JP2021078611A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine in which ingenuity is exercised to a performance.SOLUTION: There is provided a game machine in which variation of symbols is started, one game is ended when the symbols are stop-displayed, and a lottery on winning is executed. The game machine includes operation means that can be operated by a player, and performance display means in which predetermined displays are made. The predetermined displays include a first guiding display indicating a way of shooting advantageous to the player, a second guiding display displayed attributed to a fact that a game medium continues to stay in a specific space, a third guiding display as a request performance that requests an operation to the operation means, and a winning display indicating that the result of the lottery is winning. The winning display can be prevented when the first guiding display, the second guiding display, and the third guiding display are all displayed in the performance display means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 756

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a rotating drum type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

Conventionally, when an internal lottery is won, a bonus game, an ART (assist replay time) game, and an AT (assist time) game in which more game media can be obtained compared to the normal game state are executed, such as a slot machine. Rotating type gaming machines are known. In addition, a large number of spinning-type gaming machines have been proposed in which a display device is used to perform an effect while a game is being executed or a game is not being executed. (For example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2009-142346

However, there is room for improvement in such a production, and there are not a few players who are seeking a further devised production.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the production is devised.

Means 1: A gaming machine in which a symbol change is started, the symbol is stopped and displayed, and one game ends.
Lottery means to draw lots for winning,
It has an operation means that can be operated by the player,
The gaming machine is provided with an effect display means for performing a predetermined display.
The predetermined display displayed on the effect display means includes
The first guidance display showing how to hit the player in an advantageous way,
The second guidance display that is displayed due to the fact that the game medium continues to stay in a specific space,
A third guidance display as a request effect requesting an operation on the operating means, and
There is at least a winning display indicating that the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a winning.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible that the hit display is not performed when all of the first guide display, the second guide display, and the third guide display are displayed on the effect display means. ..

There are known gaming machines that push the production button in order to liven up the production. However, there is room for improvement in the participatory production that progresses by the player's operation such as pressing the production button. Therefore, in the above configuration, the first guide display, which is an indication of how to hit the player, and the second guide display, which is displayed due to the continuous stay of the game medium in a specific space, and the operation It is possible that the third guidance display as a request effect requesting an operation on the means and the hit display indicating that the result of the lottery is a hit are not performed when all of them are displayed on the effect display means. Therefore, when all of the first guidance display, the second guidance display, and the third guidance display are displayed, the player can concentrate on the guidance indicated by each guidance display, and the hit display is the first. Since it is displayed when at least one of the 1st guide display, the 2nd guide display, and the 3rd guide display is not displayed, the player can be concentrated on the hit display, and by extension, the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. Yes (see, for example, paragraphs [6945]-[6964], FIG. 756, etc.).

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the production is devised.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view which shows an example of a game board. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front right. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is a front view which cut the front component and the front unit of a game board at the substantially center of the game area in the front-rear direction. It is a block diagram which shows schematic | control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the structure in the main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of the arithmetic circuit in a main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of the serial communication circuit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the initialization process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory ratio calculation / display process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the accessory ratio calculation / display process of FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the arrangement of the program (code) and data stored in ROM, RAM built in the main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the area for calculating the accessory ratio. It is a figure which shows the structure of the accessory ratio indicator. It is a figure which shows the structure of a driver circuit. It is a timing diagram of the data input to a driver circuit. It is a figure which shows the mounting example of the main control board. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship between the main control MPU and the accessory ratio indicator. It is a figure which shows the load register selection table. It is a figure which shows the character generator decoding table. It is a state transition diagram of a driver circuit. It is a figure which shows the display example of the accessory ratio. It is a figure which shows the display example of the accessory ratio. It is a block diagram which shows schematic | control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of base calculation / display processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the prize ball number and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the prize ball number and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the prize ball number and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the prize ball number and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation / display processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation / display processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation / display processing. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the base calculation area. It is a front view which shows another example of a game board. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation / display processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation / display processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation / display processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation / display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the display selection process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation / display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of base calculation process 1. It is a flowchart which shows an example of base calculation process 2. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the base calculation process 1. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the base calculation process 2. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the base calculation process 3. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the base calculation process 4. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a base display process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the base calculation process 3. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the base calculation process 4. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the base display processing. It is a block diagram which shows schematic | control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of the frame side discharge ball sensor. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of the frame side discharge ball sensor. It is a figure which shows the connection example of a discharge ball sensor and a main control board. It is a front view which shows an example of a game board. It is a figure which shows the structure of the main control input circuit. It is a figure which shows the mounting example of the main control board. It is a figure which shows the mounting example of the main control board. It is a figure which shows the mounting example of the main control board. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the main control I / O port. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the main control I / O port. It is a timing diagram in the configuration example of the main control I / O port shown in FIG. 97. It is a figure which shows the change of the state (interval) to calculate the base value. It is a figure which shows the example of the character displayed on a base display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the initialization process of FIG. 101. It is a figure which shows the structure of the base calculation area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a base calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the base calculation process of FIG. 105. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the base display data generation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the base calculation process. It is a figure which shows the calculation of the base when the game state is switched. It is a figure which shows the structure which concerns on the storage area among the internal structure of the main control MPU 1311. It is a figure which shows an example of the program of timer interrupt processing and base calculation processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the program of timer interrupt processing and base calculation processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the arrangement of the program (code) and data stored in ROM, RAM built in the main control MPU. It is a figure which shows an example of the game history recorded in a game machine. It is a figure which shows the example of the error screen. It is a figure which shows the example of an error signal. It is a figure which shows the example of an error. It is a figure which shows the example of an error. It is a figure which shows the example of an error. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the game history recording condition setting table. It is a figure which shows an example of a game history. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a peripheral control board and its surroundings. It is a block diagram which shows the peripheral structure of the peripheral control SRAM. It is a figure which shows the modification of the game history recording condition setting table. It is a figure which shows the modification of the game history. It is a figure which shows the modification of the game history. It is a figure which shows the modification of the game history. It is a block diagram which shows schematic | control structure of the pachinko machine which has a setting part. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which has a setting part from the back with the door open. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130 as viewed from behind with the door closed. It is a figure which shows the setting part of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130. It is a figure which shows the modification of the setting part. It is a block diagram which shows schematic | control structure of the pachinko machine which has a setting part. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board which has a setting part from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which mounted the game board shown in FIG. 135 from the back. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of setting change processing and setting display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of setting change processing and setting display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the special symbol change waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the variation pattern selection determination processing. (A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is out of order. (B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit. FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation pattern 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). (A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is a time saving state and the result of the special lottery is out of order. (B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is a time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit. It is a figure which shows the mounting example of the main control board. It is a figure which shows another mounting example of a main control board. FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA'in FIG. 151 (B). It is a figure which shows another mounting example of a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting confirmation process. It is a timing diagram of a security signal. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the setting confirmation processing. This is another example of the fluctuation pattern table. This is an example of the final reserved color table. A table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variable pattern of setting 1 when the variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reserved color table of FIG. 161. This is an example. A table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variable pattern of setting 3 when the variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reserved color table of FIG. 161. This is an example. A table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variable pattern of setting 5 when the variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reserved color table of FIG. 161. This is an example. This is an example of a notice production table. This is an example of a dialogue production table. This is another example of the notice production table. This is an example of a setting suggestion effect table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect. (A) is an example of the effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode, and (B) is an example of the effect limit table when an error occurs. This is an example of a new start prize production restriction table. This is an example of the processing table 1. This is an example of the processing table 2. This is an example of the processing table 3. This is an example of the processing table 4. This is an example of the processing table 5. This is an example of the processing table 6. It is a flowchart of the power-on processing of another example 1. It is a flowchart of the power-on processing of another example 1. It is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of another example 1. It is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of another example 1. It is a flowchart of the performance display processing of another example 1. It is a figure which shows the notification mode of another example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the notification priority of another example 1. FIG. It is a flowchart of the power-on processing of another example 1. It is a flowchart of the power-on processing of another example 1. It is the flowchart of the main control side main processing of another example 1. It is a flowchart of the initialization process at the time of RAM abnormality of another example 1. It is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of another example 1. It is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of another example 1. It is a flowchart of the setting process of another example 1. It is a flowchart of the setting display processing of another example 1. It is a flowchart of the setting process at the time of power-on of another example 1. It is a flowchart of the random number update process 2 of another example 1. It is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of another example 1. It is a flowchart of the switch input process 1 of another example 1. FIG. 198 (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch winning information data table of the alternative example 1, and FIG. 198 (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input level / edge data area of the alternative example 1. is there. FIG. 199 (A) is a diagram showing another configuration example of the switch winning information data table of the alternative example 1, and FIG. 199 (B) is another configuration example of the switch input level / edge data area of the alternative example 1. It is a figure which shows. It is a flowchart of the setting change / confirmation process of another example 1. FIG. 201 (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input port 2 of the alternative example 1, and FIG. 201 (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the setting state management area of the alternative example 1. FIG. 202 (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the power-on operation command of the alternative example 1, and FIG. 202 (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the power-on state command of the alternative example 1. FIG. 202 (C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the power-on return destination command of the alternative example 1, and FIG. 202 (D) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the setting value command of the alternative example 1. It is a figure which shows the transmission order of the command of another example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the state transition of the setting state management area of another example 1. FIG. It is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. It is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode of another example 1. It is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. It is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. It is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the jackpot determination threshold table of another example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the jackpot determination threshold table of another example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the jackpot determination threshold table of another example 1. FIG. It is a flowchart of the power-on processing of another example 2. It is a flowchart of the power-on processing of another example 2. It is a flowchart of the setting value confirmation processing of another example 2. It is the flowchart of the RAM confirmation processing outside the game area at the time of power-on of another example 2. It is the flowchart of the RAM abnormality out-of-game area processing of another example 2. It is the flowchart of the RWM initialization process outside the use area of another example 2. It is a flowchart of the setting process at the time of power-on of another example 2. FIG. 220 (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the setting state management area of the alternative example 2, and FIG. 220 (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the power-on operation command of the alternative example 2. 220 (C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on state command of another example 2. It is the flowchart of the main control side main processing of another example 2. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of power-off of another example 2. It is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of another example 2. It is a flowchart of the setting process of another example 2. It is a flowchart of the setting display processing of another example 2. It is a flowchart of the power-on processing of another example 3. It is a flowchart of the power-on processing of another example 3. It is the flowchart of the main control side main processing of another example 3. It is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing for setting change processing of another example 3. It is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing for normal game of another example 3. It is the flowchart of the main control side main processing of another example 4. It is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing for setting change processing of another example 4. It is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit of the game board and the front production unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is a front view which shows the state which the 1st picture is light-emitting and displayed in the front effect unit. It is a front view which shows the state which the 2nd picture is light-emitting and displayed in the front effect unit. It is a figure which shows the structure of a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the structure of the reflection part provided in the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the structure of the reflection part provided in the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the structure of a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the structure of a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the state that the pattern which is viewed in a plane is displayed by the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the state that the pattern which is viewed in a plane is displayed by the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the appearance that the picture which is stereoscopically viewed by the light guide plate is displayed. It is a figure which shows the appearance that the picture which is stereoscopically viewed by the light guide plate is displayed. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using a light guide plate. It is a circuit diagram around the synchronous serial interface of the main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the connection of a serial-parallel conversion circuit and an LED. It is a figure explaining the connection example of the terminal of the IC which accommodates an inverter buffer. It is a figure explaining the connection example of the terminal of the IC which accommodates an inverter buffer. It is a figure which shows the arrangement on the main control board of a main control MPU and peripheral parts. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of a port in a main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the timing of the output and acquisition of data by a synchronous serial signal. It is a figure which shows another arrangement of the main control board in a main control board box. It is a figure which shows another arrangement of the main control board in a main control board box. It is a block diagram which shows the connection of the power-source system around the production drive board. It is a block diagram which shows the connection of the signal around the handle unit. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the branch circuit provided on the relay board. It is a perspective view of a slot machine. It is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front member open. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operation members, etc. provided in a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the detail of the storage area provided by ROM, RAM and the like in this embodiment, and the ROM area. It is a figure which shows the detail of the RAM area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the area for calculating the accessory ratio. It is a figure which shows the detail of the parameter information setting area of this embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the procedure of the system reset start process which is executed when a slot machine is reset. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a periodic process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of information signal N output processing. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front when the pressing operation part of a production operation unit was in an ascending position. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the outer frame. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the assembly under the outer frame of the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower side. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in the dish unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a top view which looked at the effect operation unit in the dish unit from the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operation part button unit. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled each main member of an effect operation unit and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit viewed from the top front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring viewed from the bottom front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. (A) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front right. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the rotary drive unit and looked at from the left front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit and looked at from the front upper part. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the effect operation button unit and looked at from the front lower part. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the descending position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the ascending position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative substrate in the plan view which saw the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of a pressing operation part. (A) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation unit of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the dish unit when is pressed. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back, and (c) is a state in which the top lower cover is removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front and above. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front lower part. It is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. (A) to (c) are explanatory views which show the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame at the time of opening and closing the door frame with respect to the main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. It is a rear sectional view which cut the payout device of a payout unit at the center in the front-rear direction of a payout vane. (A) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center of the payout blade in the front-rear direction when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). .. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and the lower full tank path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back lower part. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit for each main structure and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit for each main structure and looked at from the back. It is an enlarged side sectional view which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine which cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which shows the upper part enlarged in the perspective view which saw the main body frame from the back. (A) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side with a tank rail or the like assembled on a ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side of (a). FIG. 379 (a) is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 379 (a) viewed from the front by disassembling. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area where the game ball overflowing from a ball tank in the upper part of a main body frame circulates. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. It is an enlarged view which shows the vicinity of a tank rail enlarged in the perspective view which saw the main body frame from the back on the hinge side. It is a front view of the game board in which the front component, the game panel, the front unit and the like are made opaque in the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 385 from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board of FIG. 385 from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is a front view of the game board in a state where the front component, the game panel, the front unit and the like are transparent. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for each main member and looked at from the back. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 385. It is a front view of the game board which shows the inside of the game area where a game ball circulates, and the obstacle nail by cutting the table unit parallel to the surface of a game panel. (A) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the start port unit and the side unit of the front unit as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the start port unit and the side unit of the front unit as viewed from the rear, and (c) is a perspective view of the start port unit and the side unit of the front unit. The left side view of the start port unit (d) is the left side view of the side unit. It is explanatory drawing which compared the inclination of the front surface of a general winning opening and the inclination of the door member of a variable winning opening in an open state. It is an enlarged front view which shows the part of the start port unit and the side unit in a game board. (A) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the first attacker unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the first attacker unit and looked at from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the 1st prize winning door in the 1st attacker unit from the left side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the passage of the game ball in the 1st attacker unit in the cross section. (A) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of a center accessory. (A) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit, the side right middle unit, and the gate member in the front unit, and (b) is the second attacker unit, the side right middle unit, and the gate member in the front unit. Is a perspective view seen from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the passage of the game ball in the 2nd attacker unit and the side right middle unit in cross section. FIG. 393 is an enlarged explanatory view of a right portion in the game area. It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main structure and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main structure and looked at from the back. It is a front view of a pachinko machine which enlarges the upper left corner of a game board with a transparent door frame. (A) is a perspective view of the back guide unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back guide unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the back-rear effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-rear effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back-rear effect unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back-rear effect unit and looked at from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable structure of the back-rear effect unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back-rear effect unit. It is a front view which shows the back-rear movable decorative body together with the back-rear decorative substrate. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 420, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 420. (A) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decorative body as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decorative body as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the movable decorative body after the back and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the movable decorative body after the back and looked at from the back. It is the front view which shows the part of the movable decorative body after the back enlarged. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light guide radiation plate and the back-rear decorative substrate by a broken line in the front view of FIG. 425. (A) is a front view showing a part of the decorative body in the back-rear movable decorative body, (b) is a front view showing a part of the decorative sheet in the same part as the decorative body of (a), and (c). ) Is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiation plate and the back-rear decorative substrate at the same portion as the decorative body of (a). FIG. 6 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing an enlarged upper portion of FIG. 421 (a). FIG. 5 is an exploded view showing a cross-sectional view of FIG. 428 in an exploded manner. It is explanatory drawing which enlarges a part of the front surface of the back-rear movable decorative body and shows the relationship between decoration by a decorative body and a decorative sheet, and a light guide radiation plate and a back-rear decorative substrate. (A) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the light guide emitting plate and the back-rear decorative substrate at the portion of the first LED in a cross section, and (b) is an explanatory view in which the second LED is located on the optical axis of the first LED. It is explanatory drawing which shows the action of the light guide radiating plate in the part from the front, (c) is the LED accommodating part of the light guide radiating plate with respect to the 2nd decorative part in a decorative body and a decorative sheet, and the 1st LED of a back-rear decorative substrate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement example of. It is the front view which shows by enlarging a part of the back-rear decorative substrate together with the copper foil of a circuit pattern. (A) is a front view of the back-rear decorative substrate, and (b) is a rear view of the back-rear decorative substrate. (A) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body in the back-rear movable decorative body, and (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative portion having a form different from that of (a). FIG. 6C is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of a decorative body having a metal decorative portion having a form further different from that of (a) and (b). (A) is an explanatory view showing the configuration of the back-rear movable decoration body of the second embodiment different from the back-rear movable decoration body of FIG. 420 in cross section, and (b) is the back-rear movable decoration body of the third embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of (c) in the cross section, and (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the back-rear movable decorative body of 4th Embodiment by the cross section. (A) is a perspective view of the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a rear view of the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit in the back unit. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower back left effect unit and the lower right effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower back left effect unit and the lower right effect unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable structure of the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the back lower middle effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back lower middle effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back lower middle elevating mechanism of the back lower middle production unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back lower middle elevating mechanism of the back lower middle production unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the under-back middle decoration unit of the under-back middle effect unit as viewed from the front by disassembling it. It is an exploded perspective view of the under-back middle decoration unit of the under-back middle effect unit as viewed from behind by disassembling it. It is explanatory drawing which shows the elevating and lowering of the back lower middle decorative body unit by the back lower middle elevating mechanism in the back lower middle production unit. (A) is an explanatory view showing the configuration related to the rotation of the back lower middle decorative body unit in the back lower middle effect unit from the front, and (b) is the stop position of the back lower middle rotating decorative body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship with each detection sensor in a table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement of LED of the back lower middle decoration unit in the back lower middle production unit from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the back-up effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-up effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-up effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-up effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-up elevating decoration unit in the back-up effect unit as viewed from the front by disassembling it. It is an exploded perspective view of the back unit as seen from behind by disassembling the back-up / down decorative body unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the rotation mechanism of the back-up front rotation decoration body in the back-up effect unit from the front. (A) is an explanatory view showing the elevating mechanism of the back-up elevating decoration unit in the back-up effect unit from the front, and (b) is the back-up elevating decoration with the back-up elevating decoration unit moved to the appearance position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the elevating mechanism of a body unit and the rotating mechanism of a back-up and rear rotation decorative body from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the decorative substrate from the front in the state which moved the back-up elevating decorative body unit to the appearance position in the back-up effect unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear left effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back left production unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left decorative body unit viewed from the front by disassembling the back rear left decorative unit. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back rear left decorative body unit of the back rear left production unit and looked at from the back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable mechanism of the back left production unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back rear left decorative body unit in the back rear left production unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-right effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back-right effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right decorative body unit viewed from the front by disassembling the back rear right decorative unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right decorative body unit of the back rear right production unit as viewed from behind by disassembling it. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movable mechanism of the right rear right production unit from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the back rear right decorative body unit in the back rear right production unit. (A) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left production unit disassembled and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decorative body unit in the back front left production unit disassembled and seen from the back. (A) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left effect unit in the closed state, and (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left effect unit in the open state. (A) is a perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decorative body unit in the back front right production unit disassembled and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decorative body unit in the back front right production unit disassembled and viewed from the back. (A) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right effect unit in the closed state, and (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right effect unit in the open state. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which moved the back-rear movable decorative body of the back-rear effect unit from the evacuation position to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the rotating ornament body under the back bottom middle production unit is moved from the descending position to the rising position. The back-up-back effect unit's back-up-back-rotating ornament is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back-back-left effect unit's back-back-left-rotating ornament is moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back-back-right effect unit is back It is a front view of the game board which shows the rear right rotation ornament body moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position, respectively. The state in which the back-rear left-rotating decorative body of the back-rear left effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back-rear-right effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown by. It is a front view of the game board which shows the shutter unit of the back front left production unit and the shutter unit of the back front right production unit from the closed state to the open state, respectively. The back-rear movable decorative body of the back-rear effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back-up-rear-rotating decorative body of the back-up-rear effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, and the back-rear-left effect unit is back-rear left-rotating decorative body. From the evacuation position to the first appearance position, from the back rear right effect unit to the back rear right rotation decoration unit from the evacuation position to the first appearance position, and from the back lower middle effect unit to the back lower middle rotation decoration unit from the descending position. It is a front view of the game board which shows in the state of being moved to each position. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine schematicly. It is a right side view of the pachinko machine shown together with the self-supporting member. (A) is a flowchart showing the procedure for the main processing executed by the main control MPU, and (b) is a flowchart showing the procedure for the interrupt processing periodically performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the pre-determination process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd start port passage processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the hit determination process executed by the main control MPU. (A) is a hit determination table used for lottery processing for hits, (B) is a big hit symbol determination table used for lottery processing for big hit types, and (C) is a small hit type. It is a small hit symbol determination table used for the lottery process of. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st variation pattern setting process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot control processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit control process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol process processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passing process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU. (A) is a normal figure hit determination table used for the lottery process for the normal figure hit, and (B) is a normal figure hit open pattern table used for the determination process for the open pattern at the time of hitting the normal figure. is there. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol stop processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary electric accessory opening process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub-main processing executed by the peripheral control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 16mS steady-state processing executed by the peripheral control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the effect control processing executed by the peripheral control MPU. (A) is an example of a hit probability table, and (B) is an example of a big hit distribution table. It is a transition diagram which shows an example of the game state transition of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the rush rush chance production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the rush rush chance production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the rush rush chance production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production during a small hit rush. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production during a small hit rush. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production during high accuracy time saving no big hit. This is an example of the timetable of the demo screen. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the screen transition of a volume control. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the upstart effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the upstart effect. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing when the promotion effect is performed in the upstart effect. (A) is a hold color determination table used when a game ball wins a prize at the start opening during no hold and non-variation execution. (B) is a hold color determination table used when the game ball wins a prize at the start opening during no hold and variable execution. (C) is a hold color determination table used when a game ball wins a prize at the start opening with one hold. (D) is a hold color determination table used when a game ball wins a prize at the start opening in a state where there are two holds. (E) is a hold color determination table used when a game ball wins a prize at the start opening in a state where there are three holds. This is an example of the pending color determination table during fluctuation. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the hold notice effect by hold color change. (A) is a gacha coin hold determination table used when a game ball wins a prize at the start opening during no hold and non-execution of fluctuation. (B) is a gacha coin hold determination table used when a game ball wins a prize at the start opening during no hold and variable execution. (C) is a gacha coin hold determination table used when a game ball wins a prize at the start opening with one hold. (D) is a gacha coin hold determination table used when a game ball wins a prize at the start opening in a state where there are two holds. (E) is a gacha coin hold determination table used when a game ball wins a prize at the start opening in a state where there are three holds. This is an example of a gacha coin hold color compatible table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of Gachacoin hold notice production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the reach collapse pseudo-continuous production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the reach symbol promotion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production on the sugoroku stage. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production on the sugoroku stage. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a pine zone production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a pine zone production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the super pine zone production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the super pine zone production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the hold peep effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a rocket production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a rocket production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a rocket production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the schedule of the dynamic production of character A and fuel after the start of a still image production in a rocket production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a battle production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a battle production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a battle production. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of a battle production. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of a battle production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a reel production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a reel production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the bee extermination production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the bee extermination production. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the bee extermination production. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the bee extermination production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the reach production that Daruma-san fell down. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the reach production that Daruma-san fell down. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the reach production that Daruma-san fell down. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the notification process selection reach effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the notification process selection reach effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the notification process selection reach effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the hold group production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the hold group production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the division reach production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the division reach production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the cut selection effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the cut selection effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the cut selection effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the cut selection effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the cut selection effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the reach change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the reach change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the reach change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the sound presence / absence hold change effect. This is an example of the final hold color distribution table used when the sound presence / absence hold change effect is performed in the out-of-order fluctuation. This is an example of the final hold color distribution table used when the sound presence / absence hold change effect is performed in the jackpot fluctuation. This is an example of a color distribution table held at the start of fluctuation. This is an example of a pending change timing table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process which is executed when the sound presence / absence hold change effect execution possible timing comes. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of hold & zone change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of hold & zone change effect. This is an example of the chance time count table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the light production in front of the wind. This is an example of a light hold change table in front of the wind. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a blackout effect. This is an example of a blackout time table. It is an exploded perspective view of a slot machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which omitted the door type front member. It is a perspective view of a slot machine. It is a vertical sectional view of the slot machine which shows the state which omitted the door type front member. It is an enlarged view of Z1 part of FIG. 593. It is the Z1 part enlarged view of FIG. 593 which shows the state which moved the connector holder. It is sectional drawing of the slot machine which shows the state which omitted the door type front member. (A) is an enlarged view of the Z2 portion of FIG. 596, and (b) is an enlarged view of the Z2 portion of FIG. 596 showing a state in which the connector holder is moved. It is an enlarged view which shows the main part of FIG. 597 (a). It is sectional drawing of the main part of the slot machine which shows the back plate side. It is an exploded perspective view of a case member. It is a perspective view which looked at the case member from the back. (A) and (b) are perspective views of the main part of the case member for explaining the temporarily fixed state of the connector holder. It is an exploded perspective view of the wiring relay member. It is a front view which omitted the cover body of a wiring relay member. It is an exploded perspective view of a connector holder. It is an exploded perspective view of a connector holder. It is a perspective view of the stopper which stops a case member. It is a perspective view of the stopper which shows another form. It is sectional drawing of the main part which shows the guide structure of a case member. It is sectional drawing of the main part which shows the guide structure of a case member. It is a partial perspective view of the symbol variation display device which shows the other form of a handle. It is a perspective view of the main part which shows the relationship between the case member and the stopper on the outer body side. It is sectional drawing of the main part which shows the relationship between a wiring window and a reel of a symbol variation display device. It is a vertical sectional view of the upper part of a slot machine. It is a perspective view which shows the lower half part of a slot machine by omitting the medal discharge device. It is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 615. It is a rear view which looked at the heat dissipation port from the back side of a slot machine. It is a partial cross-sectional part front view of the slot machine which shows a power supply device. It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked up at the power supply device from the bottom. It is a cross-sectional view of a side plate of an outer body and a main part of a power supply device showing another form. It is the schematic sectional drawing of the lighting apparatus which shows the other form. It is a perspective view of the door type front member which shows disassembled the transparent plate and a light emitting unit. It is a perspective view of the door type front member which shows by disassembling the transparent plate. It is sectional drawing which corresponds to FIG. 622A-A of the door type front member which attached the transparent plate. It is a disassembly / assembly perspective view of a hinge metal fitting. It is a diagram which shows the chain of the hinge metal fittings. It is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part which shows the door type front member. It is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part which shows the door type front member in the process of opening. It is a perspective view seen from the back side which shows the upper half part of a door type front member. It is sectional drawing which cut the connector in the vertical direction. It is a cross-sectional plan view of a main part of a door type front member which shows the example of other hinge metal fittings. It is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part which shows the middle of opening of the door type front member of FIG. 631. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the image display body and a frame member in a model unit. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the door type front member with the connector connected. It is a development view which developed the symbol string of a reel band in a plane. It is an enlarged view near the design display window in the slot machine viewed from the front. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, and operation members equipped in a slot machine. This is an example of a lottery table used for the lottery of the winning combination when the setting is 1. This is an example of a lottery table used for the lottery of the winning combination when the setting is 2. This is an example of a lottery table used for the lottery of the winning combination when the setting is 3. This is an example of a lottery table used for the lottery of the winning combination when the setting is 4. This is an example of a lottery table used for the lottery of the winning combination when the setting is 5. This is an example of a lottery table used for the lottery of the winning combination when the setting is 6. It is a flowchart which shows the basic processing procedure of one game in a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing procedure of the start processing. This is an example of a block diagram showing a transition of the RT state. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the rough processing flow of instruction function processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process which is related to the generation of an instruction function. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing in a hell state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advantageous state A time processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advantageous state B time processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advantageous state C time processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advantageous state D time processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the advantageous state E time processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in the pullback state. This is an example of a lottery table used for the additional decision lottery. This is an example of a lottery table used for a lottery for determining the number of additional games when the probability is in the ART medium / low probability state. This is an example of a lottery table used for a lottery for determining the number of additional games when the ART is in a medium-high probability state. This is an example of a lottery table used for a lottery to determine the number of additional games in the special zone. This is an example of a lottery table used for the lottery to determine the number of additional games during the preparation of the special zone. This is an example of a table used for the ART first hit lottery when the winning combination selected by the internal lottery is either "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip" or "normal maintenance lip". When the winning combination selected by the internal lottery is either "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip" or "normal maintenance lip", (a) is an example of a table used in the additional decision lottery, and (b). ) This is an example of a table used for the lottery to determine the number of additional games. This is an example of the ART first hit lottery table in the advantageous state D during the game number management process. This is an example of a lottery table for shifting to the lottery state during ART. This is an example of a special zone lottery table. This is an example of the ART first hit lottery table in the pulled back state. This is an example of a production operation lottery table when an internal lottery is won in RT1. This is an example of a production operation lottery table when an internal lottery is won in RT2. This is an example of a production operation lottery table when an internal lottery is won in RT3. This is another example of the production operation lottery table when the internal lottery is won. It is a figure for demonstrating the instruction function display. It is a figure for demonstrating the instruction function display. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of the reel stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of the reel stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of the determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of the bonus game start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of the bonus game end determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of ART game determination processing. It is a time chart showing an example of the overall game flow. It is a figure for demonstrating the data block of a RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating the error display by a special display LED. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process at the time of error occurrence. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process at the time of error occurrence. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure example of the power failure recovery processing. This is an example of a production image related to the additional decision lottery and the additional game number determination lottery. This is an example of a small role lottery table. This is an example of the AT first hit lottery table. This is an example of a lottery table for the number of precursor games. This is an example of an AT stock lottery table. This is an example of a pseudo bonus lottery table. This is an example of the AT initial game number lottery table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop type of various bells. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a precursor effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a precursor effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a flag processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process in the AT precursor. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process of the state which AT is stocked. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing of a relief state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing after all reels are stopped. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a precursor effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a precursor effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a precursor effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a precursor effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a precursor effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a precursor effect. This is an example of a small role lottery table. This is an example of the AT first hit lottery table. This is an example of a CZ transition lottery table. This is an example of the AT first hit lottery table referred to at the start of each game in CZ. This is an example of the AT first hit lottery table referred to during the simulated game in CZ. This is an example of an AT addition lottery table. This is an example of a lottery table for the number of games added to AT. This is an example of a special zone transition lottery table. This is an example of the red 7 stop pattern table. This is an example of the symbol arrangement of each reel in the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the image of the reel in CZ. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production in CZ. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production in CZ. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production in CZ. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production in CZ. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the relationship between the operation amount of the start lever during the simulated game of a CZ game, and the visual state of the lower part of the right reel hidden by the transmissive liquid crystal. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a flag processing. , Is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed when all reels are stopped (at the time of the third stop). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flag processing of step S107 of FIG. 645 when the CZ flag is on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of the 1st pseudo stop in the pseudo game in CZ. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of the 2nd pseudo stop in the pseudo game in CZ. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of the 3rd pseudo stop in the pseudo game in CZ. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of the 3rd stop of the main game of the game in which a pseudo game is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example (pushing practice production) of the production in CZ. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the pseudo game executed during a normal game. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production in a special specialization zone. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of CZ production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of CZ production. This is an example of an AT lottery table showing the lottery value of the AT lottery executed when the red 7 is stopped in the middle stage at each pseudo stop of the CZ2. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production of CZ2. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production of CZ2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production of CZ2. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which carries a seesaw accessory. It is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine (excluding the outer body) which carries the seesaw accessory. It is a front view which shows the outline of a seesaw accessory. This is an example of a small role lottery table. This is an example of a seesaw game production rush lottery table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the see-saw game production performed in a normal game. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the see-saw game production (failure) performed during a normal game. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the see-saw game production (success) performed during a normal game. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the see-saw game production (success) performed during a normal game. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the practice production of the addition chance in the see-saw game production. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example (two-choice production of fate) of the additional chance production in the see-saw game production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the see-saw game production executed during AT. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the see-saw game production executed during AT. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the see-saw game production executed during AT. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the see-saw game production executed during AT. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the see-saw game production executed during AT. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of suddenly seesaw game production. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example at the time of the see-saw game production failure. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the addition chance performed in the see-saw game production. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the see-saw game production executed during AT. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the see-saw game production executed during AT.

The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame 3 opened from the main body frame and the main body frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame 3, the game board 5, the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and viewed from the front. FIG. 9 shows the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame 3, the game board 5, and the pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back by disassembling into the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and can be visually recognized from the player side through the door frame 3. It is provided with a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, which are connected to each other at both ends of the 20 and extend vertically, are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in the front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 are provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a square outer shape in front view and having a through hole 111 penetrating the front and rear, and a game attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. A plate unit 200 having an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100. The unit 400, the right side unit 450 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100, and the game ball attached to the lower right part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 through the plate unit 200 and stored in the upper plate 201. A handle unit 500 that can be operated by the player to drive the door frame 5 into the game area, and a plate unit 200 that receives a game ball that is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and fails to hit into the game area. A foul cover unit 520 that discharges to the lower plate 202, a ball feed unit 540 that is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and for sending the game ball of the upper plate 201 to the ball launcher 680, and a door frame base unit 100. It includes a glass unit 560 that is attached to the rear surface and closes the through hole 111, and a security cover 580 that covers the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 560.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 and a main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front left side surface of the main body frame base 600, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door, and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4 attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base when viewed from the front. , And the locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the reverse L that is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out the game ball to the player side. A character-shaped payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. It is provided with a back cover 980 that covers the rear side.

Inside the back cover 980, a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game performed by the pachinko machine 1 is provided. The main control unit 1300 is provided with an accessory ratio indicator 1317. The accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured by the effect display device. The accessory ratio indicator 1317 may be provided not in the main control unit 1300 but in the payout control board unit 950.

Further, the effect display device 1600, 3114, 244 may display the accessory ratio without separately providing a display device for displaying the accessory ratio. In this case, if the bonus ratio is constantly displayed on any of the effect display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, the bonus ratio can be notified to the player, and the player may be able to confirm the condition of the pachinko machine.

As will be described later, the bonus ball ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of bonus balls acquired by the total number of balls acquired. For example, a pachinko machine with a high value of the bonus ratio (for example, 90%) will receive many prize balls depending on the jackpot. Since it has been obtained, it can be said that it is in good condition. On the other hand, a pachinko machine with a low value of the accessory ratio (for example, 10%) has few jackpot games and few prize balls during the jackpot, so it can be said that it is not in good condition. Therefore, the player can select the pachinko machine to play in consideration of the numerical value of the accessory ratio.

As a mode for notifying the player of the accessory ratio, the numerical value of the accessory ratio may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. For example, when the accessory ratio is 70% or more, the numerical value is displayed in red and the frame lamp is lit or blinking in red, and when it is 69% to 30%, the numerical value is displayed in green and the frame lamp is lit or blinking in green. To do. The numerical value of the accessory ratio may be displayed in such a manner that it is not mistaken for a decorative pattern. For example, it may be displayed at a position that does not overlap with the display position of the decorative symbol when it does not fluctuate, or the size of the number indicating the accessory ratio may be smaller than that of the decorative symbol. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

Further, the player may be notified of the bonus ratio by changing the mode of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 according to the numerical value of the bonus ratio. For example, when the accessory ratio is 70% or more, the decorative pattern is displayed in red and the frame lamp is lit or blinking in red, and when it is 69% to 30%, the decorative pattern is displayed in green and the frame lamp is lit in green. Or flashes. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

Further, it may be displayed on the effect display device 244 provided on the door frame 3. At that time, the above-mentioned display mode may be changed, or the display may be performed together with other information as well as the accessory ratio. Other information includes the number of big hits, the number of consecutive big hits (so-called number of consecutive chans), the number of balls held, and the remaining balance.

Further, not only the accessory ratio but also the continuous accessory ratio and the base value, which will be described later, may be displayed in different modes as described above. The display mode of the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the base value may be changed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is enclosed in a transparent resin main control board box 1320 sealed with a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once closed, and is arranged on the printed circuit board. You can see the parts that have been made from the outside. Further, for example, when the back cover 980 is made of a transparent resin, the main control unit 1300 can be seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the accessory ratio indicator 1317 provided in the main control unit 1300 is pachinko. It can be seen from the back side of the machine 1. By enclosing the accessory ratio indicator 1317 in the main control board box 1320, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 to make the pachinko machine 1 look low in gambling, and the pachinko machine 1 is accurate. Can display gambling.

When the back cover 980 is made of opaque resin, pachinko can be made by making a hole in the back cover 980 at the position of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 or by making the position of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 transparent. The accessory ratio indicator 1317 may be viewed from the back side of the machine 1.

Further, even when the back cover 980 is made of a transparent resin, by forming the surface of the back cover 980 at the position of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 flat or by forming the back cover 980 thinly, the accessory ratio indicator is formed. The ratio display 1317 may be easily seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

Below the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, there is provided a discharge port for collecting game balls that have flowed out of the game area 5a via the out ports 1111 and winning ports 2001, 2005, 2006, etc., and discharging them to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. ing. The game balls discharged from the discharge port are supplied to the ball tank 802 through the island equipment. The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a discharge ball sensor 3060 that detects game balls discharged from the discharge port.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is provided with a display switch 1318. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole through which the display switch 1318 can be operated. It is preferable to indicate on the printed circuit board near the display switch 1318 or on the main control board box 1320 that the switch is for operating the display of the accessory ratio (printing, engraving, sticker, etc.). It is desirable that the display switch 1318 is provided near the accessory ratio display 1317, but even if it is not the main control unit 1300, if it is in a place where it is easy to operate, another board (for example, the effect control board 4700). , Power supply device 4112), housing 4100, or front member 4200. It may be provided on the peripheral control unit 1500, the relay board provided separately from the main control unit 1300, the power supply board in the power supply board box 930 on the frame side, or the payout control board unit 950. Further, as will be described later, the display switch 1318 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. By providing the display switch 1318 at a position where the player cannot operate it, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously operating it.

The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the upper part of the inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores game balls supplied from island equipment that is not shown in a box shape, and a game ball that is attached to the payout unit base 801 under the ball tank 802 and the game balls in the ball tank 802 are viewed to the left in the front view. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the front view of the payout unit base 801 and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a serpentine manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. The game ball, which is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and is guided by the ball guide unit 820, is instructed from the payout control board 951 (see FIG. 17) housed in the payout control board unit 950. Based on this, the payout device 830 and the game balls attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 are guided downward, and the game balls are stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. From the upper full tank path unit 850 that discharges the game ball from either the normal discharge port or the full tank discharge port according to the situation, and from the normal discharge port of the upper full tank path unit 850 that is attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. The released game ball is guided forward and guided from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3. The normal taxiway and the game ball released from the full tank discharge port are guided forward and the door frame 3 is guided from the front end. It is provided with a lower full tank path unit 860 having a full tank taxiway for guiding to the full tank receiver 530.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the front view of the board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the speaker for bass inside. The speaker unit 920 having 921, the power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodating the power supply board inside, and the power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and inside. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game balls are housed therein. It includes a payout control board unit 950.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is hit, and the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 is placed on the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 to guide the player, a flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, and a game panel 1100. It has a box-shaped board holder 1200 attached to the lower part on the rear side and opened upward, and a main control board 1310 attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 to control the game of the pachinko machine 1. A table unit having a main control unit 1300 and a plurality of winning openings mounted in the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and capable of receiving a game ball driven into the game area 5a (not shown). ), And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 on the upper side of the board holder 1200.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 with the game balls stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launcher 680 plays the game with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. The ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls driven into the game area 5a are received in a winning opening (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning openings. .. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front right, FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front left, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 16 is a front view in which the front component and the front unit of the game board are cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction in the game area.

The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. Further, the game board 5 is attached to the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and the rear end of the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 to be partitioned, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 by driving the game ball into the game area 5a. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 17) that controls the game content. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (not shown).

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000. Peripheral control unit 1500 mounted on the rear side of 1100, effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. It further includes a front unit 2000 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110, which are formed to be slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and the front component 1000. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that game balls driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are played at different positions in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002, which is always open so that the ball can be received, the gate portion 2003, which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. The second start port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery, and the first special, which is drawn by accepting the game balls to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is provided with a first major winning opening 2005 and a second major winning opening 2006, which can accept game balls according to the lottery result or the second special lottery result. The second major winning opening 2006 is composed of two major winning openings, the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b, which are arranged in one flow path through which the game balls are distributed (Fig.). 16).

Further, the table unit 2000 is started with a start port unit 2100 which is mounted directly above the out port 1111 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002 and a first prize winning port 2005. It is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the mouth unit 2100, and is mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit lower 2200 having three general winning openings 2001 and the side unit lower 2200. A frame-shaped frame that is mounted on the side unit 2300 and substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006. It is equipped with a center accessory 2500.

The back unit 3000 is arranged in a box-shaped back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has an open front and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a predetermined position in the back box 3010. A plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the cage front unit 2000, and a lock mechanism attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600. The right ball passage unit 3030, which is attached to the right end of the front view inside the back box 3010 and is used to discharge the game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting port 2004 of the center accessory 2500, and the back. The lower right ball passage unit 3035, which is attached near the front end of the lower right corner of the front view in the box 3010 and for discharging the game balls received in the second major winning opening 2006 and the second out opening 2543c of the center accessory 2500. And have.

Further, the back unit 3000 is rotatably attached to the upper relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the upper relay board cover 3041 covering the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and the rear surface of the back box 3010. The box-shaped effect drive board box 3042, the effect drive board 3043 housed in the effect drive board box 3042, the panel relay board 3044 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the panel relay board 3044. It includes a panel relay board cover 3045 that covers the rear side.

Further, the back unit 3000 has a back left middle decorative unit 3050 attached upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side side of the front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and a back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back bottom rear movable production unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, the back top left movable production unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side of the front view, and the back box. The back left movable effect unit 3300 installed on the left side of the front view of the opening 3010a in 3010, and the back top middle mounted from the center in the left-right direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. It includes a movable effect unit 3400 and a back lower front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010.

[2-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction, passes through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extends diagonally to the upper right. The game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left in the front view, and the right side in the front view at the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with a game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front constituent member 1000 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

On the back surface side of the game board 5 near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002 (preferably immediately after passing through the backflow prevention member 1007), a launch ball sensor 1020 for detecting the game ball driven into the game area 5a is provided. For example, the launch ball sensor 1020 is composed of a magnetic sensor, and when it detects a game ball that has passed through the backflow prevention member 1007 and has flowed into the game area 5a, it outputs a signal. The launch ball sensor 1020 may be provided at a position in the game area where the game ball always passes. By fixing the position of the launch ball sensor 1020 on the game board 5, the specifications can be standardized among a plurality of models, and the inspection at the manufacturing site and the inspection after installation in the hall become easy.

Further, the launch ball sensor 1020 provided upstream of the game area 5a such as near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002 detects the out ball before the winning opening sensor detects the winning of the game ball. That is, since the game balls are detected in the order of the out balls and the prize balls, the prize balls caused by the game balls that are not counted as the out balls are not detected, and the base value can be calculated accurately.

[2-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and which is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed with an out port 1111 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 holds the panel plate 1110 detachably from the rear side. Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with a plurality of mounting holes and positioning holes for mounting the back unit 3000 on the rear surface.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel plate 1110 is opened on the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1111 by the out guide unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111.

[2-3. Board holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. When the board holder 1200 is assembled on the game board 5, it can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below. As a result, all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged unit 1201 (see FIG. 14).

[2-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15 and 17. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls game contents, payout of game balls, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. ..

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent force against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

[2-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. This function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 has a status indicator consisting of one LED for displaying the game status, and two LEDs based on the result of a normal lottery drawn by the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display that displays these two LEDs in a lighting mode according to the normal lottery result after displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner by controlling blinking, and a variable display of the normal symbol related to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003. Of these, a normal hold indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of holds, which is the number of fluctuation displays for which the start condition of the change display has not yet been satisfied, and the acceptance of game balls into the first starting port 2002 (starting prize). By controlling the blinking of eight LEDs based on the result of the first special lottery drawn by (occurrence), the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and then these eight LEDs are displayed in a lighting mode according to the result of the first special lottery. Among the fluctuation displays of the first special symbol and the first special symbol related to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002, the number of pending numbers, which is the number of fluctuation displays for which the start condition of the fluctuation display has not yet been satisfied. Eight LEDs blink based on the first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs to display and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004 (occurrence of starting prize). A second special symbol display that displays these eight LEDs in a lighting mode according to the result of the second special lottery after variable display of the second special symbol by control, and acceptance of a game ball into the second starting port 2004. The second special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holds, which is the number of change displays for which the start condition of the change display has not yet been satisfied, and the first special When the lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" etc., a round indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006. And, mainly equipped. A part of the display (for example, the first special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400 may be composed of a 7-segment LED.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the LEDs provided.

[2-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 15. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 17) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. It is equipped with a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image (FIG. 17). reference).

[2-7. Production display device]
Next, the effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a full-color display device backed by a white LED, and can display a still image or a moving image.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface in front view and a right fixing piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface in front view. And have. The effect display device 1600 has a back box in two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface of the front view in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of the 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is moved downward. By sliding, it is attached to the back box 3010.

[2-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12 and 14 to 16. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The table unit 2000 of the present embodiment has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open and can accept game balls driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball can be received at different positions, the gate portion 2003, which is installed at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball is a gate. A lottery is made by accepting game balls into the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing through the section 2003. The first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is provided, and the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are provided so that the game balls can be accepted at either of them.

Three (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the remaining one is arranged in the vicinity of the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1111. The gate portion 2003 is arranged in the game area 5a at the upper right of the front view and substantially directly below the abutment portion 1006. The second starting port 2004 is arranged on the right side of the front view from directly below the gate portion 2003. Of the plurality of general winning openings 2001 described above, the general winning openings 2001 arranged near the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a are arranged directly above the second starting opening 2004. The first big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1111. The second grand prize opening 2006 is arranged on the right side of the front view of the first starting port 2002 and above the first grand prize opening 2005.

As shown in FIG. 16, the second major winning opening 2006 in the table unit 2000 includes the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b arranged along one flow path through which the game balls circulate. It is composed of. In the second major winning opening 2006, the second upper winning opening 2006a is arranged near the lower right of the front view in the game area 5a, and the second lower winning opening 2006b is the front view of the second upper winning opening 2006a. It is located below on the left side.

Further, the table unit 2000 is started with a start port unit 2100 which is mounted directly above the out port 1111 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002 and a first prize winning port 2005. It is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the mouth unit 2100, and is mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit lower 2200 having three general winning openings 2001 and the side unit lower 2200. A frame-shaped frame that is mounted on the side unit 2300 and substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006. It is equipped with a center accessory 2500.

[2-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the start port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described. The start port unit 2100 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1111, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 and a first winning opening 2005.

The starting port unit 2100 is a flat plate-shaped unit base 2101 having a first large winning opening 2005 that is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and has a rectangular shape extending to the left and right and penetrates back and forth, and the first unit base 2101. The ball receiving portion 2102, which protrudes forward from the upper part of the center in the left-right direction to form the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port, which is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2101, above the large winning opening 2005. The ball guiding unit 2103 that guides the game ball received in 2002 downward, the first starting port sensor 2104 that is attached to the ball guiding unit 2103 and detects the game ball received in the first starting port 2002, and the first It includes a first attacker unit 2110 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the big winning opening 2005.

The first attacker unit 2110 of the starting port unit 2100 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the first winning opening 2005 from the rear, and the front end is opened forward with approximately the same size as the first winning opening 2005. The box-shaped unit case 2111 and the first prize opening 2005 can be opened and closed. The first prize opening door is a horizontally long rectangular and flat plate with the lower side rotatably supported at the front end of the unit case 2111. The member 2112, the first attacker solenoid 2113 installed in the unit case 2111 and driving the opening and closing of the door member 2112, and the first large winning opening 2005 installed in the unit case 2111. The first big winning opening sensor 2114 that detects the game ball, the first starting opening sensor 2104, the first attacker solenoid, and the first big winning opening sensor 2114 and the main control board 1310 that are mounted on the upper surface of the unit case 2111. It is provided with a start port unit relay board 2115 that relays the connection with the device, and a start port unit decoration board (not shown) that is attached to the lower part of the unit case 2111 and is attached to the lower part of the unit case 2111 to illuminate the first prize opening 2005. ing.

The ball receiving portion 2102 forming the first starting port 2002 is opened upward with a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time. The first big winning opening 2005 penetrating the unit base 2101 opens forward in a size capable of accepting a plurality of game balls (for example, 4 to 6) at a time.

In the starting port unit 2100, the first starting port 2002 formed by the ball receiving portion 2102 opens upward, and the game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is unit-based by the ball guiding unit 2103. It can be guided downward on the rear side of 2101, detected by the first start port sensor 2104, and then discharged downward through the first attacker unit 2110. In the present embodiment, two first start port sensors 2104 are provided, and on the main control board 1310, when the two first start port sensors 2104 detect a game ball within a predetermined time range, the first start port sensor 2104 is provided. It is determined that the game ball was accepted in 2002. Thereby, it is possible to detect an illegal act due to an illegal insertion of a tool into the first starting port 2002.

In the starting port unit 2100, by attaching the first attacker unit 2110 to the rear surface of the unit base 2101, the first big prize opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 is opened to the unit base 2101. It is inserted into the mouth 2005 from behind to close the first prize opening 2005. In the upright state where the first prize opening door member 2112 is closed, the left and right ends of the lower side are rotatably attached by the unit case 2111, and the upper side is forward and By rotating the door so as to move downward, the first prize opening 2005 can be changed from the closed state to the open state.

The first large winning opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 stands upright in a normal state (a state in which the first attacker solenoid 2113 is not energized) and closes the first large winning opening 2005. Then, when the first attacker solenoid 2113 is energized according to the gaming state, the first large winning opening door member 2112 rotates so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side moves slightly above the lower side. It will be in the positioned state. That is, the first grand prize opening door member 2112 is in a state of being inclined so as to be higher from the lower side of the first grand prize opening 2005 toward the front.

In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the first prize opening door 2005 and comes into contact with the first prize opening door member 2112, the distribution direction of the game ball is from below due to the inclination of the first prize opening door member 2112. It changes to the rear and is accepted by the first prize opening 2005 and enters the unit case 2111. Then, the game ball received in the first prize opening 2005 is discharged downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2111 after being detected by the first prize opening sensor 2114.

[3. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effect devices during a game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 and an upper plate effect display based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. It is provided with an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the display of the effect image on the device 244 or the like. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls payout of the game ball and the like, and a launch control unit 953 that controls the launch of the game ball by the rotation operation of the handle lever 504.

[3-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game includes a main control MPU 1311 that is a microprocessor in which a ROM 1313 that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM 1312 that temporarily stores data, and the like are built, and an input / output device (I). / O device) main control I / O port 1314, main control input circuit 1315 to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, main control solenoid drive circuit 1316 to drive various solenoids, and main control It is provided with a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the MPU 1311. In addition to its built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1311 also has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 2104 that detects a game ball received in the first start port 2002, and a second start port sensor that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2004. 2551, the general winning opening sensor 3015 that detects the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001, the gate sensor 2547 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003, and detects the game ball received in the first major winning opening 2005. The first large winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening 2006a as the second major winning opening 2006, and the second upper winning opening sensor 2554 and the second upper winning opening sensor 2554 that detect the game ball received in the second lower grand winning opening 2006b. Detection signals from the second lower winning opening sensor 2557, the ejection ball sensor 3060, the launch ball sensor 1020, the magnetic detection sensor that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, etc. are transmitted via the main control I / O port 1314, respectively. Is entered.

The main control MPU 1311 outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 1314 to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the start port solenoid 2550, the first attacker solenoid 2113, and the second upper attacker A drive signal is output to the solenoid 2553 and the second lower attacker solenoid 2556, and the first special symbol display, the second special symbol display, and the first special symbol memory of the function display unit 1400 are output from the main control I / O port 1314. A drive signal is output to a display, a second special symbol storage display, a normal symbol display, a normal symbol storage display, a game status display, a round display, and the like.

In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, the gate sensor 2547, the first large winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower winning opening The sensor 2557 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, whereas the general winning opening sensor 3015 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first start port sensor 2104 and the second start port sensor 2551, Also, the detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2547 frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, and the gate sensor 2547. In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened (or expanded), and the game ball is frequently played. In order to enter the ball, the detection of the game ball by the first large winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower large winning opening sensor 2557 also occurs frequently. For this reason, the first grand prize opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower winning opening sensor 2557 also use proximity switches with high durability and long life. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the game ball does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3015 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3015 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. Or Further, the main control MPU 1311 issues various commands related to the control of the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 or the like and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the periphery of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port 1314. It may be transmitted to the control unit 1511. When the main control MPU 1311 receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951, these various commands are shaped and transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board in the power supply board box 930. The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. To do.) With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1311 can store various information in the RAM 1312 in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM 1312. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the main control I / O port 1314, and is also output to the payout control board 951 and the like.

The accessory ratio indicator 1317 is attached to the main control board 1310 at a position visible from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. The accessory ratio display 1317 displays the accessory ratio calculated by the main control MPU 1311.

A display switch 1318 is provided on the main control board 1310. The display switch 1318 may be composed of a push button switch that performs a momentary operation, but may be a switch of another type. When the display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. The accessory ratio display 1317 may always display the accessory ratio, and the display content may be switched by operating the display switch 1318.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a configuration in the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 includes CPU 13111, RAM 1312, ROM 1313, random number generation circuit 13112, parallel input port 13113, serial communication circuit 13114, timer circuit 13115, interrupt controller 13116, external bus interface 13117, clock circuit 13118, collation block 13119, and unique. It has information 13120, arithmetic circuit 13121, and reset circuit 13122.

The CPU 13111 executes the program stored in the ROM 1313. The RAM 1312 stores data required when the program is executed.

The main control MPU 1311 is provided with one or more random number generation circuits 13112. The random number generation circuit 13112 provides a random number for determining the lottery result of the result of the variable display game (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) and the effect content of the variable display game. The random number generation circuit 13112 is, for example, a so-called hard random number generation means that outputs a random number updated at the timing of the clock period (or a signal obtained by dividing the clock period) supplied to the main control MPU 1311. The hard random number generated by the random number generation circuit 13112 is used for a lottery for winning a special symbol, a lottery for a winning symbol in a special symbol variation display game, and a lottery for winning a normal symbol.

The parallel input port 13113 is a port to which detection signals from various detection switches are input via the main control input circuit 1315.

The serial communication circuit 13114 transmits and receives various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to and from the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port 1314. Further, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits and receives various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to the payout of the game ball to and from the payout control board 951 via the main control I / O port 1314. Further, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits data for displaying the accessory ratio to the accessory ratio display 1317. The detailed configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The timer circuit 13115 is a timer for timer interrupts and various time controls. The interrupt controller 13116 controls various interrupts (general interrupts, NMIs that cannot be masked by software) to the CPU 13111. That is, when the interrupt controller 13116 detects an interrupt, it refers to the vector table defined for each type of interrupt and jumps to the address set in the vector table.

The external bus interface 13117 is an interface for connecting the internal bus of the main control MPU 1311 to an external device. From the external bus interface 13117, I / O request (IORQ), read (RD), write (WR), 16-bit address (A0 to A15), and 8-bit data (D0 to D7) can be input and output.

The clock circuit 13118 generates the internal clock of the main control MPU 1311 from the input external clock signal (for example, 32 MHz). Further, the clock circuit 13118 divides the input clock signal by a set number and outputs the clock signal to the outside from the CLKO terminal. For example, the clock signal supplied to the driver circuit 13171 (see FIG. 28) of the accessory ratio display 1317 may be output.

The collation block 13119 is a functional block that verifies whether the ROM 1313 has been tampered with by using a predetermined code. The unique information 13120 is an ID unique to the main control MPU 1311 and is written in a non-rewritable manner when the chip is manufactured.

The arithmetic circuit 13121 provides an arithmetic function that does not depend on the program recorded in the ROM 1313. This arithmetic function is fixedly written at the time of manufacturing the chip.

The reset circuit 13122 has a non-designated running prohibition circuit, a watchdog timer, and a user reset function. When the CPU 13111 accesses an address other than the predetermined address of the ROM 1313, the non-designated travel prohibition circuit presumes that the access is by an illegal program and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The watchdog timer outputs a timeout signal when a predetermined timer time has elapsed, and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The user reset function resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311 by the reset signal input to the SRST terminal.

FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing a detailed configuration of the arithmetic circuit 13121.

The calculation circuit 13121 provides a calculation function that does not depend on a program for the calculation result, and has a multiplication circuit 131211 and a division circuit 131215.

The multiplication circuit 131211 is an arithmetic circuit that multiplies two values of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 16 bits) and outputs a product of 32 bits, and converts an input value (multiplier, multiplicand) into a product by a multiplication function. Functions as an output conversion circuit.

The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores a multiplier and a multiplicand of 16 bits or less in the multiplication input register A131212 and the multiplication input register B131213. The multiplication circuit 131211 reads the values stored in the two 16-bit multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 at predetermined timings, and stores the result of multiplying the two values in the multiplication result register 131214. The CPU 13111 acquires the multiplication result from the multiplication result register 131214. The process from writing the value to the multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 to storing the calculation result in the multiplication result register 131214 is configured to be completed in a predetermined time (for example, one clock), and the CPU 13111 is configured to complete the multiplication input register 131212. , 131213, and after a predetermined number of clocks have elapsed, the multiplication result can be obtained by referring to the multiplication result register 131214.

The division circuit 131215 is an arithmetic circuit that outputs a 32-bit quotient and a 32-bit remainder by dividing a divisor of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits) by a divisor of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits), and divides. It functions as a conversion circuit that converts input values (divisors and dividends) into quotients and remainders and outputs them by a function.

The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores a division number of 32 bits or less in the division input register A131216, and stores a division of 32 bits or less in the division input register B131217. When the division circuit 131215 detects that a value is stored in both the two 32-bit division input registers 131216 and 131217, it reads the stored value at a predetermined timing and divides the divisor by the divisor to obtain the quotient. The division result register A131218 stores the remainder, and the division result register B131219 stores the remainder. Further, when the division circuit 131215 reads the value stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217, the read value may be erased and the register may be cleared. Further, the division circuit 131215 may read the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 at the timing when the start instruction is input, and store the division result in the division result registers 131218 and 131219. In this case, the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 do not have to be erased at the read timing. Further, the division input registers 131216 and 131217 may be able to overwrite the value even if the value is already stored (without clearing the stored value).

The CPU 13111 acquires the division result from the division result registers 131218 and 131219. The process from writing the value to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to storing the calculation result in the division result registers 131218 and 131219 is configured to be completed in a predetermined time (for example, 32 clocks), and the CPU 13111 is configured to complete the division input. The values can be stored in the registers 131216 and 131217, and after the predetermined number of clocks has elapsed, the quotient and the remainder can be obtained by referring to the division result registers 131218 and 131219, respectively.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as will be described later, a division process is required to calculate the base value, and the division executed by the CPU 13111 by the CPU 13111 is executed by a plurality of multiplications and subtractions, so that a considerable amount of time is required. This is the case. Therefore, it is difficult to execute the base calculation process for each timer interrupt process, and it is difficult to display the base value without delay. On the other hand, by performing the division process using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required for calculating the base value can be shortened, and the base value can be calculated multiple times in one timer interrupt process (see FIGS. 75 and 80). .. Further, since the CPU 13111 is not occupied for the division process from the writing of the value to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 to the reading of the arithmetic result from the division result register A131218, other processing can be executed. Base calculation processing during timer interrupt processing can be executed efficiently.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114.

The serial communication circuit 13114 has four data transmission / reception circuits, and each data transmission / reception circuit transmits / receives data for one channel to / from a predetermined device. Note that FIG. 20 illustrates only the data transmission circuit, and the description of the data reception circuit (for example, one channel is implemented) will be omitted.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, as described above, the serial communication circuit 13114 has channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, and a bonus ratio. Three channels of channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the display 1317 are used, and channel 3 is unused.

The serial communication circuit 13114 includes a data register 3141, a transmission data register 3142, a parity generation circuit 3143, a transmission shift register 3144, a command status register 3145, a communication setting register 3146, a transmission trigger setting level register 3147, a baud rate register 3148, and a baud rate generation circuit. It has 3149.

The data input from the CPU 13111 is stored in the data register 3141 and then stored in the transmission data register 3142. The transmission data register 3142 is composed of a FIFO having a predetermined capacity (for example, 64 bytes). The transmission data register 3142 adds an error detection code generated by the parity generation circuit 3143 for each data transmission unit to the data to be transmitted and stores it in the transmission shift register 3144.

The baud rate generation circuit 3149 generates a transmission clock signal for transmitting data at a rate set in the baud rate register 3148 from the clock signal supplied from the clock circuit 13118. Then, the transmission shift register 3144 transmits data according to the transmission clock signal.

The command status register 3145 is a register referred to for confirming the transmission status.

The communication setting register 3146 stores commands for controlling data transmission. The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 stores a threshold value for controlling the amount of data in which the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 generates an interrupt. The baud rate register 3148 stores a baud rate setting for defining a data transmission rate. The communication setting register 3146, the transmission trigger setting level register 3147, and the baud rate register 3148 are set for each of the four channels as initial settings in step S28 of FIG.

Hereinafter, these settings will be described in detail. The communication format of each channel is set in the communication setting register. Specifically, the presence / absence of use of FIFO (FIFO mode, normal mode), the number of stop bit bits, and parity (whether parity is used, even parity, or odd parity) are set. For example, in channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510 and channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, FIFO mode, stop bit = 1 bit, and 1 ××× 1010B meaning even parity. Is set, and in the channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the even-numbered display 1317, FIFA mode, stop bit = 1 bit, and 1 ××× 1000B meaning that parity is not used are set.

In the FIFO mode, data is transmitted using the FIFO of the transmit data register 3142. Further, since the gaming machine is in a noisy environment, it is desirable to set the parity when transmitting data to the outside of the main control board 1310 at high speed.

Since the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is mounted on the main control board 1310, it is less affected by noise as compared with communication with other boards via communication wires. Further, since the amount of data to be transmitted / received is small, the communication speed may be low, and there is little need to use parity. In addition, along the pattern of transmitting a signal between the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 (for example, the left / right and / or thickness direction of the signal line provided on the surface or inner layer of the printed circuit board). A ground pattern is provided on the layer adjacent to the ground pattern, and the noise superimposed on the signal transmission pattern can be reduced by the shielding effect of the ground pattern.

The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 determines the amount of data that the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 generates an interrupt. Specifically, when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is smaller than the set number of bytes, a predetermined bit of the status register corresponding to each channel is set. By determining the relevant bit in the status register, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is a vacancy in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142, and it is possible to determine the transmission timing of the data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142.

The bit in the status register can be used to determine whether the transmit FIFO has an abnormality. For example, even if data is not written to the FIFA of the transmission data register 3142 for a predetermined period, if the bit of the status register is not set, there is no free space in the FIFA of the transmission data register 3142, so that the transmission data register 3142 It may be determined that no data has been transmitted from the FIFA, and error processing (for example, error notification) may be executed.

The baud rate register 3148 determines the data transmission rate. For example, 19200 bps is set for channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, 1200 bps is set for channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is set. 1200 bps is set for the channel 2 used for communication with.

In this way, the transmission rate is changed according to the data transmitted in each channel. This is because the gaming ball is rolling inside the gaming machine, and the electronic circuit of the gaming machine is in an environment that is easily affected by noise. Therefore, the data is transmitted to the payout control board 951 at a low speed so that the data for controlling the ball ejection directly related to the profit given to the player is surely transmitted. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 transmits data at a high rate because the amount of data to be transmitted is large and has nothing to do with the exit of the ball. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 verifies whether the received command is abnormal, and when it is determined that the command is abnormal, the peripheral control board 1510 is not operated or abnormal processing (for example, communication error notification) is executed, and the command is executed. Request to resend. Then, when it is determined that the retransmitted command is normal, the state of the peripheral control board 1510 is restored by using the normal command. Therefore, in the communication with the peripheral control board 1510, data can be transmitted at a high rate. Further, if the communication rate with the peripheral control board 1510 is lowered, the player can recognize the delay from the winning of the starting port to the start of the fluctuation of the symbol, which may reduce the interest.

Communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 can be performed at a high rate (19200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) or at a low rate (1200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). Good. Further, communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 is performed at a high rate (19200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) and a low rate (1200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). A rate between and may be adopted. This is because when the data transmission rate is increased, there is a possibility that other circuits may malfunction due to switching noise of the transistor of the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. On the other hand, even if an abnormality occurs in the transmitted data due to noise, the same data is retransmitted for each timer interrupt unless the transmitted data is updated, and if the retransmitted command is normal, the display content of the accessory ratio indicator 1317. Is returned to normal, so it is not necessary to make the transmission rate extremely slow.

The command status register 3145 is a register that is referred to for confirming the transmission status. For example, each bit is defined as follows.
Bit 7: A flag indicating SnTC transmission completion, 0 indicating transmission in progress, and 1 indicating transmission completion. Bit 6: In SnTDBE normal mode (communication mode that does not use FIFO), it is a flag indicating transmission data emptyness, 0 indicates that it has not been transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1 indicates that it has been transferred to the transmission shift register. That is, when the data is transferred from the transmission data register 3142 to the transmission shift register 3144 and the transmission data is not stored in the transmission data register 3142, the data is set.

In the SnTFL FIFO mode, it is a flag indicating the transmission FIFA trigger level. 0 means that the amount of transmission data stored in the transmission data register 3142 is equal to or more than the trigger level, and 1 is stored in the transmission data register 3142. Indicates that the amount of transmitted data is less than the trigger level. That is, it is set when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is less than the number of bytes set in the transmission trigger level setting register. Therefore, at the time of communication in the FIFO mode, after confirming that the bit is 1, data is written to the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142.
Bits 5 to 2: Unused (fixed to 0)
Bit 1: A bit for clearing the SnTCL transmission buffer and break code transmission, emptying the transmission data, or setting the transmission FIFO trigger level (SnTFL), which is written from the outside. For example, when forcibly clearing the contents of the buffer, 1 is set in the relevant bit. More specifically, it is used when a command is written to the FIFO, but the transmission of the written command is stopped due to some reason (for example, an abnormality occurs). Even if bit 1 is set, the data in the transmission shift register is not cleared.

With the configuration described above, the serial communication circuit 13114 is capable of synchronous communication (asynchronous communication), but outputs a clock signal for synchronous communication (not shown). In this case, the clock signal supplied to the communication partner (driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317) is output from the serial communication circuit 13114 instead of the clock circuit 13118. Each transmission / reception circuit of the serial communication circuit 13114 may be capable of synchronous communication by setting at least one channel, and a serial communication circuit for pacing synchronization and a serial communication circuit for synchronous communication may be separately provided.

Further, although not shown, the serial communication circuit 13114 outputs a signal (LOAD) indicating a data acquisition timing used during synchronous communication.

[3-2. Payout control board]
Returning to FIG. 17, the description of the control configuration of the pachinko machine will be continued. Although detailed illustration of the payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of the game ball is omitted, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to the payout, the launch control by the launch solenoid 682, and the ball by the ball feed solenoid 551 are performed. A launch control unit 953 that performs feed control, an error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 802, and a tank rail. The 803, the ball guidance unit 820, and the ball removing switch for discharging the game ball in the payout device 830 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball removing operation are provided.

[3-2a. Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 951 is a micro that has a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the device 830, and a payout control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from is input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 is input, and the ball burnout detection sensor 827 is paid out. The detection signals from the detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

The detection signals from the ball-out detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port. To.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 of the foul cover unit 520 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I / O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal plate 784 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1. Of the signals output from the external terminal board 784, the signal generated by the main control board 1310 is output from the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951 from the main control board 1310. The signal generated by the main control board 1310 may be output from the external terminal board 784 without passing through the payout control board 951.

The error LED display is a segment display, and displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no game ball in the payout device 830, and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically, the blade). Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the number "3" is displayed to notify that the payout blade and the game ball are engaged with each other in the payout passage of the payout device 830 and the payout blade is difficult to rotate). If there is, a "count switch error" is notified (specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842), and the number "5" is displayed. When it is, it notifies that it is a "retry error" (specifically, it means that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value), and when the number "6" is displayed, it is "full tank". (Specifically, the game ball stored in the foul cover unit 520 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535), and the number "7" is displayed. When it is, it notifies that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 951 to the CR unit), and the number "9" is displayed. Occasionally, it notifies that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port and input to the payout control MPU. Will be done. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the display unit, and this signal is displayed on the display unit. It is entered and displayed.

[3-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 953, which performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 551, is not shown in detail, but is a launch control input in which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. A circuit, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game region 5a based on this clock signal, and this launch reference pulse. A launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 682 based on the above, and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 551 based on the launch reference pulse are provided. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls are launched toward the game region 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the launch reference pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. A ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 500, a contact detection sensor 509 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle lever 504, and a stop that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal from the button is input to the launch timing control circuit after being input to the launch control input circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, they are input to the launch control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle operation sensor 507 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle lever 504 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In this launch solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle operation sensor 507, the launch reference pulse inputs the drive current for launching the game ball toward the game area 5a with the launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle lever 504. When this is done, the output is output to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 551 when the ball feed reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is balled. One ball is received in the feed unit 540, and when the input of the ball feed reference pulse is completed, the received game ball is sent to the ball launcher 680 side by stopping the output of the constant current. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 682 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 551 is controlled to be constant. ing.

The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 951 in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 951.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 17, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. It is provided with an effect display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the sub effect display device 3114 and the upper plate effect display device 244.

[3-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality sound performance. It is provided with a sound source IC for performing the above and a sound ROM for storing sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to the effect drive board 3043, or the game board. The game board side drive data for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in No. 5 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the game board decorative drive board to the effect drive board 3043, or the door. Door-side drive data for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as the vibration exciter 242 provided in the frame 3 and the lower right drive motor 272 of the door, and the collar provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to an LED or the like, and door-side drive light emission data composed of the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port to the door frame 3 side Control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 or the upper plate effect display device 244 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit to the effect display control unit 1512. In addition, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

The detection signals from the various position detection sensors for detecting the positions of the various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU via the effect drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. .. Further, the detection signals from the touch panel 246 of the effect operation unit 220 provided on the door frame 3 and the effect button pressing sensor 258 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally is input from the effect display control unit 1512, and the effect display control unit 1512 is based on this operation signal. The operation is being monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and music and music according to various effects from the speaker 921 and the like provided on the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and the like. Control so that sound effects etc. flow. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or a sound signal 921 for bass of the main body frame 4 and a plurality of speakers on the door frame 3 side is used. By sending 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU has the built-in WDT and an external device. In combination with WDT, he diagnoses whether his system is out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (19.2 km). k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, a plurality of commands different from the initial data, the door frame side lighting / blinking command, the game board side lighting / blinking command, the movable body drive command, and the display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. In this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

The effect drive board 3043 outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or receives a game board side lighting / blinking command. A lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the above is output to the LED of each decorative board provided on the game board 5.

Further, the effect drive board 3043 transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command to the vibration device 242 provided in the door frame 3, the lower right drive motor 272 of the door, each drive motor provided in the game board 5, and the like. Output to.

[3-3b. Various control processes of the peripheral control unit]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 17 performs the peripheral control unit power-on processing as shown in FIG. 60. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the effect control program performs the initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, a process of determining a hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU first performs a process of initializing itself, and the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU is in a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, commands and pachinko related to control of game production output from the main control board 1310. It is in a state where various commands such as commands related to the state of the machine 1 can be received.

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs the current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC control unit, and the calendar information storage unit is stored in the peripheral control RAM as the current calendar information. And set it in the time information storage unit as the current time information.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is set to a value of 0 when is not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V-blank signal indicating that screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted is input, which will be described later. The value 1 is set in the interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG.

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1. By repeating such a determination, the state waits until the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the value 1 is first set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed.

Following step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set in the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the number of 1ms timer interrupts, and the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 119. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller of the peripheral control MPU is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board.

Following step S1012, the effect control program performs the effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation of the operation button 220C based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 220, etc. Based on the various information obtained from the above, the presence / absence of operation of the operation button 220C is monitored, and it is appropriately determined whether or not the operation state of the operation button 220C is reflected in the game effect.

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the sound source built-in VDP displays the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP in the display data creation process described later by the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side. Output to the decorative substrate 233. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233.

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP in the sound data creation process described later to the speaker 921, and notifies the sound data in addition to the music and sound effects. Sound data of sound and notification sound is output to speaker 921.

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the peripheral control RAM. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which screen data from the first screen data is output to the sound source built-in VDP among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data. Update the pointer.

Further, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which light emission data from the first light emission data to be the light emission mode of various LEDs among the light emission data arranged in the time series constituting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode. , Update the pointer.

In the scheduler update process, the first sound among the sound data such as music and sound effects, and the sound command data for instructing the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in the time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation. The pointer is updated to indicate the number of sound command data to be output to the sound source built-in VDP from the command data.

In the scheduler update process, the output target is the drive data from the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in the time series that compose the electrical drive source schedule data. Update the pointer to indicate if you want to.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs reception command analysis processing (step S1022). In this reception command analysis process, the effect control program is information transmitted from the decorative board 3053 on the game board side and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, and is a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command) described later. The various commands received by the receiving means) are analyzed (command analysis means).

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, further, when the command analyzed by the received command analysis process in step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into predetermined notification displays, the effect control program issues various abnormality notifications. The peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 can display the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormal display mode for execution. Alternatively, it is extracted from the peripheral control RAM and set in the peripheral control RAM. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in descending order of priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically transitioned to. It is designed to do. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly has occurred and one anomaly has occurred after one anomaly has occurred but before the anomaly has been resolved. Can be done.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the commands analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above are classified into various commands, for example, status displays. In the case of the error release navigation command (second error release command), by controlling the mode different from the normal effect mode associated with the effect operation, for example, the game board side decorative board 3053 (effect device), the door frame side. A decorative substrate 233 (effect device) and a lamp (effect device) are used to visually warn the outside, and a speaker is used to audibly warn the outside (error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error release navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch of the payout control board 951 even though the player is in the gaming state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to give a warning to the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game are suppressed.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program is stored in the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit and the time information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and set in the peripheral control RAM. Update the time information. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year and month, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs a lamp data creation process (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates the light emission data arranged in time series that constitutes the schedule data for generating the light emission mode. Peripheral control of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 based on the light emission data to be generated. It is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of unit 1511, set in the peripheral control RAM, and lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3. The door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511, created, and set in the peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer. Is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the sound source built-in VDP. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source built-in VDP extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create sprite data, and creates sprite data on the game board side decorative board 3053. And the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the door frame side decorative board 233 is generated on the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates among the sound command data arranged in time series that constitutes the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the sound source built-in VDP. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source built-in VDP extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM and controls the built-in sound source to control the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program copies the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the external peripheral control RAM to the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively, and backs them up. The contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the external peripheral control SRAM are copied to the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively, and backed up.

Following step S1034, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. The value 0 is set in −FLG for initialization, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB—FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, it waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, steps S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

This peripheral control unit steady processing starts from the effect control program first setting a value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. The interrupt timer start processing is performed, each processing of step S1012, step S1014, ..., And step S1036 is performed, and finally, in step S1038, the value 0 is set to the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed. If you set, it will be completed. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequencies (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 are set to approximately 30 fps per second, and thus a V blank signal. The interval at which is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

Next, the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 61 can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP of the effect display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with the above as an opportunity will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 61 (step). S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 60 is being executed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

When the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is a value 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). Exit this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the steady processing is not executed.

Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 60 will be described. .. When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. 62 (step). S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 60 in this routine. A peripheral control unit 1ms timer A counter that counts the number of times interrupt processing is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequencies (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 are set to approximately 30 fps per second, and thus a V blank signal. The interval at which is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second, ..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt is sequentially performed. It will occur.

When the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as it is. When the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, , The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt is newly started. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, a value 1 is added (incremented, step S1102) to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 60. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one time.

Following step S1102, a motor and solenoid drive process is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, a pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the peripheral control MPU and the peripheral control RAM. Drives electric drive sources such as various motors and solenoids according to the drive data instructed by, updates the pointer to the next drive data specified in time series, and executes this motor and solenoid drive process each time. Update the pointer.

Following step S1104, the movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, in-situ history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , Movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the peripheral control RAM. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the peripheral control RAM, it is possible to acquire the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5.

Following step S1106, the effect operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 220 are input. (Operation history information of button 220C, etc.) is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. Whether or not the operation button 220C is operated can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from various detection switches set in the peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the door frame side effect receiver IC of the door frame side decorative board 233 is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. As for the LOCKN signal, as described above, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the door frame side decorative board 233 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is judged, it is a signal to be output to convey that fact.

Following step S1110, a backup process is performed (step S1112), and this routine is terminated. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM are copied to the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively, and backed up, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM are backed up. Make a backup by copying to one area and the second backup area.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effect of steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 60, various processes related to the production of steps S1012 to S1032 described above are executed as the progress of the production within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt Peripheral control by forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process, restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then newly generating the 1 ms timer interrupt. Part 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is not broken. Therefore, it is possible to surely match the progress state of the production.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the decorative board 3053 on the game board side and the decorative board 233 on the door frame side, and the peripheral control MPU and the VDP with a built-in sound source are mounted. Even in the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, peripheral control The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the unit V blank interrupt processing. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb the time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[3-4. Production display control unit]
Next, the effect display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect display device 244 on the peripheral control board 1510 is displayed as a microprocessor, although detailed illustration is omitted. A control MPU, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a VDP (abbreviation for Video Display Processor) that displays and controls the effect display device 1600 and the upper plate effect display device 244, and an effect display device 1600. , An image ROM for storing various screen data displayed on the sub-effect display device 3114 and the upper plate effect display device 244, and an image RAM to which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the effect display device 1600 and sub. The drawing control of the effect display device 3114 and the upper plate effect display device 244 is performed. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU performs interrupt processing when an execution signal is input from VDP and the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect display device 244, as well as control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511. A plurality of corresponding schedule data, its control data (display command), and corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect display device 244. ing. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in chronological order. The non-resident area transfer data is the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600, the sub-effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect display device 244 according to the progress of the schedule data, and various data from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance. The order in which the data is transferred is specified.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. Extract from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the first screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data to produce the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect. The drawing data to be displayed on the display device 244 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect display device 244. Further, when the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect display device 244 do not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an executing signal to that effect to the display control MPU. .. The line buffer method is adopted for VDP. This "line buffer method" means that one line of drawing data for drawing the left and right directions of the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect display device 244 is held in the line buffer and held in this line buffer. This is a method of outputting the drawing data for one line to the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect display device 244.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect display device 244 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the effect display device. 1600, it affects the speed of drawing on the sub-effect display device 3114 and the upper plate effect display device 244. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded in the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit grouped on the effect display device 1600 and the upper plate effect display device 244. For example, when displaying various characters on the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect display device 244, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect display device 244, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are arranged on the screen and have a vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "the order in which the sprites are overlapped"), and the effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3114 are set. It is drawn on the upper plate effect display device 244.

The sprite is composed of a plurality of rectangular areas having 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in width 2 x height 3 etc. are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect display device 244 are main scans that set the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels in order from left to right when viewed from the front. , Driven by a sub-scan that repeats the main scan in a direction intersecting that one direction. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input to the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect display device 244, the effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 1600 as the main scan. When viewed from the front of the display device 3114 and the upper plate effect display device 244, the data is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect display device 244 shift to the line directly below as a sub scan, and similarly, the drawing data for the next line is input. Then, based on the drawing data for the next line, one line is sequentially displayed from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3114, and the upper plate effect display device 244 as the main scan. Output to each pixel.

[4. Game content]
Next, the content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 10, 16, 16, 17 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, and the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. However, the game is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle lever 504, and the more the ball is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be driven. That is, the game ball can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball becomes an obstacle nail. By abutting, the flow speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates due to the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are not shown. The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 will flow down while contacting the center. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500, the center accessory 2500 passes through the warp passage 2521. It is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp outlet 2522, which is open in the frame of 2500, through the guideway 2523.

The game ball supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530 and moves back and forth from side to side to the central guide portion 2531 in the center in the left-right direction or the side guide portions 2532 on the left and right sides thereof. It is emitted backward from any of the above. When the game ball is released into the game area 5a from the central guide portion 2531 of the stage 2530, since the central guide portion 2531 is located directly above the first starting port 2002, the game released from the central guide portion 2531. The ball has a high probability of being accepted into the first starting port 2002. When the game balls are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released from the side guide portion 2532 into the game area 5a, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the first grand prize opening 2005 in the open state, or the like.

By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf portion 2302 of the side unit upper 2300, and the general winning opening of the side unit lower 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in 2001, the first starting port 2002, and the like. Then, when the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

On the other hand, in the game area 5a, the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters (is driven) to the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500. ), And enter the upper right distribution space 2541 of the right-handed game area 2540. Although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in the upper right distribution space 2541, and the game ball comes into contact with the obstacle nails and circulates while changing the flow direction thereof in various ways. In the upper right distribution space 3541, a gate portion 2003 is provided at the upper part, and a general winning opening 2001 and a second starting port 2004 which is normally closed by a second starting port door member 2549 are provided at the lower part.

The game ball that has flowed down in the upper right distribution space 2541 enters the lower right distribution space 2543 through the right flow passage 2542 on the downstream side thereof. The game ball that has entered the lower right distribution space 2543 has the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b that are lined up side by side as the second prize opening 2006. The upper surface of the door member 2552 and the second lower prize opening door member 2555 passes through the second attacker passage 2543a forming the bottom surface, and from the left end of the lower discharge plate portion 2559 on the left side of the front view into the game area 5a. Be released. The downstream end (discharge plate portion 2559) of the second attacker passage 2543a is opened so that the game ball faces the first prize opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100, and when the first prize opening 2005 is in the open state. When the game ball is released from the second attacker passage 2543a into the game area 5a, the game ball is accepted into the first prize opening 2005 with a high probability.

The game ball flowing through the right-hand flow passage 2542 and the lower right distribution space 2543 flows down while the increase in the distribution speed is suppressed by the plurality of deceleration ribs 2546. In rare cases, in the lower right distribution space 2543, the game ball that has entered the discharge passage 2543b that branches near the upstream end of the second attacker passage 2543a may enter the game area 5a. It is discharged to the outside of the game board 5 from the second out port 2543c without being returned to the inside.

When a game ball that hits right and enters the upper right distribution space 2541 passes through the gate unit 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2547, it is an ordinary random number that is updated in a predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310. An ordinary lottery is performed by acquiring one ordinary random number from among them and collating the acquired ordinary random number with a predetermined ordinary hit determination table. If the result of this normal lottery is "normal hit" when the time reduction control described later is not executed, the second start port door member 2549 rotates only once in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the second start port. With 2004 in the open state, the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this example). On the other hand, when the time reduction control is executed, a lottery is performed in the ordinary lottery to determine whether the "ordinary hit" is "first ordinary hit", "second ordinary hit", or "third ordinary hit". Then, when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is any of "first normal hit", "second normal hit", and "third normal hit" when the time reduction control is executed, the second start door member 2549 Front view After rotating in the counterclockwise direction to open the second starting port 2004, the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined period, and then viewed from the front. By rotating in the counterclockwise direction to close the second starting port 2004, the opening / closing control that makes it impossible to accept the game ball into the second starting port 2004 is performed a predetermined number of times (5 in this example). Repeat over (times). In addition, when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "first normal hit", the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted, and the period of each of the five times is "0.3 seconds". , "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", and when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "second normal hit" "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "1.1 seconds", "0.28 seconds" as the period of each of the five times that the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted. , "0.3 seconds", and if the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "third normal hit", the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted. The period is "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "1.1 seconds", "second normal hit" and "third normal". The "hit" is more advantageous to the player than the "first normal hit" (it is easy to accept the game ball into the second starting port 2004). When the game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. To.

In the present embodiment, in the variation display of the normal symbol performed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the passage of the game ball through the gate portion 2003, the normal symbol is displayed after the variation display of the normal symbol is started. A certain amount of time is set until the stop display is displayed (until the result of the normal lottery is suggested) (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as the normal fluctuation time). At the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door member 2549 rotates to be in the open state after the lapse of the normal fluctuation time. During the execution of the time reduction control described later, the control that normally shortens the fluctuation time is executed as compared with the normal state (the state in which the time reduction control is not executed). Further, the opening time for rotating the second starting port door member 2549 to open the second starting port 2004 may be changed according to the gaming state, for example, time saving control is executed. If not, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 may be changed to a longer time than when the time saving control is executed.

In addition, a new game ball is placed in the gate section between the time when the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and the time when the normal symbol that is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display is stopped and displayed (until the normal lottery result is suggested). After passing through 2003, it is not possible to newly start the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display, so the variable display of the normal symbol is started until the variable display of the previous normal symbol is completed (of the normal lottery result). I try to put it on hold (until the suggestion is finished). Specifically, the ordinary random numbers acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003 by the gate sensor 2547 are stored, and the variation display of the ordinary symbol can be started. The start of variable display of normal symbols is suspended until. The maximum number of ordinary random numbers that can be stored on the main control board 1310 is four, and even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, the number of pending ordinary random numbers is discarded without being retained. .. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is detected by the first starting port sensor 2104, the pachinko machine 1 is updated within a predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310. By acquiring one first special random number from one special random number and collating the acquired first special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit"). , "Small hit", etc.), the first special lottery result will be drawn. Then, based on the lottery first special lottery result, the eight LEDs of the first special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds), and then the first special lottery result. The result of the first special lottery is suggested to the player by displaying the lighting mode according to the above (displaying the stop symbol according to the result of the first special lottery after displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner). In addition, "missing", "small hit", "2R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit" are included in the first special lottery result that is drawn when the game ball is accepted at the first starting port 2002. Yes, by collating the acquired first special random number with the jackpot judgment table, it is determined which of these is, and after the jackpot game, it is normal (low probability state: in this example, there is a probability of about 1/395). Probability improvement control (high probability state (also called probabilistic state): in this example, the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/44) that improves the probability of winning the jackpot (winning probability) than (winning the jackpot). Whether or not to execute (probability variation big hit or not) and whether or not to execute time saving control (time saving state) that shortens the fluctuation time than usual when at least the first special lottery result is out of order (whether or not it is a time saving big hit) The time reduction control period (number of time reductions: special symbol (number of fluctuations of the first special striking symbol and the second special symbol)) is also determined. The winning probability of "small hit" is always constant regardless of the gaming state (about 1/300 in this example).

Further, when the game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2551, one of the second special random numbers updated in the numerical range predetermined in the main control board 1310 is selected. By acquiring the second special random number of the above and collating the acquired second special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "small hit", etc. ) Is generated, and the result of the second special lottery is drawn. Then, based on the result of the second special lottery drawn, the eight LEDs of the second special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds), and then the second special lottery result is obtained. The result of the second special lottery is suggested to the player by displaying the lighting mode according to the above (displaying the stop symbol according to the result of the second special lottery after displaying the second special symbol in a variable manner). The results of the second special lottery, which is drawn when the game ball is accepted at the second starting port 2004, include "missing", "2R jackpot", "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", and so on. There are "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", and "16R jackpot", and by collating the acquired second special random number with the jackpot judgment table, it is determined which of these is, and further, after the jackpot game, it is normal ( Low probability state: Probability improvement control that improves the probability of winning a big hit (winning probability) rather than winning a big hit with a probability of about 1/395 in this example (high probability state (also called probability variation state): this example Then, whether or not to execute (whether or not the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/44) (whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot), and at least when the second special lottery result is out of order, the time reduction control that shortens the fluctuation time than usual It is also determined whether or not (time reduction state) is executed (whether or not it is a time reduction jackpot) and the period during which time reduction control is executed (time reduction number: special symbol (number of fluctuations of the first special striking symbol and the second special symbol)). It is supposed to be done.

When the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is a special lottery result that causes an advantageous gaming state. , After the lapse of a predetermined fluctuation time, eight LEDs of the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) are displayed in a lighting mode according to the special lottery result, and then the first prize opening Either 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is accepted into the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 when the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is open, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 A predetermined number from the payout device 830 (for example, 11 when the game ball is received in the first prize opening 2005, or 15 when the game ball is received in the second prize opening 2006). The game ball is paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the 1st Grand Prize 2005 and the 2nd Grand Prize 2006 allow the game balls to be accepted, by allowing the 1st Grand Prize 2005 and the 2nd Grand Prize 2006 to accept the game balls, many games can be played. The ball can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

When the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit", the first big winning opening 2005 will play the game ball for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern of closing after becoming an acceptable open state is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", "16R jackpot", the first big prize opening A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has passed after the 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is opened so that the game ball can be accepted, or the first prize opening 2005 is predetermined. When either the number of game balls (for example, 7) is accepted, or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted for the second prize opening 2006, either condition is satisfied. , The opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the game ball unacceptable is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, "4R jackpot" is repeated for 4 rounds, "5R jackpot" is for 5 rounds, and "16R jackpot" is for 16 rounds, respectively, to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. In addition, the opening / closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (the first big winning opening 2005 is for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds)). In the open / close pattern in which the game ball is closed after it is in an open state in which the game ball can be accepted), it is practically difficult to insert the game ball into the first prize opening 2005. On the other hand, the opening / closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", "16R jackpot". (A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted, or the first prize opening 2005 Either a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls will be accepted, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls will be accepted for the second prize opening 2006. When the above conditions are satisfied, it is easy to insert the game ball into the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 in the opening / closing pattern) in which the game ball is in an unacceptable closed state. If the special lottery result is "4R big hit", "5R big hit", "6R big hit", "7R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit", "16R big hit", the above first big prize A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has passed after the opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted, or the first big winning opening 2005 is predetermined. Either the number of game balls (for example, 7) is accepted, or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted for the second prize opening 2006. Then, the number of rounds in which the opening / closing pattern that makes the game ball unacceptable is executed may be the actual special lottery result, and the number (for example,) predetermined to the first large winning opening 2005 as the special lottery result. , 7) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls will be accepted in the second prize opening 2006, if any of the conditions is satisfied, the game balls will be accepted. An opening / closing pattern that makes the closed state unacceptable and an opening / closing pattern that is executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (the first big winning opening 2005 is a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds) For ~ 0.6 seconds), a device may be provided to perform a plurality of rounds including an opening / closing pattern) in which the game ball is opened and then closed. For example, as a result of the special lottery, a "8R jackpot with a real 4R" is provided, and a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls are accepted in the first prize opening 2005, or the second prize opening. When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted in 2006, or if any of the conditions is satisfied, the opening / closing pattern for closing the game balls in an unacceptable closed state is repeated four times, and then the game balls are closed. Opening and closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) in the first big winning opening 2005) The opening / closing pattern (opening / closing pattern) in which the game ball is opened and then closed may be repeated four times.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the second major winning opening 2006 is composed of the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b arranged side by side, and the second major winning opening 2006 is used. In the case of "big hit", for example, in the first round (1st round), the second upper prize opening 2006a opens to allow the game ball to be accepted, and the game ball is closed due to the satisfaction of the conditions for making it unacceptable, and then accepted. Until (during the interval), the second lower prize opening 2006b is opened to start the next round (2R) that allows the game ball to be accepted, and when the second lower prize opening 2006b becomes unacceptable, Since the interval period has passed in the meantime, the second upper prize opening 2006a is opened again so that the game ball can be accepted. Then, the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b are alternately opened and closed until a predetermined number of rounds are exhausted. As a result, in the second attacker passage 2543a, either the second upper prize opening 2006a or the second lower prize opening 2006b is in a state where the game ball can be accepted during the "big hit". If you hit right with and distribute the game ball in the second attacker passage 2543a, the game ball will surely be accepted in the second big prize opening 2006, and the player will be entertained by eliminating the missing game ball. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, in some of the above-mentioned multiple types of jackpots, whether or not to execute the above-mentioned time saving control after the end of the jackpot game is different depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. For example, in the non-time saving state (the state in which the time saving control is not executed), when the first special lottery result is an 8R normal big hit that does not execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game, the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the first special lottery result is the 8R normal jackpot in the time saving state (the state in which the time saving control is executed), the time saving control is executed after the big hit game. Further, in the non-time saving state (the state in which the time saving control is not executed), when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal big hit that does not execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game, the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal jackpot in the time saving state (the state in which the time saving control is executed), the time saving control is executed after the big hit game. In addition, in a low probability non-time saving state (a state in which both probability improvement control and time saving control are not executed: also referred to as a normal state), the probability improvement control is executed after the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are hit. In the case of a 2R probability variation jackpot, the time saving control is not executed after the jackpot game. On the other hand, the probability improvement control is executed or the time saving control is executed, that is, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game in a state other than the normal state. In the case of a big hit, the time saving control is executed after the big hit game.

In the present embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol executed by the first special symbol display by the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 and the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 are performed. (Ii) The variable display of the second special symbol executed by the special symbol display is not executed at the same time, and only one of them is executed. Therefore, until the first special symbol, which is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display due to the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2002, is stopped and displayed (until the first special lottery result is suggested) and the first. (Ii) The first start is performed until the second special symbol, which is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display due to the acceptance of the game ball into the start port 2004, is stopped and displayed (until the result of the second special lottery is suggested). When a new game ball is accepted in the opening 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display newly starts the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Because it is not possible, the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started until the variable display of the previous special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is completed (first special lottery). (Until the result and the suggestion of the second special lottery result are completed), it is put on hold. Specifically, the first special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball received by the first start port 2002 by the first start port sensor 2104, and the second start port sensor 2551. The second special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball received in the second starting port 2004 by the above, and the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) are stored. The start of the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended until the variable display of the symbol) can be started. The number of reserved first special random numbers and second special random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is limited to four, respectively, and for more than that, games are played in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the ball is accepted, it is discarded without being held. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold. Further, the first special random number and the second special random number stored in the main control board 1310 are digested with priority given to the second special random number. That is, regardless of the timing of accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, if the second special random number is stored and the start of the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, the first special The variable display of the second special symbol is prioritized over the symbol.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) and the effect display device 1600 (sub-effect display device 3114 may also be used). In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is that the above eight LEDs constituting the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) are repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time. It blinks, then stops in a predetermined lighting mode, and the combination of LEDs lit at the time of this stop suggests a special lottery result.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 indirectly controls the effect based on the control signals (variation pattern command, determination result notification command, etc.) from the main control board 1310, and the effect image suggests the special lottery result. Is done. Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, each decoration is displayed in a state in which a series of decorative symbol rows consisting of a plurality of different symbols are displayed in a plurality of rows (for example, three rows of a left decorative symbol, a middle decorative symbol, and a right decorative symbol). The variable display of the symbol sequence is started, and then it is stopped and displayed in sequence (in this example, the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → the middle decorative symbol is stopped and displayed), and finally all the decorative symbol rows are stopped and displayed. Then, the lottery result of the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) extracted by the combination of the stopped and displayed symbols is suggested to the player side. That is, a plurality of decorative symbol rows change according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) acquired when the start prize occurs. After being displayed, the effect image that is stopped and displayed is displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result). The decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is larger than the first special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol that is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display. Since it is easy to see, the player generally pays attention to the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device 1600.

The time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the symbol sequence fluctuates and the confirmed image is displayed. The time until it is displayed) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a shorter time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the decorative body of the center accessory 2500, the back left middle, according to the lottery special lottery result. The decorative unit 3050, the back-bottom rear movable production unit 3100, the back-up left movable production unit 3200, the back-left movable production unit 3300, the back-up middle movable production unit 3400, the back-bottom front movable production unit 3500, and the like are appropriately used. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc., and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[5. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, the process executed by the main control board 1310 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. Specifically, the system / user reset process executed when the power of the game machine is turned on and the timer interrupt process executed in a predetermined cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) by the timer started by the system / user reset process. explain.

[5-1. Initialization process]
21 and 22 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the initialization process of the main control board according to the embodiment of the present invention.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform the initialization process. When the initialization process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission so that the RAM 1312 can be written (step S10). Specifically, "00H" indicating write permission is output to the RAM protect register.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12). Specifically, first, "03H" indicating the mode setting is written in the watchdog timer control register, and further, "03H" indicating the activation of the watchdog timer is written. Further, the watchdog timer is cleared and reset (step S14).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the predetermined wait time has elapsed (step S16). Since the voltage does not rise immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, if the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time the power is turned on and the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit A power failure warning signal is input from. In the wait process, a predetermined monitoring wait value is set, and the watchdog timer is activated while waiting for the process for a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds).

If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, the time required for the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) to start has elapsed, so it is determined whether the RAM clear switch is operated (step S18). .. When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the work area for calculating the accessory ratio (area 13128 for calculating the accessory ratio) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased (step S30). ), Proceed to step S24. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set (step S20). The power failure flag is a flag that is set when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off through normal processing such as the occurrence of a power failure (see step S56 in FIG. 22).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct. Therefore, the data backed up in the work area (other than the accessory ratio calculation area 13128) is deleted (step). S30), the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power failure and the checksum in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct, so the data backed up in the work area ( The area (other than the accessory ratio calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, so the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and step S24 Proceed to.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the work area for calculating the accessory ratio (area for calculating the accessory ratio 13128) is normal using the check code (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio may not be correct, so the data stored in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio is deleted (step S26).

When one or more backup areas are provided in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined by using the check code, and when the main area is determined to be abnormal, the backup area 1 is used. It is preferable to duplicate the data in the backup area, which is determined in the order of 2, 2 and N, and which is first determined to be normal, in the main area. After that, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is.

Regarding the accessory ratio calculation area, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted at predetermined time intervals, separately from the determination result of the check code when the power is turned on. In addition, for each predetermined operating amount (for example, for each predetermined number of launched balls, for each predetermined number of winning balls, for each predetermined number of special symbol variation display games, for each jackpot of a predetermined number of special symbol variation display games, etc.) The data in the ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is different for each data type (game control data 13132 and accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136). Erase with conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control data 13132 is erased, but the backed up accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not erased. When the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 can be erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the accessory ratio calculated by the pachinko machine 1 can be erased at an arbitrary timing. Therefore, the backed up accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not deleted by the operation of the RAM clear switch, and the deletion of the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 by the operation of the staff of the game hall is prevented. , It is possible to prevent the concealment of the state where the accessory ratio is abnormal. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect a gaming machine modified to a state in which the accessory ratio is high or low.

The main control MPU 1311 executes the initial setting for setting in various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111) when the power recovery setting or the RAM initialization process of the RAM work area is executed (step S28). In the initial setting of the main control MPU 1311, first, the CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) is initially set to allow interrupts. Furthermore, the serial communication port and the test signal output port are initially set. Start the hardware random number generation circuit. Then, the serial communication circuit 13114 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, the payout control board 951 and the accessory ratio display 1317 is set. Further, after the operation of the serial communication circuit 13114 is started, the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 is initially set.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a process of setting a power-on command for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S32). In the power-on command creation process, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. To generate the power-on command, the power-on state reference command is set as the reference command data, and the command addition data corresponding to the generated command is added.

The power-on commands include the power-on state buffer command and the special symbol / electric accessory operation number command. The power-on state buffer command is a command for notifying the game state when returning after the power is turned off, and notifies the winning probability of the special lottery and the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory. On the other hand, the special symbol / electric accessory operation number command notifies the execution status of the variable display of the special symbol.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 permits execution of interrupt processing including timer interrupt processing (step S34). The initial setting of the pachinko machine 1 is completed by the processing from the power-on of the pachinko machine 1 to step S34 (initial setting means).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the power failure warning signal (step S36) and determines whether or not the power failure warning signal is ON (step S38). When the power failure warning signal is not ON (the result of step S38 is "No"), that is, the random number update process is executed (step S40). In the random number update process of step S46, a random number other than the random number for determining the winning is mainly updated in the special lottery or the ordinary lottery. The random number update process for determining the winning in the special lottery or the normal lottery is executed by the timer interrupt process described later. The processes from step S36 to step S40 are executed until the power failure warning signal is detected, and these processes are set as the main process on the main control side (normal means after initial setting).

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is detected (the result of step S38 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 executes the power cutoff process (power cutoff setting means). In the power outage process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the occurrence of a power failure is executed. Specifically, first, the execution of interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42). As a result, the timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM 1312 can be prevented, and rewriting of game information can be protected. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S44). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is set in the solenoid, power failure clear, and ACK output port. It is not necessary to clear all the output ports. For example, the output ports for controlling a solenoid or a motor that consumes a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption of the time until the main board side power off processing is completed can be reduced, and the main board side power off processing can be surely ended.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held (step S46). Further, the checksum calculation result is stored in the checksum area of the RAM 1312 (step S48). This checksum is used to determine if the data backed up in the work area is normal.

Subsequently, a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio (area 13128 for calculating the accessory ratio) (step S50). If the check code is a fixed value, it is not necessary to calculate the check code in step S50. The check code may be calculated and stored each time the data is updated by the accessory ratio calculation / display process instead of the process when the main board power is turned off.

Subsequently, the calculated check code (or a predetermined value used as the check code) is stored in a predetermined area of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S52).

Subsequently, the data in the main area of the accessory ratio calculation work (accessory ratio calculation area 13128) is duplicated in each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also duplicated. The backup may be executed as appropriate (for example, each time the data is updated) by the accessory ratio calculation / display process instead of the process when the main board side power is turned off.

In this way, by storing the data used for calculating the accessory ratio in the backup area together with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code, the data for calculating the accessory ratio is retained even when the power is turned off. , It is possible to calculate the accessory ratio in long-term operation.

Further, a value indicating that the backup was normally performed is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S56). As a result, the storage of the game backup information is completed. Finally, the write of the RAM 1312 is prohibited by outputting "01H" indicating write prohibition to the RAM protect register (step S58), and the process waits until the power is restored from the power failure (infinite loop).

[5-2. Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the initialization process shown in FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets 1 in the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word by executing the main control program, and switches the register (step S70). The main control board 1310 in the present embodiment has a bank 0 and a bank 1, and is switched and used each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the switch input process (step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Specifically, detection signals from various sensors that detect game balls that have entered a winning opening such as a general winning opening, detection signals from a magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet, and prize ball control processing. The payer ACK signal and the like from the payout control board 951 that conveys that the payout control board 951 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the above are read and stored in the input information storage area as input information. Further, in the switch input process, the detection signals from the discharge ball sensor 3060 and the launch ball sensor 1020 are read to count the number of out balls.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs a timer update process (step S76). In the timer update process, for example, the time during which the special symbol display 1185 is lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process described later, and the normal symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process determined by the ordinary electric accessory control process. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the symbol variation display pattern, there is a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has normally received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311). When determining whether or not an input has been made, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the random number update process 1 (step S78). In the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the small hit, which are updated by the non-winning random number update process in step S40 in the system / user reset process (main process on the main control side) shown in the figure. The random number for determining the initial value for the symbol is also updated.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the prize ball control process (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out based on the read input information is calculated, and the number is written to the main control built-in RAM 1312. Further, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out the game balls can be created, and a self-check for checking the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 can be performed. Create commands. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines the current game state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and adds the area 13128 for calculating the accessory ratio of the main control built-in RAM 1312. (See FIG. 26) is updated (step S81). The process of step S81 can be skipped when there is no prize ball to be paid out in step S80, and the load on the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the frame command reception process (step S82). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into status displays by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information for transmitting that fact to the payout control board 951 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Further, the main control MPU 1311 formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, a frame state display command, an error release notification command, etc.), and transmits as the transmission information described above. Store in the information storage area. Further, in the prize ball discharge process, the number of prize balls discharged is recorded in the storage area (see FIG. 27) determined by the game state of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128.

The accessory ratio calculation area update process (step S81) may be executed in any order as long as it is after the prize ball control process (step S80) and before the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step S89). ..

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the fraud detection process (step S84). In the fraud detection process, the abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and it is detected by the count switch that the game ball has entered the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 when the game is not in the big hit game state, the main control program Creates a winning abnormality display command that is classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. Further, it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability fluctuation state based on the jackpot symbol random value. Then, when the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, the process shifts to the probability fluctuation state, and when the probability variation transition condition is not satisfied, the game state shifts to a game state other than the probability variation state. Here, the "probability fluctuation state" refers to a state in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively higher than in the normal gaming state (low probability state) (high probability state).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process (step S88). In the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal, a random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted, and it is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM ("" "Ordinary lottery"). Then, it is determined whether or not to open / close the second start door member 2549 according to the lottery result by the ordinary lottery. When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the second start port door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), so that the game ball can be accepted by the start port 2004, which is advantageous for the player. Move to the state.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the display switch 1318 is operated, and if the display switch 1318 is operated, calls the accessory ratio calculation / display process (FIGS. 24 and 25) to call the accessory ratio. The bonus ratio is calculated with reference to the number of prize balls stored in the calculation area 13128. Then, the calculated bonus ratio is displayed on the bonus ratio display 1317 (step S89). In this way, by calling the accessory ratio calculation / display process in the timer interrupt process and calculating the accessory ratio, the accessory ratio (gambling of the pachinko machine 1) based on the latest data can be confirmed.

Regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, if the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the accessory ratio may be displayed. .. Further, when the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. May be good. Since the display switch 1318 is provided on the back surface side of the game board, if the display switch 1318 is displayed, the main body frame 4 is normally open and the progress of the game is stopped. In this way, if the bonus ratio is calculated at the timing when the progress of the game is stopped, the CPU resource can be reduced without consuming CPU resources by division or subtraction for calculating the bonus ratio during the game.

Details of the accessory ratio calculation / display process will be described later in FIGS. 24 and 25. Further, a specific example of the display method of the accessory ratio will be described later. When the display switch 1318 is operated, all kinds of values (role ratio, continuous accessory ratio, cumulative total, total cumulative total) may be calculated, but they are displayed for each operation of the display switch 1318. You may only calculate the value. Further, the accessory ratio may be calculated regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, and if the display switch 1318 is operated, the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio indicator 1317.

Even when the pachinko machine 1 detects fraud and stops the game, the accessory ratio calculation area update process (step S81) and the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step S89) are executed. By executing these processes regardless of whether or not fraud is detected, the accessory ratio can be confirmed even during fraud notification.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the output data setting process (step S90). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951 or a big hit game. When in this state, a drive signal may be output to the attacker solenoids (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that open and close the opening / closing member 2107 of the winning openings 2005 and 2006. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the start port (second start port door member 2549), information output signal during probability fluctuation, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output Various information (game information) signals and security signals related to the game, such as signals, time saving and medium information output information, and start opening winning information output signals, are output to the payout control board 951.

Further, in the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out balls counted in the switch input process (step S74) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal having a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal plate 784 for each predetermined number of out balls (10 or the like).

Further, in the output data setting process, a test signal for output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a game state, a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol (information signal output means).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information such as commands and data is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and the transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. Various commands created by timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, are stored in the transmission information. One packet of the main peripheral serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. It is composed of a sum value obtained by regarding the mode as a numerical value and the sum of the sum values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to clear. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is terminated and the process returns to the processing before the interrupt.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation processing of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio in the timer interrupt processing, and the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 performs the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus. The calculation process of the object ratio may be executed. In this case, a command for displaying the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or the payout control unit 952 may send a command to the peripheral control unit 1511. You may send a command to display the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio.

[5-3. Character ratio calculation / display processing]
24 and 25 are flowcharts showing an example of the accessory ratio calculation / display process. The main control MPU 1311 executes the accessory ratio calculation / display process. The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may execute the accessory ratio calculation / display process. When the peripheral control unit 1511 calculates the accessory ratio, the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. For example, when the calculated accessory ratio is within (or outside the range) of a predetermined range, the effect in the game may be changed. Specifically, when the accessory ratio exceeds a predetermined threshold value (threshold value smaller than the reference value), the advance notice effect may be changed to perform a notice effect that is more interesting than the normal advance notice effect.

First, a check code is calculated from the main area of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 (step S140), and the calculated check code is the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined whether they match (step S142). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the main area is normal, so the accessory ratio calculation process is executed and the combination is obtained from the data in the main area. The object ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated and stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S156). Specifically, the bonus ratio is calculated by dividing the number of acquired balls by the total number of acquired balls, and the continuous bonus ratio is calculated by dividing the number of consecutive acquired balls by the total number of acquired balls. The fractional part (value after the decimal point) of the calculated bonus ratio and continuous bonus ratio may be rounded down or rounded off. Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

In step S156, the updated value may be duplicated in the backup area each time the accessory ratio and / or the continuous accessory ratio of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is updated.

If the number of bits in which the number of acquired balls is stored is large and the number of bits that can be calculated by the main control MPU 1311 is insufficient, the lower bits of the number of acquired balls are omitted and the bonus ratio is calculated. May be calculated. For example, if the storage area for the number of acquired balls is 32 bits, a numerical value from 0 to 4,294,967,295 can be stored. However, when the main control MPU is an 8-bit processor and can perform 8-bit or 16-bit arithmetic, 16 bits below the most significant bit having a value of 1 are extracted from the acquired spheres stored in 32-bit and the arithmetic is performed. It is advisable to store it in a register (16 bits) and divide it. When the number of acquired balls is equal to or less than the maximum number of bits that can be used in the calculation (32767, which is the maximum value of 16 bits), the lower 16 bits may be taken out and used in the calculation.

Further, if the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100 (rounded down to the nearest whole number) and used as the number to be divided (the number to be divided) to calculate the accessory ratio, the calculation with a decimal number can be avoided.

Further, the upper limit of the accessory ratio is set to 99, and when the calculation result of the accessory ratio is 100 or more, it may be 99.

On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in the main area is abnormal, and the accessory ratio is calculated from the data in the backup area 1. Try. Specifically, a check code is calculated from the backup area 1 of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S144), and the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined whether or not (step S146). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, and the data in the backup area 1 is duplicated in the main area (step S148). ), The bonus ratio calculation process is executed, and the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are calculated from the data in the main area (step S156). Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in the backup area 1 is abnormal, and the accessory ratio is calculated from the data in the backup area 2. Try. Specifically, a check code is calculated from the backup area 2 of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S150), and the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined whether or not (step S152). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, and the data in the backup area 2 is duplicated in the main area (step S154). ), The accessory ratio calculation process is executed, the data in the main area is read out, and the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated (step S156). Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

If there is another backup area, it is similarly determined whether the data in the backup area is normal, and the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated from the data in the normal backup area.

If the data in the main area and all the backup areas is abnormal, the work area for calculating the accessory ratio (area 13128 for calculating the accessory ratio) is initialized and the abnormality is notified (step S158).

Subsequently, a check code is calculated from the main area (step S160), and the calculated check code is stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S162). The check code is calculated in the accessory ratio calculation / display process in the RAM 1312 in the initialization process because the power failure flag and checksum are not calculated when the main board side power is turned off in the middle of the process. The backed up data is initialized, but if the check code is periodically calculated and stored in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, even if the power of the pachinko machine is turned on again, the accessory ratio calculation work area This is because the data in (the accessory ratio calculation area 13128) can be left without being erased.

Subsequently, 1 is added to the backup area distribution counter value to update (step S164), and it is determined whether the backup area distribution counter value is odd (step S166). If the backup area distribution counter value is odd, the data in the main area is duplicated in the backup area 1 (step S168). On the other hand, if the backup area distribution counter value is an even number, the data in the main area is duplicated in the backup area 2 (step S170). By allocating the copy destination of the data in the main area by the backup area distribution counter value and writing the data to only a part of the backup areas, it is possible to prevent an abnormal value from being written to a plurality of backup areas.

When 3 or more backup areas are provided, the backup area for writing data may be distributed by the remainder obtained by dividing the backup area distribution counter value by the number of backup areas.

Subsequently, the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 (step S172). Specifically, using the calculated type of accessory ratio and the calculated value, the data to be displayed in each digit of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is acquired by referring to the conversion table (not shown). The acquired data is sent to the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. For example, if the type of the bonus ratio is the bonus ratio (cumulative), A7 is displayed in the first two digits, and if the calculated bonus ratio is 66%, 66 is displayed in the last two digits.

The bonus ratio calculation process (step S156) of the bonus ratio calculation / display process reads the data of the number of acquired balls from the bonus ratio calculation area 13128 (that is, the bonus ratio calculation work area shown in FIG. 27). , Data cannot be written in the storage area related to the number of acquired balls in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. That is, as will be described later, when the processes of steps S156 and S172 are configured by the common program module, the common program module does not have the authority to write data to the storage area related to the number of acquired balls in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. Data can be written in the storage area of the calculated bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio.

As explained above, since the data for calculating the accessory ratio is duplicated in the backup area in the accessory ratio calculation / display processing, when the normal power off processing is not executed due to an abnormal reset or the like. , The data for calculating the accessory ratio can be protected.

Since the processes of steps S156 and S172 are common regardless of the type of gaming machine, it is preferable to configure one or a plurality of common program modules. In this case, the process of determining whether the check code of the main area and the check code of the backup area are correct may be configured on the non-common side separately from the common program module. This is because the data check and backup methods differ depending on the model. However, if the data check and backup methods are standardized among the models, they may be placed in the common program module.

[6. Storage area configuration]
Subsequently, the arrangement of the program and the data stored in the ROM 1313 will be described. FIG. 26A is a diagram showing an example of arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in ROM 1313 and RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310.

The ROM 1313 contains the game control code 13131, the game control data 13132, the debug (inspection function) code 13133, the debug (inspection function) data 13134, the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135, and the accessory ratio calculation / display. An area for storing the data 13136 is included. The ROM 1313 of the present embodiment includes a game control area (first storage area) for storing programs and data related to the pachinko machine 1 such as the game control code 13131 and the game control data 13132, and a debug (inspection function) code 13133. And debug (inspection function) area (second storage area) for storing programs and data used for the purpose of outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) of pachinko machine 1 such as debug (inspection function) data 13134. And, the bonus ratio calculation area (third storage area) that stores programs used for the purpose of calculating the bonus ratio, such as the bonus ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the bonus ratio calculation / display data 13136. Is assigned.

When a free area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more is provided between the final address of the game control data 13132 and the start address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and displayed in the dump list format. The game control area and the debug (inspection function) area can be easily distinguished. Similarly, a free area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more is provided between the final address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the start address of the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135. When displayed in the dump list format, the debug (inspection function) area and the accessory ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished. The value stored in the free area may be a fixed value which is the same value, and may be set to a value different from the value set in the game area and the debug area or a value having a low frequency. Further, the value stored in the free area may be an instruction such as a No Operation code in which the CPU does nothing. In this way, when displayed in the dump list format, the game control area, the debug (inspection function) area, and the accessory ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished.

Further, even if the debug (inspection function) area and the accessory ratio calculation area are not separated and the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 are stored in a part of the debug area. Good. That is, the game control area and other areas need only be clearly distinguished. By clearly distinguishing the game control area from other areas in this way, the accessory ratio calculation area (the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the accessory), which is a process that is not directly related to the control of the progress of the game. The ratio calculation / display data 13136) is arranged separately from the game control area to avoid the risk that a defect (bug or the like) of the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 affects the game control.

The debug (inspection function) area stores target programs and data that are not directly related to the game. For example, various functions used only when debugging the pachinko machine 1 other than the game control of the pachinko machine 1. The code 13133 for outputting the inspection signal is stored. These debug (inspection function) code 13133 are programs for outputting debug (inspection function) signals. In addition, a program for calculating the bonus ratio, which is not directly related to the progress of the game, is stored in the bonus ratio calculation area.

Further, the game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311. Further, the game control code 13131 can be appropriately read and written to the RAM 1312, but the game control area 13126 used in the game control code 13131 can only be read from the debug (inspection function) code. It is configured to be executable and is configured so that writing to the area cannot be executed. As described above, the game control area 13126 constitutes a game area that can be accessed only from the game control code 13131. The process based on the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be unilaterally called and executed while the game control code 13131 is being executed, but the game control code 13131 can be executed from the debug (inspection function) code. Is configured so that it cannot be called and executed. As a result, the independence of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be enhanced, so that even if the game control code 13131 is changed, the change of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be minimized. ..

Further, the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 23), and is executed by the main control MPU 1311. The bonus ratio calculated by the bonus ratio calculation / display code 13135 is stored in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312. As shown in the figure, the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area). In this way, by designing the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a different area, the inspection and game control code 13131 of the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 is stored. The inspection of the pachinko machine 1 can be performed separately, and the labor of the inspection of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. Further, the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 can be commonly used by a plurality of models regardless of the model.

FIG. 26B is a diagram showing details of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. The accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be provided with a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which a copy of the data stored in the main area is stored, in addition to the main area in which the calculation result of the accessory ratio is stored. .. The backup area may be one or more. A check code is added to each area to detect data errors. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, is set every time the data in the main area is updated in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, or is the process when the power is turned off on the main control side (Fig. It may be set in steps S50 to S54) of 22. In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or the data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the main control side power cutoff process (step S50 in FIG. 20). You may set it. The check code may also be used as a power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set in the check code of the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. Further, if a predetermined value is set in the power failure flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

When it is determined that the main area is abnormal, it may be determined whether the backup area is normal, and the data of the backup area determined to be normal may be duplicated in the main area (step of FIG. 21). S24). Further, in the process of power off on the main control side, the value of the main area may be duplicated in each backup area (step S54 in FIG. 22). Further, in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, each time the value in the main area is updated, the updated data may be duplicated in the backup area (steps S168 and S170 in FIG. 25).

An unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be separated, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digit of the address.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. The data of the number of acquired balls in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is written in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) timed by the main control MPU 1311, and the accessory ratio calculation process of the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step in FIG. 24). It is read in S156). In this way, the bonus ratio calculation / display process reads the acquired ball number data from the bonus ratio calculation area 13128, and the timer interrupt process (game control program) reads the acquired ball number data in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128. By writing, the game control program and the program that executes the character ratio calculation / display processing can be completely separated, and the program for the character ratio calculation / display processing can be standardized even for game machines with different specifications. ..

In the bonus ratio calculation process (step S156 in FIG. 24) of the bonus ratio calculation / display process, the calculated bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are converted into the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128. Write to the ratio storage area. The calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio data are read out in the accessory ratio display process (step S170 in FIG. 25) of the accessory ratio calculation / display process when displaying the accessory ratio. The game control program does not access the storage area of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio of the bonus ratio calculation area 13128.

FIG. 27 (A) shows the structure of the work area in the simplest way. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27 (A), the number of winning balls, the number of continuous winning balls, the total number of winning balls, the winning ratio, and the continuous winning ratio are stored. The number of winning balls is the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in a moving accessory (for example, the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 when the opening is open, and the second starting opening 2004 when the second starting opening door member 2549 is open). is there. The number of consecutive winning balls is the number of winning balls by winning a winning character while the character is continuously operating (for example, the winning opening is open during the big hit consecutive chan). The total number of balls won is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player. The bonus ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of winning balls by the total number of winning balls. The continuous bonus ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of consecutive winning balls by the total number of winning balls. The number of winning balls, the number of consecutive winning balls, and the total number of winning balls are updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt processing, and the bonus ratio and the continuous winning ball ratio are calculated in step S91 of the timer interrupt processing. Stored.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27 (A), the number of winning balls, the number of continuous winning balls, and the total number of winning balls correspond to the total cumulative total of FIG. 27 (B), which will be described later, and are 3 or each. It is a 4-byte storage area and can store numbers up to 16777215 or 42949672795 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. Further, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are storage areas of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal numbers.

FIG. 27B shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27 (B), the number of winning balls, the number of other winning balls, the number of continuous winning balls, the total number of winning balls, the winning ratio, and the continuous winning ratio are stored. Further, the storage area of each data is composed of a ring buffer having n storage areas for every predetermined number of prize balls (for example, n = 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls), and the total acquisition balls. When the number reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointer of all the data moves, and the storage area where the data is updated changes. Then, after the data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when the data other than the total number of acquired balls (the number of acquired balls for the character, the number of launched balls, the number of winning balls, the number of special symbol variation display games, the number of jackpots of the special symbol variation display game, etc.) becomes a predetermined number, You may move the write pointer.

The write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointers of all the data strings move for each predetermined number of prize balls. In addition, as the write pointer moves, the read pointer also moves. The read pointer points to the storage area immediately before the write pointer. This is to calculate the accessory ratio using the latest data for 6000 prize balls.

The cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Yes, when the ring buffer goes around and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the total cumulative value of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio calculated from the cumulative value is the value calculated from the total cumulative value of each data. Therefore, even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data after the ring buffer makes a round, the total cumulative value including the data of the cleared area is calculated.

Among the structures of the work areas shown in FIG. 27 (B), the number of winning balls, the number of continuous winning balls, the winning ratio, and the continuous winning ratio are the same as those described in FIG. 27 (A). The number of other winning balls is the number of winning balls by winning a prize in a prize opening other than the accessory (a winning opening that does not open and close, for example, a general winning opening 2001). The total number of acquired balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player, and when this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves. Regarding the number of winning balls, the number of other winning balls, the number of continuous winning balls, and the total number of winning balls, the data in the storage area where the write pointer is located is updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt process, and the bonus ratio and the continuous winning combination The object ratio is calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 27C shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. With the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27 (C), more detailed data than that shown in FIG. 27 (B) can be acquired, and the number of normal electric accessory acquisition balls, the number of special electric accessory acquisition balls, and the number of starting port acquisition balls can be acquired. , Others The number of winning openings, the number of consecutive winning balls, the total number of winning balls, the winning ratio, and the continuous winning ratio are stored. Further, the storage area of each data is composed of a ring buffer having n storage areas for every predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls), and the total number of acquired balls is When the number reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointer moves and the storage area where the data is updated changes. Then, after the data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when the data other than the total number of acquired balls (the number of acquired balls of special electric accessory, the number of launched balls, the number of winning balls, the number of special symbol fluctuation display games, the number of jackpots of special symbol fluctuation display games, etc.) becomes a predetermined number. You may move the write pointer to.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Yes, when the ring buffer goes around and is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the cumulative value of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data, and the ring buffer goes around. Even if the data is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer to write new data, the total cumulative value including the data in the cleared area is calculated.

Among the structures of the work areas shown in FIGS. 27 (B) and 27 (C), the number of winning balls in the ring buffer, the number of other winning balls, the number of continuous winning balls, the total number of winning balls, and the normal electric bonus winning balls. The number, the number of balls acquired by the special electric accessory, the number of balls acquired by the starting port, and the number of balls acquired by the other winning openings are each in a 2-byte storage area, and a numerical value up to 65535 can be stored in decimal. Number of winning balls, other winning balls, continuous winning balls, total winning balls, normal electric bonus winning balls, special electric bonus winning balls, starting opening winning balls and other winning opening winning balls The cumulative number is a storage area of 3 bytes each, and can store numbers up to 16777215 in decimal. Since the cumulative total is the total of the data for 6000 prize balls x n (60,000 prize balls when n = 10), a large storage area is prepared. Number of winning balls, other winning balls, continuous winning balls, total winning balls, bonus ratio, continuous bonus ratio, normal electric bonus winning balls, special electric bonus winning balls, starting port The total number of acquired balls and the total number of other winning openings won is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 42949672795 in decimal. Since the total cumulative total is not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. Further, the cumulative total of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is a 1-byte storage area, and up to 255 decimal numbers can be stored.

Among the structures of the work areas shown in FIG. 27 (C), the total number of acquired balls, the bonus ratio, and the continuous bonus ratio are the same as those described in FIG. 27 (B). The number of other winning balls is the number of winning balls by winning a prize other than the accessory (the winning opening that does not open and close). The number of balls acquired by the ordinary electric accessory is the prize ball acquired by winning a prize in the ordinary electric accessory (the second starting port 2004 in which the second starting door member 2549 is open) that is operating according to the result of the lottery by the ordinary symbol. It is a number. The number of balls acquired for the special electric accessory is the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in the special electric accessory (for example, the opening large winning openings 2005, 2006) that is operating according to the result of the lottery by the special symbol. The number of balls acquired at the starting port is the number of winning balls acquired by winning a prize at the starting port (first starting port 2002). The number of balls won by other winning openings is the number of winning balls acquired by winning a prize in the winning opening (general winning opening 2001), which is not a character (does not operate) and does not trigger a lottery of special symbols. The number of normal electric accessory acquisition balls, the number of special electric accessory acquisition balls, the number of starting port acquisition balls, the number of other winning opening acquisition balls, the number of continuous accessory acquisition balls, and the total number of acquisition balls are determined in step S81 of the timer interrupt process. The data in the storage area where the write pointer is located is updated, and the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt process.

In the data structure shown in FIG. 27 (A), when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is deleted in step S116 of the initialization process. The data is not erased at the opportunity of. Therefore, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, January, etc.). Similarly, the total cumulative total of FIGS. 25 (B) and 25 (C) may be deleted at predetermined intervals.

In addition, the data of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 and the calculated accessory ratio are abnormal values (for example, the accessory ratio exceeds 100%, and the calculation result of the accessory ratio has changed significantly from the previous calculated value. , The number of acquired balls for the accessory> the total number of acquired balls, etc.), the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all the data of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted. Further, when the data of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 or the calculated accessory ratio is an abnormal value, it may be notified that the accessory ratio is abnormal. Further, the data in the backup area may be inspected using the check code, the data in the normal backup area may be duplicated in the main area, and then the accessory ratio may be calculated again.

[7. Composition of accessory ratio display]
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the configuration of the accessory ratio indicator 1317.

The accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of a driver circuit 13171 and a plurality of 7-segment LEDs 13172. For example, the 7-segment LED 13172 is composed of 4 digits.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be housed together in one package, but both may be housed in different packages.

The driver circuit 13171 and the main control MPU 1311 are connected by three signal lines (DATA, LOAD, CLOCK).

The DATA line transfers data to be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 and a signal for setting the operating state of the accessory ratio indicator 1317, and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The LOAD line transfers a signal indicating the data acquisition timing and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The CLOCK line transfers a clock signal that defines the operation cycle of the driver circuit 13171 and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 are connected by four digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 and eight segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp. The segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp transmit signals for lighting each LED element (7-segment and decimal point) of the 7-segment LED 13172. The digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 transmit a control signal indicating which digit of the 7-segment LED13172 the signal transmitted by the segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp is. The direction of the signal (current) shown differs depending on whether the 7-segment LED 13172 is an anode common type or a cathode common type, but an example of the anode common type is shown.

A resistor 13174 that determines the current value to be passed through each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172 is connected to the R-EXT terminal of the driver circuit 13171. By changing the resistance value of the resistor 13174, the emission brightness of each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172 can be changed.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a configuration of a driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317.

The driver circuit 13171 includes a 16-bit shift register 3171, a 16-bit data latch 3172, an 8-bit data latch 3173A to D, an 8 × 4 data selector 3174, a decoder 3175, a 2 × 8 data selector 3176, a constant current driver 3178, and a driver 3179. It has a latch selector load pulse distributor 3180, a Digit-Limit control unit 3181, a duty ratio control unit 3182, a data selector control unit 3183, a standby mode control unit 3184, and an oscillator 3185.

The 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in the serial data input to the DATA IN terminal, holds the data for 16 bits, and sends the data as parallel data to the 16-bit data latch 3172. The 4 bits of D15 (MSB) to D12 are data for selecting the operation mode of the driver circuit 13171 (see FIG. 35), and the 4 bits of D11 to D8 are data for selecting the register corresponding to the operation mode. (See FIG. 33), and D7 to D0 (LSB) are the detailed setting data.

The 16-bit data latch 3172 latches data at the timing of the LOAD signal, and controls D15 to D8 in each control unit (latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control unit 3181, duty ratio control unit 3182, data selector control). It sends to unit 3183, standby mode control unit 3184), and sends D7 to D0 to 8-bit data latches 3173A to D.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, the 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in the serial data input to the DATA IN terminal at the rising timing of the CLOCK signal and shifts the data. The 16-bit data latch 3172 acquires 16-bit data as parallel data from the 16-bit shift register 3171 at the rising timing of the LOAD signal, and latches the data. Then, D15 to D8 are sent to each control unit (latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control unit 3181, duty ratio control unit 3182, data selector control unit 3183, standby mode control unit 3184). Further, the 16-bit data latch 3172 sends D7 to D0 of the latched data to the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D at the falling timing of the LOAD signal.

The LOAD signal is also input to the latch selector load pulse distributor 3180. The latch selector load pulse distributor 3180 acquires D15 to D8 and selects an 8-bit data latch 3173 for storing display data (8 bits of D7 to D0). Specifically, as shown in the load register selection table (see FIG. 33), if D15 to D8 are 00100010B, the latch selector load pulse distributor 3180 has data register 0, that is, 8-bit of Digit-A. It sends a signal to select the 8-bit data latch 3173 so that the data latch 3173A stores the data.

The 8-bit data latch 3173 is provided as many as the number of 7-segment LEDs 13172 (the number of display digits), and according to the selection signal from the latch selector load pulse distributor 3180, the data to be displayed on each 7-segment LED is captured. Hold. The 8-bit data latch 3173 sends the held data to the 8 × 4 data selector 3174.

The 8x4 data selector 3174 selects the data sent from each of the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D at a predetermined display timing of each digit, and sends the data to the decoder 3175 and the 2x8 data selector 3176.

The decoder 3175 uses the character generator decoding table (see FIG. 34) to convert the input data into characters to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172, and generates data for lighting each segment. The generated data is input to the 2 × 8 data selector 3176.

The 2x8 data selector 3176 refers to the decoding settings and selects data from the decoder 3175 if it is set to a mode that uses a decoder, and 8x if it is set to a mode that does not use a decoder. 4 Select the data from the data selector 3174. The selected data is input to the constant current driver 3178.

The constant current driver 3178 uses the data from the 2 × 8 data selector 3176 to output current signals for lighting each segment from the data output terminals OUTa to OUTDp. As described above, the current output from the constant current driver 3178 is controlled by the resistance value of the resistor connected to the R-EXT terminal.

The driver 3179 receives a sink current of the current output from the constant current driver 3178 to light each segment of the 7-segment LED 13172. The driver 3179 controls the current suction timing of the terminals DIG-0 to DIG-3 to determine which 7-segment LED (digit) is to be displayed.

The Digit-Limit control unit 3181 controls the number of display digits of the 7-segment LED 13172 controlled by the driver circuit 13171. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the number of lit digits from 1 to 4 by setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are set to 00100001B and D7 to D0 are set to XXX0011B, all four digits are used in the digit register (DIGITREGISTER) of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181. Is written. Note that x indicates that either H or L data may be used, and whether the input data is H or L does not affect the truth table.

The duty ratio control unit 3182 controls the duty ratio when lighting the 7-segment LED 13172. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the duty ratio by setting from the outside, and controls the brightness at which the 7-segment LED 13172 lights up. The duty ratio control unit 3182 controls the duty ratio by controlling the pulse width of at least one of the timing signals sent to the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179. Specifically, D15 to D8 are set to 00100000B, and by inputting arbitrary data to D3 to D0, the duty register (DUTY REGISTER) of the duty ratio control unit 3182 has 16 steps of duty of 0/16 to 15/16. The ratio setting is written.

The data selector control unit 3183 controls the decoder settings. That is, the driver circuit 13171 controls whether or not to use the decoder 3175 by setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are set to 00100001B and D7 to D0 are set to 0001 ×××× B, the setting for using the decoder is written in the decode register, and D7 to D0 are set to 0000 ××. By inputting the data set to XXB, the setting of NO DECODER that does not use the decoder is written. The data selector control unit 3183 controls the 2 × 8 data selector 3176 to select data from the decoder 3175 when the decoder is set to be used, and 2 when the decoder is not used. The × 8 data selector 3176 controls to select data from the 8 × 4 data selector 3174.

The standby mode control unit 3184 controls the standby mode setting and the data clear setting. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can shift to the standby mode by setting from the outside. Specifically, the standby mode can be set by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0000B. In the standby mode, the setting at that time is maintained as it is, the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172 is cut off, and the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171 is suppressed.

Further, the driver circuit 13171 can clear all the data held inside by setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0001B, all the data held in the registers and latches are cleared and initialized.

Oscillator 3185 produces the clock used in driver circuit 13171.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a mounting example of the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration on the main control board 1310 is shown by a dotted line.

FIG. 31 (A) shows the main control board box 1320 of the mounting example 1. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that houses the main control board 1310 so that it can be sealed with a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed, and the model number of the main control board 1310 is displayed on the surface thereof. (Seal sticking, engraving, printing, etc.) and opening sticker are stuck. The opening seal is a seal that records the history of opening the seal of the main control board 1310.

The mounting example 1 shown in FIG. 31 (B) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in (A). In mounting example 1, the main control MPU 1311 is mounted on the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1311 may be mounted so that the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are the same.

The main control board 1310 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320 to form the main control unit 1300. The main control MPU 1311 is arranged at a position where it can be confirmed from the outside that no improper modification has been made. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is arranged so that it can be easily confirmed from the outside that no improper modification has been made by not arranging the parts around the main control MPU 1311.

The accessory ratio indicator 1317 is arranged on the main control board 1310 at a position that can be visually recognized from the outside. The direction of the numbers displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 may be the same as the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the model number display of 1320 on the main control board box. Further, it is preferable that the components are mounted so that the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio indicator 1317, the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310, and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are the same. When the main control board 1310 is mounted on the gaming machine in a horizontally long direction, the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 are in the same direction. It is preferable to mount the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 so as to be. When the main control board 1310 is mounted on the gaming machine in a vertically long direction, the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio indicator 1317, the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311, and the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 are 90 degrees. It is advisable to mount the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 so as to face each other.

Further, the connectors CN1 and CN2 for drawing out the signal line from the main control board 1310 are end portions (upper length in the figure) along the long side of the main control board 1310 in the direction of being aligned with the accessory ratio display 1317. It is the upper end along the side, but it may be mounted at the lower end along the lower long side or the end along the left and right sides). That is, it is desirable that the connectors CN1 and CN2 are arranged at positions where the wiring (harness) connected to the connectors CN1 and CN2 overlaps with the accessory ratio indicator 1317 and does not interfere with the visibility of the accessory ratio indicator 1317. ..

Further, the model number display of the main control board box 1320 and the opening sticker attached to the main control board box 1320 are attached at positions that do not overlap with either the main control MPU or the accessory ratio indicator 1317.

By mounting the accessory ratio indicator 1317 in this way, the model number display of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 is displayed in the correct orientation, improving their visibility and improving the visibility in the manufacturing process and the amusement park. Even in the inspection after installation, it is possible to confirm the ratio of accessories and the presence or absence of modification of the main control MPU 1311 without taking an unreasonable posture.

In another mounting example shown in FIG. 31 (C), the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the numerical display of the accessory ratio display 1317 are mounted so as to be in the same direction, but circuits other than the main control MPU 1311 are used. The direction of the model number display of the module (for example, IC) is different from the direction of the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the direction of the number display of the accessory ratio display 1317. Further, the circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged at a position overlapping with the model number display of the main control board box 1320 and the opening seal attached to the main control board box 1320. This is because the circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 are less important when inspecting for unauthorized modification, and therefore it is of little significance to make the orientations arranged on the main control board 1310 the same.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio indicator 1317.

As shown in FIG. 32 (A), the signal line 13173 between the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may become unstable due to the influence of noise. Therefore, it is desirable that the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 are arranged as close to each other as possible.

For example, as shown in the figure, the distance between the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 (the length L2 of the wiring 13173) is the distance between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 (the length of the wiring 13101). Arrange so that it is shorter than L1). That is, L1 is larger than L2.

Further, as described above, as shown by the dotted line, no parts are arranged around the main control MPU 1311 in order to easily confirm from the outside that no improper modification has been made. Therefore, the wiring length L1 becomes a certain length, but L2 is made as short as possible.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be housed in one package or another package, and in either case, L1 is mounted so as to be larger than L2.

FIG. 32 (B) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio display 1317 in another mounting example, and FIG. 32 (C) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio indicator 1317, and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the printed circuit board.

As shown in FIG. 32 (B), ground patterns 13102 are provided on both sides of the signal line 13101 between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio indicator 1317. Further, in the printed circuit board, a prohibited area 13106 in which no signal pattern is provided is provided on the back surface and the inner layer of the signal line 13101. A ground pattern 13107 or a power supply pattern as a guard pattern may be provided on at least one of the back surface and the inner layer of the printed circuit board in the prohibited area 13106.

Explaining the arrangement of other signal lines in this implementation example, for example, the signal line 13103 that supplies the clock signal from the oscillator to the main control MPU 1311 avoids the prohibited area 13106 (that is, the signal line 13103 and the signal line 13101 are arranged. Arranged (so that they do not intersect). Further, the signal line 13104 connected to the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged so as to pass through the back surface or the inner layer through the through hole 13105. Also in this case, the signal line 13104 is arranged so as to avoid the prohibited area 13106 (that is, the signal line 13104 and the signal line 13101 do not intersect).

From the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification, the main control board 1310 is generally composed of a two-layer board having a pattern on the front surface and the back surface and having no inner layer. It can also be applied to a multilayer substrate having an inner layer (4 layers, 6 layers, etc.).

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a load register selection table of the driver circuit 13171.

The load register selection table is a table for determining a register for storing data input to the driver circuit 13171.

The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has seven registers. The duty register is used by the duty ratio control unit 3182, and the duty ratio for lighting the 7-segment LED 13172 is set. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100000B, the data set in D7 to D0 is the data for setting the duty ratio and is written in the duty register of the duty ratio control unit 3182.

The decode register is used by the data selector control unit 3183 or the Digit-Limit control unit 3181, and the use of the decoder 3175, that is, the presence / absence of decoding and the number of display digits are set. The decode register and the digit number register may be configured as one register. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100001B, the data set in D7 to D0 is data for setting the presence or absence of decoding or data for setting the number of display digits, and is decoded by the data selector control unit 3183. It is written to the register or the digit register of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181.

The data register is used by the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D, and the data to be displayed in each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 is set. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100010B to 00100101B, the data set in D7 to D0 is the data for lighting the 7-segment LED, and is written to the data register in the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D.

The duty ratio, the presence / absence of decoding, and the number of display digits set in the registers described above do not need to be set each time the accessory ratio is displayed, and may be set once. Therefore, the initial setting is performed in step S28 of FIG. Is set as. If the initial setting is set only once, the setting may be changed due to the influence of noise or the like after the initial setting. Therefore, a switching button is pressed every time a predetermined condition (for example, opening of the main body frame 4 is detected). It may be reset every time (is pressed). As a result, even if the setting is switched due to noise, the correct display can always be performed.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a character generator decoding table. The character generator decode table is used by the decoder 3175 to convert the input data into character data to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172. By using the character generator decoding table, characters such as numbers and some alphabets can be displayed without considering the font. Further, when displaying numbers, since D5 to D0 match the displayed numbers, the calculation result can be input to the driver circuit 13171 and displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172 without conversion.

The lighting of the decimal point of each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 is controlled by D6.

FIG. 35 is a state transition diagram of the driver circuit 13171, and FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a display example of the accessory ratio indicator 1317.

The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has five states, that is, an initial state, a data input state, an LED lighting state (0000), an LED lighting state (lighting according to input data), and an LED lighting state (all lighting). Is being prepared.

In order to control these five states, there are blank, normal operation, register write, full lighting, and standby mode setting instructions. The blank instruction cuts off the output of the constant current driver 3178 and the output of the driver 3179. The normal operation command displays the 7-segment LED 13172 after the completion of each setting. If a normal operation command is input without setting the display data, the 7-segment LED13172 displays the number 0 in all digits. The register write instruction sets the number of digits used, sets the duty ratio, sets whether the decoder is used or not, and inputs display data. Select the register to write data in D11 to D8, and input the contents to be set in the register in D7 to D0 (see FIG. 33). The all lighting command turns on the output of the constant current driver 3178 on the data side and lights all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172. The standby instruction is divided into two according to the parameters, and there are a standby instruction that transitions to the standby state and a clear instruction that transitions to the initial state. The standby instruction maintains the setting at that time, stops the operation of the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179, cuts off the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172, and suppresses the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171. In addition, the clear instruction clears and initializes all the data held in the register or latch, and the display is also turned off.

Since the blank instruction is also a kind of display instruction, in the present specification, the "display" includes any of the states of the 7-segment LED being fully lit, some segments being lit, and all being extinguished.

A display example in each of the above-described states will be described with reference to FIG. 36.

When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the initial setting of the driver circuit 13171 is not completed or the display data is not set, so that the initial state (ALL BLANK) is set. As shown in FIG. 36 (A), the 7-segment LED 13172 All segments of are turned off and are not lit. Further, since the accessory ratio display 1317 cannot be visually recognized when the main body frame 4 is closed and the game is possible, it is preferable to set the standby mode and turn off the 7-segment LED 13172 to reduce the power consumption of the game machine.

Then, after the control data is set in the various control registers in the driver circuit 13171 and the initial setting is completed, the display data is input, and the 7-segment LED 13172 displays a predetermined display. As shown in FIG. 36B, this predetermined display may display “−” in all digits or light all segments. It is preferable that the normal operation of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 can be confirmed by this predetermined display.

Further, when the main body frame 4 is opened, it is advisable to display a predetermined value on all the digits so that it can be confirmed that the accessory ratio display 1317 is operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36 (B), "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be lit.

Then, when the display switch 1318 is operated and the display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the LED is lit (lights according to the input data). Specifically, the accessory ratio is displayed, the code indicating the display content is displayed in the left two digits of the 7-segment LED13172, and the numerical value of the accessory ratio is displayed in the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 36 (C), "y175" is displayed, indicating that the accessory ratio 1 is 75%. If the displayed accessory ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range, it is preferable to display it so that it can be identified. For example, all digits (or numbers) are blinked and displayed, and the decimal point is lit or blinked.

Further, when the display switch 1318 is operated and the display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the display content of the 7-segment LED 13172 is changed. That is, another kind of accessory ratio is displayed. Also in this case, the code indicating the display content is displayed in the left two digits, and the numerical value of the accessory ratio is displayed in the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 36 (D), "y263" is displayed, indicating that the accessory ratio 2 is 63%. In this case as well, it is preferable to display so as to be able to identify that the displayed accessory ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range, as described above. A more specific display example of the accessory ratio will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

Then, when the main body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display for confirming the normal operation of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is performed (FIG. 36 (E)), and after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned on. It is recommended to turn off the lights to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. This bonus ratio non-display state is the same mode as after the initial setting is completed, but may be a different mode, as long as it is distinguishable from the bonus ratio display.

FIG. 36 (E) is a display example in which the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 have an abnormality and the accessory ratio cannot be displayed. The decimal point may be lit or blinking, or may be displayed differently for each digit. Further, the abnormal display may be in a mode different from that shown in the drawing, and may be in a mode that can be distinguished from the normal accessory ratio display in order to indicate that the accessory ratio display cannot be performed.

Further, when the all lighting command is input in any of the states, all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are lit. Further, when a blank instruction or a standby instruction is input in any of the states, all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are turned off while retaining the data. Further, when a data clear command is input in any of the states, all the data held in the register or the latch is cleared, all the segments of the 7-segment LED13172 are turned on, and the initial state is returned.

[8. Display of character ratio]
Next, a method of calculating and displaying the accessory ratio will be described.

As described above, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio indicator 1317 provided on the main control board 1310. As described above, the accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED and an effect display device, displays the value of the accessory ratio in the last 2 digits, and the type of the numerical value in the first 2 digits. Is displayed.

Further, the accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured by a 2-digit 7-segment LED. In this case, the numerical value of the accessory ratio and the type of the numerical value may be displayed alternately.

The display mode of the numerical value of the accessory ratio may be displayed in a different display mode depending on the comparison result between the accessory ratio and the predetermined reference value. For example, when the accessory ratio exceeds a predetermined reference value, the numerical value is blinked or the color is changed (normally green, when the reference is exceeded, red, etc.) is displayed. By changing the display mode according to the comparison result with the reference value, it is possible to easily recognize that the accessory ratio is abnormal.

The accessory ratio indicator 1317 may be composed of one or a plurality of LED lamps. When the accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of one LED lamp, the comparison result between the accessory ratio and the predetermined reference value is displayed in different modes. For example, if the accessory ratio is smaller than the reference value, it is displayed in green, and if the accessory ratio is larger than the reference value, it is displayed in red. If the accessory ratio is smaller than the reference value, it lights up, and if the accessory ratio is larger than the reference threshold, it blinks.

When the accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of a plurality of (for example, 10) LED lamps, the accessory ratio is displayed with one LED lamp as 10%. For example, if the accessory ratio is 70% or more and less than 80%, seven LEDs are turned on. In this case, different display modes (display colors) may be displayed depending on the display content (proporty ratio or continuous bonus ratio, latest data display or medium-term data display, etc.).

In addition, if the total number of acquired balls is less than 6000, the collection period of the prize ball data is short and the value of the accessory ratio may not have converged, so the display is displayed in a different display mode (display color, blinking, etc.). You may. It is desirable that the display mode when the total number of acquired balls is less than the threshold value is different from the display mode when the total number of acquired balls exceeds the above-mentioned reference value.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may switch between the latest data display, the medium-term data display, and the long-term data display. The latest data display is the accessory ratio calculated by using the previous counter value currently being written in the ring counter shown in FIGS. 27 (B) and 27 (C). The medium-term data display is the accessory ratio calculated using the cumulative total in the ring counters shown in FIGS. 27 (B) and 27 (C). The long-term data display is the accessory ratio calculated using the total cumulative total in the ring counter shown in FIGS. 27 (B) and 27 (C).

The accessory ratio display 1317 may also be used by the function display unit 1400. The function display unit 1400 normally displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 has been released. The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the accessory ratio. The display of the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the main body frame 4, but it is preferable that the progress of the game continues. By continuing the progress of the game, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the display of the accessory ratio can be quickly switched to the display of the game state. For example, if the main body frame 4 is opened during the special symbol fluctuation display game, the accessory ratio is displayed, but if the main body frame 4 is closed before the fluctuation time elapses, the fluctuation display for the remaining time can be performed. it can. Since the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbol is stopped at the timing when the special symbol variation display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped. Therefore, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the accessory ratio, it can be configured so as not to give a sense of discomfort to the player.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may display a value other than the accessory ratio. For example, the number of prizes won or the number of prize balls paid out for each type of prize opening per unit time may be displayed. The unit time may be switched and displayed by operating the display switch 1318, such as 1 minute, 10 minutes, 1 hour, and 10 hours.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may display the base. The base is the normal ball output rate excluding the special prize (during the big hit), and can be calculated by dividing the number of safe balls by the number of out balls. The number of launch balls (number of out balls) is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020. As described above, the launch ball sensor 1020 is provided near the exits (backflow prevention member 1007) of the rails 1001 and 1002 that guide the game ball from the ball launcher to the game area 5a (see FIGS. 10 and 16). Further, the number of out balls may be detected by the discharge ball sensor 3060. As described above, the discharge ball sensor 3060 is provided at the discharge port for discharging the game ball discharged from the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). Further, an out-port passing ball sensor 1021 (see FIG. 53) for detecting a game ball passing through the out-port 1111 provided in the lower part of the game area 5a is provided, and the number of game balls detected by the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 and the number of game balls detected by the out-port passing ball sensor 1021. The number of out balls may be detected by the total of the number of game balls detected by the start opening sensors 2104 and 2551 and the number of game balls detected by the various winning opening sensors 3015, 2114, 2554 and 2557. Further, a launch supply ball sensor (not shown) that detects a game ball supplied to the ball launcher 680, and a game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 but not reaching the game area 5a (so-called foul ball). A foul ball sensor (not shown) is provided to detect, and the number of foul balls is subtracted from the number of game balls supplied to the ball launcher 680 detected by the launch supply ball sensor to obtain the number of out balls (number of launch balls). It may be detected.

The number of out balls may be counted by any of the methods described above. That is, among the illustrated sensors, it is sufficient if either the discharge ball sensor 3060 or the launch ball sensor 1020 is provided.

In addition, the number of safe balls is equal to the number of prize balls paid out. In addition, the base may be defined as the ball output rate for each game state (during normal game, during electric power support, during probability fluctuation, during time reduction), and may be calculated by the number of safe balls divided by the number of out balls for each game state. .. By displaying the base on the accessory ratio display 1317, it is possible to check the deviation of the ball ejection performance from the design value during operation on the spot for each gaming machine. In addition, since the ball ejection performance can be confirmed without using a hall controller, it becomes easy to inspect each gaming machine at the time of on-site inspection of the game hall.

The accessory ratio indicator 1317 provides information on other prizes and prize balls in the base (the number of prizes in the general prize opening 2001 and the number of prize balls due to the prize, the number of prizes in the starting port 2002 and the number of prize balls due to the prize, etc. The number of prizes won in the large prize openings 2005 and 2006, the number of prize balls due to the prizes, etc.) may be displayed.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may always display the accessory ratio, or may display the accessory ratio by operating the display switch 1318. For example, when the display switch 1318, which is a push button switch, is pressed, the display of the accessory ratio is started, the display is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the display is turned off. If the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, even if the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. Good. That is, even if the display switch 1318 is operated unless the main body frame is open, the accessory ratio indicator 1317 does not display the accessory ratio.

Further, the display content may be changed for each operation of the display switch 1318. For example, as shown in FIG. 37, when the display switch 1318 is operated once, A7, which means the prize ratio (cumulative), is displayed in the first two digits, and the prize balls for a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) are displayed. The ratio is displayed in the last two digits. When the display switch 1318 is operated once again, the display of the first two digits switches to A6, which means the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), and the continuous bonus ratio to a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of prize balls is lowered by 2. It may be displayed in digits (FIG. 37 (B)). Furthermore, when the display switch 1318 is operated once, y7, which means the accessory ratio (6000 prize balls), is displayed in the first two digits, and the accessory ratio based on the latest data is displayed in the last two digits (latest data display). (Fig. 37 (C)). When the display switch 1318 is operated once again, the display of the first two digits switches to y6, which means the bonus ratio (cumulative), and the bonus ratio to the predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of prize balls is changed to the last two digits. The display (medium-term data display) may be performed (FIG. 37 (D)).

The display switch 1318 may not be provided as an independent switch, but may also be used as a RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. That is, the switch functions as a RAM clear switch when operated when the power is turned on, and functions as a display switch 1318 when operated during the operation of the pachinko machine 1. By consolidating the functions of the RAM clear switch and the display switch 1318 into one switch, the number of switches operated by the staff in the amusement park becomes one, and erroneous operations by inexperienced staff can be reduced.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to accurately calculate the accessory ratio of the operating gaming machine, and to confirm the gambling of the operating gaming machine.

In addition, the data of the number of prize balls is accumulated as the data for calculating / displaying the prize ball 13136, and when the check code is abnormal, the data for calculating / displaying the prize ratio 13136 is deleted, so that the wrong character ratio is displayed. Can be avoided.

In addition, since the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is deleted under a condition different from the deletion condition of the data related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311, the accurate prize ball number data is retained. , You can calculate the exact prize ratio.

In addition, since the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not accidentally erased by the operation of the staff in the game hall. Since the data for calculating and displaying the object ratio is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the data is not erased by the erroneous operation of the staff of the game hall. Further, since the game hall cannot intentionally delete the data for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio, the reliability of the displayed accessory ratio is improved, and it is possible to prevent the state where the accessory ratio is high from being concealed.

[9. View base]
[9-1. Basic configuration of a gaming machine that displays the base]
Up to this point, an example of a pachinko machine that calculates and displays the accessory ratio has been described. Next, an example of a pachinko machine that calculates and displays a base value will be described. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine that calculates and displays the base value will be described exclusively, but the accessory ratio may be calculated and displayed together with the base value.

In the pachinko machine described below, as described above, when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port (first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004), a lottery is performed by a random number and a special symbol variation display game is executed. .. The fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol fluctuation display game is a fluctuation pattern of a relatively short time (normal fluctuation pattern of about 10 seconds, shortened fluctuation pattern of about 2 to 5 seconds that is easily selected when the number of holds is large). Or, there is a fluctuation pattern for a relatively long time (a fluctuation pattern such as super reach exceeding 1 minute). When calculating the base value with a pachinko machine, the notification of the base value is less urgent than the notification of the error, so that the notification can be made at the timing when the special symbol variation display game is switched to the next variation display game. However, if the variable display time is long, the number of out balls (number of launched balls) and the number of prize balls (paid balls) are met when the predetermined conditions are met without waiting for the end of one special symbol variable display game. If the number) changes), it is better to calculate the base value and update the display. Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the game (for example, even in the special symbol variation display game) (for example, the number of out balls (number of launch balls) or the number of prize balls (number of payout balls)). ) Changes), the base value is calculated and displayed. Next, a specific configuration of a pachinko machine that performs such an operation will be described.

FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing a configuration around the main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 that calculates and displays the base value.

The pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 38 has substantially the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 17, but the configuration represented by reference numeral 1317 is not a bonus ratio indicator but a base indicator. The base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment may use, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED as shown in FIGS. 4 and 28, and may have another number of digits (for example, 2 digits). A 7-segment LED may be used.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment acquires data on the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the area update process (step S81) for calculating the accessory ratio of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) executed by the main control MPU 1311. In the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step S89), the base value is calculated and displayed. In the following description, the “accessory ratio calculation area update process” in step S81 of FIG. 23 is read as the “base calculation area update process”, and the “accessory ratio calculation / display process” in step S89 is “base”. The explanation will be replaced with "calculation / display processing". Further, the "character ratio calculation area 13128" shown in FIG. 26 is read as "base calculation area 13128", and the "character ratio calculation / display code 13135" is read as "base calculation / display code 13135". The description will be described by replacing "data for calculating / displaying the accessory ratio 13136" with "data for calculating / displaying 13136".

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process determines the current game state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and updates the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. To do. In particular, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, the total number of prize balls is calculated using the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) in order to calculate the base value each time for each timer interrupt cycle. Is directly updated (step S814), and the total number of out balls is directly updated using the number of out balls (step S822).

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The fact that the game state is in the special prize means that the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 are open and the player can win many prize balls, but even if the opening and ending times of the big hit game are included. Good. When the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 repeat opening and closing in one big hit, the time between the closing of the big winning opening and the next opening (closing interval) may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810, it means that the condition device is operating, for example, from the determination of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. In addition, it may include all the time during the right-handed instruction.

Further, at the starting ports 2002 and 2004, the time saving, the probability change (ST), and the electric power support may be included in the special prize. Further, in a gaming state other than during time reduction, probabilistic change (ST), and electric power support, from the opening of the starting port 2004 to the predetermined time after closing (for example, the ball winning the starting port is detected as an out ball). The required number of seconds) may be included in the special prize.

The electrically operated accessory provided in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment can be divided into two types from the viewpoint of calculating the base value. As described above, the special prizes related to the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 in the gaming machine of this embodiment are during the operation of the condition device (for example, from the determination of the big hit symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending). Since the base value is calculated by the number of prize balls and out balls other than during the special prize, the normal (so-called big hit) prizes to the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 are not used to calculate the base value. On the other hand, in the starting port 2004 (so-called electric tulip) having an opening / closing member, prize balls and prize balls other than during the special prize (low probability time or non-time saving time) are used for calculating the base value. In other words, some of the electrically operated accessories (large winning openings 2005, 2006) use the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls as the base value regardless of the playing state (whether or not they are in the special prize). Not used, other accessories (starting port 2004) can switch whether to use the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls in the calculation of the base value according to the game state (whether or not the special prize is in progress). It will be. Not using the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls in the calculation of the base value means that the paid out prize balls are not counted in (the number of prize balls other than the special prize which is the division number in the calculation of the base value). Even if a winning signal is input, it also includes not creating edge information for paying out the winning ball by the winning signal.

Further, the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 may be opened (as a so-called small hit) even when the condition device does not operate. Generally, small hits occur during a short time, and since it is open for a short time, it is unlikely that a game ball will win a prize, so it does not affect the calculation of the base value. However, a small hit may be generated except during the special prize (normal time), and the game ball may be opened only during the time when the possibility of winning the prize is high. In this case, the winning balls and the winning balls to the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 in the small hits generated other than during the special prize may be used in the calculation of the base value. In this way, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of occurrence of a small hit other than during the special prize. That is, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly respond to the standard of the base value, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in design.

If the game state is during the special prize, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base calculation area update process is terminated without updating the number of prize balls and the number of out balls. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811). The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation area update process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the sent payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command in which the main control board 1310 transmits the payout command to the payout control board 951 and the receipt confirmation (ACK) is received from the payout control board 951 may be used. Further, the number of prize balls (number of paid prize balls) may be used, in which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and the payout control board 951 reports that the payout is completed. This variation will be described with reference to FIGS. 41-44.

Then, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls to update the total number of prize balls (step S814). It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped. Further, although the game balls have won the starting ports 2002 and 2004, the holding is the upper limit value, and even if the winning to the starting opening is not held, the prize balls are paid out, so that the total number of prize balls is updated. In addition, in a gaming state in which a prize ball is not generated even if a game ball is won in the winning opening (for example, when a specific error occurs), the prize ball due to the winning is not generated and the number of prize balls to be acquired is large. Since it is 0, the total number of prize balls is not updated. The total number of prize balls is recorded in the total number of prize balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out balls is updated so as to add the acquired number of out balls to the total number of out balls (step S822). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020, the discharge ball sensor 3060, and the like, and in the switch input process of step S74, the detection signals of these sensors are read, and if there is a sensor detection signal, the out balls are out. Acquire the number of balls = 1. The total number of out balls is recorded in the total number of out balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time an out ball is detected. In this way, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process, the total number of out balls is updated, and the base value is calculated and displayed by the base calculation display process (FIG. 40), so that the base value is displayed without delay. You can judge whether the base is normal or abnormal without delay.

In addition, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described later, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to notify the prize ball abnormality. May be stopped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation process of the base value in the timer interrupt process, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may execute the calculation process of the base value. In this case, the main control board 1310 may transmit a command for notifying the base to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or the payout control unit 952 may send a command for notifying the peripheral control unit 1511 of the base. May be sent.

Further, even if information on both the winning and the out balls to the winning opening is acquired in one timer interrupt process, the number of prize balls is changed to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the embodiment described later). Add and add the number of out balls to the total number of out balls (or the out ball number buffer in the examples described later). Further, even if information on winning a prize in a plurality of winning openings is acquired in one timer interrupt process, the total number of prize balls due to the plurality of winnings is the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the embodiment described later). ). Therefore, the base value can be calculated and displayed accurately. For example, if a prize is detected in the winning opening sensor of the winning opening with 5 prize balls and the winning opening sensor of the winning opening with 3 winning balls, a total of 8 prize balls are used as the total number of winning balls. (Or, add to the prize ball count buffer).

Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer) only when the launch of the game balls is detected. That is, only the number of prize balls related to the prize detected within a predetermined time from the detection of the launch ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer). Further, the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launcher 680 is detected, and while the launch control unit 953 or the ball launcher 680 is operating (furthermore, the launch control unit 953 or the ball launcher 680 stops operating). Only the number of prize balls related to the winning detected within a predetermined time (for example, after 5 seconds) may be added to the total number of prize balls or the number of prize balls buffer. Further, when the player is operating the firing handle, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer). That is, only the number of prize balls related to the prize detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when it is detected that the palm or finger is touching the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 is the total number of prize balls ( Alternatively, it may be added to the prize ball number buffer). In this way, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being reflected in the base value due to an abnormality or cheating that detects the prize ball when the game ball is not fired, and it is possible to prevent an inaccurate display of the base value. Further, when the contact detection sensor 509 is used, it is not necessary to newly provide a sensor for detecting the launch of the game ball, so that the cost increase of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, the base was calculated by excluding the number of prize balls during the special prize and the number of out balls. , The base value may be calculated by counting the number of out balls by excluding the number of balls that have won the big prize opening.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 40, the base value is calculated every time (every timer interrupt cycle).

First, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of out balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). When the total number of prize balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but the base value does not have to be calculated. Furthermore, when an abnormal base value is calculated (for example, when the total number of prize balls is larger than the total number of outs and a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value), the base value is not calculated. May be good. When the base value is expressed as a percentage, the base value is calculated by multiplying the total number of prize balls ÷ the total number of out balls by 100. Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217.

The predetermined number to be multiplied by the total number of prize balls stored in the division input register A131216 controls the number of digits of the calculated base value. For example, if this predetermined number is 100, the base value is calculated up to the 1st place in 100%, and the minority or less is not calculated. If this predetermined number is 10000, the base value is calculated in parts per hundred to two decimal places. That is, if the quotient output from the arithmetic circuit is divided by 100, the base value of a fraction of two decimal places can be calculated.

Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. During the wait time of 32 clocks from writing data to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to reading data from the division result register A131218, the main control MPU 1311 waits for other processing even if it waits without performing processing. May be done. For example, a random number for determining a jackpot may be updated between writing data to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and reading data from the division result register A131218. More specifically, since the hard random number generated by the random number generation circuit 13112 is updated at the timing of the clock period (or the signal obtained by dividing the clock period) supplied to the main control MPU 1311, the wait time Hard random numbers are also updated.

That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, even while the arithmetic circuit 13121 is executing the base arithmetic processing, other processing related to the game can be executed in parallel. Other processes related to the game include at least a process of updating a random number for determining a win. Further, during the calculation (division) process in the calculation circuit 13121, the random numbers that affect the result of the game are updated one or more times.

Further, when the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 results in an error, so that it is not necessary to store the base value in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. The base notification command may simply notify the base value or notify an abnormality of the base value. The abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a allowable range in a plurality of stages.

There are various methods for base notification, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more may be used. For example, the base display (7-segment LED) 1317, the effect display device 1600, 3114, 244, or the like may be used to notify the base value at all times or at a predetermined timing. By notifying the player of the base value, the player may be able to confirm the condition of the pachinko machine. At that time, the display mode described in the accessory ratio may be applied to the base value. When notifying the base value, the calculated base value is displayed as a percentage notation on the above-mentioned display or display device. The value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded up, or rounded up, and on a display device capable of displaying an image such as the effect display device 1600, 3114, 244, the value is displayed to the first decimal place and displayed in more detail. You may.

When displaying the base value on the base display 1317 composed of the 7-segment LED, the main control MPU 1311 inputs the display data to a predetermined register provided in the driver circuit 13171 of the base display 1317. That is, the main control MPU 1311 generates display data set in the register of the driver circuit 13171 as a base notification command. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the main control MPU 1311 specifies the digits for displaying the numerical values in D15 to D8 in the "data n setting", and the display contents are specified in D7 to D0. Is generated and written to the shift register 3171.

Further, when displaying the base value on the effect display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, a predetermined reference value (for example, 50%) may be provided for the base value, and if the reference value is exceeded, the display mode may be changed. .. For example, the numerical value is blinked or the color is changed (normally green, when the standard is exceeded, red, etc.) is displayed. Further, the display mode of the base value may be changed in a plurality of steps. Specifically, the displayed base values are 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. It may be divided into a plurality of stages and displayed with different emission colors such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage. Also, at each stage, self-deprecating comments may be displayed when the base value is low, such as "I'm feeling good", "I'm feeling down", "I'm not bad", "It's amazing in a sense". If the base value exceeds the reference value, the pachinko machine is operating differently than expected, and there is a possibility that fraud has been performed. For this reason, it is desirable to display in a manner that indicates a warning such as red. Further, the display mode may be the same as or similar to the weak error that does not stop the progress of the game. Here, the same means that at least one of the display, the lamp, and the sound is the same.

In addition, various lamps, effect display devices, sounds, and the like may be used to notify the range of the base value (whether the base value is high or low, abnormal value or normal value, etc.). Further, when the base cannot be calculated (Yes in step S902) and there is no base value calculated in the past, a base notification command for displaying the base notification failure on the effect display device may be generated. By transmitting the notification command to the generated sub-board, the state of the base can be notified by the effect device controlled by the sub-board, so that a wider variety of notifications can be made than the main board, and the load on the main board can be increased. Can be reduced. Further, by notifying that the base display is not possible when nothing is displayed on the base display 1317, it is possible to distinguish between the failure of the base display 1317 and the absence of the base value to be displayed. Further, by displaying the abnormality of the base value on the effect display device, it is possible to know the abnormality of the base value without looking at the back surface side of the game board provided with the base display 1317.

The function display unit 1400 may also serve as the base display 1317. In this case, a specific LED lamp (or 7-segment LED) of the function display unit 1400 may be used for constant notification. Further, it may be notified at a predetermined timing (for example, when the main body frame 4 is opened, while the special symbol variation display game is not being executed, the timing at which the special symbol variation display game ends).

The base information may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the amusement park. In this case, as in the base calculation / display processing (FIGS. 47, 49, etc.) described later, when the base information is output at a predetermined timing (for each predetermined number of prize balls and for each predetermined number of out balls). Good.

The base information output from the external terminal board 784 may be a binary signal (high, low) indicating whether the calculated base value is high or low with respect to a predetermined threshold value. Further, a signal having a length indicating an outline of the calculated base value may be output (for example, a pulse having a base value of 30% or more and less than 40% is a pulse of 30 milliseconds). Further, a number of continuous pulses indicating an outline of the calculated base value may be output (for example, three continuous pulses when the base value is 30% or more and less than 40%).

Even if the base value is not updated, the base notification command may be generated, and if the base value is not updated, the base notification command may not be generated. The display of the base value continues even if the base notification command is not generated.

Further, as will be described later in FIG. 56 and the like, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal, a base notification command for notifying the abnormality of the base value is generated, and the player or the hall employee is notified of the abnormality of the base. It may be notified.

Further, whether or not to notify the player of the base may be determined according to the game state (game situation). This is because if the base value is constantly notified to the player, the player's attention to the production of the special symbol variation display game, which is the original pleasure of the pachinko machine, may be distracted, and the player's consciousness may be dispersed. Is.

Further, based on the calculated base value, the effect of the special symbol variation display game being executed or executed in the future may be changed. For example, it is preferable to prepare a plurality of display selection tables and select an effect from the display selection tables (see FIGS. 64 to 68) that differ depending on the base value.

In addition, the base value may exceed or fall below a predetermined threshold value (for example, 30%) during the special symbol variation display game. Therefore, when the threshold value is exceeded or falls during the special symbol variation display game, the effect of the special symbol variation display game may be changed. The effect may be changed in the same manner or the effect may be changed in a different manner depending on whether the base value exceeds a predetermined threshold value or decreases.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value. As shown in FIG. 23, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls is updated in the base calculation area update process in step S81, and the base value is calculated in the base ratio calculation / display process in step S89.

Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and calculates the base. The prize ball number buffer is updated in the area update process (step S81). After that, the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89), and the payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting process (step S90).

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. Of the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80), the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951. When the payout control board 951 backs up the number of unpaid prize balls, the payout control board 951 needs to send a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310, but it is necessary to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout. Absent. On the other hand, when backing up the number of unpaid prize balls on the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951 needs to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout, but sends a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. No need.

In the pachinko machine according to the embodiment described above, the base value is calculated without delay during the game, and the state of the game machine can be known in real time. Therefore, the abnormality of the gaming machine can be detected at an early stage. For example, when it is determined that the base is abnormal when the base value is lower or higher than the predetermined threshold value, the base value is calculated multiple times during one special symbol variation display game, and the base value moves up and down across the predetermined threshold value and becomes abnormal. Even if it is determined to be, the game is not stopped, and the calculation process of the base value is continuously executed regardless of the determination of abnormality. For example, there are short-term games such as normal fluctuations and long-term games such as reach fluctuations in special symbol fluctuation display games, and the base value is calculated from the start to the end of one special symbol fluctuation display game. When the conditions to be performed are satisfied multiple times, the base value should be calculated each time, and the base value should be updated and displayed each time. This is because if the calculation of the base value during the special symbol variation display game is restricted (for example, the base value is calculated and updated only once at the end of the variation display), the change of the base value may be long depending on the calculation timing of the base value. This is because the hall may be inconvenienced because the information necessary for the operation of the hall is not output at an appropriate timing without noticing the time.

Also, if the launched game ball has not won a prize in the starting opening or the general winning opening, the base value will decrease. In this state, the player is losing money, so for example, an additional effect (for example, an effect related to a win that is not related to a change in the base value, or an effect related to a change in the base value) appears in addition to the effect performed on the liquid crystal. A notice effect with a high degree of expectation for a big hit (a notice effect with a high degree of expectation such as the next notice effect among the effects not related to the change in the base value, or a change in the base value) Of the specific effects that appear, a notice effect with a high degree of expectation (for example, the base value is displayed in a rainbow display) may be performed. As a result, the player can reduce the discomfort felt by not winning the starting opening and the general winning opening, and can motivate the player to continue the game.

On the other hand, if many of the launched game balls win the starting opening or the general winning opening (if more than the average number of winnings in the past), the base value increases. In this state, even if the result of the big hit lottery is wrong, the player is paid out more game balls than usual, so that the player's disappointment is reduced. The production of the variable display game may be changed to a production with a low degree of expectation.

[9-2. Variations in the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value]
Next, variations of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 44. The outline of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
・ Fig. 41: Calculation of the number of prize balls → Update the number of prize balls → Calculation of the base value → Send the payout command ・ Fig. 42: Calculate the number of prize balls → Update the number of prize balls → Send the payout command → Calculate the base value ・ Fig. 43: Calculate the number of prize balls → Send payout command → Update prize balls → Calculate base value ・ Figure 44: Calculate prize balls → Send payout command → Confirm command reception → Update prize balls → Calculate base value ・ Figure 45: Calculate prize balls → Send payout command → Notification of completion of payout → Update of number of prize balls → Calculation of base value The variations of FIGS. 41 to 44 include not only the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39 and the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 40, but also described later. It can be applied to any of the base calculation area update processing and the base calculation / display processing.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 42, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 23, the base calculation area update process (step S81) is executed at the indicated position, and the base ratio is calculated after the output data setting process (step S90). -The display process (step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and determines the base calculation area. In the update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated. After that, a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting process (step S90), and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89).

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. As described above, depending on whether the number of unpaid prize balls among the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951, the payout command reception confirmation or Either of the ball payout completion may be omitted.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 43, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 23, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89) are performed after the output data setting process (step S90). To execute.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs data setting process. In (step S90), a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. After that, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated with the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command, and the base ratio is calculated. The base value is updated in the display process (step S89). The prize ball number buffer may be updated with the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command (even if the payout command has not been transmitted) instead of the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command.

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. As described above, depending on whether the number of unpaid prize balls among the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951, the payout command reception confirmation or Either of the ball payout completion may be omitted.

The timing at which the main control MPU 1311 receives the command reception confirmation and the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951 depends on the processing speed of the payout control board 951 and the operating speed of the payout device 830. The order of the step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89) does not matter.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 23, after receiving the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display process are performed. (Step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs data setting process. In (step S90), a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951.

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310.

When the main control MPU 1311 receives the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls is the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command for which the command reception confirmation is received (step S81). Alternatively, in the embodiment described later, the prize ball number buffer) is updated, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89).

Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, since the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is not lost when a power failure occurs, the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up by the payout control board 951. Therefore, it is necessary to confirm the command reception from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, but the ball payout completion notification may be omitted.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 45, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 23, after receiving the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display process are performed. (Step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs data setting process. In (step S90), a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951.

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize balls according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout.

When the main control MPU 1311 receives the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or, in the embodiment described later) is the number of prize balls for which the payout is completed. The prize ball number buffer) is updated, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89).

In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up by the main control board 1310 so that the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is not lost when a power failure occurs. Therefore, although it is necessary to notify the completion of ball payout from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, the command reception confirmation may be omitted.

As described above, the pachinko machine of the present embodiment updates the number of prize balls and the number of out balls, which are parameters used for calculating the base value, when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, in the process shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, when the winning opening sensor detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls is updated. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 43, the number of prize balls is updated when the payout command is transmitted. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 44, the number of prize balls is updated when the receipt of the payout command is confirmed. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 45, the number of prize balls is updated when the payout of the prize balls is completed.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the number of prize balls during the special prize may not be accurately counted due to the difference between the timing of determining whether the game state is in the special prize and the timing of updating the number of prize balls. In particular, the problem becomes greater when the time from winning the winning opening to updating the number of winning balls is long. Therefore, a flag is attached to the prize during the special prize, and the flag is inherited in the number of prize balls, the payout command, the reception confirmation, and the payout completion notification due to the prize. Then, using the flag, it is determined at each stage whether or not the prize ball is a special prize. In this way, even if it takes a long time from winning the winning opening to updating the number of prize balls, the number of prize balls in the special prize can be accurately counted and updated.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the number of prize balls and the number of out balls are updated at these triggers, and the base value is calculated and displayed. That is, since the base value can be known by the gaming machine alone, the time required for nail adjustment in the manufacturing process and the inspection process can be shortened, and the gaming machine can be efficiently manufactured.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine is out of balls and the prize balls cannot be paid out, the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls.

When the main control board 1310 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning opening sensor detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening in which the winning is detected is not yet obtained. Add to the number of payout balls. A predetermined upper limit may be set for the number of unpaid balls, but the upper limit may not be set. In this case, it is advisable to update the prize ball number buffer or the total prize ball number for calculating the base value each time the number of prize balls to be paid out is calculated. Further, the number of prize balls may be updated after the payout command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951.

On the other hand, when the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning opening sensor detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening in which the winning is detected. Is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Even if the pachinko machine is out of balls and the prize balls cannot be paid out, the payout command is transmitted and the number of unpaid balls is held by the payout control board 951. In this case, it is advisable to update the prize ball number buffer or the total prize ball number for calculating the base value each time the payout command is transmitted.

Further, when the payout control board 951 receives the payout command, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated. A predetermined upper limit may be set for the number of prize balls, but the upper limit may not be set. In addition, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated each time the prize balls are actually paid out. The payout control board 951 transmits the number of prize balls for calculating the base value to the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 calculates the base value using the received number of prize balls.

Further, as will be described later in FIG. 47, without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1, every predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) of winning, or every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). , Steps S891 and S892 may be executed.

As explained above, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value can be updated at various timings, but when the number of prize balls is updated, the base value is calculated without delay and the base display 1317 is displayed in real time. The base value may be calculated and displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, every minute).

[9-3. Timing of updating the number of prize balls and calculating the base value]
Next, variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 51. The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
-Fig. 39 and Fig. 40: Calculate the base value for each timer interrupt cycle-Fig. 46 and Fig. 47: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls-Fig. 48 and Fig. 49: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of out-balls Calculation ・ Fig. 50 and Fig. 51: The base value is updated when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 46, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition (step S813). In FIG. 46, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation area update process (FIG. 39), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. If the game state is during the special prize, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, the process proceeds to step S824 without updating the number of prize balls and the number of out balls. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811).

Then, it is determined whether there are prize balls, that is, whether the number of acquired prize balls is 1 or more (step S812). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813). Each time the prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer, the prize ball number may be output from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer installed in the amusement park, and the prize ball number described later becomes a predetermined threshold Th1 or more. In some cases, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and the number of prize balls to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1 is temporarily stored.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815). For example, an abnormality in the number of prize balls is a prize equivalent to 10 or more prizes per minute in consideration of the number of prize balls at a predetermined time other than during the special prize (for example, the number of prize balls at the general prize opening or the starting opening). For example, when a ball) is obtained. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls by providing a permissible range in a plurality of stages. If the number of prize balls is abnormal, the acquired number of prize balls does not have to be added to the prize ball buffer in step S813, and the number of prize balls added to the prize ball buffer in step S813 is subtracted. May be good.

As a result, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the player or the hall employee is notified that the prize balls are abnormal. There are various methods for notifying the abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more may be used. For example, an abnormality in the number of prize balls may be notified by various lamps, effect display devices 1600, 3114, 244, sounds, and the like. Further, an abnormality in the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer installed in the amusement park. Further, it is not necessary to use the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal in the calculation of the base value. In this case, the prize ball may be paid out to the player. Further, when the number of prize balls is determined to be abnormal and the notification is performed by the above-mentioned notification means (sound, lamp, LED, effect display device, information output from the external terminal board 784, etc.), the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal is determined. It may be used to calculate the base value. Further, the game may be temporarily stopped. Specifically, the main control board 1310 initializes all the data of the main control built-in RAM 1312 and initializes all the data of the RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 even if the RAM clear switch is not operated. Then, in the initial state, the game is started from the operation check. As another method of stopping the game, the game is temporarily stopped (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is stopped), and then the error notification is stopped, the game returns to the original state, and the game is restarted. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit outputs a power failure detection signal even if the power failure monitoring circuit does not detect a drop in the power supply voltage, and the main control MPU 1311 backs up all the data of the main control built-in RAM 1312 to stop the game. Then, after the error notification is completed, the data of the main control built-in RAM 1312 is restored from the backup area, and the game is restarted. At this time, since the peripheral control unit 1511 waits for a command from the main control board 1310 as it is, the interrupted game is restarted by restarting the operation of the main control board 1310. However, 100 game balls (that is, out balls) are launched into the game area 5a, and all the game balls may win a prize at the general winning opening or the starting opening, so that an abnormality in the number of winning balls is notified. It is desirable that the mode to be performed is a gentle mode (for example, a lower volume or a lower light amount than a normal error notification), which is less urgent than a normal error (magnetic sensor error, etc.). Also, the display time may be the same as a normal error or may be shorter. In some cases, the notification time may be set to 0 seconds and the notification may not be performed.

Then, the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality is reset (step S817), and the counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out balls is updated so as to add the acquired number of out balls to the total number of out balls (step S822).

After that, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer activated in step S817 has timed up (step S824). Then, when the time is up for the prize ball abnormality notification timer, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S825). In step S824, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time, but the end of the notification is determined so as to notify the prize ball abnormality by a predetermined number of launched balls. You may. In addition, the abnormality may be continuously notified until the hall employee confirms it.

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 46, it was determined in step S985 whether the number of prize balls is abnormal, but after the number of out balls is acquired, the number of prize balls is abnormal in comparison with the number of out balls. (That is, whether there is an abnormality in the base value) may be determined. For example, when the number of prize balls exceeding the number of out balls is counted in a predetermined time, or considering the number of prize balls at the general winning opening and the starting opening, the out balls are won at a high rate (for example, 50% or more). For example.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 47, the base value is updated at the timing when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 47, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display process (FIG. 40), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1. For example, the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold Th1 may be compared, or the value of a predetermined bit in the prize ball number storage area may be used for determination (specifically, the prize ball number storage area is 8 bits. If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more). Further, the determination result of comparing the number of prize balls and the threshold Th1 in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) is recorded in a flag, and in the base calculation / display process (FIG. 47), the prize ball number buffer value is set by the flag. May be determined whether is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1.

Then, if the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation / display process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold Th1 or more, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). That is, if the number of prize balls counted from a predetermined starting point satisfies a predetermined condition (the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than the threshold Th1), the fractional portion of the number of prize balls is used. Leave (the fraction obtained by subtracting the threshold Th1 from the prize ball number buffer is left in the prize ball number buffer), store the other part in the memory (add the threshold value Th1 to the total prize ball number), and use it to calculate the base value. Execute the process to be performed. Specifically, when the threshold Th1 is 100, the prize ball number buffer value is 99, and when 5 prize balls are generated by winning a prize in the general winning opening, the prize ball number buffer value is 104 pieces. However, 100 pieces are moved to the total number of prize balls and used for calculating the base value, and the remaining 4 pieces are left in the prize ball number buffer. In this case, the count of the four prize balls left in the prize ball number buffer is used in the calculation of the base value when the prize ball number buffer value becomes the threshold Th1 or more next time. Further, although the threshold value Th1 = 100 is described, other numerical values such as 1000 may be used. However, if a large threshold Th1 is set so that the base is not calculated even if a jackpot is obtained, the detection of fraud may be delayed. Therefore, the threshold Th1 is less than or equal to the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot (multiple types). If there is a big hit (for example, 4 rounds and 8 rounds of big hits), it is better to set it to the minimum value or less of the number of prize balls of the big hit. Also, from the viewpoint of detecting fraud at an early stage, it is advisable to update the base value frequently. For example, it is preferable that the threshold value Th1 is 10 instead of 100 because the base value is updated frequently.

In addition, steps S891 and S892 may be executed every predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) of winning without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1. Further, steps S891 and S892 may be executed every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1. This predetermined time may be measured by a timer operated by the main control MPU 1311, or may be measured by the output of an RTC (real-time clock).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of out balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. If the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will result in an error (or indefinite), so that it does not have to be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

Further, when the total number of out balls is 0 or when the calculated base value becomes an abnormal value, the base value may not be calculated and the base calculation area 13128 may not be updated. For example, when the total number of out balls is less than or equal to the total number of prize balls, the base value is 100% or more, the number of prize balls equal to or more than the number of fired balls (out balls) is obtained, and the game is normally performed. Since it is not in the present state, it is not necessary to store the numerical value in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and calculate the base value. Further, when the base value is calculated and the value read from the division result register A131218 is 100% or more, it is not necessary to update the base calculation area 13128 with the value read from the division result register A131218.

Further, the abnormality of the base value may be determined with 1500% as a threshold value. Since the upper limit of the theoretical base value of a pachinko machine with a maximum number of prize balls of 15 for the winning opening is 1500%, a base value exceeding 1500% is an impossible value, and the gaming machine is abnormal. It can be determined that there is. In this case as well, it is not necessary to calculate the base value, or it is not necessary to update the base calculation area 13128 with the value read from the division result register A131218.

Further, the threshold value for determining the abnormality of the base value may be another value. A normal value (for example, 30% to 50%) of the base value in the normal operation of the pachinko machine is determined, and if it is out of the range of the normal value, the base calculation area 13128 is set to the value read from the division result register A131218. It is not necessary to update the display of the base value without updating.

Although the case where the base value is not displayed has been described above, even if the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal base value may be displayed.

As will be described later in FIG. 52, the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are cumulative values since the pachinko machine 1 started operation, but the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are the same. It may be initialized at the timing (for example, every predetermined number of prize balls, every predetermined number of out balls).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

As described above, the pachinko machine of the present embodiment determines whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal each time the number of prize balls is acquired, so that fraudulent activity can be detected at an early stage. This is because, in a normal game, a considerable number of game balls (for example, 50% of the number of launched balls) do not win a prize in the general winning openings 2001 and the starting openings 2002 and 2004 with a high probability. Therefore, an abnormality in winning a prize in the winning openings (general winning openings 2001 and starting openings 2002, 2004) that are always open is determined and notified.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, since the base value is calculated when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition, an accurate base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, since the base value is calculated when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number, the amount of calculation required for calculating the base value (for example, compared to the case where the base value is calculated for each prize ball). The load of the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base notification command for notifying the calculated base value is generated and the new base value is notified, but until then, the conventional base value is notified. Will be done.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 48, the number of out balls is recorded in the out ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition (step S819). In FIG. 48, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-described base calculation area update process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there are prize balls as a result of the determination in step S812, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 48, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). The acquired number of out balls is added to the number of out balls buffer (step S819).

After that, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S824). Step S825).

Further, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls. For this reason, for example, when it is determined that a game ball wins a prize at the starting port to generate a look-ahead effect, and the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a mode different from the usual mode (blinking display, red hold, etc.), The player expects the special symbol variation display game corresponding to the pre-read hold to be a big hit, but the player is discouraged if the special symbol variation display game is lost. Even in such a case, if the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls as in the present embodiment, the disappointment of the player as described above can be reduced. This is because the calculation of the base value is delayed from the timing when the prize ball is generated, so that the base value increased by the prize ball due to winning the winning opening is notified. That is, even if it is determined that the look-ahead effect is executed at the time of winning the starting port, even if the number of prize balls paid out at the time of winning the starting port is added, the above-mentioned predetermined number (for example, threshold Th1 = 100) is obtained. If not reached, the base value will not be updated. That is, the base value displayed to the player has not changed. However, since the prize ball was obtained, the base value should rise (only the lower numerical value changes due to the number of displayed digits, and the display may not change). Therefore, even if the above-mentioned look-ahead effect is out of order, the player thinks that the base value will rise later (that is, the condition is good), and the decline in interest can be suppressed. In other words, even if it is determined that the look-ahead effect is executed, the base value is not updated if the prize ball buffer value does not reach a predetermined number (threshold value Th1). Further, when it is determined that the look-ahead effect is executed and the prize ball buffer value reaches a predetermined number, the calculation of the base value may be delayed until the prize ball buffer value reaches the predetermined number next time. ..

The player may be able to select whether to delay the calculation of the base value or to calculate without delay. For example, at the start of the game, it can be selected by the operation button 220C. Further, the calculation timing of the base value may be determined by lottery. Further, when it is decided to perform the look-ahead effect, it is preferable to execute the effect capable of notifying the delay of the calculation of the base value. If the hold memory of the special symbol variation display game has reached the upper limit, the jackpot lottery will not be executed even if the starting port is won. Even in this case, since the prize balls are paid out with the winning of the starting port, the number of the prize balls is counted and used for the calculation of the base value. In addition, at the time of a specific error, even if you win a prize at the start opening or general winning opening, if it is treated as if there was no prize and the prize balls are not paid out, the number of prize balls will not be counted, and depending on the prize, the base value Is not updated.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 49, the base value is updated at the timing when the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 49, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). Various methods can be used to determine whether the out-ball number buffer value is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the number of out balls may be compared with the threshold value Th2, or the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of out balls may be used for determination (specifically, the storage area for the number of out balls is composed of 8 bits. , If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more). Further, in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 48), the determination result of comparing the number of out balls and the threshold Th2 is recorded in a flag, and in the base calculation / display process (FIG. 49), the number of out balls is determined by the flag. It may be determined whether or not the threshold value Th2 or more of.

Then, if the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation / display process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is the threshold Th2 or more, the threshold Th2 is added to the total out-ball number (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out-ball number buffer (step S900). In addition, steps S899 and S900 may be executed every predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) without comparing the out-ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th2.

After that, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 results in an error, so that it is not necessary to store the base value in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

The total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are cumulative values since the pachinko machine 1 started operation, but the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are set at the same timing (for example, a predetermined prize). It may be initialized for each number of balls and for each predetermined number of out balls).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. The base notification command may simply notify the base value, notify the base value by a specific effect, or notify an abnormality of the base value.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the base value can be updated and displayed every time the number of out balls (number of launched balls) reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, the base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing. In addition, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which fun is pursued.

In addition, the number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls each time a prize ball (winning detection, payout command transmission, payout command arrival, prize ball payout completion, etc.) is performed. This is because the base value may not be calculated correctly if it is confirmed whether a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, whether there is an out ball corresponding to the prize ball) when adding the number of prize balls. For example, even if the firing is not performed for a predetermined time (about 1 minute), the slinging state caused by the game ball being caught by the nail arranged in the game area is resolved, and the game ball is delayed in the winning opening. This is because there are cases where a prize is won. Therefore, it is desirable to update the number of prize balls regardless of the presence or absence of out balls.

When both the out-ball number and the out-ball number buffer value are smaller than the threshold Th2, it may be displayed that the out-ball number buffer value is a fraction smaller than the threshold Th2, or the out-ball number buffer value may be displayed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, since the base value is calculated when the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number, it is required to calculate the base value rather than calculating the base value every time an out ball is detected. The amount of calculation (for example, the load of the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base notification command for notifying the calculated base value is generated and the new base value is notified, but until then, the conventional base value is notified. Will be done.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 50, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. , Record the number of out balls in the out ball number buffer. In FIG. 50, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-described base calculation area update process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the out ball number buffer (step S819).

After that, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S824). Step S825).

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 51, the base value is updated at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 51, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold Th1 or more, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). In addition, steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total out-ball number, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is the threshold Th2 or more, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball number buffer (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of out balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 results in an error, so that it is not necessary to store the base value in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. The base notification command may simply notify the base value or notify an abnormality of the base value. It should be noted that the base notification command may be generated each time the base value is calculated, the base value may be calculated, or the base notification command may not be generated.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 51, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the base calculation area 13128.

The data of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area 13128 are the base calculation area update process and the base calculation / display process (FIGS. 39, 46, 47, 48, and 48) executed by the main control MPU 1311. It is written in FIG. 49, FIG. 51, etc.) and read out in the base calculation / display process (FIG. 40, FIG. 47, FIG. 49, FIG. 51, etc.). Further, the data of the prize ball number buffer and the out ball number buffer of the base calculation area 13128 are written in the base calculation area update process (FIGS. 46, 48, 50, etc.) executed by the main control MPU 1311, and the base calculation is performed. -Read by display processing (FIG. 47, FIG. 49, FIG. 51, etc.). Therefore, the base calculation area update process and the base calculation / display process can be configured separately from the timer interrupt process (game control program), and the programs for the accessory ratio calculation / display process can be shared even for game machines with different specifications. it can.

FIG. 52 (A) shows an example of the structure of the work area in the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52 (A), the prize ball number buffer, the total prize ball number, the out ball number buffer, the prize ball number buffer, the specific prize ball number buffer, the total out ball number and the base are stored. The prize ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of prize balls paid out to the player other than during the special prize, and is based on the case where the number of prize balls meets a predetermined condition (for example, for each predetermined number of prize balls). Is used to calculate. The total number of prize balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player other than during the special prize. The out ball number buffer is the number of game balls fired by the player other than during the special prize, and is used to calculate the base when the number of out balls meets a predetermined condition (for example, for each predetermined number of out balls). Be done. The winning ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of winning balls in the general winning opening and the starting opening. The specific winning ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of balls won in a specific general winning opening or starting opening. The winning ball number buffer is used when counting the number of out balls based on the number of balls passing through the out port (FIGS. 55 and 56). The specific winning ball number buffer is used when the number of out balls is corrected by the number of winning balls to the specific general winning opening (FIGS. 71 and 72). The total number of out-balls is the total number of game balls fired by the player except during the special prize. The base is calculated by multiplying the total number of prize balls by the total number of out balls × 100, and is a numerical value expressed as a percentage, which is calculated in step S903 of the base calculation / display process.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52 (A), the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls correspond to each area of the total cumulative total of FIG. 52 (B) described later, and each has a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes. It is possible to store a numerical value up to 167727215 or 42949677295 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. Further, the base is a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the total cumulative total of the base shown in FIG. 52 (B) described later, and can store a numerical value up to 255 in decimal. A capacity that can record a decimal number of base values may be allocated.

FIG. 52B shows another example of the structure of the work area using the ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52 (B), the prize ball number buffer, the total prize ball number, the out ball number buffer, the prize ball number buffer, the specific prize ball number buffer, the total out ball number and the base are stored. Each data item is the same as the description in FIG. 52 (A). The storage area for the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is n storage areas (for example, every 6000 prize balls) for each predetermined number of prize balls (or for each predetermined number of out balls or for each predetermined time). It is composed of a ring buffer having n = 10 storage areas), and when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointer of all the data moves and the storage area where the data is updated changes. .. Then, after the data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. The write pointer may be moved when the number of data other than the number of prize balls (number of out balls, predetermined time, etc.) reaches a predetermined number.

The write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointers of all the data strings move for each predetermined number of prize balls. In addition, as the write pointer moves, the read pointer also moves. The read pointer points to the storage area immediately before the write pointer. This is because the base value is calculated using the latest data of 6000 prize balls.

The cumulative total of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the base is the total number of total prize balls and the total number of out balls. It is a value calculated from the value, and when the ring buffer goes around and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated by excluding the data in the cleared area. It will be recalculated. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of all the data collected in the past, and the total cumulative value of the base calculated from the cumulative value is the value calculated from the total cumulative value of each data, and the ring buffer Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data in one round, the total cumulative value including the original data of the cleared area is calculated.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52 (B), the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the ring buffer are storage areas of 2 bytes each, and numerical values up to 65535 can be stored in decimal numbers. Since the cumulative total is the total of the data for 6000 prize balls x n (60,000 prize balls when n = 10), a large storage area is prepared. The cumulative total of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and can store a numerical value up to 167727215 or 42949677295 in decimal. Since the total cumulative total is not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. In addition, the cumulative total of the base and the total cumulative total are storage areas of 1 byte each, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal numbers. A capacity that can record a decimal number of base values may be allocated.

In the data structure shown in FIG. 52 (A), the stored data is not deleted, so even if the data in the base calculation area 13128 is deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.). Good. Similarly, the total cumulative total of FIG. 52 (B) may be deleted at predetermined intervals.

Further, when the data in the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all the data in the base calculation area 13128 may be deleted. Further, it may be notified that the data of the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is abnormal. Alternatively, the data in the backup area may be inspected using a check code, the data in the normal backup area may be duplicated in the main area, and then the base value may be calculated again.

[9-4. Display of base value]
The base value calculated as described above may be continuously displayed while the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but when the main body frame 4 is closed and the game is possible, the base display 1317 is visually recognized. Therefore, the 7-segment LED 13172 may be turned off to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. As a matter of course, even when the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation / display process (step S89) are executed.

Further, the base display 1317 may always display the base value, or may display the base value by operating the display switch 1318. For example, when the display switch 1318, which is a push button switch, is pressed, the display of the base value is started, the display is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the display is turned off. If the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the base value may be displayed on the base display 1317. That is, even if the display switch 1318 is operated unless the main body frame 4 is open, the base display 1317 does not display the accessory ratio.

Further, when the main body frame 4 is opened, it is preferable to display a predetermined display on all the digits so that it can be confirmed that the base display 1317 is operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36 (B), "-" may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be lit.

Then, when the main body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display for confirming the normal operation of the base display 1317 is performed (FIG. 36 (E)), and after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off. , It is good to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. This base non-display state is the same mode as after the initial setting is completed (FIG. 36 (B)), but may be a different mode as long as it is distinguishable from the displayed base value.

The base display 1317 may also be used by the function display unit 1400. The function display unit 1400 normally displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 has been released. The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the base value. Even if the display of the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the main body frame 4, the progress of the game may be continued. By continuing the progress of the game, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the display of the base display can be quickly switched to the display of the game state. For example, if the main body frame 4 is opened during the special symbol fluctuation display game, the base value is displayed, but if the main body frame 4 is closed before the fluctuation time elapses, the fluctuation display for the remaining time can be performed. .. Since the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbol is stopped at the timing when the special symbol variation display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped. Therefore, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the base value, it can be configured so as not to give a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, even when the main body frame 4 is closed, the calculated base value (in the above-described embodiment, the accessory ratio) may be displayed on the base display (accessory ratio indicator) 1317. In this way, since the base value (role ratio) can be confirmed without opening the main body frame 4, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine. Further, it is not necessary to determine whether the main body frame 4 is open. Further, in an island facility where pachinko machines are installed on both sides, when the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine on one side is opened, the back surface of the pachinko machine installed on the opposite side can be seen. In such a game machine, by opening the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine on one side, the bases (role ratio) of the two pachinko machines installed back to back can be confirmed. Further, when the base value is displayed even when the main body frame 4 is closed, the base value is displayed in a form that can be recognized by the player (for example, on a display device for displaying the effect of a special symbol variation display game or a display device attached to the frame). Should be displayed. This is because the base value can be used as a barometer for expressing the condition of the pachinko machine and is worth seeing by the player. When the base value is calculated by the main control board 1310, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. When the payout control board 951 calculates the base value, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted via the relay board.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the light intensity (luminance) of the base display 1317 is not changed even when the mode is shifted to the energy saving mode. This is because if the amount of light of the base display 1317 is reduced during the energy saving mode, it becomes difficult to confirm the base value by the base display 1317 when adjusting the pachinko machine other than the opening time.

Specifically, the gaming machine of the present embodiment is in a standby state when a predetermined time elapses after the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is exhausted without the gaming ball winning in any of the winning openings. .. In the standby state, the peripheral control unit 1511 continuously outputs the BGM that is output in the so-called normal fluctuation. Further, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in the standby state, the demo state is entered. In the demo state, a video showing the motif of the gaming machine is played, and the gaming machine is explained. Further, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in the demo state, the mode shifts to the energy saving mode (note that it is not necessary to distinguish between the demo state and the energy saving mode). In the energy saving mode, in order to suppress power consumption, the amount of light of the effect display devices 1600, 3114, 244 and various lamps controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 is reduced. However, since the power consumption of the display devices (function display unit 1400 and base display 1317) controlled by the main control board 1310 is smaller than the power consumption of the entire pachinko machine, it is not necessary to reduce the amount of light of these display devices. May be good. Further, if the amount of light of the function display unit 1400 is not reduced, a player who intends to play on an empty platform can easily visually recognize the result of the previous lottery.

In addition, even if the game ball does not win at the start opening or the general winning opening, when the game ball is launched toward the game area and an out ball is detected, the displayed base value can be recalculated and updated. There is sex. If the number of prize balls does not increase even if the number of out balls is increased after the game balls are launched, the calculated base value will decrease, but some players will burn with revenge.

By notifying such a player of the state of the game with the function display unit 1400 that also serves as the base display 1317, the interest of the game can be revived. That is, even if the player shifts to the demo mode or the energy saving mode, the player can maintain the display mode of the display on which the base value is displayed before shifting to the demo mode or the energy saving mode, or increase the light amount. It is good to be able to confirm the base value properly.

Although the maintenance or increase of the light intensity of the display on which the base value is displayed has been described in this way, even if the light intensity of the display on which the base value is displayed is decreased or turned off with an emphasis on the viewpoint of reducing energy consumption. Good. For example, a predetermined operation (a launch stop button that forcibly stops firing, an operation button that changes the appearance of the effect, a RAM clear button that clears the contents of the RAM, and a power supply to the gaming machine) during the energy saving mode. When the operation of the operation means provided in the gaming machine such as the supply adjustment button for switching the presence / absence of the base value is detected, it is preferable to reduce the amount of light of the display on which the base value is displayed. Furthermore, not only in the energy saving mode, but also when the above-mentioned predetermined operation is performed, the amount of light of both the lamp or the like that reduces the power consumption and the display that displays the base value is reduced or turned off during the energy saving mode. May be good.

When reducing or turning off the light intensity of both the lamp and the display that displays the base value, reduce the light intensity of the lamp that reduces power consumption during the energy saving mode before the display that displays the base value. It may be turned off or off. In this case, the amount of light from a lamp or the like having a large power consumption is reduced first, and the power consumption is greatly reduced. Further, the display on which the base value is displayed may be turned off or the light amount of the display on which the base value is displayed may be reduced or turned off before the lamp or the like. In this case, the gorgeousness of the gaming machine is maintained even in the energy saving mode. It works. Further, during the energy saving mode, the lamp or the like that reduces the power consumption and the display that displays the base value may be reduced or turned off at the same time. In this case, the amount of power consumption reduction can be increased and the energy saving effect is high. .. In addition, before and after the time in these explanations (meaning "first" and "simultaneously") includes the order of the timing of internal processing and the order of appearance from the player.

Further, the display mode of the base value may be set in a plurality of stages, and the display mode of each stage may be changed. Specifically, the displayed base values are 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. Divide into multiple stages. The display for displaying the base value may be configured by a multi-color LED, and the emission color may be changed such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage. In addition, the display device that displays the base value is configured with a production display device, and the base value is low, such as "I like it", "I'm feeling down", "It's not bad", "It's amazing in a sense", etc. Sometimes you may want to display a selfish comment. Further, the effect of adding a comment as described above to the effect display device 1600 on which the decorative design is displayed may be executed without changing the display mode of the display that displays the base value.

[9-5. Calculation of base value using the number of balls passing through the out port]
Next, further variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56. In the process described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56, the number of out balls is calculated using the number of winning balls and the number of balls passing through the out port, and the base value is calculated. The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
-Fig. 54 and Fig. 40: Calculate the base value for each timer interrupt cycle-Fig. 55 and Fig. 56: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and for each predetermined number of out balls. Although the description of the pattern for calculating the above and the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out balls is omitted, it can be realized by combining FIGS. 54 to 56.

When the out ball is detected by the out port passing ball sensor 1021 provided near the out port 1111, there is a problem that the number of out balls cannot be accurately counted. This is because the game ball launched toward the game area 5a flows out from the game area 5a via the out opening 1111, the general winning opening 2001, the starting opening 2002, the large winning opening 2005, and 2006. Therefore, the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 cannot accurately count the number of game balls launched toward the game area 5a. Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the number of out balls is accurately calculated using the number of winning balls and the number of balls passing through the out port, and the base value is accurately calculated.

FIG. 53 is a front view showing another example of the game board.

The game board of the pachinko machine of this embodiment has substantially the same structure as the game board shown in FIG. 10, but is provided at the lower part of the game area 5a, passes through the out port 1111 and flows out from the game area 5a (out). An out-mouth passing ball sensor 1021 for detecting the number of mouth-passing balls) is provided. The out-port passing ball sensor 1021 may be installed at a position where the player can see through the out-port 1111. By installing the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 at a position where the player can see through the out-port 1111, it is possible to make the player aware that the out-balls are counted, that is, the base is calculated.

Further, the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 may be installed at a position not seen by the player, such as a gutter in which game balls flowing down from the game area 5a passing through the out-port 1111 are aligned. If it is installed in a position invisible to the player, it is not necessary to make the player aware of the counting of out balls. Further, by providing the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 on the back side of the out-port 1111, a sufficient place for arranging the effect display device and the accessory (movable body) can be secured, and the degree of freedom in designing the game board 5 is improved. it can. Further, in order to prevent double counting of the game balls, the rolling surface on which the game balls that have passed through the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 roll so that the game balls that have passed through the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 do not bounce off. It is good to make it sloped or curved.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54 acquires the number of prize balls, the number of balls passing through the out port, and the number of winning balls in order to calculate the base value using the number of balls passing through the out port for each timer interrupt cycle. In FIG. 54, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-described base calculation area update process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated. It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped.

After that, the number of balls passing through the out port is acquired (step S818), and the number of winning balls is acquired (step S820). Then, the sum of the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time an out ball or a winning ball is detected.

As in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825 of FIG. 46, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize is awarded. The ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

After recording the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 40.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. , The number of balls passing through the out port is recorded in the out ball number buffer, and the number of winning balls is recorded in the winning ball number buffer. In FIG. 55, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-described base calculation area update process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of balls passing through the out port is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of balls passing through the out port is added to the number of out balls buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired (step S820), and the acquired number of winning balls is added to the number of winning balls buffer (step S821).

After that, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S824). Step S825).

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the sum of the acquired number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is added to one storage area (total number of out balls), and the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55 is performed. Then, the acquired number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls are added to another storage area (out ball number buffer, winning ball number buffer). In this way, the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls may be recorded in one storage area or in another storage area.

Further, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55, when the acquired number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls are recorded in different storage areas, the number of out balls increases by 1 when the winning opening is won. The counting of the number of balls passing through the out port and the counting of the number of winning balls are executed at the same time (within one timer interrupt process), but the base value is calculated after updating both the number of out balls buffer and the number of winning balls buffer. At that time, if both the out ball number buffer and the winning ball number buffer cannot be updated within one timer interrupt process, whether to count the number of balls passing through the out port with priority or to count the number of winning balls with priority. It is better to determine in advance rather than determining by lottery as appropriate. At that time, if the process related to the prize ball is prioritized over other processes, the process of paying out the prize ball can be executed quickly, but it may be appropriately determined according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 56, the base value is updated at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 56, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, and the process proceeds to step S896. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold Th1 or more, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). In addition, steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether the sum of the number of balls passing through the out port stored in the out ball number buffer and the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S896). ). The total of the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls that have flowed into the game area, and is the number of out balls. As a result of the determination, if the calculated out-ball number is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total out-ball number, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated out-ball number is the threshold Th2 or more, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), the winning ball number buffer is set to 0, the winning ball number buffer value is added to the out ball number buffer, and the threshold Th2 is subtracted (step S901). .. In addition, steps S896 to S901 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined time without comparing the number of out balls (buffer value of the number of out balls + the buffer value of the number of winning balls) with the threshold value Th2.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of out balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 results in an error, so that it is not necessary to store the base value in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 56, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the number of winning balls is added to the number of balls passing through the out port to calculate the number of out balls. Therefore, the number of out balls is accurately counted and the base value is calculated accurately. it can. Further, by confirming the base value in the manufacturing process and the inspection process of the gaming machine, it is possible to confirm whether the winning opening switch, the base display 1317, and the process of calculating the base value are normal.

[9-6. Notification of base abnormality]
The process described above generates a command for notifying the calculated base value. Next, a process of determining an abnormality of the base value and notifying the abnormality will be described.
-Fig. 57: Calculates the base value for each timer interrupt cycle-Fig. 58: Calculates the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and for each predetermined number of out-balls A pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls, predetermined Although the description of the pattern for calculating the base value for each number of out balls is omitted, it can be realized by combining FIGS. 57 and 58.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 57, the base value is calculated every time (every timer interrupt cycle).

First, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of out balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 results in an error, so that it is not necessary to store the base value in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a allowable range in a plurality of stages. Then, if the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation / display process is terminated. As a method for notifying the abnormality of the base, the same method as the above-mentioned notification of the base can be adopted.

For example, one of the methods described below may be used, or two or more may be combined. Specifically, the base display (7-segment LED) 1317, the effect display device 1600, 3114, 244, or the like may be used to notify the abnormality of the base value. When the player is notified of the abnormality of the base value, the player may be able to confirm the abnormality of the pachinko machine. The calculated base value may be displayed as a percentage notation on the above-mentioned display or display device to notify an abnormality of the base value. The value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded up, or rounded up, and on a display device capable of displaying an image such as the effect display device 1600, 3114, 244, the value is displayed to the first decimal place and displayed in more detail. You may.

Further, when the base value is displayed on the effect display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, if the base value is abnormal, the display mode may be changed. For example, the numerical value is blinked or the color is changed (normally green, abnormally red, etc.) and displayed. Further, the display mode of the base value may be changed in a plurality of steps. Specifically, the displayed base values are 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. It may be divided into a plurality of stages and displayed with different emission colors such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage.

In addition, various lamps, effect display devices, sounds, and the like may be used to notify the range of the base value (whether the base value is high or low, abnormal value or normal value, etc.). The function display unit 1400 may notify an abnormality of the base value. Further, the information on the abnormality of the base may be output from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer installed in the amusement park.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 57, for example, as shown in FIGS. 50 and 55, the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are calculated at the timing when the number of prize balls and the number of out balls satisfy a predetermined condition. It may be used in combination with the base calculation area update process to be updated.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 58, the base value is updated at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 58, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold Th1 or more, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). In addition, steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total out-ball number, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is the threshold Th2 or more, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball number buffer (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of out balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 results in an error, so that it is not necessary to store the base value in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a allowable range in a plurality of stages. Then, if the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation / display process is terminated.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 58, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 58, for example, as shown in FIGS. 39 and 54, the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are directly updated using the acquired number of prize balls and out balls. It may be used in combination with the base calculation area update process.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when the calculated base value is abnormal, the abnormality is notified, so that the player can know the state of the gaming machine and the hall employee can know the state of the gaming machine. It is possible to know the possibility of unauthorized operation on the gaming machine. In addition, it is possible to detect and notify an abnormality of a gaming machine that cannot be detected by conventional error detection.

[9-7. Notification of changes in the base]
Next, an example of a gaming machine that notifies a change in the calculated base value will be described.

The base value calculated by the pachinko machine naturally fluctuates. Since the base value represents the condition of the gaming machine, the player during the game is concerned about the change in the base value as well as the base value itself. Therefore, it is desired to notify the player of the change in the base value. When a display that serves as a guide for the top and bottom of the base value appears, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 59, the history of the calculated base value is recorded in order to compare the history of the current base value with the history of the past base value. In FIG. 59, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold Th1 or more, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). In addition, steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total out-ball number, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is the threshold Th2 or more, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball number buffer (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of out balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 results in an error, so that it is not necessary to store the base value in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, it is determined whether or not the base value management timer has timed up (step S904). If the base value management timer has not timed up, it is not the timing to store the base value in the base history, so the base calculation / display process ends. On the other hand, if the base value management timer is timed up, the base value is stored in the base history (step S905), and the base value management timer is reset (step S906).

The base value management timer is a timer used to record a base value at predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes), and stores the current base value in the base history every time the base value management timer times up. The base history is stored in the base calculation area 13128. Only one of the base histories may be stored in the base calculation area 13128, or a plurality of base histories may be stored in the base calculation area 13128. When a plurality of base histories are stored in the base calculation area 13128, a ring buffer may be configured in the base calculation area 13128, and for example, a predetermined time × 10 base values may be stored. Further, as shown in FIG. 52, a ring buffer of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is configured in the base calculation area 13128, and for example, a predetermined time × n number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are stored. The base value may be calculated if necessary.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the display selection process. The display selection process is called from the display data creation process (step S1030) of the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 60).

First, the MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 selects a specific base history (for example, the latest past base value) stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value. (Step S10301). As a result, if the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value, the base decrease duration measurement timer is referred to, and it is determined whether a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the decrease of the base value. (Step S10302). Then, if a predetermined time has not elapsed from the start of lowering the base, the effect table during the lowering of the base is selected (step S10303). On the other hand, if a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of lowering the base, the effect table in which the lowering of the base is continuing is selected (step S10304).

On the other hand, if the selected base history value is not less than (equal to or greater than) the current base value, the base decrease duration measurement timer is reset (step S10305) and the display selection table during base increase is selected (step S10306). ).

In the display selection process described above, in step S10301, it is determined whether the current base value is smaller than the base history value, but the current base value and the base history value are compared to determine whether they are large, equal, or small. You may. The base value is generally a decimal value because it is calculated by division. Therefore, it is advisable to determine whether the base history value and the current base value are equal in consideration of a predetermined allowable range (for example, 3%).

64 to 68 are views showing an example of a display selection table. These display selection tables are used to select the effect of the special symbol variation display game by the random numbers selected when the starting port is won (or before the start of the special symbol variation display game). The display selection table 1 shown in FIGS. 64 to 66 is selected when the base value is rising or the base value does not change, and the display selection tables 2 and 3 shown in FIGS. 67 and 68 are selected while the base value is decreasing. Be selected. In particular, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the base value decreasing.

Each display selection table includes each item of effect number, effect content, fluctuation time, remarks, and distribution. The effect number is an identifier for uniquely identifying the effect selected in the display selection table. The content of the production is the name of the production. The fluctuation time is the time from the start to the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol due to the effect. The remarks are information that describes the outline of the production so that the designer can understand it. The distribution is the probability that the effect is selected, and is defined by the numerator with 65536 as the denominator.

The display selection table 1 (outside) shown in FIG. 64 is selected when the result of the big hit lottery is out of order and the base value is rising or does not change. The display selection table 1 (outside) shown in FIG. 65 is selected. Is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot that does not derive a probability change state, and the base value is rising or does not change. The display selection table 1 (win 2) shown in FIG. 66 is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability variation jackpot that derives a probability variation state, and the base value is rising or does not change.

The display selection table 2 shown in FIG. 67 is selected while the base value is decreasing. Further, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected when the base value has decreased even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value began to decrease.

As shown in the figure, the display selection tables 2 and 3 include freeze effects 1 and 2, which are effects in which the symbols do not change, and the freeze effects are selected with high probability. The freeze effect is displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the effect is determined.

If the base value has decreased even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value began to decrease, the effect is selected using the display selection table 3 to obtain the selected effect. You may switch.

Further, it may be determined whether to display a specific effect for notifying the change of the base value according to the game state (game situation). This is because if the player is constantly notified of changes in the base value, the player's attention to the production of the special symbol variation display game, which is the original pleasure of the pachinko machine, may be distracted, and the player's consciousness may be dispersed. Because there is.

For example, during the execution of the special symbol variation display game (game situation in which the result of the jackpot lottery is not shown), the production of the special symbol variation display game is executed with priority, and when it is not variable, the base value is increased. It is advisable to display a specific effect (an effect that serves as a guide for a change in the base value) at the time of time or descent.

The specific effect may be displayed at a timing in which the special symbol variation display game is not executed for a predetermined time. This is because if the specific effect is displayed immediately after the end of the special symbol variation display game, the player's feeling of tension is maintained and fatigue is accumulated. If a game ball wins a prize at the start opening while the specific effect is displayed, the display of the specific effect is stopped and the effect of the special symbol variation display game is executed. This is because a big hit lottery is held and a special symbol variation display game is started when a prize is won at the starting port, so it is better to have the player pay close attention to the special symbol variation display game.

The specific effect may be displayed even in a situation where the number of prize balls does not reach a predetermined number (threshold Th1) or the number of out balls does not reach a predetermined number (threshold Th2). Further, the specific effect may be displayed according to the result of the lottery, but it may be executed without fail if the same conditions are satisfied.

Further, the specific effect may not be displayed when the base value rises, but may be displayed only when the base value falls. This is because when the player is notified of the increase in the base value, the player's expectation rises, and if the base value does not rise to the extent expected by the player, the player may be discouraged due to the gap with the expectation. is there. On the other hand, when the player is notified of the decrease in the base value, some players increase their fighting spirit in order to increase the base value.

Further, in this embodiment, the display selection table is changed depending on whether the base value is decreasing or not (increasing, steady state), but the display is divided into three states of the base value decreasing, steady state, and increasing. A selection table may be defined to notify the player that the base is rising. In this case, it is advisable to determine whether the base value is in the steady state (whether the base history value and the current base value are equal) in consideration of a predetermined allowable range (for example, 3%).

In addition, the specific effect may be displayed during the special symbol variation display game. In this case, the base value is more likely to decrease when it is displayed outside the special symbol variation display game than when it is displayed during the special symbol variation display game.

In addition, when the game ball does not win a prize at the starting port and the special symbol variation display game is not played, the base value usually decreases. Further, if the special symbol variation display game is not played for a predetermined time, a demo screen is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

FIG. 69A is a display example of the normal reach, in which the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. FIG. 69B is a display example of Special Reach 1, in which the left symbol and the right symbol displayed in the upper left of the screen are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. In the center of the screen, the player and the opponent are playing rock-paper-scissors, and the middle design is determined by the result of rock-paper-scissors. FIG. 69C is a display example of the special reach 2, in which the left symbol and the right symbol displayed in the upper left of the screen are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. In the center of the screen, the player and the opponent are playing against each other, and the middle symbol is determined by the result of the battle.

FIG. 69 (D) is a display example of the freeze effect 1, in which the stopped decorative symbol is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value is lowered at a position (for example, the lower right of the screen) that does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative symbol. Make a recognizable display. FIG. 69 (E) is a display example of the freeze effect 2, in which the stopped decorative symbol is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value is lowered at a position (for example, the lower part of the screen) that does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative symbol. Display a recognizable continuation. In the freeze effect, the display indicating the decrease in the base value may be any position as long as it does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative pattern. Further, the display indicating the decrease in the base value may be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative pattern. For example, a display that pops up in the center of the display screen may be used.

Although the example of displaying the degree of change in the base value on the effect display device 1600 has been described above, the lighting mode of the decorative lamp may be changed. Further, the change in the base value may be displayed numerically instead of the vertical tendency of the base value.

The change in the displayed base value is the total cumulative total of the base values calculated before the specified time, even in the comparison result between the base value calculated in the time interval before the specified time and the base value calculated in the current time interval. May be the result of comparison with the total cumulative total of the latest base values.

[9-8. Calculation of the base considering a specific general winning opening]
Next, a process of accurately calculating the base value in consideration of winning a specific general winning opening will be described.

In pachinko machines, the player aims to win a prize in a specific winning opening (for example, the open winning opening 2005, 2006) in which the game ball is likely to win during the jackpot. Adjust the firing strength. Even during a big hit, you can shoot a game ball at the same place as the so-called normal hit and aim for the big prize opening 2005, or you can strengthen the firing strength to the maximum, so-called right-handed hit to aim for the big prize opening 2006. There are variations. In such a variation, a game board may be designed so that a starting port and a general winning opening are arranged downstream of the large winning opening to pick up a ball spilled from the large winning opening.

Here, the downstream (lower part) of the pachinko machine that hits right during a big hit will be described in detail. During the big hit, the player hits right in order to win the game ball in the open big prize opening. Most of the game balls launched toward the game area win the open large prize opening 2006. As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10 and 16, the general winning opening 2001 is provided on the right side of the large winning opening 2005, and the right-handed game ball is open. When the big winning opening 2006 is not won, the general winning opening 2001 is won. That is, it can be said that the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the large winning opening 2005 wins only when the right-handed game ball does not win the opening large winning opening 2006.

The base value is the number of prize balls paid out by winning the starting port and the general winning port when 100 game balls are launched toward the game area 5a (that is, paid for the number of 100 out balls). The number of balls that have flowed into the game area but are unlikely to win the starting opening and the general winning opening (there is a high possibility of winning the big winning opening) to show the number of winning balls issued. When counted in (number of out balls), it is expected that the actual base value will deviate when calculated as the base value.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the large winning opening 2005 is defined as a specific general winning opening, and the number of balls won in the specific general winning opening during the special prize is excluded from the number of out balls. To calculate the base value.

The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation of the gaming machine that calculates the base value in consideration of a specific general winning opening is as follows.
-Fig. 70 and Fig. 40: Calculate the base value for each timer interrupt cycle-Fig. 71 and Fig. 72: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and for each predetermined number of out balls. Although the description of the pattern for calculating the above and the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out balls is omitted, it can be realized by combining FIGS. 70 to 72.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the number of winning balls and the out are calculated in order to calculate the base value using the number of out balls corrected by the number of winning balls to the specific general winning opening for each timer interrupt cycle. Obtain the number of balls and the number of specific winning balls. In FIG. 70, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-described base calculation area update process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated. It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the number of winning balls to a specific general winning opening (specific winning number of balls) is acquired (step S820). Then, the value obtained by subtracting the specific winning ball number from the out ball number is added to the total out ball number (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time an out ball or a winning ball is detected.

As in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825 of FIG. 46, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize is awarded. The ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

After recording the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 40.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 71, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer and the number of out balls is recorded in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of prize balls and the number of out balls satisfy a predetermined condition. Record the number in the out ball count buffer. In FIG. 71, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-described base calculation area update process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the out ball number buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired, it is determined whether or not the winning opening related to the acquired number of winning balls is a specific general winning opening, and the number of winning balls to the specific general winning opening is acquired (step S820). Then, the acquired number of winning balls to the specific general winning opening is added to the specific winning ball number buffer (step S823).

After that, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S824). Step S825).

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated in consideration of the specific number of winning balls recorded in the specific winning ball number buffer. In FIG. 72, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold Th1 or more, the threshold Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). In addition, steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether the sum of the number of balls passing through the out port stored in the out ball number buffer and the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S895). ). The total of the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls that have flowed into the game area, and is the number of out balls. As a result of the determination, if the calculated out-ball number is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total out-ball number, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated out-ball number is the threshold Th2 or more, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the specific winning ball number is subtracted from the total number of out balls and the threshold value Th2 is added (step S899), the winning ball number buffer is set to 0, and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted from the out ball number buffer (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of out balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 results in an error, so that it is not necessary to store the base value in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a allowable range in a plurality of stages. Then, if the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation / display process is terminated.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, the base value is maintained at the same value, and if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, then The base value is updated to a different value. The base value may be calculated at the timing when one of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is updated, or the base value may be calculated at the timing when both are updated.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the base value is calculated excluding the game balls that have flowed into the game area but are unlikely to win the starting port and the general winning port, so that the deviation from the actual base value is large. A small base value can be calculated accurately.

Further, the case where the general winning opening 2001 is located downstream of the large winning opening 2006 in the pachinko machine that hits right during the big hit has been described, but the invention according to this embodiment aims at the big winning opening 2005 by hitting normally during the big hit. It can be applied to pachinko machines as well as gaming machines in which a starting port or a general winning opening is provided downstream of the large winning opening 2005.

Further, in the game area 5a, there are large winning openings 2005 and 2006 that do not normally accept game balls but can accept game balls according to the result of the big hit lottery. The prize balls from winning the grand prize openings 2005 and 2006 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the game ball wins the starting ports 2002 and 2004, the special symbol variation display game starts, and the big winning opening is from the time when the special symbol is confirmed until the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened (big hit opening). The detected out-balls are excluded from the number of out-balls during the period from the closing of 2005 and 2006 to the start of the next special symbol variation display game (big hit ending). In this way, the number of prize balls and the number of out balls during the special prize can be counted without determining whether or not the special prize is being awarded in step S810 as shown in FIG. 39. When the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 repeat opening and closing in one big hit, the time between the closing of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 and the next opening (closing interval) may be included in the special prize. That is, during the special prize, it means that the condition device is operating, for example, from the determination of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. In addition, it may include all the time during the right-handed instruction. Further, at the starting ports 2002 and 2004, the time saving, the probability change (ST), and the electric power support may be included in the special prize. Further, in a gaming state other than during time reduction, probabilistic change (ST), and electric power support, from the opening of the starting port 2004 to the predetermined time after closing (for example, the ball winning the starting port is detected as an out ball). The required number of seconds) may be included in the special prize.

Further, in the game area 5a, a second starting port 2004 is arranged, which normally does not accept the game ball, but can accept the game ball according to the lottery result of the normal symbol. The prize ball due to winning the second starting port 2004 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, a lottery of the normal symbol is performed, the normal symbol variation display game starts, and from the time when the normal symbol is confirmed until it is opened (opening), the second start port 2004 The detected out-balls are excluded from the number of out-balls, with the period from the closing of the game to the start of the next normal symbol variation display game (ending) as a special prize. When the second starting port 2004 repeats opening and closing depending on the lottery result of the normal symbol, the time between the closing of the second starting port 2004 and the next opening (closing interval) may be included in the special prize. In this way, not only during the time saving, but all the winnings to the second starting port 2004 can be excluded from the calculation of the base value.

By doing so, it is possible to accurately count the number of prize balls and the number of out balls other than during the special prize (big hit, shortened working hours, etc.) without determining whether or not the special prize is being awarded in step S810 as shown in FIG. 39.

In this way, the number of out balls and the number of prize balls while the player is hitting right can be accurately excluded, and the base value can be calculated accurately.

Further, depending on the pachinko machine, it is recommended to play the game by left-handed in a state where neither the big hit nor the time is shortened (so-called normal state), and to play the game by right-handed during the big hit or the time is shortened. In such a gaming machine, a general winning opening 2001 and a first starting opening 2002 for winning a left-handed hit, and a general winning opening 2001 and a second starting opening 2004 for winning a right-handed hit are provided. In such a gaming machine, the number of winning openings in the left side to the center of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting left) and the right side of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting right) The ball entry rate to each winning opening differs depending on the arrangement and the arrangement position of the nails. In other words, the base value for left-handed and the base value for right-handed are different.

The base value of the pachinko machine is set on the assumption that the player strikes left in the normal state. However, for the reason mentioned above, when the base value is different between left-handed and right-handed (for example, when the base value at right-handed in the normal state is designed to be lower than that at left-handed). , When the player hits right in the normal state, a low base value is calculated.

Hall considers that a pachinko machine with a low base value is abnormal and inspects it, or judges that it is a gaming machine with poor ball ejection performance. Even in pachinko machines that are judged to have poor ball ejection performance (lower than the expected base), the hall determines that the player is hitting left, so the starting port that acts on the base when hitting left Make adjustments to increase the winning rate of general winning openings. Then adjust the abnormal nail to increase the base value. If you hit left with a gaming machine adjusted in this way, you can get many prize balls even in the normal state. In other words, you can get a lot of lottery for a small amount. In other words, even if the base at the time of left-handed hit is not different from what the hole expected, the hole misunderstands and makes adjustments to increase the entry rate of the starting opening and the general winning opening that win at the time of left-handed hit. Since the hole may suffer a disadvantage due to such malicious intent of the player, it is necessary to accurately calculate the base value when hitting left and the base value when hitting right.

By the way, in the pachinko machine that strikes right during a short time, the second start port 2004 that opens and closes depending on the game state and the gate portion 2003 for performing a normal symbol lottery for opening the second start port 2004 are at the time of right strike. It is placed in the area where the game ball rolls. In addition, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 by hitting right in the normal state, even if the lottery of the normal symbol is performed, the probability of winning the normal symbol is extremely low so that the second starting port 2004 does not open, or it is normal. Even if the symbol lottery is won, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 is shortened, which makes it difficult to win a prize in the second starting port 2004 in the normal state.

Here, in order to increase the base value in a right-handed state in the normal state, the ball entry rate to the second starting port 2004 is increased. However, since the second starting port 2004 is generally set to be more advantageous than the first starting port 2002, increasing the ball entry rate to the second starting port 2004 puts pressure on the profit of the hall. Therefore, when counting the game balls that have passed through the gate portion 2003 in the normal state and calculating the base value, it is preferable to calculate the base value corrected by using the number of passing balls of the gate portion 2003.

Specifically, the number of game balls that have passed through the gate portion 2003 in the normal state is subtracted from the number of out balls (the number of game balls driven toward the game area 5a) as the number of specific winning balls. By reducing the number of out balls, a high base calculation value can be obtained. For example, when a considerable number of game balls pass through the gate portion 2003, an extremely high base value will be calculated. The degree of correction processing may be appropriately determined based on the design value (performance) of the gaming machine.

Further, when the passage of the gate portion 2003 is monitored and the game balls pass through the gate portion 2003 (for example, when a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls pass through the gate portion 2003 without winning a prize at the starting port). After passing through the gate portion 2003 (or before and after), the number of out balls counted at a predetermined time or a predetermined number of shots may not be used in the calculation of the base value. In this way, the base value can be calculated more accurately. When the passage of the gate portion 2003 is detected, a display such as "Please return to left-handed" or a voice may be output without actively notifying the player that it is not reflected in the calculation result of the base value. Further, when the passage of the gate portion 2003 is detected, the hole may be notified that the ball is hit right. For example, a specific lamp may be turned on, the lighting mode may be changed, or the external terminal board 784 may output that the hall computer installed in the amusement park is hitting right.

As described above, by excluding the number of passing balls of the gate portion 2003 provided on the right side of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting right) from the number of out balls, the player hits right in the normal state. The base value of time can be corrected to a large value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fluctuations in the calculated value of the base depending on the player's game style.

[9-9. Initialize base value]
Considering the role of the base value for checking the operating status of the pachinko machine 1, it is desirable that the calculated base value be maintained for a long period of time. Further, it is desirable that the calculated base value cannot be easily erased. Therefore, the base calculation / display data 13136 is erased under a condition different from the condition for erasing the data related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311. As a result, it is possible to retain accurate data on the number of prize balls and calculate an accurate bonus ratio.

Specifically, the base calculation / display data 13136 is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch (first operation), but the backup power supply supplied to the main control MPU 1311 is cut off, and the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is used. By the second operation of shutting off, all the data backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 can be erased. In the second operation, one switch for realizing this operation may be provided, or the employee of the game store disconnects the connector of the backup power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310, and the pachinko machine 1 The power supply may be cut off.

In other words, two operations are prepared to erase the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311. In the first operation, only the data related to the progress of the game is erased, but in the second operation, the calculated base value. And delete all data including data related to the progress of the game.

With this configuration, the base calculation / display data 13136 is not erased due to an erroneous operation by the staff of the amusement park, so that the reliability of the displayed accessory ratio is improved and it is possible to prevent concealment of the state where the accessory ratio is high. ..

[9-10. Calculation of the base considering the winning abnormality]
73 and 74 are flowcharts of the base calculation area update process in consideration of the winning abnormality.

In the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 described above, an abnormality in winning may be detected. For example, when a prize is detected other than when the jackpots 2005 and 2006 are open due to the jackpot being derived in the special symbol variation display game, or the start opening 2004 due to the winning being derived in the normal symbol variation display game. If a prize is detected other than during the opening of, the prize is abnormal. That is, the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 is an abnormal operation detected from the number of prize balls, and is mainly a case where a large number of prize balls are obtained in a predetermined time. On the other hand, the winning abnormality is an abnormal operation detected from the number of winning balls, and is mainly a case where a winning is not possible or a large number of winnings are detected at a predetermined time.

Since the winning ball related to this winning abnormality is counted as an out ball, it is desirable to correct this amount and calculate the base accurately. Therefore, in the base calculation area update process in consideration of the winning abnormality, the total number of out balls is corrected so as to reduce the number of winning balls related to the detected winning abnormality.

Normally, the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 and the starting opening 2004 are won only during the special prize, so the winning balls to these winning openings are not counted as out balls for calculating the base and are won. There is no need to consider anomalies.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process determines the current game state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and updates the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. To do. In particular, the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73 is the prize ball control process (step S80) in order to calculate the base value each time for each timer interrupt cycle, similarly to the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39. The total number of prize balls is directly updated using the number of prize balls calculated in (step S814), and the total number of out balls is directly updated using the number of out balls (step S822). In FIG. 73, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-described base calculation area update process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded.

If the game state is during the special prize, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base calculation area update process is terminated without updating the number of prize balls and the number of out balls. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811). The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation area update process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the sent payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command in which the main control board 1310 transmits the payout command to the payout control board 951 and the receipt confirmation (ACK) is received from the payout control board 951 may be used. Further, the number of prize balls (number of paid prize balls) may be used, in which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and the payout control board 951 reports that the payout is completed. This variation has been described with reference to FIGS. 41-44.

Then, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls to update the total number of prize balls (step S814). It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped. Further, although the game balls have won the starting ports 2002 and 2004, the holding is the upper limit value, and even if the winning to the starting opening is not held, the prize balls are paid out, so that the total number of prize balls is updated. In addition, in a gaming state in which a prize ball is not generated even if a game ball is won in the winning opening (for example, when a specific error occurs), the prize ball due to the winning is not generated and the number of prize balls to be acquired is large. Since it is 0, the total number of prize balls is not updated. The total number of prize balls is recorded in the total number of prize balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). Then, it is determined whether or not the winning abnormality is detected (step S826). Then, the number of game balls corresponding to the winning prize determined to be abnormal is acquired (step S827). Specifically, as described above, when a prize is detected in the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 other than during the special prize (when the condition device is operating) that occurs due to the derivation of the big hit in the special symbol variation display game. , If a prize is detected in the starting port 2004 even though the game is not open due to the fact that the hit is derived in the normal symbol variation display game, it is determined that the prize is abnormal.

If one winning ball related to the winning abnormality is detected, it may be determined to be a winning abnormality, or if a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are detected, it may be determined to be a winning abnormality. Further, if a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are continuously detected, it may be determined as a winning abnormality, and if a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are detected within a predetermined time, it is determined as a winning abnormality. You may.

Then, the total number of out balls is updated so as to add the acquired number of out balls to the total number of out balls (step S822). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020, the discharge ball sensor 3060, and the like, and the detection signals of these sensors are read and acquired by the switch input process in step S74. At this time, a value obtained by subtracting the number of winning balls due to abnormal winning from the acquired number of out balls may be added to the total number of out balls, or after adding the acquired number of out balls to the total number of out balls, the player wins a prize. The number of abnormally winning balls may be subtracted from the total number of out balls. The total number of out balls is recorded in the total number of out balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time an out ball is detected. In this way, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process, the total number of out balls is updated, and the base value is calculated and displayed by the base calculation display process (FIG. 40), so that the base value is displayed without delay. It is possible to judge whether the base value is normal or abnormal without delay.

In addition, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 74) described later, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to notify the prize ball abnormality. May be stopped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation process of the base value in the timer interrupt process, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may execute the calculation process of the base value. In this case, the main control board 1310 may transmit a command for notifying the base to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or the payout control unit 952 may send a command for notifying the peripheral control unit 1511 of the base. May be sent.

Further, even if information on both the winning and the out balls to the winning opening is acquired in one timer interrupt process, the number of prize balls is changed to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the embodiment described later). Add and add the number of out balls to the total number of out balls (or the out ball number buffer in the examples described later). Further, even if information on winning a prize in a plurality of winning openings is acquired in one timer interrupt process, the total number of prize balls due to the plurality of winnings is the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the embodiment described later). ). Therefore, the base value can be calculated and displayed accurately. For example, if a prize is detected in the winning opening sensor of the winning opening with 5 prize balls and the winning opening sensor of the winning opening with 3 winning balls, a total of 8 prize balls are used as the total number of winning balls. (Or, add to the prize ball count buffer).

Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer) only when the launch of the game balls is detected. That is, only the number of prize balls related to the prize detected within a predetermined time from the detection of the launch ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer). Further, the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launcher 680 is detected, and while the launch control unit 953 or the ball launcher 680 is operating (furthermore, the launch control unit 953 or the ball launcher 680 stops operating). Only the number of prize balls related to the winning detected within a predetermined time (for example, after 5 seconds) may be added to the total number of prize balls or the number of prize balls buffer. Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer) only when the player is operating the firing handle. That is, only the number of prize balls related to the prize detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when it is detected that the hand or finger is touching the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 is the total number of prize balls ( Alternatively, it may be added to the prize ball number buffer). In this way, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being reflected in the base value due to an abnormality or cheating that detects the prize ball when the game ball is not fired, and it is possible to prevent an inaccurate display of the base value. In this case, if the contact detection sensor 509 is used, it is not necessary to newly provide a sensor for detecting the launch of the game ball, so that an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 74, the number of out balls is recorded in the out ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition (step S819). In FIG. 74, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-described base calculation area update process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there is no prize ball as a result of the determination in step S812, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815), and if there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). .. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 74, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). The acquired number of out balls is added to the number of out balls buffer (step S819). Then, it is determined whether or not the winning abnormality is detected (step S826), and the number of game balls corresponding to the winning winning determined to be abnormal is acquired (step S827).

After that, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S824). Step S825).

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the out-balls are corrected by the number of all winning balls related to the winning abnormality, but the out-balls are corrected for the winning balls related to a specific type of winning abnormality, and the like. It is not necessary to correct the out ball for the winning ball that is affected by the specific type of winning abnormality. For example, depending on the type of winning ball related to the winning abnormality, the winning ball for the winning ball may or may not be paid out. Whether or not to pay out the prize ball for this winning abnormality should be determined for each winning opening. In this case, for a winning abnormality in which the winning ball is not paid out, the winning ball should not be counted as the total out ball and should not be used in the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, for prize-winning abnormalities in which prize balls are paid out, the prize-winning balls may be counted as total out balls, and the prize balls to be paid out may also be counted as the total number of prize balls and used in the calculation of the base value. Even if the prize balls are paid out abnormally, the prize balls are not counted as the total out balls, and the prize balls to be paid out are not counted as the total number of prize balls, and may not be used in the calculation of the base value.

For example, as a result of maintenance of a game machine failure (clearing a ball jam, etc.), a hall employee may manually insert a game ball into the starting port to compensate for the player to leave the ball so as not to damage it. In that case, a prize ball will be paid out for winning a prize at the starting port. The winning of this starting port is detected as a winning abnormality, but the winning ball is paid out. When the prize ball is paid out in this way, it should be reflected in the base value, so it is better not to judge that the prize is abnormal. In this case, the prize balls are paid out at the winning openings (starting openings 2002 and 2004) that are reflected in the calculation of the base value, the winning abnormality is not determined, and the winning balls are used at the other winning openings (large winning openings 2005 and 2006). It is advisable to judge the winning abnormality without paying out. The number of prize balls paid out by winning is smaller in the winning openings for determining the winning abnormality than in the winning openings for which the winning abnormality is not determined (the starting opening is 3 prize balls, and the large winning opening is 15 prize balls). For this reason, although the winning abnormality is determined at the large winning opening, even if the abnormal winning is not determined at the starting opening, it does not become a large security hole from the viewpoint of protection against fraudulent activities. In this way, by determining the winning abnormality, it is possible to prevent inconsistency between the out balls and the number of winning balls. In particular, by correcting the number of out balls by using the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality that does not generate a winning ball, the number of winning balls and the out ball that causes the winning ball can be matched.

As described above, the winning abnormality can be determined by various winning openings, but a specific implementation example on the pachinko machine will be described.

First, the general winning opening 2001 may not determine the winning abnormality, and the winning openings other than the general winning opening 2001 (large winning openings 2005, 2006, starting openings 2002, 2004) may determine the winning abnormality. Since it is difficult to win multiple gaming balls at the same time, the general winning openings are the large winning openings 2005, 2006 and the starting openings 2002, which are electric accessories that open and close while improving the security resistance of the gaming machine against fraudulent activities. The player can be compensated for the ball by entering the general winning openings 2001 (4 in total), which are provided more than 3 in total. Further, since the general winning opening 2001 can be easily identified by the employees of the hall, it is easy to operate the pachinko machine 1 for maintenance and ball ejection compensation. The reason why hall employees can easily identify the general winning opening 2001 is that the general winning opening 2001 is often arranged together (in separate areas) in the game area, and the electric accessory (large winning opening). This is because the decorative member (appearance) is different from that of 2005, 2006, starting ports 2002, 2004). Further, when the number of prize balls for one ball of the general prize opening is small, the security resistance of the gaming machine against fraudulent acts is improved. It should be noted that the winning abnormality may not be determined only by a specific general winning opening (for example, the left end), and the winning abnormality may be determined by another general winning opening.

In addition, the large winning openings 2005 and 2006, which have a large number of prize balls, do not determine the winning abnormality, and the winning openings other than the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 (general winning openings 2001, starting openings 2002, 2004, which have a small number of winning balls) are used to win a prize. An abnormality may be determined. Since the number of prize balls for one prize is large in the large prize opening, the base value changes greatly even with a small number of prize balls. Therefore, it is convenient to easily inspect the change in the base value when inspecting the pachinko machine. It should be noted that the winning abnormality may not be determined only by a specific large winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 2005 where it is easy to obtain a game ball by hand), and the winning abnormality may be determined by another large winning opening (for example, 2006). ..

Further, the starting ports 2002 and 2004 may not determine the winning abnormality, and the winning openings other than the starting ports 2002 and 2004 (general winning openings 2001, large winning openings 2005 and 2006) may determine the winning abnormality. Since the number of winning balls for one winning opening is smaller than that for the large winning opening, the player can be compensated for the ball output while improving the security resistance of the gaming machine to the goto. It should be noted that the winning abnormality may not be determined only by a specific starting port (for example, the starting port 2002 provided in the center of the game board is easy to understand the position), and the winning abnormality may be determined by another starting port 2004.

Further, at the large winning opening and the starting opening, the opening / closing member of the winning opening is in a position where it can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine. Instead, the opening / closing member of the winning opening may be determined so that the opening / closing member cannot be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, the winning opening is difficult for the employee of the hall to operate the opening / closing member. For example, a winning opening (so-called electric tulip) having a structure in which the opening / closing member is tilted at an oblique position so that the opening / closing member is vertically positioned in the closed state can be easily operated by a hall employee. On the other hand, in the closed state, the winning opening is closed by a flat plate-shaped member, and when the flat plate-shaped member retracts to the back, the entrance to the winning opening is opened. Is difficult to operate. In this way, the security level is relaxed only for the winning openings used to compensate the player for the ball, so that it is easy for the employees of the hall to understand and the security resistance of the gaming machine can be improved.

In addition, the detected winning abnormality may be notified. The method of notifying the winning abnormality may be the same as the method of notifying the winning ball number abnormality (for example, output of a security signal to an external terminal board, warning display on a display device such as a liquid crystal, a game board or a frame. The decoration lamp is lit or blinking, sound or sound effect, warning sound is output, etc.), but the notification of winning abnormality should be slower than the notification of other abnormalities. Specifically, the abnormal notification time is short, the characters that notify the abnormality are small, the lamp does not light during the abnormality notification, and the abnormality notification sound is made lower (suppressed) than the volume of the notification sound at the time of other abnormalities. ).

Further, in the notification of the winning abnormality, the abnormality is notified for a predetermined time after the winning abnormality is detected, and even if the winning abnormality is further detected during the predetermined time, the setting is first set without extending the predetermined time. It is advisable to end the notification or change the mode of notification at a predetermined time. In this way, when the winning abnormality occurs continuously for a predetermined time (for example, several minutes), it can be determined that the hall is maintaining the gaming machine, not the cheating by the player. Therefore, if the winning abnormality is notified only for a predetermined time and the notification is not continued after that, the work efficiency can be improved without interfering with the maintenance work of the gaming machine by the hall. Further, by changing the mode of notification after a predetermined time, it can be seen that the work is correctly continued without interfering with the maintenance work of the gaming machine. Specifically, it is preferable to stop the notification by sound (or reduce the volume) while the notification by the display device or the lamp is continued.

In summary, the gaming machine of the present embodiment has a correction means for correcting the number of out balls according to the number of winning balls, and the correction means classifies a plurality of winning openings into a plurality of types (starting opening, large winning opening). However, for the first type of winning openings, the number of out balls is corrected based on the winning balls detected other than when the predetermined conditions are met (during special prize), and for the second type of winning openings, the predetermined number of winning openings is used. The number of out balls is not corrected based on the winning balls detected except when the condition is satisfied (during the special prize). As a result, as described above, it is possible to prevent a deviation in the number of out balls when compensating the player due to maintenance of the gaming machine, and the number of out balls can be calculated accurately. In addition, an abnormal base value may be calculated due to a malfunction of the gaming machine, and the base value can be adjusted as the adjustment (maintenance). This makes it possible to calculate and display an accurate base value.

Up to this point, the detection of winning abnormalities and the exceptional handling of detection of winning abnormalities (when not detected) have been described, but the game balls judged to be winning abnormalities are not the prize balls acquired in the game, but the pachinko machine. Since there is a high possibility that it will be used for maintenance (adjustment of the base value), it is desirable that the winning balls for which the winning abnormality is determined are not reflected in the number of out balls and should not be used for the calculation of the base value.

Further, the winning abnormality detected in the base calculation area update process shown in FIGS. 73 and 74 may be notified. For example, in the fraud detection process (step S84) of the timer interrupt process, the winning abnormality display command is created with the winning abnormality as an abnormal state, and is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). The notification of the winning abnormality may be performed when one winning ball related to the winning abnormality is detected, or may be performed when a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are detected. Further, if a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are continuously detected, the winning abnormality may be notified, or if a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are detected within a predetermined time, the winning abnormality may be notified. Notification may be performed.

Further, the notification of the winning abnormality may be terminated after a lapse of a predetermined time, or may be terminated when the winning opening is opened (the condition device is activated).

It is not necessary to notify the winning abnormality.

[9-11. Base value calculation processing that takes advantage of the characteristics of the arithmetic circuit]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the arithmetic circuit 13121 performs the division process for calculating the base value, the base value can be calculated without interfering with other processes than the CPU 13111 executing the division programmatically. The base calculation process described so far has not taken advantage of this characteristic.

That is, in relation to the calculation of the base value, in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) described above, in the switch input process (step S74), the detection signals from the discharge ball sensor 3060 and the launch ball sensor 1020 are read to obtain the number of out balls. Is counted, and the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80). After that, in the base calculation area update process (step S98), the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the base calculation area 13128 are updated.

After that, in the base calculation / display process (step S89), the base value is calculated with reference to the number of prize balls and the number of out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the calculated base value is displayed on the base display 1317. indicate.

Since the timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined time intervals, the predetermined processing must be completed for each timer interrupt. Therefore, in the slow division processing by the program, the time-consuming processing is included in the timer interrupt processing. That is, it was difficult to include multiple base calculation processes in the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, by performing the division process using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required for calculating the base value can be shortened, the base value can be calculated a plurality of times in one timer interrupt process, and the base value can be displayed without delay.

Further, the CPU 13111 is not occupied for the division process from the writing of the value to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 to the reading of the arithmetic result from the division result register A131218. That is, the wait time of 32 clocks from the input timing of the divisor and the divisor to the output timing of the quotient can be effectively utilized, and other processing can be performed during this time. In other words, since the input timing of the divisor and the divisor and the output timing of the quotient are different, the degree of freedom of the base value calculation processing in the timer interrupt processing is improved.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing utilizing the characteristics of the arithmetic circuit. Since the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 75 is the same as the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) described above except for the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98), the description of the same process will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first switches the register by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the switch input process (step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Specifically, the number of out balls is read by reading the detection signal from the sensor that detects the winning ball, the detection signal from the switch that detects cheating, the discharge ball sensor 3060, and the detection signal from the launch ball sensor 1020. To count.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation process 1 (step S97). In the base calculation process 1, the total number of out balls is updated using the number of out balls counted in step S74, and the base value is calculated. Details of the base calculation process 1 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 and 78.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the timer update process (step S76) and the random number update process 1 (step S78).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the prize ball control process (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out based on the read input information is calculated, and the number is written to the main control built-in RAM 1312. Also, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out the game balls is created.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation process 2 (step S98). In the base calculation process 2, the total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls calculated in step S80, and the base value is calculated. Details of the base calculation process 2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 77 and 79.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 has a frame command reception process (step S82), a fraud detection process (step S84), a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86), and a normal symbol and an ordinary electric accessory. The control process (step S88) is executed. Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the output data setting process (step S90) and the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to clear. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is terminated and the process returns to the processing before the interrupt.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 1 (step S97).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, since it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the total number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls. The number of out balls is updated (step S9705). If the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the number of out balls acquired is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load of the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 1 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of out balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9708). Then, after the elapse of a predetermined time (32 clocks), the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of out balls) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value (step S9709).

After that, in the same manner as in step S908 described above, a base notification command is generated (step S9710), and the base (base value or abnormality of the base value) is notified to the player or the hall employee. The base notification command is a display command for the peripheral control unit 1511 when the base value is notified by the display device (effect display device 1600, 3114, 244) or the speaker 921 controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 or the effect display control unit 1512. And sound output commands. Further, when the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 is used for notification, since these display devices are composed of 7-segment LEDs and LED lamps, the base notification command is sent to the LED element. It is a drive signal. Specifically, when the 7-segment LED is driven by the driver, the drive signal including the character code set in the driver (character generator in the driver) is the base notification command. When the 7-segment LED is directly driven, the drive signal for lighting each LED element is the base notification command.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 2 (step S98).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded.

As a result, if the gaming state is in the special prize, the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls is updated (step S9809). If the number of prize balls cannot be obtained or the number of prize balls obtained is 0, the base calculation process 2 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load of the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated. Therefore, the base value is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of out balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9812). When the total number of prize balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but the base value does not have to be calculated. Further, when the total number of prize balls is larger than the total number of outs, a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value, but the base value does not have to be calculated. Then, after a predetermined time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of out balls) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value (step S9813).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S9814), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

Since the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 76 and 77 is executed for each timer interrupt process, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that the base calculation process 1 and the base calculation process 2 may not be executed for each timer interrupt process, but may be executed for each timer interrupt process for a predetermined time (for example, one minute having a cycle longer than the timer interrupt process). By not executing the base calculation display process for each timer interrupt process, the amount of calculation required for calculating the base value (for example, the load of the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced as compared with the case where the base value is calculated for each timer interrupt process.

Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98) will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 79. In the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of out balls and for each predetermined number of prize balls.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 1 (step S97).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, since it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the out ball number buffer. The number of balls buffer is updated (step S9703). If the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the number of out balls acquired is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load of the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out balls is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the out-ball number buffer value and the threshold Th2 may be compared, or the value of a predetermined bit in the out-ball number storage area may be used for determination (specifically, the out-ball number storage area is 8 bits. If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

Then, if the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 1 is terminated.

On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is the threshold Th2 or more, the total out-ball number buffer value is updated so as to add the out-ball number buffer value to the total out-ball number (step S9705), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0. Set (step S9706).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 1 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of out balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9708). Then, after the elapse of a predetermined time (32 clocks), the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of out balls) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value (step S9709).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S9710), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 2 (step S98).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and there are prize balls, that is, the acquired number of prize balls is 1 or more. (Step S9803). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S9808 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S9805), and if there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer. The number of balls buffer is updated (step S9804).

On the other hand, if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806) to notify the player and the hall employee that the prize balls are abnormal. There are various methods for notifying the abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more may be used. Specifically, various methods described in step S816 of FIG. 46 can be adopted.

An abnormality in the number of prize balls is, for example, a prize corresponding to 10 or more prizes per minute in consideration of the number of prize balls at a predetermined time other than during a special prize (for example, the number of prize balls at a general prize opening or a starting opening). For example, when a ball) is obtained. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls by providing a permissible range in a plurality of stages.

Then, the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality is reset (step S9807), and the counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

Then, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1. For example, the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold Th1 may be compared, or the value of a predetermined bit in the prize ball number storage area may be used for determination (specifically, the prize ball number storage area is 8 bits. If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

Then, if the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 2 is terminated without calculating the base.

On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold Th1 or more, the total prize ball number is updated so as to add the prize ball number buffer value to the total prize ball number (step S9809), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0. Set (step S9810).

Each time the prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer, the prize ball number may be output from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer installed in the amusement park, and the prize ball number described later becomes a predetermined threshold Th1 or more. In some cases, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and the number of prize balls to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1 is temporarily stored.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated. Therefore, the base value is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of out balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9812). Then, after a predetermined time (32 clocks) has elapsed, the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of out balls) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value (step S9813).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S9814), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

After that, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer activated in step S9807 has timed up (step S9815). Then, when the time is up for the prize ball abnormality notification timer, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S9816). In step S9815, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time, but the end of the notification is determined so as to notify the prize ball abnormality by a predetermined number of launched balls. You may. In addition, the abnormality may be continuously notified until the hall employee confirms it.

FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing another example of timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 80 is the same as the timer interrupt process (FIGS. 23 and 75) described above except for the base calculation process (steps S93 and S94) and the base display process (step S95). Is omitted.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first switches the register by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the switch input process (step S74). In the switch input process, the detection signals from the discharge ball sensor 3060 and the launch ball sensor 1020 are read to count the number of out balls.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation process 3 (step S93). In the base calculation process 3, the total number of out balls is updated using the number of out balls counted in step S74, and a parameter for calculating the base value is written in the calculation circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 3 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 and 84.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the timer update process (step S76) and the random number update process 1 (step S78).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the prize ball control process (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out based on the read input information is calculated, and the number is written to the main control built-in RAM 1312. Also, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out the game balls is created.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation process 4 (step S94). In the base calculation process 2, the total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls counted in step S80, and the parameters for calculating the base value are written in the calculation circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 4 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 and 85.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 has a frame command reception process (step S82), a fraud detection process (step S84), a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86), and a normal symbol and an ordinary electric accessory. The control process (step S88) is executed.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a base display process that reads from the arithmetic circuit 13121 and generates a command for notifying the base (step S95).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the output data setting process (step S90) and the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to clear. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is terminated and the process returns to the processing before the interrupt.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 3 (step S93). The base calculation process 3 shown in FIG. 81 is obtained by removing steps S9709 and subsequent steps from the base calculation process 1 shown in FIG. 76.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, since it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the total number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls. The number of out balls is updated (step S9705). If the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the number of out balls acquired is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load of the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 3 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 4 (step S94). The base calculation process 4 shown in FIG. 82 is obtained by removing steps S9813 and subsequent steps from the base calculation process 2 shown in FIG. 77.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls is updated (step S9809). If the number of prize balls cannot be obtained or the number of prize balls obtained is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load of the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated. Therefore, the base value is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

In step S9708 of FIG. 81, the total number of out balls is not stored in the division input register B131217, and in step S9812 of FIG. 82, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is the division input register A131216. The total number of out balls may be stored in the division input register B131217.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the base display process (step S95).

The main control MPU 1311 reads the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of out balls) from the division result register A131218 and uses it as the base value (step S8901). After that, a base notification command is generated (step S8902), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

Since the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 and the base display process shown in FIG. 83 are executed for each timer interrupt process, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that the base calculation process 1 and the base calculation process 2 may not be executed for each timer interrupt process, but may be executed for each timer interrupt process for a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute).

Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97, S98) will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 85. In the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of out balls and for each predetermined number of prize balls.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 3 (step S93). The base calculation process 3 shown in FIG. 84 is obtained by removing steps S9709 and subsequent steps from the base calculation process 1 shown in FIG. 78.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, since it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the out ball number buffer. The number of balls buffer is updated (step S9703). If the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the number of out balls acquired is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load of the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out balls is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold Th2. For example, the out-ball number buffer value and the threshold Th2 may be compared, or the value of a predetermined bit in the out-ball number storage area may be used for determination (specifically, the out-ball number storage area is 8 bits. If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

Then, if the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 1 is terminated.

On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is the threshold Th2 or more, the total out-ball number buffer value is updated so as to add the out-ball number buffer value to the total out-ball number (step S9705), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0. Set (step S9706).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 1 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 4 (step S94). The base calculation process 4 shown in FIG. 85 is obtained by removing steps S9813 and subsequent steps from the base calculation process 2 shown in FIG. 79.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and there are prize balls, that is, the acquired number of prize balls is 1 or more. (Step S9803). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S9808 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S9805), and if there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer. The number of balls buffer is updated (step S9804).

On the other hand, if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806) to notify the player and the hall employee that the prize balls are abnormal. There are various methods for notifying the abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more may be used. Specifically, various methods described in step S816 of FIG. 46 can be adopted.

An abnormality in the number of prize balls means that, for example, a large number of prize balls (for example, 10 or more prizes per minute considering the number of prize balls at the general prize opening and the starting opening) can be obtained at a predetermined time other than during the special prize. For example. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls by providing a permissible range in a plurality of stages.

Then, the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality is reset (step S9807), and the counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

Then, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1. For example, the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold Th1 may be compared, or the value of a predetermined bit in the prize ball number storage area may be used for determination (specifically, the prize ball number storage area is 8 bits. If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

Then, if the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 2 is terminated without calculating the base.

On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold Th1 or more, the total prize ball number is updated so as to add the prize ball number buffer value to the total prize ball number (step S9809), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0. Set (step S9810).

Each time the prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer, the prize ball number may be output from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer installed in the amusement park, and the prize ball number described later becomes a predetermined threshold Th1 or more. In some cases, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and the number of prize balls to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1 is temporarily stored.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated. Therefore, the base value is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

In step S9708 of FIG. 84, the total number of out balls is not stored in the division input register B131217, and in step S9812 of FIG. 85, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is the division input register A131216. The total number of out balls may be stored in the division input register B131217.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing another example of the base display process (step S95).

The main control MPU 1311 reads the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of out balls) from the division result register A131218 and uses it as the base value (step S8901). After that, a base notification command is generated (step S8902), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

After that, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer activated in step S9807 of the base calculation process 4 has timed up (step S8903). Then, when the time is up for the prize ball abnormality notification timer, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S8904). In step S8903, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time, but the end of the notification is determined so as to notify the prize ball abnormality by a predetermined number of shot balls. May be good. In addition, the abnormality may be continuously notified until the hall employee confirms it.

As shown in FIGS. 75 and 80, in the timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, before the timer interrupt processing ends (before the timer interrupt cycle elapses and the next timer interrupt processing starts), the arithmetic circuit The input values (divisors and divisors) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 are written at the timing when the division result can be read from the 13121. Specifically, the write timing of the input value (divisor, divisor) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 is the first half of the timer interrupt process, before the random number update process (step S78), or a special symbol or a normal symbol. It is better before the control process (steps S86, S88).

Further, it may be determined whether or not the process of calculating the base value is executed based on the number of game media (prize balls) given to the player. That is, from the viewpoint of the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening, it may be switched whether to use the number of prize balls or the number of out balls in the calculation of the base value. For example, the winning ball of the winning opening that gives the maximum winning ball to one winning ball does not have to be used in the calculation of the base value.

Specifically, the number of prize game media (prize balls paid out for one prize ball) to be given when the game medium defined for each prize opening provided in the game area wins is one, three. In the case of 3 types of 5 pieces, the maximum number of 5 prize balls and the corresponding number of out balls need not be used in the calculation of the base value. This is because when a prize with a large number of prize balls is used to calculate the base value, the change in the calculated base value becomes large, and the lower digits of the calculated base value are rounded by the processing means (rounding, rounding up, rounding down, etc.). Even if it is displayed, the displayed value may change frequently. In such a case, it becomes difficult to judge from the hole whether the pachinko machine is exhibiting a predetermined performance (for example, whether the set ball ejection rate is met).

Further, it is not necessary to use the minimum number of prize balls and the corresponding number of out balls in the calculation of the base value. This is because the change in the base value due to a prize with a small number of prize balls is small, so even if the one prize ball is not used in the calculation of the base value, the lower digit of the base value calculated by the processing means is rounded. When displayed (rounded, rounded up, rounded down, etc.), the displayed base value may not change, so processing that does not contribute to the change in display may be omitted.

Further, although the case where the number of prize balls is the maximum and the case where the number of prize balls is the minimum is described, it is not necessary to use the number of prize balls of the intermediate value between the maximum and the minimum in the calculation of the base value. In this case, since the maximum and minimum number of prize balls are used in the calculation of the base value, the number of prize balls and the number of out balls that represent the operation of the entire pachinko machine are shown by averaging the maximum and minimum, which is appropriate. The base value can be shown.

Although the pattern of the number of prize balls of three types has been described, the pattern of the number of prize balls of other types such as five types and seven types is not limited to the three types.

Furthermore, if the winning number of prize balls of a specific type (1 of the minimum value mentioned above, 3 of the intermediate value, 5 of the maximum value, etc.) is not used in the calculation of the base value, the winning will be awarded. All winnings in the gaming state when detected need not be used to calculate the base value. For example, if the winning of the winning opening that grants five prize balls is not used in the calculation of the base value, in the gaming state in which the winning of the winning opening is detected, the winning is achieved until the end of the gaming state. Do not use mouths or other winning mouths to calculate the base value. In addition, even after the start of the game state, the winning openings and other winning openings are not retroactively used in the calculation of the base value.

In addition, the winning when the gaming state when the winning is detected does not have to be used for the calculation of the base value, and the gaming state when the winning is detected transitions to another gaming state. It is not necessary to use the winning prizes up to to calculate the base value. This is because the pachinko machine is normal (for example, is it according to the set ball output rate) by not using the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the game state in which the calculated base value changes greatly in the calculation of the base value? This is to eliminate the possibility of delaying the judgment of.

It should be noted that the prize balls that are the maximum (or the minimum, the middle) for one winning ball when the number of prize balls changes depending on the game state need not be used in the calculation of the base value.

Next, a specific process will be described in which the number of prize balls and the number of out balls are not used in the calculation of the base value depending on the number of game media (prize balls) described above.

In the switch input process (step S74), when the detection signal from each winning opening sensor is input to the main control board 1310, it may be determined whether the main control MPU 1311 uses the winning in the calculation of the base value. .. Then, for prizes that are determined not to be used in the calculation of the base value, the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls for calculating the base value may not be updated, or the calculation process of the base value may not be executed. To do. More specifically, for example, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 75, in the base calculation process 1 (step S97), the number of winning balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value is set to 0 and excluded from the number of out balls, and the base is calculated. In process 2 (step S98), the number of prize balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value may be set to 0 and not added to the total number of prize balls. Further, when all the detected prizes are not used for the calculation of the base value, it is not necessary to execute the base calculation process 1 (step S97) and the base calculation process 2 (step S98) of FIG. 75.

Further, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 80, in the base calculation process 3 (step S93), the number of winning balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value is set to 0 and excluded from the number of out balls, and the base calculation process 4 (step S94). In, the number of prize balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value should be set to 0 and not added to the total number of prize balls. Further, when all the detected prizes are not used for the calculation of the base value, the base calculation process 3 (step S93), the base calculation process 4 (step S94), and the base display process (step S95) of FIG. 80 are not executed. You may.

As a method of excluding the number of winning balls determined not to be used in the calculation of the base value from the number of out balls, the same method as the correction of out balls due to abnormal winning described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74 may be adopted.

In this case, since it is determined from the number of winning balls whether the detected prize is used for calculating the base value, the base calculation process 1 (step S97), the base calculation process 2 (step S98), and the base calculation process 3 ( In step S93) and base calculation process 4 (step S94), it is not necessary to determine whether or not the prize is being awarded.

In this way, by excluding the number of out balls and the number of winning balls required for a predetermined winning from the calculation of the base value, the processing is executed without skipping, so that it is easy to check whether the processing is correctly executed especially in the development stage. Can be confirmed. Further, by not updating the base value without executing the process of calculating the base value, the process of the main control MPU 1311 is reduced, and other processes (lottery process, process of determining the fluctuation pattern, etc.) are accurately executed. it can.

That is, among a plurality of prizes having different degrees of advantage, even if the maximum prize is given to the player, it is not used in the calculation of the base value, and the base value is displayed unchanged by the grant of the prize. The prize. Further, the calculated base value is displayed unchanged at least until the game state in which the maximum prize is given is completed.

[9-12. Another configuration of a gaming machine that displays the base]
FIG. 87 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, unlike the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 17, a board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is provided on the game board 5 as a discharge ball sensor 3060, and a frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is a main body frame. It is provided in 4. Either one of the panel-side discharge ball sensor 3060A and the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be provided, or both may be provided.

As described above, the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is an out-port passing ball sensor 1021 that detects a game ball passing through the out-port 1111 provided in the lower part of the game area 5a (see FIG. 53). The output signal of the panel-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is input to the main control board 1310 and input to the main control MPU 1311 as will be described later with reference to FIG. 92. In this case, the number of game balls detected by the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 and the number of game balls detected by the start port sensors 2104 and 2551, and the number of game balls detected by various winning port sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, and 2557. The total with the number is taken as the number of out balls.

As described above, the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is provided at the discharge port for discharging the game ball discharged from the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). The output signal of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and the connector connecting the main body frame 4 and the game board 5.

When both the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A and the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B are provided, the count result of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A and the count result of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B are compared, and two count results are obtained. An error may be notified when a difference of more than a predetermined value occurs. Further, when a difference of more than a predetermined value occurs between the two counting results within a predetermined time, an error may be notified.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the display switch 1318 is not an indispensable configuration, and the display contents (provisional section display and fixed section display) of the base display 1317 can be switched at predetermined time intervals as described later. (See FIG. 99), the base value may be displayed or the display content may be switched by operating the display switch 1318.

The configuration other than the above is the same as the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.

88 and 89 are views showing the arrangement of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B.

FIG. 88 shows an example of a mechanism in which out balls are aligned in one row in a ball flow path 960 provided in the main body frame 4 on the back surface side of the game board, and one frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B counts out balls. .. The game ball that rolls in the game area 5a flows into the main body frame 4 on the back surface side of the game board 5 via the out opening 1111, the general winning opening 2001, the large winning opening 2005, and 2006. The main body frame 4 is provided with a ball flow path 960 that allows the discharged game balls to flow down to the right side of the front view and align them in one row. The frame-side ejection ball sensor 3060B counts the game balls arranged in one row.

FIG. 89 shows an example of a mechanism in which out balls arranged in a ball flow path 960 provided on the back surface of the game board are allowed to flow down by two rows and counted by a plurality of discharge ball sensors 3060. The game ball that rolls in the game area 5a flows into the main body frame 4 on the back surface side of the game board 5 via the out opening 1111, the general winning opening 2001, the starting ports 2002, 2004, and the large winning opening 2005, 2006. The main body frame 4 is provided with a ball flow path 960 in which the discharged game balls flow down from the left and right to the vicinity of the center and are aligned in two rows. Each of the two frame-side ejection ball sensors 3060B counts the game balls arranged in each row.

Although the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is provided at the position shown in FIGS. 53, 88, and 89, it may be unitized together with the ball flow path 960 so as to be detachable from the main body frame 4. Further, the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be configured to be detachable from the main body frame 4.

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example of connection between the discharge ball sensor and the main control board.

The output line of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected to the connector 13101 provided on the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and the output signal of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is input to the main control MPU 1311. The output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected to the connector 13102 provided on the main control board 1310, and the output signal of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control MPU 1311.

The connector 13101 to which the output line of the panel side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected is preferably provided on the upper side of the main control board 1310, and the connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected is the main control board 1310. It should be provided on the lower side.

The connector 13101 to which the output line of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected and the connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B are connected are provided separately. The output line of the 3060A and the output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to one connector (for example, 13102).

The output line of the panel-side discharge ball sensor 3060A may be connected to the main control board 1310 without passing through the relay board. The output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be directly connected to the main control board 1310. The output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via a relay board (not shown). After connecting the output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B to the payout control board 951 or the relay board, it is connected to the main control board 1310 via a connector (for example, a floating connector) that connects the game board 5 and the main body frame 4. You may.

Further, the pachinko machine of this embodiment is provided with a plurality of magnetic detection sensors 1030. The output signal of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is input to the main control MPU 1311 as described later with reference to FIG. 92.

FIG. 91 is a front view showing an example of the game board 5, and in particular, shows the arrangement of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided on the game board 5.

The magnetic detection sensor 1030 is a sensor that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and is in the vicinity of a sensor that detects winning in various winning openings 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, and 2006 (positions of stars in the figure). It is provided in. The detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is indicated by a broken line on the game board 5, and partially overlaps.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is also provided in the vicinity of the out port 1111. This is to prevent incorrect base value calculation. That is, when the player operates the discharge ball sensor 3060 by bringing the magnet close to the out port 1111, the number of out balls is counted more than the actual number and the base value is lowered. For this reason, the game store may perform maintenance work on the pachinko machine 1 so as to return the base value to a predetermined standard value. In a pachinko machine whose maintenance work is performed based on a base value different from the actual one, the number of balls released in the normal state increases, the player can play in a more advantageous state than usual, and a large number of balls can be obtained. A magnetic detection sensor 1030 is provided in the vicinity of the out port 1111 in order to calculate an accurate base value and prevent such illegal payout of the ball. It is preferable to provide the magnetic detection sensor 1030 in a place other than the vicinity of the out port 1111 where the discharge ball sensor 3060 may malfunction due to magnetism.

As shown in the figure, the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided near the out port 1111 should have a wider detection range than the other magnetic detection sensors 1030. This is because, as shown in FIG. 89, when the out-balls are detected by the plurality of discharge ball sensors 3060, the magnetism is detected within a sufficient range that can cover the plurality of discharge ball sensors 3060. Further, the magnetic detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided in the vicinity of the out port 1111 may include another winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 2005 provided in the upper part of the out opening 1111).

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control input circuit 1315. The main control input circuit 1315 includes a discharge ball sensor 3060 and a winning port sensor (general winning port sensor 3015, first starting port sensor 2104, second starting port sensor 2551, first large winning port sensor 2114, second upper large winning port sensor). The output signals of the sensor 2554, the second lower prize opening sensor 2557, etc.) and the magnetic detection sensor 1030 are received and input to the main control MPU 1311.

The main control input circuit 1315 includes an interface circuit 1331 and a buffer circuit 1332. The interface circuit 1331 outputs signals input from various sensors after level conversion and shaping (for example, chattering removal). The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the input signal to the data bus at the timing instructed by the main control MPU 1311.

Specifically, the output signal from each sensor is input to any of the terminals A1 to A8 of the interface circuit 1331, and the signal level-converted or shaped by the interface circuit 1331 is output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals and buffered. It is input to any of the terminals A1 to A8 of the circuit 1332. The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the signals input to the Y1 to Y8 terminals to the data bus at the timing when the chip select signals CS4 and CS5 of the main control MPU 1311 are input. As a result, the detection result by each sensor is taken into the main control MPU 1311.

The interface circuit 1331 includes an abnormality detection circuit and a power supply monitoring circuit. The abnormality detection circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the input of the A1 to A8 terminals, and the input signal to each terminal is at a level lower than a predetermined threshold (for example, 4V) or a predetermined threshold (for example, power supply voltage-). When the level becomes higher than 0.1V), a disconnection of the connection wire to the switch or a short circuit of the switch is detected, and when the input of any terminal exceeds the normal range defined by the predetermined threshold value, the abnormal signal E Is output, and a signal at a level at which each sensor is OFF is output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals regardless of the input signals of the A1 to A8 terminals. The power supply monitoring circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the power supply voltage VS, and when the power supply voltage becomes a level lower than a predetermined threshold value (for example, 12V-20%) and detects an abnormality in the power supply, an abnormality signal E is output. At the same time, a signal at a level at which each sensor is OFF is output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals regardless of the input signals of the A1 to A8 terminals. That is, even if an ON level signal is input from the sensor, the output of the interface circuit with respect to the input becomes the OFF level. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 does not determine that the signal output from the sensor is valid (the output of the sensor is invalid). As a result, the main control MPU 1311 does not need to determine whether or not to execute the processing of the input signal depending on whether or not the power supply of the switch is reduced, the processing load can be reduced, and the output signals of Y1 to Y8 can be output. Regardless of the state of the input signals A1 to 8, each sensor can output a signal at a level of OFF.

As will be described later, when the main control MPU 1311 detects an abnormal signal, it does not calculate the base value (see FIG. 105). Signals from sensors used to calculate the base value (number of ejected balls, number of prize balls) and signals from sensors not used to calculate the base value (gate sensor 2547, etc.) are input to the interface circuit 1331. .. The interface circuit 1331 outputs an abnormal signal when any of the input signals becomes abnormal. Therefore, even if an abnormality is detected in the sensor that is not related to the calculation of the base, the calculation of the base is not executed, and the display content of the base display 1317 is maintained and does not change.

That is, the main control input circuit 1315 monitors the signal from the sensor used for calculating the base value and the signal from the sensor not used for calculating the base value, and when any of the signals becomes abnormal, Output an abnormal signal to stop the base calculation.

93, 94, and 95 are diagrams showing a mounting example of the main control board 1310. FIG. 93 (A) shows an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, and FIG. 93 (B) shows an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are one. An example of being connected to the driver circuit 1334 is shown. FIG. 94 shows the arrangement of the main control MPU 1311, the base display 1317, and the main control board 1310. 95 (A) is a front view of the main control board 1310 housed in the main control board box 1320, FIG. 95 (B) is a bottom view, and FIG. 95 (C) is a right side view.

As shown in FIGS. 93 (A) and 93 (B), the main control I / O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334.

In the example shown in FIG. 93A, the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and taken into different latch circuits 1333. Then, display data is output from the different driver circuits 1334 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317.

In the example shown in FIG. 93B, the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and incorporated into one latch circuit 1333. Then, the display data is output from one driver circuit 1334 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 93A and 93B, a reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 and a clock signal from the clock oscillator 1336 are input to the main control MPU 1311. It is preferable that the signal line from which the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 is output from the main control MPU 1311 does not intersect with the signal line of the reset signal or the clock signal.

The connector 13101 is a connector to which the output line of the panel-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected, and may be provided on the upper side of the main control board 1310. Not only the output line from the panel side discharge ball sensor 3060A, but also the output lines from other winning opening sensors 3015, 2104, etc., and the magnetic detection sensor 1030 are connected to the connector 13101. The connector 13102 is a connector to which the output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected, and may be provided under the main control board 1310. The signal from the discharge ball sensor 3060 input to the connectors 13101 and 13102 is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the interface circuit 1331 and the buffer circuit 1332.

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the components arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 on the main control board 1310. FIG. 94 is a view showing the printed circuit board constituting the main control board 1310 from the back surface side. The solid line is the pattern on the back surface side, the broken line is the pattern on the component side, and the dotted line is the component mounted on the component surface of the printed circuit board. Is shown. The illustration of the ground pattern and the power supply pattern is omitted.

The data lines (D1 to D8) output from the main control MPU 1311 are input to the latch 2 (1333), and the segment on the cathode side of each digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 via the driver 2 (1334). Connected to the terminal.

Further, a part of the data lines (D1 to D4) output from the main control MPU 1311 is input to the latch 1 (1333), and each digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 via the driver 1 (1334). It is connected to the common terminal on the anode side of.

A chip select signal for controlling the operation timing of the latch circuit 1333 is output from the main control MPU 1311. Specifically, the latch circuit 2 (1333) is the timing at which the chip select signal CS2 of the main control MPU 1311 is input. Then, the data for controlling the blinking of each segment is taken in from the data lines (D1 to D8). Further, the latch circuit 1 (1333) takes in data for controlling the blinking of each digit from the data lines (D1 to D4) at the timing when the chip select signal CS3 of the main control MPU 1311 is input.

A reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 and a clock signal from the clock oscillator 1336 are input to the main control MPU 1311. Further, the reset signal is also input from the reset circuit 1335 to each latch circuit 1333, and the latch circuit 1333 clears the latched data by the reset signal.

The data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 are arranged so as not to intersect with the signal lines of the reset signal and the clock signal. Similarly, although not shown, the data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the function display unit 1400 are arranged so as not to intersect with the signal lines of the reset signal and the clock signal.

This is because in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the base display 1317 is controlled by dynamic lighting, a pulse signal is transmitted in the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317, and the main control MPU 1311 and the main control MPU 1311 The level changes frequently on the data line to and from the base indicator 1317. In particular, a large current required to drive the LED element flows between the driver circuit 1334 and the base display 1317. Therefore, the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 (particularly between the driver circuit 1334 and the base display 1317) causes noise. Then, when the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 intersects with the signal line of the reset signal or the clock signal, noise is placed on the signal line of the reset signal or the clock signal, and the pachinko machine 1 malfunctions. there's a possibility that. The intersection of the signal lines can also occur at the intersection of the wiring patterns on the front surface and the back surface of the printed circuit board, or the intersection of the wiring patterns of the inner layer and the front surface layer (front surface, back surface).

Specifically, by inputting a reset signal to the main control MPU 1311 at a timing that cannot occur originally, the main control MPU 1311 may be reset during the game, and the game may be stopped or the game state may be erased. .. If the game state is erased at a timing that cannot occur originally, the normal power off processing is not executed and the game is reset, so that the data stored in the RAM 1312 is cleared, the jackpot ends, or the variable display is displayed. The game ends in the middle, or the hold of the special symbol variation display game or the normal symbol variation display game is deleted.

The main control board box 1320 is partially low in height and high in other parts depending on the height of the parts attached to the main control board 1310 and the interference with other members when assembled. It has become. For example, as shown in FIG. 95, since the main control MPU 1311 has a high height, the height of the main control board box 1320 is high at the place where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted, and the place where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted. In the area on the left side of the main control board box 1320, the height of the main control board box 1320 is high, and components such as a relatively tall electrolytic capacitor are mounted. On the other hand, the height of the main control board box 1320 is low in the area on the right side of the place where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted, and parts such as a short IC are mounted (tall parts cannot be arranged). The height of the main control board box 1320 is high, and the area where a high-height component can be mounted is indicated by hatching. Further, in the area where the connectors 13101 and 13102 are attached, the main control board box 1320 is formed at a height equal to or less than the surface on which the mating connector is inserted / removed (preferably the same height as the board surface). It is advisable not to hinder the insertion and removal of the cable (connector) connected to the board of.

In this way, by partially changing the height of the main control board box 1320 according to the height of the parts mounted on the board, it is possible to suppress the goto action of attaching an illegal part (circuit) on the main control board. it can.

In FIG. 95, the base display 1317 is arranged in the upper right part of the main control board 1310, but even if the main body frame 4 is opened by a predetermined angle for the convenience of maintenance, the display content is based at a position where it is difficult for the player to see. The display 1317 may be arranged. For example, if the player can visually recognize the display content of the base display 1317 when the main body frame 4 is opened by a predetermined angle for maintenance during business (checking for the presence or absence of a game ball in the replenishment tank), the player In many cases, the player does not correctly understand how to read the display of the base display 1317. Therefore, the player may be asked to explain the display contents of the base display 1317 in order to prevent such complexity. In addition, it is preferable to arrange the base display 1317 at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the displayed contents. Further, by arranging the base display 1317 in this way, it is possible to suppress inquiries from the player. That is, the base display 1317 displays the base value for the operation of 52,000 out balls at the maximum, but since it is different from the base value in the short-time game by the player, a complaint about the ball output rate may occur. There is. By arranging the base display 1317 in this way, complaints from the player can be suppressed. The above is the same for the above-mentioned accessory ratio indicator 1317, and it is preferable to arrange the accessory ratio indicator 1317 at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the displayed contents.

As shown in the figure, since the base display (7-segment LED) 1317 has a low height, it is mounted in a region where the height of the main control board box 1320 is low.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control I / O port 1314, and as shown in FIG. 93 (A), an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334. It is a circuit diagram. In this embodiment, an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are composed of a light emitting diode (LED) will be described, but they may be composed of a lamp (bulb) or another light emitting element. The main control I / O port 1314 is arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400, and outputs the display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400. To do.

As mentioned above, the main control I / O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334.

The latch circuit 1333 captures the input data at the timing of the clock signal, holds it until the next clock signal or clear signal is input, and outputs the data. The driver circuit 1334 operates a switching transistor according to the input signal, and outputs a power supply voltage (+ 12V) input to the VCS terminal of the driver circuit 1334, respectively.

Specifically, the latch circuit 1333 takes in the bus data input to the D1 to D8 terminals at the rising timing of the clock signal CK, and outputs the bus data from the Q1 to Q8 terminals to the driver circuit 1334, respectively. The driver circuit 1334 operates the switching transistor according to the signal input to the I1 to I8 terminals, and changes the voltage of the O1 to O8 terminals, respectively. The outputs O1 to O8 of the driver circuit 1334 are connected to the segment terminals of the 7-segment LEDs constituting the base display 1317 and the 7-segment LEDs of the function display unit 1400.

For example, in order to light the 7-segment LED (7seg1) of the first digit of the base display 1317, the driver 2 (1334) sends the bus data D1 to D8 captured in the latch 2 (1333) at the rising timing of the CS1. Output as segment data (LOW when lit). Further, the drive timing of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal. That is, at the rising timing of CS0, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 captured in the latch 1 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven). Specifically, if the bus data D1 is HIGH at the rising timing of CS0, COM1 output from the driver 1 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the first-digit 7-segment LED (7seg1) of the base display 1317 is set. Driven.

Further, in order to light the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, the bus data D1 to D8 taken into the latch 3 (1333) is transferred by the driver 3 (1334) at the rising timing of the CS2, and the segment data (LOW when lit). ) Is output. Further, the drive timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, at the rising timing of CS3, the driver 4 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 taken into the latch 4 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven). Specifically, if the bus data D1 is HIGH at the rising timing of CS3, the O1 terminal of the driver 4 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the 7-segment LED (LED-C1) of the function display unit 1400 is driven.

In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED of both the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 is an anode common type, a current flows from the driver 1 to the driver 2 in the 7-segment LED. Therefore, the outputs of the drivers 1 and 4 when the segment is lit are VCS (+ 12V), and the outputs of the drivers 2 and 3 are GND (0V).

The latches 1 and 4 (1333) on the common side output the data input from the data bus to the Q1 to Q8 terminals as they are, but the latches 1 and 4 (1333) have a decoder function and the data bus. A signal may be output from any of the terminals Q1 to Q8 according to the binary data obtained from.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 93A and 96, the signal output timing when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 will be described.

The segment data sent from the driver 2 (1334) to the base display 1317 and the common data sent from the driver 1 (1334) to the base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt processing. Further, the segment data sent from the driver 3 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 and the common data sent from the driver 4 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 are also output in the same timer interrupt processing. That is, since both the common data and the segment data are sent to the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 by different signal lines, both the display data to the base display 1317 and the display data to the function display unit 1400 can be displayed. Output in one timer interrupt process.

Then, in the next timer interrupt process, the common data for selecting the next digit (LED group) is output, and the segment data for controlling the lighting of each LED is output at the same timing as the output of the common data.

The display data on the base display 1317 and the display data on the function display unit 1400 are generated by another process in the timer interrupt process, and are output at different timings in the timer interrupt process. That is, the main control MPU 1311 generates and outputs display data to the base display 1317 by executing the base calculation / display code 13135 outside the game control area. On the other hand, the main control MPU 1311 generates and outputs display data to the function display unit 1400 by executing the game control code 13131 in the game control area. These data will be generated by another program (code) and output at different timings.

Next, a modified example of the signal output timing when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 will be described.

The segment data sent from the driver 2 (1334) to the base display 1317 and the common data sent from the driver 1 (1334) to the base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt processing. Similarly, the segment data sent from the driver 3 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 and the common data sent from the driver 4 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 are output in the same timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process for outputting the data to be sent to the base display 1317 may be executed at a timing different from the timer interrupt process for outputting the data to be sent to the function display unit 1400, and may be subsequently executed.

The process of outputting signals to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 is executed according to the programs (game control code 13131, base calculation / display code 13135) stored in different areas of the RAM 1312, but they are the same. In order to prevent the common signal from being transmitted at the timing, it is preferable to use the control data common to the two codes and control so that the transmission timing of the common signal does not overlap. For example, a common counter that is commonly used by the game control code 13131 and the base calculation / display code 13135 is provided. For example, when the common counter is 0 to 3, a common signal is output to the function display unit 1400, and the common counter is used. Is controlled to output a common signal to the base display 1317 when is 4 to 7.

The process of outputting the common signal and the process of outputting the segment signal may be separated or configured by one subroutine. The game control code 13131 for executing the process of outputting the data to be sent to the function display unit 1400 and the base calculation / display code 13135 for executing the process of outputting the data to be sent to the base display 1317 are each. It is preferable to call the subroutine at the timing specified by the program and output a signal to the function display unit 1400 or the base display 1317. In this case, the output of the data sent to the function display unit 1400 and the output of the data sent to the base display 1317 are not performed in the same timer interrupt process. Although the game control code 13131 and the base calculation / display code 13135 are executed within one timer interrupt process, the subroutine is called by different timer interrupt processes.

As shown in FIGS. 93 (A) and 96, when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, a display (function display unit 1400) provided outside the main control board 1310 is provided. Even if noise is mixed in, the influence on the internal display (base display 1317) of the main control board 1310 and the circuit of the main control board 1310 can be suppressed.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control I / O port 1314, and as shown in FIG. 93 (B), the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to a common driver circuit 1334 on the common side. It is a circuit diagram of an example. The main control I / O port 1314 is arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400, and outputs the display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400. To do.

As mentioned above, the main control I / O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334. Since the configuration of the circuit included in the main control I / O port 1314 is the same as the circuit configuration described above, the difference from the configuration example shown in FIG. 96 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 97, the operation for lighting the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is the same as the example shown in FIG. 96, but the common signal of the function display unit 1400 is the same as that of the base display 1317. It is common.

In order to light the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, the bus data D1 to D8 captured in the latch 3 (1333) is used as segment data (LOW when lit) by the driver 3 (1334) at the rising timing of CS2. Output. Further, the drive timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, at the rising timing of CS0, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 captured in the latch 1 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven).

In this way, the circuit scale can be reduced by sharing the driver circuit between the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400. By reducing the number of parts, the failure rate can be reduced, the size of the board can be reduced, and the board unit (including the main control board 1310 and the main control board box 1320) can be easily miniaturized. In the pachinko machine, the main control board 1310 does not use an inner layer pattern (printed circuit board having three or more layers), but uses a two-layer board having a pattern only on the front surface and the back surface. Therefore, even if the components can be physically arranged on the main control board 1310 composed of the two-layer board, the area for routing the wiring pattern cannot be secured, and the board must be larger than the multi-layer board having three or more layers. Therefore, it is important to reduce the number of parts to reduce the size.

FIG. 98 is a timing diagram of the configuration example of the main control I / O port 1314 shown in FIG. 97. In FIG. 98, the dotted line perpendicular to the time axis indicates the timer interrupt processing delimiter (timer interrupt processing start timing).

In the timer interrupt process, the main control MPU 1311 outputs digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0. Latch 1 (1333) selected by CS0 takes in D1 to D4 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS0, and driver 1 (1334) receives common data (during drive) corresponding to the digits specified by D1 to D4. Outputs HIGH).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment lit by the function display unit 1400 to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS2. The latch 3 (1333) selected by CS2 takes in D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS2, and the driver 3 (1334) fetches the segment data (LOW when lit) specified by D1 to D8. Output and turn on the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment lit by the base display 1317 to the data bus at the timing of outputting the CS1. The latch 2 (1333) selected by CS1 takes in D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS1, and the driver 2 (1334) fetches the segment data (LOW when lit) specified by D1 to D8. Output and turn on the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets all the data on the data bus to 0 at the timing of outputting CS0, CS1 and CS2. As a result, the digit selection data set in the latch 1 (1333) and the display data set in the latches 2, 3 (1333) are erased, and the 7-segment LED is turned off.

In the next timer interrupt process, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the next digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0, repeats the above-mentioned process, and outputs the digit selection data and the display data. In this way, the common driver circuit is shared between the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400, the segment data is time-divided and output, and the common common data is used to function with the base display 1317. The LED element with the display unit 1400 can be turned on.

As shown in FIGS. 93 (B) and 97, since the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to the common driver circuit 1334, the circuit scale of the main control board 1310 can be reduced and high-density mounting (for example,). , It is possible to easily mount the components on the main control board 1310, which cannot be used for the adoption of the multilayer board or the close arrangement of the components.

Further, in order to control both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 by common common data in one timer interrupt process, the function display unit 1400 and the base display are output during the period when the common data is output. The segment data is output to 1317 at a different timing. Therefore, while both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are controlled by a common common data line, both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 can be displayed and controlled within one timer interrupt process. ..

In the case shown in FIG. 98, the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output first, and the display data of the base display 1317 is output later. Each display data is latched at the rising timing of the chip select (CS2, CS1) and erased at the rising timing of the chip select (CS0) corresponding to the erased data. Therefore, as shown in the figure, if the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output first and the display data of the base display unit 1317 is output later, the display time of the function display unit 1400 is the display time of the base display unit 1317. Become longer. This prolongs the lighting time of the LED of the function display unit 1400 arranged on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 in one cycle and raises the brightness, thereby reducing the visibility due to being directly illuminated by the lighting of the hall. This is to prevent it. Further, since the base display 1317 is arranged on the back side which is darker than the front side of the pachinko machine 1, even if the LED is made to emit light with low brightness, the influence on the visibility of the base display 1317 is small. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first LED and the second LED controlled by the main control MPU 1311 are provided, and the emission brightness of the first LED is higher than the emission brightness of the second LED.

Contrary to the above, the display data of the base display unit 1317 is output first, the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output later, and the display time of the base display unit 1317 is displayed by the function display unit 1400. It may be longer than the time.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing changes in the state (interval) involved in the calculation of the base value.

On the base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the provisional section display and the fixed section display are switched and displayed at predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) intervals. In the provisional section display, the base value of the section being measured is displayed. Specifically, "bA." Is displayed in the first two digits to indicate that the base value A is displayed, and the base value A being measured is displayed in the last two digits as a two-digit percentage. If the integer portion of the percentage of the base value A is 99, "99" is displayed, if it is 100 or more, "99." is displayed, and if it is 0, "00" is displayed. Therefore, even if the number of display digits of the base display 1317 is two, it can be displayed so that the base value A can be seen as 0% or 100%.

In the provisional section display, if the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls is less than a predetermined number (for example, 6000), the first two digits (or all four digits) are blinked and displayed (for example, the cycle is 0.6 seconds). Then, it repeats turning on for 0.3 seconds and turning off for 0.3 seconds), indicating that the accurate base value cannot be measured. On the other hand, when the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls is a predetermined number (for example, 6000) or more, the first two digits are lit and displayed to indicate that an accurate base value can be measured.

In the fixed section display, the base value of the previous section is displayed. Specifically, "bb." Is lit in the first two digits to indicate that the base value B is displayed, and the last two digits indicate the base value of the previous section (below the previous period). The base value B), which is the final value of two digits, is lit and displayed at a two-digit percentage. If the integer portion of the percentage of the base value B is 99, "99" is displayed, if it is 100 or more, "99." is displayed, and if it is 0, "00" is displayed. Therefore, even if the number of display digits of the base display 1317 is two, it can be displayed so that the base value B can be seen as 0% or 100%.

In the first section, since the previous section is a test section, the base value has not been measured. Therefore, in the fixed section display, "bb." Is blinked in the first two digits and "---" is blinked in the last two digits.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the base value is not calculated for a predetermined number (for example, 256) in which the number of out balls is less than 500 from the first power-on as a test section. This is because, in a predetermined number of launches from the first power-on of the pachinko machine 1, the number of balls to be ejected may vary within the range of the probability distribution, the base value is not stable, and a meaningful base value cannot be measured. .. Therefore, in the test section, the base value is not displayed on the base display 1317, and the base value is indefinite. Specifically, in the provisional section display, "bA." Is displayed in the first two digits, "---" is displayed in the last one digit, and "bb." Is displayed in the first two digits in the fixed section display. , "---" is displayed in the last digit. In the test section, the entire number of digits of the base display 1317 is blinked to indicate that the accurate base value cannot be measured. In the test section as well, the base value may be calculated and the base value may be indefinite without displaying the calculated base value on the base display 1317.

Here, the first power-on means the first power-on after the completion of 1 of the pachinko machine, or immediately after the initialization of the work area for base calculation (S26 in FIG. 101, S8013 in FIG. 108) is executed. It is in a state. Further, the power-on time generally used in the present specification is a power-on time other than the first power-on time.

Further, all LEDs of all digits of the base display 1317 may be blinked at a predetermined time after the power is turned on or after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed (from the OFF operation of the setting key 971). ..

If an abnormality is detected in the data and the data is deleted in the inspection of the data in the base calculation area 13128, which will be described later, the calculation of the base value is restarted from the test section.

In each section other than the test section, when the total number of out balls in all game states (big hit, normal game, time saving, non-time saving, high probability, low probability, etc.) reaches 52000, the next section Switch to and measure the base value anew. The number of out balls in one section is not 52,000, and any other number may be used as long as it is a predetermined value. For example, assuming that the daily operating time of the pachinko machine 1 is 10 hours, 60,000 pachinko machines, which are the daily operating hours (number of out balls), may be adopted as the number of out balls in one section. A well-cut number of 50,000 or 100,000 may be adopted.

The number of out balls in one section may be changed as appropriate. For example, it is preferable that a setting switch (DIP switch, rotary switch, etc.) is provided on the main control board 1310, and the number of out balls in one section is set according to the setting of the switch. The switch is provided on the main control board 1310 provided on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 or another board connected to the main control board 1310. Further, if the setting of the switch is changed, the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) of the RAM 1312 is initialized and the calculation of the base value is restarted from the test section, or the calculation of the base value is restarted from the beginning of the current section. Good. Since many pachinko machines are in operation immediately after being introduced as a new machine, the number of out balls in one section is set to a large number, and after the business period has passed, the number of out balls in one section is set to a small number. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a setting means capable of setting an operation for determining the length of a section which is a unit for calculating the base value, and when the power is turned on for the first time, it is based on the operation set by the setting means. The length of one section is set.

As an example of displaying the section immediately before the provisional section currently being measured as the fixed section display, the base value of a plurality of fixed sections (for example, the section before 1 to 3 sections) is switched and displayed. You may. At this time, even if the display is switched from the provisional section → the fixed section 1 → the fixed section 2 → the fixed section 3 at predetermined time intervals, the provisional section → the fixed section 1 → the fixed section 2 → is operated by the operation of the display changeover switch provided separately. The fixed section 3 may be switched and displayed.

In this case, in each fixed section, the first two digits of the base display 1317 in the fixed section display are not "bb." But "b1", "b2", and "b3" so that the displayed section can be seen. It is better to display differently.

In this way, the base value of the section currently being measured and the base value of the immediately preceding one or a plurality of sections are switched and displayed on the base display 1317 at predetermined time intervals. In addition, a part of the base display 1317 is displayed so that the displayed contents can be distinguished, and the measured base value is displayed on the other part.

FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of characters displayed on the base display 1317.

As described above, the base display 1317 is composed of a plurality of digits (for example, 4 digits) of 7-segment LEDs, and displays numbers and characters by lighting or blinking the segments of each digit. The numbers 0 to 9 can be displayed, and the letters A, b, c, d, E, F, L and-signs can also be displayed. In addition, the decimal point can be displayed at the same time as numbers and letters. The case where the number 6 is displayed at the same time as the decimal point and the case where the number 9 is displayed are shown.

101 and 102 are flowcharts showing an example of the initialization process of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

In the initialization process shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, the check code calculation process (step S50) and the check code storage process (step S52) are deleted as compared with the initialization process described above in FIGS. 21 and 22. Therefore, the calculation of the check code in the base calculation area is executed in the base calculation process (step S8038) of the timer interrupt process. The same steps as those in the initialization process described above in FIGS. 21 and 22 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform the initialization process. First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes it possible to write to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and determines whether a predetermined wait time (time required for the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) to start) has elapsed. Determine (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch is being operated (step S18). When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased (step S30), and step S24. Proceed to. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set (step S20).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct. Therefore, the data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30). , Step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power failure and the checksum in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct, so the data backed up in the work area ( The area (other than the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, so the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and step S24 Proceed to.

Subsequently, the check code is used to determine whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the area of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the RAM clear switch (step S18) and the power failure flag abnormality (step S20) in which the power failure flag is not set are described. , There are a RAM abnormality in which the checksums of the RAMs do not match (step S22) and an abnormality in the base calculation work (step S24). Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, or when the power failure flag is abnormal or the RAM is abnormal, the game control area 13126 (the game work area and the game stack area) is used. Included) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Further, in the case of a base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

Note that, unlike the ones shown in the figure, in the case of a power failure flag abnormality, a RAM abnormality, or a base calculation work abnormality, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, so that the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128 The entire RAM area including the above may be cleared. If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a base calculation work error, the data indicating the game state is lost and normal processing cannot be executed. If the memory configuration is such that the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area cannot be executed. Only should be initialized. When the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 is set as described above. You don't have to clear it.

When one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined by using the check code, and when the main area is determined to be abnormal, the backup areas 1 and 2 are provided. , N is determined in this order, and the data in the backup area first determined to be normal may be duplicated in the main area. After that, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is deleted under different conditions (the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128) for each data type. To do. That is, the backed up game control area 13126 is erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, but the backed up base calculation area 13128 is not erased. When the base calculation area 13128 can be erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the base value calculated by the pachinko machine 1 can be erased at an arbitrary timing. Therefore, the backed up base calculation area 13128 is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the base calculation area 13128 is prevented from being erased by the operation of the staff of the game hall, and the abnormal base value is concealed. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect a gaming machine modified to a state in which the base value is high or low.

The main control MPU 1311 has an initial setting process (step S28) for setting in various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111) when a power recovery setting or a RAM initialization process of the RAM work area is executed, and a peripheral control board. The power-on command setting process (step S32) for transmitting to 1510 is executed, and execution of interrupt processing including timer interrupt processing is permitted (step S34). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the power failure warning signal (step S36) and determines whether or not the power failure warning signal is ON (step S38). When the power failure warning signal is not ON (the result of step S38 is "No"), the random number update process is executed (step S40).

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is detected (the result of step S38 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 executes the power cutoff process (power cutoff setting means). In the power off processing, first, the execution of the interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42), the output ports are cleared, and the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port is stopped (step S44). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held (step S46), and checks the checksum calculation result in the RAM 1312. Store in the thumb area (step S48).

Subsequently, the data in the main area of the base calculation work (base calculation area 13128) is duplicated in each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also duplicated. The backup may be executed as appropriate (for example, each time the data is updated) in the base calculation process instead of the process when the power supply is cut off on the main board side. In this way, by storing the data used for calculating the base value together with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code in the backup area, the data for calculating the base and the calculated base value even when the power is turned off Can be retained and the base value for long-term operation can be calculated.

The check code checked in step S24 is calculated in step S8038 (FIG. 106) of the base calculation process. Further, in the modification described later, the calculation is performed in step S50 (FIG. 22) of the initialization process.

Further, a value indicating that the backup was normally performed is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S56), and "01H" indicating write prohibition is output to the RAM protect register to prohibit writing of the RAM 1312 (step). S58), wait until recovery from a power failure (infinite loop).

FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a configuration of a base calculation area 13128 in which the accessory ratio calculation area shown in FIG. 26A is replaced in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment.

The base calculation area 13128 is composed of a part of the RAM 1312, and is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area) as described above.

The base calculation area 13128 includes a storage area for a base value A, a base value B, an interval counter, a total number of out balls, a low probability / non-time saving out ball number, and a low probability / non-time saving prize ball number.

The storage area of the base value A is composed of 1 byte and stores the base value of the provisional section currently being measured. The storage area of the base value B is composed of 1 byte, and stores the base value measured in the section immediately before the provisional section. The storage area of the section counter is composed of 1 byte, and stores a value indicating the section for which the base value is currently being measured. The section counter is updated every time the section is switched, and is used to control the display content that differs depending on the section. The interval counter may be controlled so as not to be larger than any value of 0, 1, or 2, that is, 2. Specifically, the section counter = 0 in the test section, the section counter = 1 in the first section, and the section counter = 2 in the second and subsequent sections. Further, the section counter may be controlled so as not to be larger than 255 as a value from 0 to 255, and the section counter = 2 or more after the second section.

The storage area for the total number of out balls is composed of 2 bytes, and stores all the number of out balls regardless of the gaming state (that is, a value indicating the operation of the gaming machine). The total number of out balls is used to determine the switching of the interval, which is the unit of measurement of the base. In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value in each section is measured with the operation of one day as one section. Therefore, 2 bytes (65536) are allocated to the storage area of the total number of out balls. As described above, the total number of out balls is a storage area for counting all the number of out balls regardless of the gaming state for each section, and the total number of out balls in the above-described embodiment (the number of out balls in the special prize). It is different from the total value from the start of operation of the pachinko machine 1).

The storage area for the low-probability, non-time-saving out-balls is composed of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes), and the number of out-balls for calculating the base value (the number of out-balls in the game state other than during the special prize) is calculated. Store. The storage area for the low-probability, non-time-saving prize balls is composed of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes), and the number of prize balls for calculating the base value (the number of prize balls in the gaming state other than during the special prize) is calculated. Store. The storage area for the low-probability / non-time-saving out-balls and the storage area for the low-probability / non-time-saving prize balls may be an area of 2 bytes or more, but considering the calculation process of the base value, the number of bytes is the same. It is better to do it.

The storage capacity (number of bytes) of each storage area described above is only an example as described above, and may be determined according to the number of out balls in one section.

Further, when the main area and the backup area of the base calculation area 13128 are provided, a storage area having the same configuration is provided in the RAM 1312.

FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

Compared with the timer interrupt process described above in FIG. 23, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 104 is provided with a base calculation process (step S801) instead of the accessory ratio calculation area update process in step S81, and the combination of step S89. The object ratio calculation / display process is deleted. Note that the same steps as the timer interrupt processing described above in FIG. 23 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets 1 in the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word by executing the main control program, and switches the register (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the switch input process (step S74), the timer update process (step S76), the random number update process 1 (step S78), and the prize ball control process (step S80).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current game state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and adds the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312 ( (See FIG. 103) is updated to calculate the base value (step S801). Details of the base calculation process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106. The base calculation process (step S801) may be executed in any order after the prize ball control process (step S80), but it is preferable to execute the base calculation process (step S801) in an early order in order to reliably execute each timer interrupt. ..

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 has a frame command reception process (step S82), a fraud detection process (step S84), a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86), and a normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process (step S86). Step S88), output data setting process (step S90), and peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) are executed.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is terminated and the process returns to the processing before the interrupt.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, since the base value is measured by the timer interrupt processing, the base value during the game can be measured in real time.

105 and 106 are flowcharts showing an example of the base calculation process.

The base calculation process (step S801) is called from the timer interrupt process and executed by the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not there is an error in the calculation of the base value by executing the base calculation program (step S8011). For example, as described above, the winning opening sensor (general winning opening sensor 3015, first starting opening sensor 2104, second starting opening sensor 2551, first large winning opening sensor 2114, second upper winning opening sensor 2554, second If there is an abnormality in the lower prize opening sensor 2557, etc.) or the discharge ball sensor (board side discharge ball sensor 3060A, frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B), the base value is accurately calculated by the abnormality signal output from the interface circuit 1331. Judge that there is an error that cannot be done. Also, if it is determined that fraudulent activity has been performed (for example, the magnetic detection sensor has detected magnetism, the vibration detection sensor has detected vibration, or the radio wave detection sensor has detected radio waves), the base value is accurate. Judges that there is an error that cannot be calculated. If it is determined that there is this error, the display of the base display 1317 may be turned off. In step S8011, an error that accompanies the game stop (for example, magnetism, vibration, radio wave error, etc.) is determined to be an error (YES), and an error that does not accompany the game stop (for example, prize ball abnormality, door opening, etc.). For failures that are not directly related to the calculation or the base (out of supply, full tank error, etc.), it may be determined that there is no error (NO). That is, it is not necessary to execute the base calculation process even if there is some abnormality among the plurality of types of abnormal states, and not to execute the base calculation process if there is another abnormality.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the number of out balls (step S8014). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020, the discharge ball sensor 3060, and the like, and in the switch input process of step S74, the detection signals of these sensors are read, and if there is a sensor detection signal, the out balls are out. Acquire the number of balls = 1. When an out ball is detected by a plurality of discharge ball sensors 3060, the total value of the numbers detected by each sensor is acquired as the number of out balls. That is, a plurality of out balls may be detected in one timer interrupt process.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the number of prize balls (step S8015). As for the number of prize balls, as described above, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process in step S80 is acquired. The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the sent payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command in which the main control board 1310 transmits the payout command to the payout control board 951 and the receipt confirmation (ACK) is received from the payout control board 951 may be used. Further, the number of prize balls (number of paid prize balls) may be used, in which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and the payout control board 951 reports that the payout is completed. This variation is as described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether an out ball is detected in step S8014 (step S8016). If the out sphere is not detected, the process proceeds to step S8022 without executing the process related to the out sphere. On the other hand, if the out spheres are detected, the detected out spheres are added to the total number of out spheres stored in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8017).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128, and determines whether or not it is currently a test section (step S8018). The test section is a section in which the number of out balls is less than 500 from the initial power-on of the pachinko machine (or initialization of the base calculation area 13128), and the value of the section counter is 0, which is the initial value. It has become. Therefore, if the interval counter value is 0, it can be determined that the interval is a test interval. If it is a test interval, it is not necessary to calculate the base value, so the process proceeds to step S8028. On the other hand, if it is not a test section, it is determined whether the current gaming state is in the special prize (step S8019). The determination as to whether or not the prize is being awarded can be determined in the same manner as in step S810 of FIG. 39 described above. The fact that the game state is in the special prize means that the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 are open due to the big hit, and it is during the time when the player can win many prize balls, but including the opening and ending time of the big hit game. You may. When the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 repeat opening and closing in one big hit, the time between the closing of the big winning opening and the next opening (closing interval) may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810, it means that the condition device is operating, for example, from the determination of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. In addition, it may include all the time during the right-handed instruction.

Further, at the starting ports 2002 and 2004, the time saving, the probability change (ST), and the electric power support may be included in the special prize. Further, in a gaming state other than during time reduction, probabilistic change (ST), and electric power support, from the opening of the starting port 2004 to the predetermined time after closing (for example, the ball winning the starting port is detected as an out ball). The required number of seconds) may be included in the special prize. The so-called "latent game state", which is a high-probability game state but does not become during the time saving (during electric power support), is not included in the special prize, and is in the game state as in the normal state (low probability / non-time saving state). The base value may be calculated using the number of prize balls and the number of out balls. In this case, the base value may be calculated separately in each of the normal gaming state and the latent gaming state, and the base value may be displayed so that it can be identified which base display is used.

The latent game state is a game state in which the player does not recognize that it is a high probability state even if the probability is high, but if the latent game state is excluded from the calculation of the base value, the frame is opened during business. In addition, the player may look at the base display 1317 and recognize that it is in a latent game state (that is, a high probability). That is, when the employee of the hall cares for the ball in the winning opening or throws the ball in the out opening in the open frame state, the player can know the playing state depending on whether the base display changes. Such a problem can be avoided by calculating the base value without distinguishing between the normal game state and the latent game state.

On the other hand, in the business of the hall, it may be necessary to manage the base value in a low probability / non-time saving state, and if the base value is calculated including the latent game state, it may not be possible to manage according to the business form of the hall. .. Such a problem can be avoided by calculating the base value excluding the latent game state. The same problem can be avoided by calculating the base value separately for the normal game state and the latent game state. That is, since the normal game state and the latent game state are different game states in the first place, it may be desired to manage (inspect) the base value separately for each game state depending on the business form of the hall. ..

When calculating the base value separately for the normal game state and the latent game state, even if the base value is calculated using the dedicated calculation process for each game state, the base value is calculated using the common calculation process. You may. By calculating the base value using a common calculation process, the processing load on the CPU can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

The electrically operated accessory provided in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment can be divided into two types from the viewpoint of calculating the base value. As described above, the special prizes related to the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 in the gaming machine of this embodiment are during the operation of the condition device (for example, from the determination of the big hit symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending). Since the base value is calculated by the number of prize balls and out balls other than during the special prize, the normal (so-called big hit) prizes to the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 are not used to calculate the base value. On the other hand, in the starting port 2004 (so-called electric tulip) having an opening / closing member, prize balls and prize balls other than during the special prize (low probability time or non-time saving time) are used for calculating the base value. In other words, some of the electrically operated accessories (large winning openings 2005, 2006) use the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls as the base value regardless of the playing state (whether or not they are in the special prize). Not used, other accessories (starting port 2004) can switch whether to use the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls in the calculation of the base value according to the game state (whether or not the special prize is in progress). It will be.

Further, the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 may be opened (as a so-called small hit) even when the condition device does not operate. Generally, small hits occur during a short time, and since it is open for a short time, it is unlikely that a game ball will win a prize, so it does not affect the calculation of the base value. However, a small hit may be generated except during the special prize (normal time), and the game ball may be opened only during the time when the possibility of winning the prize is high. In this case, the winning balls and the winning balls to the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 in the small hits generated other than during the special prize may be used in the calculation of the base value. In this way, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of occurrence of a small hit other than during the special prize. That is, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly respond to the standard of the base value, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in design.

If the game state is in the special prize, since it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, the process proceeds to step S8022 without updating the low probability / non-time saving out ball number. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of out balls detected in step S8014 should be used for the calculation of the base, so that the number of out balls detected in the base calculation area 13128 is detected in the low probability / non-time saving out balls. The number of out balls is added (step S8020). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8021). The update flag is set to 1 when an out ball or prize ball other than during the special prize is detected for each execution of the base calculation process (timer interrupt process), and indicates the timing for calculating the base value (steps S8026 to S8027). reference).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the prize ball is detected in step S8015 (step S8022). If the prize ball is not detected, the process proceeds to step S8026 without executing the process related to the prize ball. On the other hand, if the prize ball is detected, it is determined whether the current gaming state is in the special prize (step S8023). The determination as to whether or not the prize is being awarded may be the same as in step S8019.

If the game state is during the special prize, the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the process proceeds to step S8026 without updating the low probability / non-time saving prize ball number. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls detected in step S8015 should be used for the calculation of the base, so that the number of prize balls detected in the low probability / non-time saving prize balls stored in the base calculation area 13128 is detected. The number of prize balls awarded is added (step S8024). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8025).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8026). When the update flag is 1, since an out ball or a prize ball other than the special prize is detected in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process), the low probability / non-time saving prize ball number is set to the low probability / non-time saving out ball. The base value is calculated by dividing by a number and stored in the storage area of the base value A of the base calculation area 13128 (step S8027).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter and determines whether or not the test section is in progress (step S8028). Then, when the section counter value is 0, indicating that it is a test section, it is determined whether it is the timing to end the test section (step S8029). The test section is a section in which the number of out balls is a predetermined value of less than 500 from the first power-on of the pachinko machine (including the initialization of the base calculation area 13128), and indicates that the section counter is the test section. If the total number of out balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, it can be determined that it is the timing to end the test section.

As a result, if it is not the timing to end the test section, the process proceeds to step S8034 without updating the base calculation area 13128 in order to continue the test section. On the other hand, if it is in the test section and the timing is to end the test section, the process proceeds to step S8032 in order to shift from the test section to the first section. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the section counter (step S8032). The interval counter changes from 0 representing the test interval to 1 representing the first interval. Then, the total number of out balls, the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls, and the number of low-probability / non-time-saving prize balls are initialized to 0 (step S8033). This process ends the test section and shifts to the first section.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S8028 that the section counter value is not 0 and the test section is not in progress, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the total number of out balls is 52000 or more (step S8030). If the total number of out balls is less than 52000, the process proceeds to step S8034 in order to continue the current section.

On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is 52000 or more, the process for ending the section and starting a new section (steps S8031 to S8033) is executed. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads the base value A from the base value A storage area and writes it in the base value B storage area in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8031). After that, 1 is added to the section counter (step S8032). As described above, the interval counter is controlled so as not to be larger than any value of 0, 1, or 2, that is, 2. Therefore, even if 1 is added to the interval counter when the interval counter value is 2. The interval counter value does not increase and remains at 2. Then, the total number of out balls, the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls, and the number of low-probability / non-time-saving prize balls are initialized to 0 (step S8033), and the process proceeds to the next section.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8034). When the update flag is 1, data for displaying the newly calculated base value is generated (step S8035). Details of the base display data generation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 107. After that, the main control MPU 1311 sets the update flag to 0 (step S8036).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the display switching counter (step S8037). The display switching counter is used to switch between the provisional section display and the fixed section display described with reference to FIG. 99 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds). The predetermined time for switching between the provisional section display and the fixed section display is the cycle of the blinking display (blinking display controlled in step S8051 of FIG. 107) when the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls in each section is less than 6000. It is better to have a sufficiently long time. This is because if the blinking and display switching have the same cycle, it becomes difficult to understand the blinking display (that is, whether the number of low-probability / non-time saving out balls is less than 6000). This is to make it easier to understand whether it is a switch.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a check code (for example, a checksum) from the data in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8038). As the check code calculation method, the same calculation method as the process of calculating the check code in step S50 of the initialization process (FIG. 22) is used. If the check code is set to a fixed value without being calculated, it is preferable to set the value to a plurality of bytes in which adjacent bits of the check code do not have the same value (for example, if it is 2 bytes, it is A55AH (1010010101011010B). To). Further, instead of setting a fixed value in a continuous area, they may be arranged separately. For example, the first fixed value is stored at the beginning of the base calculation area 13128, the second fixed value is stored in the middle, and the third fixed value is stored at the end. When the check code is a fixed value, it is preferable to improve the possibility of determining the RAM abnormality by configuring the check code with a larger number of bytes than the check data calculated by the checksum.

In this way, according to the base calculation process of this embodiment, the base value is calculated and displayed for each timer interrupt process, so that the base value can be set without delay at the timing of each occurrence of a prize ball or each occurrence of an out ball ( It can be displayed (in real time), and it can be judged without delay whether the base value is normal or abnormal. Since the capacity of the base calculation area 13128, which is a storage area used for the base calculation, is extremely small as compared with the capacity of the game control area 13126, a check code is displayed at the end of each execution of the base calculation process. Even if it is calculated, the influence on the processing load of the main control MPU 1311 is small.

In addition, when the base value of the prize balls is calculated and displayed using the planned number of prize balls to be paid out based on the generated winning signal, the timing of calculation and display as the base value and the timing of the prize balls being paid out Is different. That is, a state in which the prize ball is not paid out due to an abnormality in the payout device (out of supply, the upper plate is full, a failure of the payout count sensor provided in the prize ball passage, a failure of the payout motor, etc.) Even if it becomes (stop, etc.), the base value is calculated and displayed.

In the above-mentioned base calculation process, the base value is calculated using the number of out balls detected by the timer interrupt process and the calculated number of prize balls each time the base calculation process is called from the timer interrupt process. The base value may be calculated each time the ball sensor 3060 detects an out ball and each time the various winning opening sensors detect a winning ball. That is, in one timer interrupt process, the base value calculation process is called a plurality of times, and the base value is calculated a plurality of times. In this way, even if the timing of switching the above-mentioned section (the number of out balls is 52,000) arrives in one base calculation process, it is possible to distinguish which section before and after the calculation is performed as the base value. , Can display accurate base values in real time.

Further, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to notify the prize ball abnormality. May be stopped.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing an example of the base display data generation process.

The base display data generation process is called and executed from step S8035 of the base calculation process.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether the display switching counter is smaller than 1250 by executing the base display data generation program (step S8041). Since the timer interrupt process described above is executed every 4 milliseconds, when the display switching counter reaches 1250, 5 seconds have elapsed since the display switching counter was initialized to 0. In step S8053, the display switching counter is initialized to 0 when it reaches 2499. Therefore, the processes of steps S8042 to S8045 are executed while the display switching counter is between 0 and 1249, and the display switching counter is between 1250 and 2499. Executes the processes of steps S8046 to S8049. Therefore, in the base display data generation process of this embodiment, the display data of the base display 1317 is switched every 5 seconds.

If the display switching counter is smaller than 1250, data for displaying "bA." In the first two digits of the base display 1317 is generated (step S8042). After that, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether or not it is currently a test section (step S8043). Since the base value has not been calculated in the test section, data for displaying "---" in the last two digits is generated (step S8044). On the other hand, if it is not a test section, data for displaying the base value A currently being measured in the provisional section is generated (step S8045).

When it is determined in step S8041 that the display switching counter is 1250 or more, data for displaying "bb." In the first two digits of the base display 1317 is generated (step S8046). After that, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128, and determines whether it is currently the test section or the first section (step S8047). In the test section or the first section, since the base value has not been measured in the past fixed section, data for displaying “−−” in the last two digits is generated (step S8048). On the other hand, if it is neither the test section nor the first section, data for displaying the base value B measured in the latest confirmed section is generated (step S8049).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128, and determines whether the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls is smaller than 6000 (step S8050). ). If the number of low-probability, non-time-saving out balls is smaller than 6000, the number of operations (number of out balls) after starting the measurement of the base value in the relevant section is small, so the base value may not be stable. The display of the base display 1317 is controlled to blink (step S8051). On the other hand, if the number of low-probability, non-time-saving out balls is 6000 or more, the display of the base display 1317 is controlled to light without blinking (step S8052).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the display switching counter is 2499 or more (step S8053). If the display switching counter is smaller than 2499, the process proceeds to step S8055 without initializing the display switching counter. On the other hand, if the display switching counter is 2499 or more, one repetition is completed, so the display switching counter is initialized to 0 (step S8054).

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 generates a display pattern in which the generated display data and the lighting mode (lighting or blinking) are specified (step S8055).

In this way, in the timer interrupt processing (base calculation processing) executed at predetermined time intervals, the display contents on the base display 1317 are switched by using the display switching counter that is periodically updated, so that the current in the provisional section is present. The base value A being measured and the base value B measured in the past in the fixed section can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, since the blinking display is performed in the range where the base value is not stable in each section, it can be easily confirmed by the display of the base display 1317 whether the base value is in the stable range or the unstable range.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the base calculation process. In the modified example shown in FIG. 108, it is the same as the base calculation process shown in FIG. 105 except that the check process (steps S8012 and S8013) of the base calculation work is added. Note that FIG. 108 describes up to the calculation of the base value A (step S8027) in the base calculation process, but the processes from steps S8028 to S8038 are the same as those in FIG. 106 described above.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not there is an error in the calculation of the base value by executing the base calculation program (step S8011).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal by using the check code (step S8012). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S8013).

When one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined by using the check code, and when the main area is determined to be abnormal, the backup areas 1 and 2 are provided. , N is determined in this order, and the data in the backup area first determined to be normal may be duplicated in the main area. After that, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is.

In the illustrated example, after determining whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011), it is determined whether the base calculation area 13128 is normal (step S8012). After determining whether 13128 is normal (step S8012) and executing necessary processing based on the determination result, it may be determined whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011).

Since the subsequent processing (steps S8014 to) is the same as those in FIGS. 105 and 106 described above, their description will be omitted.

In the base calculation process shown in FIG. 108, since it is determined whether the data in the base calculation area 13128 is normal for each timer interrupt (that is, every 4 milliseconds), an abnormality in the base calculation area 13128 can be detected quickly, and an abnormality can be detected. It is possible to suppress the display of various base values.

Next, the abnormality determination method of the base calculation area 13128 in the pachinko machine of this embodiment will be described. The value used for calculating the base value and the calculated base value are the base calculation area 13128 of the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 (the "feature ratio calculation area 13128" shown in FIG. 26 is the "base calculation area 13128". It is stored in (replaced) and determines whether the data is normal at a predetermined timing. There are the following variations in which process (timing) the normal / abnormal determination step and the check code calculation step are performed.
101 and 106: The check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is determined when the power is turned on.
21 and 22: The check code calculated when the power is turned off is determined when the power is turned on (initialization process).
FIG. 106 and FIG. 108: The check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is determined by the base calculation process (timer interrupt process).

(A case where the check code is calculated for each timer interrupt and judged when the power is turned on)
First, the process of determining the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) at the time of turning on the power will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 and 106.

When the initialization process is shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 and the base calculation process is shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the base calculation area 13128 is set in step S8038 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 105 and 106). The check code (for example, checksum) is calculated from the data of.

Further, in step S24 of the initialization process (FIGS. 101 and 102), it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal by using the check code. As a result, if it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

When the data in the base calculation area 13128 is deleted, the state related to the calculation of the base value is initialized, so that the calculated base value is cleared and the calculation of the base value is started from the test period.

When one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined by using the check code, and when the main area is determined to be abnormal, the backup areas 1 and 2 are provided. , N, and the data in the backup area determined to be normal first may be duplicated in the main area to recover the data in the base calculation area 13128. After that, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is.

In this case, the frequency of the check code determination is low, and the consumption of the calculation resource (main control MPU 1311) required for the abnormality determination can be reduced.

(Case where the check code is calculated when the power is turned off and judged when the power is turned on)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, a process of determining the check code calculated when the power is turned off at the time of turning on the power (initialization process) will be described.

When the initialization process is as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, and the base calculation process is as shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, in step S50 of the power-off process of the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22), A check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128).

Further, in step S24 of the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22), it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal by using the check code. As a result, if it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In this case, the calculation of the check code in step S8038 of the base calculation process may be omitted.

In this case, the frequency of calculation and determination of the check code is low, and the consumption of the calculation resource (main control MPU 1311) required for the abnormality determination can be reduced.

(Case where check code is calculated by timer interrupt processing and judged)
Next, a process of determining the check code calculated by the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) by the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 and 108.

Assuming that the base calculation process is shown in FIGS. 108 and 106, a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data in the base calculation area 13128 in step S8038 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 108 and 106).

Further, in step S8012 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 108 and 106), it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal by using the check code. As a result, if it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S8013).

In this case, the initialization process is shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, and the step of determining whether the base calculation work area in steps S24 and S26 is normal may be omitted.

In this case, the abnormality in the base calculation area 13128 can be detected more quickly than in the case described above.

When a fixed value is used for the checksum instead of the checksum, the timing of setting and determining the checksum may be the same as the timing of calculating and determining the checksum. Further, both the checksum and the fixed value may be used together as the check code for the determination.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing the calculation of the base value when the gaming state is switched.

One game ball won a prize while the starting port 2004 (electric tulip) was opened, and then the predetermined number of variable display games ended, the time saving state ended, and the normal state returned. After that, in the normal state, it is assumed that the game ball wins a prize in the opening opening 2004 that is being opened.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display according to the winning of the starting port 2004. That is, a variable display game is played in which the second special symbol is variablely displayed in relation to any of the winning prizes in the starting port 2004 shown in the figure.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the out ball in the special prize is not used in the base calculation, the first winning ball to the starting port 2004 is not added to the low probability / non-time saving out ball number. The second winning ball is added to the low probability / non-time saving out ball number.

In the above, the time when the time saving state ends has been described, but the same applies when the probability change ends by ST.

In addition to the above-mentioned time saving state ending, the same phenomenon occurs when a big hit of the special symbol fluctuation display game occurs. In the normal state, it is assumed that one game ball wins a prize while the starting port 2004 (electric tulip) is open, then the big hit state starts, and the game ball wins the opening opening 2004.

In this case as well, a variable display game is played in which the second special symbol is variablely displayed in connection with winning a prize in any of the starting ports 2004. On the other hand, since the out ball in the special prize is not used in the base calculation, the first winning ball to the starting port 2004 is added to the low probability / non-time saving out ball number, but the second winning ball has a low probability.・ It is not added to the number of non-time saving out balls.

Furthermore, the same phenomenon occurs when a specific error occurs. In the normal state, it is assumed that one game ball wins while the start port 2004 (electric tulip) is open, a specific error occurs after that, and the game ball wins the start port 2004 that is open. .. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a specific error occurs (when it is determined that there is an error in which the base value cannot be calculated accurately due to the abnormal signal output from the interface circuit 1331), the machine is out. Do not use spheres for base calculations.

In this case as well, a variable display game is played in which the second special symbol is variablely displayed in connection with winning a prize in any of the starting ports 2004. On the other hand, since the out ball during a specific error is not used in the base calculation, the first winning ball to the starting port 2004 is added to the low probability / non-time saving out ball number, but the second winning ball. Is not added to the low probability / non-time saving out ball number.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of game balls that have won prizes during the operation of the electric accessory under specific conditions (at the end of the time reduction, at the time of a big hit of the special symbol fluctuation display game, at the time of a specific error, etc.). There are cases where it is used for calculating the base value and cases where it is not used for calculating the base value, and it is possible to start the fluctuation of the special figure in any winning.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, regarding the look-ahead effect of the special symbol variation display game on hold, the first prize that is won in the start port 2004 in a short time state is not subject to the look-ahead effect, and is in the normal state. The second prize won may be the target of the look-ahead effect. On the contrary, the first prize that is won in the start port 2004 in a short time state does not have to be the target of the look-ahead effect, and the second prize that is won in the normal state does not have to be the target of the look-ahead effect.

Although the timing of changing from the time saving state to the normal state has been described, the same applies to the timing of changing from the probability change state (ST) or the electric support state to the normal state.

[10. Memory switching in processing outside the game control area]
Next, switching of the memory used by the CPU in the processing outside the game control area (for example, the base calculation processing) will be described.

FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a configuration related to a storage area among the internal configurations of the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 is configured as shown in FIG. 18 as a whole, but FIG. 110 shows in detail the configuration relating to the storage area.

The main control MPU 1311 is provided with a RAM 1312, a ROM 1313, and an in-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 as storage areas for storing data. The in-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 exclusively temporarily stores data at the time of program execution by the CPU 13111 (for example, a flag indicating the state of the calculation result, the program execution state, data input / output to / from the CPU 13111, etc.). The auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU temporarily stores, for example, a random number value updated in the random number update process (step S40 in FIG. 22) and an intermediate value in the random number value update operation. Further, the address of the subroutine to be executed and the address of the jump destination are temporarily stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU, and the processor core 13141 executes the process corresponding to the stored address. Furthermore, the values input to the port from various switches connected to the main control board 1310 (for example, the value in the process of creating the edge information of the signal input from the switch and the detection result of the edge information) are temporarily used. Store in.

Further, when a random number is acquired and stored in the hold storage area at the time of winning the start opening, the random number value is temporarily stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU, and the temporarily stored random number value is stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 1312. Remember in. Further, when a random number at the time of winning the start opening is acquired and a look-ahead determination (determination of winning at the time of winning the starting opening) is performed based on the value of the random number, the disturbance temporarily stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU is performed. The look-ahead determination may be performed based on the numerical value, or the random number value stored in the hold storage area may be read (again) into any storage area of the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU to perform the look-ahead determination.

The in-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 is provided separately from the memory space composed of the RAM 1312 and the ROM 1313 and specified by an address, and is specified by the name of each storage area (for example, Area0) included in the in-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142. .. The auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU includes a switching unit 13143, a switching register 13144, and a plurality of auxiliary storage areas 13145A to C.

Auxiliary storage areas 13145A to 13C are composed of a plurality of storage areas (Area 0 to 6) having a predetermined number of bits (for example, 1 byte or 2 bytes), and groups are formed for each storage area of a predetermined number (7 in the figure). It is configured and can be accessed from the processor core 13141 for each group. That is, when the auxiliary storage area 13145A is selected, the processor core 13141 can access only the auxiliary storage area 13145A and cannot access the other auxiliary storage areas 13145B and C.

As will be described later, the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145 can collectively switch a plurality of storage areas for each group with one CHANGE instruction. For example, the instruction CHANGE 0 selects the auxiliary storage area 13145A of group 0 and switches the auxiliary storage area accessible to the processor core 13141 to group 0.

The auxiliary storage area 13145 is composed of three groups in the illustrated example, but may be any number as long as it is two or more. That is, at least two auxiliary storage areas 13145 are provided with the same configuration.

The storage area (Area 0 to 5) of the auxiliary storage area 13145 is a storage area provided separately from the RAM 1312 for temporarily storing data at the time of program execution, and even one (1 byte = 8 bits) can be used. Therefore, even if a plurality of sets are set (for example, 2 bytes = 16 bits as a set of Area0 and Area1) can be used. Therefore, 8-bit data and 16-bit data can be stored in the auxiliary storage area 13145 without creating an extra capacity in the storage area. Further, the storage area (Area6) is set as a storage area used with a capacity that is an integral multiple (for example, 2 bytes) of another storage area, and cannot be divided into a storage area of 1 byte and used. In this way, since the auxiliary storage area 13145 is configured by the storage areas having a plurality of capacities and the storage area that can be used in any combination is provided, the storage area is used properly according to the application (for example, data length) in the arithmetic processing. be able to. For example, if the address space is represented by 16 bits, addresses can be specified in one (or combination) storage area. Therefore, the number of instruction arguments can be reduced, and the instruction can be executed with a small number of clocks.

The switching unit 13143 switches a group of storage areas accessible to the processor core 13141 according to the value stored in the switching register 13144.

The switching register 13144 is a storage area for storing data for determining the accessible auxiliary storage area 13145, and is an area accessible to the processor core 13141 regardless of the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145. In the switching register 13144, for example, data for identifying the selected auxiliary storage area 13145 (for example, 2-bit data for switching the four areas), and an abnormality flag indicating that the switching was not performed normally. (If the error flag is set, the switching command will be executed again), and the unauthorized access flag that is set when an error occurs in which the value of the unselected auxiliary storage area 13145 changes is stored. It is good.

Further, the switching register 13144 may store a flag (for example, a carry flag, a parity / overflow flag, a zero flag, a sine flag, etc.) indicating the state of the operation result.

In addition to the switching register 13144, a storage area accessible to the processor core 13141 may be provided regardless of the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145. For example, a program counter indicating the address at which the program is being executed and a stack pointer indicating the start address of the stack area provided in the RAM 1312 may be provided.

FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example of a program for timer interrupt processing and base calculation processing, and shows a specific example of a portion that calls base calculation processing from timer interrupt processing and returns from base calculation processing.

In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 104), the base calculation process is called in step S801, but the interrupt is disabled by the DI instruction before shifting to the base calculation process. The base calculation process can be performed without interrupting the process from the DI instruction to the EI instruction due to an interrupt.

After that, the data in the switching register 13144 is saved in the game control stack area 13137 (see FIG. 113) by the PUSH instruction. After that, the program is executed from the start address xxxxx of the base calculation process by the CALL instruction.

In the base calculation process, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is used in the base calculation process of the callee from group 0 used in the timer interrupt process of the caller by the CHANGE instruction before starting the process shown in FIGS. 105 to 108. Switch to group 1. In this way, a plurality of storage areas can be switched for each group by one CHANGE instruction, and a plurality of storage areas can be collectively switched by one instruction (that is, a small number of steps).

Further, by the LD instruction, the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt process is written to an arbitrary address (for example, zzzzz) of the RAM 1312, and the stack pointer value is saved. After that, the LD instruction is used to write the address yyyy of the base calculation stack area 13138 to the stack pointer to change the stack area.

After the preparation for executing the base calculation process is completed, the process is executed from step S8011 of FIG. 105 or FIG. Then, after the base calculation process is completed (after step S8038 in FIG. 106), the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt process is restored from the address zzz of the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction. After that, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched from the group 1 used in the callee's base calculation process to the group 0 used in the caller's timer interrupt process by the CHANGE instruction, and then the caller's timer interrupt process is performed by the RET instruction. Return. In general, the instruction for switching the auxiliary storage area 13145 and the instruction for returning the data saved in the stack have different roles, but in this embodiment, after returning from the base calculation process to the timer interrupt process, the instruction has a different role. By returning the data saved in the stack to the switching register 13144, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is not necessary to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 to group 0 by the CHANGE instruction after the base calculation process is completed, but the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be reliably switched by the CHANGE instruction.

As described above, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 by changing the argument (operand), but a different instruction may be provided for each auxiliary storage area 13145.

After that, when returning from the base calculation process, the data of the switching register 13144 saved in the game control stack area 13137 is restored to the switching register 13144 by the POP instruction. Note that the data of the switching register 13144 may be saved and restored by using other instructions (for example, data transfer instruction LD, exchange instruction EX) without using the stack operation instructions PUSH and POP.

After that, after enabling the interrupt by the EI instruction, the timer interrupt processing is continued, the timer interrupt processing is terminated by RETI, and the process returns to the main control side main processing (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21).

The interrupt may be disabled by the DI instruction at the beginning of the timer interrupt processing, and the interrupt may be enabled by the EI instruction at the end of the timer interrupt processing. Further, regardless of the DI instruction or the EI instruction, the interrupt may be disabled when the timer interrupt processing starts by directly operating the interrupt enable flag, and the interrupt may be enabled at the execution timing of the RETI instruction.

Further, since the timer interrupt processing is originally executed in a state in which interrupts are disabled, it is not necessary to further disable interrupts or allow interrupts in the timer interrupt processing. In the illustrated program example, the interrupt prohibition by the DI instruction is for setting the interrupt permitted state to the interrupt prohibition for some reason. In this case, since the interrupt prohibition state should be continued until the end of the timer interrupt processing, the EI instruction should be executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, not immediately after the POP instruction.

In the above-mentioned example, the switching register 13144 is saved by the timer interrupt process of the caller, and the auxiliary storage area 13145 and the stack area are switched by the base calculation process of the callee. One process may be executed by either the caller or the callee when the process moves out of the game control area and when the process returns to the game control area. An example of switching the auxiliary storage area 13145 by the timer interrupt processing of the caller will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 112 is a diagram showing another example of a program for timer interrupt processing and base calculation processing, and shows a specific example of a portion that calls base calculation processing from timer interrupt processing and returns from base calculation processing.

In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 104), the base calculation process is called in step S801, but the interrupt is disabled by the DI instruction before shifting to the base calculation process. An interrupt occurs between the DI instruction and the EI instruction, and the base calculation process can be performed without interrupting the processing during that period due to the interrupt.

After that, the data in the switching register 13144 is saved in the game control stack area 13137 (see FIG. 113) by the PUSH instruction. After that, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 from group 0 used in the timer interrupt processing of the caller to group 1 used in the base calculation processing of the callee. In this way, a plurality of storage areas can be switched for each group by one CHANGE instruction, and a plurality of storage areas can be collectively switched by one instruction (that is, a small number of steps).

After that, the program is executed from the start address xxxxx of the base calculation process by the CALL instruction.

In the base calculation process, before starting the process shown in FIGS. 105 to 108, the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt process is written to an arbitrary address (for example, zzzzz) of the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction, and the stack pointer value is written. To evacuate. After that, the LD instruction is used to write the address yyyy of the base calculation stack area 13138 to the stack pointer to change the stack area.

After the preparation for executing the base calculation process is completed, the process is executed from step S8011 of FIG. 105 or FIG. Then, after the base calculation process is completed (after step S8038 in FIG. 106), the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt process is restored from the address zzz of the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction.

After that, when returning from the base calculation process, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched from the group 1 used in the callee's base calculation process to the group 0 used in the caller's timer interrupt process by the CHANGE instruction, and the game is played by the POP instruction. The data of the switching register 13144 saved in the control stack area 13137 is restored to the switching register 13144. Note that the data of the switching register 13144 may be saved and restored by using other instructions (for example, data transfer instruction LD, exchange instruction EX) without using the stack operation instructions PUSH and POP.

As described above, since the auxiliary storage area 13145 returns to the state before calling the base calculation process by returning the switching register 13144, it is not necessary to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 by the CHANGE instruction. However, the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be reliably switched by the CHANGE instruction.

After that, after enabling the interrupt by the EI instruction, the timer interrupt processing is continued, the timer interrupt processing is terminated by RETI, and the process returns to the main control side main processing (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21).

As described above, the interrupt may be disabled by the DI instruction at the beginning of the timer interrupt processing, and the interrupt may be enabled by the EI instruction at the end of the timer interrupt processing. Further, regardless of the DI instruction or the EI instruction, the interrupt may be disabled when the timer interrupt processing starts by directly operating the interrupt enable flag, and the interrupt may be enabled at the execution timing of the RETI instruction.

Further, since the timer interrupt processing is originally executed in a state in which interrupts are disabled, it is not necessary to further disable interrupts or allow interrupts in the timer interrupt processing. In the illustrated program example, the interrupt prohibition by the DI instruction is for setting the interrupt permitted state to the interrupt prohibition for some reason. In this case, since the interrupt prohibition state should be continued until the end of the timer interrupt processing, the EI instruction should be executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, not immediately after the POP instruction.

In FIG. 111, an example of switching between the timer interrupt process, the base calculation process, and the auxiliary storage area 13145 has been described. Further, the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be switched in the inspection process executed by the debug (inspection function) code 13133. In this case, at the beginning of the debug (inspection function) code 13133, the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be switched to the auxiliary storage area 13145 for inspection processing by the CHANGE instruction. Further, the initialization process (steps S10 to 22 in FIG. 21), the main control side main process (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21), and the power cutoff process (steps S42 to S58 in FIG. 21). , The auxiliary storage area 13145 may be switched between the timer interrupt processing (FIGS. 23, 75, 80, etc.), and different auxiliary storage areas 13145 may be used properly in each processing.

Further, when only two auxiliary storage areas 13145 are provided, processing executed in the game control area (for example, main control side main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc.) and outside the game control area (for example, debugging (for example, debugging) The auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched between the processing (for example, debug processing, base calculation processing, etc.) executed in the (inspection function) area, base calculation area, etc., and different auxiliary storage areas 13145 are used properly inside and outside the game control area. May be good.

In this case, the same auxiliary storage area 13145 is used for the main control side main processing and the timer interrupt processing, but the timer interrupt processing is started because the main control side main processing being executed is interrupted and the timer interrupt processing is started. At the start of processing (for example, at the beginning of timer interrupt processing), the value of the auxiliary storage area 13145 is temporarily stored in the game control stack area 13137, and at the end of timer interrupt processing (for example, at the end of timer interrupt processing). It is preferable to return the value temporarily stored in the game control stack area 13137 to the auxiliary storage area 13145.

For example, since the auxiliary storage area 13145 has a plurality of (bytes) storage areas, if one unit (bytes or words) is saved in the stack area, the number of instructions for saving increases. Similarly, the number of instructions for recovering data from the stack area increases. Also, in this case, if the order of processing is incorrect between saving data to the stack area and recovering data from the stack area, different data will be read from the stack area, so subsequent processing may not be performed accurately. .. Therefore, by providing an instruction to collectively save all of the plurality of storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the stack area and collectively restore all of the plurality of storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 from the stack area. The above problem can be solved.

Furthermore, if all the storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 are saved in the stack area, the stack area may overflow and rewrite data outside the area planned as the stack area (such as a stack area for other purposes). is there. Therefore, in addition to the instruction to collectively store all the storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 in the stack area, an instruction to collectively save a plurality of arbitrarily specified storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the stack area is provided. , An instruction for collectively recovering a plurality of arbitrarily designated storage areas among the auxiliary storage areas 13145 saved in the stack area may be provided and executed.

In this way, when moving to the processing outside the game control area, it is switched to another auxiliary storage area 13145, and when moving to the processing inside the game control area, it is switched to the original auxiliary storage area 13145, so that it is stored in the auxiliary storage area 13145. The processing can proceed without saving the generated data in the RAM 1312 (for example, the stack area).

Further, the switching register 13144 is saved in the RAM 1312 (for example, the stack area) when moving to the processing outside the game control area, and the switching register 13144 is recovered from the RAM 1312 when moving to the processing inside the game control area. The auxiliary storage area 13145 can be switched when moving to the processing in the game control area, and the data in the auxiliary storage area 13145 can be recovered without recovering from the RAM 1312.

In addition, when moving to processing outside the game control area, the stack area is switched to another stack area, and when moving to processing inside the game control area, the original stack area is switched to, so that the stack area used for processing inside the game control area is , The processing inside and outside the game control area can be completely separated without being updated in the processing outside the game control area.

Further, the value stored in the switching register 13144 is saved in the RAM 1312 (for example, the stack area) when shifting to the processing outside the game control area, and the saved value is saved when moving to the processing in the game control area for switching. Since the register 13144 is restored, the processing inside and outside the game control area can be completely separated without updating the value related to the execution result of the program in the game control area in the processing outside the game control area.

FIG. 113A is a diagram showing an example of arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in ROM 1313 and RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310. As for the arrangement on the memory shown in FIG. 113, the stack area omitted in the above-mentioned arrangement on the memory in FIG. 26 is shown in the RAM 1312, but the RAM 1312 also shown in FIG. 26 is also provided with the stack area.

The ROM 1313 contains a game control code 13131, a game control data 13132, a debug (inspection function) code 13133, a debug (inspection function) data 13134, a base calculation / display code 13135, and a base calculation / display data 13136. Contains the area to store. The ROM 1313 of the present embodiment includes a game control area (first storage area) for storing programs and data related to the pachinko machine 1 such as the game control code 13131 and the game control data 13132, and a debug (inspection function) code 13133. And debug (inspection function) area (second storage area) for storing programs and data used for the purpose of outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) of pachinko machine 1 such as debug (inspection function) data 13134. A base calculation area (third storage area) for storing programs used for the purpose of calculating the base value, such as the base calculation / display code 13135 and the base calculation / display data 13136, is allocated.

When a free area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more is provided between the final address of the game control data 13132 and the start address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and displayed in the dump list format. The game control area and the debug (inspection function) area can be easily distinguished. Similarly, a free area (unused space) having a predetermined length is provided between the final address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the start address of the base calculation / display code 13135. It is desirable that the predetermined length is 16 bytes or more because the debug (inspection function) area and the base calculation area can be easily distinguished when displayed in the dump list format, but the predetermined length may be shorter than 16 bytes. The value stored in the free area may be a fixed value which is the same value, and may be set to a value different from the value set in the game control area and the debug area or a value having a low frequency. Further, the value stored in the free area may be an instruction such as a No Operation code in which the CPU does nothing. In this way, when displayed in the dump list format, the game control area, the debug (inspection function) area, and the base calculation area can be easily distinguished.

Further, the base calculation / display code 13135 and the base calculation / display data 13136 may be stored in a part of the debug area without separating the debug (inspection function) area and the base calculation area. That is, the game control area and other areas need only be clearly distinguished. By clearly distinguishing the game control area from other areas in this way, the debug area (debug (inspection function) code, debug (inspection function) data), which is a process that is not directly related to the control of the progress of the game. ) And the base calculation area (base calculation / display code 13135 and base calculation / display data 13136) are arranged separately from the game control area, and defects (bugs, etc.) in the base calculation / display code 13135 become game control. Avoid the risk of impact.

The debug (inspection function) area stores target programs and data that are not directly related to the game. For example, in addition to the game control of the pachinko machine 1, various functions used only when debugging the pachinko machine 1. The code 13133 for outputting the inspection signal is stored. These debug (inspection function) code 13133 are programs for outputting debug (inspection function) signals. Further, in the base calculation area, a program for calculating the base value, which is not directly related to the progress of the game, is stored.

Further, the game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311. Further, the game control code 13131 can be appropriately read and written to the RAM 1312, but the game control area 13126 used in the game control code 13131 can only be read from the debug (inspection function) code 13133. Is configured to be executable, and is configured so that writing to the area cannot be executed. As described above, the game control area 13126 constitutes a game control area that can be accessed only from the game control code 13131. Processing based on the debug (inspection function) code can be unilaterally called and executed while the game control code 13131 is being executed, but the game control code 13131 can be called from the debug (inspection function) code. It is configured so that it cannot be called and executed. As a result, the independence of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be enhanced, so that even if the game control code 13131 is changed, the change of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be minimized. ..

Further, the base calculation / display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 23), and is executed by the main control MPU 1311. The base value calculated by the base calculation / display code 13135 is stored in the base calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312. As shown in the figure, the base calculation area 13128 is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area). In this way, by designing the base calculation / display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a different area, the inspection of the base calculation / display code 13135 and the inspection of the game control code 13131 can be performed. It can be performed separately, and the labor of inspection of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. Further, the base calculation / display code 13135 can be used in common by a plurality of models without depending on the model.

The RAM 1312 is provided with a game control area 13126, a debug area, a base calculation area 13128, a game control stack area 13137, a debug stack area, and a base calculation stack area 13138.

The game control area 13126 is an area in which data used by the game control code 13131 is stored, and can be read and written from the game control area 13126. Further, in the game control area 13126, data cannot be written from the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the base calculation / display code 13135, but read access is possible, and the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the base calculation. -The display code 13135 can refer to the data stored in the game control area 13126.

The debug area is an area in which data used by the debug (inspection function) code 13133 is stored. The debug area can be accessed from the game control code 13131 and the base calculation / display code 13135, but only reading of data is permitted and writing of data is prohibited. The base calculation area 13128 is an area for storing data used by the base calculation / display code 13135. The base calculation area 13128 can be accessed from the game control code 13131 and the debug (inspection function) code 13133, but only reading of data is permitted and writing of data is prohibited.

The game control stack area 13137 is an area in which the data used by the game control code 13131 is saved. The debug stack area is an area in which data used by the debug (inspection function) code 13133 is saved. The base calculation stack area 13138 is an area in which the data used by the base calculation / display code 13135 is saved. Each stack area is exclusively used to temporarily save the data stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU. Each stack area can be switched by changing the value of the stack pointer managed by the CPU 13111. The stack pointer is a storage area that specifies the start address of the stack area.

FIG. 113 (B) is a diagram showing details of the base calculation area 13128. The base calculation area 13128 may be provided with a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which a copy of the data stored in the main area is stored, in addition to the main area in which the calculation result of the base is stored. The backup area may be one or more. A check code is added to each area to detect data errors. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, is set every time the data in the main area is updated in the base calculation / display process, or is the process when the main control side power is turned off (FIG. 22). It may be set in steps S50 to S54). In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or the data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the main control side power cutoff process (step S50 in FIG. 20). You may set it. The check code may also be used as a power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set in the check code of the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. Further, if a predetermined value is set in the power failure flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

When it is determined that the main area is abnormal, it may be determined whether the backup area is normal, and the data of the backup area determined to be normal may be duplicated in the main area (step of FIG. 21). S24). Further, in the process of power off on the main control side, the value of the main area may be duplicated in each backup area (step S54 in FIG. 22). Further, in the base calculation / display processing, the value of the main area may be duplicated in the backup area at the end of the base calculation / display processing. When at least a part of the main area is updated, only the entire main area or the area of the updated value may be duplicated in the backup area (steps S168 and S170 in FIG. 25).

An unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be separated, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digit of the address.

[11. Record of game history]
Next, an example of a pachinko machine that records and outputs a game history will be described.

[11-1. Basic configuration of a gaming machine that records game history]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines from among a plurality of effects that match the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310, and displays the determined effects. Display at 1600. At that time, when the peripheral control unit 1511 decides to display a specific effect (for example, two specific effects out of three types of super reach) among a plurality of prepared effects, the switching of the game state is the starting point. As a result, how many times the special symbol variation display game was played and the specific effect appeared (in other words, at what rotation the effect appeared), along with the progress of the game, the effect display device 1600. indicate.

Specifically, according to the game history shown in FIG. 114, Super Reach 1 appears at the 34th rotation at 10:25, and the result of the special symbol variation display game is lost, and at the 127th rotation at 10:54. Super Reach 2 appeared, the result of the special symbol fluctuation display game was lost, Super Reach 2 appeared at 428 rotations at 11:30, and the result of the special symbol fluctuation display game was a probable change jackpot. Is displayed.

The display of the jackpot history (for example, the history of the jackpot at the 15th rotation and the jackpot at the 50th rotation) can be confirmed on the data display provided in the hall, but the specific effect that has appeared by the jackpot cannot be confirmed. Some players determine whether the pachinko machine 1 is performing well or not based on the appearance of a specific effect (for example, if Super Reach 2 appears within 50 rotations after the end of the jackpot, it is considered that the jackpot will be won in a short time). In order to meet the expectations of such players, the degree of appearance of the production is visually displayed. In addition, since the game ball is not fired when the player confirms the degree of appearance of the effect, if a display showing the degree of appearance of all of the multiple effects prepared is displayed, the player will perform each effect. It takes time to confirm the degree of appearance of the game console, which may reduce the operation of the game console. Therefore, it is preferable to display only a specific reach effect (reach effect with high expectation for a big hit) among the reach effects. Further, the appearance history for each effect may be confirmed by operating a predetermined operation means (operation button 220C or the like).

As a specific process, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 stores the number of fluctuations and the information of the appearance of the effect. Further, the peripheral control unit 1511 updates the number of fluctuations and the information of the displayed effect based on the received fluctuation pattern command. Then, when a predetermined operation means (operation button 220C, etc.) is operated, the number of fluctuations required until a limited specific effect appears is added and displayed instead of all the effects that have appeared. You just have to do the processing.

Further, when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1 during business, the error information is output from the pachinko machine 1 and notified to the employees in the hall. In this form of notification, the error screen shown in FIG. 115 (A) is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or the detailed error screen shown in FIG. 115 (B) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 to notify the cause of the error. The error signal shown in FIG. 116 is output from the external terminal board 784. Typical errors in the pachinko machine 1 are shown in FIGS. 117, 118, and 119. The error that occurs in the pachinko machine 1 is notified to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 so that the employees in the hall can know the cause. For example, the code defined for each type of error may be displayed on the status display LED included in the function display unit 1400. Specifically, when the cable connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is defective, "0" is displayed on the status display LED included in the function display unit 1400, and the LED on the right side of the door is displayed. Lights blue.

However, the error occurs due to various causes such as a minor failure of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a connector disconnection), a serious failure requiring parts replacement, or a fraudulent act.

The pachinko machine 1 in which the error has occurred must search for the cause of the error, recover from the error, and operate the pachinko machine 1. It takes time and cost to search for the cause of the error, and the suspension of operation of the pachinko machine 1 due to the error causes a decrease in sales. Therefore, if the hall can know the detailed information of the error that has occurred, the error can be resolved at an early stage, and the operation stop time of the pachinko machine 1 can be shortened.

More specifically, the hall uses a hall computer to determine the state of the pachinko machine 1 based on the signal output from the external terminal plate 784. However, in order to search for the cause of the error, in addition to the signal output from the external terminal board 784, it is desirable that "the number of winnings of the general winning opening", "the number of winnings of the large winning opening", "the number of passing through the gate", and "normal symbol fluctuation". Game history information such as "number" is required. If the pachinko machine 1 is out of order, it will be solved by repair or parts replacement, so there is no big problem, but if the game ball is acquired by cheating, the chances that a normal player can make a profit will decrease, and the hall It may interfere with the business of the pachinko machine and eventually make the hall difficult to manage.

When such game history information is output from the external terminal board 784, the number of terminals of the connector used for the external terminal board 784 increases, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 increases. Furthermore, since events such as "winning to the general winning opening", "winning to the big winning opening", "passing through the gate", and "normal symbol fluctuates" occur frequently, if all the data is output from the pachinko machine 1, the data will be displayed. A high-performance hall computer is required to analyze the data, which increases the burden on the hall.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, data that is not output as a real-time signal from the external terminal plate 748 is stored inside the pachinko machine 1, and the stored data can be referred to later. By doing so, it became possible to confirm the details of the process leading up to the occurrence of the error.

In addition, the time of occurrence of events (number of general winning openings, number of large winning openings, number of gate passages, number of normal symbol fluctuations, etc.) that occurred in the process up to the occurrence of these errors is recorded, so how long is it? You can see how many events have occurred in. For example, it can be seen that the number of winnings in the general winning opening was 50 per minute.

If the date and time of occurrence is recorded for each event, the amount of data used for searching for the cause of the error increases, and it takes time to search for the cause of the error. Therefore, when a predetermined number or more of events occur in a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute), it may be output as error information and notified.

For example, since it is possible to win a prize in the general winning opening in any game state, it is advisable to output error information and notify when there are more than a predetermined number of winnings in a predetermined time, but the big winning opening is won only during the big hit game. Therefore, it is advisable to set a predetermined time from the start to the end of the jackpot game, and output error information to notify when a predetermined number or more of the prizes are won in the jackpots in the predetermined time.

In the pachinko machine described below, the peripheral control unit 1511 records the game history and outputs the data in a predetermined format.

FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of this embodiment. In the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 120, a game history recording process (step S1023) is added to the peripheral control unit power-on processing described above with reference to FIG. 60.

In the game history recording process, the peripheral control unit 1511 records the game history in the memory when the received command is a predetermined command based on the analysis result of the command received from the main control board 1310. The game history is recorded as the event occurrence date and time in the format shown in FIG. 122, for example. The memory in which the game history is recorded may be DRAM, but it is preferable to record in SRAM, which does not require a refresh operation and consumes low power, in consideration of retaining the stored contents even when the power is cut off.

The game history recording process (step S1023) may be executed before the process related to game control (steps S1024 to S1032). By executing the game history recording process at an early stage of the peripheral control unit steady processing, the game history can be accurately recorded even if the process related to the game control is stopped in the middle and some effects are not executed. That is, even if some of the effects are not executed (even if all the effects are not executed), the result of the lottery already performed on the main control board 1310 does not change, and the privilege given to the player also changes. Since there is no such thing, the game history is recorded with priority over the production. Further, since the game history recording process is not affected by the process related to the game control, the game history recording process can be shared among a plurality of models of pachinko machines.

Next, the process when the memory capacity of the recorded game history reaches the upper limit will be described. When the amount of recorded game history data reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, the game history recording process is executed, but the game history recorded in the memory does not have to be updated. That is, the information recorded in the memory does not change. In this way, by executing the game history recording process even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, it is not necessary to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history, and the peripheral control unit 1511 is required to check the free status each time. Processing can be reduced.

Further, when the capacity of the recorded game history memory has reached the upper limit, the game history recording process may be executed to update the game history recorded in the memory. In this case, a ring buffer having a plurality of (for example, 10) storage areas may be provided in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the oldest game history may be deleted, and the latest game history may be recorded. Even in this case, it is not necessary to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be reduced each time.

Further, when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is not necessary to skip step S1023 and execute the game history recording process. By not executing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing from being executed. Therefore, other processes (effect control, lamp) performed by the peripheral control unit 1511. Control and sound control can be executed reliably, and new processing (for example, processing that is executed over multiple peripheral control unit steady processing because there is not enough processing time) can be executed by utilizing the free processing time. Alternatively, since it is not necessary to execute each time, a process (for example, a process of switching the selection table) that is executed once in several peripheral control unit steady processes may be executed.

Immediately after the interrupt timer activation process (step S1010), the received command may be analyzed (step S1022) and the game history recording process (step S1023) may be executed.

FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a game history recording condition setting table.

In the game history recording condition setting table, among the commands received from the main control board 1310 by the peripheral control unit 1511, the type of the command recorded as the game history, that is, the event recorded as the game history is registered.

For example, the following command types are registered in the game history recording condition setting table, and the conditions for generating the command and the purpose of recording as the game history are as follows.

For example, when the start port 1 winning command and the starting port 2 winning command detect the winning of the game ball to the starting port 2002 and the starting port 2004, the command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511, respectively. The control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to each starting port. Further, the special symbol 1 symbol type command and the special symbol 2 symbol type command are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, respectively, and the peripheral control units 1511 of the special symbols 1 and 2 The number of fluctuations can be counted.

Further, the power-on command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the time of power-on, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire a ram clear operation or the like. The change start state command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the start of the change of the special symbol, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the state at the start of the change of the special symbol. There are four states that can be distinguished by the change start state command: low probability / time saving, low probability / non-time saving, high probability / time saving, and high probability / non-time saving. You can count the number of fluctuations that have occurred. Here, the low probability is a state in which the probability that a jackpot is derived in the jackpot lottery associated with the special symbol variation display game is a normal probability, and the high probability is a jackpot in the jackpot lottery associated with the special symbol variation display game. Is higher than usual. The time reduction is the time from when the above-mentioned second start door member 2549 is opened (or expanded) to a higher probability than when it is not, or when the normal symbol starts to fluctuate. The frequency with which the second start opening door member 2549 is opened (or expanded) is higher than that in the non-time saving state, such as being shortened. Along with this, there is a high probability that an effect having a short time in one special symbol variation display game will be selected.

The large winning opening 1 winning command (for each winning) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (for each winning) are sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the game ball wins the large winning opening 2005 and the large winning opening 2006, respectively. A command is transmitted, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to each large winning opening.

The large prize opening 1 winning command (less than the specified winning amount) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (less than the specified winning amount) will win only the specified number of game balls or less by the end of the round at the large winning opening 2005 and the large winning opening 2006, respectively. If not, a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a predetermined time elapses from the closing of each grand prize opening (for example, from 1 second later to before the next opening), and the peripheral control unit 1511 sends a command. You can get the winning status in one round for each big winning opening. The large winning opening 1 winning command (larger than the specified winning) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (larger than the specified winning) are rounded by winning more game balls than the specified number in the large winning opening 2005 and the large winning opening 2006, respectively. When is completed, a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a predetermined time elapses from the closing of each large winning opening (for example, from 1 second later to before the next opening), and the peripheral control unit 1511 sends a command. You can get the status of winning in one round for each big winning opening. It should be noted that this command is transmitted when a predetermined time has elapsed from the closing of each of the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 by detecting the specified number of winning balls (for example, 10) specified in one round and the large winning openings. There is a possibility that an undetected game ball may exist in the large winning opening when the game is closed, and this is to accurately grasp the winning situation even at the time of such an over winning.

The jackpot OP command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a jackpot occurs (that is, when the condition device is activated or the accessory continuous operating device is activated), and the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires the change to the jackpot state. You can count the number of big hits. The transition destination command at the end of the jackpot operation is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the end of the jackpot state, and the end of the jackpot state and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the status after the jackpot.

The small hit OP command is for opening the big winning opening in a relatively short time (for example, one opening time is 1.8 seconds, or the total of multiple opening times is less than 1.8 seconds). Therefore, when the accessory continuous operation device does not operate (so-called small hit), a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of small hits.

The normal symbol stop command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the normal symbol is stopped, the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the stop symbol of the normal symbol, and the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol can be counted. When the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, the command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the number of game balls that have passed through the gate unit 2003.

Even if the special symbol or normal symbol is not drawn even if the start port is won or the gate is passed (when there is no overflow or memory, etc.), the main control board 1310 wins the start port 1 in the peripheral control unit 1511. The time command, the start port 2 winning command, and the general gate passage command are transmitted. Therefore, the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to the starting port and the number of balls passing through the gate unit.

The error display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when an error occurs, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the error occurrence timing and count the number of error occurrences.

When the game ball wins a prize in each general winning opening 2001, the general winning opening 1 winning command, the general winning opening 2 winning command, and the general winning opening 3 winning command are sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511, respectively, and are transmitted to the surroundings. The control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to each general winning opening 2001. The general winning opening winning command may be determined by the number of general winning openings 2001 provided in the game area 5a, and the above-mentioned example illustrates the case where three general winning openings 2001 are provided. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 16, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with four general winning openings 2001, and therefore, four types of general winning opening winning commands, from the general winning opening 1 winning command to the general winning opening 4 winning command, are provided. The command is defined.

FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a game history recorded in the memory.

The game history includes a history number, an event, and an event occurrence date and time, and is preferably recorded in the memory in the order of the event occurrence time. As the event occurrence date and time, the time when the peripheral control board 1511 receives the command from the main control board 1310 may be recorded as the event occurrence date and time, and the time when the main control board 1310 detects the event occurrence is notified to the peripheral control unit 1511. The peripheral control unit 1511 may record the event occurrence time notified from the main control board 1310. In the illustrated game history, the date and time when the event occurred is recorded in the particle size up to minutes, but it may be recorded up to seconds.

By analyzing the game history in the form shown in FIG. 122, it is possible to know the details of the event generated in connection with the command transmitted from the main control board 1310 (for example, the change in the game state, the result of the variable display game, etc.). .. For example, the power-on command of history number 1 occurred at 15:30 on March 15, 2016, the RAM was cleared from the contents of the command, and the game started in a low probability and non-time saving state. I understand. That is, the hall started operations at 15:30, the pachinko machine 1 was turned on, and the player started hitting after a while (for example, after igniting a cigarette) and won the general prize opening 2001. I understand. In addition, the special symbol 1 fluctuation start event of history number 4 occurs at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, and the special symbol fluctuation is performed from the content of the received special symbol 1 symbol type command (type of stop symbol). You can see the result of the display game. The special symbol 1 fluctuation start event of history number 6 occurs at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, and the special symbol fluctuation display game is based on the content of the received special symbol 1 symbol type command (type of stop symbol). You can see the result of. Although the result of the special symbol variation display game is not shown in FIG. 122, each special symbol variation display game is based on a numerical value indicating the result of the variation display game included in the symbol type command received at the start of the special symbol variation. The result of the variable display game (loss, usually per 4 rounds, high probability per 4 rounds, high probability per 16 rounds, etc.) may be recorded as a game history.

Next, a method in which the hall refers to the information (game history) recorded in the memory will be described.

First, a history output interface 1590 that outputs information recorded in a memory from the peripheral control unit 1511 is provided. Then, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the history reference command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 outputs the game history recorded in the memory from the history output interface 1590.

Further, when the data collection terminal is connected to the pachinko machine 1 and the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the history reference command from the data collection terminal, the peripheral control unit 1511 outputs the game history recorded in the memory from the history output interface 1590. The history output interface 1590 may be configured by the history output terminal provided in the peripheral control unit 1511, or may be provided separately from the peripheral control unit 1511. The data collection terminal may be owned by the hall for data management of the pachinko machine 1.

The connection between the data collection terminal and the pachinko machine 1 may be a cable connection via the history output interface 1590 or a wireless connection via short-range wireless (for example, Bluetooth®).

The command that triggers the peripheral control unit 1511 to output the game history is a command that is not transmitted when the pachinko machine 1 is performing a normal game even if it is a history reference command dedicated to the game history output (FIG. 121). A command when a special condition (operation) is performed under a command (command not defined in) may be used as a history reference command. The special condition (operation) is, for example, operating the RAM clear button while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. Further, a history reference command may be transmitted even if the command is transmitted during a normal game, on condition that an event that cannot (or is unlikely to occur) occurs. For example, when 50 pieces are won in the start opening or the general winning opening in one minute. Further, the game history may be output when the commands used for the game control are received in a special order that is not normally possible.

An operation panel (keyboard) and a display (effect display device) may be provided on the back surface side (a place invisible to the player) of the pachinko machine 1 to display the game history.

FIG. 123 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a peripheral control board and its surroundings.

The peripheral control board 1510 performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and also transmits control commands and various information (various data) to the effect display drive board 4450 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. Effect display control that controls the drawing of the peripheral control unit 1511 that exchanges with each other, the effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and controls the sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It has a unit 1512 and a real-time clock (hereinafter, referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies the date and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second.

As shown in FIG. 123, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on. Peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that control the effected operation to be executed, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a V blank from the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the effect display control unit 1512 described later. Peripheral control unit executed each time a signal is input Various information that is continued across the steady processing (for example, schedule data that defines the screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 and schedule that defines the light emission mode of various LEDs, etc. Peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores information for managing data, etc., and various information that continues over days (for example, management of information for managing the history of jackpot game states and special production flags) Peripheral control SRAM 1511d for storing peripheral control SRAM 1511d and peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e for monitoring whether or not peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally (hereinafter, referred to as "peripheral control external WDT1511e"). .) And.

The peripheral control RAM 1511c loses its contents when the power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power interruption occurs), whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d has a large capacity (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931. By supplying backup power from the electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as "electrolytic capacitor for SRAM"), the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. Since the power supply board 931 is provided with an electrolytic capacitor for SRAM, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so that the peripheral control SRAM 1511d retains the stored contents. You can't do it and lose its contents.

Further, a part of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with power by a backup power source 1513 different from the backup power source supplied from the power supply board 931. The game history is recorded in the area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d to which the power is supplied by the backup power supply 1513, and the stored contents can be retained even if the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The backup power supply 1513 is composed of a secondary battery such as a lithium ion battery, and is preferably capable of holding data in at least a part of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d for several weeks to one month.

FIG. 124 is a block diagram showing a peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

In the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the area for storing the game history may be configured in a package different from the peripheral control CPU including the peripheral control MPU, or may be configured in the peripheral control CPU package together with the peripheral control MPU.

FIG. 124 (A) shows the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d in which an area for storing the game history is configured in a package different from the peripheral control CPU. As shown in the figure, the effect control area where power is not supplied from the backup power supply 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package, and the game history storage area where power is supplied from the backup power supply 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package. Be done.

When the pachinko machine 1 is reset by operating the RAM clear switch, the data of the peripheral control SRAM (effect control area) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage) outside the peripheral control CPU is cleared. Area) The data of 1511d is not cleared.

FIG. 124 (B) shows the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d that constitutes an area for storing the game history in the package of the peripheral control CPU. As shown in the figure, both an effect control area in which power is not supplied from the backup power supply 1513 and a game history storage area in which power is supplied from the backup power supply 1513 are provided in the peripheral control CPU package.

Even in the configuration shown in FIG. 124 (B), when the pachinko machine 1 is reset by operating the RAM clear switch, the data of the peripheral control SRAM (effect control area) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the peripheral control is performed. The data of the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage area) 1511d outside the CPU is not cleared. Therefore, it is preferable that the effect control area and the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are physically separated from each other.

In the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the area for storing the game history may be configured by a flash memory instead of the SRAM. By storing the game history in the flash memory, the game history can be held even in the pachinko machine 1 to which the power is not supplied without providing the backup power supply 1513.

In both modes of FIGS. 124 (A) and 124 (B), the pachinko machine 1 has means for initializing the data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. The means for initializing the data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d can be any method different from the normal data initialization method of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while operating the RAM clear switch. Good. For example, if a history clear switch is provided in addition to the RAM clear switch and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating the history clear switch, the stored game history is initialized. In this case, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating both the RAM clear switch and the history clear switch, both the stored game state information and the game history are initialized. The history clear switch may be directly connected to the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch and the RAM clear switch is continuously operated for a predetermined time even after the power is turned on, both the stored game state information and the game history are initialized. It may be changed.

When initializing the game history stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the main control board 1310 transmits a command different from the normal power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the main control board 1310 continues to transmit the power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510 while the RAM clear switch is being operated, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command a predetermined number of times within a predetermined time. When the power-on command is continuously received, the game history stored in the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage area) 1511d may be initialized. By providing the means for initializing the data in the game history storage area in this way, for example, even if the game machine continues to operate in the hall for one year, the latest information can be accurately recorded and analyzed.

The peripheral control external WDT1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU1511a is out of control, and when the timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, if the peripheral control MPU1511a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT1511e to the peripheral control external WDT1511e within a certain period of time (until the timer starts up), the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT1511e within a certain period of time, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT1511e is restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands from the main control board 1310 are received, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp drive board is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 and outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serialized for the motor drive board. The door side motor drive data for transmitting from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit and outputting the drive signal to the electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 is frame-decorated drive. Transmission from the serial I / O port for the amplifier board motor to the frame decoration drive amplifier board via the peripheral control output circuit and frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, or to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. Door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal is driven by frame decoration from the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via a peripheral control output circuit and frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. Send to the amplifier board.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 provided on the effect operation unit 220. The detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized effect operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a are input to the serial I / O port for detecting the effect operation unit via the peripheral control input circuit.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a photo sensor) for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. It is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the event that occurred during the game is recorded as the game history according to the command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the event occurred during the game. The event can be analyzed later (for example, after the hall is closed) to understand the performance and failure of the gaming machine. Further, since the game history is stored in the non-volatile memory (SRAM to which the backup power supply is input), the game history can be confirmed even after the game machine is restarted.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121, 122, etc., various information is recorded together with the time of occurrence. Further, for example, when the starting port 1 is won, (1) the fact that the starting port 1 is won, (2) the time when the starting port 1 is won, and (3) the event that occurred before the starting port 1 is won. As described above, more information than the information output from the external terminal plate 748 shown in FIG. 116 is stored inside the pachinko machine 1. This means that the minimum necessary information (information indicating the fact that the starting port has won a prize) is output from the external terminal board 784, such as when the starting port is won, and in a special case (for example, the cause of an error). This is because the information stored inside the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed at the time of investigating). This is because if all the information stored inside when winning a prize at the starting port is output from the external terminal board 784, the amount of information related to the operation of the pachinko machine 1 increases, which may be a burden on the hall. Is. That is, when an event occurs, more information than the information output from the external terminal board 784 is recorded inside the pachinko machine 1, and a part of the information recorded inside is recorded in the pachinko machine via the external terminal board 784. It is output to the outside of 1 so that the information stored inside the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed in special cases.

[11-2. Compact plan 1]
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine that records and outputs the game history will be described. It should be noted that some of the modifications described below modify a part of the above-described embodiment and form a part of the embodiment.

In the above-described embodiment, among the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the event (command type) and the event occurrence date and time are recorded for a predetermined command. However, the capacity of the SRAM 1511d for recording the game history is finite, and it is difficult to record all of the enormous amount of events that occur during the game over a long period of time. Therefore, in the modified example 1 (compact plan 1), the change in the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of counting events generated in the state are recorded.

FIG. 125 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the game history recording condition setting table of the first modification.

In the game history recording condition setting table of the first modification, the commands recorded as the game history are defined separately as a command to be counted and a command to trigger a state change, and a command in which both attributes are set. There is also. Note that the countable information column and the acquireable state change column are provided for convenience of explanation, and when the game history recording condition setting table is implemented in the pachinko machine 1, only the command type column is sufficient. ..

When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command for which the attribute to be counted is set, the peripheral control unit 1511 counts the number of events that triggered the issuance of the command as a result of the command analysis. Further, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command in which an attribute that triggers a state change is set, the peripheral control unit 1511 updates the state of the game history recorded in the memory as a result of command analysis, and counts the number of events. To add.

For example, the power-on command, the change start state command, the jackpot OP command, the jackpot operation end transition destination command, and the error display command are commands issued by the state change, and are the power-on command, the special symbol change display start, respectively. It can be grasped as a change of the state of the jackpot state start, the jackpot state end, and the error state occurrence state.

In addition, the counting command is used to count the number of events that triggered the issuance of the counting command. Specifically, the starting port 1 winning command and the starting port 2 winning command can count the number of winning balls to each starting port. The special symbol 1 symbol type command and the special symbol 2 symbol type command can count the number of fluctuations of each special symbol. The large winning opening 1 winning command (for each winning) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (for each winning) can count the number of winning balls to each large winning opening. The large prize opening 1 winning command (less than the specified winning prize) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (less than the specified winning prize) can count the number of rounds completed with the specified number of winning or less. The large winning opening 1 winning command (larger than the specified winning) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (larger than the specified winning) can count the number of rounds completed in excess of the specified number of winnings (that is, by over winning).

The small hit OP command can count the number of small hits. The normal symbol stop command can count the number of fluctuations in the normal symbol. The command to pass through the gate can acquire the number of game balls that have passed through the gate. The error display command can count the number of error occurrences. The general winning opening 1 winning command, the general winning opening 2 winning command, and the general winning opening 3 winning command can count the number of winning balls to each general winning opening.

FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a game history recorded in the memory of the first modification.

The game history of the modification 1 is the state change event that triggered the state change of the pachinko machine 1, the state after the state change event, the time when the state change event occurred, and the state from a predetermined starting point. Includes the cumulative number of counting events detected until the end of (until the next state change event). The number of counting events recorded as the game history may be the number of counting events detected during the state (between the previous state change event and the state change event). The predetermined starting point is the time when the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is initialized. The states in which the counting events are recorded separately are assumed to be five states: low probability / non-time saving state, low probability / time saving state, high probability / non-time saving state, high probability / time saving state, and jackpot state. The state may be further subdivided.

Next, the details of the game history recording process in the first modification will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 126, as counting events, the starting port 1 winning number, the starting opening 2 winning number, the special symbol 1 variation number, the special symbol 2 variation number, the general winning opening 1 winning number, the general winning opening 2 winning number, The number of general winning openings 3 winnings, the number of large winning openings 1 winning, the number of large winning openings 2 winnings, the number of passing gates, and the number of changes in normal symbols are recorded. The number of events other than those shown may be counted.

Two bytes is sufficient for the storage area of the cumulative number of each counting event. In particular, the data that is not derived so frequently and the cumulative number does not increase (for example, the number of general winning openings) may be 1 byte, and the other data may be 2 bytes. In this case, it is preferable to arrange the 1-byte data and the 2-byte data in the order of 2 bytes and 1 byte (or the order of 1 byte and 2 bytes) without mixing them.

When a state change event occurs, the type of the state change event, the state after the event occurs, and the date and time when the event occurs are recorded, and a new record is created in the game history. Then, the counting event after the state change is recorded in a new record.

The counting result of the counting event in the current state may be recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and stored in a new record created in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d after the state change. A new record in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is created when the state changes, but a new record may be created at the start of the period in which the counting event is counted. In this case, while the counting event is counted, the data may not be stored in the new record created, or 0 may be stored as the initial value. Also, a new record may be created at the end of the period during which the counting event is counted. In this case, immediately after creating a new record, the counting result of the counting event in the relevant period is stored in the new record.

When the game state changes and the data recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is stored in the game history storage area (peripheral control SRAM 1511d), the data is read from the game history storage area and recorded in the work area. Numerical values are added and stored in the game history storage area. On the other hand, when the number of counting events detected during the state (between the previous state change event and the state change event) is recorded as the game history, the count value of the counting event is recorded as the game of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Store in the history storage area.

That is, every time a state change event occurs, the count value in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. Therefore, the counting result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c until the next state change event occurs, and the stored contents are backed up when a power failure occurs. , Will be initialized by normal ram clear operation. Specifically, for example, in a low-probability, non-time-saving state, the game history information in which 50 winning numbers in the starting port 1 are recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is the pachinko machine of the modified example 1. In 1, the game history is recorded in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d after the game state changes. In other words, if the game state does not change, the game history is not recorded in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, if the power is cut off and the ram clear operation is performed in the low probability / non-time saving state, the number of winnings of 50 is initialized to 0.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a counting event occurs, the counting value in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the counting result in the current state recorded in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal ram clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

Further, even when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, the game history recording process may be executed. In this case, it is not necessary to continuously record the game history in the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current state and store the cumulative number of counting events from the peripheral control RAM 1511c to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d when the state changes. Further, the game history (cumulative number of counting events) in the oldest state may be deleted and the cumulative number of counting events in the immediately preceding state may be recorded. In this case, it is preferable to configure a ring buffer in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

By executing the game history recording process even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, it is not necessary to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 is reduced every time. it can. Further, since the cumulative number of counting events in the current state is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the latest game history can be confirmed.

Further, when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is not necessary to skip step S1023 and execute the game history recording process. By not executing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is possible to prevent the execution of unnecessary processing and reduce the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511.

As described above, in the modification 1, the switching of the states of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the number of counting events (number of winnings, number of fluctuations, etc.) in each state between the switchings is recorded. A long game history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the history storage area.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the modified example 1 is characterized in that it internally records more information than the information output from the external terminal plate 784.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the modification 1, the condition for creating a new record in the game history is a change in the game state, and if the game state does not change, the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d Information (game history) is not written. That is, if fraud is performed in a state where a new record is not created in the game history storage area (the same game state is continuing), it may be difficult to detect the fraud. As described above, in the hall, in order to analyze the information (game history) written in the memory, the information written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d can be confirmed, but in the pachinko machine 1 of the modification 1, the hall can confirm the information written in the game history storage area. As long as the game state does not change, the information is not written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, even if the information is read from the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the information of the current state (game history) cannot be confirmed. Even in such a case, a check function that can detect fraud at an early stage may be provided.

Specifically, the first record (the latest record of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d) in which the game history of the latest state is recorded and the second record (the record of the peripheral control RAM 1511c) in which the game history of the current state is recorded). If the result of comparison with is satisfied with a predetermined condition, an error may be notified.

For example, in the so-called right-handed pachinko machine 1, which launches a game ball so as to roll on the right side of the game area 5a in a high-probability / short-time state or a big-hit game state, the transition from the high-probability / short-time state to the big-hit game state. However, if the game transitions to a high-probability / short-time state after the jackpot game state ends, even if the state is switched, it is usually right-handed, so there is a possibility of winning the general winning opening on the left side of the game area 5a. Extremely low. In this case, the number of winnings in the general winning opening may be compared between the jackpot game state and the subsequent high probability / time saving state, and if a difference is detected, an error may be notified. The permissible value of the difference in the number of winning balls to the general winning opening between the states is set to 1, and if a difference of 2 or more occurs, an error may be notified. This is because when the hand is released from the launch handle, the launch force becomes uneven and the game ball may roll on the left side of the game area 5a.

Instead of the error notification, a security signal may be transmitted from the external terminal plate 784 shown in FIG. 116. The above-mentioned early fraud detection check function predicts the game from the game state of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, it will hit right because it is in a high probability and time saving state), so an unfamiliar player can use it. There is a possibility of detecting an error when hitting unexpectedly. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 may not notify the error, only output the security signal from the external terminal plate 784, and may not notify the player. In this way, the clerk in the hall can confirm the possibility of an error from a place away from the pachinko machine 1 without being noticed by the player, and trouble with the player can be prevented.

As described above, since the error detection function of the pachinko machine 1 is not perfect, the cause of the error can be checked by analyzing the game history outside the pachinko machine 1.

[11-3. Compact plan 2]
In the above-described modification 1, among the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the state change event of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the number of counting events in each state during the change is recorded. Was recorded. However, the number of events in each changing state may not be important, and it may be sufficient to know the number of events for each type of recurring state. Therefore, in the modified example 2 (compact plan 2), the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the cumulative number of counting events for each state are recorded.

In the second modification, the game history is recorded using the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 125) as in the first modification.

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a game history recorded in the memory of the second modification.

As shown in FIG. 127, the game history of the second modification is composed of a history of state events and a cumulative number of each counting event for each state. The history of the state event includes the state change event that triggered the state change of the pachinko machine 1, the state after the state change event, and the time when the state change event occurs. In the pachinko machine 1 of the modified example 2, the cumulative number of counting events is recorded in five states of low probability / non-time saving state, low probability / time saving state, high probability / non-time saving state, high probability / time saving state, and jackpot state. To. The counting events (and commands related to the event) recorded in the second modification are the starting port 1 winning number (starting port 1 winning command), the starting port 2 winning number (starting port 2 winning command), and special. Symbol 1 variation number (special symbol 1 symbol type command), special symbol 2 variation number (special symbol 2 symbol type command), general winning opening 1 winning number (general winning opening 1 winning command), general winning opening 2 winning number (general) Winning opening 2 winning command), general winning opening 3 winning number (general winning opening 3 winning command), large winning opening 1 winning number (large winning opening 1 winning command), large winning opening 2 winning number (large winning opening 2 winning command) ), The number of gate passages (normal symbol gate passage command), and the number of normal symbol fluctuations (ordinary symbol stop command).

The number of counting events other than those described above may be counted, and the state in which the counting events are recorded separately may be further subdivided.

Next, the details of the game history recording process in the second modification will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 127, when a state change event occurs, the type of the state change event, the state after the event occurs, and the date and time when the event occurs are recorded in the state event history. When a change in the state of the gaming machine is detected by the state change event, the cumulative number of counting events counted in the state before the change is recorded in the non-volatile memory, and the above-mentioned counting event corresponds to the state after the change. Start recording the cumulative number of.

The counting result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and after the state change, the game history storage area (cumulative value of the state) of the SRAM 1511d is read out and stored in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is preferable to add the recorded values and store them in the game history storage area of SRAM 1511d. That is, each time a state change event occurs, the cumulative value of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated using the value before the state change recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Therefore, the counting result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up in the event of a power failure, but is initialized by a normal ram clear operation.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a counting event occurs, the cumulative value of the game history storage area of SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the counting result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal ram clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

As described above, in the modification 2, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the counting event (the number of winnings, the number of fluctuations, etc.) for each state type is recorded. Therefore, the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d You can record a long game history without increasing the capacity of the game.

[11-4. Compact plan 3]
In the above-described modification 2, among the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the state change of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded by the state change event, and the cumulative number of counting events for each state is recorded. However, the timing of state switching may not be important, and it may be sufficient to know the number of events for each state type. Therefore, in the modified example 3 (compact plan 3), the change of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is not recorded, but the cumulative number of counting events for each state is recorded.

In the third modification, the game history is recorded using the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 125) as in the first modification.

In the third modification, the same event as the event recorded in the first modification is recorded by using the game history recording condition setting table shown in FIG. 125.

FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a game history recorded in the memory of the modification example 3.

As shown in FIG. 128, the game history of the modification 3 is composed of the cumulative number of counting events in each state. Further, the game history of the modified example 3 includes the cumulative time of each state. The cumulative time is included so that the hall can estimate the number of event occurrences (for example, the number of jackpot occurrences) from the cumulative time. There are five states in which counting events are recorded separately: low probability / non-time saving state, low probability / time saving state, high probability / non-time saving state, high probability / time saving state, and jackpot state, but they are further subdivided. Counting events may be recorded.

The counting events (and commands related to the event) recorded in the third modification are the starting port 1 winning number (starting port 1 winning command), the starting port 2 winning number (starting port 2 winning command), and special. Symbol 1 variation number (special symbol 1 symbol type command), special symbol 2 variation number (special symbol 2 symbol type command), general winning opening 1 winning number (general winning opening 1 winning command), general winning opening 2 winning number (general) Winning opening 2 winning command), general winning opening 3 winning number (general winning opening 3 winning command), large winning opening 1 winning number (large winning opening 1 winning command), large winning opening 2 winning number (large winning opening 2 winning command) ), The number of gate passages (normal symbol gate passage command), and the number of normal symbol fluctuations (ordinary symbol stop command). The number of counting events other than those described above may be counted.

Next, the details of the game history recording process in the second modification will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 128, when a state change event occurs, the cumulative number of the above-mentioned counting events is recorded corresponding to the state of the gaming machine changed by the state change event.

The counting result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and after the state change, the game history storage area (cumulative value of the state) of the SRAM 1511d is read out and stored in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is preferable to add the recorded values and store them in the game history storage area of SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a state change event occurs, the cumulative value of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. Therefore, the counting result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up in the event of a power failure, but is initialized by a normal ram clear operation.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a counting event occurs, the cumulative value of the game history storage area of SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the counting result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal ram clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

As described above, in the modification 2, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the counting event (the number of winnings, the number of fluctuations, etc.) for each state type is recorded. Therefore, the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d You can record a long game history without increasing the capacity of the game.

As described above, with respect to the modified examples 1 to 3, when the condition of temporarily recording in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) when an event occurs by the game history recording process and writing to the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is satisfied. The data of the work area is written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. Further, in the normal ram clear operation, the information written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is not erased (initialized), but the information recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is erased (initialized).

Here, I would like to briefly touch on the sales of the hall. In many cases, the hall has fixed business hours, for example, the opening time is 10:00 and the closing time is 23:00. For this reason, it may be difficult for a clerk to monitor whether or not a player is playing an illegal game during a time when many players are present, such as a time zone shortly after the store opens or a time zone in the evening. However, as the closing time approaches, the number of pachinko players will decrease, and if there is a pachinko machine with a high probability and a short time just before the store closes, the pachinko machine with a high probability and a short time will be initialized for the next day's business, and the probability will be low. It may be in a non-time saving state. In this case, since the number of pachinko players is small, it is possible to monitor pachinko machines with a high probability and a short time, so it is possible to know whether the latest game has been fraudulent. In other words, considering the situation that some pachinko machines do not need the latest game history, it is possible to provide an efficient game machine by allowing the clerk to select whether to keep the latest information.

Specifically, by initializing the pachinko machine 1 by the ram clear operation, the game history stored in the work area for the event that occurred after the latest event is deleted, and the game history is stored for the event that occurred before the latest event. The game history stored in the area is retained. That is, although the pachinko machine records information that is not output from the external terminal board 784, the information recorded in the work area that is erased by the RAM clear operation and the information recorded in the game history storage area that is not erased by the RAM clear operation. The game history is recorded separately for. By doing this, if you want to keep a record of all the events recorded in the work area, if the clerk wants to cause a change in the state of the pachinko machine, and if you want to delete the record of the event recorded in the work area, The clerk may perform the ram clear operation. As mentioned above, it was decided to delete only the game history stored in the work area related to the event that occurred after the latest event without deleting all the game history by the ram clear operation, before the latest event. This is because the clerk has not seen the events that have occurred up to that point (because there are many players, they cannot see them).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, not only the information that the starting opening is won, but also the winning of the general winning opening that is not related to the lottery is once recorded in the work area. Even if the symbol that starts to fluctuate by winning a prize in the start opening and the lottery result of winning is shown by the stop mode of this symbol), the game is played while the game ball is launched in the game area 5a. It is characterized by collecting history. That is, it can be said that the game history recording process is not a process that is executed when the winning lottery is triggered, but a process that may be executed at any time while the power is being supplied to the pachinko machine.

In addition, in the low probability and non-time saving state, the game ball is fired to the starting port 2002 so that the game ball wins, like a so-called left-handed hit or a choro-hit. In such a case, the starting port 2002 and the general winning port 2001 should be appropriately won. However, there is no prize in the general winning opening 2001 (or very few), but there are many game balls in the starting opening 2002, or conversely, there is no winning in the starting opening 2002 (or very few). ) However, if a large number of game balls have won in the general winning opening 2001, there is a possibility that fraud has been committed. Therefore, the first winning opening and the second winning opening in which the game ball wins at the same time are set as monitoring targets, and the number of winnings in the first winning opening is a predetermined multiplication factor of the number of winnings in the second winning opening. When the number exceeds, an error may be notified.

Further, instead of the error notification, a security signal may be transmitted from the external terminal board 784. With the above-mentioned detection method, there is a possibility that an error may be detected when an unfamiliar player makes an unexpected hit. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 may not notify the error, only output the security signal from the external terminal plate 784, and may not notify the player. In this way, the clerk in the hall can confirm the possibility of an error from a place away from the pachinko machine 1 without being noticed by the player, and trouble with the player can be prevented.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is also characterized in that information accumulated in a plurality of games is collected as a game history. Since there is an upper limit to the amount of game history data that can be recorded, if you record for each game (1 variation), you will not be able to record many games (long time), so you can keep more game records. There is.

[12. Game performance setting function]
Next, an example of a pachinko machine having a setting function will be described. The pachinko machine of this embodiment has, for example, a setting function for changing the operating ratio of a condition device as a game performance.

[12-1. Basic configuration of pachinko machines with setting function]
FIG. 129 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine having a setting unit, and FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine having a setting unit as viewed from the back side with the door open. Is a perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130 as viewed from the back surface side in a closed state, and FIG. 132 is a view showing a setting portion of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130.

The pachinko machine shown in FIG. 129 has a setting board 970 for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine. The setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, and the payout control unit 952 acquires the operation state of each switch and controls the display of the setting display 974.

As shown in the front view of FIG. 132 (A), the setting board 970 has a setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, and a setting for changing a setting value. A change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value, and a setting display 974 for displaying the set or selected setting value are provided. The setting board 970 functions as a setting change operation unit that accepts a setting change operation.

In this embodiment, the operation signals of the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are taken into the payout control unit 952. Further, the setting display 974 is controlled by the payout control unit 952. The finalized setting is transmitted from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board 1310. As will be described later, the main control board 1310 may control the components on the setting board 970.

The setting key 971 is for changing to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode by inserting a predetermined key into a keyhole (key insertion part) and maintaining a short-circuited or open state of contacts by turning the key to a set position. It is a switch that outputs a signal that triggers. It should be noted that other switches may be used in combination without providing the setting key 971. In this case, by operating the setting change switch 972 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (holding down), the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and the setting change switch 972 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. You may press and hold to exit the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode.

Further, the setting change mode may be started / ended by operating the RAM clear switch 954. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954 and continuing the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (holding down). Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than a predetermined time, the RAM clear process is executed. Further, the setting change mode may be terminated by pressing and holding the RAM clear switch 954 in the setting change mode.

In this way, even an employee who does not have the key for the setting key 971 can change the setting, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily handled in the hall. Further, since the operation time of the setting change switch 972 is detected, it is preferable to detect the operation when the setting change switch 972 falls.

The setting change switch 972 is composed of, for example, a push button switch, and is operated to switch and select a set value (1 to 6) in order. That is, when the setting change switch 972 is pressed once, the setting value is incremented by 1, and when the setting change switch 972 is operated when the setting value = 6, the setting value becomes 1. The set value may be selectable by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. The set value may be not 6 steps, but may be less steps (for example, 2 steps) or more steps (for example, 8 steps).

Further, the setting change switch 972 may not be provided, and the setting key 971 may also serve as the setting change switch 972. In this case, the setting key 971 can be operated in three stages, the key can be inserted and removed in the neutral position (normal position), turning it counterclockwise is the operation to start the setting change mode, and turning it clockwise is the setting to be set. This is an operation for selecting a value (turning it clockwise functions as a setting change switch 972). The setting key 971 performs an alternative operation capable of holding the left position and the neutral position, and performs a momentary operation in which the right position is not held (returns to the neutral position when the key is released).

The set value changes the operation ratio of the condition device (that is, the hit probability of the special symbol). The set value = 1 has a low hit probability, and the set value = 6 has a high hit probability. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability variation jackpot ratio, the time reduction (ST) ratio after the jackpot, the number of time reductions, the number of rounds and counts of the jackpot, the probability of hitting a regular figure, the general winning opening, the starting opening, and the big winning opening Various parameters related to the game, such as the number of prize balls, may be changed to change the number of prize balls that the player can obtain.

The setting confirmation switch 973 is composed of, for example, a momentary type switch, and is a switch for confirming the set value selected by the operation of the setting change switch 972 and inputting it to the pachinko machine 1. The setting confirmation switch 973 may be a push button switch or a momentary toggle switch as long as it is a momentary type switch. The setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973 may be configured by switches having different operation methods (operation directions) and shapes so that both switches are not operated by mistake. For example, the setting change switch 972 may be composed of a push button switch, and the setting confirmation switch 973 may be composed of a momentary toggle switch.

The setting selected by the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position may be confirmed without providing the setting confirmation switch 973. Further, the selected set value may be determined by the operation of another switch or sensor provided in the pachinko machine 1. For example, the operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, the contact detection by the contact detection sensor 509 by touching the handle lever 504, the operation of the stop button of the handle unit 500, the operation of the operation button 220C, and the ball lending button. The selected setting may be confirmed by the operation of, the operation of the return button, the detection of winning of the game ball to the starting ports 2002 and 2004, and the like. The operation unit that substitutes for the setting confirmation switch 973 may be a switch that can be operated by the player (used for the game) or a switch that cannot be operated by the player (provided on the back side of the pachinko machine).

That is, in the illustrated example, three switches (including setting keys) are provided on the setting board 970 in order to set the game performance on the pachinko machine 1, but one or two switches are provided on the setting board 970. It is enough to provide it.

Further, the setting change operation may be performed only by the RAM clear switch 954 without providing any of the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954 and continuing the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (holding down). Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than a predetermined time, the RAM clear process is executed. Further, instead of the setting change switch 972, the set value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 in the setting change mode for less than a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and instead of the setting confirmation switch 973, the RAM clear switch The set value can be confirmed by the operation (long press) of 954 for a predetermined time or longer. Further, the setting change mode may be terminated by pressing and holding the RAM clear switch 954 after the setting is confirmed.

The setting display 974 is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, displays the setting value selected by the operation of the setting change switch 972, and displays the current setting value by a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of the setting key 971). .. The setting display 974 may be configured by a number of LEDs having a settable value instead of the 7-segment LED. In this case, the LED corresponding to the set value lights up to display the set value.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the payout control board 951 is provided with an error type indicator using a 7-segment LED that displays the type of the payout error. However, this error type indicator and the setting indicator 974 are also used. The selected setting value or the current setting value may be displayed on the error type display. In this case, it is advisable to change the display mode so that the display of the error type and the display of the set value can be distinguished. For example, the dot may be turned off when displaying the error type, and the dot may be turned on when displaying the set value. Further, the error type display may be a lighting display (not blinking), and the set value display may be a blinking display.

In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, but it may be connected to the power supply board (not shown) in the power supply board box 930. By providing the setting board 970 side by side with the power supply board (or inside the power supply board box 930), the setting key 971 and the power supply switch 932 operated at the time of setting change are arranged in the vicinity, and the operability of setting change is performed. Can be improved.

Further, as will be described later, the setting board 970 may be connected to the main control board 1310.

As yet another form, the setting board 970 may be formed not as an independent board but also as a part of a payout control board 951, a power supply board, or a main control board 1310. That is, the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973, and the setting display 974 may be mounted on any of the payout control board 951, the power supply board, or the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 130, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side surface of the lower part of the main body frame 4 (that is, the frame side instead of the game board 5) constituting the pachinko machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 131, When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, at least a part of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2. In the state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the distance between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow, so that it is difficult to operate the keys and switches on the setting board 970 in this state. In this way, the right frame member 40 hides the setting key 971 and hinders the insertion of the key into the keyhole of the setting key 971, making it difficult to operate the setting board 970 (setting change operation unit). Functions as a means. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2, the setting key 971 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval as at least a part of the setting board 970. However, the entire setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. In this case, the keys and switches may be arranged vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40. In this way, when all of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval, the pachinko machine 1 is set during operation (that is, the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2). It is possible to make the operation of the board 970 difficult and suppress fraudulent acts in which the player changes the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

The member (means for making setting change difficult) facing the setting board 970 in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the right frame member 40 in the illustrated example, but other members may be used. For example, the cover provided on the outer frame 2 may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. Further, a cover that moves in conjunction with the opening and closing of the main body frame 4 may be provided, and in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the cover may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval. ..

The setting change difficulty means composed of the members provided so as to face the setting board 970 may be a cover covering the setting board 970. In this case, the setting key 971 that triggers the start of the setting change mode may be covered with a double cover. For example, an inner cover that covers the setting board 970 and an outer cover that covers various control boards including the setting board 970 are provided. Further, an inner cover that covers the keyhole of the setting key 971 and an outer cover that covers the setting board 970 may be provided. More specifically, the setting board 970 is housed in the setting board case, and the setting board case has a first cover that prevents inadvertent operation of the setting key 971 and the switches 972 and 973 (at least the setting key 971). Provide a body (for example, a door-shaped lid that can be opened during operation). Further, a second cover body covering various control boards including the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 is provided on the outer frame 2. The second cover body may be provided on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 to cover various control boards. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the start of the setting change mode due to an inadvertent operation, and it is possible to suppress an illegal act of an unauthorized player changing the setting of the pachinko machine 1.

The distance at which the setting board 970 faces a member such as the right frame member 40 while the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the head of the key inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 (the key head to be gripped during operation). ) Should be shorter than the length.

The setting board 970 may be arranged in the vicinity of the power switch 932 so that the setting key 971 and the power switch 932 operated when the setting is changed are arranged in the vicinity. In this way, the operability when activating the setting change mode can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 131, the power supply board box 930 is provided with a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1, and the payout control board unit 950 is initially equipped with the main control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1. A RAM clear switch 954 is provided. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during the game and can be operated from the back side. However, the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 described above are from the back side. It is provided at a position where it can be visually recognized and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably also the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973) is provided at a position where it is difficult to see and operate from the back surface side during the operation of the pachinko machine 1. This is because the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated in the manufacturing process, and are therefore provided at positions that can be operated from the back surface side during the operation of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, the setting key 971 is hidden so that it is difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation, so that the setting board 970 is operated during the game to suppress fraudulent acts of changing the setting of the pachinko machine 1. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the switches on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 are arranged so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraudulent activities.

Similarly, since the current set value of the pachinko machine 1 is important information for selecting the player's platform, it is desirable that the pachinko machine 1 is not known to the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 131, similarly to the setting key 971, the setting display 974 may be opposed to the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval so that the display cannot be seen. Normally, when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 or the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting display 974 is turned off so that the player does not know the set value. Is desirable. In this way, the right frame member 40 functions as a visibility difficulty means for hiding the display content of the setting display 974 and making it difficult to visually recognize the display content of the setting display 974 (setting state display unit).

FIG. 132 (B) is a view of the setting board 970 viewed from above with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2. In this state, since the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval, the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 and the right frame member 40 interfere with each other, and the setting key 971 The key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole.

On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the right frame member 40 is not located in front of the keyhole of the setting key 971, and the key 975 can be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

Further, the display surface of the setting display 974 faces the side surface of the pachinko machine 1, and when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, it faces the right frame member 40. It is difficult to check the current settings of pachinko machines.

FIG. 133 is a diagram showing a modified example of the setting board 970.

In this modified example as well, the setting board 970 is provided with the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973, and the setting display 974, as in the above-described example. However, in this modification, the setting key 971 is arranged sideways on the setting board 970, and the key 975 is inserted from the side of the setting board.

Therefore, the setting board 970 of this modification is installed not on the side surface side of the main body frame 4 but on the back surface side so that the keyhole faces the side surface. Then, as shown in FIG. 133 (B), when the setting board 970 is viewed from above, the side surface (that is, the keyhole) of the setting board 970 is the right frame member 40 in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. The head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 interferes with the right frame member 40, and the key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 133, the board of the pachinko machine 1 can be arranged in the same direction as the other boards, and even if the difficulty of board placement is reduced, the setting board 970 is operated while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that change the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine having the setting unit will be described. In this modification, the setting board 970 is provided not on the main body frame 4 but on the game board 5, and is connected to the main control board 1310.

FIG. 134 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine of this modified example, FIG. 135 is a perspective view of a game board having a setting unit from behind, and FIG. 136 is a perspective view of FIG. 135. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which mounted the game board shown from the back.

The setting board 970 is provided with a setting key 971, a setting change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973, and a setting display 974. The setting board 970 may be the one shown in FIG. 132 (A) or the one shown in FIG. 133 (A).

In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 134, the setting board 970 for setting the game performance of the pachinko machine is connected to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the operation state of each switch, and the main control MPU 1311 Controls the display of the setting display 974.

The functions and configurations of the setting board 970 and each component on the setting board are the same as those in the above-described embodiment, and common description will be omitted.

The main control board 1310 is provided with a base display 1317 composed of 7-segment LEDs. Therefore, the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 may be used in combination, and the selected setting value or the current setting value may be displayed on the base display 1317. On the base display 1317, normally, the base value of the provisional section (the section currently being measured) and the base value of the fixed section (straight line section) are switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals. On the other hand, in the setting change mode, the selected (next set) setting value is displayed, and while the setting is being confirmed (see FIG. 152), the current setting value is displayed.

In this case, it is advisable to change the display mode so that the display of the base value and the display of the set value can be distinguished. For example, although four digits are used for displaying the base value, only a predetermined one digit (for example, the rightmost digit) may be used for displaying the set value, and "-" may be displayed. For digits that are not used in the display of the set value, other numbers, characters, and symbols may be displayed instead of "-" as long as they are not used in the display of the base value. Further, when displaying the set value, characters that are not used in displaying the base value may be displayed. For example, the set value is displayed in six stages of alphabets A, b, C, d, E, and F.

Further, in the setting change mode, it is preferable that the set value is blinked while being selected and the confirmed set value is lit. In addition, the current set value should be lit and displayed. Further, in the base display, the first two digits indicate the type of display data, and the numbers are not displayed. Therefore, the setting value may be displayed using the most significant digit. When the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used together, the set value is displayed with priority during the setting change mode and the setting confirmation, so that the base value is displayed although the base value is calculated. Not done. After that, when the setting change mode and the confirmation of the set value are completed, the base display 1317 resumes the display of the base value.

When the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are also used, the process of outputting the display contents to the setting display 974 is executed by the game control code 13131 in the game control area, and the display contents are displayed on the base display 1317. The output process is executed by the base calculation / display code 13135 outside the game control area. However, a part of the base calculation / display code 13135 (for example, a process of outputting display data to the driver circuit) may be provided in the game control area. By standardizing the processing, the capacity of the program can be reduced and the memory can be saved.

On the other hand, the process of outputting the display content to the setting display 974 is executed by the game control code 13131 in the game control area, and the process of outputting the display content to the base display 1317 is for base calculation / display outside the game control area. When executed by the code 13135, the processing inside and outside the game control area can be completely separated, and the security can be improved.

Further, the processing of setting change and setting confirmation may be executed outside the game control area.

That is, whether the setting display 974 is provided separately from the base display 1317 or is also used as the base display 1317, it is included in the category of the invention described in the present specification. In this way, by displaying the plurality of displays provided on the main control board box 1320 so as not to be confused during the setting change mode and the confirmation of the set value, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation at the time of setting change and a misidentification of the set value.

Further, even when the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are not shared, the display of the base display 1317 may be turned off or all may be turned on while the setting display 974 is displaying the set value. Even in this case, when the setting change mode and the confirmation of the set value are completed, the base display 1317 resumes the display of the base value. By not displaying a plurality of displays on the main control board box 1320 during the setting change mode and the confirmation of the set value, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation at the time of setting change and a misidentification of the set value.

In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310, but the setting board 970 may be formed on a part of the main control board 1310 instead of an independent board. That is, the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973, and the setting display 974 may be mounted on the main control board 1310.

The setting board 970 may be enclosed in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310. When the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 has holes or notches for operating the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970. Is provided.

When the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320, the structure of the main control board box 1320, that is, the opening / closing direction differs depending on the direction of the keyhole of the setting key 971 on the setting board 970. Specifically, when the key 975 is inserted vertically into the board from the front of the board, the main control board box 1320 is vertically separated from the setting board 970 by the front surface and the back surface of the setting board 970, or the front side box body (the front side box body ( Alternatively, the cover) and the backside box may be configured to be openable and closable with one side as a hinge. On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted in the direction in which the substrate is stretched from the side, the main control board box 1320 is formed by the front side box (or cover) of the setting board 970 and the back side box in the stretching direction of the setting board 970. It is preferable to have a structure that slides in (the insertion direction of the key 975) to separate the keys.

In this modification, the operation signals of the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are taken into the main control MPU 1311. Further, the setting display 974 is controlled by the main control MPU 1311.

As shown in FIG. 135, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side surface (left side in FIG. 135) of the game board 5 constituting the pachinko machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 136, the game board 5 is attached. When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, at least a part of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2. When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the distance between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow. Therefore, when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the keys on the setting board 970 and the like The operation of the switch is difficult. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2, the setting key 971 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval as at least a part of the setting board 970. However, the entire setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. In this case, the keys and switches may be arranged vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40. In this way, when all of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval, the pachinko machine 1 is set during operation (that is, the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2). By operating the board 970, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that change the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

The member (means for making setting change difficult) facing the setting board 970 in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the right frame member 40 in the illustrated example, but other members may be used. For example, the cover provided on the outer frame 2 may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. Further, a cover that moves in conjunction with the opening and closing of the main body frame 4 may be provided, and in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the cover may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval. ..

The distance at which the setting board 970 faces a member such as the right frame member 40 while the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the head of the key inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 (the key head to be gripped during operation). ) Should be shorter than the length.

Further, as shown in FIG. 136, the power supply board box 930 is provided with a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1, and the payout control board unit 950 is initially equipped with the main control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1. A RAM clear switch 954 is provided. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during the game and can be operated from the back side. However, the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 described above are from the back side. It is provided at a position where it can be visually recognized and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably also the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973) is provided at a position where it is difficult to see and operate from the back surface side during the operation of the pachinko machine 1. This is because the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated in the manufacturing process, and are therefore provided at positions that can be operated from the back surface side during the operation of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, the setting key 971 is hidden so that it is difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation, so that the setting board 970 is operated during the game to suppress fraudulent acts of changing the setting of the pachinko machine 1. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the switches on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 are arranged so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraudulent activities.

Similarly, since the current set value of the pachinko machine 1 is important information for selecting the player's platform, it is desirable that the pachinko machine 1 is not known to the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 136, similarly to the setting key 971, the setting display 974 may be opposed to the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval so that the display cannot be seen. Normally, when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 or the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting display 974 is turned off so that the player does not know the set value. Is desirable. In this way, the right frame member 40 functions as a visibility difficulty means for hiding the display content of the setting display 974 and making it difficult to visually recognize the display content of the setting display 974 (setting state display unit).

In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 134, a view of the setting board 970 viewed from above with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2 is as shown in FIGS. 132 (B) and 133 (B). .. In this state, the keyholes of the setting board 970 and the setting key 971 face the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval, so that the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 interferes with the right frame member 40. However, the key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

Further, the display surface of the setting display 974 faces the side surface of the pachinko machine 1, and when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, it faces the right frame member 40. It is no longer possible to check the current settings of the pachinko machine.

Next, the process related to the setting change will be described.

FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of the initialization process. The initialization process shown in FIG. 137 is compared with the initialization process described above in FIG. 21, and the point where the RAM clear process is performed when the setting key is operated (step S17, step S30) and the CPU initialization process (step). The difference is that the setting change process is performed in S28). The same steps as those in the initialization process described above in FIG. 21 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform the initialization process. First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes it possible to write to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and determines whether a predetermined wait time (time required for the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) to start) has elapsed. Determine (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the setting key 971 is being operated and its output is on (step S17). When the setting key 971 is operated, among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312, the set value data and the game state (for example, probabilistic state, time saving state, hold storage of special symbol or normal symbol, prize ball) Information about) is left, the other data is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24.

On the other hand, when the setting key 971 is not operated, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch is operated (step S18). When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased (step S30), and step S24. Proceed to. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set (step S20).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct. Therefore, the data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30). , Step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power failure and the checksum in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct, so the data backed up in the work area ( The area (other than the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, so the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and step S24 Proceed to.

Subsequently, the check code is used to determine whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), the operation of the RAM clear switch (step S18), and the power failure flag are set as the case where at least a part of the area of the RAM 1312 is initialized. There are a power failure flag error (step S20) that has not been set, a RAM error (step S22) in which the checksums of the RAMs do not match, and an error (step S24) of the base calculation work. Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the set value and the game state in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area). (For example, probability change state, time saving state, hold memory of special symbol or normal symbol, information about prize ball) is left, other data is cleared, and base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. .. If the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, or if the power failure flag is abnormal or the RAM is abnormal, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared and the base is calculated. Area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Further, in the case of a base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

Note that, unlike the ones shown in the figure, in the case of a power failure flag abnormality, a RAM abnormality, or a base calculation work abnormality, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, so that the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128 The entire RAM area including the above may be cleared. If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a base calculation work error, the data indicating the game state is lost and normal processing cannot be executed. If the memory configuration is such that the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area cannot be executed. Only should be initialized. When the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 is set as described above. You don't have to clear it.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is used for base calculation for each data type (game control area 13126 (set value, game state data)). Area 13128) Erase under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is erased, and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. This is because if the set value is erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, it is necessary to reset the set value every time the RAM clear switch is operated, which complicates the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall. Therefore, the set value is not erased by operating the RAM clear switch.

For the processing after step S28, either FIG. 22 or FIG. 102 may be adopted as necessary. The difference between FIGS. 22 and 102 is the presence or absence of processing (steps S50 and S52) in which a check code is calculated and stored from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) when the power is turned off.

138 and 139 are flowcharts showing an example of setting change processing and setting display processing, and FIG. 138 shows a setting board 970 connected to a payout control board 951 (or integrally configured with a payout control board 951). 139 shows the processing when the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 (or is integrally configured with the main control board 1310).

First, the setting change process in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 138 (A) are linked will be described.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, (1) the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned on and whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Whether or not the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 can be determined by the detection signal from the main body frame open switch. Considering from the arrangement position of the setting key 971, since the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, the determination of opening the main body frame 4 may be omitted. ..

If the setting key 971 is turned on and the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the payout control unit 952 starts the setting change mode. In this way, the payout control unit 952 functions as a setting change allowable state generating means. As the start conditions of the setting change mode other than the above, the operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, the detection by the contact detection sensor 509 by touching the handle lever 504, and the prepaid card being inserted in the CR unit (prepaid). It is not necessary to start the setting change mode when there is a balance on the card) and there is a balance put into the cash sand. Further, even when the pachinko machine 1 detects the possibility of some kind of fraudulent activity (for example, a magnetic error), it is better not to start the setting change mode. The determination of these conditions may be performed after the main control MPU 1311, not the payout control unit 952, receives the setting change start command. In such a case, it is presumed that the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 is not performed by the hall, and there is a possibility that an unauthorized player is trying to change the setting. Therefore, it is better not to shift to the setting change mode. ..

(2) When the setting change mode is started, the payout control unit 952 transmits a setting change start command to the main control board 1310.

(3) When the main control MPU 1311 receives the setting change start command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 executes the RAM clear process before the setting change. The RAM clear processing before this setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) in the game state (for example, the probability change state, the time saving state, the special symbol, and the hold storage of the normal symbol). , Information about the prize ball) is left, the other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. Since the set value is set to the initial value later in step (6), it does not have to be cleared in this step.

(4) After that, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(5) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies that the setting change mode is in progress. For the notification in the setting change mode, the initial operation of the accessory is performed, or a predetermined display is performed on the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control unit 1511 does not have to perform the initial operation of the accessory. For example, when displaying the procedure or status of setting change on the effect display device 1600, if the initial operation of the accessory is performed during the setting change, the display of the effect display device 1600 is partially hidden, and the setting change work. Because it interferes with.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting change mode in accordance with the notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511. For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be displayed in a special mode that does not appear during the normal game (for example, all the LEDs for displaying the special symbol are turned off or on) to stop the progress of the game. .. Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting change mode by stopping the detection of the winning ball and the out ball and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, the base value is not calculated in the setting change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the launch permission signal, stops the launch of the game ball controlled by the launch control device, and functions as a launch disabled means to notify the setting change mode. May be good. When the launch of the game ball is stopped during the setting change mode, the launch of the game ball during the launch stop period may be regarded as an error, and an error may be detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. ..

(6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to 0. As described above, the set value can be selected from 1 to 6, the set value = 0 is the state in which the setting is not set, and the setting change mode cannot be ended when the set value = 0, and the game (game ball). Launch, variable display game, etc.) does not start.

(7) After that, each time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the payout control unit 952 displays the selected set value on the setting display 974.

(8) The payout control unit 952 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Although the opening of the main body frame 4 is determined in the above-mentioned procedure (1), it may be determined at least once before determining the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973. In this way, the payout control unit 952 functions as a setting change permissible state generating means for determining whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied before the setting change is confirmed.

(9) Further, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(10) If the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, the payout control unit 952 confirms the selected set value, and the set value is confirmed. Is displayed on the setting display 974. The set value confirmation display may display a value that cannot be selected as the setting value (for example, 8), or the confirmed setting value may be displayed blinking for a predetermined time.

(11) After that, the payout control unit 952 determines whether or not the setting key 971 is turned off.

(12) If the setting key 971 is turned off, the setting change mode is terminated, so that the payout control unit 952 transmits a setting change end command to the main control board 1310. By this setting change end command, the confirmed setting value is notified to the main control MPU 1311.

(13) When the main control MPU 1311 receives the setting change end command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 transmits the setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(14) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 ends the notification during the setting change. At the same time, if the main control MPU 1311 notifies that the setting is being changed, this also ends.

The notification (including the game stop and the launch stop) may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode is completed, or may be canceled after a predetermined time has elapsed. If the notification performed in the procedure (5) is considered to be a mere notification to the outside (player, hall employee), the notification may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode ends. However, if the notification performed in the procedure (5) is caught from the viewpoint of finding fraudulent activity, it is preferable to cancel the notification after the setting change mode ends and a predetermined time elapses. This is because when the setting is changed, the predetermined display is displayed for a predetermined time or the game is stopped, so that it becomes easy to detect that an unauthorized player has changed the setting during business hours. is there.

When the launch of the game ball is stopped in a predetermined period after the setting change mode ends, the launch of the game ball during the launch stop period is regarded as an error, and an error is detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. You may.

(15) After that, the main control MPU 1311 executes the RAM clear process after the setting change. The RAM clear processing after this setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) with the set value and the game state (for example, the probability change state, the time saving state, the special symbol, and the normal symbol). The data of the hold memory and the prize ball) is left, the other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. That is, in the RAM clear process after the setting change, the set value is not initialized unlike the RAM clear process before the setting change.

Then, the setting change mode is terminated.

In this way, when the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951 and functions as a child board of the payout control board 951 (or the setting board 970 is integrally configured with the payout control board 951). , The main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cooperate to execute the setting change process.

In the above-described processing, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated, but the main control MPU 1311 may determine. In this case, the signal related to the operation of the setting key 971 from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board 1310 is transmitted by serial communication, a predetermined pulse signal (a predetermined number of pulses of a predetermined frequency is transmitted), or a power supply voltage. However, a signal having an intermediate potential that is neither the ground voltage nor the ground voltage may be output. In order to prevent fraudulent activity that short-circuits the terminal of the setting key 971 and activates the setting change mode, the payout control unit 952 mainly controls a signal related to the operation of the setting key 971 by a signal that cannot occur due to the short-circuiting of the terminal. This is because it is preferable to transmit to the substrate 1310.

Next, the setting display process in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 138 (B) are linked will be described.

When the setting key 971 is turned on while the pachinko machine 1 is operating (energized), the payout control unit 952 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

(1) In the setting display mode, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Considering from the arrangement position of the setting key 971, since the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, the determination of opening the main body frame 4 may be omitted. ..

(2) When it is determined that the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, the payout control unit 952 transmits a set value request command to the main control board 1310.

(3) When the main control MPU 1311 receives the set value request command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 reads the set value stored in the main control RAM 1312 and transmits the set value notification command to the payout control unit 952.

(4) The payout control unit 952 displays the set value notified by the set value notification command from the main control MPU 1311 on the setting display 974.

In the above, the set value stored in the main control board 1310 (main control RAM 1312) is displayed on the setting display 974, but the payout control unit 952 stores the set value and stores it in the payout control unit 952. The set value may be displayed on the setting display 974.

Next, the setting change process by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 139 (A) will be described.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, (1) the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned on and whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, the main control MPU 1311 functions as a setting change allowable state generating means. Whether or not the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 can be determined by the detection signal from the main body frame open switch. The detection signal of the main body frame release switch is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The payout control board 951 may transmit a main body frame opening detection command to the main control board 1310 based on the received detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch. Further, the payout control board 951 may output the received detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch to the main control board 1310 as it is. Considering from the arrangement position of the setting key 971, since the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, the determination of opening the main body frame 4 may be omitted. ..

If the setting key 971 is turned on and the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1311 starts the setting change mode. As the start conditions of the setting change mode other than the above, the operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, the detection by the contact detection sensor 509 by touching the handle lever 504, and the prepaid card being inserted in the CR unit (prepaid). It is not necessary to start the setting change mode when there is a balance on the card) and there is a balance put into the cash sand. Further, even when the pachinko machine 1 detects the possibility of some kind of fraudulent activity (for example, a magnetic error), it is better not to start the setting change mode. In such a case, it is presumed that the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 is not performed by the hall, and there is a possibility that an unauthorized player is trying to change the setting. Therefore, it is better not to shift to the setting change mode. ..

(3) When the setting change mode starts, the main control MPU 1311 executes the RAM clear process before the setting change when it receives the setting change start command from the payout control unit 952. The RAM clear processing before this setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) in the game state (for example, the probability change state, the time saving state, the special symbol, and the hold storage of the normal symbol). , Information about the prize ball) is left, the other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. Since the set value is set to the initial value later in step (6), it does not have to be cleared in this step.

(4) After that, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(5) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies that the setting change mode is in progress. For the notification in the setting change mode, the initial operation of the accessory is performed, or a predetermined display is performed on the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control unit 1511 does not have to perform the initial operation of the accessory. For example, when displaying the procedure or status of setting change on the effect display device 1600, if the initial operation of the accessory is performed during the setting change, the display of the effect display device 1600 is partially hidden, and the setting change work. Because it interferes with.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting change mode in accordance with the notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511. For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be displayed in a special mode that does not appear during the normal game (for example, all the LEDs for displaying the special symbol are turned off or on) to stop the progress of the game. .. Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting change mode by stopping the detection of the winning ball and the out ball and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, the base value is not calculated in the setting change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the launch permission signal, stops the launch of the game ball controlled by the launch control device, and functions as a launch disabled means to notify the setting change mode. May be good. When the launch of the game ball is stopped during the setting change mode, the launch of the game ball during the launch stop period may be regarded as an error, and an error may be detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. ..

(6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to 0. As described above, the set value can be selected from 1 to 6, the set value = 0 is the state in which the setting is not set, and the setting change mode cannot be ended when the set value = 0, and the game (game ball). Launch, variable display game, etc.) does not start.

(7) After that, each time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the main control MPU 1311 displays the selected setting value on the setting display 974.

(8) The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Although the opening of the main body frame 4 is determined in the above-mentioned procedure (1), it may be determined at least once before determining the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973. In this way, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the conditions for the setting change are satisfied (in particular, whether the detection signal of the main body frame release switch is input from the payout control board 951) before the setting change is confirmed. It functions as a means for generating an allowable state.

(9) Further, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(10) If the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, the main control MPU 1311 confirms the selected set value and confirms that the set value is confirmed. It is displayed on the setting display 974. The set value confirmation display may display a value that cannot be selected as the setting value (for example, 8), or the confirmed setting value may be displayed blinking for a predetermined time.

(11) After that, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting key 971 is turned off.

(13) If the setting key 971 is turned off, the setting change mode is terminated, so that the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(14) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 ends the notification during the setting change. At the same time, if the main control MPU 1311 notifies that the setting is being changed, this also ends.

The notification (including the game stop and the launch stop) may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode is completed, or may be canceled after a predetermined time has elapsed. If the notification performed in the procedure (5) is considered to be a mere notification to the outside (player, hall employee), the notification may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode ends. However, if the notification performed in the procedure (5) is caught from the viewpoint of finding fraudulent activity, it is preferable to cancel the notification after the setting change mode ends and a predetermined time elapses. This is because when the setting is changed, the predetermined display is displayed for a predetermined time or the game is stopped, so that it becomes easy to detect that an unauthorized player has changed the setting during business hours. is there.

When the launch of the game ball is stopped in a predetermined period after the setting change mode ends, the launch of the game ball during the launch stop period is regarded as an error, and an error is detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. You may.

(15) After that, the main control MPU 1311 executes the RAM clear process after the setting change. The RAM clear processing after this setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) with the set value and the game state (for example, the probability change state, the time saving state, the special symbol, and the normal symbol). The data of the hold memory and the prize ball) is left, the other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. That is, in the RAM clear process after the setting change, the set value is not initialized unlike the RAM clear process before the setting change.

Then, the setting change mode is terminated.

In this way, when the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 and functions as a child board of the main control board 1310 (or the setting board 970 is integrally configured with the main control board 1310). Since the main control board 1310 acquires the detection signal of the main body frame release switch from the payout control board 951, the setting change process cannot be executed only by the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cooperate with each other. Is executing the setting change process.

Next, the setting display process in which the setting board 970 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 139 (B) are linked will be described.

When the setting key 971 is turned on while the pachinko machine 1 is operating (energized), the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

In the setting display mode, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Considering from the arrangement position of the setting key 971, since the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 in order to operate the setting key 971, the determination of opening the main body frame 4 may be omitted. ..

When it is determined that the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1311 reads the set value stored in the main control RAM 1312 and displays it on the setting display 974.

In the setting change processing described with reference to FIGS. 138 (A) and 139 (A), if the pachinko machine 1 detects an error during the setting change mode, the setting change mode may be invalidated and the setting change mode may be temporarily stopped. Then, by shutting off the power of the pachinko machine 1 and turning it on again, the stopped setting change mode is restarted. The setting change mode may be restarted from the stage where the setting change mode is stopped due to error detection, or may be performed from the beginning of the setting change mode (setting value = 0 when the setting value is not selected).

To change the set value, it is advisable to record the history a predetermined number of times. Specifically, the date and time when the setting is confirmed and the confirmed setting value are stored in the RAM of the main control RAM 1312 or the peripheral control unit 1511. When the history of set values is stored in the peripheral control unit 1511, it is preferable to store it in the RAM in the RTC provided in the peripheral control unit 1511 because the stored contents are backed up even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. Furthermore, the history of changes in the recorded setting values can be output. For example, it is preferable to display the history of changes in the recorded set values on the effect display device 1600 by a predetermined operation.

When the set value is changed, the measurement interval of the base value may be changed. That is, when the set value is changed, even if the total number of out balls in the section currently measuring the base value is less than 52000, the section is ended and the next section is started. Since the gaming performance of the gaming machine is changed by the set value, by changing the section by changing the set value, it is possible to calculate the base value in which different gaming performances are not mixed, and it is possible to grasp the transition of the base value by changing the set value. ..

Further, when the set value is changed, the section in which the base value is currently being measured may be continued without changing the interval in which the base value is measured. Since the set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device, it is possible to design the base value so that the base value does not change significantly by changing the set value. In such a case, it is not necessary to change the calculation interval of the base value by changing the set value.

If both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the on operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the setting change mode may be activated. In the ON operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, considering the operation method and the arrangement of the operation means, the operation of the setting key 971 is less likely to be operated by mistake, so the setting change mode is activated. Is considered to be the intention of the operator. Further, in the setting change mode, the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 other than the game state and the base value are cleared. Therefore, even if the RAM is desired to be cleared, it is considered sufficient to activate the setting change mode. ..

On the other hand, when both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the on operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the RAM may be cleared without activating the setting change mode. This is because it is considered that the operator wants at least the RAM clear when both are operated. Further, when both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the on operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, it is not necessary to activate the setting change mode or clear the RAM. This is because, from the viewpoint of file-safe against erroneous operations, it is preferable not to accept operations for which the intention of the operator is not clear.

In the RAM clearing steps (3) and (15) described above, the game state data is maintained, but the reserved memory of the special symbol may be erased. Since the set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device, the judgment result of the random number of the special symbol lottery may change. For this reason, it is preferable to erase the reserved memory of the special symbol and have a new lottery performed.

On the other hand, the lottery of special symbols (extraction of winning random numbers) is performed when the game ball wins the starting port, but the lottery result is judged at the start of the variable display game. The random number value stored on hold may be determined. Therefore, the reserved memory of the special symbol may be maintained.

Further, in the RAM clearing in the steps (3) and (15) described above, the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized in the same area as the area erased due to the operation of the RAM clear switch 954. That is, in the RAM clear processing in the setting change mode, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is erased (the game state data is also erased), and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. Normally, setting changes are made between the closing of the hall and the opening of the next day, so the game status data (probability change status, time saving status, reserved memory of special symbols and ordinary symbols, information on prize balls, etc.) is deleted. There is no need to maintain it without it.

[12-2. Production on pachinko machines with setting functions]
[12-2-1. Special design and special electric accessory control processing]
Hereinafter, the details of the processing by the main control MPU 1311 will be described. First, the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process. The special symbol and the special electric accessory control process are executed in the process of step S86 in the main control side timer interrupt process. Hereinafter, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are also collectively referred to as a starting port. In addition, the first major winning opening 2005 and the second major winning opening 2006 are collectively referred to as simply the major winning opening. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively called a special symbol.

In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, when the game ball is accepted into the starting port, that is, when the starting prize is won (the starting condition is satisfied), a big hit is made for each starting memory information (starting information) for which this starting condition is satisfied. A random number for determination is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the random number for jackpot determination matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (lottery means). Then, it is determined whether or not to generate the jackpot game state based on the lottery result, and when the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (predetermined winning conditions are satisfied), it is usually Shift from the game state to the jackpot game state. Hereinafter, the procedure of the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

When the special symbol and special electric accessory control process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the game ball B has won a prize in the large winning opening (step S100). When the game ball B wins the big prize opening (the result of step S100 is "yes"), the big winning opening winning designation command is set (step S102).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize at the starting port (step S112). Then, whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the start port is determined by the presence or absence of a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002 or the second start port sensor 2511 in the switch input process (step S74) in the timer interrupt process on the main control side. It is read and performed based on the input information stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

When the game ball wins the start opening (the result of step S114 is “yes”), the main control MPU 1311 executes the start opening winning process (step S116). In the start-up opening winning process, a start-up opening winning command to be transmitted when a new game ball is won in the starting opening is set, a random number for jackpot judgment is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, and a special symbol is used. It executes processing for executing the look-ahead effect.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the corresponding process based on the special symbol / electric accessory operation number which is the game progress state variable in which the type of the branch process executed according to the progress of the game is specified (step). S124). The game progress state variable is stored in the game progress state storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and is updated in each branch process executed according to the progress of the game. In the process of step S124, the process shifts to the branch process specified based on the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area, and when the transferred branch process is completed, the special symbol and the special electric accessory control End the process. Since the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area is game information, it is backed up in the main control side power off processing.

In the process of step S130, special symbol change waiting process (step S130), special symbol change process (step S132), special symbol jackpot determination process (step S134), as branching process, based on the value of the game progress state variable. Special symbol loss stop processing (step S136), special symbol big hit stop processing (step S138), big winning opening pre-opening interval processing (step S140), big winning opening opening processing (step S142), big winning opening closing processing (step) S144) or the large winning opening opening end interval process (step S146) is executed.

In the special symbol change waiting process (step S130), a process of starting the change display of the special symbol on the special symbol display is performed based on the fact that the game ball B has entered the start port.

In the special symbol changing process (step S132), a process of controlling the variation display of the special symbol is performed. In the special symbol jackpot determination process (step S134), it is determined whether or not the special symbol that has been confirmed and stopped causes the jackpot game state based on the fact that the game ball has entered the start opening.

In the special symbol loss stop process (step S136), when the big hit game state is not generated, the variation display of the special symbol is stopped and a process for notifying the fact is performed. In the special symbol big hit stop process (step S138), when a big hit game state is generated, a process of stopping the variation display of the special symbol and notifying the fact is performed.

In the interval process before opening the big winning opening (step S140), a process for generating a big hit game state and notifying that the big hit operation is started is performed. In the big winning opening opening process (step S142), processing related to the big hit operation that makes it easy for the game ball to enter each big winning opening by opening the big winning opening is performed.

In the processing during closing of the large winning opening (step S144), processing related to the big hit operation that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter each large winning opening is performed by changing the large winning opening from the open state to the closed state. In the winning opening opening end interval processing (step S146), when the jackpot operation is completed, a process for notifying that fact is performed.

[12-2-2. Special symbol change waiting process]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol change waiting process (step S130) in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol change waiting process. The special symbol change waiting process is executed in a state where the change display of the special symbol is not executed, and when the change display is suspended, preparations are made to start the change display of the special symbol.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the change of the special symbol is suspended (step S420). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of balls on hold for special symbol operation is not 0. In addition, when a plurality of start ports are provided, the number of special symbol operation hold balls is stored for each start port. If the change of the special symbol is not reserved (the result of step S420 is "no"), the change display of the special symbol is not started, so this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the variable display of the special symbol is suspended (the result of step S420 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1311 sets the reserved ball number designation command as command data (step S438).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol / flag setting process (step S442). In the special symbol / flag setting process, a special lottery is executed based on a random number for determining a jackpot acquired at the time of winning a prize at the start opening.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444). In the special symbol variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is set based on the result of the special lottery. Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 creates a variation pattern command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, first, as a command value, the upper byte of the special figure variation pattern reference command corresponding to the special symbol identification flag is set (step S452). Further, the fluctuation pattern value stored in the fluctuation pattern area is set as the lower command data (step S458). Further, by acquiring the variation type type value from the variation type type area (step S460) and adding the variation type type value to the command value set in the process of step S452, the upper byte of the variation pattern command according to the variation type. Is calculated (step S462). The command data of the variation pattern command created in this way is stored in a predetermined area.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 sets a symbol type command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S466). Further, the variable state specification command is set in the command buffer (step S474).

Each command created by the above process is set in the command buffer. The reserved ball number designation command set in the command buffer is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[12-2-3. Special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) in the special symbol variation waiting process will be described. The special symbol variation pattern setting process is a process for setting a variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation pattern setting process.

The main control MPU 1311 first acquires the number of balls on hold for special symbol operation (step S530). The number of balls on hold for special symbol operation is stored in the number of balls on hold for special symbol operation. Further, the main control MPU 1311 sets the jackpot flag from the jackpot flag area (step S538).

Then, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation pattern selection determination process for selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol based on the number of balls on hold for special symbol operation and the jackpot flag (step S542). Details of the variation pattern selection determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 143.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the fluctuation pattern value extracted by the fluctuation pattern selection determination process (step S544). Then, the data (variation time value) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern value is searched from the special symbol fluctuation time data (step S546).

Further, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation type determination process for selecting the variation type defined in the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol (step S548). The variation type type value acquired by the variation type determination process is set (step S550).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 searches the fluctuation time addition value data for the fluctuation time addition value corresponding to the fluctuation type type value (step S552). The fluctuation time addition value is the addition time corresponding to the fluctuation type, and corresponds to, for example, the addition time according to the number of pseudo-reams. Then, the main control MPU 1311 adds the fluctuation time addition value searched in the process of step S552 to the reference fluctuation time value searched in the process of step S546 to acquire the final fluctuation time (step S554). .. Finally, the final fluctuation time is stored in the special symbol / electric accessory operation timer area (step S556), and the special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process is completed.

[12-2-4. Fluctuation pattern selection judgment processing]
Subsequently, the details of the variation pattern selection determination process (step S542) will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variation pattern selection determination process. The variation pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display of a special symbol.

The main control MPU 1311 first acquires the fluctuation information source table based on the fluctuation table number (step S340). The variable table number is a value for selecting (acquiring) the variable information source table from the variable information source address table. The fluctuation information source table is a hit (hit fluctuation selection information status table), a miss (missing fluctuation selection information status table), a reach (reach fluctuation selection information status table), and a reach probability (special symbol reach probability) according to the game state. A data table in which table information for referring to a table) and a variation type (variation type determination data table) is stored.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a winning determination value for deriving the result of the special lottery (step S346). By determining whether or not the hit determination value matches the jackpot value, it is determined whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S350). If the jackpot is won (the result of step S350 is "yes"), the jackpot flag and the jackpot symbol type are acquired (step S354).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the fluctuation information number search process based on the jackpot flag and the jackpot symbol type (step S358). In the variation information number search process, the variation information number for determining the hit-time variation pattern selection value data table is acquired from the jackpot variation selection information type table. The main control MPU 1311 acquires a random number 1 for a variation pattern from the jackpot variation selection information type table based on the acquired variation information number (step S360).

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1311 has not won a big hit or a small hit (the result of step S350 is "no"), it determines whether or not to generate reach in the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step). S372).

When the main control MPU 1311 does not generate reach in the fluctuation display (the result of step S372 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 acquires the random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern from the out-of-bounds fluctuation selection information reservation table based on the number of reserved balls (step). S376).

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1311 generates a reach in the fluctuation display (the result of step S372 is “yes”), the main control MPU 1311 acquires the random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern from the reach fluctuation selection information status table based on the status flag. (Step S382).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the variation information number search process based on the random number 1 for the variation pattern acquired in the processes of step S360, step S378 or step S382 (step S388). Then, the variation pattern selection value data table is acquired by the variation information number search process, and the random number 2 for the variation pattern is acquired from the variation pattern selection value data table (step S392). Further, the variation information number search process is executed based on the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern selection value data table (step S394). A variation pattern is selected based on the result of the variation information number search process (step S396), and this process ends.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern is selected in two steps by two types of random numbers, the variation pattern random number 1 (steps S360, S372, S378) and the variation pattern random number 2 (step S392). First, the type of fluctuation pattern (variation pattern group such as XX reach) is selected based on the random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern. Further, from the variation pattern group selected by the variation pattern random number 1 based on the variation pattern random number 2, the variation pattern (value set in the variation pattern command) to be finally varied and displayed is selected. The lottery method is not limited to two stages, and a lottery method may be used in three or more stages, or a random number for one fluctuation pattern may be used to directly select a fluctuation pattern.

[12-3. Explanation of production on pachinko machines with setting functions]
Hereinafter, the effect of the pachinko machine 1 having the setting function will be described. Specifically, a setting suggestion effect that suggests the current setting will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 having a setting function, for example, the higher the setting, the larger the number of game balls to be paid out with respect to the number of special lottery. Specifically, for example, the higher the setting, the higher the probability of winning a big hit in the non-probability state (for example, setting 1: 1/300, setting 2: 1/290, setting 3: 1/280, setting 4: 1/270). , Setting 5: 1/250, Setting 6: 1/230, etc.). Therefore, since the player wants to play the game with the pachinko machine 1 having a setting as high as possible, the motivation for playing is increased by installing the setting suggestion effect.

Hereinafter, in this chapter, for convenience of explanation, the main control MPU 1311 directly selects a fluctuation pattern with a random number for one fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern selection determination process in step S542. Specifically, in this chapter, the main control MPU 1311 shall execute the following processing in step S542.

In step S542, the main control MPU 1311 is the current gaming state (whether it is a time saving state (a state in which the time saving control is executed) or a normal state other than the time saving state) and the result of the special lottery (winning a big hit). Select the variation pattern table according to (whether it is done or not). When the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a random number for the fluctuation pattern, and based on the acquired random number for the fluctuation pattern and the distribution of each fluctuation pattern in the selected fluctuation pattern table. A variation pattern shall be selected from the selected variation pattern table. In addition, if the result of the special lottery is out of order, it is further determined whether or not reach has occurred, a random number for the fluctuation pattern is acquired, and the acquired random number for the fluctuation pattern and each fluctuation pattern in the selected fluctuation pattern table are distributed. A variation pattern shall be selected from the selected variation pattern table based on.

FIG. 144 (A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is out of order. FIG. 144 (B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

The variation pattern table is stored in, for example, the ROM 1313 of the main control board 1310. The variation pattern table includes, for example, a variation pattern type column, a variation time column, a corresponding effect content column, and a random number distribution column for determining a variation pattern. The variation pattern type column stores information for specifying the type for identifying the variation pattern in the table. The fluctuation time column stores information that identifies the fluctuation time in the corresponding fluctuation pattern type. The corresponding effect content column stores information that identifies the effect content to be executed in the corresponding variation pattern.

The distribution random number column for determining the fluctuation pattern stores the distribution in which the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected for each setting. In addition, the random number column for determining the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern table (that is, the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A) and FIG. 149 (A) described later) selected when the special lottery result is out of order is displayed when reach occurs. And for each of the times when reach does not occur, the distribution in which the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected is stored for each setting.

[12-4. Setting suggestion effect that is executed after the temporary display of the special lottery result]
First, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern stored in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A) will be described. First, the effect executed in the deviation fluctuation patterns 24 to 29 will be described with reference to FIG. 144.

FIG. 144 is a schematic view showing an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). In the fluctuation of the deviation variation pattern 20, after the temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be out of order is displayed on the effect display device 1600 after the SP reach 1 is executed, the special lottery result is subsequently out of order. A confirmation display indicating that there is is displayed on the effect display device 1600. On the other hand, in the fluctuations of the deviation fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be deviation is displayed on the effect display device 1600 after the SP reach 1 is executed, and then the setting is made. The suggestion effect is executed, and then a confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is out of order is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In this way, in the fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, even if the temporary display is executed by executing the setting suggestion effect after performing the temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be out of order. The player can expect the subsequent setting suggestion effect to occur and maintain a sense of expectation. Further, when the setting suggestion effect occurs due to the deviation fluctuation, even if the special lottery result is out of order, the player's disappointment due to the result of the special lottery can be suppressed, and eventually the feeling of exhilaration can be enhanced.

In the fluctuation of the deviation variation pattern 24, after the SP reach 1 is executed, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be deviation is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and then the setting suggestion effect is executed. However, the setting suggestion effect itself is not performed, and a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is out of order is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

The SP reach is a reach effect in which a high percentage is selected when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, and a low percentage is selected when the result of the special lottery is out of order. In other words, the expectation of a big hit of the fluctuation in which SP reach is executed is high.

Hereinafter, the effects executed in the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24 to 29 will be specifically described. In addition to the contents described below, in each effect, sound output from various speakers, light emission from various lamps, operation of various movable bodies, and / or display on the effect display device 1600 are executed at the same time. May be good.

In the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24-29, first, the pre-reach effect is executed. In the pre-reach effect, all the decorative symbols are changed in the effect display device 1600. Subsequently, in the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24-29, the normal reach effect is developed. In the normal reach effect, the decorative symbol is in the reach state on the effect display device 1600. Specifically, for example, of the three decorative symbols (for example, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol), the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same symbol, and the middle symbol is in a fluctuating state.

Subsequently, in the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, the SP reach 1 is developed, and the first half effect of the SP reach 1 is executed. In SP reach 1, for example, one main character and one enemy character are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a rock-paper-scissors game is played. In the first half of the SP reach 1 in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, the effect display device 1600 executes an effect in which the main character loses to the enemy character in a rock-paper-scissors game. In the SP reach, the decorative symbol may be displayed at a position closer to the periphery of the effect display device 1600, for example, as compared with the pre-reach effect and the normal reach effect.

Subsequently, in the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24-29, the latter half of SP reach 1 is produced. In the second half production of SP reach 1 in the deviation variation pattern 20 and 24 to 29, for example, a so-called revival production is executed, and for example, at the start of the second half production, the voice of the main character such as "Still more!" Is output from various speakers and produced. On the display device 1600, an effect is executed in which a rock-paper-scissors game between the main character and the enemy character is performed again. In the latter half of the SP reach 1 in the deviation fluctuation patterns 24 to 29, the effect display device 1600 executes an effect in which the main character loses to the enemy character again in a rock-paper-scissors game.

Subsequently, a temporary display in which the special lottery result is out of order is executed on the effect display device 1600. Specifically, for example, in the effect display device 1600, one combination of decorative symbols in the detached state (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol are the same symbols as the symbols stopped in the reach state, and the middle symbol is the corresponding symbol. A symbol different from the same symbol) is displayed in a manner as if it is swaying with a small width.

Subsequently, in the disengagement variation pattern 20, after the provisional display, a definite display indicating that the special lottery result was deviated is displayed on the effect display device 1600 without performing any other effect. In the deviation variation pattern 24, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the provisional display, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is deviation is displayed on the effect display device 1600. On the other hand, in the deviation variation patterns 25 to 29, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the provisional display, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is out is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In the final display, for example, in the effect display device 1600, the same combination as the combination of the decorative symbols displayed in the temporary display is displayed in a completely stopped manner. In the temporary display and the final display, the decorative symbol is displayed, for example, in the central portion of the effect display device 1600 in the same size as in the pre-reach effect and the normal reach effect.

In the setting suggestion Gase effect in the deviation variation pattern 24, for example, in the effect display device 1600, one main character discovers two enemy characters, and an effect that chases the enemy character but cannot catch it is executed. As in the distribution of the deviation pattern 24 in FIG. 144 (A), it is desirable that the distribution of the variation pattern in which the setting suggestion gassing effect is executed is equal or approximately equal in all the settings. This is because if the distribution is not even, the setting suggestion effect suggests the setting.

Further, it is desirable that the ratio of the deviation pattern 24 distribution to the total distribution of the fluctuations in which the SP reach 1 is executed is low (for example, 20% or less). This is because if the distribution is high, the setting suggestion effect will be generated frequently when the SP reach 1 is developed, and the player's expectation for the occurrence of the setting suggestion effect may be reduced.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, for example, in the effect display device 1600, one main character discovers two enemy characters, chases and catches the enemy character, and then three people play a rock-paper-scissors game. The production is executed.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 25, in a rock-paper-scissors game with three people, all three people play goo and become enthusiastic. Further, in FIG. 144 (A), the deviation variation pattern 25 is defined so as to be distributed only at low settings (settings 1, 2, and 3). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 25 is an effect in which the low setting is fixed.

In the example of FIG. 144 (A), the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 25 is the same value as the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 26 and the like in the high setting (settings 4, 5, and 6), but the low setting confirmation effect is achieved. If it occurs, the player may stop the game early. Therefore, the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 25 may be set lower than the distribution of the other setting confirmation effect in other settings, or the deviation variation pattern may be set lower. 25 itself does not have to exist.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 26, in a rock-paper-scissors game with three people, all three people play a choki and become a friend. Further, in FIG. 144 (A), the deviation variation pattern 26 is defined so as to be distributed only at high settings (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 26 is an effect in which the high setting is fixed.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 27, in a rock-paper-scissors game with three people, all three people give a par and become a friend. Further, in FIG. 144 (A), the deviation variation pattern 27 is defined so as to be distributed only in even-numbered settings (settings 2, 4, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 27 is an effect in which the even number setting is fixed.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 28, in the rock-paper-scissors game with three people, the effect that all three people put out different hands and become sympathetic is executed. Further, in FIG. 144 (A), the deviation variation pattern 28 is defined so as to be distributed only in odd-numbered settings (settings 1, 3, and 5). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 28 is an effect in which the odd number setting is fixed.

For example, when the odd number setting and the even number setting have different characteristics, the player can be interested in the effect by installing the odd number setting confirmation effect or the even number setting confirmation effect as described above. ..

Specifically, for example, the jackpot winning probability in the normal state is high in the order of settings 6, 4, 2, 5, 3, 1 (6 is the highest, 1 is the lowest), and settings 5, 3, 1, 6, 4, Probability change jackpot ratio is higher in the order of 2 jackpots (5 is the highest, 2 is the lowest), and the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are in the order of settings 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. It is assumed that the jackpot winning probability and the probability variation ratio in each setting are set so that the ratio of the total number of game balls paid out to the number of prizes won in the game balls is high (6 is the highest and 1 is the lowest).

In this case, the even number setting has a higher probability of winning a big hit in the normal state than the odd number setting, but the probability variation rate is low, that is, the number of game balls required to win the so-called first hit tends to be smaller. The total amount of game balls that can be obtained from a single consecutive villa from the first hit tends to be small. On the other hand, the odd number setting has a lower probability of winning a big hit in the normal state than the even number setting, but the probability variation rate is high, that is, the number of game balls required to win the first hit tends to be larger, but the first hit The total amount of game balls that can be obtained from one consecutive villa is likely to increase. In such a case, there is a possibility that one player prefers an even-numbered ball ejection tendency and another player prefers an odd-numbered ball ejection tendency. Therefore, an odd-numbered setting confirmation effect or an even-numbered setting confirmation effect may occur. The player's interest in the production will increase. Further, the even number setting may have a feature that the jackpot winning probability in the normal state is higher than that of the odd number setting, but a jackpot with a small number of rounds is easily selected.

In the above-mentioned deviation fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, the effects until the setting suggestion effect starts are the same, but the contents of the setting suggestion effect are different (the results in the rock-paper-scissors game with three people are different). In addition, it is desirable that the rock-paper-scissors game production by three people is used only in the out-of-range fluctuation patterns 25 to 29. As a result, the player can recognize that the setting suggestion production has started when the rock-paper-scissors game production by three people starts, and the feeling of exhilaration is further enhanced.

Note that, for example, the deviation variation pattern 25 is a variation pattern in which the effect of determining the high setting is executed, but it may be a variation pattern in which the effect suggesting that the high setting is likely to be executed is executed. Specifically, for example, if the variation pattern 25 is distributed even at the low setting and the distribution is lower than the distribution of the variation pattern 25 at the high setting (for example, 50% or less), the effect of the deviation variation pattern 25 is achieved. Is not an effect in which the high setting is fixed, but an effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of a high setting.

In addition to the variation pattern in which the effect of determining the high setting is executed, the variation pattern in which the effect suggesting that the high setting is likely to be set is executed may be defined. The same applies to the low setting confirmation effect, the odd number setting confirmation effect, the even number setting confirmation effect, the maximum setting confirmation effect, and the like.

According to the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 144 (B) (the fluctuation pattern table at the time of normal and big hit winning), when the special lottery result is a big hit in the normal state, other than the hit fluctuation pattern 34 in which the maximum setting is determined. The setting suggestion effect of is not executed. In addition, the distribution of the fluctuation pattern in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed is higher than that in the case where the special lottery result is out of order. As a result, the setting suggestion effect is mainly executed when the special lottery result is out of order, and the player can obtain a sense of expectation even when the special lottery result is out of order.

[12-5. Setting suggestion effect using shortening fluctuation]
Hereinafter, the deviation variation pattern 30 will be described with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effects executed in the deviation fluctuation patterns 1, 2, and 30 in the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A).

Shortening variation is performed in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30. The shortened variation is, for example, a variation in which the variation time is shorter than that of other variation patterns, and after the variation of the decorative symbol is started on the effect display device 1600, all the decorative symbols do not develop into a reach state. Is a fluctuation that stops. In the normal variation, in the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbols are stopped in the order of, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, but in the shortened variation, all the decorative symbols may be stopped at the same time.

Subsequently, in the deviation fluctuation patterns 1, 2, and 30, a provisional display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be out is performed, and then a definite display is performed to indicate that the special lottery result is out of order. The description of the provisional display and the final display is the same as the above description, and is therefore omitted.

The deviation variation pattern 30 has a variation time different from the variation time of all other variation patterns in which the shortened variation such as the deviation variation patterns 1 and 2 is executed. In the example of FIG. 144 (A), the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 1 is 2 seconds, the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 2 is 5 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 is 3.5 seconds. .. Further, in FIG. 144 (A), the deviation variation pattern 30 is defined so as to be distributed only at the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when the deviation variation pattern 30 is executed, the maximum setting is determined.

Further, the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 30, which is a variation pattern in which the shortening variation is executed and suggests the setting, is extremely low as compared with the distribution of the other variation patterns in which the shortening variation is executed (for example, the other variation pattern). It is desirable that it is 10% or less of the minimum distribution of. Further, it is desirable that the execution time of the provisional display and the confirmed display is the same in each fluctuation pattern in which the shortened fluctuation is executed, and only the time of the shortened fluctuation is different. Further, it is desirable that the difference between the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern in which other shortened fluctuations are executed is such that the player can recognize it (for example, 1.5 seconds or more). ..

As a result, when the shortened fluctuation is executed, the player assumes a fluctuation time such as the deviation fluctuation patterns 1 and 2 with many distributions, but when the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 is executed, the fluctuation time is assumed to be the same. You can recognize that they are different, and you can enjoy the production where the highest setting is fixed. In particular, in the example of FIG. 144 (A), since the fluctuation pattern including the shortening fluctuation is selected only when the shortening fluctuation is out of reach, the player loses the expectation that the shortening fluctuation is executed and is interested in the shortening fluctuation. I can't have it. However, by executing the setting suggestion effect using the shortening fluctuation in this way, the player can have a sense of expectation for the shortening fluctuation that is selected only when the player is out of reach, and suppresses the decline in interest. can do.

Further, in the deviation fluctuation patterns 1, 2, and 30, although the contents displayed on the effect display device 1600 are the same, only the time of the shortened fluctuation is different. As a result, the player can concentrate on the production so as not to overlook the highest setting final production.

The deviation variation pattern 30 is a variation pattern in which the maximum setting is fixed and the shortening variation is executed. However, for each setting other than the maximum setting, the setting is fixed and the shortening variation is executed. A pattern may exist. In this case, for example, it is desirable that the fluctuation time of each of the fluctuation patterns is different from the fluctuation time of other deviation fluctuation patterns in which the shortened fluctuation is executed.

[12-6. Setting suggestion effect executed before the temporary display of the special lottery result]
Hereinafter, the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 will be described with reference to FIG. 147. FIG. 147 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). In FIG. 144, the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 are defined so as to be distributed only at the maximum setting (setting 6). That is, when the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 are executed, the maximum setting is determined.

In the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34, for example, the special movie 1 is played on the effect display device 1600 at the same time as the variation starts. The special movie 1 is an effect that occurs only in the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34, that is, the effect in which the maximum setting is fixed.

In the deviation variation pattern 31, after the end of the special movie 1, a provisional display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be out is performed, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is out is performed. In the hit variation pattern 34, after the end of the special movie 1, a provisional display indicating that the special lottery result is a hit is performed, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is a hit is performed.

In the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34, unlike the deviation variation patterns 25 to 30, etc., the setting suggestion effect is started before the provisional display (specifically, at the same time as the start of the variation). As a result, the player can obtain an uplifting feeling of waiting for the notification of the jackpot lottery result in the state where the maximum setting is confirmed. Further, especially when the display time of the special movie 1 is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), it is possible to appeal to other players that the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is the highest setting, and by extension, the player. Can feel superiority to the other player, and it becomes easier for the hall to appeal to the other player that the highest setting is used.

[12-7. Setting suggestion production where big hit winning or high setting is confirmed]
Hereinafter, the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a schematic view showing an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). In FIG. 144 (A), the deviation variation pattern 32 is defined so as to be distributed only at high settings (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, when the deviation variation pattern 32 is executed, the maximum setting is determined.

In the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35, for example, the special movie 2 is played on the effect display device 1600 at the same time as the variation starts. The special movie 2 is an effect that occurs only in the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34.

In the deviation variation pattern 32, after the end of the special movie 2, a provisional display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be out is performed, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is out is performed. In the hit variation pattern 35, after the end of the special movie 2, a provisional display indicating that the special lottery result is a hit is performed, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is a hit is performed.

Therefore, when the special movie 2 occurs, one of the high setting and the big hit in the fluctuation is determined. That is, if the special lottery result is out of order after the special movie 2 is generated, the high setting is confirmed, so that the player can suppress the disappointment that the special lottery result is out of order, and by extension, the high setting. A feeling of exhilaration can be obtained by confirming.

Further, especially when the display time of the special movie 2 is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), the player can feel superiority to other players, and after the special movie 2 is generated. If the special lottery result is out of order, it will be easier for the hall to appeal to other players that the high setting is being used.

[12-8. Setting suggestion effect in a time saving state]
Hereinafter, the fluctuation pattern selected in the game state and the time saving state will be described. FIG. 149 (A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is a time saving state and the result of the special lottery is out of order. FIG. 149 (B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is a time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

In the example of FIG. 149 (A), the higher the setting, the larger the distribution of the deviation fluctuation pattern 3 and the smaller the distribution of the deviation fluctuation pattern 2 at the time of non-reach deviation. Further, the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 2 is shorter than the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 3. For example, if the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot winning probability, and if the distribution of each fluctuation pattern is the same in all settings, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot in a short time, and per unit time. The number of game balls to be paid out will increase, which may lead to a burden on the hall.

However, as in the example of FIG. 149 (A), the higher the setting, the more the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is distributed, so that the number of game balls paid out by the jackpot per unit time in each setting can be made equal. it can. Further, the higher the setting, the higher the selection rate of the deviation variation pattern 3 having a long variation time among the variation patterns including the shortened variation. Therefore, the deviation variation pattern 3 also functions as a variation pattern suggesting a high setting. Can be done.

Similarly, even when there is reach and the deviation is high, the higher the setting, the larger the distribution of the deviation fluctuation pattern 11 having a long fluctuation time, and the smaller the distribution of the deviation fluctuation pattern 12 having a short fluctuation time. Similarly, at the time of winning a big hit, the higher the setting, the larger the distribution of the hit fluctuation pattern 2 having a long fluctuation time, and the smaller the distribution of the hit fluctuation pattern 3 having a short fluctuation time.

As described above, for example, when the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot winning probability, and if the distribution of each fluctuation pattern is the same in all the settings, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot in a short time. In other words, the lower the setting, the longer it takes to win the jackpot, and the number of game balls fired before winning the jackpot increases. For example, if the lower the setting, the larger the distribution of the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time, and the smaller the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time, the player who stops firing the game ball during the fluctuation, The number of game balls fired per unit time in the setting can be made equal.

It should be noted that a predetermined sound effect may be output or a predetermined light emission effect may be executed at the timing when the setting is suggested in the various setting suggestion effects described in this chapter. The predetermined sound effect and the predetermined light emission effect may be dedicated to be executed only at the time of setting suggestion effect. Further, particularly in the setting suggestion effect in which the high setting or the maximum setting is determined, it is preferable that a predetermined sound effect output or a predetermined light emission effect, which is executed only by the setting suggestion effect, is executed.

It is desirable that the distribution of the fluctuation pattern in which the effect suggesting that the high setting or the maximum setting is fixed or the possibility is high is executed is extremely low as compared with the distribution of other fluctuation patterns. If the distribution of the fluctuation pattern is high, the player loses the sense of expectation if the high setting suggestion effect or the highest setting suggestion effect is not executed even though the player plays only a short game time, and eventually the game is played early. This is because there is a risk of canceling.

Further, it is desirable that the distribution of the fluctuation pattern in which the effect suggesting that the low setting or the minimum setting is fixed or the possibility is high is executed is extremely low as compared with the distribution of other fluctuation patterns. This is because if the distribution of the fluctuation pattern is high, the low setting suggestion effect and the minimum setting suggestion effect are frequently executed, which may cause the player to lose the sense of expectation and eventually stop the game at an early stage.

Further, although the setting suggestion effect suggesting a group of settings such as high setting, low setting, maximum setting, odd number setting, and even number setting has been described, the setting group in the setting suggestion effect is not limited to these. A setting suggestion effect for any group consisting of one or more settings may be executed. For example, settings 1 and 2 may be set as low settings, settings 3 and 4 may be set as intermediate settings, and settings 5 and 6 may be set as high settings, or there may be a group consisting of only setting 5.

[12-9. Other forms of pachinko machines with setting functions]
FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a mounting example of the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is shown by a dotted line.

In the above description, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, and the payout control unit 952 acquires the operation state of each switch and controls the display of the setting display 974. , The setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1311 acquires the operation state of each switch and controls the display of the setting display 974.

FIG. 150 (A) shows the main control board box 1320 of this mounting example. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that houses the main control board 1310 so that it can be sealed with a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a hole 971A for operating the setting key 971.

FIG. 150 (B) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 are housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in (A). In the example shown in FIG. 150 (B), in addition to the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit (not shown), the base display 1317, the display switch 1318, and the RAM clear switch 954 are mounted on the main control board 1310. The RAM clear switch 954 may not be mounted on the main control board 1310, but may be mounted on another control board (for example, a payout control board 951 or a power supply board). In this case, the main control board box 1320 is not provided with the hole 954A.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, two operation units (RAM clear switch 954, setting key 971) that trigger RAM clear are provided in the main control board box 1320. As will be described later, the storage area of the main control RAM 1312 from which data is erased is different between when only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated and when the setting key 971 is operated.

The setting board 970 is provided close to the main control board 1310, and the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted. The connection between the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be directly connected between the boards by a connector or may be connected by an electric wire. On the setting board 970, a setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, and a setting display 974 for displaying a set or selected set value are mounted. The setting change switch 972 for changing the set value and the setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value may be mounted on the setting board 970.

The outputs of the various switches 971, 972, and 973 provided on the setting board 970 are sent to the main control board 1310 and input to the ports of the main control MPU 1311.

Further, the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 may perform serial communication, and the driver circuit of the setting display 974 may be mounted on the setting board 970.

Since the main control board box 1320 is arranged on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting display 974 on the setting board 970 is mounted at a position that can be seen from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1.

The main control board 1310 may authenticate the setting board 970 in the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22). For example, an authentication code for each manufacturer of the pachinko machine is set on the setting board 970, and the main control board 1310 reads out and collates the authentication code set on the setting board 970. Then, if the setting board 970 cannot be authenticated, the pachinko machine 1 cannot start the game. That is, although the game ball can be launched toward the game area 5a, the prize ball is not paid out even if the prize is won in the winning opening, and the variable display game is not executed. The authentication code may be set for each pachinko machine model, or the serial number for each pachinko machine may be set. As for the method of setting the authentication code, for example, the authentication code is set by a DIP switch, a jumper wire, a jumper pin, a short circuit of a pattern, etc. provided on the setting board 970, or a logic circuit in which the authentication code is set (for example, A small-capacity FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) may be mounted on the setting board 970.

Further, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311) may be able to identify whether the board mounted in the main control board box 1320 is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. For example, by outputting a signal different from the setting board 970 and the dummy board 979 to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1311 recognizes whether the connected board is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. To do. Specifically, the setting board 970 outputs + 5V, and the dummy board 979 outputs 0V (ground level). The signals from the setting board 970 and the dummy board 979 are input to a specific port of the interface circuit 1331 circuit of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1311 determines the connected board by the input signal to the port.

By changing the code of the setting board 970 for each manufacturer (for each model) in this way, it is possible to prevent the wrong setting board 970 from being mounted on the main control board box 1320. Further, by setting the authentication code in the logic circuit on the setting board 970, it is possible to prevent the setting board 970 from being illegally replaced.

FIG. 150 (C) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 are housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in (A).

As described above, in recent years, some pachinko machines 1 have a game performance setting function. This setting function can change the performance of the pachinko machine regarding the prize ball acquired by the player, such as the jackpot probability in the special symbol variation display game, and the setting function can change the performance of the pachinko machine 1 according to the business policy of the hall. On the other hand, conventional pachinko machines that do not have a setting function are sufficient, and there are some halls where the setting function is unnecessary. For this reason, manufacturers of pachinko machines need to design and produce both pachinko machines that do not have a setting function and pachinko machines that have a setting function. Efficient design and production of pachinko machines is required.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 that does not have the setting function, the dummy board 979 is mounted in the mounting space of the setting board 970 so that the pachinko machine 1 can be produced in the same manner as when the setting board 970 is mounted. To. Further, the main control board 1310 can be shared between the pachinko machine having no setting function and the pachinko machine having the setting function.

The dummy board 979 does not have devices such as the setting key 971 and the setting display 974 mounted on the setting board 970, but may have a pattern for mounting these devices. That is, although a pattern for mounting the device is provided on the dummy substrate 979, the device is not mounted on the pattern.

The dummy board 979 may be a member (for example, a unit made of a resin case) that can be attached to the main control board box 1320 at the same position as the setting board 970, even if it is not composed of the printed circuit board.

Further, since the driver circuit of the setting display 974 is mounted on the main control board 1310, the output of the driver circuit of the setting display 974 is neither open nor ground on the dummy board 979, but is terminated by a dummy resistor. It is good. This can prevent damage to the driver circuit due to overcurrent. Further, when the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 perform serial communication, the dummy board 979 may terminate the serial communication with the main control board 1310.

When the dummy board 979 is mounted, the hole 971A is not provided in the main control board box 1320. A small door that can be moved so as to close the hole 971A can be operated from the inside of the main control board box 1320 and cannot be operated from the outside. By providing the main control board box 1320 with a setting function. The main control board box 1320 may be shared with a pachinko machine that does not have a pachinko machine and a pachinko machine that has a setting function.

The dummy board 979, which will be described later, may also be set with an authentication code for the main control board 1310 to authenticate. Further, the dummy board 979 does not require authentication by the main control board 1310, and it is not necessary to set an authentication code. The main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 may perform serial communication, and the main control board 1310 may authenticate the dummy board.

The variations of the operating means mounted on the setting board 970 described above can be summarized as follows.

(1) With setting change switch 972, with setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, the pachinko machine with the key 975 inserted in the setting key 971 and turned to the set position (and with the RAM clear switch 954 pressed). Operate the power switch of 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the setting change switch 972 to select a setting value to be set, the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(2) With setting change switch 972, without setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, with the key 975 inserted in the setting key 971 and turned to the set position (and with the RAM clear switch 954 pressed), the pachinko machine Operate the power switch of 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the setting change switch 972 to select the setting value to be set, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position.

(3) Without setting change switch 972, with setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, with the key 975 inserted in the setting key 971 and turned to the set position (and with the RAM clear switch 954 pressed), the pachinko machine Operate the power switch of 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the RAM clear switch 954 to select the set value to be set, the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated. Instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, the setting key 971 may be turned to the right to select a setting value to be set.

(4) No setting change switch 972, no setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, the pachinko machine is inserted with the key 975 inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the set position (and the RAM clear switch 954 is pressed). Operate the power switch of 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the RAM clear switch 954 to select the set value to be set, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position. Instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, the setting key 971 may be turned to the right to select a setting value to be set.

151 and 152 are diagrams showing another mounting example of the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is shown by a dotted line.

In the mounting example shown in FIGS. 151 and 152, the small door 1321 is provided in the main control board box 1320, which is different from the mounting example shown in FIG. 150.

FIG. 151 (A) shows the main control board box 1320 of this mounting example. Similar to the above, the main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that houses the main control board 1310 so that it can be sealed with a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed. The main control board box 1320 has a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a setting mode switch for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode. A hole 976A for operating the 976 is provided.

The hole 976A is normally covered by a small door 1321. The small door 1321 is provided with a key unit 1321. By inserting the key 975 into the keyhole of the key unit 1322 and operating the small door 1321, the small door 1321 is opened from the main control board box 1320, and the hole 976A is exposed and set. The mode switch 976 can be operated.

As shown in FIG. 152 (A), in the normal state in which the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the bar 1323 is in the maximum protruding position from the key unit 1322, the bar 1323 is inserted into the receiving seat 1324, and the bar 1323 and the receiving seat 1324 are inserted. Engage with and the small door 1321 is fixed in the closed position. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 152 (B), when the key 975 is inserted into the keyhole and the rotation operation is performed, the hinge 1323 retracts from the maximum protruding position, and the engagement between the latch 1323 and the seat 1324 is released. The small door 1321 can be opened around the hinge 1325. When the small door 1321 is open (FIG. 152 (B)), the hole 976A is exposed and the setting mode switch 976 can be operated.

FIG. 153 is a diagram showing still another mounting example of the main control board 1310. In the mounting example shown in FIG. 153, the key unit 1322 is provided on the back cover 980 that covers the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, by inserting the key 975 into the keyhole of the key unit 1322 and operating it, the back cover 980 is opened from the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 (setting mode switch 976 provided on the setting board 970) is operated. It will be possible.

That is, in the normal state in which the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the back cover 980 is fixed by closing the back side of the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 is housed in the back cover 980. On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted into the keyhole and the rotation operation is performed, the back cover 980 can be opened from the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 housed inside the back cover 980 is exposed on the back side. The setting mode switch 976 can be operated.

When the key unit 1322 is provided on the back cover 980, the main control board box 1320 (main control board 1310) may have the configuration shown in FIG. 151 (C). Specifically, the main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that houses the main control board 1310 so that it can be sealed with a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed. The main control board box 1320 has a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode. A hole 976A is provided for operating the. The main control board box 1320 houses the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970. In addition to the main control MPU and driver circuit (not shown), the base display 1317, the display switch 1318, and the RAM clear switch 954 are mounted on the main control board 1310. The RAM clear switch 954 may not be mounted on the main control board 1310, but may be mounted on another control board (for example, a payout control board 951 or a power supply board). In this case, the main control board box 1320 is not provided with the hole 954A.

The setting board 970 is provided close to the main control board 1310, and the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted. The connection between the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be directly connected between the boards by a connector or may be connected by an electric wire. On the setting board 970, a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode, and a setting display 974 for displaying the set or selected set value are mounted. The setting change switch 972 for changing the set value and the setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value may be mounted on the setting board 970.

[12-10. Details of setting change processing]
FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing an example of the initialization process. The initialization process shown in FIG. 154 is different from the initialization process described above in FIG. 101 in that the RAM clear process is performed when the setting key 971 is operated (steps S17 and S30). The same steps as those in the initialization process described above in FIGS. 21 and 101 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform the initialization process. First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission, and makes it possible to write to the RAM 1312 (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and determines whether a predetermined wait time (time required for the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) to start) has elapsed. Determine (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 is being operated (step S18).

The RAM clear switch 954 may be detected immediately after the power is turned on (for example, before step S12), the detection result may be stored in a predetermined register, and the stored value may be determined in step S18. By detecting the RAM clear switch 954 immediately after the power is turned on, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 can be reliably detected even if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated only for a short time after the power is turned on.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, it is determined whether the setting key 971 is operated and its output is on (step S17). If the setting key 971 is not operated, it is a normal RAM clear operation, so the process proceeds to step S30 to initialize a predetermined area of the built-in RAM 1312. On the other hand, when the setting key 971 is operated, that is, when the power is turned on while both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated, the mode shifts to the setting change mode. That is, since it is necessary to operate the two switches and the power switch to start the setting change mode, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation of starting the setting change mode by mistake.

In the setting change mode, first, the set value is displayed (step S60). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads the current set value from the main control RAM 1312 and generates data for displaying on the setting display 974. Then, a security signal is output (step S61). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality, but it is extremely rare to put the pachinko machine 1 in the setting change mode during the game, and cheating is possible. This is because the hall computer should be notified when the mode is changed to the setting change mode during business hours.

Whether the security signal is output for a predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode or between the start and end of the setting change mode, the security signal is output from the start of the setting change mode to the predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode. It may be output. By outputting the security signal until a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, the period during which the abnormality can be detected becomes longer, and the security can be further improved.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting change operation has been performed depending on whether or not the setting change switch 972 is operated (step S62), changes the set value according to the operation of the setting change switch 972, and writes the setting value to the main control RAM 1312. (Step S63). For example, when the setting change switch 972 is composed of a push button switch, when the setting change switch 972 is pressed once, the set value is changed by one step. Further, when the setting key 971 also serves as the setting change switch 972, when the setting key 971 is turned to the right once, the setting value is changed by one step. Then, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for displaying the changed set value on the setting display 974 (step S64).

After that, it is determined whether to end the setting change mode and confirm the set value (step S65). Specifically, when the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973, the setting change mode is terminated and the process proceeds to step S30. Further, the setting change mode may be terminated by the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position. Further, the setting change mode may be terminated with the operation of another switch or sensor provided in the pachinko machine 1.

In the above-described process, after the setting change mode is completed, or when it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not on, the process proceeds to step S30, but the process may proceed to step S20. In this case, after the setting change mode ends, it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20), it is determined whether the checksums match (step S22), and the power failure flag is not set and the check is performed. If the sums do not match, the predetermined area of the built-in RAM 1312 is initialized. If it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not on, the process proceeds to step S30.

After the setting change mode ends, in step S30, among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312, the set value data, the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128), and the gaming state (for example, the probability change state, The data of the time saving state, the reserved memory of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol, the information about the prize ball) is left, the other data is deleted, and the process proceeds to step S24. The game state data may be deleted without leaving it. In this case, the storage area erased by the RAM area erased after the setting change operation and the storage area erased by the RAM clear operation are the same.

On the other hand, if the operation for ending the setting change mode is not detected, the process returns to step S62, and further, the setting change operation is detected.

If the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected in step S17, the set value data and the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 are found in step S30. ) Is left, the other data is erased, and the process proceeds to step S24.

If the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is not detected in step S18, the main control MPU 1311 does not erase the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312, and determines whether the power failure flag is set (step S20). ..

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 erases the data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128). (Step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the main control MPU 1311 clears the power failure flag and checks calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power cutoff. The thumb and the checksum stored in step S48 are compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 backs up to the work area. The data (other than the base calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, so the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and step S24 Proceed to.

In step S24, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal by using the check code. If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 deletes the data stored in the base calculation work area (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the area of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), the operation of only the RAM clear switch (step S18), and the power failure flag are set. There are a power failure flag error that is not set (step S20), a RAM error that the RAM checksums do not match (step S22), and an error of the base calculation work (step S24). Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the set value and the game state in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area). (For example, probability change state, time saving state, hold memory of special symbol or normal symbol, information about prize ball) is left, other data is cleared, and base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. .. If the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is detected when the power is turned on, but the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected, or if the power failure flag is abnormal or the RAM is abnormal, the game control area 13126 (game work area and game stack). (Including the area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Further, in the case of a base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

Note that, unlike the ones shown in the figure, in the case of a power failure flag abnormality, a RAM abnormality, or a base calculation work abnormality, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, so that the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128 The entire RAM area including the above may be cleared. If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a base calculation work error, the data indicating the game state is lost and normal processing cannot be executed. If the memory configuration is such that the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area cannot be executed. Only should be initialized. When the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 is set as described above. You don't have to clear it.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is used for base calculation for each data type (game control area 13126 (set value, game state data)). Area 13128) Erase under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is erased, and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. This is because if the set value is erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, it is necessary to reset the set value every time the RAM clear switch is operated, which complicates the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall. Therefore, the set value is not erased by operating the RAM clear switch.

For the processing after step S28, either FIG. 22 or FIG. 102 may be adopted as necessary. The difference between FIGS. 22 and 102 is the presence or absence of processing (steps S50 and S52) in which a check code is calculated and stored from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) when the power is turned off.

In the initialization process described above, the setting confirmation process is not executed, but is executed by the setting confirmation process called from the timer interrupt process described later (FIGS. 155 and 156), but the setting confirmation process is performed in the initialization process. You may do it. By executing the setting confirmation process in the initialization process, the setting confirmation can be permitted only when the power is turned on, and the confirmation of the set value due to careless operation during the operation of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented.

In this case, a setting confirmation operation unit (for example, a push button switch) is provided separately from the setting key 971 (the setting change switch 972 may have the function of the setting confirmation operation unit), and when the power is turned on. When the setting confirmation operation unit is operated, the current set value is read from the main control RAM 1312, data for displaying on the setting display 974 is generated, and the set value is displayed on the setting display 974. It is good to do it. In this case as well, it is advisable to output a security signal along with the display of the set value.

The main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment may not immediately execute the RAM clear process even if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. Specifically, when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to turn on the power while the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends (step S30). That is, the main control MPU 1311 suspends the RAM clear process, and executes the RAM clear process after the predetermined condition is satisfied (the end of the setting change mode). It can be said that during the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 is controlled to memorize the execution of the RAM clear process. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to turn on the power without operating the setting key 971, the main control RAM is cleared without starting the setting change mode (step S30).

The clearing (initialization) of the main control RAM 1312 has been described in detail above. Next, the clearing of the RAM of the payout control unit 952 mounted on the payout control board 951 will be described.

After the setting change mode, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared in step S30, but the RAM of the payout control unit may be cleared at the same time. Further, it is not necessary to clear the RAM of the payout control unit 952. Further, it may be switched whether to clear the RAM of the payout control unit by the operation. For example, when the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954 while the setting key 971 is turned on, the RAMs of the main control RAM 1312 and the payout control unit 952 are cleared, and the setting key 971 is turned on. If the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch 954, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared and the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is not cleared. By changing the operation method in this way, it is possible to perform a process in which a part of the main control RAM 1312 is cleared and the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is not cleared.

Further, when clearing the RAM of the main control RAM 1312 and the payout control unit 952, there is a difference between the timing of clearing the main control RAM 1312 and the timing of clearing the RAM of the payout control unit 952 depending on whether or not the setting key 971 is operated. May occur. That is, when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to turn on the power while the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared after the setting change mode ends (step S30). On the other hand, when the payout control unit 952 detects the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the payout control unit 952 immediately clears the RAM. Therefore, depending on the condition (operation), the RAM of the payout control unit 952 may be cleared, but the main control RAM 1312 may not be cleared.

Further, not only when the RAM clear switch 954 is provided on the main control board 1310, but also on the pachinko machine 1 provided on the payout control board 951 and the power supply board 931 while operating the RAM clear switch 954 when changing the set value. When the power is turned on, the RAM of the payout control unit 952 should be cleared. That is, the payout control unit 952 does not clear the RAM by the RAM clear command from the main control board 1310, but the payout control unit 952 detects the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on, and the RAM clear switch 954 performs the RAM clear switch 954. It is determined whether or not the operation is being performed, and whether or not the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is cleared is determined. If the RAM clear switch is provided on the payout control board 951, there is an effect that various models can be supported without changing the control program on the frame side.

[12-11. Details of setting confirmation process]
FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

Compared with the timer interrupt process described above in FIG. 23, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 155 is provided with a base calculation process (step S801) instead of the accessory ratio calculation area update process in step S81, and the combination of step S89. The object ratio calculation / display process is deleted. In addition, a setting confirmation process (step S802) for displaying a set value indicating the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the operating ratio of the condition device) is added. The same steps as those of the timer interrupt processing described above in FIGS. 23 and 104 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets 1 in the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word by executing the main control program, and switches the register (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the switch input process (step S74), the timer update process (step S76), the random number update process 1 (step S78), and the prize ball control process (step S80).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current game state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and adds the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312 ( (See FIG. 103) is updated to calculate the base value (see step S801, FIG. 105 and FIG. 106 for details of the base calculation process). The base calculation process (step S801) may be executed in any order after the prize ball control process (step S80), but it is preferable to execute the base calculation process (step S801) in an early order in order to reliably execute each timer interrupt. ..

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 has a frame command reception process (step S82), a fraud detection process (step S84), a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86), and a normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process (step S86). Step S88) is executed.

After that, a setting confirmation process (step S802) for displaying a set value indicating the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the setting confirmation process, the employee of the hall performs a predetermined operation to display the current setting value on the setting display 974. Details of the setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 156.

Subsequently, the output data setting process (step S90) and the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) are executed.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is terminated and the process returns to the processing before the interrupt.

FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. The setting confirmation process is called and executed from step S802 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 155).

In the setting confirmation process, first, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting confirmation operation is in progress (step S8061). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key 971 is operated. If the setting key 971 is operated when the power is turned on, it triggers a transition to the setting change mode (step S17 in FIG. 154), and if it is operated during operation, it becomes a setting confirmation operation and can display the current setting.

If the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position, so data for not displaying the setting value is generated and the setting value is hidden (step S8065).

On the other hand, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected, it is determined whether the setting display condition is satisfied (step S8062).

As a setting display condition, it is determined whether or not the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 by the output of the frame release switch. Since the setting key 971 is installed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting key 971 cannot be operated unless the outer frame 2 is open. However, if the operation of the setting key 971 is detected even though the outer frame 2 is closed, it is presumed that some abnormality (malfunction or cheating) has occurred in the pachinko machine 1, and in this case, the setting is made. It is better not to display. Further, since the setting display 974 is installed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting display 974 cannot be seen unless the outer frame 2 is open, and there is no need to display the setting.

The set value may be displayed at any time during the operation of the pachinko machine 1. Further, a setting display condition that enables display at a specific time may be provided. For example, the set position may be displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) from the time when the power is turned on. In this case, it is preferable to operate a timer that measures the elapsed time from turning on the power (or the initial setting of the CPU in step S28) so that the set value can be displayed until the timer is timed up.

Further, a setting display condition may be provided so that the set value can be displayed in a specific gaming state. For example, the setting display condition cannot be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game. That is, a setting display condition is provided so that the set value can be displayed during a period other than during the special symbol change and the jackpot. In addition, the set value may not be displayed in a game state other than the above. In this case, when the setting key is operated during the special symbol variation game or the jackpot game, the set value may be displayed at the timing when the special symbol variation game or the jackpot game ends.

If it is determined that the setting display condition is satisfied, a security signal is output (step S8063). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality, but it is rare for the pachinko machine 1 to confirm the setting during the game, which is a precursor to fraudulent activity. This is because the hall computer should be notified when a setting confirmation operation is performed during business hours.

The security signal may be output for a predetermined time from the start of the set value display, output between the start and end of the set value display, or output from the start of the set value display to the predetermined period after the end of the set value display. Good. By outputting the security signal until a predetermined period after the setting value display is completed, the period during which the abnormality can be detected becomes longer, and the security can be further improved.

In the illustrated setting confirmation process, a security signal is transmitted when the setting display condition is satisfied, but even if the setting display condition is not satisfied, even if the setting confirmation operation (operation of the setting key 971) is detected, the security signal is transmitted. Good.

After that, the set value is displayed (step S8064). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads the current set value from the main control RAM 1312 and generates data for displaying on the setting display 974.

If the setting display condition is not satisfied, the condition is checked until the setting display condition is satisfied, but it may not be possible to get out of the loop for a long time. The confirmation process may be completed. For example, if it is determined that the set value is not displayed because the special symbol variation display is in progress, and then the special symbol variation display ends within a predetermined time, the setting display condition is satisfied when the special symbol variation display ends. And display the set value. If the setting conditions are not satisfied, the setting confirmation process may be terminated immediately without repeating the confirmation of the setting conditions.

At this time, the fact that the set value is not being displayed may be included in the special symbol variation display start condition. In this way, the new special symbol variation display is not started while the set value is being displayed, and the new special symbol variation display is started after the set value is hidden.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the set value can be confirmed at a predetermined timing, so that the set value can be confirmed without interfering with other displays. In particular, when the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used in combination, the set value is displayed with priority during the setting confirmation, so that the base value is calculated but the base value is not displayed. In a gaming state where many prize balls are paid out in a short time, it may be desired to check the change in the base value. Therefore, the set value can be displayed without interfering with the real-time display of the base value.

[12-12. Output of security signal accompanying setting change and setting confirmation]
FIG. 157 is a timing diagram of a security signal output when the setting is changed and the setting is confirmed.

As described above, a security signal is output at the time of setting change mode and setting confirmation (S61 in FIG. 154 and S8063 in FIG. 156).

In the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 157 (A), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode. The predetermined time (T seconds) at which the security signal is output may be longer than or equal to the time during which the hall computer can recognize the security signal, and may be 1 second or less or several tens of seconds.

Further, the security signal may be output not for a predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode but for a period from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

Further, in the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 157 (B), a security signal may be output for a predetermined time (T seconds) at the timing of the RAM clear processing executed in association with the setting change mode.

At the time of setting confirmation, as shown in FIG. 157 (C), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time from the start of the setting confirmation. The predetermined time (T seconds) at which the security signal is output may be longer than or equal to the time during which the hall computer can recognize the security signal, and may be 1 second or less or several tens of seconds.

Further, the security signal may be output not for a predetermined time from the start of the setting confirmation but for a period from the start to the end of the setting confirmation (the period during which the setting value is displayed).

When the pachinko machine 1 detects an error, as shown in FIG. 157 (D), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time (T seconds) from the detection of the error. When the pachinko machine 1 detects an error during the setting confirmation, as shown in FIG. 157 (E), a security signal is output for a predetermined time from the detection of the error. That is, the security signal caused by the setting confirmation and the security signal caused by the error detection are continuously output over a predetermined time (T seconds) (a predetermined time from the error detection). Even if an error is detected during the setting confirmation, it is not necessary to extend the output time of the security signal. That is, even if an error is detected during the output of the security signal, the security signal due to the error detection is not output and is absorbed by the security signal being output.

Since the pachinko machine 1 does not detect an error during the setting change mode, the security signal caused by the setting confirmation and the security signal caused by the error detection do not overlap. That is, in the setting change mode, the security signal output time is not extended even if an error occurs, but the security signal output time is extended if an error occurs during the setting confirmation.

[12-13. Another example of setting confirmation processing]
Hereinafter, another example of the setting confirmation process will be described. In the above description, an example in which the setting confirmation processing is performed in the timer interrupt processing in the peripheral control unit steady processing has been mainly described, but in the following, the setting confirmation processing is performed in the initialization processing when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. An example will be described.

Specifically, for example, when the setting key is turned on when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the process proceeds to the setting confirmation process. The details of the process will be described below. The timer interrupt process executed by the peripheral control MPU in this chapter is assumed to be the timer interrupt process in FIG. 23 (that is, the timer interrupt process that does not include the setting confirmation process in step S802).

FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing another example of the initialization process. The difference from FIG. 154 will be described. When the main control MPU 1311 determines in step S18 that the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (step S18: No), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated and its output is on (step). S29).

When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is on (step S29: Yes), the main control MPU 1311 proceeds to the setting confirmation process in step S807, and then proceeds to step S20. The setting confirmation process in step S807 will be described later. When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is off (step S29: No), the main control MPU 1311 proceeds to step S20.

FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing another example of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation process in step S807). Differences from FIG. 156 will be described. The main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting display condition is satisfied without performing the process of step S8061 (step S8062). When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the setting display condition is satisfied (step S8062: Yes), the main control MPU 1311 outputs a security signal (step S8063) and displays the set value (step S8064). When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the setting display condition is not satisfied (step S8062: No), the process of step S8062 is executed again.

The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated following the process of step S8064 and its output is off (step S8071). When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is ON (step S8071: No), for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the determination of step S8071 is executed again. When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is off (step S8071: Yes), the main control MPU 1311 hides the set value (step S8075) and ends the setting confirmation process. That is, when the setting key 971 is turned on and the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear button, the setting confirmation state is entered.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the change of the special symbol, the number of reserved storages managed by the main control board 1310, the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the like are stored as they are. After that, if the setting confirmation process is performed the next time the power is turned on (when the power is turned on with the setting key 971 turned on), after the setting confirmation process is completed (setting without turning off the power). After returning the key 971 to the initial position), the special symbol change resumes. At this time, for example, the effect (effect using a display device, effect using a lamp, sound effect using a speaker, effect using a movable body, etc.) executed together with the special symbol change is the special symbol. Nothing will happen after the fluctuation resumes.

Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol change and the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, the special symbol change is resumed after the setting confirmation process is completed. You may resume the production that was being performed with. For example, the interrupted production using the display device, the lamp, and the speaker is resumed. Further, regarding the effect using the movable body, for example, it is stipulated that the movable body is operated in the effect pattern of the effect after the movable body is returned to the initial position after restarting the special symbol variation or when the power is turned on. If so, the movable body is operated according to the effect pattern.

That is, if the movable body shifts to the setting confirmation state when it is not in the initial position, it is returned to the initial position once when the power is turned on or when the setting confirmation process is completed, and then based on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation. If the determined effect includes an effect of moving (moving) the movable body, the movable body may be moved (moved). If the setting confirmation state is entered while the movable body is operating (moving), the operation pattern of the operation (moving) may not be executed, or the movable body is once returned to the initial position. The movable body may be operated as long as it is a pattern that can be operated even from the body.

In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol change and the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, the special symbol change is resumed after the setting confirmation process is completed. Of the effects that were performed together with, the effect using the display device, the effect using the lamp, and the sound effect using the speaker were restarted, and the movable body was moved to the initial position after the resumption of the special symbol variation or when the power was turned on. It is not necessary to return and produce using a movable body.

Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol change and the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, the effect display device 1600 is restarted after the setting confirmation process is completed. The fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed in is resumed (the production originally planned to be performed is resumed), or the variation of the decorative symbol is performed until the symbol is confirmed (or until the shaking fluctuation immediately before the symbol is confirmed). The decorative symbol may be made transparent to perform high-speed fluctuation, or the decorative symbol may be hidden until the symbol is confirmed (or until the shaking fluctuation immediately before the symbol is confirmed). Further, at the time of determining the symbol, for example, the combination of decorative symbols scheduled before the power is turned off is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, in this case, at the end of the special symbol change after resumption, a combination of predetermined decorative symbols, a combination of decorative symbols displayed at the time of initial power-on, or a special decorative symbol that is not displayed at the time of normal special symbol change. The combination (for example, "XXX" or the like) may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol change, the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, and the setting confirmation process is completed and the normal state is restored, the setting key 971 is in the off state. The same initial operation as when the power is turned on (that is, when the power is normally turned on) (for example, an operation such as confirming a predetermined operation of the movable body or a predetermined light emission of the LED) may be performed. (The above-mentioned effect or the like may be restarted after performing this initial operation).

In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off while the look-ahead effect is being performed during the special symbol change and the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, for example, the special after the setting confirmation process is completed. When the symbol change is restarted, the look-ahead effect and the look-ahead effect for the special symbol change held immediately before the power is turned off are not executed (specifically, for example, it is performed before the power is turned off. A special zone that was displayed during the fluctuation of the special symbol that was being displayed (for example, a special stage that shows the player that the expectation of a big hit is high across multiple fluctuations, from rival horse production to horse racing production, which will be described later. A developing zone (a special zone in which the horse racing production has a higher expectation (for example, a special zone in which the expectation is relatively higher than the dialogue production described later)). The display effect in the zone is erased, or if the mode of the hold display is blue instead of normal white, the display effect is returned to normal white). However, the look-ahead effect may be executed for the special symbol change corresponding to the winning after the setting confirmation process is completed.

In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off while the look-ahead effect is being performed during the special symbol change and the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, for example, the special after the setting confirmation process is completed. When the symbol change resumes, the look-ahead effect during the special symbol change is canceled (specifically, for example, the special zone displayed during the special symbol change that was performed before the power was turned off. The standby display and the display effect in the special zone are erased, and if the mode of the hold display is blue instead of normal white, for example, it is returned to normal white), but the following The look-ahead effect may be restarted from the special symbol change (the erased display may be restored, or if the effect pattern is to promote the look-ahead effect at the start of the change, it may be restored in the display mode after the promotion. May be good). In this case, the look-ahead effect executed from the next special symbol change is restarted, for example, assuming that the look-ahead effect during the special symbol change is not stopped. That is, before turning off the power of the pachinko machine 1, the look-ahead effect that was scheduled to be executed after the next special symbol change is executed. Further, a new look-ahead effect pattern may be set, and the effect of the new look-ahead pattern may be executed from the next special symbol variation.

[12-14. Another example of setting suggestion effect]
Hereinafter, an example of processing in which the execution of the setting suggestion effect is restricted will be described. In the following description, it is assumed that the jackpot probabilities of settings 1 to 6 in the normal state are 1/240, 1/230, 1/220, 1/210, 1/200, and 1/190, respectively. It is assumed that the jackpot probabilities of settings 1 to 6 at the time are 1/48, 1/46, 1/44, 1/42, 1/40, and 1/38, respectively. In addition, it is assumed that the probability variation rate at the time of winning a big hit is 50%.

[12-14-1. Fluctuation pattern table]
FIG. 160 is another example of the variation pattern table. The variation pattern table is stored in, for example, the ROM 1313 of the main control board 1310. In the explanation of FIG. 142 and the like, an example in which a variation pattern table exists for each winning type of the special lottery result has been described, but in the example of FIG. 160, the variation pattern for each winning type of the special lottery result is described in one variation pattern table. Is defined. Further, in the example of FIG. 160, it is assumed that a common fluctuation pattern table is used in all the settings.

The variation pattern table of FIG. 160 shows the correspondence between the winning type of the special lottery result, the identifier of the variation pattern, the outline of the effect of the variation pattern, and the selection rate. As described above, in the example of FIG. 160, the information of the fluctuation pattern of each special lottery result is stored in one fluctuation pattern table. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 selects the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the winning type corresponding to the winning according to the selection rate indicated by the fluctuation pattern table. As in the example of FIG. 144, the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern may be defined in the fluctuation pattern table.

In addition, the movie reach described in the summary column has a high percentage selected when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, and a very low percentage selected when the result of the special lottery is out of order. Is. In other words, the expectation of a big hit of fluctuations in which movie reach is executed is high. Further, when a movie reach occurs, a predetermined movie is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In addition, the "+1 symbol" when the winning type is "missing" described in the summary column means that the decorative symbol that has changed to the end after the decorative symbol has stopped in the reach state is in the reach state. Indicates that the vehicle will stop after passing one decorative pattern. Specifically, for example, after the decorative symbol "7" reaches the reach state, the decorative symbol that has been fluctuating until the end stops at "8". When the winning type is "big hit", "+1 symbol" means that after the decorative symbol has stopped in the reach state, the decorative symbol that has fluctuated to the end has passed one decorative symbol in the reach state and temporarily stopped. After pretending to be like this, the decorative symbol stops as the same symbol as the decorative symbol in the reach state. Specifically, for example, after reaching the reach state with the decorative symbol "7", the decorative symbol that has fluctuated until the end appears to have stopped temporarily at "8", and then the decorative symbol stops at "7". And notify the big hit.

In the summary column in the example of FIG. 161, "+1 symbol" is selected only when the winning type is "big hit (non-probable change)", but in the case of "big hit (probable change)". Only may be selected, or may be selected in the case of "big hit (non-probable change)" and "big hit (probable change)". Further, "+1 symbol" may be selected only when the winning type is "missing".

Further, "+ pseudo 1" and "+ pseudo 2" described in the summary column indicate that two pseudo continuous effects and three pseudo continuous effects are executed, respectively. The pseudo continuous effect is an effect in which the operation of changing the decorative symbol and ending the change of the decorative symbol is executed a plurality of times during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. .. "Ending the variation of the decorative symbol" means, for example, a mode in which a part or all of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a mode in which the player is made to recognize that the variation of the decorative symbol is once completed, and a mode of the decorative symbol. A mode in which a pseudo-ream symbol (a symbol in which a pseudo-ream is confirmed if this symbol is stopped) is partially stopped. A pseudo-continuous effect in which the operation is performed N times (N is a natural number of 1 or more) is called an N-series pseudo-continuous effect, and the M-th variation of the decorative symbol (M is 1 or more N) in the N-series pseudo-continuous effect. The following natural numbers) are called the M-th pseudo continuous production. In addition, while suggesting to the player that the operation may be executed again during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display, the operation is actually executed again. A production that does not occur is called a "pseudo-gase production". Further, hereinafter, the pseudo continuous production is also simply referred to as a "pseudo continuous production".

Pseudo-continuous production occurs or continues, that is, the operation of changing the decorative symbol and ending the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is executed again during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. Peripheral control MPU may stop the pseudo-continuous symbol at at least one of the left decorative symbol, the intermediate decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol when it is confirmed that the pattern is to be performed. In the following example, the peripheral control MPU stops a character such as "continue!" As a pseudo-continuous symbol on the intermediate decorative symbol. In addition, for example, a combination of specific decorative symbols (for example, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are all odd or even numbers and reach does not occur) may be used as a pseudo-continuous symbol. It should be noted that the pseudo-gase effect can be executed, for example, when the outline of the effect is "normal variation" or the like. Further, for example, even in the fluctuation pattern in which "+ pseudo 1" is executed, a pseudo-gase effect suggesting the occurrence of the third pseudo-ream in "+ pseudo 2" may be executed.

[12-14-2. Last hold color table]
FIG. 161 is an example of the final reserved color table. The final reserved color table is stored in, for example, the peripheral main control ROM. The final hold color table is, for example, the display color of the hold display at the end of the change for each change pattern (winning type of special lottery result, identifier of change pattern, and outline of production of the change pattern) (hereinafter, final hold color). (Also called) selectivity and keeps.

The effect display device 1600 includes a hold display area indicating the number of pending first special random numbers and second special random numbers. In the start opening winning process in step S116 of FIG. 142, a hold number designation command for designating the hold numbers of the first special random number and the second special random number is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU displays the hold number indicated by the hold number designation command in the hold display area.

Specifically, when a game ball wins a prize (starting condition is satisfied) in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the number of holds (number of hold memories) specified by the hold number designation command increases. , Adds one hold display to the hold display area and displays it. On the other hand, when the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) based on the hold display is started (the start condition is satisfied), the number of holds (the number of hold memories) specified by the hold number specification command is reduced. , Delete the hold display in the hold display area.

In addition, there may be a plurality of display modes in the hold display. For example, as the plurality of display modes, there are display modes of hold display in a plurality of colors (white, blue, green, red, rainbow). Hereinafter, the color of the hold display is white, blue, green, red, and rainbow in that order, and the jackpot expectation of the special lottery result corresponding to the hold display is high. In particular, in the example of FIG. 161 the rainbow-colored hold display is selected only when the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

That is, the peripheral control MPU selects the final reserved color corresponding to the selected variation pattern according to the selectivity indicated by the final reserved color table. Further, the peripheral control MPU corresponds to the hold display by changing the display mode of the hold display during the display period from displaying the hold display in the hold display area until the hold display is deleted. It is possible to execute a hold notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit for the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol).

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the hold change effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display may change during the display period of the hold display. It should be noted that the hold change effect and the hold notice effect during the display period of the hold display and before the start of the change corresponding to the hold are also referred to as a hold look-ahead effect.

For example, the peripheral control ROM holds a hold notice table (not shown) that defines a change timing of the display mode of the hold display. Specifically, for example, in the hold notice table, the change timing of the display mode of the hold display and the display mode (display color) of the hold display at the time of winning and at each change timing are defined for each final hold color. The start, during, and end of the special symbol change after the prize and before the special symbol change corresponding to the prize are examples of the change timing.

It is desirable that the display mode of the hold display at each change timing is a hold color having a jackpot expectation degree equal to or lower than the jackpot expectation degree of the final hold color. In addition, it is desirable that the jackpot expectation indicated by the hold display does not demote at each change timing (for example, it is desirable that the blue hold display does not change to the white hold display). In addition, there may be a different hold notice table for each number of hold memories at the time of winning.

In addition, for example, the start of the special symbol change held before the hold display is an example of the change timing of the display mode of the hold display described above, and for example, during the special symbol change corresponding to the hold display. , The change timing of the display mode of the hold display may be provided.

The look-ahead effect including the hold look-ahead effect is executed based on the pre-determination command transmitted from the main control MPU 1311 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the pre-determination process performed in the start opening winning process in step S116 of FIG. 142. To.

Hereinafter, the pre-judgment process in the start opening winning process for the first special symbol will be described. Since the same applies to the pre-judgment process in the start opening winning process for the second special symbol, only the first special symbol will be described here. In the pre-judgment process, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a big hit is achieved by comparing the pre-judgment table (not shown) with a special random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, and a variable random number. The type of the big hit, and if the big hit is not obtained, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed is specified.

Then, the specified pre-judgment information (whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit if it is a big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600. Depending on the mode type of the game effect to be played, the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of reserved storages (value of the pending number counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number. Set the pre-judgment command. For example, in the effect pre-judgment process related to the first special symbol, the first special symbol pre-judgment command is set according to the specified pre-judgment information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first reserved memory number. ..

Then, by transmitting a pre-judgment command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the number of reserved storages stored corresponding to the starting port where the starting winning is generated, a special symbol based on the generated starting winning is obtained. Whether or not the display result of the variable display of is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp the preliminary determination information such as the mode type of the game effect before starting the variation display according to the start winning prize.

FIG. 162 shows the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variable pattern of setting 1 when the variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reserved color table of FIG. 161. This is an example of a table showing. FIG. 163 is an example of a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 3 in the same case. FIG. 164 is an example of a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each fluctuation pattern of setting 5 in the same case. According to FIGS. 162 to 164, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance rate of the display mode of the hold display of the higher jackpot expectation degree. In addition, the higher the jackpot expectation of each color, the higher the expectation. The appearance rate and the degree of expectation are calculated based on the jackpot probability of each setting described above, and for the final reserved color table, the final reserved color table of FIG. 161 is used in all the settings. It is supposed to be.

The peripheral control ROM may hold a final reserved color table that is different for each setting. In this case, for example, in the same display mode of the hold display, the selection rate of the final hold color table of the last hold color is set so that the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot expectation. As a result, for example, when a big hit is won in the special symbol variation corresponding to the red hold display, the expectation for a higher setting is further increased, so that the player can obtain an uplifting feeling.

Further, for example, in the display mode of the hold display other than white that is most often selected, for the same hold display display mode, the final hold color of the final hold color table is set so that the lower the setting, the higher the jackpot expectation. The selection rate may be set (specifically, for example, the jackpot expectation when the hold display mode is red is 50% in setting 1 which is a low setting and 30 in setting 6 which is a high setting. Set to%). As a result, for example, even if the jackpot is not won in the special symbol variation corresponding to the red hold display, the expectation for the high setting is high, so that the player's disappointment is suppressed and the game is continued. Can be promoted.

Further, for example, in the display mode of the hold display other than white that is most often selected, for the same hold display display mode, the final hold color of the final hold color table is set so that the jackpot expectation is substantially the same in all settings. The selection rate of may be set. As a result, for example, it becomes difficult to estimate the setting from the combination of the final hold color and the special lottery result, and the player can concentrate only on the expectation for the special lottery result from the display mode of the hold display. Further, for example, when the big hit is not won in the special symbol variation corresponding to the red display mode, it is possible to prevent the situation that the possibility of the low setting becomes high.

[12-14-3. Notice production table]
FIG. 165 is an example of a notice effect table. The notice effect table is stored in, for example, a peripheral control ROM. The advance notice effect table holds, for example, the selection rate of the advance notice effect for each variation pattern (specified by the winning type of the special lottery result, the identifier of the variation pattern, and the outline of the effect of the variation pattern).

In the example of FIG. 165, as the advance notice production, there are a dialogue production, a weather change production, and a rival horse production. The dialogue effect is, for example, an effect in which a predetermined character is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in the variation and the dialogue is spoken. The weather change effect is, for example, an effect in which the weather in the background of the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device 1600 changes in the fluctuation. The rival horse production is a production in which a rival horse of a horse raised by the main character appears on the production display device 1600 in the fluctuation.

It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect using the advance notice effect, and the advance notice effect table stores the selection rate of each advance notice effect according to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed. In the example of FIG. 165, “without set” indicates that the setting suggestion effect is not executed, and “with set” indicates that the setting suggestion effect is executed. The peripheral control MPU determines the advance notice effect to be executed based on the fluctuation pattern and the selection rate of the advance notice effect table.

It is desirable that the selection rate without the setting suggestion effect is sufficiently higher than the selection rate with the setting suggestion effect in each advance notice effect in each variation pattern of the notice effect table. If the selection rate with the setting suggestion effect is high, the setting suggestion effect frequently occurs. This is because if the frequency of occurrence of the setting suggestion effect suggesting a high setting is low in this state, the player is likely to stop the game in a short time. That is, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 which is set to a low setting is remarkably lowered, which may impose an excessive burden on the hall. On the contrary, for example, when the frequency of setting suggestion effects suggesting a high setting is high, the number of players who presume that the setting of the other pachinko machine 1 in the hall is low increases and the operation of the other pachinko machine 1 is performed. There is a risk that the rate will drop and the hall will be overloaded.

The selection rate of the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern table is determined so that the jackpot expectation increases as the number of pseudo-reams increases. For example, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect does not change substantially depending on the number of pseudo-reams. , The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the advance notice effect table is determined. That is, for example, for fluctuation patterns whose outlines are "SP reach", "SP reach + pseudo 1", and "SP reach + pseudo 2", the pseudo setting suggestion effect is such that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is substantially the same. The selection rate of whether or not to execute is determined. As a result, although the jackpot expectation is low for the fluctuation pattern with a small number of pseudo-reams, the occurrence rate of the setting suggestion effect is not low even when compared with the fluctuation pattern with a large number of pseudo-reams. You can also be interested in fluctuations in small fluctuation patterns.

Further, the selection rate of whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed in the advance notice effect table may be determined so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect increases as the number of pseudo-reams increases. The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the advance notice effect table may be determined so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is high. If the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is increased as the number of pseudo-reams decreases, the above-mentioned problems may occur. Therefore, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is increased as the number of pseudo-reams decreases. However, it is desirable to set the values to be almost the same (specifically, for example, 15/256 when the variation pattern 5 is selected at the time of deviation, and 15/256 when the variation pattern 6 is selected, and the dialogue effect set when the variation pattern 6 is selected. Set as 16/256).

In addition, a fluctuation pattern with a high expectation of a big hit (or a production in which the expectation of a big hit is not a fluctuation pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, but the expectation of the appearance is relatively high (for example, a production in which the expectation of a big hit is a predetermined value or more) ), The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the advance notice effect table may be determined so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect becomes higher. Specifically, for example, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect increases in the order of "normal variation", variation including "normal reach", variation including "SP reach", and variation including "movie reach". The selection rate of whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed in the advance notice effect table may be determined.

Further, in the example of FIG. 165, there is a possibility that a setting suggestion effect may occur in all the advance notice effects (line effect, weather change effect, and rival horse effect). May exist.

In addition, if the outline of the fluctuation pattern is the same, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is higher when the special lottery result is a big hit without a probability change than when the special lottery result is a big hit with a probability change. The selection rate of whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed in the advance notice effect table may be determined. As a result, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect becomes high when the jackpot without probability change is won, and the player's disappointment for not being given the probability change can be reduced. In the above example, the three types of advance notice productions of dialogue production, weather change production, and rival horse production have been described, but it goes without saying that the production is not limited to the three types.

[12-14-4. Dialogue production]
The details of the dialogue production among the preliminary productions will be described below. When the peripheral control MPU selects a dialogue effect without a setting suggestion effect as the advance notice effect, for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation (for example, 2 seconds later), the character A appears on the effect display device 1600. "What day is it today?" Is displayed as the line of character A. Then, for example, the peripheral control MPU causes the character B to appear on the effect display device 1600 after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the dialogue display of the character A, and the dialogue of the character B is "Come on ...". indicate. In addition, for example, the dialogues of the characters A and B may indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit of the fluctuation.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU selects a dialogue effect with a setting suggestion effect as the advance notice effect, the peripheral control MPU selects the dialogue of the character B (the dialogue suggesting the setting) from the dialogue effect table described later. For example, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation (for example, 2 seconds later, that is, the same timing as the timing at which the character A appears when there is no setting suggestion effect described above), the peripheral control MPU is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A appears and the line of character A is displayed as "What day is it today?". For example, the peripheral control MPU causes the character B to appear on the effect display device 1600 after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the dialogue display of the character A, and displays the dialogue of the selected character B. The dialogue of the character A may be a dialogue that directly expresses a setting value such as "Do you know the setting of this platform today?".

FIG. 166 is an example of a dialogue production table. The dialogue effect table is stored in, for example, a peripheral control ROM. The dialogue production table holds the production type of the dialogue production and the selection rate of the dialogue content of the character B for each setting. The production type includes "a pattern that is halfway together" and "a pattern that suddenly branches", and there are "Kamone-type" lines and "determined-type" lines for each of the two patterns. ..

Each line belonging to the "halfway together pattern" contains the same line halfway, and then branches into different lines. In the example of FIG. 166, all the lines belonging to the "halfway together pattern" start with "Come on ..." and then branch to different lines. On the other hand, the lines belonging to the "suddenly branching pattern" branch to different lines from the beginning. It is desirable that the selection rate of the lines belonging to the "halfway together pattern" is higher than the selection rate of the lines belonging to the "suddenly branching pattern". This is to raise expectations.

The lines that belong to "Kamone-kei" are lines that suggest the current setting but do not definitively announce the setting. For example, "But I feel like it was an even-numbered day ..." is a line of "Kamone-kei" that suggests an even-numbered setting. "But I feel like it was an even day ..." is a "maybe" type of dialogue, so the selection rate is determined so that it may appear even with an odd number setting. However, the selection rate of the line in the odd number setting shall be sufficiently lower than the selection rate of the line in the even number setting. Similarly, for other "Kamone-kei" lines, the selection rate of the line in the setting suggested by the line shall be sufficiently higher than the selection rate of the line in the other settings.

On the other hand, the dialogue belonging to the "deterministic system" is a dialogue that deterministically announces the setting. For example, "Oh! I remembered! It's an even day!" Is a "confirmed" line that definitively announces the even setting. Therefore, the selection rate of the dialogue in the odd number setting is 0, and the selection rate exceeds 0 only in the even number setting.

It is desirable that the selection rate of the lines belonging to the "Kamone system" is higher than the selection rate of the lines belonging to the "determined system". If the selection rate of the lines belonging to the "determined system" is high, there is a good possibility that the player will be definitively notified of the high setting in a short time after the start of the game. This is because there is a certain number of players who presume that the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is not good, which may reduce the operation of other game machines.

In addition, in the dialogue production when executing a specific reach production such as SP reach or movie reach, or in the dialogue production when performing a pseudo-ream, the dialogue that suggests the setting of character B is written in red characters (in the jackpot expectation suggestion production, etc.). The dialogue of the normal production may be displayed in white characters). This makes it easier for the player to distinguish between the dialogue of the expectation suggestion effect and the dialogue of the setting suggestion effect, so that the two types of effects (setting suggestion effect and expectation suggestion effect) coexist without making the player feel unnatural. Can be made to. The expectation suggestion effect is an effect indicating that the jackpot expectation degree in the special symbol fluctuation is a predetermined value. Specifically, a notice effect suggesting an expectation for a jackpot within one fluctuation, or a plurality of notice suggestion effects. Includes a look-ahead effect that suggests expectations for a big hit across fluctuations in.

The peripheral control MPU may determine the setting suggestion effect by a lottery table similar to the dialogue effect table, although the weather change effect and the rival horse effect are not shown. For example, in a setting suggestion effect in a weather change effect, a thundercloud is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a number such as "246?" In the setting suggestion production in the horse production, the combined horse production by the horse raised by the main character and the rival horse is displayed on the production display device 1600, and a number such as "135?" Is displayed on the number of the rival horse, for example (. "Kamone-type" production that suggests an even number setting).

In the above example, "How many days is it today?" Is displayed as the line of character A in the dialogue production, but in addition to this line, character A is "How many points was the test last week?" Character B is one, such as "66 points! (" Definite system "where setting 6 is confirmed)" and "I feel like it was 55 points ... (" Maybe system "which suggests setting 5)". A plurality of variations may be provided for the production (for example, dialogue production). In that case, it is preferable that the B effect (for example, the effect of listening to the test score) is more credible to the setting suggestion than the A effect (for example, the effect of listening to the date). Specifically, for example, when the A production says "I feel like it was a day with a 6 ... (Maybe system)", the expectation level of setting 6 is only 30%, but in the B production, " The expectation level, which is the setting 6 when it is said that "I feel like I got 66 points ... (Maybe system)", should be set to 50%.

[12-14-5. Another example of the notice production table]
FIG. 167 is another example of the notice effect table. In the example of FIG. 167, the advance notice effect table 173 holds the selection rate of the advance notice effect for each variation pattern. Unlike the example of FIG. 165, the notice effect table of FIG. 167 does not hold information about whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed. That is, the peripheral control MPU selects only the type of the advance notice effect according to the selection rate corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the advance notice effect table of FIG. 167.

Then, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect based on the fluctuation pattern and the type of the selected advance notice effect. FIG. 168 (A) is an example of a setting suggestion effect table showing the distribution of whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed when the outline of the variation pattern is “normal variation” and “line effect” is selected as the notice effect. is there. FIG. 168 (B) is an example of a setting suggestion effect table showing the distribution of whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed when the outline of the fluctuation pattern is “normal reach + 1 symbol” and “line effect” is selected as the advance notice effect. Is. A setting suggestion effect table for all combinations of the variation pattern and the advance notice effect as shown in FIG. 168 is stored in the peripheral control ROM in advance.

In the above example, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect after determining the content of the advance notice effect, but determines the content of the advance notice effect after determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect. You may. By using such a method, although the amount of data is larger than that of the table as shown in FIG. 165, the appearance rate and reliability of the effect can be set in detail. Further, the table shown in FIG. 165 and the processing shown in this alternative example may be combined.

[12-14-6. Specific example of setting suggestion effect]
FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an outline of the setting suggestion effect. The effect that progresses in the order of FIGS. 169 (A), (B), and (C) is a setting suggestion when "It's a day with 4 or 5 or 6!" Is selected as the line of character B in the line effect. It is an outline of the production.

In FIG. 169 (A), the special symbol variation starts. In FIG. 169 (B), after the start of the special symbol change, the character B line "It's a day with 4 or 5 or 6!" Is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 169 (C), the dialogue is displayed on the effect display device 1600 until the end of the special symbol variation.

The production that progresses in the order of FIGS. 169 (A), (D), and (E) is an outline of the setting suggestion production when "It's a day with 6!" Is selected as the dialogue of character B in the dialogue production. is there. In the effect of proceeding in the order of FIGS. 169 (A), (D), and (E), the setting suggestion effect starts from the start of the special symbol change, while the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect is during the end of the special symbol change. has been edited. Specifically, in FIG. 169 (D), after the start of the special symbol change, the character B line "It's a day with 4 or 5 or 6!" Is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 169 (E), at the end of the special symbol change, the character B's line "It's a day with a 6!" Is displayed. That is, the setting suggested by the dialogue of character B has been promoted.

Specifically, for example, for each line (finally displayed line) in the line production table, one or more scenarios indicating the timing of line change and the line at each timing, and the selection rate of each scenario are set. It may be defined for each. The peripheral control MPU displays the dialogue at the timing of the dialogue change according to the selected scenario.

In this case, it is desirable that the dialogue production table does not hold a scenario in which the suggested setting may be demoted. Specifically, for example, the dialogue production table may not hold a scenario in which the dialogue "It's an even day!" Is displayed after the dialogue "It's a day with 4 or 5 or 6!". desirable.

Further, in the example of FIG. 169, only the setting suggestion effect is performed in the special symbol variation, but other effects (for example, the effect suggesting the jackpot expectation degree) may be executed in parallel. Although the example in which the dialogue of the character B is promoted at the end of the special symbol change is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the character B may be promoted before the end of the special symbol change. In addition, character A appears before the dialogue of character B, and character A talks to character B, but it is omitted in the drawing.

FIG. 170 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an outline of a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect. In FIG. 170 (A), the game ball B has won a prize at the first starting port 2002 during the special symbol change without holding the special symbol change. Subsequently, in FIG. 170 (B), immediately after the game ball B wins the first starting port 2002, the character B line "It's a day with 4 or 5 or 6!" Is displayed on the production display device 1600. To. In this case, since the remaining time of the special symbol that has already changed is indefinite, the character B may be displayed immediately without displaying the character A, or the character B may be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the winning. Alternatively, the character A may be displayed and then the character B may be displayed. Further, in FIG. 170 (B), the number of holds indicated by the display in the hold display area is increased by one.

Subsequently, in FIG. 170 (C), all the decorative symbols are stopped, and the special symbol variation ends. In addition, the character B line "It's a day with 4 or 5 or 6!" Is still displayed on the effect display device 1600. Subsequently, in FIG. 170 (D), the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning is started. At the same time as the start of the special symbol change, the dialogue of the character B displayed on the effect display device 1600 changes to "It's a day with 5 or 6!". That is, the setting indicated by the dialogue of character B has been promoted.

Subsequently, in FIG. 170 (E), all the decorative symbols are stopped, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning is completed. At the end of the special symbol change corresponding to the prize, the dialogue of the character B displayed on the effect display device 1600 changes to "It's a day with a 6!". That is, the setting indicated by the dialogue of character B has been promoted.

For example, the peripheral control ROM holds a dialogue look-ahead effect table (not shown) that defines the dialogue of the character B and the change timing of the dialogue. Specifically, for example, the dialogue look-ahead effect table defines the change timing of the dialogue of the character B and the dialogue of the character B at the time of winning and at each change timing. The start, during, and end of the special symbol change after the prize and before the special symbol change corresponding to the prize are examples of the change timing. It is desirable that the settings suggested by the dialogue are not demoted at each change timing. In addition, there may be a different dialogue look-ahead effect table for each number of reserved memories at the time of winning. When the peripheral control MPU determines to execute the look-ahead effect based on the pre-determination command, the peripheral control MPU executes the line look-ahead effect by referring to the line look-ahead effect table at a predetermined ratio, for example. Also, in the case of promotion, in Fig. 170, it is promoted step by step ("It's a day with 4 or 5 or 6!", "It's a day with 5 or 6!", "It's a day with 6". (Promotion in the order of! ”) May be promoted in multiple stages at once. Specifically, for example, in FIG. 170, the dialogue of (E) may be displayed without displaying the dialogue of (D).

The setting suggestion effect may be executed under a specific situation other than the above. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed when the condition of the hold sequence is satisfied. The hold ream means that the next big hit is realized by a special random number held by the end of the big hit game. In this case, for example, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the hold is performed and before the end of the jackpot game. Further, for example, when a specific variation pattern is continuous a predetermined number of times, a setting suggestion effect may be executed in the special symbol variation at the predetermined number of times.

[12-15. Restrictions on setting suggestion effects]
Hereinafter, restrictions on the setting suggestion effect under specific conditions will be described.

[12-15-1. Restrictions on setting suggestion effects after a special state]
First, the limitation of the setting suggestion effect after the special state will be described. Below, both the setting confirmation mode and the error occurrence are examples of special states. The setting confirmation mode is a mode for displaying the set value, which starts when it is determined in the setting confirmation process that the setting display condition is satisfied (step S8062: Yes).

FIG. 171 (A) is an example of the effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode. FIG. 171 (B) is an example of an error-occurring effect restriction table. The effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode and the effect restriction table when an error occurs are stored in, for example, the peripheral control ROM.

[12-15-1-1. Restrictions on setting suggestion effects after setting confirmation mode]
First, the effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode will be described. The effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode shows the variation when the setting confirmation mode is started while the variation determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (hereinafter referred to as the setting suggestion variation in this chapter) is being executed or held. A restriction flag indicating whether or not to restrict the setting suggestion effect is stored.

In the setting confirmation mode, the effect restriction table is set in the setting confirmation mode before the start of the setting suggestion effect (that is, when the effect related to the setting suggestion is not executed (displayed) even though it is determined to perform the setting suggestion effect). Record 1701 that stores the restriction flag when is started, and after the start of the setting suggestion effect in the setting suggestion fluctuation (that is, when it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be performed and the effect related to the setting suggestion is executed (displayed)). Includes record 1702, which stores the limit flag when the setting confirmation mode is started.

When the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 159 is performed, the game is stopped at the start of the setting confirmation mode, and when the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 156 is performed, the game proceeds even during the setting confirmation mode. .. Therefore, the effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode stores the column 1703 for storing the restriction flag when the game is stopped at the start of the setting confirmation mode, and the restriction flag when the game progresses even in the setting confirmation mode. Includes column 1704 and.

Further, if the game progresses even in the setting confirmation mode, there is a possibility that a new setting suggestion change is suspended by winning a game ball at the starting port during the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the column 1704 includes a column 1705 that stores a restriction flag in a new setting suggestion variation corresponding to a winning of the starting port in the setting confirmation mode. It should be noted that each restriction flag in the effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode is set by the operation medium provided in the pachinko machine 1 at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or in a hall or the like (even if the operation medium cannot be operated by the player). It can be set by an operation medium that can be operated). When a game ball enters the starting port during the setting confirmation mode, the lottery information may not be acquired and the prize ball may not be acquired for the entry. However, even in such a case, the special symbol change that has already been held is executed during the setting confirmation mode or after the setting change mode ends.

When the game is stopped at the start of the setting confirmation mode, one value of the fields 1706 and 1707 is 1 and the other value is 0, the values of the fields 1708 to 1711 are 0, and the values of the fields 1712 and 1713 are set. One value is 1 and the other value is 0, and the values of fields 1714 to 1717 are 0.

Further, when the game progresses even in the setting confirmation mode, the values of the fields 1706 and 1707 are 0, one of the fields 1708 and 1709 is 1 and the other value is 0, and the field 1710. And one of the fields 1711 is 1 and the other is 0, the values of fields 1712 and 1713 are 0, one of the fields 1714 and 1715 is 1 and the other is 0. One value of field 1716 or field 1717 is 1 and the other value is 0.

The peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect restriction pattern according to the restriction flags in each state defined in the setting confirmation mode start effect restriction table and the error occurrence effect restriction table. Hereinafter, these restriction patterns will be described.

(1) When the setting confirmation mode starts before the start of the setting suggestion effect and the game stops when the setting confirmation mode starts.

(1-1) After resuming the game, the setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1706 is 1 and the value of the field 1707 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to notify the player that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode in which the setting change process is executed, and there is a sense of security that the result of the game will not be affected. Can be given.

(1-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed after the game is restarted (the value of field 1706 is 0 and the value of field 1707 is 1). For example, in the setting confirmation mode, when a sound or an image indicating that the setting is being confirmed is output to various speakers and the effect display device 1600, the setting suggestion effect is not executed in this way, so that the setting confirmation mode is in progress. It is possible to provide the player with the expectation that the setting may have been changed to a higher setting.

(2) Regarding the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion variation when the setting confirmation mode starts before the start of the setting suggestion effect and the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode.

(2-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1708 is 1 and the value of the field 1709 is 0). Since the game progresses even in the setting confirmation mode, the operation is not slowed down. When the audio and image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress are output to the various speakers and the effect display device 1600, these audio and images are output in preference to the audio and image in the setting suggestion effect. To do. At this time, in order not to cause discomfort to the player, an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress is displayed on the effect display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. In addition, in order to provide the player with the expectation that "when the setting suggestion effect was displayed" and "the setting suggestion effect suggesting a high setting may have been displayed", all of the setting suggestion effects are provided. An image indicating that the setting confirmation mode may be in progress may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 so as to be hidden.

(2-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of field 1708 is 0 and the value of field 1709 is 1). For example, when the player confirms the set value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, when the set value is 1, a high setting such as "maybe a high setting?" Is set. (When a suggestion effect occurs), the player may feel distrust of the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

(2') When the setting confirmation mode starts before the start of the setting confirmation effect and the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode, a new setting suggestion variation corresponding to the winning of the starting port in the setting confirmation mode About the setting suggestion production of.

(2'-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1710 is 1 and the value of the field 1711 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to notify the player that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode, and it is possible to give a sense of security that the result of the game is not affected.

(2'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of field 1710 is 0 and the value of field 1711 is 1). For example, if Hall shifts to the setting confirmation mode because he is skeptical about the set value, the set value may be changed after that. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in such a case, the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, the setting suggestion effect is changed to a different setting while the even number setting is confirmed. Since there is a possibility that the odd number setting will be confirmed later in the setting suggestion effect), a trouble may occur between the hall and the player. By not executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of such a situation.

It is desirable that the image, sound, light, and the like indicating that the setting is confirmed as described above appear regardless of the value of the field described above. Further, since it is assumed that a new prize is valid even when the game is stopped after the transition to the setting confirmation state, in that case, the same process as the process for advancing the game may be performed.

(3) The setting confirmation mode starts during the setting suggestion fluctuation and after the setting suggestion effect is started (when the setting suggestion effect is displayed and after the setting suggestion effect is displayed and the display of the setting suggestion effect is finished). And when the game stops when the setting confirmation mode starts.

(3-1) After resuming the game, the setting suggestion effect is restarted (the value of the field 1712 is 1 and the value of the field 1713 is 0). If the already started setting suggestion effect is canceled, the player may feel distrust that the setting may have been changed. By restarting the setting suggestion effect after the game is resumed, such a setting suggestion effect is resumed. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation.

(3-2) The setting suggestion effect is not restarted after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1712 is 0 and the value of the field 1713 is 1). For example, in the setting confirmation mode, when a sound or an image indicating that the setting is being confirmed is output to various speakers and the effect display device 1600, the setting suggestion effect is not executed in this way, so that the setting confirmation mode is in progress. It is possible to provide the player with the expectation that the setting may have been changed to a higher setting.

(4) The setting confirmation mode starts during the setting suggestion fluctuation and after the setting suggestion effect is started (when the setting suggestion effect is displayed and after the setting suggestion effect is displayed and the display of the setting suggestion effect is finished). And, about the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion variation when the game progresses even in the setting confirmation mode.

(4-1) The setting suggestion effect is continued (the value of the field 1714 is 1 and the value of the field 1715 is 0). Since the game progresses even in the setting confirmation mode, the operation is not slowed down. When the audio and image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress are output to the various speakers and the effect display device 1600, these audio and images are output in preference to the audio and image in the setting suggestion effect. To do. At this time, in order not to cause discomfort to the player, an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress is displayed on the effect display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed ( The image related to the setting suggestion effect and the image indicating the setting confirmation mode do not overlap, or the image related to the setting suggestion effect and the character indicating the setting confirmation mode such as "in the setting confirmation mode" are displayed so as not to overlap). .. It should be noted that this display and the like can be processed in the same manner even when an error occurs, which will be described later. The term "non-overlapping" as used herein means that the appearance from the player does not overlap, not the image data actually set in the RAM.

In addition, in order to provide the player with the expectation that "when the setting suggestion effect was displayed" and "the setting suggestion effect suggesting a high setting may have been displayed", all of the setting suggestion effects are provided. An image indicating that the setting confirmation mode may be in progress may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 so as to be hidden.

(4-2) The setting suggestion effect is canceled (the value of the field 1714 is 0 and the value of the field 1715 is 1). For example, when the player confirms the set value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, when the set value is 1, a high setting such as "maybe a high setting?" Is set. (When a suggestion effect occurs), the player may feel distrust of the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

(4') When the setting confirmation mode starts while the setting suggestion is fluctuating and the setting suggestion effect is started, and the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode, a new game corresponding to the winning of the starting port in the setting confirmation mode is supported. About the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion fluctuation.

(4'-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1716 is 1 and the value of the field 1717 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to notify the player that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode, and it is possible to give a sense of security that the result of the game is not affected.

(4'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of field 1716 is 0 and the value of field 1717 is 1). For example, if Hall shifts to the setting confirmation mode because he is skeptical about the set value, the set value may be changed after that. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in such a case, the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, the setting suggestion effect is changed to a different setting while the even number setting is confirmed. Since the odd-numbered setting is displayed in the later setting suggestion effect), a trouble may occur between the hall and the player. By not executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of such a situation.

In addition, when the game progresses also in the setting confirmation mode, when the setting confirmation mode straddles a plurality of fluctuations, for example, the peripheral control MPU is set after the setting confirmation mode is started, for example, based on the notification from the main control MPU 1311. At the time of the first symbol confirmation or the start of the next fluctuation, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation mode is used. When it is determined that the peripheral control MPU is in the setting confirmation mode, if the newly won hold is a setting suggestion change, the peripheral control MPU performs the setting suggestion effect together with the change corresponding to the hold. By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to notify the player that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode in which the setting change process is executed, and there is a sense of security that the result of the game will not be affected. Can be given.

Further, the peripheral control MPU may not execute the setting suggestion effect in this case. When the player confirms the set value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, when the set value is 1, a high setting such as "maybe a high setting?" Is suggested. (When the effect occurs), the player may feel distrust of the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

In this way, the effect is exhibited in both cases when the setting suggestion effect is performed and when the setting suggestion effect is not performed. Therefore, by allowing the hall or the like to set the effect restriction for the setting suggestion effect, the hall or the like can be set. We can provide gaming machines that meet the needs of our business style.

[12-15-1-2. Restrictions on setting suggestion effects when an error occurs]
Subsequently, the effect restriction table at the time of error occurrence will be described with reference to FIG. 171 (B). The effect restriction table at the time of error is the setting suggestion effect of the change when an error occurs during the execution or pending of the variation determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (hereinafter referred to as the setting suggestion variation in this chapter). Stores a restriction flag that indicates whether or not to restrict.

When an error occurs, the effect restriction table includes record 1801 that stores the restriction flag when an error occurs before the start of the setting suggestion effect, and an error occurs during the change of the setting suggestion variation and after the start of the setting suggestion effect in the setting suggestion variation. Includes record 1802, which stores the restriction flag in the case of.

The errors include a strong error that is notified by stopping the game and a weak error that is notified while the game is in progress. The error of detecting an illegal magnetism in the launch ball sensor 1020 and the game area 5a is an example of a strong error. The full tank error (an error indicating that the game ball stored in the foul cover unit 520 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535) is an example of a weak error.

Therefore, the effect restriction table when an error occurs, the column 1803 that stores the restriction flag corresponding to the error notified when the game is stopped, and the column 1804 that stores the restriction flag corresponding to the error notified while the game is in progress. ,including.

Further, if the game progresses even during the error occurrence, the game ball may win a prize at the starting port during the error occurrence, so that a new setting suggestion change may be suspended. Therefore, column 1804 includes column 1805 that stores the limit flag in the new setting suggestion variation corresponding to the winning of the starting port during the error.

The restriction flag in the error-occurring effect restriction table can be operated by the player even if the operation medium is provided in the pachinko machine 1 (the operation medium cannot be operated by the player), for example, at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or in a hall or the like. It can be set depending on the operation medium).

In the error-occurring effect restriction table, one value of field 1806 and field 1807 is 1 and the other value is 0, and one value of field 1808 and field 1809 is 1 and the other value is 0. One value of field 1810 and field 1811 is 1 and the other value is 0, one value of field 1812 and field 1813 is 1 and the other value is 0, and one value of field 1814 and field 1815 is 0. The value of 1 and the other is 0, and the value of one of fields 1816 and 1817 is 1 and the value of the other is 0.

The peripheral control MPU executes the restriction pattern of the setting suggestion effect according to the restriction flag of each case defined in the error occurrence effect restriction table. Hereinafter, these restriction patterns will be described.

(1) When an error starts before the start of the setting suggestion effect and the game stops when the error occurs (strong error).

(1-1) After resuming the game, the setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1806 is 1 and the value of the field 1807 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to notify the player that the setting has not been changed when the error is cleared by the hall clerk, and it is possible to give a sense of security that the result of the game is not affected. it can.

(1-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1806 is 0 and the value of the field 1807 is 1). As a result, when an error occurs, a situation that is disadvantageous to the player that the setting suggestion effect is not executed may occur, so that the player proceeds with the game so as not to generate an error, and the game Can proceed smoothly and the burden on the hall can be reduced.

(2) Regarding the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion variation when an error occurs before the start of the setting suggestion effect and the game progresses even after the error occurs (weak error).

(2-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1808 is 1 and the value of the field 1809 is 0). As a result, the game proceeds even when an error occurs, so that the operation of the game machine is not slowed down. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when an error occurs, it is possible to improve the interest of the player. When the sound and image indicating that an error is occurring are output to the various speakers and the effect display device 1600, these sounds and images are output in preference to the sound and image in the setting suggestion effect. .. At this time, in order not to cause discomfort to the player, an image indicating that an error is occurring is displayed on the effect display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. In addition, in order to provide the player with the expectation that "when the setting suggestion effect was displayed" and "the setting suggestion effect suggesting a high setting may have been displayed", all of the setting suggestion effects are provided. An image indicating that an error is occurring may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 so as to be hidden.

(2-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of field 1808 is 0 and the value of field 1809 is 1). As a result, when an error occurs, a situation that is disadvantageous to the player that the setting suggestion effect is not executed may occur, so that the player proceeds with the game so as not to generate an error, and the game Can proceed smoothly and the burden on the hall can be reduced.

(2') Setting suggestion When an error occurs before the start of the effect and the game progresses even during the error (weak error), a new setting suggestion corresponding to the winning of the starting port during the error is occurring. About setting suggestion production of fluctuation.

(2'-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1810 is 1 and the value of the field 1811 is 0). As a result, the game proceeds even when an error occurs, so that the operation of the game machine is not slowed down. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when an error occurs, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

(2'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1810 is 0 and the value of the field 1811 is 1). As a result, since the setting suggestion effect is not executed for the winning prize during the error occurrence, the player stops launching the game ball and releases the error at an early stage.

(3) When an error occurs during the setting suggestion fluctuation and after the setting suggestion effect starts, and the game stops when the error occurs (strong error).

(3-1) After resuming the game, the setting suggestion effect is restarted (the value of the field 1812 is 1 and the value of the field 1813 is 0). If the already started setting suggestion effect is canceled, the player may feel distrust that the setting may have been changed. By restarting the setting suggestion effect after the game is resumed, such a setting suggestion effect is resumed. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation.

(3-2) The setting suggestion effect is not restarted after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1812 is 0 and the value of the field 1813 is 1). As a result, when an error occurs, a situation that is disadvantageous to the player that the setting suggestion effect is canceled may occur, so that the player proceeds with the game so as not to generate an error, and the game Can proceed smoothly and the burden on the hall can be reduced.

(4) Regarding the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion variation when an error occurs during the setting suggestion fluctuation and after the start of the setting suggestion effect, and the game progresses even during the error occurrence (weak error).

(4-1) The setting suggestion effect is continued (the value of the field 1814 is 1 and the value of the field 1815 is 0). As a result, the game proceeds even when an error occurs, so that the operation of the game machine is not slowed down. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when an error occurs, it is possible to improve the interest of the player. When the sound and image indicating that an error is occurring are output to the various speakers and the effect display device 1600, these sounds and images are output in preference to the sound and image in the setting suggestion effect. .. At this time, in order not to cause discomfort to the player, an image indicating that an error is occurring is displayed on the effect display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. Also, in order to provide the player with the expectation of "when the setting suggestion effect was displayed" and "when the setting suggestion effect suggesting the high setting was displayed", hide all the setting suggestion effects. Then, an image indicating that an error is occurring may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

(4-2) The setting suggestion effect is canceled (the value of the field 1814 is 0 and the value of the field 1815 is 1). As a result, when an error occurs, a situation that is disadvantageous to the player that the setting suggestion effect is stopped may occur, so that the player proceeds with the game so as not to generate an error, and the game is played. It can proceed smoothly and reduce the burden on the hall.

(4') When an error occurs during the setting suggestion fluctuation and after the start of the setting suggestion effect, and the game progresses even while the error occurs (weak error), a new prize corresponding to the winning of the starting port during the error is occurring. About setting suggestion production of setting suggestion fluctuation.

(4'-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1816 is 1 and the value of the field 1817 is 0). As a result, the game proceeds even when an error occurs, so that the operation of the game machine is not slowed down. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when an error occurs, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

(4'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1816 is 0 and the value of the field 1817 is 1). As a result, since the setting suggestion effect is not executed for the winning prize during the error occurrence, the player stops launching the game ball and releases the error at an early stage.

In this way, the effect is exhibited in both cases when the setting suggestion effect is performed and when the setting suggestion effect is not performed. Therefore, by allowing the hall or the like to set the effect restriction for the setting suggestion effect, the hall or the like can be set. We can provide gaming machines that meet the needs of our business style.

[12-15-2. Restrictions on production in new start prizes]
Hereinafter, the restrictions on the production in the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning prize during the special symbol fluctuation and in the state where the new fluctuation can be reserved will be described. FIG. 172 is an example of a new start prize production restriction table. The new start winning effect restriction table is stored in, for example, the peripheral control ROM.

The new start winning effect restriction table includes, for example, a condition column, a reference processing table column, and a flag column. The conditions in the condition column are defined by the assumption about the pre-variation effect and the effect limit in the effect in the new start winning in the assumption. The previous change in this chapter is the change immediately before the change corresponding to the new starting prize. As a condition of the effect of the pre-variation, there are a case where only the expectation suggestion effect is performed to see if the special lottery result corresponding to the change is a big hit, and a case where the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed.

In addition, as the effect limitation of the look-ahead effect in the new start prize, only the setting suggestion effect in the look-ahead effect is restricted (that is, the setting suggestion effect is not executed), and both the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect in the look-ahead effect are restricted (that is, the setting). There are two cases: the suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect are not executed), and neither the setting suggestion effect nor the expectation suggestion effect in the look-ahead effect is restricted (that is, the setting suggestion effect and the look-ahead effect are executed).

The reference processing table column stores the identifier of the processing table to be referred to when executing the look-ahead effect restriction in the new start winning, which is included in the corresponding condition. The flag column stores a flag indicating which condition is executed and which processing table is used to determine the processing for the look-ahead effect in the new start winning prize.

1 is stored in the flag column corresponding to any one of the processing tables 1 to 3, and 0 is stored in the flag column corresponding to the other two of the processing tables 1 to 3. Further, 1 is stored in the flag column corresponding to any one of the processing tables 4 to 6, and 0 is stored in the flag column corresponding to the other two of the processing tables 4 to 6. The flag in the new start winning effect restriction table is, for example, an operation medium provided in the pachinko machine 1 at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or in a hall or the like (whether the operation medium cannot be operated by the player or the operation medium can be operated by the player). It doesn't matter), and it can be set.

If the peripheral control MPU determines that there is a new start prize while the special symbol is changing and the new change can be reserved, and only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous change, the new start prize effect restriction table The condition indicated by the condition column is executed, in which the value in the "pre-variation effect" column corresponds to the flag column corresponding to "expectation suggestion only" and 1 is stored as the value. Further, the peripheral control MPU refers to the processing table corresponding to the flag column, and determines the content of the look-ahead effect in the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize.

Similarly, the peripheral control MPU has a new start prize while the special symbol is changing and a new change can be reserved, and when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous change, the new start prize is given. The value in the "pre-variation effect" column of the effect restriction table is the flag column corresponding to "expectation suggestion + setting suggestion", and the processing table corresponding to the flag column storing 1 as a value is newly referred to. Determine the content of the look-ahead effect in the fluctuation corresponding to the starting prize.

Hereinafter, each condition indicated by the condition column will be described. The first condition (condition in which the processing table 1 is selected) is that when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the pre-variation, only the setting suggestion effect is restricted as the look-ahead effect limit of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. To be done. In the first condition, since the expectation suggestion effect is performed in the pre-variation, the player feels more uplifted by the expectation for the big hit. In such a state, when the setting suggestion effect is executed as the look-ahead effect of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning prize, the player's consciousness is also directed to the setting suggestion effect, so that the pre-variation effect is performed. The feeling of exhilaration may decrease. In addition, the player may confuse the setting suggestion effect with the expectation suggestion effect, which may make the player happy. Therefore, by executing the first condition, the occurrence of these situations can be suppressed.

Further, in the first condition, the expectation suggestion effect is performed in the pre-variation, but in this state, if the setting suggestion effect is further executed as the look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new start winning prize, the player Even if it is assumed that the previous fluctuation will deviate, the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize can still be expected, so that the player can be provided with a sense of security.

For example, when selecting an effect by the advance notice effect table of FIG. 165, whether or not the flag in the condition column indicating that the peripheral control MPU determines the effect by the table and then limits the setting suggestion effect is 1. (Whether or not to limit) is determined, and if it is 1 (restrict), even if set is selected, it is rewritten and displayed without set to limit the setting suggestion effect. To do. That is, the peripheral control MPU can execute the restriction of the setting suggestion effect by using the advance notice effect table shown in FIG. 165 by executing the determination process after determining the effect. That is, since the pachinko machine 1 does not need to hold the effect table for each effect restriction type, the amount of data can be reduced. Similarly, in the expectation suggestion effect described later, when the peripheral control MPU limits the expectation suggestion effect even when the look-ahead hold display is selected other than white using the final hold color table of FIG. 161. Rewrites the selected hold display to white and displays it.

The second condition (condition in which the processing table 2 is selected) is the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion as the pre-reading effect limit of the change corresponding to the new start winning when only the expectation suggestion effect is executed in the pre-variation. It is to limit both productions. In the second condition, since the expectation suggestion effect is performed in the pre-variation, the player is more uplifted by the expectation for the big hit. In such a state, when the setting suggestion effect and the period attitude suggestion effect are executed as the look-ahead effect of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize, the player's consciousness is directed to these effects as well. There is a risk that the feeling of exhilaration in the production of pre-variation will decrease. Therefore, by executing the second condition, the occurrence of these situations can be suppressed.

The third condition (condition in which the processing table 3 is selected) is the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion as the pre-reading effect limit of the change corresponding to the new start winning when only the expectation suggestion effect is executed in the pre-variation. Do not limit any of the productions. In the third condition, since the expectation suggestion effect is performed in the pre-variation, the player is more uplifted by the expectation for the big hit. In such a state, by executing the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize, in addition to the uplifting feeling for the big hit, the uplifting feeling for the setting suggestion effect (particularly, the high setting confirmation suggestion effect). Alternatively, (when a high setting confirmation effect or the like is executed) can be given to the player.

The fourth condition (condition in which the processing table 4 is selected) is a setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect limit of the change corresponding to a new start winning when the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the pre-variation. Only is limited. In the fourth condition, since the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the pre-variation, the player may win a big hit in the pre-variation, and (especially the high setting suggestion effect or the high setting confirmation effect). (When is executed) I feel an uplifting feeling due to the setting suggestion. In such a state, if the setting suggestion effect is executed as the look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new start winning, there is a possibility that the feeling of excitement for the big hit in the hold of the previous change may decrease. ..

Specifically, for example, when the setting 4 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect of the pre-variation, and the setting 5 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect as the pre-reading effect of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, the pre-variation The setting suggestion effect contains a lot of inaccurate information (although it is originally set 5 or higher, it also suggests the possibility of setting 4). In such a case, the player presumes that not only the setting suggestion effect in the pre-variation but also the expectation suggestion effect contains a lot of inaccurate information (specifically, for example, the display mode is red). (It is presumed that the expectation for big hits is not high even for the hold, which is), and there is a risk that the uplifting feeling for the expectation suggestion effect will decrease. By executing the fourth condition, the occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

The fifth condition (condition in which the processing table 5 is selected) is a setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect limit of the change corresponding to the new start winning when the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the pre-variation. And to limit both the expected suggestion effect. In the fifth condition, since the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the pre-variation, if the setting suggestion effect is performed in the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning prize, the setting suggestion effect is performed a plurality of times in a short period of time. This will be performed, and the player may guess the set value with high accuracy (for example, when the odd number setting suggestion effect and the high setting suggestion effect are performed, there is a high possibility that the setting value is 5). If the player determines that the setting is low in such a state, the game on the pachinko machine 1 may be stopped, and if it is determined that the setting is high, other pachinko machines in the hall may be stopped. There is a risk that the operation of the machine 1 will decrease. By executing the fifth condition, the occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

In particular, if the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the pre-variation, and the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed as the look-ahead effect even in the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize, many effects occur in a short period of time. However, the player may be confused. By executing the fifth condition, the occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

The sixth condition (condition in which the processing table 6 is selected) is a setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect limit of the change corresponding to the new start winning when the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the pre-variation. And neither of the expected suggestion effects should be restricted. In the sixth condition, since the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the pre-variation, the player assumes the expectation degree of the expectation suggestion effect in the setting suggested by the setting suggestion effect. In this state, in the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning prize, the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect are performed, so that the expectation level due to these two expectation suggestion effects may be raised.

Specifically, for example, when a setting suggestion effect suggesting a setting of 4 or more is executed in the pre-variation, and a setting suggestion effect suggesting a setting of 5 or more is executed as a look-ahead effect in a new start winning prize, the player Regarding the expectation suggestion effect in the previous fluctuation, the degree of expectation at setting 4 or higher is assumed. However, after that, since the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect in the new start winning prize suggests a setting of 5 or more, the expectation degree of the expectation suggestion effect is assumed to be the setting 5 or more, and the player The feeling of exhilaration increases.

In this way, the effect is exhibited for each of the pre-reading effect restriction contents corresponding to the new start prize. Therefore, by making it possible for the hall etc. to set such pre-reading effect restriction contents, the needs of the sales style of the hall etc. It is possible to provide a gaming machine tailored to the needs.

Hereinafter, each processing table and the look-ahead effect executed with reference to each processing table will be described. Each processing table is stored in, for example, a peripheral control ROM.

FIG. 173 is an example of the processing table 1. First, the contents common to each processing table will be described. Each processing table stores the winning type in the special lottery result of the previous variation, the processing content related to the new start winning corresponding to the winning type, and the processing number which is an identifier of the processing content.

The processing content held by each processing table defines the processing content for the look-ahead effect that is not subject to restriction. Specifically, for example, as the pre-reading effect restriction of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning, the processing content of the processing table 1 which is a table referred to when only the setting suggestion effect is restricted includes the expected suggestion effect. The processing content is defined. Similarly, as the pre-reading effect limitation of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning, the processing contents of the processing table 3 which is a table referred to when both the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are restricted include the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect. The processing content for the setting suggestion effect is defined.

Therefore, the peripheral control MPU determines the look-ahead effect of the restriction target in the new start prize and the processing table to be referred to based on the flag of the new start prize effect restriction table, and is not the restriction target based on the processing table. Determine the processing for the look-ahead effect.

The processing table 3 and the processing table 6, which will be described later, store a flag for selecting the processing content related to the new start winning from a plurality of processing contents. The flag in the processing table may be, for example, an operation medium provided in the pachinko machine 1 at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or in a hall or the like (an operation medium that the player cannot operate or an operation medium that the player can operate). ) Can be set.

Hereinafter, the processing contents related to the new start winning prize defined in the processing table 1 will be described. The processing table 1 is a table that is referred to when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the pre-variation and only the setting suggestion effect is restricted as the look-ahead effect limit of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. Hereinafter, an example in which hold look-ahead is performed as a look-ahead effect for suggesting expectations will be described.

The process of process number 1 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a big hit with a short time. In the process of process number 1, the peripheral control MPU is, for example, when the mode of the hold display of the new start prize is a specific mode (for example, a hold display mode such as blue, green, red, etc.) with a high expectation of big hit. At the start of the opening screen of the jackpot won by the previous variation, the mode of the hold display of the new start prize is returned to the default (the white display mode in the final hold color table of FIG. 161). However, if the hold is not displayed in the hold display area at the start of the jackpot opening screen, the hold display of the specific mode is deleted in the same manner as the other hold display. In addition, the peripheral control MPU does not return the mode of the hold display of the new start prize to the specific display mode (that is, leave the default display) at the time of the time saving transition after the end of the jackpot. It should be noted that the peripheral control MPU does not return the mode of the hold display of the new start prize to the specific display mode even if the hold of the new prize is not exhausted at the end of the time reduction (that is,). Leave the default display).

The process of process number 2 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a big hit with no time reduction. In the process of process number 2, the peripheral control MPU determines that the mode of the hold display of the new start prize is a specific mode in which the jackpot expectation is high, for example, at the start of the jackpot opening screen won by the pre-variation. Return the mode of the hold display of the new start prize to the default. However, if the hold is not displayed in the hold display area at the start of the jackpot opening screen, the hold display of the specific mode is deleted in the same manner as the other hold display. Further, even at the time of transition to the normal state controlled after the jackpot game is completed, the mode of the hold display of the new start prize is not returned to the specific display mode (that is, the default display is left).

The process of process number 3 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a small hit. In the process of process number 3, the peripheral control MPU does not change the mode of the hold display of the new start prize (that is, the hold display is continued, specifically, for example, if the hold display mode is blue, it is blue. The hold display mode of is continuously displayed). Further, the peripheral control MPU may return the mode of the hold display of the new start prize to the default at the start of the opening screen of the small hit won by the previous variation. However, if the hold is not displayed in the hold display area at the start of the small hit opening screen, the hold display of the specific mode is deleted in the same manner as the other hold display.

The process of process number 4 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is out of order. In the process of process number 4, the peripheral control MPU does not change the mode of the hold display of the new start prize (that is, the hold display is continued, specifically, for example, if the hold display mode is blue, it is blue. The hold display mode of is continuously displayed).

FIG. 174 is an example of the processing table 2. The processing table 2 is a table that is referred to when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the pre-variation and both the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect are restricted as the look-ahead effect limit of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. is there. Since the processing table 2 is a table that is referred to when both the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect are restricted as the look-ahead effect limit of the change corresponding to the new start winning, regardless of the jackpot type of the pre-variation. It is defined that no special processing is performed on the look-ahead effect in the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize.

FIG. 175 is an example of the processing table 3. The processing table 3 is a table that is referred to when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the pre-variation and neither the set suggestion effect nor the expectation suggestion effect is restricted as the look-ahead effect limit of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. is there.

The processing of the processing numbers 5 to 6 is a processing related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a big hit with a short time. One of the processes of process numbers 5 to 6 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 5 to 6, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 1.

In the process of process number 5, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize. Before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize, specifically, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the jackpot game won by the previous fluctuation, or during the time saving accompanying the jackpot won by the previous fluctuation. The second special symbol is on hold and is being digested. When the player recognizes that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the pre-variation by the process of the process number 5, the player can remember that the setting suggestion effect is performed. it can.

In the process of process number 6, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning prize. In addition, since the jackpot with a time reduction is won in the previous fluctuation, the fluctuation corresponding to the new prize is likely to start after the end of the time reduction (during the time reduction, the game ball is at the second starting port 2004). If the prize is won frequently and the first special symbol change and the second special symbol change are suspended, the second special symbol change is executed in preference to the first special symbol change). Therefore, since the setting suggestion effect is executed after the time reduction ends by the processing of the process number 6, the player's disappointment due to the time reduction ending can be reduced.

The processes of process numbers 7 to 8 are processes related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a big hit with no time reduction. One of the processes of process numbers 7 to 8 can be selected by a flag. The processing for the expectation suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning in the processes of the process numbers 7 to 8 is the same as the process of the process number 2.

In the process of process number 7, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize. The term "before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize" is, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the big hit game won by the previous fluctuation, or the like. The player feels disappointed that he won the jackpot but did not win in a short time, but if the processing of process number 7 starts the setting suggestion effect during the jackpot game at the latest, he will be disappointed. You can enjoy the big hit game in a reduced state.

In the process of process number 8, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning prize. Since the setting suggestion effect is started immediately after the jackpot is completed by the process of the process number 8, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player due to the fact that the time reduction is not given.

The processing of the processing numbers 9 to 10 is a processing related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a small hit. One of the processes of process numbers 9 to 10 can be selected by a flag. The processing for the expectation suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning in the process of the process numbers 9 to 10 is the same as the process of the process number 3.

In the process of process number 9, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize. The term "before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize" is, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the opening of the small hit won by the previous fluctuation, or during the small hit. In the small hit, the player may be disappointed because only a small privilege is given to the player, but the processing of the processing number 9 starts the setting suggestion effect at an early timing, which is disappointing. Can be reduced.

In the process of process number 10, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning prize. Since the series of digestion times related to the small hit is shorter than the series of digestion times related to the big hit, the setting suggestion effect is when the player recognizes that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the pre-variation. If you do not do this, the player may feel distrustful. By the process of the process number 10, it is possible to prevent the player from giving such a feeling of distrust.

The processes of process numbers 11 to 13 are processes related to a new start winning prize when the winning type of the previous variation is out of order. One of the processes of process numbers 11 to 13 can be selected by a flag. The processing for the expectation suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning in the process of process numbers 11 to 13 is the same as the process of process number 4.

In the process of process number 11, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning prize.

In the process of process number 12, the peripheral control MPU starts the new start only when the mode of the hold display in the hold look-ahead effect of the pre-variation is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high expectation of a big hit. During the fluctuation corresponding to the winning, the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect in the new start winning is executed. The execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is not changed, that is, no special processing is performed, but the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is controlled to be different (for example, a line suggesting the setting by the character B appears. The timing may be delayed by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds) or earlier than usual by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds). By the processing of the processing number 12, it is possible to alleviate such disappointment for the player who feels disappointed at the fact that the mode of the hold display having a high expectation of big hit appears in the pre-variation. it can. In addition, in FIG. 175 and FIG. 178 described later, the old hold is a hold corresponding to the previous fluctuation, and the new hold is a hold corresponding to the new start winning prize.

In the process of process number 13, when the mode of the hold display is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high expectation of big hit, the peripheral control MPU suggests setting as a look-ahead effect in the new start winning prize. Do not perform the production. Due to the processing of process number 13, although the mode of the hold display having a high expectation of big hit appears in the pre-variation, the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect does not appear even in the change corresponding to the new start winning prize. , It is possible to prevent the player from being absorbed in the game.

FIG. 176 is an example of the processing table 4. The processing table 4 is a table that is referred to when the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the pre-variation, and only the setting suggestion effect is restricted as the look-ahead effect restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. ..

The process of the process number 14 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a big hit with a time saving. In the process of process number 14, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 1.

The process of process number 15 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a big hit with no time reduction. In the process of process number 15, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 2.

The process of process number 16 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a small hit. In the process of process number 16, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 3.

The process of the process number 17 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is out of order. In the process of process number 16, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 4.

Since the processing table 4 is a table that is referred to when only the setting suggestion effect is restricted as the pre-reading effect limit of the variation corresponding to the new start prize, the new start is performed regardless of the jackpot type of the previous variation. It is defined that no special processing is executed for the setting suggestion effect in the fluctuation corresponding to the winning.

FIG. 177 is an example of the processing table 5. Refer to the processing table 5 when both the setting suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the pre-variation and both the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect are restricted as the look-ahead effect limitation of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. It is a table to be executed. Since the processing table 5 is a table that is referred to when both the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect are restricted as the look-ahead effect limit of the change corresponding to the new start winning, regardless of the jackpot type of the pre-variation. It is defined that no special processing is performed on the look-ahead effect in the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize.

FIG. 178 is an example of the processing table 6. The processing table 6 is referred to when the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the pre-variation, and neither the setting suggestion effect nor the expectation suggestion effect is restricted as the look-ahead effect restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. Table.

The processing of the processing numbers 18 to 21 is a processing related to a new start winning when the winning type of the pre-variation is a big hit with a short time. One of the processes of process numbers 18 to 21 can be selected by a flag. The processing for the expectation suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning in the processes of the process numbers 18 to 21 is the same as the process of the process number 1.

In the process of process number 18, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize. Before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize, specifically, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the jackpot game won by the previous fluctuation, or during the time saving accompanying the jackpot won by the previous fluctuation. The second special symbol is on hold and is being digested. When the player recognizes that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the pre-variation by the process of the process number 18, the player can remember that the setting suggestion effect is performed. it can.

In the process of process number 19, the peripheral control MPU has a setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize, rather than the setting suggested in the pre-variation setting suggestion effect. Is better (specifically, for example, it is notified that setting 4 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect of the previous variation, and the setting as the look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize. Only when it is notified that the setting 5 or more is confirmed in the suggestion effect), the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect is executed before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize. Before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize, specifically, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the jackpot game won by the previous fluctuation, or during the time saving accompanying the jackpot won by the previous fluctuation. The second special symbol is on hold and is being digested.

By the processing of the process number 19, the player can see the high setting suggestion effect during the time reduction jackpot at the latest, so that a double uplifting feeling due to the time reduction jackpot and the high setting suggestion can be obtained. Further, for example, it is notified that the setting 5 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect of the pre-variation, and the setting 4 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize. Is notified, the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize is a useless effect that does not provide new information to the player, and is processed. By processing the number 19, such a useless effect can be omitted. On the contrary, for example, when it is notified that the setting 4 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect of the pre-variation, the setting 5 is set in the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize. Since the player is likely to continue the game even if it is not notified that the above is confirmed, the setting suggestion effect is likely to be a useless effect, and the process of the process number 19 is such a useless effect. The production can be omitted.

In the process of process number 20, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning prize. Since the setting suggestion effect is often started immediately after the end of the time reduction by the processing of the process number 20, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player due to the end of the time reduction state.

In the process of process number 21, the peripheral control MPU is set to be suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start prize, rather than the setting suggested in the pre-variation setting suggestion effect. Only when is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning prize. By the process of the process number 21, it is possible to omit the useless setting suggestion effect as described in the process of the process number 19, and to reduce the disappointment of the player for the end of the time saving state.

The processes of process numbers 22 to 25 are processes related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a big hit with no time reduction. One of the processes of process numbers 22 to 25 can be selected by a flag. The processing for the expectation suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning in the processes of the process numbers 22 to 25 is the same as the process of the process number 2.

In the process of process number 22, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize. The term "before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize" is, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the big hit game won by the previous fluctuation, or the like. The player feels disappointed that he won the jackpot but did not win in a short time, but if the processing of process number 22 starts the setting suggestion effect during the jackpot game at the latest, he will be disappointed. You can enjoy the big hit game in a reduced state.

In the process of process number 23, the peripheral control MPU is set to be suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning prize, rather than the setting suggested in the pre-variation setting suggestion effect. Only when is better, the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect is executed before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize. The term "before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize" is, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the big hit game won by the previous fluctuation, or the like. When the setting suggestion effect is started during the big hit game at the latest by the processing of the process number 23, the big hit game can be enjoyed in a state where the disappointment is reduced.

In the process of process number 24, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning prize. By the processing of the processing number 24, the setting suggestion effect is started immediately after the end of the big hit, so that it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player for not entering in a short time.

In the process of process number 25, the peripheral control MPU is set to be suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start prize, rather than the setting suggested in the pre-variation setting suggestion effect. Only when is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning prize. By the processing of the processing number 21, it is possible to omit the useless setting suggestion effect as described in the processing of the processing number 19, and to reduce the disappointment of the player for not entering in a short time. Further, if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start prize is not better than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the pre-variation, If the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect is executed before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize, the player who is disappointed not to rush into the short time will be shown a more useless setting suggestion effect. There is a risk of stroking the person in reverse.

The processes of process numbers 26 to 29 are processes related to a new start winning prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a small hit. One of the processes of process numbers 26 to 29 can be selected by a flag. The processing for the expectation suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning in the processes of the process numbers 26 to 29 is the same as the process of the process number 3.

In the process of process number 26, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize. The term "before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize" is, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the opening of the small hit won by the previous fluctuation, or during the small hit. In the small hit, the player may be disappointed because only a small privilege is given to the player, but the processing of the processing number 26 disappoints the setting suggestion effect to start at an early timing. Can be reduced.

In the process of process number 27, the peripheral control MPU is set to be suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start winning prize, rather than the setting suggested in the pre-variation setting suggestion effect. Only when is better, the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect is executed before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize. The term "before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize" is, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the opening of the small hit won by the previous fluctuation, or during the small hit. By the processing of the processing number 27, it is possible to omit the useless setting suggestion effect as described in the processing of the processing number 19, and to reduce the disappointment of the player due to the small merit being given in the small hit.

In the process of process number 28, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning prize. Since the series of digestion times related to the small hit is shorter than the series of digestion times related to the big hit, the setting suggestion effect is when the player recognizes that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the pre-variation. If you do not do this, the player may feel distrustful. By the processing of the processing number 28, it is possible to prevent the player from giving such a feeling of distrust.

In the process of process number 29, the peripheral control MPU is set as suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize, rather than the setting suggested in the pre-variation setting suggestion effect. Only when is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning prize. By the processing of the processing number 29, it is possible to omit the useless setting suggestion effect as described in the processing of the processing number 19, and to reduce the disappointment of the player for giving only a small merit in the small hit. Further, if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start prize is not better than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the pre-variation, If the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect is executed before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize, the player who is disappointed that only a small merit is given in the small hit will be given a more useless setting suggestion effect. It will be shown and there is a risk of stroking the player in reverse.

The processes of process numbers 30 to 34 are processes related to a new start winning prize when the winning type of the previous variation is out of order. One of the processes of process numbers 30 to 34 can be selected by a flag. The processing for the expectation suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning in the processes of the process numbers 30 to 34 is the same as the process of the process number 4.

In the process of process number 30, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning prize. By the processing of the processing number 30, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player due to the deviation of the pre-variation.

In the process of process number 31, the peripheral control MPU starts the new start only when the mode of the hold display in the hold look-ahead effect of the pre-variation is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high expectation of a big hit. During the fluctuation corresponding to the winning, the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect in the new start winning is executed. The execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is not changed, that is, no special processing is performed, but the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is controlled to be different (for example, a line suggesting the setting by the character B appears. The timing may be delayed by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds) or earlier than usual by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds). By the processing of the processing number 31, it is possible to alleviate such disappointment for the player who feels disappointed at the fact that the mode of the hold display having a high expectation of big hit appears in the pre-variation. it can.

In the process of process number 32, the peripheral control MPU sets the pre-variation when the mode of the hold display in the hold look-ahead effect of the pre-variation is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high expectation of a big hit. Setting as a look-ahead effect before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize The new start prize is only when the setting suggested in the suggestion effect is better than the setting suggested in the suggestion effect. During the fluctuation corresponding to, the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect in the new start winning prize is executed. By the process of the process number 32, the player's disappointment that the pre-variation, which was the mode of the hold display with a high expectation of a big hit, was out of order can be alleviated by the setting suggestion effect.

In the process of process number 33, the peripheral control MPU performs the new start winning only when the mode of the hold display in the hold look-ahead effect of the pre-variation is not a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high expectation of big hit. During the fluctuation corresponding to, the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect in the new start winning prize is executed. By the processing of the process number 33, such a disappointment can be alleviated by the setting suggestion effect for the player who has been disappointed because the expectation for the big hit cannot be obtained by the hold look-ahead effect of the pre-variation.

In the process of process number 34, the peripheral control MPU is a setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the pre-variation when the mode of the hold display is not a specific mode (for example, green or red) having a high expectation of big hit. Therefore, only when the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start prize is better, during the change corresponding to the new start prize, The setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect in the new start winning prize is executed. A situation in which the processing of the process number 34 amplifies the frustration of the player that the mode of the pending display of the previous variation suggests a low setting in the setting suggestion effect in the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize with a low expectation. Can be suppressed.

In the above-mentioned process, as a pre-reading effect limitation of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning, even in a situation where the setting suggestion effect is not restricted, in the following cases, the peripheral control MPU suggests the setting. It is not necessary to perform the production. For example, when the new start winning prize is made during the big hit, the peripheral control MPU does not have to execute the setting suggestion effect. This is because immediately after the big hit game, the player is likely to continue the game without giving an incentive by the setting suggestion effect.

As in the example of the processing table 3 and the processing table 6, since the effect is exhibited in each of the processes related to the new start winning prizes defined by each processing number, the hall or the like can set the processing related to the new starting winning prize. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that meets the needs of a business style such as a hall.

Further, for example, the new start winning prize is just before the end of the ST state (probability change state that continues until a big hit is won or a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations are executed) (specifically, for example, a special until the end of the ST state). The remaining fluctuation number of the symbol is 4 or less, which is the maximum reserved number of the special symbol, or the remaining fluctuation number of the special symbol until the end of the ST state is displayed on the effect display device 1600, etc.). In that case, the peripheral control MPU does not have to execute the setting suggestion effect. Immediately before the end of the ST state, the player's greatest concern is whether or not to win a big hit in the ST. In such a state, when the setting suggestion effect is started as a look-ahead effect related to a new start prize, the player misunderstands the setting suggestion effect as a production with a high expectation of a big hit, and a situation occurs that makes the player happy. There is a risk of By the above-mentioned processing, the occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

Further, for example, after the ST state ends and the normal state is entered, a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations (specifically, for example, four special symbol fluctuations, which is the maximum number of reserved special symbols, or the ST state) Immediately after the transition to the normal state, the second starting port 2004 may be open, and in consideration of this, the new design may be changed until a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) of special symbol fluctuations are performed. When the start winning is won, the peripheral control MPU does not have to execute the setting suggestion effect. Immediately after the end of the ST state, the player's greatest concern is whether or not he will win the jackpot immediately. In particular, immediately after the end of the ST state, there is a high possibility that a change corresponding to the hold of the second special symbol, which is easy to win a big hit of a type having a great merit for the player, is executed. In such a state, when the setting suggestion effect is started as a look-ahead effect related to a new start prize, the player misunderstands the setting suggestion effect as a production with a high expectation of a big hit, and a situation occurs that makes the player happy. There is a risk of By the above-mentioned processing, the occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

In addition, when it is determined that the setting suggestion effect that is completed independently is executed in each of the plurality of holds, the pre-variation is such that one setting suggestion effect that spans the changes corresponding to the plurality of holds is executed. The setting suggestion effect may be changed.

[12-16. Another example of setting change / confirmation processing 1]
Hereinafter, another embodiment of the pachinko machine having the setting changing function will be described. In the embodiment described below, the set value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. However, the initialization function of the original main control RAM 1312 of the RAM clear switch 954 and the initialization function of the RAM 1312 are used. In order to distinguish it from the setting change function, the operation related to the change of the setting value may be described as the setting change switch 972.

179 and 180 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on. The power-on processing shown in FIGS. 179 and 180 is another example of step S10 in FIG. 21 to step S34 in FIG. 22.

First, the main control MPU 1311 captures the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 and the signal level of the setting key 971 from the input port, and stores the captured level data in the register (step S201). The main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are being operated in steps S212 and S214 after the peripheral control board 1510 is reliably activated. Therefore, if the hall employee mistakenly interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 while waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to start, the hall employee unintentionally clears the RAM. The switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined. Therefore, the input state (level) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is stored in a temporary storage means such as a register at an early stage after the start of the power-on processing, and after the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 ends. By determining the status of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in a temporary storage means such as a register, even if an employee in the hall accidentally interrupts the key operation at an early stage after the power is turned on, the power supply is supplied. The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 at the time of the closing operation is reliably detected.

The ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON level of the setting key 971 may be different. For example, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 may be used to change the logic between the positive and negative, and the RAM clear switch 954 may be turned ON at the High level and the setting key 971 may be turned ON at the Low level. Further, the voltage determined to be ON may be changed by the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971. By doing so, it is possible to change the signal level by irradiating the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves and make it difficult to perform fraudulent acts to activate the setting change mode. Further, as will be described later, it is not necessary to monitor the signal level of the sensor for fraud detection in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

Then, it is determined whether the set value is within a predetermined range (step S202). For example, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the setting can be selected in stages from 1 to 6, the value of the work in which the setting value is stored corresponds to 0 to 5 (when setting 1 = 0, when setting 6 = 5) In the case, if a value of 5 or less is stored, it is determined that the value is within the predetermined range.

If the set value is not within the predetermined range, a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the set state management area, and initialization by the reset signal of the pachinko machine 1 is awaited (step S203). Since the set value is not in the range where the checksum is calculated and is not erased by the RAM clear operation, the abnormal set value is not corrected. Therefore, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the set value, and if there is an abnormality, processing related to a normal game such as a special figure or a normal figure is not executed.

The set value is not only determined when the power is turned on, but also when a prize is entered at the start port, when a variable display game is started, or when the game state is switched (from the normal state to the big hit state, from the low probability state to the high probability state). , Non-time saving state to time saving state, etc.), etc.) is also determined. As a result, even if the set value is erroneously set to an abnormal value, the lottery is prevented from being performed based on the erroneous set value.

If it is determined that the set value is abnormal, the state of the set value abnormality (RAM abnormality) is maintained until the game is stopped and the power is turned on again or the setting value is changed. .. When it is determined that the set value is abnormal, it is advisable to set a predetermined value. As the predetermined value, it is preferable to update the storage area of the set value by using the value corresponding to the setting 6 indicating the highest setting and the value corresponding to the setting 1 indicating the lowest setting.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the RAM abnormality can be resolved only via the setting change mode, and the RAM abnormality cannot be resolved only by turning on the power again. This is because the RAM abnormality may be caused not only by a defect but also by an illegality, and if the RAM abnormality caused by the illegality can be resolved by the power cycle operation, the RAM abnormality can be easily resolved. On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality cannot be resolved without going through the setting change mode, the RAM abnormality cannot be resolved unless the power switch 932, the setting key 971, and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated. Since the operation of the setting key 971 that can be operated only by the employee of the hall having the key is included, the security performance against fraudulent activity can be improved.

In addition, in order to deal with the illegal act of changing the set value to an indefinite value, if the set value is determined to be abnormal, updating it to the value corresponding to the setting 1 indicating the minimum setting will be used for the security of the gaming machine. It is effective because it can improve the sex.

As shown in FIG. 201 (B), the setting state management area is a storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and is, for example, a normal game state (game startable state), a setting confirmation mode, and a setting change mode. , The abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is recorded.

On the other hand, if the set value is within a predetermined range, the peripheral control board 1510 is waited for activation (step S204).

Then, the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of the previous power cutoff is compared (verified) with the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power cutoff and stored in step S48. A fixed value check code may be used instead of the checksum. Further, it is determined whether the value of the backup flag area is normal. If the value of the power failure flag indicating that the backup was normally performed is stored in the backup flag area, the RAM data is normally backed up when a power failure occurs (step S205).

If either the checksum or the backup flag area value is abnormal as a result of the determination, a value (08H) indicating a RAM error is recorded in the setting state management area (step S206), and the entire area (setting) of the main control RAM 1312 is recorded. Initialize (including the area where the value is stored) (step S207), and proceed to step S216. The erasure of data stored in the entire area or a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is referred to as "initialization", but "RAM clear" is also used in the same meaning.

On the other hand, if the values of the checksum and the backup flag area are normal, the setting change operation (RAM clear switch 954 is ON, setting key 971 is ON) is performed based on the value (contents) of the setting key stored in the register. Determine if it is. If it is not a setting change operation (either the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are OFF), it is set in the setting status management area in order to determine whether the status is being changed before the power is turned on. It is determined whether or not a value (02H) indicating that the change is being made is recorded (step S208).

As a result, if it is stored in the register that the setting change operation has been performed, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are used to switch to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, and the setting change operation should be started. It can be determined that it is in a state. Further, if a value (02H) indicating that the setting is being changed is recorded in the setting state management area, it can be determined that the power is turned on after a power failure during the setting change operation. When it is determined to shift to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the register or the value stored in the setting state management area, a value (02H) indicating the setting change state is recorded in the setting state management area (step). S209), the clear area of the main control RAM 1312 to be initialized when the RAM is normal is initialized (step S210), and the process proceeds to step S216.

In step S208, when the mode shifts to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the setting state management area, the value indicating the setting change state (02H) is recorded in the setting state management area in step S209. At this time, since it is not necessary to set the same value (setting change state (02H)) again, when it is determined to shift to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the setting state management area, the setting is changed to the setting state management area. It is not necessary to record the value (02H) indicating the state.

On the other hand, if the setting change operation is not set in the register and the value (02H) indicating that the setting is being changed is not recorded in the setting state management area, the setting change operation should not be started. In order to determine whether or not the state of is in the RAM abnormality, it is determined whether or not a value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S211).

As a result, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined that the state before the power is turned on is in the RAM abnormality (main control RAM 1312 is abnormal), and the process proceeds to step S216. On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM error is not recorded in the setting state management area, the state before the power is turned on is not during a RAM error (main control RAM 1312 is abnormal), and the ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 is stored in the register. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (step S212).

As a result, if the ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 is stored in the register, the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to ON when the power is turned on, so that the RAM in the game control area excluding the set value and the setting state management area In order to initialize the area (clear area when RAM is normal), the process proceeds to step S210.

On the other hand, if the level of the ON operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is not stored in the register, the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated at the time of power-on, so the power-on state buffer is set (step S213). The contents set in the power-on state buffer are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a power-on state command for notifying the gaming state managed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is restored.

After that, it is determined whether the ON level of the setting key 971 is stored in the register (step S214). As a result, if the ON level of the setting key 971 is stored in the register, the setting key 971 is operated when the power is turned on and the setting confirmation operation should be started. Therefore, the setting confirmation mode is shown in the setting status management area. The value (01H) is recorded (step S215).

After that, the device built in the main control MPU 1311 is initially set (step S216), and a power-on operation command for notifying the operation of each part at power-on is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S217). The power-on operation command is one of the power-on commands described in step S32 of FIG. Then, the main control RAM 1312 is initially set to the state when the power is turned on (step S218).

After that, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating the game startable state is recorded in the set state management area (step S219). If a value indicating a game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game can be started, so the process proceeds to step S220 and the initial setting is continued. On the other hand, if the value indicating the game startable state is not recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game cannot be started, so the initial setting is finished and the process proceeds to step S224.

In step S220, the initial setting at the start of the game or the initial setting at the time of recovery from the power failure is performed. After that, a power-on state command for notifying the state of each part at power-on is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S221). Then, the power-on recovery destination command for notifying the state of the special symbol when the power is restored is stored in the buffer for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S222). The power-on state command and the power-on return destination command are one of the power-on commands described in step S32 of FIG. 22. The various commands stored in the buffer are transmitted in the timer interrupt process.

Further, a set value command for notifying the set value is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S223), interrupts are permitted (step S224), and the process proceeds to a normal main loop (for example, step S36 in FIG. 22).

18 and 182 are flowcharts of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The timer interrupt processing shown in FIGS. 181 and 182 is different from the timer interrupt processing shown in FIGS. 24, 75, 80, 104, and 155, and the setting change process is executed in the timer interrupt process.

First, the main control MPU 1311 updates the LED common counter (LED_CT) (step S230). The LED common counter is a counter that determines which common terminal of the base display 1317 is turned on, that is, the digit to be displayed. In this embodiment, an example in which the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used in combination will be described, but the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 may be provided separately. In this case, it is preferable to provide as many LED common counters as there are indicators.

After that, the switch input process is executed (step S231). The switch input process is the same as in step S74 of FIG.

Next, it is determined whether an initial value (a value indicating a game startable state) is recorded in the set state management area (step S232). If the initial value (value indicating the game startable state) is recorded in the setting state management area, it is not necessary to execute the setting change / confirmation process (step S234 or later) in the timer interrupt process, so that the normal timer interrupt process is performed. (For example, after step S76 in FIG. 23) is executed (step S233). In the normal timer interrupt processing in step S233, the performance display processing (FIG. 183) described later is executed. On the other hand, if the initial value (value indicating the game startable state) is not recorded in the setting state management area, the setting change / confirmation process is executed without executing the normal game process in the timer interrupt process.

In the setting change / confirmation process, first, OFF is output from the LED common port, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784, and the game interruption signal is set to ON (step S234). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the LED extinguishing time is secured, and the display before and after the LED display switching appears to be mixed. And prevent the LED from flickering.

After that, it is determined whether or not a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S235). If a value indicating a RAM error is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S245 without executing the process of changing / confirming the set value. On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether or not an operation of changing / confirming the set value has been performed (steps S236 and S237). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a value (02H) indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S236).

Then, if the setting change switch 972 is operated, the set value is added by 1 (step S238), and the process proceeds to step S245. If the upper limit is exceeded as a result of adding the set value, the initial value is returned. On the other hand, if the value indicating the setting change is not recorded in the setting status management area (the value indicating the setting confirmation is recorded in the setting status management area) or the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting key It is determined whether the OFF edge of the output level of 971 is detected (step S239). When the OFF edge of the output level of the setting key 971 is detected, the setting key 971 is operated to the normal position, so that the setting change / confirmation mode end processing is executed (steps S240 to S244). On the other hand, if the OFF edge of the output level of the setting key 971 is not detected, the setting change / confirmation mode is not terminated and the process proceeds to step S245.

In the setting change / confirmation mode end process, as shown in FIG. 182, an initial value (a value indicating a game startable state) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S240), and the initial setting at the start of the game or when the power failure is restored. To perform the initial setting of (step S241) and send a power-on state command to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the state of each part (game state such as low probability / high probability, time saving / non-time saving) at the time of power-on. Is stored in the buffer (step S242). Then, a power-on recovery destination command for notifying the state of the special symbol when recovering after a power failure is stored in a buffer for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S243). Specifically, a counter value indicating the processing status of the special symbol / special electric accessory (state of each process (standby, changing, determination, jackpot, etc.) related to the special symbol / special electric accessory) is transmitted as a command. .. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 can determine the gaming state and the operating state of the special electric accessory related to the special symbol when the power is restored. Then, the set value command for notifying the set value is stored in the buffer for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S244), and the process proceeds to step S245.

The command for notifying the set value may be transmitted not only at the setting change / confirmation mode end process when the power is turned on, but also at the start of fluctuation or when the game state is switched. At that time, the command of the set value to be transmitted when the power is turned on and the command to be transmitted during a normal game such as when the fluctuation starts may be the same command or a different command (for example, the value of the upper byte is different).

When the set value command is different between when the power is turned on and during normal game, the peripheral control board 1510 issues a series of commands (variation pattern command, symbol command, etc.) including the set value at the start of the special symbol variation display game. Upon receipt, it determines if the command is missing. By changing the content of the command at the timing when the command is transmitted (at the time of power-on, during normal game, etc.), the peripheral control board 1510 may be the set value correctly received at the time of power-on, or other than the set value at the start of fluctuation. It is possible to determine whether the fluctuation pattern command or the symbol command is missing.

In step S245, it is determined whether or not a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area. If a value indicating a RAM error is recorded in the setting state management area, an error display is made on the base display 1317 (setting display 974 in the case of a separate body) (step S246). On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM error is not recorded in the setting status management area, a setting for displaying the current setting value on the base display 1317 (setting display 974 in the case of a separate body) is performed (step). S247).

After that, ON is output to the common terminal of the LED of the base display 1317, and the base display 1317 is turned on by the segment signal output according to the setting in step S246 or S247 (step S248). In this way, after the timer interrupt processing is started, the set value change operation is determined (step S237), and then ON is output to the common terminal of the LED for each timer interrupt to display the set value (display of the set value). Toggle). The set value will be displayed without using the setting operation as a trigger. Specifically, the setting change / confirmation process is being executed by performing the process related to the setting change / confirmation within the same timer interrupt process as when the normal game is started, instead of performing the process when the power is turned on. Even if the power is restored after the setting key 971 is returned to the original state due to a power failure, the setting at the time of the power failure occurs without operating the setting key 971 or the setting change switch 972 at the same position as when the power failure occurred. It is possible to return to the state of change / confirmation processing. Further, in the setting change / confirmation process, it is possible to standardize the processes that are also executed in the normal game process, such as the command transmission process and the control of the dynamic lighting of the LED.

Then, a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S249), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. That is, in step S249, the commands stored in the buffer in steps S242, S243, S244 and the like are actually output as serial data from the main control board 1310.

In the timer interrupt processing described above, the processing is branched depending on whether the normal game is executed or the setting change mode (or setting confirmation mode) is executed (step S232 in FIG. 181), but a plurality of timer interrupt processing May be provided to activate different timer interrupt processing in the normal game state and the setting change mode and / setting change mode. The plurality of timer interrupt processes may include some common processes (for example, even if a common subroutine is called in each timer interrupt process), or all of them may be composed of different routines. That is, the timer interrupt process 1 (for setting change / confirmation) is called in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and the timer interrupt 2 (for normal game) is called in the normal game state, which is common to these two timer interrupt processes. It has a process (module) to be executed and a dedicated process (module) to be executed only by one timer interrupt process. Commonly executed processes include, for example, a switch input process for capturing the output of various detection switches such as a winning opening sensor, and a peripheral board command process for transmitting a command to the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the register bank may be shared between the process executed in the normal game and the process executed in the setting change mode. When bank 0 is used in the main processing on the main control side, bank 1 is used in both timer interrupt processing. Since two timer interrupt processes are not started at the same time, one register bank can be shared. That is, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 has two or more registers that can be switched by the bank, and the main control side main process that is repeatedly executed and the timer interrupt process that is periodically executed. It has 1 (during a normal game) and timer interrupt process 2 (setting change mode) that is periodically executed, and is common to at least two processes of the main control side main process, timer interrupt process 1, and timer interrupt process 2. Use the registers of the bank of.

The timer interrupt process executed in the normal game and the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode may have the same execution cycle, but may be executed in different cycles. Since the switching sampling in the timer interrupt processing executed in the setting change mode is only the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, it is executed in the setting change mode where the execution cycle of the timer interrupt processing in the normal gaming state is 4 ms. The execution cycle of the timer interrupt process may be early (for example, 2 ms) or late (for example, 8 ms). If the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode is delayed, the cycle of the dynamic lighting control of the LED displaying the set value is delayed, and the display mode of the set value is different from the base display during the normal game. become. When there are eight LED commons, if the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process is 8 ms, the display cycle is 64 ms (display ON is 8 ms, OFF is 56 ms), and the timer interrupt process execution cycle is 4 ms. The cycle is 32 ms (display ON is 4 ms, OFF is 20 ms), the OFF time becomes longer in proportion to the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process, and the lighting flicker of the LED becomes larger, so that the display mode is different from the base display during the normal game. Can be recognized differently.

Further, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is activated when the power is started, the timer interrupt processing 1 for setting change / confirmation is permitted, and the timer interrupt processing 2 for normal games is prohibited. On the other hand, when the power is started in the normal game state (does not shift to the setting change / confirmation mode), the timer interrupt process 1 for setting change / confirmation is prohibited, and the timer interrupt process 2 for normal game is permitted. Then, at the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the timer interrupt processing 1 for setting change / confirmation is prohibited, and the timer interrupt processing 2 for normal games is permitted.

FIG. 183 is a flowchart of the performance display process executed by the main control MPU 1311. In the performance display process, the performance (for example, the base value) of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the base display 1317.

The performance display process is executed in the timer interrupt in the normal gaming state described above. Specifically, it is executed in the normal interrupt processing in step S233 of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 181 and the base display output processing in step S2087 of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 191.

First, the main control MPU 1311 saves the stack address in the game control area, sets the stack address outside the game control area (step S260), and saves the register used in the game control area in the register save buffer (step). S261). In step S261, the save destination of the register used in the game control area may be a work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312. The save destination of the register used in the game control area may be a stack area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312.

After that, it is determined whether the first power-on flag is normal (step S262). The initial power-on flag is a flag indicating whether the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized (that is, whether it is the first power-on), and 5AH is set when the area outside the game control area is initialized. Will be done. That is, if the value of the first power-on flag is 5 AH, it can be determined that the main control RAM 1312 at the time of the first power-on is initialized (that is, the area outside the game control area is also initialized).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the parameter used for displaying the base value is within a predetermined range (step S263). For example, if the value of the LED common counter for switching the display digit of the base display 1317 is other than 0 to 3, it is determined that the parameter value is abnormal, and the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area is set in step S264. initialize.

If the power failure flag is not normal or the value of each parameter is not within the predetermined range, the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area is initialized, the power failure flag is set to 5AH (step S264), and the process proceeds to step S265. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is normal and the value of each parameter is within a predetermined range, various winning opening sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, 2557 and the discharge ball sensor 3060 are detected, and the base value is calculated ( Step S265).

Then, it is determined whether it is the switching time of the section of the base value calculation (step S266), and if the switching time has arrived, the display mode is switched (step S267). Then, display data is created according to the display mode and stored in the buffer (step S268). Then, the display is controlled for each section. For example, the display control for each section includes a display of a test section with less than 500 out balls and a blinking display when the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls is less than a predetermined number (for example, 6000) (for example). Step S269).

After that, the register value is returned from the register save buffer (step S270), the stack address in the game control area is returned to the original value (step S271), and the performance display process is terminated.

Next, the notification mode of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 184. As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is notified when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, in the setting change mode, or in the setting confirmation mode, and the pachinko machine is notified to the employees in the hall. Inform the state in an easy-to-understand manner.

The notification mode described below (for example, the display mode of the function display unit 1400) is output in the mode selected in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. These notifications are controlled by selecting a notification pattern in combination with the display setting on the base display 1317 in steps S246 and S247 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181). Specifically, it is executed in the setting display process of step S2069 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 190. A dedicated module for displaying the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 may be provided to execute the process.

First, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, it is controlled by a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181). The abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is notified with priority over the notification of other abnormalities and states.
Function display unit 1400 All lights off or all LEDs blink at high speed at the same cycle Effect display device 1600 Display sound of "RAM error" (sound effect) Output RAM error notification sound (RAM error notification sound is in setting change mode It may be the same as the notification sound other than the setting confirmation mode)
Sound (Voice) Outputs the sound of "RAM error" Volume Maximum volume that does not depend on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player Frame decoration LED A predetermined frame lamp (top lamp) provided on the door frame 3 Including, excluding out-of-ball and stock notification LED) blinks in red Display panel decoration LED all off External output (security signal) Output test signal (game machine error signal) Release condition to re-notify output By changing the setting on the main control board 1310 The RAM was cleared, or the power was turned on again to the peripheral control board 1510.

Next, the setting change notification when the main control RAM 1312 is started in the setting change mode will be described. The setting change notification is controlled by a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181).
Function display unit 1400 All lights or all LEDs blink at medium speed at the same cycle Effect display device 1600 Display the characters "Settings are being changed" Sound (effect sound) Output the notification sound of the setting change mode Output sound (voice) "Settings" Output volume of "changing" sound a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times) Maximum volume that does not depend on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player Frame decoration LED A predetermined frame lamp (top) provided on the door frame 3 Flashes white (excluding lamps, bulb burnout and stock notification LED) Display panel decoration LED all off External output (security signal) Output test signal (game machine error signal) Release condition for re-notifying output Peripheral control board 1510 is the power supply Received "A001H" as an operation command at the time of input

Next, the setting confirmation notification when the main control RAM 1312 is started in the setting confirmation mode will be described. The setting confirmation notification is controlled by a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181).
Function display unit 1400 All lights or all LEDs blink at low speed in the same cycle Display device 1600 Displaying the characters "Setting confirmation" sound (sound effect) Output setting confirmation mode notification sound (setting confirmation mode notification sound) May be the same as the notification sound in the setting change mode)
Sound (voice) Output the sound of "setting is being confirmed" a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times) Volume Maximum volume that does not depend on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player. Predetermined frame lamp (including top lamp, excluding ball burnout and stock notification LED) blinks in white Display panel decoration LED all off External output (security signal) Output test signal (game machine error signal) Output re-notification release condition A predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the peripheral control board 1510 receives "A001H" as an operation command when the power is turned on.

As for the notification of the above-mentioned three states, it is preferable that the abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is notified with the highest priority, and the notification is given with priority in the order of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. More specifically, the priorities may be set in the order shown in FIG. 185. Note that priority 1 has a high priority for notification, and priority 9 has a low priority for notification. That is, when a plurality of notifications should be performed, the notifications having a high priority (small numbers) are performed. In addition, when a plurality of notification conditions having the same priority are satisfied and the notifications conflict, even if the plurality of competing notifications are switched and notified, the previously established notification is performed and the notification is canceled. If the competing notifications satisfy the conditions, the competing notifications may be performed. Specifically, at priority 3, the RAM clear notification and the setting confirmation notification do not occur at the same time, so that the notifications do not conflict with each other. At priority 4, the prize ball excess abnormality notification and the ordinary electric accessory winning abnormality notification may occur at the same time, and the two notifications may compete with each other.
Priority 1: RAM error notification when a RAM error is detected Priority 2: Setting change notification priority in the setting change mode 3: RAM clear RAM clear when the main control RAM is initialized by operating the switch 954 Notification (excluding RAM clear by changing settings)
Priority 3: Setting confirmation notification priority in the setting confirmation mode 4: Excessive prize balls when more than a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out Abnormal notification priority 4: Ordinary electric accessory When the electric accessory is not operating, a predetermined number or more are continuously When a prize is detected, or when a prize equal to or higher than a predetermined value is detected during the operation of one ordinary electric burner, the normal electric accessory prize abnormality notification priority 5: Difference between the number of prizes and the number of discharges of the large prize opening Discharge abnormality notification priority when the number exceeds a predetermined number 6: Vibration sensor abnormality notification priority when vibration is detected 7: Door opening abnormality notification priority when opening of the door frame 3 or main body frame 4 is detected 8: Magnetic sensor abnormality notification priority when the magnetic sensor detects magnetism 9: When a predetermined number or more of consecutive prizes are detected when the big prize opening is not operating, or when a single big hit is made, a predetermined or higher prize is awarded. Large prize opening prize abnormality notification when detected

Next, the details of the power-on processing (FIGS. 179 and 180) described above will be described. 186 and 187 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 at power-on.

First, the main control MPU 1311 starts from the process of address 8000, which is the start address of the program code, when the reset signal is released by turning on the power. The protection invalidity and the prohibited area invalidity of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protect register (step S2000). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a used area of the main control RAM 1312 so that when an access is made to a prohibited area other than the designated area, it is determined to be abnormal and reset. In order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to invalid so that the entire area of the main control RAM 1312 can be accessed. Even if the unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and access is detected in the specified prohibited area, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. Good.

Next, the simple clear mode timer for a predetermined time is set in the watchdog timer (step S2001), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2002). After that, the power failure clear signal is set to ON (step S2003), and the power failure clear signal is set to OFF (step S2004). By setting the power failure clear signal to ON and then to OFF, the power failure signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal value.

Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2005). Since the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are operated after the peripheral control board 1510 is surely started, the hole is displayed while waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to start. If the employee of the hall erroneously interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined in a state not intended by the employee of the hall. Therefore, the input state (level) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is stored in a register or the like which is a temporary storage means at an early stage after the start of the power-on processing, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 ends. By determining the status of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in a register or the like, which is a temporary storage means, even if the hall employee accidentally interrupts the key operation at an early stage after the power is turned on. , The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 at the time of power-on operation is reliably detected.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is in power failure (step S2006). If the power failure warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, so that the machine waits until the power supply voltage stabilizes in step S2006.

After that, it is determined whether the set value is within a predetermined range (step S2007). For example, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the setting can be selected in stages from 1 to 6, the value of the work in which the setting value is stored corresponds to 0 to 5 (when setting 1 = 0, when setting 6 = 5) In the case, if a value of 5 or less is stored, it is determined that the value is within the predetermined range.

If the set value is not within the predetermined range, the set value is initialized to 0 (step S2023), a value indicating a RAM error (08H) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2024), and the reset signal of the pachinko machine 1 is set. Wait for initialization by. Since the set value is not in the range where the checksum is calculated and is not erased by the RAM clear operation, even if the set value is an abnormal value, it is not corrected. Therefore, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the set value, and if there is an abnormality, the normal game is not started. In the hall where the pachinko machine is installed, you want to initialize the game state while maintaining the set value (for example, you want to clear the latent probability change (high probability non-time reduction) and return to the normal state with low probability time reduction). In some cases, a RAM clear operation may be performed. When the set value is initialized by the RAM clear operation during business, the power is cut off and the setting change mode is started to reset the set value and continue business, and the original set value is set again. There is a need. In order not to generate such trouble, the set value is maintained without being cleared by the RAM clear operation.

On the other hand, if the set value is within the predetermined range, the sub-start waiting timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer is timed up, and the peripheral control board 1510 is used. (Step S2008). The start-up wait of the peripheral control board 1510 may be any time during the period from when the power is turned on to when the command is first transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, even if the set value is not determined.

After that, it is determined again whether the power failure warning signal is in power failure (step S2009). If the power failure warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and the pachinko machine 1 stands by in step S2009.

Further, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, and the determination result is stored in the register (step S2010). Specifically, the checksum calculated and stored from the data used as the game control area (excluding the data saved in the stack) out of the areas backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 when the power was cut off last time, The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if the two are different, it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality. If the value of the power failure flag indicating that the backup was normally performed (the power off processing was executed normally) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data in the main control RAM 1312 is normally backed up when a power failure occurs. It is determined that there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 because it is not (the power off processing is not executed normally).

Then, if there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the information in the setting state management area is saved (step S2011), and a value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality is temporarily recorded in the setting state management area (step S2012). ..

Then, among the register values in which the value of the PF port is recorded, the bits of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are masked (step S2013). After that, it is determined by using the value stored in the register whether the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON when the power is turned on (step S2014). If the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON, it is determined that the setting change operation has been performed, and the process proceeds to step S2030 of FIG. 187.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is not operated and the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, it is determined whether the setting change mode was set when a power failure occurred (step S2015). For example, when the value of the setting state management area saved in S2011 is the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode.

Then, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S2030 of FIG. 187.

On the other hand, when it is determined that no power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2016). Specifically, the determination can be made using the determination result stored in the register in step S2010 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2031 of FIG. 187.

On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing (step S2017). For example, when the value of the saved setting state management area is a value indicating a RAM abnormality (08H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing.

Then, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process proceeds to step S2036 of FIG. 187. On the other hand, when it is determined that a power failure has not occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, a value (00H) indicating a normal gaming state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2018). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2018, the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality tentatively recorded in the setting state management area in step S2012 is returned to the normal state. Further, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2018, the value of the setting state management area when jumping from step S2016 and S2019 to step S2031 is different, so that the program can be shared by both. The size can be reduced.

After that, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2019). Then, if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to be ON, it is determined that the RAM clear switch is being operated, and the process proceeds to step S2031 of FIG. 187.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 and the value recorded in the setting state management area. For example, if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 08H is recorded in the setting state management area, and 08H is maintained until the power is cut off, so that normal game processing cannot be executed. At this time, the RAM abnormality can be cleared by turning off the power once and then turning on the power by performing the setting change operation. That is, when it is determined in step S2014 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are being operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area changes from the value indicating the RAM error (08H) to the value indicating the setting change. It is updated to (02H) (step S2030), and the RAM abnormal state ends. In this way, recovery from a RAM error always goes through a setting change. In other words, since it is determined whether the setting change operation has been performed before determining whether the state at the time of power failure is a RAM abnormality, the RAM abnormality can be resolved only when the set value is changed.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, the game state information at the time of the power failure is stored in the power-on state buffer in order to restore the state before the power failure occurs (step S2020).

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting key 971 has been turned ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2021). Then, if the setting key 971 is operated to ON, it is determined that the setting confirmation operation has been performed, a value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2022), and FIG. The process proceeds to step S2036. That is, regardless of whether the state at the time of power failure is confirming the setting, if only the setting key 971 is operated (if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated), the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode.

Since steps S2018 to S2022 are processes executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated, the determination of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (step S2019) and the setting key 971 Either of the determination of the operation of (step S2021) and the determination of the operation of (step S2021) may be performed first. That is, as shown in the figure, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2019) and then the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2021), or the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2021). The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2019).

Next, FIG. 187, which is a continuation of the power-on processing (FIG. 186), will be described.

If YES is determined in step S2014 or step S2015, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2030). Then, the area other than the set value and the set state management area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2031). After that, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2032). Specifically, since the determination result in step S2010 described above is stored in the register, in step S2032, the determination result can be determined based on the determination result stored in the register.

When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2033), and the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is initialized by the RAM abnormality initialization process. Initialize the RAM (work area and stack area) used outside (step S2034). The details of the RAM abnormality initialization process will be described later with reference to FIG. 189. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2035).

After that, the functions of the devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built in the main control MPU 1311 are initially set (step S2036), and the hardware random numbers (for example, winning random numbers) built in the main control MPU 1311 are activated (step S2037). Then, the power-on setting process is executed (step S2038). Details of the power-on setting process will be described later in FIG. 194.

Finally, the timer interrupt is set to enable (step S2039), and the process proceeds to the main control side main process (FIG. 188).

FIG. 188 is a flowchart of the main control side main process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control side main process is executed after step S2039 of the power-on process (FIG. 187).

First, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure warning signal, and determines whether a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure warning signal is ON (step S2040). If the power failure warning signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, and the random number update process 2 is executed (step 2041). The details of the random number update process 2 will be described later in FIG. 195. In the random number update process 2, random numbers other than random numbers for determining winning in a special lottery or a normal lottery are mainly updated.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is detected, the power cutoff process (steps S2042 to S2046) is executed. In the power outage process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the occurrence of a power failure is executed. Specifically, first, interrupts are disabled (step S2042). As a result, the timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing of data to the main control built-in RAM 1312 is prohibited, and rewriting of game information is protected. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S2043). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid / power failure clear / ACK output port. It is not necessary to clear all the output ports. For example, the output ports for controlling a solenoid or a motor that consumes a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption until the main board side power off processing is completed is reduced, and the main board side power off processing can be surely ended.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held, and stores it in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312. (Step S2044). This checksum is used to determine if the data backed up in the work area is normal. The area for which the checksum is calculated is the setting status management (setting value) that may be changed in the work area in the game control area between the time the power is turned on and the time the main processing on the main control side is executed. And the value of the setting status management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area should be excluded.

Further, as a power failure flag, a value (5AH) indicating that the power cutoff process was normally executed is stored in the backup flag area (step S2045). As a result, the storage of the game backup information is completed. Finally, RAM protect is enabled (write prohibited), the prohibited area is written to the RAM protect register, writing to the predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is prohibited (step S2046), and the process waits until the power is restored from the power failure. (infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a used area of the main control RAM 1312 so that when an access is made to a prohibited area other than the designated area, it is determined to be abnormal and reset. In order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to invalid so that the entire area of the main control RAM 1312 can be accessed. Even if the unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and access is detected in the specified prohibited area, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. Good.

FIG. 189 is a flowchart of the RAM abnormality initialization process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The RAM error initialization process is executed in step S2034 of the power-on process (FIG. 187).

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP save buffer outside the game control area (step S2050), sets the stack pointer value outside the game control area to the stack pointer (step S2051), and sets all the registers. The value is stored in the register save buffer outside the game control area (step S2052).

After that, it is determined whether the initialization at the time of the first power-on is based on the value of the first power-on flag at the time of the power-on (step S2053). The first power-on means when the pachinko machine is first turned on, and when the backup power is interrupted and the data backed up in the main control RAM 1312 is erased. For example, if the connection line between the main control board 1310 and the backup power supply (for example, installed in the main body frame 4) is disconnected, the supply of the backup power supply to the main control RAM 1312 is cut off, and the data in the main control RAM 1312 cannot be retained.

If the initialization is performed at the time of the first power-on, the process proceeds to step S2056. On the other hand, if it is not the initialization at the time of the first power-on, it is determined whether the discharge ball to be calculated based is out of the predetermined range (step S2054). If the discharge ball to be calculated based is out of the predetermined range, the process proceeds to step S2056. On the other hand, if the discharge ball to be calculated based is within a predetermined range, it is determined whether the display parameter of the performance display monitor is within the normal range (step S2055). Then, if the display parameter of the performance display monitor is within the normal range, the initialization process at the time of RAM abnormality is terminated and the process returns to the caller's process.

On the other hand, if the display mode of the performance display monitor is out of the normal range, 00H is written to and initialized in all work areas outside the used area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2056), and 00H is written in all stack areas outside the used area. Is written and initialized (step S2057), a predetermined value (for example, 5AH) is set in the initialization flag at the time of power-on (step S2058), and the process returns to the caller's process.

190 and 191 are flowcharts of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2060). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one is used as a register group of bank 0, and the other can be used as a register group of bank 1, and bank switching is performed. It is configured so that the registers of both banks cannot be used without. Register bank 0 is used in the main control side main processing, and register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, although the instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, it is not necessary to execute the instruction to switch the bank to 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the bank status in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of interrupt and RET. Return from the stack area by executing the instruction. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also restored. If a configuration in which the bank status is not stored in the flag register is adopted, a bank switching instruction is executed at the end of timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Since the flag register also stores a flag that controls whether or not interrupts can be interrupted, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting interrupt enable. The flag that controls whether or not interrupts can be interrupted is set to the interrupt disabled state after stacking the flag register at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the interrupt is not enabled unless the interrupt is permitted (EI instruction or the like) or the RETI instruction is executed during the timer interrupt process.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2061).

Next, the switch input process 1 is executed (step S2062). In the switch input process 1, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and the input information is stored in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

The switch input process 1 in step S2062 is a process related to a winning signal, and the switch input process 2 in step S2080, which will be described later, is a process related to the input of a fraud detection sensor (magnet sensor, radio wave sensor, vibration sensor, etc.). Therefore, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, since it is determined as NO in step S2604, winning detection is performed, but fraud is not detected. Even if a prize is detected, the prize ball is not paid out or the fluctuation display is not executed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by the employees of the hall, and it is considered desirable that the fraud is not detected in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

Even in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected by the switch input process 1 to monitor a specific type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect fraud in which a person who intends to commit fraud (Mr. Goto) forcibly activates the setting change mode by irradiating radio waves or the like.

Subsequently, the random number update process 1 is executed (step S2063). In the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the initial values of the large hit symbol determination random number and the small hit symbol determination random number updated in the random number update process 2 of the main control side main process shown in FIG. 188 are changed. Update the random number for determining the initial value.

After that, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2064). If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2080 in FIG. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2065). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the LED extinguishing time is secured, and the display before and after the LED display switching appears to be mixed. And prevent the LED from flickering.

After that, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2066), and a test signal is output (step S2067). In step S2067, only the game state error signal may be turned ON, and the others may be turned OFF.

Then, the setting process is executed (step S2068). Details of the setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 192.

After that, the setting display process is executed (step S2069). Details of the setting display process will be described later with reference to FIG. 193.

Further, a peripheral board command transmission process for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2070). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a multi-byte FIFO format transmission buffer, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area to the peripheral control board 1510.

After that, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2071). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. After that, the register bank is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2072), and the process returns to the pre-interrupt process.

Subsequently, FIG. 191 will be described. When it is determined in step S2064 of FIG. 190 that a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the main control MPU 1311 detects the state of the sensor (switch) for fraud detection. Is executed (step S2080). Specifically, when a detection signal or the like from a magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet is read and a predetermined level (ON level or OFF level) continues for a predetermined time, the input information storage area is stored. Remember. Based on the detection state of each fraud detection sensor generated in the switch input process 2, it is determined whether or not fraud is detected in the fraud detection process in step S2084. In the fraud detection process (step S2084), in addition to fraud detection by the fraud detection sensor, winning abnormalities such as a large winning opening and excessive winning of ordinary electric accessories are also determined.

After that, the timer update process is executed (step S2081). In the timer update process, for example, the time during which the special symbol display 1185 is lit according to the variation display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process, and the normal symbol variation determined by the ordinary symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the display pattern, a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has normally received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311) is input. When determining whether or not the signal is input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

Subsequently, the prize ball control process is executed (step S2082). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out based on the read input information is calculated, and the number is written to the main control RAM 1312. Further, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out the game balls can be created, and a self-check for checking the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 can be performed. Create commands. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data.

Subsequently, the frame command reception process is executed (step S2083). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into status displays by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information for transmitting that fact to the payout control board 951 is stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Further, the main control MPU 1311 formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, a frame state display command, an error release notification command, etc.), and the transmission information storage area described above. Remember in. Specifically, the frame command reception process conforms to the command system for transmitting the command received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 in order to perform the notification corresponding to the command received from the payout control board 951. It is modified so as to be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO) like other generated commands. Further, when the command from the payout control board 951 is normally received, a signal for controlling the output of the main ACK signal is generated. The main ACK signal is output directly from the output port to the payout control board 951 instead of the serial communication circuit.

Subsequently, the fraud detection process is executed (step S2084). In the fraud detection process, abnormal conditions related to fraud (magnetism, vibration, winning abnormalities, etc.) are confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and it is detected by the count switch that the game ball has entered the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 when the game is not in the big hit game state, the main control program Creates a winning abnormality display command that is classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Subsequently, a command output process at the time of passing the switch, which creates a command corresponding to the passing detection of various switches related to the winning switch and the start port switch and sets the command in the transmission information storage area, is executed (step S2085).

Then, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2086), and the base display output process is executed (step S2087). Unlike other processes, the base display output process is a process executed using a second area outside the game control area, and is a common process that is not affected by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in order to ensure the independence of the base display output processing, predetermined data such as the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area before and after the execution of the base display output processing, and the base display is stored. It is prevented from being updated in the output process. After that, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2088).

Subsequently, the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process are executed (step S2089). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, and the probability fluctuates based on the jackpot symbol random value. Determine whether to migrate. Then, when the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value, it is determined whether or not to open / close the big winning openings 2005 and 2006. When the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened and closed by this decision, the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened (or expanded) so that the game balls can be accepted by the large winning openings 2005 and 2006. It shifts to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Further, when the probabilistic transition condition is satisfied, the game shifts to the probability fluctuation state, and when the probability variation transition condition is not satisfied, the game state shifts to a game state other than the probability fluctuation state. Here, the "probability fluctuation state" refers to a state in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively higher than in the normal gaming state (low probability state) (high probability state).

Subsequently, the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process are executed (step S2090). In the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal, a random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted, and it is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM ("" "Ordinary lottery"). Then, it is determined whether or not to open / close the second start door member 2549 according to the lottery result by the ordinary lottery. When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the second start port door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), so that the game ball can be accepted by the start port 2004, which is advantageous for the player. Move to the state.

Subsequently, the output data setting process is executed (step S2091). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951 or a big hit game. When in this state, a drive signal may be output to the attacker solenoids (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that open and close the opening / closing member 2107 of the winning openings 2005 and 2006. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the start port (second start port door member 2549), as output information to the hall computer, information output signal during probability fluctuation and special symbol display information Various information (game information) signals and security signals related to the game, such as output signals, normal symbol display information output signals, time saving and medium information output information, and start opening winning information output signals, are output to the external terminal board 784.

Further, in the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out balls counted in the switch input process 2 (step S2080) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal having a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal plate 784 for each predetermined number of out balls (10 or the like).

Further, in the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a game state, a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol.

Then, the process proceeds to step S2070 of FIG. 190.

FIG. 192 is a flowchart of the setting process. The setting process is executed in step S2068 of the timer interrupt process when the set state management area does not have a value (00H) indicating a normal game state, and mainly executes a process of changing the set value.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2100). If a value indicating a RAM error is recorded in the setting status management area, the process returns to the caller's process without executing the setting process.

If it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the setting process is repeatedly executed, so that the process related to the special symbol or the normal symbol is not executed, and the game cannot be played at all. This RAM error is caused by the setting change state by operating the setting change mode with the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on again after the power is cut off and the power failure process is executed. Then the RAM error is resolved. Then, the setting change mode is terminated by the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the original state, and the normal game can be started.

Further, when the power is turned on again, if an operation other than activating the setting change mode with the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 is performed, the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality in the setting state management area is maintained. The RAM abnormal state continues, and the normal game cannot be started. That is, in order to eliminate the RAM abnormality and bring it into the normal game state, it is necessary to always go through the setting change mode.

On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2101). Specifically, it detects the edge of the setting key 971 from ON to OFF, or whether a predetermined period has elapsed since the setting key changed from ON to OFF.

When it is determined that the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position, the output time is set in the security signal output timer (step S2102), the setting status management area is initialized (step S2103), and the power-on setting process is executed. (Step S2104), the process returns to the caller's process.

When the operation to end the setting change mode (setting key 971 is turned off) is performed, the delay time until the security signal is turned off after the setting change mode is finished is set by setting the output time value in the security signal output timer. Provide. Therefore, even if the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends in a short time (for example, within one timer interrupt processing), only the shortest output signal of the security signal is set as the output time value in the security signal output timer. It can be secured and the hall computer can reliably detect the security signal.

If a fraud is detected during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, the security signal may be output for a period or time corresponding to the newly detected fraud while maintaining the security signal.

Furthermore, if a power failure occurs during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, if the hot start is performed in the normal gaming state when the power is restored, the security signal for the remaining time is output and the RAM is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch. Or, when the RAM is cleared due to a RAM error, the security signal for the remaining time is not output. This is because the security signal output timer value is reset by the initialization of the main control RAM 1312, and the output of the security signal is stopped.

When the power is turned on after a power failure occurs during the security signal output, one of the five patterns of hot start, RAM clear, setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, and RAM abnormal state continuation is performed.

When the mode shifts to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the activated mode ends and a security signal is output until the delay time elapses. If the RAM error state continues, the setting change operation has not been performed even when the power is restored, so a security signal due to the continuous RAM error is output. In the case of hot start, the security signal is output for the remaining time.

Even when the security signal is continuously output, the output of the security signal is stopped by the power-on reset signal when the power is turned on, and the timer interrupt processing is performed after a predetermined time (for example, during the startup waiting time of the peripheral control board 1510) has elapsed. After the transition, the security signal output resumes. That is, in the following cases, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs during the output of the security signal, a period for stopping the output of the security signal is provided for a predetermined period after the power is restored.
-When the power is restored by hot start after a power failure occurs during security signal output due to fraud detection, etc.-After a power failure occurs during security signal output due to a RAM error, the power is restored and the RAM error continues.・ When the power is restored after a power failure occurs during the security signal output in the setting change mode and the setting change mode continues ・ The power is restored after the power failure occurs during the security signal output in the setting confirmation mode. When the setting confirmation mode continues

In this way, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs during the security signal output, the security signal output is stopped for a predetermined period after the power is restored, so that the security signal can be used on the hall computer side. It is possible to determine whether there was an abnormality or whether the state associated with the output of the security signal was released.

Further, in the setting confirmation mode in which only the setting key 971 is operated, the security signal is output until the setting confirmation mode ends, and the delay time after the setting confirmation mode ends, regardless of the remaining time during which the security signal is output. After that, the output of the security signal is stopped. Further, even in the setting change mode in which the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated, the same processing as in the setting confirmation mode may be performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key 971 has not returned to the OFF position, it is determined whether a value (02H) indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2105), and the setting change switch 972 is operated. It is determined whether or not it has been done (step S2106). The setting change switch 972 may also be used as the RAM clear switch 954. As a result, when the value indicating the setting change is recorded in the setting state management area and it is determined that the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting value is updated by +1. If the set value exceeds the upper limit of 6, it is set to 1 (step S2107). After that, it returns to the processing of the caller.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is not recorded in the setting status management area (that is, the setting confirmation mode) or the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting value is updated. Instead, return to the caller's processing.

When determining the operation of the setting change switch 972 (immediately before or immediately after), it may be determined whether the setting key 971 is operated to ON. In this way, if the operation of the setting key 971 is determined when the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting change mode is set when a power failure occurs, and even if the setting key 971 is not operated to ON when the power failure is restored, the setting change switch 972 It is possible to prevent the setting from being changed by the operation.

FIG. 193 is a flowchart of the setting display process. The setting display process is executed in step S2069 of the timer interrupt process.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2110). If no value indicating a RAM error is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminal is set so that the current setting value is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2111). On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminal is set so that the error is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2112).

After that, the LED common signal corresponding to the LED common counter is output (step S2113), and the driver is driven to output the display data (segment signal) corresponding to the set value or the error display to the base display 1317 (step S2114). , Return to caller processing.

FIG. 194 is a flowchart of the power-on setting process. The power-on setting process is made into a subroutine, and is called and executed in step S2038 of the power-on process (FIG. 187) and S2104 of the setting process.

First, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command, and sets the created command in the transmission information storage area (step S2120). As shown in FIG. 202A, the power-on operation command is a command for notifying the recorded contents of the setting state management area.

Next, the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 in the input level data 2 area and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 are set to 1 which is an initial value. The other bits may be set to 0 (step S2121). Setting the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 of the input level data 2 area and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 to 1 is because the bit of the switch is detected by 1 at the next timer interrupt and the ON edge is incorrect. This is to prevent it from being made.

After that, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating a game startable state is recorded in the set state management area (step S2122). If the value indicating the game startable state is not recorded in the setting status management area, it means that it is in the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, or the RAM error, so the setting process at power-on is terminated and the caller's caller Return to processing.

On the other hand, if a value (00H) indicating a game startable state is recorded in the set state management area, the normal game can be started, so the work in the game control area depends on whether or not the main control RAM 1312 is initialized. Initialize the area (step S2123).

After that, a power-on state command is created, and the created command is stored in the transmission information storage area (step S2124). As shown in FIG. 202B, the power-on state command is a command for notifying whether or not a normal game can be started based on the recorded contents of the setting state management area.

Then, a return destination command at power-on is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2125). As shown in FIG. 202C, the power-on return destination command is a command for notifying the game state related to the special symbol.

Further, a set value command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2126). As shown in FIG. 202 (D), the setting value command is a command for notifying the setting value.

In addition to the power-on state command, power-on return destination command, and set value command, a special symbol hold number command indicating the number of hold of the special symbol variation display game is transmitted to the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The hold number display may be restored to the state before the power failure occurred. The special symbol hold count command is sent in the order of sending the power-on state command, power-on return destination command, and set value command, before sending these commands, or during the transmission of these commands. You may.

After that, it returns to the processing of the caller.

The power-on setting process is executed when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is set when the power is restored, or when the setting change mode ends or the setting confirmation mode ends. , Power-on status command, power-on return destination command, setting value command) are sent when the power is restored from a power failure, which is neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode, when the setting change mode ends, or when the setting confirmation mode ends.

FIG. 195 is a flowchart of the random number update process 2. The random number update process 2 is executed in step S2041 of the main process (FIG. 188), and updates random numbers other than random numbers mainly for determining winning in a special lottery or a normal lottery.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets interrupt prohibition (step S2131), updates the initial value random number (step S2132), and sets interrupt enable (step S2133). Since the initial value random number is also updated in the random number update process 1 of step S2063 of the timer interrupt process, the interrupt is prohibited before the initial value random number update process so that the initial value random number update process is not interrupted by the timer interrupt process. Initial value Interruption is permitted after random number update processing. The initial value random numbers are a random number for determining a big hit for drawing a big hit of a special symbol, a random number for drawing a hit of a normal symbol, a symbol type at the time of a big hit of a special symbol (low probability / high probability / time saving / non-time saving, etc.) ) Is a random number for changing the initial value for each cycle, such as a random number.

After that, a random number other than the winning random number (excluding the initial value random number) is updated (step S2134), and the process returns to the caller's process.

FIG. 196 is a flowchart of another example of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The same processing steps as those of the timer interrupt processing described above in FIGS. 181 and 182 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In another example 1 described below, it is preferable that the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in the setting confirmation mode as well as in the setting change mode. In this alternative example 1, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is restored, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the RAM clear switch 954 is set to the setting change mode or the setting. It does not switch between confirmation modes, but only has a function as an operation to change the set value.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1, switches the register bank (step S2060), executes the switch input process 3 (step S2141), and details of the switch input process 3 will be described later in FIG. 197. To do. In step S2141, the switch input process 1 of S2062 may be applied instead of the switch input process 3 described with reference to FIG. 197.

Then, the random number update process 1 is executed (step S2063), and the setting change / confirmation process is executed (step S2142). Details of the setting change / confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 200.

Subsequently, the switch input process 2 is executed (step S2080), the timer update process is executed (step S2081), and the prize ball control process is executed (step S2082). Subsequently, the frame command reception process is executed (step S2083), the fraud detection process is executed (step S2084), and the command output process when the switch is passed is executed (step S2085).

Then, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2086), the base display output process is executed (step S2087), and the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step). S2088). Subsequently, the special symbol and special electric accessory control process is executed (step S2089), the ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process is executed (step S2090), and the output data setting process is executed (step S2091). Further, the peripheral board command transmission process is executed (step S2070), the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2071), the register bank is switched by the return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2072), and the process returns to the pre-interrupt process. To do.

FIG. 197 is a flowchart of the switch input process 3. The switch input process 3 is executed in step S2141 of the timer interrupt process, reads various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311, creates an ON edge, and inputs the main control RAM 1312 as input information. Store in the information storage area.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the start address of the switch winning information data (step S2160), and acquires the number of times the process is repeated from the switch winning information data (step S2161). The number of times the process is repeated is the number n of blocks in the switch winning information data table. Then, the input port address designated by the switch winning information data is acquired (step S2162), and the input level data area address designated by the switch winning information data is acquired (step S2163). Further, the input information is read from the acquired input port address (step S2164), and the read input information is corrected by using the logical correction value specified in the switch winning information data (step S2165).

After that, the value recorded in the setting state management area is referred to, and it is determined whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set (step S2166). Then, if it is not the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the correction value is masked with the mask value during the normal game specified in the switch winning information data (step S2167). With this mask, it is possible to acquire a bit of the input port used during a normal game.

On the other hand, in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the correction value is masked by the mask value during setting change / confirmation specified in the switch winning information data (step S2168). With this mask, only the bits used in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode among the input ports can be acquired.

After that, the input level data is generated from the bits acquired by the mask processing, and the input level data area designated by the switch winning information data is updated (step S2169).

Then, the edge data of the change from OFF to ON is generated from the input level data, and the input edge data area designated by the switch winning information data is updated (step S2170).

After that, it is set in the next block as switch winning information data (step S2171), and it is determined whether or not the processing of all switch input ports is completed (step S2172). When it is determined that the processing of all switch input ports has not been completed, the process returns to step S2162, and the next input port is processed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the processing of all switch input ports is completed, the switch input processing 3 is terminated and the process returns to the processing before the interrupt.

FIG. 198 (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a switch winning information data table.

The switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 198 (A) is divided into n blocks (n is the number of times the process is repeated), and each block has an input port address, a logical correction value, and a mask during a normal game. Includes values, changing / checking mask values, and the address of the input level data area.

FIG. 198 (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a switch input level / edge data area.

The switch input level / edge data area includes n pairs of the address of the input level data area and the address of the input edge data area.

Since the address of the input edge data area is set to the address next to the input level data area as shown in the figure, it is not specified in the switch winning information data. If the input level data area and the input edge data area are not arranged consecutively, the address of the input edge data area is set together with the input level data area in the same table. The addresses of the input level data area and the input edge data area are 16-bit (2 bytes) values, but are set as the addresses of the input level data area and the input edge data area set in the switch winning information data table. The value may be a lower 8-bit (1 byte) value. That is, since the upper byte of the address is a fixed value that does not change depending on the value of the input level data area or the input edge data area, the upper byte is the upper byte of the address in the RAM area, and only the lower byte needs to be set. Can be reduced.

FIG. 199 is a diagram showing another configuration example of the switch winning information data table, and FIG. 199 (A) shows a configuration example of the switch winning information data table used in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 199 (B). Shows a configuration example of the switch winning information data table used in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

Each of the switch winning information data tables shown in FIG. 199 is divided into n blocks (n is the number of times processing is repeated), and each block contains an input port address, a logical correction value, a mask value, and the like. And the address of the input level data area. The switch winning information data table used in the normal gaming state and the switch winning information data table used in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode include ports in which the logical correction value and the mask value are different. That is, in the switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 198 (A), the mask value is set to a different value between the setting change mode (and the setting confirmation mode) and the normal gaming state, but the switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 199. In, different switch winning information data tables are used between the setting change mode (and the setting confirmation mode) and the normal game state, and different switch winning information data can be acquired.

In order to correspond to such a configuration, the switch input process 3 (FIG. 197) is changed as follows. For example, in step S2160, it is determined whether the setting change mode (or setting confirmation mode) or the normal gaming state is set, and the start address of the switch winning information data according to the determination result is set. Then, in step S2166, the correction value is masked with the mask value specified in the switch winning information data in step S2167 without determining whether the mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

FIG. 200 is a flowchart of the setting change / confirmation process. The setting change / confirmation process is executed in step S2142 of the timer interrupt process. In the setting change / confirmation process shown in FIG. 200, the same processing steps as those of the timer interrupt processing described above in FIGS. 181 and 182 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the set state management area (step S2064). If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting status management area, the setting change / confirmation process is terminated and the process returns to the process before the interrupt. On the other hand, if a value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2065), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2066), and a test signal is output. (Step S2067). Then, the setting process (FIG. 192) is executed (step S2068), and the setting display process (FIG. 193) is executed (step S2069).

FIG. 201 (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input port 2.

The switch input port 2 is one of a group of ports to which the outputs of various switches and sensors are input, and is composed of 8 bits. In the illustrated example, the bit 7 detects a reception confirmation signal (ACK) from the payout control board 951 at level 1. At bit 6, the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is detected at level 0. At bit 5, the signal level becomes 1 when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. In bit 4, when the setting key 971 is turned ON, the signal level becomes 0. In bit 3, when the door opening sensor detects the opening of the door frame 3, the signal level becomes 1. In bit 2, when the magnetic detection switch (magnetic detection sensor) detects magnetism, the level becomes 0. Bits 1 and 0 are not used.

FIG. 201 (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the setting state management area.

As shown in FIG. 201 (B), the setting state management area is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, the lower 4 bits are used and the upper 4 bits are defined. Not. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal game state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 08H if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H in the RAM clear processing by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. Further, it is updated from 01H to 00H at the end of the setting confirmation mode, and is updated from 02H to 00H at the end of the setting change mode. Further, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, it is updated from 08H to 02H when the setting change mode is entered by the setting change operation at the next power-on, and is updated from 02H to 00H at the end of the setting change mode.

FIG. 202A is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on operation command. The power-on operation command is a command for notifying the recorded contents of the setting status management area. For example, the power-on operation command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is A0H, and the lower byte indicates the recorded content of the setting state management area. The value of the lower byte stores the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting state management area. This is because the value of the setting state management area is 00H during a normal game, so if the value transmitted as a command is 00H, it cannot be distinguished from a hardware error in which the output is 0, so either bit. Is set to 1.

The power-on operation command is created at least once in the power-on process. Specifically, it is created once in the case of hot start, RAM clear, and RAM abnormality, and in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, it is created twice, that is, when the power is turned on and when the setting is changed / confirmed.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command, it notifies the setting confirmation mode, the setting change mode, and the state of the RAM abnormality in the above-described manner (see FIG. 184).

If the peripheral control board 1510 receives a game command during a normal game without receiving A001H in the power-on operation command, the game state may be inconsistent, so the received game command is used. It is determined to be invalid, and the game operation (effect, etc.) for the game command is not started. However, if the predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, the game commands during the normal game are continuously transmitted a predetermined number of times), the peripheral control board 1510 may have missed the power-on operation command (A001H). It is advisable to cancel the invalidation of the received game command and perform the effect corresponding to the game command.

In addition, in the state where the game command is invalidated, among the received game commands, an effect satisfying a predetermined condition is performed (for example, for the operation of the symbol, the lamp, the movable body, the voice, etc., the effect corresponding to the received command is performed. ), And the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp may be used to notify that an inconsistency in the gaming state has occurred. In addition, a small volume may be used to notify that an inconsistency in the gaming state has occurred. This is because the player who cannot understand that the inconsistency of the game state has occurred unless any effect is performed until the predetermined condition is met, the special symbol variation display game does not start even if the starting port is won. This is to prevent troubles that may occur in the hall, thinking that the pachinko machine 1 is out of order. Even if the peripheral control board 1510 invalidates the game command, since the main control board 1310 is executing the normal game processing, the function display such as the special symbol and the normal symbol in the function display unit 1400 is normally displayed. Will be done.

FIG. 202B is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on state command. The power-on state command is a command that notifies whether or not a normal game can be started based on the recorded contents of the setting state management area. For example, the power-on state command is composed of 2 bytes, and if the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte is 01H, it indicates that the normal game can be started. The series code for each pachinko machine model may be notified by using the lower byte of the power-on state command. For example, bits 6-4 can be used to identify eight series. The power-on state command may be another example shown in FIG. 220 (C). By using the power-on state command shown in FIG. 220 (C), the information recorded in the power-on buffer (game state before a power failure) can be notified to the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 202C is a diagram showing a configuration example of a return destination command when the power is turned on. The power-on return destination command is a command for notifying the game state related to the special symbol. For example, the power-on return destination command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is 31H, and the lower byte indicates the game state related to the special symbol. Shown. The return destination command when the power is turned on notifies the state of the special symbol and the operating state of the special electric accessory when a power failure occurs. The return destination command when the power is turned on is transmitted once when the power is turned on.

FIG. 202 (D) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a setting value command. The setting value command is a command for notifying a setting value. For example, the setting value command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte indicates A1H, and the lower byte indicates the setting value. The setting value command is sent at the time of recovery from a power failure that is neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode, at the end of the setting change mode, or at the end of the setting confirmation mode. In addition, it is transmitted at the start of a special symbol change or at the time of a change in the game state (at the start and end of a big hit, a probability change, a time reduction, etc.). As a result, even if the peripheral control board 1510 misses the set value command transmitted when the power is turned on, it is changed to the correct set value in the subsequent game (for example, the start of fluctuation of the special symbol), so that the setting is incorrect. The production is not performed based on the value. The effect based on the set value is an effect that suggests the set value by using an effect device such as a display, a lamp, a sound, or a movable body, and an effect mode that is unlikely to occur (or does not occur) in normal times is performed with a predetermined probability. The set value is suggested by generating it. This set value suggestion effect may include an effect of another aspect of the effect illustrated below, and may include a ghost. As a set value suggestion effect, the effect display device 1600, which is an example of a display, displays an effect such as a notice corresponding to the set value, and changes the variation mode of the symbol from the normal time (for example, the start of variation of the left and right middle symbols). Or the timing of confirmation is different from the normal time (in normal time, each symbol starts to fluctuate at the same time, and in the case of high setting, it starts to fluctuate in the order of left, middle, right, etc.), and the voice is played. When used, a notification sound corresponding to the set value is generated with a predetermined probability when the start opening is won, or a voice different from the normal time is generated (normal time is male voice, high setting is female voice). Voice etc.), etc.

FIG. 203 is a diagram showing commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in various states. In the following description, n is a counter value indicating the processing state of the special symbol / special electric accessory, and m is a value corresponding to the set value.

As shown in the figure, in the hot start in which the normal game state is activated, the power-on operation command (A001H) → the power-on state command (3001H) → the power-on return destination command (310 nH) → the set value command (A10 mH). It is sent in order.

Further, when the main control RAM 1312 is initialized by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, the power-on operation command (A001H) → the power-on state command (3001H) → the power-on return destination command (3101H) → the set value command ( It is transmitted in the order of A10mH).

Further, in the setting change mode, first, the power-on operation command (A003H) is transmitted, then the setting value is changed in the setting change mode, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position, and then the power-on operation is performed. The command (A001H) → the power-on state command (3001H) → the power-on return destination command (3101H) → the set value command (A10mH) are transmitted in this order.

Further, in the setting confirmation mode, first, the power-on operation command (A002H) is transmitted, then the set value is confirmed, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position, and then the power-on operation command (A001H) is performed. → Power-on status command (3001H) → Power-on return destination command (310nH) → Set value command (A10mH).

When the RAM is abnormal, the power-on operation command (A009H) is first transmitted, and the setting change mode is activated by the setting change operation (setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are turned on) when the power is restored after the power is cut off. The power-on operation command (A003H) is transmitted. After that, after the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position, the power-on operation command (A001H) → the power-on state command (3001H) → the power-on return destination command (3101H) → the setting value command (A10mH). Will be sent.

When the RAM is abnormal, the power-on operation command (A009H) is first transmitted, and if the setting change operation is not performed when the power is restored after the power is cut off, the RAM abnormal state continues and the power-on operation command (A009H) is generated. ) Is sent. After that, after the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position, the power-on operation command (A001H) → the power-on state command (3001H) → the power-on return destination command (3101H) → the setting value command (A10mH). Will be sent.

As described above, when the main control board 1310 is started in a normal gaming state, a command group (combination of a plurality of commands in a predetermined order) indicating that a plurality of commands return the power is peripheral at a predetermined timing. It is transmitted to the control board 1510. Therefore, when it is determined that the normal game state can be started after all the reception of a series of commands from A001H to A10mH is completed, and some commands of the series of commands cannot be received (missed), it is determined. It is determined that the normal game state cannot be started, and the inability to start the normal game state is notified.

That is, in the same manner as the effect in which the game command is disabled described above, among the received game commands, an effect that satisfies a predetermined condition is performed (for example, the operation of the symbol, the lamp, the movable body, the voice, etc. are received. The effect corresponding to the command is performed), and the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp may be used to notify that an inconsistency in the gaming state has occurred.

If the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the set value command, the peripheral control board 1510 supplements the set value command missed when the power is turned on by the set value command transmitted at the start of the special symbol variation display game, and starts the normal game. You may.

Further, when the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the set value command, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the set value command when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the set value command with a predetermined initial value (for example, setting 1) as the set value when the power is turned on. It may be updated to the setting value corresponding to the command.

The power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on state command (3001H) both notify the normal game startable state, and are usually transmitted continuously, so one of them is mainly controlled. All you have to do is send it to the board.

FIG. 204 is a diagram showing a state transition of a value set after the power is restored from the state before the power is cut off in the setting state management area.

The operation when the power of a pachinko machine having a setting function is turned on differs depending on whether the RAM clear switch 954 is operated or the setting key 971 is operated. There are multiple patterns for convenience.

<Pattern 1>
An operation example will be described in the case where the normal gaming state (VALUE_PLAY = 00H) is set when the power is cut off immediately before and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored, as shown in FIG. 204 (A). First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is a game control including the entire area stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area used as the area. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H. Further, the base display 1317 displays the set value accompanying the setting change.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 are not initialized. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 01H. Further, the base display 1317 displays the current set value for confirming the setting.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is a game control area including the entire area stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area used as. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the normal game state, and the value of the set state management area is maintained at 00H. Further, the base display 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying a display indicating that the performance display has been switched to as an initial display when the power is turned on (for example, full blinking for 5 seconds).

When the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 are maintained in the state before the power failure. Even if all the stored contents in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 are not maintained, at least an area in which information for returning to the game state before the power failure is stored (memory in which information about the game is stored). Areas (special symbols, areas related to ordinary symbols, areas related to prize balls, random numbers generated by the program (variable pattern random numbers, initial value random numbers, etc.)) need only be maintained, and are necessary to return to the gaming state before the power failure. The area where the non-information is stored may be in a different state after the power is restored than before the power failure. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the normal game state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 00H. The same value (00H) may be set regardless of the original value. Further, the base display 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying a display indicating that the performance display has been switched to as an initial display when the power is turned on (for example, full blinking for 5 seconds).

<Pattern 2-1>
As shown in FIG. 204 (B), in the operation example 1 in which the setting change mode is set when the power is cut off immediately before and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored, the RAM clear switch 954 is operated when the power is turned on. Regardless of the presence / absence and the presence / absence of the operation of the setting key 971, the main control RAM 1312 initializes an area used as a game control area including a stack area other than the setting value and the base value. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. The same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. Further, the base display 1317 displays the set value accompanying the setting change.

The initialization of the main control RAM 1312 in the pattern 2-1 can be performed by initializing the area used as the game control area including the stack area together with the storage area initialized by the initialization process already executed when a power failure occurs. Good. For example, when the power supply is cut off during the initialization process of the main control RAM 1312, the remaining storage area for which the initialization process has not been completed may be initialized. On the other hand, regardless of the progress of the initialization process at the time of power failure, the area used as the game control area including the stack area of the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized after the power is restored.

If a power failure occurs during the initialization process, an area (for example, the RAM clear process in progress flag) for storing whether the main control RAM 1312 is in the initialization process is provided, and while the RAM clear process in progress flag is set, It is advisable to prohibit writing of data to the storage area to be initialized.

Further, the process of monitoring the power failure may be repeatedly executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, in addition to the main loop (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 22), for example, the power failure warning signal may be monitored by a timer interrupt.

The power failure monitoring process and power outage process can be executed in the same process in the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, and the normal game state, or in separate processes, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation. In the mode, it may be executed by a common process, and in the normal game state, it may be executed by another process. That is, the power failure monitoring process and the power cutoff process may be shared in at least two of the three or more states (operation modes) in the operation of the pachinko machine.

As described above, in the pattern 2-1 when the power is cut off in the setting change mode and the main control RAM 1312 is normal at the time of recovery from the power failure, the setting is always set regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954. Start in change mode. For example, if a power failure occurs during the setting change work in the hall, the setting change mode may be activated even when the power is restored. However, the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954 for activating the setting change mode when the power is restored may not be operated. Therefore, by controlling as in pattern 2-1 it is possible to prevent an unintended state (different from the setting change mode) when the power is restored.

For example, if only the setting key 971 is operated (the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated) when the power is restored, the device is started in the setting confirmation mode instead of the setting change mode, or only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. If (the setting key 971 is not operated), the main control RAM 1312 is initialized and the normal gaming state is activated, or if none of the switches is operated, the normal gaming state is activated. However, when controlled as in pattern 2-1 it always starts in the setting change mode regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954.

<Pattern 2-2>
If the setting change mode is set when the power is cut off immediately before and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored, the operation may be performed in another pattern shown in FIG. 204 (C), unlike the pattern 2-1. Good. When the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is used as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. The same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. Further, the base display 1317 displays the set value accompanying the setting change.

When the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 at the time of turning on the power is other than the above, when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) at the time of turning on the power, the main control RAM 1312 The memory content of is not changed. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the game stopped state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 08H indicating an abnormality of the main control RAM 1312. Further, the base display 1317 displays an error (for example, an error code). The game stop state may be a game stop by executing an infinite loop on the main control MPU 1311 or a game stop by not executing the normal game process.

That is, in pattern 2-1 the setting key and the RAM clear switch are unconditionally shifted to the setting change mode regardless of the state after the power is restored, but in pattern 2-2, the setting is made when the power is restored. When the operation to activate the setting change mode is performed by the key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954, the setting change mode is activated, and when the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are in other states, the game cannot be executed (RAM error). And. That is, in pattern 2-2, even if at least one of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 at the time of power recovery is operated, the normal game is not started as a RAM abnormal state, and the normal game is normally performed after passing through the setting change mode. Start the game. For this reason, when the operation to activate the setting change mode is not performed, the normal game is not executed in a state different from the setting change mode such as RAM error and the setting confirmation mode, and the game is canceled by notifying the hall. Employees may be prompted to activate the configuration change mode.

When a value (08H) indicating a RAM error is recorded in the setting state management area, the setting change operation is performed without initializing the game control area and the stack area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312. Stand by with the game stopped. The game stop state may be a game stop by executing an infinite loop on the main control MPU 1311 or a game stop by not executing the normal game process. After that, once the power is cut off, the setting key and the RAM clear switch are operated to the setting change mode, and the power is turned on, the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H, and it becomes the game control area of the main control RAM 1312. Clear the stack area in the game control area and start the setting change mode.

<Pattern 3-1, 3-2>
An operation example will be described when the setting confirmation mode is set when the power is cut off immediately before and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored, as shown in FIG. First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 serves as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area used. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H. Further, the base display 1317 displays the set value accompanying the setting change.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 do not change. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 01H. The same value (01H) may be set regardless of the original value. Further, the base display 1317 displays the current set value for confirming the setting.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is used as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area to be created. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the normal game state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 00H. Further, the base display 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying a display indicating that the performance display has been switched to as an initial display when the power is turned on (for example, full blinking for 5 seconds).

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 do not change. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the normal game state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 00H. Further, the base display 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying a display indicating that the performance display has been switched to as an initial display when the power is turned on (for example, full blinking for 5 seconds). In this case, as shown in pattern 3-2 shown in FIG. 204 (E), the main control MPU 1311 may be started in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 01H (original value). The same value (01H) may be set regardless of the setting), and the base display 1317 may display the current set value for confirming the setting.

<Pattern 4>
As shown in FIG. 204 (F), an operation example when there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of recovery from a power failure will be described. First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is a game control including the entire area stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area used as the area. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is 02H. Further, the base display 1317 displays for changing the setting.

When the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 at the time of turning on the power is other than the above, that is, when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) at the time of turning on the power, the main operation is performed. The stored contents of the control RAM 1312 do not change. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the game stopped state, and the value of the set state management area is maintained at 08H. The same value (08H) may be set regardless of the original value. Further, the base display 1317 displays an error (for example, an error code).

If there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 when the power is cut off immediately before, if the main control RAM 1312 is initialized before the power is cut off, the main control RAM 1312 will not be initialized again when the power is restored (1). Initialize the device built into the main control MPU 1311. (2) Restart the hardware random number. (3) It is advisable to execute the main loop after executing at least one of setting interrupt enable.

Further, even if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 when the power is cut off immediately before, when the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are set before the determination of whether the state before the power failure is the RAM abnormality (step S211 in FIG. 179). Judge whether or not there is an operation of. Then, when the setting change operation (RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 is turned on) is detected when the power is turned on, the setting change mode is activated, but even if the setting change operation is not performed when the power is turned on (setting confirmation mode is set). The state of the RAM abnormality is maintained when the operation to start is performed, only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, or none of them is operated). That is, normally, when the setting change mode is started and the setting confirmation mode is started, the setting change mode processing and the setting confirmation mode processing are executed in the timer interrupt processing, but the power is turned on again from the RAM abnormal state. If so, different processes are executed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. In other words, when the power is turned on again and recovered from the RAM abnormal state, when starting in the setting change mode, the setting change mode processing is executed in the timer interrupt processing as usual, but the setting confirmation mode is started. When doing so, a process different from the normal process is executed in the timer interrupt process.

In this way, when a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the game cannot be started even if the power is turned on again. However, since the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, it is not necessary to initialize the main control RAM 1312 again.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 1 and its variations will be described using a time chart. The outline of the time chart described below is as follows.
-Time chart for normal setting changes (Fig. 205)
-Time chart for normal setting confirmation (Fig. 206)
-Time chart when the setting change mode is entered in the setting change mode at the time of a power failure, and the setting key 971 is OFF and the RAM clear switch 954 is OFF after the power is restored (FIG. 207).
-Time chart when shifting to the setting change mode in the setting change mode at the time of a power failure with the setting key 971 ON and the RAM clear switch 954 OFF after the power is restored (FIG. 208).
-Time chart when shifting to the setting confirmation mode in the setting confirmation mode at the time of power failure with the setting key 971 OFF and the RAM clear switch 954 OFF after the power is restored (Fig. 209).

FIG. 205 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 205, since the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting change mode.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply is turned on (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register at the timing T4, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until the timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer waiting effect is started. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, and records 02H in the setting state management area to set. Move to change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 lights all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts to output a security signal. The display mode of the function display unit is as described in FIG. 184.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating the transition to the setting change mode, and transmits the command to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect (notification) in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 184 above according to the received power-on command.

When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the set value from N to N + 1, and is a base display. 1317 displays the updated set value N + 1 (T6). Furthermore, by the second operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972), the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the set value from N + 1 to N + 2, and updates the base display 1317. The later set value N + 2 is displayed (T7). That is, in the setting change mode, the set value is changed in the range of 1 to 6 each time the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, and is updated to 1 when the set value exceeds 6. To.

The employee of the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position when the change of the set value is completed. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it exits the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, creates a power-on operation command (A0001H), and shifts to the normal gaming state. (T8). The created power-on operation command (A0001H) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing. By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the processing during the normal game in the timer interrupt processing. Further, the main control MPU 1311 finishes all lighting of the function display unit 1400 and starts displaying in the normal game state. Further, the base display 1317 blinks and displays all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state. In this way, by displaying the base display 1317 in a predetermined mode at the start of the normal gaming state, the end of the setting change mode can be clearly understood, and an operation error at the end of the setting change mode can be reduced. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. Since the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in the setting change mode, the lower byte of the return destination command at power-on is 01H. As shown in FIG. 202 (D), m of the set value command (A10 mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 according to the set value. Both the power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on state command (3001H) notify the normal game startable state, and are usually transmitted continuously. Therefore, one of them is the main control board. All you have to do is send it to.

The peripheral control board 1510 knows that the normal game can be started by the received power-on state command, and executes the effect in the normal game state (for example, the customer waiting effect). The peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time elapses after knowing that the normal game can be started by the power-on state command (the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the effect may be switched so as to start the customer waiting effect). During the predetermined delay time, it is advisable to perform the notification effect during the setting change by some of the effect devices. For example, the effect display device 1600 and the sound return to the effect in the normal gaming state, and the decorative lamp is changing the setting. Continue the notification effect. Further, as for the continuation of the notification effect by the decorative lamp, even if some decorative lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and the other decorative lamps (for example, the panel side) return to the normal gaming state effect. Good.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) is delayed from the end of the setting change mode (T9). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the hall computer cannot grasp the transition to the setting change mode, so the minimum output time of the security signal is set. This is to secure it.

FIG. 206 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 206, the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on because the normal game state or the setting confirmation mode is set when the power is turned off immediately before. , The main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting confirmation mode.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply is turned on (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register at the timing T4, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until the timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer waiting effect is started. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, and records 01H in the setting state management area to set. Move to confirmation mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 lights all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts to output a security signal.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating that the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits the command to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on command.

After confirming the set value, the employee in the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it exits the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T6). When the value of the setting state management area becomes 00H, it becomes possible to execute the processing during the normal game in the timer interrupt processing. Further, the base display 1317 blinks and displays all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (310 nH), and a set value command (A10 mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. As shown in FIG. 202 (D), m of the set value command (A10 mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 according to the set value. In the setting confirmation mode, as a general rule, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized, so that the state before the power failure is transmitted as the lower byte of the return destination command when the power is turned on.

The peripheral control board 1510 knows that the normal game can be started by the received power-on state command, and executes the effect in the normal game state (for example, the customer waiting effect). The peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time elapses after knowing that the normal game can be started by the power-on state command (the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the effect may be switched so as to start the customer waiting effect). During the predetermined delay time, it is advisable to perform the notification effect during the setting change by some of the effect devices. For example, the effect display device 1600 and the sound return to the effect in the normal gaming state, and the decorative lamp is changing the setting. Continue the notification effect. Further, as for the continuation of the notification effect by the decorative lamp, even if some decorative lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and the other decorative lamps (for example, the panel side) return to the normal gaming state effect. Good.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) is delayed from the end of the setting confirmation mode (T7).

FIG. 207 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 207, since the setting change mode is set when the power is cut off immediately before, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting change mode. As shown in FIG. 204 (B), if the setting change mode is set when the power is turned off immediately before, the main control MPU 1311 is set in the setting change mode regardless of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 when the power is turned on. Indicates the case of starting.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply is turned on (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register at the timing T4, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until the timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer waiting effect is started. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, and records 02H in the setting state management area to set. Move to change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 lights all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts to output a security signal.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating the transition to the setting change mode, and transmits the command to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. Since the peripheral control board 1510 is reset to the initial state by shutting off the power supply, it receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the set value from N to N + 1, and is a base display. 1317 displays the updated set value N + 1 (T6).

After that, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects a power failure and executes a power cutoff process (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal is stopped from the reset circuit 1335, the display of the set value by the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal is stopped (T8). In the power off processing, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the security signal output port and the output port to the base display 1317 by the power off processing program, the security signal output can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port in the power off processing, the power consumption during the power off processing can be reduced, and the reset due to the power supply (5V) being lowered before the power off processing is completed can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power off processing. It is preferable that the signal output port to the solenoid that controls the opening and closing of the large winning openings 2005, 2006, the second starting port 2004, and the like is also turned off to stop the solenoid drive signal.

After that, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply is turned on (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is started (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, starts the main control program at the timing T11, and then stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in the register at the timing T12. Wait until the timing T13 to start the peripheral control board 1510.

The main control MPU 1311 refers to the value in the setting state management area. In the example shown in FIG. 207, since 02H is recorded in the setting state management area, the setting change mode is set at the timing T13 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954. Move to. When shifting to the setting change mode, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are reinitialized in the same manner as in the shift to the normal setting change mode. Since the power failure is monitored after the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is completed and then the power failure process is executed, the RAM clear process is not interrupted by the power cutoff process. Therefore, the setting change mode is used during a power failure. In this case, since the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, the RAM clear process may be executed when the power is restored so that the game control area is not initialized. After being initialized again, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and starts outputting the security signal.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating the transition to the setting change mode, and transmits the command to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. Since the peripheral control board 1510 is reset to the initial state by shutting off the power supply, it receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the setting value, and bases the updated setting value. It is displayed on the display 1317.

The employee of the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position when the change of the set value is completed. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it exits the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T14). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the processing during the normal game in the timer interrupt processing. Further, the base display 1317 blinks and displays all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. As shown in FIG. 202 (D), m of the set value command (A10 mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 according to the set value.

The peripheral control board 1510 knows that the normal game can be started by the received power-on state command, and executes the effect in the normal game state (for example, the customer waiting effect). The peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time elapses after knowing that the normal game can be started by the power-on state command (the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the effect may be switched so as to start the customer waiting effect). During the predetermined delay time, it is advisable to perform the notification effect during the setting change by some of the effect devices. For example, the effect display device 1600 and the sound return to the effect in the normal gaming state, and the decorative lamp is changing the setting. Continue the notification effect. Further, as for the continuation of the notification effect by the decorative lamp, even if some decorative lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and the other decorative lamps (for example, the panel side) return to the normal gaming state effect. Good.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) is delayed from the end of the setting change mode (T15). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the hall computer cannot grasp the transition to the setting change mode, so the minimum security signal. This is to secure the output time.

FIG. 208 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 208, the main control MPU 1311 is started in a different operation mode by operating the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 when the power is turned on, even if the setting change mode is set when the power is turned off immediately before.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply is turned on (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register at the timing T4, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until the timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer waiting effect is started. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, and records 02H in the setting state management area to set. Move to change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts to output a security signal.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating the transition to the setting change mode, and transmits the command to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. Since the peripheral control board 1510 is reset to the initial state by shutting off the power supply, it receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the set value from N to N + 1, and is a base display. 1317 displays the updated set value N + 1 (T6).

After that, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects a power failure and executes a power cutoff process (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal is stopped from the reset circuit 1335, the display of the set value by the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal is stopped (T8). In the power off processing, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the security signal output port and the output port to the base display 1317 by the power off processing program, the security signal output can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port in the power off processing, the power consumption during the power off processing can be reduced, and the reset due to the power supply (5V) being lowered before the power off processing is completed can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power off processing. It is preferable that the signal output port to the solenoid that controls the opening and closing of the large winning openings 2005, 2006, the second starting port 2004, and the like is also turned off to stop the solenoid drive signal.

After that, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply is turned on (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is started (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, starts the main control program at the timing T11, and then stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in the register at the timing T12. Wait until the timing T13 to start the peripheral control board 1510.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T13 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, and reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch. The operation mode is changed depending on the signal level of 954. In the example shown in FIG. 208, the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off and the setting key 971 is turned on so that the setting confirmation mode is set when the power is turned on again. However, the state before the power failure recorded in the setting state management area is displayed. Since the value (02H) indicates the setting change, the main control MPU 1311 is restarted in the setting change mode at the timing T13 when the peripheral control board start waiting time has elapsed, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. Will be done. The same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. When shifting to the setting change mode, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are reinitialized in the same manner as in the shift to the normal setting change mode. Since the power failure is monitored after the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is completed and then the power failure process is executed, the RAM clear process is not interrupted by the power cutoff process. Therefore, the setting change mode is used during a power failure. In this case, since the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, the RAM clear process may be executed when the power is restored so that the game control area is not initialized. For example, in FIG. 186 described above, if the state before the power failure is changing the setting, YES in step S2015, branching to RESET_P_5A (step S2030 in FIG. 187), and executing the RAM abnormality initialization process (step S2034). However, if it branches to RESET_P_7 (S2036 in FIG. 187), the state before the power is cut off will be continued without executing the RAM error initialization processing step S2034. After being initialized again, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and starts outputting the security signal. That is, in the time chart shown in FIG. 208, the setting change mode can be activated even if the setting key 971 is not operated to ON. In other words, regarding the setting change mode, the setting change mode is activated by operating the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 to be ON when the power is turned on, and further, the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are set when the power is turned on. It is possible to start the setting change mode even if it is not ON.

Although it is indicated by a broken line at the timing T12, when the RAM clear switch 954 is OFF and the setting key 971 is operated OFF when the power is turned on again, unlike the time chart shown in FIG. 207, the setting state management area is displayed. You may record 00H and restart in a state where normal games cannot be executed (for example, RAM abnormality) without returning to the setting change mode. That is, in the operation pattern shown in FIG. 208, even in the setting change mode at the time of a power failure, if the setting change operation is not performed when the power is restored, the system restarts in a RAM abnormal state. That is, if the power is cut off during the setting change mode, the normal game cannot be started unless the setting change mode is normally ended at some point.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating the transition to the setting change mode, and transmits the command to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. Since the peripheral control board 1510 is reset to the initial state by shutting off the power supply, it receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the setting value, and bases the updated setting value. It is displayed on the display 1317 (T14).

The employee of the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position when the change of the set value is completed. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it exits the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T15). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the processing during the normal game in the timer interrupt processing. Further, the base display 1317 blinks and displays all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. Since the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in the setting change mode, the lower byte of the return destination command at power-on is 01H. As shown in FIG. 202 (D), m of the set value command (A10 mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 according to the set value. The power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on state command (3001H) both notify the normal game startable state, and are usually transmitted continuously, so one of them is mainly controlled. All you have to do is send it to the board.

The peripheral control board 1510 knows that the normal game can be started by the received power-on state command, and executes the effect in the normal game state (for example, the customer waiting effect). The peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time elapses after knowing that the normal game can be started by the power-on state command (the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the effect may be switched so as to start the customer waiting effect). During the predetermined delay time, it is advisable to perform the notification effect during the setting change by some of the effect devices. For example, the effect display device 1600 and the sound return to the effect in the normal gaming state, and the decorative lamp is changing the setting. Continue the notification effect. Further, as for the continuation of the notification effect by the decorative lamp, even if some decorative lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and the other decorative lamps (for example, the panel side) return to the normal gaming state effect. Good.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) is delayed from the end of the setting change mode (T16). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the hall computer cannot grasp the transition to the setting change mode, so the minimum security signal. This is to secure the output time.

FIG. 209 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 209, if the setting confirmation mode is set when the power is cut off immediately before, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting confirmation mode regardless of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 when the power is turned on.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply is turned on (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register at the timing T4, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until the timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer waiting effect is started. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, and records 02H in the setting state management area to set. Move to change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts to output a security signal.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating that the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits the command to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on operation command.

After that, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects a power failure and executes a power cutoff process, and the main control MPU 1311 stops the operation (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal is stopped from the reset circuit 1335, the display of the set value by the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal is stopped (T8). In the power off processing, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the security signal output port and the output port to the base display 1317 by the power off processing program, the security signal output can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port in the power off processing, the power consumption during the power off processing can be reduced, and the reset due to the power supply (5V) being lowered before the power off processing is completed can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power off processing. It is preferable that the signal output port to the solenoid that controls the opening and closing of the large winning openings 2005, 2006, the second starting port 2004, and the like is also turned off to stop the solenoid drive signal.

After that, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply is turned on (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is started (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, starts the main control program at the timing T11, and then stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in the register at the timing T12. Wait until the timing T13 to start the peripheral control board 1510.

The main control MPU 1311 refers to the value in the setting state management area. In the example shown in FIG. 209, the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off and the setting key 971 is turned on so that the setting confirmation mode is set when the power is turned on again. However, the state before the power failure recorded in the setting state management area is displayed. Since the value (01H) indicates the setting confirmation, the system is restarted in the setting confirmation mode at the timing T13 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 01H. The same value (01H) may be set regardless of the original value. After that, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting the security signal. That is, in the time chart shown in FIG. 209, the setting confirmation mode can be activated even if the setting key 971 is not operated to ON. In other words, the setting confirmation mode is activated by operating the setting key 971 to be ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is being operated to OFF when the power is turned on, and further, the setting key 971 is not ON when the power is turned on. It is also possible to start the setting confirmation mode.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating that the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits the command to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on command.

Even if the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting confirmation mode and the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, the set value is used as the base indicator without updating the set value. It is continuously displayed in 1317.

After confirming the set value, the employee in the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it exits the setting confirmation mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T15). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the processing during the normal game in the timer interrupt processing. Further, the base display 1317 blinks and displays all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (310 nH), and a set value command (A10 mH) to the peripheral control board 1510.

The peripheral control board 1510 knows that the normal game can be started by the received power-on state command, and executes the effect in the normal game state (for example, the customer waiting effect). The peripheral control board 1510 starts the effect in the normal game state (for example, the customer waiting effect) after a predetermined delay time elapses after knowing that the normal game can be started by the power-on state command. You may. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time elapses after knowing that the normal game can be started by the power-on state command (the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the effect may be switched so as to start the customer waiting effect). During the predetermined delay time, it is advisable to perform the notification effect during the setting change by some of the effect devices. For example, the effect display device 1600 and the sound return to the effect in the normal gaming state, and the decorative lamp is changing the setting. Continue the notification effect. Further, as for the continuation of the notification effect by the decorative lamp, even if some decorative lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and the other decorative lamps (for example, the panel side) return to the normal gaming state effect. Good.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) is delayed from the end of the setting confirmation mode (T16). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the hall computer cannot grasp the transition to the setting change mode, so the minimum security signal. This is to secure the output time.

210 to 212 are diagrams showing a configuration example of a jackpot determination threshold table. The jackpot determination threshold table stores the hit determination threshold value of the jackpot determination random value for drawing a jackpot of a special symbol.

The jackpot threshold value determination table shown in FIG. 210 is composed of an address table for selecting a set value table and a determination threshold value table for each set value. The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 210 is an example of determining a jackpot when the random value for jackpot determination is larger than the threshold value defined in the table.

In the setting value table selection address table, the pointer address of the judgment threshold table selected in each setting value is defined, and each data may be configured as a 2-byte value. If the high-order byte is a fixed value, only the low-order byte may be defined. The judgment threshold table for each set value stores the threshold value at the time of low probability (normal state) and the threshold value at the time of high probability (probability change state).

At the time of jackpot determination, the pointer address defined in the address table for selecting the set value table is acquired, and the threshold value determination table of the current set value is selected using this value as an offset. Then, with the probability change state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) as an offset, the threshold value for jackpot determination is acquired from the selected threshold value determination table. Then, when the big hit determination random value acquired at the time of winning the starting port is equal to or more than the acquired threshold value, it is determined to be a big hit, and when it is less than the threshold value, it is determined to be a deviation.

The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 211 is composed of an address table for selecting a set value table and a determination threshold table for each set value. The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 211 is an example of determining a jackpot when the random value for jackpot determination is in the range from the lower limit to the upper limit defined in the table.

In the setting value table selection address table, the pointer address of the judgment threshold table selected in each setting value is defined, and each data may be configured as a 2-byte value. If the high-order byte is a fixed value, only the low-order byte may be defined. The judgment threshold table for each set value includes a lower threshold at low probability (normal state), an upper threshold at low probability (normal state), a lower threshold at high probability (probability change state), and a lower threshold at high probability (probability change state). Store the upper threshold.

At the time of jackpot determination, the pointer address defined in the address table for selecting the set value table is acquired, and the threshold value determination table of the current set value is selected using this value as an offset. Then, with the probability change state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) as an offset, it is determined whether the block is a low probability block or a high probability block of the selected threshold value judgment table, and the lower limit threshold value and the upper limit for the jackpot judgment are determined. Get the threshold. Then, when the jackpot determination random value acquired at the time of winning the starting port is equal to or greater than the acquired lower limit threshold value and equal to or less than the upper limit threshold value, it is determined to be a jackpot, and when it is out of the range from the lower limit threshold value to the upper limit threshold value, it is determined to be out of alignment.

The jackpot judgment threshold table shown in FIG. 212 includes an address table for selecting a low-probability setting value table, a judgment threshold table for each setting value for low probability, an address table for selecting a high-probability setting value table, and each setting for high probability. It consists of a judgment threshold table for values. The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 211 includes a low-probability table and a high-probability table integrally, whereas the jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 212 includes a low-probability table and a high-probability table. It is configured separately.

In the low probability setting value table selection address table, the pointer address of the judgment threshold table selected in each low probability (normal state) setting value is defined, and in the high probability setting value table selection address table. Defines the pointer address of the judgment threshold table selected in each set value of high probability (probability change state). The data defined in each setting value table selection address table may be configured as a 2-byte value. If the high-order byte is a fixed value, only the low-order byte may be defined. The judgment threshold table for each set value for low probability stores the lower limit threshold value at the time of low probability (normal state) and the upper limit threshold value at the time of low probability (normal state). The judgment threshold table for each set value for high probability stores the lower limit threshold value at the time of high probability (normal state) and the upper limit threshold value at the time of high probability (normal state).

At the time of jackpot judgment, the probability variation state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) determines whether the address table is for selecting the low probability setting value table or the high probability setting value table, and is determined. The set value is acquired as an offset from the address table for selecting the set value table, and the judgment threshold table corresponding to the current set value is selected according to the acquired offset. Then, when the jackpot determination random value acquired at the time of winning the starting port is equal to or greater than the acquired lower limit threshold value and equal to or less than the upper limit threshold value, it is determined to be a jackpot, and when it is out of the range from the lower limit threshold value to the upper limit threshold value, it is determined to be out of alignment.

[12-17. Another example of setting change / confirmation processing 2]
Next, another embodiment of the pachinko machine having the setting changing function will be described. In the embodiment described below, the set value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. However, the initialization function of the original main control RAM 1312 of the RAM clear switch 954 and the initialization function of the RAM 1312 are used. In order to distinguish it from the setting change function, the operation related to the change of the setting value may be described as the setting change switch 972.

213 and 214 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on.

First, the main control MPU 1311 starts from the process of address 8000, which is the start address of the program code, when the reset signal is released by turning on the power. The protection invalidity and the prohibited area invalidity of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protect register (step S2200). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a used area of the main control RAM 1312 so that when an access is made to a prohibited area other than the designated area, it is determined to be abnormal and reset. In order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to be invalid so that the entire area of the main control RAM 1312 can be accessed. Even if the unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and access is detected in the specified prohibited area, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. Good.

Next, the simple clear mode timer for a predetermined time is set in the watchdog timer (step S2201), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2202). After that, the power failure clear signal is set to ON (step S2203), and the power failure clear signal is set to OFF (step S2204). By setting the power failure clear signal to ON and then to OFF, the power failure signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal value.

Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2205). As the register, any one of a plurality of general-purpose registers (storage means for temporarily storing information related to the operation in the operation of the process) provided in advance in the main control MPU 1311 may be used. The general-purpose register is divided into bank 0 and bank 1, and the register of bank 0 is used in step S2205. The register is provided in the main control RAM 1312 and is erased without holding the information in the event of a power failure, which is different from the area of the RAM in which the information is backed up in the event of a power failure. Since the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are operated after the peripheral control board 1510 is surely started, the hole is displayed while waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to start. If the employee of the hall erroneously interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined in a state not intended by the employee of the hall. Therefore, the input state (level) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is stored in a register or the like which is a temporary storage means at an early stage after the start of the power-on processing, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 ends. By determining the status of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in a register or the like, which is a temporary storage means, even if the hall employee accidentally interrupts the key operation at an early stage after the power is turned on. , The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 at the time of power-on operation is reliably detected.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is in power failure (step S2206). If the power failure warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, so that the machine waits until the power supply voltage stabilizes in step S2206.

After that, the sub-start wait timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer expires, and the peripheral control board 1510 is waited for start (step S2207). The start-up wait of the peripheral control board 1510 may be any time during the period from the power-on until the first command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

After that, it is determined again whether the power failure warning signal is in power failure (step S2208). If the power failure warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and the pachinko machine 1 stands by in step S2208.

After that, the set value confirmation process is executed to determine whether the set value is within the normal range, and it is determined whether the value in the setting state management area is within the normal range (step S2209). Details of the set value confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 215.

After that, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2210). This is because the information used in one process does not affect the other process in order to ensure the independence between the process outside the game control area and the process inside the game control area. After that, a RAM confirmation process outside the game area when the power is turned on is executed to determine an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2211). Details of the RAM confirmation process outside the game area when the power is turned on will be described later with reference to FIG. 216. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2212).

After that, the RAM abnormality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2213), and the RAM abnormality value (03H) in the setting state management area is temporarily set in the B register (step S2214). The B register and C register used in steps S2213 and S2214 are general-purpose registers. The general-purpose register of bank 0 is used in the process when the power is turned on.

The value set in the setting state management area in the second embodiment is different from that shown in FIG. 201 (B) in the above-described embodiment, and as shown in FIG. 220 (A), if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312. 03H is recorded. That is, the setting state management area of the second example 2 is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, the lower 4 bits are used and the upper 4 bits are not defined. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal game state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 03H if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H in the RAM clear processing by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. Further, it is updated from 01H to 00H at the end of the setting confirmation mode, and is updated from 02H to 00H at the end of the setting change mode. Further, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, it is updated from 03H to 02H when the setting change mode is entered by the setting change operation at the next power-on, and is updated from 02H to 00H at the end of the setting change mode.

Further, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the determination result is stored in the C register (steps S2215 and S2216), and the process proceeds to step 2219. Specifically, the checksum calculated and stored from the data used as the game control area (excluding the data saved in the stack) out of the areas backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 when the power was cut off last time, The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if the two are different, it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality. If the value of the power failure flag indicating that the backup was normally performed (the power off processing was executed normally) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data in the main control RAM 1312 is normally backed up when a power failure occurs. It is determined that there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 because it is not (the power off processing is not executed normally).

Then, if there is no abnormality in either the game control area or the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the RAM normality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2217), and the information in the setting state management area is set in the B register. (Step S2218), and the process proceeds to step 2219.

After that, a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is tentatively recorded in the setting state management area (step S2219).

Then, among the register values in which the value of the PF port is recorded, the bits of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are masked (step S2220). As the register in which the value of the PF port is stored, a general-purpose register different from the register temporarily set in S2213 and S2214 is used. After that, it is determined by using the value stored in the register whether the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON when the power is turned on (step S2221). If the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON, it is determined that the setting change operation has been performed, and the process proceeds to step S2230.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is not operated and the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, it is determined whether the setting change mode was set when a power failure occurred (step S2222). For example, when the value of the setting state management area is the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode.

Then, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S2230.

On the other hand, when it is determined that no power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2223). For example, the abnormality in the game control area can be determined by using the determination result stored in the C register in steps S2213 and S2217 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in either the game control area or the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2236.

On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in either the game control area or the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing (step S2224). For example, if the value of the saved setting state management area is a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality, it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing.

Then, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process proceeds to step S2236. On the other hand, when it is determined that a power failure has not occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, a value (00H) indicating a normal gaming state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2225). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2225, the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality tentatively recorded in the setting state management area in step S2214 is returned to the normal state. Further, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2225, the value of the setting state management area when jumping from step S2226 and S2231 to step S2235 is different. In this way, since the value of the setting state management area differs between the normal RAM clear processing and the RAM clear processing associated with the setting change processing, the caller can be distinguished even if the programs for both RAM clear processes are shared. , It is not necessary to provide a separate program, and the size of the program size can be reduced.

After that, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2226). Then, if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to ON, the process proceeds to step S2235.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the operation of the setting key 971, and the value recorded in the setting state management area. For example, if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area, and 03H is maintained until the power is cut off, so that normal game processing cannot be executed. At this time, the RAM abnormality can be cleared by turning off the power once and then turning on the power by performing the setting change operation. That is, when it is determined in step S2221 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are being operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area changes from the value indicating the RAM error (03H) to the value indicating the setting change. It is updated to (02H) (step S2230), and the RAM abnormal state ends. In this way, recovery from a RAM error always goes through a setting change. In other words, since it is determined whether the setting change operation has been performed before determining whether the state at the time of power failure is a RAM abnormality, the RAM abnormality can be resolved only when the set value is changed.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, the game state information at the time of the power failure is stored in the power-on state buffer in order to restore the state before the power failure (step S2227).

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting key 971 has been turned ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2228). Then, if the setting key 971 is operated to ON, it is determined that the setting confirmation operation has been performed, a value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2229), and the process proceeds to S2236. .. That is, even if the state at the time of power failure is the setting confirmation mode, if the setting key 971 is not operated when the power is turned on, the normal gaming state is set. If the state at the time of power failure is the setting confirmation mode and the setting key 971 is not operated when the power is turned on, the mode may shift to the same power failure confirmation mode as before the power failure, instead of the normal gaming state.

Since steps S2225 to S2229 are processes executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated, the determination of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (step S2226) and the setting key 971 Any of the determination of the operation (step S2228) of the above may be performed first. That is, as shown in the figure, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2226) and then the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2228), or the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2228). The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2226).

If YES is determined in step S2221 or step S2222, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2230). Then, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2231). For example, an abnormality outside the game control area can be determined based on the RAM abnormality determination result set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area in step S2266 described above. As a result, if there is no abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2235.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the RAM clear process outside the game control area is executed. That is, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2322), and the out-of-game area RAM error processing is executed (step S2233). Details of the out-of-game area RAM abnormality processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 217. After that, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area is restored in step S2232 (step S2234).

Then, the set value in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the area other than the set state management area, and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2235). That is, the RAM clearing process outside the game control area is not executed unless the setting is changed. When a RAM is abnormal outside the game control area, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area and the game is stopped, as in the case of a RAM error in the game control area. Therefore, the RAM is restored from the abnormal state unless the setting is changed. It is not possible. However, while the condition for clearing the RAM outside the game control area is only the setting change, the condition for clearing the RAM inside the game control area is the setting change and the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (even if no RAM error has occurred). When the RAM is forcibly cleared by the operation of the employee).

In the RAM clearing process in the game area in step S2235, excluding the set value and the set state management area causes damage to the hall side when the set value is set high due to an illegal RAM clear operation by the player. This is because if a problem (RAM abnormality) occurs during the game at the high setting and the game is stopped, the RAM clear operation changes the setting from the high setting to the low setting, causing damage to the player.

After that, all command buffers are initialized (step S2236). This is because when the power is turned off without clearing the RAM while the command is stored in the command buffer and the power is restored without clearing the RAM, the untransmitted command stored in the command buffer is transmitted. For example, when the power is cut off during the transmission of the variation command, the symbol command may be transmitted, but the subsequent variation pattern command may not be transmitted. Then, if only the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted when the power is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 may determine that it is abnormal. Further, when an untransmitted command in the processing related to the setting change is stored in the command buffer, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the command by transmitting the untransmitted command during the setting processing after the power is restored. There is a possibility of malfunction by setting the game state. In order to prevent the occurrence of such an abnormality, the command buffer is initialized in step S2236.

Although the command buffer is initialized in step S2236, the command buffer may be cleared only when the setting change process is started and the setting confirmation process is started. In the setting change process, the command buffer is cleared when the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, so it is not necessary to clear the command buffer separately. However, in the setting confirmation mode, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized. Therefore, it is advisable to clear the command buffer when shifting to the setting confirmation mode.

After that, the functions of the devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built in the main control MPU 1311 are initially set (step S2237), and the hardware random numbers (for example, winning random numbers) built in the main control MPU 1311 are activated (step S2238). By activating the hardware random number in step S2238, the hardware random number is updated even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, but the hardware random number is activated at the end of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. You may. Then, the power-on setting process is executed (step S2239). Details of the power-on setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 219.

Finally, the timer interrupt is set to enable (step S2240), and the process proceeds to the main control side main process (FIG. 221).

FIG. 215 is a flowchart of the set value confirmation process. The set value confirmation process is executed in step S2209 of the power-on process (FIG. 213), determines whether the set value of the set state management area is within the normal range, and determines whether the value of the set state management area is within the normal range. To do. The setting value confirmation process may be executed not only when the power is turned on, but also when the setting change mode ends or the setting confirmation mode ends. Further, it may be executed at the start of a special symbol change or at the time of a change in the gaming state (at the start and end of a big hit, a probability change, a time reduction, etc.).

In the set value confirmation process, first, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a value other than the value originally recorded in the setting state management area is set (step S2250). As shown in FIG. 220 (A), 00H to 03H are recorded in the setting state management area. Therefore, if a value of 04H or more is set, it is abnormal, and the process proceeds to step S2252.

On the other hand, if a normal value (03H or less) is set in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the set value is within a predetermined range (step S2251). For example, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the setting can be selected in stages from 1 to 6, the value of the work in which the setting value is stored corresponds to 0 to 5 (when setting 1 = 0, when setting 6 = In the case of 5), if a value of 6 or more is stored, it is determined that the value is out of the predetermined range.

If the set value is out of the predetermined range, a value (03H) indicating a RAM error is recorded in the set state management area (step S2252), the set value is initialized to 0 (step S2253), and the process returns to the power-on processing. .. On the other hand, if the set value is within the predetermined range, the process returns to the power-on processing.

Regarding the values and the set values recorded in the set state management area, it is determined whether the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal even during the progress of the game (every start of fluctuation, when the game state is switched, etc.). Therefore, the condition for determining the RAM abnormality regarding the set state management area and the set value during the game, and the RAM abnormality when the power is turned on (the work area in the game area excluding the set state management area and the set value and the outside of the game area) The two conditions for determining (work RAM abnormality) are different. Some of these two RAM abnormality determination conditions may be the same. For example, if it is determined whether the set state management area and the set value are abnormal even when the power is turned on, it can be said that the two determination conditions are partially the same.

In this way, the RAM abnormality judgment conditions are different if the RAM abnormality judgment regarding the set value is performed only when the power is turned on, and if the set value is changed due to a malfunction due to fraudulent activity or noise, a hole or a game This is because it is desirable to detect an abnormality at an early stage and shorten the period in which the disadvantage occurs because the person is disadvantaged.

In addition, by making the RAM abnormality determination process related to the setting state management area and the set value into a subroutine during the game, the same program can be multiple times by calling the subroutine as necessary during the game to determine the RAM abnormality. The size of the program can be reduced without providing it in place.

Further, although the setting state management area is excluded from the RAM abnormality determination target when the power is turned on, it may be handled as the RAM abnormality determination target in the same manner as other areas of the main control RAM 1312. By setting the setting state management area as the target for determining the RAM abnormality when the power is turned on, the setting change mode is set before the power failure, and when the RAM abnormality is determined when the power is restored, the RAM abnormality has priority. Therefore, if an abnormality occurs in the value of the setting state management area (that is, a RAM abnormality), it is desirable to initialize the value recorded in the setting state management area. In this case, the storage area of the main control RAM 1312 in which the set value is stored may be the target of the RAM abnormality determination at the time of turning on the power or may not be the target of the RAM abnormality determination.

As for the priority order in the determination at the time of turning on the power, the RAM abnormality has the highest priority, and the normal gaming state has the lowest priority. Further, entering the setting change mode has a higher priority than entering the setting confirmation mode or executing the RAM clear process by the RAM clear operation. By executing the determination process in the order of priority of the derived states in this way, even when a plurality of conditions are satisfied after the power is restored, the state with high priority can be accurately derived.

FIG. 216 is a flowchart of the RAM confirmation process outside the game area when the power is turned on. The power-on out-of-game area RAM confirmation process is executed in step S2211 of the power-on time process (FIG. 213), and determines an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP save buffer outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2260), and sets the stack pointer value outside the game area value in the stack pointer (step S2661). , All the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the processing of the caller are stored in the register save buffer outside the game area (step S2262). A stack area outside the game control area may be used as a backup buffer for storing all registers in a process executed outside the game control area.

Then, it is determined whether or not the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized by the first power-on or the like (step S2663). Specifically, if the value of the power-down check area (EX_PDIND) is 5 AH, it can be determined that the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized by the first power-on or the like.

If the main control RAM 1312 has not been initialized by the first power-on or the like, the process proceeds to step S2266 without executing steps S2264 to S2265. On the other hand, if the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized by the first power-on or the like, a checksum outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is calculated (step S2264), and is the calculated checksum normal? Is determined (step S2265).

If the calculated checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S2267. On the other hand, if the calculated checksum is abnormal, the RAM abnormality determination result value (01H) is set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area (step S2266), and the process proceeds to step S2271. In addition, based on the value set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area in S2266, the RAM abnormality outside the game control area is determined in S2231.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the check sum calculated in step S2265 is normal, the LED check timer is set to 5 seconds, the LED check timer is activated (step S2267), and the LED blinking cycle timer is set to the blinking cycle value (600). (Milliseconds) is set (step S2268), and the mode switching time (5 seconds) is set in the mode switching time timer (step S2269). The LED blinking cycle timer is a timer for blinking and displaying the first two digits (or all four digits) of the base display 1317, and becomes one blinking cycle when the time of the LED blinking cycle timer is up. The mode switching time timer is a timer for controlling mode switching in the base display 1317, and switches to the base display mode when the mode switching time timer times up.

After that, 0 is set in the performance display monitor display management area to initialize (step S2270), and the process proceeds to step S2271.

After that, the power-down check area is initialized to 00H (step S2271).

Then, all the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the caller's processing, which was saved in the register save buffer outside the game area, are restored (step S2272), and the SP save buffer outside the game area is used. The saved stack pointer value is restored (step S2273), and the process returns to the power-on processing.

FIG. 217 is a flowchart of the out-of-game area RAM abnormality processing. The out-of-game area RAM error processing is executed in step S2233 of the power-on processing (FIG. 214) to initialize the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP save buffer outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2280), sets the stack pointer value outside the game area to the stack pointer (step S2281), and sets the stack pointer value. All the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the processing of the caller are stored in the register save buffer outside the game area (step S2282). A stack area outside the game control area may be used as a backup buffer for storing all registers in a process executed outside the game control area.

Then, the RWM initialization process outside the used area is executed to initialize the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2283). Details of the RWM initialization process outside the used area will be described later with reference to FIG. 218.

After that, the RAM normal determination value (00H) is set in the RAM abnormality determination area (EX_RWMERROR) outside the game area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2284). Based on the value set in the non-game area RAM abnormality determination area in step S2284, it is determined in step S2231 whether or not the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal at the next power-on.

Then, 5 seconds is set in the LED check timer, the LED check timer is activated (step S2285), the blinking cycle value (600 milliseconds) is set in the LED blinking cycle timer (step S2286), and the mode switching time timer is set to the mode. The switching time (5 seconds) is set (step S2287). These timer values are initial settings for displaying the base value on the base display 1317.

Then, all the register values saved in the register save buffer outside the game area (register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the processing of the caller saved in step S2262) are restored (step S2288). , The stack pointer value saved in the SP save buffer outside the game area is restored (step S2289), and the process returns to the power-on processing of the caller.

FIG. 218 is a flowchart of the RWM initialization process outside the used area. The out-of-use RWM initialization process is executed in step S2283 of the out-of-game area RAM abnormality processing, and initializes the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312.

First, the main control MPU 1311 writes 00H to a work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and initializes it (step S2290). Then, 00H is written to the stack area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 to initialize it (step S2291). After that, the process returns to the out-of-game area RAM error processing.

FIG. 219 is a flowchart of the power-on setting process. The power-on setting process is a subroutine, and is executed in step S2239 of the power-on process (FIG. 214) to execute the initial setting at power-on.

First, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command, and sets the created command in the transmission information storage area (step S2300). As will be described later in FIG. 220B, the power-on operation command is a command consisting of 2 bytes for notifying the recorded contents of the setting state management area, and the upper byte is A0H and the lower byte is the setting status management. It is the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the area.

Next, the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 in the input level data 2 area and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 are set to 1 which is an initial value. The other bits may be set to 0 (step S2301). Setting the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 of the input level data 2 area and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 to 1 is because the bit of the switch is detected by 1 at the next timer interrupt and the ON edge is incorrect. This is to prevent it from being made.

Next, the backup flag is cleared (step S2302).

After that, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating the game startable state is recorded in the set state management area (step S2303). If the value indicating the game startable state is not recorded in the setting status management area, it means that it is in the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, or the RAM error, so the setting process at power-on is terminated and the caller's caller Return to processing.

On the other hand, if a value (00H) indicating a game startable state is recorded in the set state management area, the normal game can be started, so the work in the game control area depends on whether or not the main control RAM 1312 is initialized. Initialize the area (step S2304).

After that, a power-on state command is created, and the created command is stored in the transmission information storage area (step S2305). As shown in FIG. 220C, the power-on state command is a command composed of 2 bytes, in which the upper byte indicates the state before a power failure and the upper byte indicates a state before a power failure.

Then, a return destination command at power-on is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2306). As shown in FIG. 202 (C), the power-on return destination command is a command composed of 2 bytes for notifying the game state related to the special symbol, and the upper byte is 31H and the lower byte is special when a power failure occurs. The state of the symbol and the operating state of the special electric accessory are shown. The return destination command when the power is turned on is transmitted once when the power is turned on.

Further, a set value command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2307). As shown in FIG. 202 (D), the set value command is a command composed of two bytes for notifying the set value, the upper byte indicates A1H, and the lower byte indicates the set value.

In addition to the power-on state command, power-on return destination command, and set value command, a special symbol hold number command indicating the number of hold of the special symbol variation display game is transmitted, and the hold number display is cut off on the effect display device 1600. It may be restored to the state before the occurrence. The order of sending the special symbol hold count command is to send the power-on state command, power-on return destination command, and set value command, before sending these commands, or during the transmission of these commands. You may.

After that, it returns to the processing of the caller.

The power-on setting process is always executed regardless of the setting change mode. Further, the power-on setting process is called from the setting process (FIG. 224) when the OFF setting key 971 is detected and the setting change / confirmation process is completed. At this time, since 00H is recorded in the setting state management area, all the processes from S2300 to S2307 are executed.

When the setting change / confirmation process is executed, the power-on setting process is called from step S2239 of the power-on process and step S2355 of the setting process, so that the power-on operation command is transmitted twice. On the other hand, when the setting change / confirmation process is not executed, the power-on operation command is transmitted once only by the power-on setting process called from step S2239 of the power-on process. The power-on operation command is transmitted to identify the state of the main control board 1310 (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, RAM abnormality, etc.) on the peripheral control board 1510. By receiving the command, the peripheral control board 1510 performs notification corresponding to a state such as a setting change mode, a setting confirmation mode, and a RAM abnormality.

In the setting / confirmation change mode, the setting adjustment function by the player (for example, the adjustment of the volume and brightness by operating the button provided on the door frame 3) is stopped, and the adjustment by the employee of the hall (peripheral control board box). The volume and brightness adjustment by the volume provided in the 1520) may be effective. Specifically, it is preferable to stop the setting adjustment function by the player until the power-on operation command indicating the normal game state is received.

Further, in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the full screen of the effect display device 1600 may be used to display whether the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, or the RAM is in an abnormal state. In this case, a voice message indicating whether the mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be output. Further, the notification may be performed by using a part of the lamps or all the lamps (the lamps provided on the door frame 3 may be included).

FIG. 220B is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on operation command. The power-on operation command is a command for notifying the recorded contents of the setting status management area, and the value of the lower byte stores the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting status management area. Unlike the one shown in FIG. 202 (A), in another example 2, when a RAM abnormality occurs, the lower byte becomes 04H.

Specifically, the power-on operation command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is A0H, and the lower byte indicates the recorded content of the setting state management area. The value of the lower byte stores the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting state management area. This is because the value of the setting state management area is 00H during a normal game, so if the value transmitted as a command is 00H, it cannot be distinguished from a hardware error in which the output is 0, so either bit. Is set to 1.

The power-on operation command is created at least once in the power-on process. Specifically, the A001H or A004H command is created once in response to hot start, RAM clear, and RAM error, and in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, the A002H or A003H command is created in the power-on processing. After that, it is created twice as an A001H command at the end of setting change / confirmation.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command, the peripheral control board 1510 is described above according to the normal game start ready state (A001H), the setting confirmation mode (A002H), the setting change mode (A003H), and the RAM abnormality state (A004H). (See FIG. 184). Although the notification of the normal game startable state is not shown in FIG. 184, a demo screen is displayed and a standby state for explaining the game content is produced.

If the peripheral control board 1510 receives a game command during a normal game without receiving A001H in the power-on operation command, the game state may be inconsistent, so the received game command is used. It is determined to be invalid, and the game operation (effect, etc.) for the game command is not started. However, if the predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, the game commands during the normal game are continuously transmitted a predetermined number of times), the peripheral control board 1510 may have missed the power-on operation command (A001H). It is advisable to cancel the invalidation of the received game command and perform the effect corresponding to the game command.

In addition, in the state where the game command is invalidated, among the received game commands, an effect satisfying a predetermined condition is performed (for example, for the operation of the symbol, the lamp, the movable body, the voice, etc., the effect corresponding to the received command is performed. ), And the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp may be used to notify that an inconsistency in the gaming state has occurred. In addition, a small volume may be used to notify that an inconsistency in the gaming state has occurred. This is because the player who cannot understand that the inconsistency of the game state has occurred unless any effect is performed until the predetermined condition is met, the special symbol variation display game does not start even if the starting port is won. This is to prevent troubles that may occur in the hall, thinking that the pachinko machine 1 is out of order. Even if the peripheral control board 1510 invalidates the game command, since the main control board 1310 is executing the normal game processing, the function display such as the special symbol and the normal symbol in the function display unit 1400 is normally displayed. Will be done.

FIG. 220 (C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on state command. Unlike the one shown in FIG. 202 (B) in the above-described embodiment, the power-on state command of the second embodiment defines four states of 01H, 02H, 03H, and 04H. That is, the power-on state command is a command that notifies whether the normal game can be started based on the recorded contents of the power-on state buffer, and further notifies the state before the power failure. For example, the power-on state command is composed of 2 bytes, and if the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte is 01H, it indicates that the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized to notify the RAM clear. Further, when the lower byte is 02H, it indicates that the state before the power failure is a low probability / non-time saving state, the main control RAM 1312 returns without being initialized, and the normal game can be started. Further, when the lower byte is 03H, it indicates that the state before the power failure is the high probability / time saving state, the main control RAM 1312 returns without being initialized, and the normal game can be started. Further, when the lower byte is 04H, it indicates that the state before the power failure is the low probability / time saving state, the main control RAM 1312 returns without being initialized, and the normal game can be started.

Further, as described above, the power-on state buffer is a storage area for storing information on the gaming state at the time of the power-out in order to restore the state before the power-out occurs. , The value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the power-on state buffer is stored. For example, in the low probability non-time saving, 1 is stored in the power-on state buffer, and 2 obtained by adding 1 to this value is stored in the power-on state command. Further, when the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, since the power-on state buffer is 0, 1 is stored in the power-on state command, and it is possible to notify that the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized.

FIG. 221 is a flowchart of the main control side main process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control side main process is executed after step S2240 of the power-on process (FIG. 214).

First, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure warning signal, and determines whether a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure warning signal is ON (step S2310). In another example 2, the power failure is monitored in the main process, but the power failure may be monitored by the timer interrupt process and the power failure process may be executed when the occurrence of the power failure is detected. For example, when it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is ON at least at the start and end of the timer interrupt, the period during which the power failure warning signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result reaches a predetermined value. It may be determined that a power failure has occurred.

If the power failure warning signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, and the random number update process 2 is executed (step S2311). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described with reference to FIG. 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than random numbers for determining winning in a special lottery or a normal lottery.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is detected, the power cutoff processing (steps S2312 to S2319) is executed. In the power outage process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the occurrence of a power failure is executed. Specifically, first, interrupts are disabled (step S2312). As a result, the timer interrupt processing described later is not performed. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S2313). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid / power failure clear / ACK output port. It is not necessary to clear all the output ports. For example, the output ports for controlling a solenoid or a motor that consumes a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption until the main board side power off processing is completed is reduced, and the main board side power off processing can be surely ended.

After that, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2314), the power-off processing is executed, and the necessary processing is executed before the power is cut off (step S2315). Details of the process when the power is turned off will be described later with reference to FIG. 222. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area is restored (step S2316).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 for determining whether or not the data stored in the backed up work area is normally held. It is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2317). This checksum is used to determine if the data backed up in the work area is normal. The area for which the checksum is calculated is the setting status management (setting value) that may be changed in the work area in the game control area between the time the power is turned on and the time the main processing on the main control side is executed. And the value of the setting status management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area should be excluded.

Further, as a power failure flag, a value (5AH) indicating that the power cutoff process was normally executed is stored in the backup flag area (step S2318). As a result, the storage of the game backup information is completed. Finally, RAM protect is enabled (write prohibited), the prohibited area is written to the RAM protect register, writing to the predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is prohibited (step S2319), and the process waits until the power is restored from the power failure. (infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a used area of the main control RAM 1312 so that when an access is made to a prohibited area other than the designated area, it is determined to be abnormal and reset. Therefore, by invalidating the prohibited area of the RAM protect register, the reset function by accessing the main control RAM 1312 is canceled (not reset), and the entire area can be accessed. Even if the unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and access is detected in the specified prohibited area, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. Good.

FIG. 222 is a flowchart of processing when the power is turned off. The power-off processing is executed in step S2315 of the main control side main processing (FIG. 221), and necessary processing is executed before the power is cut off.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP save buffer outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2320), sets the stack pointer value outside the game area to the stack pointer (step S2321), and sets the stack pointer value. All register values are stored in the register save buffer outside the game area (step S2322).

Subsequently, the checksum outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is calculated and stored in the checksum storage area outside the game area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2323). After that, 5AH is set in the power-down check area (EX_PDIND), and it is recorded that the RAM area outside the game area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized (step S2324). If 5 AH is recorded in the power-down check area, the power failure process is being executed normally. In this sense, the power-down check area and the backup flag of the RAM in the game control area are substantially the same. Since the power failure process is executed normally, it is already determined that the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is normal, and as a result, if 5AH is set in the power down check area, the main control The initialization of the area outside the game control area of the RAM 1312 has been completed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, two types of flags indicating that the power failure processing has been normally executed are provided in the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, respectively. .. This is because the determination is made twice between the inside of the game control area and the outside of the game control area, and since one storage area is not shared between the inside of the game control area and the outside of the game control area, it is independent. This is because it is desirable to process it. For example, if there is only one flag indicating that the power failure processing has been executed normally, 5AH is mistakenly set in the flag, and if the flag is restored without performing the power failure processing, it is erroneously determined that the power failure processing has been executed normally. Is judged. By making a double judgment in this way, the possibility of erroneous judgment is reduced.

Further, the two flags are provided in separate regions as regions (for example, regions in which the lower bytes (** 00H to ** FFH) or upper bytes (00 ** H or 01 ** H) of the address do not overlap). Therefore, even if the data is rewritten due to a defect such as noise, it can be restored correctly.

Then, all the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the caller's processing, which was saved in the register save buffer outside the game area, are restored (step S2325), and the SP save buffer outside the game area is used. The saved stack pointer value is restored (step S2326), and the caller is returned.

FIG. 223 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2330). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one is used as a register group of bank 0, and the other can be used as a register group of bank 1, and bank switching is performed. It is configured so that the registers of both banks cannot be used without. Register bank 0 is used in the main control side main processing, and register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, although the instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, it is not necessary to execute the instruction to switch the bank to 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the bank status in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of interrupting and RET. Return from the stack area by executing the instruction. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also restored. If a configuration in which the bank status is not stored in the flag register is adopted, a bank switching instruction is executed at the end of timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Since the flag register also stores a flag that controls whether or not interrupts can be interrupted, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting interrupt enable. The flag that controls whether or not interrupts can be interrupted is set to the interrupt disabled state after stacking the flag register at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the interrupt is not enabled unless the interrupt is permitted (EI instruction or the like) or the RETI instruction is executed during the timer interrupt process.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2331).

Next, the switch input process 1 is executed (step S2332). In the switch input process 1, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and the input information is stored in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

The switch input process 1 in step S2332 is a process related to a winning signal, and the switch input process 2 in step S2080 in FIG. 191 is a process related to the input of a fraud detection sensor (magnet sensor, radio wave sensor, vibration sensor, etc.). Therefore, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, since it is determined as NO in step S2335, winning detection is performed, but fraud is not detected by the fraud detection sensor. Even if a prize is detected, the prize ball is not paid out or the fluctuation display is not executed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by the employees of the hall, and it is considered desirable that the fraud is not detected in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. For example, since the operation of changing the setting and confirming the setting is performed with the door open, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 connected to the outer frame 2 by the hinge member are in a state of being easily shaken, so that the vibration sensor can be used. There is a possibility of false detection of vibration. Therefore, such false alarms can be prevented by stopping the detection of fraud by the fraud detection sensor in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. In addition, the employees in the hall have magnets for collecting the balls that have fallen on the floor, and it is possible to prevent false alarms of the magnets held by the employees when changing settings or confirming settings. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has means for invalidating (or limiting, regulating, suppressing, etc.) fraud detection, and after shifting to normal game processing (for example, initial setting processing at the time of power-on). After the end of), the fraud detection is enabled, and in a specific gaming state (for example, during the setting process), the fraud detection is invalidated (or restricted, regulated, suppressed, etc.) by the above means.

Even in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected by the switch input process 1 to monitor a specific type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect fraud in which a person who intends to commit fraud (Mr. Goto) forcibly activates the setting change mode by irradiating radio waves or the like.

Subsequently, the random number update process 1 is executed (step S2333). In the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the initial values of the large hit symbol determination random number and the small hit symbol determination random number updated in the random number update process 2 of the main control side main process shown in FIG. 221 are changed. Update the random number for determining the initial value. In the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 223, the random number is updated even when the setting process for changing the set value is executed. This is because the hardware random number that determines the win is updated regardless of whether the setting is being changed or the setting is confirmed, so the random number generated by the software is also updated at the same timing as the hardware random number is started, that is, By updating during the process of setting change and setting confirmation, inconsistency between hardware random numbers and software random numbers is unlikely to occur, and the design value of the expected value of the production in the game and the expected value from which the jackpot is derived at the time of a specific production It is possible to suppress the deviation from.

After that, the set value confirmation process (FIG. 215) is executed to determine whether the set value is within the normal range (step S2334). The set value confirmation process is periodically executed in the timer interrupt process, but even if the set value confirmation process is not executed in the timer interrupt process, it is at the start of fluctuation and at the time of switching the game state (for example, the jackpot probability). It is advisable to take the opportunity of the establishment of specific conditions such as at the time of switching, at the start or end of the jackpot game, at the start or end of the time saving state, or at the time of fraud detection (for example, at the time of opening the door or at the time of magnetic detection). Even if the determination is not made periodically in a short cycle as in the execution of timer interrupt processing, the resource consumption of the main control MPU 1311 can be suppressed if the determination is made when a specific condition is satisfied.

Then, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2335). By confirming the value of the setting state management area after the setting value confirmation process (step S2334, FIG. 215), when the setting value is determined to be abnormal, the value of the setting state management area immediately after is confirmed (S2335). It is controlled so that the normal game processing is not executed. If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2080 in FIG. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2336). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the LED extinguishing time is secured, and the display before and after the LED display switching appears to be mixed. And prevent the LED from flickering.

After that, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2337), and the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2338). Then, the test signal output process is executed, and the test signal is output (step S2339). Then, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2340). Before and after the start of execution of the process for outputting the test signal, the stack pointer and the register are saved and restored after the process is completed, as in the case of other out-of-game area processing. Since the test signal processing does not control the progress of the game, it is executed as a processing outside the game control area. If the test signal processing is executed as a process in the game control area but does not affect the game, it may be executed as a process in the game control area. When the test signal processing is executed as the processing in the game control area, it is not necessary to save and restore the flag registers (steps S2337 and S2340) executed before and after the test signal output processing (step S2339).

Then, the setting process is executed (step S2341). Details of the setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 224.

After that, the setting display process is executed (step S2342). Details of the setting display process will be described later with reference to FIG. 225.

Further, a peripheral board command transmission process for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2343). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a multi-byte FIFO format transmission information storage area. The command generated for each command generation is stored in the transmission information storage area, and the values (commands) stored in the transmission information storage area are sequentially transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Each time a command is generated, the generated command may be directly stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit in the FIFO format.

After that, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2344). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. After that, the register bank is switched (step S2345) by a return instruction (for example, RETI), and the process returns to the pre-interrupt process.

The process after it is determined in step S2335 that the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the set state management area is the same as the process described above in FIG. 191. After executing the output data setting process in step S2091, the process proceeds to step S2343 of FIG. 223.

FIG. 224 is a flowchart of the setting process. The setting process is executed in step S2341 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 223) when the set state management area does not have a value (00H) indicating a normal gaming state, and mainly executes a process of changing the set value.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2350). If a value indicating a RAM error is recorded in the setting status management area, a power-on command is created (step S2351), and the process returns to the caller's process.

As a result, in the case of a RAM error, a power-on operation command (A004H) indicating the RAM error is transmitted for each timer interrupt until the RAM error is cleared. This is because if the power-on operation command indicating the RAM abnormality is sent only once, the RAM abnormality is not re-notified when the command is missing, so that the peripheral control board 1510 cannot know the state of the gaming machine. Is. Further, since the function display unit 1400 is completely turned off, if the peripheral control board 1510 does not know the state of the gaming machine, the abnormality notification will not be performed, so that the state of the gaming machine cannot be confirmed from the outside. Further, when the RAM is abnormal, the game is not performed and commands other than the power-on operation command are not transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, as long as the RAM abnormal state continues, the power-on operation command is repeatedly transmitted. doing.

That is, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, a predetermined number of times (for example, a timer interrupt process) is executed in a command of the same system (for example, a power-on operation command), which is executed at a predetermined cycle. The first case in which only a small number of times such as once, two, or three times are transmitted) and the second case in which the pachinko machine is repeatedly transmitted at predetermined cycles without limiting the number of times during operation. In the second case, the same command is repeatedly transmitted regardless of whether or not the peripheral control board 1510 is correctly received, and no other game-related command is transmitted when the normal game is stopped. But it is a command to be sent.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the command related to the RAM abnormality, the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the RAM abnormality. Even if the same command is received again during the RAM abnormality notification, the command related to the received RAM abnormality may be invalidated and the current notification may be continued. By invalidating the subsequent command, for example, it is possible to prevent the voice notification from being repeated from the beginning, and the normal notification can be performed.

The command regarding the RAM abnormality may always be the same, but may differ depending on the timing of transmission. The consistency of the command may be determined by changing the command related to the RAM abnormality depending on the transmission timing. For example, by making the power-on operation command (A004H) transmitted when the RAM is abnormal at the time of power-on and the power-on operation command (A005H) transmitted when the RAM is abnormal at the time of a normal timer interrupt. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command (A005H) after the power-on command (A004H), it can determine that the RAM abnormality at the time of power-on continues. On the other hand, if the power-on command (A005H) is received without receiving the power-on command (A004H), the set value and the setting state management area recorded in the main control RAM 1312 after the power is restored (for example, during a normal game). Can be determined to be abnormal. In this way, the notification mode can be different in each of the two determined states. For example, if the RAM abnormality at the time of turning on the power continues, it is possible to notify that the RAM is abnormal, and if the RAM abnormality occurs after the power is restored, it is possible to notify that the set value is abnormal.

During the RAM abnormality notification, the player may stop the setting adjustment function (for example, the adjustment of the volume and the brightness by operating the button provided on the door frame 3). This is because the setting adjustment operation by the player during the RAM abnormality notification is considered to be an erroneous operation. Specifically, it is preferable to stop the setting adjustment function by the player until the power-on operation command indicating the normal game state is received.

If it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the setting process is repeatedly executed, so that the process related to the special symbol or the normal symbol is not executed, and the game cannot be played at all. This RAM error is caused by the setting change state by operating the setting change mode with the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on again after the power is cut off and the power failure process is executed. Then the RAM error is resolved. Then, the setting change mode is terminated by the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the original state, and the normal game can be started.

Further, when the power is turned on again, if an operation other than activating the setting change mode with the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 is performed, the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality in the setting state management area is maintained. The RAM abnormal state continues, and the normal game cannot be started. That is, in order to eliminate the RAM abnormality and bring it into the normal game state, it is necessary to always go through the setting change mode.

On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2352). Specifically, it detects the edge of the setting key 971 from ON to OFF, or whether a predetermined period has elapsed since the setting key changed from ON to OFF.

When it is determined that the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (determined as the end of setting change or setting confirmation), the output time is set in the security signal output timer (step S2353), and the setting status management area is initialized (step). S2354), the power-on setting process shown in FIG. 219 is executed (step S2355), and the process returns to the caller process.

When the operation to end the setting change mode (setting key 971 is turned off) is performed, the delay time until the security signal is turned off after the setting change mode is finished is set by setting the output time value in the security signal output timer. Provide. Therefore, even if the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends in a short time (for example, within one timer interrupt processing), only the shortest output signal of the security signal is set as the output time value in the security signal output timer. It can be secured and the hall computer can reliably detect the security signal.

If a fraud is detected during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, the security signal may be output for a period or time corresponding to the newly detected fraud while maintaining the security signal.

Furthermore, if a power failure occurs during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, if the hot start is performed in the normal gaming state when the power is restored, the security signal for the remaining time is output and the RAM is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch. Or, when the RAM is cleared by changing the setting, the security signal for the remaining time is not output. This is because the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 resets the security signal output timer value and starts the output of the security signal accompanying the initialization of the main control RAM 1312.

When the power is turned on after a power failure occurs during the security signal output, one of the five patterns of hot start, RAM clear, setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, and RAM abnormal state continuation is performed.

When the mode shifts to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the activated mode ends and a security signal is output until the delay time elapses. If the RAM error state continues, the setting change operation has not been performed even when the power is restored, so a security signal due to the continuous RAM error is output. If the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends and a power failure occurs before the delay time elapses, or if a hot start occurs after the power is restored, a security signal is output for the remaining time.

Even when the security signal is continuously output, the output of the security signal is stopped by the power-on reset signal when the power is turned on, and the timer interrupt processing is performed after a predetermined time (for example, during the startup waiting time of the peripheral control board 1510) has elapsed. After the transition, the security signal output resumes. That is, in the following cases, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs during the output of the security signal, a period for stopping the output of the security signal is provided for a predetermined period after the power is restored.
-When the power is restored by hot start after a power failure occurs during security signal output due to fraud detection, etc.-After a power failure occurs during security signal output due to a RAM error, the power is restored and the RAM error continues.・ When the power is restored after a power failure occurs during the security signal output in the setting change mode and the setting change mode continues ・ The power is restored after the power failure occurs during the security signal output in the setting confirmation mode. When the setting confirmation mode continues

In this way, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs during the security signal output, the security signal output is stopped for a predetermined period after the power is restored, so that the security signal can be used on the hall computer side. It is possible to determine whether there was an abnormality or whether the state associated with the output of the security signal was released.

Further, in the setting confirmation mode in which only the setting key 971 is operated, the security signal is output until the setting confirmation mode ends, and the delay time after the setting confirmation mode ends, regardless of the remaining time during which the security signal is output. After that, the output of the security signal is stopped. Further, even in the setting change mode in which the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated, the same processing as in the setting confirmation mode may be performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2352 that the setting key 971 has not returned to the OFF position, it is determined whether a value (02H) indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2356), and the setting is changed. If it is determined that the mode is set, it is determined whether the setting change switch 972 has been operated (step S2357). The setting change switch 972 may also be used as the RAM clear switch 954. As a result, when it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is recorded in the setting state management area and the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting value is updated by +1 (step S2358). If the set value exceeds the upper limit of 6, it is set to 0 (steps S2359 and S2360). After that, it returns to the processing of the caller.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is not recorded in the setting status management area (that is, the setting confirmation mode) or the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting value is updated. Instead, return to the caller's processing.

When determining the operation of the setting change switch 972 (immediately before or immediately after), it may be determined whether the setting key 971 is operated to ON. In this way, if the operation of the setting key 971 is determined when the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting change mode is set when a power failure occurs, and even if the setting key 971 is not operated to ON when the power failure is restored, the setting change switch 972 It is possible to prevent the setting from being changed by the operation.

FIG. 225 is a flowchart of the setting display process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The setting display process is executed in step S2342 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 223) when the setting state management area does not have a value (00H) indicating a normal gaming state, and a process of displaying the set value is executed.

First, the main control MPU 1311 clears the LED segment port (step S2370).

Then, it is determined whether or not a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2371). If no value indicating a RAM error is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminal is set so that the current setting value is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2372). On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminal is set so that the error is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2373).

After that, the LED common signal corresponding to the LED common counter is output (step S2374), and the driver is driven to output the display data (segment signal) corresponding to the set value or the error display to the base display 1317 (step S2375). , Return to caller processing.

[12-18. Another example of setting change / confirmation processing 3]
Next, another embodiment of the pachinko machine having the setting changing function will be described. In the third example described below, the timer interrupt process for the setting change process is provided separately from the timer interrupt process for the normal game, which is the main difference from the second example described above. The processing other than that described below is the same as that of the second example described above.

In the third example, as in the second example, the set value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972, but the original main control RAM 1312 of the RAM clear switch 954 In order to distinguish between the initialization function and the setting change function, the operation for changing the setting value may be described as the setting change switch 972.

226 and 227 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on.

First, the main control MPU 1311 starts processing from address 8000, which is the start address of the program code, when the reset signal is released by turning on the power. The protection invalidity and the prohibited area invalidity of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protect register (step S2400). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a used area of the main control RAM 1312 so that when an access is made to a prohibited area other than the designated area, it is determined to be abnormal and reset. In the third embodiment, in order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to invalid so that the entire area of the main control RAM 1312 can be accessed. Even if the unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and access is detected in the specified prohibited area, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. Good.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is immediately initialized. However, if the checksums do not match or the backup flag is not set normally, the setting change operation will not be performed after stopping the function of the gaming machine as a RAM error and making it impossible to play. The main control RAM 1312 is controlled so that the game is not executed without being initialized.

Therefore, when the prohibited area of the RAM protect register is effectively set, a reset occurs due to an erroneous access to the prohibited area of the RAM due to a malfunction or a malfunction, and when the main control MPU 1311 executes the power-on processing, the main control MPU 1311 executes the power-on processing. Since the power failure process is not executed, the checksum is not calculated, and the backup flag is not set, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. If it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, not only the game is initialized by the RAM clear process, but also the game cannot be restarted unless the hall employee performs a RAM abnormality release operation (setting change operation), so the RAM protect register is prohibited. It is desirable to set the area to "invalid".

The prohibited area may be effectively set. By effectively setting the prohibited area, if the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312 is accessed due to fraud, etc., the game cannot be restarted unless the hall clerk performs a RAM error release operation (setting change operation). Therefore, resistance to fraudulent activity can be improved.

Next, the simple clear mode timer for a predetermined time is set in the watchdog timer (step S2401), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2402). After that, the power failure clear signal is set to ON (step S2403), and the power failure clear signal is set to OFF (step S2404). By setting the power failure clear signal to ON and then setting it to OFF, the power failure warning signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal state (a state other than a power failure).

Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2405). Since the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are operated after the peripheral control board 1510 is surely started, the hole is displayed while waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to start. If the employee of the hall erroneously interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined in a state not intended by the employee of the hall. Therefore, the input state (level) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is stored in a register or the like which is a temporary storage means at an early stage after the start of the power-on processing, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 ends. By determining the status of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in a register or the like, which is a temporary storage means, even if the hall employee accidentally interrupts the key operation at an early stage after the power is turned on. , The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 at the time of power-on operation is reliably detected.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is in power failure (step S2406). If the power failure warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, so that the machine waits until the power supply voltage stabilizes in step S2406. In the loop of step S2406, since the watchdog timer is not cleared, the watchdog timer resets unless the power failure is canceled. In this reset by the watchdog timer, the program is immediately started from the start address without executing the security check like the system reset, and the power-on processing is executed. Therefore, the loop is not exited unless the power failure warning signal is released in the loop of step S2406.

In this way, the power failure determination process for detecting the power failure warning signal is, first, in steps S2406 and S2408 during power-on processing, and second in step S2450 of the main control side main process during the normal game. It is running in place. In the latter (step S2450), the power failure processing after step S2462 is executed by detecting the power failure, but in the former (steps S2406, 2408), the power failure processing is not executed even if the power failure is detected. Since the checksum value and the backup flag value are maintained during the loop period, the state at the time of the power failure can be correctly restored without executing the power failure process.

The reset in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a system reset generated by the reset circuit and a user reset generated by an access outside the designated area of the watchdog timer and the game control RAM 1312. In a system reset, the program starts after a security check of several hundred milliseconds is executed, but in a user reset, the program starts immediately without executing a security check when the reset is released.

Therefore, for example, if a reset occurs by the watchdog timer during normal game processing, the power failure processing is not executed, the checksum is not calculated, and the backup flag is not set, so that it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. To. If it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game state is initialized by the RAM clear process, and the game cannot be restarted unless the hall clerk performs the RAM abnormality release operation (setting change operation). On the other hand, in steps S2406 and S2408 during the power-on processing, even if the watchdog timer resets, the hall clerk does not perform the RAM abnormality release operation (setting change operation), and the state at the time of the power failure is correct. You can return.

In this way, regarding the reset generated by the watchdog timer, it is usual to provide a case where a setting change operation for canceling a RAM abnormality is required and a case where it is not necessary to restart the pachinko machine 1. The reset by the watchdog timer occurs during the game, when a software problem occurs, the data stored in the main control RAM 1312 is destroyed, and the content different from the game state at the time of the power failure is stored. Therefore, it is desirable to initialize the main control RAM 1312. On the other hand, the reset by the watchdog timer occurs in the power-on processing when a hardware problem occurs, and the data stored in the main control RAM 1312 is unlikely to be destroyed. Therefore, the main control RAM 1312 is initially initialized. This is because there is little need to reset it.

Although the reset generated by the watchdog timer has been described above, the same processing is performed for other types of user resets caused by the watchdog timer. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, there are a plurality of reset factors, and the above-described processing can be executed by a reset generated with one of the reset factors (for example, a user reset by a watchdog timer).

After that, the sub-start wait timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer expires, and the peripheral control board 1510 is waited for start (step S2407). The start-up wait of the peripheral control board 1510 may be any time during the period from when the power is turned on to when the command is first transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, even if the set value is not determined.

After that, it is determined again whether the power failure warning signal is in power failure (step S2408). If the power failure warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and the pachinko machine 1 stands by in step S2408. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the power failure warning signal is during a power failure may be determined not only in steps S2406 and S2408, but also in either one.

After that, the set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 215 is executed to determine whether the set value is within the normal range (step S2409).

After that, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2410), the RAM confirmation process outside the game area at power-on shown in FIG. 216 is executed, and an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is determined. (Step S2411). Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2412).

After that, the RAM abnormality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2413), and the RAM abnormality value (03H) in the setting state management area is temporarily set in the B register (step S2414).

The value set in the setting state management area in the third embodiment is different from that shown in FIG. 201 (B) in the above-described embodiment, and as shown in FIG. 220 (A), if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312. 03H is recorded. That is, the setting state management area of the third example is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, the lower 4 bits are used and the upper 4 bits are not defined. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal game state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 03H if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H in the RAM clear processing by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. Further, it is updated from 01H to 00H at the end of the setting confirmation mode, and is updated from 02H to 00H at the end of the setting change mode. Further, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, it is updated from 03H to 02H when the setting change mode is entered by the setting change operation at the next power-on, and is updated from 02H to 00H at the end of the setting change mode.

Further, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 (steps S2415 and S2416). Specifically, the checksum calculated and stored from the data used as the game control area (excluding the data saved in the stack) out of the areas backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 when the power was cut off last time, The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if the two are different, it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality. If the value of the power failure flag indicating that the backup was normally performed (the power off processing was executed normally) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data in the main control RAM 1312 is normally backed up when a power failure occurs. It is determined that there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 because it is not (the power off processing is not executed normally).

Then, if there is an abnormality in either the game control area or the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2419. On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in either the game control area or the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the RAM normality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2417), and the information in the setting state management area is set in the B register. (Step S2418), and the process proceeds to step 2219. As a result, the determination result of whether or not the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal is set in the C register. Therefore, in the subsequent processing, the RAM abnormality is determined as the determination of "RAM abnormality" and "game state before power failure". The size of the program can be reduced without having to re-execute the process (the process of determining the match of the checksum and backup flag).

Further, the value of the set state management area when a power failure occurs or the determination result (RAM abnormal value) of the main control RAM 1312 when the power is restored is set in the B register, and the RAM abnormal value is temporarily set in the set state management area in step S2419. By setting, unnecessary processing can be deleted and the size of the program can be reduced. For example, if the RAM abnormal value is not temporarily set in the setting state management area in step S2419, when YES is determined in each of the determinations in steps S2423 and S2424, the RAM abnormal value is set in the setting state management area and step S2436. It is necessary to execute the JUMP instruction to. However, since the RAM abnormal value is temporarily set in the setting state management area in step S2419, by designating S2436 as the JUMP destination at the time of determination in step S2423, JUMP is shown in the source code example illustrated below. You can reduce the number of orders.

Source code example when the RAM abnormal value is not temporarily set in step S2419
AND A, 30H; S2420
CP A, 30H; S2421 (when bit5: setting key, bit4: RAM clear SW)
JR Z, RESET_P_6;

CP B, 02H; S2422
JR Z, RESET_P_6;

CP C, 00H; S2423
JR Z, $ 111;
$ 000:
LD W, 03H; Equivalent to S2419
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
JR S2436; Jump instruction to S2436
$ 111:
CP B, 03H; S2424
JR Z, $ 000;

XOR W, W; S2425
LD (VALID_PALY), W;

Source code example when a RAM error value is temporarily set in step S2419
LD W, 03H; S2419
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
AND A, 30H; S2420
CP A, 30H; S2421
JR Z, RESET_P_6;

CP B, 02H; S2422
JR Z, RESET_P_6;

CP C, 00H; S2423
JR NZ, S2436;

CP B, 03H; S2424
JR Z, S2436;

XOR W, W; S2425
LD (VALID_PALY), W;

After that, in step S2419, a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is tentatively recorded in the setting state management area (step S2419).

Then, among the register values in which the value of the PF port is recorded, the bits of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are masked (step S2420). After that, it is determined by using the value stored in the register whether the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON when the power is turned on (step S2421). If the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON, it is determined that the setting change operation has been performed, and the process proceeds to step S2430.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is not operated and the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, it is determined whether the setting change mode was set when a power failure occurred (step S2422). For example, when the value of the B register set in step S2418 is the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode.

Then, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S2430.

On the other hand, when it is determined that no power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2423). For example, the abnormality in the game control area can be determined by using the determination result stored in the C register in step S2413 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in either the game control area or the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2436.

On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in either the game control area or the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing (step S2424). For example, if the value of the setting state management area set in the B register in S2418 is a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality, it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing.

Then, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process proceeds to step S2436. On the other hand, when it is determined that a power failure has not occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, a value (00H) indicating a normal gaming state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2425). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2425, the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality temporarily recorded in the setting state management area in step S2419 is reset to 00H as the temporary setting value. Further, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2425, the value of the setting state management area when jumping from step S2426 and S2431 to step S2435 is different. Therefore, since the value of the setting state management area differs between the normal RAM clear processing and the RAM clear processing associated with the setting change processing, the caller can be distinguished even if the programs for both RAM clear processes are shared. , It is not necessary to provide a separate program, and the program size can be reduced.

As shown in the source code example illustrated below, at the timing of step S2425, it is not determined whether 01H or 00H is recorded in the setting state management area. The determined value should be set in the setting status management area at the time of determination, but then 00H is set in the setting status management area after the RAM clear processing when it is determined that the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to ON. The process of recording is required. Therefore, since the processing contents are different between the power-on processing and the RAM clear processing when the setting is changed, dedicated processing is required for each part other than the processing for initializing the main control RAM 1312. Therefore, in order to standardize the process of initializing the main control RAM 1312 between when the setting is changed and when only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, 00H is temporarily set in step S2425.

Source code example when 00H is not temporarily set in the setting status management area in step S2425
CP A, 10H; S2426 (PF port information is stored in the A register)
JR NZ, $ 000; (bit5: setting key bit4: RAM clear SW)

LD A, (JOTAI_BF); S2427
LD (POWER_BF), A;

CP A, 20H; S2428
JR NZ, $ 111;

LD W, 01H; S2429
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
JR S2436;

$ 000:
XOR W, W; equivalent to S2425
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
JR S2435; increase

$ 111:
XOR W, W; increase
LD (VALID_PALY), W; increase
JR S2436; Increase

S2430:
LD W, 02H; S2430
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・
S2435:
[RAM clear processing]; S2435
S2436:
[Initialize all command buffers]; S2436

Source code example when 00H is temporarily set in the setting status management area in step S2425
XOR W, W; S2425
LD (VALID_PALY), W;

CP A, 10H; S2426
JR NZ, S2435;

LD A, (JOTAI_BF); S2427
LD (POWER_BF), A;

CP A, 20H; S2428
JR Z, S2436;

LD W, 01H;
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
JR S2436;
S2430:
LD W, 02H; S2430
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・
S2435:
[RAM clear processing]; S2435
S2436:
[Initialize all command buffers]; S2436

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2426). Then, if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to ON, the process proceeds to step S2435.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the operation of the setting key 971, and the value recorded in the setting state management area. For example, if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area, and 03H is maintained until the power is cut off, so that normal game processing cannot be executed. At this time, the RAM abnormality can be cleared by turning off the power once and then turning on the power by performing the setting change operation. That is, when it is determined in step S2421 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are being operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area changes from the value indicating the RAM error (03H) to the value indicating the setting change. It is updated to (02H) (step S2430), and the RAM abnormal state ends. In this way, recovery from a RAM error always goes through a setting change. In other words, since it is determined whether the setting change operation has been performed before determining whether the state at the time of power failure is a RAM abnormality, the RAM abnormality can be resolved only when the set value is changed.

When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the work area and the stack area of the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area may be initialized and the game process may be started. In this way, even if the main control RAM 1312 is determined to be abnormal, it can automatically return to the normal gaming state.

In addition, when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is stopped, the power is cut off, and when the power is restored, when it is determined that the work area in the game control area and the area outside the game control area is normal, The game process may be started by initializing the work area and the stack area in the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area. In this way, it is possible to return to the normal gaming state by operating the power switch ON / OFF.

In addition, when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is stopped, and after the power is turned off, when the power is restored, it is determined that the work areas in the game control area and the area outside the game control area are normal, and the RAM is cleared. When the switch is operated, the work area and the stack area in the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area may be initialized and the game process may be started. In this way, the normal gaming state can be restored by operating the RAM clear switch 954 after the power is cut off.

Further, when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is stopped, the power is cut off, and when the power is restored, the work areas in the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area are determined to be normal, and the settings are set. When the key 971 is being operated, the work area and the stack area of the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area may be initialized and the game process may be started. In this way, it is possible to return to the normal gaming state by operating the setting key 971 after the power is cut off.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, the game state information at the time of the power failure is stored in the power-on state buffer in order to restore the game state before the power failure occurs (step S2427). In this way, the effect (background, decorative pattern mode (low probability time)) corresponding to each gaming state (for example, low probability state or high probability state, time saving state or non-time saving state) on the peripheral control board 1510 side. Preparations are made to restore (using decorative symbols of different modes depending on the probability). In step S2300 of the power-on setting process (INITIAL_SET) executed in step S2439, the power-on operation command is performed. Used when creating.

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting key 971 has been turned ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2428). Then, if the setting key 971 is operated to ON, it is determined that the setting confirmation operation has been performed, a value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2429), and the process proceeds to S2436. .. That is, regardless of whether the state at the time of power failure is the setting confirmation mode, if only the setting key 971 is operated (if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated), the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode.

Since steps S2425 to S2429 are processes executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated, the determination of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (step S2426) and the setting key 971 Any of the determination of the operation (step S2428) of the above may be performed first. That is, as shown in the figure, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2426) and then the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2428), or the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2428). The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2426).

If YES is determined in step S2421 or step S2422, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2430). Then, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2431). For example, the determination result stored in the C register in step S2413 described above can be used to determine an abnormality outside the game control area. As a result, if there is no abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2435.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2432), and the out-of-game area RAM abnormality processing shown in FIG. 217 is executed (S2433). After that, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area is restored in step S2432 (step S2434).

Then, the work area other than the set value and the set state management area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2435). The unused area provided between the work area and the stack area may also be initialized.

After that, all command buffers are initialized (step S2436). This is because when the power is turned off without clearing the RAM while the command is stored in the command buffer, the untransmitted command stored in the command buffer is transmitted. For example, when the power is cut off during the transmission of the variation command, the symbol command may be transmitted, but the subsequent variation pattern command may not be transmitted. Then, if only the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted when the power is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 may determine that it is abnormal. Further, when an untransmitted command in the processing related to the setting change is stored in the command buffer, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the command by transmitting the untransmitted command during the setting processing after the power is restored. There is a possibility of malfunction by setting the game state. In order to prevent the occurrence of such an abnormality, the command buffer is initialized in step S2436.

Although the command buffer is initialized in step S2436, the command buffer may be cleared when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is started. In the setting change process, the command buffer is cleared when the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, so it is not necessary to clear the command buffer separately. However, in the setting confirmation process, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized. Therefore, it is advisable to clear the command buffer when moving to the setting confirmation.

After that, the functions of the devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built in the main control MPU 1311 are initially set (step S2437). Specifically, the timer interrupt cycle time is set in CTC0 for setting change processing, and CTC0 is set to interrupt enable. The time of the CTC1 that controls the timer interrupt processing in the normal game state is not set, and the interrupt of the CTC1 for the normal game remains set to prohibit.

Then, the hardware random number (for example, the winning random number) built in the main control MPU 1311 is activated (step S2438) to start updating the hardware random number, and the power-on setting process shown in FIG. 219 is executed (step S2439).

Finally, the timer interrupt is set to enable (step S2440), and the process proceeds to the main control side main process (FIG. 228).

FIG. 228 is a flowchart of the main control side main process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control side main process is executed after step S2440 of the power-on process (FIG. 227).

First, the main control MPU 1311 executes the first main loop process (steps S2450 to S2453) for the setting change process. In the first main loop process, first, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure warning signal, and determines whether a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure warning signal is ON (step S2450). In another example 3, the power failure is monitored in the main process, but the power failure may be monitored by the timer interrupt process, and the power failure process may be executed when the occurrence of the power failure is detected. For example, when it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is ON at least at the start and end of the timer interrupt, the period during which the power failure warning signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result reaches a predetermined value. It may be determined that a power failure has occurred. In another example 3, since the timer interrupt processing for setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for normal game processing are separately provided, the power failure may be monitored by any timer interrupt processing, and both timer interrupt processing may be used. Power outages may be monitored. Therefore, by making the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process into subroutines and executing these subroutines (power failure monitoring process, power failure process) in each of the two timer interrupt processes, the same program (code) of the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process is executed. ) Does not need to be incorporated into each timer interrupt process, and the size of the program can be reduced.

When the power failure warning signal is detected, the power cutoff processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

On the other hand, if the power failure warning signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, so interrupts are set to disabled (step S2451), and a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area. Determine (step S2452). If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2454 to start the normal game. On the other hand, if a value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, interrupt is set to allow (step S2453), the process returns to step S2450, and the first main loop process for the setting change process is repeatedly executed. ..

When it is determined in step S2452 that a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, after switching the interrupt timer for the normal game, the second main loop process for the normal game (steps S2457 to S2458). To execute. Before executing the second main loop processing, first, the timer interrupt cycle time is set in CTC1 for normal games (step S2454), the interrupt of CTC0 (timer interrupt for setting processing) is stopped, and the interrupt of CTC1 (step S2454) is stopped. The timer interrupt for normal game processing) is activated (step S2455), and interrupt enable is set (step S2456).

After that, the power failure warning signal is acquired, and it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure warning signal is ON (step S2457). When the power failure warning signal is detected, the power cutoff processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, so the random number update process 2 is executed (step S2458). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described with reference to FIG. 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than random numbers for determining winning in a special lottery or a normal lottery. After that, the process returns to step S2457, and the second main loop process for normal games is repeatedly executed.

When a power failure warning signal is detected in steps S2450 and S2457, power cutoff processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. In the main control side main process shown in FIG. 228,
In the power outage process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the occurrence of a power failure is executed. Specifically, first, interrupts are disabled (step S2462). As a result, the timer interrupt processing described later is not performed. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S2463). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid / power failure clear / ACK output port. It is not necessary to clear all the output ports. For example, the output ports for controlling a solenoid or a motor that consumes a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption until the main board side power off processing is completed is reduced, and the main board side power off processing can be surely ended.

After that, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2464), the power off processing is executed, and the necessary processing is executed before the power is cut off for the work area outside the game area (step S2465). ). The details of the process when the power is turned off are as shown in FIG. 222. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area is restored (step S2466).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 for determining whether or not the data stored in the backed up work area is normally held. It is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2467). This checksum is used to determine if the data backed up in the work area is normal. The area for which the checksum is calculated is the setting status management (setting value) that may be changed in the work area in the game control area between the time the power is turned on and the time the main processing on the main control side is executed. And the value of the setting status management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area should be excluded.

Further, as a power failure flag, a value (5AH) indicating that the power cutoff process was normally executed is stored in the backup flag area (step S2468). As a result, the storage of the game backup information is completed. Finally, the setting values for enabling RAM protection (write-protected) and invalidating the prohibited area are written to the RAM protect register, writing to the main control RAM 1312 is prohibited (step S2469), and the process waits until recovery from a power failure (step S2469). infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a used area of the main control RAM 1312 so that when an access is made to a prohibited area other than the designated area, it is determined to be abnormal and reset. In this embodiment, the reset function by accessing the prohibited area is canceled to enable access to the entire area. By designating an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 as a prohibited area and setting the prohibited area as valid in the RAM protect register, when an access is detected in the specified prohibited area, the main control MPU 1311 operates. It may be reset.

In the above-described processing, the processing is executed in the order of clearing the output port (step S2463), processing when the power is turned off (step S2465), calculating the checksum (step S2467), and setting the backup flag (step S2468). However, the execution order of these four processes is not limited to the one shown in the figure, and may be any other order.

In another example 3, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the main process on the main control side, but the occurrence of a power failure may be monitored by the timer interrupt process, and the power failure process may be executed based on the monitoring result. For example, in each of the two main loops, when the power failure signal is confirmed at least at the start and the end, the period during which the power failure signal is continuously output is measured, and the measurement result reaches a predetermined value. It is good to detect the occurrence of a power outage.

In the main control side main process shown in FIG. 228, two main loops are provided corresponding to each of the timer interrupt process for the setting change process and the timer interrupt for the normal game, and the setting change process is always performed once. There is an opportunity to execute timer interrupt processing. Further, at this execution trigger, the timer interrupt process for the setting change process may not be executed (for example, when branching to YES in step S2454). By providing two main loops in this way, the process of calculating the base value in the main loop for normal games (timer interrupt processing) is executed, and the unnecessary base value is calculated in the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing. It is possible to switch whether to execute the process of calculating the base value so that the process is not executed. In another example 3, since the timer interrupt processing for setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for normal game processing are separately provided, the power failure may be monitored by any timer interrupt processing, and both timer interrupt processing may be used. Power outages may be monitored. Therefore, by making the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process into subroutines and executing these subroutines (power failure monitoring process, power failure process) in each of the two timer interrupt processes, the same program (code) of the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process is executed. ) Does not need to be incorporated into each timer interrupt process, and the size of the program can be reduced.

FIG. 229 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing for setting processing executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2470). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which can be used as a register group of bank 0 and the other of which can be used as a register group of bank 1, and the banks can be switched. Is configured to allow use of either bank. In this embodiment, the register bank 0 is used in the main control side main process, and the register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt process for the setting process or the normal game. Therefore, the instruction to switch to the bank 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, but it is not necessary to execute the instruction to switch to the bank 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the bank status in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of interrupting and RET. Return from the stack area by executing the instruction. Therefore, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also configured to be restored by executing the RET instruction. If a configuration in which the bank status is not stored in the flag register is adopted, it is necessary to execute a bank switching instruction at the end of the timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Since the flag register also stores a flag that controls whether or not interrupts can be interrupted, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting interrupt enable. The flag that controls whether or not interrupts can be interrupted is set to the interrupt disabled state after stacking the flag register at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the interrupt is not enabled unless the interrupt is permitted (EI instruction or the like) or the RETI instruction is executed during the timer interrupt process.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2471).

Next, the switch input process 1 is executed (step S2472). In the switch input process 1, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and the input information is stored in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Since the switch input process 1 in step S2472 is a process related to the winning signal, the timer interrupt processing executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode determines NO in step S2473, so that the winning detection is performed. , No fraud is detected. Even if a prize is detected, the prize ball is not paid out or the fluctuation display is not executed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by the employees of the hall, and it is considered desirable that the fraud is not detected in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

Even in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected by the switch input process 1 to monitor a specific type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect fraud in which a person who intends to commit fraud (Mr. Goto) forcibly activates the setting change mode by irradiating radio waves or the like. For example, while a hall employee is changing settings or confirming settings, the door is open and the sensor attached to the door is in a position closer to the next pachinko machine. For this reason, while performing the setting change operation and setting confirmation, it is possible to detect the goto action caused by radio waves or the like in the adjacent pachinko machine.

Then, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2473). In the timer interrupt processing for the setting change processing, the value of the game state management area is normally other than 00H (01H to 03H), so the value (00H) indicating the start of the game is displayed in the setting state management area. It is not necessary to determine whether or not is recorded, but the determination is intentionally made in order to prevent fraudulent acts such as illegally shifting to the setting change mode during a normal game.

If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2479 without executing the processing related to the change of the setting value and the setting display (steps S2474 to S2478). On the other hand, if a value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the specific output port is cleared (step S2474), for example, the signal cleared as the specific output port in step 2474 is a power failure clear signal. , A solenoid signal for a large winning port / electric chew, etc., and a response signal (ACK) when a command is received to the payout control board 951. After that, the LED common port is turned off (step S2475). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the LED extinguishing time is secured, and the display before and after the LED display switching appears to be mixed. And prevent the LED from flickering.

After that, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2476), and the setting process shown in FIG. 224 is executed (step S2477). After that, the setting display process shown in FIG. 225 is executed (step S2478).

Further, a peripheral board command transmission process for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2479). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a multi-byte FIFO format transmission buffer, and the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit are sequentially transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Since the capacity of the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is finite, untransmitted commands remain in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit, and the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is full or full. If it is close to, it is preferable to control whether the command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit according to the free state of the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. For example, it is determined whether the free space of the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is larger than the size (number of bytes) of the command stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit, and if the free space is larger, the command is issued. It may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. Further, each time the command transmission process to the peripheral control board 1510 is executed, a predetermined upper limit is set for the size of the command stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit, and the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is set. If the size of the command stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit exceeds a predetermined upper limit without determining the free space, all commands cannot be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. Also, in the peripheral board command transmission process executed in the next timer interrupt process, the remaining commands may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

The upper limit may be set to the same amount or less than the amount of data that can be transmitted by the serial communication circuit (SIO) in one timer interrupt cycle. For example, when the communication speed of the serial communication circuit is 20 kbps and the timer interrupt cycle is 4 ms, serial communication of about 80 bits is possible in one timer interrupt cycle. When one command is composed of 20 bits, 80/20 = 4, so 4 commands should be the upper limit. In practice, the upper limit may be set to 5 commands, which is one more command. This is because the maximum command length is assumed to be 20 bits, but there are many commands shorter than the maximum length.

Regardless of whether a predetermined upper limit is set for the amount of command data stored in the transmission information storage area in one command transmission process, the transmission information storage area is stored in the transmission information storage area so as not to be full. The capacity of the storage area where the previous command is stored should be smaller than or the same as the capacity of the transmission information storage area.

After that, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2480). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. After that, the register bank is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2481), and the process returns to the pre-interrupt process.

In the timer interrupt process for the setting change process shown in FIG. 229, unlike the other timer interrupt processes, the random number update process (R_ATTART_K) is not executed, but since the hard random number has already been activated in S2438, it is hard. Similar to the random number, the random number update process may be executed in the timer interrupt process for the setting change process.

In another example 3, even if the test signal output process is executed by the timer interrupt process for normal games (for example, the output data setting process S2505 in FIG. 230), it is called in the timer interrupt process for the setting change process. May be good.

FIG. 230 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing for a normal game executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2490). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which can be used as a register group of bank 0 and the other of which can be used as a register group of bank 1, and the bank can be switched. Is configured to allow any bank to be used. In this embodiment, register bank 0 is used in the main control side main process, and register bank 1 is used in the setting process or the timer interrupt process for normal games. Therefore, the instruction to switch to the bank 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, but it is not necessary to execute the instruction to switch to the bank 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the bank status in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of interrupting and RET. Return from the stack area by executing the instruction. Therefore, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also configured to be restored by executing the RET instruction. If a configuration in which the bank status is not stored in the flag register is adopted, it is necessary to execute a bank switching instruction at the end of the timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Since the flag register also stores a flag that controls whether or not interrupts can be interrupted, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting interrupt enable. The flag that controls whether or not interrupts can be interrupted is set to the interrupt disabled state after stacking the flag register at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the interrupt is not enabled unless the interrupt is permitted (EI instruction or the like) or the RETI instruction is executed during the timer interrupt process.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2491).

Next, the switch input process 1 is executed (step S2492). In the switch input process 1, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and the input information is stored in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Subsequently, the random number update process 1 is executed (step S2493). In the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the initial values of the large hit symbol determination random number and the small hit symbol determination random number updated in the random number update process 2 of the main control side main process shown in FIG. 221 are changed. Update the random number for determining the initial value.

After that, the switch input special process is executed (step S2494).

After that, the timer update process is executed (step S2495). In the timer update process, for example, the time during which the special symbol display 1185 is lit according to the variation display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process, and the normal symbol variation determined by the ordinary symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the display pattern, a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has normally received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311) is input. When determining whether or not the signal is input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

Subsequently, the prize ball control process is executed (step S2494). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out based on the read input information is calculated, and the number is written to the main control RAM 1312. Further, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out the game balls can be created, and a self-check for checking the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 can be performed. Create commands. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. The main control MPU 1311 has a serial communication circuit for output of two channels, and one channel transmits a command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the other one channel transmits a command to the payout control board 951. The transfer rate (baud rate) of serial communication can be set for each channel. For example, in step S2437, the transfer rate of the serial communication circuit is set. For example, the transfer rate may be set so that the transfer rate on the payout control board 951 side is lower than the transfer data on the peripheral control board 1510 side. This is because the prize ball controlled by the payout control board 951 has a game value, so it is not easily affected by noise, etc., and is transferred at a low speed so as not to become an abnormal prize ball command due to garbled commands or omissions. On the peripheral control board 1510 side, a command for production that does not accompany the game value is transmitted, so that the production may be restored by the next command, and a large number of commands are transmitted to perform the production with good response, and the game is played. It is desirable to send a command to the peripheral control board 1510 as soon as possible so as not to give a sense of discomfort to the person. If the response of the effect is poor (for example, even if the game ball wins the start winning opening and the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 starts to fluctuate, the decorative symbol does not start to fluctuate in the effect display device 1600). This is because the player feels uneasy that it may be a malfunction.

Subsequently, the frame command reception process is executed (step S2497). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into status displays by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information for transmitting that fact to the payout control board 951 is stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Further, the main control MPU 1311 formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, a frame state display command, an error release notification command, etc.), and the transmission information storage area described above. Remember in. Specifically, the frame command reception process conforms to the command system for transmitting the command received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 in order to perform the notification corresponding to the command received from the payout control board 951. It is modified so as to be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO) like other generated commands. Further, when the command from the payout control board 951 is normally received, a signal for controlling the output of the main ACK signal is generated. The main ACK signal is output directly from the output port to the payout control board 951 instead of the serial communication circuit. The main ACK signal may be output as a command from the serial communication circuit.

Subsequently, the fraud detection process is executed (step S2498). In the fraud detection process, abnormal conditions related to fraud (magnetism, vibration, winning abnormalities, etc.) are confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and it is detected by the count switch that the game ball has entered the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 when the game is not in the big hit game state, the main control program Creates a winning abnormality display command that is classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Subsequently, a command output process at the time of passing the switch is executed, in which commands corresponding to the passing detection of various switches related to the winning switch and the start port switch are created and set in the transmission information storage area (step S2499).

Then, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2500), and the base display output process is executed (step S2501). Unlike other processes, the base display output process is a process executed using a second area outside the game control area, and is a common process that is not affected by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in order to ensure the independence of the base display output processing, predetermined data such as the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area before and after the execution of the base display output processing, and the base display is displayed. It is prevented from being updated in the output process. After that, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2502).

Subsequently, the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process are executed (step S2503). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, and the probability fluctuates based on the jackpot symbol random value. Determine whether to migrate. Then, when the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value, it is determined whether or not to open / close the big winning openings 2005 and 2006. When the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened and closed by this decision, the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened (or expanded) so that the game balls can be accepted by the large winning openings 2005 and 2006. It shifts to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Further, when the probabilistic transition condition is satisfied, the game shifts to the probability fluctuation state, and when the probability variation transition condition is not satisfied, the game state shifts to a game state other than the probability fluctuation state. Here, the "probability fluctuation state" refers to a state in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively higher than in the normal gaming state (low probability state) (high probability state).

Subsequently, the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process are executed (step S504). In the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal, a random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted, and it is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM ("" "Ordinary lottery"). Then, it is determined whether or not to open / close the second start door member 2549 according to the lottery result by the ordinary lottery. When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the second start port door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), so that the game ball can be accepted by the start port 2004, which is advantageous for the player. Move to the state.

Subsequently, the output data setting process is executed (step S2505). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951 or a big hit game. When in this state, a drive signal may be output to the attacker solenoids (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that open and close the opening / closing member 2107 of the winning openings 2005 and 2006. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the start port (second start port door member 2549), as output information to the hall computer, information output signal during probability fluctuation and special symbol display information Various information (game information) signals and security signals related to the game, such as output signals, normal symbol display information output signals, time saving and medium information output information, and start opening winning information output signals, are output to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the output data setting process, the test signal output process may be executed to output the test signal.

Further, in the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out balls counted in the switch input special process (step S2494) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal having a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal plate 784 for each predetermined number of out balls (10 or the like).

Further, in the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a game state, a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol.

Further, a peripheral board command transmission process for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2506). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a multi-byte FIFO format transmission buffer, and the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit are sequentially transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

After that, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2507). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. After that, the register bank is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2508), and the process returns to the pre-interrupt process.

[12-18. Another example of setting change / confirmation processing 4]
Next, another embodiment of the pachinko machine having the setting changing function will be described. In another example 4 described below, the processing related to the setting change is executed not by the timer interrupt processing but by the main processing on the main control side. The processing other than that described below is the same as that of the above-described alternative example 3.

In another example 4, as in the second example, the set value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972, but the original main control RAM 1312 of the RAM clear switch 954 In order to distinguish between the initialization function and the setting change function, the operation for changing the setting value may be described as the setting change switch 972.

FIG. 231 is a flowchart of the main control side main process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control side main process is executed after step S2440 of the power-on process (FIG. 227). In the main control side main process of the fourth example, steps S2481 to S2484 are executed instead of step S2452 of the main control side main process (FIG. 228) of the third example. The main control side main processing executes the setting change and setting confirmation processing not only when the timer interrupt processing for the setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for the normal game processing are separately provided as in the fourth example. It is also applicable to another example 1 and another example 2. For example, the main control main process shown in FIG. 231 includes the first main loop process (steps S2450 to S2453) for the setting process and the second main loop process (steps S2457 to S2458) for the normal game. Even in the main loop processing, one timer interrupt processing (FIG. 196 of another example 1 and FIG. 223 of another example 2) is executed. The setting processing (step 2068 in FIG. 190, step S2341 in FIG. 223) is executed in the timer interrupt processing. ) And the normal game process are executed. In this case, since there is only one timer interrupt process executed in the main loop, it is not necessary to switch the CTCs in steps S2454 and S2455 described later.

In the main control side main process shown in FIG. 231, the same reference numerals are given to the same processes as the main control side main process (FIG. 228) of the third embodiment.

First, the main control MPU 1311 executes the first main loop process (steps S2450 to S2453) for the setting process. In the first main loop process, first, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure warning signal, and determines whether a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure warning signal is ON (step S2450). In another example 4, the power failure is monitored in the main process, but the power failure may be monitored by the timer interrupt process and the power failure process may be executed when the occurrence of the power failure is detected. For example, when it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is ON at least at the start and end of the timer interrupt, the period during which the power failure warning signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result reaches a predetermined value. It may be determined that a power failure has occurred. In another example 4, since the timer interrupt processing for setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for normal game processing are separately provided, the power failure may be monitored by any timer interrupt processing, and both timer interrupt processing may be used. Power outages may be monitored. Therefore, by making the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process into subroutines and executing these subroutines (power failure monitoring process, power failure process) in each of the two timer interrupt processes, the same program (code) of the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process is executed. ) Does not need to be incorporated into each timer interrupt process, and the size of the program can be reduced.

When the power failure warning signal is detected, the power cutoff processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, so interrupts are set to disabled (step S2451), and the setting process shown in FIG. 224 is executed (step S2482). After that, the setting display process shown in FIG. 225 is executed (step S2483).

After that, it is determined whether the setting change / setting confirmation process is completed depending on whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2484). Specifically, it detects the edge of the setting key 971 from ON to OFF, or whether a predetermined period has elapsed since the setting key changed from ON to OFF. If the operation for ending the setting change / setting confirmation process has been performed, the process proceeds to step S2454 in order to start the normal game. On the other hand, if the setting change / setting confirmation process is not completed, the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is cleared (step S2485). By clearing the edge information, it is possible to prevent the set value from being changed multiple times by one operation. This is because the first main loop process may be executed multiple times while the timer interrupt process for detecting the edge of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 is executed once, so the setting was changed once. This is to prevent the setting from being changed by using the same edge information as the previous time in the first main loop process executed later. The edge information of the setting key 971 may not be cleared, but only the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 may be cleared. After that, the interrupt is set to allow (step S2453), the process returns to step S2450, and the first main loop process for the setting change process is repeatedly executed. The interrupt disabled setting is set in the processes S2482 to S2485 in order to prevent the setting change process and the setting confirmation process from being interrupted by the timer interrupt.

In the first main loop processing (steps S2450 to S2453) for the setting processing, the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is continuously cleared, and when the normal game is started (execution of the second main loop processing). (Inside), the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not referred to.

When it is determined in step S2484 that the process of changing the setting / confirming the setting is completed, the second main loop process for normal games (steps S2457 to S2458) is executed. When executing the second main loop process, first, the timer interrupt cycle time is set in CTC1 for normal games (step S2454), the interrupt of CTC0 is stopped, the interrupt of CTC1 is activated (step S2455), and then Set CTC1 to enable interrupts (step S2456).

After that, the power failure warning signal is acquired, and it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure warning signal is ON (step S2457). When the power failure warning signal is detected, the power cutoff processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, so the random number update process 2 is executed (step S2458). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described with reference to FIG. 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than random numbers for determining winning in a special lottery or a normal lottery. After that, the process returns to step S2457, and the second main loop process for normal games is repeatedly executed. When it is detected that the setting key 971 is operated to ON during the normal game (after entering the second main loop), the main control MPU 1311 generates a command to notify that fact and controls the periphery. The board 1510 may give a notification effect to the display device. Since this notification effect is performed during a normal game, it is desirable that the notification effect does not interfere with the progress of the normal game. For example, only a specific LED is lit and displayed, or characters are displayed in a narrow area of the effect display device 1600. , A specific symbol, or the like, or a specific character indicating that the setting key 971 is operated to be ON may be displayed according to the progress of the game.

When a power failure warning signal is detected in steps S2450 and S2457, power cutoff processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

In the power outage process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the occurrence of a power failure is executed. Specifically, first, interrupts are disabled (step S2462). As a result, the timer interrupt processing described later is not performed. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S2463). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid / power failure clear / ACK output port. It is not necessary to clear all the output ports. For example, the output ports for controlling a solenoid or a motor that consumes a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption until the main board side power off processing is completed is reduced, and the main board side power off processing can be surely ended.

After that, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2464), the power off processing is executed, and the necessary processing is executed before the power is cut off for the work area outside the game area (step S2465). ). The details of the process when the power is turned off are as shown in FIG. 222. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area is restored (step S2466).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 for determining whether or not the data stored in the backed up work area is normally held. It is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2467). This checksum is used to determine if the data backed up in the work area is normal. The area for which the checksum is calculated is the setting status management (setting value) that may be changed in the work area in the game control area between the time the power is turned on and the time the main processing on the main control side is executed. And the value of the setting status management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area should be excluded.

Further, as a power failure flag, a value (5AH) indicating that the power cutoff process was normally executed is stored in the backup flag area (step S2468). As a result, the storage of the game backup information is completed. Finally, the setting values for enabling RAM protection (write-protected) and invalidating the prohibited area are written to the RAM protect register, writing to the main control RAM 1312 is prohibited (step S2469), and the process waits until recovery from a power failure (step S2469). infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a used area of the main control RAM 1312 so that when an access is made to a prohibited area other than the designated area, it is determined to be abnormal and reset. In this embodiment, the reset function by accessing the prohibited area is canceled to enable access to the entire area. By designating an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 as a prohibited area and setting the prohibited area as valid in the RAM protect register, when an access is detected in the specified prohibited area, the main control MPU 1311 operates. It may be reset.

In the above-described processing, the processing is executed in the order of clearing the output port (step S2463), processing when the power is turned off (step S2465), calculating the checksum (step S2467), and setting the backup flag (step S2468). However, the execution order of these four processes is not limited to the one shown in the figure, and may be any other order.

In another example 4, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the main process on the main control side, but the occurrence of a power failure may be monitored by the timer interrupt process, and the power failure process may be executed based on the monitoring result. For example, in each of the two main loops, when the power failure signal is confirmed at least at the start and the end, the period during which the power failure signal is continuously output is measured, and the measurement result reaches a predetermined value. It is good to detect the occurrence of a power outage. In another example 4, since the timer interrupt processing for setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for normal game processing are separately provided, the power failure may be monitored by any timer interrupt processing, and both timer interrupt processing may be used. Power outages may be monitored. Therefore, by making the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process into subroutines and executing these subroutines (power failure monitoring process, power failure process) in each of the two timer interrupt processes, the same program (code) of the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process is executed. ) Does not need to be incorporated into each timer interrupt process, and the size of the program can be reduced.

In the main control side main process shown in FIG. 231, two main loops are provided corresponding to each of the timer interrupt process for the setting change process and the timer interrupt for the normal game, and the setting change process is always performed once. There is an opportunity to execute timer interrupt processing. Further, at this execution trigger, the timer interrupt process for the setting change process may not be executed (for example, when branching to YES in step S2454). By providing two main loops in this way, the process of calculating the base value in the main loop for normal games (timer interrupt processing) is executed, and the unnecessary base value is calculated in the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing. It is possible to switch whether to execute the process of calculating the base value so that the process is not executed.

FIG. 232 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process for setting change processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. In another example 4, the setting change / setting confirmation process is repeatedly executed in the main loop for the setting process. Therefore, in the timer interrupt processing for the setting change processing in the alternative example 4, the setting change / setting confirmation processing (steps S2477 to S2478) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 229) for the setting change processing in the alternative example 3 is deleted. It is a timer.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2470). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one is used as a register group of bank 0, and the other can be used as a register group of bank 1, and bank switching is performed. It is configured so that the registers of both banks cannot be used without. Register bank 0 is used in the main control side main processing, and register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, although the instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, it is not necessary to execute the instruction to switch the bank to 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the bank status in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of interrupting and RET. Return from the stack area by executing the instruction. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also restored. If a configuration in which the bank status is not stored in the flag register is adopted, a bank switching instruction is executed at the end of timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Since the flag register also stores a flag that controls whether or not interrupts can be interrupted, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting interrupt enable. The flag that controls whether or not interrupts can be interrupted is set to the interrupt disabled state after stacking the flag register at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the interrupt is not enabled unless the interrupt is permitted (EI instruction or the like) or the RETI instruction is executed during the timer interrupt process.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2471).

Next, the switch input process 1 is executed (step S2472). In the switch input process 1, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and the input information is stored in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Since the switch input process 1 in step S2472 is a process related to a winning signal, in the timer interrupt processing executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, even if a winning is detected, the prize ball is paid out, a special symbol, or the like. The process related to the progress of the game, such as the variable display of the symbol, is not executed. In addition, although winning detection regarding the progress of the game is performed, detection regarding fraud such as magnets and shocks (vibrations) is not executed. This is because the employees in the hall perform the setting change operation and setting confirmation operation, and in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, fraud such as magnets and shocks (vibrations) is not performed, and fraud due to magnetism or vibration is not performed. This is because it is considered desirable not to detect it.

Even in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected by the switch input process 1 to monitor a specific type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect fraud in which a person who intends to commit fraud (Mr. Goto) forcibly activates the setting change mode by irradiating radio waves or the like.

Then, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2473). In the timer interrupt process for the setting change process, it is not necessary to determine the value of the game state management area. This is to deal with fraudulent acts that illegally shift to the setting change process. Further, it is determined before the switch input process 1 (step S2472) whether or not the value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the set state management area, and the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the set state management area. If so, it may proceed after the peripheral board command transmission process (step S2479).

If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the set state management area, the process proceeds to step S2479 without executing the processes related to the change and display of the set value (steps S2474 to S2476). If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, an abnormality notification command for notifying that an abnormal timer interrupt process is being executed may be generated. This is because when the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the timer interrupt processing for the setting change processing shown in FIG. 232 is not executed, and some abnormality has occurred. As the mode of this abnormality notification, a notification using a liquid crystal, a lamp, or a sound such as a notification of a magnet, a radio wave, a vibration, or the like, or a security signal may be output from an external terminal plate 784. One or more of these notification modes may be adopted to notify one or a combination.

On the other hand, if a value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the specific output port is cleared (step S2474), for example, the signal cleared as the specific output port in step 2474 is a power failure clear signal. , A solenoid signal for a large winning port / electric chew, etc., and a response signal (ACK) when a command is received to the payout control board 951. After that, the LED common port is turned off (step S2475). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the LED extinguishing time is secured, and the display before and after the LED display switching appears to be mixed. And prevent the LED from flickering.

After that, a security signal is output from the external terminal plate 784 (step S2476). The process of outputting the security signal may also be executed in the main loop for the setting change process of the main control side main process shown in FIG. 231, similarly to the process of setting change / setting confirmation.

Further, a peripheral board command transmission process for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2479). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a multi-byte FIFO format transmission buffer, and the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit are sequentially transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Peripheral board command transmission processing may be executed after the processing of S2480 or S2481 of the main processing is completed instead of the timer interrupt processing.

After that, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2480). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. After that, the register bank is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2481), and the process returns to the pre-interrupt process.

In the timer interrupt process for the setting change process shown in FIG. 232, unlike the other timer interrupt processes, the random number update process (R_ATTART_K) is not executed. This is because it is not necessary to update the random number generated by the software when the RAM is abnormal, but the random number update process may be executed.

[13. Pachinko machine equipped with a light guide plate]
Next, an embodiment of a pachinko machine provided with a light guide plate will be described. In recent years, pachinko machines are provided with a light guide plate that emits light by illumination on the front side of the effect display device 1600, and together with the effect display device 1600, produce a special symbol variation display game. In this type of pachinko machine, a complicated effect can be produced by using an effect display device and a light guide plate, for example, by superimposing images. Further, since the light guide plate is provided on the front surface of the effect display device, the effect with a three-dimensional effect is displayed together with the image displayed on the effect display device. In addition, there is a light guide plate that enables stereoscopic viewing using the parallax of the left and right eyes, and displays an effect with a larger stereoscopic effect.

However, the production using the light guide plate has become a rut, and it is necessary to improve the interest by a new light emission production. Further, there is a light guide plate capable of displaying a plurality of patterns on one sheet, and there is a demand for a more interesting production by displaying a wider variety of patterns.

[13-1. Construction]
FIG. 233 is an exploded perspective view of the table unit 2000 of the game board 5 as viewed from the front by disassembling the center accessory 2500 and the table effect unit 2600. FIG. 234 is a front view showing a state in which the first pattern is light-emittingly displayed in the front effect unit. FIG. 235 is a front view showing a state in which the second pattern is light-emittingly displayed in the front effect unit.

The front effect unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500. The front effect unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500. The front effect unit 2600 includes a transparent flat light guide plate 2610 that closes the frame of the center accessory 2500, and a first pattern substrate 2611 and a second pattern substrate attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500. It has 2612 and. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2613 capable of irradiating light on the right side surface of the light guide plate 2610 are mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611, and light is applied to the upper side surface of the light guide plate 2610 on the second design substrate 2612. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2614 capable of irradiating the light guide plate are mounted.

The first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 are arranged perpendicular to the light guide plate 2610 so that the side surface of the light guide plate 2610 can be irradiated with light. Therefore, from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, only the side surfaces of the first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 can be seen, and the first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 can be seen from the player side. It has become spicy and looks good in the game area 5a.

In this embodiment, the light guide plate (front light guide plate) 2610 will be described, but another back light guide plate may be provided between the light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600.

The light guide plate 2610 has a first pattern 2621 (see FIG. 234) formed by innumerable first reflecting portions having irregularities that reflect light from above to the front side, and light from the lateral direction on the front side. It has a second pattern 2622 (see FIG. 235) formed by innumerable second reflecting portions having an uneven shape to be reflected to. That is, when the front effect unit 2600 emits 2613 the light guide plate LED of the first pattern substrate 2611, the first pattern 2621 can be emitted and displayed on the light guide plate 2610, and the light guide plate LED 2614 of the second pattern substrate 2612 is displayed. When the light is emitted, the second pattern 2622 is emitted and displayed on the light guide plate 2610. The plurality of LEDs 2613 and 2614 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 are preferably full-color LEDs, and are highly directional light emitting sources (LEDs with lenses) that irradiate light in a narrow range. Is desirable. By using the full-color LED, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 can be transferred to the light guide plate 2610 by any single color or a plurality of colors (for example, seven rainbow colors).

The light guide plate 2610 is finely formed with irregularities forming a plurality of first reflecting portions for copying the first pattern 2621 and unevenness forming a plurality of second reflecting portions for copying the second pattern 2622. In a state where the light guide plate LED 2613 of the first pattern substrate 2611 and the light guide plate LED 2614 of the second pattern substrate 2612 do not emit light, the light guide plate 2610 transmits light and is arranged on the back side. Various decorative objects of the unit 3000, an effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the like can be satisfactorily visually recognized. The light guide plate 2610 has a transmission region that can be seen through the effect display device 1600 provided on the back surface side even when the light guide plate LEDs 2613 and 2614 are in a light emitting state, and the light guide plate 2610 is not reflected and is polished. A matte region processed into a glass shape, a lame region in which a reflection pattern that reflects transmitted light is formed regardless of the traveling direction of light in the light guide plate 2610, and a light emitting portion of the light guide plate LED 2613 ( That is, a moving region in which a reflection pattern is formed so as to change whether light is emitted or not depending on the traveling direction of light in the light guide plate 2610 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 234, the first symbol 2621 becomes a part of the production of the special symbol variation display game together with the image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as described later. The first pattern 2621 is composed of moving regions 2621a and 2621c, lame regions 2621b and 2621d, and a matte region 2621e. The outside of the first pattern 2621 is a transmission region 2621f. In the moving regions 2621a and 2621c, a part of the light guide plate LED 2613 of the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned on, and the lighting portion is switched so that the moving region 2621a emits light or the moving region 2621c emits light. Therefore, by blinking the light guide plate LED 2613, it is possible to make the size of the first pattern 2621 appear to change.

In the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234, the moving region and the lame region are arranged by being repeated twice, but the repetition may be repeated any number of times. By forming the first pattern 2621 by repeating the moving area and the lame area a plurality of times, the first pattern 2621 can express a complicated movement. Further, in the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234, the moving region and the lame region are alternately repeated, but the characteristic (that is, the moving region emits light) without sandwiching the lame region between the moving regions. Moving regions having different incident positions of light) may be arranged adjacent to each other.

By causing the light guide plate LED 2613 to emit light so that the light emitting color is changed by the light guide plate LED 2613, the color can be changed for each moving region 2621a to illuminate. Then, by sequentially changing the emission color of the light guide plate LED2613 (for example, repeating red → orange → yellow → green → blue → indigo → purple → red), the pattern appears to move as the color changes. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 235, the second pattern 2622 is a pattern in which a plurality of light streaks extend diagonally downward. The second pattern 2622 is formed so that an obliquely extending light streak corresponds to the position of the light guide plate LED 2614 mounted on the second pattern substrate 2612. That is, when one LED 2614 for a light guide plate is made to emit light, a streak of light extending diagonally downward of the light guide plate 2610 is emitted from the portion of the LED 2614 for the light guide plate that emits light on the upper side of the light guide plate 2610.

Since the second pattern 2622 is farther from the light guide plate LED 2614 as it goes downward in the light guide plate 2610, the brightness of the light streaks becomes darker as it goes downward in the light guide plate 2610. As a result, when the second pattern 2622 is viewed from the front (player side), the light streaks appear to extend backward toward the downward direction of the light guide plate 2610, and the light is radiated three-dimensionally. It is possible to make the illusion like this, and to enjoy the light emission effect by the light guide plate 2610.

Further, it is preferable to arrange the reflecting portion so that stereoscopic viewing can be performed by parallax between the left and right eyes. For example, focusing on one light streak constituting the second pattern 2622, the light guide plate 2610 differs between the left and right eyes in the second reflective portion that emits light that forms the light streak on the player's retina. By arranging it at the position, it is possible to cause parallax between the left and right eyes of the player, and it is possible to show a second pattern with depth.

As shown in FIG. 234, the light guide plate 2610 of the present embodiment has a first pattern 2621 projected by irradiation of light from one direction, depending on a matte region 2621e that does not reflect the irradiated light and the traveling direction of the light. Instead, it is composed of lame regions 2621b and 2621d in which reflection patterns that reflect transmitted light are formed, and moving regions 2621a, 2621c and 2622a in which reflection patterns that reflect light in a specific traveling direction are formed. , The first pattern can be composed of a moving pattern area (dynamic pattern) that appears to move and a still pattern area (static pattern) that appears to be stationary.

Further, one light guide plate 2610 can project the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234 and the second pattern 2622 shown in FIG. 235 depending on the difference in the illumination direction. Therefore, light of a single color (for example, red of a single wavelength or white in which light of a plurality of wavelengths is mixed) is irradiated from the lateral direction, and light of a plurality of colors is irradiated from the upper direction (for example, adjacent LED groups). (2614 emits light at different wavelengths), one light guide plate 2610 can produce a rainbow pattern (rainbow beam) shining in seven colors and a single color pattern.

In the light guide plate 2610 of the present embodiment, by irradiating light from the lateral direction, the matte region 2621e of the first pattern 2621, the still pattern in the lame areas 2621b and 2621d, and the moving pattern appearing to move in the moving areas 2621a, 2621c and 2622a. Is reflected. That is, the light guide plate effect by both the still pattern and the moving pattern is performed by the first pattern 2621 by irradiating the light from the lateral direction. In this case, the still pattern and the moving pattern by the first pattern 2621 are projected at the same time.

Unlike the above, the first pattern 2621 is composed of a matte area and a lame area, and the first pattern 2621 does not have to include the moving pattern. In this case, the light guide plate effect is performed by the still pattern by the first pattern 2621 by irradiating the light from the lateral direction and the second pattern 2622 by irradiating the light from the upper direction. In this case, the still pattern by the first pattern 2621 and the moving pattern by the second pattern 2622 can be projected at different timings. That is, the moving pattern may be projected after the still pattern is projected, or the still pattern may be projected after the moving pattern is projected. In this way, by projecting the still pattern and the moving pattern at different timings, it is possible to perform various effects. In particular, by displaying a rainbow pattern as a moving pattern and then displaying a specific character as a still pattern, it is possible to produce an effect in which the character descends. On the other hand, by displaying the background with the still pattern and then displaying the character with the moving pattern, it is possible to produce an effect in which the character moves at a specific place.

In the light guide plate 2610 of this embodiment, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 may be superposed and arranged. When light is irradiated from the horizontal direction and the upward direction, in the region where the two patterns are overlapped on the light guide plate 2610, the reflection patterns of the two patterns are provided in a mixed manner, so that the two patterns can be recognized together. .. However, when the first pattern 2621 is a picture to be viewed in a plane and the second pattern 2622 is a picture to be viewed stereoscopically, stereoscopic viewing may be difficult in an area where the two patterns are mixed. When the reflection pattern of the first pattern 2621 is not provided and the transmission area 2621f through which the back surface side (effect display device 1600) can be seen is provided and the pattern by the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622 is projected, the second pattern 2622 is played. It can be easily stereoscopically viewed by a person.

In the light guide plate 2610 of this embodiment, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 may be arranged in different regions without being superimposed. If the first pattern 2621 is a plan view and the second pattern 2622 is a stereoscopic pattern, stereoscopic view may be difficult in an area where the two patterns coexist. Therefore, the first pattern is the first. By separating the area where the reflection pattern of the picture 2621 is provided and the area where the reflection pattern of the second picture 2622 is provided and projecting the picture by the reflection pattern of the second picture 2622, the second picture can be easily stereoscopically displayed to the player. You can see it.

[13-2. Light guide plate configuration]
Next, a specific configuration of the reflecting portion will be described. FIG. 236 is a diagram showing the structure of the light guide plate 2610 (particularly, the arrangement of the reflecting portion).

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 has a transmission region 2621f through which the back surface side (effect display device 1600) can be seen and a matte region 2621e that does not reflect the irradiated light, regardless of the traveling direction of the light. Lame regions 2621b and 2621d are provided with reflection patterns that reflect transmitted light, and moving regions 2621a, 2621c and 2622a are provided with reflection patterns that reflect light in a specific traveling direction.

FIG. 237 is a diagram showing the structure of the reflecting portion.

The reflecting portion is formed by a recess provided on the back surface side of the light guide plate 2610, and the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 is reflected to the front side of the light guide plate 2610 by the reflection of light on the boundary surface (reflection surface 2651). Then, the pattern portion of the light guide plate 2610 is made to emit light so that the player can visually recognize the pattern. Inside the light guide plate 2610, the light incident from the light guide plate LED 2614 travels inside the light guide plate 2610 with a certain spread (for example, ± 30 degrees). The light streaks constituting the second pattern 2622 can be seen by reflecting the light traveling in the direction of the light streaks by the reflecting portion 2650 described below.

In the reflecting portion of the moving region 2622a shown in FIG. 237 (A), a plurality of reflecting portions 2650 are arranged along the streaks of light. The size of the reflecting portion 2650 is preferably several hundred micrometers to several millimeters, which is extremely smaller than the streaks of light appearing on the light guide plate 2610, but is shown large in the figure.

The reflecting portion 2650 is composed of a reflecting surface 2651 that reflects light, an inclined surface 2652 on the back side of the reflecting surface 2651, and a side surface 2653 formed by a curved surface. The reflecting surface 2651 is arranged at an angle of about 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 2610, and the perpendicular line of the reflecting surface 2651 and the incident direction of the reflected light are arranged at about 45 degrees. Therefore, the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 and hitting the reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650 is reflected to the front side of the light guide plate 2610 as shown in FIG. 237 (B).

Further, the light traveling in the direction perpendicular to the streaks of light appearing in the moving region 2622a, that is, along the reflecting surface 2651 and parallel to the reflecting surface 2651, does not hit the reflecting surface 2651 but is reflected by the reflecting portion 2650 and is reflected by the light guide plate 2610. Does not emit from the surface of. Similarly, the amount of light traveling in a direction having an angle (particularly an acute angle) with the streaks of light appearing in the moving region 2622a hits the reflecting surface 2651 in a small amount, and the reflecting portion 2650 reflects only a small amount of light and guides the light. Only weak light is emitted from the surface of the light plate 2610. Therefore, the light having a wavelength that reaches a large number can be seen by the player, and the pattern can be shown in the color of the light guide plate LED 2614 that emits light at a specific position.

At this time, by slightly tilting the reflecting surface 2651, the emission direction of the reflected light may be slightly shifted to the left or right from the direction perpendicular to the light guide plate 2610. Since the light source that irradiates the light guide plate 2601 of this embodiment irradiates light with strong directivity, the reflected light from the reflecting unit 2650 also reaches the player as a beam of light having directivity. Therefore, the parallax between the left and right eyes of the player can be generated, and the second pattern having a depth can be shown. That is, since the reflecting unit 2650 that reflects the light that reaches the right eye and the reflecting unit 2650 that reflects the light that reaches the left eye are at different positions, the light that reaches the right eye and the light that reaches the left eye The virtual intersection is not on the light guide plate 2610. In other words, if the virtual intersection of the light reaching the right eye and the light reaching the left eye is behind the light guide plate 2610, the pattern appears in a recessed position and reaches the light reaching the right eye and the left eye. If the virtual intersection with the light is in front of the light guide plate 2610, the pattern can be seen in the front position.

The inclined surface 2652 provided on the opposite side of the reflecting surface 2651 may be provided at an angle of approximately 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 2610 like the reflecting surface 2651, or the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610. May be formed at an angle that does not reflect on the front surface side of the light guide plate 2610 (for example, perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate 2610).

The side surface 2653 is processed into a curved surface. By processing the side surface 2653 into a curved surface instead of a flat surface, it is possible to prevent the pattern from being displayed by light coming from other than a specific direction without strongly reflecting light incident from one direction.

The reflective portions 2660 of the lame regions 2621b and 2621d shown in FIG. 238 are formed by spherical recesses provided on the back surface side of the light guide plate 2610, travel in the light guide plate 2610, and travel from a plurality of directions (that is, that is). The light arriving at the reflecting unit 2660 (by a plurality of paths) is reflected and emitted to the front side of the light guide plate 2610. Since the reflecting portion 2660 in the lame region reflects the light from the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2614, if each of the light guide plate LEDs 2614 blinks at different timings, the lame region 2621b will shine. Further, when the light guide plate LED 2614 emits light in different colors, the lame region 2621b shines with a mixture of a plurality of colors. Further, when the light guide plate LED 2614 blinks in a different color, the lame region 2621b is a mixture of a plurality of colors and glitters.

The matte region 2621e is not provided with a reflecting portion and is processed into irregularly shaped irregularities like frosted glass, so that the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is not reflected to the front side.

Up to this point, the light guide plate 2610 representing the first pattern and the second pattern has been described, but next, examples of the light guide plates representing different patterns will be described. FIG. 239 is a diagram schematically showing the relationship between the LED and the reflecting portion in the light guide plate constituting the pattern shown in FIGS. 240 to 242.

The light guide plate 2610 shown in FIG. 239 is formed on the back surface thereof, reflects light incident from any of a plurality of specific light input portions 2630 on the upper side surface of the light guide plate 2610, and emits light to the front side of the light guide plate 2610. It has a plurality of fine reflecting portions 2670. The plurality of specific light input units 2630 of the light guide plate 2610 introduce light so that the light travels in the light guide plate 2610 from a plurality of positions. The plurality of specific light input units 2630 are illustrated as the first specific light input unit 2630a, the second specific light input unit 2630b, the third specific light input unit 2630c, and the fourth specific light input unit 2630d. A specific light input unit 2630a to a seventh specific light input unit are provided. In this method, seven specific light input units 2630 (LED group 2614) are repeatedly provided for a rainbow effect in which the light guide plate emits light in seven colors, and the number of specific light input units may be determined according to the type of light emission color. The first specific light input unit 2630a to the seventh specific light input unit (not shown) repeat the upper side surface of the light guide plate 2610 in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in the figure) in order from left to right (seventh specific light input unit). After that, it returns to the beginning and is arranged in the order of becoming the first specific light input unit 2630a).

The reflection unit 2670 extends and guides in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light input unit 2630 (the direction in which the light incident from the specific light input unit 2630 travels in the light guide plate 2610). It has a boundary surface that is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light plate 2610. The reflecting portion 2670 is recessed in a pent roof-shaped triangle. The reflection unit 2670 reflects the light incident from the corresponding specific light input unit 2630 and emits the light in a direction substantially perpendicular to the front surface of the light guide plate 2610. Further, the reflecting unit 2670 reflects the light incident from the non-corresponding specific light input unit 2630 and emits the light in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical line in front of the light guide plate 2610.

As a result, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 239, the light incident from the corresponding specific incoming light unit 2630 is reflected by the reflecting unit 2670 toward the front surface of the light guide plate 2610 (perpendicular to the paper surface). However, the reflecting portion 2670 appears to emit light from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 239, the light incident from the non-corresponding specific incoming light unit 2630 is reflected by the reflecting unit 2670 in a direction other than the front front of the light guide plate 2610, and the pachinko machine 1 From the player sitting in front of the above, the reflective portion 2670 does not appear to emit light.

In this embodiment, the reflecting portion 2670 is in a state of being recessed in a triangle and extending in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific incoming light portion 2630. It is not limited to the above, and any one may extend in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light input unit 2630.

The plurality of reflection units 2670 correspond to any of the plurality of specific light input units 2630, and the plurality of first reflection units 2670a and the second specific light input unit 2630b corresponding to the first specific light input unit 2630a. 2670b of the second reflection unit corresponding to the above, a plurality of third reflection units 2670c corresponding to the third specific light input unit 2630c, and a plurality of fourth reflections corresponding to the fourth specific light input unit 2630d. Part 2670d and the like are included.

Further, the light guide plate 2610 can display a plurality of patterns 2623 capable of displaying light emission in different modes by reflecting light forward by a specific reflecting portion 2670 among the plurality of reflecting portions 2670. The plurality of patterns 2623 include a pattern 2623a composed of a plurality of first reflecting portions 2670a, a pattern 2623b composed of a plurality of second reflecting portions 2670b, a pattern 2623c composed of a plurality of third reflecting portions 2670c, and a plurality of fourth reflections. Includes a pattern 2623d and the like composed of part 2670d.

As shown in FIGS. 240 to 242, the patterns are arranged so as to circulate in order from the center to the outside.

The second pattern substrate 2612 has a strip-like shape extending to the left and right, and the LED 2614 is mounted at a position corresponding to each specific light input unit 2630. The plurality of LEDs 2614 include a first LED group 2614a corresponding to the first specific light input unit 2630a, a second LED group 2614b corresponding to the second specific light input unit 2630b, and a third specific light input unit 2630c. The third LED group 2614c corresponding to the above, the fourth LED group 2614d corresponding to the fourth specific light input unit 2630d, and the fifth LED group corresponding to the fifth specific light input unit (not shown). (Not shown), the sixth LED group (not shown) corresponding to the sixth specific light input unit (not shown), and the seventh LED group corresponding to the seventh specific light input unit (not shown). (Not shown). Note that FIG. 239 shows the first LED group 2614a to the fourth LED group 2614d, and the fifth LED group to the seventh LED group are not shown. Each LED group divides a plurality of LEDs 2614 arranged in a row in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in the figure) on the second pattern substrate 2612 in the left-right direction of the second pattern substrate 2612, and in order from left to right. (In the order of returning to the beginning and becoming the first LED group 2614a after the seventh LED group). In this embodiment, each LED group has 6 LEDs 2614 each.

Next, the light emitting effect by the table effect unit 2600 of the present embodiment will be described in detail. When the first LED group 2614a of the second pattern substrate 2612 is made to emit light, light is incident on the light guide plate 2610 from the first specific light input unit 2630a, and is reflected by the first reflection unit 2670a to the front surface of the light guide plate 2610. Since the other second reflecting portion 2670b, the third reflecting portion 2670c, the fourth reflecting portion 2670d, and the like reflect to other than the front, only the first reflecting portion 2670a appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the pattern composed of the plurality of first reflecting portions 2670a can be made to emit light.

When the second LED group 2614b of the second pattern substrate 2612 is made to emit light, light is incident on the light guide plate 2610 from the second specific light input unit 2630b, and is reflected by the second reflection unit 2670b to the front surface of the light guide plate 2610. Since the other first reflecting portion 2670a, the third reflecting portion 2670c, the fourth reflecting portion 2670d, and the like reflect to other than the front, only the second reflecting portion 2670b appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the pattern composed of the plurality of second reflecting portions 2670b can be made to emit light.

When the third LED group 2614c of the second pattern substrate 2612 is made to emit light, light is incident on the light guide plate 2610 from the third specific light input unit 2630c, and is reflected by the third reflection unit 2670c to the front surface of the light guide plate 2610. Since the other first reflecting portion 2670a, the second reflecting portion 2670b, the fourth reflecting portion 2670d, and the like reflect to other than the front, only the third reflecting portion 2670c appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the pattern composed of the plurality of third reflecting portions 2670c can be made to emit light.

When the fourth LED group 2614d of the second pattern substrate 2612 is made to emit light, light is incident on the light guide plate 2610 from the fourth specific light input unit 2630d, and is reflected by the fourth reflection unit 2670d to the front surface of the light guide plate 2610. Since the other first reflecting portion 2670a, the second reflecting portion 2670b, the third reflecting portion 2670c, and the like reflect to other than the front, only the fourth reflecting portion 2670d appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the pattern composed of the plurality of fourth reflecting portions 2670d can be made to emit light.

Similarly, when each LED group is made to emit light from the fifth LED group to the seventh LED group 2614, light is incident on the light guide plate 2610 from the corresponding specific light input unit 2630, and the light guide plate 2610 is incident on the corresponding reflection unit 2670. It reflects to the front, and the other reflecting parts 2670 reflect to other than the front, and only the corresponding reflecting part 2670 appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and is composed of the corresponding reflecting parts 2670. It is possible to make the pattern that is being emitted emit light.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of patterns 2623 can be made to emit light by switching the LED group to emit light, and the plurality of patterns are made to emit light in order to create a moving animation. It is possible to perform such a light emission effect. In particular, as shown in FIG. 240, in the light guide plate 2610 on which similar figures are superimposed, a moving effect that emits light like an animation in which there is a movement that spreads from the center to the outside or shrinks from the outside to the center. Can be done.

FIG. 240 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed by a moving effect by a light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 240, a moving effect in which the size of the pattern changes is performed by switching the position of the light emitting LED group with the passage of time.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light input unit 2630a to the seventh specific light input unit 2630 g, and corresponds to each specific light input unit 2630a to 2630 g from the first LED group 2614a. The seventh LED group 2614 g is arranged. In FIG. 240, the position corresponding to each specific light input portion is represented by the alphabet of the last character of the code.

As shown in FIG. 240 (A), when the sixth LED group 2614f and the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on and light is incident from the sixth specific light input unit 2630f and the seventh specific light input unit 2630g, the light guide plate 2610 is exposed to light. The incident light is reflected by the sixth reflecting portion 2670f and the seventh reflecting portion 2670g, and the pattern in which the sixth reflecting portion 2670f and the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

After that, when the fifth LED group 2614e and the sixth LED group 2614f are turned on and light is incident from the fifth specific light input unit 2630e and the sixth specific light input unit 2630f, the light incident on the light guide plate 2610 is reflected by the fifth reflection unit. The 2670e and the sixth reflecting portion 2670f are reflected, and the pattern in which the fifth reflecting portion 2670e and the sixth reflecting portion 2670f are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 240 (B), when the fourth LED group 2614d and the fifth LED group 2614e are turned on and light is incident from the fourth specific light input unit 2630d and the fifth specific light input unit 2630e, the light guide plate is used. The light incident on the 2610 is reflected by the fourth reflecting portion 2670d and the fifth reflecting portion 2670e, and the pattern in which the fourth reflecting portion 2670d and the fifth reflecting portion 2670e are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

After that, when the third LED group 2614c and the fourth LED group 2614d are turned on and light is incident from the third specific light input unit 2630c and the fourth specific light input unit 2630d, the light incident on the light guide plate 2610 is reflected by the third reflection unit. The 2670c and the fourth reflecting portion 2670d are reflected, and the pattern in which the third reflecting portion 2670cd and the fourth reflecting portion 2670d are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 240 (C), when the second LED group 2614b and the third LED group 2614c are turned on and light is incident from the second specific light input unit 2630b and the third specific light input unit 2630c, the light guide plate is used. The light incident on the 2610 is reflected by the second reflecting portion 2670b and the third reflecting portion 2670c, and the pattern in which the second reflecting portion 2670b and the third reflecting portion 2670c are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

In this way, by changing the position without changing the number of LED groups (LED elements) to emit light, the size of the pattern can be changed, and a moving effect of emitting light so as to move from the center to the outside can be achieved. At this time, the LED group may emit light in a single color, or each group may emit light in a different color (that is, depending on the position).

FIG. 241 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed by another moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 241, a moving effect in which the size of the pattern changes is performed by changing the number of light emitting LED groups with the passage of time.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light input unit 2630a to the seventh specific light input unit 2630 g, and corresponds to each specific light input unit 2630a to 2630 g from the first LED group 2614a. The seventh LED group 2614 g is arranged. In addition, in FIG. 241, the position corresponding to each specific light input part is represented by the alphabet of the last character of the code.

As shown in FIG. 241 (A), the second LED group 2614b to the seventh LED group 2614g are lit, and the light incident from the second specific light input unit 2630b to the seventh specific light input unit 2630g is emitted from the second reflection unit 2670b. -The seventh reflecting portion 2670g reflects, and the pattern in which the second reflecting portion 2670b to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

After that, the third LED group 2614c to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the third specific light input unit 2630c to the seventh specific light input unit 2630g is reflected by the third reflection unit 2670c to the seventh reflection unit 2670g. Then, the pattern in which the third reflecting portion 2670c to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 241 (B), the fourth LED group 2614d to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the fourth specific light input unit 2630d to the seventh specific light input unit 2630g is reflected by the fourth. The 2670d to the 7th reflecting portions 2670g are reflected, and the pattern in which the 4th reflecting portion 2670d to the 7th reflecting portion 2670g is arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

After that, the fifth LED group 2614e to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the fifth specific light input unit 2630e to the seventh specific light input unit 2630g is reflected by the fifth reflection unit 2670e to the seventh reflection unit 2670g. Then, the pattern in which the fifth reflecting portion 2670e to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 241 (C), the sixth LED group 2614f to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the sixth specific light input unit 2630f to the seventh specific light input unit 2630g is reflected by the sixth. The 2670f to the 7th reflecting portions 2670g are reflected, and the pattern in which the 6th reflecting portion 2670f to the 7th reflecting portion 2670g is arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

In this way, by changing the number of LED groups (LED elements) to emit light, the size of the pattern (light emitting range) can be changed, and a moving effect of causing the pattern to emit light so as to shrink can be produced. At this time, the LED group may emit light in a single color, or each group may emit light in a different color (that is, depending on the position).

FIG. 242 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed by another moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 242, the moving effect in which the color of the pattern changes is performed by changing the emission color of the LED group with the passage of time.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light input unit 2630a to the seventh specific light input unit 2630 g, and corresponds to each specific light input unit 2630a to 2630 g from the first LED group 2614a. The seventh LED group 2614 g is arranged. The first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are composed of full-color LEDs and can emit light in multiple colors. In FIG. 242, the position corresponding to each specific light input portion is represented by the alphabet of the last character of the code.

As shown in FIG. 242 (A), the first LED group 2614a lights up in red, the red light incident from the first specific incoming light unit 2630a is reflected by the first reflecting unit 2670a, and the first reflecting unit 2670a is arranged. The printed pattern emits light in red, and the player recognizes the red pattern. Similarly, the second LED group 2614b lights up in orange, and the orange light incident from the second specific incoming light unit 2630b is reflected by the second reflecting unit 2670b, and the pattern emits orange light. Further, the third LED group 2614c lights up in yellow, and the yellow light incident from the third specific light input unit 2630c is reflected by the third reflection unit 2670c, and the pattern emits yellow light. Further, the fourth LED group 2614d lights up in green, and the green light incident from the fourth specific incoming light unit 2630d is reflected by the fourth reflecting unit 2670d, and the pattern emits green light. Further, the fifth LED group 2614e lights up in blue, and the blue light incident from the fifth specific incoming light unit 2630e is reflected by the fifth reflecting unit 2670e, and the pattern emits blue light. Further, the sixth LED group 2614f lights up in indigo color, and the indigo light incident from the sixth specific light input unit 2630f is reflected by the sixth reflection unit 2670f, and the pattern emits indigo color. Further, the 7th LED group 2614g lights up in purple, and the 7th reflecting unit 2670g reflects the purple light incident from the 7th specific light input unit 2630g, and the pattern emits purple light.

After that, as shown in FIG. 242 (B), the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are lit in purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo, respectively, and the color of the pattern is changed. After a further lapse of time, as shown in FIG. 242 (C), the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g light up in indigo color, purple color, red color, orange color, yellow color, green color, and blue color, respectively. The color changes.

In this way, the emission color of the LEDs constituting the LED group is changed, and the color of the pattern is sequentially changed (for example, every 0.5 seconds). Since the human eye gazes at a pattern that emits light in the same color, it is possible to create a moving effect that causes the pattern to emit light so that it moves inward.

FIG. 243 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the patterns on the light guide plate 2610 and the arrangement of the LED group 2614.

In this embodiment, the plurality of LED groups 2614 correspond to the reflection unit 2670 forming one pattern, and the plurality of LED groups 2614 emit light in a predetermined pattern to display one pattern. Specifically, the light emission pattern of the LED group 2614 (specific light input unit 2630) is controlled to be repeated with the seven LED groups as the repeating unit. Further, the LED is configured to emit light with directivity and illuminate a predetermined angle range from the front of the LED.

That is, as shown in FIG. 243, the illumination range of the LEDs that emit light in the same pattern (the light emitting source of the light constituting one pattern) is the range shown by the fan shape in the figure, and the second pattern substrate 2612. In the vicinity, there is a range where the light from the LED does not reach.

Therefore, the pattern is provided at a position separated by a predetermined distance from the end portion where the light is incident on the light guide plate 2610. For example, when the illumination range of the LED is 60 degrees (half-value full angle θ = ± 30 degrees), the range where the light from the LED does not reach is an equilateral triangle, so the length of the repeating unit of the LED group (with the same pattern). The pattern is separated from the end of the light guide plate 2610 by a length of 0.87 times α (interval between LEDs that emit light).

Generally speaking, if the length α of the repeating unit of the LED group, the illumination angle of the LED is θ, and the distance away from the end of the light guide plate 2610 is L, the following relationship is obtained.
L = tan θ × α / 2

In this way, when the moving pattern that appears to move is composed of light from a plurality of LED groups, the moving pattern must be arranged at a position separated from the end of the light guide plate 2610 by a predetermined distance. That is, the moving pattern area for projecting a moving pattern is smaller than the still pattern area for projecting a stationary pattern. When the light guide plate 2610 has the same size as the display area of the effect display device 1600, the moving effect can be performed by the light guide plate 2610 in an area narrower than the display area of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the production of the variable display game, the player can be made to recognize the progress of the variable display game without hindering the visual recognition of the special symbol normally displayed near the end of the display area of the effect display device 1600. .. Further, by performing the moving effect at the central portion of the effect display device 1600 that the player pays attention to, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest due to the excitement of the player due to the moving effect.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the center accessory 2500 light guide plate 2610 of the table unit 2000 is attached has been described. In this case, the inner frame of the center accessory 2500 (from the player located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1) In the visible opening window portion), a region where the moving effect cannot be produced within a predetermined distance from the end portion of the light guide plate 2610 is created, and the region where the moving effect cannot be produced can be visually recognized by the player. In addition, the area where the moving effect can be produced becomes narrower, and the effect of the effect is reduced.

Therefore, unlike the above, the light guide plate 2610 may be attached to the back unit 3000. In this case, since the light guide plate 2610 can be made larger than the inner frame of the center accessory 2500, the area where the moving effect is impossible is hidden by the center accessory 2500, and the area where the moving effect is impossible is the display area of the effect display device 1600. By arranging it on the outside, it is possible to perform a moving effect in the entire (or most) area of the inner frame of the center accessory 2500. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the end portion of the light guide plate 2610 is located at a position away from the outer periphery of the effect display device 1600 or the outer circumference of the center accessory 2500.

Since the back unit 3000 includes various decorative bodies (decorative unit 3050, movable effect unit 3100, 3200, 3300, 3400, 3500, etc.), the end portion of the light guide plate 2610 is located behind these decorative bodies. The light guide plate 2610 can be arranged, and the light emitting device (first pattern substrate 2611, second pattern substrate 2612) can be positioned behind the decorative body. As a result, the substrate serving as a light source can be arranged at a position where the player cannot see it, and the decorativeness can be ensured.

Further, the LED for the light guide plate 2610 (LEDs 2613, 2614 for the light guide plate) and the LED for emitting light of the decorative body may be mounted on one substrate.

In this way, when the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the back unit 3000, the entire display area of the effect display device 1600 can be made into an area where a moving effect can be produced, and the player does not notice the unnaturalness due to the limitation of the moving effect area. Can be done.

FIG. 244 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed by another moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 244, the moving effect in which the color of the pattern changes is performed by changing the emission color of the LED group with the passage of time.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light input unit 2630a to the seventh specific light input unit 2630g, and the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED correspond to each specific light input unit. A group of 2614 g is arranged. The first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are composed of full-color LEDs and can emit light in multiple colors. In FIG. 244, the position corresponding to each specific light input portion is represented by the alphabet of the last character of the code.

As shown in the figure, the first LED group 2614a lights up in red, the first reflection unit 2670a reflects the red light incident from the first specific light input unit 2630a, and the pattern on which the first reflection unit 2670a is arranged is red. The player recognizes the red pattern. Similarly, the second LED group 2614b lights up in orange, and the second reflecting unit 2670b reflects the orange light incident from the second specific incoming light unit 2630b, and the pattern emits orange light. Further, the third LED group 2614c lights up in yellow, and the third reflecting unit 2670c reflects the yellow light incident from the third specific incoming light unit 2630c, and the pattern emits yellow light. Further, the fourth LED group 2614d lights up in green, and the fourth reflecting unit 2670d reflects the green light incident from the fourth specific incoming light unit 2630d, and the pattern emits green light. Further, the fifth LED group 2614e lights up in blue, and the fifth reflecting unit 2670e reflects the blue light incident from the fifth specific incoming light unit 2630e, and the pattern emits blue light. Further, the sixth LED group 2614f lights up in indigo color, and the sixth reflection unit 2670f reflects the indigo light incident from the sixth specific light input unit 2630f, and the pattern emits indigo color. Further, the 7th LED group 2614g lights up in purple, and the 7th reflecting unit 2670g reflects the purple light incident from the 7th specific light input unit 2630g, and the pattern emits purple light.

After that, each of the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g lights up in purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo, and the color of the pattern changes. After a further lapse of time, each of the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g lights up in indigo, purple, red, orange, yellow, green, and blue, and the color of the pattern changes.

In this way, the emission color of the LEDs constituting the LED group is changed, and the color of the pattern is sequentially changed (for example, every 0.5 seconds). Since the human eye gazes at a pattern that emits light in the same color, it is possible to create a moving effect that causes the pattern to emit light so that the lines of light of seven colors flow.

Although detailed description is omitted, even in the light guide plate 2610 having a pattern in which the two light streaks shown in FIG. 235 intersect, the emission color of each LED group 2614 is changed as described in FIG. 244. The color of the pattern (light streaks) changes, and you can create a moving effect that makes the pattern emit light so that the seven colors of light streaks flow. Further, by using the left-right parallax so that the streaks of light can be seen in the depth or the front side as the distance from the light source increases, a three-dimensional pattern can be displayed.

Next, the stereoscopic pattern and the plan view pattern by the light guide plate 2610 will be described.

FIG. 245 is a diagram showing a state in which a pattern viewed in a plane is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 245 (B), since the reflecting surface of the reflecting portion 2660 provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is a curved surface, the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is reflected in a plurality of directions. , Reach the player's right eye 10R and left eye 10L. Further, the reflection unit 2660 travels in the light guide plate 2610, reflects light arriving at the reflection unit 2660 from a plurality of directions (that is, by a plurality of paths), and emits light to the front side of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 245 (A), since the parallax between the left and right eyes does not occur in the pattern 2621 formed by the reflecting portion 2660, the player can place the pattern 2621 on the light guide plate 2610 as a flat pattern. Will be seen as.

FIG. 246 is a diagram showing a state in which a pattern viewed in a plane is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 246 (B), the reflecting portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 in the direction of the player's left eye 10L, and the reflecting portion 2650R is The light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is reflected in the direction of the player's right eye 10R. However, since the reflecting portion 2650L and the reflecting portion 2650R are arranged close to each other (for example, 1 mm or less), as shown in FIG. 246 (A), the left and right sides of the pattern 2621 composed of the reflecting portions 2650L and R are arranged. The parallax of the eye is small, and it can be said that the left-eye pattern formed by the reflecting portion 2650L and the right-eye pattern formed by the reflecting portion 2650R are arranged at the same position. Therefore, the player sees the pattern 2621 as a flat pattern at the position of the light guide plate 2610.

FIG. 247 is a diagram showing a state in which a picture that can be viewed stereoscopically is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 247 (B), the reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is set to an angle that reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 in the direction of the player's left eye 10L. The reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650R is set at an angle that reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 in the direction of the player's right eye 10R. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 247 (A), the left eye image 2621L and the right eye image 2621R are displaced by the distance between the reflecting portion 2650L and the reflecting portion 2650R on the light guide plate 2610, and the player can see the left and right eyes. Recognize a right-eye image and a left-eye image with a difference. In the state shown in FIG. 247, the light reaching the left eye 10L of the player and the light reaching the right eye 10R intersect at the point 2621C on the back surface side of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the player sees the pattern 2621 composed of the reflecting portions 2650L and R as a three-dimensional pattern located behind the light guide plate 2610.

FIG. 248 is a diagram showing a state in which a picture that can be viewed stereoscopically is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 248 (B), the reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is set to an angle that reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 in the direction of the player's left eye 10L. The reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650R is set at an angle that reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 in the direction of the player's right eye 10R. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 248 (A), the left eye image 2621L and the right eye image 2621R are displaced by the distance between the reflecting portion 2650L and the reflecting portion 2650R on the light guide plate 2610, and the player can see the left and right eyes. Recognize a right-eye image and a left-eye image with a difference. In the state shown in FIG. 248, the light reaching the left eye 10L of the player and the light reaching the right eye 10R intersect at the point 2621C on the surface side of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the player sees the pattern 2621 composed of the reflecting portions 2650L and R as a three-dimensional pattern in front of the light guide plate 2610.

As described above, according to the front effect unit 2600, since a plurality of different patterns can be made to emit light by one light guide plate 2610, it is necessary to provide a plurality of light guide plates for each pattern in order to display an animation or the like. However, the thickness of the front effect unit 2600 in the front-rear direction can be made as thin as possible. Further, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, the light guide plate 2610 can be positioned as close as possible to the player side, and it is easy to secure a large space behind the light guide plate 2610. it can. Therefore, since a large space can be secured on the rear side of the light guide plate 2610, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like can be arranged on the rear side of the light guide plate 2610. This makes it possible to improve the appearance in the game area 5a and make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player, and in addition to the effect of the light emitting display of the pattern 2623, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and the upper rear movable effect unit 3200. By performing a movable effect by the upper front movable effect unit 3300 or the like, it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, by arranging the light guide plate 2610 in front of the effect unit, the decorative body, and the effect display device 1600, a plurality of translucent patterns generated by the light emission of the plurality of reflecting units 2670 emerge to show a light emitting decoration that moves like an animation. Because of this, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player who is accustomed to the light emission effect using the conventional light guide plate, and it is possible to surprise and entertain the player, and at the same time, something good for the player. It is possible to make people think that there may be something, and it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since only the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the light emitting display of the pattern by the light guide plate 2610 well, the light emitting display of the pattern 2623 can be seen from other players away from the front. It becomes difficult to see, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players to notice that the effect using the light guide plate 2610 is being performed, and it is possible to suppress the attention of other players and other players. You can play the game without worrying about the player, and you can entertain the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the light guide plate 2610 is mounted in the frame of the center accessory 2500 in which the center accessory 2500 is attached in the center of the front view game area 5a, the pictures 2621 and 2622 are emitted and displayed by the LEDs 2613 and 2614. However, the light-emitting pattern does not interfere with the game in the game area 5a, and the area where the game is actually played can be visually recognized from the player side in good condition, which makes it difficult to see the game. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a feeling of distrust and to enjoy the game in a good condition.

Further, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, the peripheral edge of the light guide plate 2610 (first pattern substrate) can be obtained by matching the peripheral edge of the light guide plate 2610 with the frame of the center accessory 2500. 2611, the second pattern substrate 2612) can be made difficult to see from the player side, and it can be difficult for the player to notice the existence of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, when the pattern is displayed by light emission, the light guide plate 2610 is present. It is possible to give a strong impact to a player who thought that it was not, and to be surprised, and to entertain the light emitting display of a plurality of patterns by the light guide plate 2610 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image is provided behind the light guide plate 2610, the light emitting display of a plurality of different patterns by the light guide plate 2610 and the effect image by the effect display device 1600 are combined. Since the effect can be shown to the player, various effects can be produced by appropriately combining them, and the player can be less likely to get bored, and the player can be entertained by the effect of the light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged behind the light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the light guide plate 2610 is different from the distance to the effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is possible to display an effect image related to a plurality of patterns 2623 emitted by the light guide plate 2610 to give a sense of depth and a three-dimensional effect to the patterns 2623 displayed by emission. It is possible to show the player a production (display production) that can strongly attract interest, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, the LEDs 2613 and 2614 may be single-color LEDs or full-color LEDs. Further, the number of the specific light input unit, the reflection unit, and the LED group can be appropriately selected according to the number, shape, and size of the patterns.

[13-3. Production example]
Next, an example of the effect display using the light guide plate in the special symbol variation display game will be described. 249 to 254 are views showing an example of an effect using a light guide plate.

In the effect display shown in FIG. 249, the light guide plate 2610 is made to emit light so that a predetermined pattern is projected on the light guide plate 2610, and a movement effect of moving the image toward the predetermined image is displayed on the effect display device 1600. This effect display may be executed in a specific special symbol variation display game (for example, as a specific reach effect or a notice effect).

Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 249 (A), nothing is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the screen is completely blacked out (blacked out). This blackout causes the player to gaze at the effect display device 1600.

After that, as shown in FIG. 249 (B), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned on, and the first pattern 2621 is projected on the light guide plate 2610. As a result, the player is made to pay attention to the first pattern 2621. Then, as shown in FIG. 249 (C), a movement effect is performed in which an image moving toward the first pattern 2621 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, as shown in FIG. 249 (D), in the movement effect, the image 1611 may be moved from a plurality of locations (that is, a plurality of directions) of the effect display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621. The image 1611 moved to the effect display device 1600 and displayed may be the same color as or different from the first pattern 2621. Further, the image 1611 moved to the effect display device 1600 and displayed may have the same shape (similar shape) as the first pattern 2621 as shown in FIG. 249, or may have a different shape as shown in FIG. 250. In addition, the image 1611 and the first pattern 2621 that are moved and displayed have the same character image (the pose and face may be the same or different) and the same character (for example, the name of the character) but have the same font and color. It may be the same or different. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the light guide plate 2610 is arranged on the front side of the effect display device 1600, the back of the first pattern 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 as shown in FIG. 249 (D). It is also preferable that the image is displayed by the effect display device 1600.

After that, as shown in FIG. 249 (E), in the movement effect, the number of images 1611 moving toward the first pattern 2621 and the ratio of the moving image 1611 in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are over time. It may be changed according to.

During the movement effect, the mode of the first pattern 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed. For example, as shown in FIG. 251, the color and brightness of the first pattern 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the movement effect. The color and brightness of the first pattern 2621 may be changed continuously (gradually) or stepwise (stepwise).

Further, as shown in FIG. 252, the size of the first pattern 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the movement effect. In this case, it is advisable to provide a plurality of light guide plates and use other light guide plates to project patterns of different sizes. Further, since the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns by irradiating light from different directions, the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns in a direction different from the irradiation direction (horizontal direction) for projecting the first pattern 2621 of the initial size (for example). The first pattern 2621 of a different size (large or small) may be projected by irradiating light from (diagonal direction).

After performing the movement effect for a predetermined time, as shown in FIG. 249 (F), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned off, and the first pattern 2621 is erased from the light guide plate 2610. Further, the image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is also erased, and the entire screen is blacked out (blacked out). By this blackout, the player is made to pay attention to the effect display device 1600, and a space is created to improve the expectation for the next effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 249 (G), an image 1612 (for example, a character having a high hit reliability) different from the first pattern 2621 or the image that is moved and displayed is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, as shown in FIG. 249 (H), the size of the character image 1612 is changed. For example, if the size of the character image 1612 is increased, the player's expectation for hitting is increased, but if the size of the character image 1612 is decreased, the player's expectation for hitting is lowered. The color and facial expression of the character image 1612 may be changed. Further, the character image 1612 may be displayed in an area that overlaps with the display area of the first pattern 2621. Further, along with the display of the character image 1612, the light guide plate 2610 may be irradiated from above to project a rainbow pattern (see FIG. 235).

The character image may be projected on the light guide plate 2610. As described above, since the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns by irradiating light from different directions, the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns in a direction different from the irradiation direction (horizontal direction) for projecting the first pattern 2621 (for example, obliquely). A character image may be projected by irradiating light from the direction). Further, a plurality of light guide plates may be provided, and the character image may be projected on the other light guide plates. When character images having different sizes and facial expressions are projected on the light guide plate provided in addition to the light guide plate 2610, unlike the flat effect display device 1600, an effect display with a sense of depth is possible.

In the movement effect described above in which the image moves toward the first pattern 2621, the image on the effect display device 1600 moves after the first pattern 2621 is projected, but the image on the effect display device 1600 moves. After starting the above, the first pattern 2621 may be projected. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 253, after the blackout (FIG. 253 (A)), as shown in FIG. 253 (B), before the first pattern 2621 is projected, the first pattern 2621 is displayed. The movement effect of displaying the image moving toward the projected position on the effect display device 1600 is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 253 (C), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned on, and the first pattern 2621 is projected on the light guide plate 2610. After that, as shown in FIG. 253 (D), the movement effect of moving the image toward the first pattern 2621 is continued.

In this way, the time when the first pattern 2621 is projected (time for the light guide plate effect) and the effect time for the image 1611 to move (time when the moving image is displayed on the effect display device 1600) are the first pattern 2621. The light guide plate effect on which the image 1611 is projected may be started before or after the effect of moving the image 1611. Further, the light guide plate effect time on which the first pattern 2621 is projected may be longer or shorter than the effect time in which the image 1611 moves.

Further, as shown in FIG. 254, a variable display game may be produced by switching between a moving pattern in which the pattern on which the images are collected appears to move and a still pattern in which the image does not appear to move.

In the light guide plate effect shown in FIG. 254, when a moving pattern appears, the expectation for a big hit is high, and when a still pattern appears, the expectation for a big hit is low. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 254 (A), a still picture 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 according to the progress of the variable display game, and as shown in FIG. 254 (B), the displayed still picture is displayed. A moving effect is performed in which the image 1611 moving toward 2621 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 254 (C), the still pattern 2621 is switched to the moving pattern. Further, as shown in FIG. 254 (D), a moving effect of moving the image 1611 from a plurality of locations (that is, a plurality of directions) of the effect display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621 may be performed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 254 (E), the still pattern 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 according to the progress of the variable display game, and as shown in FIG. 254 (F), the still pattern 2621 is displayed. The moving effect of displaying the moving image 1611 on the effect display device 1600 is performed. Further, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 254 (G), even if the moving effect of moving the image 1611 from a plurality of locations (that is, a plurality of directions) of the effect display device 1600 toward the pattern 1613 is performed. Good. After that, as shown in FIG. 254 (H), the variable display game ends with a loss without switching the still pattern 2621 to the moving pattern.

In the effect shown in FIG. 254, when a specific display effect (for example, a specific reach effect, a pseudo continuous effect, or a specific look-ahead effect) is selected in the special symbol variation display game, the effect is displayed in the specific display effect. The specific image 1611 is produced integrally with the moving effect by the first pattern 2621, and in other cases, the first pattern does not have to be subjected to the moving effect.

In this way, in the production of the variable display game shown in FIG. 254, the still pattern and the moving pattern are selectively displayed by the light guide plate 2610, so that the player has a sense of expectation for the development of the variable display game. , It is possible to suppress the decline in game entertainment.

Next, an example of an effect in which an effect by a moving body is added to an effect display using a light guide plate in a special symbol variation display game will be described.

FIGS. 255 and 256 are views showing an example of an effect using the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601.

In the effect shown in FIG. 255, one pattern is composed of the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601 appearing on the front surface of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 255 (A), a part of the movable body 3601 appears or hides from the upper part of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in a short cycle according to the progress of the variable display game. Repeatedly raise the expectations of the player for a big hit. Then, as shown in FIG. 255 (B), all of the movable body 3601 appears on the front surface of the display screen of the effect display device 1600.

After that, as shown in FIG. 255 (C), the pattern 2621 superimposed on the movable body is displayed by the light emission of the light guide plate 2610, and the moving effect of displaying the image 1611 moving toward the movable body 3601 on the effect display device 1600 is performed. Do. Further, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 255 (D), a moving effect may be performed in which the image is moved from a plurality of locations (that is, a plurality of directions) of the effect display device 1600 toward the pattern 2621. ..

The movable body 3601 may be made to emit light at the timing when the movement effect starts or during the movement effect. The light emitting mode (light emitting color and light emitting timing) of the movable body 3601 may be the same as or different from the light emitting mode of the light guide plate 2610.

By selectively performing either the effect display in which the movable body 3601 shown in FIG. 249 does not appear or the effect display in which the movable body 3601 shown in FIG. 255 appears, the player's expectation for the development of the variable display game can be expected. It can be enhanced and can be a pachinko machine with a high degree of interest.

In the above-described example, the movable body 3601 is made to appear instead of the pattern on which the images are collected, but one character may be composed of the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601. For example, if the body is represented by the movable body 3601 and the face is represented by the light guide plate 2610, the facial expression can be changed by switching the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 2610. In this way, in addition to the effect produced by the effect display device 1600, various effects can be realized by the light guide plate 2610.

In the effect shown in FIG. 256, the light guide plate 2610 is used as an effect suggesting the appearance of the movable body 3601. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 256 (A), the pattern 2621 is displayed by the light emission of the light guide plate 2610 according to the progress of the variable display game, and as shown in FIG. 256 (B), the light guide plate 2610 displays the pattern 2621. A moving effect is performed in which the image 1611 moving toward the displayed pattern is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 256C, a movement effect of moving the image 1611 from a plurality of locations (that is, a plurality of directions) of the effect display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621 is performed. You may. After that, as shown in FIG. 256 (D), the movable body 3601 appears from the upper part of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, and stops at a position overlapping with the pattern 2621 of the light guide plate 2610.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 256 (E), the pattern 1613 is displayed on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the variable display game, and as shown in FIG. 256 (F), toward the displayed pattern 1613. A moving effect is performed in which the moving image 1611 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 256 (G), even if the moving effect of moving the image 1611 from a plurality of locations (that is, a plurality of directions) of the effect display device 1600 toward the pattern 1613 is performed. Good. After that, as shown in FIG. 256 (H), the movable body does not appear and the variable display game ends with a loss.

As described above, in the effect shown in FIG. 256, the effect suggesting that the movable body appears can be performed by using the light guide plate.

[14. Pachinko machine using main control MPU with serial communication function]
The main control MPU 1311 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a synchronous serial communication function in addition to the conventional 8-bit parallel bus communication function.

In a conventional pachinko machine, the input / output signals of the main control MPU 1311 in the main control board 1310 are transmitted using a parallel port in which one signal is transmitted by one signal line or an 8-bit bus. , The data output from the main control MPU 1311 may be read, or an illegal signal may be input to the main control MPU 1311 to perform an illegal act. Therefore, a configuration in which it is difficult to detect the input / output signal of the main control MPU 1311 from the outside is required, and when a serial communication function for continuously transmitting data at a predetermined timing with one signal line is used, the serial communication is performed. It becomes difficult to read data or input data at the timing of the line.

Further, the main control board 1310 is equipped with a test signal output circuit for the purpose of monitoring a signal when an inspection organization inspects a pachinko machine. For example, when inspecting the operation of a special electric accessory, a signal (for example, 5V on / off) input to a solenoid drive driver (transistor) is used to monitor the output signal of the solenoid that opens and closes the special electric accessory. The signal) was branched and used as a signal for inspection. When the serial signal transmitted in the main control board 1310 described above is output as an inspection signal, it is difficult for the inspection organization to use the serial signal as the inspection signal because a device for analyzing the serial signal is required. Is. Therefore, in a pachinko machine that transmits a signal by serial communication in the main control board 1310, it is necessary to devise an output of an inspection signal. Therefore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, by inputting one serial signal to two serial-parallel conversion circuits connected in parallel, the inspection signal changes the level at the same timing as the solenoid drive signal. Was to be generated. When configured with the output transistor open collector (or open drain) of the serial-parallel conversion circuit, the voltage level differs by changing the voltage (5V and 12V) applied to the two serial-parallel conversion circuits connected in parallel. Two synchronized signals can be generated.

Furthermore, it is necessary to reduce the number of program steps for detecting the input by serial communication and reduce the software load. In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, a part of the signal input to the main control MPU 1311 is input to the parallel / serial conversion circuit, and a part is directly input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311. It is necessary to devise whether to accept the input signal. For example, a signal whose input level needs to be determined immediately after the power is turned on may not be input to the parallel / serial conversion circuit, but may be directly input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311. This is because the level of the signal input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPUI 1311 can be detected even before the interrupt processing is executed, so that the signal level can be detected even other than the timer interrupt processing such as immediately after the power is turned on.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, depending on the number of signals directly input to the main control MPU 1311, it is not necessary to use the extended I / O using the chip select, and the signals are input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311. The signal level can be captured in bit units for each clock, and the signal level can be detected in real time without waiting for the reception of the serial signal.

FIG. 257 is a block diagram of the periphery of the synchronous serial interface of the main control board 1310, FIG. 258 is a circuit diagram showing the connection between the serial-parallel conversion circuit and the LED, and FIG. 261 is the main control MPU 1311 and its periphery. It is a figure which shows the arrangement on the main control board 1310 of a component. In addition, in FIG. 257, FIG. 258 and FIG. 261, a thick line indicates a parallel signal transmission line, and a thin line indicates a serial signal transmission line.

The main control MPU 1311 of this embodiment has an asynchronous serial communication port (asynchronous serial communication function) for communicating with other boards (peripheral control board 1510, payout control board 951 and the like), and the main control board 1310. It outputs the control signal of the synchronous serial communication port (synchronous serial communication function) for communicating with the interface circuit and other devices (solar, etc.), and is output from the abnormality detection sensor such as the vibration detection sensor and magnetic detection sensor. It has a general-purpose port to which signals are input.

The synchronous serial communication function of the main control MPU 1311 has a plurality of transmission / reception ports and a plurality of transmission ports. The communication partner of the transmission / reception port is selected by the chip select signal output from the main control MPU 1311.

The transmission / reception port is composed of a serial signal transmission terminal (SERTX), a reception signal input terminal (SERRX), a chip select output terminal (SERS0 to SERS3), and a synchronization signal output terminal (SERCK). Further, the transmission port is composed of a serial signal transmission terminal (SERTXT), a chip select output terminal (SERST), and a synchronization signal output terminal (SERCKT).

As shown in FIG. 257, one parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 and two serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are connected to the transmission / reception port. The number of parallel-serial conversion circuits connected to the transmission / reception ports is not limited to the one shown in the figure.

In addition, more serial-parallel conversion circuits may be connected by making a connection such as the parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341 without using the chip select terminal. In this case, the types of signals output from the serial-parallel conversion circuit do not increase.

The parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 connected to the transmission / reception port takes in the parallel data input when CLEAR / LOAD (negative logic) is at 0 level, and after CLEAR / LOAD (negative logic) rises to 1, a predetermined clock. Data is output from the serial port at the timing of. Signals such as a game ball detection switch (starting winning opening, large winning opening count switch, ordinary winning opening, specific area switch, ordinary symbol gate switch, game board discharge switch) and a photo sensor are input to the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341. The game ball that flows down the game area 5a is mainly detected. The parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 has a configuration having a 16-bit input port, but an integrated circuit having an 8-bit input port may be connected in parallel to form a 16-bit configuration.

Specifically, since the serial signal transmission terminal (SERTX) is connected to the CLEAR / LOAD (negative logic) of the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341, when the serial transmission signal output by the main control MPU 1311 is at 0 level. The input output signal of the game ball detection switch is taken in, and after the serial transmission signal (SERTX) rises to 1, serial data corresponding to the level of the game ball detection switch is output from the serial port at a predetermined clock timing. In this way, since the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 takes in the output signal of the game ball detection switch by using the SERTX signal as a trigger, the data of the ball detection sensor can be taken in at an arbitrary timing.

Further, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 connected to the transmission / reception ports both output signals for lighting the LEDs (function display unit 1400, base display 1317). , The data transmission destination is selected by the chip select signal from the main control MPU 1311. The serial-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 take in the serial data input when the chip select (CS) signal is at 0 level according to a predetermined clock signal, and output the signal from the parallel port at the timing when the chip select signal rises to 1. To do. The output level from the parallel port is latched in the serial-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 and is maintained until the next time the chip select signal rises to 1.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 258, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1342 are connected to the segment side of the LED and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 is connected to the common side of the LED. The serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 dynamically lights the LED by outputting a signal at a predetermined timing. The serial-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 have a configuration having a 16-bit output port, but an integrated circuit having an 8-bit output port may be connected in parallel to form a 16-bit configuration.

The main control MPU 1311 outputs a common signal at the timing of outputting 0 from the chip select terminal (SERS0), sets the display digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317, and outputs 0 from the chip select terminal (SERS1). A segment signal is output at the timing to turn on the LED.

In this embodiment, a 7-segment LED in which the anode side of the LED is a common terminal is used for the base display 1317, and when the LED is lit, a drive current is applied from the common terminal on the anode side to the segment terminal on the cathode side. It flows. However, since the integrated circuit having the same configuration is used for the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343, the direction of the current output by the driver circuit in each of the conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 (of the output transistor of the driver circuit). Polarity) will be the same. Therefore, a driver circuit 1344 is provided after the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 so that current can be supplied to the common terminal on the anode side. That is, the driver circuit 1344 has a function of outputting a drive current for lighting the LED, and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 has a function of sucking the drive current for lighting the LED.

In other words, a serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 and a driver circuit 1344 that function as signal direction regulating means for regulating the signal direction are connected to the common side of the LED (function display unit 1400, base display 1317). That is, a two-stage signal direction regulating means is provided on the common side of the LED. On the other hand, a serial-parallel conversion circuit 1342 is provided on the segment side of the LED, and a one-step signal direction regulating means is provided.

The parallel-serial conversion circuit and 1341 and the serial-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 may use an integrated circuit having only a parallel-serial conversion function and an integrated circuit having only a serial-parallel conversion function, respectively. Further, the parallel-serial conversion function and the serial-parallel conversion function may be switched and used by an integrated circuit capable of mutually converting a serial signal and a parallel signal.

Further, two serial-parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 are connected to the transmission port of the main control MPU 1311. Similar to the serial-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 described above, the serial-parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 take in the serial data input when the chip select (CS) is at 0 level according to a predetermined clock signal, and the CS is 1. Output from the parallel port at the timing when it starts up. The output of the parallel port is equipped with a transistor for the driver, and the voltage applied to the transistor for the driver is switched to generate an output signal. That is, output signals of various voltages can be generated depending on the voltage applied to the driver transistor.

An external terminal board 784 is connected to the output ports (PA0 to PA7) of channel A of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345, and signals output from the external terminal board 784 (for example, a security signal, a ball payout signal, etc.) Is output. Further, various solenoids are connected to the output ports (PB0 to PB7) of the channel B of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345, and drive signals of the various solenoids are output. Further, an inspection terminal 1348 is connected to the output ports (PB0 to PB7) of the channel B of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346, and a signal output from the inspection terminal 1348 (for example, a special electric accessory release signal, Ordinary electric accessory release signal, etc.) is output. Further, nothing is connected to the output port of channel A of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346.

The transmission port of the main control MPU 1311 can control only one channel (16 bits), and the same signal branched including the chip select is input to the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346. Therefore, the same signal is output to the parallel side. Therefore, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346 generate a set of parallel signals that change at the same timing from one serial signal. That is, for inspection, the solenoid drive signal output from the output port (PB0 to PB7) of the channel B of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the output port (PB0 to PB7) of the channel B of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346 are output. The signal changes at the same timing. Therefore, the movement of the solenoid can be accurately output from the inspection terminal 1348. In addition, + 12V is applied to the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345 to drive the solenoid with 12V, and + 5V is applied to the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346 to output a 5V inspection signal. In this way, by using two serial-parallel conversion circuits to which different voltages are applied, it is possible to generate synchronized signals having different voltage levels.

Of the outputs from the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346, the pattern on the output side of the solenoid drive signal through which a relatively large current flows is thickened, and the pattern on the output side of the inspection signal through which a relatively small current flows is thickened. The pattern may be thin. It should be noted that the resistance of the pattern may be reduced without thickening the pattern, and the pattern may be formed on both the front and back surfaces to increase the substantial cross-sectional area, or the inner layer pattern may be formed to increase the substantial cross-sectional area. May increase.

Further, since the two serial-parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 operate independently, even if the load of one conversion circuit becomes large, the waveform of the output signal of the other conversion circuit is not disturbed and affects the output signal. Does not occur. That is, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346 can output an inspection signal having the same waveform as the original waveform of the solenoid drive signal regardless of the operation of the solenoid connected to the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345, which is useful for accurate inspection. ..

A reset signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 from the reset circuit 1335. The reset signal output from the reset circuit 1335 is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the two inverter buffers of the buffer circuit 1336. When the main control MPU 1311 receives the reset signal, the operation is reset and the program is executed from the start address.

The reset signal is also input from the reset circuit 1335 to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 via the two inverter buffers of the buffer circuit 1336. When the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 receive the reset signal, the operation is reset and the display contents of the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are returned to the initial state (for example, the display is erased).

The buffer circuit 1336 has at least four inverter buffers, two inverter buffers are arranged between the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311, and the reset circuit 1335 and the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are arranged. Two inverter buffers are arranged between and. Inverter buffers with the same characteristics are placed in the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the main control MPU 1311 and the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 because they are output from the reset circuit 1335 in two paths. This is to make the waveform and timing of the reset signal to be performed the same as much as possible.

The inverter buffer of the buffer circuit 1336 functions as a signal direction regulating means for passing a signal in only one direction. By restricting the signal direction along the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343, it is possible to suppress the arrival of noise entering from the outside to the main control MPU 1311. However, when the reset circuit 1335 and the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are directly connected, the reset signal is sent to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 at a timing different from the reset signal input from the reset circuit 1335 to the main control MPU 1311. It will be entered. That is, the reset signal is transmitted to the serial-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 of the two-stage inverter buffer provided in the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the main control MPU 1311 faster, and is controlled by the main control MPU 1311. The reset command arrives at the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 first.

Therefore, in this embodiment, mainly two-stage inverter buffers are provided in the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the control MPU 1311 and the path to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343, and the main control MPU 1311 and the serial are provided. The reset signal is transmitted to the parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 at the same timing, and each circuit is reset at the same timing. In this way, the inverter buffer arranged in the path from the reset circuit 1335 to the main control MPU 1311 matches the transmission timing of the reset signal input to the paths to the serial-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 infinitely. At first glance, the circuits provided in the two paths look the same, but perform different functions.

In general, it is not necessary to arrange a special circuit in the path for transmitting the reset signal output from the reset circuit, but as in this case, a buffer (timing adjusting means) is used from the viewpoint of aligning the timing of the reset signal. ) Is required.

Further, in order to match the signal timing (delay the signal), the circuit is not limited to the above-mentioned inverter buffer, and other types of circuits that match the timing may be used. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 259 and 260, an IC accommodating six inverter buffers is adopted, but the packaged IC has one integrated six inverter buffers. It is formed on a semiconductor chip. In a semiconductor chip, a plurality of sets of circuits are formed on a silicon wafer cut out from a single crystal silicon (ingot) through several processes. This is diced to separate the circuit, and the chip-shaped circuit is packaged to form an IC. Therefore, the variation in the characteristics of each of the plurality of circuits formed on the same silicon wafer is small. In this case, in consideration of such a thing, the inverter buffers housed in one IC are arranged in two paths to have the same signal transmission characteristics on the paths.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the function display unit 1400 is arranged on the hinge side for opening and closing the frame, and the prize ball payout mechanism is also arranged on the hinge side. The game balls supplied from the island equipment where the pachinko machines are installed move in the prize ball payout mechanism in a charged state. The game ball is further charged by friction with the resin member constituting the prize ball payout mechanism. Then, when the charged game ball discharges static electricity, electromagnetic noise is generated, which invades the electronic circuit directly or through a signal path (electric wire constituting the harness).

As described above, the main control board of this embodiment executes game control by interrupt processing at a fixed cycle (the above-mentioned initialization processing to timer interrupt processing: FIGS. 21 to 23). Therefore, even if the information is reset, the peripheral control board 1510 mainly contains new information (display data) in the next interrupt cycle (4 ms later in this case) if the main control MPU 1311 is operating normally. Commanded by the control MPU 1311, it returns to normal operation.

However, when the main control MPU 1311 is reset, the time required for the initialization process of the peripheral control board 1510 that controls the effect display device 1600 is waited, so that the command to the function display unit 1400 is interrupted and the function is functioned. The display of the display unit 1400 disappears, and the player becomes anxious about whether or not the game can be continued. Therefore, it is desirable not to reset the main control MPU 1311.

Next, the arrangement of the inverter buffer in the IC package and the connection of the terminals will be described. 259 and 260 are diagrams illustrating a connection example of terminals of an IC accommodating an inverter buffer.

The ICs shown in FIGS. 259 and 260 have terminals arranged side by side (that is, in two rows) on both sides of the IC package (for example, a through-hole type Dual In-line Package or a surface mount type Small Outline Package). ), With 6 inverter buffers, and the input and output terminal numbers of each inverter buffer are 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 9-8, 11-10, 13-12. It has become.

Each inverter buffer may be a Schmitt trigger type inverter buffer having a hysteresis characteristic, not just an inverter buffer. By giving the inverter buffer a hysteresis characteristic, the waveform of the reset signal can be reliably shaped and the resistance to noise can be improved. Further, by using a Schmitt trigger type buffer, it is possible to deal with a waveform in which the input signal rises slowly. That is, in CMOS, when the input signal level is near the threshold for a long time, a large current may flow in the gate and cause latch-up. However, by using a Schmitt trigger type buffer, the input signal rises. Latch-up can be suppressed even with a slow waveform.

In the connection example shown in FIG. 259, the reset signal output from the reset circuit 1335 is input to the terminal 3 and the terminal 11, and the reset signal input to the terminal 3 is output from the terminal 4 via the inverter buffer. , Is input to the terminal 5, is output from the terminal 6 via the inverter buffer, and is input to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343. On the other hand, the reset signal input to the terminal 11 is output from the terminal 10 via the inverter buffer, input to the terminal 9, further output from the terminal 8 via the inverter buffer, and input to the main control MPU 1311. Will be done.

As described above, in the connection example shown in FIG. 259, the reset signal sent to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 is passed through the terminal on one side of the IC package in which the terminals are arranged side by side (that is, in two rows). Since the reset signal sent to the main control MPU 1311 is passed through the terminal on the other side, the reset signals of the two systems do not intersect, and the noise induced in the signal lines to the serial-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 is sent to the main control MPU 1311. Input can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in the connection example shown in FIG. 260, the reset signal output from the reset circuit 1335 is input to the terminals 1 and 3, and the reset signal input to the terminal 1 is transmitted from the terminal 2 via the inverter buffer. It is output, input to the terminal 13, further output from the terminal 12 via the inverter buffer, and input to the main control MPU 1311. On the other hand, the reset signal input to the terminal 3 is output from the terminal 4 via the inverter buffer, input to the terminal 11, and further output from the terminal 10 via the inverter buffer, and is a serial-parallel conversion circuit. It is input to 1342 and 1343.

As described above, in the connection example shown in FIG. 260, the reset signal sent to the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 is collected in a part of the IC and passed through, and the reset signal sent to the main control MPU 1311 is collected in another part. Since it is passed through, the reset signals of the two systems do not intersect, and the input of the noise induced in the signal lines to the serial-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 can be suppressed to the main control MPU 1311.

Next, the arrangement of the main control MPU 1311 and peripheral components on the main control board 1310 will be described with reference to FIG. 261.

As shown in FIG. 261, a main control MPU 1311 is mounted on the main control board 1310, and various interface circuits are arranged around the main control MPU 1311. Further, an inspection circuit arrangement area is provided on the main control board 1310, and a serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346, an interface circuit 1347, and an inspection terminal 1348 are provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area. The circuit components (serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346, interface circuit 1347, inspection terminal 1348, etc.) provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area are mounted only on the pachinko machine 1 to be inspected by the inspection institution, and are generally commercially available pachinko machines. It is not mounted on 1 (a pattern for mounting parts is provided). That is, the pachinko machine 1 generally available on the market is equipped with a connector that relays the signal output from the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345 to the solenoid, but the inspection signal output from the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346 is used. The relay inspection terminal 1348 is not mounted. Therefore, the commercially available pachinko machine 1 has a configuration in which the inspection signal is not detected by the fraudster and is not used for the fraudulent act.

As described above, in the commercially available pachinko machine 1, no component is mounted in the inspection circuit arrangement area, but a print pattern (for example, a data bus connected to the interface circuit 1347) is provided. For this reason, noise may be induced in the data bus and cause malfunction. Therefore, the wiring (print pattern) in the inspection circuit arrangement area is pulled up to the power supply (+ 5V) via a resistor (or to GND). (Pull down) to reduce the effect of noise.

Further, from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification, surface mount parts are not used in the commercially available pachinko machine 1, but the circuit parts provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area are not mounted in the commercially available pachinko machine 1. Surface mount components can be used. Therefore, the parts of the inspection circuit can be miniaturized, the inspection circuit arrangement area can be miniaturized, and the main control board 1310 can be miniaturized. Similarly, from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification, the commercially available pachinko machine 1 does not have any parts mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310, but the circuit parts provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area are commercially available pachinko machines. Since it is not mounted on 1, components can be mounted on the back surface side of the main control board 1310.

Among the components of the inspection circuit, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346 and the inspection terminal 1348 may be provided on another board arranged in the vicinity of the main control board 1310. This separate substrate is mounted only on the pachinko machine 1 that is inspected by an inspection organization, and is not mounted on the pachinko machine 1 that is generally on the market. Also in this case, the inspection signal is not output from the pachinko machine 1 which is generally on the market.

In this way, by arranging the circuit parts used for the inspection of the pachinko machine 1 in the inspection circuit arrangement area, it is easy to find the missing parts in the commercially available pachinko machine 1, and the additional parts for fraud can be easily found. Easy to find installation. Further, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346 and the interface circuit 1347 can be arranged near the inspection terminal 1348, and the main control board 1310 having high noise immunity can be configured.

Further, as shown in FIG. 261, the circuit components arranged in the inspection circuit arrangement area are oriented differently from the same type of circuit components arranged elsewhere in the main control board 1310 (eg, 180 degrees as shown). It is better to arrange it in the direction of rotation). By arranging the circuit parts in different directions in the inspection circuit arrangement area and the other place of the main control board 1310 in this way, it becomes possible to easily distinguish the parts used for the normal game from the parts for inspection. In the manufacturing process of the commercially available pachinko machine 1, it is possible to prevent erroneous mounting in which parts are erroneously placed in the inspection circuit placement area.

Further, on the main control board 1310, the symbols and numbers (or combinations thereof) of the mounted circuit parts are displayed by, for example, silk printing, but the symbols of the circuit parts arranged in the inspection circuit arrangement area and the symbols of the circuit parts are arranged. The numbers may be grouped together with the symbols and numbers following the symbols and numbers of the circuit parts used for game control. For example, the integrated circuits for game control are IC1 to IC11, and the integrated circuits arranged in the inspection circuit arrangement area are designated by the symbols after IC12. By doing so, it is possible to add non-jumping symbols and numbers to the game control circuit parts mounted on the commercially available pachinko machine 1, and it is easy to check after the circuit parts are mounted on the main control board 1310. it can.

Furthermore, if the symbols and numbers of the inspection terminals are different from the symbols and numbers of the connectors connected to the game control parts, the connectors connected to the game control parts and the inspection terminals can be easily separated. It can be distinguished, and it is possible to prevent erroneous wiring that connects cables incorrectly. In particular, if the symbol or number of the inspection terminal is the same as the symbol or number of the connection destination of the inspection device of the other party, it is convenient to connect the cable at the time of inspection and connection mistakes can be reduced.

Further, some of the general-purpose ports of the main control MPU 1311 are unused empty ports, and it is preferable to arrange the free ports so as to consolidate them at the adjacent terminals of the main control MPU 1311. That is, regardless of whether the port numbers of the unused ports are continuous, it is preferable that the terminals of the empty ports are arranged at the aggregated position. By consolidating and arranging the empty terminals, the area on the main control board 1310 where the printed pattern is not provided is aggregated, it is easy to find missing parts, and it is easy to find the installation of additional parts for fraud. It's getting easier.

Further, the terminal of the empty port is arranged at a position close to the connector through which a relatively large current flows (for example, a solenoid is connected) in the positional relationship with the connector. That is, in the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311, connectors for inputting / outputting game control signals are arranged on the left and right (up and down in the figure) on the side where the terminal of the empty port is located. Therefore, when adding an additional function to the pachinko machine 1, the design of the main control board 1310 can be easily changed without routing a long pattern.

As described above, by using serial communication for signal transmission in the main control board 1310, it is possible to reduce the wiring of the data bus, and it becomes easy to find the attachment of additional parts for fraud. That is, the wiring in which the circuit patterns of a large number of data buses are complicatedly arranged by eliminating the large number of data buses connected to a plurality of parallel interface circuits and forming several signal lines including the control line. Therefore, it becomes a neat circuit pattern. Further, by shortening the routing distance of the data line, it is possible to configure the main control board 1310 which is resistant to noise.

Further, since the number of data lines is reduced, the circuits can be arranged without being affected by the routing of the data lines, so that the I / O ICs (parallel interface circuit, serial interface circuit) can be arranged near the main control MPU 1311.

Further, by reducing the circuit pattern, the ground pattern can be increased without changing the area of the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 which is more resistant to noise can be configured.

FIG. 262 is a diagram showing the arrangement of ports in the main control MPU 1311.

The parallel output port of address D2 (chip select SERS0) is a serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343, and as shown in FIG. 258, the output ports PA0 to PA3 of channel A are on the common side of the function display unit 1400 (LED anode terminal). The output ports PA4 to PA7 are connected to the common side (anode terminal of the 7-segment LED) of the base display 1317. The output ports PB0 to PB7 of channel B of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 are not used.

Further, the parallel output port of the address D3 (chip select SERS1) is a serial-parallel conversion circuit 1342, and as shown in FIG. 258, the output ports PA0 to PA7 of the channel A are on the segment side (LED cathode) of the function display unit 1400. It is connected to the terminal), and the output ports PB0 to PB7 of the channel B are connected to the segment side (cathode terminal of the 7-segment LED) of the base display 1317.

The common side of the LED (the anode terminal of the LED) switches the output port to be turned on at regular intervals (for example, interrupts every 4 ms). When paying attention to the output port of channel A, only PA0 is turned on in the timer interrupt processing, only PA1 is turned on in the next timer interrupt processing (after 4 ms), ..., Only PA7 is turned on in the next timer interrupt processing (after 4 ms). Is repeated at a fixed cycle (4 ms x number of ports). That is, when eight ports are repeatedly switched, each port is turned on every 32 ms. Alternatively, when the output ports PA0 to PA3 and PA4 to PA7 of channel A are grouped and the output port of channel A is focused on, only PA0 and PA4 are turned on in the timer interrupt processing, and the next timer interrupt processing (after 4 ms). Only PA1 and PA5 may be turned on, ..., Only PA3 and PA7 may be turned on at a fixed cycle (4 ms × number of ports) in the next timer interrupt process (after 4 ms). By using serial communication for this fixed cycle operation, it is possible to make it difficult to detect the operation timing of the main control MPU 1311.

The parallel input port at address D5 is a parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341, and switches (ball detection sensors) for detecting game balls are connected to inputs PA1 to PA7 and PB0 to PB7. The outputs of these ball detection sensors are input to the main control MPU 1311 as serial signals and read as signals at address D5.

Further, the operation information of the setting key 971, the operation information of the RAM clear switch 954, the power failure warning signal, the main payment ACK signal, and the detection signal of the frame opening detection switch are input to the general-purpose input ports INP0 to INP4 provided in the main control MPU 1311. ing. Since these signals need to be monitored in real time (when requested by the program) or outside the timer interrupt processing (for example, immediately after the power is turned on), the main control is performed without going through the parallel-serial conversion circuit. It is directly input to MPU 1311.

Further, the general-purpose input / output ports (both input / output) IOP0 to IOP3 provided in the main control MPU 1311 have a detection signal of a radio wave detection sensor, a detection signal of a vibration detection sensor, a detection signal of a magnetic detection switch, and a detection signal of a proximity error switch. It has been entered. These signals are signals that are output when an abnormality (such as fraudulent activity or failure) occurs in the pachinko machine 1, and real-time monitoring (when requested by the program) is required. Therefore, a parallel-serial conversion circuit is used. It is directly input to the main control MPU 1311 without intervention. Further, the detection signals of these sensors and switches are used to notify the abnormality by the effect display device 1600 or voice. By this abnormality notification, the employees of the hall come to check the status of the pachinko machine, so that the game is substantially stopped. If this abnormality notification is an erroneous notification, it makes the player feel uncomfortable, so it is necessary to suppress the erroneous detection. Therefore, it is preferable to input these signals to the general-purpose input / output port and detect them a plurality of times in a short time (so-called double reading) to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise.

In this double-reading process, in one timer interrupt process, read instructions are continuously executed to determine the signal level input to the general-purpose input / output port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals. Execute multiple read instructions with several instructions in between to determine the signal level input to the general-purpose input / output port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals, or multiple reads with a wait of several clocks in between. It is performed by executing an instruction to determine the signal level input to the general-purpose input / output port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals. Therefore, when the level of a port is continuously determined via a parallel-serial conversion circuit, the level can be detected only at intervals of several tens of microseconds, whereas when the level of a general-purpose port is continuously determined, it is 1 microsecond. The level can be detected at the following intervals, and the signal level can be detected in a short cycle.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the signals of various switches and sensors that require real-time performance are directly input to the general-purpose input port and the general-purpose output port without using the extended I / O using the chip select. Since the level of the signal input to the general-purpose input / output port (for both input and output) is captured in bit units for each clock, the signal level can be detected in real time without waiting for the reception of the serial signal.

Although the general-purpose input / output ports (for both input and output) IOP4 to IOP7 are not used, some of the signals input via the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 are part of the general-purpose input / output ports (for both input / output) IOP4 to IOP7. You may enter in.

Further, although not shown, the main control MPU 1311 may have a general-purpose output port.

If the general-purpose input port is an empty terminal, pull it up to 5V via a resistor or pull it down to GND to prevent the terminal from reaching an intermediate potential and prevent the influence of noise induced in the power supply line. It should be reduced. When the general-purpose output port is an empty terminal, it may be opened, but it is preferable to pull up to 5V via a dummy resistor or pull down to GND so that the level change of the output port does not become noise.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the inspection signal is output from the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311, and the signal used for the game control is output via the serial-parallel conversion circuit. Therefore, the winning ball detection signal is aggregated and input to one port, and is easy to handle in the game control program.

Further, among the signals input to the main control MPU 1311, a signal that needs to be detected multiple times in a short time (so-called double reading) is input to the general-purpose port, and a signal that does not need to be read twice is serialized. It is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the parallel conversion circuit. Since the general-purpose port can check the signal level in real time, the signal level can be detected multiple times in a short time to eliminate the influence of noise and make a judgment. If the general-purpose input port is free, the port may be assigned so that a signal that does not need to be read twice is input to the general-purpose port.

A signal input to the main control MPU 1311 can be assigned to the general-purpose input port, but a signal input to the main control MPU 1311 and a signal output from the main control MPU 1311 are assigned to the general-purpose input / output port (for both input and output). Since both can be assigned, the general-purpose I / O port is highly versatile for changes in specifications. For this reason, it is desirable that the port to be left as a spare for adding new functions is a general-purpose input / output port (for both input and output), and it is desirable to give priority to the general-purpose input port.

Next, the timing of data output and capture by the synchronous serial signal will be described with reference to FIG. 263.

When the main control MPU 1311 outputs 0 (LOW) from the chip select terminal SERS0, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 is selected, and the main control MPU 1311 outputs a selection signal on the common side of the base display 1317. In the figure, PA7 (COM4) is selected in PA7 to PA4. After that, the main control MPU 1311 outputs a selection signal on the common side of the function display unit 1400 from the serial signal transmission terminal SERTX. In the figure, PA3 (LED-C4) is selected in PA3 to PA0.

Since no output is assigned to the B channel port of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343, nothing is originally output at the data acquisition timings of PB7 to PB0, and 1 (HIGH) is maintained. However, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the serial transmission signal SERTX output from the main control MPU 1311 is connected to the CLR / LOAD terminal that determines the data acquisition timing of the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341, and this signal is 0 ( Data is fetched from PA0 to PB7 at the time of LOW). Therefore, the serial transmission signal SERTX is set to 0 (LOW) at any timing of PB7 to PB0, and data is taken from PA0 to PB7 of the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341.

The parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 takes in the data, and after the serial transmission signal SERTX rises to 1 (HIGH), outputs the serial data from the serial signal output terminal (Q8C) according to the clock signal. During this period, the serial transmission signal SERTX is maintained at 1 (HIGH) and controlled so as not to capture new data.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, since the transmission signal of the vacant output port is used for the trigger for capturing the output of the game ball detection sensor, the data of the ball detection sensor can be captured at an arbitrary timing.

Next, another arrangement of the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 264 and 265.

It is desirable that the main control board 1310 be commonly used by a plurality of models without redesigning. However, the input / output signals of the main control board 1310 may differ depending on the model and specifications. Therefore, in this embodiment, the input / output interfaces of the main control board 1310, which differ depending on the model, are mounted on another board (input / output board 1351), and the periphery of the main control MPU 1311 common to each model is mounted on the main control board 1310. The configuration is to be used. Performance (for example, noise resistance) is evaluated and designed by making the main control board 1310 common to multiple models, that is, by making the board size, circuit design, printed circuit board artwork, component placement, etc. the same. The main control board 1310, which has stable quality, can be commonly used by a plurality of models without redesigning.

Further, when the input / output interface of the main control board 1310 is mounted on another input / output board 1351, the problem is where to divide the circuit. One is a method of separating by a serial signal line, and the second is a method of separating by a parallel signal obtained by converting a serial signal. In the former case, the number of wirings between the substrates can be reduced as compared with the latter, which is desirable. Further, in the serial signal, even if the signal itself is acquired, it is difficult to know the order in which the data is transmitted, and it is unknown which data is transmitted at which timing. Further, it is output at a speed synchronized with the clock for the serial signal, and this synchronized clock may be different from the operating clock of the main control MPU 1311 and can be changed. Therefore, it is difficult to estimate the data rate from the outside, and it is difficult to know the content of the transmitted data even if the serial signal is acquired. Therefore, it is preferable to connect the main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351 with a serial signal line.

As shown in FIG. 264, an input / output board 1351 attached to the main control board 1310 is provided, and the main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351 are mounted in the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that houses the main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351 so that it can be sealed with a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once closed. The input / output board 1351 is provided with a parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341 and a serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345. The main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351 (main control MPU 1311 and the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345) are connected by a serial communication line, and are connected by a parallel bus or a general-purpose port. The boards can be connected with a smaller number. The serial signal line may be connected by an electric wire or by a board-to-board connector.

Further, if serial communication is performed between the boards, it is difficult to analyze the data even if the signal is acquired, so that the possibility that the content of the transmitted data is known to a fraudster can be reduced. Further, since the input / output board 1351 for inputting / outputting signals for game control is configured separately from the main control board 1310 and the input / output signals changing depending on the model are set in the input / output board 1351, the main control board 1310 is modified. The number of models that can be applied without doing this can be increased, and the versatility of the main control board 1310 can be improved.

Further, by accommodating the main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351 in one main control board box 1320, the signal line for serial communication can be shortened.

Further, when the main control board 1310 is used for another model, the design of the input / output board 1351 may be changed, and the relationship between the connector of the main control board 1310 and the main control MPU 1311 does not change depending on the model. The main control board 1310, whose performance (for example, noise resistance performance) has been evaluated and whose design quality is stable, can be used. Further, if the size of the input / output board 1351 and the position of the mounting holes are not changed, the conventional main control board box 1320 can be diverted without redesigning the main control board box 1320. Further, the noise countermeasures that change for each model may be taken not by the main control board 1310 but by the input / output board 1351.

The serial-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 that output the drive signal of the base display 1317 may be arranged on the main control board 1310. When the base display 1317 is arranged on the input / output board 1351, the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are arranged on the input / output board 1351 and the signal for driving the function display unit 1400 is transmitted to the input / output board. It is good to output from 1351.

Further, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346 that generates the inspection signal may be arranged on the main control board 1310. That is, the inspection circuit arrangement area and the inspection terminal 1348 may be provided on the main control board 1310. This is because a part of the signal output from the inspection terminal 1348 is output from the main control MPU 1311 by the parallel bus. Therefore, when the inspection terminal 1348 is arranged on the input / output board 1351, the input / output with the main control board 1310 This is because the number of connecting lines to and from the substrate 1351 increases.

Further, as shown in FIG. 265, the main control board 1310 may be housed in the main control board box 1320, and the input / output board 1351 may be mounted outside the main control board box 1320.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 265, since the input / output board 1351 is provided outside the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 can be used in common even if the size of the main control board box 1320 changes. Further, since the input / output board 1351 and the main control board 1310 are housed in separate board boxes, the degree of freedom in arranging the boards is improved. Further, if the main control board box 1320 for accommodating the main control board 1310 and the input / output board box 1350 for accommodating the input / output board 1351 are separately provided, each board box becomes smaller and the board installation position becomes free. .. Further, since the main control board 1310 is provided with a base display 1317, an LED for displaying an error code, and a setting key 971, it must appear on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, but the input / output board 1351 is a pachinko machine. Since it is not necessary to be visible from the back surface side of the machine 1, the board installation position is free. As described above, in the form shown in FIG. 265, the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

In the form shown in FIG. 265, the serial signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is output to the outside of the main control board box 1320. The main control MPU 1311 outputs data from the data bus in addition to the serial signal. In pachinko machines, it is desirable not to output the data bus output from the main control MPU 1311 to the outside of the sealed main control board box 1320 so that the pachinko machine operation is not detected by fraudsters. .. However, even if the serial signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is output to the outside of the main control board box 1320, it is unlikely that a fraudster will detect the operating status of the pachinko machine. This is because the data bus outputs data according to the operating clock of the main control MPU 1311 and the data rate is constant, so that the data rate can be easily estimated from the outside, and as a result, the signal transmitted by the data bus is acquired. There are times. However, the serial signal is output at a speed synchronized with the clock for the serial signal, and the speed of this synchronous clock may be different from the operating clock of the main control MPU 1311 and can be changed. Therefore, it is difficult to estimate the data rate from the outside, and it is difficult to know the content of the transmitted data even if the serial signal is acquired.

The example in which the input / output board 1351 is provided separately from the main control board 1310 and the input / output function of the signal depending on the model is mounted on the input / output board 1351 has been described above. If there is a part that does not reduce the resistance to fraud and noise even if it is arranged, it may be mounted on the input / output board 1351. For example, the output of signals that require drive current for solenoids and motors attached to the game board 5, the output of drive signals for the function display unit 1400, and various sensors (winning ball detection, radio wave sensor, magnetic sensor, vibration sensor). The signal input of is a function that may be mounted on the input / output board 1351. Further, communication with the payout control board 951, output of a signal output from the external terminal board 784, power failure detection, input of the setting key 971 (the setting key 971 itself may be provided outside the main control board 1310), a base display. The output to 1317 is a function that should be mounted on the 1310 on the main control board.

Further, when the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345 mounted on the input / output board 1351 input a dummy signal (0V or 5V) to the empty input terminal or connect a dummy resistor to the empty output terminal. Good. This is because if nothing is connected to an empty terminal, noise may be taken in and the circuit may malfunction.

In particular, if some of the multiple signals that the fraudster tries to acquire are transmitted by a parallel bus or a general-purpose port and other signals are transmitted by a serial signal, it is difficult to analyze the serial signal. The fraudster needs to acquire signals from a plurality of locations including the main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351, and the deterrence against fraud can be enhanced.

[15. Example of power supply path inside pachinko machine]
Next, an example relating to overcurrent protection in the power supply path inside the pachinko machine will be described.

The pachinko machine 1 is supplied with an AC 24V power supply. The power supply board 931 has a power supply creation circuit 933 that creates various direct current (for example, 5V, 12V, 24V, 35V) power supplies used inside the pachinko machine 1 from an AC 24V power supply supplied to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The power output from the power supply board 931 is supplied to these effect members, control devices, and the like in order to drive accessories and lamps (LEDs) for producing and decorating the pachinko machine 1. Although the electric wire that supplies the driving power to such an effect member is generally fixed, the movable part of the driving part of the accessory has a sufficient length so that the electric wire is not pulled by the accessory. It is wired with. Therefore, due to the operation of the accessory, the electric wire may be rubbed against the member constituting the accessory or may be pinched by the movable portion of the driving portion of the accessory, and the coating of the electric wire may be damaged. If the power supply line and the ground line are close to each other under such a situation, a short circuit will occur and a large current will flow.

However, when a short circuit occurs near the power supply board 931, a large current flows, and the overcurrent protection function (fuse) mounted on the power supply board 931 operates to shut off the power supply.

However, as described above, if a short circuit occurs at a location far from the power supply board 931, a current large enough to operate the overcurrent protection function (fuse) does not flow, and the problem does not become apparent. This is because the wired electric wire becomes a load. For example, if a short circuit occurs at a place where the impedance of the electric wire is about 1Ω, and the drive power supply supplied to the effect member is 12V, the overcurrent protection function (for example, 15A fuse) of the power supply board 931 operates even though a current of 12A flows. do not. An overcurrent protection device (fuse) having an appropriate capacity considering the current flowing in a normal state may be attached to all power supply lines, but this causes an increase in component cost and assembly cost.

Therefore, especially when the power supply line and the ground line are arranged close to each other in the electric wire passing near the movable part, the board to which the electric wire is connected operates at 2 to 3 times the current actually flowing in the power supply. An overcurrent protection device (fuse) is placed to prevent a large current from flowing in the event of a short circuit.

Here, as an example of the drive device, the upper movable unit 3400 of FIG. 16 will be described.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16, the upper part of the game board 5 viewed from the front is composed of a design shaped like a mahjong stick, and is a movable stick (movable). Body) 3410 is arranged. The point stick accessory 3410 stands by at the upper position in the non-effect state, can move to the lower center position of the game board in the effect state, and rotates around the central decorative lamp 3412a at the center position of the game board. It is a thing.

Although not shown, a unit base body is provided on the right back surface that overlaps the game area when the game board is viewed from the front, and the point rod accessory 3410 is pivotally supported by a driven shaft that can be swiveled by the unit base body. Then, the turning motion of the accessory base body extending from the point bar accessory 3411 to the unit base body and the turning motion of the accessory base body are regulated and assisted (the vertical movement of the point bar accessory 3410 is restricted and assisted), and the points are pointed. It has a slit for inserting and sliding a bush provided in the accessory base of the rod accessory 3410, and is supported by an arm body movablely supported by a driven shaft in the unit base body.

In addition, a stepping motor MA for movement, a movement detection sensor, and the like for moving the point bar accessory 3410 to the lower center position of the game board are attached to the unit base body. In addition, a stepping motor MB for rotation and a rotation detection sensor for rotating the accessory base body, an LED board (4250A) on which the LED of the central decorative lamp 3412a is mounted, and other LEDs of the left and right decorative lamps 3411 are mounted. The LED substrate (4250B, etc.) is provided.

Then, the stepping motor MB for rotation, the rotation detection sensor, and the drive signal line and the detection signal line for driving the LED are routed from the accessory base body together with the power supply line and the ground line, and the relay board (3044A). , 3044B, 3044C, etc.) or directly to and connected to the effect drive substrate 3043. It should be noted that the various electric wires are determined between the standby position and the effect position of the point bar accessory 3410 of the upper movable unit 3400, have a wire length with a certain amount of play, and are bundled loose electric wires. Wiring may be performed using a flat cable. Further, although the relay board and the effect drive board are provided on the upper movable unit 3400, they may be provided on the outside.

FIG. 266 is a block diagram showing an electrical connection relationship between various substrates, a drive source, and the like for the upper movable unit 3400, which is the drive device described above.

An AC 24V power supply supplied from the outside of the pachinko machine 1 is input to the power supply board 931. The power supply board 931 has a power supply creation circuit 933, and an AC 24V power supply is input to the power supply creation circuit 933 via a fuse 934 as an overcurrent protection device (overcurrent protection means).

The power supply creation circuit 933 is composed of 24V alternating current, various direct currents used inside the pachinko machine 1 (mainly 12V, 24V, 35V used for stepping motors, solenoids, LEDs, various sensors, etc., and mainly electronic devices such as CPUs. Create a power supply such as 5V used as a control power supply for the circuit (may be created by stepping down from another DC power supply on the control board separately).

In this embodiment, a stepping motor that operates at 12 V and an LED (board) that lights and blinks using a 12 V power supply will be described as an example. Therefore, in FIG. 266, only the 12 V power supply system is shown by a thick line, and other The system is omitted. In addition, various control lines and drive lines, which will be described later, are shown by thin lines. It is assumed that each board is connected by a connector and a harness (electric wire).

The 12V power supply output from the power supply board 931 passes through the payout control board 951 from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and then through the effect drive board 3043 to various stepping motors (MA, MB) and various LED boards. It is supplied to (4250A, 4250B).

As shown in the figure, a relay board 3044B and a relay board 3044C are provided between the effect drive board 3043, the moving stepping motor MA, and the rotary stepping motor MB, respectively. Similarly, a relay board 3044A is also provided between the effect drive board 3043 and the central decorative lamp LED board 4250A. The left and right decorative lamp boards 4250B are directly connected to the effect drive board 3043.

Next, drive signals for driving various stepping motors and control signals for lighting and blinking various LEDs are input to various stepping motors (MA, MB) and various LED boards (4250A, 4250B).

When the ball entry is detected by the first start port sensor 2014 and the second start port sensor 2551 of the first start inlet 2002 and the second start port 2004 connected to the main control board 1310, the main control board The 1310 uses a control line connecting the payout control board 951 to send a command for operating the payout device 830 to execute the payout of the ball, and enters using the control line connecting the peripheral control board 1510. A command for executing the effect display based on the result of the lottery due to the detection of the sphere on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is transmitted.

Then, with the execution of the effect display, a drive device including various stepping motors (MA, MB) and various LED substrates (4250A, 4250B) is driven, but various stepping motors (MA, MB) are driven. Using the drive line connecting the stepping motors (MA, MB), the control signal (drive signal) output from the peripheral control board 1510 is input to the stepping motor driver provided on the effect drive board 3043, and further as a drive signal. It is driven by receiving the drive signal output from the production drive board.

For LEDs mounted on various LED boards, the control line connecting the various LED boards is used to temporarily receive the control signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 by the LED driver, and then use it as a drive signal on the board. Lights and blinks in response to the output drive signal.

Here, the drive signal indicates a so-called excitation signal given to each coil (each phase) in the case of a stepping motor, and in the case of an LED, the current flowing through the LED is supplied to light and blink the LED. Indicates a signal to shut off.

The stepping motor driver mounted on the effect drive board 3043 has a serial / parallel conversion function, and uses the control signals of the stepping motors serially output from the peripheral control board 1510 connected in a daisy chain as drive signals. It is a device that outputs to a motor, and is a device that operates by supplying a 12V power supply and creating a circuit power supply inside the device inside the device.

As the fuse 934, a fuse having a rated current determined by the total power consumption consumed by the pachinko machine 1 in the normal gaming state is used, and the breaking current is a value larger than the rated current.
In this embodiment, a pachinko machine 1 having a rating of 15A and a breaking current of 37.5A (2.5 times the rating) is adopted so that the pachinko machine 1 does not perform a breaking operation even with the total current consumption of the power source consumed during normal use.

Further, chip fuses 3071, 3072, 3074, and 3075 for cutting current are mounted on the effect drive board 3043 and various relay boards (3044A, 3044C), respectively. The role of these fuses will be described continuously.

[15-1. Protection of drive devices with accessories and LED decorations]
The effect drive board 3043 is connected to the LED boards 4250A and 4250B, and outputs a power source for lighting and blinking the LED and a control signal of the LED driver.

Further, the power lines output to the LED substrates 4250A and 4250B are provided with fuses 3074 and 3075 as overcurrent protection devices. This is because the operation of the accessory may cause the electric wire to rub against the members constituting the drive device or be caught in a moving part such as the drive portion of the accessory, and the coating of the electric wire may be damaged. If a short circuit occurs when the power supply line and the ground line are close to each other under the circumstances, a large current flows through the power supply line. Therefore, the fuses 3074 and 3075 are operated so that the power supply line is not burnt, and damage to the accessory constituting the drive device such as melting or burning of the accessory due to the burnout of the power line is prevented.

The rated current of each of the fuses 3074 and 3075 can be determined by the potential difference generated between the electric wires bundled and arranged together and the routing length (impedance) of the electric wires. The maximum potential difference will occur between the ground (0V) and the power supply voltage (for example, 12V), but if the wire is damaged and the internal conductor is exposed and short-circuited with the ground wire, the exposed part and the power supply From the impedance of the electric wire between the power supply board 931 which is the supply source and this maximum potential difference, the current obtained by using Ohm's law is set as the breaking current.

Assuming that the 12V power supply is a load that consumes 2A even in the normal state out of the estimate of the total current consumption of 15A, if the impedance of the electric wire up to the LED substrate 4250A is 2Ω, a current of 6A will flow at the time of short circuit. Therefore, for example, for the fuse 3075, a fuse with a rating of 2A and a breaking current of 5A (2.5 times the rating) may be adopted.

As for the fuse 3074, if the lighting and blinking LEDs are the same as those used for the LED board 4250A and the same number of LEDs are mounted, the impedance of the electric wire up to the LED board 4250B is assumed to be 1. If it is 5Ω, a current of 8A will flow at the time of a short circuit, so that a fuse 3074 with a rating of 2A and a breaking current of 5A may be adopted.

Originally, if the electric wire were to cause a short circuit no matter where it was, a large breaking current that would quickly cut off the fuse 934 provided on the power supply board 931 should flow and the fuse 934 would cut off, but in reality it is supplied to the load. Since even the electric wire for performing the fuse has been regarded as a load (electric wire impedance), in this embodiment, in a place where there is a short-circuit factor far from the power supply board, a separate fuse is taken in consideration of the impedance of the electric wire to be routed. (3071 etc.) is provided to prepare for a short circuit and shut off.

In addition, when arranging the drive device not only on the game board side but also on the door side, the length should be sufficient so that the electric wire for driving the drive device is not pulled by the opening and closing of the door by the hall clerk. Although it is wired, on the contrary, when the door is opened and closed, the wire is rubbed against a member near the route where the wire is wired, or the wire is caught in a moving part such as the door opening / closing part (hinge, etc.), and the wire coating is covered. It may be damaged. If the power supply line and the ground line are close to each other under such a situation, a short circuit will occur and a large current will flow.

Alternatively, if the hall clerk has no choice but to wire the electric wire to the hinge side or the opening / closing side when attaching / detaching the game board, the electric wire may be rubbed or caught between the main body frame and covered with the electric wire. May be damaged. Even when the power supply line and the ground line are close to each other under such circumstances. A short circuit will cause a large current to flow.

As described above, the present invention can be applied even when the sliding portion is caused by human movement or due to human property damage. It is better to place a fuse with an appropriate capacity at an appropriate position, but especially when arranging a drive device on the door side, a relay board on which the fuse is mounted is placed near the downstream of the opening / closing part of the door, which is a factor. It is good to place it.

Up to this point, fuses 3074 and 3075 have been described as examples of the second overcurrent protection device, but instead of this, a self-recovery type that shuts off when a large current flows but restores continuity after a lapse of a predetermined time. A device such as a thermistor may be used.

In the present embodiment, the fuse 3071, which is the second overcurrent protection device, uses a surface mount type chip fuse in consideration of the size of the drive device, but the chip fuse has an advantage that it is smaller than the tube fuse. However, it is not possible to tell from the appearance whether or not electrical continuity is possible. In such a case, it is necessary to replace the electric wire and the load (drive source) to which the electric wire is connected, the effect drive board 3043 for driving the movable body, and the relay board 3044A on which the fuse is mounted as a set.

The thermistor has a function of cutting off the current by increasing the internal resistance by changing its own temperature due to heat generated by a large current. When its own temperature returns to a low temperature again, the internal resistance is lowered and it returns to reusability. That is, if a surface mount thermistor is used instead of the fuse, at least the board on which the thermistor is mounted (for example, a relay board) does not need to be replaced and can be used continuously.

Regarding the fuse 934 as the first overcurrent protection device, a tube fuse is used in this embodiment, but in the case of a tube fuse, the fuse element is blown due to a large current flowing, so that the chip fuse Although it is not clear from the appearance whether or not electrical continuity is possible, the fuse element itself of the tube fuse is thin and has a metallic color close to gray, so it is difficult to know the fusing status on a general green resist substrate. Therefore, in order to make it easier to see that the fuse is blown, a light-colored solid such as white or yellow is used to make the metal-colored fuse element stand out on the resist in the area where the fuse is mounted and to improve visibility. It is a good idea to print the silk.

In addition, for overcurrent protection devices that have different ratings or require special attention even with the same rated capacity, special marks (for example, stars) are silk-printed near the devices for the purpose of identification. The colors may be different, or the device may be placed vertically, horizontally, or diagonally with respect to the substrate so that the devices can be distinguished from each other.
[15-2. Stepping motor driver protection]

The effect drive board 3043 is provided with a stepping motor driver and fuses 3071 and 3072 as overcurrent protection devices. Although two stepping motor drivers are shown in FIG. 266, a plurality of stepping motor drivers are mounted according to the number of stepping motors used in the pachinko machine 1.

The stepping motor driver switches the power supply supplied from the power supply board 931 according to the control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to generate a drive signal. This drive signal drives a stepping motor incorporated in the accessory to operate the accessory. In the illustrated example, 12V is supplied to the stepping motor driver and the stepping motor, but the necessary power supply may be selected according to the specifications of the stepping motor driver and the stepping motor to be driven.

In the example shown in FIG. 266, fuses are provided in the 12V power supply lines of the two stepping motors, respectively. However, in the case of daisy chain connection, it is preferable to provide fuses in the power supply lines of other stepping motor drivers.

Each fuse 3071 or 3072 connected to the power line of each stepping motor connected in a daisy chain prevents the other stepping motor drivers from catching fire and being damaged by a large current flowing through one of the power lines. doing. That is, if the stepping motor continues to be driven at a high temperature exceeding the specified temperature, the resistance value of the coil may decrease and a large current may flow into the stepping motor driver. In that case, a large current also flows into other stepping motor drivers connected in a daisy chain, which is prevented.

Further, when the resistance value of the coil decreases, the stepping motor itself also generates heat, but if the coating of the electric wire (coil) that guarantees the insulation is damaged at that time, a short circuit occurs in the stepping motor. In preparation for such a situation, in addition to damage to the stepping motor driver, a separate fuse is used to prevent damage to the accessories that make up the drive unit, such as melting or burning of the accessories due to a short circuit in the stepping motor. It is advisable to provide.

The cutoff current of the fuse used in the present embodiment may also be determined in consideration of the impedance of the wiring in the same manner as to whether the fuse is mounted on the relay board or the effect drive board.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is arranged in the path for supplying the AC power supply to the power supply creation device (power supply creation circuit 933), and the power supply creation device is overcurrented according to the current supplied by the power supply creation device. A first overcurrent protection means (fuse 934) that protects from a state and a current that is arranged in a path that supplies DC power to a drive source (stepping motor MA, LED of LED substrate 4250A, etc.) and supplied by a power generation device. A second overcurrent protection means (fuse 3075, etc.) that protects the power supply creation device from an overcurrent state is provided, and the second overcurrent protection means is driven by a DC power source created by the power supply creation means. It is a subsequent stage distributed to (effect drive board 3043) and is arranged at a position closer to the drive source than the first overcurrent protection means, and protects the power supply creating device from the overcurrent state than the first overcurrent protection means. Since the current for this is small, it is possible to effectively prevent damage to production parts such as accessories and electric wires.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effect member (point rod accessory (movable body) 3410 and the center) are based on the peripheral control board 1510 that controls the effect in the game and the drive data transmitted from the peripheral control board. A drive control board (direct current drive board 3043) that outputs a drive signal to a drive device (upper movable unit 3400) provided with a drive source (stepping motor MA, LED of LED board 4250A, etc.) for driving the decorative lamp 3412a, etc. A power supply creation device (power supply creation circuit 933) that creates a DC power supply to be supplied to the source, and a power supply creation device that is arranged in a path that supplies AC power to the power supply creation device according to the current supplied by the power supply creation device. A power source protecting means (fuse 934) that protects the drive device and a drive device protecting means (fuse) that is arranged in a path for supplying DC power to the drive source and protects the drive device according to the current supplied by the power source creating device. 3075 etc.), so it is possible to effectively prevent damage to direct current parts such as accessories and electric wires.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, two or more electric wires including an electric wire connected to the upstream side or the downstream side of the relay board 3044A and transmitting a drive signal have a potential difference with each other, and the second electric wire has a potential difference. The protective means (fuse 3075) shuts off by the current flowing when the electric wire having the potential difference is short-circuited. The current of this breaking operation is obtained by using Ohm's law from the potential difference and impedance of the electric wire. Therefore, even if the first overcurrent protection means (fuse 934) arranged in the path for supplying AC power to the power supply creation device (power supply creation circuit 933) does not operate, the second protection means allows the parts and electric wires to be connected. Damage can be effectively prevented.

The invention according to this embodiment can be summarized as a gaming machine having the following means.
Means 1: A peripheral control board that controls the effect in the game,
A drive control board that outputs a drive signal that drives a drive source that drives the effect member based on the drive data transmitted from the peripheral control board.
A power supply creation device that creates a DC power supply to be supplied to the drive source, and
A first overcurrent protection means, which is arranged in a path for supplying AC power to the power generation device and protects the power supply creation device from an overcurrent state according to the current supplied by the power supply creation device.
A second overcurrent protection means, which is arranged in a path for supplying the DC power to the drive source and protects the power generation device from an overcurrent state according to the current supplied by the power generation device, is provided.
The second overcurrent protection means is a subsequent stage in which the DC power source created by the power supply creating means is distributed to the drive control board, and is located closer to the drive source than the first overcurrent protection means. A gaming machine that is arranged and has a smaller current for protecting the power supply creating device from an overcurrent state than the first overcurrent protection means.

Means 2: Peripheral control board that controls the production in the game,
A drive control board that outputs a drive signal to a drive device including a drive source that drives the effect member based on the drive data transmitted from the peripheral control board.
A power supply creation device that creates a DC power supply to be supplied to the drive source, and
A power supply creating device protecting means that is arranged in a path for supplying AC power to the power producing device and protects the power producing device according to the current supplied by the power producing device.
A gaming machine comprising: a drive device protecting means which is arranged in a path for supplying the DC power source to the drive source and protects the drive device according to a current supplied by the power source creating device.

[16. Example of Contact Detection Sensor for Launch Handle]
FIG. 267 is a block diagram showing the connection of signals around the handle unit 500.

The handle unit 500 includes a handle lever 504 whose surface is metal-plated (for example, plated) as described above, is electrically connected to the plating of the plated handle lever 504, and is connected to the handle lever 504 by a player. It has a contact detection sensor 509 that detects whether or not a person's hand or finger is touching.

The contact detection sensor 509 measures the capacitance (stray capacitance) of the handle lever 504, measures the change in the capacitance of the handle lever 504 due to contact with the human body, and the measured capacitance is a predetermined threshold value. Detects contact with the human body when it increases. Since the contact detection sensor 509 detects the contact of the human body by such a principle, it is preferable that the difference in capacitance between the state in which the human body is in contact and the state in which the human body is not in contact is large. That is, it is desirable that the smaller the capacitance in the non-contact state, the larger the change in the capacitance due to the contact with the human body, and the smaller the area of the contact portion 511. That is, since the change in capacitance due to contact with the human body is not the rate of change from the non-contact state but the change value of the capacitance, it is easier to detect when the original (non-contact state) capacitance is small.

On the other hand, in order to enhance the decorativeness of pachinko machines, plating is often used on the surface of the housing. Plating may be used for parts other than the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. In this case, in order to reduce the influence on the capacitance of the handle lever 504, it is preferable to form a metal film on the portion other than the handle lever 504 by using discontinuous vapor deposition. Although discontinuous vapor deposition can form a surface having a metallic luster, since the processed portion does not have conductivity, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacitance of plating of the handle lever 504 in a non-contact state.

Further, an LED board (printed circuit board) on which the LED 512 and the LED driver IC 513 for driving the LED 512 are mounted is provided in the handle unit, and the LED 512 is used in a case where a highly expected effect is executed. Flashes red. The LED driver IC 513 in the present embodiment parallel-converts the serialized lighting / extinguishing data and drives a plurality of LEDs 512 mounted on the printed circuit board at the timing according to the parallel-converted data. .. Therefore, when the LED driver IC 513 is not required, for example, when driving one LED 512, the LED driver 513 may be omitted.

As described above, from the same viewpoint, a capacitance is also generated between the conductor forming the circuit pattern on the printed circuit board in the handle unit 500 and the plating of the handle lever 504. Therefore, the area of the circuit pattern formed on the printed circuit board in the handle unit 500 may be as small as possible. For example, the printed circuit board may be provided with a wide ground pattern for noise suppression and ground potential stabilization. However, since the plating of the handle lever 504 also generates a capacitance with the ground pattern, if the ground pattern is wide, the capacitance of the handle lever 504 in the non-contact state is increased. Therefore, it is preferable to reduce the area of the ground pattern on the printed circuit board in the handle unit 500 as much as possible to reduce the capacitance with the handle lever 504 in the non-contact state. That is, it can be said that an ideal printed circuit board is one in which only a connector for electrically connecting the printed circuit boards is mounted other than the LED 512, and a pattern is wired only for electrically connecting the LED 512 and the connector.

The contact detection sensor 509 outputs a contact detection signal when the measured capacitance of the handle lever 504 exceeds a preset threshold value. As shown in FIG. 268, the contact detection signal is output by the potential difference between the touch sensor + signal and the touch sensor-signal, and when the contact of the human body with the plated portion of the handle lever 504 is detected, the contact detection signal is output. Touch sensor-lowers the signal potential to a low level.

As shown in FIG. 267, the contact detection signal is input from the branch circuit 991 to the emission control unit 953a and the main control board 1310 provided on the power supply board 931. The launch control unit 953a uses the contact detection signal as a launch permission condition, and controls the launch device 680 so that the game ball can be launched only when the player is touching the handle lever 504 of the launch handle unit 500. ..

The main control MPU 1311 detects an abnormality in the pachinko machine by using a contact detection signal. For example, 30 seconds after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds after the state of indicating non-contact) elapses after the player releases the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 and the contact detection signal is interrupted. Start monitoring after the preparation period of. If the number of balls entered into the winning opening or the large winning opening is counted after the preparation period has elapsed and the number exceeds the specified number, there is a high possibility that a game ball has been entered into the winning opening or the large winning opening due to fraudulent activity. Determined to be in an abnormal state. The preparation period assumes a period sufficient for all the game balls launched into the game area 5a immediately after the end of the game to reach the out port 1111. Some of the pachinko machines that have become less popular close without any players from opening to closing, so the value counted after the number of pachinko players disappears is clearly more credible and unpopular. The anomaly is correctly judged as a natural event occurring. In addition, although various measures have been taken against static electricity applied from the outside or generated inside the gaming machine, static electricity still has an adverse effect on various control devices and various sensors, and is abnormal. It is useful to avoid false alarms, to correctly determine abnormalities, and to monitor whether or not the player is actually playing, in order to avoid unnecessary troubles with the player. There is sex.

Further, the gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a base display (character ratio display, performance display monitor) 1317 as described above, so that the progress of the gaming machine can be visually managed. The display of the base display 1317 that counts the number of prize balls and displays the base value is updated only when the game balls are fired, that is, only when the player is playing the game. That is, only the number of prize balls detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when the contact detection sensor 509 detects the player's contact with the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is counted to obtain the base value. calculate. In this way, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being reflected in the base value obtained by an abnormality or cheating in which the prize ball is detected when the game ball is not fired, and the base value can be calculated accurately. Further, when the contact detection sensor 509 is used, it is not necessary to newly provide a sensor for detecting the launch of the game ball, so that the cost increase of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. Even in such progress management of a gaming machine, progress management after grasping whether or not the player is actually playing is useful for correctly determining the performance of the gaming machine.

Next, the details of the processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 267 and the flowchart of FIG. 23, particularly regarding the processing related to the contact detection signal. The contact detection signal passes from the main control input circuit 1315 in the block diagram shown in FIG. 267 to any port of the main control I / O port 1314, and in the switch input process (step S74) of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 23. It is taken into the main control MPU 1311 and various processes are executed.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the fraud detection process (step S84). In the fraud detection process, the main control MPU 1311 switches the detection of the abnormal state according to the state of the captured contact detection signal. That is, the abnormal state is detected / not detected, or the abnormal state detection method is switched.

For example, after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the interruption of the contact detection signal (in a state indicating non-contact), even in the big hit game state, the game is played in the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 by the count switch. When it is detected that the ball has entered, a winning abnormality display command is created. The created command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92).

The main control MPU 1311 may execute the fraud detection process when the contact detection signal is interrupted (in a state indicating non-contact). Further, only a specific fraud detection process (for example, fraudulent prize detection process for the large winning openings 2005 and 2006) may be executed according to the non-detection of the contact detection signal. When the contact detection signal changes to the detection state (the state indicates contact), it is preferable to stop the execution of the fraud detection process executed with the change of the contact detection signal as a trigger.

Further, even when the contact detection signal changes from the non-detection state to the detection state (the state indicates contact), the execution of the fraud detection process executed by the change of the contact detection signal may be continued. .. In this case, the notification of the abnormality is stopped by the operation of the employee in the hall, for example, the power is turned on again, and the normal gaming state is restored.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 executes the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step S89) to calculate the accessory ratio (base value). At this time, according to the determination using the contact detection signal, if the handle unit 500 is in a non-contact state with the handle lever 504, the game ball is not fired without executing the prize ratio calculation / display process. Prevents the obtained prize balls from being reflected in the base value.

Further, a command based on the detection result of the contact detection signal is also transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). The peripheral control unit 1511 notifies the abnormality detected according to the command received from the main control board 1310. When the contact detection signal changes from the non-detection state to the detection state (the state indicates contact), the detected abnormality is a winning abnormality in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) described above. A hidden command may be sent to force the peripheral control unit 1511 to stop the notification. Further, even if the contact detection signal changes from the non-detection state to the detection state (even if the contact is indicated), the abnormality notification may be continued. In this case, the notification of the abnormality is stopped by the operation of the employee in the hall, for example, the power is turned on again, and the normal gaming state is restored.

FIG. 268 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a branch circuit 991 provided on the relay board 990.

The branch circuit 991 is composed of three switching transistors Tr2, Tr3, and Tr5, and generates and outputs two signals, a touch sensor-1 signal and a touch sensor-2 signal, from the touch sensor-signal. Specifically, in the branch circuit 991, when the touch sensor-signal is H level, the transistor Tr2 is turned on, the transistors Tr3 and Tr4 are turned off, and the touch sensor-1 signal is H level (touch sensor + signal). (Same voltage as). At this time, since Tr3 is an open collector output, the output of the touch sensor-2 signal is indefinite. On the other hand, when the touch sensor-signal is at the L level, the transistors Tr2 are turned off, the transistors Tr3 and Tr4 are turned on, and the touch sensor-1 signal and the touch sensor-2 signal are at the L level (ground voltage).

In this way, the branch circuit 991 divides the contact detection signal into two signals having different signal levels and outputs the signal.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, since the player's steering wheel operation is used as the abnormality determination condition, the abnormality of the gaming machine can be correctly determined, and the fraudulent activity can be accurately detected.

In addition, depending on whether or not the player operates the steering wheel, whether the base value is updated, that is, whether the number of out balls or the number of prize balls is counted changes, so that the progress of the game machine can be managed correctly and the performance of the game machine is accurate. Can be evaluated. That is, the out balls and prize balls are counted while the firing handle is being operated (+ for a predetermined time after the hand is released).

The following describes the details of the process (flow chart of FIG. 23) executed by the main control MPU 1311, in particular, the process related to the contact detection signal in the configuration shown in the block diagram of FIG. 17 instead of the configuration shown in the block diagram of FIG. 267. It is an explanation. The difference between FIG. 267 and FIG. 17 is that the contact detection signal input to the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 is directly input via the branch circuit 991 in the configuration of FIG. 267, whereas that of FIG. 17 is shown in FIG. The configuration is different in that it is input to the payout control board 951 and a command is input to the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 via the payout control MPU of the payout control board 951.

The contact detection signal is taken into the payout control MPU by the switch input process of the timer interrupt process via one of the payout control I / O ports from the payout control input circuit in the payout control unit 952, and various processes are executed. .. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control MPU captures the contact detection signal and transmits the state of the contact detection signal periodically captured by the timer interrupt process to the main control MPU 1311 as a command. Then, in the main control MPU 1311, the above-mentioned interrupt processing frame command reception process (step S82) is executed, the command is received, the received command is analyzed, and the fraud detection process (step S84) is executed. Other than that, the processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 is the same as that described above.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the touch sensor contact detection signal is used for determining the abnormality of the gaming machine, but the effect control is triggered when the contact detection signal changes to a state indicating non-contact. May be done. The following is an example of the effect control performed when the contact detection signal changes to a state indicating non-contact.

For example, when the player releases the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 and the contact detection signal is interrupted (a state indicating non-contact), the production content is changed from the current production to a highly expected effect. You may change it. By performing an effect with a high degree of expectation while the player has released his hand from the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, it is possible to give an opportunity to continue the game to the player who intends to stop the game. Further, at the timing when the player releases the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, an effect of directly asking the continuation of the game (for example, an effect of asking the character "I'm going to stop") may be performed.

Therefore, depending on whether or not the player operates the steering wheel, it is possible to display an effect that the player does not intend, and it is possible to give the player a motivation to continue the game. Not limited to the contact detection signal, the handle unit 500 is similarly operable by the player, and can be turned on / off by rotating the handle lever 504, and the game ball is temporarily fired by the on operation. Similarly, an on / off signal from the launch stop button (not shown) to be stopped is input to the main control board 1310, and the above-mentioned effect control is performed when the launch stop button is operated or not. Well, in this case as well, the same effect can be obtained.

The invention according to this embodiment can be summarized as a gaming machine having the following means.
Means 1: A game control means for drawing a special game that is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
A launch operation means that has a contact detection means for detecting contact by the player and the player performs a launch operation of the game ball, and a launch operation means.
A launch control means that controls the launch of the game ball according to the operation of the launch operation means, and
A launching means for launching a game ball into the game area according to the control of the launch control means is provided.
A gaming machine characterized in that a contact detection signal indicating a detection result by the contact detecting means is input to the game control means.

Means 2: The gaming machine according to Means 1.
The game control means is a game machine that detects an abnormality of the game machine according to a state of the contact detection signal.

Means 3: The gaming machine according to Means 2.
The gaming control means is a gaming machine characterized in that an abnormality of the gaming machine is detected when the contact detecting signal indicates non-contact.

Means 4: The gaming machine according to Means 3.
The game control means is a gaming machine characterized in that the contact detection signal indicates non-contact, which is used as an abnormality detection condition.

Means 5: The gaming machine according to Means 1 to 4.
The game control means is characterized in that it controls whether to update a value for evaluating the performance of the game machine according to the state of the contact detection signal.

Means 6: The gaming machine according to Means 5.
The game control means evaluates the performance of the gaming machine by using the winning balls detected between the time when the contact detection signal indicates non-contact and the time when the contact detection signal indicates contact after a predetermined time has elapsed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is not used to update the value.

[17. Slot machine]
Up to this point, the arrangement of the programs and data stored in the ROM of the pachinko machine has been described. Next, the arrangement of the programs and data stored in the RAM and ROM of the slot machine (rotary type gaming machine) will be described. Although the pachinko machine has been outlined with reference to FIG. 26, the programs and data are arranged in the RAM and ROM as in the case of the slot machine 4000 described below.

[17-1. Construction]
First, the structure of the slot machine 4000 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 269 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000, and FIG. 270 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000 with the front member 4200 open.

As shown in FIGS. 269 and 270, in the slot machine 4000 of the present embodiment, various devices are provided inside a box-shaped housing 4100 having an open front surface, and a front member is provided on the front surface of the housing 4100. The 4200 is provided so as to be openable and closable in a single-sided manner. An image display body 4500 for displaying and displaying information according to the progress of the game, a speaker for producing sound, and the like are provided on the upper portion of the front member 4200. The image display body 4500 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display panel, and displays various information in addition to the effect display related to the game. Then, various effect displays and history information displays on the image display body 4500 are controlled by the effect control board 4700. That is, the image display body 4500 serves as an effect display means capable of displaying an effect according to the progress of the game, and the effect control board 4700 provides a display control means capable of performing display control of the effect display means. Eggplant.

At the center of the front member 4200, a front panel is arranged so that the rear cannot be seen and a pattern for decoration is drawn, and the rear can be seen at the center of the front panel (for example, transparent). ) A design display window 4401 is formed. The front panel may be configured by a display device, and the reel 4301 can be visually recognized when the image is not displayed on the symbol display window 4401, and an image for producing a game is mainly displayed around the symbol display window 4401. To do. In this case, it is also possible to display an image for producing the game on the portion of the symbol display window 4401.

Through the symbol display window 4401 (window portion), it is possible to visually recognize the symbol that is variablely displayed by the rotation of the reel 4301 arranged in the housing. The reel 4301 includes a cylindrical left reel 4301a, a middle reel 4301b, and a right reel 4301c arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. A strip-shaped sheet on which a plurality of symbols are drawn is wound around the outer peripheral surfaces of these reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, so that the plurality of symbols are arranged according to a predetermined arrangement.

Reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c (see FIG. 271), which are stepping motors, are provided on the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, respectively, and the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are independently rotated and stopped. It is possible to do. That is, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c form the drive source of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, respectively. Further, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c are controlled by the two-phase excitation method in the same manner as the payout motor 839 of the pachinko machine 1 described above to increase the drive torque and the static torque. As a result, it becomes possible to adopt a small motor as a drive source, and the cost can be reduced.

In the following, the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c will be referred to as the left reel 4301a, the middle reel 4301b, and the right reel 4301c, respectively, as necessary. The corresponding reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, and 4211c are designated as the left reel stop button 4211a, the middle reel stop button 4211b, and the right reel stop button 4211c. Further, the reel drive motors 4341 corresponding to each reel are the left reel drive motor 4341a, the middle reel drive motor 4341b, and the right reel drive motor 4341c.

Further, by rotating the reel 4301 by the reel drive motor 4341, a plurality of types of symbols visually recognized from the symbol display window 4401 are changed so as to circulate from top to bottom, for example (variation display). On the other hand, when the reels 4301 are stopped, for each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, a predetermined number (for example, three) of consecutive symbols, that is, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3, are transmitted through the symbol display window 4401. It is visible. That is, the effective display units of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c for deriving and displaying the stop result of the game can be visually recognized through the symbol display window 4401.

A predetermined enableable line is set for the 3 × 3 symbol matrix visually recognized from the symbol display window 4401. In the present embodiment, a line (middle line) that crosses the middle symbol of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, a line that diagonally crosses each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c from the left reel 4301a lower-middle reel 4301b middle-right reel 4301c upper (Right-up line), left reel 4301a upper-middle reel 4301b middle-right reel 4301c lower line that diagonally crosses each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c (right-down line) is an enableable line. Then, the enableable line is activated by the player inserting a medal or inputting from a credit (hereinafter referred to as "betting operation"), and based on the symbol combination mode (roll) formed on this valid line. It is judged whether or not the prize (role) is established.

When a prize is established, three predetermined symbols may be lined up on the effective line, or three predetermined symbols may be lined up on another line in appearance. As such a line, there is a line (upper line) that crosses the upper symbol of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. It should be noted that the line (lower line) that crosses the lower symbol of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c and the front portion (visible part) facing the symbol display window 4401 of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c other than the above are crossed. The symbols may appear to be lined up on the virtual line located. Below, the enableable lines (middle, rising to the right, falling to the right), the lines where the symbols can be visually aligned at the time of winning (upper line), and other lines (lower line, etc.) are grouped together to stop the symbols (design alignment). Line).

The upper, middle, lower, upward-sloping, and downward-sloping lines are set as enableable lines, and a predetermined enableable line is activated according to the number of bets, and a prize is won based on the symbol combination mode formed on this valid line. Judge the establishment / non-establishment of the role). For example, in the number of bets 1, the middle line is the effective line, in the number of bets 2, the middle line is added to the upper and lower lines, and in the number of bets 3, the upper, middle and lower lines are added to the upper, middle and lower lines, and the upward and downward right lines are the effective lines. And. In addition, all lines may be valid regardless of the number of bets (even if the number of bets is 1 or 2), or may be dedicated to 3 cards.

Around (for example, below) the symbol display window 4401, a payout number display LED 4562 that displays the number of medals paid out by the game is provided. A credit display for displaying the number of medals stored in the slot machine 4000 and a count display for displaying the number of remaining games in the special prize may be provided.

A step portion projecting to the front side is formed below the design display window 4401, and the upper surface of this step portion is an operation unit 4202 that inclines downward toward the front side. The operation unit 4202 is provided with a medal insertion slot 4203, a single insertion button 4205, and a max bet button 4206 as a progress operation unit for advancing the game.

The medal insertion slot 4203 is arranged on the right side of the operation unit 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000. The game can be executed when the player inserts a medal into the medal insertion slot 4203 and performs a betting operation. A insertion sensor 4207b for detecting the passage of medals is provided in the path through which the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 pass, and the number of inserted medals is counted based on the detection information by the insertion sensor 4207b.

The one-sheet insertion button 4205 and the max bet button 4206 are arranged on the left side of the operation unit 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000. The one-sheet insertion button 4205 can be input one by one from the credit by performing the pressing operation once. The max bet button 4206 can input from credits to the maximum number of bets (for example, 3) by performing a pressing operation once, but if the number of credits is less than the maximum number, the number of credits is input as the number of bets. It has become like.

Below the operation unit 4202, a refund button 4209, a start lever 4210, a return button 4208, a reel stop button 4211, a key device 4215, and the like are provided. The refund button 4209 is paid out as a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203, a medal (bet medal) input as the number of bets by the single insertion button 4205, and the max bet button 4206, or a prize is established and stored as a credit. It is used when giving a command to return the medal (stored medal) to the medal tray 4201. In addition, when a medal is inserted from the medal slot 4203 after an automatic betting operation based on the establishment of a replay prize (replay prize), or a medal exceeding a predetermined number that can be stored as a credit is also used for medals via the medal selector 4207. It will be returned to the saucer 4201.

The start lever 4210 is an operation lever for starting a break game. The key device 4215 is for inserting a key when opening the front member 4200 or when resetting the error (for example, hopper error) state of the slot machine 4000. The return button 4208 is used when the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 and packed inside the medal selector 4207 is returned to the medal tray 4201.

The reel stop button 4211 is composed of a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c, which are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the left reel 4301a, the middle reel 4301b, and the right reel 4301c, respectively. The purpose is to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c according to the stop operation, respectively.

Further, below the portion where these operation buttons are provided, a decorative plate (decorative panel) forming a lower region of the front member 4200 is provided. Further, below the decorative plate and at the bottom of the front member 4200, a medal tray 4201 for storing medals, a medal payout outlet, a speaker 4512 for outputting sound, and the like are provided.

A main board (game control device) 4600 (see FIG. 271) that controls the entire slot machine 4000 is arranged in the upper part inside the housing. An accessory ratio indicator 1317 and a display switch 1318 are provided on the main board 4600. The accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED, similar to the pachinko machine described above. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured by a liquid crystal display device provided on the main board 4600.

The accessory ratio display 1317 is not provided on the main board 4600, but is also used as another display (for example, payout number display LED4562 or image display 4500) provided in front of the slot machine 4000, and payout number display LED4562. Or the image display body 4500 may display the accessory ratio.

When the display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. It is preferable to indicate (print, engrav, seal, etc.) that the switch is for operating the display of the accessory ratio on the printed circuit board near the display switch 1318 or on the housing 4100. It is desirable that the display switch 1318 is provided in the vicinity of the accessory ratio display 1317, but even if it is not the main control unit 1300, if it is in a place where it is easy to operate, another board (for example, the effect control board 4700). , Power supply device 4112), housing 4100, or front member 4200. Further, as will be described later, the display switch 1318 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. By providing the display switch 1318 at a position where the player cannot operate it, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously operating it.

Further, a symbol variation display device 4300 is provided substantially in the center of the inside of the housing, and rotatable reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are placed. Further, an external relay terminal plate 4131 for outputting a signal from the main board 4600 to an external device is provided inside the housing of the slot machine 4000.

Further, a medal payout device (hopper) 4110 is arranged in the lower part inside the housing. The medal payout device 4110 receives and stores medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 and guided by the medal selector 4207, and when a predetermined symbol combination mode is formed on the effective line and a prize is established, the prize is won. The number of medals (payout medals) corresponding to the above, or the medals exceeding the upper limit of credits due to the addition accompanying the establishment of the prize are paid out to the medal tray 4201. The medals for the credits are paid out to the medal tray 4201 by the medal payout device 4110 by operating the refund button 4209. Further, on the right side of the medal payout device 4110, medals overflowing from the medal payout device 4110 and flowing in are stored, and the inflowing medals are sent to the medal collection mechanism of the installation island where the slot machine 4000 is installed. An overflow tank is provided for guidance.

[17-2. Internal configuration of slot machine]
FIG. 271 is a block diagram showing the configurations of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operating members, and the like provided in the slot machine 4000. The slot machine 4000 has a main board 4600 for comprehensively controlling the progress of the game, and the main board 4600 is equipped with a CPU 4601, a ROM 4602, a RAM 4603, an input / output interface 4604, and the like.

Further, as described above, the main board 4600 is provided with a bonus ratio indicator 1317 for displaying the bonus ratio calculated by the CPU 4601 and a display switch 1318 for switching the display of the bonus ratio display 1317. The display switch 1318 may be composed of a push button switch that performs a momentary operation, but may be a switch of another type. When the display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio indicator 1317.

The above-mentioned single push button 4205, max bet button 4206, start lever 4210, reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, 4211c, refund button 4209, etc. are all connected to the main board 4600, and these operation buttons are not shown. Is operated by the player, and the detected operation signal is output to the main board 4600. Specifically, when the start lever 4210 is operated, an operation signal for starting the above-mentioned symbol variation display device 4300 (starting rotation of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c) is output to the main board 4600, and the reel stop button 4211a When 4211b and 4211c are operated, an operation signal for stopping the reels 4301a, 4301b and 4301c is output to the main board 4600.

Further, the slot machine 4000 accommodates other devices together with the main board 4600, and various signals are input from these devices to the main board 4600. In addition to the symbol variation display device 4300, the devices include a medal payout device 4110 and the like.

As described above, the symbol variation display device 4300 includes reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c for rotating the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, respectively (left reel drive motor 4341a, middle reel drive motor 4341b, right). Reel drive motor 4341c). The reel drive motor 4341 is composed of a stepping motor, and the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c can be independently rotated and stopped. During the rotation, a plurality of types of symbols are displayed from above on the symbol display window 4401. It is displayed while continuously changing downward.

Further, each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c has a position sensor 4331a, 4331b, 4331c for detecting a reference position regarding rotation, and each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c has a position sensor 4331a, 4331b, 4331c, respectively. It is provided correspondingly in the reel (left reel position sensor 4331a, middle reel position sensor 4331b, right reel position sensor 4331c). By inputting the detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors to the main board 4600, the main board 4600 can obtain the stop position information of each reel.

The solenoid 4207a and the insertion sensor 4207b described above are installed in the medal selector 4207. The insertion sensor 4207b detects the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203, and outputs the medal detection signal to the main board 4600. When the solenoid 4207a is in the OFF state, the inserted medals are detected by the insertion sensor 4207b. On the contrary, when the solenoid 4207a is ON, the passage reaching the insertion sensor 4207b in the medal selector 4207 is locked out and the insertion of medals cannot be accepted. Even if the player inserts a medal, the medal selector 4207 The medals that flowed through the return gutter return to the medal tray 4201. At this time, the function of the insertion sensor 4207b is also invalidated, so that neither betting nor storage of medals is performed by inserting medals.

The medal payout device 4110 has a payout sensor 4110e in the discharge port for detecting the paid out medals one by one, and a payout medal signal for each medal is input to the main board 4600 from the payout sensor 4110e. .. Further, the auxiliary storage box for game medals is provided with a medal full tank sensor 4111a, and when the number of medals stored inside exceeds a predetermined quantity, a detection signal in which the number of medals exceeds a predetermined quantity is transmitted to the main board 4600. Output to. At this time, an error display for notifying the abnormality of the medal storage is performed by the image display body 4500, the error lamp 4554, etc., and the player, the hall employee, or the like is notified that the abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, the main board 4600 outputs a control signal to the symbol variation display device 4300 and the medal payout device 4110. That is, a drive pulse signal for controlling the start and stop of each of the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c described above is output from the main board 4600. Further, a drive signal is input from the main board 4600 to the medal payout device 4110 according to the type of combination of symbols stopped on the effective line, and the medal payout device 4110 performs a medal payout operation in response to the drive signal. At this time, if the number of medals required for payout is insufficient in the medal payout device 4110, or if there are no medals at all, the number detection by the payout sensor 4110e will be delayed. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, an error signal of the payout medal is output from the payout sensor 4110e to the main board 4600, and in response to this, the main board 4600 notifies that an abnormality has occurred in the payout of the medal. Is displayed on an error lamp 4554, an image display body 4500, or the like to notify a player, a hall employee, or the like that an abnormality has occurred.

The slot machine 4000 includes an effect control board 4700 in addition to the main board 4600, and the effect control board 4700 includes a CPU 4701, a ROM 4702, a RAM 4703, an input / output interface 4707, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 4704, and an AMP (audio amplifier). ) 4705, sound source IC4706 and the like are mounted. The effect control board 4700 receives various command signals from the main board 4600 and controls the display of the image display 4500, the light emission (or lighting, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of the lighting device 4502 and the operation of the speaker 4512.

Further, an external relay terminal plate 4131 is provided, and the slot machine 4000 is connected to the hall computer 4800 in the amusement park via the external relay terminal plate 4131. The external relay terminal board 4131 plays a role of relaying various signals (inserted medal signal, payout medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 4600 to the hall computer 4800.

The power supply device 4112 creates a plurality of types of DC power supplies from an AC 24 volt (AC24V) power supply supplied from the island equipment. For example, three types of power supplies are created: DC + 5V (hereinafter, "+ 5V"), DC + 12V (hereinafter, "+ 12V"), and DC + 24V (hereinafter, "+ 24V"). The three types of power supplies of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power supply device 4112 are supplied to each configuration included in the slot machine 4000. For example, two types of power supplies of + 5V and + 12V are supplied to the reel 4301 and the reel drive motor 4341. It is supplied to the symbol variation display device 4300 provided with the above.

In addition, the power supply device 4112 is provided with a setting change key switch 4112t, a reset switch 4112u, a power supply switch 4112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed to the outside of the slot machine 4000, and can be operated only by opening the front member 4200. The power switch 4112v is for turning on / off the power supply to the slot machine 4000, and the setting change key switch 4112t is for changing the setting (for example, settings 1 to 6) of the slot machine 4000. Further, the reset switch 4112u is for canceling an error generated in the slot machine 4000, and is further operated when changing the setting together with the setting change key switch 4112t.

Further, the main board 4600 is provided with a reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. When the drive torque for rotating the reel 4301 is obtained by rotationally driving the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341, the CPU 4601 sets the voltage switching signal logic (for example, HI) to the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. By outputting to, + 12V is controlled to be supplied to the reel drive motor 4341 as the motor drive voltage. On the other hand, when obtaining a static torque for maintaining the state in which the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341 is stopped, the CPU 4601 sets the voltage switching signal logic (for example, LOW) to the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. By outputting to, + 5V as a motor drive voltage is controlled to be supplied to the reel drive motor 4341.

The above is a configuration example of the slot machine 4000. In the game using the slot machine 4000, when the player operates the start lever 4210 while the number of medals to be multiplied is determined, the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c rotate, and then the player presses the reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, 4211c. When the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped and controlled, and when all the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped, the game result is judged from the combination mode of the symbols on the effective line, and it is necessary. A specified number of medals corresponding to the corresponding winning combination will be awarded accordingly.

As described above, each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c has a reel band on which a design is drawn. Then, when all the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped, the display content displayed in the symbol display window 4401 (combination mode of the symbols displayed on the effective line) indicates that the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is used. It is determined whether or not the combination mode (symbol combination) is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed on the above-mentioned effective line in the symbol display window 4401. In addition, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in each of the plurality of effective lines. As a result, when it is determined that a combination of symbols of a plurality of winning combinations is displayed, the total number of medals to be paid out corresponding to each of the displayed winning combinations is paid out.

[17-3. Storage area configuration]
Subsequently, the storage area provided by the ROM 4602, the RAM 4603, and the like provided on the main board 4600 will be described. Although the storage area of the pachinko machine has been outlined with reference to FIG. 24, it has the same configuration as that of the slot machine 4000 shown in FIGS. 272 to 275. FIG. 272 is a diagram showing details of an access area in game control of the slot machine 4000 in the present embodiment and a ROM area 5100 which is a storage area corresponding to the ROM 4602.

The storage area in the present embodiment is provided by media such as ROM4602 and RAM4603, and is provided as one access area to which addresses from "0000H" to "FFFFH" are assigned. Further, the access area of the present embodiment is divided into a predetermined area corresponding to the medium that provides the access area, and includes a ROM area 5100, a RAM area 5200, an I / O area 5300, and a parameter information setting area 5400. It has been. It should be noted that each area does not necessarily correspond to the medium that provides the access area, and one area may be provided by a plurality of media, or a plurality of areas may be provided by one medium.

When the access area of the present embodiment is configured as described above, the CPU 4601 can access the program or data by designating the address without being aware of the medium that actually provides the access area. The details of the access area will be described below.

[17-3-1. ROM area]
First, the configuration of the ROM area 5100 will be described. The ROM area 5100 corresponds to the storage area provided by ROM 4602. The ROM 4602 is a non-volatile storage medium in which the stored contents are retained even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, and the stored data can be read out, but can be updated or deleted. You can't do that. The ROM 4602 may be any non-volatile storage medium, and the data stored in the ROM area 5100 may be updatable.

Addresses from "0000H" to "1FFFH" are assigned to the ROM area 5100. The CPU 4601 can access the data stored in the ROM 4602 by designating "1FFFH" from the address "0000H".

The ROM area 5100 includes a first control area, a first isolation area, a first data area, a second control area, a second isolation area, a second data area, a third control area, a third isolation area, and a fourth isolation area. included. A start address and an end address are set in each area.

The first control area is a game control area, and a program for performing game control and the like are stored. Further, the first data area is a game data area in which data necessary for performing game control is stored. That is, the program stored in the first control area is executed, and the game control is performed while referring to the data stored in the first data area. The area used for game control (first control area, first data area) is defined as a game control area (first storage area).

In the second control area, a program for debugging (functional inspection) the control program and the like are stored. The second data area is an area for storing data for debugging (functional inspection). The second data area is not always necessary, and debugging data may be stored in the second control area. The area (second control area, second data area) in which the program and data for debugging the game control program (functional inspection) that is not used for game control is stored is the debug (inspection function) area (inspection function). Second storage area).

In the third control area, a program for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio is stored. Data for calculating the accessory ratio is also stored in the third control area. A third data area for storing data for calculating the accessory ratio may be provided. An area (third control area) in which a program or data for calculating the accessory ratio is stored without being used for game control is defined as an area for calculating the accessory ratio (third storage area). In this way, by designing the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a different area, the inspection and game control code 13131 of the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 is stored. Can be performed separately from the inspection of the slot machine 4000, and the labor of inspection of the slot machine 4000 can be reduced. Further, the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 can be commonly used by a plurality of models regardless of the model.

The first quarantine area, the second quarantine area, the third quarantine area, and the fourth quarantine area are areas allocated between the control area and the data area, and are areas for which access is prohibited. In the process by the CPU 4601, when the isolated area is accessed, the reset process is forcibly executed. The first quarantine area, the second quarantine area, the third quarantine area, and the fourth quarantine area are areas continuous with the previous and next quarantine areas. ("0A00H"), and the end address of the first quarantine area is the address immediately before the first data area ("0AFFH"). Further, the third isolation area is arranged between the game control area and the debug (functional inspection) area, and is treated as the game control area in FIG. 30, but the debug (functional inspection) area. It may be treated as. Similarly, the fourth isolation area is arranged between the debug (functional inspection) area and the accessory ratio calculation area, and is treated as the debug (functional inspection) area in FIG. 272. It may be treated as an area for calculating the object ratio.

[17-3-2. RAM area]
Subsequently, the configuration of the RAM area 5200 will be described. FIG. 273 is a diagram showing details of the RAM area 5200 in this embodiment. The RAM area 5200 corresponds to the storage area provided by the RAM 4603. The RAM 4603 is a volatile storage medium in which the stored contents are erased when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, and the stored data can be read and written. The RAM area 5200 temporarily stores the program and data stored in the ROM area 5100, and stores the data derived by executing the program. The RAM 4603 may be a non-volatile storage medium as long as the data can be read and written. Further, when a power failure occurs, the data stored in the RAM 4603 by the backup power supply can be retained for a predetermined period.

Addresses from "3000H" to "31FFH" are assigned to the RAM area 5200. The CPU 4601 can access the data stored in the RAM 4603 by designating the addresses "3000H" to "31FFH".

The RAM area 5200 includes a game control work area, a debug (inspection function) work area, a save area, and an isolated area. A start address and an end address are set in each area.

The game control work area is a work area (temporary area) used when executing the game control (first control). The debug (inspection function) work area is a work area used when executing debug control (second control) of a program. The work area for calculating the bonus ratio is an area for storing data for calculating the bonus ratio and the calculated bonus ratio (feature ratio, continuous bonus ratio, advantageous section bonus ratio, etc.). The work area for debugging (inspection function) and the work area for calculating the accessory ratio do not necessarily have to secure a dedicated work area, and the work area for game control may be used, or the work area for game control may be used. A work area for debugging (inspection function) or a work area for calculating the accessory ratio may be assigned to the work area. In this case, the independence between the game control area, the debug (inspection function) control area, and the accessory ratio calculation work area is reduced. However, if the program configuration is such that the work area for debugging (inspection function) and the work area for calculating the accessory ratio are not used, the work area for debugging (inspection function) and the work area for calculating the accessory ratio are not necessarily used. May be good.

The save area is an area for temporarily storing data used in game control, debug (inspection function) control, or accessory ratio calculation. For example, when an interrupt occurs and a predetermined process is executed, the values of various CPU registers (arithmetic register, flag register, stack pointer, etc.) are copied to the save area before the predetermined process is executed. The value copied after the processing is completed is returned to various registers of the CPU. The evacuation area may be used in common for game control, debugging (inspection function), and accessory ratio calculation, but like the work area, game control, debugging (inspection function), and accessory ratio may be used in common. It may be divided individually by calculation. As a result, the game control, the debug (inspection function) control, and the accessory ratio calculation can maintain more independence.

The isolation area is between the work area for game control, the work area for debugging (inspection function), and the work area for calculating the accessory ratio, the work area for debugging (inspection function), the evacuation area, and the evacuation area for calculating the accessory ratio. It is assigned between, and is a continuous area with each area (front and back areas). For example, the start address of the isolation area between the game control work area and the debug (inspection function) work area is the address (“3076H”) next to the end address of the game control work area, and the end address is This is the address ("307FH") immediately before the work area for debugging (inspection function). Further, the isolated area is an area where access is prohibited, and is configured to forcibly execute the reset process when accessed in the process by the CPU 4601.

FIG. 273 shows the details of the work area for calculating the accessory ratio on the right side thereof. The work area for calculating the accessory ratio may be provided with a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 for storing a copy of the data stored in the main area, in addition to the main area for storing the calculation result of the accessory ratio. .. The backup area may be one or more. A check code is added to each area to detect data errors. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the power of the slot machine 4000 is turned on, or is set every time the data in the main area is updated in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, or the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 276). ) May be set. In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, even if the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or the data is deleted and the fixed value is set in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 276). Good. The check code may also be used as a power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set in the check code of the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. Further, if a predetermined value is set in the power failure flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

In the initialization process (step S1020 of FIG. 276), it is determined whether or not the data in the backup area is normal, and the data in the backup area determined to be normal may be duplicated in the main area. Further, in the power off processing executed when the power is cut off, the value of the main area may be duplicated in each backup area.

An unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be separated, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digit of the address.

FIG. 274 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio.

FIG. 274 (A) shows the structure of the work area in the simplest way. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 274 (A), the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the total number of payouts, the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, the number of advantageous section games, the number of non-advantageous section games, and the advantageous section Store the percentage. The number of bonuses paid out is the number of medals paid out while the bonus is in operation (for example, during a regular bonus). The number of consecutive winning balls is the number of medals paid out while the continuous winning ball is operating (for example, during a big bonus). The total payout is the number of all medals paid out by the game. The bonus ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of bonuses paid out by the total number of payouts. The continuous bonus ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of continuous bonuses paid out by the total number of catches paid out. The number of advantageous section games is the number of games played in a game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a game state in which the medals on hand such as ART (assist replay time) are difficult to decrease), and the number of non-advantageous section games is , The number of games played in a game state other than the advantageous section. The advantageous section ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of advantageous section games by (the number of advantageous section games + the number of non-advantageous section games).

Among the structures of the work areas shown in FIG. 274 (A), the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous section games and the number of non-advantageous section games are the total of FIG. 274 (B) described later. It corresponds to the cumulative total and is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 42949672795 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. Further, the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are 1-byte storage areas, and numerical values up to 255 can be stored in decimal numbers.

The number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous section games, and the number of non-advantageous section games are updated in the area update process for calculating the bonus ratio (step S1038 in FIG. 276), and the bonus ratio is updated. , The continuous bonus ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the bonus ratio calculation / display process (step S1119 in FIG. 277).

FIG. 274 (B) shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 274 (B), the number of replays, the number of winning prizes paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the number of games, the bonuses ratio, the continuous bonuses ratio, the number of advantageous section games, and non-playing Advantageous section The number of games and the ratio of advantageous sections are stored. Further, the storage area of each data is composed of a ring buffer having n storage areas for every predetermined number of games (for example, 15 storage areas for every 400 games), and the number of executed games is predetermined. When the number (400 times) is reached, the write pointer of all the data moves, and the storage area where the data is updated changes. Then, after the data of the predetermined number of games is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area.

The write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointer of all data moves for each predetermined number of prize balls. In addition, as the write pointer moves, the read pointer also moves. The read pointer points to a storage area that is one lag behind the write pointer. This is to calculate the accessory ratio using the data for 400 games.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Yes, when the ring buffer goes around and is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the cumulative value of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data, and the ring buffer goes around. Even if the data is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer to write new data, the total cumulative value including the data in the cleared area is calculated.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 274 (B), the number of replays, the number of prizes paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, and the number of games in the ring buffer are storage areas of 2 bytes each. Numerical values up to 65535 can be stored in decimal. The total number of re-games, the number of prizes paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, and the total number of games are stored in a 3-byte storage area, and numbers up to 16777215 can be stored in decimal numbers. Since the cumulative total is, for example, the total of data for 400 games × n (6000 games in the case of n = 15), a large storage area is prepared. The total number of re-games, the number of prizes paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, and the total number of games are stored in a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 42949672795 in decimal. Since the total cumulative total is not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. Further, the cumulative total of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is a 1-byte storage area, and up to 255 decimal numbers can be stored. The number of advantageous section games and the number of non-advantageous section games are storage areas of 3 bytes each, and numerical values up to 16777215 can be stored in decimal numbers. The advantageous section ratio is a 1-byte storage area, and can store a numerical value up to 255 in decimal.

By increasing the number of games corresponding to the data stored in each storage area constituting the ring buffer (for example, 600 games), the number of continuous storage areas for storing time-series data (for example, 600 games) Even if n) is reduced to 10, the same data for 6000 games can be stored in total. Therefore, the size of the storage area used as the ring buffer can be reduced.

Among the structures of the work areas shown in FIG. 274 (B), the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, the number of advantageous section games, the number of non-advantageous section games, and the advantageous section ratio are It is the same as the description in FIG. 274 (A). The number of replays is the number of games that have been replayed. The number of prizes paid out is the number of all medals paid out by the game. The number of games is the number of games executed, and when this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves.

The number of re-games, the number of winning prizes paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous section games, and the number of non-advantageous section games are the area update processing for calculating the bonus ratio (step S1038 in FIG. 276). ), The bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the bonus ratio calculation / display process (step S1119 in FIG. 277).

In the data structure shown in FIG. 274 (A), when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio is deleted in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 276). However, the data is not erased at other times. Therefore, the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio may be deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.). Similarly, the total cumulative total of FIG. 274 (B) may be deleted at predetermined intervals.

In addition, the data of the work area for calculating the accessory ratio and the calculated accessory ratio are abnormal values (for example, the accessory ratio exceeds 100%, and the calculation result of the accessory ratio has changed significantly from the previous calculated value. , Number of bonuses paid out> Total number of payouts, etc.), the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio may be deleted. Further, when the data of the work area for calculating the accessory ratio or the calculated accessory ratio is an abnormal value, it may be notified that the value is abnormal. Further, the data in the backup area may be inspected using the check code, the data in the normal backup area may be duplicated in the main area, and then the accessory ratio may be calculated again.

[17-3-3. I / O area configuration]
Subsequently, the I / O region 5300 will be described. Input / output ports correspond to the I / O area 5300, and each input / output port can be accessed by the CPU 4601 accessing the I / O area 5300. The input / output port corresponds to, for example, a port related to input of a switch or the like, a port related to output of a grand prize opening solenoid, an LED drive signal, or the like. The input / output port settings (settings related to use / non-use of input settings, output settings, etc.) are set based on the set values of the parameter information setting area 5400.

[17-3-4. Parameter information setting area]
Subsequently, the parameter information setting area 5400 will be described. FIG. 275 is a diagram showing details of the parameter information setting area 5400 of the present embodiment. The parameter information setting area 5400 is an area where various settings can be made. For example, as shown in FIG. 275, various settings include start / end addresses of each control area and data area. In FIG. 275, the definitions of the start address and the end address of each of the third control area, the work area for calculating the accessory ratio, and the evacuation area for calculating the accessory ratio are not shown, but the third control area start setting And the third control area end setting is defined in the same way as the start and end settings of other control areas, and the work area start setting for calculating the accessory ratio and the work area end setting for calculating the accessory ratio are the start and end settings of other work areas. It is defined in the same way as the end setting, and the save area start setting for calculating the accessory ratio and the save area end setting for calculating the accessory ratio are defined in the same way as the start and end settings of other save areas. Areas other than the area set here are regarded as unused (unset) areas. As a result, when the CPU 4601 accesses the unused area, the reset signal is forcibly input to the CPU 4601. Although it is set in a continuous area in FIG. 275, it is not necessary that the setting area is continuous. For example, the parameters may be grouped and arranged at predetermined intervals.

Further, in the present embodiment, when an area other than the set area (the first to fourth isolated areas of the ROM 5100 and the isolated area of the RAM 5200) is accessed, a reset is forcibly generated. Therefore, it is possible to perform the initial startup of the program by causing a reset by intentionally accessing the isolated area. Since the slot machine executes the processing sequentially, the program can be executed from the startup processing and the initial setting can be executed again by accessing the quarantine area after the final game processing is completed. As a result, even if the initial setting function is set to a value different from the set value due to noise or the like during the game, the normal value can be reset by executing the initial setting again. Furthermore, in the initial setting process, RAM clear is determined by the power failure flag, but it is possible to forcibly generate RAM clear by accessing the isolation area without setting the power failure flag. Become. On the other hand, since the above-mentioned pachinko machine plays games in parallel, if the game itself is initialized, the game cannot be continued, but in the case of a slot machine, it is no longer necessary after the game ends. Since it is necessary to initialize the RAM information, it is possible to eliminate the process for initializing the RAM information by accessing the isolated area.

The values set in the parameter information setting area 5400 are not sequentially set by the user program processing such as the initial setting of the CPU 4601, but by setting the address and the setting value of the parameter area in the ROM 4602 separately from the program. , The parameter information set in the ROM 4602 is sequentially set in each function setting register of the CPU before the CPU 4601 starts the control program at the time of startup. As a result, various parameters can be set when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Since the set values of various parameters are information managed (determined) by the user, they are set in the ROM 4602 in which the game control program is stored.

[17-4. Game control]
[17-4-1. System reset boot process]
Subsequently, the control of the slot machine of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 276 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a system reset startup process executed when the slot machine 4000 is reset. The system reset start process is a process executed when the power of the slot machine 4000 is turned on, a power failure occurs, or the like, and is a process of starting when a reset signal is input to the CPU 4601.

When the system reset start process is started, the CPU 4601 first executes a parameter setting process for setting various parameters necessary for executing the game (step S1010). Specifically, the setting value stored in the parameter information setting area 5400 included in the storage area is set in each function setting register of the CPU 4601, or the address of each area assigned to the access area is set as the setting value. By setting the address of each area as a set value, for example, a work area or a save area is allocated to the RAM area 5200 as a used area, and an area not allocated as a used area (isolated area in FIG. 273) is set as an unused area. Assigned. The work area and the evacuation area are divided into a game control area and a debug (inspection function) (or other use) area, respectively. Further, in the ROM area 5100, as in the RAM area 5200, an area for storing programs and data is allocated as a used area, and an area not allocated as a used area is allocated as an unused area.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes the security check process (step S1012). The security check process is a process of determining whether or not the data stored in the ROM 4602 is normal data. If the data stored in the ROM 4602 is not normal data, for example, the ROM 4602 may have been replaced with an invalid ROM, so that the startup of the slot machine 4000 is stopped. Further, the CPU 4601 waits until the time required for the security check elapses (step S1014).

The process from turning on the power of the slot machine to the end of the security check (process up to step S1014) is not a process defined by the user program, but a process composed of hardware in the CPU that cannot be changed by the developer. It has become.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes a device initialization setting process for initializing (step S1016). In the device initialization setting process, a process such as a start setting of a periodic process (FIG. 277, timer interrupt process) that periodically executes a predetermined process is executed. In this embodiment, a function such as a random number function setting that prevents the game lottery setting from being rewritten by a user program after a security check is executed by a parameter setting process, and other than these functions, a device initialization setting process is performed. Is running on. By dividing the initialization of the CPU 4601 into a parameter setting process and a device initialization setting process in this way, the degree of freedom in game control is increased and fraud is less likely to occur in the game.

Further, the CPU 4601 determines whether or not to execute the initialization of the RAM 4603 (step S1018). In the process of step S1018, it is determined whether to perform a cold start for initializing the RAM 4603 or a hot start for returning to the game with the contents of the backed up RAM 4603.

When the CPU 4601 performs a cold start for initializing the RAM 4603 (the result of step S1018 is "Yes"), the CPU 4601 executes an initialization process for executing the initialization of the RAM 4603 (step S1020). The cold start is performed when the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is changed, when an abnormality occurs in the contents of the RAM 4603, or when the power failure flag is not set.

On the other hand, when the CPU 4601 performs a hot start for returning to the game based on the contents of the RAM 4603 (the result of step S1018 is "No"), the CPU 4601 executes a process of returning the game based on the contents of the backed up RAM 4603. (Step S1022). At this time, the return process returns to the process interrupted at the time of power failure. Specifically, any of the processes from step S1024 to step S1042 of the system reset activation process to be described later or steps S1110 to S1130 of the periodic process (FIG. 277) restores the process to the process interrupted at the time of power failure.

In the slot machine 4000 of the present embodiment, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the RAM 4603 when a power failure occurs and when the recovery process is executed. At this time, only the game control work area excluding the debug (inspection function) work area out of all the areas where the checksum calculation target is used as the work (game control work area and debug (inspection function) work area). May be. The checksum is calculated only in the game control work area because the debug (inspection function) process is designed to maintain independence from the game control process and affects the result of the game. Since it is a non-processing, it is possible that some bugs may remain due to insufficient verification. In this case, a work area for debugging (inspection function) that holds the information obtained by executing such processing is provided. Targeting the checksum calculation may impair the reliability of returning to normal from a power failure. On the other hand, since the game control process is directly related to the game, if it is installed in the product with bugs remaining, it will cause a big trouble in the market. In some cases, it is possible that sales will be discontinued and it will be necessary to collect the product. In this case, it is extremely likely that it will cause enormous cost damage to the manufacturer and the hall. This is because the game control work area is more reliable than the debug (inspection function) work area because the verification is performed.

When the initialization process is completed or a series of games is completed, the CPU 4601 executes a game initial setting process in order to start a new game (step S1024). In the game initial setting process, a process of temporarily returning the information of the RAM 4603 that is no longer needed for performing a series of game controls to the initial setting state is executed.

When the game initial setting process is completed, the CPU 4601 executes the information signal 1 output process for outputting the debug (inspection function) signal at the start of the game (step S1026). In the information signal 1 output process, processing such as setting the debug (inspection function) signal to the initial state is performed. Information signal output processing is defined as information signal 1 to N output processing, and a required module is called at the timing of outputting the information signal. For example, when a debug (inspection function) signal (information about reel rotation start, start lever ON, winning combination) is output in the game start process, the debug (inspection function) signal related to the stop of each reel is output in the symbol stop process. When the (inspection function) signal (stop operation signal, stopped symbol information, etc.) is output, the debug (inspection function) signal related to the fixed combination in the winning judgment process (fixed combination displayed as stopped on each reel, payout associated with the fixed combination) At the time of output of the number of sheets information, output signal information (number of payout medals) related to the number of payouts at the time of payout, etc.), the "information signal N output process" module required for the process is appropriately called and executed.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes a standby process for performing a process before the player operates the start lever 4210 (step S1028). Before operating the start lever 4210, for example, it is determined whether or not an instruction to execute a replay is given, whether or not a medal has been inserted, whether or not a medal has been settled, and the like. The game settings are checked.

When the start lever 4210 is operated, the CPU 4601 executes a game start process for starting the game (step S1030). In the game start process, a random number value for drawing a game is acquired, a winning combination or the like is determined, and the rotation of the reel 4301 is started. After that, the CPU 4601 executes a Wait process for waiting until the reel 4301 reaches a normal rotation speed (step S1032).

When the reel 4301 reaches a normal rotation speed, the CPU 4601 makes it possible to accept the input of the reel stop button 4211, and executes a symbol stop process that performs a process until all the reels 4301 are stopped (step S1034).

Further, when all the reels 4301 are stopped, the CPU 4601 executes a winning determination process for determining a winning combination based on the stopped symbol (step S1036). In the winning combination determination process, the winning combination is determined, and if it is determined that the winning combination is won, the setting corresponding to the winning combination is made, and the setting for executing the payout process corresponding to the winning combination is made.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 determines the current game state, adds the number of prize medals to be paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and adds the work area for calculating the accessory ratio of the RAM area 5200 (FIG. 273, see FIG. 274) is updated (step S1038). The process of step S1038 can be skipped when there is no prize medal to be paid out in step S1036, and the load on the CPU 4601 can be reduced.

Even if the slot machine 4000 detects fraud and cancels the game, the accessory ratio calculation area update process (step S1038) is executed. By executing these processes regardless of whether or not fraud is detected, it is possible to collect data for calculating the accessory ratio even during fraud notification.

Finally, the CPU 4601 executes a game end process for performing a game end process (step S1042). In the game end process, the payout process corresponding to the winning combination is executed, and if there is no winning or if there is no paying out, the processing is skipped. When the game end process is completed, the game returns to the game initial setting process, and the main loop process from step S1024 to step S1038 is executed.

[17-4-2. Periodic processing]
Next, periodic processing, which is interrupt processing that is activated at a predetermined cycle while the main loop processing of the system reset initial startup processing is being executed, will be described. FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing the procedure of periodic processing.

When the periodic processing is executed, the CPU 4601 first saves the values stored in all the registers (step S1110). At this time, the data to be saved is stored in the game control save area shown in FIG. 273. As described above, since the periodic processing is an interrupt processing that is started while the main loop processing is being executed, the processing can be continued after returning by saving the register of the CPU used in the main loop processing. Need to be.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 resets the watchdog timer built in the CPU (step S1112). As a result, the watchdog timer can be cleared periodically.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes a switch input process for sampling input signals from various switches (step S1114). Further, the game state check process is executed (step S1116). In the game state check process, a process related to drive control of a drive body (stepping motor) that rotates the reel 4301 is performed. Specifically, the pulse output of the stepping motor, the detection of the origin position, and the like are performed.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes a timer measurement process for updating various timers used in the game control (step S1118). Since the periodic processing is executed periodically, the set time is the execution interval of the periodic processing x the set number of times.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 determines whether or not the display switch 1318 is operated, and if the display switch 1318 is operated, calls the accessory ratio calculation / display process, and the medal stored in the accessory ratio calculation work area. Calculate the bonus ratio by referring to the number of payouts. Then, the calculated bonus ratio is displayed on the bonus ratio display 1317 (step S1119). The accessory ratio calculation / display process is the same as the accessory ratio calculation / display process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the specific calculation method of the accessory ratio and the specific display method of the accessory ratio are the same as the methods described in the examples of the pachinko machine 1. In this way, by calling the accessory ratio calculation / display process in the timer interrupt process and calculating the accessory ratio, the accessory ratio (gambling of the slot machine 4000) based on the latest data can be confirmed.

When the display switch 1318 is operated, all kinds of values (role ratio, continuous accessory ratio, cumulative total, total cumulative total) may be calculated, but the display is displayed for each operation of the display switch 1318. Only the values to be calculated may be calculated. Further, the accessory ratio may be calculated regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, and the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio indicator 1317 triggered by the operation of the display switch 1318.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes an LED output process for controlling the LED (step S1120). The LED to be controlled is the one controlled by the main board 4600, and is, for example, the payout number display LED 4562. In addition, data for displaying the accessory ratio on the LED is output.

The CPU 4601 executes an information output process for outputting a signal to the external relay terminal plate 4131 (step S1122). The output signal is transmitted to the hall computer 4800 via the external relay terminal plate 4131. Further, the CPU 4601 outputs the command stored in the command buffer to the effect control board 4700 (step S1124).

The CPU 4601 executes a random number update process for updating the random numbers used in the game (step S1126). In the random number update process, the random number is updated to be generated by software processing. Here, in addition to the random numbers generated only by the software, the update processing of the soft random numbers built in the CPU is executed. With the soft random numbers built into the CPU, the count itself is executed by the hardware, but the trigger for updating is determined by this process. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the program processing related to the random number update.

When the random number update process is completed, the CPU 4601 performs a process for returning to the interrupted process (main loop process). Specifically, the value of the register saved in the process of step S1110 is restored (step S1128). Further, the execution of the interrupt is permitted (step S1130). During periodic processing (timer interrupt processing), even if a new timer interrupt occurs, the new timer interrupt is pending, and after the timer interrupt processing executed immediately before is normally completed and the interrupt is enabled. It is supposed to be executed. Therefore, it is configured so that periodic processing (timer interrupt processing) is not executed multiple times.

[17-4-3. Information signal output processing]
Subsequently, the information signal output process executed in the system reset start process and the like will be described. The information signal output process is provided according to each function (1 to N) of the output signal, and is composed of a plurality of modules. For example, there are "for condition device output signal (signal output related to condition device operation)" and "lottery determination process (signal output related to lottery)". Although the output signals are different, the configuration of each information output process is basically the same, so the explanation of each flow is omitted. FIG. 278 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the information signal output processing of the present embodiment.

When the information signal output process is started, the CPU 4601 first saves the values of all the registers of the CPU (step S1210). This is to prevent the values set in the registers from being destroyed by executing the information signal output processing (to ensure that the values are restored even if they are destroyed), and save the values of all the registers to the stack area. It is designed to let you. Further, the stack area used at this time is allocated to the debug (inspection function) evacuation area, and is allocated to a different area separated from the game control evacuation area.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 acquires the information to be referred from the RAM 4603 for selecting (ON / OFF) the information signal to be output (debugging (inspection function) signal) (step S1212). In each information signal output process, only the information stored in the RAM 4603 is referred to, and no data is written to the RAM 4603 within the process. When writing is required, the information is output to the debug (inspection function) work area. A dedicated work is provided, and the work is configured not to be used (including reference) in processing other than information signal output processing. As a result, even if the program that executes the information signal output processing is arranged in a different place from other game control programs, independence from other game control programs can be ensured without using a common area. ..

Next, the CPU 4601 generates an information signal to be output based on the information acquired in the process of step S1212 (step S1214), and outputs the generated signal to the corresponding port (step S1216). Further, it waits until the information signal output time, which is the time for maintaining the output signal, elapses (step S1218). The information signal output time is predetermined, and by setting a sufficient time, the debug (inspection function) signal can be reliably transmitted to the transmission destination. After that, the values of all the registers saved in the process of step S1210 are restored (step S1220), and this process is terminated.

As described above, the information signal (debugging (inspection function) signal) is generated and output in the processes from step S1210 to step S1220. Then, the processes from step S1210 to step S1220 are executed for the amount of the debug (inspection function) signal to be output. Output different types and numbers of signals for each output signal function (1 to N). In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of information signal output processing are defined for each function, but the table in which the output signals corresponding to the functions are defined is defined in the debug (inspection function) area. (Ii) The information signal output processing may be standardized by preparing a signal in the data area, selecting a signal corresponding to the function specified by the caller, and configuring the signal to be output.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the program (signal output program) for executing the information signal output processing and the like is stored in the area clearly distinguished from the area for storing the game control program (game control area). By providing an area (area for debugging (inspection function)), a program for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1 can be independently arranged. The signal output program is used for the purpose of debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1, is a process that does not affect the result of the game, and does not impair the fairness of the game. Also, for other purposes (for example, to place a game control program or a general-purpose program to make up for the lack of capacity in the game control area), the program should not be placed in the debug (inspection function) area. It has become.

The signal output program is executed after being statically called from the game control program, and at this time, the address of the callee is specified. Further, the signal output program is modularized for each function, and when called, protects all the registers used in the game control area. Further, as described above, when the program processing of the game control area is executed, the access to the debug (inspection function) work area is prohibited, and the program processing of the debug (inspection function) area is executed. If so, it is configured to allow only reference to the game control work area and prohibit writing. Furthermore, it is configured to prohibit calling modules (including subroutines) arranged in the game control area from the debug (inspection function) area. The program placed in the debug (inspection function) area including the signal output program is always called in the subroutine format, and after the subroutine ends, it returns immediately after the call by the return instruction. The modules stored in the debug (inspection function) area are configured for each purpose. With this configuration, the execution of the signal output program (the program arranged in the debug (inspection function) area) does not affect the execution of the game control program.

In the embodiment of the slot machine 4000, the erasing timing of the RAM (work area for game control, work area for calculating the accessory ratio) may be the same as in steps S18 to S26 of FIG. 21 of the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. The slot machine 4000 does not have a RAM clear switch, and when the setting change key switch 4112t is operated, the backup data in the game state is erased.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in addition to the effects described in the above-described embodiment of the pachinko machine, the ratio of the accessory of the slot machine in operation can be accurately calculated, and the gambling of the gaming machine in operation can be determined. You can check it.

Among the inventions disclosed in the present specification, the following are typical examples of the viewpoints of inventions other than those described in the claims.

(0) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A main control device that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
Equipped with a character ratio display that displays information about the given game value,
The accessory ratio display has a display device and a driver circuit for driving the display device.
The main controller
Data to be displayed on the accessory ratio display is transmitted to the driver circuit by serial communication, and the data is transmitted to the driver circuit.
The game according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises setting whether to use a synchronization method, a communication rate, parity, or a stop bit for serial communication with the driver circuit after the power is turned on. Machine.

(1) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the communication between the main control device and the driver circuit is slower than the communication between the main control device and the peripheral control device.

As a result, it is possible to suppress an inaccurate display of the accessory ratio due to garbled data during communication.

(2) The main control device is
It has a work RAM that holds data related to the progress of the game and data for calculating the accessory ratio even when the power is cut off.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the setting for serial communication is executed after the work RAM is cleared.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the display of the wrong accessory ratio by using the data of the RAM having the wrong content.

(3) The main control device is
It has a function to transmit the data stored in the FIFO buffer by serial communication.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that a data storage amount for determining a timing for transmitting data from the FIFO buffer is set after the power is turned on.

As a result, data can be transmitted from the FIFO buffer with an arbitrary number of bits.

(4) A gaming machine that gives a player a gaming value.
A main control device that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
Equipped with a character ratio display that displays information about the given game value,
The accessory ratio display has a display device and a driver circuit for driving the display device.
The length of the signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit is longer than the length of the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device, so that the length of the main control device, the display device, and the driver is longer. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that a circuit is arranged.

By lengthening the signal line connecting the main controller and the driver circuit, it is easy to detect unauthorized modifications without arranging parts around the main controller, and the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device. By making the signal line shorter than the signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit, the influence of noise can be reduced and the accessory ratio can be displayed more accurately.

(5) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the main control device and the accessory ratio indicator are housed in one case.

This makes it easier to detect unauthorized modifications without arranging other parts around the main controller, and further reduces the effects of noise.

(6) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the main control device and the accessory ratio display are arranged on one printed circuit board.

This makes it easier to detect unauthorized modifications without arranging other components on the printed circuit board around the main controller, and further reduces the effects of noise.

(7) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the accessory ratio display is configured by accommodating the display device and the driver circuit in one package.

Thereby, the influence of noise on the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device can be reduced. Further, the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device can be shortened.

(8) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein a guard pattern (ground pattern or power supply pattern) is provided along a signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit.

Thereby, the influence of noise on the signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit can be reduced.

(9) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display direction of the accessory ratio display is the same direction as the display direction of the model number on the surface of the main control device.

As a result, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the main control device has been replaced and the displayed accessory ratio without taking an unreasonable posture.

(10) The driver circuit has a standby mode in which characters and numbers are not displayed on the display device and power consumption is reduced.
The game according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the main control device sets the driver circuit to a standby state when the accessory ratio display is in a closed state in which the accessory ratio indicator cannot be visually recognized in the installed state of the gaming machine. Machine.

As a result, it is possible to prevent wasteful power consumption of the gaming machine when it is not necessary to display the accessory ratio.

(11) A gaming machine that grants a prize ball as a game value to a player by winning a prize in a predetermined winning opening of a game ball launched toward a game area.
The main control device that controls the progress of the game,
Equipped with an accessory ratio display that displays information about prize balls
The winning openings include a general winning opening whose entrance shape does not change depending on the gaming state and an electric winning opening whose entrance opens or expands depending on the gaming state.
The main control device determines the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player, at least with the number of first prize balls paid out in the wake of winning the general winning opening and the winning of the electric winning opening. Count separately from the number of second prize balls to be paid out,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the accessory ratio indicator displays information regarding a ratio between the number of the first prize balls and the number of the second prize balls.

(12) The main control device stores the counted number of prize balls in the memory, and stores the counted number of prize balls in the memory.
The memory stores a check code for verifying the number of stored prize balls, and stores the check code.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the main control device erases the number of prize balls stored in the memory when the check code is not normal.

As a result, it is possible to detect an abnormality in the number of prize balls stored in the memory, and it is possible to suppress the display of an erroneous accessory ratio (ratio of the number of first prize balls to the number of second prize balls).

(13) The main control device is
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which the stored contents are retained even when the power is cut off.
Data for game control is stored in the first backup area, and
The data of the number of prize balls for calculating the accessory ratio is stored in the second backup area, and the data is stored in the second backup area.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the data stored in the first backup area and the data stored in the second backup area are erased under different conditions.

As a result, when at least one of the data for game control and the data for the number of prize balls for calculating the bonus ball ratio is normal, only the abnormal data can be deleted and the normal data can be left.

(14) The main control device is
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which the stored contents are retained even when the power is cut off.
Data for game control is stored in the first backup area, and
The data of the number of prize balls for calculating the accessory ratio is stored in the second backup area, and the data is stored in the second backup area.
If the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the data stored in the first backup area is erased, but the data stored in the second backup area is not erased. The gaming machine described in the section.

If the bonus ratio calculation / display data 13136 can be erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the bonus ratio calculated by the gaming machine can be erased at an arbitrary timing. Therefore, the backed up accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not deleted by the operation of the RAM clear switch, and the deletion of the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 by the operation of the staff of the game hall is prevented. , It is possible to prevent concealment in a state where the ratio of accessories is high. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the gaming machine modified to the state where the accessory ratio is high, and it is possible to prevent the state where the accessory ratio is high from being concealed.

(15A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the control means updates information on a gaming value to be displayed on the display means, triggered by input / output of a predetermined signal.

(15B) The information on the game value is based on
The control means
The progress of the game is controlled by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state.
The number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state is the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state (for example, the number of gaming balls launched into the gaming area, the game discharged from the gaming machine). The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing by the number of balls, the sum of the number of gaming balls passing through the out opening and the number of winning balls).

(15C) The control means receives, as the predetermined signal, a prize detection signal for detecting a prize in the prize opening, a reception confirmation signal for a prize ball payout command, or a prize ball payout completion signal, or a prize ball. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the number of prize balls used for calculating the base for displaying on the display means is updated at the timing when the prize ball payout command instructing the payout is transmitted.

(15D) The control means
It stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when a signal for detecting the winning of a game ball is received by the winning opening provided in the game area, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated.
The total number of prize balls is updated using the calculated number of prize balls.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15E) A payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player is provided.
The control means
It stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when the winning of the game ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated.
Instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
The total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls instructed to the payout control means.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15F) A payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player is provided.
The control means
It stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when the winning of the game ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated.
Instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
Upon receiving the confirmation of receipt of the instruction from the payout control means,
The total number of prize balls is updated by using the number of prize balls corresponding to the instruction for receiving the reception confirmation.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15G) A payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player is provided.
The control means
It stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when the winning of the game ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated.
Instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
Upon receiving the completion of the payout of the prize ball according to the instruction from the payout control means,
The total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls corresponding to the instruction upon receiving the completion of the payout.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15H) The control means includes an information updating means for updating information on a game value to be displayed on the display means, and the display means for displaying the updated information on the game value, triggered by input / output of a predetermined signal. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that it has a processing display means capable of processing (statistical processing) and displaying the result of arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions of 15A to 15H, the process relating to the acquisition of the game medium can be accurately executed.

(16A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the control means updates information regarding a gaming value to be displayed on the display means in relation to a game situation satisfying a predetermined condition.

(16B) The information on the game value is based on
The control means
The progress of the game is controlled by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated at the timing when the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number.

(16C) The control means
It stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
When a winning ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area in the normal gaming state, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated and stored in the buffer.
The predetermined number is moved from the buffer to the total prize balls at a predetermined timing, and the total prize balls are consumed by the player in the normal gaming state (for example, the number of game balls launched into the gaming area). , The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the base is calculated by dividing by the number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming machine, the sum of the number of balls passing through the out-port and the number of winning balls).

(16D) The predetermined timing is a timing when the number of prize balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number.
When the number of prize balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer and adds the predetermined number to the total number of prize balls, thereby causing the total prize balls from the buffer. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises moving the predetermined number to a number.

(16E) The control means has an information updating means for updating information on a game value to be displayed on the display means, and the display means for displaying the updated information on the game value, triggered by input / output of a predetermined signal. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that it has a processing display means capable of processing (statistical processing) and displaying the result of arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions of 16A to 16E, it is possible to accurately execute a process different from the game property while maintaining the game property within the restrictions of the main control device according to the rules.

(17A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The control means
Count the number of balls consumed by the player and
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the information regarding the gaming value for displaying on the display means is updated in relation to the counted number of balls consumed satisfying a predetermined condition.

(17B) The control means
The progress of the game is controlled by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information on the gaming value is calculated at the timing when the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number.

(17C) The control means is the number of balls consumed by the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the game machine, or the sum of the number of game balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises counting.

(17D) The information on the game value is based on
The control means
It stores the total number of out balls used to calculate the base,
The number of balls consumed in the normal game state is calculated, stored in the buffer, and stored.
The base is calculated by moving a predetermined number from the buffer to the total number of out balls at a predetermined timing and dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state by the total number of out balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that.

(17E) The predetermined timing is a timing when the number of balls consumed in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number.
When the number of spheres consumed in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer and adds the predetermined number to the total number of out spheres, thereby causing the total out spheres from the buffer. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that a predetermined number is moved to a number.

(17F) The control means
Taking the opportunity of winning a prize at the start winning opening, the special symbol variation display game for deriving the special game state is executed, and the game is executed.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein when the hold memory of the special symbol variation display game is the upper limit value, the winning balls to the starting winning opening are not stored and the number of winning balls is counted.

(17G) The control means includes an information updating means for updating information on a game value to be displayed on the display means, and the display means for displaying the updated information on the game value, triggered by input / output of a predetermined signal. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that it has a processing display means capable of processing (statistical processing) and displaying the result of arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions of 17A to 17G, it is possible to accurately execute a process different from the game property while maintaining the game property.

(18A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information on the given game value, and
It is provided with a main body frame to which a game board having a game area in which the game is played can be detachably attached.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display means displays information on the gaming value even when the main body frame is closed.

(18B) The main body frame is rotatably attached to an outer frame attached to the island equipment of the amusement park.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display means is provided on the back surface side of the gaming machine, which is visible when the main body frame is opened.

(18C) The control means is attached to the main body frame.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display means is visibly provided in the case of the control means from the back surface side of the gaming machine.

According to the inventions of 18A to 18C, the decrease in sales of halls can be suppressed.

(19A)
A gaming machine that gives a player a gaming value
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The control means
Information updating means for updating information on the game value to be displayed on the display means in relation to satisfying a predetermined condition in the game, and
It has a game execution means to play a special symbol variation display game triggered by winning a prize at the start winning opening.
Each of the preceding paragraphs is characterized in that the information regarding the game value is updated even when the predetermined condition is satisfied while the special symbol variation display game is being performed by the game execution means. Described game machine.

(19B) The information on the game value is based on
As the predetermined condition, the control means said at any timing of detecting a prize to the winning opening, transmitting a prize ball payout command, receiving confirmation of receipt of the prize ball payout command, and receiving a prize ball payout completion signal. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the number of prize balls used to calculate the base for displaying on the display means is updated.

According to the inventions of 19A to 19B, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which sufficient countermeasures against fraud are taken even in a variable display game.

(20A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
The main control means that executes the program that controls the progress of the game,
A production control means that controls the production of a special symbol variation display game that is performed when a prize is won at the start port, and
It is equipped with a game value information display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The effect control means
Control the transition to the low power mode, which reduces the power consumption of the gaming machine from the normal mode,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display mode is not changed so as to reduce the power consumption of the gaming value information display means during the low power mode.

(20B) Displaying the effect of the special symbol variation display game, the effect display means composed of a liquid crystal display means having a backlight is provided.
The effect display means reduces the brightness of the backlight during the low power mode.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the gaming value information display means is composed of a light emitting diode and does not reduce the brightness even during the low power mode.

(20C) Provided with an effect display means for displaying the effect of the special symbol variation display game.
The effect display means controls the display mode to the low power mode when a predetermined time elapses after the hold memory of the special symbol variation display game is exhausted.
The game value information display means does not change the display mode so as to reduce power consumption even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is exhausted. The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

According to the inventions of 20A to 20C, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a full energy saving mode.

(21A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The control means
It has a game state control means for controlling a normal game state and one of a plurality of advantageous game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.
Described in the preceding paragraphs, wherein the information on the game value is calculated and updated by dividing the number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal game state. Gaming machine.

(21B) The control means depends on any one of the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the game machine, and the number of game balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises counting the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(21C) The control means
When the special symbol variation display game becomes a big hit, the advantageous game state is derived, and the player is controlled to open the winning opening where a large amount of game value can be acquired.
The period from the determination of the jackpot by the special symbol variation display game to the start of the next special symbol variation display game is regarded as the advantageous gaming state, and the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls during this period are excluded from the calculation of the information regarding the game value. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized by the above.

(21D) The control means
In the advantageous gaming state, the player is controlled to open the winning opening where a large amount of gaming value can be acquired.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the number of gaming balls won in the winning opening is excluded from the number of gaming balls launched into the gaming area, and the number of consumed balls in the normal gaming state is counted.

According to the inventions of 21A to 21D, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(22A) A gaming machine that grants a gaming ball when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information about the given game ball.
In the game area where the launched game ball rolls, a start port that is an opportunity to derive a special game state that facilitates acquisition of a large amount of game balls, and an opportunity to derive an open state from the closed state of the start port. At least there is a passageway
The control means
It is also possible to control the special gaming state in which the open state of the starting port can be easily derived.
The number of prize balls given to the player is used as the number of prize balls given to the player, excluding the number of prize balls given and the number of balls consumed by the player when controlled by either the special gaming state or the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information about the gaming ball is calculated and updated by dividing by the number of balls consumed by the person.

(22B) The control means depends on any one of the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the game machine, and the number of game balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises counting the number of balls consumed in the normal state.

(22C) The control means sets the expanded state from the determination of the hit by the normal symbol variation display game to the start of the next normal symbol variation display game, and determines the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls during this period with respect to the game ball. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, which is characterized by being excluded from the calculation of information.

(22D) The control means is characterized in that the number of game balls launched in the game area is excluded from the number of game balls that have won a prize at the start port, and the number of balls consumed in the normal state is counted. The gaming machine described in each section.

According to the inventions of 22A to 22D, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(23A) A launching device that can be operated by the player and launches a game ball toward the game area,
A prize ball granting means for granting a predetermined number of prize balls when the game ball is detected at the winning opening provided in the game area, and
When the game ball is detected in a predetermined winning opening among the winning openings, a main control means for executing a lottery for whether or not to give an advantageous gaming state to the player, and
A gaming machine including peripheral control means for determining an effect to be displayed based on information transmitted from the main control means.
The main control means has an information updating means capable of updating the information about the given game ball in any increase or decrease.
The first state in which the information about the game ball given by the information updating means can be updated to increase or decrease, and the first state in which the information about the game ball given by the information updating means can be updated to increase or decrease. There is at least a second state in which the rate at which the information about the given game ball is updated to increase is suppressed as compared with the first state.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of a special effect indicating that the first state has shifted to the second state.

(23B) The information on the game value is based on
The main control means
The progress of the game is controlled by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state.
The base is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls in the normal gaming state by the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect with a timing at which the base is likely to decrease as the second state.

(23C) The main control means
Information about the game ball is written in the storage area at any timing of a predetermined time, a predetermined number of prize balls, or a predetermined number of consumed balls.
The information about the game ball written in the storage area is compared with the information about the game ball stored in the storage area before the writing, and the increase / decrease of the information about the game ball is determined.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect according to the determined increase / decrease.

According to the inventions of 23A to 23C, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest even if the variable display game is interrupted for a long time.

(24A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that repeatedly executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information on the given game value, and
A means for acquiring the number of prize balls acquired by the player at a predetermined timing, and a means for acquiring the number of prize balls.
It is equipped with a consumption ball detecting means for detecting the consumption balls consumed by the player.
The control means
When the predetermined timing and the detection of the consumed balls by the consumed ball number detecting means occur within the same repetition, the number of prize balls acquired at the predetermined timing and the detected number of consumed balls are within the same repetition. Count with
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein information on the game value is calculated using the counted number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls.

(24B) The information on the game value is based on
The control means
The progress of the game is controlled by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state.
The total number of prize balls in the normal game state and the number of game balls consumed by the player in the normal game state are counted within the same repetition.
The game according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein information on the game value is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of game balls consumed by the player in the normal game state. Machine.

According to the inventions of 24A to 24B, the information on the number of game media acquired by the player can be quickly displayed.

(25A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information on the given game value, and
An out-port detection means for detecting a game ball that has passed through an out-port provided at the bottom of the game area, and an out-port detection means.
It is equipped with a winning ball detecting means for detecting a winning ball to a predetermined winning opening.
The control means
It has a game state control means for controlling a normal game state and a special game state in which a player can acquire more game value than the normal game state.
The number of game balls that have passed through the out port is counted from the output of the out port detecting means.
The number of winning balls is counted from the output of the winning ball detecting means, and the number of winning balls is counted.
The number of balls consumed by the player is counted by the sum of the counted number of game balls that have passed through the out port and the number of winning balls.
It is characterized in that information on the game value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state at a predetermined timing. , The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

(25B) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information on the given game value, and
It is equipped with a detection means for counting the number of game balls launched into the game area.
The control means
It has a game state control means for controlling a normal game state and a special game state in which a player can acquire more game value than the normal game state.
The number of game balls launched into the game area is counted from the output of the detection means, and the consumed game balls consumed by the player are counted.
It is characterized in that information on the game value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state at a predetermined timing. , The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

(25C) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information on the given game value, and
It is equipped with a detection means that counts the number of game balls ejected from the game machine.
The control means
It has a game state control means for controlling a normal game state and a special game state in which a player can acquire more game value than the normal game state.
The number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine is counted from the output of the detection means, and the number of balls consumed by the player is counted.
It is characterized in that information on the game value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state at a predetermined timing. , The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

According to the inventions of 25A to 25C, the process relating to the acquisition of the game medium can be accurately executed.

(26A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The control means
A game state control means for controlling a normal game state and a special game state in which a player can acquire more game value than the normal game state, and a game state control means for controlling the game state.
A means for counting the number of prize balls, excluding the number of prize balls given when a game ball launched toward the right side of the game area wins a prize opening, and a means for counting the number of prize balls.
It has a consumption ball number counting means for counting the number of consumption balls consumed by the player by excluding the number of game balls launched toward the right side of the game area.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the control means updates information on the gaming value by using the counted number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls.

(26B) The information on the game value is based on
The number of prize balls in the normal game state is counted by excluding the number of prize balls given when the game ball launched toward the right side of the game area wins a prize opening that is considered to be able to win.
The number of balls consumed in the normal game state is counted by excluding the number of game balls launched toward the right side of the game area.
The control means according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the control means calculates information on the game value by dividing the counted number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state. Gaming machine.

(26C) For a predetermined period of time after the control means detects the passage of the game ball of the gate portion provided on the right side of the game area or the winning of the winning opening provided on the right side of the game area. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which is excluded from the counting of the number of prize balls and the number of balls consumed.

(26D) The control means determines the predetermined period according to either the elapse of a predetermined time from the last detection, the time for consuming a predetermined number of game balls, or the time for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized by.

(26E) The control means excludes the number of passing balls of the gate portion provided on the right side of the game area and the number of winning balls to the winning opening provided on the right side of the game area, and the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises counting the number of balls consumed.

According to the inventions of 26A to 26E, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(27A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A main control means for deriving a game state advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning lottery in the game,
The first data setting means for setting the first data according to the result of the game, and
A second data setting means for setting the second data that does not depend on the result of the game,
A third data setting means that sets the third data according to the result of the game,
A first conversion means for obtaining the first conversion data from the first data set by the first data setting means and the second data set by the second data setting means, and
A second conversion means for obtaining the second conversion data from the first conversion data obtained by the first conversion means and the third data set by the third data setting means, and
A gaming machine characterized by having a display means for displaying the second conversion data without displaying the first conversion data.

(27B) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display means device does not display the second conversion data when the second conversion data is a numerical value in a predetermined range.

(27C) The first conversion means is a multiplication means, and is characterized in that the first conversion data is obtained by multiplying the first data and the second data at a timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

(27D) The second conversion means is a division means, and is characterized in that the first conversion data is divided by the third data to obtain the second conversion data at the timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied. , The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

(27E) The first data is the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) given to the player.
The third data is the game value consumed by the player (for example, the number of out balls).
The second conversion means divides the first conversion data by the third data to obtain information on the given game value as the second conversion data.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display device displays information (for example, a base) regarding the gaming value obtained by the second conversion means.

According to the inventions of 27A to 27E, information on the result of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, the base value required for evaluation of gaming machines can be displayed accurately in real time. Further, by using the second conversion means (division means), information on the game value (for example, a base value) can be accurately displayed in real time while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the control means.

(28A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a periodic process that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information on the given game value, and
It has a conversion means for calculating information on the game value, and has
The control means
An argument is passed to the conversion means at a predetermined timing, and the result converted based on the argument by the conversion means is obtained from the conversion means.
A gaming machine characterized in that a process of passing an argument and a process of acquiring the result of the conversion can be executed within one periodic process.

(28B) The conversion means
It is an arithmetic circuit that performs division operations.
It has a divisor register in which a divisor is input, a divisor register in which a divisor is input, and a result register for outputting the quotient of the division operation.
The control means
Write arguments to the divisor register and the divisor register,
After a predetermined time has elapsed from the writing of the argument, the quotient is read from the result register.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the process of writing an argument to the divisor register and the divisor register is executed before the predetermined time from the end of the repeatedly executed program.

(28C) A prize game medium number counting means for counting the game media given to the player in a predetermined game state, and
It has a consumption game medium number counting means for counting the game media consumed by the player in the predetermined game state.
The control means
A value obtained by multiplying the number of prize game media counted by the prize game medium number counting means by 100 is written to the divisor register.
The number of consumption game media counted by the consumption game medium number counting means is written in the divisor gista.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base value is read from the result register.

According to the inventions of 28A to 28C, information on the result of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, since the process of passing an argument to the conversion circuit and the process of acquiring the conversion result from the conversion circuit are executed within one iterative process (timer interrupt process), the complexity of control can be suppressed.

(29A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A winning opening where a game ball can be won, and
Control means to control the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information on the given game value, and
A consumption ball counting means for counting the consumption balls consumed by the player,
It has a prize ball counting means for counting the prize balls given to the player,
At least one of the winning openings is a specific winning opening that can be switched between an open state in which it is easy to win a game ball and a closed state in which it is difficult to win a prize.
The control means
Based on the counted number of consumed balls and the number of prize balls, the information regarding the game value to be displayed on the display means is updated.
If a prize is detected in the specific winning opening even though the specific winning opening is in the closed state, it is determined that the winning is abnormal, and if the determination is made, the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality is determined. Is excluded from the number of balls consumed, and the information regarding the game value for displaying on the display means is updated.

(29B) At least one of the winning openings is a starting winning opening that serves as an opportunity to derive a special gaming state that facilitates the acquisition of a large number of game balls.
When the starting winning opening is closed and a winning is detected in the starting winning opening, the control means determines that the winning is abnormal and excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning from the number of consumed balls. , The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information regarding the gaming value for displaying on the display means is updated.

(29C) At least one of the winning openings is a large winning opening that is opened in a special gaming state.
When the winning opening is detected while the winning opening is closed, the control means determines that the winning is abnormal and excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning from the number of consumed balls. , The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information regarding the gaming value for displaying on the display means is updated.

(29D) It has a consumption ball detecting means for detecting the consumption ball consumed by the player.
Each of the preceding means is characterized in that the consumption ball counting means counts the consumption balls consumed by the player by subtracting the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the number of consumption balls detected by the consumption ball number detecting means. The gaming machine described in the section.

(29E) The control means stores the total number of balls consumed for calculating the information regarding the game value.
The consumption ball counting means adds the number of consumption balls detected by the consumption ball number detecting means to the total number of consumption balls, subtracts the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the total number of consumption balls, and obtains the consumption balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which is characterized by counting.

(29F) The control means stores the total number of balls consumed for calculating the information regarding the game value.
The consumption ball counting means counts the consumption balls by adding a value obtained by subtracting the number of consumption balls related to the winning abnormality from the number of consumption balls detected by the consumption ball number detection means to the total number of consumption balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, which is a feature.

(29G) The winning opening can be switched between an open state in which it is easy to win a game ball and a closed state in which it is difficult to win a prize.
When the control means detects the winning of the winning opening in the closed state and does not pay out the winning balls in connection with the winning, the control means determines that the winning is abnormal and determines the number of winning balls for the winning. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information regarding the gaming value for displaying on the display means is updated by excluding it from the number of balls consumed.

(29H) When the winning abnormality in the winning opening is detected a plurality of times within a predetermined period, the control means excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the number of consumed balls and displays it on the display means. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the information regarding the gaming value for playing the game is updated.

According to the inventions of 29A to 29H, information on the result of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, the number of winning balls that are abnormally won can be excluded from the number of out balls, and information on the game value (for example, the base value) can be accurately displayed in real time.

(30) A gaming machine that gives a gaming medium to a player as a prize.
A game area where multiple winning openings are arranged,
When a game medium is detected in each of the winning openings, a prize-giving means for granting a predetermined specific prize among a plurality of prizes, and a prize-giving means.
A calculation processing means for executing a predetermined calculation process using the number of game media flowing into the game area and the number of game media given as prizes given by the prize giving means.
A processing means for processing the result of the arithmetic processing executed by the arithmetic processing means, and
A display means for displaying the result of arithmetic processing processed by the processing means on a predetermined display device is provided.
When a specific prize is generated among the plurality of prizes in the game, the prize-giving means grants the specific prize, and the display means displays the result of the arithmetic processing so as not to change. Amusement machine.

According to the thirty invention, information on the result of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, prizes (for example, prize balls that are paid out in connection with winning a prize in a prize opening (for example, a general prize opening or a large winning opening with a large number of prize balls) to which a high-value prize is given) are generated when a specific prize is generated. Even if it is given, the result of the calculation process (calculated base value) can be displayed so that it does not change, and it is easy to determine whether the gaming machine is exhibiting the specified performance (for example, whether it is according to the set payout rate). it can.

(31A) A game including a main control means including a lottery means for executing a lottery regarding winning when a specific condition is satisfied, and a peripheral control means for controlling a predetermined effect based on a signal from the main control means. It ’s a machine,
The peripheral control means
Temporary storage means for storing information based on the signal received from the main control means, and
An information storage means that is updated by the information stored in the temporary storage means, and
By providing a first information output means for outputting at least a part of the information stored in the information storage means to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
A gaming machine characterized in that the status history of the gaming machine can be grasped.

(31B) Equipped with a general winning opening that allows a game ball launched in the game area to win even if it is not in a special game state.
The signal transmitted from the main control means to the peripheral control means includes a signal indicating winning to the general winning opening.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the first information output means outputs information regarding winning to the general winning opening to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(31C) When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the external output means for outputting the information based on the predetermined condition to the external terminal board and the external output means.
When the predetermined conditions are satisfied, an information storage means for storing more detailed information than the information output to the external terminal board, and an information storage means.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, comprising: an information presenting means for presenting information stored by the information storage means.

(31D) A first initialization means for initializing the state of the gaming machine is provided.
The peripheral control means
A storage means for storing information based on a signal received from the main control means, and a storage means.
The game according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises a limited initialization means that does not initialize a part of the information stored in the storage means even when it is initialized by the first initialization means. Machine.

(31E) The first initialization means for initializing the state of the gaming machine,
A second initialization means for initializing the stored contents of the information storage means is provided.
The information storage means can retain the stored contents even when the power of the gaming machine is cut off.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the first initialization means does not initialize the stored contents of the information storage means, but initializes the stored contents of the temporary storage means.

(31F) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means stores the type of a signal received from the main control means and the time when the signal is received in the information storage means.

(31G) The signals transmitted from the main control means to the peripheral control means include a signal related to a counting event counted according to the progress of the game and a signal related to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine. Including
The peripheral control means
Temporary storage means for storing information based on the signal received from the main control means, and
An information storage means that is updated by the information stored in the temporary storage means, and
It has a first information output means that outputs at least a part of the information stored in the information storage means to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
The peripheral control means
The counting event is counted based on the signal received from the main control means, and the counting result is stored in the temporary storage means.
When a signal relating to the state change event is received from the main control means, the state change event is stored in the information storage means, and the counting result of the counting event stored in the temporary storage means is stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that.

(31H) The signal transmitted from the main control means includes a signal related to a counting event counted for management of the gaming machine and a signal related to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine.
The information storage means stores the counting result of the counting event for each state of the gaming machine.
The peripheral control means
The signal related to the counting event received from the main control means is counted and stored in the temporary storage means.
When a signal related to the state change event is received from the main control means, the type of the signal related to the state change event, the time when the signal is received and the information storage means are stored, and the counting event stored in the temporary storage means. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the counting result of the counting event is added to the counting result of the counting event stored in the information storage means.

(31I) The signal transmitted from the main control means includes a signal related to a counting event counted for management of the gaming machine and a signal related to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine.
The information storage means stores the counting result of the counting event for each state of the gaming machine.
The peripheral control means
The signal related to the counting event received from the main control means is counted and stored in the temporary storage means.
When a signal relating to the state change event is received from the main control means, the counting result of the counting event stored in the temporary storage means is added to the counting result of the counting event stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine described in each section before.

According to the inventions of 31A to 31I, it is possible to know how the balls have been ejected. In particular, according to the inventions of 31D and 31E, information on the game can be properly stored.

(32) A gaming machine that gives a player a prize gaming medium as a gaming value.
A control means that executes periodic processing related to the progress of the game,
Consumed game media counting means for counting consumed game media consumed by the player,
A prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media given to a player,
A calculation means for calculating information on the given game value using the counted number of consumption game media and the number of prize game media, and
A first light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements for displaying information about a game including a variable display of a symbol, and a first light emitting element group.
It has a second light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements that display information on the given game value, and has.
The first light emitting element group includes a first terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected and a plurality of second terminals to which the other terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is connected. And have
The second light emitting element group includes a third terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected and a plurality of fourth terminals to which the other terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is connected. And have
The first terminal of the first light emitting element group and the third terminal of the second light emitting element group are connected to one output driving means.
Although the control means outputs a selection signal at a timing common to the first terminal and the third terminal, at least one of the first light emitting elements group is output during the period during which the selection signal is output. A signal output to the plurality of second terminals for lighting one light emitting element and a signal output to the plurality of fourth terminals for lighting at least one light emitting element of the second light emitting element group. Is output at different timings to control the display of the first light emitting element group and the second light emitting element group within one periodic process.

According to the invention of 32, the circuit for displaying the information on the game value to be given (for example, the base value and the accessory ratio) can be simply configured, and the information on the game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(33) A gaming machine that gives a player a prize gaming medium as a gaming value.
A control means that executes periodic processing related to the progress of the game,
Consumed game media counting means for counting consumed game media consumed by the player,
A prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media given to a player,
A calculation means for calculating information on the given game value using the counted number of consumption game media and the number of prize game media, and
A first light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements for displaying information about a game including a variable display of a symbol, and a first light emitting element group.
It has a second light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements that display information on the given game value, and has.
The first light emitting element group includes a first terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected and a plurality of second terminals to which the other terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is connected. And have
The second light emitting element group includes a third terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected and a plurality of fourth terminals to which the other terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is connected. And have
At least one light emitting element of the first light emitting element group corresponds to the selection signal output to the first terminal of the first light emitting element group and the selection signal output to the first terminal. A signal output to the plurality of second terminals for lighting, a selection signal output to the third terminal of the second light emitting element group, and a selection signal output to the third terminal. Although the signals output to the plurality of fourth terminals for lighting at least one light emitting element of the second light emitting element group corresponding to the above are output within the same periodic processing, the first The process of outputting the selection signal output to the terminal 1 and the signal output to the plurality of second terminals corresponding to the selection signal, and the selection signal output to the third terminal and the selection signal. The process of outputting signals to the plurality of corresponding fourth terminals is a gaming machine characterized in that signals are output at different timings in the periodic process by different processes in the same periodic process. ..

According to the invention of 33, a circuit for displaying information regarding the game value to be given can be simply configured. Therefore, information on the game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(34A) A gaming machine that gives a player a prize gaming medium as a gaming value.
Control means to control the progress of the game,
Consumed game media counting means for counting consumed game media consumed by the player,
A prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media given to a player,
A calculation means for calculating information on the given game value using the counted number of consumption game media and the number of prize game media, and
It has a calculation result display means for displaying information on the game value calculated by the calculation means.
The control means
A control device that executes processing for game control,
A timing means for generating a signal (for example, a clock signal or a reset signal) that determines the operation timing of the control device, and
It has an output driving means that is controlled by the control device and at least outputs a control signal for displaying by the calculation result display means.
In the substrate on which the control device is mounted, the timing means is arranged in one direction with respect to the control device, and the output driving means and the calculation result display means are arranged in a direction different from the one direction. A gaming machine characterized in that it is placed away from the timing means.

(34B) The connection line between the control device and the timing means and the connection line between the control device and the output drive means are arranged on the substrate so as not to intersect with each other. The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

(34C) The timing means includes a reset circuit that generates a reset signal input to the control device and an oscillation circuit that generates a clock signal input to the control device.
On the printed circuit board on which the control means is realized, the reset circuit is arranged from the processor in the same direction as the oscillation circuit, and the driver circuit and the display device are arranged apart from the reset circuit and the oscillation circuit. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that.

According to the inventions of 34A to 34C, it is possible to suppress the interference between the signal related to the game control and the signal for displaying the information related to the game. Therefore, the influence on the game control can be suppressed, and the information on the game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(35A) A gaming machine that gives a player a prize gaming medium as a gaming value.
Control means to control the progress of the game,
Consumed game media counting means for counting consumed game media consumed by the player,
A prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media given to a player,
A calculation means for calculating information on the given game value using the counted number of consumption game media and the number of prize game media, and
It has a display means that is controlled by the control means and displays information about the game value.
The control means
A control device that executes processing for game control,
It has a memory that the control device accesses when the process is executed and stores at least information about the game value.
The gaming machine is provided with an input means for instructing the initialization of the memory.
The control means
At a predetermined timing, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the memory is normal, and if it is determined to be abnormal, the first initialization means for initializing the predetermined first area of the memory. ,
At the time of turning on the power, it is determined whether or not the input means is operated, and if it is determined that the input means is operated, a second initialization means for initializing a predetermined second area of the memory is provided. Have and
The first region initialized by the first initialization means and the second region initialized by the second initialization means are the second initial region also by the first initialization means. Includes overlapping areas that are commonly initialized by the conversion means
At least the first region includes a region that does not overlap with the second region.
The gaming machine, characterized in that the information regarding the game value is stored in the first area other than the overlapping area.

(35B) In the first area, data used for calculating information regarding the game value is stored.
Data used for controlling the progress of the game is stored in the second area.
The control means
When it is determined that the data stored in the first area is abnormal, the first area is initialized and the data is initialized.
When it is determined that the data stored in the second area is abnormal, the second area is initialized and the data is initialized.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein when it is determined that the input means is being operated, the second region is initialized without initializing the first region.

(35C) In the first area, data used for calculating information regarding the game value is stored.
Data used for controlling the progress of the game is stored in the second area.
The control means
When it is determined that the data stored in the first area is abnormal, the first area and the second area are initialized, and the data is initialized.
When it is determined that the data stored in the second area is abnormal, the first area and the second area are initialized.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein when it is determined that the input means is being operated, the second region is initialized without initializing the first region.

(35D) Each of the preceding items, wherein the control means determines whether or not the data stored in the first area is abnormal for each execution of periodic processing that is repeatedly executed at predetermined time intervals. The gaming machine described in.

(35E) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the control means determines whether or not the data stored in the first region is abnormal each time the information regarding the gaming value is calculated. ..

(35F) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the control means determines whether or not the data stored in the first area is abnormal when the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

According to the inventions of 35A to 35F, it is possible to appropriately control the memory for storing the information (base value and accessory ratio) regarding the game value to be given. Therefore, information about the game can be displayed accurately and quickly.

(36A) A gaming machine that gives a player a prize gaming medium as a gaming value.
Control means to control the progress of the game,
Consumed game media counting means for counting consumed game media consumed by the player,
A prize game medium counting means for counting prize game media given to a player,
A calculation means for calculating information on the given game value using the counted number of consumption game media and the number of prize game media, and
A display means for displaying information on the game value and
It has an electric accessory that is operated by the control means.
Under specific conditions, when a plurality of game media win a prize during the operation of the electric accessory triggered by one hit, among the winning game media, some of the game media have information on the game value. A gaming machine that is used for calculation and is not used for calculating information on the game value for other gaming media, but can trigger a variable display game for any of the gaming media.

(36B) The control means
When the predetermined start conditions are met, the variable display game is executed, and
Depending on the result of the variable display game, a first gaming state (time saving, high probability state, big hit, etc.) that is advantageous to the player and a second gaming state (normal state) that is less advantageous than the first gaming state. Control to either
When a plurality of game media win a prize during one operation of the electric accessory, the game medium won in the second game state is used for calculating information on the game value, and the first game The gaming media described in the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the gaming media that have won a prize in the state are not used for calculating the information on the game value, but any of the gaming media can trigger a variable display game.

(36C) The control means
Detects multiple types of errors that occur in gaming machines and
When a plurality of game media win a prize during one operation of the electric accessory, the game medium won in a state where the error of a predetermined type is detected is used for calculating the information on the game value. However, although the game media that won the prize in the state where the error of the predetermined type is not detected is used for calculating the information on the game value, any of the game media can be a trigger for the variable display game. The gaming machine described in each section before.

According to the inventions of 36A to 36C, since the game medium is switched to be used for calculating the information on the game value according to the state of the game machine, the information on the game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(37A) A gaming machine provided with an outer frame, a main body frame that is openable and closable to the outer frame and is provided with a gaming board, and a setting changing operation unit for changing a setting state related to the game. hand,
Difficulty in changing settings that makes it difficult to operate the setting change operation unit when the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame, as compared with when the main body frame is open with respect to the outer frame. A gaming machine characterized by having a means of conversion.

(37B) When performing a setting change operation for changing the setting state related to the game, the outer frame, the main frame that is openably and closably supported by the outer frame and the game board is provided, and the changed setting state A gaming machine equipped with a setting status display unit for displaying.
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for making it difficult to see what is displayed by the setting state display unit when the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame.

(37C) An outer frame, a main body frame that is openable and closable to the outer frame and is provided with a game board, and a setting determination operation unit for performing a setting determination operation for determining a setting state related to the game It ’s a pachinko machine
A gaming machine characterized by having a determination difficulty means that makes it difficult to operate the setting determination operation unit when the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame.

(37D) A gaming machine provided with an outer frame, a main body frame that is openable and closable to the outer frame and is provided with a gaming board, and a setting changing operation unit for changing a setting state related to the game. hand,
The setting change operation unit has a setting key insertion unit into which a setting key is inserted.
When the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame, a specific portion of the outer frame is configured to prevent the setting key from being inserted into the setting key insertion portion. A game machine to play.

According to the inventions of 37A to 37D, it is possible to make it difficult for a fraudster to change the setting state illegally, and to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

(37E) A gaming machine that gives a predetermined game profit when a symbol variation display is performed based on the establishment of a start condition and a winning result is derived as the symbol variation display result.
A fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol, and
A setting information determination unit that determines a predetermined setting information related to a game to any one of a plurality of games based on an operation on a specific operation unit is provided.
The gaming machine characterized in that the fluctuation time determining means can determine a specific fluctuation time when the setting information is determined as the specific information based on an operation on the specific operation unit.

(37F) A gaming machine that gives a predetermined game profit when a symbol variation display is performed based on the establishment of a start condition and a hit result is derived as the symbol variation display result.
A fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol, and
It is provided with a probability determination unit that determines the probability that the hit result is derived to one of a plurality of probabilities based on an operation on a specific operation unit.
The gaming machine characterized in that the fluctuation time determining means can determine a specific fluctuation time when the probability determined based on the operation on the specific operation unit is a specific probability.

(37G) A gaming machine that gives a predetermined game profit when a symbol variation display is performed based on the establishment of a start condition and a winning result is derived as the symbol variation display result.
A fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol, and
A setting information determination unit that determines a predetermined setting information related to a game to any one of a plurality of games based on an operation on a specific operation unit is provided.
The fluctuation time determining means may determine a common fluctuation time regardless of the setting information, or may determine a different fluctuation time according to the setting information.
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability that different fluctuation times are determined according to the setting information is set lower than the probability that the common fluctuation time is determined.

(37H) A gaming machine that gives a predetermined game profit when a symbol variation display is performed based on the establishment of a start condition and a winning result is derived as the symbol variation display result.
A fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol, and
A setting information determination unit that determines a predetermined setting information related to a game to any one of a plurality of games based on an operation on a specific operation unit.
It is equipped with a production control unit that performs a predetermined production.
The fluctuation time determining means can determine different fluctuation times according to the setting information.
When the specific variation time is determined by the variation time determining means in response to the specific setting information in the setting information, the effect control unit displays the variation of the symbol within the specific variation time. A gaming machine characterized in that a result suggestion effect suggesting a result and a setting suggestion effect suggesting the content of the setting information determined by the setting information determination unit are sequentially performed.

According to the inventions of 37E to 37H, it is possible to make the player detect the set state in a new mode and improve the game entertainment.

(37I) A main control board provided with a game control unit that controls a game, another control board connected to the main control board and provided with a control unit different from the game control unit, and the game control. A gaming machine equipped with a setting-related operation unit for changing a setting state related to a game performed by the unit.
The game control unit has a setting change permissible state generating means that allows an operation related to the change of the setting state with respect to the setting-related operation unit.
The setting change permissible state generating means is a gaming machine characterized in that when the information transmitted from the separate control board to the main control board is specific information, the operation related to the change of the setting state is permitted. ..

According to the invention of 37I, it is possible to make it difficult for a fraudster to change the setting state illegally, and to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

(37J) A game control unit that controls a game and a setting change operation unit for changing a setting state related to control performed by the game control unit are provided, and a game area is operated by a player operating a predetermined launch operation unit. It is a gaming machine that gives a gaming profit by winning a prize in a predetermined winning opening with a gaming ball launched toward.
When the setting change operation unit is operated to change the setting state, it is characterized by having a launch disabling means for disabling the launch of the game ball by the operation of the launch operation unit for a predetermined period. Gaming machine.

According to the invention of 37J, the act of illegally changing the setting state can be suppressed.

(38A) A gaming machine including a game control unit that controls a game and a setting operation unit for changing a setting related to control performed by the game control unit.
A gaming machine characterized in that the game control board constituting the game control unit and the setting board constituting the setting operation unit are housed in one case.

(38B) The case described in each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein, in place of the setting operation unit, a dummy unit that cannot perform an operation for changing the setting can be accommodated together with the game control unit. Pachinko machine.

(38C) The setting operation unit is
The first operation unit for starting the setting state in which the setting can be changed, and
A second operation unit for confirming the setting and ending the setting state,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises a setting display for displaying the contents of the setting.

(38D) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the dummy unit does not have any of the first operation unit, the second operation unit, and the setting display.

According to the inventions of 38A to 38D, the specifications of a gaming machine having a setting function and a gaming machine having no setting function can be standardized, and efficiently designed and produced.

(39A) A game control unit having a processor that executes a program for controlling a game and a memory accessed by the processor.
A clear switch for initializing a predetermined area of the memory, and
A gaming machine including a setting operation unit for changing settings related to control performed by the game control unit.
The setting operation unit has a setting change operation unit for starting a setting state in which the setting can be changed.
The game control unit
When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the operation of the clear switch and the operation of the setting change operation unit are detected.
A gaming machine characterized in that when the clear switch is operated and the setting change operation unit is operated, the setting state is started.

(39B) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the gaming control unit initializes a first area of the memory after the end of the setting state.

(39C) When the clear switch is operated and the setting change operation unit is not operated, the game control unit may perform the game control unit in a second region which is at least partially different from the first region. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding sections, which is characterized by initializing a memory.

According to the inventions of 39A to 39C, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation of setting change.

(40A) A gaming machine including a game control unit that controls a game and a setting operation unit for changing a setting related to control performed by the game control unit.
The game control unit has a game value display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The setting operation unit has a setting change operation unit for starting a setting state in which the setting can be changed, and a setting display means for displaying the contents of the setting.
The game control unit is a gaming machine characterized in that, in the set state, the game value display means and the setting display means are displayed so as not to be confused.

(40B) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the gaming control unit and the setting operation unit are housed in one case.

(40C) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the game value display means and the setting display means are composed of one display.

(40D) The game value display means displays information on the given game value on the display without delay as the game progresses.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the setting display means displays information on the setting on the display in place of the information on the given gaming value in the setting state.

(40E) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the gaming value display means and the setting display means are configured by different indicators.

(40F) The game value display means is
In other than the above setting state, the information regarding the given game value is displayed without delay as the game progresses.
In the setting state, any of the characters, numbers, and figures that are not displayed in the setting state is displayed.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the setting display means displays information related to the setting in the setting state.

(40G) The game value display means is
In other than the above setting state, the information regarding the given game value is displayed without delay as the game progresses.
In the above setting state, turn off or turn on all
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the setting display means displays information related to the setting in the setting state.

According to the invention of 40A to 40G, it is possible to prevent confusion of a plurality of displays arranged on the substrate.

(41A) A lottery means for drawing a lottery regarding a hit based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the starting port, and
A production determining means for determining one of a plurality of productions based on the result of the lottery, and
An effect executing means for executing the effect determined by the effect determining means, and an effect executing means.
When a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit, a setting information determining means for determining a predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of games, and a setting information determining means.
When an operation different from the predetermined operation is performed, the setting information confirmation means for displaying the setting information determined by the setting information determining means on a predetermined display unit is provided.
The plurality of effects include a setting suggestion effect that can suggest the setting information determined by the setting information determining means.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect even if the different operation is performed when the effect determination means determines that the setting suggestion effect is to be performed.

(41B) A lottery means for drawing a lottery regarding a hit based on the game medium passing through the starting port
When a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit, a setting information determining means for determining a predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of games, and a setting information determining means.
A production determining means for determining one of a plurality of productions based on the result of the lottery, and
An effect executing means for executing the effect determined by the effect determining means, and an effect executing means.
Error detection means to detect errors and
An error notification means for notifying an error detected by the error detection means is provided.
The plurality of effects include a setting suggestion effect that can suggest the setting information determined by the setting information determining means.
The effect executing means is a gaming machine capable of executing the setting suggestion effect during a period in which the error notification means notifies an error satisfying a predetermined condition.

(41C) A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of starting conditions, and
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, a determination means for determining whether or not the prize is won, and
A special symbol variation execution means that executes a special symbol variation based on the establishment of a start condition,
When the establishment of the start condition is satisfied but the establishment of the start condition is not satisfied, a holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number, and
A setting information determining means for determining a predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of games based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit.
With a display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expectation suggestion effect for a determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determining means.
When the start condition is newly satisfied during the fluctuation period of the special symbol variation in which the expected suggestion effect is determined to be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is pending, the new establishment condition is established. A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of the setting suggestion effect is restricted in a special symbol variation corresponding to the starting condition.

(41D) A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of starting conditions, and
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, a determination means for determining whether or not the prize is won, and
A special symbol variation execution means that executes a special symbol variation based on the establishment of a start condition,
When the establishment of the start condition is satisfied but the establishment of the start condition is not satisfied, a holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number, and
A setting information determining means for determining a predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of games based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit.
With a display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expectation suggestion effect for a determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determining means.
When the start condition is newly satisfied during the fluctuation period of the special symbol variation in which the expected suggestion effect is determined to be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is pending, the new establishment A gaming machine characterized in that the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect can be executed in a special symbol variation corresponding to the start condition.

(41E) A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of starting conditions, and
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, a determination means for determining whether or not the prize is won, and
A special symbol variation execution means that executes a special symbol variation based on the establishment of a start condition,
When the establishment of the start condition is satisfied but the establishment of the start condition is not satisfied, a holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number, and
A setting information determining means for determining a predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of games based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit.
With a display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expectation suggestion effect for a determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determining means.
When the start condition is newly satisfied during the fluctuation period of the special symbol variation in which the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are determined to be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is pending. , A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of the setting suggestion effect in a special symbol variation corresponding to the newly established starting condition is restricted.

(41F) A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of starting conditions, and
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, a determination means for determining whether or not the prize is won, and
A special symbol variation execution means that executes a special symbol variation based on the establishment of a start condition,
When the establishment of the start condition is satisfied but the establishment of the start condition is not satisfied, a holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number, and
A setting information determining means for determining a predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of games based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit.
With a display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expectation suggestion effect for a determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determining means.
When the start condition is newly satisfied during the fluctuation period of the special symbol variation in which the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are determined to be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is pending. , A gaming machine characterized in that execution of the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect is restricted in a special symbol variation corresponding to the newly established start condition.

(41G) A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of starting conditions, and
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, a determination means for determining whether or not the prize is won, and
A special symbol variation execution means that executes a special symbol variation based on the establishment of a start condition,
When the establishment of the start condition is satisfied but the establishment of the start condition is not satisfied, a holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number, and
A setting information determining means for determining a predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of games based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit.
With a display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expectation suggestion effect for a determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determining means.
When the start condition is newly satisfied during the fluctuation period of the special symbol variation in which the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are determined to be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is pending. , A gaming machine characterized in that the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect can be executed in a special symbol variation corresponding to the newly established start condition.

According to the inventions of 41A to 41G, the game entertainment can be improved.

(42A) A gaming machine provided with a main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning lottery in the game.
The main control means
A program storage means for storing the first program and the second program,
An arithmetic means that performs required arithmetic processing by the first program and the second program, and
A first storage means having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing, and
A second storage means having a storage area having the same configuration as that of the first storage means, and
The accessability of the first storage means and the second storage means can be switched so that either of them can be accessed.
The calculation means is
The first storage means is used when the first program is executed, and the first storage means is used.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second storage means is used when the second program is executed.

(42B) The first storage means and the second storage means are game machines whose accessability can be switched by one command input to the calculation means.

(42C) The instruction for switching the first storage means to be accessible and the instruction for switching the second storage means to be accessible are characterized in that at least one of an instruction (opcode) and an argument (operand) is different. Game machine.

(42D) The first program is a program (in the game control area) for performing a winning lottery in a game.
The second program is a program (outside the game control area) that calculates information regarding the game value given in the game, and is a game machine that is called and executed from the first program.

(42E) A gaming machine provided with a main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning lottery in the game.
The main control means
A program storage means for storing the first program and the second program,
An arithmetic means that performs required arithmetic processing by the first program and the second program, and
A first storage means having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing, and
A second storage means having a storage area having the same configuration as that of the first storage means, and
The accessability of the first storage means and the second storage means can be switched so that either of them can be accessed.
The calculation means is
When executing the first program, the first storage means is used, and the first storage means is used.
At the start of the second program, in the second program, the first storage means is inaccessible and the second storage means is accessible.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second storage means is used when the second program is executed.

(42F) A gaming machine, characterized in that, at the end of the second program, the calculation means switches to the first storage means inaccessible to the second storage means in the second program.

(42G) A gaming machine provided with a main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning lottery in the game.
The main control means
A program storage means for storing the first program and the second program,
An arithmetic means that performs required arithmetic processing by the first program and the second program, and
A first storage means having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing, and
A second storage means having a storage area having the same configuration as that of the first storage means, and
The accessability of the first storage means and the second storage means can be switched so that either of them can be accessed.
The calculation means is
When executing the first program, the first storage means is used, and the first storage means is used.
When starting the second program, in the first program, the first storage means is inaccessible, and the second storage means is accessible.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second storage means is used when the second program is executed.

(42H) After the end of the second program, the calculation means switches the first program that has returned from the second program so that the second storage means is inaccessible and the first storage means is accessible. A game machine featuring.

According to the inventions of 42A to 42H, when the processing is transferred between programs, data can be saved at high speed with a simple instruction, and precautions at the time of program creation can be reduced.

(43A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A main control means for deriving a game state advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning lottery in the game,
Peripheral control means that controls the effect in the game based on the instruction from the main control means,
A display device that is controlled by the peripheral control means to display the effect, and
A display panel that displays the production pattern and
It is provided with a light emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and irradiates light so as to travel in the display panel from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel.
The display panel includes a plurality of first reflecting portions that reflect light traveling in the display panel in a specific path toward the front side of the gaming machine, and light traveling in the display panel in a plurality of paths. It has a plurality of second reflecting portions that reflect on the front side of the gaming machine.
The peripheral control means
A dynamic pattern is displayed on the display panel by causing the light emitting device to emit light in a predetermined pattern and changing the light reflected by the first reflecting unit.
A gaming machine characterized in that a static pattern is displayed on the display panel by reflecting light from the light emitting device by the second reflecting unit.

(43B) The light emitting device has a plurality of light emitting elements that irradiate light from a plurality of positions to the side of the display panel.
The peripheral control means changes the emission color of the plurality of light emitting elements with the passage of time so that light of different colors travels in different paths in the display panel, and the plurality of first reflections. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the color of the pattern projected by the plurality of first reflecting portions is changed according to the passage of time by emitting light of different colors from the portions.

(43C) The light emitting device has a plurality of light emitting elements that irradiate light from a plurality of positions to the side of the display panel.
The peripheral control means switches the lighting of the plurality of light emitting elements according to the passage of time, controls the path of light in the display panel, and emits light from at least a part of the plurality of first reflecting portions. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the color of the pattern projected by the plurality of first reflecting portions is changed according to the passage of time.

(43D) The light emitting device has a plurality of light emitting elements that irradiate light from a plurality of positions to the side of the display panel.
The peripheral control means switches the number of light emitting elements that emit light among the plurality of light emitting elements according to the passage of time, controls the path of light in the display panel, and controls the path of light in the display panel. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the color of the pattern projected by the plurality of first reflecting portions is changed according to the passage of time by emitting light from at least a part thereof.

According to the inventions of 43A to 43D, a pattern that appears to move and a pattern that appears to be stationary can be displayed on a single light guide plate, and a decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

(44A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A main control means for deriving a game state advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning lottery in the game,
Peripheral control means that controls the effect in the game based on the instruction from the main control means,
A display device that is controlled by the peripheral control means to display the effect, and
A display panel that displays the production pattern and
A light emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and irradiates light so as to travel in the display panel from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel.
The display panel includes a plurality of first reflecting portions that reflect light traveling in the display panel in a specific path toward the front side of the gaming machine, and light traveling in the display panel in a plurality of paths. It has a plurality of second reflecting portions that reflect on the front side of the gaming machine.
The first reflecting unit includes a plurality of first right-eye reflecting units that reflect light traveling in the display panel in a specific path in a direction reaching the player's right eye, and the player's left eye. Includes a plurality of first left eye reflectors that reflect in the direction of reaching
The plurality of first right eye reflectors are arranged on the display panel so as to form a right eye pattern.
The plurality of first left-eye reflective portions are arranged on the display panel so as to form a left-eye pattern at a position different from that of the right-eye pattern.
The peripheral control means
By causing the light emitting device to emit light so that the light emitted in the same pattern reaches the first right eye reflecting portion and the first left eye reflecting portion, the right eye pattern and the left eye pattern are emitted. Is displayed on the display panel to allow the player to recognize a three-dimensional pattern that causes parallax between the left and right eyes.
A gaming machine characterized in that a flat pattern that does not cause parallax between the left and right eyes is displayed on the display panel by reflecting the light from the light emitting device by the second reflecting unit.

(44B) The second reflecting unit is the front side of the gaming machine and the direction in which the light traveling in the display panel in a plurality of paths reaches the right eye and the left eye of the player. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the flat pattern is displayed on the display panel by reflecting on the display panel.

(44C) The second reflection unit includes a plurality of second right eye reflection units that reflect light traveling in the display panel in a specific path in a direction reaching the player's right eye, and the player's second reflection unit. Includes a plurality of second left eye reflectors that reflect in the direction of reaching the left eye.
The plurality of second right eye reflectors are arranged on the display panel so as to form a right eye pattern.
The plurality of second left eye reflecting portions are arranged on the display panel so as to form the left eye pattern at the same position as the right eye pattern.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the flat pattern is displayed on the display panel by the light reflected by the second reflecting unit.

According to the inventions of 44A to 44C, a three-dimensional pattern and a two-dimensional pattern can be displayed on a single light guide plate, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(45A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A main control means for deriving a game state advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning lottery in the game,
Peripheral control means that controls the effect in the game based on the instruction from the main control means,
A display device that is controlled by the peripheral control means to display the effect, and
A display panel that displays the production pattern and
A light emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and irradiates light so as to travel in the display panel from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel.
The peripheral control means
By making the light emitting device emit light, a dynamic pattern and a static pattern can be displayed on the display panel.
A gaming machine characterized in that by combining the display of the dynamic pattern and the display of the static pattern, an effect suggesting the result of the winning lottery is performed.

(45B) The display panel has a plurality of first reflecting portions that reflect light traveling in the display panel in a specific path and emit light to the front side of the gaming machine, and a plurality of paths in the display panel. It has a plurality of second reflecting portions that reflect the traveling light and emit it to the front side of the gaming machine.
The peripheral control means
By causing the light emitting device to emit light in a predetermined pattern, the path of light traveling in the display panel is changed, and the light reflected by the first reflecting portion is changed, so that a pattern that changes is displayed on the display panel. Display on
By reflecting the light from the light emitting device by the second reflecting unit, a stationary pattern is displayed on the display panel.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the display of the changing pattern and the display of the stationary pattern are combined to produce an effect suggesting the result of the winning lottery.

According to the inventions of 45A to 45B, a pattern that appears to move and a pattern that appears to be stationary can be displayed on a single light guide plate, and a decrease in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

(46A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A main control means for deriving a game state advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning lottery in the game,
Peripheral control means that controls the effect in the game based on the instruction from the main control means,
A display device controlled by the peripheral control means to display an effect image,
A display panel that displays the production pattern and
A light emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and irradiates light so as to travel in the display panel from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel.
The display panel has a plurality of reflecting portions that reflect light traveling in the display panel toward the front side of the gaming machine.
The peripheral control means
By causing the light emitting device to emit light, the target pattern is displayed on the display panel.
A gaming machine characterized in that an image moving toward the target pattern is displayed on the display device.

(46B) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the pattern displayed on the display panel and the image displayed on the display device represent the same character or character.

(46C) The game according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means displays an image moving toward the target pattern on the display device after displaying the target pattern on the display panel. Machine.

(46D) The game according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means displays an image moving toward the target pattern on the display device, and then displays the target pattern on the display panel. Machine.

According to the inventions of 46A to 46D, a single light guide plate can display a plurality of patterns or patterns of different modes, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(47A) A game control means for drawing a special game that is beneficial to the player when the predetermined condition is satisfied.
A gaming machine including a setting operating means operated for changing or confirming a set value related to control performed by the gaming control means.
The game control means
The power-on processing executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the periodic processing executed at predetermined intervals are executed.
When the power to the gaming machine is turned on while the setting operating means is being operated, the setting value can be changed according to the operating state of the setting operating means in the power-on processing. Execute the setting corresponding to the state or the setting confirmation state in which the above setting value cannot be changed,
After executing the setting corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, it is possible to execute the process corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state in the periodic process. A gaming machine characterized by being.

(47B) The periodic process is common to at least two of the plurality of processes, that is, a process related to the change of the set value, a process related to the confirmation of the set value, and a process related to a normal game. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises processing to be executed in.

(47C) The periodic process is composed of at least a first iterative process that executes a process related to the normal game and a second iterative process that executes a process related to the change of the setting.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the gaming control means selectively executes the first repeating process and the second repeating process depending on the operation mode of the gaming machine.

(47D) The memory includes a setting state management area for recording the operating state of the gaming machine in an area where the stored contents are backed up when the power is cut off.
The game control means
In the setting change mode, as the predetermined condition, the fact that the setting change mode is set is set in the setting state management area.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the setting confirmation mode, as the predetermined condition, the setting confirmation mode is set in the setting state management area.

(48) A game control means for drawing a special game that is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
A gaming machine including a setting operating means operated for changing or confirming a set value related to control performed by the gaming control means.
The game control means
The power-on processing executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the periodic processing executed at predetermined intervals are executed.
When the power to the gaming machine is turned on while the setting operating means is being operated, the setting value can be changed according to the operating state of the setting operating means in the power-on processing. Execute the setting corresponding to the state or the setting confirmation state in which the above setting value cannot be changed,
The periodic process makes it possible to execute a normal game process related to a normal game and a setting process related to setting change or setting confirmation.
The game machine is characterized in that the normal game process is composed of a plurality of processes, and a specific process among the plurality of processes is a process that can be executed in common between the normal game and the setting process.

(49A) A game control means for drawing a special game that is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
The setting operation means operated to change or confirm the setting value related to the control performed by the game control means, and the setting operation means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The setting operation means is composed of at least a first setting operation means and a second setting operation means.
The game control means
Equipped with a storage means that can store information related to the game
In the power-on processing executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the output signal of the setting operation means is stored and held in a specific storage means among the storage means.
In the power-on processing, when determining whether or not the setting operation means is being operated, the determination is made based on the information stored in the specific storage means without reading the output signal of the setting operation means. And
The second setting operation means is the storage means when the first setting operation means is not operated and only the second setting operation means is operated in the power-on processing. Is a means to initialize
When the storage means is initialized when the first setting operation means is not operated and only the second setting operation means is operated in the power-on processing, the specific setting operation means is used. A gaming machine characterized in that the storage means is not initialized.

(49B) A peripheral control means for controlling the effect on the display device is provided.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the gaming control means determines a mode for activating the gaming machine based on an output signal stored in the memory after the peripheral control means is activated.

(50A) A game control means for drawing a special game that is beneficial to the player when the predetermined condition is satisfied.
The setting operation means operated to change or confirm the setting value related to the control performed by the game control means, and the setting operation means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The setting operation means is composed of at least a first setting operation means and a second setting operation means.
The game control means
A storage means having at least a first storage area capable of storing information related to the game and a second storage area different from the first storage area is provided.
The first storage area is an area for storing the set value, and is an area for storing the set value.
The second storage area is an area for storing various parameters used by the game.
The game control means
When it is determined that the set value is not a normal value, the first storage area and the second storage area are initialized.
When it is determined that the first setting operation means of the setting operation means is not operated and the second setting operation means is operated, the first storage area is not initialized. , A gaming machine characterized in that the second storage area is initialized.

(50B) The memory further includes a third storage area.
The game control means initializes the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area when the third condition is satisfied. Described gaming machine.

(50C) The third storage area is a storage area other than the area for storing various parameters used in a normal game.
When the data backed up in the memory is erased when a power failure occurs, the game control means determines that the third condition is satisfied, and determines that the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area are satisfied. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the storage area of the machine is initialized.

(51A) A game control means for drawing a special game that is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
The setting operation means operated to change or confirm the setting value related to the control performed by the game control means, and the setting operation means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The game control means
Equipped with a storage means that can retain information related to the game even when the power is cut off
The power-on processing executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the periodic processing executed at predetermined intervals are executed.
When the power to the gaming machine is turned on while the setting operating means is being operated, the setting value can be changed according to the operating state of the setting operating means in the power-on processing. Execute the setting corresponding to the state or the setting confirmation state in which the above setting value cannot be changed,
The storage means stores a setting state management area in which a value set corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is stored according to the operation state of the setting operation means at least in the power-on processing. A gaming machine characterized by including.

(51B) A setting operation means operated for starting in a setting change mode for changing a setting value related to control performed by the game control means is provided.
The game control means
When the gaming machine is operated to start in the setting change mode while the RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area, the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area, and the setting change mode is recorded in the memory. When the predetermined area is initialized and the setting change mode is terminated by the setting operation means, the normal game state is recorded in the setting state management area, and the game is played in the normal game state in which the game ball can be launched. Start the machine and
When the gaming machine is operated to start in the setting confirmation mode while the RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area, the RAM abnormality recorded in the setting state management area is continued, and the above-mentioned The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the normal gaming state is not recorded in the setting state management area even if the setting operation means terminates the setting confirmation mode.

(52) A game control means for drawing a special game that is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
The setting operation means operated to change or confirm the setting value related to the control performed by the game control means, and the setting operation means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The game control means
The power-on processing executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the first periodic processing executed every predetermined first cycle, and the second periodic processing executed every predetermined second cycle are executed. Enable and
In the power-on processing, it is determined whether or not an operation associated with the setting operation is performed in the setting operation means.
When it is determined that the operation associated with the setting operation is being performed in the setting operation means, the setting change state in which the setting value can be changed or the setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed depends on the operation state. Perform the settings corresponding to
When it is determined that the operation associated with the setting operation has not been performed in the setting operation means, the setting corresponding to the setting change state in which the setting value can be changed or the setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed is performed. It is possible to execute normal game start processing without
The first periodic process is executed after executing the setting corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state in the power-on processing.
The second periodic process is executed after the normal game start process can be executed in the power-on process.

(53A) A game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An accessory controlled according to a control signal output from the game control means,
A first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the accessory is provided.
A gaming machine that can be equipped with an inspection signal generation circuit for outputting inspection signals used for inspection of gaming machines.
The inspection signal generation circuit is
A second driver circuit in which the same control signal as that of the first driver circuit is input and an inspection signal is generated from the control signal, and a second driver circuit.
Including an inspection connector for outputting the generated inspection signal.
The first driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into a drive signal for driving the accessory.
The second driver circuit is a gaming machine characterized in that a control signal output as a serial signal from the gaming control means is converted into the inspection signal.

(53B) The first driver circuit and the second driver circuit have an output transistor that switches an input power supply to generate an output signal.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the first driver circuit and the second driver circuit independently generate signals of different voltages that are input to different voltages and change at the same timing.

(53C) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein a connector connected to the first driver circuit is mounted, and a connector connected to the second driver circuit is not mounted.

(53D) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the connector connected to the first driver circuit is a discrete component, and the connector connected to the second driver circuit is a surface mount component. ..

(53E) A game control means that executes periodic processing at predetermined intervals in order to control the progress of the game, and
Among the events related to the progress of the game, the first detecting means for detecting the event captured by the game control means in the periodic processing, and
A gaming machine including a second detecting means for detecting an event captured by the game control means in a process other than the periodic process among the events related to the progress of the game.
The game control means
A conversion means for converting a signal from the first detection means into a serial signal, and
The serial input port where the serial signal is input and
It has a general-purpose input port into which signals of the first detection means or the second detection means are individually input.
The signal of the first detection means is input to either the general-purpose input port or the serial input port via the conversion means.
A gaming machine characterized in that a signal of the second detection means is input to the general-purpose input port.

(53F) The first detection means is a ball detection means for detecting a game ball launched toward a game area.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the second detecting means is a setting operating means operated for changing or confirming a set value related to control performed by the gaming control means.

(53G) An accessory driven according to a control signal output from the game control means,
It is provided with a first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the accessory.
The serial input port is a serial input / output port capable of inputting a serial signal and outputting a serial signal.
The game control means outputs a control signal for driving the accessory from the serial input / output port.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the first driver circuit converts the control signal into the drive signal.

(53H) A game control means that executes periodic processing at predetermined intervals in order to control the progress of the game, and
A gaming machine including a first detecting means and a second detecting means for detecting an event related to the progress of the game.
The game control means
A conversion means for converting a signal from the first detection means into a serial signal, and
The serial input port where the serial signal is input and
It has a general-purpose input port into which signals of the first detection means or the second detection means are individually input.
The first detection means determines the signal level based on the result of detecting the signal once in the periodic processing.
The second detection means determines the signal level based on the result of detecting the signal a plurality of times in the periodic processing.
The signal of the first detection means is input to either the general-purpose input port or the serial input port via the conversion means.
The signal of the second detection means is input to the general-purpose input port and is input to the general-purpose input port.
The gaming control means is a gaming machine characterized in that the signal of the second detecting means is detected a plurality of times within the periodic processing and the signal level is determined.

(53I) The first detecting means is a ball detecting means for detecting a gaming ball launched toward a gaming area.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the second detecting means is a setting operating means operated for changing or confirming a set value related to control performed by the gaming control means.

(53J) A game control means for controlling the progress of a game,
A display device driven according to a control signal output from the game control means,
A gaming machine including a first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the accessory.
The game control means is mounted on the first printed circuit board, and is mounted on the first printed circuit board.
The first driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into a drive signal for driving the display device, and is mounted on the second printed circuit board. Ori,
The first printed circuit board and the second printed circuit board are connected by a serial communication line that transmits a serial signal obtained by converting a signal repeated at a predetermined cycle from the first printed circuit board side. Game machine.

(53K) An inspection signal generation circuit for outputting an inspection signal used for inspection of a gaming machine can be mounted.
The inspection signal generation circuit is
A second driver circuit in which the same control signal as that of the first driver circuit is input and an inspection signal is generated from the control signal, and a second driver circuit.
Including an inspection connector for outputting the generated inspection signal.
The second driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into the inspection signal, and is characterized by being mounted on the first printed circuit board. Game machine.

(53L) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the first printed circuit board and the second printed circuit board are housed in one board box.

(53M) The first printed circuit board and the second printed circuit board are housed in different substrate boxes.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the first printed circuit board is sealed by a caulking mechanism.

(53N) The first driver circuit and the second driver circuit have an output transistor that switches an input power supply to generate an output signal.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the first driver circuit and the second driver circuit independently generate signals of different voltages that are input to different voltages and change at the same timing.

Means 1: In a gaming machine
"A translucent flat decorative member with decoration and
A transparent, flat-shaped radiating plate provided behind the decorative member and capable of radiating light in a direction along the plate surface forward within the plate thickness.
A plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light in a direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the radiation plate are mounted on the front surface, and an effect member including a decorative substrate provided behind the radiation plate is provided. It is characterized by being equipped.

Here, the "decorative member" may be composed of one member or a plurality of members (for example, a relief portion formed by three-dimensional relief). It may be composed of a decorative body having a design and a decorative sheet having a pattern).

In addition, examples of the "decoration" of the decorative member include "three-dimensional relief", "flat pattern", "three-dimensional relief and two-dimensional pattern", and the like. .. In addition, as "decoration", "decoration with logos and characters in line with the concept of the gaming machine", "decoration with characters in line with the concept of the gaming machine", and "items in line with the concept of the gaming machine" Examples include "decoration with a scene" and "decoration with a scene in line with the concept of a gaming machine".

Further, the "radiating plate" includes "a plate formed so as to be recessed from the rear surface to the front and having a plurality of LED accommodating portions in which the LEDs of the decorative substrate are accommodated from the rear" and "a plate within the plate thickness". Those having multiple reflecting parts that reflect light in the direction along the surface forward on almost the entire surface "," Multiple reflecting parts that reflect light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness forward Some have "things", etc.

Further, examples of the "LED" mounted on the decorative substrate include a "side view type LED", a "top view type LED mounted sideways", and the like. Further, examples of the "LED" include a "full-color LED", a "monochromatic LED", a "two-color LED", and the like.

Further, as the configuration for irradiating light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the radiation plate, "a configuration for irradiating light from the inner surface of the hole penetrating the radiation plate into the plate thickness" and "radiation plate". From the inner surface of the concave part that is recessed from the rear surface of the radiation plate to the front, "a configuration that irradiates light into the plate thickness from the inner surface of the slit that penetrates and is open to the side surface side of the radiation plate." Examples include "a configuration in which light is radiated into the plate thickness" and "a configuration in which light is radiated into the plate thickness from the side surface of the radiation plate".

Further, the "directing member" may be a movable one or a fixed one that is not movable.

According to the configuration of the means 1, the gaming machine is provided with a translucent flat decorative member provided with decoration and a plate-shaped decorative member provided behind the decorative member, and is provided in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness. A transparent flat plate-shaped radiation plate that can radiate the light forward and a plurality of LEDs that can irradiate light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the radiation plate are mounted on the front surface of the radiation plate. It is provided with a decorative substrate provided at the rear and an effect member provided with the decorative substrate.

As a result, when a plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative member and the decorative substrate behind the radiation plate are made to emit light, the light from the LEDs is irradiated in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the radiation plate. The light radiated forward by the radiating plate and radiated forward from the radiating plate radiates and decorates the decorative member having the translucency provided with the decoration. At this time, since the light emitted from the LED in the direction along the plate surface of the radiation plate is reflected forward within the plate thickness of the radiation plate to illuminate and decorate the decorative member, the LED is moved forward. Compared with the conventional method in which the light is radiated toward the radiation plate, the distance from the front surface of the LED to the front of the radiation plate can be increased, and the light from the LED is widely diffused to the radiation plate. Can be radiated forward from. Therefore, when the LED is made to emit light, the light from the LED can be widely diffused, and it is possible to suppress the appearance of the LED emitting light in a dot shape. Therefore, the decorative member is uniformly emitted and decorated. It can be made to look beautiful, entertain the player, and suppress the decline in interest. Further, in the effect member, since the flat plate-shaped decorative member and the decorative substrate are provided behind the radiation plate, the dimensions in the front-rear direction can be reduced, and it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging the effect member. At the same time, it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging other effect members, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is more entertaining to the player by providing various effect members.

The decorative member is provided in a transparent flat-shaped decorative body having a relief portion formed by three-dimensional relief and forming at least a part of the decoration, and behind the decorative body. It is preferably composed of a sheet-like decorative sheet having a pattern constituting the rest of the decoration. As a result, since the decorative member provided with the decoration is composed of a decorative body having a relief portion and a decorative sheet having a pattern, the relief portion can give a three-dimensional effect to the decoration. , The lens effect of the relief of the relief part can give a sense of depth to the design of the decorative sheet provided at the rear. Therefore, the relief part of the decorative body and the pattern of the decorative sheet can show the player a three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth, so that the decoration can be performed even if the thickness of the decorative member (dimensions in the front-rear direction) is reduced. The effect is not reduced, it is possible to attract and entertain the player's attention, and the effect member can be made thinner through the decorative member, so that the above-mentioned action effect can be surely achieved. it can.

Further, as described above, when the decorative member is composed of the decorative body and the decorative sheet, since the decorative sheet having a pattern is provided behind the decorative body having the relief portion, the transparent decorative body. Even if it is not colored, the decorative body can be made to appear to be colored by the color of the pattern on the decorative sheet, and the cost for the decorative body can be reduced. Further, in this case, the decoration of the decorative body (decorative member) can be easily changed by changing the design of the decorative sheet, so that the gaming machine should be easy to respond to model changes, design changes, etc. Can be done.

Further, the decorative member may have a hologram portion that forms a part of the decoration and displays a pattern by interference fringes of light. As a result, the light from the LED of the decorative substrate, the light from other light emitting means provided in the game machine, the light in the game hall in which the game machine is installed, etc. hit the hologram portion, so that the light is emitted. Since a predetermined hologram can be shown by the interference fringes of the light, the appearance of the decoration can be improved by the hologram, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the hologram can be used as a part of the decoration of the decorative member. It is possible to give a three-dimensional effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the thinness even if the effect member is made thin.

Further, when the decorative member has a hologram portion and the decorative member is composed of the decorative body and the decorative sheet, the hologram portion constitutes at least a part of the pattern on the decorative sheet. Is also good. As a result, since a part of the pattern on the decorative sheet is composed of the hologram portion, the hologram can be seen through the transparent decorative body having the relief portion. Therefore, due to the lens effect of the relief portion, the hologram or the like can be seen. It is possible to give a sense of depth to the pattern and show the player a decoration that can strongly attract the player's attention. Further, in this case, since the decorative sheet is provided with the hologram portion, it is possible to use the printing technique for forming the hologram portion, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost.

Further, when the decorative member is composed of the decorative body and the decorative sheet, the rear surface of the decorative body is formed flat, and then the decorative sheet is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body. Is desirable. As a result, since the rear surface of the decorative body is flattened and the outer shape of the decorative sheet is the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body, the outer peripheral edge of the transparent decorative body can be decorated with the pattern of the decorative sheet. Since there is no such thing as a frame on the outer periphery of the decoration, it is possible to give a feeling of openness to the decoration of the effect member and to make the decoration look larger. Therefore, the decoration of the directing member (such as the pattern of the decorative sheet) can be made more conspicuous, the decorative effect of the directing member can be fully exhibited, and the decoration of the directing member strongly attracts the interest of the player. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can entertain the player.

Further, as described above, when the rear surface of the transparent decorative body is flattened, the decorative sheet is in contact (contact) with the rear surface of the decorative body, so that light is diffusely reflected between the decorative body and the decorative sheet. The pattern of the decorative sheet can be made more visible through the transparent decorative body, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the decorative sheet can be fully exhibited.

Further, as described above, when the rear surface of the decorative body is flattened, the dimensions of the decorative member composed of the decorative body and the decorative sheet in the front-rear direction can be made as small as possible. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the thickness of the member and embodying the above-mentioned effects.

Further, as described above, when the decorative sheet is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body, the pattern of the decorative sheet can be used to decorate the outer peripheral edge of the effect member (decorative body). By making the decoration mode of the member adjacent to the effect member continuous with the decoration of the effect member, it is possible to show the player a large decoration with a sense of unity, and the appearance impact on the player. It is possible to give attention to the player and to entertain the large decoration, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, it is desirable that the radiation plate has a plurality of LED accommodating portions formed so as to be recessed from the rear surface to the front surface and accommodating the LEDs of the decorative substrate from the rear surface. As a result, by accommodating the LED from the rear in the LED accommodating portion of the radiation plate, the rear surface of the radiation plate and the front surface of the decorative substrate can be brought as close as possible to each other, and the thickness of the effect member in the front-rear direction can be increased. It can be made thinner, and a gaming machine that exhibits the above-mentioned effects can be surely embodied.

Further, when the radiation plate has an LED accommodating portion that is recessed toward the front where the LED can be accommodated, it is possible to irradiate the light from the LED from the inner surface of the LED accommodating portion into the plate thickness. Compared to the case where the light is emitted from the outer peripheral surface of the radiation plate, even in the portion of the radiation plate (for example, the central portion) where the light from the outer peripheral surface is difficult to reach, an LED accommodating portion is provided in the portion. By irradiating the light from the inner surface, the portion can be made to emit light brightly, and the decorative member can be made to emit light evenly.

Further, it is desirable that the LED of the decorative substrate is of a side view type capable of irradiating light in a direction along the plate surface of the radiation plate. As a result, by mounting the LED on the decorative substrate and causing it to emit light, it is possible to irradiate the light from the LED in the direction along the plate surface of the decorative substrate (radiation plate), so that the light from the LED is directly emitted. It is possible to easily irradiate the inside of the plate thickness, and it is possible to easily exert the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, it is desirable to have a plurality of reflecting portions that reflect light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness forward on substantially the entire rear surface of the radiation plate. As a result, when light is irradiated from the LED of the decorative substrate in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the radiation plate, it can be reflected forward by a plurality of reflecting portions provided on substantially the entire surface of the rear surface. Since light can be radiated forward from substantially the entire surface of the radiation plate, the entire decorative member can be light-emitting and decorated, and the same effects as described above can be obtained.

Further, when a plurality of reflecting portions are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the radiation plate, light can be radiated to substantially the entire decorative member, so that even if the decoration provided on the decorative member is changed, the light is reflected. It is not necessary to change the part, it is possible to easily respond to a change in the decoration of the decorative member, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy to respond to a model change, a design change, or the like.

Further, it is desirable to mount electronic components such as ICs and resistors provided on the decorative substrate on the rear surface of the decorative substrate. As a result, as compared with the case where electronic components such as ICs and resistors excluding LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate, the radiation plate is equal to the height of the electronic components from the substrate surface of the decorative substrate. The rear surface can be brought closer to the front surface of the decorative substrate, and the thickness of the effect member can be made thinner.

Further, as described above, when electronic components such as ICs and resistors are mounted on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, when a side view type LED is used, the LED is irradiated in the direction along the front surface of the decorative substrate. It is possible to prevent the light from the LED being blocked by the electronic component, and the light from the LED can be sufficiently distributed. Therefore, since shadows cannot be cast by the electronic components, the entire decorative member can be uniformly luminescent and decorated, and the player can be entertained by the luminescent effect having a good appearance, and the entire decorative member can be displayed even with a small number of LEDs. Can be light-emitting and decorated, and an increase in the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1.
"The decorative member is
A transparent, flat-shaped decorative body having a relief portion formed by three-dimensional relief forming at least a part of the decoration.
It is characterized in that it is provided behind the decorative body and is composed of a sheet-shaped decorative sheet having a pattern constituting the rest of the decoration. "

Here, as the "decorative body", the relief portion may be provided on both the front surface and the rear surface, the relief portion may be provided only on the front surface, or the relief portion may be provided. The part may be provided only on the rear surface.

Further, as the "decorative sheet", "a sheet having a hologram portion in which a pattern is displayed by interference fringes of light" and "a sheet having a prism portion in which innumerable minute prisms are formed". , "Those having a lens portion on which innumerable minute lenses are formed", "Those having an opaque portion that makes the rear invisible", and the like.

Further, as for the relationship between the relief portion of the decorative body and the pattern of the decorative sheet, the relief portion and the pattern may be related to each other, or the relief portion and the pattern may be completely unrelated.

According to the configuration of means 2, the decorative member is a transparent flat decorative body having a relief portion which constitutes at least a part of the decoration and is formed by a three-dimensional relief, and behind the decorative body. It is provided and is composed of a sheet-shaped decorative sheet having a pattern constituting the rest of the decoration.

As a result, since the decorative member provided with the decoration is composed of a decorative body having a relief portion and a decorative sheet having a pattern, the relief portion can give a three-dimensional effect to the decoration. , The lens effect of the relief of the relief part can give a sense of depth to the design of the decorative sheet provided at the rear. Therefore, the relief part of the decorative body and the pattern of the decorative sheet can show the player a three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth, so that the decoration can be performed even if the thickness of the decorative member (dimensions in the front-rear direction) is reduced. The effect is not reduced, it is possible to attract and entertain the player's attention, and the effect member can be made thinner through the decorative member, so that the above-mentioned action effect can be surely achieved. it can.

In addition, since a decorative sheet with a pattern is provided behind the decorative body having a relief portion, it seems that the decorative body is colored by the color of the pattern on the decorative sheet without coloring the transparent decorative body. It is possible to reduce the cost of the decoration. Further, by changing the design of the decorative sheet, the decoration of the decorative body (decorative member) can be easily changed, so that the gaming machine can easily respond to model changes, design changes, and the like.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2.
"The decorative member is
It is characterized by having a hologram portion that forms a part of the decoration and displays a pattern by interference fringes of light.

Here, examples of the "hologram unit" include a "transmissive hologram", a "rainbow hologram", a "Lippmann hologram", and the like. Further, the hologram portion may be provided on the surface of the decorative member or may be provided on the rear surface of the decorative member.

According to the configuration of the means 3, the decorative member is provided with a hologram portion that forms a part of the decoration and displays a pattern by light interference fringes.

As a result, the light from the LED of the decorative substrate, the light from other light emitting means provided in the game machine, the light in the game hall in which the game machine is installed, etc. hit the hologram portion, so that the light is emitted. Since a predetermined hologram can be shown by the interference fringes of the light, the appearance of the decoration can be improved by the hologram, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the hologram can be used as a part of the decoration of the decorative member. It is possible to give a three-dimensional effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the thinness even if the effect member is made thin.

Means 4: In the configuration of means 3,
"The hologram part is
It is characterized in that it constitutes at least a part of the pattern in the decorative sheet.

According to the configuration of the means 4, the hologram portion constitutes at least a part of the pattern on the decorative sheet.

As a result, since a part of the pattern on the decorative sheet is composed of the hologram portion, the hologram can be seen through the transparent decorative body having the relief portion. Therefore, due to the lens effect of the relief portion, the hologram or the like can be seen. It is possible to give a sense of depth to the pattern and show the player a decoration that can strongly attract the player's attention.

Further, since the decorative sheet has a hologram portion, it is possible to use a printing technique for forming the hologram portion, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost.

Means 5: In any one of the configurations from Means 2 to Means 4.
"The decorative body has a flat rear surface and is
The decorative sheet is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body. "

By the way, in the conventional technique as in Patent Document 1, the decorative body provided on the frontmost side of the effect member has a flange-shaped portion protruding rearward over substantially the entire circumference of the outer circumference. Therefore, when a sheet-shaped decorative sheet is provided behind the decorative body, the size of the outer circumference of the decorative sheet must be smaller than the size of the inner circumference of the flange-shaped portion of the decorative body. Due to the presence of the flange on the outer circumference of the decorative sheet pattern that can be seen through, it looks like it is fitted into the frame in a small size, and the decoration of the directing member looks small and the decorative effect can be fully exerted. There is a risk of disappearing.

According to the configuration of the means 5, the rear surface of the decorative body is formed flat, and the decorative sheet is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body.

As a result, since the rear surface of the decorative body is flattened and the outer shape of the decorative sheet is the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body, the outer peripheral edge of the transparent decorative body can be decorated with the pattern of the decorative sheet. Since there is no such thing as a frame on the outer periphery of the decoration, it is possible to give a feeling of openness to the decoration of the effect member and to make the decoration look larger. Therefore, the decoration of the directing member (such as the pattern of the decorative sheet) can be made more conspicuous, the decorative effect of the directing member can be fully exhibited, and the decoration of the directing member strongly attracts the interest of the player. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can entertain the player.

In addition, since the rear surface of the transparent decorative body is flat, the decorative sheet is in contact (contact) with the rear surface of the decorative body, so that light is diffusely reflected between the decorative body and the decorative sheet. Instead, the pattern of the decorative sheet can be made more visible through the transparent decorative body, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the decorative sheet can be fully exhibited.

Further, since the rear surface of the decorative body is flat, it is possible to reduce the dimensions of the decorative member composed of the decorative body and the decorative sheet in the front-rear direction as much as possible, so that the thickness of the effect member is increased. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the thickness and embodying the above-mentioned effects.

Further, since the outer peripheral edge of the effect member (decorative body) can be decorated by the pattern of the decorative sheet, the decoration mode of the member adjacent to the effect member can be continuous with the decoration of the effect member. By doing so, it is possible to show the player a large decoration with a sense of unity, which can give the player a visual impact and attract attention, and at the same time, the large decoration can be enjoyed, and the player's interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Means 6: In any one of means 1 to 5,
"The radiation plate is
It is formed so as to be recessed from the rear surface to the front, and the LED of the decorative substrate has a plurality of LED accommodating portions accommodating from the rear. "

Here, as the "LED accommodating portion", "a hole-shaped one penetrating the radiation plate in the front-rear direction", "a bottomed concave one recessed from the rear surface of the radiation plate toward the front", and "radiation". A slit-shaped object that penetrates the plate in the front-rear direction and is open to the side surface side ", and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 6, the radiation plate is formed so as to be recessed from the rear surface to the front, and has a plurality of LED accommodating portions in which the LEDs of the decorative substrate are accommodated from the rear.

As a result, the radiation plate has an LED accommodating portion capable of accommodating the LED mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate. Therefore, by accommodating the LED from the rear in the LED accommodating portion, the rear surface of the radiation plate can be accommodated. The front surface of the decorative substrate can be brought as close as possible, the thickness of the effect member in the front-rear direction can be reduced, and a gaming machine exhibiting the above-mentioned effects can be surely realized.

Further, since the radiation plate has an LED housing portion that is recessed toward the front where the LED can be accommodated, it is possible to irradiate the light from the LED from the inner surface of the LED housing portion into the plate thickness. .. As a result, an LED accommodating portion is provided in the portion of the radiation plate (for example, the central portion) where the light from the outer peripheral surface is difficult to reach as compared with the case where the light is irradiated from the outer peripheral surface of the radiation plate. By irradiating light from the inner surface of the rod, the portion can be made to emit light brightly, and the decorative member can be made to emit light evenly.

Means 7: In any one of means 1 to 6,
"The LED is
It is characterized by being a "side view type" capable of irradiating light in a direction along the plate surface of the radiation plate.

According to the configuration of the means 7, the LED of the decorative substrate is of a side view type capable of irradiating light in a direction along the plate surface of the radiation plate.

As a result, by mounting the LED on the decorative substrate and causing it to emit light, it is possible to irradiate the light from the LED in the direction along the plate surface of the decorative substrate (radiation plate), so that the light from the LED is directly emitted. It is possible to easily irradiate the inside of the plate thickness, and it is possible to easily exert the above-mentioned action and effect.

In the decorative substrate, it is desirable to mount electronic components such as ICs and resistors on the rear surface of the decorative substrate. As a result, it is possible to prevent the light from the side-view type LED that irradiates the light in the direction along the front surface of the decorative substrate from being blocked by the electronic components, and the light from the LED is sufficiently distributed. It can be turned over. Therefore, since shadows cannot be cast by the electronic components, the entire decorative member can be uniformly luminescent and decorated, and the player can be entertained by the luminescent effect having a good appearance, and the entire decorative member can be displayed even with a small number of LEDs. Can be light-emitting and decorated, and an increase in the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

Means 8: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 7.
"The radiation plate is
It is characterized in that it has a plurality of reflecting portions that reflect light in a direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness forward on substantially the entire surface of the rear surface. "

Here, the "reflecting part" includes "square pyramid", "triangular pyramid", "conical", "pentroof (gable)", "hemispherical", and the like. And so on. Further, the "reflection portion" may be provided in a constant pattern regardless of the position of the LED on the decorative substrate, or may be provided on a concentric arc centered on the corresponding LED.

According to the configuration of the means 8, a plurality of reflecting portions for reflecting light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the radiation plate.

As a result, when light is irradiated from the LED of the decorative substrate in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the radiation plate, it can be reflected forward by a plurality of reflecting portions provided on substantially the entire surface of the rear surface. Since light can be radiated forward from substantially the entire surface of the radiation plate, the entire decorative member can be light-emitting and decorated, and the same effects as described above can be obtained.

Further, since a plurality of reflecting portions are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the radiation plate and light can be radiated to substantially the entire decorative member, even if the decoration provided on the decorative member is changed. It is not necessary to change the reflective portion, it is possible to easily respond to a change in the decoration of the decorative member, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can easily respond to a model change, a design change, or the like.

Means 9: In a gaming machine
"A transparent flat-shaped decorative body having a relief portion formed as a part of the decoration and formed by three-dimensional relief and having a flat rear surface, and provided behind the decorative body. A sheet-shaped decorative sheet having a hologram portion in which a part of the pattern is displayed by a pattern constituting the rest of the decoration and light interference fringes and formed in the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body. A flat plate-shaped decorative member with translucency composed of
A plurality of LED accommodating portions provided behind the decorative member and formed so as to be recessed from the rear surface to the front, and substantially the entire surface of the rear surface reflects light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness to the front. A transparent, flat-shaped radiating plate that has a plurality of reflecting portions and is capable of radiating light in a direction along the plate surface forward within the plate thickness by the plurality of reflecting portions.
A plurality of side-view type LEDs, which are housed in the LED accommodating portion of the radiation plate from the rear and capable of irradiating light in a direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the radiation plate, are mounted on the front surface. It is provided with an effect member including a decorative substrate provided behind the board. "

According to the configuration of the means 9, the gaming machine is a transparent flat decorative body having a relief portion formed by a three-dimensional relief which constitutes a part of the decoration and has a flat rear surface. , And the pattern that is provided behind the decoration and constitutes the rest of the decoration, and has a hologram part in which a part of the pattern is displayed by the interference fringes of light, and is formed to be the same size as the outer shape of the decoration. A flat plate-shaped decorative member having a translucency composed of a sheet-shaped decorative sheet, and a plurality of LED accommodating portions provided behind the decorative member and formed so as to be recessed from the rear surface to the front. And, on substantially the entire surface of the rear surface, there are a plurality of reflecting portions that reflect light in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness forward, and the plurality of reflecting portions are provided in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness. A transparent, flat-shaped radiation plate that can radiate light forward, and multiple side views that are housed in the LED housing of the radiation plate from behind and can irradiate light in the direction along the plate surface within the thickness of the radiation plate. A type of LED is mounted on the front surface, and includes a decorative substrate provided behind the radiation plate and an effect member including.

As a result, in the effect member, a transparent radiation plate and a decorative substrate are provided behind the decorative member composed of the decorative body and the decorative sheet, and a plurality of LEDs formed on the rear surface of the radiation plate. Side-view type LEDs mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate are inserted into each of the accommodating portions so as to accommodate them. When a plurality of LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate are made to emit light, the light from the LEDs is emitted from the inner surface of the LED housing portion in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the radiation plate, and the light from the rear surface of the radiation plate is emitted. It is reflected forward by a plurality of reflecting portions formed on substantially the entire surface, and is radiated forward from the front surface of the radiation plate. Then, the light radiated forward from the radiation plate is radiated forward through the decorative sheet and the decorative body constituting the decorative member, so that the decorative member having the translucency provided with the decoration is formed. It will be luminescent and decorated. At this time, the light emitted from the LED in the direction along the plate surface of the radiation plate is reflected forward by a plurality of reflecting portions within the plate thickness of the radiation plate to make the decorative member emit and decorate. Compared with the case where the LED is directed to the front to irradiate the light, the distance from the front of the radiation plate to the front of the LED can be increased, and the light from the LED can be widened. It can be diffused and radiated forward from the radiation plate. Therefore, when the LED is made to emit light, the light from the LED can be widely diffused, and it is possible to suppress the appearance of the LED emitting light in a dot shape. Therefore, the decorative member is uniformly emitted and decorated. It can be made to look beautiful, entertain the player, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the effect member, since the flat plate-shaped decorative member and the decorative substrate are provided behind the radiation plate, the dimensions in the front-rear direction can be reduced, and it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging the effect member. At the same time, it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging other effect members, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is more entertaining to the player by providing various effect members.

Further, since the decorative member provided with the decoration is composed of a decorative body having a relief portion and a decorative sheet having a pattern, the relief portion can give a three-dimensional effect to the decoration. Due to the lens effect of the relief of the relief part, it is possible to give a sense of depth to the design of the decorative sheet provided at the rear. Therefore, the relief part of the decorative body and the pattern of the decorative sheet can show the player a three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth, so that the decoration can be performed even if the thickness of the decorative member (dimensions in the front-rear direction) is reduced. The effect is not reduced, it is possible to attract and entertain the player's attention, and the effect member can be made thinner through the decorative member, so that the above-mentioned action effect can be surely achieved. it can.

In addition, since a decorative sheet with a pattern is provided behind the decorative body having a relief portion, it seems that the decorative body is colored by the color of the pattern on the decorative sheet without coloring the transparent decorative body. It is possible to reduce the cost of the decoration. Further, by changing the design of the decorative sheet, the decoration of the decorative body (decorative member) can be easily changed, so that the gaming machine can easily respond to model changes, design changes, and the like.

Further, the decorative sheet of the decorative member is provided with a hologram portion in which a part of the decorative pattern is displayed by the interference fringes of light, and the light from the LED of the decorative substrate is provided in the game machine. When the light from other light emitting means, the light in the game hall where the game machine is installed, etc. hit the hologram part, a predetermined hologram can be shown by the interference fringes of the light, so that the hologram makes the decoration look good. Can be improved, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the hologram can give a three-dimensional effect to a part of the decoration of the decorative member. It is possible to prevent the feeling of thinness.

Furthermore, since a part of the pattern on the decorative sheet is composed of the hologram part, the hologram can be seen through the transparent decorative body having the relief part. Therefore, the lens effect of the relief part makes the picture of the hologram or the like visible. It is possible to give the player a sense of depth and show the player a decoration that can strongly attract the player's attention. Further, since the decorative sheet has a hologram portion, it is possible to use a printing technique for forming the hologram portion, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost.

Further, in the decorative member, since the rear surface of the decorative body is flattened and the outer shape of the decorative sheet is the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body, the outer peripheral edge of the transparent decorative body is decorated with the pattern of the decorative sheet. Since there is no frame on the outer periphery of the decoration, it is possible to give a feeling of openness to the decoration of the effect member and to make the decoration look larger. Therefore, the decoration of the directing member (such as the pattern of the decorative sheet) can be made more conspicuous, the decorative effect of the directing member can be fully exhibited, and the decoration of the directing member strongly attracts the interest of the player. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can entertain the player.

In addition, since the rear surface of the transparent decorative body is flat, the decorative sheet is in contact (contact) with the rear surface of the decorative body, so that light is diffusely reflected between the decorative body and the decorative sheet. Instead, the pattern of the decorative sheet can be made more visible through the transparent decorative body, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the decorative sheet can be fully exhibited. Further, since the rear surface of the decorative body is flat, it is possible to reduce the dimensions of the decorative member composed of the decorative body and the decorative sheet in the front-rear direction as much as possible, so that the thickness of the effect member is increased. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the thickness and embodying the above-mentioned effects.

Further, since the decorative sheet is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body, and the outer peripheral edge of the effect member (decorative body) can be decorated by the pattern of the decorative sheet, the decorative sheet is adjacent to the effect member. By setting the decoration mode of the member to be continuous with the decoration of the effect member, it is possible to show the player a large decoration with a sense of unity, which gives the player a visual impact and attracts attention. At the same time, it is possible to entertain a large decoration, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

Further, since the radiation plate has a plurality of LED accommodating portions in which the LEDs of the decorative substrate are accommodated from the rear, by accommodating the LEDs from the rear in the LED accommodating portion of the radiation plate, the rear surface of the radiation plate The front surface of the decorative substrate can be brought as close as possible, the thickness of the effect member in the front-rear direction can be reduced, and a gaming machine exhibiting the above-mentioned effects can be surely realized.

Further, since the LED of the decorative substrate is housed in the LED housing portion of the radiation plate and the light from the LED is irradiated from the inner surface of the LED housing portion into the plate thickness, the light is irradiated from the outer peripheral surface of the radiation plate. Even in the part of the radiation plate (for example, the central part) where the light from the outer peripheral surface is hard to reach, the LED accommodating part is provided in the part so that the light is emitted from the inner surface thereof. Therefore, the portion can be made to emit light brightly, and the decorative member can be made to emit light evenly.

Furthermore, since the LED of the decorative substrate is of the side view type, the LED is simply housed in the LED housing part of the radiation plate to emit light, and the LED is from the inner surface of the LED housing part along the plate surface within the thickness of the radiation plate. It is possible to irradiate light in the above-mentioned directions, and it is possible to surely embody a gaming machine that exhibits the above-mentioned effects.

Further, since a plurality of reflecting portions are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the radiation plate and light can be radiated to substantially the entire decorative member, reflection is performed even if the decoration provided on the decorative member is changed. It is not necessary to change the part, it is possible to easily respond to a change in the decoration of the decorative member, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy to respond to a model change, a design change, or the like.

Means 10: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to 9.
The gaming machine
The game area where the game medium is driven by the operation of the player, and
A plurality of receptions arranged in the game area and capable of accepting game media, and
The pachinko machine is provided with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media according to the reception of the game media at the reception port.

Here, as the "reception entrance", "a general winning opening that is always open in the game area" and "an advantageous game state that is always open in the game area and is advantageous to the player by accepting the game medium". "Starting winning opening (starting opening)" where a special lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate "", "By accepting the game medium at a specific entrance (chucker) in the game area, the game medium can be used in the game area. Variable winning openings (variable starting openings, accessory winning openings, etc.) that can be accepted, "ordinary lottery that is drawn when the game medium passes through a specific area (gate, through chucker, etc.) in the game area Depending on the result, the game medium can accept the game medium in a variable winning opening (variable starting opening, accessory winning opening, etc.), and a specific area (for example, gate, chucker, etc.) in the game area. Depending on the result of the ordinary lottery that is drawn by passing, the game medium can be accepted, and a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not the acceptance of the game medium causes an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous. "Winning opening (variable starting opening)", "V winning opening that generates an advantageous gaming state that gives the player an advantage when the game medium accepted in the accessory winning opening is sorted and accepted by the sorting means", " Examples of the advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous include a large winning opening and an accessory winning opening that can be opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to accept the game medium.

Further, as the "pachinko machine", "a lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by accepting the game medium to the starting port, and a special lottery result drawn by the lottery means". The special lottery result display means for displaying the special lottery result by lottery by the combination of the stop-displayed special symbols and the special lottery result display means for displaying the special lottery result in a variable manner according to the special lottery result display means When the result of the special lottery to be generated is displayed, the large winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to generate an advantageous gaming state. When the distribution means for distributing the game medium received in the mouth and the game medium distributed by the distribution means are received in the V winning opening, the accessory winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, which is advantageous for the player. It has an advantageous gaming state generating means for generating an advantageous gaming state (so-called honey machine), and has a large winning opening and an accessory winning opening, and is drawn by accepting the game medium to the starting opening. Depending on the result of the special lottery, the large winning opening or the special winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and when the game medium accepted in the special winning opening is distributed to the V winning opening, the special winning opening or the large winning opening is designated. A device provided with an advantageous gaming state generating means (so-called multifunction device) that opens and closes in the pattern of the above to generate an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 10, a plurality of gaming machines are arranged in the gaming area in which the gaming medium is driven by the operation of the player, and the receiving entrance where the gaming medium can be received, and the game to the receiving entrance. It is a pachinko machine equipped with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media according to the acceptance of the media. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, any of the above-mentioned means can be exerted.

It is desirable that the effect of emitting and decorating the decorative member by emitting light from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate (light emission effect) is executed by receiving the game medium driven into the game area into the receiving port. As a result, when the game medium is received at the reception port, a predetermined number of game media are paid out, and the decorative member of the effect member is light-emittingly decorated. Therefore, the player is entertained by receiving the game medium. It is possible to facilitate continuous driving of the game medium aiming at the entrance, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, a special lottery is conducted to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by accepting the game medium to the starting port, and the drawn special lottery result is presented to the player when suggested to the player. As one of the effects to be performed, the decorative member of the effect member may be light-emittingly decorated. As a result, the decorative member is light-emittingly decorated, so that the player can be entertained by giving a strong impact to the player due to the above-mentioned action and effect. Therefore, the special lottery result drawn for the player is the player. It is possible to make people think that an advantageous gaming state occurs (for example, "big hit"), and it is possible to raise expectations for the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state and suppress a decline in interest. Further, as described above, since it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect having a higher effect by emitting and decorating the decorative member, an effect for suggesting the lottery special lottery result to the player (for example, It can be suitably used for (reach production), entertain the player, and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Means 11: In any one of means 1 to 9,
The gaming machine
Multiple fuselage bodies, each with multiple symbols,
A start operation unit that rotates the plurality of rotating bodies by operating the player after the game medium is inserted, and a start operation unit.
A plurality of stop operation units for stopping the rotation of each of the plurality of rotating bodies, and
A slot machine provided with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media according to a combination of stop symbols by all the rotating fuselage that has been rotated and stopped by a player operating a plurality of the stop operation units. It is characterized by being.

Here, the "slot machine" includes "a machine in which the number of effective lines for determining the combination of stop symbols changes according to the number of game media (medals) used in one game" and "a plurality of rotating bodies". An internal lottery is executed when the rotation starts, and a privilege that gives the player an advantage according to the combination of the stop symbols and the result of the lottery internal lottery is given. ”,“ The effective line for determining the combination of the stop symbols is fixed. It has been done ”, etc. The "privileges" include "Big Bonus (BB)", "Regular Bonus (RB)", "Cherry Rush Bonus (CRB)", "Replay", "Long Replay Time (LRT)", and "Assist Time (Assist Time). AT) ”, etc.

According to the configuration of the means 11, the gaming machine is operated by a plurality of rotating bodies, each of which has a plurality of symbols, and by the player after the game medium is loaded, so that the starting operation unit rotates the plurality of rotating bodies. And, according to the combination of a plurality of stop operation units for stopping the rotation of each of the plurality of rotating cylinders and a stop symbol by all the rotating cylinders whose rotation is stopped by the player operating the plurality of stop operation units respectively. It is a slot machine equipped with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media. Thereby, in the pachislot machine, any of the above-mentioned means can be exerted.

In addition, in the effect of emitting and decorating the decorative member by emitting light from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate (light emission effect), the combination of the symbols that are stopped rotating except for one on the effective line is the combination of the winning combination symbols. When it is satisfied (so-called reach), as one of the effects presented to the player, the decorative member of the effect member may be light-emittingly decorated. As a result, the decorative member is light-emittingly decorated, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the operation of the stop operation unit can be enjoyed so as to win the winning combination. Further, the lottery result of the internal lottery may cause the decorative member to be luminescently decorated at the time of winning, and as a result, the decorative member is luminescently decorated, which can give a strong impact to the player. , When stopped at a specific combination of symbols, it is possible to make the player think that an advantageous gaming state occurs (for example, "BB"), which raises the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest. Further, as described above, since it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect having a higher effect by emitting and decorating the decorative member, it is suitable for the effect of suggesting the drawn internal lottery to the player. It can be used to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Means 12: In any one of means 1 to 9,
The gaming machine
It is characterized by being a fusion machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

Here, the "fusion machine", which is a fusion of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, is a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols according to the operation of a starting operation unit (for example, an operation lever) after a plurality of game media are loaded. Is displayed in a variable manner, and then the fluctuation of the symbol sequence is stopped according to the operation of the stop operation unit (for example, the stop button), the game medium is paid out according to the combination of the stop symbols, and a privilege advantageous to the player (for example). , Advantageous gaming state). If the stop operation unit is not operated even after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the symbol sequence may be stopped according to the elapse of the predetermined time.

According to the configuration of the means 12, the gaming machine is a fusion machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. Thereby, in the fusion machine in which the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine are fused, any of the above-mentioned means can be exerted.

In addition, in the effect of emitting and decorating the decorative member by emitting light from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate (light emission effect), the combination of the symbols that are stopped rotating except for one on the effective line is the combination of the winning combination symbols. When it is satisfied (so-called reach), as one of the effects to be presented to the player, the decorative member of the effect member may be light-emitting and decorated, or the lottery result of the internal lottery is the winning combination. At this time, the decorative member may be light-emittingly decorated, and the same effects as described above can be obtained.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 279 to 290. FIG. 279 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 280 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 281 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 282 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 283 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 284 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 285 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 286 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 287 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position. is there. Further, FIG. 288 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 289 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 290 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back by disassembling into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. It includes a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 368) is hit.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 make up the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body of the main body frame 4. The hinge assembly 520 under the frame is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side in the front view as the center.

Further, in the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. Is formed, and the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated forward, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 182 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player operates the effect operation unit 301 when the player participation type effect is executed. The player can participate in the production, and the player can be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301 in addition to the game by the game ball B.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer circumference of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame for attaching the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 for reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and the game. A ball launching device 540 for driving a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. Covers the payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, the board unit 620 having the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501. It includes a back cover 640, an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which the game ball B is played by the operation of the player, a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and a front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 having the main control board 1310, the function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the periphery arranged behind the game panel 1100. A control unit 1500 (see FIG. 290), an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a table unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100. , A back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emitting effect according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N that are in contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by accepting or passing the game ball B. (For example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) General winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, gate portion 2003, second starting opening 2004, first big winning opening 2005, and second big winning opening 2006 And have. The obstacle nail N is planted in front of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first large winning opening 2005, and the second large winning opening 2006 are provided in the table unit 2000.

The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B becomes the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, the second big winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. , It is possible to entertain the player with the driving operation of the handle 182 so as to be accepted or passed.

Further, the game board 5 causes the effect display device 1600 to display a predetermined effect image according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a, or the back-to-back effect unit 3100 and the back-to-back effect unit 3100. Left production unit 3200, back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom middle production unit 3300, back top production unit 3400, back rear left production unit 3500, back rear right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700, back front right production It is possible to entertain the player by causing a light emitting effect, a movable effect, or the like to be performed by the unit 3800 or the like.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 291 to 296. FIG. 291 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 292 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 293 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 294 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 295 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 296 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided. ing.

In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. At the same time, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 297. FIG. 297 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, respectively, and are arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially and rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. This is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, in the outer frame left assembly 10, the outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and the upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy mold material. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flatly recessed to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a portion on the right side surface that is opposite to the concave portion 11a to the right. It includes a bulging portion 11b that bulges toward the direction and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame left member 11 are increased by the recess 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced by the cavity 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20, which will be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 12, the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is inserted into the cavity portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. Further, in the upper left connecting member 12, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the notch 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a and a flat plate-shaped upper side extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixed portion 13b, the flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b, and the upper lateral fixing portion 13b to the right from the rear side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d extending shortly to. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower left connecting member 13, the rear surface of the contact portion 13d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and the left surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b is in contact with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 to remove the outer frame. It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, in the lower left connecting member 13, the horizontal fixing portion 13a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 has an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hook member 24 attached to the upper part of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. It includes a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy mold material. The outer frame right member 21 has a recess 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in the rear portion of the right side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a recess 21a on the left side surface that is opposite to the recess 21a to the left. It includes a bulging portion 21b that bulges toward the direction and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are increased by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper right connecting member 22, the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the upper right connecting member 22, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-shaped upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, the flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the rear side to the left. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d that extends shortly toward the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower right connecting member 23, the rear surface of the contact portion 23d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b is brought into contact with the left surface of the outer frame right member 21. By abutting and aligning the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the lower right connecting member 23, the horizontal fixing portion 23a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking the outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends to the left from the front side of the flat plate-shaped mounting portion 24a to be mounted on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and the mounting portion 24a. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped hooking piece portion 24b on which the hook 653 for the outer frame on the upper side of the cage is hooked.

The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and has a flat plate-shaped mounting portion 25a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extending from the front side of the mounting portion 25a to the left. Insertion that allows the lower outer frame hook 653 to be inserted through the flat plate-shaped hook piece portion 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked and the hook piece portion 25b. It has a mouth 25c and.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 296. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right. The width of the outer frame upper member 30 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with a notch 30a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the cutout portions 30a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. A hinge assembly 50 on an outer frame, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment step portion 30b.

[2-3. Assembly under the outer frame]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 298. FIG. 298 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the front by disassembling. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 includes an outer frame lower member 41 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right and extends to the left and right, and the outer frame lower assembly 40. A box-shaped front curtain plate member 42 that is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends to the left and right along the lower member 41 of the outer frame and is open at the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front curtain plate member 42. A box-shaped rear curtain plate member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear curtain plate member 43. It includes a mechanism 44 and.

The width of the outer frame lower member 41 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame upper member 30.

The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with a notch 41a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutout portions 41a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively. As a result, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and includes a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends to the left and right, and is pulled out from a position closer to the rear in the center in the front-rear direction toward the front end side. The recess 41b makes the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 as large as possible.

The curtain plate front member 42 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape in which the length in the left-right direction extends to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41 and the depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 is closed on the open rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the curtain plate front member 42 becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the curtain plate rear member 43. The space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 includes an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a that penetrates the front and rear and extends to the left and right on the front surface near the right end.

The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than that of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the curtain plate front member 42 to the front surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate front member 42 to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a tubular connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends left and right and projects upward at the central portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so as to be positioned upward from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, toward the rear. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The length of the connecting cylinder portion 43a in the left-right direction is formed to be about 1/3 of the length of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also formed slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a to connect the speaker unit. It communicates with the internal space of the 620a and forms the enclosure 624.

In the ball biting prevention mechanism 44, the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. Is to prevent being pinched.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and has a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the hinge member 60 under the outer frame, which will be described later, is highlighted, and a mounting portion. The first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a and the second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a are mounted. A vertical wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placement portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion protruding forward from the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d and being inclined so that the upper surface is positioned upward as the upper surface is directed backward. A part 44e and a part 44e are provided.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a and are open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. The standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of an illegal tool abuts on the standing wall portion 44d and bends upward, it abuts on the upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and further invades. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the hinge member 60 under the outer frame.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the mounting portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen on the mounting portion 44a for some reason is the standing wall portion. Since the movement of the outer frame 2 to the rear is prevented by the 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the mounting portion 44a. If the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a is first referred to as the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45 arranged apart from each other on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-shaped grill member 46 and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which are attached to the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 sandwiched between them. A frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 is provided.

The pair of guide members 45 are such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low friction material having low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates between the curtain plate internal space 40a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (inside the enclosure 624) by the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Therefore, rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This is to prevent the sound in the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 from leaking from between the connection cylinder portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 299. FIG. 299 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 299 (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower surface. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is provided, and a mounting screw 53 that attaches the lock member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has an upper fixing portion 51a which is horizontally extended and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the left and right center of the front extending portion 51b and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of the 51a, and extending downward from the edge of the front extending portion 51b from the left side to the front side and the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The hinge member 51 on the outer frame is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a strip-shaped lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It is provided with an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending diagonally to the left front and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame by the attachment screw 53.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right surface near the front end is the end of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space is formed in the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a so that the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame can be accommodated.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Hinge member under the outer frame]
The hinge member 60 below the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 296. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion rearward of the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. A hinge pin 60c under the outer frame that protrudes upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d that penetrates the horizontal portion 60a up and down and allows only one game ball B to pass through. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 60b in the front-rear direction and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

In the state where the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled on the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and a screw (not shown) is provided. It is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to a portion on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. As a result, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is moved between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the distance from 4 is gradually narrowed, the vehicle rolls to the rear side where the distance is wide, and the battery can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, since the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame can be easily prevented from rolling. The game ball B can be made difficult to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 300 to 308. FIG. 300 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 301 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 302 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 303 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 304 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 305 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 306 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 307 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 308 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a quadrangle extending vertically in front view, and the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side via the main body frame 4. Has been done. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 182 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 is a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape extends vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 which is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and is attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and a door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front surface, the dish unit 200 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper side of the dish unit 200 attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit, the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side unit 410. The door frame top unit 450, which is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame, is provided.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a which is formed in a square shape (rectangular shape) whose outer shape extends vertically and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. The handle mounting member 102 mounted below, the speaker duct 103 mounted in the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and the speaker duct 103 mounted in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end of the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view. Covers the rear relay board 106 after the handle, the door frame relay board cover 107 that covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame rear relay board 106 from the rear side. It includes a relay board cover 108 after the handle and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the relay board 106 after the handle. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that was launched by the ball launcher 540 and did not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is discharged from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player, and by operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It is for playing a game of driving into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. FIG. 309 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 309 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 310 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 311 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. is there.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached so that the left side of the front view can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is closed so as to be openable and closable. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a quadrangular and flat door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right front of the door frame base 101 for mounting the handle unit 180, and the like. It is provided with a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end of the rear view at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and the rear handle relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame relay board cover 107, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. The rear relay board cover 108, which is attached to the rear side and covers the rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and the cable cover 109, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable, are attached. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the relay board 106 after the handle. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 in the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 in the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

Further, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. ..

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 penetrates back and forth, and includes a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. As described above, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door windows 101a penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 is formed in the lower right corner of the front view and is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. The insertion recess 101c, in which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, and the insertion recess 101c, which are recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end of the front view, penetrate the front and rear of the cylinder lock 130. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, the cylinder insertion hole 101d, and the handle mounting seat surface 101b penetrate the front and rear on the left side of the front view, and the entry entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are forward. It is equipped with a ball feeding opening 101e for facing the cylinder.

Further, the door frame base 101 is to the left of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. The passage port 101f, the upper plate ball passage port 101g that penetrates the front and rear so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end of the front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to the front, and the door. It is provided with a glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 is formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage port 101 g), and is provided with a plurality of vertically long slits 101i penetrating the front and rear. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, in the plurality of slits 101i, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the main body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located in the rear. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later is penetrated. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a, and a cylinder. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) ridges 102c that protrude into the portion 102a and extend over the entire axial length of the tubular portion 102a and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a. The outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b are connected to each other, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d arranged in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a are provided.

The handle mounting member 102 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three ridges 102c is provided on the upper portion of the tubular portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the tubular portion 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the tubular portion 102a only when the three ridges 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned with each other. The rotation position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 101.

Since the axis of the tubular portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The axis of the tubular portion 102a is tilted so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in the same tilted state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. In the speaker duct 103, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the tubular portion is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, the pachinko machine 1 can be satisfactorily guided to the front (player side).

Further, the speaker duct 103 is provided with a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the lower rear surface of the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged on the left side of the door frame relay board cover 107 when viewed from the front, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, rear relay board after handle]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, and the rear-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 310 and 311. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the relay board 106 after the handle and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 361). And a part of (see FIG. 362) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which the quadrangles extending to the left and right are combined on the right side of the front view of the upper part of the quadrangles extending vertically, and the door frame is formed in an inverted L shape. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 when viewed from the rear. The door frame sub-relay board 105 is a handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the decorative substrate 413 of the window decoration, the decorative substrate 418 on the right side of the door frame, the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface substrate 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals project rearward. In the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105, when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts extending vertically of the door frame sub-relay board 105 are doors. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining portion of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The rear handle relay board 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is mounted on the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear-handle relay board 106 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104, the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single-shot button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. Is for relaying. The rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear-handle relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover / rear relay board cover / cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear relay board cover 108 after the handle, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, it is behind a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board (a portion extending vertically in an inverted L shape). It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front side and the left side when viewed from the front open. In the state of being assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

The rear-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and provides a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and openings for passing wiring cables are formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is provided on the left and right sides connecting the vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112, which are arranged apart from each other on the left and right, and the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The extended upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end side is attached at a position upward from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending to the right to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A cylinder mounting frame 115 connecting the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of mounted cylinder mounting frames 115 vertically separated from each other on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112, and a hook 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 is hooked. The hook member 116 is provided.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically at substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are separated in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends horizontally in the vertical direction with a width wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a that is squarely cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper plate ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and has a pair of rear piece portions that are formed in a quadrangular flat plate shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear piece portions that face each other. It includes a pair of side pieces extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front, and a flat plate-shaped front piece portion connecting the front end sides of the pair of front extending portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. The left rear piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hook member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating the front and rear. The hook 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 is hooked on these hook members 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are punched metal plates by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is assembled. , It is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). In the state where the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passage port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Door frame hinge assembly]
The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the front upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It includes a member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a having a quadrangular front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. In the hinge bracket 121, the mounting piece 121a is mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is a columnar metal rod bent into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion extending vertically penetrates from below near the front end of a pair of projecting pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. A portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the pair of projecting pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is placed around a portion extending vertically on the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame upward via the collar member 123.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is in a state of being urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower protruding piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves the door frame upper hinge pin 122 as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 may be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, or may be pulled out downward. it can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view is hinged with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 extending vertically is located coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1h. Hinge member under the door frame]
The hinge member 125 under the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the front left lower corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so that the hinge can be rotated.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a quadrangular front view flat plate-shaped mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 300 and the like) projecting downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b is provided.

The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the hinge member 125 under the door frame are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a columnar metal rod having a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. When the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the hinge pin 126 is located on the protruding piece 125b so as to be coaxial with the portion extending vertically of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. It is installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. Can be done.

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locks. The cylinder lock 130 is a regular cylinder lock 130 that is attached to the rear side of a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending forward and backward, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a keyhole 132 that is inserted into the keyhole 132. It includes a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates with the rotation of the key.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece portion of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, and the rear end is attached to the front piece portion. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the rotation is rotated by inserting the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 into the pair of notches. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is in a state of substantially coincident with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 252h of the dish unit main body 252 in the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 300 and the like).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 312 and 313. FIG. 312 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 312 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 313 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 313 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open front cover and a box-shaped front cover with the rear end of the front cover 141 closed and the front open, and a game ball entered from the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The front cover is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 having a ball hitting supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, the rear cover 142, and the front cover 141. A ball pulling member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a game ball B on the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 are covered one by one. The ball feeding member 144, which is rotatably supported around the axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. It is provided with a ball feeding solenoid 145.

As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 140, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in the front view, and the ball feeding member 143 is ball feeding on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b when viewed from the front. From 141c, the operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing unit 240 The portion of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c that is open to the rear on the upstream end side is closed from the rear side.

The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a and a partition portion 143a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 144 as a partition between the entrance entrance 141a and the ball ejection port 141b below the entrance 141a. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from the vicinity of the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A rotating rod 143b that is rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 143b, and a rotating rod 143b that is below the operating rod 143c. It is provided with a weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. The actuating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 is formed so as to project forward through the arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 312 (a)). The operating rod 143c is the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 that moves downward by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Contact with the upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 is after the blocking portion 144a and the blocking portion 144a having a fan-shaped plan view centered on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the partition portion 143a of the entrance / exit 141a and the ball pulling member 143. It is provided with a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotating shaft core by moving the paddle portion 144c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft core in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hit ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a. It is designed to rotate with and from the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the hit ball supply port 142a and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (striking ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction of the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the paddle portion 144c side closes the ball hitting supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip swinging in the vertical direction in the ball feeding operating rod 146. It is provided with a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates a ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operation rod 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around the axis extending back and forth. Has been done. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is pulled toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feeding operation rod 146 is centered on the right end. The left end side near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. It rotates in this way and returns to the initial state. As a result, in the ball feeding operation rod 146, the left end portion (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 swings in the vertical direction by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction so as to be able to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is arranged on the opposite side to the side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. The ball feeding member 144 includes a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 313 (b)) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation.

The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis that extends back and forth.

When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding unit 140 is in a state where the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in a state of being positioned at the feeding position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. Rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled by the launch control unit 633b (see FIG. 484) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 542.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to apply a moment that rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by a ball pulling member 143 that is rotatably supported by the ball or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c projecting forward of the ball removing member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 that operates by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the ball pulling member 143, and the ball pulling port 141b side. The game ball B does not invade.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the operation transmission unit 242b to move the operation transmission unit 242b downward. Along with this, the operating plate 143c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 242b, the ball pulling member 143 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b. The partition is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball extraction guide path 241c of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 in the plate unit 200. It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

Since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 on which the working transmission portion 242b with which the working rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 abuts is formed is urged upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if the ball is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, it is possible to prevent the ball pulling member 143 and the like from being damaged, and the game ball B is a partition portion. It is possible to prevent the bounce at 143a.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 313 (b) and the like) that is recessed forward to the upper right in the rear view of the ball hitting port 142a in the rear cover 142. The fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape with the outer shape of the front view extending to the left and right, and the upper piece portion 148a and the upper piece portion 148a which are separated vertically at substantially the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. It includes a lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C chamfer shape on the tip end side (right end side in front view) of the side facing each other of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b. .. The upper piece 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent so that the right end in front view projects rearward with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same surface as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. As a result, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b communicates with the inside of the ball striking supply port 142a. Become.

According to the fraud prevention member 148, the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140 and attached to the fraudulent game ball B. When a fraudulent act such as manipulating the string to move the fraudulent game ball B in and out of the first starting port 2002 or the like is performed, the fraudulent game ball B launched (struck) by the ball launcher 540 A V-shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b after inserting the string attached to the illegal game ball B between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b by the momentum. It can be cut by the narrowed portion of the shape, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached.

[3-1k. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 314 and 315. FIG. 314 (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 314 (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 315 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side in the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that was launched by the ball launcher 540 and did not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is discharged from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and an open front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. It is equipped with 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and penetrates the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit 200. A full tank receiver that opens rearward on the lower right side of the ball passage 150a and the through ball passage 150a when viewed from the front and can communicate with the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4. It has a mouth 150b.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 opens upward on the right side of the front view of the full tank ball receiving port 150b, and does not reach the game area 5a even though it is fired by the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul ball receiving port 150c that receives the game ball B (foul ball), and the game ball B that is open forward near the lower right corner of the front view and is received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c. The ball discharge port 150d communicates with the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit 200 while discharging the ball forward.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharging port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. It is provided with a storage passage 150e having a possible size.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed on the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 and a movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. It is provided with a full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that urges the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

In this foul cover unit 150, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the storage passage 150e is filled to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full with the game ball B. Therefore, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower plate 202 is full, the payout of the game ball B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, the staff of the game hall, and the like to that effect, and urge the player to eliminate the fullness of the lower plate 202.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the penetrating ball passage 150a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 described later in the main body frame 4. The door opening / closing contact portion 150f to which the actuating protrusion 613a of 613 can come into contact is provided (see FIG. 369). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated to rotate the lower end of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 307 and 308. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear and is detachably attached so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front), and also makes the game visible. It closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the glass frame 161 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 to attach the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. It includes a mounting member 163.

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right corners in the front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 161b and. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 375). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 375).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 163b and a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably mounted on the outer side of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. As a result, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When the glass unit 160 is removed from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by the reverse procedure of the above. As a result, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base portion 163a, the protruding portion 163b restricts the movement of the glass frame 161 to the rear. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally lifted, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally disengaged from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 307 and 308. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged separately from the left and right sides of a flat plate-shaped main body 171 having a predetermined outer circumference and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 173 that project forward from the main body 171 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). As a result, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 172 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to come into contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 316 and the like. FIG. 316 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 316 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and by being operated by the player, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is a thing.

The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181 and the front end side of the handle 182. Covers the disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181 and the handle decorative substrate 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, and the front side of the handle decorative substrate 184. The handle cover 185, which is attached to the cover pedestal 183, is provided.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, and a handle 182 attached to the front end thereof, and is rotatably attached to the outer periphery by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. The handle base 181 and the inner have a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. It includes a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

Further, the handle unit 180 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end side is attached to the handle 182 so that the handle 182 returns to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 190 and the other end side are attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. It is equipped with an auxiliary spring 191 that is urged in the direction.

Further, the handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a tip side protruding outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button that detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193 and is attached to the handle base 181. It is equipped with an operation sensor 194.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, the disc-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and the cylindrical base 181a. It also has three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Therefore, with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102, and the ridges 102c are formed in the three groove portions 181c, respectively. When inserted, the handle base 181 becomes unable to rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

The handle 182 has four first protrusions 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape as the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and protruding rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 182e, the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked. It is provided with a locking protrusion 182f to be formed.

The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusions 182b, the third protrusions 182c, and the fourth protrusions 182d are provided in order in the clockwise direction in the front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a bulges outward so that the side surface in the front-view clockwise direction of the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 bulges outward, and is the opposite side around the anti-city decision. The side surface in the direction of is dented (cut) so as to curve inward. In the second protrusion 182b, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 182a in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and the second protrusion 182b is separated from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly low. The second protrusion 182b bulges so that the side surface in the front-view clockwise direction of the most protruding portion bulges outward, and the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side curves inward. It is recessed in the shape and is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

In the third protrusion 182c, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the third protrusion 182a has a rotation angle of about 70 degrees. It protrudes at about half the height. The side surfaces of the third protrusion 182c are inclined substantially linearly on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side. In the fourth protrusion 182d, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 182c in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and the fourth protrusion 182d is separated from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d has side surfaces on both sides that are inclined in a substantially straight line, and is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape and includes three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, which regulates the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this embodiment, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

The front surface of the handle cover 185 is bulged forward and has translucency. The handle cover 185 is provided with a lens member three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member inside. The handle cover 185 can be decorated by emitting light by appropriately emitting an LED on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle mounting member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located behind the left end side in a plan view and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 180 attached via the slingshot unit 180 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 and perform the rotation operation without a sense of discomfort.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180, and when the player comes into contact with the handle 182 or the like, it detects static electricity acting on the handle 182 or the like of the player and applies the static electricity to the handle 182 or the like of the player. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be driven. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 by a method different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

Further, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while the player is rotating the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 determines the operation of the single-shot button 193. The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. As a result, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, before operating the single-shot button 193. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and rotates the handle 182 most in the front-view clockwise direction. When the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right-handed"), the fourth protrusion 182d of the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, by changing the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, the player can maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state. It is possible to reduce the player's feeling of fatigue and suppress the decline in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the dish unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 317 to 320. FIG. 317 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame, and FIG. 318 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 319 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 320 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the front surface of the door frame base 101 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 for storing a game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged below the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. It is provided with a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower plate 202 is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210. It is provided with a plate decoration unit 250 having a plate decoration unit 250, and a production operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operated by a player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending to the left and right, an upper plate main body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201, and the right side of the upper plate main body 212. The mounting base 213 mounted on the mounting base 213 and protruding forward, the dish unit relay board 214 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213, and the ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. The upper plate ball removal unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230 are provided.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The dish unit main body 252, the lower dish ball pulling unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251 and the dish upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit main body 252, respectively. It includes a plate upper right decoration unit 275, a plate upper left decoration unit 270, and a plate upper left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below each of the plate upper right decoration unit 275.

The effect operation unit 300 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the operation unit base 320. For an annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. It includes a transmission gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 that rotatably mounts the transmission gear 350 for an operation ring.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 that emits and decorates the effect operation ring 330, the decorative substrate cover 353 that covers the upper side of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibrating speaker 354, the effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And have.

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the effect operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The upper plate 201 is arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged on the right side, and the lower plate 202 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the effect operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 317 to 320 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate main body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides of the front view and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges most forward. The front end of the upper plate 201 recedes backward from the most bulging portion toward the right in the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. See). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the front view right end side of the guide passage portion 201a is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.

When the upper plate 201 is assembled in the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is a game ball from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 211e. It is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e.

The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting 201b that is electrically grounded in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls) the game ball. The static electricity charged in B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 317 to 320 and the like. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically through the bottom wall and is capable of discharging the game ball B. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is closed by the lower plate ball extraction unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangle shape in a plan view extending to the left and right, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom surface of the lower plate 202 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is located in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c and below the effect operation unit 300 in a state of being assembled in the plate unit 200.

The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and at the same time, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is opened. The game ball B stored in the plate unit 200 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is open, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate ball supply port 211c is forward. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Plate base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 321 to 324. FIG. 321 is a perspective view of the plate base unit of the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 322 is a perspective view of the plate base unit of the plate unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 323 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 324 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there. The plate base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the plate decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are attached to the front surface.

The plate base unit 210 has a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201. The main body 212, the mounting base 213 which is mounted on the right side of the upper dish main body 212 on the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and the mounting base 213 which is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting base 213. The dish unit relay board 214 is provided.

Further, the dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213 and an upper dish ball pulling-out unit 230 mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. A unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball, which is attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 211 behind the unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 323 and 324. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and has a flat plate shape (a shallow rear is open) extending to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 101. It is formed in a box shape).

The plate unit base 211 penetrates back and forth near the upper left corner of the front view and also penetrates back and forth below the upper plate ball supply port 211a and the upper plate ball supply port 211a extending rearward in a tubular shape. A speaker port 211b with a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c that penetrates back and forth at the lower part on the left side of the center of the left and right sides of the front view, and extends rearward in a tubular shape, and a lower plate A notch 211d that is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right wall of a portion that extends cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear on the upper right side of the front view of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is provided with an upper plate ball feeding port 211e whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

Further, the plate unit base 211 protrudes forward on the right side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, and is upper on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on which the mounting base is placed and the upper plate ball feeding port 211e. It penetrates back and forth below the plate body and penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the front view with the slider insertion port 211g through which the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 in the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is inserted. The handle insertion port 211h through which the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted through the front and rear near the right corner of the front view. It is equipped with a mouth 211i.

The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is assembled in the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the tubular rear end passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

The lower plate ball supply port 211c has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a tubular rear end having a lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 is connected to the notch portion 211d formed in the tubular portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 can be moved to the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance / exit 141a and the ball removing port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 222. After the dish ball is pulled out, the dish is discharged from the lower dish ball supply port 211c into the lower dish 202 via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball pulling guide path 241c of the unit 240, and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is a game ball in the upper plate 201. B is supplied to the ball feeding guide path 241b from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 after the upper plate ball is pulled out.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 323 and 324. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The upper plate main body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger and bulges forward than the center of the left and right in the front view. The front end of the upper plate main body 212 recedes rearward from the most forward bulging portion toward the right side of the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper part of the upper plate main body 212 is closed near the right end.

In the state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, the upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion where the upper part is closed near the right end is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, in the upper plate main body 212, an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a is formed in an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 323 and 324. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in a state of being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the dish unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open upper part. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion port 213a that penetrates vertically near the left end and a through opening 213b that penetrates vertically at the right corner of the rear end.

The front slider 232 of the upper plate ball pulling-out unit 230 is inserted into the insertion port 213a of the mounting base 213. Further, a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through port 213b.

[3-5c-4. Dish unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 includes the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish lower left decorative board 283, and the dish lower right decorative board 288. , And to relay the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, its rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 317 to 324 and the like. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or a ball lending machine (for example, a CR unit) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 (not shown). After inserting cash or a prepaid card for (omitted), a predetermined number of game balls B can be lent out into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, or the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is displayed. The purpose is to return the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine after deducting the amount of the loaned game ball B.

The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 mounted on the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper plate ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221 and an upper plate ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disk-shaped ball lending operation base 223 that is arranged on the right side of the pull-out button 222 and has translucency, a ball lending button 224 that is arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation. It includes a return button 225 arranged on the right side of the front part of the base 223, and a ball lending display unit (not shown) arranged below the rear part of the ball lending operation base 223.

The upper plate ball pulling button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221 and can be moved downward by a pressing operation by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light emitting state.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card having cash or a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and then the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine is returned after deducting the loaned game ball B. The ball lending display unit displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards inserted in the ball lending machine. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display unit when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5c-6. Unit before removing the upper plate ball and unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 323 and 324. The upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, and the upper plate 201 This is for discharging the game ball B stored in the lower plate 202 to the lower plate 202.

The upper plate ball extraction unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the plate unit base 211. The upper plate ball removal unit 240 is attached to a portion on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230.

The upper plate ball extraction front unit 230 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and has a tubular front base 231 extending vertically and a front base 231 that is movably inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231. It includes a slider 232 and. The front base 231 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 near the front of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, and the upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper plate ball removing button 222, and the lower end is the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 after removing the upper plate ball. It is in contact with the upper surface.

The unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball has a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and the rear base 241 in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper plate ball pulling slider 242 attached so as to be slidable to, a spring 243 for urging the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. It has.

The rear base 241 protrudes upward from the portion where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward so that the game ball B can pass through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball receiving port 241a. A game from a position below the ball feeding taxiway 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and a ball feeding taxiway 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward. It is provided with a taxiway 241c for guiding the ball B downward and then to the right in the rear view.

The ball receiving port 241a is assembled in the plate base unit 210, and at the downstream end (right end in the front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201, the ball receiving port 241a is directed forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211. It is formed at the opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The part extending to the left and right of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c protrudes to the right of the rear view from the part where the upper plate ball-extracting slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side of the rear view is lower. It opens on the right side of the rear view. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. In the state where the ball feeding guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball feeding guiding path 241b is located in front of the ball feeding port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending to the left and right in the rear view is formed so as to be connected to the notch 211d of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in the plate unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball pulling slider 242 has a quadrangular shape in front view, and has an actuating receiving portion 242a projecting forward from the upper left corner and an actuating receiving portion 242a projecting rearward from a rear surface on the rear side of the actuating receiving portion 242a. It is provided with an operation transmission unit 242b. The upper surface of the actuating receiving portion 242a is formed to be flat. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward toward the rear, and the lower surface thereof extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

In the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion 242a penetrates the slider insertion port 211g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the actuating receiving portion 242a. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper plate ball extraction unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the above. Further, in the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled on the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242b projects rearward of the rear base 241 and the ball feeding unit 140 operates on the ball pulling member 143 on the upper surface. The door 143c is in contact.

The upper end of the spring 243 is attached to the rear base 241 and the lower end is attached to the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 to urge the upper plate ball removing slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is located at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

In the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 The upper plate ball pulling button 222 is positioned at the moving end upward via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. Further, since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c which is in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. Will be done. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball extraction port 141b is guided from the notch portion 211d into the lower plate ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lower from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the plate 202, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the lower plate 202.

When the downward pressure of the upper plate ball removal button 222 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate is moved through the front slider 232 that is in contact with the actuating receiving portion 242a. As the ball pulling button 222 rises, the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the operating rod 143c in contact with the operation transmitting portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b. It will return to the original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 by the upper plate ball extraction unit 230 and the upper plate ball extraction unit 240. It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 325 to 328 and the like. FIG. 325 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 326 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 327 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 328 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. is there. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211, and the plate unit base so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The plate unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of 211, the lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and the plates attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit main body 252, respectively. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 of the plate, and the lower left decoration unit 280 and the lower right decoration unit of the plate attached below the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 of the plate on the entire surface of the plate unit main body 252. 285 and.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 325 to 328 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower plate body 251 extends to the left and right, and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear open. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a portion of the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower plate main body 251 is formed with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end at the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower plate main body 251 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265 of the lower plate ball extraction unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate main body 251 is in a state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252. Further, in the state where the lower plate main body 251 is assembled in the plate unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a supplies the lower plate ball. It is located in front of the mouth 211c. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 325 to 328 and the like. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction and extends downward and is separated to the left and right, and a left side from the center in the left-right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. ..

The left and right upper side bulges 252a are formed in a box shape with the rear open, and the upper left decorative unit 270 and the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate, the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, and the lower right decorative unit of the plate are formed on the front surfaces of each. 285 is attached. The right end of the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d that penetrates back and forth between the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side.

Further, the plate unit main body 252 includes a front notch portion 252e cut out upward from the lower front end of a portion covering the outer circumference of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decorative portion 252b, and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. It is provided with a bottom surface notch 252f, which is notched at a portion below the above. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Further, the dish unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b, and has a handle insertion port 252 g through which the cylinder portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion port 252 g. A production operation unit formed between a cylinder insertion port 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and into which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are centered in the left-right direction. It is provided with an effect operation unit mounting portion 252i to which the 300 is mounted. The effect operation unit mounting portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width in the left-right direction of the dish unit main body 252.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the plate base unit 210 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. .. Further, in the state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal button 263 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate ball removal base 261 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed so that the bottom surfaces are on the same surface.

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removing unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 325 to 328 and the like. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and opens and closes the lower plate ball removing hole 202a to store the game ball B in the lower plate 202 and discharge the game ball B from the lower plate 202. It is for letting you do it.

The lower plate ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and has a flat plate-shaped lower plate ball removal base 261 having a through hole penetrating up and down in the right front corner in a plan view, and a lower plate ball removal unit 260. A slider 262 that is slidably attached back and forth on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower plate ball removal button 263 that is attached to the front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 that urges the slider 262 forward. It includes a lower plate ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes a through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower plate ball removing lid 265 in an open state via the slider 262.

The lower plate ball removal base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and is vertically located at a position corresponding to the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 (lower plate main body 251). A through hole that penetrates is formed. The through hole of the lower plate ball extraction base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is slidably attached to a portion of the lower plate ball removal base 261 to the left from the center in the left-right direction. The slider 262 includes a protruding pin that projects upward in a columnar shape.

The lower plate ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower plate ball removal base 261 so that the left end side can rotate around the axis extending vertically at a position to the left of the slider 262, and the right end side is the slider 262. It extends to the right beyond the above, and the right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower plate ball removing lid 265 is formed with slits extending to the left and right into which the protrusion pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

In the state where the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal base 261 closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower plate ball removal base 261 It is located on the same surface as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower plate ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the plate unit main body 252. In the lower plate ball removing unit 260, under normal conditions, the slider 262 is located at the moving end on the front side due to the urging force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower plate ball removing lid 265 is located directly above the through hole. The through hole (lower plate ball extraction hole 202a) is closed.

In this normal state, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower plate ball pulling button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front surface notch portion 252e on the front surface of the lower front surface decorative portion 252b.

In the normal state, when the lower plate ball removal button 263 is pressed backward and moved backward against the urging force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves backward together with the lower plate ball removal button 263. It becomes. When the slider 262 moves backward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 pushes the lower plate ball removal lid 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower plate ball removal lid 265 is centered on the left end side and the right end side is rearward. It will rotate in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower plate ball extraction lid 265, which was located directly above the through hole, moves rearward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved backward by pressing the lower plate ball pulling button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower plate ball pulling button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the urging force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower plate ball removal lid 265 remains rotated backward, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is maintained in an open state, and the game balls B in the lower plate 202 are continuously played. It can be discharged downward.

To close the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a from this state, press the lower plate ball extraction button 263, which is recessed from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, backward, and the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. To. Then, when the pressure of the lower plate ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the urging force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower plate ball removal button 263 returns to the state where it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower plate ball removal lid 265 rotates so that the right end side is located directly above the through hole, and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball removal lid 265. As a result, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decoration unit and plate upper right decoration unit]
The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 325 to 328 and the like. The dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 at the upper part of the plate unit 200.

The dish upper left decorative unit 270 includes a dish upper left decorative body 271 that is semi-cylindrical and extends to the left and right and has translucency, and a dish upper left reflector 272 that is attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271. It is provided with a dish upper left decorative substrate 273 which is attached to the rear side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The upper left decorative body 271 of the plate has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and the central axis extends diagonally to the upper left at the left end, and the central axis extends to the left and right at the right end, forming a twisted semi-cylinder. It is formed. The upper left decorative body 271 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The dish upper left reflector 272 is inserted into the dish upper left decorative body 271 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper left decorative body 271 can be light-emittingly decorated.

When the plate upper left decorative unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish upper left decorative body 271 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper left decorative body 271 is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish upper right decoration unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has translucency, a dish upper right decorative body 276, and a dish upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right decorative body 276. It is equipped with a dish upper right decorative substrate 278, which is attached to the rear side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the upper right side bulge 252a. The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and the central axis extends diagonally to the upper right at the right end, and the central axis extends to the left and right at the left end, giving the shape of a twisted semi-cylinder. It is formed. The upper right decorative body 276 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decorative body 276 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper right decorative substrate 278. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper right decorative substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper right decorative body 276 can be light-emittingly decorated.

In the state where the plate upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish upper right decorative body 276 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish upper right decorative board 278 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

A part of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 is projected upward from the front end of the upper side bulging portion 252a in the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 in a state of being assembled on the door frame 3. It is possible to form a step in which the upper left decorative unit 270 of the plate and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate are raised between the bulging portion 252a on the upper side. As a result, the player can hook his / her finger on the step between the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is leveled. It can be used as a finger hook when operating the effect operation unit 301, which will be described later. Further, the step between the plate upper left decorative unit 270 and the plate upper right decorative unit 275 and the upper side bulging portion 252a can prevent the game ball B on the upper side bulging portion 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5d-5. Lower left decoration unit of the plate and lower right decoration unit of the plate]
The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit 285 of the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 325 to 328 and the like. The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right dish 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the dish unit body 252 so as to extend along the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right dish 275, respectively. Be done. The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate cooperate with the upper left decorative unit 270 of the plate and the upper right decorative unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. ..

The lower left dish decorative unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape extending to the left and right to have translucency, a lower left dish decorative body 281, and a lower left dish reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left dish decorative body 281. It is provided with a dish lower left decorative substrate 283, which is attached to the rear side of the dish lower left reflector 282 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The lower left decorative body 281 of the plate extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in a plan view, and is on the left side. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the above. In the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate, a semicircle that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, the central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper left and rear at the left end, and the center at the right end. The shaft extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a semi-cylinder is bent. The left end of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate changes so as to become thinner toward the left end side. The lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The lower left dish reflector 282 is inserted into the lower left dish decorative body 281 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the lower left dish decorative substrate 283 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the plate are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated.

The lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate is assembled on the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left end of the upper left decorative unit 270 of the plate, and the right end is the lower left decorative unit 312b of the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. Since the left end of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape, the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate seems to have the left end sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower left decorative unit 280 of the dish does not have a rib in the middle of the lower left decorative body 281 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the dish are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left decorative body 281 of the dish is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate has a semi-cylindrical shape extending to the left and right and has translucency, and the lower right decorative unit 286 of the plate and the lower right of the plate attached to the rear side of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate. It includes a reflector 287 and a dish lower right decorative substrate 288 that is attached to the rear side of the dish lower right reflector 287 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and also extends in an arc shape having a center at the rear in a plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulge 252a on the right side. The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, and the central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper right and rear at the right end, and at the left end. The central axis extends to the left and right, and the shape is such that the semi-cylinder is bent. The right end of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate changes so as to become thinner toward the right end side. The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the dish lower right decorative body 286 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish lower right decorative substrate 288 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated.

The lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate is assembled on the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, and the left end is the lower right decorative unit 312b of the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right end of. Since the right end of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape, the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate seems to have the right end sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate does not have a rib in the middle of the lower right decorative body 286 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate are made to emit light, the lower right decorative unit 286 of the plate emits light. The entire front surface of the plate can be luminescent and decorated almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 329 to 332 and the like. FIG. 329 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the plate unit as viewed from the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operation button. FIG. 330A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 330B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 331 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 332 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. It is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring. .. The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a central pressing operation unit 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, and an outer circumference of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. It is composed of an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b arranged between the inner circumference and the outer circumference.

The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 330. It includes a transmission gear 350 for an operation ring that transmits rotation to and from the unit 302, and a gear mounting member 351 that rotatably attaches the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring to the operation unit base 320.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring decorative board 352 and the effect operation ring decorative board 352 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit base 320, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330. It includes an effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320, and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 331 and 332. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear sides open.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is recessed downward, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, and the front of the unit. A dish center upper reflector 313 mounted from the rear inside the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center upper reflector 313 and capable of irradiating light toward the front are mounted. The dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the dish center lower reflector 315 attached to the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear, and the dish center lower reflector 315 attached to the dish center lower reflector 315, and light toward the front. It is provided with a dish center lower decorative substrate 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of illuminating the light are mounted.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the front side of the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the rear side in the center in the front-rear direction, and the rear side of the unit lower cover 311 is the effect operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to the 252i so as to be mounted from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis perpendicular to the virtual plane formed on the upper end edge extending in a semicircular shape at the front is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is tilted at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. When the unit lower cover 311 is assembled into the dish unit 200, a plurality of drain holes 311a are formed at the lowest portion.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular shape in which the plan view shape is bulged forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 and is formed on the upper end of the front portion of the unit lower cover 311. It is installed. The unit front cover 312 has a semicircular arc extending forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a semicircular shape, and a dish center upper decorative body 312a and a dish center upper decorative body 312a below the dish center upper decorative body 312a. It is provided with a dish center lower decorative body 312b in which a bulging semicircle extends in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by halving a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) and extending the split surface toward the center in a semicircular shape. It is formed in such a bent shape. The dish center lower decoration 312b extends in a semicircular shape with a large curvature with respect to the dish center upper decoration 312a, and the dish center lower decoration 312b has a slightly thinner thickness than the dish center upper decoration 312a. It is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled in the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a protrudes forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Further, in the state of being assembled in the plate unit 200, the left and right ends of the plate center upper decoration unit 312a are continuous with the right end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the left end of the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively, and the plate center lower decoration body. The left and right ends of the 312b are continuous with the right end of the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate and the left end of the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate, respectively. The unit front cover 312 is translucent and is formed in a milky white color.

Further, the unit front cover 312 is assembled on the door frame 3, and the front end thereof is the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about 1/2 of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 from leaking to the rear (inside). The decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is formed in a semicircular shape along the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outside) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate are full-color LEDs, and the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated by emitting light.

The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312. The dish center lower reflector 315 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center lower decorative substrate 316 from leaking to the rear (inside). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outside) are mounted on the upper surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs of the dish center lower decoration substrate 316 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can be light-emittingly decorated by emitting light.

Since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a rib for reinforcement in the middle of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 extending in a semi-arc shape, the dish When the LED of the decorative substrate 314 on the upper center and the LED of the decorative substrate 316 below the center of the plate are made to emit light, the whole of each can be light-emitting and decorated substantially uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is greatly projected forward from the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the upper left decorative body 312a of the plate is continuous with the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, and the lower left decorative body 312b of the plate is the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate and the right plate. It is continuous with the lower decorative body 286. As a result, the production operation unit 300 is made to stand out, and the appearance is improved by the integrated decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 331 and 332. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the effect operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is the effect operation unit attachment of the upper plate body 212 on the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the portion 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in the shape of a container with an open upper part.

The operation unit base 320 has a main body portion 321 whose outer shape is formed in a substantially cubic box shape and whose upper part is open, and a main body portion 321 which extends outward from the upper end of the main body portion 321 and has a circular outer circumference. The flange portion 322, the plurality of (four in this case) leg portions 323 protruding downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and the upper mounting formed at the rear end of the flange portion 322 and attached to the dish base unit 210. A portion 324 and a gear bearing portion 325 that rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350 that penetrates the flange portion 322 and opens upward on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 are provided.

The operation unit base 320 is formed in such a size that the main body unit 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 inside. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 from below, and the portion of the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354, and the vibration can be amplified and the vibration can be converted into a sound such as voice or music and output. it can.

The leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 of the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. Further, the main body portion 321 is formed with a through hole on the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body portion 321. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the main body 321 and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The outer circumference of the flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter substantially matching the inner circumference of the decorative body 312a on the center of the dish of the unit front cover 312. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 and the decorative substrate cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

The gear bearing portion 325 can rotatably mount the transmission gear for the operation ring around the axis extending to the left and right in cooperation with the gear mounting member. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is a flange portion. Below 322, it is exposed to the outside.

When the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface.

[3-5e-3. Production operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 333 and 334. FIG. 333 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit viewed from the top front, and FIG. 333 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring viewed from the bottom front. FIG. 334 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 334 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320, and has a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player. The diameter (outer diameter) of the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and the inner diameter is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring mounting base 331 mounted on the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring mounting base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically and vertically on the ring mounting base 331 that abuts on the outer peripheral surface of the 332, and that is mounted on the ring mounting base 331 and moves upward of the rotating base 332. It is provided with a regulated ring retaining member 334.

Further, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 and the ring outer upper cover 335 which form a part of the rotation operation unit 302. The ring outer lower cover 336, which forms a part of the rotation operation unit 302, and the ring outer upper cover 335, which are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side, form a part of the rotation operation unit 302. It is provided with a ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in an annular shape having translucency.

The outer diameter of the ring mounting base 331 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and the inner diameter is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 is separated from the mounting portion 331a on which the rotary base 332 is slidably mounted on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge in the circumferential direction on the outer side of the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. The boss portion 331b, which protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from a plurality of (here, four) parts and for rotatably mounting the bush 333, and the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a through-hole 331c that penetrates up and down at a plurality of parts. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352.

The outer diameter of the rotating base 332 is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331a of the ring mounting base 331, and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotary base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed on the bevel gear so as to project downward toward the center side of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331, and when assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on the outer upper surface portion 335a and the outer upper surface portion 335a in which the arcs forming the outer and upper parts of the ring extend in an annular shape, and a plurality of ring outer upper covers 335 are arranged in the circumferential direction. The decorative portion 335b is provided, and the outer upper cover mounting portion 335c that extends downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extends toward the center side and is arranged in a plurality of circumferential directions. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/4 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover mounting portion 335c extends slightly downward from the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a, and is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

The ring outer lower cover 336 has a plurality of outer lower surface portions 336a in which arcs constituting the outer and lower parts in a circle extend in an annular shape, and a plurality of outer lower surface portions 336a projecting upward and toward the center from the inside and in the circumferential direction. It is provided with an outer lower cover mounting portion 336b that is arranged. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attachment portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

The ring inner cover 337 is a cylinder having an inner surface portion 337a in which an arc forming an inner and upper portion in a circle extends in an annular shape and a cylinder extending downward in parallel with the central axis from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a. It is provided with a tubular surface portion 337b and an inner cover mounting portion 337c formed on the outer periphery of the tubular surface portion 337b and arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical inner diameter of the cylinder surface portion 337b is the same as the inner diameter of the rotary base 332. The inner cover mounting portion 337c is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a form a portion in a range of 1/2 or more of the circle, and the whole is donut-shaped. The effect operation ring 330 can be light-emitting decorated by the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 335 to 337 and the like. FIG. 335 (a) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 335 (b) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 336 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front right, and FIG. 337 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear portion of the right side surface of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft projects to the left. , A drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. A gear cover that rotatably attaches the 345, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 in cooperation with the rotary drive base, and covers the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side. It is equipped with 346 and.

Further, the rotation drive unit 340 includes a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348, which are attached to the gear cover 346 and detect the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, and a first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction and long in the front-rear direction and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is composed of a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and is formed to have a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a diameter larger than that of the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) and a gear portion 345a projecting to the left from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a in the circumferential direction. A plurality of detection pieces 345b, which are arranged in a row at regular intervals, are provided. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length as the interval in which the length in the circumferential direction is separated in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are arranged so as to be spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integral multiple with respect to the interval of the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. As a result, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them first detects the detection piece 345b. It has become like. Thereby, the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

In the assembled state of the rotary drive unit 340, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. To mesh with. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 is entirely located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The rotation drive unit 340 arbitrarily drives the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 can reciprocate and vibrate the rotation operation unit 302 by repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation of the drive gear 343 by the operation ring drive motor 342 within a range of a predetermined rotation angle. it can.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and can detect the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, it is possible to assist the player in the rotation operation. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the player. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling or a click feeling according to the content of the player participation type production.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 331 and 332. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and is a gear of the operation unit base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325.

The transmission gear 350 for the operation ring rotates integrally with the ring-side gear portion 350a in the shape of a bevel gear that meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330 and the ring-side gear portion 350a to detect transmission of the rotation drive unit 340. A spur gear-shaped drive-side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345 is provided. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the drive-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles having the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The transmission gear 350 for the operation ring is rotatably attached to the operation unit base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320 from above and then the gear attachment member 351 is attached to the operation unit base 320. Be done.

In the state where the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b It meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotation drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and can also transmit the rotation drive of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Production operation ring decorative board]
The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 331 and 332. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is formed in a form in which an annulus is divided into front and rear parts, and is composed of a front decorative substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decorative substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in rows along the outer periphery on each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 are full-color LEDs.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a decorative substrate cover 353 whose upper side is transparent. The decorative substrate cover 353 is formed in a front and rear divided form like the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and covers the front decorative substrate 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320. It is composed of 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, thereby passing through the decorative substrate cover 353 and the through port 331c of the ring mounting base 331, and above the ring forming the rotation operation unit 302. The cover 335, the ring outer and lower covers 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be light-emitting decorated from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration as if the LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 331 and 332. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. Is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output a sound (sound) such as voice or music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Further, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire effect operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. This vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present a more diverse effect to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 338 to 340 and the like. FIG. 338 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 339 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit disassembled and viewed from the front lower side. FIG. 340 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the descending position, and FIG. 340 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the ascending position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is composed of a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b formed so as to cover the outer circumference of the central pressing operation unit 303a. ing.

The effect operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer circumference, and is arranged on a target with the button unit base 361 mounted in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A disk-shaped guide shaft 362 that extends upward in a columnar shape and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 is movably attached between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 by a pair of guide shafts 362, and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. It is provided with a disk-shaped elevating base 364 and a pair of elevating springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted and urging the elevating base 364 upward.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a columnar shape and whose upper end is attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button elevating drive motor 367 attached so as to project upward, the spur gear-shaped elevating drive gear 368 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the elevating drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably attached to the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevating cam drive gear member rotatably attached by inserting a central shaft 366 rotated by the driven gear 369. The 370, the elevating cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end are connected, and the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached, and the elevating cam member 371 that elevates and elevates the elevating base 364 by rotating, and the elevating drive gear. It includes a 368, a driven gear 369, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted on the upper side of the elevating base 364 so as to be movable in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362. The center button body 373, the pair of button springs 374 that are arranged between the center button body 373 and the elevating base 364 and urging the center button body 373 upward, and the center button body 373 are substantially the same. The central button cover 375, which is formed in a bottomed tubular shape with the upper end side closed by diameter and is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper part of the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. It is provided with a central button decorative substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the central button main body 373 and the central button cover 375 form a central pressing operation unit 303a.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion of the upper surface of the elevating base 364 outside the central button body 373, and has an annular outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface, and an outer circumference. The outer peripheral board cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decorative board 377 and the outer circumference of the central button main body 373, and the portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 that covers the outer circumference of the central button main body 373. A cylindrical outer peripheral decorative lens 379 that is arranged above the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 on the outer peripheral side and has a three-dimensional decoration and has translucency, and moves up and down so as to cover the outer circumference and the upper surface of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379. It is attached to the base 364 and has a transparent outer peripheral button cover 380 in which the central button cover 375 faces upward in the center. The effect operation button unit 360 includes an outer peripheral substrate cover 378, an outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an outer peripheral button cover 380, and constitutes an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and is attached to the pressure detection sensor 381 that detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and is attached to the button unit base 361 and is attached to the elevating cam drive gear member 370. It is provided with an elevating detection sensor 382 that detects the elevating of the elevating base 364 by detecting the rotation position.

The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, and a plurality of leg portions 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. The outer diameter of the base main body 361a of the button unit base 361 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320. A pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevating cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevating detection sensor 382 are attached to the lower surface. Is installed. The lower end of the leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 from the center to the front and the rear at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a, respectively. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, the lower end of which is in contact with the base body 361a of the button unit base 361, and the upper end of which is in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

The elevating base 364 is formed so that the outer diameter is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b in which the elevating cam member 371 penetrates vertically in a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass therethrough. A vertical wall portion 364c projecting upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting into the central hole 364b so as to face each other near the lower end of the vertical wall portion 364c. There is. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are rotatably attached around the axis.

The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted from moving upward by the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c coming into contact with the upper base 363, and at the same time, a space where the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 can move is provided between the elevating base 364 and the upper base 363. Is forming. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by a pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and connects the lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. It is provided with an elevating detection piece 370c, which protrudes downward from the top in a tubular shape and has two notches facing each other and is detected by the elevating detection sensor 382. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are separated by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar column and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364.

The cam portion 371a is one of a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the shaft core, and a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d. (See FIG. 340). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 is provided with a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b in the cam portion 371a when the second cam 371d rotates the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view. It is formed like this. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the elevating base 364 can be moved up and down by guiding the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 by the cam portion 371a.

The center button body 373 is a pair of guide shafts that penetrate the cylindrical cylinder portion 373a extending vertically, the bottom portion 373b that closes the lower end side of the cylinder portion 373a, and the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which the 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at the center of the bottom 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364, and downward from the bottom 373b. It includes a pressure detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373b and are inserted into the button spring 374.

The central button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by a tubular portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The central button body 373 is formed so that the bottom portion 373b is arranged between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the tubular portion 373a projects upward from the upper base 363. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending downward shortly, and the lower end abuts on the upper surface of the elevating base 364 to restrict the downward movement of the central button main body 373. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button main body 373.

The central button body 373 is urged upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that the lower end penetrates the elevating base 364 and extends downward, and a screw having a washer inserted is attached to the lower end. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, thereby restricting the upward movement of the center button body 373.

The pressure detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is a lifting base when the bottom portion 373b (lower end of the central port 373d) of the center button body 373 abuts on the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate 364 and project downward. The central button body 373 is opaquely formed. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a weaker urging force than the elevating spring 365.

The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the tubular portion 373a of the central button main body 373, and a tubular peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed to have translucency. The central button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by the top plate portion 375a and the peripheral wall portion 375b. The lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b of the central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the tubular portion 373a of the central button main body 373.

In the central button decorative board 376, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The central button decoration substrate 376 can illuminate the central button cover 375 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. In the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 can illuminate and decorate the outer peripheral decorative lens 379 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 and has an annular board portion 378a attached to the elevating base 364 and a cylindrical board portion 378a extending upward from the inner circumference of the central button body 373. It is provided with a cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparently.

In the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction toward the upward direction are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378a of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. The lower end of the tubular portion 380a of the outer peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the elevating base 364. The inner diameter of the annular portion 380b is formed to be substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

In the assembled state of the effect operation button unit 360, as shown in FIG. 340 (a), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in a state where the elevating base 364 is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365. It is inserted from below into the locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in the descending position where the elevating base 364 is moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. Further, in this state, the central button body 373 is located at the upward moving end due to the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 341 and the like).

In this state (state of FIG. 340 (a)), when the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the center button main body 373 The pressing detection piece 373e is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is detected. In the state where the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 has a height substantially coincident with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 343 (c)).

Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 presses. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

In this lowered position, when the lift drive gear 368 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367, the lift cam is driven via the driven gear 369 meshing with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 340 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves from the locking portion 371c to the third. The cam 371b rolls to the left side of the locking portion 371c, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is located from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, the second cam Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 364d and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises and is in the ascending position.

In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 340 (b), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and the elevating base 364 is restricted from moving further upward. Further, in the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) in the lowered position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. The entire pressing operation unit 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 is moving upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

When the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are moved to the ascending position in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in a state of protruding more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 (FIG. 343 (b) and the like). reference).

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 are attached with the button spring 374. It moves downward against the force, and the central button body 373 comes into contact with the elevating base 364. In the state where the center button main body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressure detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 is in a state of protruding downward from the elevating base 364, but the elevating base 364 is the button unit base 361. Since the pressure detection piece 373e is separated from the pressure detection sensor 381, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

When the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374. After the central button body 373 comes into contact with the elevating base 364, the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

In this way, when the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 while the central button body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressure detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364e. Is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the press of the center button cover 375 (center press operation unit 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is pressed downward by a force lower than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the raised position, the elevating base 364 is moved to the elevating spring via the outer peripheral button cover 380. It moves downward against the urging force of 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364, but since the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) protrudes upward due to the urging force of the button spring 374, the center button main body The pressure detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the elevating base 364, and the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

To return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (pressing operation unit 303) from the ascending position to the descending position, the elevating cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. Then, in FIG. 340 (b), the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364, moves to the right (direction of the guide pin 364d), so that the third cam The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by the 371e, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevating base 364 stops and the guide pin 364d moves to the first cam. It rolls along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, the original descending position is restored.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 331 and 332. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay board 392 installed in the substrate box 391.

The board box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled into the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a dish center upper decorative board 314, a dish center lower decorative board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, an effect operation ring decorative board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, operation button elevating drive motor 367, center button decorative board 376, outer peripheral button decorative board 377, pressure detection sensor 381, elevating detection sensor 382, and relaying the connection between the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 There is.

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 341 to 343 and the like. FIG. 341 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 342 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. 343 (a) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the dish unit when the operation part is pressed.

The effect operation unit 300 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 is an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit arranged between the columnar central pressing operation unit 303a located at the center of the rotation operation unit 302 and the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. It is composed of 303b.

The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation unit 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state of being inclined so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operating unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward). ..

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See Fig. 341 and the like).

In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 in the left side view, the effect operation ring 330 is passed through the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 of the above rotates in the clockwise direction in a plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. ..

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated to vibrate by repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range. This vibration is different from the vibration caused by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the left side view via the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring and rotates. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting a plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are separated in the circumferential direction, is equal to the distance between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , The interval is not an integral multiple. As a result, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured so as not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In the present embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the clockwise direction in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. To do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) in the order of detecting the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

In this way, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the operation ring drive motor 342 drives the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. .. Alternatively, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotationally driven in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342 to make the rotation operation heavier or give a click feeling.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state where the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, so that the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. ..

As a result, the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated in a way that is easy for the player to do, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated. The sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated when the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the lower position or the ascending position. Since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like the steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 342, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape below the effect operation ring 330. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting the LED of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. Further, in the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a row are sequentially arranged according to the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, it is possible to illuminate and decorate only a specific portion of the rotating rotation operation unit 302. This makes it possible for the player to have the illusion that an LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating rotation operation unit 302.

In the normal state of the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 343 (a), the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface thereof more than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a descending position that protrudes slightly upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation unit 303a in the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a (center button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380), and the pressure is detected. Pressing is detected by the sensor 381.

In this normal (lowering position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b in the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressure is detected. The pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

In a normal state, when the elevating cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365, the pressing operation unit 303 vigorously protrudes upward together with the elevating base 364 to be in the ascending position (see FIG. 343 (b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is located above the upper surface of the rotation operating unit 302. In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 project significantly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the central pressing operation unit 303a first moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure. Further, the central pressing operation unit 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface (see FIG. 343 (c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects the pressure.

Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a remains projected upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b. The outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 (see FIG. 343 (a)). .. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure.

As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end regardless of the descending position or the ascending position. ing. Therefore, since it is possible to urge the player to firmly press the central pressing operation unit 303a, it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the effect operation unit 301 in the player participation type production. , Player participation type production can be more enjoyed.

The rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the rotation operation becomes easier by using the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the pressing operation unit 303 becomes an obstacle and the rotation operation becomes difficult. Therefore, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and a wider variety of operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 344 to 346. FIG. 344 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 344 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 345 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 346 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front surface of the door frame left side base 401 and the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. A door frame left side decorative board 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402. A door frame left side decorative body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403 is provided.

The door frame left side base 401 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and is composed of the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the door frame left side decorative board 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 can illuminate and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The left side reflector 403 has a through hole 403a formed in the front and rear at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semicircle bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The lower end of the door frame left side unit 400 is formed so as to be continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 271 of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is formed so as to be continuous with the left end of the door frame top decorative body of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left end of 453.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 is assembled on the door frame 3 and decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, so that it looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded in the door frame left side unit 400.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 347 to 349. FIG. 347 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 347 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 348 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 349 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and the side window 410a penetrates in the left-right direction. And, a plurality of light emitting side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in the side window 410a are provided. The door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in a game hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or a player playing a game with the pachinko machine on the right side. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 is a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration members 410b mounted on the front surface and extending forward in a cylindrical shape and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the portion corresponding to the window interior decoration portion 410b, and the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and a plurality of side window interior decoration members 412. It is provided with an internal reflector 414, which is inserted into each of the side window interior decoration portions 410b.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right side reflector 415, which is arranged in front of the front end of the side window interior decorative member 412 and extends vertically, and the door frame right side base 411, and is attached to the door frame. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the vertical and front-rear directions so as to cover the right side surface of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and also has a through opening 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction and constitutes a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is flattened in the vertical and front-back directions so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. It is provided with a door frame right side inner panel 417 which extends in a shape and penetrates in the left-right direction to form a through port 417a forming a side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the door frame right side decorative board 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and the front side of the right side reflector 415. It includes a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

The door frame right side base 411 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat plate-shaped connecting base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (here, three) side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in a vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-shaped cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than that of the rear end side on the front end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window interior decoration member 412, the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window interior decorative member 412 is attached to a portion on the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 from a position lower to the center in the vertical direction to an upper portion. The decorative member 412 in the side window is formed in a milky white color having translucency.

The decorative substrate 413 for the decorative portion in the side window is attached to a portion on the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame, which is behind the connecting base 412a of the decorative member 412 in the side window. The plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative substrate 413 of the decorative portion in the side window are full-color LEDs. In the side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape up, down, left and right around the axis of the side window interior decoration portion 410b at a portion behind each of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b. Has been done.

The internal reflector 414 has an X-shaped front view, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 divides the inside of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, top, bottom, left, and right.

The right side reflector 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is formed in a wavy shape that moves forward and then backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. Has been done. The right side reflector 415 penetrates back and forth, and a plurality of through holes 415a are formed so that the LED of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 faces forward.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 is flat and extends vertically and front and back, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The outer panel 416 on the right side of the door frame is formed to be translucent.

The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame is flat and extends vertically and front and back, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. In the door frame right side inner panel 417, the through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction is formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame is formed to be translucent.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and is composed of a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. In the door frame right side decorative board 418, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 can illuminate and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircle bulging forward extends vertically in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The lower end of the door frame right side unit 410 is formed so as to be continuous with the right end of the dish upper right decorative body 276 of the dish upper right decorative unit 275 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the part of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The front end (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a wavy shape so that a quarter portion from the top protrudes most forward, and is formed in a tsuitate shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending in the front-rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 to emit light. Therefore, the decoration portion 410b in the side window can be light-emittingly decorated. Then, by illuminating the decoration portion 410b in the side window, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that emits and decorates the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b is turned off, so that the side window The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side (edge of the island equipment) of the pachinko machine 1 through between the three side window interior decoration portions 410b in the 410a. Therefore, a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game can easily use the pachinko machine 1 without having to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island equipment. It can be found in, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game with this pachinko machine 1 and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity can be blocked by other parts including the side window interior decoration portion 410b. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for the player to feel as if it is being seen by another player, so that the other player can play the game without hesitation. ..

Further, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are made to emit light by the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled by the light, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let me. At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are columnar, light is radiated in a band shape and radially. Therefore, the side window interior decoration portions 410b are dazzled and the opposite side is radiated. It is possible to make it difficult to see, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players such as those next to each other to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for the inside of the game area 5a to be seen, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because he / she cannot concentrate on the game, or feeling lost due to the induction of mistakes, and by devoting the player to the game, he / she can enjoy the game more. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 350 to 352 and the like. FIG. 350 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back, and FIG. It is the bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in this state. FIG. 351 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 352 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front lower side. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door window 101a, the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. The top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. The door frame top bottom plate 454, which is connected to the lower end of the door frame, is attached.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, and has a door frame top central decorative board 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and a door. Door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a door The door frame top right decorative board 457, which is attached to the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. I have.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a top center reflector 458 arranged between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and the door frame top decoration. Between the top left reflector 459, which is arranged between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457. It is provided with a top right reflector 460, which is arranged in and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached downward to the central speaker box 461, and a door. Cover the pair of speaker brackets 463 attached to the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, the pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 from below. The top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, the lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and the door frame top. The door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the base 451 and the door frame top top plate 468 attached to the top top cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451 are provided. There is.

The door frame top base 451 has a flat plate-shaped main body portion 451a extending to the left and right with the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and from the vicinity of both left and right ends on the front surface of the main body portion 451a. It includes a front protruding portion 451b that protrudes forward. The main body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape so that the lower side thereof is aligned with the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward. The left and right front projecting portions 451b are inclined so as to move rearward as the front end moves downward, and are formed in a box shape open to the rear. The front protrusion 451b on the right side of the front view is also open upward.

The top top cover 452 is formed so that the front view shape is substantially the same as that of the door frame top base 451. The top top cover 452 is formed so as to cover the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and to connect the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top top cover 452 projects most forward in the center in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top top cover 452 has an opening 452a on the upper surface, which is largely cut out from the rear end to the front. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a shape in which a semicircular arc that bulges forward decreases in curvature toward the center in the left-right direction from both left and right ends, and extends in the left-right direction along the front end of the top top cover 452. It is formed. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body portion 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. It extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent form so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 penetrates vertically between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a, which are separated in the left-right direction, connect the front end and the rear end, and extend upward in a flat plate shape, and the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a. It has a pair of central speaker ports 454b facing the top center speaker 462 and a pair of side speaker ports 454c penetrating vertically on the outside of each pair of reinforcing ribs 454a in the left-right direction and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. The central speaker box 461 is mounted between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip shape extending to the left and right. In the door frame top left decorative board 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. In the door frame top right decorative board 457, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can illuminate and decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, to the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. Through holes penetrating back and forth are formed at positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs, respectively.

The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a pair of top central speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is mounted between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker, and outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top-side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, the sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward.

The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top central decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, the front end is locked to the top top cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 is assembled on the door frame 3 and decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively, forming an integrated decoration. There is. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 353 and the like. FIG. 353 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially quadrangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the effect operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

Plate upper left decorative body 271, dish upper right decorative body 276, dish center upper decorative body 312a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since the 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate, the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, the upper upper decorative body 312a of the plate, the left side decorative body 404 of the door frame, the right side decorative body 419 of the door frame, and the right side decorative body 419 of the door frame surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decoration Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, an annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is arranged coaxially in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is attached below the rotation operation unit 302. Two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tube-shaped) large diameter upper decorative bodies 312a and lower center of the dish 312b are attached vertically apart from each other, and above the center of the dish. The door frame left side decoration 404 of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side decoration of the door frame right side unit 410 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decoration 312a and the lower center decoration 312b of the plate. 419 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are attached to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the plate unit 200, the rotation operation unit 302, the two plate center upper decorative bodies 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b are arranged vertically with three donut-shaped members, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the outer circumference are arranged. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be enhanced, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous.

Further, the dish upper left decorative body 271, the dish upper right decorative body 276, and the dish lower left decorative body 281, the dish lower right decorative body 286, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b arranged below the dish central upper decorative body 312a are half. The thickness of the tubular tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, since the effect operation unit 300 becomes larger from the lower end toward the upper side, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 arranged on the upper side can be operated by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. it can.

Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotatably attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 has a front end side. Since the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are tilted so as to be lowered, the upper surfaces of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 face the direction of the player's head (face) seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation operation unit 302 rotates from the player. The entire operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look larger. Further, as described above, since the entire rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, since the player can be made to immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, the player is immediately rotated when the player participation type production is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be used to entertain the player-participatory production and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made larger than the rotation operation unit 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b is in a state of protruding more forward than the upper plate 201, and is on the plate center. Since the decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b should be greatly conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotation operation unit 302 can be improved by the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate and the decorative body 312b on the lower center of the plate. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player and appeal to the player. This makes it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 354 to 360. FIG. 354 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 355 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 356 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 357 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 358 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 359 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 360 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. The hinge member 510 on the main body frame, which is attached to the upper end of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2, and the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached, and the main body frame. Main body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end on the left side of the front view of the base unit 500 and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. It has a three-dimensional 520 and.

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game is played in the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launcher 540 for driving the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is openable and closable and is attached to the main body frame base 501, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 that are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. It also includes a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member that guides the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view shape extends vertically, and the connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. It includes a 502 and a game board lock member 505 for holding the game board 5 detachably.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right. The 552, the tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending to the left in a groove shape open upward, the first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the first rail cover 554. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. It includes a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 to be paid out one by one, the upper full tank path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full tank path unit 600 are placed on the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, it is provided with a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the substrate unit to the 620 side.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. It includes a 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and project rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It is provided with a lock spring 655 that is urging and urging the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 354 to 362 and the like. FIG. 361 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 361 (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIGS. 362 (a) to 362 are explanatory views showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 is for holding the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front while the rear portion is inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape in which the front view extends vertically, and the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502 to be connected, and a game board lock member 505 rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth to hold the game board 5 detachably. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a in which the shape of the front view is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly lower than the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board that penetrates back and forth within the height range of the game board 5 and forms the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and the game board insertion port 501b on which the game board 5 is placed. It is provided with a mounting portion 501c and a game board regulating section 501d that projects upward from the center of the game board mounting section 501c in the left-right direction and regulates the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rearward.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and the launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540 and the launcher mounting portion 501e are mounted. The board unit penetrates back and forth on the right side of the front view of the unit 501e and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the front view of the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted and the game board mounting portion 501c. The circular speaker opening 501 g for the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in the 620 and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward and extend to the left and right below the speaker opening 501 g. It is provided with a cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable insertion port 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h in the front view.

Further, the main body frame base 501 extends in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion port 501b in the base main body 501a to the rear in a plate shape, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is attached to the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j that can be rotatably attached and a rear extending portion 501j are formed near both upper and lower ends of the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the base main body 501a to attach the hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 below the main body frame. It includes an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

The game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position on the right side of the speaker opening 501 g below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and around an axis extending back and forth. The game board lock member 505 makes it possible to restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b can be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted on the right side of the speaker opening 501g. .. The cable mounting recess 501h is formed in a size capable of accommodating the connecting cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connecting cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an vertically extending axis.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the flat guide main body 502a extending to the left and right and the upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a, and extends to the right of the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are exposed, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a that penetrate back and forth and are left and right. It is provided with a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. It is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is rotatably mounted around a shaft whose mounting shaft 502c extends vertically near the right end in the cable mounting recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of the door frame 3 is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub. It is connected to the relay board 105.

Subsequently, the action and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 362 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is hinge-rotatably attached in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably attached around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. The left and right directions of the plurality of through holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide main body 502a by being tightened together with the guide main body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. Behind the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3. (See FIG. 362 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends to the left from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l and passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 to cover the door frame relay board. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinged to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the rightmost mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 362 (b)).

The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases when the door frame 3 is opened, but the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes like this. In the present embodiment, the maximum opening angle β is set to be less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501, so that the connection cable guide member 502 By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When the open door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the connection cable 503 presses the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 rearward. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connecting cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connecting cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the door.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can make a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connecting cable 503 that is folded 180 degrees is changed to open, a force that tries to close the connecting cable 503 due to the folding habit acts. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the bending habit, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) is closed. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is placed closer to the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to be held by the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis core) side of the hinge pin 126 under the door frame.

Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, is centered on the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame, and is more door than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. The angle at which the tangent line tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis core) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame intersects with the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is used when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on the main body frame]
The hinge member 510 on the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 359 and 360. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached.

The hinge member 510 on the main body frame has an upper hinge main body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate is bent downward in an L shape, and the upper hinge main body 511 projects upward in a columnar shape from the front end. The hinge pin 512 on the main body frame, which is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame, is provided. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extended portion, and provides a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for axially supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

In the main body frame upper hinge member 510, a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The hinge pin 122 on the door frame of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 from below.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 can cooperate with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated, and the door frame to the main body frame 4. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Hinge assembly under the main body frame]
The hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 359 and 360. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge member 125 under the door frame is rotatably attached.

The lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L shape. It is provided with a lower hinge second main body 522 in which the rear portion of a flat plate-like plate extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. In the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame, a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is arranged at an upward interval from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521, and a lower portion is arranged. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first main body 521.

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The lower hinge hole 521a for the outer frame is formed coaxially with the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame.

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position rearward from the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion to regulate the rotation range of the door frame 3. , Is equipped. The lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame is formed coaxially with the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 can attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated in cooperation with the main body frame upper hinge member 510, and the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. Can be mounted so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 359 and 360. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U-shape with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of an extruded metal material.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 regulates the movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 forward and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending from the front end to the right. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a groove portion 530a that is open to the right and extends vertically on the front side that is formed in a U shape with the right side open in a plan view. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the groove portion 530a is inserted with the rear left end of the left reinforcing frame 111 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame 3. By inserting the left reinforcing frame 111 into the groove 530a, the gap between the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the left reinforcing frame 111 becomes meandering in a plan view, and an illegal tool is used from the left side surface of the pachinko machine 1. Can be prevented from being inserted inside. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 363 and the like. FIG. 363 (a) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 363 (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the rear. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the game area 5a of 5. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 540 is attached to a flat plate-shaped launch base 541 attached to the launcher mounting portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 541 in front view and rotates. From the launch solenoid 542, which consists of a rotary solenoid whose shaft penetrates the launch base 541 and extends forward, the ball hammer 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the launch solenoid 542, and the vicinity of the tip of the ball mallet 543. It is equipped with a launch rail 544 that is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

In the ball launching device 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in this state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting mallet 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

If the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B or the like, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) are used. From between, it falls into the rail ball receiving port 150c of the lower rail cover unit 150, passes through the inside of the rail cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 364 and the like. FIG. 364 (a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 364 (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending to the left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a width in the front-rear direction extending downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width as the top plate portion. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c whose width in the front-rear direction from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as that of the top plate portion 551a, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. The upper part of the back plate 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and the upper portion 551d of the back plate extending downward from the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the right with a substantially constant width to the vicinity of the lower end. The left side of the back plate 551e, the inner plate 551f extending rearward from the right side of the left side of the back plate 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate 551b, and the lower side of the left side plate 551b from the front to the right. It includes a bottom plate portion 551g extending to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape in front view, and is formed in a box shape open to the front and inward of the L shape.

In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left plate portion 551b extends above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends up and down with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the payout base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f, and the payout base 551 is provided in the portion. The unit 560 is mounted. Further, the payout base 551 projects to the right at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f in the front view, and has a back cover mounting portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is mounted.

The payout base unit 550 is a box-shaped ball tank 552 attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and extending upward to the left and right, and a portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. It is provided with a tank rail 553 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends to the left in a groove shape that is open upward.

Further, the payout base unit 550 is separated from the first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the upper end of the tank rail 535 in the left-right direction and the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 535. A ball rectifying member 556 that is attached and is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at a position between the second rail cover 555 that extends to the left end of the tank rail 555 and the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stop member 557 attached near the left end of the front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left-right direction is about half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 in the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction. It is formed in the direction. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. The shape of the tank rail 553 in a plan view is diagonally to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is about one minute from the depth of several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape that extends straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guidance passage 570a in the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B on the left end side. It is tilted so that the left end side is low at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, in the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 555 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

The ball rectifying member 556 is provided at a portion between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 555 with respect to the axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. It is mounted rotatably. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a projecting into the tank rail 553 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 370). The rectifying piece 556a delays the flow of the game ball B on the upper side of the game ball B, which is distributed in two upper and lower stages, and rectifies the game ball B so that it flows in one stage on the downstream side. I try not to clog the ball even if the height becomes low.

The ball stop member 557 is slidably attached in the left-right direction near the left end of the front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553, and by sliding it to the left, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front on the upper surface of a portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal plate 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion port 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 365 and 366. FIG. 365 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 365 (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 366 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 366 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 is a ball guidance unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guidance unit 570 and is guided by the ball guidance unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full tank path unit. It includes a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

The ball guidance unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a row by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guidance unit 570 can be distributed, and a ball removal passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a. , The game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full tank path unit 600 side based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated from the ball pulling passage 580b to the upper full tank path unit. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B discharged from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full tank path unit 600, and is discharged from the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 365 and 366. The ball guidance unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper part of the rear surface of the left portion 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

The ball guidance unit 570 has a meandering guidance passage 570a through which the game ball B can flow, and closes the box-shaped guidance unit base 571 that is open forward and the front side of the guidance unit base 571. The movable piece member 573 that is movable by the flat plate-shaped guide passage front lid 572 and the game ball B that circulates in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is provided with a ball-cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of the (see FIG. 370).

The ball guidance unit 570 has a front view shape of the guidance unit base 571 and the guidance passage front lid 572 formed in a quadrangle extending vertically. The guidance passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guidance unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guidance unit base 571, and then bends to the right to guide. It extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly folding back between the widths of the unit base 571 in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the induction unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a has a depth on the front-back right side and a width in the left-right direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B is distributed. It can be guided in a row.

In the ball guidance unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached in the vicinity of the upper portion so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guidance passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached around an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outer side of the guide passage 570a when viewed from the front, and a part of its lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the game ball B comes into contact with the portion protruding into the guidance passage 570a, so that the protruding portion is pushed by the game ball B and retracts from the guidance passage 570a and does not protrude. It becomes.

When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When it is not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is in the detection state when the game ball B is present in the guidance passage 570a, and is in the non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guidance passage 570a.

In the state where the ball guidance unit 570 is assembled in the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guidance passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guidance passage 570a is the payout passage of the payout device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guidance unit 570, since the guidance passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering shape, the guidance passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guidance unit 570, and many games are played in the guidance passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Payout device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 365 to 368 and the like. FIG. 367 is a rear sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. FIG. 368 (a) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. Is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guidance unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear.

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a open to the rear and a ball ejection passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can flow, and a payout device main body 581. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped payout device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped payout device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the payout device main body 581 and is open to the rear. ing.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581, and the rotary shaft is projected on the payout motor 584 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 that is attached, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device front lid 583. , The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587, which is meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, is meshed with the second transmission gear 587. It has a spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588, the payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and project into the payout passage 580a, and the payout blade 589. It is equipped with a blade rotation detection sensor 590 which is attached to the rear side of the apparatus main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, and a payout device main body 581 and after the payout device. A ball-extracting movable piece 592 attached so that the ball-extracting passage 580b can be opened and closed at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a by the lid 582, and a ball-extracting movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball-extracting passage 580b is closed. It is provided with a ball pulling lever 593 that is slidably attached in the vertical direction by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582.

The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangle whose plan view shape extends vertically. The width of the payout device 580 in the left-right direction is formed to be larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guidance unit 570.

As shown in FIG. 367, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opening upward from the center in the left-right direction to the left and a downstream end near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B is provided between the payout blade 589 and the outer circumference. It extends downward in an arc shape concentric with the payout blade 589 so as to form, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the payout blade 589.

In the payout passage 580a, the payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball-extracting passage 580b branches at a portion of the payout passage 580a that extends diagonally downward from the upstream end and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side of the rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball pulling passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B is opposed to each other. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to project rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball ejection passage 580b, respectively. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a is provided. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are rear view of the portion extending to the right side of the rear view at a height of about 1/3 from the top branching from the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout passage 580a. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed diagonally upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to form a side wall of the ball pulling passage 580b. The ball pulling movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side of the rear view of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The payout blade 589 is arranged between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends from above toward the rotation axis in the payout passage 580a and then extends to the right in the rear view so that the distance between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage becomes narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. In addition, it protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b recessed between the three blade pieces 589a by an arc having a radius younger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can be restricted from moving the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by the payout device rear lid 582 and the payout device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

The ball pulling movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is bent in a dogleg shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the payout passage 580a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Through the gap between them, it is possible to project into the ball pulling passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b.

The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the left side of the rear view near the upper end of the ball pulling movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 penetrates the rear lid 582 of the payout device and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the descending end, the lower part can come into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball pulling passage 580b can be closed by the ball pulling movable piece 592. Further, by locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. FIG. See 368).

When the ball pulling lever 593 is raised to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which has been in a state like a string of beads on the upstream side of the ball pulling movable piece 592, becomes a ball pulling movable piece 592. It will flow down to the ball pulling passage 580b side beyond the above. At this time, since the ball ejection passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball ejection passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is no such thing as a payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down soon.

In this way, in the state where the ball-extracting movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball-extracting passage 580b at a high speed, so that the ball-extracting movable piece 592 projecting into the ball-extracting passage 580b. The game ball B vigorously abuts on the lower end side of the ball, but the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear lid 582. Since the ball pulling passage 580b can be moved to the outside of the inner surface, the ball pulling movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b due to the contact force, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 is a ball. It is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the drawing passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the ball can be pulled out due to the collision of the game ball B. It is possible to suppress a decrease in durability and damage of the piece 592.

For this reason, the movable ball-extracting piece 592 can be made less likely to be damaged, and more game balls B can be discharged to the island equipment side on the downstream side of the ball-extracting passage 580b more quickly. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball pulling movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a at a narrower interval than the game ball B, and the ball pulling passage 580b. In order to move to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, the game ball B comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592 protruding into the ball pulling passage 580b, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball pulling movable piece 592 when moving to the outside through the space, the space is larger than that of the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward due to the narrow space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball. Since the movement of the movable ball-pulling piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the movable ball-pulling piece 592, the movable ball-pulling piece 592 can be made hard to be damaged, and the guide on the main body side. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball pulling passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably distributed to the downstream side of the ball pulling passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 365 and 366. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the lower rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full tank path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends vertically.

The upper full tank path unit 600 has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 attached to the payout base 551 and the rear side is open, and a box shape attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and the front side is open. The upper full tank cover 602 and the payout device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the payout device 580 upward are provided. The upper full tank base 601 projects from the right side in the front view to the right, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 600 is open upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right of the front view by about 3/4 of the total width and extends downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. The upper sphere storage passage 600b, the upper normal payout passage 600c extending downward from the left side in the front view from the center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the lower surface, and the upper normal payout passage 600c adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. The upper full tank discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the front view and opening downward on the lower surface of the ball storage passage 600b from the center in the left-right direction, and the upper full tank payout passage 600d opening upward near the right end of the front view on the upper surface and substantially vertical downward. It is provided with an upper ball-extracting passage 600e which is opened downward near the right end of the lower surface after extending to (see FIG. 370).

On the lower surface of the upper full tank path unit 600, the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e are opened downward in order from the left side when viewed from the front. In the state where the upper full tank path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened just below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and the upper ball is pulled out. The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout device 580. As a result, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. It is emitted downward from any of the above. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball pulling passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 365 and 366. The lower full tank path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551 g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full tank path unit 600. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full tank path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lowered, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and is a lower full tank base that extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, the lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower normal payout passage 610a which are rotatably attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 around an axis extending back and forth. A payout passage opening / closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a payout passage opening / closing door 613 in the direction of closing the downstream end opening of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are attached. It is equipped with a rushing closing spring 614.

In the lower full tank path unit 610, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c are arranged in this order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end. In the state, each upstream end opens upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state of being arranged side by side, and then open forward at the front end of the lower full tank ball path unit 610. The lower full tank payout passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal payout passage 610a. The lower ball pulling passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank payout passage 610b in the front view, and opens to the right in the middle of the front-rear direction.

The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is urged in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by a closing spring 614. Under normal conditions, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are provided. The opening) is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is provided with an actuating protrusion 613a projecting forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a front view shape in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and as the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is tilted so that it protrudes forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

When the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are each upper full. It is located directly below the downstream end of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tongue ball path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates in the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d circulates in the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball pulling passage 600e will circulate in the lower ball pulling passage 610c.

Further, in the state where the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front end (downstream end) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b penetrates the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball pulling guide portion 627 which is opened to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

In the normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the lower full tank path unit 610 has the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 in contact with the door opening / closing contact of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front against the urging force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are open, and communicate with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full tank receiver 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 Is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in the payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 370. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled on the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is located at the descending end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in the open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number is set based on the detection of the ball out by the ball out of ball detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, for example, from the game hall island equipment in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 in a state of being arranged in a row by the tank rail 553. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay on the upstream side of the payout blade 589. It becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. From this, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout blade 589 is rotated in the rear view clockwise direction by the payout motor 584, the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the rear view clockwise direction, and the payout blade 580a in the payout passage 580a is moved. It is released to the downstream side of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 is arranged directly under the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down into the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 in the above.

When a large number of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a, so that the payout device The game ball B paid out from the 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full tank path unit 600 that communicates. Then, when the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is further paid out, the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the upper ball storage passage 600b which is connected to the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610, and the full tank receiver 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3 Can be received by. After that, the game ball B received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are further paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

When the lower plate 202 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate B is further paid out. The game ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full (hereinafter, this guidance is also referred to as a ball removal instruction. The ball removal instruction is displayed on, for example, the effect display device 1600), and the payout motor of the payout device 580 is displayed. The 584 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is in a non-detection state. For example, when the ball removal instruction is displayed during the big hit and the full tank state is maintained without operating the ball removal lever, the effect is continuously achieved even in the time saving state or the normal state. The ball removal instruction can be displayed on the display device 1600.

When the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide it to the position of the rising end. After that, the lower end side of the ball-extracting movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the ball-extracting movable piece 592 becomes the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

At this time, at the portion of the ball pulling movable piece 592, the flowing game ball B comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball pulling movable piece 592, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 Is hard to break.

Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball pulling passage 600e of the upper full tank path unit 600 and the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball pulling passage 610c to the ball pulling guide portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the discharging ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharging port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hole). It is discharged to the island facility side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 371 to 375 and the like. FIG. 371 (a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 371 (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 372 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from below. FIG. 373 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 374 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 375 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the speaker unit 621 faces forward near the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. It is provided with a main body frame speaker 622 attached to the main body frame speaker 622, and a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. ..

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates back and forth near the left end of the front view, and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed by a plurality of slits extending vertically, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b, which is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b, which protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, diagonally downward and backward. It is provided with an open connection portion 621c.

The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. .. The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass.

The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and the portion on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward. It is formed so that the protrusion of the speaker is small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the center of the front view of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a is formed by a speaker cover 621 and a speaker box 623 as a part of an enclosure 624 for containing the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. Since the enclosure 624 has a front recess 621b for space that bulges forward to the right of the front view of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as it moves to the right. Even if the speaker is formed in a stepped shape so that the amount is small, the space to the right of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently widened.

When the main body frame 4 of the speaker unit 620a is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43a so as to sandwich the seal member 48, and is behind the main body frame speaker 622. And the space 40a inside the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, an enclosure 624 in a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43 on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, and behind the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side of the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and the connection portion 621c and the speaker unit 620a are extended. Since the sound is communicated to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 does not particularly attenuate the bass range in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. It can be transmitted to the side, and the transmitted bass range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state where the phase is inverted, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and is a dish unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 is resonated so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, a large sound with deep bass can be output.

That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 This makes it possible for the player to hear a sound having rich bass.

Further, in the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recess 621b for space, and the speaker box 623. In addition, a through cylinder 623a that communicates with the through port 621d and extends in a tubular shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction is formed. In the state of being assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a communicate with each other and become independent from the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 has a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. It is equipped with a rear base 626 to which the 620c is mounted.

Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball ejection guidance unit 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving portion that is open upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball extraction guidance unit 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. It includes a 628, a ball ejection port 629 that ejects the game ball B that has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the ejection ball receiving portion 628 downward.

The ball pulling guide portion 627 has an upstream end opening to the upper part of the left side surface toward the left in front view, and a downstream end opening to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball pulling guide portion 627 faces the opening at the upstream end so as to coincide with the opening at the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is inclined so that the left end of the front view is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball ejection guiding portion 627 and becomes lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B pulled out from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball pulling guide unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then the ball. Since the space is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear the sound having richer bass than the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 is a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. It is equipped with 631 and.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (FIG. 375) and. The payout control board 633 sets the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to the pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 and the payout command from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5. It is for controlling and paying out the instructed number of game balls B to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so as to leave a trace of opening and closing. As a result, it is possible to detect unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, and enhance the deterrent against fraudulent activities.

The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 mounted on the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 mounted on the rear surface of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. It includes an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most rearward, which is behind the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end of the connection cable 503 (main body frame 4 side). The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like, and is also connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in the front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 354 to 360. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 is rotatably attached to the rear end where the right side in front view extends vertically of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501, and the left side is the payout base 551. It is attached to the back cover mounting portion 551i of the above and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in a shape in which the right side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 is formed in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located on substantially the same surface as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 that penetrate the front and rear and extend vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 376. FIG. 376 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 376 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of units that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3. Door frame hook 652, multiple outer frame hooks 653 protruding rearward from the unit base 651 and lockable to the outer frame 2, and door frame protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 depending on the direction of rotation. It is provided with a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame in the vertical direction.

Further, the locking unit 650 is more than a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and an outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. It is provided with an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled on the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, transmission cylinder 654, and outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion port 501f of the main body frame base 501, and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. It engages with the transmission member 133, and the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotates.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hook member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and the outside of the plurality (two). The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

When the lock unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of lock units 650 are inserted via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved downward. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip side of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 is inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are replaced with the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the 24 and the lower hook member 25, the door is locked by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 377 to 384. FIG. 377 (a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 377 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in (a). FIG. 378 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper portion of the main body frame in a perspective view viewed from the rear. FIG. 379 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front upper side with a tank rail or the like assembled on the ball tank, and FIG. 379 (b) is a perspective view seen from the front lower side of (a). FIG. 380 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 379 (a) viewed from the front in an exploded manner. FIG. 381 is an explanatory diagram showing a region in the upper part of the main body frame where game balls overflowing from the ball tank circulate. FIG. 382 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball overflowing from the ball tank at the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 383 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 384 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind on the hinge side.

As described above, the main body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and is removable and hinged to the outer frame 2 by the hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 below the main body frame. A frame-shaped main frame base 501 that is rotatably attached to support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped base that is attached along the upper side and the left side of the front view on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. The payout base 551, the ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape (container shape) extending to the left and right, and the ball tank 552 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. The tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, the first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the tank rail separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the 553, the ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and the tank rail 553. A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the ball, and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the payout base 551 to pay out the game ball B to the player side. It has.

The ball tank 552 has a bottom wall 552a which is formed in a quadrangle whose plan view extends in the left-right direction and is inclined so that the left side is lowered in the front view, and the bottom wall 552a from the front side and the rear side, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both the left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape with the upper side open. Has been done. The ball tank 552 stores the game ball B supplied from the island equipment such as the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is notched from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper end edge. The overflow portion 552f has a length of about 3/4 of the length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the end side of the left side wall 552d to the end on the opposite side (right side wall 552e side) of the front wall 552b. It is formed over the length.

The right end side (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552. .. The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a that extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can be circulated in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game sphere B. Have. The main guide portion 553a is inclined so as to be lowered toward the left side of the front view. Further, in a plan view, the main guide portion 553a extends from the right end to a position of about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end side, and then moves to the left. It is formed in a crank shape that extends diagonally from the right end to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes toward it, and extends parallel to the axis line extending in the left-right direction to the left end. .. In the tank rail 553, a portion of the main guide portion 553a extending parallel to the axis extending from the left end to the right in the left-right direction extends to the upper end with the same width, and the first rail extends to the upper end of this portion. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game ball B is formed at the downstream end. Is formed at a height at which only one can be distributed (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

Further, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and is mainly arranged so that a plurality of game balls B are lined up in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and narrows in the width direction from the upstream end to the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. There is. With this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B circulating in the bulging portion 553b so that the width directions are aligned in the downstream side and the downward side.

The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has the center of curvature arranged on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is arranged above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 is slightly at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the bulging portion 553b that abuts. It changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball shavings in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed into a shape that extends constantly, a reaction force always acts in a constant direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B circulating in the bulging portion 553b. Since the reaction force is difficult to disperse, the internal game ball B is always pushed in a certain direction, so that the game ball B is difficult to escape and ball clogging (ball shaving) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. By dispersing the pushing directions of the plurality of game balls B to be pushed, it is possible to make it easier for the pushed game balls B to escape, and it is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging (ball shavings) to occur.

Further, the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if a ball jam (ball squeeze) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the location where the ball is jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly cleared, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game due to the interruption of the game can be achieved. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a movable defect occurs in the movable production unit or the like, the status of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be checked with the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4, and the same as above. Can produce the effects of.

The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in the front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction is outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B, which extends to the left (left) and overflows forward from the ball tank 552, to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined so as to be the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. It extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501 m and the overflow surface portion 501 m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. A part of the game ball B that overflows from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m because the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 is inclined so as to be low in the left-right direction. It is equipped with a detour passage 552 g for guiding the vehicle.

Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on both outer sides of the detour passage 552 g in the left-right direction, and the distance in the left-right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball and is on the bottom surface. It is provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501 m on the opposite side of the detour passage 552 g with the discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open and the discharge portion 551j. It covers the upper side of an external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558), and the upper surface is an overflow surface portion. It includes a terminal cover 551k that extends horizontally at a position higher than 501 m.

The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501 m has a flat plate shape from a position lower than the outer diameter of the game ball B by a distance of 2 to 4 times from the upper side on the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape with a front view extending vertically. It extends to. The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in the front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The height of the overflow surface portion 501 m from the front end to the rear end is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball B. In the overflow surface portion 501 m, a gap is formed between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame upper member 30 at a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. ..

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501 m, and has a flat plate-shaped left step portion 501n and a right step portion 501o extending substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501 m. The upper ends of the left-stage portion 501n and the right-stage portion 501o are higher than those of the left-stage portion 501n and the right-stage portion 501o on both lateral sides in the left-right direction, and extend in the front-rear direction in a strip shape. It has a plurality of ribs 501p, which are arranged in rows at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left-stage portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined so that the right corner at the rear end is slightly lower than the horizontal plane in the front view. The right-stage portion 501o is formed to have a longer length in the left-right direction than a length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined so that the left corner at the rear end is slightly lower than the horizontal plane in front view.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is formed. The gap between the game ball B and the game ball B is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501 m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552f in the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction and the overflow surface portion 501 m The left end of the detour passage 552g coincides with the left end in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right end wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552 g is integrally formed with the ball tank 552. In the following, the container-shaped region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as a ball tank 552. The detour passage 552g extends from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left in a flat plate shape, and the front end is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is inclined so as to be low. And a weir portion extending upward from the end side of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. Regarding the rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g, the left end side (weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in front view, and the left end side thereof. It extends diagonally so that it moves forward toward the right end. The passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be inclined in the left-right direction horizontally.

The detour passage 552g is assembled on the main body frame 4 so that the rear end of the tank rail 553 extending in a crank shape in the left-right direction is along the front end side of the portion extending diagonally in the left-right direction. It is extending. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552 g extends diagonally in the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour passage 552 g changes so that its distribution direction is perpendicular to the diagonal rear end from the oblique rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the distribution direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is discharged from the rear end of the detour passage 552 g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the distribution direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552 g is discharged at a wide portion of the tank rail 553. You can receive the game ball B from. Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the detour passage 552 g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the detour passage 552 g. It is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging in 553 to occur.

Since the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends diagonally in the left-right direction so as to move backward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the diagonally extending rear end allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side, where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball shavings in the tank rail 553 by discharging it to a wide part of the tank rail.

Further, the portion for guiding the game ball B by the detour passage 552 g corresponds to the rear portion of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the left portion in the front view of the rear wall 552c in the tank rail 553. A game ball B that goes under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) is distributed from the inside of the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, at the portion of the tank rail 553 behind the detour passage 552 g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552 k (the wall of the tank rail 553). Height) will not be exceeded. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552 g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward, so that the detour passage 552 g. The game ball B guided to the rear can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f on the left side wall 552d inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. It has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. Further, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end side in the front view from a position of about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b to the front wall 552b. Approximately 1/9 of the total length extends diagonally backward from the front wall 552b to a position near about 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d, and then extends parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c. From there, it is formed in a shape parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction and extending from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position of about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c.

In the ball tank 552, in a plan view, a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-mentioned shape, the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side, and the end on the rear wall 552c side. The region surrounded by and has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the ball tank 552 is a flat plate-shaped flange extending laterally outwardly and vertically on the same surface as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the detour passage 552g, respectively. It has a portion 552 liters. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edge of the two flange portions 552l is the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (main body frame base 501). It is formed higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled from each other, the upstream end (right end in the front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. Further, in a plan view, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape and the portion extending straight in the left-right direction on the left side thereof are located rearward (protruding) from the ball tank 552. )doing. The rear end side of the detour passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the discharge portion 551j is in the ball tank 552 so as to step backward from a height lower than the detour passage 552 g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side of the front view to the tank rail 553, a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 to the left along the tank rail 553 (center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555). It extends to a nearby position) and then extends backward.

The external terminal plate 558 is attached with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a arranged side by side in the left-right direction on the rear surface. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the grip portion can be opened by operating the lever to grip the tip of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of the portion closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 on the upper side of the tank rail 553 in the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. .. The terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the action and effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501 m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552 g are arranged so that the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g are lower on the rear end side as shown by the white arrows in FIG. 381. The left-stage portion 501n is inclined so that the rear end right corner is lowered, and the right-stage portion 501o is inclined so that the rear end left corner is lowered. Further, the bottom wall 552a and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) of the ball tank 552 are inclined so that the left end side is lower in the front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

Then, when the amount of the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 increases due to the supply from the island equipment, first of all, the overflow portion 552f, which is the lowest of the upper edge of the outer circumference, is exceeded. The game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be released to the overflow surface portion 501 m, and can be discharged from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501 m. The game ball B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by inclining the overflow surface portion 501 m (see FIG. 382). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from further increasing in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the strong pressing of the game balls B against each other (increase in the ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. , It is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball shaving) due to the engagement of the game balls B in the ball tank 552.

Further, since the detour passage 552 g is provided, as shown in FIG. 383, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552 g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501 m from exerting a strong backward pressing force on the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is clogged. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552 g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501 m can be prevented from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem that the game ball B spilled on the outside of the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and the main body frame 4 cannot be opened or closed.

Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552 g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) of the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552 g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged by suppressing the strong pressing of the game balls B against each other in the tank rail 553.

Further, since the height of the remaining upper end edge other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than that of the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper end edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501 m. As a result, the game ball B, which overflows from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501 m beyond the overflow portion 552 f and is distributed from the overflow surface portion 501 m to the detour passage 552 g, is on the left side of one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the ball from returning from the detour passage 552 g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552 g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

Further, as described above, the upper end edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h in which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). It is possible to prevent the game ball B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552 g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501 m. As a result, the inflow of the game ball B from the side (ball tank 552) to the detour passage 552 g can be prevented, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552 g is rearward from the overflow surface portion 501 m on the front end side. The flow can be in a fixed direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the detour passage 552 g to the tank rail 553 can be in a fixed direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pushed against each other and biting each other due to the different directions of the pressure applied to the game balls B, and the game balls B may be clogged. Can be prevented.

Further, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a in a row in the left-right direction. Since the game balls B are arranged side by side, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. Further, since the tank rail 553 is provided with a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be lined up in a portion where the upper side is open, the game released from the rear end of the detour passage 552 g. The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be reliably achieved.

Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is extended from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction is narrowed from the upstream end to the downstream side to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. Since the game balls are changed so as to coincide with each other, as the plurality of game balls B move toward the downstream side in the bulge portion 553b, they can be aligned so as to be aligned with respect to the width direction. Further, since the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (ball tank 552 side). By distributing a plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction to the downstream side through a portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced in a row. Can be aligned with. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide a plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row.

Further, since the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulge portion 553 b. Therefore, since the volume inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

Further, an external terminal plate 558 provided with a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a on the opposite side of the ball tank 552 with the detour passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j in between. Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the electric wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be separated from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island equipment. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island equipment bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501 m, it can be difficult to reach (contact) the electric wire connection terminal 558a or the like. , There is no problem such as short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring due to the contact of the game ball B.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 is the ball tank 552. Even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501 m, it can be made difficult to get on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B gets on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501 m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 382) due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game ball B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented.

Further, the game ball B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501 m, and rides on the left stage portion 501n and the right stage portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501 m. However, as shown in FIG. 382, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501 m and the detour passage 552 g by their inclination, and the game ball B spills on the outside of the main body frame 4, causing a problem. Can be prevented.

Further, since the game ball B is configured to pass under the guide surface portion 552j when the game ball B is distributed from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game balls stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 552 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) of the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552 g, it is possible to secure a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward. , The game ball B guided by the detour passage 552 g can be reliably received.

Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, the game ball B can be dropped. The game ball B is not accepted by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 385 to 393. FIG. 385 is a front view of a game board in which the front components, the game panel, the front unit, and the like are opaque in the pachinko machine. 386 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 385 seen from the front right, FIG. 387 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 385 seen from the front left, and FIG. 388 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the back. .. FIG. 389 is a front view of the game board in a state where the front components, the game panel, the front unit, and the like are transparent. FIG. 390 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 391 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 392 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 385. FIG. 393 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front unit is cut in parallel with the surface of the game panel to show the inside of the game area where the game balls are distributed and the obstacle nails.

In the following, when the shape of the LED mounted on the decorative substrate is square when viewed from the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decorative substrate, the LED irradiates light in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the decorative substrate. When the shape of the LED mounted on the decorative substrate is rectangular, it means that the LED irradiates light in a direction parallel to the surface of the decorative substrate (side view LED). The detailed description is omitted.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting port 2002, and a gate portion that grant a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by accepting or passing the game ball B. 2003, a second starting port 2004, a first major winning opening 2005, and a second major winning opening 2006 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening in the game area 5a. The purpose is to perform a game in which the driving operation of the handle 182 and the distribution of the game ball B in the game area 5a are enjoyed so as to be accepted or passed in 2006 or the like.

The game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and the rear end of the game area 5a. It is provided with a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 393 and the like) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100. Further, the game board 5 is a game played by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and the board holder 1200. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 392, 484, etc.) for controlling the contents.

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component 1000. The peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the 1100, the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the effect display device 1600 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100. It further includes a drive board unit 1700, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100.

The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. Further, a drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

The front component 1000 is formed to be transparent as a whole. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape.

The game panel 1100 holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110, which are formed to be slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and the front component 1000. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 394 and the like), which is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The drive board unit 1700 is provided in the panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 in response to a command from the peripheral control board 1510. It includes an effect drive board 1720 for driving a decorative substrate, a drive motor, a drive solenoid, and the like, and a drive board box 1730 containing a panel relay board 1710 and an effect drive board 1720. The drive board box 1730 is hingeably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 on the left side in the rear view, and is detachably attached to the rear surface in the effect display device 1600 on the right side in the rear view.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that the game ball B driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are game areas. The first start port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in 5a, and the gate portion 2003, which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B, To the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003. The first special winning opening 2005 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting opening that can accept the game ball B according to the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B. It is provided with a first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B in 2004 or a second large winning opening 2006 capable of accepting the game ball B according to the second special lottery result.

Further, the table unit 2000 is provided at the lower end of the game area 5a and has an out port 2010 for discharging the game ball B from the game area 5a, and is provided in the middle of the game area 5a in the vertical direction and is provided in the game ball B. The game area 5a is provided with a first sub-out port 2011 and a second sub-out port 2012.

Further, the front unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a front start unit 2100 and a front surface of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning openings 2001, and a side upper left unit that is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. It is provided on the right side of the front view of the 2300 and the start port unit 2100 which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a, and has a second start port 2004, a first grand prize opening 2005, and a first sub-out port 2011. The first attacker unit 2400, the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a, and the center role. The second attacker unit 2600, which is provided above the first attacker unit 2400 on the right side of the object 2500 and has the second large winning opening 2006, and the second attacker unit 2600, which is provided above the second attacker unit 2600, are one. A side right middle unit 2700 having a general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012, and a gate member 2800 provided above the side right middle unit 2700 and having a gate portion 2003 are provided. There is.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and has a box-shaped opening 3010a in the rear wall and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall. It is provided with a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided in the flat back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010, respectively, and at the lower part of the front end in the back box 3010. The back guide unit 3050 is provided, the back rear effect unit 3100 provided at the rear end in the back box 3010, and the back guide unit 3050 at the lower part of the back box 3010 are separated from each other to the left and right. The back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250, and the back bottom middle effect unit 3300 provided behind the back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250 in the back box 3010. I have.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided behind the back upper effect unit 3400 provided in front of the back rear effect unit 3100 in the upper part of the back box 3010 and the back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. The back back left effect unit 3500, the back front right decoration unit 3600 provided behind the back front right decoration body 3040 in the back box 3010, and the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back back left in the back box 3010. The back front left production unit 3700 provided between the production unit 3500, and the back front right production unit 3700 provided between the back front right decorative body 3040 and the back rear right production unit 3600 in the back box 3010. It is equipped with 3800.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 394. FIG. 394 (a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 394 (b) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel as viewed from the rear.

The front component 1000 is formed to be transparent as a whole. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction, passes through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extends diagonally to the upper right. The game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left side in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear (out port 2010).

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front constituent member 1000 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 2010 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view in the frame. The out port 2010 penetrates the two game balls B with a width sufficiently aligned in the left-right direction. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out ball detection member 3080 of the out port 2010 and the back unit 3000 described later.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of the portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1010 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower full ball path penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. There is.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparently, and the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front. Since the front component 1000 is transparently formed together with the game panel 1100 attached to the rear side, it is possible to reduce that the boundary of the game area 5a is clearly visible when assembled on the game board 5. It is possible to give a feeling of openness to the player, and to make the game area 5a look larger (wider) to the player, although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change.

Further, since the front component 1000 is transparent together with the game panel 1100, the light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (on the player side). By doing so, it can be made to appear as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 394 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, to which the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and which is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 393 and the like).

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is at the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 2010 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the front and rear and for mounting the table unit 2000.

Further, although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is separated from each other in the left-right direction at a plurality of positioning holes formed in round holes and short elongated holes penetrating the front and rear, and at the upper edge and the lower edge, respectively. It is provided with a plurality of engaging step portions formed to have a thin plate thickness. The positioning hole is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting a protruding pin (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engaging step portion is for being detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with the engaging claw (not shown) or the engaging piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. is there.

As shown in FIG. 394, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for mounting the center accessory 2500 offset to the upper right of the center in the front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and the width orthogonal to the distribution direction (circumferential direction of the frame shape) of the game ball B in the front view is a plurality of games on the left side and the lower side from the center. The width is wide so that the balls B can be lined up, and the upper side is narrow so that a plurality of game balls B cannot be lined up.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion (not shown) that is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the holding step portion is substantially the same size as the game area 5a. It is provided with a through-hole 1121 that penetrates in the front-rear direction.

Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. The notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower full ball penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the route unit 610 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 that extends upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 2010 and is recessed from the rear surface to the front. The upper part of the out recess 1123 communicates with the out port 2010. A tubular portion 3081 of the out ball detection member 3080 in the back guidance unit 3050 of the back unit 3000, which will be described later, is inserted into the out recess 1123.

Further, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is arranged outside the holding step portion and a plurality of protruding pins each protruding forward from the holding step portion and being inserted into a plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110. Three engaging claws that are elastically engaged with the engaging step portion of the inclined portion on the upper side and the lower left of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 protruding upward from the lower outside of the holding step portion. It includes two engaging steps on the lower side and a pair of engaging pieces that engage with each other. The panel holder 1120 tilts the upper side and the lower left by moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 to the rear after engaging the engaging step portion of the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally above the front. By elastically engaging the engaging step portion of the portion to be engaged with the engaging claw, the panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached while being housed in the holding step portion. At this time, the protruding pin of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Since the game panel 1100 is transparently formed together with the front component 1000 attached to the front side, it is possible to reduce that the boundary of the game area 5a is clearly visible when assembled on the game board 5. It is possible to give a feeling of openness to the player, and although the size of the actual game area 5a does not change, the game area 5a can be made larger (wider) to the player.

Further, since the game panel 1100 is transparent together with the front component 1000, the light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (on the player side). By doing so, it can be made to appear as if it is emitting light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[5-3. Board holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 390 and 391. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 notched from the front end to the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is on the rear surface. The main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located directly above the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the back unit 3000 is out. It is located directly below the ball detection member 3080. The board holder 1200 can receive all the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and is discharged from the discharge unit 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharge ball receiving unit 628 below. Can be done.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 390 to 392 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 houses the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 484) that controls the game content and the payout of the game ball B, and the main control board 1310, and is attached to the board holder 1200. And have.

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent force against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a first starting port sensor 3052, a gate sensor 2801, a second starting port sensor 2401, a general winning opening sensor 3051, a first major winning opening sensor 2402, and a second major winning opening. It is connected to a sensor 2601, an out port sensor 3053, a first sub out port sensor 2403, a second sub out port sensor 3054, a magnetic sensor 2404, 2602, 3055, and the like.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 385 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

The function display unit 1400 is not shown in detail. The shin displays a status indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game status, and a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B at the gate unit 2003. It is provided with a normal symbol display composed of one LED and a normal hold display composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball B at the gate unit 2003.

Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002. The first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004, and the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004. It is equipped with a second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs to display, and a second special holding number display consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. ing.

Further, the function display unit 1400 repeats the opening / closing pattern of the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 (number of rounds) when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "win" or the like. It is equipped with a round indicator, which consists of five LEDs for displaying.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 388, 391, 392 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 484) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. It is equipped with a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 390 and 391. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled.

The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color effect display device backed by a white LED, and has substantially the same width as the width of the rear wall in the back box 3010 in the left-right direction. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601 protruding upward from the upper end surface and one lower fixing piece 1602 protruding downward from the lower end surface. The effect display device 1600 has a back box in two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the upper inner peripheral surface in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of the 3010, the lower fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the lower fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the right.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 395. FIG. 395 (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 395 (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the back. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end is an opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. It penetrates through and projects rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The table unit 2000 is capable of accepting the game ball B driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are games. A first starting port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B. , To the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003. The first special winning opening 2005, which enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B, is different from the first special winning opening 2005. It is possible to accept the game ball B according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery, which is provided at the position and is drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is equipped with the second major winning opening 2006.

Three (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged on the left side with respect to the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the remaining one is in the vertical direction in the right part in the game area 5a. It is located above the center. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 2010 at the lowermost end in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom in the vertical direction near the right end of the front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged in the lower right corner of the game area 5a at a height slightly higher than the general winning opening 2001 at the left end. The first prize-winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The second major winning opening 2006 is arranged above the second starting opening 2004 and directly below the general winning opening 2001 on the right side.

The first sub-out port 2011 is arranged below the second starting port 2004, and the second sub-out port 2012 is arranged on the right side of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side.

Further, the front unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a front start unit 2100 and a front surface of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning openings 2001, and a side upper left unit that is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. It is provided on the right side of the front view of the 2300 and the start port unit 2100 which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a, and has a second start port 2004, a first grand prize opening 2005, and a first sub-out port 2011. It is provided with a first attacker unit 2400, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a. ing.

Further, the front unit 2000 is a second attacker unit 2600 and a second attacker unit 2600, which are provided above the first attacker unit 2400 on the right side of the center accessory 2500 and have a second large winning opening 2006. It has a side right middle unit 2700 which is provided above the side right middle unit 2700 and has one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub out opening 2012, and a gate portion 2003 which is provided above the side right middle unit 2700. The gate member 2800 and the gate member 2800 are provided.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
The starting port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 396 to 398 and the like. FIG. 396 (a) is a perspective view of the start port unit and the side unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 396 (b) is a perspective view of the start port unit and the side unit in the front unit as viewed from the rear, (c). ) Is a left side view of the starting port unit, and (d) is a left side view of the side unit. FIG. 397 is an explanatory view comparing the inclination of the front surface of the general winning opening and the inclination of the door member of the variable winning opening in the open state. FIG. 398 is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the start port unit and the side unit in the game board. The start port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 2010, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The start port unit 2100 has a first start port 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be accepted.

The starting port unit 2100 includes a front wall portion 2101 extending parallel to the surface of the game area 5a (game panel 1100), a peripheral wall portion 2102 extending rearward from the peripheral edge of the front wall portion 2101, and a peripheral wall portion 2102. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped flange portion 2103 extending outward from the middle in the front-rear direction, and is entirely formed of a transparent member. The front wall portion 2101 is formed in a shape in which the front view is a combination of a rectangular portion that is long to the left and right and a semicircular portion whose lower side is a string. The peripheral wall portion 2102 extends rearward from the peripheral edge excluding the upper side of the front wall portion 2101, and is formed in a gutter shape with an open upper portion. The bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 is inclined so that the rear end side is lowered, and the game ball B can be guided backward.

The start port unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110 in a state where the flange portion 2103 extending in the left-right direction from the middle of the peripheral wall portion 2102 is in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The start port unit 2100, in a state of being attached to the panel plate 1110, has a first start port 2002 capable of receiving the game ball B by the front wall portion 2101 and the peripheral wall portion 2102 protruding forward from the panel plate 1110. Is forming.

By attaching the start port unit 2100 to the game panel 1100, the first start port 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 and is opened upward, so that the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 is opened. It is located just below the center of. Therefore, when the game ball B is discharged downward from the central discharge portion 2513a of the stage 2513, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

The start port unit 2100 guides the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 to the rear of the game panel 1100 by the inclination of the gutter-shaped peripheral wall portion 2102 in a state of being attached to the game panel 1100, and the back unit 3000. It can be delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the above. The game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guidance unit 3050 is detected by the first start port sensor 3052 and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200.

Although not shown, a decorative sticker is attached to the front surface of the front wall portion 2101 so as to be more conspicuous than the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. As a result, the player's attention can be directed to the first starting port 2002 rather than the general winning opening 2001, and the player can be encouraged to drive the game ball B aiming at the first starting port 2002. At the same time, by accepting the game ball B at the first starting port 2002, a special lottery result (first special lottery result) is drawn in which an advantageous game state occurs in which the player such as a "big hit" game is advantageous. Therefore, it is possible to raise the expectation for the special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

In this starting port unit 2100, the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 that guides the game ball B rearward is inclined at a gentler angle (an angle close to horizontal) than the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200. Therefore, the moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B in the rear direction is relatively slow. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, the accepted game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001. It is possible to surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted by the first starting port 2002, and at the same time, the joy (superiority complex) that the game ball B has been accepted by the first starting port 2002 can be expressed in the general winning opening 2001. It can be tasted for a longer time than when it was accepted.

Further, in the state where the start port unit 2100 is assembled on the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 398, the back lower middle effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is located behind and is provided in the back lower middle effect unit 3300. Light from LEDs such as the first decorative substrate 3322 under the back and the second decorative substrate 3329 under the back of the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is used for light emission decoration.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the starting port unit 2100 may be provided with ribs straddling the front wall portion 2101 and the bottom portion of the peripheral wall portion 2102 at the first starting port 2002. The ribs are formed in a triangular shape (which may be partially rounded) in a side view, and the upper surface is inclined from the right side of the side unit 2200 to the first front wall portion 2203 of the two general winning openings 2001. The distance to the upper end of the first front wall portion 2203 is longer than the distance from the upper end to the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 while inclining at substantially the same angle as the portion. (The position of the rib is lower than the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203). As a result, the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 abuts on the rib and is guided backward, and the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is in the first front wall portion 2203. It can be delayed from the timing at which it comes into contact with the inclined portion and is guided backward, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[5-8b. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 396 to 398 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning openings 2001 that are open so that the game ball B can be accepted at all times. The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002. The two general winning openings 2001 on the right side are open upwards, and the general winning openings 2001 on the left side are open toward the upper left.

The side unit 2200 has a flat base plate and a second second that extends from the base plate in the shape of a gutter and is inclined so that the front end moves backward as it goes downward. One gutter, the first front wall that closes the front end side of each of the two first gutters, and a gutter-shaped extension from the base plate to the left of the two first gutters. It is provided with a second guide gutter and a second front wall portion that closes the front end side of the second guide gutter. The side unit 2200 is entirely made of a transparent member.

The first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 have a U-shaped cross section. In the first guide gutter 2202, the U-shaped open portion is directed upward, and in the second guide gutter 2204, the U-shaped open portion is directed upward. The front end of the first guide gutter 2202 extends vertically on the upper side with a portion at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom as a boundary, and near the base plate 2201 so that the lower side moves backward as it goes downward. It extends diagonally to. Therefore, the first front wall portion 2203 that closes the front end side of the first guide gutter 2202 has a shape in which the lower side is bent rearward at a height of about 3/4 from the bottom.

The front end side of the second guide gutter 2204 is vertical. Therefore, the second front wall portion 2205 that closes the front end side of the second guide gutter 2204 extends vertically in parallel with the base plate 2201.

The side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110 in a state where the base plate 2201 is in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Then, the game ball B can be accepted by the portion of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 that protrudes forward from the panel plate 1110, and the first front wall portion 2203 and the second front wall portion 2205. It forms a general winning opening 2001. Further, when the side unit 2200 is attached to the panel plate 1110, a portion of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 that protrudes rearward from the base plate 2201 penetrates the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. As a result, it protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The bottom surfaces of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 are inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear, and the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 can be guided backward.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, three general winning openings 2001 project forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side unit 2200 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100, and the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the third delivery port 3063 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. It can be delivered to any of the fourth delivery ports 3064. The game ball B delivered to any of the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the fourth delivery port 3064 of the back guidance unit 3050 is detected by the general winning port sensor 3051 and then lowered. It is discharged onto the board holder 1200.

Unlike the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200 does not have a decorative sticker attached to the first front wall portion 2203 or the second front wall portion 2205 forming the front surface of the general winning opening 2001. It is less noticeable than the first starting port 2002. Since the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 in the side unit 2200 are inclined, the three-dimensional effect of the general winning openings 2001 can be emphasized, and even if a decorative sticker is not attached to the front surface. , It doesn't look bad.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 398, the back lower left effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is located behind, and the back lower left decoration of the back lower left effect unit 3200. The light from the LED of the substrate 3203 can be used for light emission decoration, and the lower back left rotation decoration body 3201 can be visually recognized in a good state. Further, since the side unit 2200 has a portion inclined to the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001, the back unit 3000 has a lower left side depending on the portion. The light radiated forward from the lower left decorative substrate 3203 of the production unit 3200 can be reflected (or refracted) near the head of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 can be reflected (or refracted). It can look good.

In this side unit 2200, since the bent and diagonally extending portion of the first front wall portion 2203 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200 is relatively rearward. The moving speed (rolling speed) of the game ball B is increasing. The bottom surfaces of the first guide gutter 2202 and the second guide gutter 2204 are inclined at substantially the same angle as the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 in the starting port unit 2100. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, the received game ball B becomes invisible in a shorter time than the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002. As a result, it is possible to make the player surely recognize the acceptance of the game ball B into the general winning opening 2001, and to prevent the player's interest from being attracted to the general winning opening 2001 unnecessarily for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to easily direct the player's interest to other winning openings such as the next game ball B, the first starting opening 2002, the first major winning opening 2005, and the second major winning opening 2006. It is possible to entertain the game in the game area 5a and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

In other words, since the bent and diagonally extending portion of the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 is inclined at a steeper angle than the bottom surface of the peripheral wall portion 2102 of the starting port unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001 The rolling speed of the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 can be made slower than the rolling speed of the game ball B received in. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, the accepted game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001. It is possible to surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted by the first starting port 2002, and at the same time, the joy (superiority complex) that the game ball B has been accepted by the first starting port 2002 can be expressed in the general winning opening 2001. It can be tasted for a longer time than when it was accepted.

By the way, in the side unit 2200, since the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 is inclined, the first front wall portion 2203 is viewed from the side of the first guide gutter 2202. The game ball B can pass in front of the inclined portion of the game ball B. When the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203, the game ball B appears to overlap the general winning opening 2001 when viewed from the front, so that the game ball B is accepted by the general winning opening 2001 depending on the player. If the game ball B is not paid out, the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side may feel distrustful, which may reduce the interest in the game. On the other hand, in the side unit 2200 of the present embodiment, as described above, the inclined portion of the first front wall portion 2203 and the first guide gutter 2202 are accepted by the general winning opening 2001 and move backward. Since the guided game ball B can be visually recognized by the player for a short time, it is possible to recognize that the game ball B has been accepted by the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, even if it is illusion that the game ball B that has passed in front of the first front wall portion 2203 has been accepted by the general winning opening 2001, it can be immediately recognized as an illusion.

Further, in this side unit 2200, since a part of the game ball B can pass in front of the first front wall portion 2203, the game ball is in front of the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001. When B passes, if most of the game ball B (at least half or more of the game ball B) overlaps with the general winning opening 2001 in the front view, the game ball B becomes the general winning opening 2001 depending on the player. It is possible to make the player feel as if he / she was accepted and entertain the player. At this time, since a part of the game ball B does not overlap with the general winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been accepted by the general winning opening 2001, and it may be considered as an illusion. Therefore, even if the benefits (payment of game ball B and lottery of the first special lottery result) are not given after that, it is possible to avoid feeling distrust toward the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side. It is possible to keep the player entertained and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the side unit 2200 extends the front end of the leftmost (leftmost) general winning opening 2001 from the three general winning openings 2001 by the second front wall portion 2205 in parallel with the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). The shape is similar to that of the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball B is received in the leftmost general winning opening 2001, it is possible for some players to have the illusion that the game ball B has been received in the starting opening. Then, even if the game ball B is accepted in the general winning opening 2001, which is an illusion that it is the starting opening, the lottery of the special lottery result is not performed, so the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side feel distrust. There is a risk that it will end up. However, the general winning opening 2001 is provided at the left end of the side unit 2200 (a position that cannot be accepted by "right-handed") away from the first starting port 2002 in the center in the left-right direction to the left, and the second Since there is no decorative sticker attached to the front of the front wall 2205 to indicate the starting port, it is possible to reconfirm that it is not the starting port, and the player feels distrust and enjoys the game. It is possible to avoid lowering it.

Further, since the side unit 2200 has the front ends of the two general winning openings 2001 inclined, the amount of material required for the side unit 2200 is compared with the case where the front ends thereof are parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. And because the decorative sticker is not attached to the front surface of the general winning opening 2001, the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

The angle of inclination from the horizontal on the first front wall portion 2203 of the side unit 2200 (general winning opening 2001) is not shown, but the variable winning openings such as the large winning opening and the accessory winning opening can be opened and closed. The winning opening door is larger than the horizontal inclination angle when the game ball B is rotated around the lower side so as to move forward so as to guide the game ball B to the winning opening side. It is an angle. More specifically, depending on the player, when the number of game balls B paid out by accepting the game ball B to the variable winning opening is larger than that of the general winning opening 2001, many of the game balls B to the variable winning opening are used. Will hope for a prize. Alternatively, even if the variable winning opening (large winning opening) has a specified number of winnings, the player will wish to win more than the specified number. Therefore, by making the inclination of the winning opening door of the variable winning opening gentler than that of the general winning opening 2001 (first front wall portion 2203), the speed of the game ball B rolling on the winning opening door is slow. Therefore, as described above, when the game ball B is accepted in the variable winning opening, the accepted game ball B can be seen for a longer time than the game ball B accepted in the general winning opening 2001. It is possible to surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted into the variable winning opening, and to give the general winning opening 2001 the joy (sense of superiority) that the game ball B has been accepted into the variable winning opening. You can enjoy it for a longer time than when it was accepted. In addition, since the angle of the winning door in the open state is loose, it takes a long time for the winning door in the open state to close, so that the number of game balls B is more than the specified number for the player. Can make you feel like doing.

Further, in the two general winning openings 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200, the portion extending diagonally downward from the lower end of the portion of the first front wall portion 2203 is more than the distance of the portion extending vertically downward from the upper end. The distance of is formed longer. As a result, since the winning opening is the general winning opening 2001, the game ball B is paid out, but the lottery such as the ordinary lottery or the special lottery is not performed. Therefore, the game ball B accepted in the general winning opening 2001 Can be hidden from the player's field of vision at an early stage.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the side unit 2200, among a plurality of general winning openings 2001, the front surface of a specific general winning opening 2001 is inclined, but the present invention is not limited to this, and all general winning openings 2001 are used. The front surface of the winning opening 2001 may be tilted. Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball B launched at the launch position (so-called "left-handed") in the normal gaming state can enter the general winning opening 2001 whose front surface is not tilted. The one provided at the position is shown, but it is not limited to this, and the general winning opening 2001 whose front is not tilted is in an advantageous gaming state (during "time saving", "probability change", or "big hit"). The game ball B launched at the launch position (so-called "right-handed") may be provided at a position where the ball can enter, or may be provided at both.

Further, as shown in FIG. 397, the inclination angle of the general winning opening 2001 having an inclination on the front surface is larger than the opening angle when the variable winning opening (for example, the large winning opening) is opened from the time when it is closed. It has a narrow angle. If the number of game balls B paid out when winning a prize in the large winning opening is larger than that in the general winning opening 2001, the player will win more than the specified number even in the large winning opening for which the specified number of winnings is set. I hope. Therefore, it is said that the speed at which the game ball B that has won the big prize opening rolls to the back side is slower than the speed at which the game ball B that has won the general winning opening 2001 with the front tilted rolls to the back side. There is. In other words, when the general winning opening 2001, which is smaller than the number paid out when winning the large winning opening, is won, it is said that the speed at which the game ball B winning the large winning opening rolls to the back side is faster. ing. In other words, it can be said that the more payouts are made, the slower the time it takes to disappear from the player's field of view. As a result, the more payouts are made, the longer the time of joy when winning can be provided.

[5-8c. Side upper left unit]
The side upper left unit 2300 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 395 and the like. The side upper left unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to be in contact with the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The side upper left unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 inclined so as to be lowered to the right. The entire side upper left unit 2300 is transparently formed.

In the state where the side upper left unit 2300 is assembled on the game board 5, the shelf portion 2301 projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the center accessory 2500 to the right side below the center accessory 2500 by the shelf portion 2301.

[5-8d. First attacker unit]
The first attacker unit 2400 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 399 to 403 and the like. FIG. 399 (a) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 399 (b) is a perspective view of the first attacker unit in the front unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 400 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 401 is an exploded perspective view of the first attacker unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 402 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the first prize-winning door in the first attacker unit from the left side. FIG. 403 is an explanatory view showing a passage of a game ball in the first attacker unit in a cross section.

The first attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a on the right side of the front view of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view, and is arranged in front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. It is installed. The first attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting port 2004, a first winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2011 (see FIG. 408 and the like). In the first attacker unit 2400, in front view, the second starting port 2004 is provided on the upper part to the right from the center in the left-right direction, and the first winning opening 2005 is on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and more than the second starting port 2004. It is provided at a lower position, and the first sub-out port 2011 is provided below the second starting port 2004 and at a position lower than the first large winning opening 2005.

Further, the first attacker unit 2400 has a second start port sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004, and a first that detects the game ball B received in the first grand prize opening 2005. It includes a large winning opening sensor 2402, a first sub-out opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the first sub-out opening 2011, and a magnetic sensor 2404 that detects illegal magnetism. Two first prize opening sensors 2402 and two magnetic sensors 2404 are provided.

The first attacker unit 2400 is attached to the unit base 2411 attached to the panel plate 1110, the front cover 2412 attached to the front side of the unit base 2411 to form the flow path of the game ball B, and the rear side of the unit base 2411. The rear cover 2413, the second start port door 2414 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the second start port 2004, and the second start port door 2414 are moved to open and close the second start port 2004. The start port solenoid 2415 for making the start port solenoid 2415, the solenoid cover 2416 covering the start port solenoid 2415, the first prize opening door 2417 attached to the unit base 2411 and capable of closing the first prize opening 2005, and the first The first attacker solenoid 2418 for moving the first prize opening door 2417 to open and close the first prize opening 2005, and the transmission for moving the first prize opening door 2417 by transmitting the advance and retreat of the first attacker solenoid 2418. A member 2419 and a member 2419 are provided.

Further, the first attacker unit 2400 is attached to the rear cover 2413, and is attached to the first grand prize opening decoration substrate 2420 for light-emitting decoration of the first grand prize opening 2005 and the rear surface of the rear cover 2413. Second start port sensor 2401, first prize opening sensor 2402, first sub-out port sensor 2403, magnetic sensor 2404, start port solenoid 2415, first attacker solenoid 2418, first prize opening decorative board 2420 and panel relay board It includes a first attacker relay board 2421 for relaying the connection with the 1710.

The unit base 2411 is formed of a transparent member. The unit base 2411 has a first opening 2411a penetrating back and forth near the upper end to the right from the center in the left-right direction, and a first guide hole 2411b penetrating back and forth below the first opening 2411a. The second opening 2411c, which is long left and right and penetrates back and forth in the upper part on the left side from the center, and the two second guide holes 2411d, which are arranged side by side below the second opening 2411c and penetrate front and back, and the second It has a first sub-out port 2011 that penetrates back and forth below the guide hole 2411b.

The left and right widths of the first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411 are formed to be slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2414a of the second starting door 2414 is inserted through the first opening 2411a. The first guide hole 2411b is provided at a position below the center in the vertical direction. The first guide hole 2411b projects rearward in a tubular shape and is inclined so that the rear end side is lowered. The second opening 2411c extends to the left and right with a length of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B, and the door portion 2417a of the first grand prize opening door 2417 is inserted through the second opening 2411c. Each of the second guide holes 2411d projects rearward in a tubular shape, and is inclined so that the rear end side is lowered.

Further, the unit base 2411 is arranged side by side along the upper side of the second opening 2411c, and has two contact portions 2411e protruding forward in a triangular shape. These contact portions 2411e use the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first prize opening door 2417 as the contact portion of the front cover 2412 when the first prize opening 2005 is closed. In cooperation with each other, they are distributed in a large zigzag shape in the front-back direction.

A second start port sensor 2401 is attached to the unit base 2411 directly above the first guide hole 2411b, with the detection hole protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. Further, directly above each of the two second guide holes 2411d, the first prize opening sensor 2402 is attached with the detection hole protruding forward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. Further, at the rear end of the first sub-out port 2011, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 is attached to the unit base 2411 so that the detection holes match. Further, magnetic sensors 2404 are attached to a portion on the rear surface of the unit base 2411 on the left side of the first guide hole 2411b and a portion on the right side of the two second guide holes 2411d, respectively.

The front cover 2412 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear, and is transparently formed into a member. The front cover 2412 is for forming a passage for the game ball B on the front surface of the unit base 2411. As shown in FIG. 403, the front cover 2412 has a first shelf portion 2412a extending downward from the vicinity of the upper right corner to the left and a game ball from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a to the left in front view. It extends slightly longer than the diameter of B and shorter than the first shelf 2412a so as to be lower to the left from a position lower than the left end of the first shelf 2412a and between the first shelf 2412a. The second shelf 2412b forming the second starting port 2004 and the second shelf so as to be lower to the left from a position lower than the diameter of the game ball B on the left side of the left end of the second shelf 2412b. The third shelf 2412c, which extends shorter than the portion 2412b, and the third shelf 2412c are spaced from the left end to the left by 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B, and the third shelf 2412c. It has a fourth shelf portion 2412d, which extends from a lower position to the left and forms a first large winning opening 2005 with the third shelf portion 2412c.

The right end of the first shelf portion 2412a is slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B and is separated to the left from the right side of the front cover 2412. The first shelf 2412a, the second shelf 2412b, and the third shelf 2412c are inclined at the same angle, respectively, and the fourth shelf 2412d is inclined at a steeper angle than the first shelf 2412a and the like. ing.

Further, the front cover 2412 is the same as the first standing wall portion 2412e extending vertically downward from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a and the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e vertically downward from the left end of the first shelf portion 2412a. The second standing wall portion 2412f extending to the height, the third standing wall portion 2412g extending vertically downward from the right end of the second shelf portion 2412b to the same height as the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2412e, and the third shelf portion 2412c. The fourth standing wall portion 2412h extending vertically downward from the right end to the lower side of the front cover 2412, the fifth standing wall portion 2412i extending downward from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c, and the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d. It has a sixth vertical wall portion 2412j extending downward from the fourth shelf portion 2412d and a seventh vertical wall portion 2412k extending downward from the left end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d.

The fifth vertical wall portion 2412i extends downward from the left end of the third shelf portion 2412c to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d, and then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to be lower to the left. Further downward, it extends to the lower side of the front cover 2412. Further, the sixth vertical wall portion 2412j extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B so as to extend downward from the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2412d to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2412d and then lower to the right. Above and further down, it extends to the bottom of the front cover 2412. The distance between the lower portions of the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j in the left-right direction is longer than twice the diameter of the game ball B.

Further, the front cover 2412 includes a first horizontal wall portion 2412l connecting the lower ends of the first standing wall portion 2412e, the second standing wall portion 2412f, and the third standing wall portion 2412g, and the first standing wall portion on the right side of the front cover 2412. From a position lower than the lower end of the 2412e, after inclining so that the game ball B is lowered to the left with a space between the first lateral wall portion 2412l and the first lateral wall portion 2412l, and then to the middle of the fourth standing wall portion 2412h on the left side. It has a second side wall portion of 2412 m, which is inclined so as to be higher toward the side. The first lateral wall portion 2412l is provided at the same height as the lower end of the first guide hole 2411b in the unit base 2411. The second lateral wall portion 2412 m is formed so that the portion of the first sub-out port 2011 below the second starting port 2004 is the lowest.

Further, the front cover 2412 extends from the lower part of each of the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j to the vicinity of the center between the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j in the direction of approaching each other. It has a third lateral wall portion 2412n extending and a partition portion 2412o extending upward while connecting the opposite ends of the two third lateral wall portions 2412n. The third lateral wall portion 2412n is provided at the same height as the lower end of the second guide hole 2411d in the unit base 2411.

Further, the front cover 2412 extends stepwise along the upper side of the front cover so as to be lowered to the left, and the interval at which the game ball B can be distributed between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c. It is provided with a space. It has an upper shelf portion 2412p. The right end of the upper shelf 2412p is located directly above the left end of the first shelf 2412a, and the left end is slightly to the right of the right end of the fourth shelf 2412d. Further, the upper shelf portion 2412p is inclined so that the vicinity of the right end is lowered to the right.

Although not shown, the front cover 2412 is located in front of the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and is triangular at a portion that is staggered in the left-right direction with respect to the two contact portions 2411e of the unit base 2411. It has two abutting portions that project rearward in shape. These contact portions refer the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a of the first prize opening door 2417 to the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 when the first prize opening 2005 is closed. In cooperation with each other, they are distributed in a large zigzag shape in the front-back direction.

The rear cover 2413 is formed in a box shape that is open forward. The rear cover 2413 cooperates with the unit base 2411 to hold the second starting door 2414, the solenoid cover 2416, the first winning door 2417, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the like. Further, the rear cover 2413 cooperates with the front cover 2412 to hold the second start port sensor 2401, the first large winning opening sensor 2402, and the first sub-out port sensor 2403 so as to sandwich it.

The second start port door 2414 has a flat plate-shaped door portion 2414a, an arm portion 2414b extending downward from the door portion 2414a, and extending in the left-right direction from the lower end of the arm portion 2414b, with respect to the unit base 2411. It has a rotating shaft 2414c that is rotatably attached to the arm portion 2414b, and a connecting portion 2414d that is provided at a portion of the lower part of the arm portion 2414b away from the rotating shaft 2414c and is connected to the tip of the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2415. ..

The door portion 2414a of the second starting port door 2414 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The arm portion 2414b of the second starting port door 2414 extends downward from the rear end of the door portion 2414a and then bends forward to a position substantially the same as the front end of the door portion 2414a. The connecting portion 2414d is provided on the side of the arm portion 2414b closer to the door portion 2414a than the rotating shaft 2414c.

The second starting port door 2414 can close the second starting port 2004 by the door portion 2414a. The second start port door 2414 rotates (rotates) around the rotation shaft 2414c due to the advancement and retreat of the plunger of the start port solenoid 2415 in the front-rear direction, so that the door portion 2414a moves in the front-rear direction. The starting port 2004 can be opened and closed.

The start port solenoid 2415 is attached so that the direction in which the plunger protrudes is directed forward. When the starting port solenoid 2415 is not energized, the plunger protrudes forward due to the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the plunger retracts when the plunger is energized.

The first prize-winning door 2417 is a flat plate-shaped door portion 2417a that is long to the left and right, a pair of arm portions 2417b extending downward from both ends in the left-right direction of the door portion 2417a, and a pair of arm portions 2417b, respectively. It has a rotating shaft 2417c that extends coaxially from the lower end to the left and right, and a columnar link pin 2417d that protrudes to the right from the lower part of the right arm portion 2417b.

The door portion 2417a of the first prize-winning door 2417 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The pair of arm portions 2417b extend downward from the rear end of the door portion 2417a and then bend forward to substantially the same position as the front end of the door portion 2417a. The link pin 2417d is provided on the lower side of the arm portion 2417b closer to the door portion 2417a than the rotating shaft 2417c. The link pin 2417d is slidably inserted into a slit 2419c extending vertically in the transmission member 2419 described later.

The first prize-winning door 2417 can close the first prize-winning door 2005 by the door portion 2417a. The first prize-winning door 2417 rotates (rotates) around the rotation shaft 2417c due to the advancement and retreat of the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 in the front-rear direction, so that the door portion 2417a moves in the front-rear direction. The first prize opening 2005 can be opened and closed.

The first attacker solenoid 2418 is attached so that the direction in which the plunger protrudes is directed forward. When the first attacker solenoid 2418 is not energized, the plunger protrudes forward due to the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the plunger retracts when energized.

The transmission member 2419 penetrates in the left-right direction near the front end of the base portion 2419a attached to the tip of the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418, the extension portion 2419b extending forward from the base portion 2419a, and the extension portion 2419b. It also has a slit 2419c that extends up and down. The link pin 2417d of the first prize-winning door 2417 is slidably inserted into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419.

A plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward are mounted on the front surface of the first grand prize opening decorative substrate 2420. The plurality of LEDs of the first grand prize opening decorative substrate 2420 are full-color LEDs. The first grand prize opening decoration substrate 2420 can illuminate the first grand prize opening 2005 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

In the first attacker unit 2400, in a normal state, the start port solenoid 2415 and the first attacker solenoid 2418 are in a non-energized (OFF) state, respectively. In this normal state, the plunger of the start port solenoid 2415 projects forward due to the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2414a of the second start port door 2414 passes through the first opening 2411a of the unit base 2411. Protruding forward. In this state, the door portion 2414a of the second starting port door 2414 is located above the second starting port 2004, and the door portion 2414a cannot accept the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. It has become. That is, the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2414 (door portion 2414a) (see FIG. 403).

Further, in a normal state, the plunger of the first attacker solenoid 2418 protrudes forward due to the urging force of a spring (not shown), and the door portion 2417a of the first prize opening door 2417 is the second opening of the unit base 2411. It projects forward through 2411c. In this state, the door portion 2417a of the first prize opening door 2417 is located above the first prize opening 2005, and the door portion 2417a cannot accept the game ball B into the first prize opening 2005. It is in a state of being. That is, the first prize opening 2005 is closed by the first prize opening door 2417 (door portion 2417a) (see FIGS. 402 and 403).

When the game ball B flows down onto the first shelf portion 2412a in this normal state, the game ball B rolls to the left due to the inclination of the first shelf portion 2412a, and the door portion 2414a of the second start opening door 2414 After rolling the upper surface and the second shelf portion 2412b, the second shelf portion 2412b is discharged from the left end to the left. The game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2412b falls on the third shelf 2412c or the door 2417a of the first prize opening door 2417 according to its momentum, and is left due to their inclination. Roll to the direction. When the game ball B released from the second shelf 2412b to the left abuts on the lower surface of the upper shelf 2412p and bounces to the right, a gap between the second shelf 2412b and the third shelf 2412c May enter.

At this time, the game ball B rolling on the door portion 2417a that closes the first prize opening 2005 with respect to the contact portion 2411e of the unit base 2411 and the contact portion of the front cover 2412. They will come into contact with each other alternately, and will roll to the left while zigzag in the front-back direction. The game ball B that has rolled to the left on the door portion 2417a is released from the left end thereof to the outside of the first attacker unit 2400 after rolling the fourth shelf portion 2412d.

In this first attacker unit 2400, when the game ball B flows down to the right of the first shelf portion 2412a, it passes through the right side of the first standing wall portion 2412e and falls near the right end of the second lateral wall portion 2412 m, and falls near the right end of the second lateral wall portion 2412 m. Due to the inclination of the part 2412 m, it rolls to the left and enters the first sub-out port 2011. Further, when the game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c, the second horizontal wall portion 2412 m passes between the third standing wall portion 2412 g and the fourth standing wall portion 2412 h. It falls near the left end, rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second side wall portion 2412 m, and enters the first sub-out port 2011.

The game ball B that has entered the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403 and then enters the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 without being returned to the game area 5a. It is delivered and discharged from the back induction unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. In the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B circulating on the right side of the first shelf portion 2412a and the game ball B passing through the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c are both first. It is formed so as to enter one sub-out port 2011, and substantially two first sub-out ports 2011 are provided.

In this normal state, when the start port solenoid 2415 is energized (ON) according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, the plunger resists the urging force of the spring. Is retracted, and the connecting portion 2414d on the arm portion 2414b of the second starting port door 2414 above the rotating shaft 2414c (door portion 2414a side) is pulled backward by the tip of the plunger. As a result, the second start opening door 2414 rotates about the rotation shaft 2414c in the direction in which the door portion 2414a moves rearward. Then, by rotating the door portion 2414a so as to retract from the front surface of the unit base 2411, the upper part of the second starting port 2004 is opened, and the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. It becomes. That is, the second starting port 2004 is opened.

When the game ball B is received by the second starting port 2004 when the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, it flows down between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g, and becomes the second starting port sensor 2401. After being detected, it falls on the first lateral wall portion 2412 l. The portion of the first lateral wall portion 2412l between the second standing wall portion 2412f and the third standing wall portion 2412g is inclined so as to be lowered rearward, and the game ball B rolls rearward due to the inclination, and the unit It enters the first guide hole 2411b of the base 2411 and is discharged rearward from the rear end. The game ball B discharged rearward from the rear end of the first guide hole 2411b is delivered to the fifth delivery port 3065 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is delivered onto the substrate holder 1200 below the back guide unit 3050. It is discharged.

On the other hand, in a normal state, according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. When the first attacker solenoid 2418 is energized (ON), the plunger retracts together with the transmission member 2419 attached to its tip against the urging force of the spring. When the transmission member 2419 retracts, the link pin 2417d of the first prize-winning door 2417 inserted into the slit 2419c of the transmission member 2419 is pressed backward by the inner wall of the slit 2419c while sliding in the slit 2419c. It will be.

As a result, the first prize-winning door 2417 rotates about the rotation shaft 2417c so that the door portion 2417a moves rearward, and the front end of the door portion 2417a moves rearward from the front surface of the unit base 2411. It will move. By moving the door portion 2417a of the first prize opening door 2417 to the rear of the front surface of the unit base 2411, the first prize opening 2005 is opened upward and the first prize opening 2005 is reached. The game ball B is ready to be accepted (see FIG. 402). That is, the first prize opening 2005 is opened.

When the game ball B is accepted into the first prize opening 2005 when the first prize opening 2005 is open, it passes between the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the sixth standing wall portion 2412j, and then passes between the fifth standing wall portion 2412i and the fifth standing wall portion 2412j. After passing between the portion 2412i and the partition portion 2412o or between the sixth standing wall portion 2412j and the partition portion 2412o, the first major winning opening sensor 2402 detects the first. (3) It falls on the lateral wall portion 2412n. The third horizontal wall portion 2412n is inclined so as to be lowered from the upper surface toward the rear, and the game ball B that has fallen on the third horizontal wall portion 2412n rolls backward due to the inclination, and the unit base 2411 It is discharged backward through the second guide hole 2411d. The game ball B discharged rearward from the second guide hole 2411d is delivered to the sixth delivery port 3066 of the back guide unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is discharged from the back guide unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below. ..

As described above, according to the first attacker unit 2400 of the present embodiment, in the first prize opening door 2417 that opens and closes the first prize opening 2005, the vicinity of the front end of the door portion 2417a that closes the first prize opening 2005. Since the door portion 2417a is rotated around the rotation shaft 2417c extending to the left and right at the same position in the front-rear direction to open and close the first prize opening 2005, the first prize opening 2005 (first prize opening 2005) The depth of the attacker unit 2400) in the front-rear direction can be shortened as much as possible. This effect is the same in the second starting port 2004 opened and closed by the second starting port door 2414. As a result, the space behind the first attacker unit 2400 can be relatively widened.

Further, in the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B received from the first big winning opening 2005 is divided into two by the partition portion 2412o, and each is detected by the different first big winning opening sensor 2402, and the unit base 2411 Since it is released to the rear of the game ball B, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from staying between the first prize opening 2005 and the first prize sensor 2402, and many game balls are released in a short time. B can be accepted.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 404 and 405. FIG. 404 (a) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 404 (b) is a perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 405 is a front view of the center accessory. The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and slightly above the center of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a transparent frame shape, and various effect units provided in the effect display device 1600 provided behind the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the front. ..

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has a portion protruding forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference, and the game ball B driven into the game area 5a is placed in the frame. It cannot be invaded.

The center accessory 2500 has a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, and a flat plate-shaped portion protruding from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and abutting on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It has a flange portion 2502 and a flat plate-shaped support portion 2503 protruding from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. The peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward to a position where the rear end coincides with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape along the inner circumference of the opening 1112 into which the center accessory 2500 in the panel plate 1110 is inserted. The peripheral wall portion 2501 can prevent the game ball B from invading the inside of the frame from the outside of the center accessory 2500 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5.

The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is formed to be thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (thickness of 1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 project from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same positions in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2503 (flange portion 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

A plurality of support portions 2503 are partially provided on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, the support portion 2503 is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not protrude, and reinforces the peripheral wall portion 2501. Further, in the support portion 2503, the end side protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or in a straight line so that the support portion 2503 is inconspicuous. The support portion 2503 has a protrusion amount from the peripheral wall portion 2501 within the range of the thickness of the support portion 2503 to the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), and the player exerts the effect as reinforcement. I try to make it inconspicuous.

More specifically, a plurality of support units 2503 of the center accessory 2500 are provided. For example, in the support portion 2503 provided at a portion above the warp inlet 2511 described later and where the peripheral wall portion 2501 protrudes to the leftmost position, the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the portion is intermediate between the portions extending vertically. Is shaped like a bulge to the left. The tip end side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape along the peripheral wall portion 2501 on both the upper and lower sides of the portion bulging to the left of the peripheral wall portion 2501, and at the portion bulging to the left of the peripheral wall portion 2501. It has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is formed in a straight line so as to connect the upper and lower side portions (see FIG. 413). In the state where the support portion 2503 of this portion is assembled on the game board 5, the portion extending linearly up and down at the tip side of the support portion 2503 is a back front left decorative body in the back unit 3000 provided at the rear. It roughly follows a part of the right side of 3030. Therefore, since the tip edge of the support portion 2503 coincides with the edge of the back front left decoration body 3030, it becomes difficult for the support portion 2503 to discriminate, and the back front left decoration provided relatively behind. The decoration of the body 3030 can be made to stand out.

Further, among the plurality of support portions 2503, the support portion 2503 on the lower side of the warp inlet 2511 extends to the right in a quadrangular shape while the peripheral wall portion 2501 extends diagonally. The support portion 2503 of this portion is located in front of the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C in the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5 (see FIG. 385 and the like). ). Since the tip side extending to the left and right of the support portion 2503 extends in parallel with the plurality of shutters 3732 of the shutter unit 3730 in the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C, it seems to be a part of the shape of the shutter 3732. The support unit 2503 is difficult to discriminate (see FIG. 389).

The center accessory 2500 is a warp entrance in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is open so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter at the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 on the left side of the front view and in front of the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). 2511, the warp outlet 2512 which is made capable of releasing the game ball B which has entered the warp entrance 2511 and is open in the frame behind the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B released from the warp outlet 2512. It includes a stage 2513 that can be released into the game area 5a after being rolled in the left-right direction, and a stage cover 2515 that is provided so as to cover the upper part of the stage 2513 (see FIG. 405 and the like). The stage cover 2515 is for preventing the game ball B from entering the frame from outside the frame of the center accessory 2500 by bouncing the game ball B bounced on the stage 2513 toward the stage 2513 side.

The stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and is located at a position corresponding to directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the panel plate of the game panel 1100. When attached to 1110, it is formed in a wavy shape (W shape) so that the position at the substantially center in the left-right direction is slightly higher than that on both the left and right sides. In this stage 2513, a portion slightly higher than the left and right sides in the center in the left-right direction (central discharge portion 2513a) and the lowest portion on both the left and right sides (side discharge portion 2513b) are directed forward. It is inclined so as to be low, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised portion (center discharge portion 2513a) in the center of the stage 2513 in the left-right direction is located directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central discharge portion 2513a at the center of the stage 2513, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is provided in the upper right corner and includes a guide passage group 2520 composed of two passages through which the game ball B can be distributed. In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the right end of the guide passage group 2520 (the end of the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500) is the inner peripheral edge of the game area 5a (the abutment of the front component 1000). The game ball B, which is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005) near the portion 1006 and is driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500, is formed so as to always pass through the guide passage group 2520.

The length of the guide passage group 2520 in the vertical direction is about 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. Each of the guide passage groups 2520 is formed in a groove shape that is open to the front, and the game ball B circulating inside can be visually recognized from the front in a good state.

The guide passage group 2520 is provided outside the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500, and is provided along the peripheral wall portion 2501 on the right side of the first guide passage 2521 and the first guide passage 2521 which are separated from the peripheral wall portion 2501. It is composed of a second guide passage 2522 extending from the center. The entrance of the first guide passage 2521 and the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 are separated from each other to the left and right. Further, the exit of the first guide passage 2521 and the exit of the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and are opened diagonally to the lower right along the arc of the upper part of the right rail 1005.

The guide passage group 2520 is located above the gate portion 2003 in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. Further, the right end of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is located directly below the lower end of the abutting portion 1006 of the front component 1000, and most of the game balls B in contact with the abutting portion 1006 are the first guides. It is formed to enter the passage 2521.

Further, the center accessory 2500 is provided with a lower right guide passage 2530 which protrudes to the right from the lower right corner of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and guides the game ball B from above to the right and then discharges it downward. The lower right guide passage 2530 has an entrance that opens upward over the front width in the left-right direction, and an exit that opens diagonally to the lower left with the width of one game ball B.

The right end of the lower right guide passage 2530 is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and is located between the first attacker unit 2400 and the second attacker unit 2600. Therefore, a second attacker unit 2600, a side right middle unit 2700, and a gate member 2800 are arranged between the guide passage group 2520 and the lower right guide passage 2530.

According to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, since the support portion 2503 protruding inward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the center accessory 2500 at the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided. Since it is an outer edge, the inside of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (inside the frame of the center accessory 2500) can be made relatively wide, and the effect image of the rear effect display device 1600 and the back unit can be passed through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to make 3000 decorations and the like more visible.

Further, since the support portion 2503 projecting inward is provided in the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. As a result, even if the game ball B comes into contact with the outside of the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, it is possible to prevent the peripheral wall portion 2501 from being deformed or damaged. Further, since the support portion 2503 can increase the strength of the center accessory 2500, the center accessory 2500 can be removed from the injection molding mold without being deformed.

Further, since the transparent support portion 2503 is projected shortly from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is partially provided with respect to the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the back surface where the support portion 2503 is provided at the rear. It is possible to reduce the hindrance to the visibility of the decorative body of the unit 3000 and the effect image of the effect display device 1600. In addition, the center accessory 2500 such as the support unit 2503 is made transparent, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left production unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 are located as close as possible to the rear surface of the center accessory 2500. Is arranged, it is possible to prevent the decorations of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700 on the rear side from being blurred due to the lens effect of the transparent center accessory 2500. Therefore, according to the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the visibility of the decorative bodies and the like provided at the rear, and it is possible to surely exert the decorative effect by them.

Further, since the support unit 2503 and the like are transparent and the support unit 2503 is provided in front of the decorative body and the effect display device 1600 that can be luminescent and decorated, the luminescent decoration can be performed by the light from them, and the appearance is improved. can do. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 413 and the like, behind the support portion 2503 (cross-hatched portion in FIG. 413), the back front left effect unit 3700 and the effect display device 1600 in the back unit 3000 are provided. , The light radiated forward from the LED of the back front left decorative substrate 3714 in the back front left effect unit 3700, the effect display device 1600, etc. is transmitted, reflected, refracted, and diffused to create a gorgeous light emitting decoration. It can be shown to the player. The support portion 2503 may be provided with a step, a notch, or the like, and the light from the rear can be diffused by the step or the like, so that the light can be made to look more gorgeous.

Further, since the support portion 2503 is provided so as to have a portion where the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided, the support portion 2503 in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is provided. At a close portion, the obstacle nail N can be planted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. As a result, the area of the game by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be widened as much as possible in the game area 5a, and the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed in the original game.

Further, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has a shape similar to the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is on the same surface as the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and the support portion 2503. Is provided on substantially the same surface as the front surface of the panel plate 1110, so that the support portion 2503 can be made inconspicuous to the player, and the center accessory 2500 appears to be integrated with the panel plate 1110. be able to.

Further, since the support portion 2503 is provided on a part of the entire circumference of the center accessory 2500, the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 can be further increased as compared with the case where the support portion 2503 is provided over the entire circumference. It can be made wider, and the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear can be made easier to see. In other words, if you want to make the non-distribution area (inside the frame) partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center frame) of the center accessory 2500 look larger, the support portion 2503 should be provided on a part of the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. You can do it. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support unit 2503 has an extension amount that does not overlap with the display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear in the front view.

The edge of the support portion 2503 may have a shape similar to the shape of the front cover 3711 (the shape of the decorative body) of the back front left effect unit 3700 provided at the rear. As a result, since the support portion 2503 is different from the rear decoration, it is possible to prevent the support portion 2503 from conspicuously lowering the decorativeness of the rear decorative body, and at the same time, the support portion 2503 also has the decorativeness. Can be enhanced.

Further, in the above embodiment, the support portion 2503 is provided at a position close to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear, and those decorations are provided by the lens effect. Although the one that suppresses the appearance of blurring is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the support portion 2503 is provided near the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 away from the rear back unit 3000. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 provided at the rear may be intentionally made to look blurry.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game panel 1100 has an opening 1112 penetrating through the panel plate 1110, and the rear side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is inserted into the opening 1112. It is also possible that there is no rear portion to be inserted into the opening 1112 in the peripheral wall portion 2501, and in this case, it may be attached to the game panel 1100 which does not have the opening 1112. .. Further, when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100 which does not have the opening 1112, the support portion 2503 may be attached to the game panel 1100. In this case, the center accessory 2500 is not provided with the flange portion 2502. You may do so.

[5-8f. Second attacker unit]
Subsequently, the second attacker unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 406 and 407. FIG. 406 (a) is a perspective view of the second attacker unit, the side right middle unit, and the gate member in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. It is a perspective view which looked at the gate member from the back. FIG. 407 is an explanatory view showing a cross-sectional view of the passage of the game ball in the second attacker unit and the side right middle unit.

The second attacker unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is arranged on the right side of the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction. It is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the panel 1100. The second attacker unit 2600 includes a second large winning opening 2006 that opens and closes to the left (see FIG. 407).

The second attacker unit 2600 has a second major winning opening sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the second major winning opening 2006 and a magnetic sensor that detects an illegal time acting near the second major winning opening 2006. It is equipped with 2602. In addition, the second attacker unit 2600 moves the second major winning opening door 2611 for closing the second major winning opening 2006 so as to be openable and closable, and the second major winning opening door 2611 to move the second major winning opening 2006. The second attacker solenoid 2612 for opening and closing, the transmission member (not shown) that transmits the advance and retreat of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612 to move the second prize opening door 2611, and the second prize opening 2006. It has a guide passage 2613 that guides the received game ball B and discharges it rearward.

In the second attacker unit 2600, the second large winning opening 2006 opens to the left at a position to the right from the center in the left-right direction, and the second large winning opening 2006 is closed from the left. A winning door 2611 is provided.

The second prize-winning door 2611 has a semicircular lower side that bulges downward, a right side that extends linearly upward in contact with the right end of the lower side, and a bulge from the upper end of the right side to the left. It is formed in a so-called blade shape, which is composed of an arc-shaped left side in contact with the left side of the lower side. The second prize-winning door 2611 has a columnar rotating shaft 2611a extending in the front-rear direction with the center of the lower side of the semicircle as the axis, and a link protruding rearward from a position distant from the rotating shaft. It has a pin (not shown). The lower rotation shaft of the second prize opening door 2611 is rotatably attached so that the upper end moves to the left.

The second attacker solenoid 2612 is attached so that the plunger protrudes downward, although detailed illustration is omitted. The transmission member (not shown) penetrates the base attached to the tip of the plunger of the second attacker solenoid 2612 in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction so that the link pin of the second prize opening door 2611 can slide. It has a slit to be inserted and is attached so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The second attacker unit 2600 is located so that the right side is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the second grand prize opening 2006 and the peripheral wall portion of the center accessory 2500. A space through which the game ball B can be distributed is formed between the 2501 and the right side. Further, in the state of the second attacker unit 2600 assembled on the game board 5, the rear surface including the rear end of the guide passage 2613 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100.

In the second attacker unit 2600, in a normal state, the second attacker solenoid 2612 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger projects downward due to its own weight and the weight of the transmission member. In this state, the second prize-winning door 2611 is upright, and the second prize-winning door 2006 is closed by the second prize-winning door 2611. That is, in the normal state, the game ball B cannot be accepted for the second major winning opening 2006.

In this normal state, according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the first When the second attacker solenoid 2612 is energized (ON), the transmission member moves upward together with the plunger, and the link pin of the second prize-winning door 2611 inserted in the slit of the transmission member is pulled upward. At the same time, by sliding in the slit, the second prize-winning door 2611 rotates in the counterclockwise direction about the rotation shaft 2611a.

As a result, the upper end of the second prize-winning door 2611 moves to the left, the second prize-winning door 2006 is opened to the left, and the right end side of the second prize-winning door 2611 becomes lower. It becomes a tilted state. That is, the second big winning opening 2006 is opened. In this state, when the game ball B that has flowed down comes into contact with the second large winning opening door 2611, it rolls to the right due to its inclination and is accepted by the second large winning opening 2006. The game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2006 is guided by the guidance passage 2613 after being detected by the second big winning opening sensor 2601, and is discharged backward. The game ball B discharged rearward from the guidance passage 2613 is delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and is discharged from the back guidance unit 3050 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

[5-8 g. Side right middle unit]
Next, the side right middle unit 2700 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 406 and 407. The side right middle unit 2700 of the front unit 2000 is arranged directly above the second attacker unit 2600 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. The side right middle unit 2700 includes one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2012.

In the side right middle unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 is always open upward with the width of one game ball B in the left-right direction, and the game is adjacent to the right side of the general winning opening 2001 in the left-right direction. The second sub-out port 2012 is always open upward with the width of two balls B.

Further, the side right middle unit 2700 has a first guide passage 2701 that guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear and a second guide passage B to guide the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 to the rear. It has a two-guide passage 2702. The first guide passage 2701 is formed in a crank shape in which the first guide passage 2701 extends rearward from the general winning opening 2001, then bends to the right and then bends further rearward. The second guide passage 2702 extends rearward from the second sub-out port 2012 after extending below the first guide passage 2701. The exit of the first guide passage 2701 and the exit of the second guide passage 2702 are arranged one above the other.

In the state where the side right middle unit 2700 is assembled on the game board 5, the rear ends of the first guide passage 2701 and the second guide passage 2702 project rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. There is.

Further, in the state where the side right middle unit 2700 is assembled on the game board 5, the right end is substantially in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and the lower end is substantially in contact with the upper end of the second attacker unit 2600. A space through which the game ball B can circulate is formed between the left end and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the center accessory 2500. In this side right middle unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 opens upward at a position slightly to the left of the second major winning opening 2006, and the second sub-out opening 2012 is the general winning opening 2001 and the right rail 1005. It opens upward over substantially the entire space (see FIG. 408 and the like).

The side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 by the first guide passage 2701, and is provided behind the back. It can be delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the unit 3000. The game ball B delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 is detected by the general winning port sensor 3051 and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200. Further, the side right middle unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 by the second guidance passage 2702, and is provided behind the back unit. It can be delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guidance unit 3050 in 3000. The game ball B delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 is detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054 and then discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200.

[5-8h. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2800 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 395 and 406. The gate member 2800 of the table unit 2000 is arranged between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the side right middle unit 2700 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. Has been done. The gate member 2800 includes a gate portion 2003 in which a lottery for the result of a normal lottery for opening and closing the second starting port 2004 when the game ball B passes, and a gate sensor for detecting that the game cow B has passed through the gate portion 2003. It has 2801 and. The detection hole for detecting the game ball B in the gate sensor 2801 is the gate portion 2003.

The gate member 2800 has a guide piece 2802 protruding diagonally from the vicinity of the right end of the lower surface toward the lower left. The guide piece 2802 is for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 to the lower left. The guide piece 2802 is in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and its extension line is inclined so as to pass near the left end of the general winning opening 2001 in the side right middle unit 2700.

The gate member 2800 is located substantially in the center between the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the game is played on both the left and right sides. A gap through which the sphere B can flow is formed. The gate member 2800 is located slightly to the left of the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, and to the right of the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700. positioned.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls in the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 393 and 408. FIG. 408 is an enlarged explanatory view of the right portion in the game area in FIG. 393. In the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided substantially in the center of the game area 5a. In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in the left and right outer portions and the lower portion of the center accessory 2500. Further, a windmill W that rotates due to contact with the game ball B is provided on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center accessory 2500 mainly enter the game ball B driven on the left side of the center accessory 2500 into the part on the right side of the center of the wind turbine W. It is adjusted so that it enters the part on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W with a lower probability than those. As a result, the game ball B can be driven into the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 with a certain probability by hitting it so as to flow down the left side of the center accessory 2500.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the gate member 2800 are more than the game ball B circulating through the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the guide passage group 2520. The game ball B that has passed through the second guide passage 2522 on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 is adjusted to pass through the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability. Further, the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 are adjusted so that the game ball B circulates mainly on the left side of the right side portion of the gate member 2800. ing.

The plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700 are mainly adjusted so that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700.

In the game area 5a, the game ball B is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and is driven upward from the left side along the peripheral edge of the game area 5a. When the game ball B is driven so as to circulate on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. 393, a plurality of obstacle nails planted on the left side of the center accessory 2500. N guides the user to enter either the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 or the part on the right side of the center of the windmill W, and the part on the left side of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability. You will be guided to enter.

The game ball B guided to a portion on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W is guided to the right by the shelf portion 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. Then, there is a possibility that the side unit 2200 will be accepted by the three general winning openings 2001. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then the second delivery port 3062, the third delivery port 3063, and the fourth delivery port of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. It is delivered to any of the 3064s, detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, and then discharged onto the board holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given. The game ball B guided to a portion on the left side of the center of the wind turbine W is rarely accepted by the first starting port 2002. Then, the game ball B that is not accepted by the general winning opening 2001 is discharged from the out opening 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the wind turbine W is centered in the left-right direction (first starting port 2002) by a plurality of obstacle nails N diagonally arranged along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. It may be guided to the side and accepted by the first starting port 2002. Further, the game ball B guided to the right side of the center of the wind turbine W may pass between a plurality of obstacle nails N arranged diagonally and flow down onto the side unit 2200, and the side unit 2200 may flow down. There is a possibility that it will be accepted by the general winning opening 2001.

The game ball B that has entered (accepted) the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth from side to side, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharge portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, the central discharge portion 2513a is located directly above the first starting port 2002, so that the first is likely to occur. Accepted at the start port 2002. When the game ball B is released from the side discharge portions 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central discharge portion 2513a, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then delivered to the first delivery port 3061 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and the first start port sensor. After being detected by 3052, it is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. When the game ball B is detected by the first start port sensor 3052, a lottery of the first special lottery result is performed and a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out. The game ball B released from the stage 2513 and not received in the first starting port 2002 is discharged from the out port 2010 to the outside of the game area 5a.

The game ball B that has circulated on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a passes through the gate portion 2003 and is accepted into the second starting port 2004, the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning opening 2006. There is no possibility of being killed.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B driven to the left side of the center accessory 2500 has a probability of being accepted by the second starting port 2004 with respect to the probability that the game ball B driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 is accepted. The probability of being accepted by the first starting port 2002 is set higher. As a result, when the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is not in the open state, the operation of driving the game ball B to the left side of the center accessory 2500 (“left-handed”) can be promoted.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is placed with the strength that the game ball B enters above the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 that becomes lower from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction toward the right. When driven, the game ball B circulates in either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

More specifically, the game ball B is driven with a strength that abuts on the abutting portion 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 forming a part of the peripheral edge of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed striking). Then, the game ball B in contact with the abutment portion 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 is discharged downward at a position slightly to the right of the gate portion 2003 directly above.

The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is located on the left side of the gate member 2800, at the gate portion, due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800. In 2003, the right side of the gate member 2800 is guided so that the probability becomes lower, and the side right middle unit 2700 side flows down.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates through the second guide passage 2522, it is on the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521. Is released downward from. The game ball B discharged downward from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is guided so that the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate member 2800 have substantially the same probability and the right side of the gate member 2800 has a lower probability. Then, it flows down to the side right middle unit 2700 side.

The game ball B that has passed through the right side of the gate member 2800 is received by the second sub-out port 2012. The game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and is delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000, and then the second sub-out port sensor. After being detected by 3054, it is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a. Further, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is discharged to the side right middle unit 2700 side after being detected by the gate sensor 2801. By detecting the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801, a lottery of the normal lottery result in which the second starting port 2004 opens and closes is performed.

The game ball B passing through the left side of the gate portion 2003 and the gate member 2800 has a high probability of being the side right middle unit 2700 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right middle unit 2700. It flows down the left side of the car and is occasionally accepted by the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, and rarely by the second sub-out opening 2012. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 of the back guidance unit 3050 in the back unit 3000. After being detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051, it is discharged onto the board holder 1200. At this time, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given.

The game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and the second big winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. Flow down to the left of.

At this time, if the game ball B is accepted in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a "small hit" is drawn as the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery, the second big prize is won. Since the mouth 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is highly likely to be accepted by the second big winning mouth 2006.

The game ball B received in the second prize opening 2006 is detected by the second prize opening sensor 2601 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a, and then in the back unit 3000. It is delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 of the back induction unit 3050 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200. By detecting the game ball B by the second large winning opening sensor 2601, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given.

The game ball B, which was not accepted by the second prize opening 2006 and flowed down to the left of the second prize opening 2006, entered the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 and exited the lower right guide passage 2530. Is discharged to the first attacker unit 2400 side.

The game ball B discharged downward (diagonally lower left) from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 flows down onto the first shelf portion 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400. Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the first attacker unit 2400, the game ball B is directly connected to the first attacker unit 2400 from the lower right guide passage 2530. It does not flow down to the right side of the first standing wall portion 2412e.

The game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf 2412a of the first attacker unit 2400 rolls to the left due to its inclination, and moves the upper surface of the door 2414a of the second starting door 2414 and the second shelf 2412b. After rolling, it is discharged from the left end of the second shelf portion 2412b to the left. Then, the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf portion 2412b falls on the third shelf portion 2412c or the door portion 2417a of the first prize opening door 2417 according to the momentum, and their inclinations. After rolling to the left from the door portion 2417a and rolling the fourth shelf portion 2412d, it is discharged from the fourth shelf portion 2412d to the left outside the first attacker unit 2400.

Depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, the game balls B may come into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N so as not to flow down to the first shelf 2412a but to the upper shelf 2412p. It may flow down. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper shelf 2412p rolls to the left due to its inclination, is released from the left end of the upper shelf 2412p to the left, and then hits the obstacle nail N planted on the left. After abutting and turning downward and flowing down near the left end of the upper surface of the door portion 2417a in the first prize opening door 2417, the door portion 2417a and the fourth shelf portion 2412d are rolled to the left and the first It is released to the outside of the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, even when the game ball B rolls on the upper shelf portion 2412p, the first major prize depending on the timing when the game ball B is released from the upper shelf portion 2412p and the timing when the first prize opening 2005 is opened. It may be accepted in the winning opening 2005.

Further, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, the first shelf portion 2412a bounces to the right due to contact with the obstacle nail N or the right end of the upper shelf portion 2412p. By flowing down, the first shelf portion 2412a may be rolled to the right against the inclination and discharged from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a to the right (downward). The game ball B discharged from the right end of the first shelf portion 2412a to the right passes between the first standing wall portion 2412e and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and flows down to the vicinity of the right end of the second lateral wall portion 2412 m. Then, due to the inclination of the second lateral wall portion 2412 m, it rolls to the left and is received by the first sub-out port 2011. The game ball B received in the first sub-out port 2011 is detected by the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and is not returned to the game area 5a, and is not returned to the game area 5a. It is delivered to the back guide unit 3050 and discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

When the game ball B is released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, if the "normal hit" is drawn as a result of the normal lottery due to the passage of the game ball B at the gate portion 2003, the second start Since the mouth door 2414 is movable and the second starting port 2004 is opened in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B rolling the first shelf portion 2412a to the left is accepted by the second starting port 2004. there is a possibility. Then, when the game ball B is received by the second start port 2004, it is detected by the second start port sensor 2401 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. When the game ball B is detected by the second start port sensor 2401, the second special lottery result is drawn and a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out.

Further, when the game ball B is discharged to the left from the second shelf portion 2412b, the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery are performed. As a result, when the "big hit" was drawn, the first big prize opening door 2417 was moved and the first big winning opening 2005 was opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, so that it was released from the second shelf 2412b to the left. The game ball B will be accepted into the first prize opening 2005 with a high probability. The game ball B received in the first prize opening 2005 is detected by the first prize opening sensor 2402 and then discharged onto the board holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. By detecting the game balls B by the first large winning opening sensor 2402, a privilege that a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out is given.

Depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the second shelf 2412b to the left, the game ball B may come into contact with the step on the lower surface of the upper shelf 2412p and flow down diagonally to the lower right to reach the second shelf 2412b and the third. The game ball B may enter the gap between the shelf and the shelf 2412c. The game ball B that has entered the gap between the second shelf portion 2412b and the third shelf portion 2412c passes between the third standing wall portion 2412g and the fourth standing wall portion 2412h and is near the left end of the second horizontal wall portion 2412m. It falls and rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second side wall portion 2412 m, and is received by the first sub-out port 2011.

The game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 to the first attacker unit 2400 side is accepted by any of the second starting port 2004, the first winning opening 2005, and the first sub-out opening 2011. If this is not the case, the game is discharged downward from the out port 2010 at the lower end of the game area 5a, behind the game panel 1100 outside the game area 5a.

Therefore, in order to open and close the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006, the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 is made to accept the game ball B, and a "small hit" is made. It is necessary to have the lottery of the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result such as "big hit". While the first starting port 2002 is always open, the second starting port 2004 needs to let the gate portion 2003 pass the game ball B to draw (assign) the "normal hit" as the result of the normal lottery. Therefore, the opportunity for the second starting port 2004 to accept the game ball B is lower than that of the first starting port 2002.

Therefore, in a normal state, the game ball B is driven into the player so that the game ball B flows down the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B can be received at the first starting port 2002. The operation can be performed, the movement of the game ball B guided by the plurality of obstacle nails N can be shown, and the original game by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 can be enjoyed. It is possible to raise the expectation for acceptance of.

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2002 and a "small hit" or a "big hit" is drawn as the result of the first special lottery, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 To open and close, the driving operation of the game ball B is changed to "right-handed" so that the game ball B can be accepted in the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006, and the first prize opening It is possible to raise expectations for the acceptance of the game ball B in 2005 or the second prize opening 2006.

At this time, a guide passage group 2520 consisting of a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided in the upper right corner of the center accessory 2500, and it is easy to pass through the gate portion 2003 by the guide passage to be distributed. , Since it is easy to be accepted by the second sub-out port 2012, the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted so that the game ball B circulates in the desired guide passage, and the player can be made to play the game ball. You can enjoy the driving operation of B.

In addition, there is a possibility that a "normal hit" in which the second starting port 2004 is opened by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003 by performing "right-handed" may be drawn, and the open state may be drawn. Since there is a possibility that the second starting port 2004 will accept the game ball B and a "small hit" or "big hit" will be drawn, it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest. Can be done.

In the time saving state, a so-called right-handed instruction (hereinafter, also referred to as a right-handed instruction) is displayed in order to allow the game ball B to enter the second starting port 2004. Further, even during the big hit, a right-handed instruction is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in order to allow the game ball to enter the first big winning opening 2005 and the first big winning opening 2006. The right-handed instruction instructs the steering wheel 182 to continue to be twisted to the right fully open.

Further, during a big hit game or during a special symbol change in each state, it is possible to perform an effect using the central pressing operation unit 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, the effect operation ring 330, and the like. In this case, for example, an effect operation instruction instructing to operate these operation units is displayed on the effect display device 1600. When the operation unit is operated according to the instruction, for example, the expected degree of big hit in the special symbol change during execution is suggested, the result of the special lottery corresponding to the special symbol change during execution is notified, or the big hit during execution is notified. It suggests or notifies whether it is a normal jackpot or a probabilistic jackpot, and changes the production mode and BGM in the time saving state during the jackpot and after the jackpot ends.

Since the above-mentioned ball removal instruction is displayed in preference to other effect images (that is, on the front side), it is difficult to see other effects. When the ball removal lever is operated according to the ball removal instruction, the full tank state of the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 is eventually released, and the ball removal instruction is deleted, so that other effects can be easily seen. In addition, the above-mentioned right-handed instruction can be displayed at a predetermined time such as when the time saving state starts or when the big hit game starts, and the production operation instruction is also displayed at a predetermined time within the predetermined production scenario. It can be displayed. On the other hand, the ball removal instruction is displayed when the detection by the full tank detection sensor 154 is executed, but is not displayed at a predetermined time. It should be noted that the right-handed instruction is given by inserting a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls B into the first starting port 2002 not only at the start of the time saving state or the big hit game but also at the time saving state and the big hit. It is also displayed when

In addition, there may be a situation where the ball removal instruction, the production operation instruction, and the right-handed instruction are displayed at the same time. In that case, the sound, the lamp, and the display relation are set in consideration of the importance of each instruction. It may be decided as appropriate.

Although it is possible to display all of the right-handed instruction, the effect operation instruction, and the ball removal instruction together in the time-saving state, if the player hits the left side without following the right-handed instruction in the time-saving state, the first start is performed. The game ball B enters the mouth 2002. The average time of the first special symbol variation executed when the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002 is the second special symbol variation executed when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004. Longer than average time. That is, in such a situation, if the right-handed instruction is not followed, the time required for one game becomes long, and the number of times the special lottery is received per unit time decreases.

It should be noted that, when the time saving state ends and the normal state is restored, a so-called left-handed instruction is recommended in order to allow the game ball B to enter the first starting port 2002 (hereinafter, also referred to as a left-handed instruction). Is displayed. Further, not only when the game returns to the normal state, but also in the normal state, a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls B enters the second starting port 2004, or a predetermined number (for example, one) of the gate portions 2003 are inserted. When the game ball B passes (that is, when the second special lottery or the ordinary lottery is performed (these lottery includes the preliminary judgment)), the left-handed instruction also appears.

Therefore, even in the normal state, there may be a situation where the ball removal instruction, the effect operation instruction, and the left-handed instruction are displayed at the same time, but even in that case, the sound is sounded in consideration of the importance of each instruction. , Lamps, and display relationships may be determined as appropriate.

It should be noted that there may be a state in which a right-handed instruction and a ball removal instruction are displayed even when the special symbol change is not performed. Further, it is also possible to change the special symbol when a new effect operation instruction is displayed while the right-handed instruction and the ball removal instruction are displayed.

Further, for example, the state in which the right-handed instruction, the ball removal instruction, and the effect operation instruction are displayed may change to the state in which the display of only one type of instruction ends. For example, if the operation indicated by the effect operation instruction is performed while the right-handed instruction, the ball removal instruction, and the effect operation instruction are displayed in the time saving state, only the effect operation instruction can be deleted. When the display of only one of the instructions is completed and a predetermined time elapses without the game ball B winning a prize at various start ports, a demo screen is displayed or a standby state for explaining the game content is produced. I get sick.

As soon as the demo screen is displayed, or after a predetermined time has elapsed, in order to shift to the menu screen for adjusting the volume and the amount of light, a certain operation unit (the operation unit corresponding to the production operation instruction may be the same). ) Is displayed.

Further, as for the effect operation instruction, it may be possible to instruct an operation method selected from a plurality of types of operations. For example, there is an instruction to simply press the operation unit corresponding to the effect operation instruction once, an instruction to repeatedly hit the operation unit, and the like. During the execution of the special symbol change, the right-handed instruction, the ball-extracting instruction, and the effect operation instruction (one-time pressing instruction) are displayed, and then the right-handed instruction, the ball-extracted instruction, and the effect operation instruction (continuous hitting). The instruction) can be changed to the displayed state.

Further, for example, a right-handed instruction, a ball removal instruction, and an effect operation instruction can be displayed at the same time during a special symbol change in the time-saving state, and when the time-saving state ends and returns to the normal state, a right-handed instruction is given. Is displayed and the left-handed instruction is displayed, so that the state can be changed to the state in which the left-handed instruction, the ball removal instruction, and the effect operation instruction are displayed at the same time.

Further, for example, the remaining one type of instruction can be displayed while two types of instructions of the right-handed instruction, the ball removal instruction, and the effect operation instruction are displayed. For example, if the full tank detection sensor 154 detects the right-handed strike instruction and the effect operation instruction in the time saving state or the big hit state, the ball removal instruction is further displayed.

Further, in the special symbol variation of the variation pattern with the shortest variation time, the effect operation instruction may not appear. That is, in the special symbol variation, the right-handed instruction, the ball removal instruction, and the effect operation instruction may not all be displayed at the same time.

For example, when the operation unit is operated according to the effect operation instruction, a judge effect is performed in which the special lottery result is notified. Therefore, the effect operation instruction is not displayed in a manner that directly indicates the special lottery result in order to give a feeling of tension in the judge effect. Is desirable. That is, in such a case, it is possible to prevent the special lottery result from being directly shown when the right-handed instruction, the ball removal instruction, and the effect operation instruction are displayed at the same time.

Further, during the big hit game, a right-handed instruction is displayed, and if detection is performed by the full tank detection sensor 154, a ball removal instruction is further displayed. Further, for example, although the jackpot with a time reduction is won, the same effect as the jackpot game without a time reduction is performed, and in a predetermined round of the jackpot game, an effect operation instruction appears, and when the operation is performed according to the instruction, it is being executed. The promotion effect for notifying that the jackpot game is a jackpot game with a certain change may be feasible. Further, for example, in a predetermined round of a jackpot game with a time reduction, an effect operation instruction may appear, and a character appearing in the effect during the time reduction state in which the operation is performed according to the instruction may be selected. That is, in a predetermined round during the big hit game, the right-handed instruction, the ball removal instruction, and the effect operation instruction can be displayed at the same time.

In this way, at least two of the ball pulling instruction, the effect operation instruction, and the right-handed instruction are displayed at the same time when the special symbol variation in the normal state and the time saving state is executed and not executed, and during the big hit game. In that case, the sound, lamp, and display relationship may be appropriately determined in consideration of the importance of each instruction. In addition, at least these two display orders (the order in which the display starts and the order in which the display ends) and the length of the display time may depend on the operation by the player, or may not be affected by the operation of the player. It may be decided as appropriate.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 409 to 412 and the like. FIG. 409 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 410 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the back. FIG. 411 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 412 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and has a box-shaped opening 3010a in the rear wall and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall. It is provided with a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided in the flat back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 provided near the left and right ends of the front end of the back box 3010, respectively, and at the lower part of the front end in the back box 3010. The back guide unit 3050 is provided, the back rear effect unit 3100 provided at the rear end in the back box 3010, and the back guide unit 3050 at the lower part of the back box 3010 are separated from each other to the left and right. The back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250, and the back bottom middle effect unit 3300 provided behind the back bottom left effect unit 3200 and the back bottom right effect unit 3250 in the back box 3010. I have.

Further, the back unit 3000 is provided behind the back upper effect unit 3400 provided in front of the back rear effect unit 3100 in the upper part of the back box 3010 and the back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. The back back left effect unit 3500, the back front right decoration unit 3600 provided behind the back front right decoration body 3040 in the back box 3010, and the back front left decoration body 3030 and the back back left in the back box 3010. The back front left production unit 3700 provided between the production unit 3500, and the back front right production unit 3700 provided between the back front right decorative body 3040 and the back rear right production unit 3600 in the back box 3010. It is equipped with 3800.

[5-9a. Back box]
The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 409 to 412 and the like. The back box 3010 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, the back front left decorative body 3030, the back front right decorative body 3040, and various effect units are mounted, and the effect display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are mounted on the rear side. The back box 3010 is transparently formed of a synthetic resin.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-shaped opening 3010a having an open front and a square penetrating rear wall, and a flat plate frame-shaped opening protruding rearward at a distance from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, the two fixing grooves 3010c which are recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the upper fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. It is provided with a notch 3010d, which is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached, near the center in the left-right direction of the lower side.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size capable of fitting the effect display device 1600 into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is slidably attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from the rear.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting decorative bodies, effect units, and the like at appropriate positions.

Further, the back box 3010 has a strip-shaped reinforcing plate 3011 made of a metal plate attached along the lower side and the left and right sides of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is reinforced by the reinforcing plate 3011.

[5-9b. Back front left decoration and back front right decoration]
Subsequently, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 409 to 413 and the like. FIG. 413 is a front view of the pachinko machine in which the upper left corner of the game board is enlarged and shown with the door frame transparent. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the front end of the back box 3010 at a distance from each other to the left and right.

The back front left decorative body 3030 includes a flat plate-shaped base 3031 extending vertically and a decorative sticker 3032 attached to the front surface of the base 3031. The base 3031 extends vertically at the same height as the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, and the left end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although not shown, the decorative sticker 3032 is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The back front left decorative body 3030 is formed opaquely, and the rear member can be made invisible from the front.

The back front right decorative body 3040 includes a flat plate-shaped base 3041 extending vertically and a decorative sticker 3042 attached to the front surface of the base 3041. The base 3041 extends from the upper end of the back box 3010 to the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction, and the right end side is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. Although not shown, the decorative sticker 3042 is decorated according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). The back front right decorative body 3040 is formed opaquely, and the rear member can be made invisible from the front.

When the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are assembled on the game board 5, the outer peripheral edge on the outside extends in a flat plate shape so as to be located outside the game area 5a in the front view. (See FIG. 389, FIG. 413, etc.). Further, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 have a flat plate shape so that the outer peripheral edge, which is the outer side when assembled in the pachinko machine 1, is located outside the door window 101a in the door frame 3. It extends to.

More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 413, in front view, the back front left decorative body 3030 is halved from the bottom of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 provided in the upper left corner of the back rear left effect unit 3500. It extends to the position of. In other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outward from the function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 in the front view. Further, in other words, the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outward from the door window 101a in the door frame 3.

As a result, in the state of being assembled on the game board 5, the lower half of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 can be covered by the back front left decorative body 3030 (shaded portion in FIG. 413), and the player side can cover the back rear left. The elevating drive motor 3554 can be obscured. Further, in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the back front left decorative body 3030 covering the lower half of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 is outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 (hatched portion in FIG. 413). Since it extends to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the door frame 3, the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 can be made invisible (invisible) from the player side. Therefore, functional parts such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid provided behind the back front left decorative body 3030 can be made invisible from the player side, and the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) is improved. can do.

Further, in the back front left decorative body 3030, the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 is extended so as to cover a part (lower half) of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554. A part (upper half) can be seen from the front, but by assembling it in the pachinko machine 1, the upper half of the back-rear left elevating drive motor 3554 can be covered and hidden by the door frame 3. Therefore, it is not necessary to extend the back front left decorative body 3030 so as to cover the entire back rear left elevating drive motor 3554, and it is possible to prevent the back front left decorative body 3030 from becoming unnecessarily large. The cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, since the back front left decorative body 3030 extends outward from the function display unit 1400, even if the function display unit 1400 is not attached to the upper left corner of the front view of the front component 1000, the function display unit Instead of 1400, the back front left decorative body 3030 can hide the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 (functional component) and the like provided at the rear.

On the other hand, the back front right decorative body 3040 extends to the upper right corner of the back box 3010 so as to cover the entire back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 in the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the front view, and is transparent to the front. Even through the constituent members 1000 and the transparent game panel 1100, the rear right elevating drive motor 3654 is made invisible from the front (player side). Therefore, by making the functional parts such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided behind the back front right decorative body 3040 invisible from the player side, the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1) is improved. It is possible to exert the same action and effect as the back front left decorative body 3030.

As described above, according to the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 of the present embodiment, at least a part of the functional parts such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided at the rear is covered. Therefore, it is possible to make the functional parts difficult to see from the player side, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1).

Further, as described above, since the front of the functional parts provided behind can be covered by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, the front constituent members 1000 and the game panel 1100 are made transparent. However, the functional parts can be made invisible from the player side. That is, the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent. Therefore, the transparent front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can reduce the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a, give the player a feeling of openness, and give the player a feeling of openness, and the actual game area 5a. Although the size of the game area does not change, the game area 5a can be made larger (wider) to the player. At this time, the parts outside the game area 5a in the decorative sticker 3032 of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the decorative sticker 3042 of the back front right decorative body 3040, which are provided with predetermined decorations, are the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100. Since it can be visually recognized from the front through the game, the outside of the game area 5a can be decorated, and the game area 5a can be made larger than it actually is, which can strongly attract the attention of the player. It can be a board 5 (pachinko machine 1).

Further, as described above, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 can be made transparent by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040, the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, and the back unit Light from 3000, etc. can be reflected or refracted forward (on the player side) by the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100, so that the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 emit light. It can be shown, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

In addition, the functional parts such as the drive motor and the drive solenoid provided in the rear are provided from the player side by the portions extending outward from the game area 5a in the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040. Since it can be made invisible, all the functional parts may be provided outside the game area 5a in the front view. At this time, since the size of the game board 5 is limited, in order to secure a space for providing all the functional parts outside the game area 5a, the size of the game area 5a is relatively reduced. Since there is a possibility that a problem that must be generated may occur, a part of the functional parts is placed outside the game area 5a in a balance such that a large game area 5a can be taken with respect to the size of the game board 5 as in the present embodiment. It is desirable to provide it.

Further, it is desirable that the decorations of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 be decorations related to the decoration (design) in the game area 5a in the front view. As a result, the design inside the game area 5a can be extended to the outside of the game area 5a by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 extending from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. The pachinko machine 1 can make the 5a look larger than it actually is, and can strongly attract the attention of the player.

[5-9c. Back guidance unit]
Next, the back induction unit 3050 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 414 and the like. FIG. 414 (a) is a perspective view of the back guide unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 414 (b) is a perspective view of the back guide unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. The back guide unit 3050 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower part of the front end in the back box 3010, and is formed in a shape in which both ends extending to the left and right are bent upward. The back guide unit 3050 is formed to be substantially entirely transparent.

The back guidance unit 3050 includes a general winning opening sensor 3051 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a first starting port sensor 3052 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002, and the like. The out port sensor 3053 that detects the game ball B received in the out port 2010, the second sub out port sensor 3054 that detects the game ball B received in the second sub out port 2012, and the warp entrance 2511 of the center accessory 2500. It is provided with a magnetic sensor 3055, which is provided in a portion behind the above and detects illegal magnetism.

Further, the back guidance unit 3050 was received in the first delivery port 3061 to which the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 is delivered, and in the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200. The second delivery port 3062 to which the game ball B is delivered, the third delivery port 3063 to which the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 on the inside of the side unit 2200 is delivered, and the general on the left side of the side unit 2200. The fourth delivery port 3064, in which the game ball B received in the winning opening 2001 is delivered, and the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 and the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400 are delivered. The 5th delivery port 3065, the 6th delivery port 3066 to which the game ball B received in the 1st big winning opening 2005 of the 1st attacker unit 2400 is delivered, and the 2nd big winning opening 2006 of the 2nd attacker unit 2600 are accepted. The seventh delivery port 3067 to which the game ball B is delivered, the eighth delivery port 3068 to which the game ball B received to the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, and the side right middle unit 2700 It is provided with a ninth delivery port 3069 to which the game ball B received in the second sub-out port 2012 is delivered.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the back guidance unit 3050 has a first discharge path and a second discharge path for guiding the game ball B delivered to the first delivery port 3061 to the right and then discharging it downward. The game ball B delivered to the delivery port 3062 and the game ball B delivered to the third delivery port 3063 are merged and then delivered to the second discharge path and the fourth delivery port 3064. A third discharge path that guides the game ball B downward and discharges it diagonally to the lower right, and a position where the game ball B delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 is below the sixth delivery port 3066. It is provided with a fourth discharge path, which is guided downward to the left, guided to the left to a position on the left side of the sixth delivery port 3066, and then discharged diagonally to the lower left. The fifth delivery port 3065, the sixth delivery port 3066, the seventh delivery port 3067, and the ninth delivery port 3069 communicate with the fourth discharge channel.

The game ball B received by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 and delivered to the first delivery port 3061 is discharged downward after being detected by the first start port sensor 3052 in the middle of the first discharge path. Will be done. The game ball B received by the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the side unit 2200 and delivered to the second delivery port 3062, and the game ball B received by the general winning opening 2001 on the middle side and delivered to the third delivery port 3063. The ball B joins the second discharge path, is detected by the general winning opening 2001, and is discharged downward. The game ball B received by the general winning opening 2001 on the left side of the side unit 2200 and delivered to the fourth delivery port 3064 is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning opening 2001 in the middle of the third discharge path. ..

It is received by the second start port 2004 or the first sub-out port 2011 of the first attacker unit 2400 and is delivered to the fifth delivery port 3065 and is received by the game ball B and the first big winning opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400. The game ball B delivered to the sixth delivery port 3066 and the game ball B received by the second major winning opening 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 and delivered to the seventh delivery port 3067 are the fourth. It is discharged through the discharge channel.

The game ball B received by the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 and delivered to the eighth delivery port 3068 is on the upstream side of the part communicating with the ninth delivery port 3069 in the fourth discharge path. It is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3051 and discharged through the fourth discharge path. The game ball B received by the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700 and delivered to the ninth delivery port 3069 merges with the fourth discharge path after being detected by the second sub-out port sensor 3054, and the second (Iv) It is discharged through the discharge channel.

The back guidance unit 3050 includes an out ball detection member 3080 that detects the game ball B received in the out port 2010. The out-ball detection member 3080 is driven into the game area 5a and is accepted by the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first major winning opening 2005, and the second major winning opening 2006. To detect the game ball B received in the out opening 2010 opened at the lower end of the game area 5a among the game balls B that did not exist (the game ball B for which the privilege was not given, also referred to as "out ball"). belongs to.

The out-ball detection member 3080 is inserted into the out recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 from the rear, and the tubular portion 3081 and the tubular portion 3081 that extend the game ball B in a tubular shape in the front-rear direction so as to be able to flow. A partition portion 3082 that divides the inside into left and right, a flange portion 3083 that protrudes in a flat plate shape in the left-right direction from the outer periphery of the rear end of the cylinder portion 3081, and a game ball B that is continuous with the rear end of the cylinder portion 3081 and moves downward. It is provided with a rear cover 3084 that can be guided to and discharged (see FIG. 392). The out-ball detection member 3080 is provided with an out-port sensor 3053 between the tubular portion 3081 and the rear cover 3084.

The tubular portion 3081 has substantially the same size as the out port 2010, and has a width in the left-right direction in which two game balls B are sufficiently lined up (a width in which three game balls B are not lined up), and the lower inner surface is It is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the rear side. The partition portion 3082 is provided near the rear end of the tubular portion 3081, and is partitioned to a size that allows one game ball B to pass on both the left and right sides. The partition portion 3082 is curved so that the front end side projects forward as it goes downward, and is shorter than the diameter of the game ball B and projects forward.

In the out ball detection member 3080, two out port sensors 3053 are provided side by side. The left out port sensor 3053 detects the game ball B circulating on the left side of the partition portion 3082 in the tubular portion 3081, and the right out port sensor 3053 detects the right side of the partition portion 3082 in the tubular portion 3081. It detects the distributed game ball B. The outlet sensor 3053 is a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch.

The two out-port sensors 3053 are provided so that the detection direction of the game ball B (the axial direction of the detection hole through which the game ball B passes) is parallel to the inner surface on the lower side of the tubular portion 3081. As a result, since the distribution direction of the game ball B circulating in the tubular portion 3081 does not change even at the portion of the out port sensor 3053, the game ball B can be smoothly detected by the out port sensor 3053, and the game ball B can be detected smoothly. Can be quickly discharged to prevent stagnation on the front side of the outlet sensor 3053.

The out-ball detection member 3080 has a tubular portion 3081 inserted into the out recess 1123 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5 (see FIG. 392).

When the out ball detection member 3080 is assembled on the game board 5, the upper part of the front end of the tubular portion 3081 projects forward from the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000 (see FIG. 392). That is, the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 is inserted into the tubular portion 3081. Further, the lower end of the rear cover 3084 passes through the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 and projects below the lower surface of the substrate holder 1200.

The out ball detection member 3080 flows down to the downstream end of the inner rail 1002 or the lower right rail 1004 of the front component 1000 in the game area 5a, and then is guided backward by the out guide unit 1003 and received in the out port 2010. The game ball B is detected by one of the two out-port sensors 3053 through the tubular portion 3081, and then guided downward by the rear cover 3084 and discharged. The out-ball detection member 3080 discharges the game ball B to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the main body frame 4 without contacting the game ball B on the substrate holder 1200.

According to the out-ball detection member 3080 of the present embodiment, since the partition portion 3082 partitions between the two out-port sensors 3053 provided on the left and right, the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 can be seen. It is possible to guide the game ball B that has flowed down the right side of the center accessory 2500 to the out port sensor 3053 side on the right side while being able to guide the game ball B to the out port sensor 3053 side on the left side. Therefore, in each of the left and right out-port sensors 3053, it is determined whether the player tends to "left-handed" or "right-handed" based on the number of game balls B detected per hour. Based on the discrimination, it is possible to promote the optimum driving operation for the game situation and enjoy the intended game.

Further, in the out ball detection member 3080, the protrusion of the partition portion 3082 to the front is shortened so that the game ball B can easily get over the partition. Therefore, when many game balls B enter the out port 2010 per hour, the partition is formed. The game ball B can be released to the left side or the right side where the distribution amount of the game ball B is relatively small in the part 3082, and the game ball B can be discharged without delay at the out port 2010.

Further, since the lower end of the rear cover 3084 is projected downward from the discharge portion 1201 of the board holder 1200, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first large winning opening 2005, The game ball B received by the second big winning opening 2006, the first sub-out opening 2011, and the second sub-out opening 2012 and discharged onto the board holder 1200 flows back by the out-ball detection member 3080 and is used by the out-port sensor 3053. It is possible to prevent the detection from being detected, and it is possible to accurately detect only the "out ball" received in the out port 2010.

In the present embodiment, the out-ball detection member 3080 is provided on the back unit 3000, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the out-ball detection member 3080 may be attached to the game panel 1100. At this time, if the game panel 1100 has an out recess 1123, the out ball detection member 3080 can be attached, so that it can correspond to the existing game panel 1100 having the out recess 1123. At the same time, it can be retrofitted to the existing game board 5.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the player is driven into the game area 5a and has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a second starting opening 2004, a first large winning opening 2005, and a second large winning opening 2006. Since the game ball B (“out ball”) that is not accepted by any of them can be detected by the out port sensor 3053, the first sub out port sensor 2403, and the second sub out port sensor 3054, for example, a specific winning prize If the acceptance of the game ball B into the mouth is continuously detected but the "out ball" is not detected, it means that a cheating is being performed on a specific winning opening. It is possible to notify that cheating is being carried out.

In addition, since the number can be counted by detecting the "out ball", the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the first major winning opening 2005, and the second major winning opening The number of "winning balls" and the number of "out balls" counted by the detection of the game ball B received in 2006, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the first large From the number of "safe balls" paid out by accepting the game ball B into the winning opening 2005 and the second major winning opening 2006, the "ball ejection rate" in the pachinko machine 1 can be known. Although not shown, a display unit for displaying the "ball ejection rate" is provided on the rear side of the game board 5.

Further, in the game board 5, all the game balls B (“global”) driven into the game area 5a are detected, and all the game balls B (“global”) discharged from the game area 5a are detected. ) Is detected, since only the "out ball" is detected by the out port sensor 3053, the first sub out port sensor 2403, and the second sub out port sensor 3054, the "out ball" and the "winning ball" are detected. By comparing the numbers of "" and "global", the occurrence of ball clogging in the game board 5 can be detected.

[5-9d. Back-to-back production unit]
Next, the back-rear effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 415 to 419 and the like. FIG. 415 (a) is a perspective view of the back-rear effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 415 (b) is a perspective view of the back-rear effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 416 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 417 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear effect unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 418 is an explanatory view showing the movable configuration of the back-rear effect unit from the front. FIG. 419 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the back-back effect unit.

The back rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the rearmost part (front of the rear wall) in the back box 3010. The back-rear effect unit 3100 has a U-shape with the front view open downward, and is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner shape of the back box 3010. The back-rear effect unit 3100 includes a back-rear movable decorative body 3110 extending in the left-right direction and a back-rear movable mechanism 3120 for moving the back-rear movable decoration 3110 in the vertical direction.

The back-rear movable decorative body 3110 includes a translucent decorative body 3111 extending in the left-right direction and having a relief-like decoration on the front surface, and a plurality of decorative bodies 3111 provided behind the decorative body 3111 and on the front surface. It includes a back-rear decorative substrate 3114 on which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b are mounted, and a decorative base 3115 attached to the decorative body 3111 so as to cover the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. The plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LEDs 3114b mounted on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are each full-color LEDs. The decorative body 3111 (back-back movable decorative body 3110) can be light-emittingly decorated by the plurality of first LEDs 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back-back decorative substrate 3114.

Further, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 includes a left slider 3116 extending vertically on the left side of the decorative body 3111 and a right slider 3117 extending vertically on the right side of the decorative body 3111. The left slider 3116 has a movable protrusion 3116a protruding from the lower end to the left, a locking protrusion 3116b protruding from the upper end to the left in a triangular shape, and a detection piece 3116c provided on the upper end. Have.

The back-rear movable mechanism 3120 is formed in a U-shape with the front view open downward, and extends vertically in a columnar shape on the left side of the unit base 3121 mounted in the back box 3010 and the unit base 3121. The slide shaft 3122 that supports the left slider 3116 of the rear movable decorative body 3110 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and the slide shaft 3122 on the left side of the slide shaft 3122 and extend vertically in parallel with the slide shaft 3122, and spiral on the outer circumference. It includes a spiral shaft 3123 in which a groove is formed.

Further, in the back-rear movable mechanism 3120, a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3124 attached to the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123, a spur gear-shaped motor gear 3125 meshing with the transmission gear 3124, and a motor gear 3125 on a rotating shaft. The mounted back-rear drive motor 3126, the motor base 3127 in which the back-rear drive motor 3126 is mounted at the lower end of the left side of the unit base 3121, and the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123 are rotatably mounted on the unit base 3121. It includes a bearing member 3128 and a lower bearing member 3129 that is rotatably attached to the unit base 3121 near the lower end of the spiral shaft 3123.

Further, the back-rear movable mechanism 3120 is screwed into the spiral shaft 3123 and can come into contact with the movable protrusion 3116a of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 from below, and the slide guide 3130 and the left side of the spiral shaft 3123. A transmission slider 3131 that extends up and down and can be raised and lowered so that the lower end side can come into contact with the slide guide 3130 from above, a spring 3132 that urges the transmission slider 3131 upward, and a transmission slider 3131. A link member 3133 that rotates around an axis in the front-rear direction by moving up and down, and a lock member 3134 that slides in the left-right direction by rotation of the link member 3133 and can come into contact with the locking protrusion 3116b of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110. It has.

Further, the back / rear movable mechanism 3120 includes a back / rear upper detection sensor 3135 that detects the detection piece 3116c of the back / rear movable decorative body 3110, a back / rear / lower detection sensor 3136 that detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, and a back / rear. The front left cover 3137 attached to the left side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the left end side of the movable decorative body 3110 from the front, and the right side of the unit base 3121 so as to cover the right end side of the back rear movable decorative body 3110 from the front. Connection between the front right cover 3138 attached and the back rear drive motor 3126, the back rear upper detection sensor 3135, and the back rear lower detection sensor 3136 attached to the lower front surface of the front left cover 3137 and the effect drive board 1720. The connection between the back-rear left relay board 3139 and the back-rear decorative board 3114 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, which is attached between the unit base 3121 and the front right cover 3138, and the effect drive board 1720. It is provided with a back-rear right relay board 3140 that is relaying.

The unit base 3121 has a shock absorbing member 3121a that abuts on the lower surface of the left slider 3116 and the lower surface of the right slider 3117 of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 that has moved downward to absorb the impact. The upper end and the lower end of the slide shaft 3122 are sandwiched between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137.

The slide guide 3130 projects to the right from the vicinity of the lower end, and has a detection piece 3130a detected by the back rear lower detection sensor 3136. The slide guide 3130 is provided so as to be slidable in the vertical direction between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137, and the slide guide 3130 is made non-rotatable with respect to the axis of the spiral shaft 3123 by coming into contact with them. In the slide guide 3130, the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be brought into contact with the upper end surface. Further, in the slide guide 3130, the upper end surface of the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 can be brought into contact with the lower surface of the slide guide 3130.

The transmission slider 3131 is attached so as to be movable in the vertical direction between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137. The transmission slider 3131 can be moved in the vertical direction only within a predetermined range by the front left cover 3137. The transmission slider 3131 has a lower protrusion 3131a protruding to the right on the lower end side, an upper protrusion 3131b protruding to the right on the upper end side, and a columnar protrusion rearward from the vicinity of the upper end of the upper protrusion 3131b. It is provided with a protruding pin 3131c. The transmission slider 3131 has a lower surface of the slide guide 3130 that can come into contact with the upper surface of the lower protrusion 3131a. Further, in the transmission slider 3131, the protrusion pin 3131c is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133.

The upper end side of the spring 3132 is attached to the unit base 3121, and the lower end side is attached to the upper protrusion 3131b of the transmission slider 3131 to urge the transmission slider 3131 upward.

The link member 3133 has a front view shape formed into a triangle in which each apex is R-chamfered. The link member 3133 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3121 near one apex with respect to the axis in the front-rear direction. The link member 3133 has a long hole-shaped first slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the left apex from the rotation axis and a long hole-shaped first slit 3133a extending in the direction of the rotation axis near the apex above the rotation axis. It has a second slit 3133b and. In the link member 3133, the protrusion pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3133a, and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b.

The lock member 3134 is slidably attached in the left-right direction by the front left cover 3137 between the unit base 3121 and the front left cover 3137.
The lock member 3134 projects rearward in a columnar shape, forms a flat upper end surface with a transmission pin 3134a slidably inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133, and in the left-right direction. The lower surface of the locking projection 3116b of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 is extended and inclined so as to move to the left with the contact surface 3134b that can be contacted and from the right end of the contact surface 3134b downward. It has a guide surface 3134c to which the locking protrusion 3116b can come into contact with.

The front right cover 3138 cooperates with the unit base 3121 to slidably support the right slider 3117 of the back / rear movable decorative body 3110 in the vertical direction.

Subsequently, the operation of the back-to-back effect unit 3100 will be described. In the normal state of the back-rear effect unit 3100, as shown in FIG. 418 (FIG. 419 (a)), the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is in a retracted position in which the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved upward, and the slide guide 3130. Is located near the upper end of the spiral shaft 3123, and the lock member 3134 moves to the right and is located at the lock position. In this state, the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the left slider 3116 of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is in contact with the upper end surface of the slide guide 3130, and the back-rear movable decoration body is in contact with the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134. The lower surface of the locking projection 3116b of the 3110 is in contact.

In the normal state, the transmission slider 3131 is located at the upward moving end due to the urging force of the spring 3132. Then, since the protrusion pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted into the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 and the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted into the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133, the spring. The urging force of the 3132 is such that the link member 3133 acts in the clockwise direction about the rotation axis and the lock member 3134 is urged in the direction of sliding to the right. Therefore, the lock member 3134 is maintained in the locked position by the urging force of the spring 3132.

In this state, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is restricted from moving downward by the slide guide 3130 and the lock member 3134. Therefore, even if either the slide guide 3130 or the lock member 3134 moves from the position for some reason (fault), the rest may prevent the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 from moving (falling) downward. it can.

Further, in a normal state, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 is located above the rotation axis of the link member 3133, and the second slit 3133b into which the transmission pin 3134a of the lock member 3134 is inserted rotates. It is located to the right of the axis. Further, the back / rear upper detection sensor 3135 detects the detection piece 3116c of the back / rear movable decorative body 3110, and the back / rear / lower detection sensor 3136 does not detect the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130.

The back-up effect unit 3100 is located behind the back-up effect unit 3400 in the normal state of the evacuation position, and is invisible from the front (player side).

In this normal state, when the spiral shaft 3123 is rotated in a predetermined direction (here, in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view) by the rear-rear drive motor 3126, the slide guide 3130 screwed to the spiral shaft 3123 is lowered. Move to. Even if the slide guide 3130 moves downward, the lock protrusion 3116b of the back-rear movable decoration 3110 is in contact with the lock member 3134, so that the back-rear movable decoration 3110 cannot move downward from the retracted position. Instead, only the slide guide 3130 moves downward away from the movable protrusion 3116a of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110.

Then, when the slide guide 3130 moves downward due to the rotation of the spiral shaft 3123 and the detection piece 3130a is detected by the back rear lower detection sensor 3136, the lower surface of the slide guide 3130 is the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131. It abuts on the upper end surface (see FIG. 419 (b)). When the slide guide 3130 further moves downward while the back rear lower detection sensor 3136 detects the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130, the slide guide 3130 presses the lower protrusion 3131a of the transmission slider 3131 downward. The transmission slider 3131 moves downward together with the slide guide 3130 against the urging force of the spring 3132.

When the transmission slider 3131 moves downward, the first slit 3133a of the link member 3133 into which the protrusion pin 3131c of the transmission slider 3131 is inserted is pressed downward, and the link member 3133 counterclockwise around its rotation axis. It will rotate in the clockwise direction. Then, as the link member 3133 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133 moves to the left, and the second slit 3133b of the link member 3133 moves to the left via the transmission pin 3134a inserted in the second slit 3133b. The lock member 3134 will move to the left (see FIG. 419 (c)).

When the lock member 3134 moves to the left of the locking protrusion 3116b of the back-rear movable decoration 3110, the lock (downward restriction) by the lock member 3134 is released, and the back-rear movable decoration 3110 falls. At this time, the detection piece 3130a of the slide guide 3130 moving downward is in a non-detection state with respect to the back rear lower detection sensor 3136, and the rotation of the back rear drive motor 3126 is stopped.

Then, the dropped back-rear movable decorative body 3110 comes into contact with the shock absorbing member 3121a of the unit base 3121, so that the falling is stopped and the state of the appearance position is reached (see FIG. 419 (c)). In this state of appearance position, the slide guide 3130 is located below the lower end of the left slider 3116 of the back-rear movable decoration 3110, and the back-rear movable decoration 3110 does not come into contact with the slide guide 3110.

In the back rear movable decorative unit 3100, the back rear movable decorative body 3110 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) in the state of the appearance position where the back rear movable decorative body 3110 has fallen. In this state, by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 (decorative body 3111) can be light-emitting and decorated. The light emitting decoration can entertain the player.

When returning the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 from the position where the lower moving end appears to the retracted position in the normal state, the rear-rear drive motor 3126 causes the spiral shaft 3123 to move in the opposite direction (here, clockwise in a plan view). Rotate in the direction) to move the slide guide 3130 upward. When the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the transmission slider 3131 slides upward together with the slide guide 3130 due to the urging force of the spring 3132. Then, when the transmission slider 3131 moves upward, the link member 3133 rotates in the clockwise direction and the lock member 3134 moves to the right and stops at the lock position, contrary to the above. Become.

Further, as the slide guide 3130 moves upward, the upper end surface of the lower protrusion 3131a comes into contact with the lower surface of the movable protrusion 3116a of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110, and the slide guide 3130 moves the movable protrusion 3116a upward. By pressing against, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 moves upward (see FIG. 419 (d)).

Then, when the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved upward by the slide guide 3130 to the vicinity of the retracted position, the locking projection 3116b comes into contact with the guide surface 3134c of the locking member 3134 from below. When the locking protrusion 3116b abuts on the guide surface 3134c from below and the locking protrusion 3116b presses the guide surface 3134c upward, the inclination of the guide surface 3134c causes the lock member 3134 to move to the left. It acts, and the lock member 3134 slides to the right against the urging force of the spring 3132 that tends to move to the right via the transmission slider 3131 and the link member 3133.

When the locking protrusion 3116b is located above the upper end of the guide surface 3134c of the lock member 3134 due to the upward movement of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the upward pressure of the locking protrusion 3116b on the guide surface 3134c is eliminated. The lock member 3134 slides to the right by the urging force of the spring 3132 to be in the locked position. As a result, the right end side of the contact surface 3134b of the lock member 3134 is located below the locking projection 3116b of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, and the lock member 3134 moves the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 downward. Can be regulated.

At this time, the detection piece 3116c of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is detected by the back-rear upper detection sensor 3135, and the rotation of the back-rear drive motor 3126 is stopped. In this way, the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 can return from the appearance position to the state of the retracted position which is the normal state.

According to the back-rear effect unit 3100 of the present embodiment, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 extending to the left and right is dropped from the state of the retracted position which cannot be seen from the player side to the state of the appearance position where it can be seen. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and strongly attract the player's interest.

Further, since the lock member 3134 that locks (regulates) the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the retracted position is moved to the left to release the lock, it rotates around the axis in the front-rear direction. Compared with the case where the lock is released by moving the lock, the rear movable decorative body 3110 can be dropped without moving upward when the lock is released.

[5-9d-1. Movable decoration after back]
Subsequently, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the back-rear effect unit 3100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 420 to 434. FIG. 420 is a front view showing the back-rear movable decorative body together with the back-rear decorative substrate. 421 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 420, and FIG. 421 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 420. FIG. 422 (a) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decorative body as viewed from the front, and FIG. 422 (b) is a perspective view of the back-rear movable decorative body as viewed from the back. FIG. 423 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear movable decorative body disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 424 is an exploded perspective view of the back-rear movable decorative body disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 425 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the back-rear movable decorative body, and FIG. 426 is an explanatory view showing the light guide radiation plate and the back-rear decorative substrate with broken lines in the front view of FIG. 425. FIG. 427 (a) is a front view showing a part of the decorative body in the back-rear movable decorative body, and FIG. 427 (b) is a front view showing a part of the decorative sheet in the same portion as the decorative body of (a). (C) is a front view showing a part of the light guide radiation plate and the back-rear decorative substrate at the same portion as the decorative body of (a).

Further, FIG. 428 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing an enlarged upper portion of FIG. 421 (a). FIG. 429 is an exploded view showing a cross-sectional view of FIG. 428 in an exploded manner. FIG. 430 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the decoration by the decorative body and the decorative sheet and the light guide radiation plate and the back and rear decorative substrate by enlarging a part of the front surface of the back-rear movable decorative body. FIG. 431 (a) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the light guide emitting plate and the back-rear decorative substrate at the portion of the first LED in a cross section, and FIG. 431 (b) shows the position of the second LED on the optical axis of the first LED. It is explanatory drawing which shows the action of the light guide radiating plate in the part which is doing from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the arrangement example of one LED from the front. FIG. 432 is a front view showing a part of the back-rear decorative substrate enlarged together with the copper foil of the circuit pattern. FIG. 433 (a) is a front view of the back-rear decorative substrate, and FIG. 433 (b) is a rear view of the back-rear decorative substrate. FIG. 434 (a) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of the decorative body in the back-rear movable decorative body, and FIG. 434 (b) shows a part of the decorative body having a metal decorative portion having a form different from that of (a). It is an enlarged cross-sectional view, and FIG. 3C is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a part of a decorative body having a metal decorative portion having a form further different from that of (a) and (b).

As shown in FIG. 420 and the like, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 extends in the left-right direction, and is provided with a decorative portion 3150 made of a predetermined decoration when viewed from the front. More specifically, the decorative portion 3150 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is located in the left-right direction between the two first decorative portions 3151 provided near both the left and right ends and the two first decorative portions 3151 in the front view. It has a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in a row. Each of the first decoration departments 3151 imitates one cherry blossom. Although not shown, the second decorative unit 3152 imitates a predetermined character, and is arranged in rows on the left and right to form a predetermined logo in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. ing. In this way, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is decorated with a logo between the two cherry blossoms.

As shown in FIGS. 420 to 424, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the back-rear effect unit 3100 extends in the left-right direction and forms a part of the decorative portion 3150 by the unevenness of the relief shape. A transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111 having the above, and a transparent sheet-shaped decorative sheet provided behind the decorative body 3111 and having a decoration (pattern) forming the rest of the decorative portion 3150. 3112, a transparent flat plate-shaped light guide radiation plate 3113 provided behind the decorative sheet 3112, and a plurality of first LEDs and second LEDs provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113 and mounted on the front surface. The back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the flat plate-shaped decorative base 3115 attached to the decorative body 3111 so as to cover the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the decorative body 3111 extending vertically on the left side. It includes a left slider 3116 and a right slider 3117 extending vertically on the right side of the decorative body 3111.

[5-9d-2. Back and rear movable decorative body decoration body]
The decorative body 3111 has flat general surfaces on the front surface side and the rear surface side. The decorative body 3111 includes a first decorative protrusion 3111a projecting forward from the general surface on the front side, a second decorative protrusion 3111b shorter than the first decorative protrusion 3111a and protruding forward, and a second decorative protrusion 3111b. It has a third decorative protrusion 3111c, which is shorter than the portion 3111b and projects forward. The first decorative protrusion 3111a is provided at a portion serving as an outline of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. The first decorative protrusion 3111a in the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is formed at the outer circumference of the petals of the first decorative portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom and the portion that imitates the central stamen and pistil, respectively. .. The first decorative protrusion 3111a at the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 is formed so as to surround the outer periphery of each of the second decorative portions 3152 in double (two rows). The first decorative protrusion 3111a is curved so that the front surface bulges forward.

The second decorative protrusion 3111b is provided on the outside of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. The second decorative protrusion 3111b is formed in a shape imitating cherry blossoms and petals smaller than the first decorative protrusion 3151. The second decorative protrusion 3111b is curved so that the front surface bulges forward.

The third decorative protrusion 3111c is provided in the frame of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. The front surface of the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the portion corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151 is curved. Further, the front surface of the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the portion corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 is flat.

The first decorative protrusion 3111a and the third decorative protrusion 3111c of the decorative body 3111 form a part of each of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 in the decorative portion 3150.

Further, the decorative body 3111 has a metal decorative portion 3111d (in the first decorative protrusion 3111a) in a portion (first foil pressing region (see FIG. 434 (a))) protruding forward from the second decorative protrusion 3111b. In FIGS. 425 to 427, it has a shaded portion with dark shades). The entire decorative body 3111 except for the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed to be colorless and transparent. As shown in FIGS. 428 and 434 (a), the metal decorative portion 3111d of the present embodiment is provided at a curved front portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the first decorative protrusion 3111a is provided. It is not provided on the side surface of the. As a result, the creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is made longer than in the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is also provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. It is possible to improve the insulation against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit.

Since the decorative body 3111 is provided with the metal decorative portion 3111d along the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward, the metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3111d can give a high-class feeling. At the same time, the curvature of the metal decorative portion 3111d can further emphasize the three-dimensional effect of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. As shown in FIG. 426 and the like, the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided in the second decorative portion 3152 at a portion in front of the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and is provided with the first LED 3114a and the light guide emitting plate 3113. The first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the above is made difficult to see from the front.

Further, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided only on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the light from the first LED 3114a or the like of the rear back decorative substrate 3114 is emitted from the back surface (rear surface) of the metal decorative portion 3111d. It can be reflected rearward to illuminate the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 provided behind, and the decoration (first contour portion 3112a) of the decorative sheet 3112 can be made more visible.

The metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by pressing a metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in the present embodiment) by hot stamping. More specifically, first, the base material of the decorative body 3111 is molded by injection molding of a synthetic resin. The base material of the formed decorative body 3111 is attached to a predetermined position of the hot stamping device in a state where the front side on which the first decorative protrusion 3111a or the like protrudes faces upward. At this time, above the base material of the decorative body 3111, a transfer sheet having a desired metal foil and a flat plate-shaped hot plate having elasticity on the lower surface side and heated to a predetermined temperature are arranged. .. Then, the hot plate is lowered from the upper end of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the base material of the decorative body 3111 to a position at a predetermined distance (a position higher than the upper end of the second decorative protrusion 3111b) to form the hot plate. The metal foil of the transfer sheet is transferred (foil pressed) to the first decorative protrusion 3111a by heat. As a result, the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed in the portion of the first foil pressing region FS1 above (front) of the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the decorative body 3111 (see FIG. 434 (a)). ..

In the hot plate of the hot stamping apparatus used for forming the metal decorative portion 3111d of the present embodiment, the portion of the transfer sheet that comes into contact with the decorative body 3111, which is the transfer destination of the metal foil, has elasticity. Even if the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a) is not flat and curved, it can be elastically deformed along the surface, and the metal foil is in a good state even on a three-dimensionally shaped part such as a curved surface. Can be transferred (foil stamped) with. As a result, the metal decorative portion 3111d can be easily formed without requiring large-scale equipment as compared with the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is formed by plating or vapor deposition, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the decorative body 3111 is provided with the metal decorative portion 3111d only at the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when forming the metal decorative protrusion 3111d by the hot stamping device, the hot plate is lowered to a position lower than the second decorative protrusion 3111b and higher than the third decorative protrusion 3111c, thereby causing the first decorative protrusion 3111c. A metal decorative portion 3111d can be provided at the tip portions of the portion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b to form the decorative body 3111.

Alternatively, with the base material of the decorative body 3111 attached to the hot stamping device, first, a hot plate is subjected to a second decorative protrusion using a transfer sheet having a metal foil (first metal foil) of a predetermined color. It is lowered to a position lower than the portion 3111b and higher than the third decorative protrusion 3111c (second foil pressing area FS2), and the first metal foil is applied to the tip portions of the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b. Transfer. Subsequently, the hot plate is made lower than the first decorative protrusion 3111a and higher than the second decorative protrusion 3111b by using a transfer sheet having a metal foil (second metal foil) having a color different from that of the first metal foil. It is lowered to the position (first foil pressing region FS1), and the second metal foil is transferred to the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a (see FIG. 434 (b)). As a result, the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b form a decorative body 3111 having different colored metal decorative parts 3111d without masking the base material of the decorative body 3111. be able to.

Further, in the above embodiment, the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 is formed by hot stamping (foil stamping), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after forming a metal film on the surface of the base material of the decorative body 3111 by plating or vapor deposition, the metal film of the portion excluding the first decorative protrusion 3111a is peeled off (laser peeling) by laser light. A decorative body 3111 having a metal decorative portion 3111d may be formed on the decorative protrusion 3111a. At this time, as shown in FIG. 434 (c), the metal decorative portion 3111d may be provided on the side surface portion in addition to the tip portion of the first decorative protrusion 3111a.

The decorative body 3111 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 has a rear concave portion 3111e that is recessed from the general surface on the rear surface side toward the front. The rear recess 3111e is provided so as to correspond to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. After that, the concave portion 3111e equalizes the plate thickness of the decorative body 3111 so that deformation due to sink marks of the resin during injection molding can be suppressed.

The rear recess 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is provided so as to be recessed forward in a portion corresponding to the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c on the flat rear surface. Therefore, the flat portion of the rear surface excluding the rear recess 3111e comes into contact with the front surface of the first contour portion 3112a described later in the decorative sheet 3112. As a result, the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 are in close contact with each other, so that light is not diffusely reflected between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. Through the transparent decorative body 3111, the pattern or the like of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly seen.

Further, since the rear recess 3111e is provided at a portion corresponding to the third decorative protrusion 3111c, it is in front of the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d described later in the decorative sheet 3112. It is provided at the site. As a result, a gap is formed between the rear recess 3111e and the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112. Therefore, the light radiated from the front to the rear recess 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is emitted from the gap. , The front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear recess 3111e are diffusely reflected, and the portion of the rear recess 3111e becomes bright due to the light from the front. As a result, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are not emitted, the portions of the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112 by the light from the front, that is, , The first decorative part 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom and the plurality of second decorative parts 3152 that form the logo become brighter and easier to see from the front.

Further, the decorative body 3111 has a plurality of mounting bosses 3111f protruding from the rear surface to the rear in a columnar shape. The mounting boss 3111f is for mounting the decorative body base 3115 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111. The mounting boss 3111f is provided at a portion directly behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c. As a result, the mounting boss 3111f is difficult to see from the front (player side) due to the lens action of the third decorative protrusion 3111c. In other words, the third decorative protrusion 3111c is provided in the portion in front of the mounting boss 3111f, and the lens action of the third decorative protrusion 3111c makes it difficult to see the mounting boss 3111f from the front.

[5-9d-3. Decorative sheet of movable decorative body after back]
The decorative sheet 3112 is in the form of a thin sheet, and is formed to have an outer shape substantially the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111. The decorative sheet 3112 is a transparent resin sheet having a pattern on the back surface. The decorative sheet 3112 is provided outside the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152, except for the rear portion of the second decorative protrusion 3111b of the decorative body 3111, and the central portion of the first decorative portion 3151. A second contour portion 3112b provided at a portion between the first contour portion 3112a and the first decorative protrusion 3111a corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152 and formed in a double manner of the decorative body 3111. The first light diffusing portion 3112c provided in the portion inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 (the portion behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c) corresponding to the first decorative portion 3151, and the first (Ii) A second light provided in a portion inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a (a portion behind the third decorative protrusion 3111c) which is provided in the double direction of the decorative body 3111 corresponding to the second decorative portion 3152. It has a diffusion unit 3112d and.

Further, the decorative sheet 3112 further includes a transparent transparent portion 3112e provided in a portion of the decorative body 3111 behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. Have.

As shown in FIG. 427 (b), the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a portion having a pattern imitating a cherry blossom smaller than the first decorative portion 3151, and the remaining portion is It is said to be the part where the interference fringes of light are displayed by the hologram. The first contour portion 3112a is formed opaquely. In the present embodiment, the portion of the hologram in the first contour portion 3112a is the same gold color as the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111. Further, the portion of the first contour portion 3112a that imitates a cherry blossom is colored using white or pink. The ink (paint) used for the pattern or the like may have glitter particles that glitter.

The first contour portion 3112a is located behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111 when the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front, and is made of metal. Since it has a portion having the same color as the decorative portion 3111d (gold in the present embodiment), it is possible to impart continuity to the decoration by the first contour portion 3112a and the metal decorative portion 3111d. Therefore, it is possible to emphasize the perspective between the first contour portion 3112a and the metal decorative portion 3111d, and it is possible to make it difficult to feel the thinness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110.

Further, the rear surface side of the first contour portion 3112a is formed to be light gray or white. This improves the color development of the pattern and hologram on the front side. Further, since the light gray or white rear surface of the first contour portion 3112a can reflect the light radiated forward from the light guide radiation plate 3113 to the rear and return it to the light guide radiation plate 3113, the light guide radiation can be returned to the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since the plate 3113 can emit light brighter, the amount of light radiated forward from the translucent portion of the decorative sheet 3112 can be increased, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be illuminated and decorated brighter. At the same time, the decorative portion 3150 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be radiated and decorated more uniformly.

Further, since the first contour portion 3112a is provided outside the first decorative protrusion 3111a and the second decorative protrusion 3111b in the decorative body 3111, it is flat except for the rear recess 3111e on the rear surface of the decorative body 3111. It is provided behind the site. As a result, the flat rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 comes into close contact with the front surface of the first contour portion 3112a on the surface, so that light is emitted between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the first contour portion 3112a. There is no diffuse reflection, and the pattern or hologram of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be clearly seen from the front through the transparent decorative body 3111.

As shown in the figure, the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed in a black linear shape having a predetermined width. The second contour portion 3112b is located behind the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 between the first decorative protrusions 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) provided on the double side of the decorative body 3111. That is, since the black second contour portion 3112b is provided between the double-formed golden metal decorative portions 3111d, the black color of the second contour portion 3112b enhances the double metal decorative portion 3111d. The decorative effect of the metal decorative portion 3111d can be further enhanced.

The first light diffusing portion 3112c of the decorative sheet 3112 is translucent and is formed by a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. More specifically, the first light diffusing portion 3112c is formed in a satin-skin-like pattern by a plurality of short linear protrusions extending in a random direction. In the present embodiment, in the portion of the first light diffusing portion 3112c, as shown in FIG. 427 (b) and the like, in one petal of the cherry blossom flower modeled by the first decorative portion 3151, from the center to the periphery of the petal. A plurality of dots of a predetermined color (pink in the present embodiment) are printed so that the shade becomes darker (the transparency becomes lower) toward the direction. Therefore, when the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 for radiating light from the rear to the first light diffusing portion 3112c is made to emit light, the pear-skin-like pattern of the first light diffusing portion 3112c causes a slight amount of light emission. Various shades will appear, and it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the luminescent decoration of the first decorative portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom.

The second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 is translucent and is formed by a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. The second light diffusing portion 3112d is provided on the entire inside of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the second decorative portions 3152, as shown by light shading in FIGS. 425 to 427. Has been done. The second light diffusing portion 3112d has translucency and is formed by a plurality of fine irregularities capable of disturbing light. The plurality of fine irregularities forming the second light diffusing portion 3112d are formed in a halftone dot-like pattern at regular intervals in the vertical and horizontal directions. The second light diffusing portion 3112d of the present embodiment is formed in a translucent milky white color. Therefore, when the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 for radiating light from the rear to the second light diffusing portion 3112d is made to emit light, it is determined by the halftone dot pattern of the second light diffusing portion 3112d. The second decorative portion 3152 composed of the characters of can be light-emitting decorated with uniform brightness.

The first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are provided behind the portion of the decorative body 3111 that is inside the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the rear surface of the portion of the decorative body 3111. Is provided with a rear recess 3111e recessed forward. Therefore, when the decorative sheet 3112 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the decorative body 3111, a gap is formed in the front surface of the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d due to the presence of the rear recess 3111e of the decorative body 3111. It will be in the state of being. Due to the gap, the light radiated from the front to the portion of the rear recess 3111e of the decorative body 3111 is diffusely reflected between the front surface of the decorative sheet 3112 and the rear surface of the rear recess 3111e, and the first light is generated by the light from the front. The diffuser 3112c and the second light diffuser 3112d become brighter. As a result, even if the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are not emitted, the portions of the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d in the decorative sheet 3112 by the light from the front, that is, , The first decorative part 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom and the plurality of second decorative parts 3152 that form the logo become brighter and easier to see from the front.

The decorative sheet 3112 forms a predetermined pattern by the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusing portion 3112c, and the second light diffusing portion 3112d, and decorates the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. It constitutes the rest of the part 3150 excluding the decoration by the decorative body 3111. In the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment, the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusing portion 3112c, and the second light diffusing portion 3112d are provided on the rear surface side of the transparent sheet serving as a base material. ing. The first contour portion 3112a and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by printing. Further, the first light diffusing portion 3112c and the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112 are formed by attaching a predetermined light diffusing film (diffuser film). The first light diffusing section 3112c and the second light diffusing section 3112d may be used as a lens film or a prism film.

The transparent portion 3112e of the decorative sheet 3112 is formed transparently. Since the transmission portion 3112e is provided behind the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) of the decorative body 3111, the light emitting from the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 causes the light guide radiation plate 3113 to emit light. A part of the light radiated forward can be transmitted to irradiate the first decorative protrusion 3111a. At this time, in the first decorative protrusion 3111a protruding forward, the metal decorative protrusion 3111d is provided only on the front side, and the side surface side remains transparent. Therefore, the first decorative protrusion 3111a is provided from the rear through the transparent portion 3112e. The light radiated to the surface leaks to the outside from the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Therefore, the light transmitted through the transmitting portion 3112e can show the player a light emitting decoration as if the first decorative protrusion 3111a (metal decorative portion 3111d) is backlit. Further, the light radiated from the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a to the outside through the transmission portion 3112e can illuminate the first contour portion 3112a located outside the first decorative protrusion 3111a from the front. Therefore, the pattern or hologram provided on the first contour portion 3112a can be made more visible, and the decorative effect of the first contour portion 3112a can be more easily exhibited.

Since the decorative sheet 3112 of the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3111 can be decorated by the first contour portion 3112a having a pattern or a hologram. The decoration of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made to look large. Further, since the decorative sheet 3112 has substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the decoration of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is not bordered, so that the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved to the appearance position. At that time, by displaying an effect image that is continuous with the decoration of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 on the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear, it is possible to show the player a unified effect. It is possible to give a person a visual impact and attract attention, and at the same time, it is possible to entertain a large decoration and suppress a decline in the player's interest.

In the decorative sheet 3112 of the above embodiment, a transparent transparent portion 3112e is provided behind the metal decorative portion 3111d (first decorative protrusion 3111a) of the decorative body 3111, but the present invention is limited to this. is not it. For example, the first contour portion 3112a may be provided at a portion behind the metal decorative portion 3111d. As a result, when the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed diagonally from the front, the rear side can be seen through the transparent side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the decorative body 3111 and the transparent transparent portion 3112e in the decorative sheet 3112. It is possible to prevent the decorative portion 3150 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 from being unsightly. Further, by providing the first contour portion 3112a up to the portion behind the metal decorative portion 3111d, the first decorative protrusion in the first contour portion 3112a is passed through the transparent side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a in the decorative body 3111. Since the portion located behind the portion 3111a can be seen, the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a can be decorated by the portion of the first contour portion 3112a, and the metal decorative protrusion 3111d is the first decorative protrusion. Even if it is provided only on the front surface of the portion 3111a, the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 can be improved.

[5-9d-4. Light guide radiation plate of movable decorative body after back]
As shown in FIGS. 423 and 424, the light guide emitting plate 3113 includes a transparent flat plate-shaped main body portion 3113a extending to the left and right, a flange portion 3113b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 3113a, and a main body. A plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c that penetrate the portion 3113a in the front-rear direction and insert the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 that penetrates the main body portion 3113a in the front-rear direction. A plurality of second LED accommodating portions 3113d into which the second LED 3114b is inserted, a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e provided over substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, and a first LED accommodating portion on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. It has a leg portion 3113f projecting rearward from the peripheral edge of the 3113c, and an auxiliary reflection portion 3113g provided along the rear end side of the leg portion 3113f opposite to the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. ..

Further, the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a right slider front portion 3113h extending downward from the front view right end of the main body portion 3113a.

The front surface of the main body 3113a of the light guide emitting plate 3113 to which the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3112 abuts is formed flat. The flange portion 3113b protrudes rearward by about 1.5 times the thickness of the main body portion 3113a. As shown in FIG. 428 and the like, the flange portion 3113b has a rear end projecting rearward from the back rear decorative substrate 3114 in a state of being assembled on the back rear movable decorative body 3110.

The inner peripheral shape of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is formed to be rectangular. As shown in FIG. 426, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are provided behind the low-transparency portion of the decorative portion 3150 when the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is viewed from the front. More specifically, in the portion of the first decorative portion 3151, a plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are provided behind the portion of the decorative sheet 3112 in the first light diffusing portion 3112c where the shades of pink are darkened by dots. ing. More specifically, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c provided at the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is located on the center side of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 in each of the five petals imitating cherry blossoms. The center of the long side with a rectangular inner circumference is provided so as to be located on the center line of the petals.

On the other hand, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c provided at the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 are provided so as to be located behind the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112. Has been done. For this reason, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c (first LED 3114a) are difficult to see from the front.

Further, the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the second decorative portion 3152 at the portion of the second decorative portion 3152. Further, when the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c are close to each other to some extent, the first LED accommodating portions 3113c are connected to each other as shown in FIGS. 427 (c) and 431 (c). It is formed in a state of being. By connecting the first LED accommodating portions 3113c that are close to each other, it is possible to prevent the main body portion 3113a from forming a portion thinner than the thickness thereof, and the light guide radiation plate 3113 is damaged. It can be difficult.

By the way, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c has a rectangular inner circumference and penetrates the main body portion 3113a. As a result, when the light guided in the direction along the surface (front surface or rear surface) of the main body portion 3113a inside the main body portion 3113a (within the plate thickness) reaches the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, the light is emitted. A part is reflected straight to the inside of the main body 3113a by the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, and the rest passes through the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c to the first LED accommodating portion. It will be emitted to the inside of 3113c. Then, when the light radiated from one of the four surfaces of the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c reaches another surface of the inner peripheral surface, a part of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c It reflects inward and the rest is incident on the inside of the main body 3113a. That is, inside the main body 3113a, when the light guided in the direction along the surface of the main body 3113a tries to pass through the first LED housing 3113c, it radiates to the inside of the first LED housing 3113c. Since a part of the light is reflected at the portion of the inner peripheral surface and the portion of the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c that is incident on the main body portion 3113a side, the light that has passed through the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. The amount of light in the light will be greatly reduced as compared with before passing through.

Therefore, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c can block the light guided in the direction along the surface of the main body portion 3113a inside the main body portion 3113a. Since the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is accommodated inside the first LED accommodating portion 3113c, the light trying to pass through the first LED accommodating portion 3113c can be blocked by the first LED 3114a. At the site where the first LED 3114a is housed, light does not pass to the opposite side of the first LED house 3113c. As a result, by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c at an optimum position with respect to the outer peripheral shape of the second decorative portion 3152, the light from the first LED 3114a accommodated in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c can be generated. It is possible to avoid being guided to another second decorative portion 3152 to be light-emitting decorated, and it is possible to reliably emit light-decorate only the desired second decorative portion 3152 in the plurality of second decorative portions 3152. ..

The operation of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c as described above will be described in more detail. For example, as shown in FIG. 431 (c), a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 of "i", "ro", "ha", and "☆". A first LED accommodating portion 3113c is provided on the outer periphery of each of the second decorative portions 3152, and light is irradiated into each of the first LED accommodating portions 3113c toward the inside of the second decorative portion 3152. The first LED 3114a is provided so as to be used. In this embodiment, since the first LED accommodating portions 3113c provided between "i" and "ro" and between "ro" and "ha" are close to each other, they are connected to each other. It is one hole. As a result, a thin portion that is easily damaged is not formed in the main body portion 3113a of the light guide emitting plate 3113. Further, in this embodiment, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the first LED 3114a for luminescent decoration of the “☆” arranged below the “I” are provided under the “☆”. Therefore, when the first LED 3114a for luminescent decoration of "☆" is made to emit light, the "i" provided above the "☆" may be luminescently decorated, but it is provided at the upper left of the "☆". The first LED accommodating portion 3113c accommodating the first LED 3114a for luminescent decoration of a part of the "I" is provided with an extending portion 3113j extending so as to cover the upper part of the "☆". ing. With this extending portion 3113j, it is possible to reduce (block) the light from the first LED 3114a for emitting and decorating the "☆" from being guided to the "I" side. As a result, even if "☆" is luminescently decorated, "i" is not luminescently decorated. Further, it is possible to reduce (block) the light for illuminating and decorating the "I" from being guided to the "☆" side by the extending portion 3113j. Only the desired second decorative portion 3152 such as "i" or "☆" can be reliably luminescent and decorated, and the desired effect can be sufficiently exhibited.

As shown in FIG. 430 and the like, the inner circumference of the second LED accommodating portion 3113d is formed in a circular shape. The plurality of second LED accommodating portions 3113d are provided behind the five circular portions imitating the stamens provided around the center in the first decorative portion 3151 imitating a cherry blossom. More specifically, the second LED accommodating portion 3113d is provided behind each of the five petals imitating a cherry blossom, behind a circular portion imitating a stamen located on the center line of the petals. As a result, in each of the five petals, a first LED accommodating portion 3113c and a second LED accommodating portion 3113d are provided one by one on the center line of the petals.

The second LED accommodating portion 3113d has a circular inner circumference and penetrates the main body portion 3113a. As a result, when the light guided in the direction along the surface (front surface or rear surface) of the main body portion 3113a inside the main body portion 3113a (within the plate thickness) reaches the second LED accommodating portion 3113d, the light is emitted. A part of the second LED accommodating portion 3113d is reflected by the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 3113a so as to diffuse in a fan shape. In the present embodiment, since the second LED accommodating portion 3113d is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a in each of the five petals in the first decorative portion 3151 that imitates a cherry blossom, FIG. 431 (b) shows. As shown, the light radiated from the first LED 3114a to the inside of the main body 3113a is reflected in a fan shape toward the first LED 3114a by the circular inner peripheral surface of the second LED housing 3113d, and the reflection thereof. Light can make the petals brighter and more luminescent.

One of the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e is formed in a square pyramid, and the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e are arranged in a row so as to be continuous in the vertical and horizontal directions. The plurality of reflecting portions 3113e exclude a portion of the flange portion 3113b on the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, a portion around the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d, and a portion of the right slider front portion 3113h. It is formed on almost the entire surface. The plurality of reflecting portions 3113e can mainly reflect the light radiated in the direction along the plate surface forward within the plate thickness of the main body portion 3113a and radiate it from the front surface of the main body portion 3113a to the front. The light guide emitting plate 3113 of the present embodiment is formed so that the rear portion is difficult to see when viewed from the front due to the presence of the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e.

Further, since the plurality of reflecting portions 3113e of the light guide emitting plate 3113 are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, light can be radiated forward from the substantially entire surface, so that the model can be changed or designed. Even if the design of the decorative portion 3150 by the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 is changed due to the change or the like, it is not necessary to change the light guide radiating plate 3113, and it is possible to easily respond to the design change and the cost. Can be suppressed from increasing.

The leg portion 3113f projects rearward from the rear end side of the portion of the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c that faces the light emitting surface of the first LED 3114a to be inserted. As shown in FIG. 428 and the like, the leg portion 3113f is provided with a surface on the first LED accommodating portion 3113c side on the same surface as the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. As a result, the area of the light receiving unit 3113i for receiving the light emitted from the first LED 3114a into the main body 3113a can be increased, and more light from the first LED 3114a can be irradiated into the main body 3113a. Can be done. Further, when the legs 3113f are assembled on the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the rear surface abuts on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and a gap is provided between the rear surface of the main body 3113a and the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Can be formed.

The auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g is provided in a C chamfered shape along the side opposite to the first LED accommodating portion 3113c at the rear end of the leg portion 3113f. The auxiliary reflecting portion 3113g is for reflecting the light radiated from the first LED 3114a to the leg portion 3113f forward.

The right slider front portion 3113h is for forming the right slider 3117 in cooperation with the right slider rear portion 3115d described later of the decorative body base 3115.

When the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment is assembled on the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the flange portion 3113b covers the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Therefore, the flange portion 3113b covers the outer circumference of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. It is possible to make the surface difficult to see, and it is possible to prevent the appearance from being deteriorated. Further, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a flange portion 3113b projecting rearward from the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the back-rear decorative substrate is formed from the metal decorative portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111. The creepage distance EL to 3114 (copper foil 3114d and electronic component 3114e) can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d flows to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is damaged. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

In the light guide radiation plate 3113 of the present embodiment, since the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d are holes penetrating the main body portion 3113a, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is accommodated in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. The heat from the LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b housed in the second LED accommodating portion 3113d can be released to the front of the main body portion 3113a, and the thermal influence on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be reduced.

Further, since the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d are through holes, the front side of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d is blocked by the decorative sheet 3112, the decorative body 3111, or the like. Even if it is, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion are compared with the case where the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d are formed in a bottomed concave shape (groove shape). The volume (heat capacity) of the 3113d can be increased. As a result, it is possible to alleviate a rapid temperature rise due to heat from the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b housed therein, and it is possible to suppress the heat effect on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 and the like. Further, in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c which is close to each other and is connected to each other and the first LED accommodating portion 3113c having the extending portion 3113j, the volume of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c is large. For the same reason as described above, it is possible to dissipate more heat from the first LED 3114a and further alleviate the rapid temperature rise.

Further, the light guide radiation plate 3113 has a first LED accommodating portion 3113c and a second LED accommodating portion 3113d into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are inserted from the rear. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d, the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a is brought as close as possible to the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. The thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner.

Further, since the light guide radiation plate 3113 has the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward from the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f is brought into contact with the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114. , A gap can be formed between the rear surface of the main body 3113a and the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. As a result, heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, etc. mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be released through the gap, and the temperature rise in the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is suppressed to be affected by the heat. Can be reduced.

Further, the light guide radiating plate 3113 guides the light from the first LED 3114a mounted at a plurality of predetermined positions of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and is forward by the reflecting portion 3113e on substantially the entire rear surface of the main body 3113a. Since it can be radiated to, the light from the first LED 3114a can be radiated forward even in a portion of the main body 3113a where the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is not provided. In other words, even if the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is made smaller than the size of the main body 3113a, light can be radiated forward from substantially the entire surface of the main body 3113a. Therefore, since the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made smaller than the main body 3113a, the distance between the outer circumference of the main body 3113a and the outer circumference of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be made longer, and the decorative body 3111 can be made longer. The creepage distance EL from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface can be made longer to make it easier to exert the above-mentioned effects.

[5-9d-5. Back-rear movable decorative substrate back-rear decorative board]
A plurality of side-view type first LEDs 3114a and a plurality of top-view type second LEDs 3114b are mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Further, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 includes a flat plate-shaped substrate main body 3114c, a copper foil 3114d (see FIG. 432 and the like) provided on the front and rear surfaces of the substrate main body 3114c to form a predetermined circuit pattern, and a substrate. It has an electronic component 3114e (see FIG. 433 (b)) such as an LED driver IC and a resistor mounted on the rear surface of the main body 3114c.

Further, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 has a coating film made of a white solder resist (not shown) on the surface excluding the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, the electronic component 3114e, and the like. Further, although not shown, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is a notation unit in which the mounted components are shown in the vicinity of the mounted components such as the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e. have. The notation portion is provided by silk printing on the coating film in a predetermined color (for example, yellow) that is inconspicuous.

The back-rear decorative substrate 3114 has an outer peripheral shape substantially along the inner circumference of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide emitting plate 3113, and has a gap between the back and rear decorative substrate 3114 and the flange portion 3113b, which is slightly larger than the thickness of the flange portion 3113b. It is formed to a size that is formed substantially constant. Further, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 has an outer peripheral shape substantially along the inner circumference of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115 described later, and a slight gap is substantially formed between the back and rear decorative substrate 3114 and the inner circumference of the flange portion 3115b. It is formed to a size that is constantly formed. That is, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is formed to have a size accommodated inside the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115.

At the portion of the first decorative portion 3151 in the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, as shown in FIG. 430 and the like, on the center line of each of the five petals imitating a cherry blossom, the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111a It is provided so as to irradiate light toward the center of the flower near the tip inside the (metal decorative portion 3111d). As a result, each of the five petals imitating a cherry blossom can be luminescently decorated by the first LED 3114a of the portion of the first decoration portion 3151.

Further, in the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 in the plurality of first LEDs 3114a, in each of the second decorative portions 3152 arranged in rows on the left and right, the first decorative protrusions provided on the double side of the decorative body 3111 are provided. In the vicinity of the rear of the 3111a, light is provided so as to irradiate the inside of the second decorative portion 3152. As a result, the first LED 3114a of the portion of the second decorative portion 3152 can illuminate and decorate the plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in rows on the left and right one by one.

As shown in FIG. 430 and the like, the plurality of second LEDs 3114b are central portions that imitate cherry blossoms in the first decorative portion 3151, and are circular portions that imitate stamens located on the center lines of the five petals. It is provided at the rear. That is, the second LED 3114b is provided on the optical axis of the first LED 3114a corresponding to one petal imitating a cherry blossom in the first decorative portion 3151. As a result, the second LED 3114b can illuminate and decorate each of the five parts of the first decoration part 3151 that imitates the stamens of the central part.

Since the second LED 3114b is a top view type capable of irradiating light toward the front, when the second LED 3114b is made to emit light, a portion imitating a stamen in the central portion of the first decorative portion 3151 is displayed from other portions. It is possible to make a point emission with high brightness, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player. Therefore, in the light emitting decoration of the decorative portion 3150, a portion that emits light in a planar manner by the first LED 3114a and a portion that emits light in a point shape by the second LED 3114b can be provided. It is possible to perform a variety of light emission effects, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored.

The substrate main body 3114c is a rigid substrate whose thickness is slightly thinner than that of the main body portion 3113a of the light guide emitting plate 3113. The substrate body 3114c of the present embodiment uses a glass composite base material.

The copper foil 3114d is provided on substantially the entire front and rear surfaces of the substrate main body 3114c. The copper foil 3114d is formed to have a predetermined thickness (18 μm to 70 μm), and forms a circuit pattern by etching (shaded portion in FIG. 432). As shown in FIG. 432, the copper foil 3114d is provided at a position where the outer peripheral edge is separated from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate main body 3114c by a predetermined distance SL (0.5 mm to 3 mm) (SL = 1 mm in the present embodiment). ing. By this predetermined distance SL, the creepage distance EL and the space distance from the external conductive member (for example, the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111) to the copper foil 3114d of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are earned to discharge static electricity or the like. Insulation against short circuits can be improved, and damage to the back-back decorative substrate 3114 due to electric discharge or the like can be suppressed.

Further, the outer peripheral edge of the copper foil 3114d is provided from the outer peripheral edge of the substrate main body 3114c to a portion inside a predetermined distance regardless of the presence or absence of the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e, and the area of the copper foil 3114d. Is as wide as possible. As a result, a part of the heat generated in the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, and the electronic component 3114e can be transferred to the copper foil 3114d to dissipate heat from the copper foil 3114d, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b can be dissipated. , And the cooling effect on the electronic component 3114e can be enhanced to prevent damage due to heat.

Further, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 has a predetermined size for facilitating forward reflection of light emitted from the first LED 3114a toward the substrate main body 3114c on the light emitting surface side of the side view type first LED 3114a on the front side. It has a light reflection auxiliary region 3114f (a region surrounded by a broken line in FIG. 432). As shown in FIGS. 429 and 431 (a), the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f of the present embodiment is not provided with the copper foil 3114d. As a result, the front surface of the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is lower than the front surface of the copper foil 3114d on which the first LED 3114a is mounted. (1) The angle of the light emitted from the LED 3114a into the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f is such that the angle approaches the vertical line on the front surface of the substrate main body 3114c, so that the light emitted to the substrate main body 3114c side is easily reflected forward. Can be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 431 (a) and the like, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 is provided after the copper foil 3114d is not provided in the light reflection auxiliary region 3114f. Since the contact is made, the leg portion 3113f can be lengthened rearward by the thickness of the copper foil 3114d. Therefore, the light receiving portion 3113i that receives the light from the first LED 3114a can be enlarged, and the light (amount of light) radiated forward from the light guide emitting plate 3113 is increased to increase the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111). And the decorative sheet 3112) can be luminescently decorated brighter.

Further, in the light reflection assisting region 3114f, the rear end of the leg portion 3113f projecting rearward of the light guide emitting plate 3113 is brought into contact with the rear end (see FIG. 431 (a) and the like). As a result, even if the coating film (solder resist) applied to the surface is worn or rolled up due to the contact of the legs 3113f, only the front surface of the substrate body 3114c is exposed, and the copper foil 3114d is exposed. There is no such thing. Therefore, the insulation property is lowered due to the exposure of the copper foil 3114d, and damage due to a short circuit such as static electricity can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 428 and the like, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 of the present embodiment is assembled on the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 to form a flange portion 3115b described later of the decorative body base 3115 and a flange portion of the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since the outer periphery of the 3113b is double-enclosed, it becomes difficult to see the outer peripheral surface from the outside, and deterioration of the appearance is prevented. Further, in the state where the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is assembled on the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the outer circumference of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is surrounded by the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 with a certain gap. The flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115 is inserted into the gap between the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the flange portion 3113b from the rear, and is also surrounded by the flange portion 3115b. As a result, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the decorative substrate 3114 on the back side is the flange portion 3113b of the light guide emitting plate 3113 due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. Since it meanders so as to wrap around, the creepage distance EL can be made longer, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d flows to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is damaged. Can be prevented. In this embodiment, the creepage distance EL is set to a distance that can correspond to a discharge voltage of 10 mm or more or 10 kV.

Further, since the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, a member provided behind the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 by the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 (in the present embodiment, The light from the effect display device 1600) can be blocked. As a result, it is possible to prevent the decorative sheet 3112 and the decorative body 3111 from being irradiated with the light from the effect display device 1600 or the like provided at the rear, so that the decorative portion 3150 is light-emitting and decorated in an unintended state. It is possible to prevent this from happening, and it is possible to reliably perform a desired light emitting effect on the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. Further, since the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, it is possible to prevent the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 from seeing the rear through the light guide radiation plate 3113, and the back-rear movable decoration. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance of the body 3110.

Further, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is provided with only the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b accommodated from the rear with respect to the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d of the light guide radiation plate 3113 on the front surface. Therefore, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d, the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is brought as close as possible to the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a. The thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner.

Further, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 has electronic components 3114e such as an LED driver IC and a resistor mounted on the rear surface. Since the LED driver IC and the resistor as the electronic component 3114e are generally black components, the black electronic component 3114e cannot be seen from the front by providing the electronic component 3114e on the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. It is possible to improve the appearance of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. Further, since the black electronic component 3114e is provided on the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 which cannot be seen from the front, it is not necessary to apply a paint of a color such as white to make the electronic component 3114e difficult to see. The cost of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be reduced.

[5-9d-6. Decorative base of movable decorative body after the back]
The decorative body base 3115 is formed to be transparent as a whole. The decorative body base 3115 penetrates the flat plate-shaped covering plate portion 3115a that covers the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, the flange portion 3115b that protrudes forward from the outer peripheral edge of the covering plate portion 3115a, and the covering plate portion 3115a. A plurality of openings 3115c and a right slider rear portion 3115d extending downward from the front view right end of the covering plate portion 3115a are provided.

The outer peripheral shape of the covering plate portion 3115a is substantially along the inner circumference of the flange portion 3113b of the light guide emitting plate 3113, and a slight gap is formed substantially constant between the covering plate portion 3115a and the inner circumference of the flange portion 3113b. It is formed in a large size. That is, the covering plate portion 3115a (decorative body base 3115) is formed in a size that can be accommodated inside the flange portion 3113b of the light guide emitting plate 3113. Since the covering plate portion 3115a covers the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, it is possible to protect the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 by preventing other members from coming into contact with the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 from the rear. It is possible to prevent damage to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114.

As shown in FIG. 428 and the like, the flange portion 3115b enters the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide emitting plate 3113 and the outer circumference of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the front end is in front of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Protrudes so that is located. The flange portion 3115b is formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and makes it difficult to see the outer peripheral surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 from the outside to improve the appearance. Further, when the flange portion 3115b is assembled on the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, it is inserted in the space between the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. The shortest route from the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the decorative substrate 3114 on the back side can be meandered around the flange portion 3113b of the light guide radiation plate 3113 due to the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. Out. Therefore, the creepage distance EL can be made longer, and it is possible to prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d from flowing to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 and damaging the back-rear decorative substrate 3114.

The plurality of openings 3115c have a slit-shaped portion that is long to the left and right and a portion that is larger than the slit-shaped portion. With these plurality of openings 3115c, the heat from the electronic component 3114e mounted on the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be released to the outside of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, and the heat effect on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Can be reduced.

The right slider rear portion 3115d is for forming the right slider 3117 in cooperation with the right slider front portion 3113h of the light guide emitting plate 3113.

Further, the decorative body base 3115 has a plurality of protrusions 3115e slightly protruding from the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a. The plurality of protrusions 3115e are arranged so as to abut on the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 where the copper foil 3114d is not provided near the outer peripheral edge. The plurality of protrusions 3115e can form a gap between the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 and the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a by abutting the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 on the front surface thereof. .. As a result, heat from the electronic component 3114e can be easily dissipated through the gap between the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 and the front surface of the covering plate portion 3115a.

[5-9d-7. Main effects of the movable back and back decoration body]
Subsequently, the main functions and effects of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the present embodiment will be described. The back-rear movable decorative body 3110 of the present embodiment sandwiches the decorative sheet 3112 between the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 and the front surface of the main body portion 3113a of the light guide emitting plate 3113, and also sandwiches the decorative sheet 3112 between the light guide emitting plate 3113 and the decorative body. It is assembled by attaching the mounting boss 3111f of the decorative body 3111 to the decorative body base 3115 with the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 sandwiched between the base 3115 and the base (see FIG. 421 and the like). As a result, the thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction is made relatively thin.

The back-rear movable decorative body 3110 has a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c projecting forward on the transparent flat plate-shaped decorative body 3111. Since the decorative sheet 3112 on the rear side of the decorative body 3111 has a first contour portion 3112a having a hologram on which a pattern or light interference fringes are displayed, the decorative portion 3150 of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided. The first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c can give a three-dimensional effect, and the second decorative protrusion 3111b and the third decorative protrusion 3111c provide a lens effect. And a hologram can give a sense of depth. As a result, even if the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is thin in the front-rear direction, the player does not feel the thinness, and the decorative effect of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 by the decorative portion 3150 is sufficient. It can be demonstrated and entertained by the player.

Further, as described above, the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, the third decorative protrusion 3111c, the first contour portion 3112a, and the like can give a three-dimensional effect and a sense of depth. The thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner. As a result, the space required for installing the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be reduced, so that the degree of freedom in arranging the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be increased, and it becomes a more effective part inside the game board 5. By providing the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, it is possible to easily embody the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the player. Further, since the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made thin, it is possible to relatively easily secure a space for arranging the other decorative body. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that looks good, or a pachinko machine 1 that allows you to enjoy a variety of productions, and provides a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players and can be more differentiated. can do.

The back-rear movable decorative body 3110 has a metal decorative portion 3111d made of metal leaf on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a of the decorative body 3111 forming the outer periphery of the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152. Therefore, the metallic luster of the metal decorative portion 3111d makes the first decorative portion 3151 and the second decorative portion 3152 stand out, and can strongly attract the interest of the player. Further, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the curved front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the metal decorative portion 3111d and to give a high-class feeling. As a result, when the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 moves from the retracted position invisible to the player to the visible appearance position, the high-class decorative portion 3150 can be seen, which gives the player a premium feeling. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, since the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flattened and the decorative sheet 3112 has substantially the same size as the outer circumference of the decorative body 3111, the first contour portion 3112a having a pattern or hologram is used. , The outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3111 can be decorated, and the decoration of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made to look large. Further, since the decorative sheet 3112 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 has substantially the same size as the decorative body 3111, the decoration of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is not bordered. When the body 3110 is moved to the appearance position, the effect display device 1600 provided at the rear displays an effect image that is continuous with the decoration of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, thereby producing a unified effect. It can be shown to a person, can give the player an impact on the appearance and attract attention, and can entertain a large decoration, and can suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with the first LED 3114a behind the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 and the second contour portion 3112b of the decorative sheet 3112, the metal decorative portion 3111d and the first LED 3114a are provided. The two contour portions 3112b can make it difficult to see the first LED 3114a from the front, and can suppress the deterioration of the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 and sufficiently exert the decorative effect.

Further, since the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a plurality of first LEDs 3114a so as to surround the outer periphery of each of the first decorative portion 3151 and the plurality of second decorative portions 3152, the first decorative portion 3151 And the second decoration unit 3152 can be individually luminescent and decorated. As a result, it is possible to sequentially illuminate a plurality of second decorative portions 3152 arranged in rows on the left and right, or to illuminate only a specific first decorative portion 3151 or second decorative portion 3152. By appropriately illuminating the first decorative section 3151 and the plurality of second decorative sections 3152, it is possible to show the player a variety of luminescent effects, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing the decline in interest. it can.

Further, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a plurality of side-view type first LEDs 3114a after irradiating light in the direction along the surface of the main body portion 3113a of the light guide emitting plate 3113. Since the light is radiated forward by the reflecting portion 3113e of the above to radiate and decorate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, the light from the first LED is radiated from the front surface of the light guide emitting plate 3113 to the front. The distance to can be increased. As a result, the light from the first LED can be sufficiently diffused and radiated forward from the light guide emitting plate 3113. Therefore, even if the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is thin in the front-rear direction, the decorative body 3111 And the decorative sheet 3112 can be uniformly and uniformly luminescently decorated, and the player can be entertained by the luminescent decoration having a good appearance. Further, since the light guide radiating plate 3113 and the side view type first LED 3114a can uniformly illuminate the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, the thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be increased. It can be made thinner, and the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-mentioned effects can be surely embodied.

Further, since the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 uses the first LED 3114a as a side-view type for planar light emission and the second LED 3114b as a top-view type, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 (decorative portion 3150). ), It is possible to add a portion that emits light with high brightness in a dot shape to the portion that is light-emitting decorated in a plane shape by the first LED 3114a. As a result, since the light emission effect of the second LED 3114b can be sharpened, it is possible to easily present the optimum light emission effect according to the game state, and the player can be more entertained and the game can be played. It is possible to raise the expectation for the player and suppress the decline in the interest of the player.

Further, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is provided with a first LED accommodating portion 3113c into which the side view type first LED 3114a is inserted in the light guide emitting plate 3113, and receives light on the inner peripheral surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c. The portion 3113i is irradiated with the light from the first LED 3114a so that the light is incident on the inside of the main body portion 3113a. As a result, by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c at a position close to the desired portion to be light-emitting and decorated by the first LED 3114a, the desired portion can be light-emitting and decorated more brightly. The high LED decoration can be entertained by the player.

Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED into which the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b mounted on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are inserted from the rear into the light guide radiation plate 3113. Since it has the accommodating portion 3113d, by inserting the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b into the first LED accommodating portion 3113c and the second LED accommodating portion 3113d, the rear surface of the main body portion 3113a is backed and the front surface of the rear decorative substrate 3114 The thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner.

Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the leg portion 3113f protruding rearward of the light guide radiation plate 3113 comes into contact with the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and between the main body portion 3113a and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. Since a gap is formed in the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, heat from the first LED 3114a, the second LED 3114b, etc. mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be released through the gap, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 It is possible to suppress the temperature rise and reduce the influence of heat.

Further, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can form a gap between the main body portion 3113a of the light guide radiation plate 3113 and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 by the leg portion 3113f, and has a plurality of openings in the decorative body base 3115. Since the portion 3115c is provided, the surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be ventilated through the gap and the opening 3115c by raising and lowering the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, and the first LED 3114a and the second LED 3114b, And the heat from the electronic component 3114e and the like can be dissipated to suppress the temperature rise of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114.

A temperature sensor is provided on the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, and when the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 (back-rear decorative substrate 3114) becomes higher than a predetermined temperature, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 moves up and down. May be made to increase the frequency (probability) of execution. As a result, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be moved up and down to ventilate the surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be cooled to suppress the occurrence of defects due to heat.

Further, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 surrounds the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 from the rear side by the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115, and the outer periphery of the flange portion 3115b is surrounded by the light guide radiation plate 3113. It is surrounded by a flange portion 3113b. As a result, the shortest route along the surface from the metal decorative portion 3111d of the metal foil provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is guided by the presence of the flange portion 3115b of the decorative body base 3115. Since it meanders around the flange portion 3113b of the plate 3113, a long creepage distance EL can be obtained, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d flows to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 to flow to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114. It is possible to prevent the 3114 from being damaged.

Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the copper foil 3114d constituting the circuit is provided on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 at a position separated from the outer periphery of the substrate main body 3114c by a predetermined distance inside the SL. Even with this predetermined distance SL, the creepage distance EL and the space distance can be lengthened, the insulation property against discharge such as static electricity and short circuit can be improved, and damage to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 due to discharge or the like can be suppressed.

Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the metal decorative portion 3111d provided on the front surface of the decorative body 3111 is provided only on the front surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and is provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. Not. As a result, the creepage distance EL to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 can be lengthened by the length of the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, and the same effect as described above can be obtained. Further, since the metal decorative portion 3111d is not provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the area of the metal decorative portion 3111d is larger than that in the case where the metal decorative portion 3111d is provided on the side surface of the first decorative protrusion 3111a. It can be made smaller, and the amount of static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d can be reduced. Therefore, since the discharge voltage can be lowered, even if a discharge occurs in the back-rear decorative substrate 3114, its influence can be reduced.

By the way, as described above, the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down (movable) between the retracted position moved upward and the appearance position moved downward by the drive of the rear-rear drive motor 3126. Therefore, friction occurs in the left slider 3116, the right slider 3117, and the like each time the vehicle is moved up and down, and the static electricity generated by the friction is likely to be accumulated on the surface of the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110. Since the decorative body 3111 and the decorative body base 3115 constituting the surface of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 are made of synthetic resin having low conductivity, even if a large amount of static electricity is accumulated, their surfaces are formed. It is difficult for the static electricity accumulated in the whole to be discharged at once. On the other hand, since the metal decorative portion 3111d made of the metal foil of the decorative body 3111 has high conductivity, the static electricity accumulated on the entire surface of the metal decorative portion 3111d is easily discharged at once. For this reason, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 of the present embodiment, static electricity is likely to be accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d on the front surface of the decorative body 3111. However, as described above, the metal decorative portion 3111d Since the creepage distance EL to the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is sufficiently long, the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is not damaged by the discharge of static electricity, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved up and down, and the back-rear movable decorative body is movable. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be enjoyed both with a light emitting effect in which the 3110 is light-emitting and decorated.

When the area of the metal decorative portion 3111d on which static electricity is accumulated is a predetermined value or more (for example, 100 cm2 or more), it is desirable to connect the metal decorative portion 3111d to the GND (ground). As a result, it is possible to reliably prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3111d from being discharged to the back-back decorative substrate 3114.

[5-9d-8. Another embodiment of the back-rear movable ornament]
Next, with respect to the back-rear movable decoration 3160, the back-rear movable decoration 3170, the back-rear movable decoration 3180, and the like, which are different from the above-mentioned back-rear movable decoration 3110, mainly with reference to FIG. 435. This will be described in detail. FIG. 435 (a) is an explanatory view showing a cross-sectional view of the configuration of the back-rear movable decorative body of the second embodiment, which is different from the back-rear movable decoration of FIG. 420, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the decorative body in the cross section, and (c) is the explanatory view which shows the structure of the back-rear movable decorative body of 4th Embodiment by the cross section.

As shown schematically in FIG. 435 (a), the back-rear movable decorative body 3160 of the second embodiment is provided behind the decorative body 3161 having a predetermined decoration on the front surface and the rear side of the decorative body 3161. A sheet-shaped decorative sheet 3162 provided with a predetermined decoration, a light guide emitting plate 3163 provided on the rear side of the decorative sheet 3162 and internally radiating light in a direction along the front surface, and a light guide emitting plate. It includes a back-rear decorative substrate 3164 on which a plurality of LEDs 3164a that irradiate the inside of the 3163 with light in a direction along the front surface are mounted on the front surface.

The decorative body 3161 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3160 includes a transparent flat plate-shaped main body portion 3161a, a flange portion 3161b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 3161a, and a metal provided on the front surface of the main body portion 3161a. It has a decorative portion 3161c and. The main body 3161a may be flat or may be decorated in a relief shape with irregularities. The metal decoration portion 3161c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body portion 3161a, and constitutes a predetermined decoration. The metal decorative portion 3161c may be formed by foil pressing, may be formed by plating, or may be formed by thin film deposition.

The decorative sheet 3162 is a transparent sheet on which a predetermined decoration (picture) is printed. In the decorative sheet 3162, a portion having low transparency in decoration is located at a portion in front of the LED 3164a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 (not shown). This makes it difficult to see the LED3164a from the front. The decorative sheet 3162 is formed to have a size smaller than the inner peripheral shape of the flange portion 3161b in the decorative body 3161.

The light guide radiation plate 3163 is formed in a flat plate shape having the same size as the decorative sheet 3162, and has an LED accommodating portion 3163a into which the LED3164a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 is inserted from the rear, and a plurality of rear surfaces provided. It has a reflecting portion 3163b. The LED accommodating portion 3163a is a hole penetrating the light guide emitting plate 3163 in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference is formed in a quadrangle along the outer circumference of the LED 3164a. Each of the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b is recessed forward in a triangular cross section, and is provided only at a predetermined portion. Each of the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b is provided so as to reflect the light from the determined LED accommodating portion 3163a forward, and is arranged in a concentric fan shape centered on the determined LED accommodating portion 3163a. .. That is, the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b are formed so as to strongly reflect light from a specific direction forward. It should be noted that the plurality of reflecting portions 3163b can reflect light from an unspecified direction forward, similarly to the reflecting portion 3113e of the light guide emitting plate 3113 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. It may be provided on almost the entire surface of the rear surface.

The back-rear decorative substrate 3164 is formed to have the same size as the decorative sheet 3162 and the light guide radiation plate 3163. A plurality of side view type LEDs 3164a, which are inserted from the rear into the LED accommodating portion 3163a of the light guide emitting plate 3163, are mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3164. Although not shown, the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 has a predetermined circuit pattern formed of copper foil at a portion inside the SL from the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 on the front surface and the rear surface. Further, the back-back decorative substrate 3164 has a coating film made of a white solder resist formed on the surface (both sides).

In the assembled state of the back-rear movable decorative body 3160 of the present embodiment, the decorative sheet 3162 is in contact with the rear surface of the main body portion 3161a of the decorative body 3161, and the front surface of the light guide radiation plate 3163 is in contact with the rear surface of the decorative sheet 3162. Is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide emitting plate 3163, and the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide emitting plate 3163. As a result, the thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3160 in the front-rear direction is reduced. The flange portion 3161b of the decorative body 3161 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3164. As a result, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3160, the outer periphery of the decorative sheet 3162, the light guide radiation plate 3163, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 is covered with the flange portion 3161b, making it difficult to see the outer peripheral surfaces from the outside. It looks good.

In this back-rear movable decorative body 3160, since the flange portion 3161b extends rearward from the main body portion 3161a of the decorative body 3161 so as to cover the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3164, the metal decorative portion on the front surface of the main body portion 3161a. The creepage distance EL from 3161c to the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 (copper foil) can be set to a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decoration portion 3161c flows to the back-rear decorative substrate 3164 to decorate the back-rear decoration. It is possible to prevent the substrate 3164 from being damaged.

As described above, according to the back-rear movable decorative body 3160 of the present embodiment, it is possible to obtain the same action and effect as the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 described above. The back-rear movable decorative body 3160 may be provided with a decorative body base that covers the back side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3164.

Subsequently, the back-rear movable decorative body 3170 of the third embodiment has the outer decorative body 3171 formed in a frame shape and the inner side (frame) of the outer decorative body 3171 as schematically shown in FIG. 435 (b). A flat plate-shaped interior decoration body 3172 that closes the inside), and a light guide radiation plate 3173 that is provided behind the interior decoration body 3172 and radiates light in a direction along the entire surface forward. The back-rear decorative substrate 3174 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 3174a mounted on the front surface to irradiate the inside of the light guide radiation plate 3173 with light in a direction along the front surface.

The outer decorative body 3171 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3170 has a main body portion 3171a that is frame-shaped and extends forward and backward, a support portion 3171b that projects inward from the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 3171a in a flat plate shape, and a main body portion 3171a. It has a metal decorative portion 3171c provided on the front surface of the above. The distance from the front end of the main body 3171a to the front surface of the support 3171b is the same as the thickness of the interior decoration 3172 in the front-rear direction. The metal decoration portion 3171c is provided on a part of the front surface of the main body portion 3171a, and constitutes a predetermined decoration. The metal decorative portion 3171c may be formed by foil pressing, may be formed by plating, or may be formed by thin film deposition.

Although not shown, the interior decoration body 3172 is formed with a relief-like decoration having irregularities. The inner decoration body 3172 is attached so as to close the opening on the front side of the frame-shaped outer decoration body 3171.

The light guide radiation plate 3173 is formed to have substantially the same size as the interior decoration body 3172. The light guide radiation plate 3173 is inserted into the frame of the exterior decoration body 3171, and the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The light guide radiation plate 3173 has an LED accommodating portion 3173a into which the LED 3174a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 is inserted from the rear, and a plurality of reflecting portions 3173b provided on the rear surface. The LED accommodating portion 3173a is a hole penetrating the light guide emitting plate 3173 in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference is formed in a quadrangle along the outer circumference of the LED 3174a. A plurality of reflecting portions 3173b extend in an arc shape around a predetermined LED accommodating portion 3173a and are provided in a plurality of concentric circles. The reflective portion 3173b has a triangular cross section. The plurality of reflecting portions 3173b are provided so as to reflect the light from the determined LED accommodating portion 3173a forward. That is, the plurality of reflecting portions 3173b are formed so as to strongly reflect light from a specific direction forward. It should be noted that the plurality of reflecting portions 3173b can reflect light from an unspecified direction forward, similarly to the reflecting portion 3113e of the light guide emitting plate 3113 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. It may be provided on almost the entire surface of the rear surface.

The back-rear decorative substrate 3174 is formed to have the same size as the light guide radiation plate 3173. A plurality of side-view type LEDs 3174a, which are inserted from the rear into the LED accommodating portion 3173a of the light guide emitting plate 3173, are mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3174. Although not shown, the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 has a predetermined circuit pattern formed of copper foil at a portion inside the SL from the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 on the front surface and the rear surface. Further, the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 has a coating film made of a white solder resist formed on the surface (both sides).

In the assembled state of the back-rear movable decorative body 3170 of the present embodiment, the inner decorative body 3172 is fitted into the frame of the outer decorative body 3171 from the front, and the front surface of the outer decorative body 3171 and the front surface of the inner decorative body 3172. Are substantially in agreement with each other, and the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rear surface of the interior decoration body 3172 is in contact with the front surface of the support portion 3171b. Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3170, the light guide radiating plate 3173 and the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 are inserted from the rear into the frame of the outer decorative body 3171, and the light guide radiating plate 3173 is placed on the rear surface of the support portion 3171b. The vicinity of the outer periphery of the front surface is in contact, and the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 is in contact with the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3173. As a result, the thickness of the back-rear movable decorative body 3170 in the front-rear direction is reduced. In the back-rear movable decorative body 3170, a gap having a thickness of the support portion 3171b is formed between the inner decorative body 3172 and the light guide radiation plate 3173.

The main body portion 3171a of the outer decorative body 3171 extends rearward to the same position as the rear surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3174. In the back-rear movable decorative body 3160, the outer periphery of the inner decorative body 3172, the light guide radiation plate 3173, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 is covered with the main body portion 3171a of the outer decorative body 3171, and the outer peripheral surfaces thereof are covered from the outside. It makes it difficult to see and makes it look good.

Since the back-rear movable decorative body 3170 covers the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 by the main body portion 3171a extending to the rear of the outer decorative body 3171, the metal decorative portion 3171c on the front surface of the main body portion 3171a The creepage distance EL to the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 (copper foil) can be set to a sufficient distance, and the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3171c flows to the back-rear decorative substrate 3174, and the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 Can be prevented from being damaged.

As described above, according to the back-rear movable decorative body 3170 of the present embodiment, the same action and effect as the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be obtained. A metal decorative portion may also be provided on the front surface of the internal decorative body 3172. Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3170, a decorative body base that covers the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3174 may be provided.

Subsequently, the back-rear movable decorative body 3180 of the fourth embodiment has the outer decorative body 3181 formed in a frame shape and the inner side (frame) of the outer decorative body 3181 as schematically shown in FIG. 435 (c). A translucent interior decoration body 3182 that closes the inside) and a back-rear decorative substrate 3183 that is provided behind the interior decoration body 3182 and has a plurality of LEDs 3183a that can irradiate light forward are mounted on the front surface. And have.

The outer decorative body 3181 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3180 covers the entire surface of the flat plate frame-shaped main body portion 3181a, the flange portion 3181b extending rearward from the outer circumference of the main body portion 3181a, and the main body portion 3181a and the flange portion 3181b. It has a metal decorative portion 3181c that covers it. The metal decorative portion 3181c is provided on the entire surface of the outer decorative body 3181. The metal decorative portion 3181c may be formed by plating or may be formed by thin film deposition.

The interior decoration body 3182 is formed of a transparent member. The inner decorative body 3182 has a flat plate-shaped main body 3182a whose outer shape is larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped main body 3181a of the outer decorative body 3181 and smaller than the inner circumference of the flange 3181b, and rearward from the outer circumference of the main body 3182a. It has a flange portion 3182b extending to the surface and a flange portion 3182b. Although not shown, the main body 3182a is formed with a relief-like decoration having irregularities on substantially the entire surface.

The back-rear decorative substrate 3183 is formed to have an outer shape smaller than the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182. That is, the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 is formed in a size such that a gap of a predetermined distance or more is formed between the outer circumference and the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration body 3182. A plurality of top view type LEDs 3183a are mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3183. Although not shown, the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 has a predetermined circuit pattern formed of copper foil at a portion inside the SL from the outer periphery of the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 on the front surface and the rear surface. Further, the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 has a coating film made of a white solder resist formed on the surface (both sides).

In the assembled state of the back-rear movable decorative body 3180 of the present embodiment, the inner decorative body 3182 and the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 are inserted into the frame of the frame-shaped outer decorative body 3181 from the rear. In the back-rear movable decorative body 3180, the front surface near the outer periphery of the inner decorative body 3182 is in contact with the rear surface of the main body portion 3181a of the outer decorative body 3181, and the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182 is the outer decorative body 3181. It extends rearward to the same position as the rear end of the flange portion 3181b. That is, the inner peripheral side of the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181 is covered with the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182. In other words, the outer circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182 is covered with the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181. Therefore, the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181 hides the outer periphery of the inner decorative body 3182 and the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 from the outside.

The back-rear movable decorative body 3180 is provided with the flange portion 3182b of the inner decorative body 3182 inside the flange portion 3181b of the outer decorative body 3181 provided with the metal decorative portion 3181c, and the inner decorative body 3182. Since the outer circumference of the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 provided on the rear side of the main body 3182a is separated from the inner circumference of the flange portion 3182b of the inner decoration 3182, the metal decoration portion 3181c to the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 (copper) The creepage distance EL to the foil) can be set to a sufficient distance to prevent the static electricity accumulated in the metal decorative portion 3181c from flowing to the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 and damaging the back-rear decorative substrate 3183. can do.

As described above, according to the back-rear movable decorative body 3180 of the present embodiment, it is possible to obtain the same action and effect as the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 described above. A metal decorative portion may also be provided on the front surface of the main body portion 3182a of the internal decorative body 3182. Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3180, a decorative body base that covers the rear side of the back-rear decorative substrate 3183 may be provided.

[5-9e. Back bottom left production unit and back bottom right production unit]
Next, the back lower left effect unit 3200 and the back lower right effect unit 3250 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 436 to 439 and the like. FIG. 436 (a) is a perspective view of the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 436 (b) shows the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit in the back unit behind. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 437 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 438 shows the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 439 is an explanatory view showing the movable configuration of the back lower left effect unit and the back lower right effect unit from the front.

The lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower back right effect unit 3250 of the back unit 3000 are attached to the lower end of the back rear effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower back right effect unit 3250 are located on the left and right sides of the lower back middle decorative unit 3320 of the lower back middle effect unit 3300 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and from the front It is visible through a transparent game panel 1100, a front unit 2000, and the like.

First, the lower left production unit 3200 will be described. The lower back left effect unit 3200 is provided behind a translucent lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 having a shaft shaft 3201a protruding rearward and a lower back left rotating decorative body 3201, and is translucent. The back lower left decorative board 3202, the back lower left decorative board 3203 which is provided behind the back lower left decorative body 3202, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and the back lower left decorative board 3203. The lower back left decorative body 3201 is rotatably attached and the lower back left decorative body 3202 is attached to the unit base 3204 attached to the lower end of the left side of the back rear effect unit 3100. , Is equipped.

Further, the lower back left effect unit 3200 is attached to the lower back left drive motor 3205 and the lower back left drive motor 3205, which are attached to the front surface of the unit base 3204 so that the rotation shaft projects rearward. The spur gear-shaped drive gear 3206 and the spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3207, which are meshed with the drive gear 3206 and are rotatably attached to the unit base 3204, are meshed with the first transmission gear 3207. The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3208 rotatably attached to the unit base 3204 and the second transmission gear 3208 are meshed with each other and attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3201a of the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201. It is provided with a spur gear-shaped third transmission gear 3209 and a front cover 3210 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3204 below the back lower left decorative body 3202.

The lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3201a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface of the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 is formed to have a length penetrating the lower back left decorative body 3202, the lower back left decorative substrate 3203, and the unit base 3204. .. The lower back left decorative body 3202 is formed by stacking two cherry blossoms of the same size as the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 on the front and back, and rotating the rear petals so that they are located between the front petals. It is formed in a shape that looks like it was made.

In the lower back left decorative board 3203, the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The lower back left decorative substrate 3203 is provided with a lower back left detection sensor 3203a on the rear surface thereof to detect the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209. The lower back left detection sensor 3203a penetrates the unit base 3204 and projects rearward. The third transmission gear 3209 has a detection piece 3209a that protrudes forward and is detected by the back bottom left detection sensor 3203a of the back bottom left decorative substrate 3203. In the state where the detection piece 3209a of the third transmission gear 3209 is detected by the back bottom left detection sensor 3203a, the back bottom left rotation decoration 3201 is in a state where one petal is directed upward (see FIG. 439). ).

When the drive gear 3206 is rotated by the back lower left drive motor 3205, the back lower left effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment is backed via the first transmission gear 3207, the second transmission gear 3208, and the third transmission gear 3209. The lower left rotation decorative body 3201 can be rotated around an axis in the front-rear direction. Further, the lower back left effect unit 3200 can emit and decorate the lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 and the lower back left decorative body 3202 by emitting light of a plurality of LEDs of the lower back left decorative substrate 3203.

Next, the back lower right effect unit 3250 will be described. The lower back right effect unit 3250 is provided behind a translucent lower right rotating decorative body 3251 having a shaft shaft 3251a protruding rearward and a lower right rotating decorative body 3251, and is translucent. 3252 on the lower right side of the back, and 3253 on the lower right side of the back, which is provided behind the lower right decorative body 3252 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and 3253 on the lower right side of the back. The lower back right decorative body 3251 is rotatably attached and the lower back right decorative body 3252 is attached to the unit base 3254 attached to the lower end of the right side of the back rear effect unit 3100. , Is equipped.

Further, the lower back right effect unit 3250 is attached to the lower right drive motor 3255, which is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3254 so that the rotation shaft projects rearward, and the lower right drive motor 3255. The spur gear-shaped drive gear 3256 and the spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3257, which are meshed with the drive gear 3256 and are rotatably attached to the unit base 3254, are meshed with the first transmission gear 3257. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3258 rotatably attached to the unit base 3254 and a second transmission gear 3258 meshing with each other and attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3251a of the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251. It includes a spur gear-shaped third transmission gear 3259 and a front cover 3260 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3254 below the lower right decorative body 3252.

The lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom. The shaft shaft 3251a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface of the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 is formed to have a length penetrating the lower back right decorative body 3252, the lower right decorative substrate 3253, and the unit base 3254. .. The lower back right decorative body 3252 is formed by stacking two cherry blossoms of the same size as the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 on the front and back, and rotating the petals on the rear side so that they are located between the petals on the front side. It is formed in a shape that looks like it was made.

In the lower back right decorative board 3253, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The lower back right decorative substrate 3253 is provided with a lower back right detection sensor 3253a on the rear surface thereof to detect the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259. The lower back right detection sensor 3253a penetrates the unit base 3254 and projects rearward. The third transmission gear 3259 has a detection piece 3259a that projects forward and is detected by the back bottom right detection sensor 3253a of the back bottom right decorative substrate 3253. In the state where the detection piece 3259a of the third transmission gear 3259 is detected by the lower back right detection sensor 3253a, the lower back right rotation decoration 3251 is in a state where one petal is directed upward (see FIG. 439). ).

When the drive gear 3256 is rotated by the back lower right drive motor 3255, the back lower right effect unit 3250 of the present embodiment is backed via the first transmission gear 3257, the second transmission gear 3258, and the third transmission gear 3259. The lower right rotation decoration body 3251 can be rotated around an axis in the front-rear direction. Further, the lower back right effect unit 3250 can illuminate the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 and the lower back right decorative body 3252 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs on the lower back right decorative substrate 3253.

[5-9f. Under the back production unit]
Subsequently, the under-back middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 440 to 447 and the like. FIG. 440 (a) is a perspective view of the back lower middle effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 440 (b) is a perspective view of the back lower middle effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 441 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower middle effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 442 is an exploded view of the back lower middle effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view. FIG. 443 is an exploded perspective view of the under-back middle decoration unit of the under-back middle effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 444 shows the under-back middle decoration unit of the under-back middle effect unit disassembled from behind. It is an exploded perspective view as seen. FIG. 445 is an explanatory view showing the raising and lowering of the lower back middle decorative body unit by the lower back middle raising and lowering mechanism in the lower back middle effect unit. FIG. 446 (a) is an explanatory view showing from the front the configuration of the back lower middle decorative body unit in the back lower middle effect unit, which is related to the rotation of the back lower middle rotating decorative body, and FIG. 446 (b) is the back lower middle rotating decorative body. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the stop position and each detection sensor in a table. FIG. 447 is an explanatory view showing the arrangement of the LEDs of the under-back middle decoration unit in the under-back middle effect unit from the front.

The lower back middle effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is arranged below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The lower back middle effect unit 3300 is attached to the rear side of the lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower back right effect unit 3250. The under-back middle effect unit 3300 has an under-back middle decoration unit 3320 having a back-down middle-rotating decorative body 3310 that can rotate around an axis in the front-rear direction, and an under-back middle-elevating mechanism that raises and lowers the back-lower middle decoration unit 3320. 3350 and.

The under-back middle-rotating decorative body 3310 of the under-back middle effect unit 3300 is formed in a regular hexagonal shape when viewed from the front. The lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 has six number decorations formed in relief shape from "1" to "6" on the entire surface, and circles at every 60 degree angle in the clockwise direction around the center. It is placed on the circumference. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has translucency. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has a recess 3311 on the rear surface capable of accommodating the diffusion lens 3321 in the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320, the first lower back middle decorative substrate 3322, and the front end side of the substrate fixing member 3323. Have.

As shown in FIGS. 443 and 444, the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is provided behind the diffuser lens 3321 provided behind the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 and behind the diffuser lens 3321. The first decorative substrate 3322 under the back and the first decorative substrate 3322 under the back are mounted on the diffuser lens 3321 so as to sandwich the first decorative substrate 3322 under the back, on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and project rearward in a columnar shape. A substrate fixing member 3323 having a shaft portion 3323a and a shaft hole 3324a into which the shaft portion 3323a of the substrate fixing member 3323 is rotatably inserted are provided. It has a base 3324 and.

Further, the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 has a region detection piece 3325 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 and extends in a semi-arc on the same axis as the shaft hole 3324a, and a circumference coaxial with the region detection piece 3325. A plurality of position detection pieces 3326 protruding from the rotation base 3324 above, and a spur gear-shaped rotation gear 3327 provided on the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 are provided.

Further, the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is provided behind the rotation base 3324 and has a penetrating opening 3328a through which the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 can pass, so that the light transmission property is increased. The lower back middle decorative body 3328, the lower back middle second decorative board 3329 provided behind the back lower middle decorative body 3328 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the back lower middle second decorative board 3329. It is attached to the front surface of a plurality of area identification sensors 3330 that can detect the area detection piece 3325, and the position identification that can detect the position detection piece 3326 and is attached to the front surface of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back. It includes a sensor 3331 and.

Further, the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is provided behind the lower back middle decorative substrate 3329, and the rear end of the shaft portion 3323a of the substrate fixing member 3323 is attached and the back lower middle decorative body 3328 is attached. The movable base 3332 to be mounted, the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3332 so that the rotation shaft protrudes forward, and the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 are attached to the rotation shaft. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3334 that meshes with the rotary gear 3327, a rear cover 3335 that is attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332, and a rear lower middle lifting mechanism 3350 that is attached to the rear side of the movable base 3332. The elevating slider 3336 is slidably guided in the vertical direction by the slide rail 3360 of the above.

The front end side of the diffusion lens 3321, the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back, and the substrate fixing member 3323 is located between the rotating decorative body 3310 in the lower back and the rotating base 3324 in the assembled state, and is in the lower back. It is housed in the recess 3311 of the rotating decoration body 3310, and is not in contact with either the rotating decoration body 3310 or the rotation base 3324 under the back. By appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back to emit light, the portion of the number decoration (relief) in the rotating decorative body 3310 in the lower back can be light-emittingly decorated. The LED of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back is a full-color LED. Further, the LED of the second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back is a full-color LED.

The area detection piece 3325 has a diameter larger than that of the rotary gear 3327 and projects rearward from the rear surface of the rotary base 3324. As shown in FIG. 446 (a), the area detection piece 3325 has a number of "3", "4", and "5" between the numerical decorations of "2" and "3" in the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310. Through the number decoration, it is formed in an arc shape in a range of 180 degrees about the rotation axis from between the number decorations of "5" and "6".

Each of the plurality of (here, six) position detection pieces 3326 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the rotation base 3324 on a circumference having a diameter larger than that of the area detection piece 3325. The position detection pieces 3326 are provided at equal intervals at an angle of θ degrees (here, 60 degrees) in the circumferential direction so that each position detection piece 3326 is located at the center of the numerical decoration of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310. .. In the present embodiment, one position detection piece 3326 is formed in an arc shape within a predetermined angle α degree (20 degrees to 25 degrees, here, 23.34 degrees) about the rotation axis, and is adjacent to the position detection piece 3326. There is an interval of 2 × β degrees (θ degree-α degrees (here, 36.66 degrees)) with the position detection piece 3326 as the center of the rotation axis (see FIG. 446 (a)). ..

A plurality of (here, three) area identification sensors 3330 are provided so as to be arranged at intervals of θ degrees (60 degrees) around the rotation axis of the back lower middle rotating decoration body 3310. The three area identification sensors 3330 are provided in the order of the first area identification sensor 3330a, the second area identification sensor 3330b, and the third area identification sensor 3330c in the clockwise order. In the present embodiment, the three area identification sensors 3330 are of "3", "4", and "5" in a state where the decoration of "1" of the back lower middle rotating decoration body 3310 is positioned directly above the rotation center. It is provided at a position corresponding to the number decoration (see FIG. 446 (a)).

The position identification sensor 3331 is provided at a position at an angle of γ degrees (here, 30 degrees) in the counterclockwise direction about the rotation axis of the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 from the first region identification sensor 3330a. ing.

The movable base 3332 has an elevating pin 3332a projecting from the lower part of the rear surface to the rear in a columnar shape. The elevating pin 3332a is slidably inserted into the second slit 3357b of the elevating arm 3357 in the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350. The lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 is a stepping motor capable of detecting the rotation position.

The lower back middle decoration unit 3320 rotates the drive gear 3334 by the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333, thereby rotating the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction via the rotation gear 3327. Can be done. Further, the back lower middle decorative body unit 3320 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back lower middle first decorative board 3322 and the back lower middle second decorative board 3329, respectively, thereby causing the back lower middle decorative body 3310 to emit light. And the lower back middle decorative body 3328 can be light-emitting decorated.

As shown in FIGS. 441 and 442, the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350 extends to the left and right, and both ends are attached to the lower back left effect unit 3200 and the lower right effect unit 3250, and the unit base 3351 and the unit base 3351. The flat bottom middle lift drive motor 3352, which is attached to the front surface of the unit so that the rotation shaft protrudes rearward, and the flat bottom middle lift drive motor 3352, which is attached to the rotation shaft and partly faces the front side of the unit base 3351. The gear-shaped drive gear 3353 and the spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3354, which are meshed with the drive gear 3353 and are rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, are meshed with the first transmission gear 3354. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3355 rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3356a meshing with the second transmission gear 3355, and an outer circumference of the front surface of the gear portion 3356a. It has a drive pin 3356b that projects forward in a columnar shape from the vicinity, and includes an elevating cam gear 3356 that is rotatably attached to the upper center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit base 3351.

Further, the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350 is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 on the base end side extending in the left-right direction, and the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 is slidably inserted in the longitudinal direction. The second slit 3357a, which extends in the longitudinal direction on the tip side of the first slit 3357a and the first slit 3357a, and the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 in the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is slidably inserted. , And an elevating arm 3357 having a detection piece 3357c provided at the tip thereof, and an underside middle elevating detection sensor 3358a capable of detecting the detection piece 3357c of the elevating arm 3357 are provided, and the unit base 3351 is provided. It is provided with a relay board 3358 under the back, which is attached to the front surface.

Further, the lower back middle elevating mechanism 3350 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, the elevating cam gear 3356, and the elevating arm 3357 from the front side. A front cover 3359 having a vertically extending elevating slit 3359a through which an elevating pin 3332a of a movable base 3332 in the decorative body unit 3320 is inserted, and an elevating and lowering in the lower middle decorative body unit 3320 attached to the front surface of the front cover 3359. The slide rail 3360 that guides the slider 3336 in the vertical direction, the gear cover 3361 attached to the rear side of the unit base 3351 so as to cover the drive gear 3353 from the rear, and the tip side of the elevating arm 3357 move upward (front). It includes a spring 3362 that urges the elevating arm 3357 to rotate in a clockwise direction with respect to the visual view.

The lower back middle elevating drive motor 3352 is attached to the lower part on the left side of the center in the left-right direction of the unit base 3351. The elevating arm 3357 is rotatably attached so that the base end side is on the right side of the elevating cam gear 3356 and at the same height as the center of the elevating cam gear 3356. The tip side of the elevating arm 3357 extends to the left of the elevating cam gear 3356.

The lower back middle relay board 3358 includes the lower back middle first decorative board 3322, the back lower middle second decorative board 3329, the area identification sensor 3330, the position identification sensor 3331, the back lower middle rotation drive motor 3333, and the back lower middle elevating drive motor. The connection between the 3352, the lower back middle lift detection sensor 3358a, and the effect drive board 1720 is relayed.

The front cover 3359 is attached to the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction, and the elevating slit 3359a is provided on the left side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the left-right direction. The elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 in the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is slidably inserted into the elevating slit 3359a of the front cover 3359. The slide rail 3360 is provided on the right side of the center of the unit base 3351 in the front cover 3359 in the left-right direction. The elevating slit 3359a and the slide rail 3360 can support the lower back middle decorative unit 3320 so as to slide straight in the vertical direction.

When the drive gear 3353 is rotated by the under-back middle elevating drive motor 3352, the under-back middle elevating mechanism 3350 passes through the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356a of the elevating cam gear 3356. The 3356 can be rotated. Then, the elevating arm 3357 can be rotated by the drive pin 3356b that revolves by the rotation of the elevating cam gear 3356 through the first slit 3357a into which the drive pin 3356b is slidably inserted. The lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 can be moved up and down together with the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 via the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 slidably inserted into the two slits 3357b.

Next, the movements of the under-back middle decorative body 3310 and the under-back middle decorative unit 3320 in the under-back middle effect unit 3300 will be described in detail. In a normal state, the under-back middle effect unit 3300 is in a state of a descending position in which the under-back middle decoration unit 3320 is moved most downward. In this normal state, the elevating arm 3357 in the under-back middle elevating mechanism 3350 is located at the tip end side below the base end side, and the tip detection piece 3357c moves up and down under the back-bottom middle of the back-bottom middle relay board 3358. It is detected by the detection sensor 3358a (see FIG. 445 (a)).

In this normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 is located below the center of revolution and near the end of the elevating arm 3357 in the first slit 3357a on the proximal end side. .. More specifically, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3356b with the first slit 3357a extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356. As a result, even if an urging force for rotating the elevating arm 3357 in the clockwise direction is applied by the spring 3362, the force line of the urging force is in contact with the first slit 3357a. Since the elevating cam gear 3356 passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3356, the elevating cam gear 3356 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 does not revolve, the elevating arm 3357 does not rotate, the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 does not move from the lowering position by the urging force of the spring 3362, and the spring. The urging force of 3362 does not act on the lower back middle elevating drive motor 3352 via the elevating arm 3357 and the like.

In a normal state, the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 may be brought into contact with the end portion of the first slit 3357a on the proximal end side. As a result, when the elevating arm 3357 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction due to the urging force of the spring 3362, the elevating cam gear 3356 moves in the counterclockwise direction due to the force acting from the first slit 3357a via the drive pin 3356b. Try to rotate. At this time, the drive pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move toward the base end side of the elevating arm 3357, but the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the end end side of the first slit 3357a. , The drive pin 3356b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the elevating arm 3357 is locked, so that the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 can be prevented from moving upward.

In the normal state of the underside middle effect unit 3300, among the plurality of number decorations in the underside middle rotation decoration body 3310, the number decoration located at the uppermost side is inside the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is located and can be clearly seen from the front (player side) (see FIG. 389 and the like). Further, in the normal state, the numerical decoration located at the lowermost position is located behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, and is located behind the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back and the middle first in the back. (Ii) By emitting light from the LED of the decorative substrate 3329, in addition to the light emitting decoration of the lower back middle rotating decoration, the first starting port 2002 formed of the transparent member can also be made to emit light (see FIG. 398 and the like). ).

In this normal state, when the drive gear 3353 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view by the lower back middle elevating drive motor 3352, the first transmission gear 3354, the second transmission gear 3355, and the gear portion 3356a are used. As a result, the elevating cam gear 3356 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 revolves in the clockwise direction. When the drive pin 3356b revolves, the inner surface of the first slit 3357a in contact with the drive pin 3356b is pressed upward, the drive pin 3356b slides in the first slit 3357a toward the tip side, and the elevating arm. It rotates in the clockwise direction around the base end side so that the tip end side of the 3357 moves upward.

By rotating the elevating arm 3357 in the clockwise direction, the elevating pin 3332a of the movable base 3332 inserted in the second slit 3357b on the tip end side of the elevating arm 3357 is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3357b. The decorative body unit 3320 under the back is moved upward via the elevating pin 3332a. Then, when the drive pin 3356b moves upward from the center of revolution, the drive pin 3356b slides in the first slit 3357a toward the proximal end side. At this time, in the elevating arm 3357, a urging force in the clockwise direction is applied by the spring 3362, so that the urging force assists the upward movement of the decorative body unit 3320 in the lower back, and is in the lower back. The load applied to the elevating drive motor 3352 is reduced.

When the drive pin 3356b revolves further in the clockwise direction and reaches the vicinity of the end portion of the first slit 3357a on the base end side, the rotation of the drive gear 3353 by the lower back middle elevating drive motor 3352 is stopped and at the same time the drive The revolution of pin 3356b stops. As a result, the movement of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 by the elevating arm 3357 is stopped, and the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is in the state of the ascending position moved most upward.

In the state where the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 is in the raised position, the normal line passing through the contact point with the first slit 3357a in the drive pin 3356b extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356. As a result, even if a force for rotating the elevating arm 3357 in the counterclockwise direction is applied by the weight of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320, the force line of the force hits the first slit 3357a. Since the elevating cam gear 3356 passes through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3356 via the contacting drive pin 3356b, the elevating cam gear 3356 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3356b of the elevating cam gear 3356 does not revolve, the elevating arm 3357 does not rotate, the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 does not move downward from the ascending position, and the lower back middle decoration unit. The weight of the unit 3320 does not act on the lower back middle elevating drive motor 3352 via the elevating arm 3357 and the like.

In the state where the lower back middle decorative unit 3320 is in the raised position, the elevating cam gear 3356 may be further revolved so that the drive pin 3356b is brought into contact with the end portion on the base end side of the first slit 3357a. As a result, when the elevating arm 3357 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the lower back middle decoration unit 3320, the elevating cam gear 3356 is clocked by the force acting from the first slit 3357a via the drive pin 3356b. Try to rotate in the clockwise direction. At this time, the drive pin 3356b tries to revolve so as to move toward the base end side of the elevating arm 3357, but the drive pin 3356b is in contact with the end end side of the first slit 3357a. , The drive pin 3356b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the elevating arm 3357 is locked, so that the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 can be prevented from moving downward.

When the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is moved to the ascending position, most of the lower middle middle decorative body 3310 is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (furthermore, a game ball that rolls in the game area 5a). B is located above the bounce prevention member (stage cover 2515) provided on the center accessory 2500 that prevents B from bouncing from the outside to the inside of the center frame (peripheral wall portion 2501), and is forward (player). All numerical decorations can be seen well from the side) (see FIG. 479).

When the lower back middle decorative unit 3320 is moved to the lower position and then returned to the lower position, the lower back middle elevating drive motor 3352 rotates the drive gear 3353 in the opposite direction to the above, and the elevating arm 3357 Rotates in the counterclockwise direction, and the lower back middle decoration unit 3320 moves downward from the ascending position. Then, when the detection piece 3357c at the tip of the elevating arm 3357 is detected by the back lower middle elevating detection sensor 3358a of the back lower middle relay board 3358, the rotation of the drive gear 3353 is stopped by the back lower middle elevating drive motor 3352. , The center that prevents the gaming ball B that rolls in the lower middle decorative unit 3320 in the normal state (furthermore, the gaming ball B that rolls in the gaming area 5a) from the outside to the inside of the center frame (peripheral wall portion 2501). The bounce prevention member (stage cover 2515) provided on the accessory 2500 can be returned to the position where it overlaps when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

The under-back middle effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment rotates the drive gear 3334 by the under-back middle rotation drive motor 3333 in the under-back middle decoration unit 3320, thereby rotating the under-back middle rotation decoration unit 3310 via the rotation gear 3327. Can be rotated around an axis in the front-back direction. By rotating the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310, the six number decorations provided on the front surface rotate like a roulette wheel. The lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 can be rotated by the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 at any position such as a lowering position or an ascending position of the lower back middle decoration body unit 3320.

In the underside middle effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, one of a plurality of (here, 6) numerical decorations in the underside middle rotation decoration body 3310 is located directly above the rotation center (stop position). doing. For example, as shown in FIG. 446 (a), in the state where the number decoration of "1" in the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 is located at the top, the area detection piece 3325 of the rotation base 3324 is specified as the first area. It is detected by three area identification sensors 3330, which are a sensor 3330a, a second area identification sensor 3330b, and a third area identification sensor 3330c, and a plurality of (here, 6) position detection pieces 3326 are detected by the position identification sensor 3331. Is not detected.

Here, first, the relationship between the three area identification sensors 3330 and the six stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 will be described. In the state where the number decoration of "1" is set to the stop position, as described above, the first region identification sensor 3330a, the second region identification sensor 3330b, and the third region identification sensor 3330c are the region detection piece 3325 of the rotation base 3324. Is detected. That is, as shown in FIG. 446 (b), when the first region identification sensor 3330a, the second region identification sensor 3330b, and the third region identification sensor 3330c are detected, the numerical decoration of "1" is centered on the stop position. It is located within the range of ± 30 degrees.

When the first region identification sensor 3330a and the second region identification sensor 3330b detect and the third region identification sensor 3330c does not detect, the numerical decoration of "2" is in the region of ± 30 degrees centered on the stop position. Located within range.

Further, when the first region identification sensor 3330a detects and the second region identification sensor 3330b and the third region identification sensor 3330c do not detect, the numerical decoration of "3" is in the region of ± 30 degrees centered on the stop position. Located within range.

Further, when the first region identification sensor 3330a, the second region identification sensor 3330b, and the third region identification sensor 3330c are not detected, the numerical decoration of "4" is in the range of ± 30 degrees centered on the stop position. Located inside.

Further, when the first region identification sensor 3330a and the second region identification sensor 3330b are not detected and the third region identification sensor 3330c is detected, the numerical decoration of "5" is in the region of ± 30 degrees centered on the stop position. Located within range.

Further, when the first region identification sensor 3330a is not detected and the second region identification sensor 3330b and the third region identification sensor 3330c are detected, the number decoration of "6" is in the region of ± 30 degrees centered on the stop position. Located within range.

In this way, by combining the detection / non-detection of the three area identification sensors 3330 of the first area identification sensor 3330a, the second area identification sensor 3330b, and the third area identification sensor 3330c, any numerical decoration can determine the stop position. It is possible to know (detect) whether or not it is located in the including stop area.

Since the under-back middle rotation drive motor 3333 of the present embodiment is a stepping motor, when the area identification sensor 3330 detects the area detection piece 3325 and then rotates 30 degrees, the under-back middle rotation drive is driven. By stopping the rotation of the motor 3333, it is possible to stop the desired numerical decoration of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 at the stop position. However, in the case of performing such control, it is necessary to recognize the origin for stopping at the stop position while specifying the area of the stop position by the three area identification sensors 3330. There is a problem that the control for stopping the rotation of the 3310 becomes complicated and the load becomes high. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of position detection pieces 3326 for specifying the stop position and a position identification sensor 3331 for detecting the position detection piece 3326 are provided, and the origin is recognized by the position identification sensor 3331. Therefore, the complication of the control for stopping the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 is suppressed, and the load is reduced.

More specifically, when the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 wants to stop the desired numerical decoration at the stop position, the lower middle rotating decoration 3310 rotates and the three area identification sensors 3330 stop at the desired stop. When the combination satisfies the position, the position identification sensor 3331 is displaced in the rotation direction at an angle of 30 degrees with respect to the first region identification sensor 3330a, so that the position identification sensor 3331 detects the center of the position detection piece 3326. ing. In this state, the desired number is separated from the stop position by a rotation angle of 30 degrees.

In this state, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates α / 2 degrees (here, 11.67 degrees), which is the length of the position detection piece 3326, and further rotates, the position detection piece 3326 separates from the position identification sensor 3331. Therefore, the position identification sensor 3331 is not detected. The origin is the angle at which the position identification sensor 3331 is not detected. Then, when it is rotated by β degrees (here, 18.33 degrees) from there (from the origin), the rotation of the under-back middle rotation decoration body 3310 by the under-back middle rotation drive motor 3333 is stopped, so that a desired number is obtained. The decoration can be stopped exactly at the stop position.

In the above description, the rotation stop of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 has been described by an angle, but the rotation may be stopped by the rotation step of the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 made of a stepping motor. For example, when one rotation is 396 steps, the position detection piece 3326 is rotated 13 steps further when the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 is in a combination in which the three area identification sensors 3330 satisfy the desired stop positions. Apart from the position identification sensor 3331, the position identification sensor 3331 is not detected. When the position identification sensor 3331 rotates 20 steps from the non-detected angle, the rotation of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 by the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 is stopped to stop the desired number decoration. It can be stopped exactly at the position.

Next, the light emitting decoration in the underside middle effect unit 3300 will be described. As shown in FIG. 447, the under-back middle effect unit 3300 has a back-bottom middle decorative body unit 3320 equipped with a plurality of LEDs for light-emitting decoration of the back-lower middle rotating decorative body 3310. It includes a decorative substrate 3322 and a second decorative substrate 3329 in the lower back. The plurality of LEDs of the lower back middle first decorative substrate 3322 are located behind the six numerical decorations in the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310, and each of the numerical decorations can be independently luminescently decorated.

On the other hand, the plurality of LEDs of the lower back middle second decorative substrate 3329 are located behind the portion outside the plurality of numerical decorations in the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310, and are outside the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310. The periphery can be luminescently decorated.

As described above, the lower back middle effect unit 3300 can detect the rotation position of the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 to some extent by the three area identification sensors 3330, and therefore, based on the detection of the area identification sensor 3330. By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back, the number decorations are rotated in a state in which only specific numerical decorations are luminescent or decorated in different colors. It is possible to show the player a production that strongly attracts the player's attention.

Further, in the state where the lower back middle decorative body unit 3320 is in the lowered position, the numerical decoration on the lower side of the lower back middle decorative body 3310 is located behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. The first starting port 2002 can be light-emitting and decorated by causing the LED of the portion of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back to emit light. As a result, the player's attention can be directed to the first starting port 2002. In addition, when the game ball B wins a prize in the first starting port 2002, the LED of the first decorative substrate 3322 in the lower back is emitted (or, one emission mode is determined from a plurality of light emitting modes and the light is emitted. ) May be made.

As described above, according to the under-back middle effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment, the rotating under-back middle-rotating decorative body 3310 having six stop positions can detect a region having a length over three stop positions. A piece 3325 and six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to each stop position are provided, and a three-region identification sensor 3330 for detecting the area detection piece 3325 and one position identification for detecting the position detection piece 3326 are provided. Since the sensor 3331 and the sensor 3331 are provided, when the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 rotates, the three area identification sensors 3330 that detect the area detection piece 3325 increase in order from one side in the rotation direction and then decrease. This is repeated, and even until the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back is rotated to the next stop position, all the area identification sensors 3330 are not temporarily undetected, and the area detection piece 3325 is detected. By combining the area identification sensor 3330, the current rotation position of the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 can be roughly grasped.

Since the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is provided with six position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to each stop position, the lower back middle rotation is performed by detecting the area detection piece 3325 by the three area identification sensors 3330. After roughly detecting the rotation of the decorative body 3310 to an arbitrary stop position, the stop position can be accurately detected by detecting the position detection piece 3326 by one position identification sensor 3331, and the deviation of the stop position can be prevented. It is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 having a plurality of stop positions by reducing the number as much as possible.

Further, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately stopped at an arbitrary stop position, and the game is played by shifting the stop position. It is possible to prevent a person from giving a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to entertain the effect (movable effect) by the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotation speed of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is increased, the deviation of the stop position can be suppressed and the back side can be suppressed. By rotating the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the moving speed (rotational speed) of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is higher than that in the case where the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is reciprocated. Can be faster. Therefore, the fast-rotating under-back middle-rotating decorative body 3310 can give a strong impact to the player, and can strongly attract the player's attention, and at the same time, the rotation of the under-back middle-rotating decorative body 3310 can be performed. It can be entertained and can suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

In addition, since the lower back middle rotating ornament 3310 is supposed to rotate around the axis in the front-rear direction and a plurality of numerical decorations are provided on the front surface, the roulette wheel that rotates and stops at an arbitrary stop position after rotating round and round. Since such an effect can be shown to the player, the player can be thrilled and excited depending on whether or not the desired number decoration stops rotating at the stop position, and the movable effect by the rotating ornament 3310 under the back is provided. It can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 is an even number, the number of stop positions that can be handled by the minimum number of area identification sensors 3330 required for detecting the movement to an arbitrary stop position is increased. , The number of the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back is the same as that of the stop position, the ability (grasp of the stop position) by the plurality of area identification sensors 3330 can be maximized, and more stop positions are provided. The lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 are provided on the rotation base 3324 that rotates together with the back lower middle rotating decoration body 3310, the radius (diameter) of the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 is possible. It can be made larger, and the positioning accuracy of the stop position can be made higher.

In the above embodiment, the rotation base 3324 that rotates integrally (together) with the lower back middle rotating decoration body 3310 is provided with the area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326. The area detection piece 3325 and the position detection piece 3326 may be provided on a member that rotates with the rotation of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310, such as the drive gear 3334.

[5-9 g. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Subsequently, the back-up effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 448 to 455 and the like. FIG. 448 (a) is a perspective view of the back-up effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 448 (b) is a perspective view of the back-up effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 449 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 450 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. is there. FIG. 451 is an exploded perspective view of the back-up elevating decorative body unit in the back-up effect unit when the back-up elevating decorative body unit is disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. It is a figure.

FIG. 453 is an explanatory view showing the rotation mechanism of the back-up front rotation decoration body in the back-up effect unit from the front. FIG. 454 (a) is an explanatory view showing the elevating mechanism of the back-up elevating decorative body unit in the back-up effect unit from the front, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the elevating mechanism of the elevating decorative body unit, and the rotating mechanism of a back-up rear rotation decorative body from the front. FIG. 455 is an explanatory view showing the decorative substrate from the front in a state where the back-up elevating decorative body unit is moved to the appearance position in the back-up effect unit.

The back-up effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back-back effect unit 3100 above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. As shown in FIGS. 449 and 450, the back-up effect unit 3400 includes a back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 having a shaft shaft 3410a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface, and a back-up front rotation decoration body 3410. The back top front decoration body 3421 extending to the left and right through which the shaft shaft 3410a penetrates in the center in the left-right direction, and the back top front decoration body 3421 provided behind the back top front decoration body 3421 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. The front decorative substrate 3422 and the back upper front decorative substrate 3422 are provided behind the back upper front decorative substrate 3422, and the back upper front decorative body 3421 is attached to the front surface to rotatably support the shaft shaft 3410a of the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410. It is equipped with a unit base 3423 and.

Further, the back-up effect unit 3400 is between the rear cover 3424 which is attached so as to form a space between the rear surface of the unit base 3423 and the unit base 3423 whose rotation axis is forward on the rear surface of the rear cover 3424. The spur gear-shaped drive gear 3426 mounted on the rotating shaft of the back-up front rotation drive motor 3425 and the back-up front rotation drive motor 3425 mounted so as to project into the space of the above, and the drive gear 3426 mesh with each other. A rotary gear 3427 which has a spur gear shape and is attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3410a of the back upper front rotary decoration body 3410 and has a detection piece 3427a protruding forward, and a back upper front decorative substrate 3422. It is equipped with a backside rotation detection sensor 3428, which is attached to the rear surface and can detect the detection piece 3427a of the rotation gear 3427.

Further, the back-up effect unit 3400 includes a back-up lift drive motor 3249 mounted on the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 so that the rotation shaft projects into the space between the rear cover 3424 and the front unit base 3423, and a back-up lift drive. The spur gear-shaped motor gear 3430 attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 3429, the gear portion 3431a meshing with the motor gear 3430, and the rear cover 3424 penetrate from the portion protruding outward from the circumference of the gear portion 3431a. With a drive pin 3431b projecting rearward in a columnar shape and a detection piece 3431c projecting forward from the vicinity of the outer periphery of the gear portion 3431a, the elevating cam gear 3431 rotatably attached to the rear cover 3424. The back-up elevating detection sensor 3432, which is attached to the rear surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 and can detect the detection piece 3431c of the elevating cam gear 3431, and the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440 are provided on the tip side of the elevating cam gear 3431. The back-up elevating decoration unit 3450 and the back-up elevating decoration unit 3450 whose base end side is rotatably attached to the rear surface of the rear cover 3424 around the axis in the front-rear direction so as to move up and down by the rotation of the drive pin 3431b of A spring 3433 that urges the 3450 to rotate in the direction in which the tip side moves upward, and a spring 3433 that is attached to the rear side of the rear cover 3424, restricts the upward movement of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450. It is provided with a rod-shaped regulating member 3434 and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 451 and 452, the back-up elevating decoration unit 3450 has a back-up rear decoration in which a shaft shaft 3440a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back-up rear rotation decoration 3440 penetrates in the center. The body 3451, the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 provided behind the back-up rear decorative body 3451 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 from the rear to the back-up rear decorative body 3451. Is mounted on the front surface, and is rotatably mounted on the unit base 3423, and includes an elevating unit base 3453 that rotatably supports the shaft shaft 3440a of the back-up and rear-rotating decorative body 3440.

Further, the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 includes a back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454 attached to the front surface of the elevating unit base 3453 so that the rotation shaft projects rearward, and a back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454. The spur gear-shaped drive gear 3455 attached to the above, the spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3456 that meshes with the drive gear 3455 and is rotatably attached to the elevating unit base 3453, and the first transmission gear 3456. The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3457, which is rotatably attached to the elevating unit base 3453, and the shaft shaft 3440a of the back-up rear rotation decoration 3440, which is meshed with the second transmission gear 3457. It includes a spur gear-shaped rotary gear 3458 attached to the rear end.

Further, the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 is a gear cover attached to the rear surface of the elevating unit base 3453 so as to cover the drive gear 3455, the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotary gear 3458 from the rear. It includes a 3459 and a motor cover 3460 attached to the front surface of the elevating unit base 3453 so as to cover the back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454 from the front.

The back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 of the back-up effect unit 3400 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom and has translucency. The shaft shaft 3410a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 penetrates the back upper front decorative body 3421, the back upper front decorative substrate 3422, and the unit base 3423, and the unit base 3423 and the rear It extends to the space between the cover 3424. In the back-up front decoration body 3421, two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 are stacked in the center in the left-right direction, and the petals on the rear side are between the petals on the front side. It has a decoration that looks like it has been rotated so that it is located in. The back-up front decorative body 3421 has translucency as a whole.

The back-up front decorative substrate 3422 extends to the left and right over substantially the entire length of the back-up front decorative body 3421 in the left-right direction. By emitting the LED of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422, the back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 and the back-up front decoration body 3421 can be made to emit light. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 are full-color LEDs.

The unit base 3423 has a through hole 3423a through which the back-up rotation detection sensor 3428 and the back-up elevating detection sensor 3432, which are attached to the rear surface of the back-up front decorative substrate 3422, are inserted. The rear cover 3424 has an arc shape in which a columnar support shaft 3424a projecting rearward from the rear surface and a drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 are inserted coaxially with the shaft shaft 3410a of the back upper front rotating decoration body 3410. It has an extended slit 3424b. The support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is for rotatably supporting the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450, and is inserted into the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453.

The detection piece 3427a of the rotation gear 3427 is detected by the backside rotation detection sensor 3428 that penetrates the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and protrudes rearward. In the elevating cam gear 3431, the gear portion 3431a is formed in a semicircular shape, and a drive pin 3431b projecting rearward is provided at a portion protruding outward from the opposite side of the gear portion 3431a. The drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the elevating unit base 3453 in the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 through the slit 3424b of the rear cover 3424. Further, the detection piece 3431c of the elevating cam gear 3431 is detected by the back-up elevating detection sensor 3432 that penetrates the through hole 3423a of the unit base 3423 and protrudes rearward.

The back-up and rear-rotating decorative body 3440 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom and has translucency. The shaft shaft 3440a projecting rearward from the center of the rear surface of the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 penetrates the back-up rear decorative body 3451, the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452, and the elevating unit base 3453, and the elevating unit base 3453. It extends to the rear side. The back-up rear decoration body 3451 is made by stacking two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440 on the front and back, and rotating the rear petals so that they are located between the front petals. It has a decoration with a shape that makes it look like it was made. The back-up rear decorative body 3451 has translucency as a whole.

The back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 can emit and decorate the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. The LED of the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 is a full-color LED.

The elevating unit base 3453 is provided on the right side of the shaft hole 3453a and the shaft hole 3453a, which penetrate the base end side (right end side in the front view) and the support shaft 3424a of the rear cover 3424 is inserted so as to be relatively rotatable. It has an elongated slit 3453b extending along a line passing through the center of the shaft hole 3453a. The drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 is slidably inserted into the slit 3453b of the elevating unit base 3453. The motor cover 3460 has a decoration imitating a cherry blossom on the front surface.

Next, the movements of the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410, the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440, and the back-up elevating decoration body unit 3450 in the back-up production unit 3400 will be described. In the back-up effect unit 3400, in a normal state, the detection piece 3427a of the rotation gear 3427 attached to the shaft shaft 3410a of the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 is detected by the back-up rotation detection sensor 3428, and the back side. The upper front rotating ornament 3410 is in a state where one petal is directed upward (see FIG. 453). In this state, when the drive gear 3426 is rotated by the back-up front rotation drive motor 3425, the back-up front rotation decoration body 3410 can be rotated around the axis in the front-rear direction via the rotation gear 3427.

Further, in a normal state, the back-up evacuation decoration unit 3450 provided with the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440 on the tip side is in a state of extending in the left-right direction, and the whole excluding the tip side is It is located behind the front decorative body 3421 on the back side and is in a retracted position invisible from the front (see FIG. 454 (a)). The portion of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 that protrudes to the left from the back-up front decorative body 3421 is located behind the back-front left effect unit 3700 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5. It is invisible from the front.

In this normal state, the detection piece 3431c of the elevating cam gear 3431 is detected by the back-up elevating detection sensor 3432. Further, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 is located below the center of revolution thereof, and is located near the end far from the shaft hole 3453a in the slit 3453b of the elevating unit base 3453 of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450. positioned.

More specifically, the normal line passing through the contact point of the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 with the slit 3453b extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3431. As a result, even if a force that tries to rotate the elevating unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction so that the tip side moves downward due to the weight of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 is acting, the force of the force is applied. Since the force line passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3431 via the drive pin 3431b that is in contact with the slit 3453b, the elevating cam gear 3431 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the elevating unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the back-up evacuation decorative body unit 3450 rotates so that the tip side moves downward from the retracted position. There is no. Therefore, the weight of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 does not act on the back-up elevating drive motor 3249 via the elevating unit base 3453 and the elevating cam gear 3431.

In a normal state, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 may be brought into contact with the end portion of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. As a result, when the elevating unit base 3453 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450, the elevating cam gear 3431 counterclockwise due to the force acting from the slit 3453b via the drive pin 3431b. Try to rotate in the clockwise direction. At this time, the drive pin 3431b tries to revolve so as to move away from the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b comes into contact with the end portion of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the elevating unit base 3453 can be locked to prevent the back-up elevating decorative unit 3450 from rotating in the counterclockwise direction. ..

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3430 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the back-up lift drive motor 3429, the lift cam gear 3431 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the gear portion 3431a meshing with the motor gear 3430. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 revolves in the clockwise direction. When the drive pin 3431b revolves in the clockwise direction, the drive pin 3431b moves to the left and upward, and the drive pin 3431b slides in the slit 3453b toward the shaft hole 3453a, and at the same time. Due to the weight of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450, the elevating unit base 3453 rotates in the counterclockwise direction about the shaft hole 3453a so that the tip side thereof moves downward.

When the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 revolves in the clockwise direction and moves above the straight line connecting the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3431 and the center of the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453, the drive pin 3431b moves. It slides in the slit 3453b in a direction away from the shaft hole 3453a. Then, when the drive pin 3431b revolves further in the clockwise direction and reaches the vicinity of the end far from the shaft hole 3453a in the slit 3453b, the back-up elevating drive motor 3429 stops the rotation of the motor gear 3430, and at the same time, the drive pin 3431b Revolution stops.

As a result, the rotation of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 via the elevating unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction is stopped, and the tip side of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 including the back-up rear-rotating decorative body 3440 is moved. , It is in the state of the appearance position moved below the back upper front decorative body 3421 (see FIG. 454 (b)). In the state of this appearance position, the tip side of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 is located below the back-up front decorative body 3421, so that the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the like can be visually recognized from the front. It will be in a possible state.

In the state where the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 is in the appearance position, the normal line passing through the contact point with the slit 3453b in the drive pin 3431b extends so as to pass through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3431. As a result, even if a force that tries to further rotate the elevating unit base 3453 in the counterclockwise direction is exerted by the weight of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450, the force line of the force hits the slit 3453b. Since the elevating cam gear 3431 passes through the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3431 via the contacting drive pin 3431b, the elevating cam gear 3431 does not rotate. Therefore, since the drive pin 3431b of the elevating cam gear 3431 does not revolve, the elevating unit base 3453 does not rotate, and the elevating decorative body unit 3450 on the back side moves counterclockwise so that the tip side further moves downward from the appearance position. The weight of the back-up elevating decoration unit 3450 does not act on the back-up elevating drive motor 3429 via the elevating cam gear 3431.

In the state where the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 is in the appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3431 may be further revolved so that the drive pin 3431b is brought into contact with the end portion of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. As a result, when the elevating unit base 3453 tries to rotate further in the counterclockwise direction due to the weight of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450, the elevating cam gear 3431 is clocked by the force acting from the slit 3453b via the drive pin 3431b. Try to rotate in the clockwise direction. At this time, the drive pin 3431b tries to revolve so as to move away from the shaft hole 3453a of the elevating unit base 3453, but the drive pin 3431b comes into contact with the end portion of the slit 3453b far from the shaft hole 3453a. Therefore, the drive pin 3431b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the elevating unit base 3453 can be locked to prevent the back-up elevating decorative unit 3450 from rotating in the counterclockwise direction. ..

When the back-up elevating decoration unit 3450 is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position side, the back-up rear rotation decoration 3440 provided on the tip side can be visually recognized from the front. In the back-up elevating decoration unit 3450, when the drive gear 3455 is rotated by the back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454, the back-up rear rotation decoration is performed via the first transmission gear 3456, the second transmission gear 3457, and the rotation gear 3458. The body 3440 can be rotated about an axis in the anteroposterior direction (see FIG. 454 (b)). Therefore, when the back-up rear rotation decoration 3440 is visible from the front, if the drive gear 3455 is rotated by the back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454, the rotating back-up rear rotation decoration 3440 can be visually recognized. ..

When returning the back-up lift decoration unit 3450 from the appearance position to the retracted position, the drive pin 3431b of the back-up lift cam gear 3431 is moved up and down by rotating the motor gear 3430 in the opposite direction to the above by the back-up lift drive motor 3429. The inner surface of the slit 3453b of the unit base 3453 is pressed downward, the evacuation unit base 3453 rotates in the clockwise direction, and the tip end side of the back-up evacuation decorative unit 3450 moves upward. Then, when the detection piece 3431c of the elevating cam gear 3431 is detected by the back-up elevating detection sensor 3432, the back-up evacuation decorative body unit 3450 is moved to the retracted position by stopping the rotation of the motor gear 3430 by the back-up elevating drive motor 3429. It can be restored.

At this time, the spring 3433 urges the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 in the clockwise direction, assists the rotation of the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450 to the retracted position side, and elevates the back-up. The load applied to the drive motor 3249 is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 455, the back-up effect unit 3400 of the present embodiment is provided with the back-up front decorative substrate 3422 behind the back-up front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back-up front decorative body 3421. By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper front decorative substrate 3422, the back upper front rotating decorative body 3410 and the back upper front decorative body 3421 can be light-emitting and decorated. Further, since the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 is provided behind the back-up rear rotating decorative body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-up rear decorative substrate 3452 are appropriately emitted. By doing so, the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440 and the back-up rear decoration body 3451 can be light-emittingly decorated.

At this time, in a state where the back-up elevating decoration unit 3450 is rotated from the retracted position to the appearance position side, the LED of the back-up rear decoration substrate 3452 is made to emit light, so that the back-up rear rotation decoration is luminescent. The body 3440 and the back-up rear decorative body 3451 can be shown to the player.

[5-9h. Back left production unit]
Subsequently, the back rear left effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to the main FIGS. 456 to 462 and the like. FIG. 456 (a) is a perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 456 (b) is a perspective view of the back rear left effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 457 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 458 is an disassembled perspective view of the back rear left effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is a figure. FIG. 459 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear left decorative unit of the back rear left effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 460 shows the back rear left decorative unit of the back rear left effect unit disassembled from the back. It is an exploded perspective view as seen. FIG. 461 is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the back rear left effect unit from the front. FIG. 462 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back rear left decorative body unit in the back rear left effect unit.

The back rear left effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 is provided near the left end in the back box 3010 and in front of the left side of the back rear effect unit 3100. The back-rear left effect unit 3500 rotatably supports the back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3510 having translucency that can rotate around the axis in the front-rear direction and the back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3510 on the lower end side. It includes a rear left decorative unit 3520 and a back rear left drive unit 3550 mounted in a back box 3010 by rotating the upper end side of the back rear left decorative unit 3520 around an axis in the front-rear direction. ..

The back-back left rotation decoration body 3510 of the back-back left effect unit 3500 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom and has translucency. The back-rear left-handed decorative body 3510 has a shaft shaft 3510a projecting from the center of the rear surface to the rear in a columnar shape (see FIG. 460).

As shown in FIGS. 459 and 460, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 includes a back rear left decorative body 3521 through which the shaft shaft 3510a of the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 penetrates in the center, and a back rear left decorative body 3521. It is attached to the back rear left decorative board 3522, which is provided behind the 3521 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and from the rear side of the back rear left decorative board 3522 to the rear side of the back rear left decorative body 3521. The front cover 3523 that rotatably supports the shaft shaft 3510a of the back-rear left-handed decorative body 3510, and the front cover 3523 are attached to the rear side, and the upper end side can be rotated to the back-rear left drive unit 3550. It includes a movable base 3524 that can be attached.

Further, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 includes a back rear left rotation drive motor 3525 and a back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, which are attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3524 so that the rotating shaft projects between the movable base 3524 and the front cover 3523. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3526 attached to the rotating shaft of the counterclockwise rotary drive motor 3525 and a flat gear 3526 that meshes with the drive gear 3526 and is attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3510a of the rear left rotation decorative body 3510. It includes a gear-shaped rotary gear 3527.

The back rear left decorative body 3521 of the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 has translucency, and two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 are stacked back and forth and then rear. The petals on the side are formed in a shape that is rotated so as to be located between the petals on the front side. The plurality of LEDs on the back left decorative substrate 3522 are full-color LEDs.

The front cover 3523 is formed in a shape in which a portion having the same shape as the outer shape of the back rear left decorative body 3521 and a portion extending in a quadrangular shape from the upper left to the upper side of the portion are combined. .. The front cover 3523 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of a portion extending upward in a quadrangular shape. The front cover 3523 is formed in the shape of a shallow container that is open to the rear.

The movable base 3524 is formed so as to close the open rear side of the front cover 3523, and the upper end side extends upward from the upper end of the front cover 3523. The movable base 3524 has a shaft hole 3524a that penetrates back and forth on the upper end side, and an operating pin 3524b that projects forward in a columnar shape at a position away from the shaft hole 3524a. The shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 is inserted with the support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 of the back rear left drive unit 3550 so as to be relatively rotatable. Further, the actuating pin 3524b projects forward at a position below and to the right of the shaft hole 3524a.

When the drive gear 3526 is rotated by the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 moves the back rear left rotation decoration 3510 back and forth via the rotation gear 3527 meshing with the drive gear 3526. It can be rotated around the axis of direction.

As shown in FIGS. 457 and 458, the back rear left drive unit 3550 has a vertically extending flat plate-shaped reinforcing plate 3551 having a support shaft 3551a that rotatably supports the back rear left decorative unit 3520. , A vertically extending unit base 3552 attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3551 and installed in the back box 3010, a unit cover 3553 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3552, and rotating to the upper part of the front surface of the unit cover 3553. Spur gear-shaped motor gears attached to the rotating shafts of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 whose shafts are mounted so as to project between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553. It is equipped with 3555.

Further, the rear left drive unit 3550 has a spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3556 that meshes with the motor gear 3555 and is rotatably attached to the unit cover 3553, and a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3557a that meshes with the transmission gear 3556. The elevating cam gear 3557 and the elevating cam gear 3557b having a drive pin 3557b protruding rearward from the vicinity of the outer circumference of the gear portion 3557a and a detection piece 3557c protruding forward from the vicinity of the front outer circumference of the gear portion 3557a. The drive pin 3557b of the 3557 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3558a extending to the left and right, and the actuating pin 3524b of the movable base 3524 in the back rear left decorative unit 3520 extending to the left and right below the first slit 3558a. Has a second slit 3558b, which is slidably inserted, and includes a link member 3558 which is slidably attached vertically between the unit base 3552 and the unit cover 3553.

Further, the rear left drive unit 3550 includes a spring 3559 that urges the link member 3558 upward, a flat plate-shaped partition plate 3560 provided between the link member 3558 and the elevating cam gear 3557, and a unit cover. A back-rear left relay board 3651 attached to the front surface of the 3553, and a back-rear left elevating detection sensor 3562 attached to the rear surface of the back-rear left relay board 3651 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3557c of the elevating cam gear 3557. It has.

The reinforcing plate 3551 of the rear left drive unit 3550 is a metal plate extending vertically, and the support shaft 3551a projects forward at the upper portion. The support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is inserted into the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the back rear left decorative unit 3520 so as to be relatively rotatable.

The unit base 3552 extends longer in the vertical direction than the reinforcing plate 3551 so that the support shaft 3551a of the reinforcing plate 3551 is located near the center in the vertical direction. The unit cover 3553 has substantially the same length as the unit base 3552 and extends vertically, and is formed in the shape of a shallow container that is open to the rear.

The elevating cam gear 3557 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3558a of the link member 3558 through the slit 3560a of the partition plate 3560 with the drive pin 3557b. The detection piece 3557c is detected by the back-rear left elevating detection sensor 3562 that penetrates the unit cover 3553 and protrudes rearward. The link member 3558 extends vertically, and has a first slit 3558a near the upper end and a second slit 3558b at the lower end. The lower end of the spring 3559 is attached to the link member 3558, and the upper end is attached to the partition plate 3560.

The partition plate 3560 has a slit 3560a extending in a semicircular shape through which the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 is inserted. The back rear left relay board 3651 relays the connection between the back rear left decorative board 3522, the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554, and the back rear left elevating detection sensor 3562, and the effect drive board 1720. It is for doing.

Subsequently, the operation of the back left effect unit 3500 will be described. In a normal state, the back-back left effect unit 3500 is a back-back left decorative body provided with a back-back left rotating decorative body 3510 on the lower end side (tip side) as shown in FIGS. 461 and 462 (a). The unit 3520 is in the hanging retracted position. In this normal state, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 (back rear left rotating decorative body 3510) is located behind the back front left effect unit 3700, and is invisible from the front (player side). It has become.

Further, in the normal state assembled on the game board 5, most of the back front left effect unit 3500 is located behind the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left effect unit 3700, and the back rear left elevating drive motor. Only a part of 3554 faces forward (see FIG. 409 and the like). The portion of the back-rear left elevating drive motor 3554 facing the front is covered by a portion outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1, and the player It becomes invisible from the side (see FIG. 413).

In this normal state, the detection piece 3557c of the elevating cam gear 3557 is detected by the back-rear left elevating detection sensor 3562. Further, in a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 is located directly below the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3557 and is located near the left end in the first slit 3558a of the link member 3558. Further, in the normal state, the link member 3558 is located at the lower moving end, and the actuating pin 3524b located to the right of the shaft hole 3524a of the movable base 3524 in the back rear left decorative unit 3520 It is located near the left end in the second slit 3558b of the link member 3558.

In this normal state, the link member 3558 is urged in the direction of moving upward by the spring 3559, but the normal line passing through the contact point in contact with the first slit 3558a in the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 Since it passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3557 (the center of revolution of the drive pin 3557b), even if an upward force acts on the drive pin 3557b via the first slit 3558a due to the urging force of the spring 3559, the drive pin 3557b Does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3558 does not move upward. Therefore, since the link member 3558 does not move upward, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 (back rear left rotating decorative body 3510) is centered on the shaft hole 3524a (support shaft 3551a) of the movable base 3524 from the retracted position. It does not rotate, and the urging force of the spring 3559 does not act on the rear left lift drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558, the lift cam gear 3557, and the like.

In a normal state, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 may be brought into contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a. As a result, when the link member 3558 tries to move upward due to the urging force of the spring 3559, the elevating cam gear 3557 tends to rotate in the clockwise direction due to the force acting from the first slit 3558a via the drive pin 3557b. At this time, the drive pin 3557b of the evacuation cam gear 3557 tries to revolve in the direction of moving to the left, but the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, so that the drive pin 3557b Cannot revolve, and the upward movement of the link member 3558 is locked via the elevating cam gear 3557, and the rotation of the back rear left decorative unit 3520 from the retracted position can be prevented.

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3555 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the rear left elevating drive motor 3554, the elevating cam gear 3557 rotates in the counterclockwise direction via the transmission gear 3556 and the gear portion 3557a. Therefore, the drive pin 3557b of the elevating cam gear 3557 revolves in the counterclockwise direction. When the drive pin 3557b revolves in the counterclockwise direction, it slides to the right in the first slit 3558a while pressing the inner surface of the first slit 3558a upward, and the link member 3558 moves upward. It will be.

When the link member 3558 moves upward, the actuating pin 3524b of the movable base 3524 of the back rear left decorative unit 3520 projecting downward and to the right of the support shaft 3551a is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3558b of the link member 3558. The movable base 3524 rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 3551a while the actuating pin 3524b slides to the right in the second slit 3558b, and the back rear left decorative unit 3520 moves. It will rotate in the counterclockwise direction from the retracted position (see FIGS. 462 (a) and 462 (b)). At this time, the urging force of the spring 3559 assists the link member 3558 to move upward, reducing the load applied to the back-rear left elevating drive motor 3554.

In this way, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 rotates in the counterclockwise direction about the support shaft 3551a, so that the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 provided on the lower end side moves to the right. While moving upward, the back-back left-rotating decorative body 3510 moves to the right of the back-front-left effect unit 3700, and becomes visible from the front (player side).

In the back rear left effect unit 3500 of the present embodiment, the back rear left decorative unit 3520 rotates when the elevating cam gear 3557 is rotated about 90 degrees counterclockwise from the normal state (retracted position state). The position is the first appearance position (see FIG. 462 (b)). In the state of the first appearance position, the back rear left decorative unit 3520 is rotated about 44 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

Then, when the elevating cam gear 3557 further rotates in the counterclockwise direction from the state of the first appearance position, the drive pin 3557b slides to the left in the first slit 3558a. Then, when the drive pin 3557b moves to just above the center of revolution (when it revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the rear left elevating drive motor 3554 stops, and at the same time, the revolution of the drive pin 3557b stops. ..

As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3558 is stopped, the rotation of the back rear left decorative unit 3520 in the counterclockwise direction is stopped, and the state of the second appearance position is reached (FIG. 462 (c). )). In the state of the second appearance position, the back rear left decorative unit 3520 is rotated about 74 degrees in the counterclockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

In the state where the back left decorative unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3557b is located directly above the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3557. In this state, due to the weight of the back rear left decorative unit 3520, a force that causes the back rear left decorative unit 3520 to rotate in the clockwise direction around the support shaft 3551a acts, and the force acts on the movable base. The link member 3558 tries to move downward via the actuating pin 3524b and the second slit 3558b of the 3524, but the drive pin 3557b inserted in the first slit 3558a is located directly above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3557b does not revolve in any direction.

Therefore, since the drive pin 3557b does not revolve, the elevating cam gear 3557 does not rotate either, so that the link member 3558 does not move downward and the back rear left decorative unit 3520 rotates from the state of the second appearance position. In addition, the force due to the own weight of the back rear left decorative unit 3520 does not act on the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 via the link member 3558, the elevating cam gear 3557, and the like.

In the state where the back left decorative unit 3520 is in the second appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3557 is further rotated in the counterclockwise direction so that the drive pin 3557b is brought into contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a. Is also good. As a result, when the back rear left decorative unit 3520 tries to rotate clockwise around the support shaft 3551a due to its own weight, and the link member 3558 tries to move downward via the actuating pin 3524b, the second The elevating cam gear 3557 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction by the force acting from the slit 3558a via the drive pin 3557b. At this time, the drive pin 3557b tries to revolve so as to move to the left, but since the drive pin 3557b is in contact with the left end of the first slit 3558a, the drive pin 3557b can revolve. Instead, the link member 3558 is prevented from moving downward, and the back rear left decorative unit 3520 can be non-rotatably locked in the state of the second appearance position.

When the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 provided on the lower end side is forward (player side). It becomes visible from.

In the back-rear left decorative body unit 3520, the back-rear left rotation decoration body 3510 is rotated by the back-rear left rotation drive motor 3525, and the back-rear left rotation decoration body 3510 is moved via the rotation gear 3527 meshing with the drive gear 3526. It can be rotated about an axis in the anteroposterior direction (see FIG. 461). Therefore, when the back rear left rotation decoration body 3510 is visible from the front (player side), when the drive gear 3526 is rotated by the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525, the back rear left rotation decoration body 3510 is rotated. It can be visually recognized by the player.

When returning the back rear left decorative unit 3520 from the state of the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the retracted position which is the normal state, the motor gear 3555 is reversed by the back rear left evacuation drive motor 3554. By rotating in the direction of, the link member 3558 can be moved downward by the revolution of the drive pin 3557b of the evacuation cam gear 3557, and as the link member 3558 moves downward, the back rear left decorative unit 3520 moves. It will rotate in the direction of the retracted position (clockwise direction). Then, when the detection piece 3557c of the elevating cam gear 3557 is detected by the back rear left elevating detection sensor 3562, the back rear left decorative unit 3520 is retracted by stopping the rotation of the motor gear 3555 by the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554. It can be returned to the state of the position.

As shown in FIG. 461, the back rear left effect unit 3500 of the present embodiment is provided with the back rear left decorative substrate 3522 behind the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 and the back rear left decorative body 3521. By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back rear left decorative substrate 3522, the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 and the back rear left decorative body 3521 can be light-emitting decorated. At this time, the LED of the back rear left decorative substrate 3522 is made to emit light in a state where the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position side, thereby emitting light decoration. The back-rear left rotating decoration body 3510 and the back-back left decoration body 3521 can be shown to the player.

[5-9i. Back right production unit]
Subsequently, the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to the main FIGS. 463 to 469 and the like. FIG. 463 (a) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 463 (b) is a perspective view of the back rear right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 464 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 465 is an disassembled perspective view of the back rear right effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is a figure. FIG. 466 is an exploded perspective view of the back rear right decorative unit of the back rear right effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 467 disassembles the back rear right decorative unit of the back rear right effect unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view as seen. FIG. 468 is an explanatory view showing the movable mechanism of the back rear right effect unit from the front. FIG. 469 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the back rear right decorative body unit in the back rear right effect unit.

The back rear right effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 is provided near the right end in the back box 3010 and in front of the right side of the back rear effect unit 3100. The back-rear right effect unit 3600 rotatably supports the back-rear right-rotating decorative body 3610 having translucency that can rotate around the axis in the front-rear direction and the back-rear right-rotating decorative body 3610 on the lower end side. The rear right decorative body unit 3620 and the back rear right drive unit 3650 installed in the back box 3010 by rotating the upper end side of the back rear right decorative unit 3620 around an axis in the front-rear direction are provided. ..

The back-back-right rotating decorative body 3610 of the back-back-right effect unit 3600 is formed in a shape imitating a cherry blossom and has translucency. The back-rear right-handed decorative body 3610 has a shaft shaft 3610a projecting from the center of the rear surface to the rear in a columnar shape (see FIG. 466).

As shown in FIGS. 466 and 467, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 includes a back rear right decorative body 3621 through which the shaft shaft 3610a of the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 penetrates in the center, and a back rear right decorative body 3621. It is attached to the back rear right decorative board 3622, which is provided behind the 3621 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and from the rear side of the back rear right decorative board 3622 to the rear side of the back rear right decorative body 3621. , The front cover 3623 that rotatably supports the shaft shaft 3610a of the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610, and the front cover 3623 are attached to the rear side, and the upper end side can be rotated to the back rear right drive unit 3650. It includes a movable base 3624 that can be attached.

Further, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 includes a back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 attached to the rear surface of the movable base 3624 so that a rotation shaft projects between the movable base 3624 and the front cover 3623, and a back rear right rotation drive motor 3625. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3626 attached to the rotating shaft of the right-handed rotary drive motor 3625 and a flat gear 3626 that meshes with the drive gear 3626 and is attached to the rear end of the shaft shaft 3610a of the back-rear right-handed decorative body 3610. It includes a gear-shaped rotary gear 3627.

The back rear right decorative body 3621 of the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 has translucency, and two cherry blossoms of the same size as the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 are stacked back and forth and then rear. The petals on the side are formed in a shape that is rotated so as to be located between the petals on the front side. The plurality of LEDs on the back right decorative substrate 3622 are full-color LEDs.

The front cover 3623 is formed in a shape in which a portion having the same shape as the outer shape of the back rear right decorative body 3621 and a portion extending in a quadrangular shape from the upper right to the upper side of the portion are combined. .. The front cover 3623 has a plurality of cherry blossom decorations formed on the front surface of a portion extending upward in a quadrangular shape. The front cover 3623 is formed in the shape of a shallow container that is open to the rear.

The movable base 3624 is formed so as to close the open rear side of the front cover 3623, and the upper end side extends upward from the upper end of the front cover 3623. The movable base 3624 has a shaft hole 3624a that penetrates back and forth on the upper end side, and an operating pin 3624b that projects forward in a columnar shape at a position away from the shaft hole 3624a. The shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 is inserted with the support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear right drive unit 3650 so as to be relatively rotatable. Further, the actuating pin 3624b projects forward at a position below and to the left of the shaft hole 3624a.

When the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 moves the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610 back and forth via the rotation gear 3627 that meshes with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated around the axis of direction.

As shown in FIGS. 464 and 465, the back rear right drive unit 3650 has a vertically extending flat plate-shaped reinforcing plate 3651 having a support shaft 3651a that rotatably supports the back rear right decorative unit 3620. , The vertically extending unit base 3652 which is attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 and is installed in the back box 3010, and the vertically extending unit cover 3653 whose upper part is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3652, and the unit cover. It is attached to the rotating shafts of the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654, which are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the 3653 so that the rotating shaft projects between the unit base 3652 and the unit cover 3653. It is equipped with a spur gear-shaped motor gear 3655.

Further, the back-rear right drive unit 3650 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 3657a that meshes with the motor gear 3655, a drive pin 3657b that protrudes rearward from the vicinity of the outer circumference of the gear portion 3657a, and the front surface of the gear portion 3657a. An elevating cam gear 3657 having a detection piece 3657c projecting forward from the vicinity of the outer circumference, a first slit 3658a extending to the left and right into which a drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted, and a first slit. It has a second slit 3658b, which extends below the 3658a to the left and right and into which the actuating pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 in the back rear right decorative unit 3620 is slidably inserted, the unit base 3652 and the unit cover 3653. It is provided with a link member 3658, which is slidably attached to and from the link member 3658.

Further, the back rear right drive unit 3650 includes a spring 3569 that urges the link member 3658 upward, a flat plate-shaped partition plate 3660 provided between the link member 3658 and the elevating cam gear 3657, and a unit cover. The back rear right relay board 3661 attached to the front surface of the 3653 and the back rear right elevating detection sensor 3662 attached to the rear surface of the back rear right relay board 3661 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3657c of the elevating cam gear 3657. It is provided with a lower base 3663, which is attached to the front surface of the reinforcing plate 3651 below the unit base 3652 and to which the lower portion of the unit cover 3653 is attached to the front surface.

The reinforcing plate 3651 of the rear right drive unit 3650 is a metal plate extending vertically, and the support shaft 3651a projects forward at the upper portion. The support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is inserted into the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the back rear right decorative unit 3620 so as to be relatively rotatable.

The unit base 3652 extends upward from the reinforcing plate 3651 so that the support shaft 3651a of the reinforcing plate 3651 is located near the lower end. The unit cover 3653 extends vertically from the upper end of the unit base 3652 to the lower end of the reinforcing plate 3651 (lower base 3663) with substantially the same length, and is formed in the shape of a shallow container open to the rear.

The elevating cam gear 3657 is slidably inserted into the first slit 3658a of the link member 3658 with the drive pin 3657b passing through the slit 3660a of the partition plate 3660. The detection piece 3657c is detected by the back-rear right elevating detection sensor 3662 that penetrates the unit cover 3653 and projects rearward. The link member 3658 extends vertically, and has a first slit 3658a near the upper end and a second slit 3658b at the lower end. The lower end of the spring 3659 is attached to the link member 3658, and the upper end is attached to the partition plate 3660.

The partition plate 3660 has a slit 3660a extending in a semicircular shape through which the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is inserted. The back rear right relay board 3661 relays the connection between the back rear right decorative board 3622, the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654, and the back rear right elevating detection sensor 3662, and the effect drive board 1720. It is for doing.

Subsequently, the operation of the back-right effect unit 3600 will be described. In a normal state, the back rear right effect unit 3600 is a back rear right decorative body provided with a back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 on the lower end side (tip side) as shown in FIGS. 468 and 469 (a). The unit 3620 is in the hanging retracted position. In this normal state, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 (back rear right rotating decorative body 3610) is located behind the back front right effect unit 3800, and is invisible from the front (player side). It has become.

Further, in the normal state assembled on the game board 5, the back rear right effect unit 3600 is located behind the back front right decorative body 3040 and the back front right effect unit 3800, and the whole is forward (player side). It is invisible from.

In this normal state, the detection piece 3657c of the elevating cam gear 3657 is detected by the back-rear right elevating detection sensor 3662. Further, in a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is located directly below the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3657, and is located near the right end in the first slit 3658a of the link member 3658. Further, in the normal state, the link member 3658 is located at the lower moving end, and the actuating pin 3624b located to the left of the shaft hole 3624a of the movable base 3624 in the back rear right decorative unit 3620 It is located near the right end in the second slit 3658b of the link member 3658.

In this normal state, the link member 3658 is urged in the direction of moving upward by the spring 3659, but the normal line passing through the contact point in contact with the first slit 3658a in the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 is formed. Since it passes through the center of rotation of the elevating cam gear 3657 (the center of revolution of the drive pin 3657b), even if an upward force acts on the drive pin 3657b via the first slit 3658a due to the urging force of the spring 3569, the drive pin 3657b Does not revolve in any direction, and the link member 3658 does not move upward. Therefore, since the link member 3658 does not move upward, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 (back rear right rotating decorative body 3610) is centered on the shaft hole 3624a (support shaft 3651a) of the movable base 3624 from the retracted position. It does not rotate, and the urging force of the spring 3569 does not act on the back rear right evacuation drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the evacuation cam gear 3657, and the like.

In a normal state, the drive pin 3657b of the elevating cam gear 3657 may be brought into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. As a result, when the link member 3658 tries to move upward due to the urging force of the spring 3569, the elevating cam gear 3657 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction due to the force acting from the first slit 3658a via the drive pin 3657b. .. At this time, the drive pin 3657b of the evacuation cam gear 3657 tries to revolve in the direction of moving to the right, but the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, so that the drive pin 3657b Cannot revolve, and the upward movement of the link member 3658 is locked via the elevating cam gear 3657, and the rotation of the back rear right decorative unit 3620 from the retracted position can be prevented.

In this normal state, when the motor gear 3655 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction by the back-rear right elevating drive motor 3654, the elevating cam gear 3657 is rotated in the clockwise direction via the gear portion 3657a, and the elevating cam gear 3657 The drive pin 3657b of the above revolves in the clockwise direction. When the drive pin 3657b revolves in the clockwise direction, it slides to the left in the first slit 3658a while pressing the inner surface of the first slit 3658a upward, and the link member 3658 moves upward. It becomes.

When the link member 3658 moves upward, the actuating pin 3624b of the movable base 3624 of the back rear right decorative unit 3620 protruding below and to the left of the support shaft 3651a is moved upward by the inner surface of the second slit 3658b of the link member 3658. The movable base 3624 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 3651a while the operating pin 3624b slides to the left in the second slit 3658b, and the back rear right decorative unit 3620 retracts. It will rotate clockwise from the position (see FIGS. 469 (a) and 469 (b)). At this time, the urging force of the spring 3569 assists the upward movement of the link member 3658, reducing the load applied to the back-rear right elevating drive motor 3654.

In this way, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 3651a, so that the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 provided on the lower end side moves to the left. It will move upward, and the back-back right-rotating decorative body 3610 will move to the left of the back-front-right effect unit 3800, and will be visible from the front (player side).

In the back-rear right effect unit 3600 of the present embodiment, the rotation position of the back-rear right decoration unit 3620 when the elevating cam gear 3657 is rotated about 90 degrees clockwise from the normal state (retracted state). Is the first appearance position (see FIG. 469 (b)). In the state of the first appearance position, the rear right decorative unit 3620 is rotated about 44 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

Then, when the elevating cam gear 3657 further rotates in the clockwise direction from the state of the first appearance position, the drive pin 3657b slides to the right in the first slit 3658a. Then, when the drive pin 3657b moves to just above the center of revolution (when it revolves 180 degrees from the normal state), the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the back-right elevating drive motor 3654 stops, and at the same time, the revolution of the drive pin 3657b stops. ..

As a result, the upward movement of the link member 3658 is stopped, the clockwise rotation of the back rear right decorative unit 3620 is stopped, and the state of the second appearance position is reached (FIG. 469 (c)). See). In the state of the second appearance position, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated about 74 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of the retracted position.

In the state where the rear right decorative unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the drive pin 3657b is located directly above the rotation center of the elevating cam gear 3657. In this state, due to the weight of the back rear right decorative body unit 3620, a force that causes the back rear right decorative unit 3620 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction around the support shaft 3651a acts, and the back rear right decorative unit 3620 moves due to the force. The link member 3658 tries to move downward via the actuating pin 3624b and the second slit 3658b of the base 3624, but the drive pin 3657b inserted in the first slit 3658a is located directly above the center of revolution. Therefore, the drive pin 3657b does not revolve in any direction.

Therefore, since the drive pin 3657b does not revolve, the elevating cam gear 3657 does not rotate either, so that the link member 3658 does not move downward and the back rear right decorative unit 3620 rotates from the state of the second appearance position. In addition, the force due to the own weight of the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 does not act on the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 via the link member 3658, the elevating cam gear 3657, and the like.

In the state where the rear right decorative unit 3620 is in the second appearance position, the elevating cam gear 3657 is further rotated in the clockwise direction so that the drive pin 3657b comes into contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a. good. As a result, when the back rear right decorative unit 3620 tries to rotate counterclockwise around the support shaft 3651a due to its own weight, the link member 3658 tries to move downward via the operating pin 3624b. Due to the force acting from the first slit 3658a via the drive pin 3657b, the elevating cam gear 3657 tries to rotate in the clockwise direction. At this time, the drive pin 3657b tries to revolve so as to move to the right, but since the drive pin 3657b is in contact with the right end of the first slit 3658a, the drive pin 3657b can revolve. Instead, the link member 3658 is prevented from moving downward, and the back rear right decorative unit 3620 can be non-rotatably locked in the state of the second appearance position.

When the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 provided on the lower end side is forward (player side). It becomes visible from.

In the back rear right decorative body unit 3620, by rotating the drive gear 3626 by the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610 is moved via the rotary gear 3627 that meshes with the drive gear 3626. It can be rotated about an axis in the anteroposterior direction (see FIG. 468). Therefore, when the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610 is visible from the front (player side), when the drive gear 3626 is rotated by the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625, the back rear right rotation decoration body 3610 is rotated. It can be visually recognized by the player.

When returning the back rear right decorative unit 3620 from the state of the first appearance position or the second appearance position to the retracted position which is the normal state, the motor gear 3655 is reversed by the back rear right evacuation drive motor 3654. By rotating in the direction of, the link member 3658 can be moved downward by the revolution of the drive pin 3657b of the evacuation cam gear 3657, and the back rear right decorative unit 3620 moves downward as the link member 3658 moves downward. It will rotate in the direction of the retracted position (counterclockwise direction). Then, when the detection piece 3657c of the elevating cam gear 3657 is detected by the back rear right elevating detection sensor 3662, the back rear right decorative unit 3620 is retracted by stopping the rotation of the motor gear 3655 by the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654. It can be returned to the state of the position.

As shown in FIG. 468, the back rear right effect unit 3600 of the present embodiment is provided with the back rear right decorative substrate 3622 behind the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 and the back rear right decorative body 3621. By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back rear right decorative substrate 3622, the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 and the back rear right decorative body 3621 can be light-emitting decorated. At this time, the LED of the back rear right decorative substrate 3622 is made to emit light in a state where the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is rotated from the retracted position to the first appearance position and the second appearance position side. The back-back right rotating decoration body 3610 and the back-back right decoration body 3621 can be shown to the player.

[5-9j. Back front left production unit]
Subsequently, the back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 470 to 473 and the like. FIG. 470 (a) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 470 (b) is a perspective view of the back front left effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 471 is an exploded perspective view of one back front left decorative unit in the back front left effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 472 disassembles one back front left decorative unit in the back front left effect unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 473 (a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left effect unit in the closed state, and FIG. 473 (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front left effect unit in the open state.

The back front left effect unit 3700 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back front left effect unit 3500 so that the vicinity of the left end is located behind the back front left decorative body 3030 in the back box 3010. The back front left production unit 3700 has three back front left decorations, in order from the top, the first back front left decoration unit 3710A, the second back front left decoration unit 3710B, and the third back front left decoration unit 3710C. It is composed of a body unit 3710.

In the back front left effect unit 3700, as shown in FIG. 473, the first back front left decorative body unit 3710A is compared with the second back front left decorative body unit 3710B and the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C. It is tilted diagonally so that the upper end side moves to the right. Further, the shape of the rear cover 3715 of the first back front left decorative body unit 3710A is slightly different from that of the second back front left decorative body unit 3710B and the third back front left decorative body unit 3710C.

As shown in FIGS. 471 and 472, the back front left decorative body unit 3710 of the back front left effect unit 3700 has a frame-shaped front cover 3711 penetrating the front and rear and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3711. The shape of the shutter support member 3712 and the front surface of the shutter support member 3712 are arranged in a row in the vertical direction, and each is rotatably supported around an axis in the horizontal direction so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 can be opened and closed. It includes a shutter unit 3730 and.

Further, the back front left decorative body unit 3710 closes the inside of the frame of the shutter support member 3712 from the rear, and has a translucent flat back front left decorative body 3713 and a back front left decorative body 3713. The back front left decorative board 3714, which is provided at the rear and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and the back front left decorative board 3714 are attached to the front cover 3711 so as to cover the back front left decorative board 3714 from the rear. It includes a rear cover 3715 that is attached to the front of the 3500.

Further, the back front left decorative body unit 3710 includes a support plate 3716 made of a metal plate attached to the left side of the shutter support member 3712, a back front left drive solenoid 3717 attached to the support plate 3716, and a back front left drive solenoid 3717. The transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger in the left drive solenoid 3717 and the support plate 3716 are rotatably attached around the axis in the left-right direction, and the transmission member 3718 is moved forward and backward by the back front left drive solenoid 3717. It includes a rotating link member 3719 and an opening / closing slider 3720 that slides in the vertical direction to open and close the shutter unit 3730 by rotating the link member 3719.

The front cover 3711 of the back front left decorative unit 3710 is formed in an outer shape such that the "convex" character is tilted to the right and the corners are rounded (a shape in which a "pine" is stylized). The shutter support member 3712 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3712a rotatably supporting the shaft portion 3733 of each shutter member 3731 in the shutter unit 3730 on the front surface. Further, the shutter support member 3712 has a boss portion 3712b that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity of the left end of the front surface. The boss portion 3712b is slidably inserted into the slit 3720b of the opening / closing slider 3720, and a support plate 3716 is attached to the tip thereof.

The shutter unit 3730 is composed of a plurality of (here, eight) shutter members 3731. The shutter member 3731 includes a flat plate-shaped shutter 3732 extending to the left and right, a shaft portion 3733 extending in a columnar shape from both ends of the shutter 3732 in the left-right direction, and a left side after projecting from the tip of the left shaft portion 3733 in the direction perpendicular to the axis. It has a crankshaft 3734 that extends in a columnar direction.

The shutter 3732 is formed in a length and shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3731 is arranged with respect to the shape in the frame of the front cover 3711. The shaft portion 3733 projects from the vicinity of the upper end of the shutter 3732 with the surface of the shutter 3732 facing forward. The crankshaft 3734 is located behind the shaft portion 3733.

The shutter member 3731 can rotate around the axis in the left-right direction about the shaft portion 3733 by rotatably supporting the shaft portion 3733 by the bearing portion 3712a of the shutter support member 3712. The crankshaft 3734 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3720a of the open / close slider 3720.

Although not shown, the back front left decorative body 3713 is provided with patterns such as characters, items, and logos in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. The back front left decorative body 3713 can diffuse the light from the LED of the back front left decorative substrate 3714. The plurality of LEDs on the back front left decorative substrate 3714 are full-color LEDs.

The support plate 3716 extends vertically with the plate surface facing left and right, and is formed in a shape in which the front end side is bent to the right. In the support plate 3716, a portion bent to the right on the front end side is attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712, and the remaining portion projects rearward through the left side of the shutter support member 3712. There is. Further, the support plate 3716 has a support pin 3716a protruding from the vicinity of the lower end to the right in a columnar shape. The support pin 3716a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3719.

The back front left drive solenoid 3717 is attached to the support plate 3716 so that the plunger moves downward. The back front left drive solenoid 3717 is urged by a spring in a direction in which the plunger protrudes downward. The link member 3719 can be rotated about an axis in the left-right direction about the support pin 3716a by inserting the support pin 3716a of the support plate 3716. The link member 3719 is provided with a first connecting portion 3719a connected to the transmission member 3718 on the rear side with a portion where the support pin 3716a is inserted, and is connected to the opening / closing slider 3720. A connecting portion 3719b is provided on the front side.

The opening / closing slider 3720 extends vertically at substantially the same length as the height of the shutter unit 3730 composed of a plurality of shutter members 3731, and a transmission groove into which each crankshaft 3734 of the shutter unit 3730 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. It has a 3720a and a slit 3720b into which the boss portion 3712b of the shutter support member 3712 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

Next, the operation of the back front left effect unit 3700 will be described. In the back front left effect unit 3700, as shown in FIG. 473 (a), in the normal state, the shutter 3732 of the shutter member 3731 of the shutter unit 3730 is in a state where the plate surface faces forward, and there are a plurality of them. The inside of the frame of the front cover 3711 is closed by the shutter 3732. In this normal state, the back front left decorative body 3713 provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is invisible from the front (player side). Although not shown, when the shutter unit 3730 is in the closed state, a pattern different from the pattern applied to the rear back front left decorative body 3713 is applied to the front surface of the shutter unit 3730 (plurality of shutters 3732). Has been done.

In the normal state, the back front left drive solenoid 3717 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward due to the urging force of the spring. Further, in a normal state, the open / close slider 3720 is located at the upper moving end, and the crankshaft 3734 of each shutter member 3731 is located above the shaft portion 3733.

In this normal state, when the back front left drive solenoid 3717 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the urging force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3718 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to. When the transmission member 3718 moves upward, the first connection portion 3719a of the link member 3719 connected to the transmission member 3718 moves upward, and the link member 3719 rotates about the support pin 3716a. As a result, the second connection portion 3719b on the opposite side of the first connection portion 3719a moves downward. Then, the downward movement of the second connecting portion 3719b of the link member 3719 causes the opening / closing slider 3720 connected to the second connecting portion 3719b to move downward.

By moving the opening / closing slider 3720 downward, the crankshaft 3734 of the shutter member 3731 inserted in the transmission groove 3720a is pressed downward, and the shutter is positioned so that the crankshaft 3734 is located below the shaft portion 3733. The member 3731 rotates about the shaft portion 3733. As a result, the plate surface of the shutter 3732 is turned up and down, so that the frame of the front cover 3711 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3732, and the back front provided behind the shutter unit 3730 is opened. The left decorative body 3713 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 473 (b)).

After that, by de-energizing (OFF) the back front left drive solenoid 3717, the plunger that had been moving upward will move downward due to the urging force of the spring, and by moving in the opposite direction to the above, The shutter unit 3730 in the open state can return to the closed state, which is the normal state.

As described above, according to the back front left effect unit 3700 of the present embodiment, by opening and closing the shutter unit 3730 by the back front left drive solenoid 3717, the decoration (picture) of the shutter unit 3730 can be changed to the back front left decoration body 3713. It is possible to switch to the decoration (picture) of, and the player can enjoy the change of decoration.

Further, since the back front left decorative board 3714 is provided behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front left decorative body 3713, when the shutter unit 3730 is in the closed state, a plurality of LEDs of the back front left decorative board 3714 are made to emit light. Then, the shutter unit 3730 decorated with light emission can be shown to the player, and when the shutter unit 3730 is in the open state, a plurality of LEDs on the back front left decorative substrate 3714 are made to emit light, so that the back front left decorated with light emission is emitted. The decorative body 3713 can be shown to the player.

Further, in the back front left effect unit 3700, there are three back front left decorative unit units 3710A, a second back front left decorative unit 3710B, and a third back front left decorative unit 3710C. Since the shutter unit 3730 can be opened and closed independently and the shutter unit 3730 can be decorated with light emission, the 3710 can be used to give the player a variety of effects by appropriately combining the effects of the three back front left decoration units 3710. I can show you.

[5-9k. Back front right production unit]
Subsequently, the back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 474 to 477 and the like. FIG. 474 (a) is a perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 474 (b) is a perspective view of the back front right effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 475 is an exploded perspective view of one back front right decorative unit in the back front right effect unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 476 disassembles one back front right decorative unit in the back front right effect unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind. FIG. 477 (a) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right effect unit in the closed state, and FIG. 477 (b) is a front view showing the shutter group in the back front right effect unit in the open state.

The back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front side of the back front right effect unit 3600 in the back box 3010 so that the upper part near the right end is located behind the back front right decoration body 3040. .. The back front right production unit 3800 has three back front right decorations, in order from the top, the first back front right decoration unit 3810A, the second back front right decoration unit 3810B, and the third back front right decoration unit 3810C. It is composed of a body unit 3810.

In the back front right effect unit 3800, as shown in FIG. 477, the first back front right decorative body unit 3810A is compared with the second back front right decorative body unit 3810B and the third back front right decorative body unit 3810C. It is tilted diagonally so that the upper end side moves to the left. Further, the shape of the rear cover 3815 of the first back front right decorative body unit 3810A is slightly different from that of the second back front right decorative body unit 3810B and the third back front right decorative body unit 3810C.

As shown in FIGS. 475 and 476, the back front right decorative body unit 3810 of the back front right effect unit 3800 has a frame-shaped front cover 3811 penetrating the front and rear and a frame attached to the rear side of the front cover 3811. The shape of the shutter support member 3812 and the front surface of the shutter support member 3812 are arranged in a row in the vertical direction, and each is rotatably supported around an axis in the horizontal direction so that the inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 can be opened and closed. It is equipped with a shutter unit 3830.

Further, the back front right decorative body unit 3810 closes the inside of the frame of the shutter support member 3812 from the rear, and has a translucent flat back front right decorative body 3813 and a back front right decorative body 3813. The back front right decorative board 3814, which is provided at the rear and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front, and the back front right decorative board 3814, which is attached to the front cover 3811 so as to cover the back front right decorative board 3814 from the rear, is a back rear right production unit. It includes a rear cover 3815 that is attached to the front of the 3600.

Further, the back front right decorative body unit 3810 includes a support plate 3816 made of a metal plate attached to the right side of the shutter support member 3812, a back front right drive solenoid 3817 attached to the support plate 3816, and a back front right drive solenoid 3817. The transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger in the right drive solenoid 3817 and the support plate 3816 are rotatably attached around the axis in the left-right direction. It includes a rotating link member 3819 and an opening / closing slider 3820 that slides in the vertical direction to open and close the shutter unit 3830 by rotating the link member 3819.

The front cover 3811 of the back front right decorative unit 3810 is formed in an outer shape such that the "convex" character is tilted to the left and the corners are rounded (a shape in which a "pine" is stylized). The shutter support member 3812 is provided with a plurality of bearing portions 3812a rotatably supporting the shaft portion 3833 of each shutter member 3831 in the shutter unit 3830 on the front surface. Further, the shutter support member 3812 has a boss portion 3812b that protrudes forward in a cylindrical shape from the vicinity of the right end of the front surface. The boss portion 3812b is slidably inserted into the slit 3820b of the opening / closing slider 3820, and a support plate 3816 is attached to the tip thereof.

The shutter unit 3830 is composed of a plurality of (here, eight) shutter members 3831. The shutter member 3831 includes a flat plate-shaped shutter 3832 extending to the left and right, a shaft portion 3833 extending in a columnar shape from both left and right ends of the shutter 3832, and a right side after projecting from the tip of the right shaft part 3833 in the direction perpendicular to the axis. It has a crankshaft 3834 that extends in a columnar direction.

The shutter 3832 is formed in a length and shape corresponding to the height at which the shutter member 3831 is arranged with respect to the shape in the frame of the front cover 3811. The shaft portion 3833 projects from the vicinity of the upper end of the shutter 3832 with the surface of the shutter 3832 facing forward. The crankshaft 3834 is located behind the shaft portion 3833.

The shutter member 3831 can rotate about the axis in the left-right direction about the shaft portion 3833 by the shaft portion 3833 being rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3812a of the shutter support member 3812. The crankshaft 3834 is slidably inserted into the transmission groove 3820a of the open / close slider 3820.

Although not shown, the back front right decorative body 3813 is provided with patterns such as characters, items, and logos in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. The back front right decorative body 3813 can diffuse the light from the LED of the back front right decorative substrate 3814. The plurality of LEDs on the back front right decorative substrate 3814 are full-color LEDs.

The support plate 3816 extends vertically with the plate surface facing left and right, and is formed in a shape in which the front end side is bent to the left. In the support plate 3816, a portion bent to the left on the front end side is attached to the front surface of the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812, and the remaining portion projects rearward through the right side of the shutter support member 3812. There is. Further, the support plate 3816 has a support pin 3816a protruding from the vicinity of the lower end to the left in a columnar shape. The support pin 3816a is for rotatably supporting the link member 3819.

The back front right drive solenoid 3817 is attached to the support plate 3816 so that the plunger moves downward. The back front right drive solenoid 3817 is urged by a spring in a direction in which the plunger protrudes downward. The link member 3819 can rotate about an axis in the left-right direction about the support pin 3816a by inserting the support pin 3816a of the support plate 3816. The link member 3819 is provided with a first connecting portion 3819a connected to the transmission member 3818 on the rear side with a portion where the support pin 3816a is inserted, and is connected to the opening / closing slider 3820. A connecting portion 3819b is provided on the front side.

The opening / closing slider 3820 extends vertically at substantially the same length as the height of the shutter unit 3830 composed of a plurality of shutter members 3831, and a transmission groove into which each crankshaft 3834 of the shutter unit 3830 is slidably inserted in the front-rear direction. It has a 3820a and a slit 3820b into which the boss portion 3812b of the shutter support member 3812 is slidably inserted in the vertical direction.

Next, the operation of the back front right effect unit 3800 will be described. In the back front right effect unit 3800, as shown in FIG. 477 (a), in the normal state, the shutter 3832 of the shutter member 3831 of the shutter unit 3830 is in a state in which the plate surface faces forward, and there are a plurality of them. The inside of the frame of the front cover 3811 is closed by the shutter 3832. In this normal state, the back front right decorative body 3813 provided behind the shutter unit 3830 is invisible from the front (player side). Although not shown, when the shutter unit 3830 is in the closed state, a pattern different from the pattern applied to the rear front right decorative body 3813 is applied to the front surface of the shutter unit 3830 (plurality of shutters 3832). Has been done.

In the normal state, the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is in a non-energized (OFF) state, and the plunger protrudes downward due to the urging force of the spring. Further, in a normal state, the open / close slider 3820 is located at the upper moving end, and the crankshaft 3834 of each shutter member 3831 is located above the shaft portion 3833.

In this normal state, when the back front right drive solenoid 3817 is energized (ON), the plunger moves upward against the urging force of the spring, and at the same time, the transmission member 3818 attached to the tip of the plunger moves upward. Move to. When the transmission member 3818 moves upward, the first connection portion 3819a of the link member 3819 connected to the transmission member 3818 moves upward, and the link member 3819 rotates about the support pin 3816a. As a result, the second connecting portion 3819b on the opposite side of the first connecting portion 3819a moves downward. Then, the downward movement of the second connecting portion 3819b of the link member 3819 causes the opening / closing slider 3820 connected to the second connecting portion 3819b to move downward.

By moving the opening / closing slider 3820 downward, the crankshaft 3834 of the shutter member 3831 inserted in the transmission groove 3820a is pressed downward, and the shutter is positioned so that the crankshaft 3834 is located below the shaft portion 3833. The member 3831 rotates about the shaft portion 3833. As a result, the plate surface of the shutter 3832 faces up and down, so that the frame of the front cover 3811 is opened by the plurality of shutters 3832, and the back front provided behind the shutter unit 3830. The right decorative body 3813 becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 477 (b)).

After that, by de-energizing (OFF) the back front right drive solenoid 3817, the plunger that had been moving upward will move downward due to the urging force of the spring, and by moving in the opposite direction to the above, The shutter unit 3830 in the open state can return to the closed state, which is the normal state.

As described above, according to the back front right effect unit 3800 of the present embodiment, by opening and closing the shutter unit 3830 by the back front right drive solenoid 3817, the decoration (picture) of the shutter unit 3830 is changed to the back front right decoration body 3813. It is possible to switch to the decoration (picture) of, and the player can enjoy the change of decoration.

Further, since the back front right decorative substrate 3814 is provided behind the shutter unit 3830 and the back front right decorative body 3813, when the shutter unit 3830 is in the closed state, a plurality of LEDs of the back front right decorative substrate 3814 are made to emit light. Then, the shutter unit 3830 decorated with light emission can be shown to the player, and when the shutter unit 3830 is in the open state, a plurality of LEDs on the back front right decorative substrate 3814 are made to emit light, so that the back front right decorated with light emission is emitted. The decorative body 3813 can be shown to the player.

Further, in the back front right effect unit 3800, there are three back front right decoration units 3810A, a second back front right decoration unit 3810B, and a third back front right decoration unit 3810C. Since the shutter unit 3830 can be opened and closed independently and the 3810 can be decorated with light emission, various effects can be given to the player by appropriately combining the effects of the three back front right decoration units 3810. I can show you.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, the main effects (movable effects) on the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 478 to 483 and the like. FIG. 478 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear-rear movable decorative body of the back-rear effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. FIG. 479 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back lower middle rotating decorative body of the back lower middle effect unit is moved from the lower position to the upper position. FIG. 480 shows the back-up rear rotation decoration of the back-up rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back-back left rotation decoration of the back-up left effect unit from the retracted position to the first appearance position, and the back rear right. It is a front view of the game board which shows the back-right rotation decoration body of the production unit moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position, respectively. In FIG. 481, the back-rear left-rotating decorative body of the back-rear-left effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position, and the back-rear-right effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows in the moved state. FIG. 482 is a front view of the game board showing the shutter unit of the back front left effect unit and the shutter unit of the back front right effect unit from the closed state to the open state, respectively.

FIG. 483 shows the back-rear movable decorative body of the back-rear effect unit from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back-up rear-rotating decorative body of the back-up rear effect unit from the evacuation position to the appearance position, and the back-rear left effect unit. Move the left-handed decorative body from the retracted position to the first appearance position, move the back-back right-rotating decorative body from the back-back right effect unit to the first appearance position, and move the back-lower middle-rotating decorative body from the back-lower middle effect unit to the first appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which it moved from the descending position to the ascending position, respectively.

The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that divides the rear end side of the game area 5a, a start port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, and a side. The upper left unit 2300, the first attacker unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, the second attacker unit 2600, the side right middle unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are formed to be substantially transparent as a whole. As shown in FIG. 389, the back front left decoration body 3030, the back front right decoration body 3040, and the back bottom left effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 are rotated to the back bottom left. Decorative body 3201, back bottom right rotation decoration unit 3250 of back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom middle rotation decoration body 3310 of back bottom middle production unit 3300, back top front rotation decoration body 3410 and back top of back top production unit 3400 The front decorative body 3421, the front cover 3711 and the shutter unit 3730 of the back front left effect unit 3700, the front cover 3811 and the shutter unit 3830 of the back front right effect unit 3800, etc. can be clearly seen, and the center accessory 2500. The effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be satisfactorily visually recognized through the frame of.

Further, in detail, the back front left decorative body 3030 is located on the left side of the center accessory 2500, and the back front right decorative body 3040 is from the abutment portion 1006 of the front component 1000 to the right rail 1005. It is located along the side right middle unit up to the vicinity of 2700. Further, the back-back movable decorative body 3110 of the back-back effect unit 3100 is located behind the back-up effect unit 3400, and is invisible to the player.

Further, the lower back left rotating decoration 3201 is located below the frame of the center accessory 2500 at the center of the side unit 2200 and behind the general winning opening 2001 on the left side, and the lower back right rotating decoration 3251. Is located below the frame of the center accessory 2500 and behind the first prize opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400. The lower back left rotating decorative body 3201 and the lower back right rotating decorative body 3251 are visible from the player side through the transparent game panel 1100 and the front unit 2000.

Further, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is in the lowered position, and is located behind the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 so that the upper portion protrudes into the frame of the center accessory 2500. ing. Since the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 sees the rotating decoration body 3310 from diagonally above, the number decoration above the center of rotation is displayed through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It can be visually recognized well.

Further, the back-up front decorative body 3421 of the back-up effect unit 3400 extends left and right at the upper part of the game area 5a in the front view, and the upper part on the left side from the center in the left-right direction is the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory. It can be visually recognized through 2500, and the rest can be visually recognized well through the frame of the center accessory 2500. The back-up front rotating decoration body 3410 is in a state where one petal is directed upward at the center in the left-right direction in front of the back-up front decoration body 3421, and is good from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2500. Can be visually recognized. The back-up elevating decoration unit 3450 having the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440 of the back-up effect unit 3400 is in a retracted position behind the back-up front decoration body 3421 in a normal state. It is invisible from the side.

Further, the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 having the back rear left rotating decorative body 3510 of the back rear left effect unit 3500 is in a retracted position behind the back front left effect unit 3700 in a normal state. , It is invisible from the player side. Further, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 having the back rear right rotating decorative body 3610 of the back rear right effect unit 3600 is in a retracted position behind the back front right effect unit 3800 in a normal state. , It is invisible from the player side.

Further, the three back front left decorative body units 3710 of the back front left effect unit 3700 are arranged vertically along the left side of the game panel 1100, and are located in the game area 5a in the front view, and are transparent games. It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the frame of the center accessory 2500. Of the three back front left decoration units 3710, the upper first back front left decoration unit 3710A is mostly located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in front view. The lower part is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. The second back front left decorative body unit 3710B on the middle side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 in the front view. Most of the lower third back front left decorative unit 3710C is located behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in the front view, and the right part is within the frame of the center accessory 2500. positioned.

In the back front left effect unit 3700, in the normal state, the shutter unit 3730 is closed in each of the three back front left decoration units 3710, and the back front left decoration unit 3713 is invisible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3730 is visible.

Further, the three back front right decorative body units 3810 of the back front right effect unit 3800 are arranged vertically along the right side of the game panel 1100, and are located in the game area 5a in the front view, and are transparent games. It is visible from the player side through the panel 1100, the center accessory 2500, and the frame of the center accessory 2500. The upper first back front right decoration unit 3810A of the three back front right decoration units 3810 is located on the right side behind the transparent game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 in front view. The left side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. The second back front right decorative body unit 3810B on the middle side and the third back front right decorative body unit 3810C on the lower side are the transparent game panel 1100 and the center on the right side from the part to the left of the center in the left-right direction in the front view. It is located behind the accessory 2500, and the remaining left side is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500.

In the back front right effect unit 3800, in the normal state, the shutter unit 3830 is closed in each of the three back front right decoration units 3810, and the back front right decoration unit 3813 is invisible. At the same time, the decoration of the shutter unit 3830 is visible.

The game board 5 is produced after the back unit 3000 according to the result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery, which are drawn by accepting the game ball B at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. Unit 3100, back bottom left production unit 3200, back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom middle production unit 3300, back top production unit 3400, back back left production unit 3500, back back right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700 , And the back front right effect unit 3800 performs a predetermined effect (movable effect or light emission effect).

Specifically, as an effect using the back-rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 478, by moving the slide guide 3130 downward by the back-rear drive motor 3126, the lock member 3134 The lock is released by, and the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 is dropped from the retracted position to the appearance position. As a result, the player can see the effect (movable effect) in which the large back-rear movable decorative body 3110 straddling the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction freely falls while blocking the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player can be entertained, and an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" game) in which the player is advantageous to the player occurs. It can make you think that it is, and you can raise the expectation for the game.

In this back-rear effect unit 3100, although not shown, after the back-rear movable decoration 3110 is dropped to the appearance position, the back-rear drive motor 3126 moves the slide guide 3130 upward to move the back-rear movable decoration. When the 3110 is returned to the retracted position, the forward / reverse rotation of the rear-rear drive motor 3126 is appropriately changed, so that the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved up and down the display screen of the effect display device 1600 via the slide guide 3130. It may be reciprocated up and down near the center of the direction. As a result, the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 moves up and down while blocking the vertical center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the player's interest is strongly attracted to the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. The movable decorative body 3110 can be noticed, and the movement of the movable decorative body 3110 after the back can be enjoyed.

As an effect using the back lower middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 479, the lower back middle elevating drive motor 3352 rotates the elevating arm 3357 to rotate the lower back middle decorative unit 3320. Is moved from the descending position to the ascending position, and the lower back middle rotation drive motor 3333 rotates the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction. As a result, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 moves upward so as to block a part of the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500, which is good from the player side. Since it can be visually recognized and rotates around, it can give a strong impact to the player and entertain the player.

Since the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is provided with six number decorations, by rotating the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310, the player feels as if the roulette is rotating. Can be given. Therefore, when rotating the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310, the effect display device 1600 is displayed with an effect image such as "Sugoroku", and the number of the numerical decoration of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 that has stopped rotating is displayed. Depending on the situation, the "piece" may advance. As a result, the player is harassed by whether or not the rotating underside middle rotating ornament 3310 stops rotating at the desired number decoration position so that the "piece" advances to the desired "square". It can be thrilling and entertaining to the player. In addition, as the "piece" advances, the player can feel that the expected value is increasing, and the expectation for the game can be increased.

Examples of the production using the back lower left effect unit 3200, the back lower right effect unit 3250, the back upper effect unit 3400, the back rear left effect unit 3500, and the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 are shown in FIG. 480. As shown, in the back lower left effect unit 3200, the back lower left drive motor 3205 rotates the back lower left rotation decoration body 3201, and in the back lower right effect unit 3250, the back lower right drive motor 3255 rotates the back lower right rotation decoration body. Rotate 3251. Further, in the back-up effect unit 3400, the back-up front rotation drive motor 3425 rotates the back-up front rotation decoration unit 3410, and the back-up lift drive motor 3429 lowers the back-up lift decoration unit 3450 from the retracted position. At the same time as rotating to the appearance position, the back-up rear rotation drive motor 3454 rotates the back-up rear rotation decorative body 3440. Further, in the back rear left effect unit 3500, the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 moves the back rear left decorative body unit 3520 from the retracted position to the first appearance position on the upper right, and the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525 moves the back rear left decorative unit 3520. Rotate the counterclockwise ornament 3510. Further, in the back-rear right effect unit 3600, the back-rear right up-and-down drive motor 3654 moves the back-rear right decorative body unit 3620 from the retracted position to the first appearance position on the upper left, and the back-rear right rotation drive motor 3625 moves the back-rear right decoration unit 3620 to the first appearance position. Rotate the right-handed decorative body 3610.

As a result, the back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440, the back back left rotation decoration body 3510, and the back back right rotation decoration body 3610 can be moved to the front of the effect display device 1600 and become visible, and the back bottom left rotation decoration body can be visually recognized. Because the body 3201, the back lower right rotation decoration body 3251, the back upper front rotation decoration body 3410, the back upper back rotation decoration body 3440, the back back left rotation decoration body 3510, and the back back right rotation decoration body 3610 rotate respectively. By rotating the six ornaments round and round, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game by making the player think that something good will happen.

At this time, the back-up elevating drive motor 3249, the back-rear left elevating drive motor 3554, and the back-rear right elevating drive motor 3654 are repeatedly rotated forward and backward as appropriate, and the back-up elevating decorative body unit 3450, the back-rear left decoration. The body unit 3520 and the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 may be swung, respectively. As a result, the back-up / rear-rotating decorative body 3440, the back-back-left-rotating decorative body 3510, and the back-back-right-rotating decorative body 3610 rotate while swaying, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It can entertain the player.

Further, at this time, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 may be rotated. As a result, the seven ornaments rotate around, which makes the player strongly think that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" game) may occur in which the player has an advantage. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game.

As an effect using the back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 481, the back rear left effect unit 3500 is backed by the back rear left evacuation drive motor 3554. The left decoration unit 3520 is moved from the retracted position to the second appearance position on the upper right, and the back rear left rotation drive motor 3525 rotates the back rear left rotation decoration 3510. Further, in the back rear right effect unit 3600, the back rear right decorative body unit 3620 is moved from the retracted position to the upper left second appearance position by the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654, and the back rear right rotation drive motor 3625 moves the back rear right decoration unit 3620. Rotate the decorative body 3610. As a result, the eyes of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and the two ornaments rotate around at a position of approximately height, so there is something good that surprises the player. It can make you think that it is, and you can raise the expectation for the game.

At this time, in the effect display device 1600, the positions of the back-rear left-rotating decorative body 3510 and the back-rear-right-rotating decorative body 3610 at the second appearance position are the eyes of the faces of the predetermined characters according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1. It is also possible to display an effect image that is a position. As a result, it is possible to show the player the effect that the character's eyes are spinning, and it is possible to entertain the player.

As an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 482, in the back front left effect unit 3700, the shutter unit 3730 is operated by the back front left drive solenoid 3717. The shutter unit 3830 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the back front right drive solenoid 3817 in the back front right effect unit 3800. As a result, the back front left decorative body 3713 behind the shutter unit 3730 and the back front right decorative body 3813 behind the shutter unit 3830 can be visually recognized from the player side, so that the back front left decorative body 3713 and the back front right The decoration of the decorative body 3813 can be shown to the player, and the player can enjoy the change of the decoration.

It should be noted that, as an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800, each of them has three back front left decorative body units 3710 and three back front right decorative body units 3810. The shutter unit 3730 of the back front left decorative unit 3710 and the shutter unit 3830 of the back front right decorative unit 3810 may be individually opened and closed, and the combination of the shutter unit 3730 and the shutter unit 3830 to be opened and closed may be opened and closed individually. As a result, various effects can be shown to the player, and the player can be less likely to get bored.

Back back production unit 3100, back bottom left production unit 3200, back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom middle production unit 3300, back top production unit 3400, back back left production unit 3500, back back right production unit 3600 As an effect using the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back front right effect unit 3800, for example, as shown in FIG. 483, all the decorative bodies and the like may be movable. This will
By moving all the decorative bodies, it is possible to convince the player that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" gaming state) will occur, and it is possible to raise expectations for the advantageous gaming state. In this case, in the back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back rear right effect unit 3600, the back rear left decorative unit 3520 and the back rear right decorative unit 3620 are moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position. By doing so, contact with the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is avoided.

In the above description, the movement of each decorative body has been described. However, when each decorative body is moved, the LED of the decorative substrate provided at the rear is appropriately emitted to emit light to give the player a light emitting effect of the decorative body. It can be shown and can attract the attention of the player even more.

Further, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the movable effect and the light emitting effect as described above can be appropriately combined, and also combined with the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. As a result, it is possible to present a variety of patterns to the player by appropriately combining a light emitting effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc., and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[5-11. Main effects of the game board]
Next, the main functions and effects of the game board 5 of the present embodiment having the above-described configuration will be described. The game board 5 of the present embodiment is provided with a penetrating opening 1112 in the game panel 1100 provided with the game area 5a on the front side, and then the game area 5a is distributed to the distribution area where the game ball B can be distributed. The frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, which is divided into an impossible non-circulation area and is formed in a shape along the inner circumference of the opening 1112, has its front end projected forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. Since the rear side is inserted into the opening 1112 in this state, the outside of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is likely to be the distribution region, and the inside is the non-distribution region. Then, a flat plate-shaped support portion 2503 thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is extended from a position where the front surface and the front-rear direction of the game panel 1100 on the peripheral wall portion 2501 are the same to the non-distribution region side (inside). At the same time, since the flange portion 2502 that abuts on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is provided from the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is not provided to the distribution region side (outside), the peripheral wall portion 2501 Since nothing extends to the distribution area side of the portion where the support portion 2503 is provided, the obstacle nail N can be planted at a position as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. Therefore, the actual distribution area can be set to a position in contact with the peripheral wall portion 2501, and the actual distribution area can be made larger than that of the conventional pachinko machine. That is, even if the non-distribution area (within the frame of the center accessory 2500) partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is increased, the actual distribution area does not become smaller as in the conventional pachinko machine. .. Therefore, the non-distribution area in which the game ball B is distributed is suppressed to be substantially reduced in the game area 5a, and the non-distribution area defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is increased to increase the non-distribution area. It is possible to make it easier to see the effect image of the effect display device 1600 as the effect device provided behind the area, the movable body and the decorative body of the effect unit, and the game and the non-distribution area in the distribution area by the game ball B. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of entertaining any of the productions in.

Further, in the center accessory 2500, the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced from the non-circulation region side (inside) by the support portion 2503, and the peripheral wall portion 2502 is provided in the portion where the support portion 2503 is not provided. Since the portion 2501 can be reinforced from the distribution region side (outside) and the center accessory 2500 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 via the flange portion 2502, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is improved. Even if the game ball B in the game area 5a comes into contact with (contacts) the portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the support portion 2503 is provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be maintained by the support portion 2503 or the like. It is possible to prevent deformation and damage of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500).

Further, since the strength and rigidity of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 can be increased by attaching to the support portion 2503, the flange portion 2502, the game panel 1100, etc., the peripheral wall portion 2501 is brought into contact with the game ball B. Can be prevented from elastically deforming and flipping the game ball B like an elastic body (rubber or spring). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B circulating in the game area 5a from coming into contact with the peripheral wall portion 2501 and making a strange movement different from the conventional one, which causes discomfort to the player. Can be prevented and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 including the support portion 2503 is made transparent, the support portion 2503 extending from the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the non-distribution area side can be made difficult to see, and the support portion 2503 (center) can be made difficult to see. Since the effect image of the effect display device 1600 as the effect device provided behind the accessory 2500) and the movable body and the decorative body of the effect unit provided on the back unit 3000 can be seen, it is a non-distribution area. The range in which the effect image, the movable body, the decorative body, etc. can be seen can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be more easily exerted. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out by having a large visible range of the effect image, the movable body, the decorative body, etc. of the effect display device 1600, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player. it can.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 including the support unit 2503 is made transparent, the light of the illumination in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed or the pachinko machine 1 is provided by the transparent part. Since it is possible to reflect, refract, diffuse, or transmit light from a light emitting means (LED, effect display device 1600, etc.), transparent parts such as the support portion 2503 and the peripheral wall portion 2501 are illuminated. It can be made to look gorgeous, improve its appearance, and enhance its appeal to the player. At this time, the transparent support portion 2503 may be provided with a step, a notch, or the like to further enhance the diffusion effect.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 including the support portion 2503 is made transparent, it is provided in a movable body (for example, the back front left effect unit 3700 and the back rear left effect unit 3500) provided behind the support unit 2503. The light emission by the light emitting means (LED) obtains the above-mentioned effect, and the transparent support portion 2503 makes it possible for the player to recognize the existence of the movable body.

Further, since the transparent support portion 2503 is extended in a flat plate shape thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100 at the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is extended to the game panel. Compared with the case where the lens is extended to the same thickness as 1100, the lens effect by the support unit 2503 can be reduced, and the support unit 2503 has the rear back front left decorative body 3030 and the effect device (effect display device 1600). Etc.), the lens effect of the transparent support part 2503 becomes even lower, and the part (design) behind the support part 2503 in the back front left decorative body 3030, the production image of the production device, the movable body, the decoration body, etc. ) Can be improved, and the back front left decorative body 3030, the effect image, and the like can be made more visible.

Further, since at least a part of the tip side of the support portion 2503 is formed in a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is formed at a portion having a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the tip end side of the support portion 2503. Since a line different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be shown depending on the tip side of the frame, it is difficult to see a single design as compared with the case where the shape is formed along the peripheral wall portion 2501, and it seems that attention is paid to details. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 having a deep design.

Further, since at least a part of the tip side of the support portion 2503 has a shape different from that of the peripheral wall portion 2501, the amount of extension from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not constant and is different at the relevant portion of the support portion 2503. Therefore, the effect of reinforcing the peripheral wall portion 2501 by the support portion 2503 can be improved by setting the extension amount according to the shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501.

Further, since the support portion 2503 extends from the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the game panel 1100 in the peripheral wall portion 2501, the support portion 2503 is a part of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 for the player. It is possible to make the illusion as if, and it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the support unit 2503.

Further, since the support portion 2503 is provided at the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and extends from the middle (middle) of the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the front-rear direction, it is behind the peripheral wall portion 2501. Compared with the case where the support portion 2503 is extended from the end side, it is possible to reduce the decrease in the reinforcing effect of the support portion 2503 with respect to the tip end side of the peripheral wall portion 2501, so that the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is sufficient. It can be maintained, and it is possible to prevent the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) from being deformed or damaged even if the game medium comes into contact with the game medium.

Further, since the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is formed so as to have a shape along the inner circumference of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 and the rear side is inserted into the opening 1112, the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 is inserted. The inner peripheral surface can be hidden, decorated, or obscured by the peripheral wall portion 2501.

Further, since the outer shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is formed along the inner circumference of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is attached to the game panel 1100 when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100. It seems that it protrudes forward from the peripheral edge of the opening 1112, and it is possible to give a sense of unity to the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center accessory 2500) and the game panel 1100, and a good-looking pachinko machine in the game area 5a. Machine 1 can be provided.

Further, since the center accessory 2500 is attached to the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, whether the game panel 1100 is transparent or opaque, it is partitioned by the peripheral wall portion 2501 inside the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. The effect image of the effect display device 1600 provided behind the non-distribution area and the movable body, decorative body, etc. of the effect unit can be satisfactorily visually recognized from the front (player side), and the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of fully exerting the effect of the effect of the above.

Further, since the front end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 is projected forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, when the game area 5a is viewed from an angle, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. Since it looks protruding to the side, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice the existence of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and to make it easier for the player to recognize the distribution area and the non-distribution area defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501.

Further, a flange portion 2502 extending to the distribution region side (outside) is provided at a portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500 where the support portion 2503 does not extend, and the flange portion 2502 is provided at the portion where the flange portion 2502 is provided. Does not provide a support unit 2503 that extends to the non-distribution area side (inside), so that the support unit 2503 interferes with the visibility of the effect device (effect display device 1600 or the effect unit of the back unit 3000). Instead, the area where the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and the movable body of the effect unit can be seen can be enlarged, and the effect of the effect can be more easily exerted by the effect device. It is possible to entertain the production by and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the center accessory 2500, since the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be maintained at the same level as the conventional product by the support portion 2503 and the flange portion 2502, the peripheral wall portion 2501 and the support portion 2503 are integrally resin-molded and gold. It is possible to prevent the molded product from being deformed when it is removed from the mold.

Further, since the support portion 2503 is extended into a flat plate shape thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100, when the center accessory 2500 is integrally molded with the synthetic resin, only the portion of the support portion 2503 is different from the other portions. It is possible to prevent the difference in the amount of shrinkage from becoming large, and it is possible to prevent the center accessory 2500 from being deformed during molding.

Further, according to the present embodiment, a frame-shaped front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and a flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 that closes the inside of the frame of the front component 1000 from the rear side. The back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 as functional parts of the back rear left effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100. The motor 3654 is arranged so that at least a part of the motor 3654 is outside the game area 5a in the front view, and is placed between the game panel 1100 and the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654. Back front left decorative body 3030 and back front right decorative body 3040 extending from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a so as to at least cover the portion in the game area 5a of the elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 can cover and hide at least a part of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654. Through the transparent front component 1000, the game panel 1100, and the game area 5a, the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 can be obscured from the player side, and the appearance of the entire pachinko machine 1 can be made difficult to see. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 can be seen instead of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 as a whole can be improved, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to have an enhanced appeal to the player.

Further, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the boundary of the game area 5a partitioned by the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 is difficult to understand, so that the outer periphery of the game area 5a is not partitioned. It is possible to give a feeling of openness by making it look like this, and even if the game area 5a is the same size as the conventional pachinko machine, the game area 5a can be made to look larger. Therefore, since the gaming area 5a looks larger than that of the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, raise the expectation for the game with the pachinko machine 1, and play the game. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can enhance the appeal to the player.

Further, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 cover at least a portion in the game area 5a in front of the functional parts such as the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654. Therefore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 can prevent the functional parts from being seen in the game area 5a, so that the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved. In addition to being able to exert the same effects as described above, it is possible to make the functional parts difficult to see even when viewed from the center side of the game area 5a.

Further, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are provided with continuous decorations over the entire surface, and the back front extending from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a in front view. Since the decorations of the left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are continuous over the entire surface, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the boundary of the outer periphery of the game area 5a by the continuous decoration, and to give a feeling of openness to the game. The size of the area 5a can be made to appear larger than the actual size, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by the decoration of the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040. It is possible to make it stand out and enhance the appeal to the player.

Further, since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are made opaque, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are provided on the rear side through the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front left decorative body 3040. It is possible to prevent the back rear right effect unit 3600 and the like from being seen, and the back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 and the like can be seen from the player side through the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100. It is possible to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 by preventing the pachinko machine 1 from becoming worse.

Further, in front view, at least a part of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 as functional parts is arranged outside the game area 5a (in the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554). Since (the whole) is completely (whole) arranged outside the game area 5a), the front component 1000 and the outer periphery of the game area 5a are used to arrange the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654. The back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 can be arranged without increasing the space between them, and the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654 can be arranged. By balancing, it is possible to prevent the space of the game area 5a from becoming small. In other words, since a part of the back-rear right elevating drive motor 3654 is arranged in the game area 5a in the front view, the space between the front component 1000 and the outer periphery of the game area 5a should be reduced. This makes it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of relatively increasing the space of the game area 5a and further exerting the above-mentioned effects. Further, by providing a part of the drive source (motor, solenoid, etc.) of the accessory that moves in the game area 5a outside the game area 5a, the space in the game area 5a can be increased. In that case, The range of effects performed within the game area 5a is expanded. All the drive sources (motors, solenoids, etc.) of the accessory that can move in the game area 5a may be arranged outside the game area 5a.

Further, since the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are transparent, the light of the illumination in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1, the effect display device 1600, etc. It is possible to transmit, reflect, refract, and diffuse the light from the pachinko machine 1, making it appear as if the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are emitting light, and the pachinko machine 1 as a whole. Can improve the appearance of. Further, although the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are provided with the opaque decorative sticker 3032 and the decorative sticker 3042, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are each based 3031. And since the base 3041 (which may include the decorative sticker 3032 and the decorative sticker 3042) is made of a transparent member, the light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 is emitted from the back front left decorative body 3030 or the back. It is possible to give the impression that the front right decorative body 3040 reaches the front right decorative body 3040 and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 emit light. It can be said that the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are arranged at positions where the light from various LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 reaches.

Further, since the back front left decorative body 3030 covers at least a part of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 as a functional part, it can be seen that it is a functional part by covering it to some extent without covering the whole. It becomes spicy and can look like part of a decoration. Therefore, even if the back front left decorative body 3030 is not sized to cover the entire back rear left elevating drive motor 3554, the same effects as described above can be obtained, and thus the back front left decorative body The game area 5a can be made larger while reducing the cost of 3030. The back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 cover and hide at least a part of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 and the back rear right elevating drive motor 3654, but some of them are pachinko machines. It is desirable that the portion close to the center of 1 (the portion closer to the boundary line that divides the inside of the game area 5a and the outside of the game area 5a). Further, it extends from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a even for a predetermined place where there is no drive source outside the game area 5a (a place in the lower left in FIG. 409, that is, a place in the lower left corner in the game board 5). By providing the decorative body, the game area 5a can be made to look larger.

Further, the inside of the frame of the front component 1000 that divides the outer circumference of the game area 5a is closed from the rear by the transparent game panel 1100, and the game area 5a is located on the front side of the game panel 1100. Therefore, the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are provided on the rear side of the game area 5a. Therefore, in front view, the inside and outside of the game area 5a can be decorated from the rear by the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 extending from the inside of the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. The same effect can be obtained, and the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 do not interfere with the game ball B in the game area 5a, and the game in the game area 5a is smooth. It can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the back front left decorative body 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 are extended to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in the front view, the back front left decorative body 3030 is formed in the door window 101a. The back rear left effect unit 3500 and the back rear right effect unit 3600 behind the 3030 and the back front right decorative body 3040 can be made invisible, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Further, since the back front left decorative body 3030 is extended to the extent that the inner part of the door window 101a of the back rear left elevating drive motor 3554 as a functional component is hidden, the back front left decorative body 3030 raises and lowers the back rear left. Since the uncovered portion can be covered by the frame-shaped door frame 3 without covering the entire drive motor 3554, it is possible to prevent the back front left decorative body 3030 from becoming longer than necessary. The cost of the back front left decorative body 3030 (pachinko machine 1) can be reduced.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface of the two general winning openings 2001 from the right of the side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is inclined toward the game panel 1100. On the other hand, in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the front wall portion 2101 forming the front surface is parallel to the game panel 1100, and the front surface is decorated with translucency. Since (a sticker is attached), the front surface of the first starting port 2002 faces forward (player side), and the first starting port 2002 can be made more conspicuous than the general winning opening 2001. Therefore, since it is possible to make it easier for the player to direct the player's consciousness toward the first starting port 2002 than the general winning opening 2001, the number of game balls B accepted by the first starting port 2002 is reduced (or the first starting). It is possible to avoid that the player's consciousness is concentrated on the general winning opening 2001 rather than the opening 2002), and the lottery of the first special lottery result performed by accepting the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002. It is possible to raise the expectation for the player and suppress the decline in interest, and at the same time, it is possible to make the player surely recognize the position of the first starting port 2002 that the player should aim at, and the player aimed at the first starting port 2002. You can entertain the game.

Then, depending on whether or not the game ball B in the game area 5a is accepted by the first start port 2002, the player can be disturbed, and when the game ball B is received by the first start port 2002, the game ball B can be received. Depending on whether or not a winning (for example, "big hit") in which an advantageous gaming state is generated by the lottery of the first special lottery result is drawn, the player can be thrilled and excited, and the expectation for the game is raised. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest. After that, when the winner is drawn by the lottery of the first special lottery result, an advantageous gaming state occurs in which the first prize opening 2005 and the second prize opening 2006 open and close in a predetermined pattern, which greatly enjoys the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game. At this time, if the game ball B aiming at the first starting port 2002 is accepted by the general winning opening 2001, the game ball B is paid out as a privilege although the lottery of the first special lottery result is not performed. , The player is not discouraged, and the game can be continuously enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined with respect to the surface of the game panel 1100, and the front wall portion 2101 of the first starting port 2002 is made parallel to the surface of the game panel 1100. Since the form (appearance) of the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting port 2002 will be significantly different, a sticker is attached to the front surface of the first starting opening 2002 and a seal is attached to the front surface of the general winning opening 2001. Even if it is not attached, it does not give a sense of discomfort to the player, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from becoming unattractive, and the player can enjoy the game with the pachinko machine 1 and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting port 2002 are formed of a transparent member, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting port 2002 is visually recognized through the transparent member. Therefore, it is possible to make the player surely recognize that the game ball B has been accepted by the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002, and to fully enjoy the joy of being accepted. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest. Further, since the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting port 2002 are formed of transparent members, the light of the illumination in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and the light emission provided in the pachinko machine 1. Since the light from the means (LED on the decorative substrate) can be reflected, refracted, or diffused, the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting port 2002 can be made to look gorgeous and look good. Therefore, the appealing power to the player can be enhanced.

Further, in the general winning opening 2001, the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface is inclined toward the game panel 1100, and in the first starting opening 2002, the accepted game ball B is used as the general winning opening. Since the game ball B is guided backward later than the game ball B received in 2001, the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 where the lottery of the first special lottery result is performed is used as the general winning opening 2001. Since the game ball B received can be guided to the rear at a later timing than the received game ball B, the game ball B received at the first starting port 2002 can be shown to the player for a relatively long time. Therefore, when the game ball B is accepted at the first starting port 2002 where the lottery of the first special lottery result is performed, the joy (superiority complex) due to the acceptance of the game ball B at the first starting port 2002 is given to the general prize. The player can be allowed to taste the game ball B for a longer time than when the game ball B is received in the mouth 2001, and the player can be entertained and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is immediately rearward (). Since it can be guided to the game panel 1100 side) and discharged faster than the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002, it is useless for the game ball B being received in the general winning opening 2001. It is possible to suppress the realization of the game for a long time, the player's attention can be directed to the next game ball B, the game can be advanced smoothly, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, in the general winning opening 2001, a part of the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203 after inclining the first front wall portion 2203 forming the front surface with respect to the game panel 1100. Therefore, when the game ball B passes in front of the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001, most of the game ball B overlaps with the general winning opening 2001 in the front view. Then, depending on the player, the game ball B can be made to have the illusion that it has been accepted by the general winning opening 2001, and the player can be entertained. At this time, since a part of the game ball B does not overlap with the general winning opening 2001, it is not strongly recognized that the game ball B has been accepted by the general winning opening 2001, and it may be considered as an illusion. Therefore, even if the privilege (lottery of the first special lottery result) is not given after that, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust of the pachinko machine 1 and the game hall side. It is possible to continue to enjoy the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the first front wall portion 2203 of the general winning opening 2001 is inclined toward the game panel 1100, the amount of material applied to the general winning opening 2001 (side unit 2200) can be reduced and the general winning opening 2001 (side unit 2200) can be reduced. Decoration such as a sticker can be omitted on the front surface of the mouth 2001. Therefore, since the cost required for the general winning opening 2001 can be reduced, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more entertaining to the player by turning the amount into a production device or the like.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the back bottom middle decoration unit 3320 of the back bottom middle effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, the rotating back bottom middle rotation having a plurality of even-numbered (here, 6 places) stop positions. The decorative body 3310 is provided with an area detection piece 3325 having a length extending to half of the stop positions and a plurality of position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to each stop position (here, six), and an area detection piece 3325. Multiple (here, three) area identification sensors 3330 consisting of half of the stop positions that detect the above, and one position identification sensor 3331 that detects the position detection piece 3326, and multiple (here four) sensors. Since it is provided, when the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 rotates, the plurality of area identification sensors 3330 that detect the area detection piece 3325 repeatedly increase in order from one side in the rotation direction and then decrease. Therefore, by combining the area identification sensor 3330 that detects the area detection piece 3325, the current rotation position of the back lower middle rotation decoration body 3310 can be roughly grasped.

More specifically, in the case of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 having six stop positions from the first stop position to the sixth stop position in the rotation direction, three side-by-side stop positions in which the area detection piece 3325 is half. The minimum number of area identification sensors 3330 required for detecting the movement to an arbitrary stop position is three, which is half of the number of stop positions. Then, the three area identification sensors 3330 are set as the first area identification sensor 3330a, the second area identification sensor 3330b, and the third area identification sensor 3330c in the rotation direction, and the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 is in the first stop position. At (the position of the decorative number of "3"), it is assumed that only the first area identification sensor 3330a detects the area detection piece 3325. When the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the second stop position (the position of the decorative number "2") from this state, the first area identification sensor 3330a and the second area identification sensor 3330b detect the area detection piece 3325. To do. Further, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the third stop position (the position of the decorative number “1”), the first region identification sensor 3330a, the second region identification sensor 3330b, and the third region identification sensor 3330c The area detection piece 3325 is detected.

Further, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the fourth stop position (the position of the decorative number of "6"), the first area identification sensor 3330a is not detected, and the second area identification sensor 3330b and the third area identification are specified. The sensor 3330c detects the area detection piece 3325. Further, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the fifth stop position (the position of the decorative number of "5"), the second area identification sensor 3330b is not detected, and only the third area identification sensor 3330c is the area detection piece. Detects 3325. Then, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the sixth stop position (the position of the decorative number of "4"), the third area identification sensor 3330c is also non-detected, and all the area identification sensors 3330 are the area detection piece 3325. Is not detected. After that, when the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 rotates, it rotates to the first stop position (the position of the decorative number of "3"), and only the first area identification sensor 3330a detects the area detection piece 3325. In the initial state, the detection / non-detection of the area identification sensor 3330 as described above is repeated as the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back is rotated.

In this way, since the area detection piece 3325 having a length extending over half of the stop positions is provided, the combination of the detection of the area detection pieces 3325 by the plurality of area identification sensors 3330 results in the rotation decoration in the lower back. The rotation of the body 3310 can be detected, and all the area identification sensors 3330 are not undetected even until the rotating decorative body 3310 rotates to the next stop position. The current position of the medium-rotating decorative body 3310 can be roughly grasped.

Since the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is provided with a plurality of (six in this case) position detection pieces 3326 corresponding to the respective stop positions, the area detection pieces 3325 by the plurality of area identification sensors 3330 After roughly detecting the rotation of the lower back middle rotation decoration 3310 to an arbitrary stop position by detection, the stop position can be accurately detected by detecting the position detection piece 3326 by one position identification sensor 3331. , It is possible to accurately grasp the stop position of the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 having a plurality of stop positions by minimizing the deviation of the stop position.

Further, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately stopped at an arbitrary stop position, and the game can be played by shifting the stop position. It is possible to prevent giving a person a sense of discomfort (discomfort), to entertain the production (movable production) by the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back, and to suppress the decline in interest. The pachinko machine 1 can realize the operation of the movable body (rotating decorative body 3310 under the back) that does not cause discomfort to the player.

Further, since the stop position of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 can be accurately grasped, even if the rotation speed of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is increased, the deviation of the stop position can be suppressed and the back side can be suppressed. By rotating the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310, the moving speed (rotational speed) of the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is higher than that in the case where the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 is reciprocated. Can be faster. Therefore, the fast-rotating under-back middle-rotating decorative body 3310 can give a strong impact to the player, and can strongly attract the player's attention, and at the same time, the rotation of the under-back middle-rotating decorative body 3310 can be performed. It can be entertained and can suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

Further, by rotating the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 around the axis in the front-rear direction, the rotating surface of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 faces the player side in front, and it is arbitrary after rotating round and round. Since it is possible to show the player an effect like a roulette that stops rotating at the stop position of, the player is thrilled and excited depending on whether or not the rotating ornament 3310 under the back bottom stops rotating at the desired stop position. It is possible to entertain the movable effect by the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the number of stop positions of the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 is an even number, the stop positions that can be supported by the minimum number of sensors (area identification sensor 3330) necessary for detecting the movement to an arbitrary stop position. The number of the number is the same as the number of the stop position of the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back, and the ability (grasp of the stop position) by a plurality of sensors (area identification sensor 3330 and position identification sensor 3331) is maximized. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest by the back lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 having more stop positions.

In the above embodiment, the back unit 3000 has 6 stop positions as the back bottom middle rotation decorative body 3310 in the back bottom middle effect unit 3300, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may have 4 to 10 stop positions.

Further, in the above embodiment, a movable body having a plurality of stop positions (rotating decorative body 3310 under the back) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body has a plurality of stop positions. These may be "circling", "linearly moving", "arc-shaped moving", "curved moving", and the like.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 484. FIG. 484 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control unit 1511 and the peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on the command from the main control board 1310. It is provided with an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the above. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control that is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU, main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches, and main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. It includes a circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU also has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a first start port sensor 3052 that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, a gate sensor 2801 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003, and a second. It was accepted by the second starting port sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the starting port 2004, the general winning opening sensor 3051 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and the first large winning opening 2005. The first big winning opening sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B, the second big winning opening sensor 2601 that detects the game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2006, and the game ball B received in the out opening 2010 are detected. Out port sensor 3053, first sub out port sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the first sub out port 2011, second sub out port sensor 3054 that detects the game ball B received in the second sub out port 2012, And the detection signals from the magnetic sensors 2404, 2602, 3055, etc. that detect the illegal magnetism in the game area 5a are input via the main control I / O ports, respectively.

The main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the start port solenoid 2415, the first attacker solenoid 2418, and the second attacker solenoid are It outputs a drive signal to 2612, etc., and displays the status display, normal symbol display, normal hold display, first special symbol display, and first special hold number display of the function display unit 1400 from the main control I / O port. A drive signal is output to a device, a second special symbol display, a second special hold number display, a round display, and the like.

In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 3052, the second start port sensor 2401, the gate sensor 2801, the first large winning opening sensor 2402, the second large winning opening sensor 2601, and the out opening sensor 3053 are not included. While a contact-type electromagnetic proximity switch is used, the general winning port sensor 3051, the first sub-out port sensor 2403, and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 have a contact-type ON / OFF operation type mechanical. A switch is used. This is because the game ball B frequently enters or passes through the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the gate portion 2003, so that the first starting port sensor 3052, the second starting port sensor 2401, and the second starting port sensor 2401 are used. The detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first start port sensor 3052, the second start port sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2801.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened, and the game ball B frequently enters. , The game ball B is frequently detected by the first prize opening sensor 2402 and the second prize opening sensor 2601. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is also used for the first prize opening sensor 2402 and the second prize opening sensor 2601. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3051 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3051 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

Further, since the game ball B frequently enters the out port 2010, a proximity switch having high durability and a long life is used for the out port sensor 3053. On the other hand, since the game ball B does not frequently enter the first sub-out port 2011 and the second sub-out port 2012, the first sub-out port sensor 2403 and the second sub-out port sensor 3054 are mechanical switches having a shorter life than the proximity switch. Is used.

Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. Although the details of the main control MPU will be described later, when the main control MPU receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, these various commands are shaped and transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Although detailed description will be described later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. It is equipped with. With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various information in the RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of the game ball B, performs launch control by the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout and the launch solenoid 542, and launches by ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. The control unit 633b, the error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, the error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, the ball tank 552, and the tank rail during maintenance. It is provided with a ball pulling switch for discharging the game ball B in the 553, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580 to the outside (upper plate 201) of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball pulling operation. ..

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 is a micro that contains a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from is input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, and the ball cut detection sensor 574 is paid out. The detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

The detection signals from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit and payout control is performed via the payout control I / O port. Input to MPU.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal plate 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, which displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically, it is a ball. Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that a "count switch error" has occurred (specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , When the number "5" is displayed, a "retry error" is notified (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it indicates that it is "full" (specifically, it means that the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it notifies that "CR is not connected" (meaning that the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 633 to the CR unit). When the number "9" is displayed, it is informed that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of balls of the game ball B that has not been paid out has reached a predetermined number). ..

The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port to the payout control MPU. Entered. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is used for ball lending. It is input and displayed on the ball rental display unit of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b has a launch control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to launch, an oscillation circuit for outputting a clock signal at regular time intervals, and the clock signal. Based on this, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on this launch reference pulse, and launch. It is provided with a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on a reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game region 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the launch reference pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , Generates a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will is detected. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then input to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, they are input to the launch control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In this launch solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch reference pulse generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game region 5a with a launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle 182. When it is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper dish 201 of the dish unit 200 One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped to move the received game ball B to the ball launching device 540 side. send. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 484, the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. It is provided with an effect display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the above.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality sound performance. It is provided with a sound source IC for performing the above and a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, sound, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to each decorative board of the game board 5. , The drive motor of the game board 5 or the drive motor of the game board 5 from the serial I / O port for the game board decorative drive board to output the drive data on the game board side for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating various production units provided on the game board 5. Door-side drive data for transmitting to the drive solenoid and outputting drive signals to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the like, and each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Door-side drive light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided in the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port In addition to transmitting from to the door frame 3 side, or transmitting control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 from the serial I / O port for the display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512. , A control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

Further, the detection signals from the pressure detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally is input from the effect display control unit 1512, and the effect display control unit 1512 is based on this operation signal. The operation is being monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and has a vibration speaker 354, a top center speaker 462, and a top side provided on the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, and the like. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects flow from the speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 have acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo) as sound information. By sending a signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU has the built-in WDT and an external device. In combination with WDT, he diagnoses whether his system is out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (19.2 km). k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting / blinking command, the game board side lighting / blinking command, the movable body drive command, etc. output from the peripheral control MPU to the game board 5 side are transmitted by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display commands. In this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

[6-3b. Production display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 displays and controls a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that displays and controls the effect display device 1600. (Abbreviation for Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM in which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. It is in control. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU performs interrupt processing when an execution signal is input from VDP and the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, and the control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in chronological order. As the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM is defined.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. Extract from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the first screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an executing signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The line buffer method is adopted for VDP. This "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line that draws the left-right direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded in the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a unit. For example, when displaying various characters on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 by setting the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "the order of superimposing the sprites").

The sprite is composed of a plurality of rectangular areas having 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in width 2 x height 3 etc. are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 repeats a main scan for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels and a main scan in a direction intersecting the one direction in order from left to right when viewed from the front. Driven by sub-scanning performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input to the effect display device 1600, one line is sequentially displayed from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. Output to each pixel. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, the effect display device 1600 is based on the drawing data for the next line. As the main scan, the output is sequentially output to one line of pixels from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game content]
The content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 393 and 408. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player by rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. However, the game board 5 is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game by the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The striking strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and the more it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the striking can be. B, that is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in front of the game panel 1100 at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N to cause the game ball. The flow speed of B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movements can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill W that rotates due to the contact of the game ball B is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N while contacting the plurality of obstacle nails N. It will flow down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2511 opened in the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2512 to the stage 2513.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls on the stage 2513 and moves back and forth from side to side, and is discharged forward from the central portion in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is discharged into the game area 5a from the central discharge portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, the central discharge portion 2513a is located directly above the first starting port 2002, so that the first is likely to occur. Accepted at the start port 2002. When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "probability fluctuation (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction)" A lottery of the special lottery result (first special lottery result) that generates "win" is performed.

The game ball B released into the game area 5a from the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 may be received by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100.

By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200. There is a possibility that the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 will be accepted. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center accessory 2500, the guide of the center accessory 2500 is guided. A plurality of passages are discharged above the gate portion 2003 through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the passage group 2520 and are planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003. After contacting the obstacle nail N, it passes through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

The guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 has a first guide passage 2521 having an entrance opened in the vicinity of the abutment portion 1006 and an entrance opened at a distance to the left from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. It is composed of the second guide passage 2522 and the second guide passage. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with a strength that abuts on the abutting portion 1006 (so-called right-handed striking), it enters the first guide passage 2521 and has a strength that does not abut on the abutting portion 1006 (right-handed striking). If the game ball B is hit with a strength that is weaker to some extent), it will enter the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B driven into the upper right side of the center accessory 2500 circulates in either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 according to the driving strength.

In the present embodiment, the game ball B is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability when the second guide passage 2522 is circulated than the first guide passage 2521. Further, the second guide passage 2522 is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 with a higher probability than the first guide passage 2521.

When the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2801, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the lottery normal lottery result is "normal hit", the first attacker unit The closed second starting port 2004 in the 2400 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery until the result of the ordinary lottery is suggested (for example, 0). 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the lapse of the fluctuation time.

If the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 between the time when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the number of hold of the normal lottery result is limited to four, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, the number of hold is discarded without being held. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 and the left side of the gate portion 2003 has a high probability of being the side right middle unit 2700 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate portion 2003 and the side right middle unit 2700. It flows down the left side of the car and is occasionally accepted by the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, and rarely by the second sub-out opening 2012. When the game ball B is accepted into the general winning opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out in the same manner as the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. On the other hand, when the game ball B is accepted in the second sub-out opening 2012, it is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a without any chance of being accepted in the second major winning opening 2006, the second starting opening 2004, or the first major winning opening 2005. ..

Further, the game ball B passing through the right side of the gate portion 2003 is received by the second sub-out port 2012 of the side right middle unit 2700, and the general winning opening 2001, the second major winning opening 2006, and the second of the side right middle unit 2700. It is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a without any chance of being accepted by the start opening 2004 or the first big winning opening 2005.

In this way, when the game ball B is received in the second sub-out port 2012 on the downstream side of the guide passage group 2520, the game ball B is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a, so that the second sub-out is given to the player. It is possible to urge a driving operation so that the game ball B cannot be received by the mouth 2012. In the present embodiment, in the guide passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500, the probability of accepting the game ball B of the second sub-out port 2012 is lower in the second guide passage 2522 than in the first guide passage 2521. , It is possible to prompt the driving operation of the game ball B aiming at the second guide passage 2522. That is, rather than "right-handed" in which the game ball B abuts on the abutting portion 1006, it is possible to promote a driving operation that requires a delicate adjustment for the rotation operation of the handle 182, and the driving operation of the game ball B. You can enjoy the original game of the pachinko machine 1 that mainly uses.

The game ball B passing through the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is guided by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right middle unit 2700, and the second big winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600. After passing to the left of the center, it is discharged to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center accessory 2500.

At this time, if the game ball B is accepted in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a "small hit" is drawn as the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery, the second big prize is won. Since the mouth 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the side right middle unit 2700 is highly likely to be accepted by the second big winning mouth 2006. When the game ball B is received in the second big winning opening 2006 when the second big winning opening 2006 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 pieces, or 10 pieces, or 10 pieces, or a predetermined number) from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201.

The game ball B released to the first attacker unit 2400 side through the left side of the second large winning opening 2006 has the first shelf portion 2412a, the second starting opening door 2414, and the second shelf portion 2412b, and the upper left. After rolling to the left, it is released to the left, and further, the third shelf 2412c, the first prize opening door 2417, and the fourth shelf 2412d roll to the left and enter the game area 5a. Be released.

Then, when the game ball B is rolling on the second start door 2414, the normal lottery result drawn by the passage of the game ball B at the gate portion 2003 is "normal hit", and the second start door When the 2414 is retracted, the game ball B is received at the second starting port 2004. When the game balls B are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. At the same time, in the main control board 1310, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "medium hit", "small hit", "probability fluctuation (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction)" A lottery of the special lottery result (first special lottery result) that generates "win" is performed.

In addition, a special lottery result (No. 1) drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 when the game ball B is rolling on the first prize opening door 2417. When the one special lottery result and the second special lottery result) are the special lottery results (for example, "big hit") that generate an advantageous gaming state, the first big winning opening 2005 has a predetermined opening / closing pattern after the lapse of the special fluctuation time. Then, the game ball B can be accepted. When the game ball B is received in the first prize opening 2005 when the first prize opening 2005 is open, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 provide a predetermined number (for example, 10 pieces, or 10 pieces) from the payout device 580. , 13) game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the first prize opening 2005 allows the game ball B to be accepted, by having the first prize opening 2005 accept the game ball B, a large number of game balls B can be paid out, and the player can be made to pay out. Can be entertained.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", which is advantageous to the player. A lottery of special lottery results that generate "medium hit", "small hit", "probability fluctuation (probability change) hit", and "time reduction (time reduction) hit" is performed. It is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, a lottery is drawn when the game ball B is accepted at the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The special lottery results include "miss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change)", "time reduction (time reduction)", " There are "probability change time reduction hit", "probability change time reduction no hit", "second big hit", etc.

When the special lottery result is "small hit", the second big winning opening 2006 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern that closes after that is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed or the first big prize has passed after the first big prize opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted. When any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B to the winning opening 2005 is satisfied, the opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is 1) that makes the game balls B unacceptable. A predetermined number of times (referred to as a round) is repeated. For example, "2R jackpot" is repeated for 2 rounds, "5R jackpot" is for 5 rounds, and "15R jackpot" is for 15 rounds, respectively, to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn is changed ("probability change hit"), or the display time of the production image suggesting the special lottery result is changed. ("Time saving hit") There is a "hit".

When the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is "second big hit", the first big winning opening 2005 makes it possible to accept the game ball B in a predetermined pattern, and then ST (special) is set as an advantageous game state.・ Time) is generated. This ST is to maintain a probabilistic change or a time saving state during a predetermined specific number of fluctuations.

In the present embodiment, from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the result of the special lottery due to the acceptance of the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the first start port 2002 and When the game ball B is accepted in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. It is put on hold. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 indirectly controls the effect image to suggest the special lottery result. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the effect display device 1600 is a pattern sequence in which three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and each pattern sequence is changed to display the pattern sequence in a variable manner. Are stopped and displayed in sequence, and each of the three picture rows is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three picture rows that are stopped and displayed are in a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a "small hit" game, a "big hit" game, etc.) occurs according to the result of the special lottery.

In addition, the time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern sequence fluctuates and the confirmed image is displayed. It is different from the time until it is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is performed according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type production in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 are operated. In the player participation type production, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated or vibrated by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be assisted, the rotation operation can be hindered, and the operation button elevating drive motor can be used. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by 367 to make it stand out, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, the effect display device 1600, and the back-rear effect unit 3100 and the back of the back unit 3000 are provided. Bottom left production unit 3200, back bottom right production unit 3250, back bottom middle production unit 3300, back top production unit 3400, back rear left production unit 3500, back rear right production unit 3600, back front left production unit 3700, and back front It is possible to perform light emission effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using the right effect unit 3800, etc., and the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. It can be suppressed.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type production in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated, the correct operation is performed when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation to be operated. Notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is required, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. The effect display device 1600 is displayed to that effect.

[8. Independence auxiliary member]
Subsequently, the self-supporting member 7 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 485. FIG. 485 is a right side view of the pachinko machine shown together with the self-supporting member. The independence assisting member 7 of the pachinko machine 1 is mounted between the lower surface of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 and the plate 8 of the island equipment in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the pachinko machine 1 is mounted on the island equipment. When installing (installing) the pachinko machine 1, it assists the pachinko machine 1 to stand on its own and prevents it from tipping over. The self-supporting member 7 is formed in a block shape. Further, the self-supporting member 7 is formed by using at least one of hard foamed resin, plastic, corrugated cardboard, wood, pulp mold, and the like.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a mounting portion for mounting the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 on the lower surface of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3. On the other hand, the self-supporting member 7 is provided with a mounted portion to be mounted on the mounting portion of the dish unit 200. In the present embodiment, the dish unit 200 is provided with a groove extending in the front-rear direction as a mounting portion, and the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is provided with a ridge to be inserted into the groove of the dish unit 200 as a mounting portion. ing. As a result, the self-supporting member 7 is slid in the front-rear direction with respect to the dish unit 200, and the mounted portion of the self-supporting member 7 is inserted into the mounting portion of the dish unit 200, whereby the self-supporting member 7 is inserted into the dish unit 200. 7 can be attached (attached). As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island equipment with the independence assisting member 7 attached to the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, the independence assisting member 7 can be easily removed by sliding it forward. .. Further, when removing the pachinko machine 1 attached to the island equipment, it can be easily attached by sliding it in the direction opposite to that when the independence assisting member 7 is removed.

The mounting (mounting) of the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 and the mounting portion of the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is not limited to the above, but is "by inserting a protrusion into the hole" and "of the claw. It may be "locked", "magnetized by magnet", "surface fastener", "adsorbent", "peelable adhesive", or the like. Further, the position where the mounting portion is provided in the dish unit 200 is not limited to the lower surface of the dish unit 200 as described above, but may be "inside", "at least one side surface on the left or right", "front surface", or the like. ..

After installing the pachinko machine 1 on the island equipment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is removed from the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 and stored on the game hall side, and when the pachinko machine 1 is removed from the island equipment, the plate is again used. It is used by being attached to the unit 200. The self-supporting member 7 may be attached to the dish unit 200 in advance when the pachinko machine 1 is shipped from the manufacturer side to the game hall side, or may be attached at the time of installation work.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the door frame 3 has the dish unit 200, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top unit 450 that greatly project forward, the door frame 3 is forward. Although it is easy to fall down, by mounting the independence assisting member 7 on the lower mounting portion of the plate unit 200, it is possible to assist the independence of the pachinko machine 1 and prevent it from falling forward. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is attached to the mounting portion of the plate unit 200, so that the pachinko machine 1 is between the plate unit 200 and the plate 8 of the island equipment. Since the self-supporting member 7 located at the above can prevent the pachinko machine 1 from tipping forward, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from tipping over when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility. It is a pachinko machine 1 that does not need to be kept and is easy to install.

Further, by mounting the self-supporting assisting member 7 on the mounting portion of the plate unit 200, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from tipping over, so that damage to the pachinko machine 1 due to the fall can be avoided, and the game hall or the manufacturer can avoid the damage. It is a pachinko machine 1 that can reduce the burden on the side.

Further, since the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is provided with a mounting portion for mounting the self-supporting member 7, the self-supporting member 7 is mounted on the mounting portion of the plate unit 200 to assist the pachinko machine 1 to become self-supporting. Since it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine from tipping forward, it is possible to make the effect device, the decorative member, etc. provided on the door frame 3 larger or to project the pachinko machine forward. It is possible to easily configure a pachinko machine having a significantly different appearance from the machine, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the dish unit 200 and the like are greatly projected forward in the door frame 3, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing.

In the above embodiment, the self-supporting member 7 can be attached to and detached from the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 by sliding the self-supporting member 7 in the front-rear direction. The plate unit 200 of the frame 3 may be attached / detached by sliding it in the left-right direction.

Further, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detachably attached to the mounting portion of the door frame 3 (dish unit 200), and then the functional member (for example, the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202) is detachably provided on the door frame 3. , Door frame left side unit 400, door frame right side unit 410, door frame top unit 450, etc.). As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or removed from the island equipment, the functional member removed from the door frame 3 is attached to the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 as an independence assisting member 7, and the pachinko machine is attached. Allow 1 to stand on its own in a stable state. On the other hand, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island equipment, a part of the pachinko machine 1 is attached by attaching the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 to the door frame 3 as a functional member. It can function as a constituent functional member. Specifically, for example, when the door frame left side unit 400 that bulges forward from the left side of the door window 101a in the door frame 3 as a functional member that also serves as the independence assisting member 7, the door removed from the door frame 3 By attaching the frame left side unit 400 to the lower side of the plate unit 200, it can function as an independence auxiliary member 7, and by removing it from the lower side of the plate unit 200 and attaching it to the left side of the door window 101a, it functions as a functional member. be able to. For this reason, when the independence assisting member 7 is made removable, it is not necessary to separately store the removed independence assisting member 7, and it is troublesome to manage the removed independence assisting member 7 so as not to be lost. Can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

Alternatively, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 is detachably provided on the door frame 3 (dish unit 200) and then detachably provided on the main body frame 4 (for example, "board cover covering the board", "wiring". "Wiring holding member that holds the game media", "Protective cover that protects the rear of the effect display device, movable decoration, etc.", "Storage tank that stores the game media", "Induction member that distributes the game media", etc.) You may also use it. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or removed from the island equipment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the main body frame 4 is attached to the door frame 3 (dish unit 200) to stabilize the pachinko machine 1. To be able to become independent in the state of being. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island equipment, the function of forming a part of the pachinko machine 1 by attaching the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 removed from the door frame 3 to a predetermined portion of the main body frame 4. It can function as a member. For this reason, when the independence assisting member 7 is made removable, it is not necessary to separately store the removed independence assisting member 7, and it is troublesome to manage the removed independence assisting member 7 so as not to be lost. Can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced. When the independence assisting member 7 is also used as the functional member provided in the main body frame 4, the player touches the removable functional member in the state where the functional member is attached to the main body frame 4. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the functional member from coming off due to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 can be obtained without causing discomfort to the player.

Further, when the independence assisting member 7 is also used as the functional member provided in the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 is compared with the case where the independence assisting member 7 is not also used as the functional member. The number of parts required for the door can be reduced, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

Further, the self-supporting member 7 may be provided so as to be accommodated in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3. As a result, when it is not necessary to attach the pachinko machine 1 to the island equipment and make it self-supporting, the self-supporting member 7 is housed in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, and the presence of the self-supporting member 7 makes the pachinko machine 1 look good. It is possible to prevent the independence assisting member 7 from becoming an obstacle to the game. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to or removed from the island equipment, the independence assisting member 7 housed in the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3 is taken out so that the pachinko machine 1 can become independent. Therefore, the installation work and the removal work of the pachinko machine 1 can be facilitated. Further, in this case, as compared with the case where the self-supporting member 7 is removed and stored separately, it is not necessary to store the self-supporting member 7, and it is troublesome to manage the self-supporting member 7 so as not to lose it. Can be eliminated, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the self-supporting auxiliary member 7 having a mounted portion to be mounted on the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is assumed that the mounting portion is not provided. Is also good.

Further, although the self-supporting member 7 that can be attached to and detached from the mounting portion of the dish unit 200 is shown, the self-supporting member 7 is not limited to this, and the self-supporting member 7 is built in the dish unit 200 (door frame 3). When the self-supporting member 7 is installed on the island facility, the self-supporting member 7 may be projected downward so as to come into contact with the plate 8. As a result, it is not necessary to remove the independence assisting member 7 and store it separately after installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment, and it is possible to reduce the time and effort required for management on the game hall side.

[10. Main control board control process]
Next, an example of the control process executed on the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 486 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 486 (a), the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment is first subjected to various processes in step S1 on the condition that the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated. Initializes the data stored in the RAM built in the register or main control MPU (hereinafter referred to as the main control built-in RAM). The RAM clear switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 so that it cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. Further, the RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 according to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses after the power is turned on, and the main control MPU inputs the clear signal when the power is turned on. When it is determined, the initialization process (step S1) is executed to initialize the data stored in various registers and the main control built-in RAM.

Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process is executed in which information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) is saved in the main control built-in RAM. If the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). The restoration process for restoring the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process to set the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state. Further, when the initialization process is executed, the game state is controlled to the non-time saving state.

Next, as the process of step S2, the random numbers, which are the numbers to be updated within the predetermined numerical range, are updated. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) used for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, and the special symbol. Whether or not to reach as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 in response to the variable random number used for the lottery process for the predetermined time (variable time) required for the variable display control of The reach random number used in the lottery process (whether or not to execute the effect), and the symbol random number used in the lottery process to determine the type of big hit when it is determined to be a big hit based on the above special random number. A random number counter that holds random numbers such as (first symbol random number, second symbol random number), random number (ordinary random number) used for lottery processing related to winning the hit that triggers the opening of the second starting port 2004), etc. I have.

In this example, the same reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first starting port 2002 is started and the second starting port 2004 is started and won. Even in the case, it is configured to acquire the reach random number from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the execution ratio of the reach effect is increased by acquiring from the counters that update the reach random number from different random numbers. It may be different, or it corresponds to the first reach judgment table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol as the reach judgment table to be compared with the acquired reach random numbers, and is different from the first reach judgment table. The execution ratio of the reach effect may be different by providing the second reach determination table in which the determination value is set.

In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed so that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) that are not related to the winning of these random numbers are updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, for example, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 mS.

FIG. 486 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 486 (b), in this interrupt control, first, a register save process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the process of step S12, the gate sensor 2801, the first start port sensor 3052, the second start port sensor 2401, and the first count sensor that detects the game ball B received in the first grand prize opening 2005, Detection signals from various sensors such as the second count sensor that detects the game ball B received in the second large winning opening 2006, the general winning opening sensor 3001, and various magnetic sensors are input. Next, as the process of step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the random numbers, the random numbers (special random numbers, ordinary random numbers) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol is stopped are updated and the counter of the random number counter. The operation is performed.

Then, after the random numbers are updated in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process process including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped as the process of step S14. To execute. The special symbol process processing will be described later, but here, basically, the special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, second) indicating the progress of the game stored in the main control built-in RAM is described. The corresponding process will be selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes a normal symbol process process including a lottery process for winning a hit that triggers the opening of the second starting port 2004 as the process of step S15. In this normal symbol process process as well, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game.

Further, when the special symbol process process (step S14) and the normal symbol process process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is then subjected to the special symbol process process as the process of step S16. The process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is performed. Next, as the process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM in the normal symbol process process to, for example, the peripheral control board 1510 is performed.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then performs an information output process for outputting data such as hit information supplied to the hall management computer as the process of step S18.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the first start port sensor 3052, the second start port sensor 2401, the first count sensor, the second count sensor, and the above as the process of step S19. When the detection signals of the general winning opening sensor 3051 and the like are in the ON state, the prize ball processing for outputting the payout control command to the payout control board 633 is executed so that the prize balls corresponding to those signals are paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board 633 outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584 and pays out the prize ball to the player. In this example, when the game ball B wins the first start port 2002 and the first start port sensor 3052 is turned on, "3 balls", and the game ball B wins the second start port 2004 and the first (2) When the start port sensor 2401 is turned on, "1 ball", when the game ball B wins the first prize opening 2005 and the first count sensor is turned on, "15 balls", the second big prize opening When the game ball B wins in 2006 and the second count sensor is turned on, "15 balls", and when the game ball B wins the general winning opening 2001 and the general winning opening sensor 3051 is turned on, The prize balls of "8 balls" are paid out to the players respectively.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then executes a storage process for checking the increase / decrease in the number of reserved storages as the process of step S20. Next, as the process of step S21, a test terminal process, which is a process of outputting a test signal so that the control state of the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed. After that, the drive control of the actuator that always operates is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24), this control ends. It becomes.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 mS. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only the flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

FIG. 487 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process process (step S14).

Assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is first driven by the first start port sensor 3052, as shown in FIG. 487. On condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first start port 2002) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the above random number counter and this is built in the main control. The first start port passing process such as storing in the first special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM is executed (step S32). Further, on condition that the detection signal by the second start port sensor 2401 is in the ON state (the ball has entered the second start port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the above random number. A second start port passage process such as acquiring from a counter and storing this in the second special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S34).

Next, the main control MPU determines whether or not the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot game is controlled is set (step S35), and if the jackpot executing flag is set, the control of the jackpot game is performed. The jackpot control process (step S40) for performing the above is executed. In the jackpot control process, the result of the lottery process (result of hit determination and contents of jackpot type) regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped suggests "15R jackpot". When, the first count sensor detects that 10 game balls B have won a prize in the first prize opening 2005 after opening the first prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). A process of controlling the 15R jackpot game in which the opening / closing pattern of closing the game is repeated 15 times is executed.

Further, in the big hit control process, after performing such open control of the first big winning opening 2005, the time saving flag setting process is executed. The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control (control executed in the time saving state) is being executed, and is set when the big hit game based on the big hit controlled by the big hit game is finished after the big hit game is finished. It is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in 498 or the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process process described later. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the number of time reductions is set so that the time reduction control is terminated when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed five times or the variation display of the second special symbol is executed once. That is, when the time saving control is started after the jackpot game is completed and either the condition of executing the variation display of the first special symbol five times or the variation display of the second special symbol once is satisfied. The time saving control is terminated.

Further, if the big hit executing flag is not set, the main control MPU determines whether or not the small hit executing flag indicating that the small hit game is controlled is set (step S36), and the small hit is executed. If the executing flag is set, the small hit control process (step S41) for controlling the small hit game is executed. In the small hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "small hit", the second big winning opening 2006, which will be described later, Closed after opening the second major winning opening 2006 based on the opening pattern A or opening pattern B, or when it is detected by the second count sensor that 10 game balls B have won in the second major winning opening 2006. Execute the process to make it. In addition, when the game ball B that has won a prize in the second prize opening 2006 and is distributed by the distribution member enters a specific area, the first big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time by controlling the big hit game (for example). 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the first count sensor that 10 game balls B have won in the first big winning opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern is repeated 15 times to shift to the 15R big hit game. To do. On the other hand, when the game ball B, which has won a prize in the first big winning opening 2005 and is distributed by the distribution member, does not enter the specific area and enters the discharge area, it is not controlled by the big hit game and is small. After the hit game is completed, the game state (normal state or time saving state) before the small hit game is controlled again.

Further, the main control MPU is a second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area if neither the big hit execution flag nor the small hit execution flag is set. On condition that the value of is "0" (step S37), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S38), and the first (Ii) On condition that the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of the second special random numbers stored in the special symbol hold storage area is not "0" (step S37), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is stopped. A second special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode is executed (step S39).

FIG. 488 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S32).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S31 that the first start port sensor 3052 is in the ON state and the game ball B has entered the first start port 2002, it is shown in FIG. 488. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S41.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires a counter value by the first special hold number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol hold storage area from the main control built-in RAM. Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is the maximum value (upper limit value) of "4" (step S42). In the process of step S42, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S43 to S43 to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S45 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S43, the first special hold number counter is counted up (1 addition). Next, as the process of step S44, each random number acquired in step S41 is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is a display result of the variation display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variation random number acquired in step S41. Whether or not to make a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( After executing the effect pre-determination process for determining the pre-determination information (type of variation pattern) before starting the variation display according to the start winning prize (step S45), the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of step S42, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S43 to S45, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, when the first hold storage number changes based on the game ball B entering the first start port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special hold number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is first held. In addition to updating to correspond to the number of stored items, a command (commands 0 to 4 for specifying the number of first reserved items) for instructing the number of first reserved items is set in the above-mentioned storage process (step S20) and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. It is designed to do. The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

FIG. 489 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the effect pre-determination process (step S45). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S41, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation Whether or not a big hit is achieved by comparing with a random number, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600. The mode type of the game effect is specified (step S61).

Then, the specified pre-judgment information (whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit if it is a big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600. Depending on the mode type of the game effect to be played, the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of reserved storages (value of the pending number counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number. Set the pre-judgment command. For example, in the effect pre-determination process relating to the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first start port passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first reserved storage number (first hold storage number) (1) The value of the special hold number counter) and the first special symbol pre-determination command according to the above (step S62).

Then, in the special symbol command control process (step S16), the pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and is stored corresponding to the first start port 2002 in which the start winning is generated. In addition to the number of reserved memories, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the special symbol based on the generated start prize is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, it is executed by the effect display device 1600 Peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before the advance determination information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed is executed as the game effect to be performed, and the variation display according to the start winning is started. Will be able to grasp.

When the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control MPU is provided with a first reserved storage area for storing prior determination information regarding the variation display of the first special symbol.

Further, the first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved storages, and the peripheral control MPU stores the first (earliest) pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Store in order from the area. Then, when the pre-judgment command is received when the pre-judgment information is stored in the n-th (n = 1-3) storage area, the pre-judgment information notified to the n + 1-th (n = 1-3) storage area is received. Is stored, and when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of variation display of the first special symbol is received, it is stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area according to the received first variation pattern command. The judgment information is discarded and the pre-judgment information stored in the Nth (N = 2-4) storage area is moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) storage area (to the reserved storage area). Shift the stored pre-judgment information). As a result, the pre-determination information of the first special symbol is memorized so as to be able to specify the order in which the suspension of the start of the variable display occurs, and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information.

When the variable display control is put on hold in this way, the jackpot expectation (pseudo-winning probability) of the variable display control is maintained even though the variable display control is maintained in the unexecuted state (holding state). ) Will be notified in advance at a predetermined timing, for example, when the hold display is newly output or when the hold display is shifted according to the hold digestion. ..

FIG. 490 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S34).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second start port sensor 2401 is in the ON state and the game ball B has entered the second start port 2004, it is shown in FIG. 490. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S51.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the second hold storage number is the maximum value (upper limit value) based on the counter value. ) Is "4" or not (step S52). In the process of step S52, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S53 to S53 to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S53, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S54, each random number acquired in step S51 is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

On the other hand, in the process of step S52, when it is determined that the second reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S53 to S54, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, when the second hold storage number changes based on the game ball B entering the second start port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special hold number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is secondly held. In addition to updating to correspond to the number of stored items, a command (second reserved number designation command 0 to 1) for instructing the number of second stored items is set in the above-mentioned storage process (step S20) and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. It is designed to do. The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

FIG. 491 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S38). The first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for determination. Since the above and the table are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is performed according to the first special symbol process flag, provided that the interval timer described later has timed out (YES in step S85). It will be executed selectively. If the interval timer has not timed out (NO in step S85), the process ends without executing the following process.

1. 1. The first special random number stored in the main control built-in RAM is read, and based on the read first special random number, the first special symbol is subjected to lottery processing for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped. Normal processing (step S80)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which the process of determining the mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped. )
3. 3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and the variation of the effect display executed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the first special symbol. First variation pattern setting process (step S82) in which a lottery process or the like for an aspect is performed
4. First special symbol variation processing (step S83) that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
5. The mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. First special symbol stop processing (step S84) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol so as to

The first special symbol process flag is operated so as to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 486).

FIG. 492 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S80).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 492, first steps S101. As the process of, it is determined whether or not there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state, it is then stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the process of step S102. The random number stored in the earliest storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) is stored in the same main control built-in RAM. Read from. Next, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special hold number counter is counted down, and the first special is stored in each storage area of the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the symbol is stopped are shifted in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol reservation storage area a to first special symbol reservation storage area d), and a start winning prize for the first start port 2002. Random numbers extracted according to the occurrence are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a start winning prize occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1-3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1-3) storage area, and the first prize is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display control hold of the first special symbol occurs is identifiable and memorized, and the hold of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). become.

Then, as the process of step S105, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for winning the big hit or the small hit, is performed based on the first special random number of the read first special symbol. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) (step S106), this process ends.

FIG. 493 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the hit determination process (step S105).

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a hit determination table shown in FIG. 494 (A) and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 when the first special symbol normal process is being executed, the first special random number, (Ii) When the special symbol normal processing is being executed, the comparison is made with the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing (step S114).

As shown in FIG. 494 (A), the hit determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM and is provided for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). Then, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, three types of hit determination values that match the jackpot determination value indicating that the two types of first special random numbers have won the jackpot and are different from the jackpot determination value. Each of the above first special random numbers matches the big hit judgment value indicating that the first special random number has won a small hit, and matches the loss judgment value indicating that the 265 types of first special random numbers are lost. It is associated (big hit probability; 1/135, small hit probability; 3/270). Further, in this example, in the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, two types of second special random numbers are used. It matches the big hit judgment value indicating that the big hit was won, and 113 kinds of second special random numbers different from the big hit judgment value match the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit was won, and 155 kinds of the second special The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the loss determination value indicating that the random numbers are lost (big hit probability; 1/135, small hit probability; 113/270). That is, the judgment table referred to for comparison with the second special random number is configured to have a higher probability of being judged as a small hit than the hit judgment table referred for for comparison with the first special random number. , When the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start prize to the second start port 2004 is executed than when the variation display of the first special symbol based on the start prize to the first start port 2002 is executed. It is becoming more advantageous for the player.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 uses the hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, or the second special read in the second special symbol normal processing. As a result of comparison with the random number), if it is determined to be a big hit (step S115), a big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation has won the big hit is set (step S116), and the hit determination process is completed.

Further, as a result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing), When it is determined to be a small hit (step S117), a small hit flag indicating that the fluctuation has won a small hit is set (step S118), and the hit determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, when neither the big hit nor the small hit is won, that is, when it is determined that the hit is lost, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the game state is the time reduction state and the reach determination table in the time reduction state, and the non-time reduction table used when the game state is the non-time reduction state. It is equipped with a reach judgment table for the state. Then, in the reach determination table in the time saving state, the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number reaches is matched with the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach random numbers do not reach. Random numbers are associated with each other.

Further, in the reach determination table in the non-time saving state, it matches the reach determination value indicating that five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time saving state reach. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the 67 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reach is higher in the non-time saving state than in the time saving state.

When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the reach is lost as a result of comparison between the selected reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119), the fluctuation is caused. The reach flag indicating that the reach is reached is set, and the process ends (step S121).

FIG. 495 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 495. The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S131).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S131, the main control MPU selects the jackpot symbol determination table shown in FIG. 494 (B) and uses the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing. By comparing with the selected jackpot symbol determination table, the jackpot symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is determined (step S132).

As shown in FIG. 494 (B), the jackpot symbol determination table is associated with symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) according to the determination result (14R time reduction jackpot, 5R time reduction jackpot). It is remembered. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number.

In particular,
1. 1. After opening the first prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the first count sensor that 10 game balls B have won in the first prize opening 2005, the first prize opening 2005 is closed. By repeating the opening / closing pattern 14 times (14 rounds), the game ball B is controlled to a 14R jackpot game in which the ball B can enter the first prize opening 2005 (easy), and after the jackpot game is completed, the symbol variation of the special symbol is 100. If the next big hit game does not occur before the execution of the game, the state is terminated. The time saving state A is controlled. 14R Time saving big hit A
2. After opening the first prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the first count sensor that 10 game balls B have won in the first prize opening 2005, the first prize opening 2005 is closed. (1 round), after that, after opening the 2nd prize opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or after that, 10 game balls B have won a prize in the 2nd prize opening 2006 by the above 2nd count sensor. By repeating the opening / closing pattern that closes when detected four times (4 rounds), the game ball B is controlled to a 5R jackpot game that allows the ball to enter the first major winning opening 2005 and the second major winning opening 2006 (easy). , After the end of the jackpot game, the state unless the next jackpot game occurs before the variable display of the first special symbol is executed five times or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once. 5R time saving jackpot A to control to end time saving state B
3. 3. After opening the second prize opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the second count sensor that 10 game balls B have won in the second prize opening 2006, the second prize opening 2006 is closed. By repeating the opening / closing pattern 14 times (14 rounds), the game ball B is controlled to be a 14R big hit game that can enter the second big winning opening 2006 (easy), and after the big hit game is finished, the symbol fluctuation of the special symbol is 100. If the next big hit game does not occur before the execution is performed, the state is terminated. The time saving state A is controlled. 14R Time saving big hit B
4. After opening the first prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the first count sensor that 10 game balls B have won in the first prize opening 2005, the first prize opening 2005 is closed. (1 round), after that, after opening the 2nd prize opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or after 10 game balls B have won in the 2nd prize opening 2006, the above-mentioned second count sensor By repeating the opening / closing pattern that closes when detected four times (4 rounds), the game ball B is controlled to a 5R jackpot game that allows the ball to enter the first major winning opening 2005 and the second major winning opening 2006 (easy). , After the end of the jackpot game, the state unless the next jackpot game occurs before the variable display of the first special symbol is executed five times or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once. 5R time saving jackpot B to control to end time saving state B

In the jackpot symbol determination table to be compared with the first symbol random number, 6 judgment values are distributed when the 14R time saving jackpot A is obtained, and 94 judgment values are sorted when the 5R time saving jackpot A is obtained. There is. That is, when a lottery result that is a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, there is a 6% probability that the 14R time saving big hit A will be obtained, and a 94% probability that the 5R time saving big hit A will be obtained. Similarly, in the jackpot symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, 58 judgment values are distributed when the 14R time reduction jackpot B is obtained, and 42 judgment values are distributed when the 5R time reduction jackpot B is obtained. ing. That is, when a lottery result that is a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, there is a 58% probability that the 14R time saving big hit B will be obtained, and a 42% probability that the 5R time saving big hit B will be obtained. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number has a higher probability of being determined as a 14R time-saving jackpot than the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number. When the variation display of the second special symbol based on the start prize to the second start port 2004 is executed rather than the variation display of the first special symbol based on the start prize to the first start port 2002. It is in a state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, when a lottery result for a big hit is obtained, the game state after the big hit game is completed is determined according to the type of the big hit. Then, in the jackpot control process (step S40), after controlling the jackpot game, a process of setting a time reduction flag based on the determination result and a process of setting the time reduction number according to the type of jackpot in the time reduction counter. Will be executed.

Specifically, when it is determined that the jackpots of "14R time saving jackpot A" and "14R time saving jackpot B" have been obtained, the special symbol (first special symbol) is executed after the jackpot game for 14 rounds is executed. When it is judged that the time saving state is controlled until the symbol fluctuation of (the sum of the second special symbol and the second special symbol) is executed 100 times, and the big hits of "5R time saving big hit A" and "5R time saving big hit B" are obtained. After the big hit game for 5 rounds is executed, the time is controlled until the variation display of the first special symbol is executed 5 times or the variation display of the second special symbol is executed once. In this way, when a lottery result that is a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, it is always controlled to a time saving state after the end of the big hit game, and similarly, a lottery result that is a big hit by a lottery based on the second special random number. Even if is obtained, it is always controlled to a time saving state after the end of the big hit game. However, when the big hits of "14R time saving big hit A" and "14R time saving big hit B" are obtained, the big hit game is more than the case where the big hits of "5R time saving big hit A" and "5R time saving big hit B" are obtained. It is controlled to shorten the time for a long time after execution.

If the 14R time-saving jackpot A is determined, the 14R jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is determined to be the 14R time-saving jackpot A symbol, and if the 5R time-saving jackpot A is determined, the 5R jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is 5R. Time saving jackpot A symbol is decided. In addition, when the 14R time-saving jackpot B is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 14R time-saving jackpot B symbol is determined as the 14R jackpot symbol of the second special symbol, and when it is determined to be the 5R time-saving jackpot B, the second special symbol is the first. (Ii) The 5R jackpot symbol of the special symbol is determined to be the 5R time-saving jackpot B symbol.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a lost symbol when the jackpot flag is not set (step S136).

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines any of the above lottery results (big hit type, small hit, reach loss, loss) as the process of step S137. A judgment result notification command corresponding to each of the lottery results is set so that the instruction (which may indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, as the process of step S138, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

The peripheral control MPU displays and controls the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and fluctuation pattern command. On the effect display device 1600, decorative symbols corresponding to the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are variably displayed. Specifically, in the peripheral control MPU, as a mode (stop symbol) when the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is stopped, when the jackpot is specified from the received determination result notification command, the jackpot symbol (left, middle, right decorative symbol) is displayed. When the same symbol combination of [0] to [8] is determined and the reach loss is specified, the loss symbol with reach (the same symbol with the left and right decorative symbols [0] to [8] is the same. If you decide on a combination of symbols with different middle decorative symbols; reach loss symbol, and identify a loss, at least left and right of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols that do not accompany the reach. It is determined to be a combination in which the decorative symbols of are different symbols), and the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (at the end of the game effect).

FIG. 496 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first fluctuation pattern setting process should be performed, the jackpot flag is set in the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 496. If this is done (step S141), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot according to the type of jackpot determined in step S132 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S142), and the reach flag is set. If it is set (step S145), the variation pattern table at the time of reach (not shown) is selected (step S146), and if neither the jackpot flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, a normal loss (reach effect). In the case of loss), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of loss is selected (step S147).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S148), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S149). Further, the main control MPU sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S150). As a result, the fluctuation display control of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 for the fluctuation time determined in this way, and the effect display device 1600 is synchronized with the fluctuation display of the special symbol. The production control will be performed at.

In addition, a plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables of this example are provided for each determination result based on a special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and a symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). Further, in the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. It is stored in a form associated with each variable random number. Then, the main control MPU includes the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number. By comparing the above and acquiring the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number from this table, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the above special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, it is set to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. .. For example, 164 types of variable random numbers out of 241 types of variable random numbers are set as judgment values (0 to 163) indicating that any of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 types of variable random numbers are super reach with low jackpot expectation. It is set as a judgment value (164 to 222) indicating that any of the effects is executed, and a judgment value (223 to 240) indicating that 18 types of variable random numbers execute any of the super reach effects with high expectation of big hits. ) Is set. In addition, the super reach effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect, and for a player who wants to generate a big hit game, the player's expectation for the big hit game increases when the super reach effect is executed. It has become.

Further, in the fluctuation pattern table of this example, 13 to 60 seconds is set as the fluctuation time corresponding to the first special random number in the non-time saving state, 4 to 60 seconds is set in the time saving state, and similarly, the second special random number is set. As the corresponding fluctuation time, 13 to 60 seconds is set in the non-time saving state, and 2 to 60 seconds is set in the time saving state.

When the variation display control of the first special symbol is started, then, as the process of step S151, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the time reduction counter for which the continuation number of the time reduction state is set is "0". Then, if this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time reduction counter (step S152), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous reduction counter is "0" (step S153). .. As a result, if the counter value is "0", the time saving end flag indicating that the time saving control is terminated is set (step S154).

If it is determined in the process of step S151 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is "0", or if it is determined in the process of step S153 that the time reduction counter is not "0", that time point In step S155, the process proceeds to step S155. Then, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) (step S155), this process is terminated.

FIG. 497 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation processing (step S83).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation processing should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 497, first steps S171. As the process of, the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time is set according to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the fluctuation pattern is subtracted by 1. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

FIG. 498 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 498, first steps S181. As the process of, display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed, and the effect display device 1600 is used for the display control. (I) A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

Next, when the time saving end flag is set (step S183), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving end flag (step S184) and resets the time saving flag (step S185). As a result, the time saving control is terminated when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100 times, 1 time, or 5 times). The control of the non-time saving state is started.

In the time saving state, in order to allow the game ball B to enter the second starting port 2004, a so-called right-handed instruction (hereinafter, also referred to as a right-handed instruction) is given to the effect display device 1600, the speaker, and the like. Performed using. Then, as described above, when a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations are completed after the time saving state starts, the time saving state ends and returns to the normal state (non-time saving state). When the player returns to the normal state, the right-handed instruction is completed in order to allow the game ball B to enter the first starting port 2002, and a so-called left-handed instruction (hereinafter, also referred to as a left-handed instruction) is displayed. It is executed using the device 1600, a speaker, and the like.

In addition, for example, when the number of time reductions is 100 (that is, the time reduction state ends when the special symbol variation of 100 times ends after the time reduction state starts), for example, the 100th variation from the time reduction start (that is, the time reduction state ends). That is, by inserting the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 during the execution of the time saving final change), the second special symbol change can be executed up to four times in the normal state after the end of the time saving state. ..

In other words, after the end of the time saving state, the second special symbol change (which can be executed mainly during the time saving state) is executed, but since the state is the normal state to the last, it is a different way of hitting from the time saving state left. A state occurs in which the hitting instruction is executed.

Hereinafter, it is assumed that the jackpot fluctuation is included in the second special symbol fluctuation up to four times. In this case, when the jackpot fluctuation ends, the jackpot game starts, and in the jackpot game, a right-handed instruction is executed in order to insert the game ball B into the jackpot, as in the time saving state.

In the normal state after the end of the time reduction, if a right-handed hit is made, it is difficult to play the game ball B to the second starting port 2004, so there is less chance of receiving a special symbol lottery than when a left-handed hit is made. That is, the probability of winning a big hit decreases. On the other hand, if the player hits the right without following the left-handed instruction, the player may receive a lottery that is different from the special lottery such as the ordinary lottery due to the passing of the game ball B through the gate portion 2003. it can. In addition, when a right-handed hit is made, the probability that the game ball B will be paid out due to the game ball B entering the general winning opening 2001 is increased. However, in such a situation where a left-handed hit should be made, when a right-handed hit is made (specifically, for example, when a predetermined number of game balls B pass through the gate portion 2003 within a predetermined time), the left A left-handed warning effect is executed to warn the player to hit. The left-handed warning effect is an effect that does not appear in situations where a right-handed player should be hit, such as during a time-saving state or a big hit game.

In addition, by hitting left after the end of the time reduction, a situation may occur in which the first special symbol change of the big hit is suspended by the end of the second special symbol change which is the big hit fluctuation. In this case, it is also possible to suspend a plurality (up to 4) of the first special symbol fluctuations of the jackpot. For example, if two of the four first special symbol change hold are jackpot hold, the two jackpot hold is continuous, and one or two missed hold is between the two jackpot hold. There are cases and there are cases.

Therefore, unless the game ball B is inserted into the second winning opening 2004, the game is executed between the end of the big hit game by the first big hit hold and the execution of the big hit game by the second big hit hold. The maximum number of fluctuations is three. In addition, when the maximum number (4) of the jackpot hold of the first special symbol change is obtained, the jackpot due to the jackpot hold is obtained for each special symbol change unless the game ball B is inserted into the second winning opening 2004. The game is executed.

In addition, when the first special symbol change that is out of alignment between the two first special symbol changes is held, the game ball B is placed in the second winning opening 2004 after the big hit game due to the first big hit hold is completed. By entering the ball, the second special symbol change is preferentially executed, so that the activation of the jackpot game due to the second jackpot hold can be delayed.

It should be noted that the probability of suspending the first special symbol fluctuation of one jackpot is higher than the probability of suspending the first special symbol fluctuation of a plurality of jackpots (up to four first special symbol fluctuations can be suspended). However, the jackpot probability in the first special lottery is a low probability such as 1/100 or 1/319).

Return to the explanation of the flowchart. Further, when the jackpot flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating to start the jackpot game (step S187), and the jackpot game The waiting time until the start (the time for displaying the start of the jackpot game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Although not shown, in step S188, a process of setting the number of rounds according to the type of jackpot in the jackpot count counter indicating the remaining number of rounds is also executed. The jackpot count counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the jackpot control process described later, and when the jackpot count counter becomes "0", it is determined that the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has executed the specified number of rounds. Control to end the jackpot game. Specifically, in the big hit control process described later, the big winning opening pre-opening process (step S91) and the big winning opening opening process (step S92) are repeatedly executed until the big hit count counter becomes "0", and the big winning opening is opened. When the round is completed in the opening processing (step S92), the jackpot counter is subtracted by 1 to become "0", and the process shifts to the large winning opening post-processing (step S93) to end the jackpot game. Perform control to make it.

Then, the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is set (step S189). The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S187, a jackpot start command (14R time-saving jackpot A start command, 5R time-saving jackpot A start command) is set according to the type of jackpot (14R time-saving jackpot A, 5R time-saving jackpot A). As a result, the effect of the jackpot game according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. Further, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process process, the jackpot start command (14R time-saving jackpot B start command, 5R time-saving jackpot B start) according to the type of jackpot (14R time-saving jackpot B, 5R time-saving jackpot B) Command) is set.

Further, the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is, specifically, when the jackpot game is finished, the jackpot is hit in the jackpot control process (step S40) after the jackpot opening post-processing (step S93). After opening / closing control of the first prize opening 2005 according to the type (for example, after opening the first prize opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or after opening the first prize opening 2005 for a long time, 10 game balls B win a prize in the first prize opening 2005. When this is detected by the first count sensor, the opening / closing pattern is repeated 14 or 5 times (opening / closing control) is completed (all rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game). By resetting the jackpot executing flag, the jackpot control process (step S40) is not executed in step S35 of the special symbol process process (step S14), while the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 Variable display of the first special symbol and function display The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the unit 1400 becomes feasible.

Further, when the big hit flag is not set (step S186), if the small hit flag is set (step S190), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 indicates that the small hit game is started. The small hit start command is set (step S191), and the waiting time until the start of the small hit game (time for displaying the start of the small hit game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S192). Then, the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is set (step S193). The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of small hit. In step S191, the small hit start command (5R small hit A1 start command, 5R small hit A2 start command, 14R small hit A) according to the type of small hit (5R small hit A1, 5R small hit A2, 14R small hit A)). A Start command) is set. As a result, the effect of the small hit game according to the type of the small hit instructed by the small hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. Further, in the second special symbol stop process of the second special symbol process process, the small hit start command (5R small hit B1) according to the type of small hit (5R small hit B1, 5R small hit B2, 14R small hit B)). Start command, 5R small hit B2 start command, 14R small hit B start command) are set.

Further, the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is set when the small hit game is finished, specifically, the small hit middle process (step S401) of the small hit control process (step S41) described later. ) To open / close control of the first big winning opening 2005 according to the type of small hit (for example, after opening the first big winning opening 2005 (for example, 1.8 seconds) or after the first big winning opening 2005 has 10 game balls B It is reset when the opening / closing control (opening / closing control) that closes when the winning is detected by the first count sensor is completed. By resetting the small hit execution flag, the small hit control process (step S41) is not executed in step S36 of the special symbol process process (step S14), while the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed. Variable display of the first special symbol on the device and function display The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the unit 1400 becomes feasible.

In addition, when the small hit flag is not set, that is, when a loss occurs, the waiting time until the next special symbol variation display is started (the time during which the special symbol stop symbol is displayed) is set in the interval timer. (Step S194), the process proceeds to step S195.

When the processes of steps S186 to S194 are executed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value. (Step S195), this process ends.

FIG. 499 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S40). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the jackpot process flag.

1. 1. The peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) will shift to the jackpot game based on the fact that the mode when the variable display is stopped is the jackpot symbol. Pre-processing for opening the large winning opening (step S91), which waits until the next round is started.
2. Based on the fact that the mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped is a jackpot symbol, the first prize opening 2005 and the second prize opening 2006 are controlled to be open, and the next round is started. After controlling the first prize opening 2005 and the second prize opening 2006 in the open state and opening the first prize opening 2005 and the second prize opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or the first Processing during opening of the large winning opening (step S92) to close when 10 game balls B have been won in the large winning opening 2005 or the second large winning opening 2006 by the first count sensor or the second count sensor.
3. 3. Post-processing after opening the big winning opening, which waits until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the big hit game ends when all the rounds are finished (step S93).

The jackpot process flag is operated to indicate that the jackpot opening pre-opening process (step S91) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 486). Further, in the above-mentioned processing during opening of the big winning opening (step S92), at the start of a round for controlling the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 in the open state, a big hit round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is issued. At the end of a round that controls the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 in a closed state, a big hit round end command is set according to the number of rounds. The jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command are commands transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect of the jackpot game according to the number of rounds instructed by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command is displayed. It is executed by the device 1600, a lamp / LED, a speaker, and the like.

FIG. 500 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small hit control process (step S41). In the small hit process, one of the following two process processes is selectively executed according to the small hit process flag.

1. 1. Small hit start process (step S400) to execute the setting process for starting the small hit game
2. Small hit medium processing (step S401) for monitoring the entry and opening time of the game ball B during the small hit game.

The small hit process flag is operated to indicate that the small hit start process (step S400) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 486). In addition, when the entry of the game ball B into a specific area is detected in the small hit middle processing, the big hit executing flag is set, and the number of rounds that can be executed in the big hit game according to the type of small hit (5R small). 4 rounds if it is a hit, 13 rounds if it is a 14R small hit) is set in the big hit count counter, and the process is completed. As a result, the big hit game is started following the small hit game.

FIG. 501 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol process process (step S15).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S801 that the detection signal by the gate sensor 2801 is on and the game ball B has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. 501, the above As the process of step S802, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs a gate passage process such as acquiring a normal random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM. Execute.

Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. 1. A normal symbol normal process (step S803) in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number.
2. Normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination process (step S804) in which a lottery process is performed for the fluctuation mode (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the normal symbol fluctuation random number.
3. 3. Normal symbol fluctuation processing (step S805) that waits until the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
4. The mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped, is displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Normal symbol stop processing (step S806) to stop the variable display of the symbol
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "per normal figure", the process of controlling the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 is performed. Ordinary electric accessory opening process to be executed (step S807)

The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 486).

FIG. 502 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate portion passing process (step S802).

Now, assuming that the detection signal by the gate sensor 2801 is in the ON state in the process of step S801 and it is determined that the game ball B has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. 502. As the process of step S811, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires a counter value by a normal hold number counter indicating the number of normal random numbers stored in the normal symbol hold storage area from the RAM of the main control MPU. .. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved storages of the normal symbol is "4", which is the maximum value.

In the process of step S811, when it is determined that the reserved storage number of the normal symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are set in order to newly put the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol into the hold state. Will be processed. That is, first, as the process of step S812, the normal hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S813, the ordinary random number and the normal figure variation random number are acquired from the random number counter. Next, as the process of step S814, each random number thus acquired is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal hold number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU.

However, in the process of step S811, when it is determined that the reserved storage number of the ordinary symbol is the maximum value, the variation display control of the ordinary symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processes of steps S812 to S814 (the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the above-mentioned ordinary figure variation random number are not acquired from the above-mentioned random number counter), the variation display control of the above-mentioned ordinary symbol is not newly put on hold.

The gate portion passing process (step S802) may be performed by another example described below. For example, assuming that the detection signal by the gate sensor 2801 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball B has passed through the gate unit 2003, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first determines the above. The ordinary random number and the above-mentioned normal random number are acquired from the above-mentioned random number counter and stored in the provisional storage area. After that, the counter value by the normal hold number counter is acquired from the RAM of the main control MPU, and based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the hold storage number of the normal symbol is the maximum value "4". Do. Then, when it is determined that the hold storage number of the normal symbol is not the maximum value, the normal hold number counter is counted up (1 addition) in order to newly put the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol into the hold state. ), Then, the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the above-mentioned ordinary-figure variable random number (the above-mentioned ordinary random number stored in the provisional storage area and the above-mentioned ordinary-figure variable random number) are selected from the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. It is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the above-mentioned normal hold number counter. On the other hand, as a result of acquiring the counter value by the normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU, when it is determined that this counter value is "4" which is the maximum value (the hold storage number of the normal symbol is the hold storage number). In the case of the maximum value), the previously acquired ordinary random number and the ordinary symbol fluctuation random number are discarded without being stored in the ordinary symbol hold storage area, and the variation display control of the acquired ordinary symbol is newly performed. You may decide not to put it on hold.

FIG. 503 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal processing (step S803).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 503, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs the process of step S821. Based on the counter value of the normal hold number counter, it is determined whether or not there is variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, the normal symbol is normally stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU as the process of step S822. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, ordinary random numbers and ordinary random numbers) related to the display mode of the symbol is read from the RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, when the normal hold number counter is counted down and the variation display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stopped. Random numbers (ordinary random numbers, random numbers that fluctuate in the normal map) related to the display mode in the above are shifted in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003 are extracted from the first (earliest) area. Memorize in order. Then, when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 when the random number is stored in the nth (n = 1-3) storage area, the random number extracted in the n + 1th (n = 1-3) storage area. Is stored, and when the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) is stored. Various random numbers stored in the area are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the fluctuation display control hold of the normal symbol occurs can be identifiable and stored, and the hold of the fluctuation display control is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). ..

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the normal figure hit determination table shown in FIG. 504 (A) with the ordinary random number read in step S822 (step S828).

The normal figure hit determination table shown in FIG. 504 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU. Then, in the normal figure hit determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random numbers, the above ordinary random numbers are set so as to match the normal figure hit judgment values indicating that all 10 types of ordinary random numbers have been won per normal figure. It is associated. That is, in this example, when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, the player always wins the game.

When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a normal figure hit as a result of comparison between the normal figure hit determination table and the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S829), A flag per normal symbol is set to indicate that the fluctuation is won per normal symbol (step S830), and the symbol per normal symbol is determined as the mode (stop symbol of the normal symbol) when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped. (Step S831). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S829 that the normal symbol is not hit, the normal symbol is determined to be a normal symbol lost symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the normal symbol) when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped (step S833).

Then, after the lottery process for the normal symbol is performed in this way, as the process of step S834, a lottery is performed so that these lottery results (instructing either a normal figure hit or a loss) are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Set the general map judgment result notification command according to each result. After that, as the process of step S835, this process ends when the above-mentioned ordinary symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804).

FIG. 505 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol variation pattern determination process should be performed, the time saving flag is set in the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 505. If (step S841), the normal symbol variation pattern determination table at the time reduction time is selected (step S842), and if the time reduction flag is set (step S841), the normal symbol variation pattern determination table at the non-time reduction time is selected. (Step S843).

Then, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation pattern) to be executed is determined by comparing the selected normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table with the normal symbol fluctuation random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S844). ), Set the normal symbol fluctuation pattern command to notify the peripheral control board 1510 of the start of normal symbol fluctuation in the determined normal symbol fluctuation pattern, and display the fluctuation of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Is started (step S845).

Further, when the main control MPU determines the normal map fluctuation pattern, the normal map fluctuation time corresponding to the determined normal map fluctuation pattern is set in the normal map fluctuation timer (step S846). As a result, the effect control is performed on the normal symbol display (variation display of the normal symbol in) of the function display unit 1400 only for the normal map fluctuation time according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation pattern.

Further, in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table in the non-time saving time of this example, 20 seconds is set as the normal symbol fluctuation time. On the other hand, in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table during the time reduction of this example, the normal symbol fluctuation time is 0.8 seconds so that the normal symbol fluctuation time is shorter than that of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table during the non-time reduction. Is set. The normal symbol variation pattern determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

Further, when the variation display control of the normal symbol is started, the process is transferred to the normal symbol variation process (step S805) as the process of step S847, when the above-mentioned ordinary symbol process flag is updated. End the process.

FIG. 506 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol variation processing (step S805). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 506, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs the process of step S851. The normal map fluctuation timer for which the normal map fluctuation time is set in step S846 is subtracted by 1. Then, when it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (step S852), the process proceeds to step S853. That is, in the process of step S853, this process ends when the normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S806).

FIG. 507 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol stop process (step S806).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 507, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs the process of step S861. The display control for displaying the stop symbol of the normal symbol determined by the normal symbol normal processing on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is performed, and the derivation display of the stop symbol of the first special symbol is notified. The normal figure stop display command to be performed is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S862).

Next, when the above-mentioned normal figure hit flag is set (step S863), the second start port according to the current gaming state is used by using the normal figure hit open pattern table shown in FIG. 504 (B). The opening pattern of 2004 is set (step S864).

Specifically, if the second starting port 2004 is controlled to be in a non-time saving state at the start of opening, the opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004. That is, if the second starting port 2004 is controlled to be in a non-time saving state at the start of opening, the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed when a lottery result that is a normal figure is obtained by a lottery based on ordinary random numbers. The opening pattern A is executed in which the starting port solenoid 2514 is turned on and the second starting port 2004 opens and closes in a short opening mode (0.05 seconds in this example). As a result, when the opening pattern A is executed as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004, the opening operation time of the second starting port 2004 is short, and the game ball is in the open state when the second starting port 2004 is in the open state. It is difficult to get the ball in. That is, in the non-time saving state, even if the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed, the game ball hardly enters.

On the other hand, if the time is controlled to be shortened at the start of opening the second starting port 2004, the opening pattern B is set as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004. That is, if the second starting port 2004 is controlled to be in a non-time saving state at the start of opening, the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed when a lottery result that is a normal figure is obtained by a lottery based on ordinary random numbers. The opening pattern B is executed in which the starting port solenoid 2514 is turned on and the second starting port 2004 opens and closes in a long opening mode (1.5 seconds in this example). As a result, when the opening pattern B is executed as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004, the opening operation of the second starting port 2004 is long, and the game ball is in the open state when the second starting port 2004 is in the open state. It is possible to enter the ball.

When the opening pattern of the second start port 2004 is set, next, as the process of step S885, a normal figure hit start command indicating that the game per normal figure is started is set, and the normal symbol process flag is set to the normal electric accessory. This process ends when the process is updated so that the process shifts to the release process (step S866). The normal figure hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect of the normal figure hit game according to the type of the normal figure hit instructed by the normal figure hit start command is produced by the effect display device 1600. It can be performed by lamps, LEDs, speakers, etc.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has updated the normal symbol process flag so that the process shifts to the normal symbol normal process, which is the initial value, when the normal symbol hit flag is not set in step S864. At this point (step S868), this process ends.

FIG. 508 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the ordinary electric accessory opening process (step S807).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S871 that the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, as shown in FIG. 508, as shown in FIG. 508, the main of the main control board 1310. If a predetermined time (opening time of the second starting port 2004 in the opening pattern set in step S865) has elapsed after controlling the second starting port 2004 to the open state (step S872), the control MPU is second. This process ends when the start port solenoid 2514 for opening and closing the start port 2004 is turned off and the second start port 2004 is controlled to be closed (step S873).

Further, if it is determined in the process of step S871 that the second starting port 2004 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 508, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is the second starting port 2004. (Step S874), when the start port solenoid 2514 for opening and closing the second start port 2004 is turned on and the second start port 2004 is controlled to be in the open state (step S875), this End the process.

Further, in the process of step S871, if it is not the timing to open the second starting port 2004, as shown in FIG. 508, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 opens the second starting port 2004. When the number of times reaches a predetermined number of times (the number of times the second start port 2004 is opened in the opening pattern set in step S865) (step S876), the end command per normal figure is set (step S877). Then, when the normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol normal process, which is the initial value (step S878), this process ends. In addition, the end command for hitting a normal figure is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the end command for hitting a normal figure, the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, etc. are used to produce the game per normal figure. Can be terminated.

[11. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, the processing executed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 509 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for the control performed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 509, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU performs the initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM built in the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, the loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 mS progress flag T is set is started (step S502).

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU generates an interrupt every 2 mS elapses and executes a 2 mS steady-state process. In the 2mS steady processing, the processing of counting up the 16mS progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16mS progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16mS progress monitoring counter becomes 8, that is, when 16 mS has elapsed, 16 mS has elapsed. Along with setting the flag T, the process of resetting (setting 0) the 16 mS progress monitoring counter is executed. As described above, the 16 mS progress flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 mS in the 2 mS steady processing, and is usually set (reset) to "0". When the 16 mS progress flag is set in step S502 (16 mS progress flag T is "1"), after resetting the 16 mS progress flag (step S503), 16 mS steady processing is performed (step S504).

In this 16 mS steady processing, a process of controlling the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like is executed based on the command received from the main control board 1310. When the 16 mS steady processing is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 mS progress flag T is set, that is, every 16 mS. On the other hand, when the 16 mS progress flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 mS progress flag T is “0”), the loop process is performed until the 16 mS progress flag T is set.

FIG. 510 is a flowchart showing an example of a 16 mS steady-state process executed every 16 mS in the sub-main process. In the 16 mS steady-state process, the peripheral control MPU executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis process of step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the variation pattern command transmitted by being set in the variation pattern setting process (step S149 of the first variation pattern setting process, step S149a of the second variation pattern setting process) is received. Originally, the control process related to the effect display device 1600 is executed.

Further, in the sound control process of step S603, the control process related to the speaker provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, the control process related to the lamp / LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to various decorative substrates 184, 273 and the like is executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating the random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

The processing of steps S601 to S606 in the 16mS steady processing is completed within 16mS. Even if it takes 16 mS or more from the start of the 16 mS steady process to the end of the 16 mS steady process, the 16 mS steady process is immediately started from the beginning (command of step S601) when 16 mS elapses after the start of the 16 mS steady process. Do not execute (from the analysis process). That is, when 16 mS elapses during the execution of the 16 mS steady process, only the 16 mS elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 mS elapse flag is set after the 16 mS steady process is completed, the 16 mS steady process is performed. To start.

Further, in this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed in the 16 mS steady-state process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in either or both of the loop processing and the 16mS steady processing in the sub-main processing.

FIG. 511 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process (step S602).

In the effect control process, the peripheral control MPU selectively executes one of the following five process processes according to the effect process flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. Will be done.

1. 1. Fluctuation pattern command (first variation pattern command for instructing the variation pattern of the first special symbol, second) for instructing the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) analyzed by the above command analysis process. After performing processing to control the effect display device 1600, LED, speaker, etc. based on the second variation pattern command) that indicates the variation pattern of the special symbol, the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the process during the variation effect. Variable production start processing to be changed (step S711)
2. The elapsed time from the start of control of the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker, etc. is measured, and the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker, etc. are controlled according to the elapsed time. The variable effect in-process (step S712) of changing the effect process flag to a value corresponding to the variable end process according to the elapse of the variable time according to the variable pattern of (1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol).
3. 3. Processing for deriving and displaying a predetermined display result based on the reception of the stop display command instructing to stop the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and if there is a loss, the above effect Change the process flag to a value according to the variable effect start process, change it to a value according to the big hit effect process if it is a big hit, and change it to a value according to the small hit effect process if it is a small hit. (Step S713)
4. Based on the reception of the jackpot start command instructing the start of the jackpot game, the effect display device 1600 performs a process for executing display control during the jackpot game, and changes the above effect process flag when the jackpot game ends. Big hit production process (step S714) to change the value according to the effect start process
5. Based on the reception of the small hit start command instructing the start of the small hit game, the effect display device 1600 is processed to execute the display control during the small hit game, and the second big winning opening is performed during the small hit game. If the game ball B accepted in 2006 is distributed to a specific area, the above-mentioned effect process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the big hit effect start process when the small hit game is ended, and the game ball B is distributed to the specific area. If not, the small hit effect process (step S715) is changed to a value corresponding to the variable effect start process.

Special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) executed by the special symbol display (first special symbol display of function display unit 1400, second special symbol display of function display unit 1400) by the above processing. The effect display device 1600 executes the variable display of the decorative symbol in synchronization with the variable display of.

[10. Fluctuation control at the end of time reduction control]
As described above, the opening / closing control of the second starting port 2004 is performed in the time saving state with an opening pattern different from that in the non-time saving state. That is, if the time is shortened when the normal symbol fluctuation executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped, the second start port 2004 is set to the opening pattern A in the short opening mode (0.05 seconds in this example). If the normal symbol fluctuation executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped and the non-time saving state is reached, the second opening pattern B in the long opening mode (1.5 seconds in this example) is used. The starting port 2004 is opened and closed.

In this way, in order to change the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004 based on the time when the normal symbol fluctuation executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped, immediately before the end of the time saving state (for example, the number of time saving times). In the case of the time saving state A of 100 times, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is displayed immediately before the 100th variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped in the time saving state. When the normal symbol fluctuation executed in is stopped and the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed, the second starting port 2004 is opened and closed in the opening pattern B of the long opening mode (1.5 seconds in this example) as a time saving state. Will be done. Further, when the time saving state ends after the second starting port 2004 is opened, the player may feel uncomfortable because the opening pattern in the time saving state is executed even though the time saving state has ended. In addition, a start prize may be given to the second start port 2004 at an unexpected time such as after the symbol change is started in the non-time reduction state after the end of the time reduction state, which is not intended by the game designer. Behavior (In the non-time saving state, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is mainly executed and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is hardly executed. However, despite the non-time saving state, the second starting port 2004 is reached. The start prize is generated and the change display of the second special symbol is executed), and at the same time, the behavior of the game may give the player a sense of discomfort, which may lead to a decrease in the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400 is stopped at a lost symbol (for example, the first). (1) Special symbol stop processing step S194), normally, "0.5 seconds" is set in the interval timer as the waiting time (time during which the special symbol stop symbol is displayed) until the next special symbol variation display is started. set. As described above, the interval timer is referred to in the first special symbol process process (step S28) and the second special symbol process process (step S39), and the special symbol display (first) of the function display unit 1400 is used until the interval timer times out. (I) Control so that the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the special symbol display (second special symbol display) is not started.

In addition, when the time saving state is ended, that is, when the symbol fluctuation of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) after the big hit game reaches the time saving number of times, and the symbol fluctuation is stopped (time saving). When the last symbol change in the state is stopped), "2 seconds" is set in the interval timer as the waiting time (the time during which the stop symbol of the special symbol is displayed) until the next special symbol change display is started. set. As described above, in the time saving state, the second starting port 2004 is changed to the open state, and then the second starting port 2004 is changed to the closed state when 1.5 seconds have elapsed. Therefore, by setting "2 seconds" in the interval timer when the last symbol change in the time-saving state stops and the time-saving state ends, the symbol change of the special symbol in the non-time-saving state is started before the start. (Ii) The starting port 2004 can be changed to the closed state, whereby it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a starting prize for the second starting port 2004 after the symbol variation of the special symbol in the non-time saving state is started.

The period set in the interval timer when the last symbol fluctuation in the time-saving state stops and the time-saving state ends is at least equivalent to the opening time of the second major winning opening 2006 in the time-saving state (in this example, "1. 5 seconds ") or more. In addition, if the second big winning opening 2006 has not changed to the open state when the last symbol fluctuation in the time saving state is stopped and the time saving state is finished, it is set as a waiting time until the next special symbol fluctuation display is started. The same time as usual (“0.5 seconds” in this example) may be set.

In this way, when the final special lottery result in the time-saving state is derived (when the last symbol change in the time-saving state stops), regardless of the presence or absence of the first hold number and the second hold number, the predetermined period By suppressing the execution of the next special lottery (winning judgment) over a period of time, the time saving control that can be continued after the last special lottery result in the time saving state is derived (after the last symbol change in the time saving state is stopped). Is completed within the predetermined period, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of second holds after the end of the time saving control. As a result, the game progresses in an unintended behavior of the game designer that a start winning prize is generated in the second start port 2004 and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed even though the game is in a non-time saving state. Since it can be prevented and the game progress (the game property intended by the game designer) can be suitably realized in the behavior intended by the game designer, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest by not giving the player a sense of discomfort. ..

In the above example, the determination of whether or not the time reduction state is performed (determination of whether or not the time reduction state is terminated) is performed when the normal symbol fluctuation executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped. Although what is performed as a reference is shown, when the normal symbol variation executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started to determine whether or not the time is shortened (for example, the above-mentioned normal symbol normal process (step S803)). Is executed, or when the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (S804) is executed), it may be performed as a reference. In this case, at least, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation (normal symbol fluctuation time: "0.8 seconds" in this example) executed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 during the time reduction state, and the time reduction state. The opening time of the second prize opening 2006 (“1.5 seconds” in this example) and the total period (“2.3 seconds” in this example) or more may be set.

In addition, the above-mentioned left-handed instruction (instruction that recommends left-handedness that appears to allow the game ball B to enter the first starting port 2002 when returning from the time-saving state to the normal state) is given after the time-saving is completed. It may be executed before the first normal fluctuation starts. That is, the left-handed instruction may be executed across the start timing of the first normal fluctuation. Further, for example, the end timing of the left-handed instruction may be before the end of the first normal fluctuation after the end of the time reduction, or may be after the end of the first normal fluctuation.

In addition, for example, the symbol is stopped at the final fluctuation of the time saving state, and the left-handed instruction is started after the symbol is stopped and before the first fluctuation is started after the time saving is completed. The left-handed instruction using the effect display device 1600 may be started after the start of the left-handed instruction using the speaker, or the order may be reversed. Further, for example, the left-handed instruction using the speaker may be finished before the left-handed instruction by the effect display device 1600 is finished, or the order may be reversed. It is desirable that the left-handed instruction at the end of the time reduction is continuously executed for a predetermined time even if the left-handed is actually started.

In addition, a left-handed instruction that appears at the end of the time reduction and a left-handed instruction in the left-handed warning effect that warns the player to perform left-handed by performing right-handed in the normal state (for example, displayed on the effect display device 1600) The display mode) may be different. When the left-handed instruction at the end of the time reduction is being executed, if the right-handed person is hit, the left-handed instruction may be continuously executed, or the left-handed instruction may be terminated and the left-handed warning effect may be produced. A left-handed instruction may be executed.

In addition, when the second special symbol change is executed in the state where the left-handed instruction that appears at the end of the time reduction is completed, if the right-handed is performed, the left-handed instruction in the left-handed warning effect described above is executed. The left-handed instruction ends after a lapse of a predetermined time. There is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is shorter than the predetermined time. Therefore, in one variation, the left-handed instruction can be further started after the left-handed instruction starts and ends. The predetermined time may be shorter than the shortest fluctuation time. If the jackpot game starts before the predetermined time elapses, the left-handed instruction is completed by the start of the jackpot game.

Further, when the left-handed instruction in the left-handed warning effect is executed and the right-handed person is hit, the effect time of the left-handed instruction may be reset and the left-handed instruction may be restarted from the beginning. , Although the production time of the left-handed instruction is reset, the left-handed instruction may be continuously executed without being redone, or only the left-handed instruction effect may be performed ignoring the fact that the right-handed instruction has been performed. You may execute it as it is.

As described above, by inserting the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 during the execution of the time saving final change, a maximum of four second special symbol changes can be suspended. For example, the time saving can be held. If the ordinary symbol lottery is won immediately before the end of the final change, the second winning opening 2004 will be opened during the execution of the first change in the normal state after the end of the time reduction, and the second special will be opened during the execution of the first change. It is also possible to suspend one more symbol change.

The second special symbol change is suspended during the execution of the time reduction final change, and one second special symbol change is suspended during the execution of the first change after the end of the time reduction, and only the one second special symbol change is a big hit. In the case of fluctuation, the second special symbol change of the jackpot is executed after the execution of the missed variation held during the execution of the time saving final variation, and the jackpot game is started. It should be noted that the right-handed instruction is executed during the time-saving state, and as long as the right-handed instruction is followed, there is a possibility that the maximum number of four second special symbol changes is suspended during the execution of the time-saving final change. Since it is the highest, the out-of-order fluctuation is most likely to be executed four times before the second special symbol fluctuation of the jackpot is executed.

On the other hand, for example, if there is no hold of the special symbol change at the end of the time reduction, the change will not be executed, but as described above, if the normal lottery is won just before the end of the time reduction final change. May be able to execute the second special symbol change from the state in which the change is not executed by executing the right-handed strike. In particular, when the second special symbol variation is a jackpot variation, the time reduction ends, the variation is not executed, and then the jackpot game starts after one variation is executed.

[12. Production in an advantageous state]
[12-1. Pachinko machine specifications]
First, an example of the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 in this chapter will be described. FIG. 512 (A) is an example of a hit probability table, and FIG. 512 (B) is an example of a big hit distribution table. The hit probability table and the jackpot distribution table are stored in, for example, the ROM of the main control MPU.

Hereinafter, the first special symbol is also referred to as special figure 1, and the second special symbol is also referred to as special figure 2. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively called a special symbol. In addition, the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation are collectively referred to as a special symbol variation or simply a variation. The special lottery results in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 include big hits and small hits.

The hit probability table includes a jackpot probability in a low probability state (that is, a non-probability state) and a high probability state (that is, a probability change state), and a small hit probability (no distinction between a low probability state and a high probability state). To define. The jackpot probability is common to Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2. Further, the hit probability table defines the small hit probability in the special figure 2. That is, according to the hit probability table of FIG. 512, a small hit is won with a high probability at the time of winning the special figure 2. In addition, from the prize of Special Figure 1, the small hit is not won, or the prize is won with an extremely low probability (for example, 1/300 or less) as compared with Special Figure 2.

In this chapter, when a small hit is won, the first big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern of closing is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice).

The jackpot distribution table defines the distribution of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won for each of the special figures 1 and 2. "2R", "8R", and "16R" in the jackpot type indicate the number of rounds of the jackpot, and "low probability time saving", "high probability time saving", and "high probability time saving" indicate the jackpot. Indicates the game state that shifts after the end.

In addition, "Special Figure 1_8R Low-Probability Time-Short Design 1", "Special Figure 1_8R Low-Probability Time-Short Design 2", "Special Figure 1_8R Low-Probability Time-Short Design 3", "Special Figure 2_2R Low-Probability Time-Short Design 1", The number of time reductions of "Special Figure 2_2R Low Accuracy Time Saving Symbol 2", "Special Figure 2_2R Low Accuracy Time Saving Symbol 3", and "Special Figure 2_2R High Accuracy Time Saving Symbol 3" is 10 times, and "Special Figure 2_2R High" The number of time reductions of "Probable time reduction symbol 1" is 7 times, and the number of time reductions of "Special figure 2_2R Low probability reduction time symbol 2" is 9 times.

The number of time reductions is the number of fluctuations that triggers the end of the time reduction state that starts after the end of the jackpot game. That is, after entering the time saving state, the time saving state ends when the fluctuation of the number of times determined by the time saving number ends. The number of time reductions may be determined by the total number of fluctuations of the special figures 1 and 2, or may be determined by the number of fluctuations of one of the special figures. In this chapter, it is assumed that the number of time reductions is determined by the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 2. That is, for example, in the time saving state that shifts after the big hit of "Special Figure 2_2R High Accuracy Time Saving Symbol 1", even if the total number of fluctuations of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 reaches 7, the fluctuation of Special Figure 2 If has not finished 7 times, it shall not finish.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter, special figures 1 and 2 are individually changed according to the extraction of special random numbers, and the changes of special figures 1 and 2 are started. Display can be executed at the same time (simultaneous fluctuation of special symbols). When both the first special random number and the second special random number are stored (held), the reserved special random numbers are individually digested according to the progress of the variable display of the individual special random numbers.

That is, when the fluctuating first special symbol is stopped, the fluctuation of the first special symbol held in the first special symbol storage display is started, and when the fluctuating second special symbol is stopped, the second special symbol is stopped. The change of the second special symbol held in the storage display is started. Further, since the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be changed at the same time, the effect display device 1600 displays the decorative symbols so as to change at the same time in response to the change of each special symbol.

When either the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is stopped in the display mode indicating a big hit, any of the following processes is performed as the process for the other special figure during the simultaneous fluctuation. .. As a first processing example, the jackpot game by one special figure is controlled, and the fluctuation of the other special figure is deleted (forcibly stopped by coming off). In this case, even after the jackpot game is completed, the change of the other special figure that has been deleted is not restarted, and the change of the next special figure of the other is started.

As a second processing example, the jackpot game by one special figure is controlled, and the lapse of the fluctuation time of the other special figure is temporarily stopped during the execution of the jackpot game. The special figure during the execution of the jackpot game and the variable stop is displayed on the special symbol display, for example, in a blinking manner (displayed in a mode different from that when the game is not paused (the player can recognize that the player is paused)). Will be done. Then, after the jackpot game is completed, the fluctuation display of the other special figure, which has been paused, is resumed from the remaining fluctuation time. As a third processing example, the big hit game by one special figure is controlled, the fluctuation time of the other special figure is reset, and the change of the other special figure is started again after the end of the big hit game.

In this chapter, the high-accuracy non-time saving state is a state in which it is easy to obtain a small hit ball (so-called small hit rush). Hereinafter, an example of specifications for realizing a small hit rush only in a high-accuracy non-time saving state will be described.

First, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol, the ordinary lottery probability, and the like will be described. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is, for example, about 1 second in both the time-reduced state and the non-time-reduced state, which is shorter than the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation. Further, in both the time-saving state and the non-time-saving state, the probability of a normal hit is very high (for example, 1/1) in the normal lottery result performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003. Further, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 when the normal symbol is won is long in the time-saving state (for example, about 6 seconds) and short in the non-time-saving state (for example, about 0.7 seconds).

Subsequently, the game method in each state will be described. As described above, the probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is extremely high as compared with the first special symbol lottery (54552/65536 in the example of FIG. 512 (A)). Therefore, in the low probability non-time saving state, the second starting port 2004 is opened by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003, and the game ball B is made to enter the second starting port 2004, and a small hit with a high probability. Can be elected.

However, in the low probability non-time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is very long as compared with the fluctuation time of the special figure 1. Specifically, for example, the shortest fluctuation time (for example, about 10 minutes) of the special figure 2 is longer than the longest fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (for example, about 5 minutes). Therefore, the time interval between winning the small hit and opening the first big winning opening 2005 is very long, and the opening and closing time of the first big winning opening 2005 in the small hit game is short and the number of times of opening and closing is small. Even if the variation of the special figure 2 is executed, it is difficult to put the game ball B into the first large winning opening 2005 at the right time during the small hit game.

Specifically, the total opening time of the first big winning opening 2005 in the small hit game is shorter than the opening time of the second starting opening 2004 in the time saving state. For example, a small hit game in which the first big winning opening 2005 opens for about 0.5 seconds and then closes for about 1.35 seconds only once, or the first big winning opening 2005 is 0.5. There is a small hit game in which the first pattern is executed once after the second pattern of opening for about seconds and then closing for about 0.7 seconds is repeated twice.

Even if the game ball B can be put into the first prize opening 2005 at the right time during the small hit game, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is very long, so the ball can be obtained per unit time. In addition, the game cannot proceed smoothly. Therefore, in the low probability non-time saving state, in principle, the player strikes left and advances the game so that the game ball B enters the first starting port 2002.

On the other hand, in the time saving state (low accuracy time saving state and high accuracy time saving state), the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set short. Specifically, for example, the fluctuation time (for example, about 1 second) of the shortened deviation fluctuation (variation in which the reach effect is not executed) of the special figure 2 is set shorter than the shortest fluctuation time (for example, about 4 seconds) of the special figure 1. If the deviation fluctuation starts in the state where the special figure 2 is held in the time saving state, the shortened deviation fluctuation is selected at a high rate (for example, about 90%). Therefore, in the time-saving state, the player executes a so-called right-handed hit and advances the game so as to allow the game ball B to enter the second starting port 2004, thereby smoothly without reducing the number of balls. The game can proceed.

Here, since the second starting port 2004 is downstream of the gate portion 2003 in the flow path of the game ball B on the game board 5, most of the game balls B heading for the second starting port 2004 are the second starting port 2004. Passes through the gate portion 2003 before reaching. Further, the first big winning opening 2005 opened during the small hit game is downstream of the second starting opening 2004 in the flow path of the game ball B on the game board 5. When the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, the game ball B heading for the first winning opening 2005 enters the second starting opening 2004 and does not reach the first winning opening 2005. That is, in order for the game ball B to enter the first large winning opening 2005, it is necessary for the game ball B to pass over the second starting port 2004 when the second starting port 2004 is in the closed state.

However, in the short-time state, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 is long (for example, about 6 seconds) when a normal hit is won, so the game heading toward the first major winning opening 2005 of the right-handed game ball B. Most of the balls B enter the second starting opening 2004 in the open state and do not reach the first winning opening 2005. Therefore, in the time saving state, the player can insert the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 and win the small hit frequently, but cannot obtain the ball output by the small hit game. .. Further, since the number of prize balls when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 is, for example, one, the special figure 2 fluctuation can be executed with almost no reduction in the number of balls to be ejected in the time saving state. It is difficult to increase the number of balls.

In addition, since the first big winning opening 2005 is arranged at a position where there is almost no game ball B that reaches the first big winning opening 2005 when a so-called left-handed hit is made, the first big winning opening 2005 is left-handed during the time saving state. We also take care of so-called capture acts that try to increase the number of game balls B by alternately repeating right-handed hits.

Subsequently, in the high-accuracy non-time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set short (for example, about 1 second) as in the time-saving state. Therefore, in the high-accuracy non-time saving state, the player executes a so-called right-handed hit and advances the game so that the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004. Further, in the high-accuracy non-time saving state, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 in the case of winning a normal hit is sufficient time for the game ball B to enter the second starting port 2004, and is short ( For example, about 0.7 seconds), so a considerable number (for example, more than half) of the right-handed game balls B pass over the closed second starting port 2004 and the first big winning opening. Reach 2005.

That is, in the high-accuracy non-time saving state, the player can enter the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 to frequently win a small hit, and can obtain a ball output by the small hit game. According to the above-mentioned specifications, it is possible to realize a small hit rush that makes it easy to obtain a ball with a small hit only in a highly accurate non-time saving state.

FIG. 513 is a transition diagram showing an example of the game state transition of the pachinko machine 1 of this chapter. As described above, the variation of the special figure 1 is executed in the low probability non-time saving state, and the variation of the special figure 2 is executed in the state other than the low probability non-time saving state, so that the player can smoothly proceed with the game. Can be done. On the other hand, the transition from the low-probability non-time-saving state to the special figure 2 jackpot and the transition from the state other than the low-probability non-time-saving state to the special figure 1 jackpot are irregular. ing.

In any state, if a jackpot is won, the state shifts to either a low probability time saving state, a high probability time saving state, or a high probability non-time saving state according to the jackpot type. In the low-probability time-saving state, when the fluctuation of the number of time-savings specified by the jackpot type that triggered the transition to the low-probability time-saving state is completed, the state shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving state. In addition, in the high-accuracy time-saving state, when the fluctuation of the number of time-savings specified by the jackpot type that triggered the transition to the high-accuracy time-saving state is completed, the high-accuracy non-time-saving state, that is, the small hit rush Transition.

At first glance, the transition from the high-accuracy time-saving state to the high-accuracy non-time-saving state seems to be a disadvantageous state transition for the player, but as described above, the small hit rush is realized in the high-accuracy non-time-saving state, which is advantageous for the player. State transition. Therefore, when the high-accuracy time-saving state ends by digesting the fluctuation of the special figure 2 determined by the time-saving number of times, the player can rather obtain an uplifting feeling without deteriorating his interest.

[12-2. Rush rush chance production]
Hereinafter, the rush rush effect, which is an effect executed from the start of the time reduction state (high accuracy time reduction state and low accuracy time reduction state), will be described. The rush rush chance production notifies that at the start of the time saving state, the current state is the time saving state, but it is unknown whether it is the high probability time saving state or the low probability time saving state, and in the fluctuation during the time saving state, the current state is changed. It is an effect of notifying whether the state is a high-accuracy time-saving state (that is, a state of shifting to a high-accuracy non-time-saving state which is a small hit rush state after the end of the specified number of special 2 fluctuations) or a low-accuracy time-saving state. ..

514, 515, and 516 are explanatory views showing an example of a rush rush chance effect. In FIGS. 514, 515, and 516, an example will be described in which the number of time reductions is 10 and all the fluctuations in the time reduction state are out-of-time fluctuations.

(A) is a state in which the time-saving big hit has been completed. The same decorative symbol indicating a big hit is stopped on the effect display device 1600. In addition, the expected value of the winning balls at the time of winning the big hit is higher in the order of low probability time saving big hit, high probability time saving big hit, and high probability time short no big hit. For example, when the "7" set of decorative symbols is selected, it is preferable that the combination of decorative symbols is selected so that the winning of the high-accuracy time-shortening no-big hit is confirmed. Also, when an odd number of decorative symbols is selected than when an even number of decorative symbols is selected, the expectation of winning a high probability time saving jackpot is higher than when a low probability time saving jackpot is selected. , A combination of decorative patterns should be selected.

In addition, the effect that the decorative symbol is promoted during the big hit may be executed. Specifically, for example, even if a player wins a high-accuracy time-shortening no-big hit, the odd-numbered or even-numbered match stops when the symbol is confirmed, a promotion effect is executed during the jackpot game, and the decorative symbol is promoted to "7". Good.

(B) is a state in which the time-saving big hit has ended and the time-saving state has started. A display indicating that the rush rush chance has started is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (C), since the time saving state has started, a display (right-handed display) prompting the player to execute the so-called right-handed hit and let the game ball B enter the second starting port 2004 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. There is. At the start of the time saving state, a large right-handed display in the lower middle part of the effect display device 1600 (three arrows marked "Right-handed !!") and a small right-handed display in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600 ("" One arrow) with the words "Right-handed !!" is displayed.

(D) is a state in which the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004 from the state of (C) and the first fluctuation of the special figure 2 is started. The large right-handed display has been erased from the effect display device 1600. Further, a display showing the maximum value of the number of remaining time reductions is displayed on the upper left portion of the effect display device 1600. As described above, the number of time reductions is 7, 8, or 10 times. Therefore, in the state (D) in which the fluctuation of Special Figure 2 has not completed even one fluctuation, the maximum value is "remaining 10 times". Is displayed. In addition, the display "Power up the character in 6 seconds !!" is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

It should be noted that the power-up effect of the character is performed by utilizing the six fluctuations from the first variation to the sixth variation of the special figure 2 in the time saving state. In the power-up effect, an image of a character wearing an aura is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the aura color is stepped up in the six fluctuations.

For example, the peripheral control ROM stores a scenario management table for power-up effects. The scenario management table stores the scenario of the power-up effect and the distribution for each of the low-accuracy time-saving state and the high-accuracy time-saving state. The scenario shows the color of the aura for each of the six fluctuations. In each scenario, it is assumed that the aura color in the final fluctuation of the power-up effect is expected to be in a highly accurate time-saving state in the order of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow color. The rainbow color shall be selected only when the current state is the high-accuracy time-saving state.

In addition, it is desirable that the aura color does not step down (for example, white in the next fluctuation of blue) in the six fluctuations of each scenario. This is because there is a risk of reducing the player's expectation. Further, for example, when the final aura color in the power-up effect is the same, it may be set so that the smaller the number of fluctuations that reach the final aura color, the higher the expectation that the time-saving state is high. Specifically, for example, when the final aura color is red, the case where it reaches red by the sixth variation of Special Figure 2 and the case where it reaches red by the fourth variation of Special Figure 2 The latter is more likely to be in a high-accuracy time-saving state. It should be noted that the former may have a higher degree of expectation that it is in a highly accurate time-saving state. This is because the expectation can be pulled up to the last (sixth) fluctuation.

Further, in each scenario, the aura color may be promoted by one step, may be promoted by a plurality of steps, or may not be promoted by one change. When the aura color is promoted in multiple stages by one fluctuation, for example, the aura color may be stepped up from white to green without passing through blue, or stepped up in order from white to blue to green in the fluctuation. You may. In each scenario, the aura color that is first displayed in the first variation of FIG. 2 does not have to be the one with the lowest expectation (that is, it does not have to be white).

The "6 seconds" displayed on the effect display device 1600 is an index indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in which the power-up effect is performed, and is different from the actual 6 seconds. That is, for example, as will be described later, "6 seconds left" for the first fluctuation in the time saving state (meaning that the power-up effect is performed using the remaining 6 fluctuations), and "after" for the second fluctuation. "5 seconds" (meaning that the power-up effect is performed using the remaining 5 fluctuations) is displayed. That is, since the remaining time indicates the number of remaining fluctuations until the rock destruction effect is performed, the display indicating the maximum number of time reductions may not be performed.

(E) is a state in which the first special figure 2 is changing after the time saving state starts, and is a continuation state of (D). On the effect display device 1600, a character wearing an aura and a display of "6 seconds left" are displayed.

(F) is the state at the end of the first fluctuation of the special figure 2 after the time saving state starts. After the state of (E), the color of the aura is promoted from white to blue by the end of the fluctuation, and the display (“power-up !!”) indicating that the color of the aura has been promoted is the effect display device 1600. Is displayed in. (G) is a state in which the second fluctuation of the special figure 2 has started since the time saving state has started. The aura color of the character remains blue, and the effect display device 1600 displays "5 seconds left". The same effect is repeated until the fifth change in Special Figure 2.

(H) is a state in which the special figure 2 is changing for the sixth time since the time saving state starts. In the sixth variation of the special figure 2, the color of the aura is promoted to red, and a display (“power-up !!”) indicating that the color of the aura has been promoted is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In the example of FIG. 514, red is the final aura color in the power-up effect.

(I) is the state at the end of the sixth special figure 2 after the time saving state starts. In the sixth variation, after the step-up of the aura color is completed, the introduction effect of the rock destruction effect performed by the seventh to tenth variation of the special figure 2 is executed. In (I), as the introduction effect, "Destroy the rock!" Is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The character destroys the rock in the rock destruction effect only when the current state is the high accuracy time saving state.

(J) is the state during the change of the special figure 2 for the seventh time since the time saving state started. An image of the character hitting the rock after the rock destruction effect has started is displayed on the effect display device 1600. During the rock destruction effect, for example, the character wears a red aura, which is the final aura color of the power-up effect.

As a result, the player does not forget the expectation level of high accuracy and short time even during the rock destruction effect. On the contrary, the character may not wear an aura during the rock destruction effect. This is because some players do not want other players to know the degree of expectation. If the character wears an aura during the rock destruction effect, the aura color may be stepped up even during the rock destruction effect.

(K) is the state during the seventh change in Special Figure 2 after the start of the time saving state and the state following (J). An image of a state in which the rock is cracked but the rock is not cracked due to the character hitting the rock is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (L) is the state at the end of the seventh variation of the special figure 2 after the start of the time saving state. A display (“Still more !!”) indicating that the rock destruction effect is still continuing is displayed on the effect display device 1600. After that, the same production is repeated.

(M) is the state during the change of the special figure 2 for the eighth time since the time saving state started. In the rock destruction effect, an image of the character hitting the rock again is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (N) is the state at the end of the ninth variation of the special figure 2 after the start of the time saving state. A display (“Bet on this blow!”) Showing that the next change in Special Figure 2 is the last change in which the rock destruction effect is performed is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

(O) is a changing state of the special figure 2 of the tenth time (that is, the end of the time saving state) after the time saving state starts. An image of the character hitting a rock is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The cracks in the rock may increase each time the character hits the rock. In (O), there are more rock cracks than in (M).

(P) is a state in which the tenth change of the special figure 2 is in progress and is a continuation of (O) since the time saving state is started. The effect display device 1600 displays an image of success in destroying the rock (that is, an image showing that the current state is a high-accuracy time-saving state and shifts to a high non-time-saving state at the end of the fluctuation). ing. After the image that failed to destroy the rock is displayed, the revival effect may be performed to display the image that succeeded in destroying the rock. (Q) is the state at the end of the tenth variation of the special figure 2 after the start of the time saving state. An image (“rush rush !!”) indicating the transition to the high-accuracy non-time saving state is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

When the number of time reductions is 7 times in the high-accuracy time-saving state, the image in which the rock is destroyed at the 7th variation in FIG. 2 and the image in which the rock is shifted to the high-accuracy non-time-saving state (that is, (P), ). However, the remaining number of times in the upper left part is displayed as "4 times remaining"). Similarly, when the number of time reductions is 9 times in the high-accuracy time-saving state, the image in which the rock breaks at the 9th variation in FIG. 2 and the image in which the rock breaks into the high-accuracy non-time reduction state (that is, (P), The image of Q). However, the remaining number of times in the upper left part is displayed as "2 times remaining").

In the above-mentioned example, the time saving state in which the number of time saving times is 7 times and 9 times is not selected in the low probability time saving state. If there is a low-probability time-saving state in which the number of time reductions is 7 or 9, the rock destruction effect that ends in failure with a small number of fluctuations will be performed, and it will not be possible to give the player an uplifting feeling. is there.

FIGS. 516 (P') and 516 (Q') are examples of rock fracture effects when the current state is a non-time saving state. (P') is the state during the tenth change of the special figure 2 after the start of the time saving state and the state following (O). In the rock destruction effect, an image in which the character fails to destroy the rock is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (Q') is a state in which the tenth change in Special Figure 2 has been completed since the time saving state started. A display indicating that the rush rush chance has ended is displayed on the effect display device 1600. After this, it shifts to a low-probability non-time saving state.

For example, in the power-up effect, an image of the pressing operation unit 303 and an image prompting the pressing of the pressing operation unit 303 are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and at the timing when the pressing of the pressing operation unit 303 is detected. You may notify whether or not the aura color can be stepped up. Similarly, for example, in the rock breaking effect, an image of the pressing operation unit 303 and an image prompting the pressing of the pressing operation unit 303 are displayed on the effect display device 1600 at the timing when the pressing of the pressing operation unit 303 is detected. , You may notify the possibility of rock destruction.

When the fluctuation during the time saving state, that is, during the rush rush effect is the jackpot fluctuation, for example, the jackpot is notified by an effect different from the effect of destroying the rock. This is to make the player recognize whether the jackpot was won or whether the transition to the high-accuracy time-saving state was successful.

As a specific effect, for example, immediately after the start of the fluctuation, the shutter group is closed so as to cover the effect display device 1600. The closed state of the shutter group is maintained for a long time (for example, about 2 minutes) according to the fluctuation pattern, for example. After that, when the shutter group is opened, an icon suggesting the type of jackpot is displayed on the effect display device 1600. After that, the decorative design is stopped. On the other hand, the jackpot may be notified by the effect of destroying the rock. As a result, the player cannot immediately recognize whether he / she has won the big hit or has shifted to the high-accuracy time-saving state, so that he / she can maintain a sense of tension.

[12-3. Production during the small hit rush]
517 and 518 are explanatory views showing an example of the effect during the small hit rush. (A) is a state at the end of the final fluctuation of the high-accuracy time-shortening state, that is, a state similar to FIG. (B) is a changing state of the high-accuracy non-time saving state. In the upper left portion of the effect display device 1600, a display (“rushing !!”) indicating that the current state is a high-accuracy non-time saving state (that is, during a small hit rush) is displayed.

Further, in (B), there is a total number of acquired balls display area and a timer display area at the lower right of the effect display device 1600. In the total number of acquired balls display area, the total number of acquired balls from the start of the small hit rush and the number of balls paid out by the large hit are displayed. For example, it is desirable that the number of balls paid out by entering the game ball B into a general winning opening other than the large winning opening or the starting opening is not included in the total number of acquired balls.

In addition, for example, the number of balls paid out by the entry of the game ball B into the general winning opening may be included in the total number of acquired balls, but in this case, the effect display device 1600 is determined at the time of the entry. It is desirable to output an image of the above, output a predetermined sound from various speakers, and output a predetermined light from various lamps. This is to make the player recognize that the total number of acquired balls is increasing by entering the game ball B into the general winning opening.

In addition, the display of the total number of acquired balls continues until the end of the jackpot fluctuation (that is, the high-accuracy time-shortened jackpot fluctuation and the low-accuracy time-shortened jackpot fluctuation) that cannot always shift to the high-accuracy non-time-saving state, and the jackpot At the end of the fluctuation, the count of the total number of acquired balls stops. However, if you win a big hit that is not always possible to shift to the high-accuracy non-time-saving state, but then you can re-shift to the high-accuracy non-time-saving state without falling to the low-accuracy non-time-saving state, you will get the total again. The number of balls is displayed again, and counting is restarted from the value at the latest count stop. In addition, although the jackpot that is not always able to shift to the high-accuracy non-time-saving state is won, if the high-accuracy time-saving no jackpot is won during the time-saving state shifted by the jackpot, the high-accuracy time-saving no jackpot will be awarded. At the start, the total number of acquired balls may be redisplayed and the count may be restarted.

In the timer display area, the digestion time of the small hit rush, which is counted from the start of the small hit rush, is displayed. The start of the small hit rush may be the end of the high-accuracy time-shortening no-big-hit game, the end of the final fluctuation in the high-accuracy time-shortening state, or the start of the first fluctuation in the high-accuracy time-shortening state. Good.

(C) is a state in which the high-accuracy time-shortening no-big hit fluctuation is completed in the high-accuracy non-time-saving state. Since the timer in the timer display area indicates the digestion time of the small hit rush, the timer is stopped at the end of the big hit fluctuation during the high accuracy non-time reduction (at the end of the big hit fluctuation). (D) is in a big hit game with high accuracy, short time, and no big hit. Even during the big hit game, the total number of acquired balls is displayed and added. Although the timer is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 during the big hit, it may be displayed with the timer stopped.

(E) is a big hit game with high accuracy, short time, and no big hit, and is a continuation of (D). When the total number of acquired balls reaches a predetermined number of balls, the effect display device 1600 displays the arrival. There are a plurality of stages in the predetermined number of balls, and for example, the arrival display is performed every time the total number of acquired balls increases by 1000. Therefore, in (E), the display of "1000 PT breakthrough !!" indicating that 1000 shots have been reached is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition to the arrival display, a predetermined light may be output from various lamps, a predetermined sound may be output from various speakers, or the BGM may be changed. In addition, for example, after the total number of acquired balls reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, 30,000 shots), the arrival display may not be performed.

For example, the difference between the plurality of stages may be constant or different. Specifically, for example, the difference between the plurality of stages may be constant such as 1000 shots, 2000 shots, 3000 shots, ..., 1000 shots, 5000 shots, 10000 shots, ... It may be set so that the difference from the previous stage becomes larger as it goes to the later stage such as 20000 shots, ...

(F) is a state immediately before the end of the big hit game of high accuracy, short time and no big hit. (G) is a state immediately after the end of the big hit game of high accuracy, short time, and no big hit. A display indicating that the high-accuracy non-time saving state, that is, the small hit rush is restarted, is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, in (G), there is an acquired ball number history display area in the upper center of the effect display device 1600. In the acquired ball number history display area, the history of the total number of balls acquired by one big hit and the number of balls acquired in the small hit rush won by the big hit is displayed. In (G), since 2910 balls were obtained in the big hit and the small hit rush immediately before, "2910" is displayed in the acquired ball number history display area.

(H) is a state in which the total number of acquired balls reaches 5,000 during the small hit rush. When the total number of acquired balls reaches a predetermined number of balls, the background image on the effect display device 1600 changes. The predetermined number of balls has a plurality of stages. For example, the background image changes every time the total number of acquired balls increases by 5,000. In addition, along with the change of the background image, a predetermined light may be output from various lamps, a predetermined sound may be output from various speakers, or the BGM after the change of the background image may be changed. For example, after the total number of acquired balls reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, 30,000 shots), the background image may not be changed.

In the example of FIG. 517, the arrival display of the total number of acquired balls is performed every 1000 shots, and the background image is changed every 5000 shots. Therefore, the total number of acquired balls is 5000 shots, 10000 shots, 15000 shots, and so on. When the arrival is reached, both the arrival display and the change of the background image are executed (in this example, the arrival display is always performed at the timing when the background image changes).

The arrival display and the change of the background image in the effect display device 1600 are executed in order according to a predetermined priority, for example. For example, since the change of the background image is executed less frequently than the arrival display, the change of the background image can give the player a stronger uplifting feeling than the arrival display. The timing of giving a stronger uplifting feeling to the player differs depending on whether the change of the background image is executed first or later.

The arrival display and the change of the background image may be executed at the same time. By simultaneously executing the arrival display and the change of the background image, a synergistic effect can be obtained, and a stronger uplifting feeling can be given to the player than when these effects are executed alone. The same applies to the output of light and sound that is executed at the same time as the arrival display and the change of the background image.

(I) is the state at the end of the time-saving big hit fluctuation. Since the rush rush chance is produced after the jackpot ends, it is desirable not to be notified at this point whether the time-saving jackpot is a high-probability time-shortening jackpot or a low-probability time-shortening jackpot.

(J) is a state at the end of the jackpot fluctuation with a time reduction, and is a continuation state of (I). The total number of acquired balls, the cumulative time of the timer, and the effect display device 1600 at the end of the jackpot fluctuation are displayed as a result. The reason why the result is displayed at that timing is that by winning the time-saving big hit, it is not always possible to shift to the high-probability non-time-saving state (small hit rush) again without falling into the low-probability non-time-saving state. Is.

(K) is a state in which the big hit with a short time is completed. (L) is a state in which the rush rush chance has started. (M) is a state in which the final fluctuation of the rush rush chance (final fluctuation in the time saving state) is changing, and the effect of destroying the rock is being executed. (N) is a state at the end of the final fluctuation, and is a state in which it is notified that the state will shift to the high-accuracy non-time saving state. (K), (L), (M), and (N) are the same as those in FIGS. 514 (A), 514 (B), 515 (P), and 515 (Q), respectively, and are therefore detailed. The explanation is omitted.

(O) is a changing state of the high-accuracy non-time saving state. When it is possible to return to the high-probability non-time-saving state again without falling into the low-probability non-time-saving state, for example, the display of each display area is as follows. The timer display in the timer display area inherits the value at the end of the immediately preceding high-accuracy non-time-saving state. In addition, the total number of acquired balls in the total number of acquired balls display area is the value obtained by adding the number of balls obtained in the immediately preceding time-saving big hit to the value at the end of the immediately preceding high-accuracy non-time-saving state. To. Further, in the background image, an image corresponding to the total number of acquired balls is displayed. Further, in the acquired ball number history display area, the history of the total number of balls acquired by the immediately preceding time-saving big hit and the number of balls acquired in the small hit rush won by the time-saving big hit is further displayed. These histories are displayed, for example, for the last 10 jackpots won without falling into a low-probability non-time saving state.

As a result, if it is possible to return to the high-accuracy non-time-saving state again without falling into the low-accuracy non-time-saving state, it is possible to display the inheritance of the previous state, and the player straddles the low-accuracy non-time-saving state. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of balls that can be obtained without losing money. In addition, if the total number of acquired balls and the timer are reset every time the high-accuracy non-time saving state ends, it is less likely that these displays will become large values, and the player will be uplifted. Since it is not possible to give a feeling, the display content is as described above.

As described above, the total value of the winning balls during one big hit game and the winning balls in the highly accurate non-time saving state (small hit rush) immediately before the big hit game is displayed in the acquired ball number history display area. Therefore, it is possible to show a numerical value larger than the expected value of the acquired balls per big hit game by using the acquired ball number history display area, so that an uplifting feeling can be given. Further, for example, the display mode may be different depending on the value displayed in the acquired ball number history display area. Specifically, if it is less than 5000, it is a blue number, if it is 5000 or more and less than 10000, it is a red number, and if it exceeds 10000, it is a rainbow-colored number. Further, although it is assumed that the latest 10 times are displayed, the total value of 1 to 10 times may be displayed after the 11th time.

[12-4. Production during big hit]
The production during the big hit will be described below. For example, every time a high-accuracy time-saving no-big hit is won without falling into a low-accuracy non-time-saving state, a song that can be played during the high-accuracy time-saving no-big hit is added. For example, only music A can be selected in the first high-accuracy time-shortening no-big hit, and music B can be further selected in the second high-accuracy time-saving no-big hit. Yes, music C can be further selected in the third high-accuracy time-shortening jackpot, and music D can be further selected in the fourth and subsequent high-accuracy time-shortening jackpots.

In the second and subsequent high-accuracy time-shortening non-big hits, the player can select the music to be played from the selectable music by executing the operation by the predetermined operation unit. When the player does not select a song, for example, the song A is won in the first high-accuracy time-shortening no-big hit, and the song is in the second high-accuracy time-saving no-big hit. It is assumed that B plays music C in the third high-accuracy time-shortening jackpot, and music D plays in the fourth and subsequent high-accuracy time-saving jackpots.

Further, the music that was played during the high-accuracy time-shortening no-big hit may continue to be played even during the high-accuracy non-time-saving state that shifts after the end of the high-accuracy time-saving no-big hit. Further, even in the high-accuracy non-time saving state, the music may be selectable by the operation of a predetermined operation unit by the player.

FIG. 519 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect during a high-accuracy time-shortening no-big hit. Specifically, a production in which all songs can be selected by inputting a predetermined command (hidden command) during a high-accuracy time-saving no-big hit will be described.

(A) is a state in which the second high-accuracy time-saving no-big hit, which was won without falling into the low-accuracy time-saving state, has started. (B) is a state in which the first round of the high-accuracy time-shortening no-big hit is being executed. A music selection box and an image explaining a music selection operation are displayed on the effect display device 1600. Since it is the second high-accuracy time-saving no-big hit that was won without falling into the low-accuracy non-time-saving state, music A and music B can be selected, and the music is in a state where the input of the operation unit by the user is not accepted. B is selected.

These images are displayed, for example, when the peripheral control MPU receives the first round start command from the main control MPU. Further, for example, at the same timing, the operation acceptance period of the operation unit for executing the music selection operation starts. The operation acceptance period ends, for example, when the peripheral control MPU receives the round end command of the final round from the main control MPU.

In the example of FIG. 519, by operating the rotation operation unit 302, the cursor for selecting the music A and the music B moves, and by pressing the center pressing operation unit 303a, the music currently playing is moved to the cursor. It changes to the song pointed to by.

Further, the operation acceptance period of the hidden command starts when, for example, the peripheral control MPU receives the first round start command from the main control MPU, and ends when the second round end command is received. .. (C) is a state after the hidden command is input in (B). All songs (songs A to D) can be selected.

The hidden command is, for example, a command for long-pressing (for example, pressing for 3 seconds or longer) the center pressing operation unit 303a. As described above, the operation acceptance period of the hidden command overlaps with the operation acceptance period of the music selection.

In the music selection, in the peripheral control MPU, the central pressing operation unit 303a changed from the pressed state to the non-pressed state, and the pressed state was not long-pressed (in the above example, the pressed state did not continue for 3 seconds or more). ) If so, perform the song determination.

If the central pressing operation unit 303a changes from the pressed state to the non-pressed state and decides a musical piece, the player decides the musical piece even though he intended to execute the hidden command. There is a risk that the pressing will not be continued until the long press state, which is a hidden command, because the operation of is mistaken. Further, if the music is determined when the central pressing operation unit 303a is in the long-pressed state and the music is changed from the pressed state to the non-pressed state, the music is always executed when the hidden command is executed. As the decision is made, it can be offensive to the player. Therefore, when the above-mentioned conditions are satisfied, the determination of the music is executed.

In addition, for example, in the operation for notifying the winning result of the effect during reach and the determination operation on the character selection screen or the like described later, when the central pressing operation unit 303a changes from the pressed state to the non-pressed state in this way. , It may be determined that the central pressing operation unit 303a has been operated.

[13. Demo screen production]
[13-1. Normal demo screen production]
Hereinafter, an example of the production of the demo screen when the fluctuation is not executed will be described. FIG. 520 is an example of a timetable of the demo screen. In the timetable, the display content on the effect display device 1600, the display time of the display content, whether or not the volume control jog can be accepted, whether or not the volume light amount adjustment jog can be accepted, whether or not BGM is flowing, and a predetermined movable body (role) In this chapter, it is defined whether or not the back-rear movable decorative body (3110) is in a falling state.

In a state where the volume adjustment jog reception is possible, for example, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302, an image showing the volume output from the pachinko machine 1 is displayed, and the volume can be adjusted. In a state where the volume light amount adjustment jog reception is possible, for example, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302, an image showing one of the volume and the amount of light can be displayed, and the one can be adjusted, and the image is displayed. When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in this state, an image showing the other of the volume or the amount of light is displayed, and the other can be adjusted.

Further, as described above, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is a decorative body that can be moved in the vertical direction. The back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is located at the above-mentioned retracted position above the game board 5 or at the above-mentioned appearance position at the center of the game board 5, depending on the effect state.

The specific flow of the production on the demo screen will be described below. First, fluctuations or jackpots are being executed (NO1). At the end of fluctuation or jackpot, the decorative symbol stops on the effect display device 1600 (NO2). After that, if there is no suspension of fluctuation, the fixed decorative symbol is kept in a stopped state (NO3). In all of NO1 to NO3, the volume control jog reception is possible, the volume light amount adjustment jog reception is not possible, the variable BGM is flowing, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is not in the falling state, that is, in the retracted position. However, in NO1, there may be a prohibited section in which the reception of volume control jog is prohibited, such as during a predetermined reach production or during a predetermined round of big hits.

Subsequently, a predetermined image is displayed (NO4-1). Subsequently, a telop image (also referred to as a volume light amount adjustment telop) indicating that the transition to the volume light amount adjustment screen is possible while the predetermined image is displayed, and a character for determining the effect state during the subsequent fluctuation. A telop image (also referred to as a character selection telop) indicating that the transition to the selection screen is possible is displayed (NO4-2).

For example, the video reproduced in NO4-1 and NO4-2 is a video for 30 seconds, and is loop-played between NO4-1 and NO4-2. In both NO4-1 and NO4-2, the volume control jog cannot be accepted, the volume light amount adjustment jog can be accepted, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the retracted position. However, although BGM is flowing in NO4-1, the BGM fades out from the start of NO4-2 (the volume becomes low and then stops).

Next, the model demo movie of pachinko machine 1 is displayed (NO5), then the maker logo is displayed (NO6), then the jog button caution movie is displayed (NO7), and then the demo screen common to all manufacturers (Goto). Action prevention movie) is displayed (NO8).

Further, after that, the volume light amount adjusting telop and the character selection telop are displayed while the predetermined image is displayed (NO9). The display content of NO9 is the same as that of NO4-2. After the display content of NO9 is displayed, the process returns to NO5. In NO5 to NO9, volume control jog reception is not possible, volume light amount adjustment jog reception is possible, and BGM is not playing.

Hereinafter, the operation of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 will be described. At the start of the model demo movie in NO5, the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 moves downward and falls into a falling state, that is, in the appearance position. After that, in NO6 to NO9, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 maintains the appearance position. In NO9, when shifting to the volume light amount adjustment screen or the character selection screen, the rear-rear movable decorative body 3110 may be moved to the retracted position in order to make the effect display device 1600 easier to see. In this case, for example, when the display of the volume light amount adjustment screen or the character selection screen is completed, the back-back movable decoration body 3110 is moved to the appearance position again.

In NO5 to NO9, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, which is not located in the retracted position, moves to the retracted position when the game ball B enters the starting port (first starting port 2002 or second starting port 2004). In NO5, when the game ball B enters the start port while the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is falling from the retracted position to the appearance position, for example, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is detected at the timing when the entry is detected. To raise. As a result, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be quickly moved to the evacuation position at the same time as the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the ball entry, and the visual recognition of the effect using the effect display device 1600 of the change can be prevented as much as possible. I'm done.

Further, in NO5, when the game ball B enters the starting port while the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is falling from the evacuation position to the appearance position, the back-rear movable decoration 3110 is once dropped to the appearance position. It may be raised after being made to rise. This is because some players mistakenly think that the back-back movable decorative body 3110, which is descending, suddenly starts to rise at the same time as the ball enters, as a production with high expectation for a big hit.

Further, the operation of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 may be determined according to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation executed by the ball entering. For example, a variation pattern in which the effect of lowering the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 at the start of variation will be described. In NO5 to NO9, a fluctuation pattern is selected in which the game ball B enters while the back-rear movable decoration 3110 is located at the appearance position, and the back-rear movable decoration 3110 is lowered at the start of the fluctuation. It shall be assumed that it was done.

In this case, for example, at the same time as entering the ball, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is once raised to a retracted position or a predetermined position higher than the maximum descending position of the descending effect, and then the descending effect is executed. When the descending effect is an effect with a high expectation of a big hit, it is desirable to execute the descending effect without canceling it (that is, to cause the descending effect to be delayed). Further, for example, instead of the descending effect, a specific irregular effect (for example, light emission of a predetermined lamp attached to the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 or output of a predetermined sound from the speaker) may be performed. The back-rear movable decorative body 3110 may be raised to the retracted position while performing a specific irregular effect.

Further, for example, instead of the descending effect, a specific irregular operation of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 (for example, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is reciprocated up and down a predetermined number of times with a predetermined amplitude) may be performed. Good. Even if the descending effect is an effect with a high expectation of a big hit, the player can be given a sense of expectation by executing these irregular processes instead of the descending effect. Further, in the first place, when the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is not in the retracted position in NO5 to NO9, the effect of lowering the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 at the start of the fluctuation is executed (the lowering effect is executed at the start of the fluctuation). The selection of the effect pattern) may be prohibited. Further, although the selection of the fluctuation pattern is not prohibited (there is a possibility that the descending effect is produced), the descending effect may not be executed when the variation pattern is selected. By doing so, even if the descending effect is not executed, the player can be made to think that the descending effect may have been selected.

Further, in NO5, a fluctuation pattern in which the game ball B enters the start port while the back-rear movable decoration 3110 is moving to the appearance position, and the back-rear movable decoration 3110 is lowered at the start of the fluctuation. The same applies when is selected.

Specifically, in this case, for example, at the same time as entering the ball, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is once raised to a retracted position or a predetermined position higher than the maximum descending position of the descending effect, and then the descending effect is performed. Execute. In addition, before the ascending, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 may be moved to the appearance position once (that is, the effect of descending may be delayed and generated). Further, for example, instead of the descending effect, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 may be raised while performing a specific irregular effect. Before the ascent, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 may be moved to the appearance position once. Further, in such a case, the selection of the fluctuation pattern (the effect pattern in which the descending effect is executed at the start of the fluctuation) may be prohibited.

Further, in NO5 to NO9, when the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is located below the retracted position, the game ball B enters the starting port, and when the fluctuation starts, another movable body (back-rear movable decorative body 3110) It is assumed that a variable pattern in which the effect of moving the back-back movable decorative body 3110 to the movable range of the movable decorative body 3110 is executed is selected at the time of entering the ball. In this case, for example, the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is moved to the retracted position first, and then the other movable body is moved to avoid interference between the movable bodies. Further, when the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the appearance position and the other movable body (movable body different from the back-rear movable decoration body 3110) operates, it does not interfere with the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 in the appearance position. The other movable body is operated while the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is in the appearance position, and after the other movable body returns to the initial position, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is moved to the evacuation position. You may. In such a case, the movement of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 to the retracted position and the movement of the movable body different from the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 may be performed at the same time.

Further, for example, in the variable pattern (effect pattern), the other movable body (movable body different from the back-rear movable decorative body 3110) may not be operated. At this time, the above-mentioned irregular effect or irregular operation may be performed on the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 or the other movable body. Further, in such a case, the selection of the variation pattern (effect pattern) in which the effect of moving the other movable body to the movable range of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 at the start of the variation may be prohibited.

When the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the appearance position, a part of the effect display device 1600 is hidden. Therefore, some players feel that the visual state of the image displayed on the effect display device 1600 in NO5 to NO9 is not good, and such a player wants to see the image in a good visual state.

For such a player, the game ball B enters the start port (when the game ball B enters the start port, the fluctuation starts and these images (for example, the model demo movie shown in FIG. 520 is stopped). The back-rear movable decorative body 3110 may be raised to the retracted position by an opportunity other than (because the time image, etc.) ends. As a specific trigger, for example, there is an operation of a predetermined operation unit (for example, an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b).

If the game ball B wins a prize in the start opening while the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is rising to the evacuation position due to an opportunity other than the game ball B entering the start opening, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 is movable. For example, the decorative body 3110 continues the ascending operation as it is and returns to the retracted position. Further, while the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is rising to the evacuation position, the game ball B wins a prize at the starting port, and the effect pattern determined based on the prize descends the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. In the case of an effect pattern for causing the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 to be moved, the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 may be continuously raised and returned to the evacuation position, and then the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 may be lowered. The descending effect may be executed even during the ascending of 3110. Further, if the game ball B wins a prize in the start port in a state where the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 has returned to the evacuation position due to an opportunity other than the game ball B entering the start port, for example, as it is. Maintain the retracted position.

The decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is in the appearance position (the symbol in which the decorative symbol of NO2 is also shown in the stopped image of NO9) is, for example, at the end of fluctuation (NO2). It may be displayed in a reduced state as compared with the symbol shown by), or it may be displayed in the same size. When the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced size, the display size of the decorative symbol is changed, for example, at the start of descent of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 at NO5, at the end of descent, or at the time of displaying the confirmed symbol of NO3. .. Further, when the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed, it is preferable to display it in an area that does not overlap with the moving range of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, but even when the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed, it is displayed in the moving range of the back-back movable decorative body 3110. They may overlap.

In NO5 to NO9, an example in which the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is located in front of the effect display device 1600 has been described, but in place of or in addition to the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, another movable body is an effect display device. It may be located in front of the 1600. However, when a plurality of movable bodies are located in front of the effect display device 1600, it is desirable to use a plurality of movable bodies whose positions after movement do not overlap (contact). Further, in NO5 to NO9, since the image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the movable body whose image cannot be visually recognized is not moved. In particular, it is desirable not to obscure the explanation to the player such as the volume light amount adjustment telop. Even if the movable body has a position after the movement that overlaps with the position where such an explanation is displayed, it is moved to the front surface of the effect display device 1600 once in NO5, and when such an explanation is displayed, the movable body is concerned. The movable body may be returned to its original position. Further, the position and size of the explanation display for the player such as the volume light amount adjusting telop may be changed according to the position of the movable body.

[13-2. Another example of volume control method]
Hereinafter, another example of the volume control method will be described. FIG. 521 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of screen transition of volume control. (A) is a state in which the decorative symbol determined after the fluctuation is stopped is stopped, that is, the state of NO3 in FIG. 520. (B) is a state in which the loop image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, that is, the state of NO4-1 in FIG. 520.

(C) is a state in which the loop image and the character selection telop are displayed on the effect display device 1600. It differs from NO4-2 in FIG. 520 in that the volume light amount adjustment telop is not displayed. When the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the state of (C), the screen transitions to the character selection screen. In the example of FIG. 521, the volume is adjusted (adjustment and setting of the output sound output from various speakers, and the subsequent volume adjustment has the same meaning only after passing through the character selection screen, so the parentheses are used. It differs from the example of FIG. 520 in that it cannot be omitted).

(D) is a state in which the character selection screen is displayed on the effect display device 1600 by pressing the central pressing operation unit 303a in the state of (C). A character can be selected by rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and the selected character can be selected by pressing the center pressing operation unit 303a.

The character selected here appears on the effect display device 1600 at the time of a predetermined effect, and performs a predetermined serif effect or performs a predetermined operation. That is, the subsequent production mode changes depending on the selected character. In addition, the effect content (for example, the above-mentioned lines and actions) when the character appears differs depending on the selected character. Further, for example, the volume of dialogue at the time of production differs for each character. Also, for example, the BGM differs depending on the selected character.

(E) is a state in which the character is determined by pressing the central pressing operation unit 303a in the state of (D). At the time of character determination, for example, the dialogue by the character is output from the speaker. The dialogue is output at a volume similar to, for example, the dialogue production of the character performed during fluctuations and the like.

For example, many players feel that the dialogue effect by character A is noisy even at volume 3 (5 levels of volume (1 is the minimum volume, 5 is the maximum volume)), and the dialogue effect by character B is not noisy even at volume 5. Many players feel it. By enabling the volume control to be executed after actually listening to the dialogue of the character at the time of determining the character in this way, the player can select an appropriate volume for himself / herself.

(F) is a state after character selection. After the character is selected, the character selection screen is erased, and a display different from the volume control screen, such as the loop image described above, is displayed. The reason for displaying such a screen before the transition to the volume control screen is possible is to prevent the player from making the volume control a mere task.

Specifically, for example, it is assumed that the character A having a loud dialogue effect is selected on the character selection screen. At this time, if the screen shifts to the volume control screen immediately after the character A is selected, the player does not think about anything and only reduces the volume. On the other hand, by temporarily displaying a display different from the volume control as described above, the consciousness is separated from the character selected by the player, so that some players forget the character selected by the time the volume control can be performed. There is. Since the player turns down the volume while remembering that he has selected character A, when the dialogue of character A appears after that, he feels reassured by reconfirming that the character he selected was character A. And delight can be obtained.

In (G), a loop image, a character selection telop, and a volume light amount adjustment telop are displayed on the effect display device 1600. (H) is a state in which the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the state of (G) and the screen shifts to the volume light amount adjustment screen. By rotating the rotation operation unit 302, the volume changes, and by pressing the center pressing operation unit 303a, the screen shifts to the light amount adjustment screen. Although not shown, in the light amount adjustment screen, the light amount is changed by rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and the volume adjustment screen is displayed by pressing the central pressing operation unit 303a.

(I) is a state in which the loop image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 again. For example, on the volume control screen or the light amount control screen, the loop image is returned to the state where a predetermined time elapses after the last operation of the rotation operation unit 302 or the center pressing operation unit 303a.

When the fluctuation starts while the volume control screen is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the volume control can be continuously executed, and the image for performing the volume control shows the visibility of the effect during the change. It should be possible to continuously display in a manner that does not significantly interfere. This makes it possible to adjust the volume while checking the actual volume during fluctuations.

In addition, although the example that the volume light amount adjustment screen cannot be shifted to without passing through the character selection screen has been described, the screen shifts to the volume light amount adjustment screen when a specific condition is not satisfied in addition to or instead of passing through the character selection screen. You may not be able to. The specific conditions include, for example, the entry of the game ball B into the general winning opening where the prize ball is obtained at the time of entry, the passage of a predetermined time, and the like (or a combination thereof).

The predetermined time may be lengthened or shortened depending on, for example, the operating status of the operating means that can be operated by the player. Further, when the condition that the volume (output sound) can be changed is satisfied, the volume (output sound) may be changed thereafter without going through the character selection screen. Further, the changed volume (output sound) may end at the end of a specific number of fluctuations. In the fluctuating specific effect, the effect may proceed at a volume (output sound) peculiar to the specific effect instead of the selected volume (output sound). Further, the number of sound patterns that can be selected on the volume control screen may be increased by performing a predetermined operation on the predetermined operation unit after the character is selected and before the transition to the volume control screen (. For example, when the predetermined operation is not executed, 5 levels of volume (output sound) can be selected, but when the predetermined operation is executed, 10 levels of volume (output sound) can be selected. etc).

[14. Upstart production]
The upstart production will be described below. The upstart effect is one of the effects performed during the SP reach (a special effect, and the SP reach described below also corresponds to a special effect). The SP reach is a reach effect that is easier to be selected in the jackpot fluctuation and less likely to be selected in the missed fluctuation than the normal reach effect. That is, the SP reach is a reach effect with a high expectation of a big hit as compared with a normal reach effect. In the upstart effect, a display indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and when the line "Ka-ra-no-" described later is displayed, the effect display device 1600 is displayed after the line is displayed. The jackpot expectation displayed in is promoted.

FIG. 522 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an upstart effect. (A) is a state in which the upstart effect is started during the SP reach. For example, the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a blurred state. Subsequently, in (B), the background color of the image of the center pressing operation unit 303a in the effect display device 1600 changes. The background color after the change shall be blue or red. Further, the higher the jackpot expectation of the fluctuation, the easier it is that red is selected as the background color after the change rather than blue.

Subsequently, in (C), the effect display device 1600 displays the line "Ka-ra-no-", and the image and background color of the center pressing operation unit 303a are erased. In (C), the image and the background color of the center pressing operation unit 303a may be continuously displayed. When the line is displayed, the jackpot expectation is promoted thereafter. Subsequently, in (D), the dialogue is erased from the effect display device 1600, and the image of the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed again in a blurred state. For example, the background color of the image of the center pressing operation unit 303a is promoted from blue to red at the timing when the dialogue is erased from the effect display device 1600.

Subsequently, in (E), the blurred image and background color of the center pressing operation unit 303a are erased, and the large image (red large push display) of the red center pressing operation unit 303a is clearly displayed in the effect display device. It is displayed on the 1600 and prompts to press the central pressing operation unit 303a. The image of the center pressing operation unit 303a displayed at this point includes, for example, a small blue image (small blue push display), a large blue image (large blue push display), and a large red image (large red). There is a large rainbow-colored image (rainbow-sized push display). It is assumed that the big hit expectation is higher in the order of blue small push display, blue large push display, red large push display, and rainbow large push display, and the rainbow large push display is selected only for the big hit fluctuation.

In the state (E), when the central pressing operation unit 303a is in the operation enabled state and the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the operation enabled state, it is notified whether the fluctuation during execution is a jackpot fluctuation or a missed fluctuation. Will be done. In (F), it is announced that the fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation.

It should be noted that, in (A), the effect from the blurry image of the central pressing operation unit 303a to just before the clear image of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed in (E) is displayed. Also referred to as a button display effect, the effect from the display of a clear image of the center pressing operation unit 303a to the end of the display of the image is also referred to.

FIG. 523 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the upstart effect. In the example of FIG. 522, the line "Ka-ra-no-" was displayed in the fanning effect, and the background color in the fanning effect was promoted. However, in the example of FIG. 523, in the button display effect, "ka-ra-no-" was displayed. The line "No ~" is displayed, and the button image in the button display effect is promoted.

(A) and (B) are the same as those in FIGS. 522 (A) and 522 (B), respectively, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. Subsequently, in (C), the blurred image and background color of the central pressing operation unit 303a are erased, and the large blue push image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a clear state, and the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed. You are urged to do so.

Subsequently, in (D), the effect display device 1600 displays the line "Ka-ra-no-" so as to overlap the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a. In (D), the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the display prompting the pressing may be deleted in order to concentrate the player's consciousness on the line "ka-ra-no-". Subsequently, in (E), the dialogue "ka-ra-no-" is erased from the effect display device 1600, and the blue large push image is promoted to the red large push image at the timing when the dialogue is erased. .. Since (F) is the same as FIG. 522 (F), the description thereof will be omitted.

When the promotion effect is performed during the button display effect, the operation of the center press operation unit 303a is effective during the period from the display of the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a to the appearance of the promotion effect in the button display effect. It may be invalid or it may be invalid. Since the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is effective during this period, it is possible to satisfy the player who wants to know the winning result quickly. Further, since the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is invalid during the period, the player who wants to enjoy the effect to the end can be satisfied, and the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed. If the operation is invalid, it is confirmed that the promotion effect is performed, and the player can feel an uplifting feeling.

In this way, even though the image of the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed, if the operation is invalid, the button display is used to prevent the promotion effect from being confirmed. Regardless of whether or not the promotion effect is performed during the effect, the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a may be enabled for a predetermined time after the button display effect starts.

In addition, in the upstart effect, there may be a pattern in which the fanning effect is not executed and only the button display effect is executed. The type of image of the central pressing operation unit 303a that can be displayed in the button display effect may be different depending on whether the fanning effect is executed or only the button display effect is executed without executing the fanning effect. ..

Specifically, for example, in the pattern in which the fanning effect is executed, only the blue large push, the red large push, and the rainbow large push can be displayed in the button display effect, but in the pattern in which the fanning effect is not executed, blue. Suppose a small push, a large blue push, a large red push, and a large rainbow push can be displayed. As a result, the expectation of a big hit is higher in the pattern in which the fanning effect is executed than in the pattern in which the fanning effect is not executed.

Further, in such a case, it is desirable that the pattern in which the fanning effect is executed has a higher frequency of appearance than the pattern in which the fanning effect is not executed and only the button display effect is executed. This is because, as described above, the pattern in which the fanning effect is executed has a higher expectation of a big hit. Further, for example, in the pattern in which the fanning effect is not executed, the BGM is played in the button display effect, but in the pattern in which the fanning effect is executed, the BGM is played in the fanning effect, but the BGM is stopped in the button display effect and there is no sound. It is desirable to put it in a state. As a result, it is possible to produce a feeling of tension in the button display effect in the pattern in which the fanning effect with high expectation of big hit is executed.

Further, for example, in a pattern in which the fanning effect is executed only when the fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation, and the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed during the effective period of the center pressing operation unit 303a in the button display effect. A pattern in which the effect of vibrating the vibration speaker 354 is executed may be executed.

FIG. 524 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing at which the promotion effect in the upstart effect is performed. The promotion effect can be performed, for example, at any of the timings 1 to 7 shown in FIG. 524. The timing 1 is immediately after the start of the fanning effect (for example, the timing of FIG. 522 (A) or the timing immediately after the start of (B)). At timing 1, the player cannot recognize or slightly recognizes the first background color in the fanning effect. Therefore, when the promotion effect is performed at timing 1, the player who has little recognition of the background color Can give a sense of surprise.

The timing 2 is a timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fanning effect (for example, the timing shown in FIG. 522 (C)). At timing 2, the player is completely aware of the first background color in the fanning effect, so for example, if the background color is blue, the player is disappointed, but the promotion effect is performed at timing 2. This can eliminate this disappointment.

The timing 3 is at the same time as the start of the button display effect (for example, the timing at the start of FIG. 523 (C)). In the example of FIG. 524, it is assumed that the valid period of the central pressing operation unit 303a ends at the same time as the end of the button display effect.

At timing 3, the player cannot recognize the type of the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a displayed in the button display effect. Therefore, when the promotion effect is performed at timing 3, the player is given a sense of surprise. Can be done. Further, when the promotion effect is performed at timing 3, the player has not yet recognized the type of the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a, but at least in the image with the lowest expectation of big hit (blue small push). Since it is confirmed that there is no such thing, an uplifting feeling can be obtained.

The timing 4 is immediately after the start of the button display effect (for example, the timing immediately after the start of FIG. 523 (C)). Specifically, the timing 4 is a difficult timing, although the central pressing operation unit 303a can be operated by the player, for example, after 0.008 seconds have elapsed from the start of the button display effect. At the timing 4, the player is not aware of the type of the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a displayed in the button display effect, so that when the promotion effect occurs, the player can be given a sense of surprise.

Further, for the player who knows that the promotion effect may occur at the timing 4, for example, the valid period starts by repeatedly hitting the center pressing operation unit 303a before the start of the button display effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide another game property, such as whether the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a can be executed before the promotion effect.

The timing 5 is a timing after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the button display effect (however, the first half of the valid period of the central pressing operation unit 303a). At timing 5, the player can completely recognize the type of image of the central pressing operation unit 303a. Therefore, for example, if the image is a small blue push, the player is disappointed, but at timing 5, the promotion effect is produced. This disappointment can be resolved by performing.

The timing 6 is a timing after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the button display effect (however, the latter half of the valid period of the central pressing operation unit 303a). At timing 6, since a considerable amount of time has passed since the image of the central pressing operation unit 303a was displayed, the promotion effect can be shown to the player who has given up the appearance of the promotion effect halfway. Therefore, a feeling of surprise can be provided.

Timing 7 is immediately before the end of the button display effect. By executing the promotion effect at the timing 7, for example, even if the center pressing operation unit 303a is prompted to be pressed, the promotion effect can be shown to a player who does not intend to operate the center pressing operation unit 303a. .. Further, for example, if the valid period of the central pressing operation unit 303a does not start until the promotion effect occurs even if the button display effect starts, the promotion effect is executed at timing 6 or timing 7 to freeze. It is possible to realize a production like a production, and it is possible to give the player a strong sense of expectation.

When the promotion effect is executed after the button display effect is started, the pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a may be used as an opportunity to execute the promotion effect. Specifically, for example, from the start of the button display effect to the timing of the promotion effect (for example, any of timings 4 to 7), the image of the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed, but the operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a is invalid. It is said that. Then, at the timing of the promotion effect, the valid period of the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a starts.

If the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed within the valid period, the promotion effect is generated, and the operation is invalid during the promotion effect. Then, the button image after promotion is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the operation valid period starts again. When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed during the operation valid period, the winning result in the fluctuation is notified.

Further, for example, although the valid period of the central pressing operation unit 303a starts at the start of the button display effect, the central pressing is performed between the start of the button display effect and the timing of the promotion effect (for example, any of timings 4 to 7). When the operation unit 303a is pressed, a promotion effect may occur. After that, when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed during the valid period after the promoted button image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the winning result in the fluctuation is notified. It is desirable that the pattern for performing the promotion effect after the start of the button display effect is selected only when the jackpot fluctuates (that is, the pattern for determining the jackpot). If the pattern is selected in the out-of-order fluctuation, the player operates the central pressing operation unit 303a with the expectation that the winning result will be announced by the button effect, but unexpected development (whether or not it is a big hit). This is because there is a risk that it will become a shoulder-opening due to the fact that it is a development that is not announced.

Further, for example, although the valid period of the central pressing operation unit 303a starts at the start of the button display effect, the central pressing is performed between the start of the button display effect and the timing of the promotion effect (for example, any of timings 4 to 7). When the operation unit 303a is pressed, an effect that expects the occurrence of a promotion effect (for example, a dialogue effect such as "Don't be impatient! I'll be promoted soon!") May be executed. In such a case, the promotion effect is not performed at the timing when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed as described above, but the promotion effect is performed at the predetermined promotion timing.

Further, for example, when the promotion effect occurs after the button display effect is started, immediately after the line "ka-ra-no-" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the fanning effect is once again executed after the promotion, and then the promotion effect is executed again. The button display effect may be executed again. In this case, the promotion target by the promotion effect may be the background color that appeared in the previous fanning effect, the image of the center pressing operation unit 303a in the button display effect, or both. Good.

Specifically, for example, when the fanning effect ends with a blue background and "ka-ra-no-" is displayed after the blue small push display is displayed in the button display effect, then it is promoted to a red background. A button display effect in which a small blue push display is displayed may be performed. Specifically, for example, when the fanning effect ends with a blue background, and after the small blue push display is displayed in the button display effect, "ka-ra-no-" is displayed, then the blue background. The fanning effect of is performed again, and the button display effect in which the large red push display is displayed may be performed.

Further, in the above-described example, the promotion effect is performed only by one of the fanning effect and the button display effect, but the promotion effect may be executed by both of them. In addition, a plurality of promotion effects may be executed within one fanning effect and one button display effect. An example in which the background color changes as a fanning effect has been described, but in addition to the background color, it is displayed before the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed and overlaps with the area where the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed. There is no need to worry about the background color, such as changing the color of the effect (light gathering effect, etc.) displayed in.

[15. Hold notice production]
[15-1. Hold notice production due to hold color change]
In the present embodiment, the hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the hold number designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310, but the hold display is displayed until the hold display is exhausted. By changing the above, it is possible to execute a hold notice effect that suggests a jackpot expectation for a variable display of a decorative symbol (variable display of a special symbol) based on the hold display. In addition, during the display period of the hold display, it is possible to execute a hold change effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display may change.

Specifically, based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize (starting condition is satisfied) in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the hold number designation command and the pre-determination command are transmitted from the main control board 1310. .. Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the hold number designation command and the pre-determination command in the command analysis process of step S601, the hold notice determination table corresponding to those commands, that is, the hold number specified from the hold number designation command. Select the hold notice determination table corresponding to the (number of pending memories) and the advance judgment information (either big hit, small hit, reach loss, or loss) specified from the advance judgment command, and the judgment set in the hold notice decision table. By comparing the value with the read random number for determining the hold notice, the type of the hold notice pattern set in the hold notice determination table is determined.

In the hold notice determination table, the distribution of the judgment value for each hold notice pattern is different for each advance judgment information (either big hit, small hit, reach loss, or loss) specified from the advance judgment command, and each hold is made. The appearance rate of the notice pattern is different.

In addition, when a game ball wins a prize (starting condition is satisfied) in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the number of holds (number of hold memories) specified by the hold number designation command increases, so that the effect display is displayed. One hold display is added to and displayed on the device 1600. On the other hand, when the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) based on the hold display is started (the start condition is satisfied), the number of holds (the number of stored items) specified by the hold number specification command is reduced. , The hold display on the effect display device 1600 is erased. Then, during the display period from when the hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 until the hold display is erased, the display mode of the hold display is displayed based on the hold notice pattern, and the hold display and the hold display are displayed. Allows the display mode of the hold display to be changed each time the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) based on another hold display is started (the start condition is satisfied).

In the present embodiment, the hold display is deleted when the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) based on the hold display is started (the start condition is satisfied), but the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol is deleted. Even after the start of the variable display (variable display of the special symbol), the hold display may be continuously displayed and the display mode of the hold display may be changed. In such a case, before and after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) based on the hold display, the position where the hold display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 moves like other hold displays. It may be suggested that the display mode of the hold display may be changed by executing the hold change effect.

Next, a hold color determination table in which a plurality of types of hold color patterns are set for each hold number (hold storage number) specified from the hold number designation command will be described with reference to FIGS. 525, 526, and 527. To do. The hold notice determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 525 (A) is a hold color determination table used when the game ball B wins a prize at the start opening during no hold and non-execution of fluctuation. FIG. 525 (B) is a hold color determination table used when the game ball B wins a prize at the start opening during no hold and variable execution. FIG. 526 (C) is a hold color determination table used when the game ball B wins a prize at the start opening in a state where there is one hold. FIG. 527 (D) is a hold color determination table used when the game ball B wins a prize at the start opening in a state where there are two holds. FIG. 527 (E) is a hold color determination table used when the game ball B wins a prize at the start opening in a state where there are three holds. It is not necessary to use the pre-judgment command to determine the hold color when there is no hold and the variable is not being executed.

In the hold color determination table, a pattern indicating the hold color at the timing when the hold color can be changed, the distribution in the hit variation of the pattern, and the distribution in the out-of-order variation are defined. Note that the start of the 1st change is when the change starts in a state where the hold of the color change target according to the pattern is the first hold (that is, the change corresponding to the hold is executed in the next change). Is. Similarly, at the start of the holding 2 fluctuation, the fluctuation starts in a state where the hold of the color change target according to the pattern is the second hold (that is, the fluctuation corresponding to the hold is executed in the next fluctuation). It's time. Similarly, at the start of the 3rd change, the change is in a state where the hold of the color change target according to the pattern is the 3rd hold (that is, the change corresponding to the hold is executed 3 times ahead). It's time to start.

The peripheral control MPU changes the reserved color at each timing according to the color indicated by the pattern. It should be noted that the distribution in the reserved color determination table is predetermined so that the jackpot expectation is higher in the order of white, blue, green, red, and rainbow. In addition, the rainbow color is predetermined so that it is selected only when the jackpot fluctuates.

In addition, in each pattern of the reserved color determination table, the change to the reserved color with a low expectation of big hit is not performed. Specifically, for example, after the reserved color becomes blue, it does not return to white. If there is a possibility of changing to a reserved color with a low expectation of a big hit, even if the reserved color becomes a color with a high expectation, the player cannot obtain a sense of expectation.

In addition, the reserved color determination table has a pattern in which a plurality of stages of color promotion are executed. Specifically, for example, there is a pattern in which the reserved color is changed from white to red by skipping blue and green. Due to the existence of such a pattern, for example, at the final timing of the reserved color change, even if the color remains white, there is still a possibility that the color will change to a color with a high expectation of a big hit. You can maintain your expectations until the end.

Further, for example, the reserved color of blue or higher may be selected only in the reach variation, or the reserved color of red or higher may be selected only in the variation in which the SP reach is executed. In addition, when the fluctuation is suspended while the fluctuation during execution or pending includes the jackpot fluctuation, the peripheral control MPU forcibly sets the reserved color change pattern for the fluctuation to all white (that is, that is). You may decide on a pattern consisting of standard colors).

FIG. 528 is an example of the changing pending color determination table. In the variable hold color determination table, a pattern showing the hold color at the timing when the change hold color can change during the change execution, the distribution in the hit variation of the pattern, the distribution in the out-of-range variation, and the variation for each variation pattern It is defined for each reserved color at the start. That is, the peripheral control MPU determines the reserved color change pattern during fluctuation according to the reserved color at the start of fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation, and whether the fluctuation is a hit fluctuation or a missed fluctuation.

In the example of FIG. 528, three promotion timings are defined for each fluctuation pattern, but the number of promotion timings may be different for each fluctuation pattern. Further, the promotion timing itself may be different for each fluctuation pattern. For example, in the execution pattern in which the SP reach is changed, the promotion timing includes, for example, the time when the reach is established, the time when the SP reach is developed, and the time when the latter half of the SP reach is started. The jackpot expectation and change pattern of each reserved color are the same as those in the reserved color determination table.

FIG. 529 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a hold notice effect due to a hold color change. (A) is a state in which the fluctuation is not held and the fluctuation is being performed. (B) is a state in which the game ball B has entered the first starting port 2002 in a state where the fluctuation is being performed. In (B), the reserved color determination table of FIG. 525 (B) was referred to, and the reserved color at the time of winning and the start of fluctuation was determined to be green.

(C) is a state in which the fluctuation in (B) has been completed. (D) is a state in which the fluctuation corresponding to the green hold has started. (E) is a state in which the change has developed into a reach. In (E), the hold remains green. (F) is a state developed into SP reach in the fluctuation. In (F), the hold remains green. (G) is a state in which the latter half of the SP reach has started in the fluctuation. At the beginning of the second half of the SP reach, the hold turned red.

[15-2. Hold notice production due to change in gacha coin]
Up to this point, the hold notice effect due to the hold color change has been explained. Hereinafter, the hold notice effect due to the hold being displayed as a gacha coin and the hold being changed will be described. In the hold notice effect, for example, the hold is displayed in the form of coins (hereinafter referred to as gacha coins) at the time of winning, and the number of coins increases or coins different from the normal mode (hereinafter referred to as coins) at the timing when the hold moves. , Called a rare gacha coin).

Then, for example, at the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the hold, the effect display device 1600 executes the gacha-gacha as many times as the number of gacha coins and rare gacha coins, and obtains the same number of hold displays. Then, the hold display indicating the fluctuation currently being executed changes to the hold display of the color having the highest expectation of a big hit among the acquired hold displays. Not limited to the change of the hold display to the color with the highest expectation of big hit, the change to any of the displayed hold displays may be performed. Although the hold of gacha coins and rare gacha coins is displayed, the hold of gacha coins and rare gacha coins may be displayed without executing the gacha at the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the hold.

A gacha coin hold determination table in which a plurality of types of gacha coin hold patterns are set for each hold number (hold memory number) specified from the hold number designation command will be described with reference to FIGS. 530, 531 and 532. .. The gacha coin hold determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 530 (A) is a gacha coin hold determination table used when the game ball B wins a prize at the start opening during no hold and non-execution of fluctuation. FIG. 530 (B) is a gacha coin hold determination table used when the game ball B wins a prize at the start opening during no hold and variable execution. FIG. 531 (C) is a gacha coin hold determination table used when the game ball B wins a prize at the start opening in a state where there is one hold. FIG. 532 (D) is a gacha coin hold determination table used when the game ball B wins a prize at the start opening in a state where there are two holds. FIG. 532 (E) is a gacha coin hold determination table used when the game ball B wins a prize at the start opening in a state where there are three holds. It is not necessary to use the pre-judgment command to determine the gachacoin hold when there is no hold and the fluctuation is not executed.

Similar to the hold color determination table, the gacha coin hold determination table includes a pattern indicating the type and number of gacha coins at the timing when the hold color can be changed, distribution in the hit variation of the pattern, distribution in the out-of-range variation, and so on. Is defined.

The peripheral control MPU changes the type and number of gacha coins at each timing according to the type and number of gacha coins indicated by the pattern. In addition, the distribution in the gacha coin hold decision table is determined in advance so that the jackpot expectation is higher in the order of 1 gacha coin, 3 gacha coins, 5 gacha coins, 1 rare gacha coin, and 5 rare gacha coins. Has been done. In addition, even five rare gacha coins with the highest expectation of big hits may be selected by the out-of-order fluctuation.

As with the hold color determination table, in each pattern of the gacha coin hold decision table, the change to the gacha coin with a low jackpot expectation is not performed. Further, like the hold color determination table, the gacha coin hold determination table has a pattern in which promotion of gacha coins in a plurality of stages is executed. In addition, when the fluctuation is suspended while the fluctuation during execution or pending includes the jackpot fluctuation, the peripheral control MPU is forcibly displayed as a normal white hold instead of the gacha coin hold. You may do so.

In the illustrated gacha coin hold determination table, when the gacha coin hold is displayed, the gacha coin is always displayed from the time of winning, but for example, the normal white hold is displayed at the time of winning. , There may be a pattern in which the hold changes to a gacha hold by the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the hold. However, it is desirable that there is no pattern that changes to Gachacoin after the reserved color is promoted to blue or higher. This is because the reserved color may reduce the expected feeling of promotion.

FIG. 533 is an example of a gacha coin holding color correspondence table. In the gacha coin hold color correspondence table, the correspondence between the type and number of gacha coins at the start of fluctuation and the hold color with the highest expectation of big hit among the hold displays acquired by the gacha at the start of fluctuation, and the big hit fluctuation and loss The distribution in which the corresponding response is selected for each fluctuation is defined.

The Gachacoin hold color compatible table is stipulated so that there will be no situation in which only white hold display can be obtained even though Gachacoin has been used for gacha-gacha. This is because when such a situation occurs, the player cannot get a sense of expectation for the production in which the gacha is executed.

In addition, "coin" in the hold color column indicates that the gacha is not executed and the change is executed while the hold is displayed as gacha coin or rare gacha coin. In the gacha coin hold decision table, the jackpot expectation when the gacha is not executed is set low, but when there are 5 rare gacha coins, which is the mode with the highest jackpot expectation as shown in Fig. 533, the gacha is executed. If not, the jackpot may be set to be fixed.
In addition, the gacha coin hold color correspondence table does not have to include a pattern in which the gacha is not executed. That is, in this case, when the hold display of the gacha coin or the rare gacha coin appears, it always changes to the hold display having a jackpot expectation degree higher than the blue hold.

Regarding jackpot fluctuations, the distribution to "coins", which indicates that the gacha is not executed and the fluctuation is executed with the display of gacha coins or rare gacha coins, is 1 gacha coin and 3 gacha coins. Any of the coins, 5 gacha coins, 1 rare gacha coin, and 5 rare gacha coins is set lower than the rate at which the colored hold display changes (32 / for 1 coin). It remains a coin at 128, but changes to some color at 96/128). This is because the expectation is generally higher when the display is changed to the colored hold display, so that it is possible to prevent the coin from ending as a coin as much as possible.

The distribution indicated by the gacha coin hold color correspondence table determines the hold color with the highest expectation of a big hit for a plurality of hold displays acquired using a plurality of gacha coins or rare gacha coins. For example, the colors of the hold display other than the hold colors with high expectations are randomly determined.

Specifically, for example, if three coins have been acquired and it is decided to display red as the hold color, the hold color indicated by the remaining two coins is expected to exceed red. It means that it is randomly determined from "coins", "blue", "green", and "red" excluding the rainbow color that has. Also, it is not random, for example, "blue", "green", "red" is pattern 1, "green", "green", "red" is pattern 2, "blue", "red", "red" is pattern 3, and so on. A plurality of patterns may be provided for each number of coins and the final color, and the pattern may be determined from among them. In addition, when the hold color with the highest expectation of big hit is not decided (when one of the displayed hold colors is decided), for example, pattern 2 is more likely to be promoted to red than pattern 1. It is good to set.

In the gacha coin hold color correspondence table, all the hold display colors acquired by a plurality of gacha coins or rare gacha coins may be defined. In this case, even if the hold colors with the highest expectation of big hits are the same, it is preferable that the distribution is set so that the higher the number of hold displays having the hold colors, the higher the expectation of big hits (specifically). For example, using three gacha coins, obtains the hold display of "red, blue, white" and obtains the hold display of "red, red, red" rather than the case where the hold display changes to red. The jackpot expectation is higher when the hold display turns red).

The change pattern of the hold display in the change after the change to the colored normal hold display at the start of the change by the gacha coin or the rare gacha coin is determined by using the changing hold color determination table of FIG. 528. That is, even if the Gachacoin hold notice is changed to the colored normal hold display, the hold change pattern by the hold color is used as in the case where the hold color change notice continues. However, with respect to each pattern of the changing hold color determination table in FIG. Good.

In the above-mentioned example, the effect of changing the gacha coin hold to the hold color display due to the gacha is performed at the start of the change of the hold corresponding to the gacha coin, but it is executed at another timing after the start of the change. May be good. The timing includes, for example, immediately before the establishment of the reach, immediately after the establishment of the reach, and the development of the SP reach when the SP reach is executed. However, for example, when an image prompting the operation of the specific operation unit is displayed during the reach effect and the effect prompting the operation of the operation unit is executed, the last timing is before the start of displaying the image. Is desirable.

For example, if the final hold color is the same, the hold color will be higher when the jackpot expectation is higher when the gacha coin hold notice is passed than when the gacha coin hold notice is not passed. It is desirable that the distribution is set in the decision table, the gacha coin hold color correspondence table, and the like.

In the above example, the number of stages of holding gacha coins (5 stages of 1 gacha coin, 3 gacha coins, 5 gacha coins, 1 rare gacha coin, 5 rare gacha coins) and the number of holding color stages. (5 levels of white, blue, green, red, and iridescent) are the same, but may be different. If the number of stages is different, it is desirable that the number of stages for holding gacha coins is larger. Since the gacha coin hold also eventually changes to the hold of the colored display, the player recognizes the final jackpot expectation by holding the colored display. That is, if the number of stages of the reserved colors is large, it is difficult for the player to grasp the final jackpot expectation unless he / she remembers the order of the jackpot expectations of all the colors.

Although not shown, in the peripheral control ROM, for example, a distribution in which the gacha coin hold display is selected and a distribution in which the normal hold display (colored hold including white) is selected as the hold at the time of winning. And, the table defined for each fluctuation pattern is stored. The peripheral control MPU selects the gacha coin hold display or the normal hold display with reference to the table, and refers to the gacha coin hold color correspondence table or the hold color determination table according to the selected display mode to change the hold. Determine the pattern.

The jackpot expectation when the gacha coin hold display is selected is generally set higher than the jackpot expectation when the normal hold display is selected, but the gacha coin hold with the lowest jackpot expectation (Gacha) It is assumed that the highest hold (red), which can be selected even if the normal hold display is out of alignment, has a higher expectation of a big hit than one coin).

FIG. 534 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the gacha coin hold notice effect. (A) is a state in which the fluctuation is not held and the fluctuation is being performed. (B) is a state in which the game ball B has entered the first starting port 2002 in a state where the fluctuation is being performed. In (B), the gacha coin hold determination table of FIG. 530 (B) is referred to, and the hold display at the time of winning is determined to be "1 gacha coin" and the hold display at the start of fluctuation is determined to be "3 gacha coins". , FIG. 533 is a diagram when red is determined as the reserved color.

(C) is a state in which the fluctuation in (B) has been completed. (D) is a state in which the fluctuation corresponding to the hold changed to Gachacoin has started. At the start of the fluctuation, the hold display, which was "1 gacha coin", has changed to "3 gacha coins". (E) is a state in which the gacha-gacha production is executed three times using three gacha coins. The gacha coin hold color correspondence table is referred to, and the hold color with the highest expectation of big hit is decided to be green. Therefore, in (E), among the three hold displays acquired by the gacha-gacha production, the one with the highest expectation for a big hit is green.

(F) is a continuation state of the fluctuation. The hold display corresponding to the change has changed to green, which has the highest expectation of a big hit, among the three hold displays acquired by the Gacha Gacha production. (G) is a state in which the change has developed into a reach. In (G), the hold remains green. (H) is a state developed into SP reach in the fluctuation. In (H), the hold remains green. (I) is a state in which the latter half of the SP reach has started in the fluctuation. At the beginning of the second half of the SP reach, the hold turned red.

After the gacha coin hold notice is changed to the normal hold display (colored hold display including white), the change mode of the hold display is the same as when the gacha coin hold notice is not passed, so (G), (H). ) And (I) are the same as those in FIGS. 529 (E), (F), and (G), respectively. In addition to this, for example, the three hold displays acquired by the gacha-gacha production are set to "blue", "green", and "red", and the state shown in FIG. 534 (F) is changed to red, and FIG. 534 (G) is used. The timing of color promotion, such as showing the final color before the start of reach shown in (1), may be appropriately determined.

[16. Reach collapse pseudo-continuous production]
Hereinafter, the reach collapse pseudo-continuous production will be described. First, the pseudo continuous production will be described. The pseudo continuous effect is an effect in which the operation of changing the decorative symbol and ending the change of the decorative symbol is executed a plurality of times during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. .. "Ending the variation of the decorative symbol" means, for example, a mode in which a part or all of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a mode in which the player is made to recognize that the variation of the decorative symbol is once completed, and a mode of the decorative symbol. A mode in which a pseudo-ream symbol (a symbol in which a pseudo-ream is confirmed if this symbol is stopped) is partially stopped. A pseudo-continuous effect in which the operation is performed N times (N is a natural number of 1 or more) is called an N-series pseudo-continuous effect, and the M-th variation of the decorative symbol (M is 1 or more N) in the N-series pseudo-continuous effect. The following natural numbers) are called the M-th pseudo continuous production.

In addition, while suggesting to the player that the operation may be executed again during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display, the operation is actually executed again. A production that does not occur is called a "pseudo-gase production". In addition, although two pseudo continuous effects are executed, there is also a pseudo-gase effect that suggests execution of the third pseudo continuous effect but does not execute the third pseudo continuous effect. Hereinafter, the pseudo-continuous production is also simply referred to as "pseudo-continuous production" or "pseudo-ream".

Pseudo-continuous production occurs or continues, that is, the operation of changing the decorative symbol and ending the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is executed again during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. Peripheral control MPU may stop the pseudo-continuous symbol at at least one of the left decorative symbol, the intermediate decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol when it is confirmed that the pattern is to be performed. In the following example, the peripheral control MPU stops a character such as "continue!" As a pseudo-continuous symbol on the intermediate decorative symbol. In addition, for example, a combination of specific decorative symbols (for example, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are all odd or even numbers and reach does not occur) may be used as a pseudo-continuous symbol.

In each variation, whether or not the pseudo-ream is executed and the number of pseudo-reams when the pseudo-ream is executed are defined in the fluctuation pattern. In addition, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern table is determined so that the jackpot expectation level increases as the number of pseudo-reams increases.

FIG. 535 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a reach collapse pseudo-continuous production. FIG. 535 (A) shows a state in which the fluctuation has started. Subsequently, in (B), the left decorative symbol is stopped, and the right decorative symbol is the same symbol as the left decorative symbol, and is about to stop (becoming in a reach state) in a shaking manner, for example. In (C), the decorative symbol maintains the state of (B), and an image urging the center pressing operation unit 303a to be pressed is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

(D) is a state immediately after the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in (C). A display (“× 2!”) Indicates that the decorative symbol that was about to reach the reach state has started to change again and the second pseudo-ream has started, is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Subsequently, in (E), the left decorative symbol is stopped again, and the right decorative symbol is the same symbol as the left decorative symbol, and is about to stop, for example, in a shaking manner. In addition, a display (“x2”) indicating that the second pseudo-ream is currently being executed is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (F), the decorative symbol maintains the state of (E), and an image urging the center pressing operation unit 303a to be pressed is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

It is assumed that the same effect is repeated and the fourth pseudo-ream is performed. In (G), the decorative symbol maintains the state of (E), and an image prompting the center pressing operation unit 303a to be pressed is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A display (“x4”) indicating that the fourth pseudo-ream is currently being executed is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In (H), although the central pressing operation unit 303a was pressed in (G), the reach was formed without breaking the decorative pattern that was about to reach the reach state. A reach state is formed by an even number of decorative patterns. In addition, it is assumed that the expected value of the balls to be obtained by the big hit is large in the order of even numbered, odd numbered other than 7, and 7 decorative symbols. A display (“x4”) indicating that the fourth pseudo-ream is currently being executed is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition, although it was explained that it is about to reach (the vertical positions of the left and right decorative symbols are slightly different), from the state of reaching (the vertical positions of the left and right decorative symbols are the same), FIG. 535. As in (c), an image prompting the center pressing operation unit 303a to be pressed may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

FIG. 536 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the reach symbol promotion effect executed following the reach collapse pseudo continuous effect. The reach symbol promotion effect is an example of SP reach. FIG. 536 (I) shows a state in which the reach symbol promotion effect has started. The characters "Promote the reach symbol !!" are displayed on the effect display device 1600. In the reach symbol promotion effect, for example, even-numbered reach is promoted to odd-numbered reach or 7-reach, and odd-numbered reach is promoted to 7-reach. Here, even-numbered reach <odd-numbered reach <7 reach is advantageous (for example, it is easy to hit a jackpot). In particular, this 7 reach is a fairly intense production (for example, a jackpot expectation of over 80%). In (I), since the reach collapse effect is completed, the display indicating the number of pseudo-reams is erased from the effect display device 1600.

Subsequently, in (J), an image prompting the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A white effect image is displayed on the background of the image of the center pressing operation unit 303a. Further, in (J), for example, the decorative symbol during reach is displayed in a manner as if it is shaking.

(K) is a state in which the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in (J) and the reach symbol is successfully promoted. A display (“promotion !!!”) indicating that the reach symbol has been promoted is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition, the decorative design has been promoted to odd reach. Also, the color of the background effect image has changed from white to blue.

For example, the color of the effect image of the reach symbol promotion effect background is white when the reach is even, blue when the reach is odd other than 7, and red when the reach is 7. Even if the promotion of the reach symbol fails, the reach effect (for example, SP reach effect) is performed by the reach symbol, the winning is announced, and the symbol is confirmed.

Subsequently, in (L), the characters "Promote the reach symbol !!" are displayed again on the effect display device 1600. Subsequently, in (M), an image prompting the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, at this time, for example, the decorative symbol during reach is displayed in a swaying manner.

(N) is a state in which the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in (M) and the reach symbol is successfully promoted. A display (“promotion !!!”) indicating that the reach symbol has been promoted is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition, the decorative design has been promoted to 7 reach. Also, the color of the background effect image has changed from blue to red. Although the illustration is omitted, after that, a reach effect (for example, SP reach effect) with 7 symbols is performed, the winning is announced, and the symbol is confirmed.

In addition, the final reach symbol is confirmed (reach symbol promotion effect) from the first period in which the reach collapse pseudo-continuous effect, which is the effect of the same mode (reach pattern mode) that is repeatedly performed, is performed, and from the end of the first period. Comparing with the second period up to the last), it is desirable that the second period is longer. Since the player pays the most attention to the winning result of the fluctuation, the longer the second period for notifying the winning result more directly, the longer the player's interest can be maintained, and the above-mentioned 7 Since the jackpot expectation of reach is set to an exceptional value, it is possible to provide the player with a feeling of exhilaration for a long time when the second period is longer than the first period.

Further, it is desirable that the number of times that the central pressing operation unit 303a is urged to press in the first period is larger than the number of times that the central pressing operation unit 303a is urged to press in the second period. The longer the time from the start of the fluctuation to the prompting of the operation of the operation unit, the more the player tends to think that when the operation of the operation unit is prompted, the winning result of the fluctuation is notified by the operation. .. Therefore, in the second period in which the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation is long, if the number of times to prompt the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is large, the player will be prepared for each operation, which may cause tiredness. The number of times is as described above.

Further, it is desirable that the time interval between the effects for prompting the central pressing operation unit 303a, which is repeatedly performed in the first period, is shorter than the time interval between the effects for prompting the central pressing operation unit 303a, which is repeatedly performed in the second period. Hereinafter, the effect of urging the pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a is also referred to as an operation request effect. As mentioned above, since the second period is a more direct notification of the winning result than the first period, if it takes time between the operation request productions in the first period, the player is interested. This is because it cannot be maintained. Further, as for the time interval between the effects for prompting the pressing of the central pressing operation unit 303a, which is repeatedly performed in the first period, the effect for prompting the first central pressing operation unit 303a in the second period after the end of the first period is displayed. For the same reason, it is said that it is shorter than the time interval until the time.

Further, it is desirable that the operation valid period in the one operation request effect in the second period is longer than the operation valid period in the one operation request effect in the first period. This is because there are some players who want to slowly perform the pressing operation in the second period with a sense of tension because the effect of notifying the winning result more directly in the second period than in the first period.

Depending on the content of the reach collapse pseudo-ream effect (for example, the number of pseudo-reams is a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) or less), the operation request effect may not be executed even if the SP reach is subsequently developed. However, it is desirable that the ratio in which the operation request effect is executed in the SP reach is higher than the ratio in which the operation request effect is not executed in the SP reach that has been developed after the reach collapse pseudo continuous effect occurs. As a result, it is possible to give the player an uplifting feeling due to the occurrence of the reach collapse pseudo-continuous production.

As described above, in the examples of FIGS. 535 and 536, the display mode of the operation request effect in the first period is one type, but the display mode of the operation request effect in the second period is a plurality of types (accompanied by a blue effect). Display and display with red effect).

Further, after the operation request effect is started, a timer (or a gauge or the like) indicating the remaining operation valid period may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this case, the time from the start of the operation request effect to the display of the timer in the first period is shorter than the time from the start of the operation request effect to the display of the timer in the second period.

Further, although not shown, when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the operation request effect in the second period, a predetermined movable body may operate according to the winning result. Specifically, for example, the movable body operates in the case of a jackpot fluctuation, and the movable body does not operate in the case of a missed fluctuation. On the other hand, when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the operation request effect in the first period, the movable body does not operate regardless of the hit result.

Further, the movable body may operate even when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the operation request effect in the first period, but the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the operation request effect in the second period. It is different from the movement mode of the movable body in the case (for example, the movement direction and the movement amount of the movable body are different, or the moving movable body is different).

Further, in the first period, a specific effect (for example, a cut-in effect) may be executed when the reach collapses and the pseudo-ream starts. There may be a plurality of types of such specific effects. Further, depending on the type of a specific effect, it may appear so that the expectation of a big hit of the fluctuation is increased and the next reach collapse is confirmed.

In addition, when a specific effect with high expectations appears, it is desirable not to lower the expectation in the specific effect of the transition (specifically, for example, when a green cut-in effect appears, it is blue. Cut-in effect does not appear). Further, in the first period, a predetermined movable body may operate when the reach collapses and the pseudo-ream starts. The movement of the movable body may be the same each time, or the movement or the moving accessory itself may be different depending on the current number of pseudo-reams.

Further, although a plurality of operation request effects are executed in the first period, the time interval between the operation request effects may be gradually shortened, or the time interval between the operation request effects may be shortened from the predetermined number of times onward. You may. However, for example, the time interval between the last operation request effect and the last operation request effect may be longer than the time interval between the other operation request effects.

[17. Sugoroku stage production]
The production during the Sugoroku stage will be described below. The sugoroku stage is an example of a specific production state, and the sugoroku production is performed during the fluctuation and the game progresses. Specifically, a sugoroku map is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310 rotates during fluctuation, and when the rotation stops, the number indicated by the back lower middle rotating decoration 3310 is increased. The character drawn on the sugoroku map advances through the squares. The effect indicated by the square in which the character has stopped is executed in the fluctuation or the pending fluctuation.

It should be noted that the rotation operation of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 does not necessarily have to be performed in all the fluctuations. In the variation in which the rotating decoration body 3310 is not rotated, for example, the character does not move the squares, that is, stays in the same squares. In addition, as a trigger for the start of the sugoroku stage, the player may move to the sugoroku stage with a predetermined probability at the start of the fluctuation, or even if it is specified to stay in the sugoroku stage after a predetermined number of fluctuations after the end of the advantageous gaming state. Alternatively, the transition may be made as a part of the look-ahead effect using the above-mentioned pre-determination command.

FIGS. 537 and 538 are explanatory views showing an example of the production on the sugoroku stage. (A) is a state immediately before the fluctuation starts. A large decorative symbol is stopped at the center of the effect display device 1600. Also, nothing is displayed in the sugoroku square. Further, it is assumed that there are three pending fluctuations at the time of (A). (B) is a state in which the fluctuation has started. A large decorative pattern begins to fluctuate in the center of the effect display device 1600.

In (C), the large decorative symbol in the center of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the small decorative symbol is changed in the upper right portion of the effect display device 1600. In addition, when the large decorative pattern is erased, a display indicating the content of the effect is displayed in the sugoroku squares. Further, for example, at the same timing, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 starts rotating. At the timing of (B), the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 may be started.

In (D), the lower back middle rotating ornament 3310 stops rotating. The number of the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 located at the uppermost position indicates the number of squares in which the character advances. In (D), the lower back middle rotating ornament 3310 points to "2".

In (E), the character moves by 2 squares. The "x" in the square after moving 2 squares indicates that no special effect is performed. Therefore, no special effect is performed, and the decorative design is stopped in (F). When the decorative symbol is stopped, a large decorative symbol is displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600.

In (G), the camera that shoots the sugoroku stage moves so that the character is located in the last square of the sugoroku squares displayed on the sugoroku display device 1600 in the effect display device 1600. Perform the production. At the end of (G), the same as in (A). Then, in (H), the next fluctuation starts. The details of (H) are the same as those of (B). After that, the same production is repeated.

(I) is a state in which the final variation of the sugoroku stage is being executed, and the details are the same as in (C). (J) is a continuation state of the final fluctuation. In (J), the ascending operation (operation different from the rotating operation) is performed so as to approach the hold display area (hold display area for the fluctuation) in the effect display device 1600 while the rotating decorative body 3310 under the back is rotating. To do. It should be noted that the ascending operation can be executed only in the final fluctuation. When the ascending motion is performed, the contents of the sugoroku squares change to those with high expectation of big hits. The contents of the squares that were "x", "?", And "x" in the state of (I) are all changed to "reach" in the state of (J).

It should be noted that the final fluctuation is set so that the probability that the ascending motion is performed is higher when the final fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation than when the final fluctuation is an out-of-bounds fluctuation, that is, the final when the ascending motion is performed. It is desirable that the jackpot expectation in the fluctuation is higher than the jackpot expectation when the ascending operation is not performed. As in (K), the lower back middle rotating decoration 3310 may hide a part or all of the hold display area, or may approach the hold display area but not hide it.

Further, the ascending operation may be performed after the rotation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 is stopped (that is, after the number is determined). However, it is desirable that the start of the ascending operation is later than the start of the rotational operation in the final fluctuation. This is because, as described above, when the ascending motion is performed, the jackpot expectation is high, and the player can have a sense of expectation that the ascending motion will be performed even after the rotation motion is started.

(K) is a continuation state of the final fluctuation. In (K), the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 returns to the initial position while rotating. It should be noted that the lower middle rotating decorative body 3310 may return to the initial value after stopping the rotation. In (K), the hold of the hidden hold display area is changed from the normal display to the blue hold display (hold display with a higher expectation of big hit than the normal hold display).

It should be noted that the rotation operation of the lower back middle rotation decoration body 3310 can be executed even in the fluctuation in the production state other than the sugoroku stage, but it is more amazing than the probability that the rotation operation is executed in each of a plurality of continuous fluctuations in the sugoroku stage. It is desirable that the probability that the rotation operation is executed in each of the plurality of continuous fluctuations in the effect state other than the stage is set lower. This is because the player can enjoy sugoroku when there are many fluctuations in the character advancing through the squares on the sugoroku stage.

On the other hand, there may be an effect state in which the probability that the rotation operation is executed in each of a plurality of continuous fluctuations is set higher than that of the sugoroku stage. This is because the player can be provided with a sense of surprise by having the effect state in which the under-back middle-rotating decorative body 3310, which seems to be provided for the sugoroku stage at first glance, rotates continuously.

Further, although the example of the rotating operation of the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 has been described, an operation of changing the position may be performed instead of an operation of not changing the position as in the rotating operation. For example, the lower back middle rotating decorative body 3310 may slightly rise while rotating (a rise width smaller than the rise operation in the final fluctuation).

[18. Specific zone production]
Hereinafter, the production of the specific zone will be described. Examples of the specific zone are a pine zone and a super pine zone. The pine zone is, for example, a zone that rushes into the sugoroku stage of the previous chapter. In addition, the super pine zone is, for example, a zone that may enter regardless of the stage.

For example, the entry into these specific zones is executed as a look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect is an effect of executing an effect suggesting a winning result of a pending change before the start of the pending change. The peripheral control MPU refers to the special symbol pre-determination command for the reserved special symbol variation sent from the main control MPU, and each of the reserved special symbol fluctuations is a hit variation (that is, a big hit variation or a small hit variation). ) Is determined (look-ahead determination), and the look-ahead effect can be executed based on this determination result.

After entering the pine zone and the super pine zone, the entry state of these zones continues until the fluctuation corresponding to the hold determined to be read ahead (also called the look-ahead target fluctuation). It is assumed that the jackpot expectation of fluctuations corresponding to the look-ahead-determined hold of the pine zone and the super pine zone is high. In addition, it is assumed that the expectation of a big hit of the look-ahead target fluctuation is higher when entering the super pine zone than when entering the pine zone. It is desirable that the pine zone and the super pine zone, in which the newly reserved fluctuation is the read-ahead target fluctuation, are not executed while the jackpot fluctuation is being executed or is suspended.

539 and 540 are explanatory views showing an example of the pine zone effect. (A) is a state in which fluctuations during the stage are being executed. The second pending variation of the running variation in (A) is the look-ahead target variation. A look-ahead effect is performed for the change of the look-ahead target from the change of (A). In (A), the effect of stopping the character in the square described as "pine zone" is executed. (B) is a continuation state of the fluctuation of (A). A display indicating that the pine zone has been entered is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In (C), the decorative design is displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600. In addition, a display indicating that the person is staying in the pine zone (“in the pine zone ...”) is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (D), the change is completed. In the next variation of (C), for example, the same effects as in (C) and (D) are executed.

(E) is a state in which the look-ahead target change has started. Subsequently, a display indicating that the person is staying in the pine zone is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (F) is a state in which the reach is established in the change of the look-ahead target. In the state where the reach is established, the display indicating that the person is staying in the pine zone is erased from the effect display device 1600.

In this way, when a specific effect with a high expectation of big hit is being executed, such as when the reach is established, the display indicating that the player is staying in the pine zone is erased, and the player stays in the pine zone until then. It is possible to draw attention to the fact that a specific effect is being performed for the player who has paid great attention to the inside. Further, if it is always displayed that the player is staying in the pine zone, the player may continue to feel nervous and tired. It should be noted that the display indicating that the person is staying in the pine zone may be deleted a plurality of times. Specifically, for example, it may be deleted every time when the execution of the pseudo-ream is confirmed.

In other words, before the SP reach production (rock-paper-scissors game production described later) was started, a specific timing (when the reach was established, when the display that the pseudo-ream was confirmed appeared, and the reach or pseudo-ream occurred. It is advisable to temporarily delete the display indicating that you are staying in the pine zone when you are performing a production related to (emphasized).

In (G), the reach state is continued. In (G), the display indicating that the person is staying in the pine zone is displayed again on the effect display device 1600. (G) is the timing when the player is waiting for whether or not to develop into SP reach, and at that timing, the display that the player is staying in the pine zone with high expectation of big hit is redisplayed, so that the player can You can expect the development to SP reach, remembering that you are in the pine zone.

(H) is a state in which the rock-paper-scissors game production, which is SP reach, has started. The rock-paper-scissors game production is an SP reach that develops due to changes in the look-ahead targets of the pine zone and the super pine zone. The rock-paper-scissors game production is, for example, a production with an extremely high expectation of a big hit among the SP reach productions (for example, the expectation of a big hit is the second highest after the SP reach production that is selected only when the jackpot fluctuates). In addition, even if you enter the pine zone, the rock-paper-scissors game effect is not always executed, but the fluctuation pattern of the look-ahead target fluctuation is selected so that the rock-paper-scissors game effect is always executed when you enter the super pine zone. It is assumed that it has been done.

Further, at the start of the rock-paper-scissors game production, the display indicating that the player is staying in the pine zone is erased from the effect display device 1600, and is erased even during the rock-paper-scissors game production. The rock-paper-scissors game production is a production with extremely high expectations for big hits, and this is to draw the player's attention to the rock-paper-scissors game production. For this reason, it is desirable that the jackpot expectation is set higher at the start of the rock-paper-scissors game production than at the time of entering the pine zone.

(I) is a continuation of the rock-paper-scissors game production. The shout of rock-paper-scissors is displayed on the production display device 1600. In (J), a rock-paper-scissors game is being played, which is directed by a rock-paper-scissors game. The hand of the ally character is displayed on the left side of the effect display device 1600, and the hand of the enemy character is displayed on the right side of the effect display device 1600. In (J), the state in which the ally character has won the rock-paper-scissors game against the enemy character is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (that is, it is notified that the fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation). In (K), the effect display device 1600 notifies that the jackpot has been won, and the decorative symbols are stopped by the jackpot combination.

541 and 542 are explanatory views showing an example of the super pine zone effect. The entry into the super pine zone is executed, for example, as a hold notice effect. Specifically, for example, the hold is displayed in a mode indicating the possibility of entering the super pine zone (hereinafter, also referred to as a super pine suggestion hold). In addition, a display indicating that the hold is confirmed to enter the super pine zone (hereinafter, also referred to as a super pine confirmed hold), for example, a hold corresponding to the winning is displayed as a super pine suggestion hold at the time of winning. When the hold of the normal display mode moves, it changes to the super pine suggestion hold.

(A) is a state in which fluctuations are being executed and three fluctuations are pending. (B) is the state of (A), in which the fluctuation is newly suspended. In (B), the winning time of the new hold is the super pine suggestion hold (hold described as "super pine?". If the super pine confirmed hold, it is described as "super pine!" It is displayed as a color different from the standard color (for example, white) (for example, red). The super pine suggestion hold is the hold of the look-ahead target change. (C) is a state in which the fluctuation is completed.

(D) is a state in which the next fluctuation has started. (E) is a continuation state of the fluctuation of (D). In (E), the effect display device 1600 executes a dialogue effect (“maybe the super pine zone ...”) suggesting entry into the super pine zone. (F) is the state at the end of the fluctuation. In (F), the effect display device 1600 displays a display (“...”) indicating that the super pine zone could not be entered although the entry into the super pine zone was suggested.

(G) is a state after the next fluctuation of (F) has started. One super pine suggestion hold has moved. Also, in (G), the dialogue effect ("It may be really the super pine zone !!!") suggesting the entry into the super pine zone is displayed again. The dialogue production in (G) is a production with a higher expectation of entering the super pine zone than the dialogue production in (E). When performing an effect suggesting entry into the super pine zone a plurality of times in this way, it is desirable that the degree of expectation of entry into the super pine zone does not decrease in the multiple times of the effect.

In (H), a display for confirming the entry into the super pine zone is displayed on the effect display device 1600. As in (H), the super pine suggestion hold may be changed to the super pine final hold at this timing. In the example of FIG. 541, the super pine suggestion hold is changed to the super pine final hold at the timing when the display confirming the entry into the super pine zone appears, but the super pine final hold is held before the timing. Needless to say, may appear. Further, in the example of FIG. 541, the rush to the super pine zone is performed over two fluctuations from the effect of suggesting the rush to the super pine zone, but the rush to the super pine zone may be performed by one fluctuation.

In (I), the decorative design is displayed in the center, and a display indicating that the user is staying in the super pine zone is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition, the super pine fixed hold has changed to a hold display in a mode with a high degree of expectation (in (I), a red hold display). For example, in this state, the fluctuation is digested.

(J) is a state in which the look-ahead target change has started. (K) is a state in which reach is established in the change of the look-ahead target. Similar to the pine zone, in the state where the reach is established, the display indicating that the player is staying in the pine zone is erased from the effect display device 1600.

In this way, when a specific effect with a high expectation of big hits such as the timing when the reach is established is being executed, the display indicating that the player is staying in the super pine zone is deleted, so that the player stays in the super pine zone. It is possible to draw attention to the fact that a specific effect is being performed for the player who has paid great attention to the inside. In addition, if the super pine zone is constantly displayed, the player may continue to feel nervous and tired. It should be noted that the display indicating that the person is staying in the super pine zone may be deleted a plurality of times. Specifically, for example, it may be deleted every time when the execution of the pseudo-ream is confirmed.

That is, as in the case of the pine zone described above, before the SP reach production (rock-paper-scissors game production described above) is started, a specific timing (when the reach is established, when the display in which the pseudo-ream is confirmed appears, It is advisable to temporarily delete the display indicating that you are staying in the super pine zone when you are performing (emphasized) production related to the occurrence of reach or pseudo-ream.

In (L), the reach state is continued. In (L), similarly to the pine zone, the display indicating that the user is staying in the super pine zone is displayed again on the effect display device 1600. Since the super pine zone has a higher expectation of a big hit than the pine zone, the player can get an uplifting feeling again by displaying the display during the stay in the super pine zone again.

(M) is a state in which the rock-paper-scissors game production, which is SP reach, has started. As mentioned above, when you enter the super pine zone, a rock-paper-scissors game is always performed. In (M), the display indicating that the user is staying in the super pine zone is erased again from the effect display device 1600. As a result, it is possible to strongly appeal to the player that he has entered the rock-paper-scissors game production.

(N) is a continuation of the rock-paper-scissors game production. The shout of rock-paper-scissors is displayed on the production display device 1600. Further, in (N), the display indicating that the user is staying in the super pine zone is displayed again on the effect display device 1600. As mentioned above, the super pine zone has higher expectations for big hits than the pine zone. Therefore, by displaying the display at the timing when the rock-paper-scissors game is actually performed in the rock-paper-scissors game production, the player is uplifted by the synergistic effect of the two highly expected effects of the rock-paper-scissors game production and the super pine zone. You can get a feeling.

In (O), a rock-paper-scissors game is being played, which is directed by a rock-paper-scissors game. The hand of the ally character is displayed on the left side of the effect display device 1600, and the hand of the enemy character is displayed on the right side of the effect display device 1600. In (O), the state in which the ally character has won the rock-paper-scissors game against the enemy character is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (that is, it is notified that the fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation).

Further, in (O), the display indicating that the user is staying in the super pine zone is erased from the effect display device 1600. This is because, at the timing when the winning result of the fluctuation is already notified, only the winning result is important for the player, and it is not important whether or not he / she is staying in the super pine zone. In (P), the effect display device 1600 notifies that the jackpot has been won, and the decorative symbols are stopped by the jackpot combination.

In addition, although the example in which the super pine suggestion hold starts after the super pine suggestion hold appears, if the super pine suggestion hold cannot be entered even though the super pine suggestion hold appears, for example, the super pine suggestion hold is set. Even during the corresponding fluctuation, although it is suggested to enter the super pine zone, the effect of failing to enter is performed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, no special effect was executed for fluctuations that are not pre-reading target fluctuations while staying in the pine zone or super pine zone, but specific effects (for example, start of rock-paper-scissors game production) are performed in these fluctuations. (Continuous production, etc.) that suggests the above may be executed. Further, the entry into the pine zone and the super pine zone may be executed by a normal effect (a part of the effect performed within one fluctuation) other than the look-ahead effect. Specifically, for example, a rushing suggestion effect, a rushing effect, and a rock-paper-scissors game may be executed in a single fluctuation.

In principle, the entry into the pine zone is performed by stopping the character in the square indicating the pine zone of the sugoroku stage, so unlike the super pine zone, the hold display does not suggest the pine zone. desirable. If the sugoroku stage suggests a pine zone by the hold display, the contents of the sugoroku squares that are not displayed until after the start of fluctuation will be suggested by the hold display, and there is a possibility that the fun as a sugoroku will be reduced. Because there is.

In the above-mentioned pine zone and super pine zone, for example, when a reach occurs, an example of erasing the display indicating that the user is staying in the pine zone or super pine zone has been described. An image different from the displayed image (for example, a reach enhancement effect) may be displayed so as to overlap on the side (which has a high priority). The point is that the display indicating that you are staying in the pine zone or super pine zone is not recognizable by the player (or is overlapped, but you are staying in the pine zone or super pine zone very slightly. You can see the display indicating).

[19. Hold peeping production]
Hereinafter, the hold peeping effect, which is an example of the hold notice effect, will be described. FIG. 543 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a hold peep effect. (A) is a state in which the fluctuation is being executed. In (A), three fluctuations are pending. In (B), a character appears from below the effect display device 1600, and is one of the hold display areas without hiding the hold display (hold display located in the lower center of the effect display device 1600) corresponding to the fluctuation currently being executed. Part (partly means completely hiding a predetermined number (for example, one) of the four holds, and / or hiding part of each of the four holds (that is, completely holding all four holds). Is hidden). The character may hide the entire hold display area. Further, the hold display (hold display located in the lower center of the effect display device 1600) corresponding to the fluctuation currently being executed by the character may be hidden.

In (C), the character disappears from the effect display device 1600, and a part of the hold display hidden by the character (the third hold in FIG. 543) is changed to the hold display in a highly expected mode, the green hold display. It's changing. (D) is the end of the fluctuation. The decorative design is stopped with a combination indicating that the fluctuation is an out-of-order fluctuation. When only the hold display on hold is hidden as in the example of FIG. 543, it is desirable that the hold peep effect is executed only when the change during execution is an out-of-order change.

When the hold peep effect is executed in the variation in which the normal out-of-range variation pattern (the variation pattern in which the special effect such as the reach effect is not executed and the variation time is long (for example, about 10 seconds)) is selected. At the start of the fluctuation, as in the example of FIG. 543, the character does not appear at the start of the fluctuation, but appears after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the start of the fluctuation. In addition, when the hold peep effect is executed in the shortened variation pattern (the variation pattern in which the special effect such as the reach effect is not executed and the variation time is short (for example, less than 10 seconds)), the variation starts or The character may appear after a very short time (a time shorter than the above-mentioned 3 seconds) elapses (for example, 0.5 seconds later) from the start of the fluctuation.

Further, before (B), a fanning effect of the hold peep effect may be performed. Specifically, in the fanning effect, for example, an effect is performed in which a character appears in the effect display device 1600 and approaches the hold display area but does not hide the hold display area. Further, although the fanning effect is performed, the character may disappear without hiding the hold display area after that. In the shortened fluctuation pattern described above, since the fluctuation time is short, it is desirable not to perform the fanning effect or to perform it in a short time (for example, about 1 second). Further, when such a fanning effect is performed and the character hides the hold display area, the hold display may be changed without fail.

Further, in the example of FIG. 543, although a part of the hold display hidden in the character has changed, there may be a pattern in which all the hold displays change, or there is a pattern in which all the hold displays do not change. You may.

Even if the color hold display has the same jackpot expectation, the jackpot expectation is higher when the hold peep effect is used than when the hold peep effect is not used, for example. To do. As a result, the player can obtain an uplifting feeling when the hold peep effect is executed. On the contrary, even if the color hold display has the same jackpot expectation, the jackpot expectation may be higher when the hold peep effect is not passed than when the hold peep effect is passed. .. The player's expectation in the hold peeping effect in which the jackpot expectation is suppressed although the hold display changes with a high probability or always at the time of occurrence, and the normal hold color change effect in which the jackpot expectation is high although the occurrence is unpredictable. You can balance the feeling.

Further, as in the example of FIG. 543, in the effect display device 1600, it is desirable to notify that the hold display changes when the character has evacuated from the hold display. If there is a change in the hold color or suggests the hold color after the change before the character evacuates, the period during which the player feels tension in the hold peeping effect is shortened, and the interest is reduced. Because.

However, for example, a light emitting body different from the effect display device 1600 (for example, a lamp or LED attached to the front wall portion 2101 of the start port unit 2100, or a lamp or LED provided in the vicinity of the start port unit 2100). Is emitted in a color equivalent to the reserved color displayed on the effect display device 1600, the light emitting body is used before the character is retracted on the effect display device 1600 (that is, before the display of the reserved color after the change). May emit light in the reserved color. The player usually executes the game mainly while looking at the effect display device 1600, but can have a sense of expectation by feeling a change due to a slight change in the color of the illuminant in the field of view. ..

Since the purpose is to make the player recognize the change in the color of the illuminant before the change in the hold color of the effect display device 1600, the effect (control for) in which the hold color of the effect display device 1600 changes is performed. The timing of execution is before the timing of executing the effect of changing the color of the light emitting body, or even at the same timing, the player is notified by the change of the color of the light emitting body before the change of the reserved color of the effect display device 1600. There is no problem if it can be recognized.

Further, it is preferable to make the light emitting body emit light in the reserved color (for example, white) of the normal display mode immediately before the light emitting body is made to emit light or immediately before the light emitting color of the light emitting body is changed. Specifically, for example, when the hold color of the hold display on the effect display device 1600 changes from blue to green, the emission color of the light emitting body changes from blue to white before the hold color of the effect display device 1600 changes. , Further changes from white to green. Although an example in which the reserved color in the normal display mode is white has been described, there is no problem as long as the color is not limited to white and is not likely to be selected as the reserved color after promotion in this pending change effect. Further, when displaying white, there is no problem whether it is lit or blinking. If it is lit, the liquid crystal can be watched, and if it is blinking, it can be appealed that a pending change is being performed.

In such a case, it is desirable that the light emitting color of the light emitting body emits white light in the middle for an extremely short time (for example, a time shorter than the shortest fluctuation pattern among all the fluctuation patterns). This is because if the light emitting body emits white light for a long time and the hold display changes to white, which has a low expectation of a big hit, the player may misunderstand.

When the hold display mode in the effect display device 1600 is a hold in a special mode that cannot be expressed only by color (for example, the super pine suggestion hold as described above), the light emitting body is, for example, in the effect display device 1600. Light emission by a color that is not used in the reserved color change (for example, in the effect display device 1600, when a white, blue, green, red, or iridescent reserved color change can be performed, the light emitter emits purple light). Alternatively, the hold display mode is expressed by executing a predetermined pattern of light emission. Examples of the light emission of the predetermined pattern include a pattern in which red blinks and a pattern in which red and green are alternately emitted.

Further, in the example of FIG. 543, a series of effects in which the character hides the hold display and evacuates is performed only once, but the effects may be executed a plurality of times. When the effect is executed a plurality of times, the mode of the hold display may change each time, the mode of the hold display may change at least once, and the mode of the hold display does not change even once. May be good.

Further, it is desirable that the hold peep effect is performed only for the hold of the special figure 1. When the game is progressing mainly due to the fluctuation of the special figure 2, it is necessary to execute the hold peep effect at high speed because a very short fluctuation time is often selected, for example, in a time saving state. This is because it may confuse the player.

In addition, a plurality of types of characters may exist in the hold peep effect. The degree of expectation of each of the plurality of characters may be different, or the degree of expectation may be common to some or all of the characters. This expectation may be a hold change expectation in the hold peep effect, or may be a jackpot expectation in the hold fluctuation. Specifically, for example, the expectation of holding is higher in the order of character A, character B, and character C, and character C is selected only when the holding change is executed. Further, for example, the expected degree of pending change is higher in character B than in character A, but the expected degree of jackpot change in the case of pending change may be higher in character A than in character B. Further, the character A and the character B may have the same pending change expectation and the jackpot expectation, and the character C may be set to have a higher pending change expectation and the jackpot expectation than the character A and the character B.

In addition, it is desirable that the hold peep effect is performed only when the fluctuation during execution is out of order, but the fluctuation during execution is non-reach fluctuation or reach fluctuation in which the jackpot expectation is not high (for example, normal reach is out of order). It is more desirable that the hold peep effect is performed only in the case of (variation, etc.). That is, it is desirable that the hold peep effect does not occur not only when the fluctuation during execution is a jackpot fluctuation but also when a reach effect with a high expectation of a big hit such as SP reach is executed.

If the hold peeping effect occurs during the fluctuation in which the SP reach is executed, the player thinks that the pending fluctuation has a higher expectation than the currently executed fluctuation, and the SP is concerned. This is because expectations for reach may diminish.

[20. Still image production]
Hereinafter, the still image effect will be described. The still image effect is an effect of displaying a dynamic display in parallel with the display of the still image on the effect display device 1600. The still image during the still image production is a still image (for example, an object (sprite) such as a character image or a background image) that was displayed as a dynamic display until just before the start of the still image production. Alternatively, it may be a still image whose display is started at the same time as the start of the still image effect. When the still image effect is completed, the still image is released from stillness, and the still image changes to a dynamic display. Further, when the still image effect is completed, the still image may be deleted and a new dynamic display may be displayed.

It should be noted that the rest of the image in this chapter includes not only a complete rest but also a mode sufficient for the player to recognize that the image is still. Specifically, for example, a mode in which the image (object) is slightly shaken, a mode in which the effect is applied to the image (object), a mode in which the image (object) is slightly enlarged or reduced, and the like are also stationary. include.

[20-1. Rocket production]
544, 545, and 546 are explanatory views showing an example of rocket production. The rocket effect is an example of an SP reach effect in which a still image effect may be performed.

When the rocket effect, which is an example of the SP reach effect, starts, in (A), a display indicating that the rocket effect has started is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (B), the image of the character A (the character whose head is white in the figure), the line "Ignition of the fuse" by the character A, and the rocket that ignited the fuse are displayed on the effect display device 1600. ..

In (C), the image of the character A is erased from the effect display device 1600. Further, in (C), the squib is shorter than in the state of (B) (that is, the spark is traveling on the squib). In (D), the character A is displayed again on the effect display device 1600, and the line "Insufficient fuel! The rocket cannot be launched as it is!" By the character A is further displayed. Further, in (D), the squib is shorter than in the state of (C).

In (E), an image of character B (a character with a black head in the figure) and a line from character B saying "Replenish fuel by the time the spark reaches the rocket!" Are displayed on the effect display device 1600. Has been done. Further, in (E), the squib is shorter than in the state of (D).

In (F), the image of the character B and the line "It will arrive in 5 seconds!" By the character B are displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, in (F), the rocket is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a zoomed-in manner in the vicinity of the fuse, and the fuse is shorter than the state of (E). Until (M), which will be described later, the rocket is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a zoomed-in manner in the vicinity of the fuse.

In (G), the line "Replenish in 3 seconds!" And the image of the character A trying to lift the fuel are displayed on the effect display device 1600. The image "Replenish in 3 seconds!" Is displayed until the end of FIG. 545 (N), which will be described later. In (G), the fuse is shorter than in the state of (F). That is, from the start of (B) to the start of (G), a dynamic effect was performed in which the spark traveled on the fuse and the fuse gradually became shorter. On the other hand, from the start of (G) to the end of (M) described later (immediately before the timing of the special lottery result notification), the still image effect in which the images of the fuse and the spark are stationary is executed.

In (H), an image in which the character A lifts the fuel is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (I), an image of the character A trying to throw fuel is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 545 (J), an image of the character A throwing fuel is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In (K), an image in which the character A tries to lift the fuel is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (L), an image in which the character A lifts the fuel is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The images of character A and fuel in (K) and (L) are the same as the images of character A and fuel in FIGS. 544 (G) and (H), respectively.

That is, from FIG. 544 (G) to FIG. 545 (J), a series of effects in which the character A tries to lift the fuel, lifts the fuel, tries to throw the fuel, and throws the fuel are repeated. The second series of productions starts from FIG. 545 (K), and the series of productions ends halfway up to (L).

In (M), the images of the character A and the fuel are erased from the effect display device 1600, and the rocket image in which the sparks and the fuse are stationary is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (N), the still image is released from stillness, the spark reaches the rocket from the fuse, and the image that the rocket is successfully launched, that is, the image that notifies that the special lottery result is a big hit is the effect display device 1600. It is displayed in. In (O), an image display for notifying that the special lottery result "Big hit! Congratulations !!" is a big hit is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

FIG. 546 is an example of the final stage of the rocket production when the special lottery result is out of order. In FIG. 546 (N') following FIG. 545 (M), an image in which the spark disappears in the middle of the ignition line and the rocket fails to launch, that is, an image informing that the special lottery result is out of order is displayed on the effect display device 1600. It is displayed. In (O'), an image is displayed although it indicates that the special lottery result "Sorry ..." is out of order. Even if the special lottery result is a big hit, even if the image notifying that the special lottery result is out of order as shown in FIG. 546 (N') is displayed at the timing of FIG. 545 (N). Often, a resurrection effect (for example, an effect as shown in FIG. 545 (N) or an effect dedicated to resurrection) may be performed after that.

It should be noted that the display mode of the character A and the fuel, which is the dynamic display during the still image production, may indicate the special lottery result. Specifically, for example, when the special lottery result is a big hit, a character such as "chance" is attached to the clothes worn by the character A during the still image production, as compared with the case where the special lottery result is out of order. Is displayed, or the fuel is displayed in a specific color (for example, red) during the still image production, it is desirable that the selection ratio of the effect is high.

Further, although a plurality of dynamic displays (character A and fuel) are displayed on the effect display device 1600 during the still image effect, one dynamic display may be used. Further, when a plurality of dynamic displays can be displayed during the still image production, the satisfaction of a specific condition during the still image production (for example, the game ball B enters a predetermined winning opening) is satisfied. The number of dynamic displays may be increased as a result.

Specifically, for example, during the still image production, each time the game ball B enters the predetermined winning opening, the characters supporting the character A are additionally displayed one by one up to a predetermined number of people (for example, 5 people). May be done. As for the additionally displayed character, for example, the additionally displayed character repeats the cheering effect, which is an example of a series of effects composed of a plurality of effect elements, one or more times. Similar to the repetition of the series of effects shown in FIGS. 544 and 545, the cheering effect may end in the middle of the series of effects (for example, the cheering effect starts from the effect A, and the effect B and the effect C). In the case of a series of productions executed in the order of, the cheering production may end after the execution of the production A or the production B in the repetition of the series of productions of the Nth time (N is a natural number).

When a plurality of characters are additionally displayed, it is desirable that the timings of the cheering effects by the plurality of characters are synchronized. That is, when a new character is additionally displayed, the cheering effect of the new character starts in a state in which the already displayed additional display character is synchronized with the schedule of the running cheering effect. This makes it easier for the player to notice that the characters have been additionally displayed, and can also attract the player's attention to the cheering effect by the plurality of characters. Further, in addition to or instead of the additional display, a display indicating the number of characters that have been additionally displayed or the number of characters that are scheduled to be additionally displayed may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Of the dynamic displays during the still image effect, it is desirable that only the ones that are displayed from the start of the still image effect (that is, the character A and the fuel) suggest the special lottery result. That is, it is desirable that the dynamic display added by satisfying the above-mentioned specific conditions after the start of the still image effect does not suggest the special lottery result. This is because if all of these dynamic displays suggest a special lottery result, the player may be confused.

It is desirable that the dynamic display during the still image effect is displayed in a position other than the central portion such as the corner of the effect display device 1600 (lower right corner in the examples of FIGS. 544 and 545). Further, it is desirable that the display size of the dynamic display during the still image production is smaller than the display size of the still image (the rocket including the fuse and the spark in the examples of FIGS. 544 and 545). The reason for notifying the result of the special lottery is that it is the rocket after the rocket is released from rest, and it attracts more attention to the rocket than the dynamic display.

In addition, a plurality of colors of the title display ("Launch a rocket! A big hit with a successful launch!") In FIG. 544 (A) are prepared, for example, white, red, and rainbow colors, and white <red <rainbow colors. Expectations may be increased in order. Further, a plurality of title display types may be provided even when the still image effect is not executed. For example, the jackpot expectation is 1% for white where the still image effect is not executed, 5% for red which is not executed, 100% for rainbow which is not executed, 10% for white which is executed, 20% for red which is executed, and it is executed. The rainbow should be 100%. When the red color is the same when the still image effect is executed and when it is not executed, the red color when the still image effect is executed has a higher expectation of big hit.

Further, when comparing the white when the still image effect is executed and the red when the still image effect is not executed, the white when the still image effect is executed has a higher expectation of big hit. In other words, the jackpot expectation is indicated by the title display color and the presence / absence of the still image effect, but since the still image effect contributes more to the jackpot expectation, the still image effect is performed with the higher title display color. The jackpot expectation may be higher when the still image effect is executed with the lower title display color than when it is not executed. By doing so, even if white is displayed in the title display displayed before the still image effect is executed, the player's disappointment can be suppressed.

In addition, it is desirable not to emit light from the lamp, output sound from the speaker, operate the movable body, or the like in accordance with the dynamic display during the still image production. The reason for notifying the result of the special lottery is that it is the rocket after the rocket is released from rest, and it attracts more attention to the rocket than the dynamic display.

The outline of the rocket effect described with reference to FIGS. 544 to 546 is as follows. First, a dynamic effect is performed in which the spark advances along the fuse and the fuse of the rocket gradually shortens, and then the fuse and the spark stand still (the rocket also stands still). Then, while the fuse and the spark are stationary, the dynamic effect of the character A and the fuel is executed. Then, at the same time as the stillness of the fuse and the spark is released, the dynamic effect of the character A and the fuel ends, and the effect of notifying the special lottery result (rocket launch success or launch failure effect) is executed.

FIG. 547 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the schedule of the dynamic production of the character A and the fuel after the start of the still image production in the rocket production. Each element in FIG. 547 shows a series of production elements described above. Element 1 is a state in which the character A tries to lift the fuel as shown in FIG. 544 (G), and element 2 is a state in which the character A is trying to lift the fuel as shown in FIG. 544 (H). Element 3 is a state in which character A tries to throw fuel as shown in FIG. 544 (I), and element 4 is a state in which character A is throwing fuel as shown in FIG. 545 (J).

Pattern A is an effect pattern in which element 1 and element 2 are executed after the first series of effects, and then a rocket launch success effect or launch failure effect (that is, an effect of notifying the special lottery result) is executed. is there. In FIGS. 544 to 546 described above, the effect of the pattern A was executed.

Pattern B is an effect pattern in which element 1 and element 2 are executed after the second series of effects, and then the rocket launch success effect or launch failure effect is executed. Pattern C is an effect pattern in which element 1 and element 2 are executed after the third series of effects, and then the rocket launch success effect or launch failure effect is executed.

That is, the patterns A, B, and C are effect patterns in which a series of effects is terminated in the middle and a rocket launch success effect or launch failure effect is executed. On the other hand, the pattern D is an effect pattern in which a rocket launch success effect or a launch failure effect is executed after a series of effects of exactly five times. In this respect, since pattern D is a different pattern from patterns A, B, and C, the case where pattern D is selected is compared with the case where patterns A, B, and C are selected. However, it is desirable that the selection rate of each pattern is set so that the expectation of big hits is high. Assuming that the jackpot expectation of pattern D, which has the longest still image production time, is low, there is a high possibility that the special lottery result is out of order even though the player has expected for a long time in the still image production. This is because the situation that strongly discourages the player often occurs. Further, the pattern D may be set so as to be selected only when the special lottery result is a big hit.

Further, since the time for producing the still image becomes longer in the order of pattern A <pattern B <pattern C, for example, the jackpot expectation is increased in the order of pattern A <pattern B <pattern C (≦ pattern D). It is desirable that the selectivity of each pattern is set. If the jackpot expectation of a pattern with a long still image production time is low, there is a high possibility that the special lottery result will be missed even though the player has expected for a long time in the still image production. This is because the situation that strongly discourages the person often occurs.

As described above, in any of the effect patterns, a series of effects is executed one or more times during the still image effect. As a result, the stillness is not released until at least one series of productions progresses, so that the player can prepare his / her mind for the production in which the special lottery result is notified, and by extension, the player's performance. Excessive tension can be suppressed.

On the other hand, as described above, a plurality of effect patterns in which the number of times of a series of effects to be executed is different are predetermined. As a result, it is difficult for the player to predict at what timing the special lottery result will be notified after the series of productions has progressed once, so that the player feels nervous after the series of productions has progressed once. Can be provided. That is, since the effect pattern shown in FIG. 547 is predetermined, it is possible to provide the player with an appropriate sense of tension during the still image effect.

Although it is difficult to predict at what timing the effect of notifying the special lottery result will be executed, as shown in FIG. 547, the timing of executing the effect of notifying the special lottery result is set as a specific timing. ing. In the example of FIG. 547, it is after the element 2 or the element 4 is executed. If there is a possibility that the effect of notifying the special lottery result will be executed after all the elements (1 to 4), the tension will continue and the player will be tired. Because it could be.

In addition, all the effect patterns shown in FIG. 547 are repeatedly executed in a series of effects starting from element 1 and then progressing in the order of element 2, element 3, and element 4, but a series of repeated effects. There may be an effect pattern in which the order of the elements in the above or the element at the start is different from the effect pattern shown in FIG. 547. Specifically, for example, there may be an effect pattern that repeats a series of effects that progress in the order of element 3, element 4, element 1, and element 2. Further, for example, there may be an effect pattern that repeats a series of effects that progress in the order of element 4, element 2, element 1, and element 3.

In the above-mentioned example, an example in which the still image effect is executed during the SP reach is described. However, for example, the still image effect is produced before the reach state is reached (that is, during the variable display of all decorative symbols). May be executed, or the still image effect may be executed after the reach state is reached and before the start of the SP reach. Further, the still image effect may be executed as an effect suggesting that the reach state is reached, or the still image effect may be executed as an effect suggesting that the SP reach starts after the reach state is reached and before the start of the SP reach. May be executed. Further, a series of effects may be started before the still image effect is performed (for example, the series of effects may be executed one or more times by the start of the still image effect, or the first time. Still image production may start during a series of production).

[20-2. Battle production]
548, 549, and 550 are explanatory views showing an example of a battle effect. The battle effect is an example of an SP reach effect in which a still image effect may be executed. When the battle effect, which is an example of the SP reach effect, starts, in (A), a display indicating that the battle effect has started is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (B), the main character (white character) and the enemy character (black character) are displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (C), the main character and the lines of the main character are displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (D), the enemy character and the dialogue of the enemy character are displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In (E), an image in which the main character and the enemy character jump on each other is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (F), an image in which the main character and the enemy character attack each other in the air is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (G), the image of the main character and the enemy character landing is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

From the start of (G) to the end of FIG. 549 (J), which will be described later (immediately before the timing of the special lottery result notification), the still image effect in which the images of the main character and the enemy character are stationary is executed. In (H), the images of the main character and the enemy character are stationary. Further, in (H), an image of an ally character (character painted with diagonal lines) in which an adhesive plaster (the character "bond" in a circle) is put in the first aid kit is displayed.

In (I), the images of the main character and the enemy character are still stationary. Further, in (I), the image of the ally character who puts a bandage (the character "wrap" in the circle) in the first aid kit is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In FIG. 549 (J), the images of the main character and the enemy character are still stationary. Further, in (J), an image of an ally character having tweezers (the character "pi" in the circle) in the first aid kit is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In (K), the image of the ally character who puts gauze (the character "ga" in the circle) in the first aid kit is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (K), before the ally character finishes putting the gauze in the first aid kit, that is, before the series of effects in which the ally character puts things in the first aid kit ends, the image of the enemy character is released from stillness and the hero stands. An image showing that the enemy character is lying down and a display indicating that the main character has won is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (K), after the ally character finishes putting the gauze in the first aid kit, the stillness of the image of the enemy character may be released.

In the example of FIG. 549, the image of the hero in (J) is the same as the image of the hero in (K) (the pose has not changed), and the hero remains stationary from (J) to (K). , The hero may also be released from rest. In (L), a display "Big hit! Congratulations !!" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 to notify that the special lottery result is a big hit.

By executing the still image effect immediately before notifying the special lottery result as in the battle effect, the player can be given a sense of tension, but the player does not know when the stillness will be released, so the still image is being produced. You have to be nervous through. Therefore, by performing the dynamic display during the still image production, the player can be distracted and the tension can be alleviated.

In addition, the player who sees the still image production in the battle production learns that the special lottery result is notified just before the ally character, which is a dynamic display, finishes putting the gauze in the first aid kit, so the same production is performed again. When executed, you can enjoy the production without being overly tense until the ally character starts putting the gauze in the first aid kit.

When the dynamic display during the still image production is a specific mode, the dynamic display mode may be selected so that the expectation that the special lottery result is a big hit is high. Specifically, for example, when the bandage in (I) is red, the selection rate of the effect is higher so that the expectation that the special lottery result is a big hit is higher than when the bandage is white. Is set.

However, if the selection rate of the specific mode is high, the expectation of a big hit due to the appearance of the dynamic display itself during the still image production is high, and the player's interest in the appearance of the specific mode is diminished. Therefore, the appearance rate of the specific mode is low (for example, 1/4 or less) when the dynamic display during the still image production appears, and even if the special lottery result is a big hit, the specific mode is used. It is desirable that the selectivity of is set to be low (for example, 1/2 or less).

Further, a plurality of dynamic displays may be displayed during the still image effect. When a plurality of dynamic displays can be displayed during the still image production, it means that the satisfaction of a specific condition during the still image production (for example, the game ball B enters a predetermined winning opening) is satisfied. The number of dynamic displays may be increased as an opportunity.

Specifically, for example, each time the game ball B enters the predetermined winning opening during the still image production, one ally character may be additionally displayed one by one up to a predetermined number of people (for example, five). .. The additionally displayed ally character also performs the same effect as the ally character in FIGS. 548 (H) to 549 (K), for example. When a plurality of ally characters are displayed, it is desirable that the effects of the plurality of ally characters are synchronized. That is, when a new ally character is additionally displayed, the cheering effect of the new ally character starts in a state of being synchronized with the schedule of the cheering effect being executed by the already displayed ally character. This makes it easier for the player to notice that the characters have been additionally displayed, and can also attract the player's attention to the cheering effect by the plurality of characters.

Of the dynamic displays during the still image effect, it is desirable that only the ally characters displayed from the start of the still image effect indicate the special lottery result. That is, it is desirable that the dynamic display added by satisfying the above-mentioned specific conditions after the start of the still image effect does not suggest the special lottery result. This is because if all of these dynamic displays suggest a special lottery result, the player may be confused.

It is desirable that the dynamic display during the still image effect is displayed in a position other than the central portion of the effect display device 1600 (lower right corner in the examples of FIGS. 548 and 549). Further, it is desirable that the display size of the dynamic display during the still image production is smaller than the display size of the still image (the main character and the enemy character in FIGS. 548 and 549). The purpose of notifying the special lottery result is to attract attention to the enemy character and the hero after the stationary is released.

In addition, it is desirable not to emit light from the lamp, output sound from the speaker, operate the movable body, or the like in accordance with the dynamic display during the still image production. The purpose of notifying the special lottery result is to attract attention to the enemy character and the hero after the stationary is released.

Further, even before the start of the still image effect, the dynamic display by the ally character in FIGS. 548 (H) to 549 (K) may be executed. As a result, the player can confirm the dynamic display by the ally character before the still image production starts, and the special lottery result is given to the player who has seen the still image production during the battle production in the past. It is possible to remind the timing of notification.

Although it is difficult to predict at what timing the special lottery result will be notified, the special lottery result will be notified in the same way as the series of rocket productions and schedule (Fig. 547). The timing of execution is defined as a specific timing. For example, the special lottery result is notified just before the ally character finishes bandaging the first aid kit or just before the ally character finishes bandaging the gauze. If there is a possibility that the special lottery result will be notified immediately before the end of all the elements, the tension will continue and the player may be tired. is there.

Note that, for example, the dynamic display of the ally character during the still image effect may be an effect in which a series of effects is repeated one or more times, as in the dynamic display during the still image effect of the rocket effect described above. Specifically, for example, a ally character puts a plaster in the first aid kit, a ally character puts a bandage in the first aid kit, a ally character puts tweezers in the first aid kit, and a ally character puts gauze in the first aid kit. A series of effects executed in the order of, may be repeatedly executed once or more.

In addition, a plurality of colors of the title display (“Win the enemy character! Victory is a big hit!”) In FIG. 548 (A) are prepared, for example, white, red, and rainbow colors, and white <red <rainbow color. Expectations may be increased in order. Further, a plurality of title display types may be provided even when the still image effect is not executed. For example, the jackpot expectation is 1% for white where the still image effect is not executed, 5% for red which is not executed, 100% for the rainbow which is not executed, 10% for white which is executed, and 20% for red where the still image effect is executed. , The rainbow to be executed is 100%, and so on. If the red color is the same when the still image effect is executed and when it is not executed, the red color when the still image effect is executed has a higher expectation of a big hit, and the still image effect is executed. When comparing white and red when the still image effect is not executed, the jackpot expectation is higher for white when the still image effect is executed. By doing so, even if white is displayed in the title display displayed before the still image effect is executed, the player's disappointment can be suppressed.

Further, a series of effects by the ally character may be started before the still image effect is performed (for example, the series of effects may be executed one or more times by the start of the still image effect. Still image production may start during the first series of production).

FIG. 550 is an example of an effect when the still image effect is not executed during the battle effect. Following FIG. 548 (G), the transition to FIG. 550 (H') is made. In (H'), the stillness of the image of the enemy character is released, and an image in which the enemy character is lying down while the main character is standing and a display indicating that the main character has won are displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, in (H'), an image of an ally character who puts an adhesive plaster in the first aid kit similar to that in FIG. 548 (H) is displayed.

In (I'), an image in which the enemy character is lying down while the hero is standing and a display indicating that the hero has won are continuously displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, in (I'), an image of an ally character wearing a bandage in the first aid kit similar to that in FIG. 548 (I) is displayed.

In (J'), an image in which the enemy character is lying down while the hero is standing and a display indicating that the hero has won are continuously displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, in (J'), an image of an ally character who puts tweezers in the first aid kit similar to that in FIG. 549 (J) is displayed.

In (K'), an image in which the enemy character is lying down while the hero is standing and a display indicating that the hero has won are continuously displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, in (K'), an image of an ally character who puts gauze in the first aid kit similar to that in FIG. 549 (K) is displayed. Subsequently, in (L'), the same display as in FIG. 549 (L) is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

As described above, the existence of the case where the still image effect is executed during the battle effect and the case where the still image effect is not executed can increase the timing of giving the player a sense of tension.

An example in which the still image effect is executed before the notification of the special lottery result during the battle effect and an example in which the still image effect is not executed have been described. However, as in the examples of FIGS. 548, 549, and 550, the still image effect is performed. The dynamic effect during the still image effect when it is performed (the effect that the ally character puts things in the first aid kit) and the dynamic effect that is executed after the special lottery result notification when the still image effect is not performed are common. Is desirable.

By sharing these, for example, a player who has seen a dynamic effect executed after the special lottery result notification when the still image effect is not performed can notify the dynamic effect and the special lottery result. Since the simultaneity of the above is memorized, it is possible to be more strongly aware that the special lottery result will be notified soon when the dynamic production during the still image production is viewed. In addition, the player who has seen the dynamic effect during the still image effect remembers that the special lottery result is notified after the dynamic effect starts, so that the still image effect is not performed and the special lottery result is notified. If the dynamic effect is executed after being notified that the lottery result is incorrect, the true special lottery result may be notified after the dynamic effect (that is, the revival effect may be performed). You can have a sense of expectation.

In addition, the selection rate of the production is determined so that the jackpot expectation when the still image production is performed before the notification of the special lottery result during the battle production is higher than the jackpot expectation when the still image production is not performed. It is desirable that it is done. Since the still image effect is an effect that gives the player a feeling of tension, it is possible to provide the player with many situations in which a big hit is notified in exchange for the feeling of tension. On the contrary, the selection rate of the production is set so that the jackpot expectation when the still image production is performed before the notification of the special lottery result during the battle production is higher than the jackpot expectation when the still image production is not performed. It may be defined. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with many situations in which a big hit is notified and an uplifting feeling can be obtained at once when the still image effect is not performed and the feeling of tension is not felt so much.

If the still image effect is not executed and the special lottery result is out of order, it is shown in FIG. 550 (H') that the main character is lying down while the enemy character is standing and that the main character is defeated. Is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and continues until FIG. 550 (K'). Even if the main character is defeated, the dynamic display of putting an object in the first aid kit by the ally characters similar to those in FIGS. 550 (H') to (K') is executed.

In addition, when the still image effect is executed and the special lottery result is out of order, in FIG. 549 (K), when the ally character finishes putting the gauze in the first aid kit, the still image of the main character is released and the enemy. An image in which the hero is lying down while the character is standing and a display indicating that the hero has been defeated are displayed on the effect display device 1600. After that, the dynamic display in which the ally character puts an object in the first aid kit is continuously executed while the image in which the main character is lying down while the enemy character is standing is displayed.

The continuously executed dynamic display is, for example, a series of effects in FIGS. 548 (H) to 549 (K), or the series of effects that are repeatedly executed. In this case, for example, the size of the dynamic display of the ally character is not changed until at least one of the series of effects is completed, and the size of the dynamic display of the ally character is not changed at a predetermined timing exceeding one time. To increase. After that, the series of effects is completed, for example, an image in which a ally character treats the hero is displayed, and a decorative pattern of a combination of outliers is displayed.

In addition, when the still image production during the battle production is performed, the image in which the hero is lying down while the enemy character is standing and the hero are shown in FIG. 549 (K) even though the special lottery result is a big hit. May be displayed on the effect display device 1600 to indicate that the player has been defeated. That is, it is possible to execute an effect that makes the player think that the special lottery result is out of order.

In this case, as in the above-mentioned production in which the special lottery result is out of order, following FIG. 549 (K), for example, an image in which the hero is lying down while the enemy character is standing and a display showing that the hero has been defeated. , Will be displayed continuously, and the production by the ally character will also continue. For example, after a predetermined time has passed since the main character collapsed, a revival effect is performed to notify that the special lottery result is a big hit. In the revival production, for example, a video in which a ally character is treating the hero is displayed, and the hero makes a guts pose while lying down.

The revival effect may be performed, for example, at a predetermined timing in which the size of the ally character, which is a dynamic display, has not changed yet, or at a predetermined timing after the size of the ally character has increased. You may. Further, one of these two types of timings may be selected according to a predetermined selection rate, and the revival effect may be executed at the selected timing. In this case, it is desirable that the selectivity of the two types of timing is different. When the revival effect is executed at a timing when the selection rate is low, the player can be surprised and the player's uplifting feeling can be improved at once. Although described with two types of timing, there may be two or more types of timing.

The series of effects executed in the battle effect may end in the middle of the series of effects. Specifically, for example, the above-mentioned ally character puts a plaster in the first aid kit (element 1), the ally character puts a bandage in the first aid kit (element 2), and the ally character puts tweezers in the first aid kit (element 1). In a series of effects executed in the order of element 3) and the effect of a ally character putting gauze in the first aid kit (element 4), element 1 and element in the repetition of the series of effects for the Nth time (N is a natural number). The series of effects may be completed immediately after the execution of the element 2 or the element 3.

551 and 552 are explanatory views showing another example of the battle effect. Differences from FIGS. 549 and 550 will be described. In FIGS. 551 and 552, a timer effect is added. Regarding the production contents other than the timer effect, since FIGS. 551 (A) to (F) are the same as those in FIGS. 549 (A) to (F), the description thereof will be omitted.

In (A), for example, at the same time as the start of the battle effect, that is, the start of the title display, the timer is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the timer value starts to decrease. The timer is a dynamic display in which the timer value decreases with time. The initial value of the timer in (A) is 30 seconds. Although the timer is displayed at the lower right of the effect display device 1600, it may be displayed at another position as long as the player can recognize the content of the battle effect.

In (A) to (E), the timer value decreases with the passage of time. In (E), the timer value becomes 0 seconds. In (F), the display "Maybe ..." is displayed in the area where the timer value is displayed.

Still image production starts from (G). In (G), in the area where the timer value is displayed, a display of "heat or intense heat?" Is displayed, which suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit of the special lottery result. In (H), in the area where the timer value is displayed, a display of "super heat!" Is displayed, which indicates that the expectation that the special lottery result is a big hit is very high. The display of the area where the timer is displayed in (F) to (H) is an expectation degree suggestion display which suggests the jackpot expectation degree of the special lottery result. The expectation suggestion display does not necessarily have to be displayed in the area where the timer was displayed.

Further, from (F) to (H), the expectation degree suggestion display changes across the start of the still image production. The expectation suggestion display maintains a dynamic display before and after the start of the still image production. The display area and the display content may be different as long as the player can recognize that the expectation degree suggestion display is an effect within the timer effect.

The light emitting mode of the various lamps when the expectation degree suggestion display is performed may be a light emission mode corresponding to the expectation degree suggestion display, or the expectation degree from the start of the expectation degree suggestion display to the start of the still image effect. In a light emitting mode corresponding to the suggestion display effect, after the still image effect is started, the light emission corresponding to the still image effect may be performed.

In the example of FIG. 551, the expected degree suggestion display changes across the start of the still image effect, but the timer value may decrease across the start of the still image effect. That is, the start timing of the decrease of the timer value may be before the start of the still image effect, and the timing when the timer value becomes 0 seconds may be after the start of the still image effect. In this case, the timer display maintains the dynamic display before and after the start of the still image effect.

The light emitting mode of the various lamps when the timer display is performed across the start of the still image effect may be a light emitting mode corresponding to the timer display, or from the start of the timer display to the start of the still image effect. In a light emitting mode corresponding to the timer display effect, after the still image effect is started, the light emission corresponding to the still image effect may be performed.

Subsequently, in (I), the expectation suggestion display that maintains the dynamic display across the start of the still image effect is erased, and the timer effect ends. That is, the display is the same as when the timer effect is not executed. That is, the timer effect ends during the still image effect before notifying the special lottery result. Since it is more important for the player to notify the special lottery result after the still image production than the expectation suggestion display, it is necessary to end the timer production prior to the notification and concentrate the player on the still image production. desirable.

Further, the expectation suggestion display, which is a dynamic display, is executed across the start of the still image effect, but the still image effect is performed from the time from the start of the expectation suggestion display to the start of the still image effect. It is desirable that the time from the start to the end of the expectation suggestion display is short. When the still image production is finished, the special lottery result is notified, but if the expectation suggestion display is executed as a dynamic display for a long time even after the still image production is started, the player's attention is the expectation suggestion display. This is because there is a risk that the tension caused by the still image production may be excessively reduced.

Since FIGS. 552 (J) to 552 (M) are the same as those in FIGS. 548 (I) to 549 (L), the description thereof will be omitted.

The sound output from the various speakers corresponding to the expectation suggestion display is one shot (that is, the sound is output only once without being repeated), and after the output of this one shot is completed (player). However, at the timing (after the sound of this one shot can no longer be heard), the still image production ends, the dynamic display starts, and the special lottery result is shown.

Note that the timer effect may end before the start of the still image effect, that is, in the state where the dynamic display is performed, without the timer effect straddling the start of the still image effect. Specifically, for example, the timer value becomes 0 seconds before FIG. 551 (H), the expectation suggestion display is displayed from FIGS. 551 (H) to (I), and the display of the expectation suggestion display is triggered to stop. Image production may be started.

However, the jackpot expectation when the timer effect ends before the start of the still image effect is higher than the jackpot expectation when the timer effect is not executed, but the timer effect is executed across the start of the still image effect. It is desirable that the selection rate of the production is set lower than the expected jackpot in the case of. This is because the case where the timer effect and the still image effect are not executed at the same time gives the player a synergistic expectation due to the two effects. Further, the effect in which the timer effect is executed over the start of the still image effect may be selected only when the special lottery result is a big hit (that is, the effect of confirming the big hit).

As described above, by causing the timer to appear and displaying the expectation suggestion display after the timer value reaches 0 seconds, the player can expect the expectation suggestion display to appear from the time when the timer appears. ..

The timer effect may appear in SP reach, movie reach, etc. other than the battle effect. Further, in the same type of fluctuation pattern, it is desirable that the selection rate of the timer effect is determined so that the jackpot expectation when the timer effect appears is higher than the jackpot expectation when the timer effect does not appear. Further, it is desirable that there is no fluctuation pattern in which the timer effect always appears.

Although described here as a timer effect in which the timer value decreases, the timer is not displayed in FIGS. 551 (A) to 551 (E), and the dynamics in FIGS. 551 (F), (G), and (H) are shown. Only the expectation suggestion display as a display may be made. If the expectation suggestion display is a still image in such a case, the player does not anticipate the appearance of the expectation suggestion display because the expectation suggestion display does not always appear in the battle production. You may not notice the expectation suggestion display. Therefore, as described above, the expectation degree suggestion display is a dynamic display straddling before and after the start of the still image production.

In addition to the above-mentioned timing, the timer display start timing is, for example, at the start of fluctuation, during the change of all decorative symbols, at the time of stopping the left decorative symbol, at the time of stopping the right decorative symbol, after the reach is established and before the SP reach starts, or. It may be a predetermined timing after the start of SP reach and before the notification of the special lottery result.

Further, the timer value may start decreasing at the same time as the timer is displayed, or the timer value may start decreasing after a predetermined time has elapsed after the timer is displayed. If the timer value starts to decrease after a predetermined time has passed since the timer was displayed, the timer value is not displayed at the timing when the timer is displayed, but the timer value is displayed at the timing when the timer value starts to decrease. You may.

In addition to the timings described above, the timing at which the timer value becomes 0 seconds is, for example, during all decorative symbol fluctuations, when the left decorative symbol is stopped, when the right decorative symbol is stopped, after the reach is established, before the SP reach is started, and after the SP reach is started. Moreover, it may be a predetermined timing before the special lottery result notification, or the timing of the special lottery result notification. For example, the timing at which the timer value starts to decrease and the timing at which the timer value becomes 0 seconds are selected, and the initial value of the timer is determined based on the selected timing.

In addition, a plurality of timers may be displayed at the same time in the timer effect. In this case, the display start timing of each of the plurality of timers, the timing of starting the decrease of the timer value, and the timing of the timer value becoming 0 seconds may be different. Further, in this case, the effect executed after the timer value of each of the plurality of timers reaches 0 seconds may be different. In this case, before executing the timer effect, a display suggesting that a plurality of timers are displayed at the same time, a display suggesting the number of timers displayed at the same time, and the like may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In addition, a plurality of timer effects are executed in order in one fluctuation (that is, a new timer is displayed after the timer value of one timer becomes 0 seconds and then the timer is hidden). You may. In this case, the effect executed after the timer value of each of the plurality of timers reaches 0 seconds may be different. Further, when the timer effect is executed a plurality of times, a display indicating that the timer effect is executed after the timer effect is being executed and before the timer effect is executed, a display indicating the number of times the timer effect is executed after the timer effect, etc. May be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

The selection rate of the effect is set so that the jackpot expectation when a plurality of timers are displayed in order or at the same time is higher than the jackpot expectation when only one timer is displayed. Further, when a plurality of timers are displayed in order or at the same time, for example, the expectation degree suggestion display, which is a dynamic display shown after the timer value reaches 0 seconds at the end of the plurality of timers, is a still image effect. Straddle the start of. As a result, the player can be made to understand that the still image effect is an effect that is directly linked to the notification of the special lottery result, and the still image effect can be attracted attention.

Further, when a plurality of timers are displayed at the same time or in order, the still image effect may be executed a plurality of times. In this case, for example, the expectation degree suggestion display, which is a dynamic display shown after the timer value reaches 0 seconds, is executed across each of the start of the plurality of still image effects. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's attention to each of the plurality of still image productions.

The timer effect may be executed as a look-ahead effect. In this case, for example, the display and decrease of the timer value starts from the fluctuation before the look-ahead target fluctuation, and the timer value becomes 0 seconds in the look-ahead target fluctuation. Although the timer display has been described in FIG. 551, another dynamic display effect may be executed instead of the timer display which is a dynamic display.

[20-3. Reel production]
553 and 554 are explanatory views showing an example of a reel effect. The reel effect is an example of an SP reach effect in which a still image effect may be executed.

In (A), the reel production, which is an example of the SP reach production, starts. At the start of the reel effect, a title image (for example, "Align the same numbers on a straight line of the reels!") May be displayed on the effect display device 1600. When the reel effect is started, the image of the reel of the slot is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the image in which the numbers in the reach state are stopped is displayed in the middle stage of the left reel and the middle stage of the right reel. The numbers displayed in the middle stage of the left reel and the middle stage of the right reel remain stationary until the reel effect is completed. Further, in the reel image in (A), a state in which the middle reel is further fluctuating is displayed.

In (B), the fluctuation speed of the middle reel gradually decelerates, and the same number as the number in the reach state appears in the upper stage of the middle reel. In (C), a display indicating that the number stops between the upper middle reel stage and the middle reel middle stage, and after 10 seconds, the number stops at either the upper middle reel stage or the middle middle reel stage ("10 seconds later"). "I'll stop somewhere!") Is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

The display "It will stop somewhere after 10 seconds!" Is an effect suggesting that the countdown effect described later is executed, and is displayed in the same area as the area where the countdown effect described later is displayed. In addition, in order to clearly recognize that the countdown effect described later is being executed, the display "It will stop somewhere after 10 seconds!" May be displayed in an area larger than the area where the countdown effect is displayed. In this case, a part or all of the area where the countdown effect is displayed may overlap.

From (C) to FIG. 554 (N), which will be described later, the numbers on the reels are stopped, that is, the still image effect is being executed. Further, from (D) to FIG. 554 (N), the countdown display is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (D), a countdown display (“10”) indicating the remaining 10 seconds is displayed. Further, in (D), two cheering characters are displayed at the left end and the right end of the effect display device 1600, and the cheering effect is executed from (D) to FIG. 554 (N). The cheering effect and the countdown display effect are dynamic display effects during the still image effect. In (D), the two cheering characters hold the fan downward.

In (E), a countdown display (“9”) indicating the remaining 9 seconds and two cheering characters holding a fan on the right side with both feet on the ground are displayed. In (F), a countdown display (“8”) indicating the remaining 8 seconds and two cheering characters holding a fan on the left side with both feet on the ground are displayed. In (G), a countdown display (“7”) indicating the remaining 7 seconds and two cheering characters holding a fan on the right side with one foot kicked out are displayed.

In (H), a countdown display (“6”) indicating the remaining 6 seconds and two cheering characters holding a fan downward as in (D) are displayed. In (I), a countdown display (“5”) indicating the remaining 5 seconds and two cheering characters holding a fan on the right side with both feet on the ground similar to (E) are displayed. .. In FIG. 554 (J), a countdown display (“4”) indicating the remaining 4 seconds and two cheering characters holding a folding fan on the left side with both feet on the ground as in FIG. 553 (F) are displayed. It is displayed.

In (K), a countdown display (“3”) indicating the remaining 3 seconds and two cheering characters holding a fan on the right side with one foot kicked out as in FIG. 553 (G) are displayed. ing. In (L), a countdown display (“2”) indicating the remaining 2 seconds and two cheering characters holding a fan on the right side with both feet on the ground as in FIG. 553 (D) are displayed. ing. In (M), a countdown display (“1”) indicating the remaining 1 second, two cheering characters holding a fan downward as in FIG. 553 (E), and two cheering characters are displayed. There is.

In (N), a countdown display (“0”) indicating 0 seconds remaining and two cheering characters holding a fan on the left side with both feet on the ground as in FIG. 553 (F) are displayed. ing. That is, between FIGS. 553 (D) and 554 (N) during the still image production, as a dynamic display, a countdown display that counts down for 10 seconds, a series of productions by two cheering characters are repeated, and so on. Is being executed. The countdown display is not a series of repeatedly executed effects, that is, an aperiodic effect.

In addition, in the series of effects (support effects in the support character) as the dynamic display, as described above in the examples of FIGS. 553 and 554, the two support characters have a fan downward and both feet are on the ground. It is a production that has a fan on the left side on the left side, a fan on the right side on the left side with both feet on the ground, and a fan on the right side with one foot kicked out.

The countdown display, which is an aperiodic effect, and the display of the cheering effect by the cheering character, which is a periodic effect, may be displayed in the vicinity or overlapped. If they are displayed in places far from each other, one of the effects may be overlooked. In this way, by making it easier to see the countdown display and the cheering effect display at the same time, it is suitable for players who want to gradually raise their mood while paying attention to the countdown display and timing the notification of the special lottery result. It can meet the needs of both players who want to pay attention and always raise their mood during the reel production.

Further, the visibility of one of the countdown display and the display of the cheering effect may be higher than the visibility of the other. Specifically, for example, the effect is put together only on the one side, the effect larger than the other side is put together on the one side, or the display size of the one side is made larger than the display size of the other side. By increasing the visibility of the countdown display more than the visibility of the cheering effect, it becomes easier to gradually raise the mood as the countdown progresses, and by increasing the visibility of the cheering effect more than the visibility of the countdown effect, the mood is always felt during the reel effect. It becomes easy to raise.

After the countdown display of (N) becomes 0, the stillness in the still image effect is released. That is, the decorative image of the middle reel displayed on the effect display device 1600 starts slowly again. In (O), the numbers on the middle reel move from the upper row to the middle row, the same numbers stop on a straight line, and it is notified that the special lottery result is a big hit.

For example, when a specific condition is satisfied during the still image production, the still image production may be forcibly released from stillness, that is, the intermediate production may be skipped and the transition to (N) may be performed. .. A plurality of game balls B fired by operating the handle 182 at a predetermined timing (for example, a period from 7 seconds to 3 seconds remaining in the countdown display) after the start of the still image production is performed at a predetermined start port. An example of the specific condition is a case where a prize is won or a case where a plurality of game balls B pass through a gate portion 2003 that normally starts a symbol change.

In addition, among the dynamic effects (support effects in the support character) during the still image effect, a plurality of display modes may exist in the series of effects described above. Specifically, for example, there are a plurality of colors of clothes of the cheering character (for example, when red is selected, the jackpot expectation is set to be higher than when white is selected). .. Further, the series of effects comprises a plurality of display modes (display modes of the cheering characters in FIGS. 553 (D) to (G)), but a series of types of effects in which the display modes constituting the series of effects are different from each other can be obtained. It may exist. On the other hand, among the dynamic effects during the still image effect, it is desirable that the display mode is single for the aperiodic effect (countdown display in the examples of FIGS. 553 and 554). That is, it is desirable that the mode of the aperiodic effect does not change even if the mode of the series of effects changes. In particular, in the examples of FIGS. 553 and 554, since the timing of notification of the special lottery result is notified by the aperiodic mode, the player can accurately take the timing because the mode of the aperiodic effect does not change. it can.

It should be noted that a suggestion effect suggesting that a series of effects that can be repeatedly executed during the still image effect is displayed may be executed before the start of the still image effect. The suggestion effect may be executed even when a series of effects that can be repeatedly executed during the still image effect are not executed (that is, a so-called ghost effect may exist).

It is desirable that the suggestion effect is an effect in which the player can infer that a series of effects that can be repeatedly executed are displayed. Specifically, for example, at the timing shown in FIG. 553 (B), an effect (not shown) in which a cheering character such as noise is displayed in the right and left corners of the effect display device 1600 is executed or cheered. An example of the suggestion effect is an effect such as performing an effect in which the effects are gathered on the character. As a result, the player can infer the appearance of the cheering character, and can have a sense of expectation. It is desirable that the above-mentioned aperiodic effect is not executed during the execution of the suggestion effect. This is to prevent the player's attention to the aperiodic effect from being lowered by the suggestion effect in a situation where it is not certain that a series of effects that can be repeatedly executed during the still image effect are displayed.

It is desirable to change the light emitting mode of a predetermined lamp or output a predetermined sound from the speaker according to the countdown display. The special lottery result is the most important concern for the player, and since the special lottery result is notified after the countdown display ends, the player's expectation is raised by outputting light emission and sound according to the countdown display. improves. However, in order to prevent the tension given to the player from becoming excessive, it is desirable that the light emitting mode of the predetermined lamp and the predetermined sound mode are as shown below.

For example, the light emitting mode of the predetermined lamp is to keep off or keep on (that is, not blink). Further, for example, only some of the lamps in the door frame and the game board repeat a predetermined lighting pattern, and the other lamps are turned off or maintained in the lit state. Further, in order to prevent the tension given to the player from becoming excessive, for example, it is desirable that the predetermined sound is SE (Sound Effect) instead of BGM (Back Ground Music).

Further, during the countdown display, for example, a hidden image may be placed on the front side when viewed from the player of the countdown display so that part or all of the countdown display is invisible (or difficult to see). However, it is desirable not to make the countdown display invisible during the latter half of the still image production. The countdown display effect is to give the player a strong sense of expectation, especially in the latter half, and to prevent such a sense of expectation from being cut off.

[20-4. Bee extermination production]
FIGS. 555 and 556 are explanatory views showing an example of a bee extermination effect. The bee extermination effect is an example of an SP reach effect in which a still image effect may be executed.

When the bee extermination effect, which is an example of the SP reach effect, is started, a display indicating that the bee extermination effect has started is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in FIG. 555 (A). In (B), a display for introducing a practice effect of exterminating bees is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (C), a display indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit when the queen bee is exterminated and that the central pressing operation unit 303a should be pressed in order to exterminate the queen bee, and the central pressing operation unit 303a The image of is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In (D), a display indicating that the special lottery result is not a big hit even if the soldier bees are defeated is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (E), a display indicating the start of bee extermination practice is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (F), the practice production of bee extermination has started. In (F), the sleeping queen bee (a large bee located in the center of the production display device 1600), a plurality of soldier bees, an aim for exterminating the bees, and an operation instruction of the central pressing operation unit 303a ("timing" "Aim and press!") Is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The practice production is a dynamic production in which each of a plurality of soldier bees moves as a dynamic display. The aim is also moving. In addition, the sleeping queen bee is moving slowly up and down, for example (displayed at the bottom of the production display device 1600 in (F)), but the sleeping queen bee has a nose lantern, and the nose lantern. It may be moving in such a manner that only the swaying motion.

In (G), the dynamic effect continues, and the queen bee that sways and moves to the upper part of the effect display device 1600, the plurality of soldier bees that move, the aim that moves, and the operation instruction of the central pressing operation unit 303a. Is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (H), the display in which the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed and the insecticide is sprayed is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In the bee extermination effect, if the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed when the moving aim is on the queen bee and not on the soldier bee, an image of the queen bee being exterminated is displayed. In (J), since the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed at the timing when the moving aim is on the soldier bee, the queen bee cannot be exterminated. Therefore, in (I), a display ("Fu ... I was saved") indicating that the queen bee could not be exterminated is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Further, in the practice production, when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed when the moving aim is on the queen bee and not on the soldier bee, for example, the display in (I) indicates that the queen bee has been exterminated. The display is replaced with the display shown, and the display in FIG. 556 (J), which will be described later, is replaced with a display such as "Do your best in the actual production in that condition!". That is, even if the display indicating that the queen bee has been exterminated (display indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit) is performed in the practice production, FIGS. 556 (J) to (N) described later are executed.

In the practice production, it may be set so that the queen bee cannot be exterminated without fail. Therefore, for example, even if the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed at a position where the aim is not on the queen bee or only on the soldier bee, or the aim can be moved to a position where the queen bee can be exterminated, the queen bee An image that failed to be exterminated is displayed, and other effects are executed.

In addition, when the special lottery result is a big hit, it may be set so that the queen bee can be exterminated without fail in the practice production. For that purpose, for example, the aim is to move only the position on the queen bee and not on the soldier bee, or the spray area of the insecticide is increased so that the queen bee is included in the injection destination although the aim can be moved only in the position other than the position. , Etc. are performed.

Subsequently, in FIG. 556 (J), a display for introducing a production effect of exterminating bees is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The display indicates that the production production starts with the soldier bees exterminated in advance. In (M), a stationary queen bee, a plurality of stationary soldier bees, a moving aim, and an operation instruction of the central pressing operation unit 303a ("press at the timing!") Are displayed. ing. Also, the plurality of soldier bees that are stationary in (K) are not located on the queen bee.

In (L), the central pressing operation unit 303a is operated at the timing when the aim is at a position on the queen bee and not on the soldier bee, and a display indicating that the queen bee is sprayed with the insecticide is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (M), an image showing that the queen bee has been successfully exterminated, that is, an image showing that the special lottery result is a big hit is displayed. In (M), the queen bee, which had been statically displayed until just before, has been released from rest. In (N), a display (“Big hit! Congratulations !!”) indicating that the special lottery result was a big hit is displayed.

If the result of the special lottery is a big hit, move only the position where the aim is on the queen bee and not on the soldier bee, or move only the position other than that position so that the queen bee can be exterminated in the actual production. Although it is possible, it is desirable to increase the spray area of the insecticide so that the queen bee is included in the spray destination. By forcibly exterminating the queen bee in this way, it is possible to eliminate an operation error of the central pressing operation unit 303a by the player when the special lottery result is a big hit.

In addition, if the special lottery result is out of order, for example, the aim can be moved only to a position other than the queen bee or the soldier bee, or the queen bee can be exterminated so that the queen bee cannot be exterminated in the production production. Although the aim can be moved to the position, even if the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed at the position, an image in which the queen bee has failed to be exterminated is displayed.

In the above-mentioned example, only the central pressing operation unit 303a is used for the bee extermination effect, but a plurality of operation units may be used. Specifically, for example, the rotation operation unit 302 may be used to move the aim. Further, for example, in the practice production, the insecticide is sprayed by pressing the central pressing operation unit 303a, and in the actual production, the insecticide is sprayed by pressing the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b. May be good.

As described above, in the actual production of the bee extermination effect, the pressing instruction of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed during the still image effect (that is, when the queen bee and a plurality of soldier bees which are still images are displayed). When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, the special lottery result is notified. That is, since the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a during the actual production is important, the player's feeling of tension is excessively increased. Therefore, the player is likely to make an operation error of the central pressing operation unit 303a.

In order to suppress such excessive tension of the player and reduce the occurrence of operation mistakes, a practice effect is executed before the actual effect. As mentioned above, in the practice production, the soldier bees move and are in the way, and the difficulty of exterminating the queen bee is high, and in the production production, the difficulty of exterminating the queen bee is low because the soldier bees are exterminated in advance. As a result, in the actual production, the player can operate the central pressing operation unit 303a with a margin without feeling the pressure as in the practice production, and the operation error is reduced, so that the player's satisfaction is improved.

It should be noted that the time of the actual production (the aim is moving and the central pressing operation unit 303a is effective) is larger than the time of the practice effect (the time when the aim is moving and the central pressing operation unit 303a is effective). It is desirable that the time spent) is longer. As a result, the player's operation error in the actual production is reduced, and the player actively operates the central pressing operation unit 303a in the actual production.

Further, in the actual production, the central pressing operation unit 303a may be pressed a plurality of times. In this case, in the actual production, for example, an insecticide is sprayed every time the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed while the aim is moving, and an effect that can easily exterminate the queen bee is executed. Therefore, the effect is such that the jackpot expectation of the special lottery result is higher when the actual effect that accepts the central pressing operation unit 303a appears only once than when the actual effect that accepts the press of the central pressing operation unit 303a appears only once. It is desirable that the selection rate of is set. As a result, the player's motivation for operating the central pressing operation unit 303a can be improved.

Similarly, in the practice effect, the central pressing operation unit 303a may be pressed a plurality of times. In this case, in the practice effect, for example, an insecticide is sprayed each time the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed while the aim is moving, so that the queen bee can be easily exterminated. Therefore, the effect is such that the jackpot expectation of the special lottery result is higher when the practice effect that accepts the central pressing operation unit 303a appears only once than when the practice effect that accepts the press of the central pressing operation unit 303a appears only once. It is desirable that the selection rate of is set. As a result, the player's motivation for operating the central pressing operation unit 303a can be improved.

Further, the success rate of extermination of the queen bee in the actual production may be set to be different depending on the result of the practice production (successful extermination or unsuccessful extermination of the queen bee). For example, the line "It seems to be difficult" in FIG. 556 (J) (display that appears based on the fact that the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed) is displayed when the jackpot expectation is low. If the jackpot expectation is high, it is desirable to replace the line with a line such as "I made a mistake, but it was a little more." As a result, when the expectation of a big hit is high, the player's motivation for the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a of the actual production can be improved. Further, for example, a production that always succeeds in exterminating the queen bee in the practice production may be set to be selected only when the special lottery result is a big hit. In addition, as described above, in the practice production, the queen bee may always fail to be exterminated. That is, the display of FIG. 556 (J) may be made to appear only when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed.

Further, although the aiming is a dynamic display in both the practice production and the production production, it is desirable that the movement of the aim is a regular movement (for example, a display that is repeated such as moving in a figure of eight). As a result, the player can easily press the central pressing operation unit 303a at the timing when the aim is on the queen bee and not on the soldier bee. Further, the aiming used for the practice effect and the actual effect may be selected from a plurality of types of aiming, and it is desirable that the jackpot expectation is set so as to differ depending on the selected plurality of types of aiming. For example, the selection rate of these sights is determined so that the jackpot expectation is low when the size of the sight is small, the jackpot expectation is high when the aim is large, and the jackpot expectation is extremely high when the aim is oversized. Has been done. Further, for example, when the aim is blue, the jackpot expectation is low, when the aim is green, the jackpot expectation is high, and when the aim is red, the jackpot expectation is extremely high. It has been decided.

In addition, the number of selectable sights may differ between the practice production and the production production. For example, the number of sights that can be selected in the production production may be larger, less, or the same as the number of sights that can be selected in the practice production.

When the number of sights that can be selected in the production production is larger than the number of sights that can be selected in the practice production, for example, in the practice production, two types of aiming, a small aim and a large aim, can be selected, and in the production production, a small aim and a small aim are selected. Three types of aiming, large aiming and oversized aiming, can be selected. At this time, since the oversized aiming with extremely high expectation of big hit is selected only for the actual production, the player can raise the expectation at once in the actual production.

In addition, when the number of sights that can be selected in the production production is larger than the number of sights that can be selected in the practice production, for example, in the practice production, three types of aiming, a small aim, a large aim, and an oversized aim can be selected. In the actual production, two types of aiming, a large aiming and an oversized aiming, can be selected. At this time, since there is a possibility that an oversized aim is selected even in the practice production, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player at the time of the practice production. In addition, since the small aim with the lowest expectation of big hit is not selected in the actual production, the player's expectation can be increased even during the actual production.

In addition, when the number of sights that can be selected in the actual production is the same as the number of sights that can be selected in the practice production, for example, in the practice production, three types of aiming, a small aim, a large aim, and an oversized aim can be selected. Even in the actual production, it is possible to select three types of aiming: small aiming, large aiming, and oversized aiming. At this time, since the same degree of expectation as the actual production is shown in the practice production, the player can pay attention to both the practice production and the actual production.

The aim selected in the practice effect and the production effect may be selected according to the selection rate set for each, or according to the selection rate set as the combination of the aim selected in the practice effect and the production effect. May be selected. However, in any case, it is desirable that the aim having a lower expectation of big hit than the aim selected in the practice production is difficult or not selected in the production production. As a result, for the player, the actual production seems to have a higher expectation of big hit than the practice production, so that the expectation can be maintained or improved.

Specifically, when the selected sights in the practice production and the production production are selected separately, the selection rate in the production production of the aim with a low jackpot expectation is lower than the selection rate in the practice production of the aim. It is set. Further, for example, an aim having a higher expectation of a big hit than the aim selected in the practice effect may be forcibly selected in the actual effect.

In addition, when the selected aiming in the practice production and the production production is selected as a combination, the selection rate of the combination in which the aim in the production production has a lower expectation of big hit than the aim in the practice production is the selection rate of other combinations. It is set lower. Further, it is not necessary that the selection target includes a combination in which the aiming in the actual production has a lower expectation of a big hit than the aiming in the practice production.

In the actual production, it is desirable not to output sound from various speakers in order to concentrate the player on the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a. If sound is output, it is desirable to output only the sound corresponding to the dynamic display, such as the sound of moving the aim. In the practice production, BGM or the like may be output from the speaker. Further, in the actual production, in order to concentrate the player on the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a, the various lamps provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are not blinked (that is, the lights are turned off or kept on). Is desirable.

Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may be provided with a movable body (not shown) that imitates a tool used for exterminating bees (for example, a can of an insecticide, an insect net, etc.). The movable body is movable on the front side of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the movable body is used instead of the aim in the bee extermination effect. For example, in the practice effect and the actual effect, when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, the movable body moves to the front side of the front view of the queen bee of the effect display device 1600.

At this time, it is desirable that the movement mode of the movable body differs depending on whether the practice production succeeds in exterminating the queen bee or the actual production succeeds in exterminating the queen bee. For example, in the practice production, when the queen bee is successfully exterminated, it is desirable not to move the movable body significantly (the queen bee moves the back side of the front view around the initial position of the movable body. Do it in). This is because if the movable body moves significantly, the player may mistakenly think that the special lottery result is a big hit. On the other hand, in the actual production, if the queen bee is successfully exterminated, the movable body may move significantly.

FIGS. 557 and 558 are explanatory views showing another example of the bee extermination effect. Differences from FIGS. 555 and 556 will be described. Although FIGS. 555 and 556 show an example in which a low-difficulty production effect is executed after a high-difficulty practice effect, in the examples of FIGS. 557 and 558, the difficulty level is multiple times (for example, a maximum of two times). Low practice production can be performed. In addition, the difficulty level of the actual production is high, although the practice production can be performed a plurality of times.

By performing a plurality of less difficult practice effects in this way, the player can become accustomed to the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a and relax the tension. In addition, the player who has become accustomed to the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a by a plurality of practice productions and relaxed the tension can feel the capture element in the highly difficult production production and enjoy the production production.

Following FIG. 555 (C), the transition to FIG. 557 (D') occurs. In (D'), the special lottery result is not a big hit even if the soldier bee is defeated, the practice production starts with the soldier bee defeated in advance, and the practice production is performed twice. The display shown is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (E'), a display indicating the start of the first practice effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In (F'), as in FIG. 556 (K), the queen bee, which is a stationary static display, the plurality of soldier bees, which are stationary static displays, and the moving aim, which is a dynamic display. And the operation instruction of the central pressing operation unit 303a (“press at the timing!”) Are displayed. Also, the plurality of soldier bees that are stationary in (F') are not located on the queen bee.

In (G'), the effect display device 1600 displays a display in which the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed and the insecticide is sprayed at a timing when the aim is not on the queen bee. Therefore, in (H'), as in FIG. 555 (I), a display indicating that the queen bee could not be exterminated is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In (I'), a display indicating the start of the second practice effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (J'), (K'), and (L') are the same as (F'), (G'), and (H'), respectively.

In FIG. 558 (M'), a display indicating that the production effect is started and that the soldier bee and the queen bee are moving in the production effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (N'), the queen bee, which is a moving static display, a plurality of soldier bees, which are dynamic displays that move, the aiming, which is a dynamic display for exterminating bees, and the central pressing operation unit 303a. The operation instruction of is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (O') is the same as (N').

In (P'), the central pressing operation unit 303a is operated at the timing when the aim is on the queen bee and not on the soldier bee, and the display that the insecticide is sprayed on the queen bee is displayed on the effect display device 1600. .. In (Q'), an image showing that the queen bee has been successfully exterminated, that is, an image showing that the special lottery result is a big hit is displayed, and the soldier bee remains in motion. If the queen bee is successfully exterminated, not only the queen bee but also the soldier bee may be exterminated. (R') is the same as in FIG. 556 (N).

As described above, in the examples of FIGS. 557 and 558, the practice effect can be performed a plurality of times (up to 2 times) in the bee extermination effect. In the actual production, the queen bee and the soldier bee are moving, but in the practice production, the queen bee and the soldier bee are stationary.

In addition, when the special lottery result is a big hit, there may be a surprise production pattern in which the queen bee can be exterminated by the practice production and the special lottery result can be notified as it is (that is, the actual production is not executed). Even in this case, there is a possibility that after the judge effect (practice effect) of the special lottery result by the still image effect, the judge effect (actual effect) of the special lottery result by the dynamic effect other than the still image effect is executed. However, after the jackpot judge effect (actual effect) of the special lottery result by the dynamic effect other than the still image effect, the judge effect (practice effect) of the special lottery result by the still image effect is not executed.

However, even when a surprise effect pattern exists, it is desirable that the selection rate of the surprise effect pattern is lower than the selection rate of the other pattern (for example, 1/10 or less of the selection rate of the other pattern). If the selection rate of the surprise production pattern is low, the player's uplifting feeling can be improved at once by winning the surprise production pattern, and conversely, if the selection rate of the surprise production pattern in which the actual production is not executed is high, This is because the player's expectation for the actual production may decrease.

It should be noted that at least once of the practice effect may be replaced with the operation explanation effect. The operation explanation effect is, for example, an effect of automatically executing the effects of (F') to (G') or (J') to (K') without going through the operation of the player. Specifically, for example, in the operation explanation effect, the insecticide is killed after a lapse of a predetermined time without displaying a prompt for the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a and without enabling the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a. It differs from the practice effect in that it displays the effect of spraying the agent and displays the retreat result. The above-mentioned surprise effect pattern may be applied to the operation explanation effect.

For example, in the practice effect and the actual effect described above, the queen bee may be enlarged and displayed by zooming in on the central portion of the effect display device 1600 while the queen bee is stationary. This makes it easier to aim at the queen bee. Further, the zoom-up may be performed for the above-mentioned model effect. Further, in the example of FIG. 558, the queen bee is moving in the actual production, but only the soldier bee may move and the queen bee may be stationary.

[20-5-1. Reach production where Daruma-san fell]
FIGS. 559 and 560 are explanatory views showing an example of the reach effect in which Daruma-san fell. The reach effect that Daruma-san fell down is an example of the SP reach effect in which the still image effect may be executed. In the following, the still image effect includes not only an effect in which the dynamic display is executed together with the display of the still image, but also an effect in which only the still image is displayed.

In the reach production where Daruma-san fell, if the main character plays the demon of "Daruma-san fell" and the main character defeats all other participants (hereinafter also referred to as non-demons), the change will occur. It's a big hit. If there is a non-demon who turns to the non-demon after the main character shouts "Daruma-san has fallen" and moves in that state, the main character has won the non-demon. In addition, when the fluctuation is an out-of-range fluctuation, the main character is touched by a non-demon in the reach production in which Daruma-san falls.

FIG. 559 (A) shows a state in which the reach effect in which the Daruma doll fell has started after the reach mode of the decorative pattern is shown. In (A), in the production display device 1600, the main character emits the line "Da-Ruma-san ga-", and during that time, four non-demons are dynamically displayed as they approach the main character little by little. In (B), the main character emits the line "Falled!". Further, in (B), when the main character finishes saying the line, the non-demon looks back and stops, and the movement of the non-demon stops by the time the main character finishes saying the line, and the still image production starts.

In (C), the still image production continues, and for example, the main character and the non-demon are still in the state at the end of (B). In (D), the still image production is completed because two of the non-demons cannot withstand the stillness and move. The non-demon that has moved in (D) will not appear after (E), which will be described later. Even if the still image in the still image production from (B) to (C) is released, the special lottery result corresponding to the change is not notified. That is, in (D), all the non-demons do not move, and the non-demons do not touch the main character.

Subsequently, in (E), in the production display device 1600, the main character emits the line "da ~~ ru ~~ ma ~~", and during that time, the remaining two non-demons gradually approach the main character. The display is being made. In (F), the main character emits the line "Sa ~~ n ~~ ga ~~", and in the meantime, the remaining two non-demons are dynamically displayed as they approach the main character little by little.

In (G), as in (B), the main character emits the line "Falled!". Further, in (G), as in (B), when the main character finishes saying the line, the non-demon looks back and stops, and by the time the main character finishes saying the line, the movement of the non-demon stops. Image production starts.

The stop position of each non-demon in (G) is a position very close to the main character (specifically, the main character after the stationary is released says "Daruma-san has fallen". It is a position that the player recognizes if the non-demon is always touched by the main character within the period). Therefore, if all the non-demons have been defeated at the end of the still image production starting from (G) (if all the non-demons move and the still image production starting from (G) ends), the special lottery result will be. It is a big hit, and if the non-demon survives even after the still image production starting from (G) is completed, the special lottery result is out of order. That is, the still image effect starting from (G) can function as a judge effect indicating the special lottery result.

The still image production continues until FIG. 560 (J), which will be described later. In (H), the still image production continues, and the main character character displays a line saying "Can I stop for another 5 seconds?". In (I), the 5-second countdown display declared by the dialogue of the main character of (H) starts.

In FIG. 560 (J), there is a display indicating that the countdown is 4 seconds remaining. In (K), a display indicating that the countdown is 3 seconds remaining is displayed, and the still image production is completed because the two non-demons cannot withstand the stillness and move. In the example of (K), the remaining two non-demons are moving in the middle of the countdown, but if the special lottery result is a big hit, the remaining two non-demons are at the timing until the end of the countdown. The demon may move at any time.

For example, the timing at which the special lottery result is notified may be the same depending on whether the special lottery result is a big hit or not. Specifically, for example, when the special lottery result is a big hit, the non-demon moves unbearably at the timing when the remaining countdown reaches 0 seconds, and when the special lottery result is out of order, When the remaining countdown reaches 0 seconds, the main character is touched by a non-demon.

In (L), the main character issues a line saying "Discover all non-demons!", Which indicates that all non-demons have been defeated, that is, the special lottery result was a big hit. In (M), an image notifying that the special lottery result "Big hit! Congratulations !!" is a big hit is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

If the special lottery result is out of order, for example, there is a non-demon that survives even if the countdown starting from FIG. 559 (I) reaches 0 seconds, and after the countdown reaches 0 seconds ( The still image production ends at the same time as the timing when the time reaches 0 seconds, or after a predetermined time elapses after the time reaches 0 seconds). Then, while the main character again issues a line saying "Daruma-san has fallen!", The surviving non-demon touches the main character and it is announced that the special lottery result is out of order.

As described above, the countdown starts after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the still image production. That is, even if the still image effect is started, the special lottery result is not shown at least until the countdown display is started, so that the player is not excessively nervous until the countdown display is started.

If the special lottery result is a big hit, the rest is released and the dynamic display starts at any timing until the countdown reaches 0 seconds, and if the special lottery result is out of order, the countdown is performed. After 0 seconds, the rest is released and the dynamic display starts. As described above, since the countdown display ends by the end of the still image effect, it is a display indicating the length of a part of the period of the still image effect, and further, the end of the still image effect (FIGS. 559 and 560). In the example of, it is also a display indicating the timing of indicating the special lottery result). Therefore, after the countdown display is displayed, the player can increase the sense of tension and the sense of expectation at once.

In the reach production in which Daruma-san fell, the special lottery result is not shown at the end of the first still image production, but the special lottery result is shown at the end of the second still image production. By showing the result of the special lottery together with the release of the stillness, it is possible to give the player a feeling of tension in the still image production, but there are not a few players in which the feeling of tension becomes too high. Therefore, the player can become accustomed to the still image effect by executing a series of effects that do not show the special lottery result at the end of the still image effect before the series of effects that show the special lottery result at the end of the still image effect. , It is possible to give the player an appropriate sense of tension to the extent that it does not become excessive in the still image production.

Hereinafter, the still image effect in which the special lottery result is not shown after the end of the still image effect is also referred to as a non-notification still image effect, and the still image effect in which the special lottery result is shown after the end of the still image effect is also referred to as a broadcast still image effect.

The non-notification still image production is prepared to familiarize the player with the still image production, and gives the player a sense of expectation by spending a long time on the notification still image production, which is important for the player. be able to. On the other hand, the period of the notified still image effect may be shorter than the period of the non-notified still image effect. Since the non-notification still image production is long, the player can get used to the still image production in advance and is not excessively nervous in the notification still image production. The notified still image effect functions as a winning notification effect that leads to notification of the winning result of the special lottery, and the non-notifying still image effect functions as a mental effect for preparing the mind.

In addition, the reach effect in which the daruma-san fell (hereinafter, also referred to as the reach effect in which the first daruma-san fell) and the non-notification still image effect, in which the period of the notification still image production is longer than the period of the non-notification still image production, There may be both a reach production in which the Daruma-san falls (hereinafter, also referred to as a reach production in which the second Daruma-san falls), in which the notification still image production period is shorter than the production period.

In this case, it is desirable that the jackpot expectation when the reach effect in which the first Daruma doll falls occurs is higher than the jackpot expectation when the reach effect in which the second Daruma doll falls occurs. By doing so, the expectation of a big hit is higher when the period of the notification still image production is longer than the period of the non-notification still image production, and the player is special as the still period becomes longer in the notification still image production. Immediately before the lottery result notification, it is possible to raise the sense of tension and expectation at once.

On the other hand, the jackpot expectation when the reach effect in which the first Daruma doll falls may be lower than the jackpot expectation when the reach effect in which the second Daruma doll falls occurs. By doing so, the jackpot expectation is higher when the period of the non-notification still image production is longer than the period of the notification still image production, and when the still period in the non-notification still image production is long, the game is played. The person can get a sense of expectation from an early stage (before the start of the notification still image production).

In addition, in the still image production in the reach production in which Daruma-san fell, a plurality of types of poses in which the non-demon stops may be prepared. For example, each non-demon pose is selected in the order of standing on both legs <standing on one leg <swan pose, so that the probability that the non-demon will move when the stillness is released increases, that is, the expectation of a big hit increases. However, it is desirable that the poses of standing on both feet, which have the lowest expectation of a big hit, appear at the highest rate in the reach production in which Daruma-san fell. Since the pose with the lowest expectation for a big hit is easily selected, it is possible to suppress giving an excessive feeling of tension to the player.

In particular, the effect in which the non-demon stops in the swan pose (the effect with the highest expectation of a big hit) may be executed only in the big hit fluctuation (that is, in this case, the appearance of the swan pose indicates the big hit confirmation). As a result, the player can look forward to the release of the stillness in the still image production, especially when the player stands still in a pose with a high expectation of a big hit.

It should be noted that the main control MPU selects a variation pattern in which the reach effect of Daruma's fall is executed, but these non-demon stop poses during the reach effect of Daruma's fall receive commands from the main control MPU. It may be selected as a notice effect by the peripheral control MPU. The peripheral control MPU may suddenly select a pose with a high expectation of a big hit (for example, standing on one leg) in the first non-notification still image production, or the expectation of a big hit in the last notification still image production. You may choose a high pose. When a pose with a high expectation of a big hit is suddenly selected in the first non-notification still image production, the player can be given a sense of expectation from an early stage, and the last notification still image production is executed. When a pose with a high expectation of a big hit is selected in the above, the player can raise a sense of tension and a sense of expectation at once immediately before the notification of the special lottery result.

In the reach production in which Daruma-san fell, for example, the pose (for example, standing on one leg) with a high expectation of a big hit is selected in the non-notification still image production that is executed first, and is executed last. The rate at which a pose with a high expectation of a big hit is selected in the notification still image production is low. As a result, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation to the player from the first non-notifying still image.

On the other hand, in the reach production in which Daruma-san fell, the notification still that is executed last is compared with the ratio in which the pose with high expectation of big hit (for example, standing on one leg) is selected in the non-notification still image production that is executed first. In the image production, the proportion of poses with high expectation for big hits may be high. As a result, the player can enjoy the final notification still image production without giving up the appearance of the production with high expectation of big hit.

In addition, in the reach production in which Daruma-san fell, the notification still that is executed last is compared with the ratio in which the pose with high expectation of big hit (for example, standing on one leg) is selected in the non-notification still image production that is executed first. In the image production, the ratio of selecting poses with high expectation for big hits may be the same. As a result, the player has a certain degree of expectation for the non-notification still image production, and even if a pose with a high expectation of a big hit does not appear in the non-notification still image production, the final notification still image production You can get a certain sense of expectation.

It should be noted that the still image effect may be performed three or more times in the reach effect in which Daruma-san has fallen. In this case, for example, by setting only the end of the final still image effect as the notification still image effect, it is possible to further suppress the player's feeling of tension.

From the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the non-notification still image effect (the period in which the main character says "Da-Ruma-san ga-" and "Falled!" In FIGS. 559 (A) to (B)) During the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the notification still image effect (in FIGS. 559 (D) to (F), the main characters are "da ~~ ru ~~ ma ~~" and "sa ~~ n ~~ ga ~~". It is desirable that the period) is longer. As a result, the period of dynamic display immediately before the notification still image effect can be lengthened, and the player's expectation can be improved during that period. On the other hand, the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the non-notification still image effect may be longer than the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the notification still image effect. As a result, it is possible to extend the period of motion display immediately before the non-notification still image production, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the non-notification still image production will be performed with a high degree of expectation. ..

Further, for example, the period of the non-notification still image effect is longer than the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the notification still image effect. As a result, the player can enjoy the notified still image effect while maintaining the tension enhanced by the non-notified still image effect. On the other hand, the period of the non-notification still image effect may be shorter than the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the notification still image effect. As a result, the tension of the player increased by the non-notification still image production can be temporarily removed, so that the player does not feel excessive tension in the notification still image production.

Further, for example, the period of the notification still image effect is longer than the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the notification still image effect. As a result, the player can enjoy the notified still image effect while maintaining the tension enhanced by the non-notified still image effect. On the other hand, the period of the notification still image effect may be shorter than the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the notification still image effect. As a result, the notification still image production is started in a state where the tension of the player increased by the non-notification still image production is temporarily reduced, and the player does not increase the tension too much in the notification still image production.

Although the example in which FIG. 559 (A) starts after the reach mode of the decorative symbol is shown has been described, the non-notification still image effect is executed before the reach mode of the decorative symbol is shown, and the non-notification still image effect is produced. After the end of the above, the reach mode may be shown, and then the broadcast still image effect may be executed. By executing the non-notifying still image effect before the reach mode is shown, the player expects that the decorative symbol will stop in the reach state after the still image is released in the non-notifying still image effect. Can be done.

In addition, the reach effect that Daruma-san, who executes the notification still image effect after the non-notification still image effect as described above, falls, and the Daruma-san, who does not perform the non-notification still image effect and only the notification still image effect is performed. There may be both a fallen reach effect and a fallen reach effect. In this case, the notification still image effect is executed after the non-notification still image effect, rather than the reach effect that the notification still image effect is performed without the non-notification still image effect. It is desirable that the reach production has a lower appearance rate but a higher expectation of a big hit. As a result, when a non-notifying still image effect appears, the expectation of a big hit is high, so even a player who has already become accustomed to the still image effect can get a sense of expectation by the appearance of the non-notifying still image effect. ..

As described above, when the notification still image effect is executed, although the special lottery result is shown in the dynamic display immediately after the notification still image production ends (for example, FIG. 560 (K)), the display of the still image ends. A specific special lottery result can be determined with the passage of a predetermined time (for example, FIG. 560 (M)). For example, as shown in FIG. 560 (M), a specific special lottery result can be determined by displaying a video that directly notifies that the jackpot is a big hit, or by displaying a set of three decorative symbols. ing.

The predetermined time is shorter than, for example, the period of the notification still image effect. As a result, the player can determine the specific special lottery result while maintaining the tension caused by the notification still image effect. On the other hand, the predetermined time may be longer than the period of the broadcast still image effect. As a result, the player can determine a state in which the tension caused by the notification still image effect is alleviated, and a specific special lottery result.

Further, the predetermined time is shorter than, for example, the period of non-notifying still image production. As a result, the player can be impressed with the non-notification still image effect as compared with the period until the specific lottery result is notified. On the other hand, the predetermined time may be longer than the period of the non-notifying still image effect. As a result, it is possible to impress the player with the predetermined time showing the specific special lottery result from the non-notifying still image production in which the special lottery result is not shown, and to increase the tension and expectation of the player at the predetermined time. it can.

The predetermined time is shorter than, for example, the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the notification still image effect. As a result, the dynamic display can be impressed on the player as compared with the period until the specific lottery result is notified. On the other hand, the predetermined time may be longer than the period of the dynamic display effect immediately before the broadcast still image effect. As a result, it is possible to impress the player with the predetermined time indicating the specific special lottery result from the dynamic display in which the special lottery result is not shown, and to increase the tension and expectation of the player at the predetermined time.

Further, in the non-notification still image production, it is desirable that the BGM that has been flowing until just before is flowing as it is. As a result, although the image is stationary, the BGM remains as it is, so that the player can recognize that the non-notifying still image effect is a series of effects from the previous effect, and the still image is displayed. Even if it is done, the player will not be too nervous. On the other hand, in the notification still image production, it is desirable that the BGM is stopped or the volume of the BGM is lowered. As a result, not only the image is stationary, but also the BGM is stopped or reduced, so that even a player who is accustomed to the still image production can obtain a certain degree of tension in the notification still image production.

Further, when the notification still image effect is finished and the dynamic display is started, a predetermined movable body may be operated. For example, when the special lottery result is a big hit, by operating a predetermined movable body at the timing, the player can easily recognize that it is the special lottery result, and the player's uplifting feeling is improved. On the other hand, when the non-notifying still image effect ends and the dynamic display starts, it is desirable not to operate the movable body. This is because the player may misunderstand that the special lottery result is a big hit even though the effect for showing the special lottery result continues even after the non-notifying still image effect.

Further, when the notification still image effect is finished and the dynamic display is started, a predetermined sound may be output. For example, when the special lottery result is a big hit, by outputting a predetermined sound at the timing, the player can easily recognize that it is the special lottery result, and the player's uplifting feeling is improved. On the other hand, when the non-notifying still image effect ends and the dynamic display starts, it is desirable not to output the predetermined sound. This is because the player may misunderstand that the special lottery result is a big hit even though the effect for showing the special lottery result continues even after the non-notifying still image effect.

In the above-described example, the countdown display is started when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the still image effect, but the countdown display may be started at the same time as the start of the still image effect. Further, as described above, the still image effect may end at the same time as the countdown ends. Therefore, when the countdown display starts at the same time as the start of the still image effect and the countdown display ends at the same time as the end of the still image effect, the countdown display is a display indicating the entire period of the still image effect itself. In this case, the player can measure the timing at which the still image production ends by looking at the countdown display, so that the player can be prepared.

Further, when the countdown display indicates a part of the period of the still image effect and ends at the same time as the end of the still image effect, for example, the countdown display period in the still image effect is longer than the countdown non-display period in the still image effect. It may be the same, it may be the same, or it may be shorter. In order to suppress the player's tension in the countdown display, the longer the countdown display period in the still image effect, the more the player's excessive tension and expectation can be suppressed. On the other hand, the shorter the countdown display period of the still image effect, the more the player's expectation and tension can be improved.

Further, when the countdown display indicates a part of the period of the still image effect, starts after the start of the still image effect, and ends before the end of the still image effect, for example, the countdown display period in the still image effect is , The total of the countdown non-display period (that is, the total of the period from the start of the still image effect to the time before the countdown display and the period from the end of the countdown display to the end of the still image effect) may be longer or the same. It may be short or short.

The countdown display may start before the start of the still image effect and end during the execution of the still image effect (before or at the end). As a result, as described above, the player can see the countdown display during the still image production, measure the timing at which the still image production ends, and prepare the mind, and also display the countdown display before the start of the still image production. By looking at it, the start timing of the still image production can be measured, and the mind can be prepared even before the start of the still image production.

In the above-described example, the countdown display is executed only in the notification still image effect, but the countdown display may be executed also in the non-notification still image effect. It is desirable that the jackpot expectation when the countdown display is executed in the non-notification still image effect is higher than the jackpot expectation when the countdown display is not executed in the non-notification still image effect. The countdown display suppresses the player's feeling of tension, but if the expectation of a big hit is low even though the countdown display is executed multiple times, it is difficult to get a feeling of tension and the frequency of getting an uplifting feeling due to the big hit. This is because it is difficult for the player to improve his or her interest because it is not expensive.

On the other hand, the jackpot expectation when the countdown display is executed in the non-notification still image effect may be lower than the jackpot expectation when the countdown display is not executed in the non-notification still image effect. As a result, the less the number of times the tension is suppressed, the higher the expectation of a big hit, so that the frequency of winning a big hit increases in a high tension, and the interest of the player is improved.

Further, the period of the countdown display executed in the notification still image effect may be longer, the same, or shorter than the period of the countdown display executed in the non-notification still image effect. ..

Since the special lottery result is shown after the notification still image production is completed, the player's tension is likely to increase in the notification still image production as compared with the non-notification still image production. Therefore, since the period of the countdown display executed in the notified still image effect is longer than the period of the countdown display executed in the non-notified still image effect, the effect of suppressing the tension of the player becomes greater. On the other hand, since the period of the countdown display executed in the notified still image effect is shorter than the period of the countdown display executed in the non-notified still image effect, it is possible to meet the needs of the player who seeks a sense of tension.

In the non-notification still image production, the countdown display may be performed during a part of the non-notification still image production, or the countdown display may be performed during the entire period of the non-notification still image production.

When the countdown display is executed during a part of the still image effect, the pattern of the countdown display period is as follows: (1) The countdown display starts from the start of the still image effect and before the end of the still image effect. Pattern A, which ends in (2), pattern B, in which the countdown display starts after the start of the still image effect and ends before the end, and (3) the countdown display starts after the start of the still image effect. In addition, there is a pattern C that ends at the end of the still image effect.

When the countdown display is executed during a part of the non-notifying still image effect, it is desirable that the effect is selected so that the jackpot expectation is higher in the order of pattern B <pattern C <pattern A. Since the special lottery result is not shown after the non-notification still image production is completed, the non-notification still image production is less likely to attract the player's interest as compared with the notification still image production. Therefore, by setting high jackpot expectations for pattern A, in which the countdown display starts at the same time as the start of the non-notification still image effect, and pattern C, in which the countdown display ends at the same time as the end of the non-notification still image effect. , It is possible to draw the player's attention from the start to the end of the non-notification still image production.

On the other hand, when the countdown display is executed during a part of the notification still image effect, it is desirable that the effect is selected so that the jackpot expectation is higher in the order of pattern A <pattern B <pattern C. That is, in the notification still image production, the later the start timing of the countdown display and the later the end timing, the higher the expectation of a big hit, so that the player does not start the countdown display early until the countdown display starts. You can enjoy the production while hoping that the countdown will not end early after the countdown display starts.

When the pattern B with a low expectation of a big hit appears in the non-notification still image production, the pattern C with a high expectation of a big hit appears in the notification still image production in order to suppress the subsequent decline in the interest of the player. It is desirable that it is always selected.

If the timing at the end of the still image effect and the timing at the end of the countdown display are the same, the countdown display may be made recognizable for a predetermined period even after the timing at which the still image effect ends has arrived. Specifically, for example, although the still image effect ends and the dynamic display starts at the same time when the countdown display becomes "0", the countdown display of "0" remains displayed for a predetermined period or counts down. The display may be enlarged, the countdown display may be made semi-transparent, or the countdown display may be covered with an effect such as smoke. As a result, it is possible to leave a lingering sound and a countdown display for the player.

It is desirable that the length of the countdown non-display period in the non-notification still image production is longer than the length of the countdown non-display period in the notification still image production. Since the special lottery result is not shown after the non-notifying still image effect, it is possible to attract the player's attention and give a feeling of tension by lengthening the countdown non-display period. On the other hand, the length of the countdown non-display period in the non-notification still image production may be shorter than the length of the countdown non-display period in the notification still image production.

In addition, the ratio of the length of the countdown display period to the total length of the non-notification still image production may be larger than the ratio of the length of the countdown display period to the total length of the notification still image production. desirable. Since the special lottery result is not shown after the non-notification still image production, the player's attention and tension can be given by increasing the ratio of the countdown non-display period to the entire period of the non-notification still image production. Can be done. On the other hand, even if the ratio of the length of the countdown display period to the total length of the non-notification still image effect is smaller than the ratio of the length of the countdown display period to the total length of the notification still image effect. Good.

[20-5-2. Another example of the reach production that Daruma-san fell down]
FIG. 561 shows another example of the reach production in which Daruma-san fell. In FIGS. 559 and 560, an example in which the non-notification still image effect is executed only once has been described, but in FIG. 561, the non-notification still image effect is executed a plurality of times.

Following FIG. 559 (D), the process proceeds to FIG. 561 (E'). That is, (E') is a state immediately after the end of the first non-notification still image effect. In (E'), in the effect display device 1600, the main character emits a line "Daruma-san ga", and in the meantime, two non-demons are dynamically displayed as they approach the main character little by little. In (F'), the main character emits the line "Falled!". Further, in (F'), when the main character finishes saying the line, the non-demon looks back and stops, and the movement of the non-demon stops by the time the main character finishes saying the line, and a still image production starts.

In (G'), the still image production continues, and for example, the main character and the non-demon are still in the state at the end of (F'). In (H'), the non-demon did not move even after a predetermined time had passed since the still image production started, so that the still image production ended and the image displayed in (G') faded out. .. Further, the image gradually fades out from (H') to (I').

The effect of (J') is the same as that of FIG. 559 (E), and the subsequent effect is the same as that of FIGS. 559 and 560. Since the special lottery result is not shown even if (I') ends and the dynamic effect starts, the still image effect up to (I') is a non-notification still image effect.

As described above, at the end timing of the first non-notification still image production (FIGS. 559 (C) to (D)), the still image does not fade out (without applying any effect to the still image) and moves as it is. It has been switched to the target display. That is, at the moment of switching to the dynamic display, the entire still image displayed as the non-notifying still image cannot be recognized by the player. On the other hand, at the end timing of the second non-notification still image effect (FIGS. 561 (H') to (I')), the still image fades out to switch to the dynamic display.

In this way, in the reach production in which Daruma-san fell down once, by performing the non-notification still image production multiple times, the player becomes more accustomed to the still image production, and the player feels excessive tension in the still image production. Can be suppressed.

On the other hand, as the number of times of non-notification still image production increases, the player may get tired of the non-notification still image production. Therefore, when the non-notification still image production is performed a plurality of times in the reach production in which Mr. Daruma has fallen, the non-notification still image production is produced by fading out the image at the end of some of the non-notification still image productions. There are variations in the image, and even if the non-notifying still image effect is performed multiple times, the player will not get bored. Even when the non-notification still image production is performed only once in the reach effect in which Daruma-san has fallen, the image may be faded out at the end of the one non-notification still image production.

It is desirable that the fade-out time in the non-notification still image production accompanied by the fade-out is shorter than the still time of the image in the non-notification still image production. If the fade-out time is longer, the tension heightened by the display of the still image in the non-notification still image production may be completely released within the fade-out time. In addition, in order to temporarily relieve the tension caused by displaying the still image, the fade-out time when the non-notification still image effect is completed and the image is faded out is longer than the still time of the image in the non-notification still image effect. May be good.

In the example of FIG. 561, after the image displayed in the non-notification still image effect is faded out and completely erased, the dynamic display of "Daruma-san fell" in (J') is started. However, the dynamic display of "Daruma-san fell" in (J') may be started during or from the start of the fade-out of the image displayed in the non-notification still image effect.

Specifically, for example, from the timing of (H') or (I'), the dynamic display of "Daruma-san fell" in (J') is started. In this case, for example, the semi-transparent image being faded out is superimposed on the dynamic display of "Daruma-san fell" in (J'). As a result, it is possible to dynamically display "Daruma-san fell" while leaving the afterglow of the still image production for the player.

In addition, the first display time, which is the display time of the still image in the non-notification still image production with the fade-out of the image, and the second display time, which is the display time of the still image in the non-notification still image production without the fade-out of the image. , May be the same or different in length. For example, if the jackpot expectation of the reach that Daruma-san fell down differs depending on the appearance of the unannounced still image effect accompanied by fade-out, the first display time and the second display time are different, so that the player can see the unannounced still image. By paying attention to the display time during the production, it is possible to have a feeling of further tension and expectation.

For example, since the second display time is longer than the first display time, the length of the second display time can be made closer to the total time of the first display time and the fade-out time. By keeping the balance of the length of time, it is possible to impress the player with both effects. However, in order to maintain the balance of the length of time between the effects, it is desirable that the second display time is shorter than the total time of the first display time and the fade-out time. The length of the second display time may be longer than the length of the total time of the first display time and the fade-out time.

On the other hand, since the second display time is shorter than the first display time, the difference between the total time of the first display time and the fade-out time and the length of the second display time can be increased. It is possible to strongly impress the player with a series of productions consisting of a non-notifying still image production and a fade-out.

Further, the length of the third display time, which is the display time of the still image in the notification still image effect, and the length of the first display time may be the same or different. For example, when the third display time is longer than the first display time, it is possible to increase the tension in the notification still image that notifies the special lottery result. In particular, when the third display time is longer than the total time of the first display time and the fade-out time, the effect is remarkable. The third display time may be longer than the first display time, and the third display time may be shorter than the total time of the first display time and the fade-out time.

As described above, the jackpot expectation may be different depending on the mode of the still image in the still image production (for example, the non-demon may stand on both legs, stand on one leg, or pose as a swan. Big hit expectations are different). For example, a still image with a high expectation of a big hit is displayed by performing a fade-out after a non-notifying still image effect in which a still image with a high expectation of a big hit (for example, a non-demon standing on one leg or a swan pose) is displayed. It can be clearly recognized by the player, and the expectation of the player can be improved.

On the other hand, for example, after a non-notifying still image effect in which a still image with a low expectation of a big hit (for example, a non-demon stands on both feet) is displayed, the still image is immediately deleted by not executing the fade-out. It is possible to suppress the discouragement of the player because the production shifts to. It should be noted that there is a fade in the case of a non-notification still image effect having a plurality of non-notification still image effects having different expectations, and there is no fade in the case of a non-notification still image production without a plurality of non-notification still image effects having different expectations. , May be.

When the image fade-out is being executed, it is desirable not to maintain the light emitting mode of the lamp that was performed in the immediately preceding non-notification still image effect. Specifically, for example, when the image fade-out is being executed, the dynamic display immediately after (the main character is "Daruma-san has fallen") is not the light emission mode of the lamp that was performed in the previous non-notification still image production. The lamp emits light in a mode corresponding to the production). As a result, the player can recognize that the non-notifying still image effect has ended when the fade-out of the image starts, and the player can turn his / her consciousness to the next effect.

Further, when the image fade-out is being executed, it is desirable not to maintain the sound output in the immediately preceding non-notification still image effect. Specifically, for example, when the image fade-out is being executed, the dynamic display immediately after (the main character is "Daruma-san fell!"" Instead of the sound output in the immediately preceding unannounced still image production. The sound corresponding to the production) is output. As a result, the player can recognize that the non-notifying still image effect has ended when the fade-out of the image starts, and the player can turn his / her consciousness to the next effect.

In the example of FIG. 561, the non-notification still image effect without the fade-out of the image and the non-notification still image effect with the fade-out of the image are performed within one fluctuation (reach effect in which Mr. Daruma fell). However, one of these unannounced still image effects does not have to be performed within the reach effect of one Daruma-san's fall.

Further, in the example of FIG. 561, the non-notification still image production with the fade-out of the image was executed after the non-notification still image production without the fade-out of the image, but the non-notification still image production with the fade-out of the image was executed. After that, a non-notifying still image effect without image fade-out may be performed. By executing the non-notification still image effect with the fade-out of the image, the player feels a lingering sound to the non-notification still image effect due to the fade-out, so that the non-notification without the fade-out of the image executed thereafter is performed. You can also enjoy still image production.

It should be noted that the non-notifying still image effect may be terminated by an image effect other than the fade-out as long as it can leave a lingering sound for the player. For example, changing the contrast, brightness, and / or transparency of an image, and monochrome or colorizing the image are examples of the image effect. Another example of the image effect is to superimpose another image or moving image on the image displayed in the non-notification still image effect. Further, instead of fading out, for example, a part or all of the image is displayed in a manner of being cracked or a hole is formed, and a part or all of the displayed content of the image itself is changed, so that the image is not notified and stationary. The image production may end.

Even if both the reach production in which Daruma-san, who performs the non-notification still image production with fade-out, falls, and the reach production in which Daruma-san, who does not perform the non-notification still image production with fade-out, falls, can be executed. Good. If both are feasible, it is desirable that the reach production in which Daruma-san, who performs the non-notification still image production with fade-out, falls, has a higher expectation of a big hit. With fade-out, it is possible to leave a lingering impression on the still image production, but if the jackpot expectation is low despite this, the player will have a stronger impression when the special lottery result is out of order, and Daruma will fall. However, there is a risk that interest in reach production will diminish.

On the other hand, for example, the reach production in which Daruma-san, who does not perform non-notification still image production with fade-out, falls, has a higher expectation of big hit than the reach production in which Daruma-san, who performs non-notification still image production with fade-out, falls. It may be expensive. As a result, regarding the reach production that Daruma-san, who produces unannounced still image production with fade-out, fell, the afterglow of the fade-out left an impression on the player, and Daruma-san, who did not perform unannounced still image production with fade-out, fell. As for the reach production, since there is a high possibility that it is a big hit, it is possible to leave an impression on the player, and it is possible to leave an impression on the player in a well-balanced manner for both productions.

It should be noted that the image may be faded out at the end of the notification still image effect. By fading out the image at the end of the notification positive image production, for example, when the special lottery result is a big hit, the player can get an uplifting feeling by feeling the afterglow of the production leading to the big hit. ..

[20-6. Notification process selection reach production]
562, 563, and 564 are explanatory views showing an example of the notification process selection reach effect. The notification process selection reach effect is an example of an SP reach effect in which a still image effect may be executed.

In FIG. 562 (A), the decorative symbol is stopped in the reach state. In (B), the notification process selection reach effect has started. Further, in (B), the still image production is started. In (B), the left part of the effect display device 1600 has an image of a gauge for suggesting the degree of expectation that the special lottery result in the fluctuation during execution is a big hit, and the right part of the effect display device 1600 is executed. The images of the patrol lamps for announcing the result of the special lottery inside (that is, directly indicating whether the result of the special lottery is a big hit or a miss without suggesting the expectation of a big hit, etc.) are stationary. It is displayed as an image.

In (C), the image of the effect operation unit 301 is displayed in the central portion of the effect display device 1600 while the image of the gauge corresponding to the notification process selection reach effect and the image of the patrol lamp are displayed as still images. Further, one of the gauge image or the patrol lamp image (in (C), the gauge image) is displayed in the same bright mode as in (B), and the other (in (C), the patrol lamp image) is displayed in a darkened mode. ..

The image of the effect operation unit 301 is displayed to indicate that the notification method indicated by the image displayed in a bright manner is selected by pressing the center pressing operation unit 303a. Further, in the image of the effect operation unit 301, by operating the rotation operation unit 302, the image displayed in the bright mode and the image displayed in the darkened mode can be exchanged (that is, the notification method is selected). There is a display indicating that it can be done. The image of the effect operation unit 301 may be displayed as a still image. For example, the center pressing operation unit 303a in the image may move up and down, or the rotation operation unit 302 in the image may rotate. It may be displayed as a dynamic display such as the arrow in the image moving.

When the player presses the central pressing operation unit 303a in (C), or when a predetermined time has elapsed after the image of the effect operation unit 301 in (C) is displayed, the notification method displayed in a bright mode is selected. Will be done. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the image of the effect operation unit 301 in (C) is displayed, one of them (for example, suggestion of expectation) may be forcibly selected, or suggestion of expectation or one shot at random. Announcements may be selected.

In (C), both the gauge image and the patrol lamp image may be displayed in a bright manner without changing from the state of (B). In this case, for example, in (C), it is assumed that the expectation suggestion is selected when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the left side, and one notification is selected when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated to the right side. An image suggesting a selection method by operation is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Further, in this case, when a predetermined time elapses after the image of the effect operation unit 301 in (C) is displayed, for example, one of them (for example, suggestion of expectation) is forcibly selected, or the suggestion of expectation is randomly selected. Or one notification is selected.

(D) is a state in which one notification is selected in (C). In (D), the still image effect is completed and the stillness is released, and only the image of the patrol lamp is displayed on the entire effect display device 1600. Then, in (D), a dynamic display in which the patrol lamp is lit is displayed as a display indicating that the special lottery result in the fluctuation was a big hit. In (E), an image is displayed that more clearly informs that the special lottery result is a big hit. In addition, you may move a predetermined movable body in (D).

In addition, for example, when the special lottery result in the fluctuation is out of order, in (D), for example, a dynamic display is performed in which the effect display device 1600 is dimmed without the patrol lamp illuminating, and in (E), "Unfortunately". An image is displayed to notify that the special lottery result is out of order, such as "...

FIG. 563 (D') shows the state in which the expectation suggestion is selected in FIG. 562 (C). In (D'), the still image effect is completed and the stillness is released, only the gauge image is displayed on the entire effect display device 1600, and the message "Accumulate the gauge!" Is displayed. The gauge can be stored up to 8 levels, and in (E'), the gauge is stored up to 3 levels, and a display ("Still more!") Suggesting that there is still an opportunity to store the gauge is displayed on the production display device 1600. It is displayed. In addition, for example, only when the special lottery result is a big hit, the gauge may be set to accumulate up to 8 stages which is the maximum value.

When the expected degree suggestion is forcibly selected after a predetermined time has elapsed without operating the central pressing operation unit 303a after the image of the effect operation unit 301 in (C) is displayed, the central pressing operation unit 303a is not operated. It is not necessary to increase the number of gauge steps in (D'). It is possible that the player did not operate the central pressing operation unit 303a because he did not want to know the degree of expectation, and this is to satisfy the player's wishes.

In (F'), the state returns to the same state as in FIG. 562 (C). However, the number of stages of the gauge displayed as a still image may reflect the number of stages accumulated in the immediately preceding production as shown in (F'), or the gauge is completely accumulated as shown in (C). It may be displayed in the absence state.

(G') is a state in which the expectation suggestion is selected in (F'). In (G'), as in (D'), the still image effect is completed and the stillness is released, only the gauge image is displayed on the entire effect display device 1600, and the message "Accumulate gauge!" Is displayed. Will be done. However, it differs from (D') in that the gauge is accumulated from the number of stages accumulated in the immediately preceding production.

In (H'), gauges are accumulated up to four stages, and a display (“more and more!”) Suggesting that there is still an opportunity to accumulate gauges is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (I'), the state returns to the same state as in (F').

Then, when the expectation suggestion is selected and a series of effects for accumulating gauges is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), the expectation suggestion effect ends and is currently displayed at the end of the effect for accumulating the gauge for the predetermined number of times. A display is made to suggest that the number of stages of the gauge is indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit ("That's it!" In (J')). (J') is a state at the end of the effect of accumulating the gauge for the predetermined number of times. In the state of (J'), the gauge is accumulated up to 6 levels.

At (H'), the gauge image is dimmed and the patrol lamp image is displayed in a bright manner. Further, although the image of the effect operation unit 301 is displayed, the display prompting the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is displayed, but the display prompting the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is not displayed. That is, after executing the effect of accumulating the gauge a predetermined number of times, in (H'), one notification is forcibly selected. That is, the number of gauge stages in (J') indicates the degree of expectation of a big hit.

FIG. 564 (I') shows a state in which the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in (J'), and the special lottery result is shown by turning on or off the patrol lamp as in FIG. 562 (D). When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display of (J'), the process shifts to FIG. 564 (I') even if the central pressing operation unit 303a is not pressed. Subsequently, in (J'), as in FIG. 562 (E), an image is displayed that more clearly informs that the special lottery result is a big hit.

After selecting the expectation suggestion, a still image effect is performed in which the notification method is selected again (for example, FIGS. 563 (F') and (I')), but one notification is selected in the still image effect. In that case, as shown in FIG. 562 (D), a one-shot notification indicating the result of the special lottery is made by displaying the patrol lamp.

The still display of the still image effect gives the player a sense of tension and expectation, but some players find it uninteresting because they are still. Therefore, as described above, in the notification process selection reach effect, in the still image effect, the notification method of the special lottery result can be selected from the expectation degree suggestion or the one-shot notification, so that the still image can be selected even for such a player. You can get interested in the production.

Further, as described above, while it is possible to select the expectation degree suggestion or the one-shot notification a plurality of times in the still image production, it seems that only the one-shot notification patrol lamp can be selected in the final still image production. It is set. As a result, in the notification process selection reach production, the special lottery result will be finally shown by one notification. Further, in the notification process selection reach effect, since the expectation degree suggestion effect can be selected a plurality of times, the expectation of the player can be gradually increased. Furthermore, even after selecting the expectation suggestion effect more than once, it is possible to switch to the one-shot notification, so that the player can know the special lottery result when he / she is satisfied with the expectation, and by extension, the player. Never get bored.

In the above-mentioned example, when the expectation suggestion was selected, the number of gauge stages was increased in the effect of accumulating the gauge, but the effect was completed with the number of the immediately preceding stages without increasing the number of gauge stages. You may. For example, if the gauge is at least a predetermined stage (for example, at 0 stage) even after the above-mentioned effect of accumulating the gauge for a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) is completed, the jackpot may be confirmed.

In addition, when accumulating the gauge, for example, the player is urged to repeatedly hit the operation unit such as the central pressing operation unit 303a, and the number of steps of the gauge is increased in such a manner that the gauge is accumulated according to the number of repeated hits. You may be broken. However, the maximum number of gauge stages in the production of accumulating gauges each time is determined by a predetermined distribution based on the special lottery result before the start of the production, and after reaching the maximum number of stages, the operation unit is repeatedly hit. However, it shall not reach the stage beyond the maximum number of stages.

As described above, the still image effect executed in the notification process selection reach is when the expectation degree suggestion is selected from the effects (FIG. 562 (C)) in which both the expectation degree suggestion and the one-shot notification can be selected. Includes a first still image effect in which the continuous striking effect is not executed, and a second still image effect in which the continuous striking effect is executed when the expectation degree suggestion is selected. Further, the still image effect executed in the notification process selection reach includes a third still image effect (FIG. 563 (H')) in which only one notification can be selected.

The validity period of the effect operation unit 301 may differ depending on the type of still image effect. For example, after the third still image effect, the most important special lottery result for the player is forcibly shown, so that the player can obtain the special lottery result by his / her own operation. It is desirable that the valid period in is longer than the valid period in the second still image effect and the first still image effect. In addition, when the expectation degree suggestion is selected in the second still image effect, the player can enjoy confirming the expectation level by the player's own operation, so that the player can surely perform the expected degree effect. It is desirable that the valid period in the second still image effect is longer than the effective period in the first still image effect so that the effect can be executed.

Further, the size of the image of the effect operation unit 301 displayed during the still image effect may differ depending on the type of the still image effect. For example, after the third still image effect, the most important special lottery result for the player is forcibly shown, so that the player can obtain the special lottery result by his / her own operation. It is desirable that the image of the effect operation unit 301 in the above is larger than the image of the effect operation unit 301 in the second still image effect and the first still image effect. In addition, when the expectation degree suggestion is selected in the second still image effect, the player can enjoy confirming the expectation level by the player's own operation, so that the player can surely perform the expected degree effect. It is desirable that the image of the effect operation unit 301 in the second still image effect is larger than the image of the effect operation unit 301 in the first still image effect so that the image can be executed.

Further, in the above-described example, one notification is selected by operating the central pressing operation unit 303a in the third still image effect, but a plurality of operation units (for example, the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation) are selected. The operation of the operation unit selected from the unit 303b and the rotation operation unit 302) is prompted, and the operation unit may be operated to select one notification. In this case, for example, the jackpot expectation may differ depending on the selected operation unit.

Further, the image of the effect operation unit 301 may appear at the same time as the start of the still image effect, or may appear after the start of the still image effect. Further, the length of time from the start of the still image effect to the appearance of the image of the effect operation unit 301 may differ depending on the type of the still image effect. For example, it takes a long time from the start of the still image effect to the appearance of the image of the effect operation unit 301 in the order of the third still image effect> the second still image effect> the first still image effect.

A special lottery result is shown after the third still image effect, a continuous hit effect is executed after the second still image effect when the expectation suggestion is selected, and the first stillness when the expectation suggestion is selected. After the image production, the continuous hitting effect is not executed and the degree of expectation is suggested. That is, since the important effects for the player are performed in the order of the third still image effect> the second still image effect> the first still image effect, the effect operation unit 301 is performed after the still image effect is started in that order. By increasing the time until the image of the above appears, it is possible to give the player a period of mental preparation for the operation for initiating an important effect.

In the above-mentioned example, the effect that the gauge gradually accumulates to a predetermined stage after a predetermined time elapses after the expectation suggestion is selected has been described, but even if the gauge accumulates to a predetermined stage at the same time as the expectation suggestion is selected. Good. As a result, the player can immediately confirm the degree of expectation. In this case, the gauge may be gradually accumulated up to the predetermined stage at the same time when the expectation suggestion is selected, or the gauge becomes the predetermined stage at the same time when the expectation suggestion is selected without going through an intermediate stage. May be good.

If the expectation suggestion is forcibly selected after a predetermined time has elapsed without the central pressing operation unit 303a being operated, for example, from FIG. 562 (C), the image of the effect operation unit 301 is displayed. The erased image may be displayed, in which case the number of gauge steps may not be changed. As a result, the player recognizes that the degree of expectation does not increase unless the effect operation unit 301 is operated, so that an incentive to operate the effect operation unit 301 can be given. However, in the final effect in which the expectation suggestion can be selected, the gauge is forcibly selected even when the expectation suggestion is forcibly selected after a predetermined time has passed without operating the center pressing operation unit 303a. It is desirable that the effect of accumulating is executed.

In the above-mentioned example, the number of gauge stages was 0 at the timing before the player selected the expectation suggestion (timing in FIG. 562 (B)), but even at that timing, a part of the gauge or All may be accumulated. However, if it is determined that the jackpot is confirmed when all the gauges are accumulated, if all the gauges are accumulated at the timing, the jackpot is confirmed at the timing, and the player selects the notification process. Since there is a risk that the reach effect cannot be enjoyed to the end, in such a case, it is desirable that most of the gauges are in a state where only a part of them is accumulated at the timing.

Regarding the image of the effect operation unit 301 in the final state, the effect is put together and the color is changed according to the jackpot expectation (for example, if the gauge is more than a predetermined number of steps, it is red, and the gauge is the predetermined one. If it is less than the number of stages, it may be white, etc.). As a result, not only the gauge but also the image of the effect operation unit 301 can make the player feel a sense of expectation.

Further, in the notification process selection reach effect, the image of the effect operation unit 301 in the selection effect other than the last one in which both the expectation suggestion and the one-shot notification can be selected, and the effect in the last selection effect in which only one notification can be selected. The image of the operation unit 301 may be common. As a result, since the image of the effect operation unit 301 does not change even in the final state, the player guesses the jackpot expectation only by the stage of the gauge, so that the player's consciousness is concentrated on the effect that the gauge is accumulated. be able to.

Further, for example, the display period of the image of the effect operation unit 301 and the effect period of the effect operation unit 301 (the valid period of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302 are the same. However, only one notification can be selected at the end. In the selection effect, the display of the image of the effect operation unit 301 may be started before the start of the valid period of the effect operation unit 301. The final selection effect is the expectation of the player in the notification process selection reach effect. Is an effect that can be enjoyed in the highest state, and by starting the display of the image of the effect operation unit 301 before the start of the valid period of the effect operation unit 301, the player can surely perform the final selection operation. You can do and enjoy yourself.

Further, the validity period of the effect operation unit 301 in the final selection effect in which only one notification can be selected is the validity period of the effect operation unit 301 in the selection effect other than the last in which both the expectation suggestion and the one announcement can be selected. Longer is desirable. As a result, the player can surely perform the final selection operation and enjoy it. The validity period of the effect operation unit 301 in the final selection effect in which only one notification can be selected is the validity period of the effect operation unit 301 in the selection effect other than the last in which both the expectation suggestion and the one announcement can be selected. It may be shorter or the same.

Further, when the expectation suggestion effect is selected, the still image effect is executed a plurality of times, but even in the dynamic display executed during the plurality of still image effects, the expectation suggestion and one shot are performed. An image of the effect operation unit 301 in a selection effect other than the last, in which both notifications can be selected, may be displayed. As a result, the player can prepare his / her mind for the selection operation in the next still image production.

[20-7. Hold set production]
565 and 566 are explanatory views showing an example of a hold set effect. The hold set effect is an example of an effect in which a still image effect may be executed. In FIG. 565 (A), all decorative symbols are in motion and there are three more holds. In (A), five hold displays are displayed, but the hold display in the center is a hold display corresponding to the fluctuation during execution, and each of the other hold displays corresponds to each of the four fluctuations from the next time onward. The corresponding hold display.

In the state of (A), the game ball B may further enter the start port (first start port 2002 or second start port 2004) to acquire a new hold, so that the hold set effect may start. is there. In (B), the hold set production is started by the above-mentioned opportunity. Since the game ball B enters the starting port and obtains a new hold, there are four holds in (B). When the hold set effect starts, the effect in which the Great Demon King appears is executed on the effect display device 1600.

In (C), the still image effect is started, and the Great Demon King who appeared in (B) is displayed as a still image for a predetermined time. It should be noted that the hold display on the effect display device 1600 does not change in the still image effect.

In (D), the still image effect is completed, and the effect in which the main character appears on the effect display device 1600 is executed by the dynamic display. In (E), the main character issues a line saying "Holding gathering chance!", And each of the holding displays on the effect display device 1600 moves to the upper part of the main character image.

In (F), in the effect display device 1600, the hold displays moved to the upper part of the main character are combined to form one sphere (hereinafter, also referred to as a courage sphere). As a result, the hold display is temporarily not displayed on the effect display device 1600. In (G), the state in which the main character is throwing a courage ball is displayed. In (H), the state in which the Great Demon King receives the courage ball thrown by the main character is displayed.

In (I), the still image production has started, and the Great Demon King receiving the courage ball is displayed as a still image. In FIG. 566 (J), which will be described later, since the hold that the special lottery result is a big hit is notified, the still image effect also functions as a judge effect.

In FIG. 566 (J), the still image effect is completed and the rest is released, and the special lottery result of either the pending variation or the executing variation of "WIN !!" on the effect display device 1600 is a big hit. There is a display indicating that.

Subsequently, in (K), in addition to the display of (J), the hold display is displayed in the original area, and a display indicating which hold the special lottery result corresponds to is a big hit is performed. In the example of FIG. 566, the hold display corresponding to the successive fluctuations of the fluctuation during execution is shining together with the effect, and the special lottery result corresponding to this fluctuation is a big hit. In (J) and (K), all the decorative patterns are changing.

The appearance timing of the effect indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit (the effect in (K), hereinafter also referred to as a big hit effect) may be immediately before or at the end of the fluctuation during execution. As a result, the player can maintain a sense of tension until the end of the fluctuation during the execution.

In the illustrated example, the jackpot effect is a size that covers the hold display corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation, but may be a size smaller than the hold display. Specifically, for example, the jackpot effect may be an effect that occurs only inside the hold display corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation (the inside of the hold display shines, etc.).

Further, the jackpot effect may overlap a part of the hold display corresponding to the jackpot, and a part of the jackpot effect may protrude from the hold display. Further, the jackpot effect may overlap with at least a part of the hold display corresponding to the jackpot, and may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 on a layer prioritizing the hold display (that is, a layer on the front side when viewed from the player). .. That is, in this case, at least a part of the hold display is hidden by the jackpot effect.

If all the special lottery results of the pending fluctuation and the running fluctuation are out of order, for example, in (J), all the special lottery results are out of order, such as "Sorry ...". The display indicating that is performed, and the hold display is displayed again on the effect display device 1600 in the same mode as (B) to (D), that is, in the normal mode.

In addition, when there is a jackpot fluctuation in the fluctuation during execution and the fluctuation in hold, the jackpot effect may be displayed after performing the same effect as the above-mentioned loss. In this case, the jackpot effect may be displayed after displaying "WIN !!" as a revival effect after the off-effect effect, or the jackpot effect itself may be displayed as a revival effect without displaying "WIN !!". May be. At this time, the jackpot effect may start from the fluctuation before the jackpot fluctuation, which is the fluctuation after the next time of the fluctuation during the execution.

If there is no jackpot fluctuation in the fluctuation during execution and the fluctuation during suspension, the fluctuation during suspension is rapidly digested after the end of the pending set effect (specifically, for example, the fluctuation time is 2 seconds or less). It is desirable that a variation pattern with a short degree is selected). The player is not interested in the fluctuation that the special lottery result is known to be out of order, and if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation is long, the player's disappointment will continue during that time, and the player's disappointment will continue. This is because it reduces the interest.

In addition, when there is a jackpot fluctuation in the fluctuation during execution and the fluctuation in hold, the fluctuation before the jackpot fluctuation may or may not be digested at high speed. By quickly digesting the fluctuations before the jackpot fluctuation, it is possible to quickly end the fluctuations that are known to be out of order in the special lottery result and shift to the jackpot game, which is the time for the player to play. Efficiency is improved. On the other hand, when the fluctuation before the jackpot fluctuation is not digested at high speed, the player can maintain the uplifting feeling of winning the jackpot during the period of the fluctuation that is not digested at high speed.

As described above, in the hold set effect, it is notified whether or not there is a change in which the special lottery result is a big hit among the change during execution and the change during hold. Since there are 5 fluctuations in total of the fluctuations during execution and the fluctuations on hold, the hold set production is successful according to the jackpot expectation degree in the fluctuations for 5 times. For example, if the special lottery result of the change during execution is out of order and the special lottery result of the next change in hold is a big hit, in the normal production, the out-of-order effect is performed in the change in progress, but the hold set. In the production, a production showing a big hit is performed in the fluctuation during the execution. That is, since the chance of the appearance of the time-consuming off-the-shelf effect is reduced, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

As described above, at the end of the first still image effect (that is, the still image effect while the hold display is displayed), whether or not there is a jackpot change among the fluctuations in progress and the fluctuations in hold. Does not show judge results.

Note that, for example, the hold change effect may be performed from the end of the first still image effect until the hold display is no longer performed on the effect display device 1600 (for example, the period shown in FIG. 565 (D)). Specifically, for example, the hold change effect is set so that the jackpot expectation of the fluctuation corresponding to the hold display changed to red is higher than the jackpot expectation of the fluctuation corresponding to the hold that does not change the hold display. Do. The tension given to the player by the first still image production is temporarily released by the end of the still image production, but by performing the hold change effect at the above-mentioned timing, the game is played even during the period until the courage ball is formed. You can give people a sense of expectation.

In the example of FIG. 565, the hold set chance is executed in (E) and the courage ball is formed in (F), but even if the hold set chance fails and the courage ball is not formed, the effect is executed. Good. Specifically, in (F), the position of the hold display does not move and is displayed as it is until the formation of the courage ball fails, each hold display returns to the original position, and the fluctuation is completed. Instead of the effects of (G) and (H), for example, the main character attacks the Great Demon King with his bare hands, and instead of (I), the Great Demon King after being attacked is displayed as a still image. Still image production is performed (that is, a still image having a mode different from that of (I) is displayed). After that, as in FIG. 566 (J), it is announced whether or not there is a jackpot fluctuation among the fluctuations during execution and the fluctuations on hold.

The jackpot expectation when the still image effect as the judge effect is performed after the hold set chance is successful is higher than the jackpot expectation when the still image effect as the judge effect is performed after the hold set chance fails. .. In other words, if the hold set chance fails and the still image is produced and the still image is canceled while the hold display is displayed and the special lottery result is notified, the hold set chance is successfully held and held. The jackpot expectation is higher when the still image effect and the still image are canceled and the special lottery result is notified while the display is not displayed.

When the hold display is displayed during the still image effect, the hold display may be a dynamic display. For example, each of the hold displays may be displayed in a shaking or rotating mode, or the brightness of each hold display may change even if the hold display itself is stationary, or the effect of the hold display may change. You may. By displaying the hold display in the dynamic display during the still image production, the dynamic display and the still image are contrasted and recognized with each other prominently.

It is preferable that the jackpot effect is continuously displayed until the fluctuation with respect to the hold indicated as the jackpot is completed. This is because it can give a sense of security to the player.

However, on the other hand, if the display that the jackpot is confirmed is displayed for a long period of time (until the fluctuation for the hold that is shown to be a jackpot ends), it may be seen by the next player with white eyes, which is unpleasant. Since the possibility of feelings cannot be denied, for example, it is displayed until just before the end of the fluctuation during execution, until the end of the fluctuation during execution, or until the start of the next fluctuation of the fluctuation during execution. The display may be made only for a relatively short time.

This relatively short time means, for example, a shorter time than the static display (I), a period less than half of the period of the dynamic display (J), or less than half. It is preferable to set the period and the latter half period of (J) of the dynamic display. Since the player's consciousness is directed to the jackpot game state by being erased at the start of the running fluctuation or the next fluctuation of the running fluctuation, the player prepares for the jackpot game (for example, how to hit at the start of the jackpot). You can do things such as being aware of changing to right-handed.

In the above example, the jackpot effect is displayed until the end of the fluctuation in which the special lottery result is the jackpot, but it may be deleted during the execution of the fluctuation in which the special lottery result is the jackpot and before the end. .. As a result, not only the jackpot effect but also the fluctuating production in which the special lottery result is a jackpot can be noticed by the player.

Further, when erasing the jackpot effect, the jackpot effect may be erased suddenly, or the jackpot effect may be gradually erased (for example, the transparency of the jackpot effect is increased and gradually erased). By suddenly erasing the jackpot effect, the player is not left with the afterglow of the jackpot effect, so that the player's consciousness can be quickly directed to the jackpot game. In addition, by gradually erasing the jackpot effect, it is possible to leave the player with the afterglow of the jackpot effect and strengthen the impression of the jackpot effect.

Further, when erasing the jackpot effect, another effect may be applied to the jackpot effect to erase it. Specifically, for example, after applying another effect on the jackpot effect to make the jackpot effect unrecognizable, the other effect is erased, or another effect is applied on the jackpot effect, but the jackpot effect After making it recognizable, the jackpot effect is erased along with the other effect. By applying another effect to the jackpot effect and erasing it, the player can leave the afterglow of the jackpot effect and strengthen the impression of the jackpot effect.

[20-8. Split reach production]
567 and 568 are explanatory views showing an example of the split reach effect. The split reach effect is an example of a reach effect in which a still image effect may be executed. In FIG. 567 (A), all the decorative symbols are changing.
When the jackpot expectation differs depending on the decorative symbol that stops in the reach state (for example, the reach state of the "7" symbol has a higher jackpot expectation than the reach state of other decorative symbols), the reach with a lower jackpot expectation. When the decorative symbol is stopped in this state, the player's uplifting feeling may decrease. In the split reach effect, since a plurality of types of timings for determining the decorative symbol to be stopped in the reach state are provided, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the uplifting feeling of the player.

In (B), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into upper and lower parts, and the same reach effect (main character (white character in the figure) and enemy character (black character in the figure) battles in the upper and lower display areas. (Direction) is executed as a dynamic display. However, in one (top) display area, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped in a reach mode, and in the other (bottom) display area, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are changing. is there.

In (C), following (B), the same reach effect is executed as a dynamic display in the upper and lower display areas, and the main character and the enemy character attack each other. Further, in (C), as in (B), in one (top) display area, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped in a reach mode, and in the other (bottom) display area. , The left decorative design and the right decorative design are changing.

In (D), the display area (upper display area) in which the decorative symbol is stopped in the reach state is selected from the upper and lower display areas divided in (B) to (C). Further, in (D), the display content of the selected display area is displayed on the entire effect display device 1600, and the still image effect is started. In the still image effect, for example, the display content displayed in the upper display area at the end of the period (C) is displayed as a still image on the entire effect display device 1600. Even during the still image production of (D), the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are in a stopped (still) state in the reach mode.

In (E), the still image effect is finished, the stillness is released, and the dynamic display is resumed. In (E), as a display showing the result of the special lottery, an image in which the main character loses to the enemy character, a display of "Sorry ...", and a decorative pattern stopped due to a combination of deviations are displayed. Since the special lottery result is shown in (E) after the completion of the still image effect of (D), the still image effect of (D) also functions as a judge effect.

FIG. 568 (D') shows a state in which a display area (lower display area) in which the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are changing is selected after (C). In (D'), the display content of the selected display area is displayed on the entire effect display device 1600, and the still image effect is started. In the still image effect, for example, the display content displayed in the lower display area at the end of the period (C) is displayed as a still image on the entire effect display device 1600. In (D'), the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are displayed in a fluctuating manner even during the still image production.

In (E'), the still image effect is finished, the stillness is released, and the dynamic display is resumed. In (E'), the battle effect between the main character and the enemy character is performed again, and at the same time, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are fluctuating in the state where the reach mode is formed (which decorative symbol stops in the reach state). It is unknown in (E') whether to do it). Further, in (E'), the display "Which symbol will reach !?" is displayed.

In (F'), the battle effect between the main character and the enemy character continues, and the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped in the reach state. At (G'), the still image production starts. After the completion of the still image effect of (G'), the special lottery result is shown in (H') described later, so that the still image effect of (G') also functions as a judge effect.

In the still image effect in (G'), the same still image as the still image in FIG. 567 (D) is displayed. That is, when the display area in the reach state is selected from the split display state, and when the display area in the non-reach state is selected from the split display state and then via (D') to (F'), The still image in the still image production is common. As a result, the player can be strongly impressed with the still image.

In (H'), the still image effect is finished, the stillness is released, and the dynamic display is resumed. In (H'), as a display showing the result of the special lottery, an image in which the main character has won the enemy character, a display of "Victory !!", and a decorative symbol stopped by a combination of big hits are displayed.

As described above, the display area is divided into upper and lower parts immediately after the start of the split reach effect, the decorative symbol is stopped in the reach state while the reach effect is performed in one display area, and the reach effect is performed in the other display area. However, the decorative design is in the reach state and fluctuates without stopping.

As a result, since it is not known which decorative pattern the reach is applied to until a predetermined time elapses after the start of the split reach effect, the player can obtain a sense of tension and expectation even after the start of the reach effect. Further, by executing the still image effect after selecting one display area from the divided display areas, it is possible to make the player more strongly recognize which display area is selected.

In addition, when a display area in which the decorative symbol is fluctuating is selected from the divided display areas, an effect for recognizing which decorative symbol is in the reach state after executing the still image effect is performed. It is possible to improve the expectation of the player by performing the dynamic display and then stopping the decorative pattern in the reach state.

The jackpot expectation when a display area in which the decorative symbol fluctuates is selected from the divided display areas is the jackpot expectation when a display area in which the decorative symbol is stopped in the reach state is selected. It is desirable that it is set higher. This is because when a display area in which the decorative symbol fluctuates is selected, there is a possibility that the decorative symbol with a high expectation of big hit will be in the reach state (for example, the reach state in the "7" symbol). is there.

However, in the display area where the decorative symbol is stopped in the reach state, the decorative symbol is fluctuating when the reach state is formed by the decorative symbol having a high expectation of a big hit (for example, the “7” symbol). The jackpot expectation when the display area is selected may be set lower than the jackpot expectation when the display area in which the decorative symbol is stopped in the reach state is selected.

In the still image effect (FIGS. 567 (D) and 568 (D')) after one of the display areas is selected from the divided display areas, an effect for prompting the operation of a predetermined operation unit is executed. May be good. In this case, for example, when the predetermined operation unit is operated, the stationary state is released and the effect proceeds.

It should be noted that the decorative symbol is in the reach state due to the number of types of operation units that may be prompted to operate in the still image effect (FIG. 568 (D')) after the display area in which the decorative symbol is fluctuating is selected. It is desirable that the number of types of operation units that may be prompted for operation in the still image effect (FIG. 567 (D)) after the stopped display area is selected is larger.

Specifically, for example, in the still image effect after the display area in which the decorative symbol is fluctuating is selected, the operation of only the center pressing operation unit 303a may be prompted, and the decorative symbol is in the reach state. In the still image effect after the stopped display area is selected, the operation of either the central pressing operation unit 303a or the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b may be prompted.

As described above, the still image effect after the display area in which the decorative symbol is stopped in the reach state is selected also functions as a judge effect. Therefore, for example, if the expectation level of the judge effect differs depending on the operation unit in which the operation is prompted. It is better that more operation units may be operated in order to make it possible.

Further, even if the number of types of operation units that can be selected is the same, the type of image that prompts the operation in the still image effect (FIG. 568 (D')) after the display area in which the decorative pattern fluctuates is selected. It is desirable that the number of image types that prompt the operation in the still image effect (FIG. 567 (D)) after the display area in which the decorative symbol is stopped in the reach state is selected is larger than the number.

Specifically, for example, in a still image effect after a display area in which a decorative pattern is fluctuating is selected, only an image in which the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed in white or red may be displayed. In the still image effect after the display area where the decorative symbol is stopped in the reach state is selected, the image in which the center pressing operation unit 303a is displayed in white or red, or the main character in the center pressing operation unit 303a. An image with is drawn may be displayed.

As described above, the still image effect after the display area in which the decorative symbol is stopped in the reach state is selected also functions as a judge effect. Therefore, for example, the judge effect depends on the number of image types of the displayed operation unit. It is better that more images may be displayed in order to disagree with the expectations of.

In addition, the display area in which the decorative symbol is stopped in the reach state is selected from the validity period of the operation unit in the still image effect (FIG. 568 (D')) after the display area in which the decorative symbol is fluctuating is selected. It is desirable that the effective period of the operation unit in the still image effect (FIG. 567 (D)) after the image is produced is longer. If the operation unit is operated during the still image production after the display area in which the decorative symbol is stopped in the reach state is selected, the judge effect is started, so that the player operates the operation unit during the still image production. There is a desire to ensure that it is done, and for that reason it is desirable that the validity period is long.

Further, in the still image effect (FIG. 568 (D')) after the display area in which the decorative pattern is fluctuating is selected, it is desirable that the BGM that has been flowing until immediately before is flowing as it is. On the other hand, it is desirable that the BGM is stopped or the volume of the BGM is lowered in the still image effect (FIG. 567 (D)) after the display area in which the decorative symbol is stopped in the reach state is selected. As a result, the movement of the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol is linked to the BGM (the BGM flows during the fluctuation of the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol, and the BGM stops or becomes smaller in the reach state). In particular, in the still image production in the reach state, not only the image is stationary, but also the BGM is stopped or reduced, so that the tension can be strengthened.

However, even in the still image effect after the display area in which the decorative symbol is stopped in the reach state is selected, it is desirable to output the effect sound corresponding to the effect that prompts the operation of the operation unit. This is to surely encourage the player to operate the operation unit.

When the still image effect (FIG. 567 (D)) after the display area in which the decorative pattern is fluctuating is selected and the dynamic display is started, a predetermined movable body may be operated. You may. For example, when the special lottery result is a big hit, by operating a predetermined movable body at the timing, the player can easily recognize that it is the special lottery result, and the player's uplifting feeling is improved. On the other hand, when the still image effect (FIG. 568 (D')) after the display area in which the decorative pattern is fluctuating is selected and the dynamic display is started, it is desirable not to operate the movable body. .. This is because the player may misunderstand that the special lottery result is a big hit even though the effect for showing the special lottery result continues even after the still image effect.

Further, when the still image effect (FIG. 567 (D)) after the display area in which the decorative pattern is fluctuating is selected and the dynamic display is started, a predetermined sound may be output. May be good. For example, when the special lottery result is a big hit, by outputting a predetermined sound at the timing, the player can easily recognize that it is the special lottery result, and the player's uplifting feeling is improved. On the other hand, when the still image effect (FIG. 568 (D')) after the display area in which the decorative pattern is fluctuating is selected and the dynamic display is started, the predetermined sound is not output. Is desirable. This is because the player may misunderstand that the special lottery result is a big hit even though the effect for showing the special lottery result continues even after the still image effect.

The series of effects shown in FIGS. 568 (E') to (F') may be repeated. Specifically, for example, in the first (F') production, a decorative symbol with a low expectation of a big hit (for example, a "6" symbol) is in a reach state, and then the (E') production is performed again. Will be. Then, in the second (F') production, the decorative symbol (for example, the “7” symbol) with a high expectation of a big hit is brought into a reach state, and the production proceeds to (G'). By advancing the effect in this way, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation even if the decorative pattern having a low jackpot expectation is reached in the first (F') effect.

In the divided display in FIGS. 567 (B) to 567 (C), different effects may be performed in one display area and the other display area. As a result, the player can enjoy two types of effects with one fluctuation. In addition, when the jackpot expectation of the effects displayed in each display area is different, the player selects not only whether or not the decorative symbol is in the reach state, but also which of the effects with different jackpot expectations is selected. You can see Ruka with a sense of tension and anticipation.

When effects with different jackpot expectations are executed in each of the divided display areas, for example, in the display area where the decorative symbol is stopped in the reach state, the decorative symbol changes in the effect with high jackpot expectation. An effect with a low expectation of a big hit is executed in the displayed display area. As described above, the jackpot expectation when the display area where the decorative symbol is stopped in the reach state is selected is lower than the jackpot expectation when the display area where the decorative symbol is fluctuating is selected. By executing an effect with a high expectation of a big hit in the display area where the symbol is stopped in the reach state, it is possible to suppress the player's disappointment when the display area is selected.

On the other hand, when an effect having a different jackpot expectation is executed in each of the divided display areas, for example, in the display area where the decorative symbol is stopped in the reach state, the effect with a high jackpot expectation changes the decorative symbol. A production with a high expectation of a big hit is executed in the displayed display area. As described above, the jackpot expectation when the display area where the decorative symbol fluctuates is selected is higher than the jackpot expectation when the display area where the decorative symbol is stopped in the reach state is selected. By executing an effect with a high expectation of a big hit in a display area where the symbol is fluctuating, when the display area is selected, an extremely high expectation of a big hit can be obtained, which strongly improves the uplifting feeling of the player. be able to.

[21-1. Cut selection production]
During the execution of the fluctuation, the jackpot expectation degree in the fluctuation such as the hold change effect of the hold indicating the change, the look-ahead hold change effect, the pseudo continuous effect, the notice effect of the change, the reach effect, the zone change effect, etc. Various productions are performed to show. Although these productions can fuel expectations, some players find these productions annoying. A cut selection effect that can be selected to cut the effect, which is provided for such a player, will be described.

The hold change effect indicating the fluctuation suggests, for example, the degree of expectation of a jackpot during execution by changing the mode of the hold display corresponding to the change during execution among the hold displays displayed on the effect display device 1600. It is a production to do. The look-ahead hold change effect is, for example, an effect of changing the mode of the hold display corresponding to the pending change among the hold displays displayed on the effect display device 1600 to indicate the jackpot expectation of the pending change. is there.

Further, as described above, in the pseudo-continuous production, the operation of changing the decorative symbol and ending the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is performed a plurality of times during one fluctuation of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. It is a production to be executed. The reach effect is an effect in which the middle decorative symbol is changed while the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped at the same symbol, and the fluctuation during execution is expected to be a jackpot fluctuation.

The notice effect of the change may, for example, foretell that the reach effect will be executed, or give a notice of a specific reach effect that may be executed, or rush into the change during execution. It is a production that gives notice of the production status. The zone change effect is, for example, an effect of shifting the effect state to a zone where a specific effect is executed to raise expectations for a big hit. The zone change effect may be performed as a look-ahead effect to raise expectations for the jackpot of pending fluctuations, or may be performed to raise expectations for the jackpot of changes during execution.

569, 570, 571, 572, and 573 are explanatory views showing an example of a cut selection effect. FIG. 569 (A) shows the state at the end of the fluctuation immediately before the cut selection effect is executed. In (A), the decorative symbols are stopped due to the combination of being off, and the normal background (the road and the two trees on the side of the road) is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

The background is an image having a lower priority than the decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600 (that is, arranged on the layer on the back side when viewed from the player), and is generally displayed on the effect display device 1600. This is the image with the lowest priority among the existing images. The normal background is the background with the lowest expectation of a big hit among the backgrounds displayed during the fluctuation in each game state excluding the big hit game and the small hit game. In addition, the normal background is also displayed when the symbol is confirmed due to the out-of-order fluctuation.

(B) is a state at the start of the fluctuation in which the cut selection effect is executed. Normally, the background is displayed continuously from the previous fluctuation, and the decoration pattern starts to change. Hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, it is assumed that the normal background is displayed in the fluctuation in which the cut selection effect is performed. (C) is a state in which the left decorative symbol is stopped in the change. (D) is a state in which the right decorative symbol is stopped in a non-reach state in the fluctuation.

(E) is a state in which the intermediate decorative symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as a pseudo-ream symbol) called "ream" is about to stop in the fluctuation. When the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped (including a temporary stop in a slightly shaking mode), it is determined that the pseudo-ream starts or progresses. In (F), a display (“x2”) indicating that the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and the second pseudo-ream starts in the fluctuation is displayed. Further, in order to make it easier for the player to recognize the start of the pseudo-ream and improve the player's expectation, the background is usually not displayed (that is, it is invisible) in (F).

Note that the "not displayed" on the effect display device 1600 means that the image itself is not displayed and that the image is displayed on the effect display device 1600 but has a higher priority than the image. It is a concept that includes both the fact that it is invisible because it is covered with an image.

(G) is a state in which the second pseudo-ream has started and all the decorative symbols have started re-variation, the hold display indicating the fluctuation changes to blue, and the jackpot expectation is improved. There is. (H) is a state in which the left decorative symbol is stopped in the second pseudo-ream. Although not shown, the display of "x2" may be performed so that it can be seen that the second pseudo-ream is being executed in (G) and (H).

(I) is a state in which the cut selection effect has started. In (I), a message explaining the upcoming production of the change is displayed. In FIG. 570 (J), the effect that will continue in the future (the effect that expects a big hit, such as the notice effect and the hold change effect that was decided at the start of the change) will be continuously displayed, or the effect that will continue in the future (the effect that was decided at the start of the change) A message is displayed suggesting that it is possible to select either the special lottery result by cutting (without displaying) the effect that expects a big hit, such as the advance notice effect or the hold change effect.

In addition, during execution (FIG. 569 (I), FIG. 570 (J), and FIG. 570 (K)) during the cut selection effect, the normal background and hold (the hold (hold corresponding to the fluctuation during execution), and All hold 1 to 4 hold), and decorative symbols are not displayed (ie, invisible). Although not shown, the fourth symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600 even during the execution of the cut selection effect. The fourth symbol is, for example, a symbol indicating a special lottery result displayed on the effect display device 1600 (for example, a corner area on the effect display device 1600), and is a symbol displayed in a size smaller than the decorative symbol. Is.

This makes it easier for the player to recognize these two options. In the illustrated example, the cut selection effect is executed after the second pseudo-ream, but in this way, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests some kind of jackpot expectation before the cut selection effect. desirable.

The cut selection effect is usually executed after the effect of determining the second pseudo-ream in which the background is invisible. By executing the effect that makes the normal background invisible and improves the jackpot expectation before the cut selection effect, I feel that the jackpot expectation for the cut selection effect will also improve, and I feel a sense of expectation. Some players improve.

In (K), a screen is displayed in which it is possible to select whether to continue the scheduled production as it is or to cut the scheduled production and show the special lottery result. It is assumed that the gaming machine 1 is provided with a cross key that can be operated by the player, and selection is performed using the cross key. By providing the cut selection effect, it is possible to satisfy the wishes of both the player who wants to thoroughly enjoy the expected effect and the player who wants to know the result immediately.

(L) is a state immediately after "continue as it is" is selected in (K) of the cut selection effect. A display (“x3”) indicating that the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped and the third pseudo-ream starts is displayed. Further, in (L), the background is usually not displayed (that is, it is invisible). That is, when "continue as it is" is selected, the effect of increasing the jackpot expectation is executed even after the cut selection effect.

(M) is a state in which the third pseudo-ream has started and all the decorative symbols have started to re-variate. (N) is a state in which the left decorative symbol is stopped in the third pseudo-ream, and the hold display indicating the fluctuation changes to green, and the degree of expectation is improved. (O) is a state in which the right decorative symbol is stopped in the reach state in the third pseudo-ream. (P) is a state in which the display "CHANGE!" Is displayed, which indicates that the degree of expectation is improved in the reach state.

In (Q), the decorative symbol in the reach state moves to the upper left portion and the upper right portion on the effect display device 1600, and the background is usually faded out in order to shift to the SP reach effect. (R) is a state in which the faded-out normal background is completely invisible. In (Q) and (R), the hold display is displayed as it is without fading out, but it may be faded out in the same manner as the background.

FIG. 571 (S) shows the state at the start of the first half of the SP reach, and the title image of the first half of the SP reach is displayed. During SP reach, in principle, the decorative design in the reach state and the hold display are displayed. (T) is a state in which the title in the first half of SP reach has been deleted. (U) is a state in which the concrete production of the first half of the SP reach has started. The first half of the SP reach in FIG. 571 is a production in which the main character catches the flying rock, throws the rock away, and develops into the latter half of the SP reach, and if it is crushed by the rock, the deviation is announced.

In (V), an image in which the main character is catching the rock is displayed. In (W), an image of the main character throwing a rock is displayed. In (X), an image showing that the main character has succeeded in the mission in the first half of SP reach is displayed. (Y) is a state in which the movable body has moved to a position where it covers the effect display device 1600. Since the movable body covers the effect display device 1600, a part of the decorative design and the hold display becomes invisible. It should be noted that the movable body may make part or all of the hold display indicating the fluctuation invisible. In addition, the movable body may make all of the decorative symbols invisible, or may make all of the hold display invisible.

(Z) is a state in which the latter half of the SP reach has started, and the title image of the latter half of the SP reach is displayed. In the latter half of the SP reach, a battle occurs between the main character and the enemy character, and if the main character wins, a big hit is announced, and if the enemy character wins, the loss is announced. In (Z), the movable body appearing in (X) returns to the reference position, and the entire effect display device 1600 is visible. Further, in (Z), the hold display indicating the fluctuation changes to red, and the jackpot expectation is improved.

In (A2), an image in which the main character and the enemy character are facing each other is displayed. In FIG. 571 (B2), an image in which the main character and the enemy character are attacking each other is displayed. Further, in (B2), the hold display indicating the fluctuation is changed to gold, and the jackpot expectation is improved.

In (C2), an image in which the main character is defeated by the enemy character is displayed. In (D2), the intermediate decorative symbol is stopped, and the decorative symbol is stopped in a combination of detachment. After that, for example, the display other than the hold display on the effect display device 1600 fades out and is erased. At this time, the hold display may also be faded out. After that, for example, on the normal background, a combination decorative symbol that is out of alignment is displayed in addition to the hold display, the decorative symbol is completely stopped, and the symbol is fixed.

In the case of a jackpot fluctuation, an image in which the main character has won the enemy character is displayed instead of (C2), and the decorative symbol is stopped at the jackpot combination instead of (D2). After that, for example, the display other than the hold display on the effect display device 1600 fades out and is erased. At this time, the hold display may also be faded out. After that, for example, a combination decorative symbol of a big hit is displayed on the normal background in addition to the hold display, the decorative symbol is completely stopped, and the symbol is confirmed.

In (D2), after the decorative symbol is stopped due to the combination of being off, the display other than the hold display fades out and is erased, and then when the normal background is made recognizable or the normal background is made recognizable. It is desirable to output a normal BGM or a normal lamp after a lapse of a predetermined time from. This is because the player can prepare for the next fluctuation by the normal BGM or the normal lamp. Further, it is desirable to continuously output the normal BGM and the normal lamp even when the next fluctuation is not held and the demo screen is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed. The normal BGM is the BGM having the lowest expectation of a big hit among the BGMs output during fluctuations in each game state excluding the big hit game and the small hit game, and the normal lamp is each game excluding the big hit game and the small hit game. In the state, it is the lamp pattern with the lowest expectation of big hit among the lamp patterns output during fluctuation.

After "Continue as it is" in FIG. 570 (K) is selected, the cut selection effect may appear again. This is because the player may choose to continue the planned production, but may feel that the production is redundant when actually continuing. When the timing at which the cut selection effect is output and the timing at which the planned effect appears are the same, it is desirable that the cut selection effect is displayed with priority. As the timing for the cut selection effect to appear again, for example, after the timing when it is confirmed to enter the third pseudo-ream until the reach is established (after FIG. 570 (M) or (N)), the first half of the SP reach. Immediately before the start (after FIG. 570 (R)), etc. That is, the number of times that the background is normally invisible except for the cut selection effect in one variation is equal to or greater than the number of times the cut selection effect is executed.

FIG. 573 (K') is the same state as in FIG. 570 (K), but the cursor is selected for "I want to know quickly" for cutting the effect and showing the special lottery result. (L') is a state in which "I want to know quickly" is selected in (K'). Since it was selected to cut the production, the production in the middle was cut significantly (all), and in (L'), an image showing that the main character similar to FIG. 572 (C2) was defeated by the enemy character (L'). That is, an image showing that the special lottery result is out of order) is displayed. In other words, when "I want to know quickly" is selected, no advance notice effect that raises the jackpot expectation is performed after the cut selection effect.

In (M'), similarly to FIG. 572 (D2), the intermediate decorative symbol is stopped, and the decorative symbol is stopped in a combination of detachment. Since the fluctuation time selected at the time of winning does not change even if the production is significantly cut, a message indicating that the time is left is displayed in (N'). The message (N') may be displayed until, for example, the end of the fluctuation time, or may be displayed until a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds before) the end of the fluctuation time.

If the message is erased before the end of the fluctuation time, for example, in the effect display device 1600, a combination decorative symbol that is out of alignment is displayed on the normal background in addition to the hold display, and the decorative symbol is complete. Stops at and the design is confirmed. It should be noted that the predetermined movable body may operate after the normal background is displayed and before the decorative symbol is completely stopped. However, the predetermined movable body does not operate the maximum movable width as shown in FIG. 571 (Y), but operates in such a manner that the movable body shakes a little, or operates only a predetermined distance from the reference position. It is desirable to do it.

In this case, it is desirable not to output the normal BGM or the normal lamp after the normal background becomes recognizable. This is to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the next fluctuation starts immediately even though there is sufficient time before the next fluctuation starts. Further, it is desirable that the normal BGM and the normal lamp are not output even if the demo screen is displayed after a predetermined time has passed without holding the next fluctuation.

As the message of (M') indicates, there is a large amount of time from the time when the special lottery result is shown until the end of the fluctuation time, so that the player can complete another task in the meantime. In addition, as shown in the illustrated example, when many effects with high expectation of big hits are scheduled to be executed despite the fluctuations, by cutting these effects with high expectations for big hits. It is possible to suppress the disappointment that the player would have felt if he did not cut.

In addition, for example, in the case where the fluctuation during execution or the fluctuation after the next time which is held is a hit, if the hit game starts while the player has completed another task, the player will not be able to do so. Along with the message, a display indicating the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation in progress may be displayed because it may be profitable.

It should be noted that, for example, when displaying a screen in which the start or continuation of the pseudo-ream is confirmed (when the pseudo-ream symbol is stopped) or immediately before the start of the SP reach, a big hit is expected after the background is usually invisible. From each of the first hours, which is the time until the effect to improve the degree is executed, from the time when the normal background becomes invisible in the cut selection effect until "I want to know quickly" is selected and the fluctuation ends. The second time, which is the time, is longer. As a result, when the production is cut, the player can secure sufficient time to complete another task. However, it is desirable that the total of the first time in one fluctuation is longer than the second time.

On the other hand, the second hour may be shorter than each of the first hours. For players who have selected "I want to know quickly" because there is no particular business and I want to suppress disappointment when a production with high expectation for big hits appears, I will give a special lottery result. This is because if the time from the indication to the end of the fluctuation is long, the time for feeling bored becomes long.

Similarly, in order to allow the player to have enough time to complete another task when the production is cut, the second time is, for example, from the start of the production to improve the jackpot expectation. It is longer than the third time, which is the time until the end, and the fourth time, which is the time from the start of the effect of improving the jackpot expectation to the execution of the effect of actually improving the jackpot expectation. On the other hand, the second time may be shorter than the third time or the fourth time so that the player who selects "I want to know quickly" in the cut selection effect does not feel bored for a long time.

In addition, from the 5th time included in the 4th hour from the start of the effect of improving the big hit expectation to the execution of the effect of actually improving the big hit expectation, the effect of actually improving the big hit expectation is executed. It is desirable that the sixth time from the time the game is played to the end of the production that improves the expectation of a big hit is longer. This is because if the effect of actually improving the jackpot expectation is executed at an early timing, the player will be bored during the sixth hour, which is a longer time. On the other hand, the 6th hour may be shorter than the 5th hour. This is because some players want to recognize the improvement in the expectation of big hits at an early timing and enjoy the production of the sixth hour, which is a long time.

It is desirable that the cut selection effect appears only in a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern of less than half of all fluctuation patterns). This is because if the cut selection effect appears in many variable patterns, the player who does not want to cut the effect finds it bothersome to select "continue as it is" every time, and the interest is reduced. In particular, especially in the variation pattern of shortened variation (the variation pattern having a short variation time selected only when a predetermined number or more are held), it is not necessary to cut the effect, so that the cut selection effect does not appear.

As the specific pattern, there are fluctuation patterns with high expectation of big hits, such as fluctuation patterns in which the first half of SP reach is performed, fluctuation patterns in which the first half and second half of SP reach are performed, and the like. By the appearance of the cut selection effect in the fluctuation pattern with high expectation of big hits in this way, even the player who does not want to cut the effect can have a sense of expectation for the appearance of the cut selection effect itself.

When a specific condition is satisfied, the cut selection effect may be generated without fail. For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is designed so that the player can always select the effect mode at the start of the fluctuation and the pachinko machine 1 is switched to the selected effect mode from the next variation, the effect mode is switched. This is an example under a specific condition, and the cut selection effect may always occur due to the variation in which the effect mode is selected to be switched.

In addition, when "I want to know quickly" (that is, to cut the effect) is selected in the cut selection effect, it is out of the question whether the advance notice effect (the special lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation during execution is a big hit). Although the production that suggests whether or not it is cut significantly (all), it directly indicates whether the notification production such as the resurrection production (that is, the special lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation during execution is a big hit or not). The effect of notifying) may be executed without being cut. Announcement productions such as revival productions are productions that maximize the uplifting feeling of the player and are extremely infrequent (premium) productions, so even for players who cut the production in the cut selection production. This is because it is an extremely important production.

When the notification effect is performed when the effect is cut in the cut selection effect, for example, the notification effect may be performed between (M') and (N'), or the message of (N') may be displayed. It may be displayed until a predetermined time before the end of the fluctuation time (for example, 20 seconds before), and the notification effect may be performed after the predetermined time has elapsed.

[21-2. Reach change production]
Hereinafter, the reach change effect, which is an effect in which the player himself / herself can select and change the content of the reach effect executed during the fluctuation, will be described. 574, 575, and 576 are explanatory views showing an example of the reach change effect.

FIG. 574 (A) is a state in which the display “CHANGE!” Is displayed, which indicates that the decorative symbol is in the reach state and the degree of expectation is further improved, as in FIG. 570 (P). In (A), the background is usually displayed. Further, in (A), the hold display indicating the fluctuation is displayed in green, which has a higher expectation of big hit than the normal display mode.

(B) is a state in which the decorative symbol in the reach state moves to the upper left portion and the upper right portion on the effect display device 1600, and the decorative symbol fades out and is about to be erased in order to shift to the SP reach effect. (C) is a state in which the faded-out decorative pattern is completely invisible. In (C), the hold display indicating the change is changed to red, which has a higher expectation of a big hit. In addition, in (B) to (C), not only the decorative pattern but also the normal background may be faded out and erased as in FIGS. 572 (Q) to (R).

(D) is the SP reach production with the highest expectation of a big hit among the reach productions that can be executed by the pachinko machine 1 (excluding the reach production with a fixed big hit such as the full rotation reach), "Shura's End Reach". The title of is displayed. During the execution of "Shura no Sueji Reach", a special background image (flame-like background in the figure) is displayed. Since "Shura no Sueji Reach" is an SP reach production with a high expectation of a big hit, when the dedicated background image is displayed, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when the normal background is displayed. Hereinafter, the dedicated background image is also referred to as a high-expectation background.

(E) is a state in which the reach change effect has started. In (E), although the "end of Shura" reach, which has a high expectation for big hits, is executed, a message indicating that the player will feel embarrassed if the fluctuation is out of order is displayed. Has been done. In (F), a message indicating that the reach effect can be changed to the “small fish advance reach” effect, which has the lowest expectation among the SP reach, is displayed.

In (G), a screen is displayed in which it is possible to select whether to continuously execute the "End of Shura Reach" effect currently being executed or to change to the "Advance Reach of Small Fish" effect. As with the cut selection effect described above, the reach effect can be selected using the cross key. By providing a reach change effect, players who want to enjoy the highly anticipated "End of Shura Reach" and other players who want to enjoy "End of Shura Reach" will be noticed. It is possible to meet the needs of both the player who wants to avoid (especially when it is an out-of-range fluctuation and does not want to receive more attention).

As shown in the figure, it is desirable that the high-expectation background is displayed continuously from the time when the title of "Shura no Sueji Reach" is displayed during the reach change effect. This is because once the high-expectation background is erased without the player's intention, the player's sense of expectation may be reduced.

(H) is a state immediately after "・ strongest reach" Shura no Setsuji "" is selected in (G) of the reach change production, and is a continuation of (D) of "Shura no Sueji Reach". .. In (H), an image in which the main character goes to the enemy character with the help of the heroine character is displayed. In (I), an image in which the main character confronts the enemy character and accumulates power is displayed. In FIG. 575 (J), an image in which the main character and the enemy character are striking each other is displayed.

In (K), an image in which the main character has collapsed, that is, an image indicating that the special lottery result is out of order is displayed (when the special lottery result is a big hit, the enemy is not the main character in (K). The image of the collapsed character is displayed). In (L), the intermediate decorative symbol is stopped, and the decorative symbol is stopped in the combination of the big hits (when the special lottery result is a big hit, the decorative symbol is stopped in the combination of the big hits in (L)). After that, for example, when the special lottery result is out of order, the display other than the hold display in the effect display device 1600 fades out and is erased. Is displayed, the decorative design is completely stopped, the design is confirmed, and the special lottery result is out of order, the display on the production display device 1600 is not faded out, and the background dedicated to "Shura's End Reach" is displayed. The decorative design of the jackpot combination is completely stopped on the image and the design is confirmed.

FIG. 576 (G') is the same state as in FIG. 574 (G), but the cursor is selected for "・ Weakest reach" Advance of small fish "". (H') is a state in which "・ Weakest reach" Advance of small fish "" is selected in (G') and "Advance reach of small fish" has started. If the player does not operate the cross key, for example, "advance reach of small fish" may be forcibly selected. In particular, when the player does not operate the cross key due to the deviation fluctuation, it is preferable to forcibly select "advance reach of small fish".

Further, for example, a fake reach change effect may occur, and in the fake reach change effect, a predetermined "advancement of small fish" or "advance reach of small fish" is not required. Is automatically executed.

Since the "advance reach of small fish" is an SP reach with a low expectation of a big hit, the background is usually displayed even during the reach production in order to prevent the player from having excessive expectations. As shown in the figure, even if the reach effect is changed to "Advance reach of small fish" with low expectation, the hold display is in the same mode as when the reach change effect is entered (including before the entry) (red in the figure). ) Is displayed. As a result, it becomes difficult to attract the attention of other players because the "advance reach of small fish" with a low jackpot expectation is executed, and the hold display of the mode with a high jackpot expectation is displayed, so that the player Can secretly maintain a sense of expectation.

In (I'), an image foretelling that a rock will fall from above the main character is displayed. In (J'), an image showing that a rock falls from above the hero character and if the hero character can avoid the rock, it will be a big hit is displayed. In (K'), an image in which the main character is crushed by the rock without being able to avoid the rock, that is, an image showing that the special lottery result is out of order is displayed. In (L'), the intermediate decorative symbol is stopped, and the decorative symbol is stopped in a combination of being out of alignment. After that, for example, each decorative symbol moves to a normal position and the symbol is fixed.

In addition, since "Advance reach of small fish" is a reach production with low expectation of big hits, it is not a dedicated sound effect, BGM or lamp, but a normal time (reach during fluctuation) so as not to give the player excessive expectations. It is desirable to output the same sound effects, BGM, and lamps as (when is not executed).

As for the execution time of the "advance reach of small fish", after the "end of Shura reach" is started in FIG. 574 (D), the "advance reach of small fish" is selected in FIG. 576 (G') to change the reach. It is desirable that it is shorter than the time until the end. This is because the "advance reach of small fish" is a simple reach production with low expectation of big hits, so that the player may get bored if it takes a long time. Even if "Advance reach of small fish" is selected, the fluctuation time does not change, so during the execution of "Advance reach of small fish", the design is hidden and "Wait for a while". A message such as "Please" may be displayed.

In addition, when "Advance reach of small fish" is selected in the reach change effect and the screen is switched to "Advance reach of small fish", it is desirable to make the decorative pattern unrecognizable once. As a result, the player can expect that the tempai symbol being reached will be promoted (for example, the reach of the decorative symbol "7" has a higher expectation of a big hit than the reach of other decorative symbols).

In addition, when "Advance reach of small fish" is selected in the reach change effect and the screen is switched to "Advance reach of small fish", the image of the effect display device 1600 may be blacked out, or "The end of Shura". An effect that does not appear in either "Reach" or "Advance Reach of Small Fish" may be displayed. By displaying such a special switching screen, the player can have a sense of expectation even when "advance reach of small fish" is selected.

Also, when "Coarse fish march reach" is selected in the reach change effect and the screen is switched to "Coarse fish march reach", the start screen of "Coarse fish march reach" is displayed so that it can be gradually recognized. You may. Specifically, for example, the start screen is gradually faded in from the translucent state, or the movable body is gradually returned to the reference position after being moved onto the effect display device 1600 when the screen is switched. Or something. When the start screen is gradually recognizable, the decorative design may be displayed so as to be gradually recognizable.

On the other hand, when "Advance reach of small fish" is selected in the reach change production and the screen is switched to "Advance reach of small fish", if a special switching screen is displayed, a production with low expectation of big hit will be performed from now on. Nevertheless, some players do not want to see the extra production, so the start screen of "Advance Reach of Small Fish" may be displayed so that it can be immediately recognized. When the start screen is immediately recognizable, the decorative design may be displayed so as to be immediately recognizable.

Further, although the start screen can be gradually recognized, the decorative symbol may be displayed so as to be immediately recognizable, or the start screen may be immediately recognizable, but the decorative symbol is gradually recognized. It may be displayed as possible.

In the above example, when switching to the start screen of "Advance reach of small fish", the hold display in the same mode as when entering the reach change effect was displayed, but the hold display is the default with the lowest expectation of big hit. You may return to the display mode, or you may hide the hold display. As a result, even the hold display becomes the default display or non-display with the lowest expectation when the "advance reach of small fish" with low jackpot expectation is being performed, so it is possible to attract the attention of other players. The sex is extremely low.

In addition, even when displaying the hold display in the same mode as when entering the reach change effect in "Advance reach of small fish", in order to suppress unnecessary attention from other players, "Miscellaneous fish" When the "advance reach" starts and a predetermined time elapses, the hold display may be returned to the default display or hidden.

The predetermined time is longer than, for example, the time from the title display of "Shura's End Reach" to the selection of "Advance Reach of Small Fish" and the end of the reach change effect (that is, the display time of the high expectation background). It may be short or short. If the predetermined time is longer than the display time of the high expectation background and the high expectation background has a higher jackpot expectation than the hold display,

Further, for the predetermined time, for example, the time required for the screen to switch to the "advance reach of small fish" when "advance reach of small fish" is selected in the reach change effect (that is, the high expectation background becomes unrecognizable). It may be longer or shorter than the normal time from when the background becomes recognizable).

In addition, during the predetermined time, for example, when "Advance reach of small fish" is selected in the reach change effect and the screen is switched to "Advance reach of small fish", the start screen of "Advance reach of small fish" is gradually changed. In the case of recognition, the time from the start of displaying the start screen to the time when the start screen can be completely recognized may be longer or shorter.

In addition, it is good to have a dedicated BGM for "Shura's End Reach" because it is a reach production with extremely high expectation of big hits, but for "Advance Reach of Small Fish" it is dedicated because it is a reach production with low expectations for big hits It is desirable that the BGM is played or silently performed when the normal fluctuation is performed instead of the BGM of the above.

Further, for example, during the period from the start of the reach change effect to the end of the explanation of the reach change effect (FIGS. 564 (E) and (F)), the dedicated BGM of "Shura's end reach" is played as it is to reach. When it becomes possible to select the above (FIG. 564 (G)), the dedicated BGM is turned off and the sound is switched to silence. Since the reach selection screen is silent, the player can calmly think about which reach to select.

It is desirable that the silent state time in the reach change effect is longer than the silent state time in the reach change effect. This is because if the silence continues for a long time during the game, other players may notice the abnormality and eventually attract the attention of the other players. On the other hand, in order to make the player slowly think about which reach effect to select, the silent state time in the reach change effect may be shorter than the silent state time in the reach change effect.

For "Shura no Sueji Reach", it is advisable to output a lamp with a special pattern, which is a reach production with extremely high expectation of big hits, but for "Advance reach of small fish", it is a reach production with low expectations for big hits. It is desirable to output the same lamp as when there is a normal fluctuation that is not in the reach state or when the symbol is stopped.

In addition, during the reach change production, the lamp output of the dedicated pattern that was output in "Shura's End Reach" may be continued, but on the reach selection screen, the player calms down and selects which reach. It is desirable to stop the lamp output of the dedicated pattern in order to make people think about whether to do so.

In addition, it is good to operate the movable body for "Shura's end reach" because it is a reach production with extremely high expectation of big hit, but for "Advance reach of small fish" it is movable because it is a reach production with low expectation for big hit. It is desirable that the body is not moved or even if it is moved, the movement is limited to a predetermined width (for example, 1/2 or less of the movable width). However, when "Advance reach of small fish" is selected in the jackpot fluctuation, in order to give the player a feeling of exhilaration, for example, when all the decorative symbols appear to have stopped. , The movable body may be operated larger than the predetermined width.

In addition, for example, if the movable body operates from the reference position and is fixed to the position after the operation between the start of "Shura's end reach" and the start of the reach change effect, the reach change effect is in progress. The movable body may remain fixed at the post-operation position. This is to make the player aware that "Shura's End Reach" has started even during the reach change production. After that, when "Advance reach of small fish" is selected in the reach change effect, a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the screen is switched to "Advance reach of small fish", the timing of winning notification, or the timing of design confirmation Etc.) to return the movable body to the reference position.

In the above example, in the reach change production, it is possible to select "Shura's advance reach", which has the highest expectation of a big hit among SP reach, and "Advance reach of small fish", which has the lowest expectation of a big hit among SP reach. However, in addition to or in place of the "advance reach of small fish", the reach with the lowest expectation of a big hit (for example, normal reach) may be selectable.

[21-3. Sound presence / absence hold change production]
Hereinafter, the sound presence / absence hold change effect will be described. Normally, when the mode of the hold display changes, it changes with a sound effect, but in the sound presence / absence hold change effect described below, the hold display becomes unrecognizable with the sound effect, and the mode of the hold display There is a sound effect that promotes to a mode with high jackpot expectation, and a soundless effect that the hold display becomes invisible without sound effects and the hold display mode does not promote to a mode with high jackpot expectation. It is feasible.

In the sound presence / absence hold change effect, when the sound presence effect is performed, the hold may further change to the mode of the jackpot expectation degree in the fluctuation (that is, the game after the sound presence effect is performed). In the process of progressing, the sound presence / absence hold change effect that enables the sound presence / absence hold change effect to be executed again continues), and if the soundless effect is performed, the hold has a higher expectation of a big hit in the fluctuation. It means that it is determined that the mode does not change (that is, in the process of progress of the game after the soundless effect is performed, the sound presence / absence hold change effect is not executed again and the sound presence / absence hold change effect ends). To do. Therefore, the player desires that the soundless effect continues without the soundless effect appearing in the sound presence / absence hold change effect.

FIG. 577 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a sound presence / absence hold change effect. (A) is a state at the end of the fluctuation immediately before the sound presence / absence hold change effect is executed. (B) is a state in which the change in which the sound presence / absence hold change effect is executed has started, and all the decorative symbols are changed.

(C) is a state in which the left decorative symbol is stopped. In (C), a sound effect is performed, a sound effect "Pilone !!" is sounded, and the hold display indicating the fluctuation is hidden by smoke, making it unrecognizable. (D) is a state in which it is recognizable that the smoke generated by the effect with sound is hidden and the hold indicating the fluctuation is promoted to blue. Since the effect with sound is performed, the effect of changing the hold with or without sound may continue, and the display may change to a mode in which the expectation of a big hit is high.

The timing of outputting the sound effect in the effect with sound may be earlier than the appearance timing of the display that hides the hold display indicating the fluctuation, may be simultaneous, or may be later. By outputting the sound effect before the appearance timing of the display, the player can know that the hold is promoted as soon as possible, so that the expectation is improved at once. By outputting the sound effect at the same time as the appearance timing of the display, the player's expectation can be improved by the synergistic effect of hearing and vision. By outputting the sound effect after the appearance timing of the display, when the display appears, the player can watch with a sense of tension whether the effect to be performed from now on is a sound effect or a soundless effect. Can be done.

(E) is a state in which the right decorative symbol is stopped in a non-reach state. In (E), the effect with sound is performed, the sound effect "Pilone !!" is sounded, and the hold display is unrecognizable due to the display in which the sword sticks into the hold display indicating the fluctuation. (F) is a state in which it is recognizable that the sword that appeared due to the effect with sound was broken and the hold indicating the fluctuation was promoted to green. Since the effect with sound is performed, the effect of changing the hold with or without sound may continue, and the display may change to a mode in which the expectation of a big hit is high.

(G) is a state in which the pseudo-ream symbol indicating that the pseudo-ream starts is stopped in the intermediate decorative symbol. In (G), the soundless effect is performed, the sound effect is not sounded, and the hold display is unrecognizable due to the display in which the pink heart is stuck in the hold display indicating the fluctuation. In (H), the heart that appears due to the soundless effect is expanded, and the hold of the fluctuation is continuously unrecognizable. By making the hold display unrecognizable even in the sound-less production, it is possible to give the player a slight expectation that the hold may be promoted even in the sound-less production (the above-mentioned effect). When the timing of outputting the sound is later than the appearance timing of the display that hides the hold display, the expectation can be obtained).

In (I), it is recognizable that the heart expands and fades out to be hidden, and the hold indicating the fluctuation remains green. Since the soundless effect is performed, the sound presence / absence hold change effect is completed, and in the change, the hold change to the mode in which the jackpot expectation is higher than that of green is not performed. It should be noted that the soundless effect may be a specification that outputs a sound effect, and even in this case, the effect that has not been promoted even after the execution of the soundless effect (that is, the hold display becomes recognizable) is After execution), it is better not to promote the hold display in the fluctuation, but it is not limited to preventing the hold display from being promoted.

A common production image is used for the display that makes the hold display unrecognizable in the production with sound and the production without sound (smoke image, sword image, and heart image in the illustrated example), but the soundless production is used. When it is performed, a dedicated production image may be used. For example, the pink heart effect images in (G) and (H) are used only for the soundless effect, and when the heart effect image is used in the sound effect, the red heart effect image is used. It is good to be able to. By preparing a dedicated production image for the production without sound (an image that is not included in the production that makes the hold display displayed when the hold changes in the production with sound unrecognizable), for example, a pachinko machine with earphones attached. Even a player who has not listened to the sound output from 1 can easily recognize that the hold display color will not be promoted any more.

Further, after the soundless effect is executed, it is desirable not to execute the effect of making the hold display unrecognizable until the fluctuation is completed. This is because if the effect of making the hold display unrecognizable is executed after the soundless effect is executed, the player may misunderstand that the sound presence / absence hold change effect has not been completed yet.

After the soundless effect is executed (especially when the sound presence / absence hold change effect ends with the hold display (for example, blue) with a low jackpot expectation), it becomes difficult to maintain the player's interest in the change. Therefore, even if the advance notice effect that makes you expect a big hit (excluding the big hit confirmation effect that announces that it is a big hit) is not executed between the time when the soundless effect is executed and the time when the symbol is confirmed and stopped. Good. Further, as shown in FIG. 577 (A), the decorative symbol is also fixedly stopped by performing only the shaking fluctuation around or near the position displayed when the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped. It is desirable to continue to execute the swaying fluctuation until the time of the swaying fluctuation, but if the jackpot confirmation effect appears during the swaying fluctuation, the decorative symbol may be changed to a fluctuation different from the swaying fluctuation.

It should be noted that although the hold display indicating the fluctuation is unrecognizable in the effect with sound, the player may forget the color of the hold display before the start of the effect with sound. For example, if the original hold display color is blue, the jackpot expectation is not so high even if it is promoted to green, but if the original hold display color is green, it is promoted to red or higher, so the jackpot expectation is high. Is high. That is, there is a difference in the expectation felt by the player during the production with sound, depending on the hold display color before the start of the production with sound. Therefore, when the hold display indicating the fluctuation is unrecognizable in the effect with sound, a second liquid crystal which is a display device different from the effect display device 1600 or a predetermined light emitting device (hereinafter, these devices are second reserved). (Called a display device) may indicate the hold display color before the start of the effect with sound. Similarly, in the soundless effect, the second hold display device may indicate the hold display color before the start of the soundless effect.

In addition, when the second hold display device shows the hold display color before the start of the sound effect in the sound effect, a predetermined effect is performed so that the hold display indicated by the second hold display device cannot be recognized. The hold display may be promoted.

When the second hold display device shows the hold display color before the start of the soundless effect in the soundless effect, the hold display on the effect display device 1600 is performed for a predetermined time after the end of the soundless effect (for example, in the soundless effect). It is desirable that the hold display on the effect display device 1600 is not immediately unrecognizable after the lapse of time (a time shorter than the time for making the display invisible). Since the hold display in the second hold display device is only an auxiliary display for confirming the hold display color when the hold display of the effect display device 1600 becomes unrecognizable, the soundless effect ends. This is to return the player's attention to the effect display device 1600 on which the main effect is performed after it is shown that the reserved color is not promoted.

Hereinafter, the data used to execute the sound presence / absence hold change effect and the process for executing the sound presence / absence hold change effect will be described. FIG. 578 is an example of a final hold color distribution table showing the distribution of the final color of the hold display when the sound presence / absence hold change effect is performed in the out-of-range fluctuation. FIG. 579 is an example of a final hold color distribution table showing the distribution of the final color of the hold display when the sound presence / absence hold change effect is performed in the jackpot fluctuation. These final reserved color distribution tables are stored in, for example, the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510.

The final hold color distribution table defines the final hold color for each variation pattern. The distribution of the final reserved colors is set so that the jackpot expectation is higher in the order of white <blue <green <red <gold. The rainbow color is selected only in the jackpot fluctuation, that is, it is a pending color for which the jackpot is confirmed.

FIG. 580 is an example of a hold color distribution table at the start of fluctuation, which shows the distribution of the hold color at the start of the fluctuation in which the sound presence / absence hold change effect is performed. The color distribution table held at the start of fluctuation is stored in, for example, the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. The hold color distribution table at the start of fluctuation defines the hold color at the start of change of the hold color at the start of change in which the sound presence / absence hold change effect is executed for each final hold color.

That is, when the peripheral control MPU decides to execute the sound presence / absence hold change effect, the final hold color is determined from the final hold color distribution table based on the fluctuation pattern, and the change start time is based on the determined final hold color. Hold color The hold color at the start of fluctuation is determined from the distribution table.

FIG. 581 is an example of a hold change timing table that defines a timing at which the sound presence / absence hold change effect can be executed. The pending change timing table is stored in, for example, the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510.

In the example of FIG. 581, as the timing at which the sound presence / absence hold change effect can be executed, the left decorative symbol is stopped, the right decorative symbol is stopped, the first pseudo-ream symbol is stopped, and the left decorative symbol is stopped in the second pseudo-ream. When, when the right decorative symbol is stopped in the second pseudo-ream, when the second pseudo-ream symbol is stopped, when the left decorative symbol is stopped in the third pseudo-ream, when the right decorative symbol is stopped in the third pseudo-ream, When a reach telop occurs, when the title is displayed in the first half of SP reach, when the first half of SP reach is started, in the middle of the first half of SP reach (predetermined timing), when the second half of SP reach is developed, when the title is displayed in the second half of SP reach, and the second half of SP reach is produced. The start time, the middle stage of the SP reach second half production (predetermined timing), and the last cut-in time of the SP reach second half are defined.

The timing shown in FIG. 581 is just an example, and the sound presence / absence hold change effect, which is an effect of making the hold display unrecognizable at other timings, may be feasible. For example, at the time of a notice effect indicating that a pseudo-ream may be executed, at the time of a full-screen look-ahead notice effect (a notice effect performed by displaying one moving image on the entire effect display device 1600), the normal reach effect is changed to SP. When the timing develops into a reach effect, when the effect indicates whether or not to branch to the second half of the SP reach at the first half of the SP reach, when a specific notice effect (for example, a notice effect indicating that the SP reach is about to start), the SP When a jackpot expectation increase effect during reach (for example, "chance" in red letters is displayed) occurs, when a predetermined movable body operates, and when a branch effect of whether or not a state changes (for example, when 50 fluctuations are completed) Assuming that there is a time saving state A that ends and a time saving state B that ends when 100 fluctuations are completed, whether the time saving state during stay is the time saving state A or the time saving state B in the 50th variation of the time saving state is determined. There is an effect of notifying (that is, an effect of notifying whether the state falls to the normal state or the time saving state continues).

By making it possible to execute the sound presence / absence hold change effect, which is an effect that makes the hold display unrecognizable, at an early timing such as when the left decorative symbol is stopped or when the right decorative symbol is stopped, the player can perform the change from an early stage. Can be expected to be a jackpot fluctuation. In addition, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped, when a reach telop occurs, or when the jackpot expectation level rises during SP reach, the sound presence / absence hold change effect can be executed, so that the hold change can be achieved. The synergistic effect can improve the player's expectation.

In addition, by making it possible to execute a sound presence / absence hold change effect, which is an effect that makes the hold display unrecognizable after the reach state is formed, the reach effect is developed in the form of a hold display with a low expectation of a big hit. However, the player can maintain a sense of expectation because the mode of the hold display may still be promoted. In particular, by making it possible to execute the sound presence / absence hold change effect in the first half of the SP reach and the second half of the SP reach (especially at a late timing such as at the last cut-in in the second half of the SP reach), the SP is displayed in a hold display mode with a low expectation of a big hit. Even when the reach is being executed, the player does not lose hope for a big hit until the end.

In the notice production that indicates that the pseudo-ream may be executed, in the notice production such as the full screen look-ahead notice production and the specific notice production that improves the expectation for the fluctuation, the hold display is made unrecognizable. By making it possible to execute a certain sound presence / absence hold change effect, the player's expectation is that there is a high possibility that the effect of the foretold content will actually be executed because the jackpot expectation level has improved due to the hold change. Can be improved.

In addition, by making it possible to execute the sound presence / absence hold change effect, which is an effect that makes the hold display unrecognizable at the time of the branch effect of whether or not the state changes, for example, it is assumed that a rich effect occurs when the time saving state ends. However, it can be expected that a big hit may be won due to the fluctuation during execution. In particular, if the trigger for the end of the probability change is a type of gaming machine (so-called fall type) that is performed by lottery, the effect is still exhibited.

Since the final color in the sound presence / absence hold change effect includes modes with low expectation of big hits such as white and blue, the sound presence / absence hold change effect may be performed even when the decorative symbol does not form a reach state. Good. That is, for example, if the timings such as when the left decorative symbol is stopped, when the right decorative symbol is stopped, and when the full screen look-ahead is announced are the timings at which the sound presence / absence hold change effect can be executed, the decorative symbol does not form a reach state. It is also possible to perform a sound presence / absence hold change effect.

Further, for example, if the sound presence / absence hold change effect can be executed only when the left decorative symbol is stopped, when the right decorative symbol is stopped, and when the full screen look-ahead is announced, the reach state can be changed even in the fluctuation forming the reach state. It is possible to finish the sound presence / absence hold change effect before the formation, and to concentrate the player's consciousness on the sound presence / absence hold change effect before the reach state is formed and on the reach effect after the reach state is formed. it can. It should be noted that the effect corresponding to each of the timings shown in FIG. 581 (for example, the effect that the left decorative symbol is stopped when the left decorative symbol is stopped) and the sound presence / absence hold change effect are performed at the same time (in the same situation). Since it is displayed, the player can recognize both effects, although the hold display cannot be recognized.

FIG. 582 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed every time the timing shown in FIG. 581 arrives in the fluctuation during execution of the sound presence / absence hold change effect. When the timing is reached, the peripheral control MPU determines whether the effect non-execution flag is on (S5821). When the peripheral control MPU determines that the effect non-execution flag is on (S5821: YES), the peripheral control MPU ends the process.

When the peripheral control MPU determines that the effect non-execution flag is off (S5821: NO), the peripheral control MPU determines whether the current hold display mode is the final hold color (S5822). When the peripheral control MPU determines that the current hold display mode is the final hold color (S5822: YES), either the sound-bearing effect or the soundless effect is not executed, or the soundless effect is executed. (For example, 2/3 for the former and 1/3 for the latter) according to a predetermined distribution (S5823).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU determines in step S5823 whether to execute the soundless effect (S5824). When the peripheral control MPU determines that the soundless effect is not executed (S5824: NO), the peripheral control MPU ends the process. When the peripheral control MPU determines that the soundless effect is to be executed (S5824: YES), the effect non-execution flag is set to ON (S5825), and the process ends. As a result, when the soundless effect is executed, the sound presence / absence hold change effect ends (the sound presence / absence hold change effect is not displayed in the subsequent game progress process).

When the peripheral control MPU determines that the current hold display mode is not the final hold color (S5822: NO), the peripheral control MPU executes a promotion lottery according to a predetermined probability (for example, 1/4) (S5826). The peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the promotion lottery in step S5826 has been won (S5827). When the peripheral control MPU determines that the promotion lottery has not been won (S5827: NO), the process ends.

When the peripheral control MPU determines that the promotion lottery has been won (S5827: YES), the peripheral control MPU performs a sound production to promote the hold display mode (S5828), and ends the process. However, even if the peripheral control MPU determines that the promotion lottery has not been won, the current timing is the last timing in which the last sound presence / absence hold change effect can be executed in the changing pattern being executed. If it is determined, it is desirable to forcibly perform a sound effect to promote the mode of the hold display to the final color.

The promotion probability of the promotion lottery in step S5826 may differ depending on the current timing and the current hold display color. For example, the closer the current timing is to the last timing in which the last sound presence / absence hold change effect can be executed, the higher or lower the promotion probability may be. Further, for example, the closer the current hold display color is to the final color, the higher or lower the promotion probability may be. Further, in one production with sound, the reserved color may be promoted by only one stage, or the reserved color may be promoted by a plurality of stages.

In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 581 and other timings described in paragraph [5264], the promotion lottery of step S5826 is performed, and when the soundless change effect is selected, the presence or absence of sound is present in the subsequent game progress process. Although it is said that the pending change effect is not displayed, the change effect with sound may appear even after the change effect without sound appears. Even in that case, the rate of appearance without sound is higher than that with sound. As a result, the player can have a slight expectation that the change effect with sound may still be restored even if the change effect without sound is executed.

[21-4. Hold & zone change production]
The hold & zone change effect will be described below. The hold & zone change effect means that a plurality of chance times arrive in the hold & zone change effect, and at each chance time, either a predetermined sound effect is produced or a predetermined sound effect is not produced. .. If a predetermined sound effect sounds at the chance time, a hold change is performed, and if a predetermined sound effect does not sound at the chance time, a zone change is performed. Therefore, in the hold & zone change production, depending on the current situation, the player may think that "the sound effect should be produced!" Or "the sound effect should not be produced!" The production that changes what you think is the hold & zone change production. The details will be described below.

583 and 584 are explanatory views showing an example of a hold & zone change effect. FIG. 583 (A) shows the state at the end of the fluctuation immediately before the fluctuation in which the hold & zone change effect is performed. (B) is a state at the start of the fluctuation in which the hold & zone change effect is performed. All the decorative symbols have started to change, and the hold display indicating the change has changed to blue. (C) is a state in which the hold & zone change effect has started, and the title of the hold & zone change effect is displayed. Further, in (C), the display position is moved to the upper left portion of the effect display device 1600 while all the decorative symbols are changing.

In (D) to (G), the hold & zone change effect will be explained. In (D), it is shown that there are 10 chances that the mode of the hold display and the zone are changed. In (E), it is shown that the hold change is performed when the predetermined sound effect is sounded, and the zone change is performed when the predetermined sound effect is not sounded.

In (F), a table showing the jackpot expectation degree corresponding to the hold display color and the zone is displayed on the effect display device 1600. At the time of (F), since the reserved color is blue and the zone is the normal zone, the corresponding jackpot expectation degree "1%" is shaded.

In addition, assuming that there are three modes displayed in the hold & zone change effect, blue, green, and red, the degree of jackpot expectation changes in the order of blue → green → red, and in the order of blue <green <red. It shall be higher. In addition, when the hold display is red and an effect that a sound effect sounds at the chance time occurs, the mode of the hold display returns from red to blue, that is, the change of the hold display mode loops. To do.

In other words, there is a situation in which the jackpot expectation is lowered when the effect of sound effect is generated (for example, the mode of the hold display is red and the mode of the hold display is blue when the effect of sound effect is generated). , Even if the mode of the hold display is red, which has the highest expectation of a big hit, it is possible to approach the production with a sense of tension. In addition, by looping the mode of the hold display in the hold change, it is possible to show the player the change to the hold display with a high expectation of big hit multiple times, so that the player's expectation can be improved many times. it can.

In addition, there are usually five zones to stay in Hold & Zone Change: Champion, Overlord, Domination, and Domination, and changes in the order of Normal → Champion → Overlord → Domination → Domination, Normal = Champion <Champion It shall be higher in the order of extinction <overlord = overlord. In other words, the zone change from overlord to overthrow is a zone change where the expectation of big hits decreases. In addition, when the zone is a quest, if a sound effect does not sound at the chance time, the zone returns from the quest to the champion, that is, the change of the zone is looped.

In other words, there is a situation where the jackpot expectation is lowered when the effect that the sound effect does not sound occurs (for example, the zone becomes normal when the effect that the sound effect does not sound occurs when the zone is dominated). Even if you become the overlord or quest with the highest expectation for a big hit, you can face the production with a sense of tension. Further, by looping the zone in the zone change, the player can be shown the change to the zone having a high expectation of big hit multiple times, so that the player's expectation can be improved many times.

Further, as described above, in the zone change, the jackpot expectation does not change even if the normal zone is changed to the champion zone, but the jackpot expectation sharply increases when the champion zone is changed to the champion zone. As a result, it is possible to realize a sharp production in which the player is disturbed when changing from the normal zone to the champion zone, and the player's expectation is improved at once when changing from the champion zone to the champion zone. ..

For convenience of explanation, the hold change and zone change in the hold & zone change effect shall change by only one stage at each chance time, and although it is described as a zone, the effect state is managed in terms of control. Since the effect mode is changed, it is synonymous with changing the effect mode.

In (G), a message indicating that the shaded portion in the table of (F) is in the current state is displayed. (H) is a state of preparation for the hold & zone change effect. A gauge 5831 indicating the remaining time of the hold & zone change effect and a zone display 5832 indicating the current zone state are displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In (H), when the arrow displayed at the lower left of the gauge 5831 moves to the right with the passage of time and moves to the lower right of the gauge 5832, the hold & zone change effect ends. Also, each time the arrow moves to the black-filled portion of the gauge 5831, either a hold change or a zone change is executed. That is, each of the black-filled parts in the gauge 5831 means a chance time in the hold & zone change effect. In the illustrated example, 10 chance times are executed.

(I) is a state in which the arrow displayed under the gauge 5831 has begun to move to the right in the hold & zone change effect. FIG. 584 (J) shows a state in which the first chance time has arrived in the hold & zone change effect. In (J), a predetermined sound effect "Pilone !!" sounds, and the mode of the hold display ("?") Indicates the fluctuation and the current zone ("?? Zone") indicated by the zone display 5832 are recognized. It is impossible.

Since the sound effect was heard at the first chance time, it is confirmed that the hold will change, but by making both the hold display mode and the current zone unrecognizable, both players will change. You can expect it to be. Similarly, when the sound effect does not sound at the chance time, it is desirable to make both the hold display mode and the current zone unrecognizable. It should be noted that the mode of the hold display indicating the fluctuation and the current zone indicated by the zone display 5832 can be erased, covered with another image, or hidden by a movable body to make it invisible, even if it is made unrecognizable. Good.

(K) is a state immediately before the end of the first chance time. Since the sound effect sounded at the first chance time, the hold display indicating the fluctuation changed from blue to green, and the zone remained as a normal zone. It is desirable that the sound effect "Pilone !!" is still output when the hold display indicating the change from blue to green becomes recognizable. This is because the synergistic effect of the expectation obtained from the visual sense by the hold display after the change and the expectation obtained from the auditory sense by the sound effect is exhibited, and the player's interest is further enhanced.

It is desirable that a BGM dedicated to the hold & zone change effect is output during the execution of the hold & zone change effect in order to raise the player's expectation. Even when the hold change is performed at the chance time, the dedicated BGM is output as it is.

Note that, for example, from the time from when the hold display becomes unrecognizable in the chance time until the hold display after the change becomes recognizable, the zone display 5832 after the change becomes unrecognizable in the chance time and the zone display 5832 after the change. It takes a long time to become recognizable. Since the zone change effect appears less frequently than the hold change effect that is executed in various effects other than the hold & zone change effect, it takes a long time for the player to recognize the changed zone. Can provide a sense of tension.

On the contrary, from the time from when the hold display becomes unrecognizable in the chance time until the hold display after the change becomes recognizable, the zone display 5832 after the change becomes unrecognizable in the chance time. The time until it becomes recognizable may be short. This is because some players want to know the zone after the change as soon as possible because the zone change effect appears less frequently than the hold change effect.

(L) is a state in which the second chance time has arrived in the hold & zone change production. In (L), the sound effect "Pilone !!" output at the timing of (J) does not sound, and the mode of the hold display indicating the fluctuation and the current zone indicated by the zone display 5832 are unrecognizable. .. It should be noted that a sound effect different from the sound effect "Pilone !!" output at the timing of (J) may be output as a ghost.

(M) is a state immediately before the end of the second chance time. Since the sound effect did not sound at the second chance time, the hold display indicating the change remains green, and the zone has changed from the normal zone to the champion zone. In addition, in order to give the player a sense of expectation at an early stage, a display showing the changed zone (“Hao?” In the figure) is produced before the contents of the changed zone display 5832 can be recognized. It may be displayed on the display device 1600. After that, at each chance time, the effect that the sound effect sounds or the effect that the sound effect does not sound occurs in the same manner.

When the zone is changed at the chance time, for example, when the zone indicated by the zone display 5832 becomes unrecognizable, the BGM dedicated to the hold & zone change effect is muted, and the changed zone is recognized. The BGM corresponding to the zone after a predetermined time change is output from the timing when it becomes possible. As a result, even a player who has not seen the zone change can be made to recognize the changed zone by the BGM. After the predetermined time has elapsed, it is advisable to output the dedicated BGM for the hold & zone change effect again.

By performing the hold & zone change effect as shown in FIGS. 583 and 584 with one change, it is possible to execute a plurality of hold changes of the change and a plurality of zone changes in one change, and the game It is possible to realize a tense production that greatly raises or lowers the expectations of the person.

FIG. 585 is an example of the chance time number table. The chance time number table is a table used for determining the number of chance times in the hold & zone change effect, and is stored in, for example, the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510.

When the peripheral control MPU decides to execute the hold & zone change effect, it decides the combination of the hold color and the zone (final hold color and final zone) at the end of the hold & zone change effect. It should be noted that the distribution for selecting the combination of the final reserved color and the final zone in the jackpot fluctuation and the missed fluctuation shall be predetermined so that the jackpot expectation degree becomes the value in the table shown in FIG. 583 (F). ..

Peripheral control MPU refers to the chance time number table, and one chance time number from the chance time number (the number of times "○" in the figure is described) corresponding to the determined combination of the final reserved color and the final zone. To determine. For example, if the final hold color is blue and the final zone is normal, the peripheral control MPU determines the number of chance times from any of 5, 8, or 11 times. For each combination of the final hold color and the final zone, the distribution for selecting the corresponding number of chance times is, for example, even (that is, when the final hold color is blue and the final zone is normal, 5). Times, 8 times, or 11 times are each selected with a 1/3 probability).

When the fluctuation in which the hold & zone change effect is executed is a jackpot fluctuation, the peripheral control MPU sounds a sound effect with a probability of 6/10 (that is, a hold change) at each chance time, and has a probability of 4/10. The production is performed by sorting with no sound (that is, zone change). In addition, when the fluctuation in which the hold & zone change effect is executed is an out-of-range fluctuation, the peripheral control MPU sounds a sound effect with a probability of 4/10 and a sound effect with a probability of 6/10 at each chance time. Perform no production.

However, in the hold & zone change effect, there is a limit to the number of times the effect with sound effect and the effect without sound effect can be executed in order to reach the final hold color and the final zone. None There is a scene where the execution of the production is decided.

Specifically, for example, it is assumed that the hold display is blue and the zone is the normal zone and the hold & zone change effect is started, the final hold color is blue and the final zone is the overlord zone, and the number of chance times is 10. Suppose it is a time. In this case, according to the table of FIG. 583 (F), the effect with sound effect and the effect without sound effect are executed a total of 10 times to reach the blue hold display and the overlord zone from the blue hold display and normal zone. In order to do so, it is necessary to execute 3n times of the effect with sound effect and 5m + 2 times of effect without sound effect.

Here, n and m are all integers of 0 or more, and 3n + (5m + 2) = 10, so (n, m) = (1,1). Therefore, in this case, it is necessary to execute the effect with sound effect three times and the effect without sound effect seven times.

For example, if the effect with sound effect is executed three times before the last chance time, there is a restriction that the effect with sound effect cannot be executed any more. Therefore, in this case, after the effect with sound effect is executed three times, the effect without sound effect is always executed regardless of the above-mentioned distribution. Similarly, if the production with sound effects is executed 7 times before the last chance time, there is a restriction that the production without sound effects cannot be executed any more, so the production without sound effects is executed 7 times. After that, the effect without sound effect is always executed regardless of the above-mentioned distribution.

It should be noted that the zone change effect, which appears infrequently, can provide a stronger expectation to the player than the various effects other than the hold & zone change effect, so the sound effect must be heard at the first chance time. You may change the zone by executing the effect of none.

For convenience of explanation, the hold change and zone change in the hold & zone change effect are assumed to be performed in only one stage in one chance time, but in order to sharply raise the expectation of the player. It may change in multiple stages in one chance time. For example, by utilizing the change in a plurality of stages, the zone change may be performed only once in the hold & zone change effect, and only the hold change may be performed in the remaining chance time. By executing the hold change more often than the zone change, a stronger expectation can be obtained. Since the number of zone changes is smaller, the player can concentrate on the zone change.

The hold change may be performed only once and only the zone change may be performed in the remaining chance time. By executing the zone change more often than the hold change, the player can enjoy many zone changes that appear less frequently and can obtain a stronger expectation.

It should be noted that the hold & zone change effect may be executed without fail in the next fluctuation that is deviated from the predetermined reach effect (for example, SP reach). This is to regain the expectation of the player who has been disappointed due to the deviation in the predetermined reach production. In that case, in order to reduce the disappointment of the player, the zone may be changed by always performing an effect without sound effects at the first chance time.

In the examples of FIGS. 583 and 584, the normal background is not displayed in the hold & zone change effect, but the normal background may be displayed. For example, in the hold & zone change effect, the background dedicated to the hold & zone change effect may change to the normal background before and after the hold change or zone change (that is, the hold display or zone after the change can be recognized. When it becomes, it changes to the normal background). In particular, for example, when a hold change or zone change occurs in which the jackpot expectation is demoted (that is, when the hold display or zone becomes recognizable after demotion), the jackpot expectation is changed to the normal background. Can be made to be more strongly recognized by the player that has been demoted.

In addition, the normal background may remain displayed before and after the hold change or zone change (that is, the hold display or zone before the change is recognizable, the hold display or zone is unrecognizable, and so on. The background is usually displayed through the pending display before the change and the state where the zone is recognizable). In particular, for example, the hold change is an effect that is also executed in various effects other than the hold & zone change effect, so even if a special background is displayed, it may just be arousing expectations. This is because some players feel suspicious.

In the above example, since both the hold change effect and the zone change effect are included in the hold & zone change effect, it was explained as if the hold change effect and the zone change effect constitute one effect. However, the above-mentioned hold change effect and the above-mentioned zone change effect may be different effects. That is, there may be a variation in which only the above-mentioned pending change effect is performed, or there may be a variation in which only the above-mentioned zone change effect is performed.

[21-5. Wind production]
The lighting effect in front of the wind will be described below. In the wind-front light effect, at the start of the effect, the hold display indicating the fluctuation is displayed in gold, which is the mode with the highest expectation of a big hit. Then, as time passes, it becomes difficult to recognize the hold display indicating the fluctuation (for example, the transparency gradually increases, the area gradually decreases, etc.).

Then, when the hold display becomes completely unrecognizable at a predetermined timing, when the hold display becomes recognizable again, the hold display changes (demotions) to a mode in which the jackpot expectation is low. ing. Further, if the hold display is not unrecognizable at the predetermined timing, the hold display is displayed in the same mode. That is, the player expects that the hold display will not be completely unrecognizable in the wind-front light effect. Hereinafter, there are four types of hold display displayed by the light effect in front of the wind, blue, green, red, and gold, and the expectation of a big hit is increased in the order of blue <green <red <gold.

FIG. 586 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the lighting effect in front of the wind. (A) is the state at the end of the fluctuation immediately before the light effect in front of the wind is executed. (B) is a state at the start of the fluctuation in which the light effect in front of the wind is executed. All decorative patterns begin to fluctuate, usually making the background invisible. In addition, the title image of the light effect in front of the wind is displayed, and the mode of the hold display indicating the fluctuation is changed to gold, which has the highest expectation of big hit.

In (C), the timer set to the remaining time of 15 seconds is displayed on the effect display device 1600. When the remaining time of the timer reaches 15 seconds, 10 seconds, and 5 seconds, the demotion of the hold display mode indicating the fluctuation can be executed. In the example of FIG. 586, the mode of the hold display is not demoted at the timing of the remaining 15 seconds.

(D) is a state in which 3 seconds have passed from (C), and the hold display indicating the fluctuation gradually increases in transparency and becomes difficult to recognize. In (E), the remaining time of the timer is 10 seconds. An image of smoke is displayed over the hold display indicating the change, and the hold display showing the change is completely unrecognizable. Although the hold display itself indicating the change can be recognized, the mode of the hold display indicating the change may be unrecognizable (for example, the hold display showing the change is grayed out (in the hold change effect). Colors that are not selected) or replaced with images of different shapes).

(F) is a state in which one second has passed since the hold display indicating the fluctuation was completely unrecognizable. In (F), the smoke image displayed in (E) is erased, and the hold display indicating the fluctuation can be recognized. Furthermore, the hold display indicating the change has been demoted to red. After that, the same effect is executed with the passage of time. When the mode of the hold display is demoted in the light effect in front of the wind, it is desirable not to output the sound effect at the time of promotion of the mode of the hold display in the other hold change effect. This is to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the mode of the hold display has been promoted.

In addition, for example, the time during which the hold display indicating the change in (E) is unrecognizable makes the hold display indicating the change unrecognizable in another hold change effect (that is, an effect in which the mode of the hold display is promoted). Shorter than time. Making the hold display unrecognizable in the wind-front light effect is synonymous with demoting the mode of the hold display. The decrease can be suppressed.

On the contrary, the time for making the hold display indicating the change unrecognizable in (E) may be longer than the time for making the hold display showing the change unrecognizable in the other hold change effect. Making the hold display unrecognizable in the wind-front light effect is synonymous with demoting the hold display mode, so the player realizes that the hold display mode is demoted by lengthening the unrecognizable time. Can be gradually accepted over time, and when the hold display becomes recognizable, the player's shock when looking at the mode of the hold display after demotion can be alleviated.

Further, the time for making the hold display indicating the change unrecognizable in (E) and the time for making the hold display showing the change unrecognizable in another hold change effect may be the same. This is because when these times are the same, the player can expect that the hold has been promoted even for a moment when the hold display becomes recognizable again in the light effect in front of the wind.

In addition, when the hold display indicating the change is made unrecognizable in (E), the hold display corresponding to the other change (for example, all hold displays) may also be made unrecognizable. In this case, when the hold display corresponding to other fluctuations is made recognizable again, the jackpot expectation may be promoted for these hold displays. As a result, it is synonymous with being unrecognizable for the hold display indicating the change and being demoted, but for other hold displays, it is promoted when it becomes unrecognizable, so that the player's disappointment can be alleviated. it can.

In (G), in the lighting effect in front of the wind, the hold display indicating the fluctuation is finally demoted to green. If the jackpot is won in the fluctuation in which the wind-front light effect is executed, and the hold display indicating the fluctuation in the wind-front light effect is demoted from the gold color with the highest expectation of the jackpot, for example, the timing when the jackpot is notified. Then, it is advisable to return the hold display indicating the fluctuation to gold. By redisplaying the golden hold display with the highest expectation of a big hit, it is possible to realize an effect such as a revival effect, and it is possible to make the player strongly recognize that the big hit has been won.

After the end of the wind-front light effect, the golden hold display is repeatedly displayed with high and low transparency, and the gold hold display is completely recognized (for example, by maximizing the transparency or covering with a smoke image like the wind-front light effect). If it becomes impossible, the red hold display with the next highest expectation for big hits should be displayed after that, and if it does not become completely unrecognizable, the golden hold display should be displayed as it is. As a result, even after the wind-front light effect is completed, an effect similar to the wind-front light effect is executed, so that the player can leave the afterglow of the wind-front light effect.

In the example of FIG. 586, the lighting effect in front of the wind was executed in a state where all the decorative symbols were fluctuating (a state in which the reach was not formed), but when a predetermined reach effect was executed or a predetermined state was executed. The light effect in front of the wind may be executed when it is confirmed that the reach effect of is executed. In general reach production, the player's expectation is improved by the reach production itself, the player's expectation is improved by the cut-in image during the reach production, the dialogue and the message in red letters, etc. When the production occurs, the hold is promoted, etc., but when the reach production is being executed, once the hold display is set to the mode with the highest expectation of big hit, it gives a feeling of surprise, but during the reach Since the effect that makes you expect to keep the hold is novel (in the extreme, it can be said that the effect is a disdain for the reach effect), for example, the image of the reach effect is of high quality due to the capacity of the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. It is advisable to perform a wind-front light effect when the reach is low.

In the above-mentioned example, when the hold display becomes unrecognizable, the mode of the hold display is always demoted when the hold display becomes recognizable again, but the hold display cannot be recognized, but the hold display can be recognized again. When becomes, the hold display of the same mode as before the unrecognizable state may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to provide surprise and joy to the player who was disappointed when the hold display became unrecognizable and the mode of the hold display was demoted.

However, although the light effect in front of the wind is an effect in which the mode of the hold display is demoted, it is an effect that can display many golden hold displays with the highest expectation of big hits, so it is better not to perform the effect in which the mode of the hold display is promoted. Good. Further, since the hold promotion effect in which the mode of the hold display is promoted is frequently executed other than the light effect in front of the wind, it is not necessary to dare to execute the effect in which the mode of the hold display is promoted in the light effect in front of the wind. Therefore, it is more comfortable for the player to decide that the hold promotion effect is executed in an effect other than the wind effect, and that the hold is promoted with a specific sound effect.

FIG. 587 is an example of a light holding change table in front of the wind. The wind-front light hold change table shows the mode of hold display (final color) at the end of the wind-front light effect, the mode of hold display (start color) at the start of the wind-front light effect, and each changeable timing (timer remaining time 15 seconds, The mode of the hold display after the change (including the case where the change does not occur) at 10 seconds and 5 seconds) is defined. The light hold change table in front of the wind is stored in, for example, the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. In the example of FIG. 587, the number of changeable timings is set to 3 times, but the number of times is not limited to this and may be any number of times. The greater the number of changeable timings, the more thrill that the mode of hold display may be demoted, and the smaller the number of changeable timings, the more reassuring the player can be.

When the peripheral control MPU decides to execute the light effect in front of the wind, it decides the final color and the start color. In the light hold change table in front of the wind, the starting color is defined to be in a mode other than blue, which has the lowest expectation of a big hit, but in the example of FIG. 587, the gold color, which has the highest expectation of a big hit, is always selected. It is defined. Further, in the light hold change table in front of the wind, the final color is defined so that an aspect equal to or less than the jackpot expectation of the start color is selected.

In the changeable timing table, it is defined that the hold display mode that is equal to or less than the jackpot expectation of the hold display mode that precedes the changeable timing is selected. Further, in the example of FIG. 587, the hold display mode is defined to be demoted one step at a time at each changeable timing. That is, for example, if the final color is blue, the demotion is performed at least twice in the wind effect after the hold display becomes unrecognizable. It should be noted that demotion in a plurality of stages may be feasible at each changeable timing.

In addition, in the light production in front of the wind, when the hold display indicating the fluctuation becomes unrecognizable and demoted, the timing when the hold display indicating the change becomes unrecognizable may come before the middle of the fluctuation time of the change. desirable. If the timing at which the hold display indicating the fluctuation becomes unrecognizable comes in the latter half of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation, the hold display in the mode with high jackpot expectation is displayed for a long time, and then the hold display mode is demoted. This is because the player's expectation, which has been maintained for a long time, may be lowered at once.

In addition, in the production other than the wind effect, the effect of making the hold display indicating the fluctuation unrecognizable may be executed, but the effect for making the hold display indicating the change executed in the wind effect unrecognizable. It is desirable to make the hold display showing the change unrecognizable by using an effect different from (the effect of covering the hold display showing the change with an image of smoke). This is because if the hold display indicating the fluctuation is made unrecognizable by the same effect as the wind effect, the player feels uneasy that the mode of the hold display may be demoted as in the wind effect.

In the example of FIG. 587, the interval of the changeable timing in the lighting effect in front of the wind is constant (each is an interval of 5 seconds), but the interval may be different. For example, since the interval between the second and third changeable timings is longer than the interval between the first and second changeable timings, the demotion of the hold display mode is concentrated in the first half of the wind effect. Therefore, if the player is not demoted in the first half, a sense of security can be provided to the player. For example, since the interval between the second and third changeable timings is shorter than the interval between the first and second changeable timings, the demotion of the hold display mode is concentrated in the latter half of the wind effect. Therefore, the player can concentrate on the production without being distracted until the second half.

In addition, when the mode of the hold display is demoted multiple times in the light effect in front of the wind, the image that makes the mode of the hold display showing the fluctuation unrecognizable and the sound effect output when demoting are the same each time. It may be present, or part or all of it may be different. Since the images and sound effects are the same, the player can be quietly perceived that the second and subsequent hold display modes have been demoted. If a different image appears or a sound effect is output in the second and subsequent demotions due to different images and sound effects, the player may not be demoted in the hold display mode. , You can have a little expectation.

Further, when the demotion of the mode of the hold display is performed in the light effect in front of the wind, a predetermined movable body may be operated in order to make the player clearly recognize that the demotion is performed. However, since it is a demotion effect to the last, if the amount of movement of the movable body is increased, the player's feelings may be upset, so the amount of movement of the movable body is small (for example, 1/2 of the maximum movable width). Is desirable.

In the above example, only the hold display corresponding to the fluctuation during execution was unrecognized and demoted in the light effect in front of the wind, but not only the hold display but also the hold 1 to hold 4 (that is, the first hold to 4). The hold display corresponding to the second hold) may also be unrecognizable. In this case, it is desirable to promote the mode of holding display when the holdings 1 to 4 are made recognizable again. As a result, even if the jackpot expectation of the fluctuation during execution is lowered by the lighting effect in front of the wind, the player can have a sense of expectation for the pending fluctuation in which the mode of the hold display is promoted.

[21-6. Blackout production]
The blackout effect will be described below. In the blackout effect, the display of the effect display device 1600 is blacked out, and the decorative pattern, the hold display, and the normal background become invisible. Then, when a predetermined time elapses after the state of being completely blacked out, the blackout gradually disappears, and the decorative pattern, the hold display, and the normal background become visible. At this time, the mode of the hold display is the jackpot expectation degree. It may have changed to a higher one.

Below, there are five types of hold display in the blackout effect: default (displayed in black in the figure), blue, green, red, and gold, and the jackpot expectation is in the order of default <blue <green <red <gold. Is high.

FIG. 588 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a blackout effect. (A) is a state at the end of the fluctuation immediately before the fluctuation in which the blackout effect is executed. The normal background is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and all the decorative symbols are stopped. (B) is a state after the fluctuation in which the blackout effect is executed starts. All decorative patterns are fluctuating.

In (C), the brightness of the entire effect display device 1600 is gradually decreasing (approaching black), and the decorative pattern, the hold display, and the normal background are recognizable but difficult to recognize. There is. In (D), the brightness of the entire effect display device 1600 is reduced to the minimum (0), and the effect display device 1600 is in a blackout state. In the blackout state, the decorative design, hold display, and normal background are unrecognizable.

When a predetermined time has elapsed from the state of being completely blacked out, in (E), the brightness of the entire effect display device 1600 gradually increases and the blackout state is solved. In (E), the decorative design, the hold display, and the normal background are still recognizable but difficult to recognize. The mode of hold display has been promoted from default to blue. In (F), the brightness of the entire effect display device 1600 is completely restored, and the decorative pattern, the hold display, and the normal background are completely recognizable. Even if the blackout state is solved, the decorative pattern and the normal background may remain invisible. This is to strongly direct the player's consciousness to whether or not the mode of the hold display has changed.

FIG. 589 is an example of a blackout time table. The blackout time table is a table that defines the distribution that determines the time when the blackout is completely blacked out in the blackout effect and the mode of the hold display in which the blackout is solved and can be recognized again. The blackout time table is stored in, for example, the ROM of the peripheral control board 1510.

After deciding to execute the blackout effect, the peripheral control MPU determines whether the blackout time is short or long according to a predetermined probability. It should be noted that the predetermined probability is set so that the jackpot expectation is higher when the long is selected than when the short is selected (for example, the fluctuation in executing the blackout effect is out of the fluctuation). If is, short is selected as 224/256 and long is selected as 32/256, and if the fluctuation that executes the blackout effect is a jackpot fluctuation, short is selected as 64/256 and long is selected as 192/256. ).

The peripheral control MPU selects the length of time that is completely blacked out by referring to the distribution shown in the blackout time table. In the example of FIG. 589, 3 seconds or 5 seconds is selected when short is selected, and 15 seconds or 20 seconds is selected when long is selected. The shortest time of the long should be at least twice the shortest time of the short so that the player can easily determine whether the long is selected or the short is selected when the blackout effect is executed. desirable. In the example of FIG. 589, the shortest long time of 15 seconds is three times as long as the longest short time of 5 seconds.

In addition, the shorter the time of complete blackout (for example, when short is selected than when long is selected), the decorative pattern, hold display, and normal background after the end of blackout are displayed. Time will be longer.

The peripheral control MPU refers to the distribution shown in the blackout time table to determine the mode of the hold display after the blackout corresponding to the selected time. In the blackout time table, the distribution is defined so that the longer the time during which the player is completely blacked out, the easier it is to select the hold display in the mode in which the jackpot expectation is high.

In this way, the shorter the time of complete blackout, the lower the expectation of big hit. Therefore, for example, when a short is selected, the predetermined timing after the blackout (decorative pattern, hold display, and normal background is displayed again. A specific sound effect may be output at a predetermined timing when the player becomes recognizable to improve the player's expectation. When long is selected, the player's expectation is sufficiently raised by the blackout, so that the sound effect does not have to be output after the blackout.

In the hold display that can be recognized again after the blackout when the short is selected, the default distribution is larger than the total of the distributions in the modes other than the default. On the other hand, in the hold display that becomes recognizable again after the blackout when long is selected, the default distribution is less than the total distribution of the non-default modes. In this way, it was recognized that the long was selected because the difference in the selection rate of the hold display in the default mode was large between the case where the short was selected and the case where the long was selected (for example, completely blacked out). It can be seen that the long is selected when more than 5 seconds have passed since then.) It is possible to improve the expectation of the player.

It is desirable that the variation display mode of the decorative symbol when the decorative symbol becomes recognizable again after the blackout differs depending on whether the short is selected or the long is selected. For example, when short is selected, the decorative design is only shaking slightly, but when long is selected, the decorative design is shaking violently. Also, for example, when short is selected, the face of the character drawn on the decorative pattern is expressionless, but when long is selected, the face of the character drawn on the decorative pattern is laughing. You may want to be there.

In this way, by changing the variable display mode of the decorative pattern after the blackout is over, the player can see the decorative pattern even in the state after the blackout, and the short is selected or long in the blackout effect. Can be remembered if was selected (because the mode of the hold display can be changed other than the blackout effect, it is not possible to completely specify whether or not the blackout effect was performed only by the mode of the hold display. There is).

It should be noted that the blackout effect may be performed a plurality of times in one fluctuation. As a result, the player can maintain a sense of expectation even if the first blackout effect does not change to the hold display in which the expectation for a big hit is high.

In the plurality of blackout effects, shorts and longs may be mixed, all shorts may be selected, or all longs may be selected. Further, for example, the blackout effect may be executed a plurality of times before the reach state of the decorative symbol is formed, the blackout effect may be executed before and after the reach state is formed, or the reach state may be executed. The blackout effect may be executed a plurality of times after the formation of.

Since it takes a long time to execute the blackout effect multiple times, if the blackout effect is executed multiple times before the reach state is formed, the multiple blackout effects are performed before the reach state is formed. In order to end it, it is advisable to start the blackout effect as the effect at the start of the fluctuation.

Even if the blackout effect is performed only once, the blackout effect may be started as the effect at the start of the fluctuation. Since the blackout effect is performed at the start of the fluctuation, the player cannot grasp what is happening at first, but when the blackout is over and the mode of the hold display changes, it suddenly increases with surprise. Expectations can be provided to the player.

Further, when the blackout effect is performed after the reach state is formed, it is desirable that the blackout effect is completed before the timing of notifying the winning in the reach effect. This is because the player's interest does not improve even if the effect related to the pending change is executed after the winning notification timing.

It should be noted that the mode for making the hold display, the decorative pattern, and the normal background unrecognizable may differ depending on whether the short is selected or the long is selected. For example, when short is selected, blackout is always performed, and when long is selected, blackout is displayed with a predetermined probability (9/10), and the effect is displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/10). If the red color is displayed on the entire device 1600 and the hold display, the decorative pattern, and the normal background cannot be recognized, it is determined that the red color is displayed on the entire device 1600, and the player is determined to be long. Expectations can be sharply improved.

Contrary to the example of FIG. 589, in the blackout time table, the longer the length of the completely blackout time, the easier it is to select the hold display in the mode in which the jackpot expectation is low. It may be defined.

[22. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 in the back-rear effect unit 3100, a transparent guide is provided behind the decorative member composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. The light emitting plate 3113 and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are provided, and are mounted on the front surface of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 on each of the plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c formed on the rear surface of the light guide radiation plate 3113. The side view type first LED 3114a is inserted so as to be accommodated. When the plurality of first LEDs 3114a mounted on the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are made to emit light, the light from the first LED 3114a is emitted from the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c to the plate surface within the thickness of the light guide emitting plate 3113. It is irradiated in the direction along the light guide emitting plate 3113, is reflected forward by a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e formed on substantially the entire rear surface of the light guide emitting plate 3113, and is radiated from the front surface of the light guide emitting plate 3113 to the front. Become. Then, the light radiated forward from the light guide emitting plate 3113 is radiated forward through the decorative sheet 3112 and the decorative body 3111 constituting the decorative member, whereby the decorative portion 3150 is provided. The decorative members having light (decorative body 3111 and decorative sheet 3112) are luminescently decorated.

At this time, the light emitted from the first LED 3114a in the direction along the plate surface of the light guide radiating plate 3113 is reflected forward by a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e within the plate thickness of the light guide radiating plate 3113 to form a decorative body. Since the 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 are light-emitting and decorated, the light of the first LED 3114a is emitted from the front surface of the light guide emitting plate 3113 as compared with the case where the first LED 3114a is directed to the front to irradiate the light. The distance until it is radiated forward can be lengthened, and the light from the first LED 3114a can be widely diffused and radiated forward from the light guide emitting plate 3113. Therefore, when the first LED 3114a is made to emit light, the light from the first LED 3114a can be widely diffused, and it is possible to suppress the appearance of light emission in a dot shape. Therefore, the decorative body 3111 and the decoration The sheet 3112 can be evenly luminescent and decorated to make it look beautiful, entertaining the player and suppressing a decrease in interest.

Further, in the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, since the flat-plate-shaped decorative member (decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112) and the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 are provided behind the light guide radiation plate 3113, the dimensions in the front-rear direction are thin. It is possible to easily secure a space for arranging the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, and other production members (back-up front rotation decoration body 3410, back-up rear rotation decoration body 3440, etc.) are arranged. It is possible to easily secure a space for the pachinko machine, and it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that is more entertaining to the player by providing various production members.

Further, the decorative member (back-rear movable decorative body 3110) provided with the decorative portion 3150 has a relief portion such as a first decorative protrusion 3111a, a second decorative protrusion 3111b, and a third decorative protrusion 3111c. Since it is composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 having a pattern such as the first contour portion 3112a, the decorative portion 3150 can be given a three-dimensional effect by the relief portion, and the relief portion is used. Due to the lens effect, it is possible to give a sense of depth to the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 provided at the rear. Therefore, the relief portion of the decorative body 3111 and the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 can show the player a three-dimensional decoration with a sense of depth (decorative portion 3150). Even if the dimensions in the front-rear direction are made thinner, the decorative effect is not reduced, the player's attention can be attracted and entertained, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 can be made thinner. The above-mentioned action and effect can be surely achieved.

Further, a decorative sheet having a pattern such as the first contour portion 3112a behind the decorative body 3111 having relief portions such as the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111c. Since the 3112 is provided, it is possible to make the decorative body 3111 appear to be colored by the color of the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 without coloring the transparent decorative body 3111, and the cost for the decorative body 3111 is reduced. Can be made to. Further, by changing the design of the decorative sheet 3112, the decoration (decorative portion 3150) of the decorative body 3111 (rear-rear movable decorative body 3110) can be easily changed. It can be a pachinko machine 1 that is easy to handle.

Further, the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a hologram portion in which a part of the pattern as the decorative portion 3150 is displayed due to light interference fringes, and the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 Light from, light from other LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1, light from the effect display device 1600, etc., light in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc. are holograms of the first contour portion 3112a. By hitting this part, a predetermined hologram can be shown by the interference fringes of light, so that the appearance of the decorative portion 3150 can be improved by the hologram, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted. Therefore, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to a part of the decorative portion 3150 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, and even if the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 is thinned, the player can not feel the thinness.

Further, since a part of the pattern on the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 is composed of a hologram, the hologram is formed on the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, and the third decorative protrusion 3111b. Since it can be seen through the transparent decorative body 3111 having a relief part such as 3111c, it is possible to give a sense of depth to a pattern such as a hologram by the lens effect of the relief part, which strongly attracts the interest of the player. The possible decoration part 3150 can be shown to the player. Further, since the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 has a hologram portion, it is possible to use a printing technique for forming the hologram portion, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost.

Further, in the decorative member composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flattened so that the outer shape of the decorative sheet 3112 is the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111. The outer peripheral edge of 3111 can be decorated with the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112, and since there is no frame on the outer periphery of the decoration (decorative portion 3150), a feeling of openness is given to the decoration of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110. As well as being able to make the decoration look bigger. Therefore, the decoration of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 (the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112, etc.) can be made more conspicuous, the decorative effect of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 can be sufficiently exhibited, and the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 can be fully exhibited. The decoration of the 3110 can strongly attract the interest of the player, and can provide the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the player.

Further, since the rear surface of the transparent decorative body 3111 is flattened, the decorative sheet 3112 is in contact (contact) with the rear surface of the decorative body 3111, so that light is emitted between the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. Is not diffusely reflected, and the pattern of the first contour portion 3112a of the decorative sheet 3112 can be made more visible through the transparent decorative body 3111, and the decorative effect of the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112 can be sufficiently exhibited. Further, since the rear surface of the decorative body 3111 is flat, the dimensions of the decorative member composed of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 in the front-rear direction can be made as small as possible. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of reducing the thickness of the rear movable decorative body 3110 and embodying the above-mentioned effects.

Further, the decorative sheet 3112 is formed to have the same size as the outer shape of the decorative body 3111, and the outer peripheral edge of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111) can be decorated by the pattern of the decorative sheet 3112. Therefore, by making the decoration mode of the member adjacent to the back-rear movable decoration body 3110 continuous with the decoration of the back-rear movable decoration body 3110, a large decoration with a sense of unity can be given to the player. It can be shown, it can give the player an impact on the appearance and attract attention, and it can also entertain a large decoration, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the light guide radiating plate 3113 has a plurality of first LED accommodating portions 3113c in which the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is accommodated from the rear, the first LED of the light guide radiating plate 3113 is accommodated. By accommodating the first LED 3114a from the rear in the portion 3113c, it is possible to bring the rear surface of the light guide emitting plate 3113 and the front surface of the back rear decorative substrate 3114 as close as possible, and the front and rear of the back rear movable decorative body 3110. The thickness in the direction can be reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-mentioned effects can be surely embodied.

Further, the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is accommodated in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide emitting plate 3113, and the light from the first LED 3114a is irradiated from the inner surface of the first LED accommodating portion 3113c into the plate thickness. Therefore, as compared with the case where the light is emitted from the outer peripheral surface of the light guide emitting plate 3113, the portion of the light guide emitting plate 3113 (for example, the central portion) where the light from the outer peripheral surface is hard to reach. However, by providing the first LED accommodating portion 3113c in the portion and irradiating the light from the inner surface thereof, the portion can be made to emit light brightly, and the back-rear movable decorative body 3110 (decorative body 3111 and decorative sheet) can be made to emit light brightly. 3112) can be evenly luminescent and decorated.

Further, since the first LED 3114a of the back-rear decorative substrate 3114 is of the side view type, the first LED is accommodated only by accommodating the first LED 3114a in the first LED accommodating portion 3113c of the light guide emitting plate 3113 and causing it to emit light. Light can be radiated from the inner surface of the portion 3113c (light receiving portion 3113i) in the direction along the plate surface within the plate thickness of the light guide emitting plate 3113, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned action and effect is surely embodied. be able to.

Further, since a plurality of reflecting portions 3113e are provided on substantially the entire rear surface of the light guide emitting plate 3113 and light can be emitted to substantially the entire decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112, the decorative body 3111 and the decoration Even if the decoration (decorative portion 3150) provided on the sheet 3112 is changed, it is not necessary to change the reflective portion 3113e, and it is possible to easily respond to the change in the decoration of the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can easily respond to model changes, design changes, and the like.

The back-rear movable decorative body 3160 and the back-rear movable decorative body 3170 can also exert the same effects as described above. It should be noted that the periodic shaking and rotation of the hold display, the periodic shaking and rotation of the decorative symbol, and the like may be a series of effects that are repeatedly executed in the dynamic display during the still image effect.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a game machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game machine (parrot machine) formed by fusing the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine can be used. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, in the above embodiment, as the decorative portion 3150 of the back-rear movable decorative body 3110, the first decorative protrusion 3111a, the second decorative protrusion 3111b, the third decorative protrusion 3111c, and the metal decorative portion 3111d of the decorative body 3111 The decoration is composed of the first contour portion 3112a, the second contour portion 3112b, the first light diffusing portion 3112c, and the decoration by the second light diffusing portion 3112d of the decorative sheet 3112, but the present invention is limited to this. It's not something to do. For example, the decorative body 3111 and the decorative sheet 3112 may be used as one decorative member, and the decorative portion 3150 may be applied to the decorative member.

<Slot machine>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings, taking a slot machine as a gaming machine as an example. In the following, the reference codes described so far will be reset, and the reference codes described so far and the reference codes described below will indicate the same code but different ones. 590 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine, FIG. 591 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine showing a state in which the door-shaped front member is omitted, FIG. 592 is a perspective view of the slot machine, and FIG. FIG. 594 is an enlarged view of the Z1 portion of FIG. 593, FIG. 595 is an enlarged view of the Z1 portion of FIG. 593 showing a state in which the connector holder is moved, and FIG. 596 is an enlarged view of the door-shaped front member. A cross-sectional view of the slot machine showing the omitted state, FIG. 597 (a) is an enlarged view of the Z2 portion of FIG. 596, and FIG. 597 (b) is an enlarged view of the Z2 portion of FIG. 596 showing a state in which the connector holder is moved. 598 is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 597 (a), FIG. 599 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the slot machine showing the back plate side, FIG. 600 is an exploded perspective view of the case member, and FIG. Viewed perspective views, FIGS. 602 (a) and 602 (b) are perspective views of the main parts of the case member for explaining the temporarily fixed state of the connector holder, FIG. 603 is an exploded perspective view of the wiring relay member, and FIG. 604 is a wiring relay member. 605 and 606 are exploded perspective views of the connector holder, FIG. 607 is a perspective view of a stopper for fixing the case member, and FIG. 608 is a perspective view of a stopper showing another form. FIG. 610 is a cross-sectional view of a main part showing a guide structure of a case member, FIG. 611 is a partial perspective view of a symbol variation display device showing another form of a handle, and FIG. 612 shows a relationship between the case member and a stopper on the outer body side. A perspective view of the main part shown, FIG. 613 is a sectional view of the main part showing the relationship between the wiring window and the reel of the symbol variation display device, FIG. 614 is a vertical sectional view of the upper part of the slot machine, and FIG. 616 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 615, FIG. 617 is a rear view of the heat dissipation port seen from the back side of the slot machine, and FIG. 618 is a part of the slot machine showing a power supply device. A front view of a cross-sectional portion, FIG. 619 is a perspective view showing a state in which the power supply device is looked up from below, FIG. 620 shows another form, a side plate of the outer body and a cross-sectional view of a main part of the power supply device, and FIG. 622 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lighting device shown in FIG. 622, FIG. 622 is a perspective view of a door-shaped front member shown by disassembling the transparent plate and the light emitting unit, and FIG. Is a cross-sectional view corresponding to line 622A-A of a door-shaped front member equipped with a transparent plate, FIG. 625 is an exploded / assembled perspective view of the hinge metal fittings, FIG. 626 is a diagram showing a chain of hinge metal fittings, and FIG. Sectional plan view of the main part showing the member, FIG. 628 opens A cross-sectional plan view of a main part showing a door-shaped front member in the middle, FIG. 629 is a perspective view of the upper half of the door-shaped front member as viewed from the back side, and FIG. FIG. 631 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part of the door-shaped front member showing an example of another hinge metal fitting, FIG. 632 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the opening of the door-shaped front member of FIG. 631, and FIG. A perspective view showing a state in which the front opening / closing member is opened, and FIG. 634 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door-shaped front member is opened with the connector connected.

As shown in FIGS. 590 and 591, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment of the present invention has a box-shaped outer body 100 having an open front surface and a door shape having a rotation shaft 100a on the front surface of the outer body 100 and opening sideways. A door-shaped front member 200 rotatably attached to the outer body, a symbol variation display device 300 that fluctuates a plurality of symbols by a driving means, and a case member that is detachable from the outer body 100 and has an opening 401 on the front surface. It has 400 and an image display body 500 for displaying an arbitrary image.

[1. Outer body]
As shown in FIGS. 590 to 593, the outer main body 100 has side plates 102 and 102 attached to the left and right sides of the bottom plate 101, and a top plate 103 is installed on the tops of the side plates 102 and 102 to form a vertically long "mouth" in front view. It has a character-shaped frame shape, and the back plate 104 is fixed to the back of the frame to form a box shape that opens only the front surface. The left and right side plates 102, 102 have a trapezoidal shape in which the front edges are slightly tilted in a backward tilted state, and therefore the opening of the outer body 100 has a backward tilted state. Further, on the top plate 103, a plurality (in the embodiment) of the top plate 103 in a region facing the upper rail 600 (see FIG. 614 imaginary line) of the game machine installation island in a state of being installed on the game machine installation island (not shown). (4) through holes 132, 132 ... Are bored.

[1-1. Outer body-partition plate]
A shelf plate-shaped partition plate 105 is provided in the outer main body 100 at substantially the center of the height. The partition plate 105 is made of metal and has a substantially convex shape in front view having a stepped portion 106 in the center as shown in FIGS. 590 and 591. The outer main body 100 has vertical mounting pieces 107 formed at both ends. The vertical mounting piece 108 formed at the rear end is fixed to the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 and attached. The mounting piece 108 at the rear end of the partition plate 105 is formed with a tubular protrusion (not shown) by burring processing (metal processing that raises a short tubular protrusion while expanding the hole diameter of the prepared hole with a punch). The tubular protrusion is driven into a small hole (not shown) pre-processed in the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 for positioning. Further, an opening 109 for wiring is formed between the partition plate 105 and the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 at the innermost portions on both sides of the partition plate 105.

[1-1-1. Outer body-partition plate-lower space]
In the space below the partition plate 105 in the outer main body 100, a medal discharge device 110 for discharging medals, which are game media, to a medal tray 201 at the lower front surface of the door-shaped front member 200, and a medal discharge device 110 An auxiliary storage box 111 for medals for storing overflowing medals, a power supply device 112, and the like are provided.

[1-1-1-1. Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Medal release device]
The medal discharge device 110 has a medal storage hopper 110b attached to a device body 110a having a built-in drive means, and a medal discharge port 110c is provided on the front surface of the device body 110a, and the medal discharge port 110c is provided in the hopper 110b. A certain medal is sent out one by one toward the discharge port 110c by the operation of the driving means. Further, the hopper 110b is provided with an overflow gutter 110d for discharging the overflowing medals, and the above-mentioned auxiliary storage box 111 for medals faces below the tip of the overflow gutter 110d. Any currently known medal ejection mechanism may be adopted as the medal ejection mechanism of the medal ejection device 110, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[1-1-1-2. Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Power supply]
As shown in FIGS. 615 to 619, the power supply device 112 is attached to an inner corner portion where the bottom plate 101 of the outer main body 100, the side plate 102 on the left side when facing the front, and the three members of the back plate 104 are orthogonal to each other. There is. The power supply device 112 is for supplying electricity to an electric component such as the medal discharge device 110 and is a component that easily generates heat. Therefore, the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 dissipates heat to the attachment portion of the power supply device 112. The mouth 104a is open.

The device case 112a of the power supply device 112 is made of a transparent synthetic resin. By doing so, since the inside of the device case 112a can be seen, it becomes easy to detect illegal work on the substrate 112s (see FIG. 619) of the power supply device 112. The device case 112a includes an upper surface plate 112b that covers the upper surface, a rear surface plate 112c that faces the back plate 104 of the outer body 100, a front plate 112d that covers the opposite side of the rear surface plate 112c, and the inside of the slot machine 1. It is formed of a side plate 112e that covers the facing side, a slope plate 112f that covers the boundary between the top plate 112b and the side plate 112e in a chamfered manner, and a bottom plate 112r (see FIG. 619) that covers the bottom. On the other hand, the surface of the device case 112a on the side facing the side plate 102 of the outer body 100 is not covered and is in an open state, but this open surface is attached to the outer body 100 by the side plate 102 of the outer body 100. It is blocked.

As shown in FIGS. 615 and 616, the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 is provided with a convex surface portion 102a to form a stepped guard portion 102b, and the upper surface plate 112b of the device case 112a is provided under the guard portion 102b. It is designed to let one side slip in. As a result, even if one surface of the device case 112a is not covered, the joint between the device case 112a and the side plate 102 is closed by the guard portion 102b, so that foreign matter cannot be inserted. FIG. 620 shows another embodiment in which the guard portion 102b is grooved. In this example, the edge of the upper surface plate 112b of the device case 112a is slightly projected toward the side plate 102, and the tip of the upper surface plate 112b is slightly projected toward the side plate 102. It is designed to fit in the groove.

In this way, in the device case 112a of the power supply device 112, when the surface of the outer body 100 in contact with the side plate 102 is made into an open structure without a cover so as to be closed by the side plate 102 during use, the inside of the device case 112a is entered. It is easy to incorporate the substrate 112s or the like using the open surface, and workability is improved because it is not necessary to attach a cover to the open surface after the substrate 112s or the like is incorporated into the device case 112a.

A large number of ventilation holes 112g, 112g ... Are formed in the upper surface plate 112b, the side surface plate 112e, the slope plate 112f, the rear surface plate 112c, and the bottom surface plate 112r of the device case 112a so that heat is not trapped inside. .. The device case 112a is lifted on a stilt by legs 112h, 112h ... Provided at the bottom, and a ventilation space 112i is formed between the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a and the bottom plate 101 of the outer body 100. Therefore, low-layer relatively cold air can be introduced into the device case 112a from the ventilation space 112i through the ventilation holes 112g, 112g ... Of the bottom plate 112r. Since the ventilation space 112i of the embodiment communicates with the heat radiation port 104a of the outer body 100, cold air on the back of the machine can be introduced into the ventilation space 112i. If an inverted L-shaped step portion 112j (see FIG. 619) that raises the ventilation space 112i is formed at the boundary between the rear surface plate 112c and the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a, the height of the leg portion 112h and the heat dissipation port 104a are formed. The ventilation space 112i can be communicated with the heat radiating port 104a even if the height of the air is deviated.

[1-1-1-2-1. Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Power supply-Fixed]
The power supply device 112 includes a mounting piece 112k that is perpendicular to one side of the front plate 112d of the device case 112a, and a protrusion that protrudes from the rear surface plate 112c of the device case 112a toward the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. It is fixed to the outer body 100 by a combination of 112 m and a heat radiation port 104a provided on the back plate 104 of the outer body 100.

That is, the contour of the heat radiating port 104a is formed smaller than the contour of the rear surface plate 112c of the device case 112a, so that the power supply device 112 hits the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 and does not pass through the heat radiating port 104a. Further, the protrusion 112m projecting from the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a is located at a position inscribed in the heat radiation port 104a, and is a horizontal protrusion inscribed in the upper side of the heat radiation port 104a in order to resist the lifting operation of the power supply device 112. It is composed of a piece 112m-1 and a vertical projecting piece 112m-2 inscribed in the vertical side of the heat radiation port 104a in order to resist the rolling operation of the power supply device 112. Therefore, simply by pushing the power supply device 112 along the inner surface of the side plate 102 of the outer body 100 and inserting the protrusion 112 m into the heat radiating port 104a, the rear surface (back side) of the device case 112a is upwardly (lifted) and FIG. 615. The fixing to the right (rollover) is completed at. Of course, the movement of the power supply device 112 is regulated by the bottom plate 101 of the outer body 100 in the downward direction and by the side plate 102 of the outer body 100 in the left direction in FIG. 615. The movement of the power supply device 112 can be completely regulated except in the direction of pulling toward the front by a simple operation of fitting the protrusion 112m.

On the other hand, a plurality of through holes 112p for screws are bored in the mounting piece 112k projecting from the front plate 112d, and at least one of the through holes 112p is fixed to the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 through a wood screw 112q. As a result, the movement of the power supply device 112 is restricted also in the direction of pulling toward the front, so that the power supply device 112 can be securely fixed to the outer body 100 with one wood screw 112q.

[1-1-1-2-2. Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Power supply-Power cord]
A power cord (not shown) for receiving electricity from the outside is connected to the power supply device 112. Conventionally, a bulging portion is provided on the side of the heat radiating port 104a so that the power cord is pulled out from the bulging portion, but at this position, there is a high risk that the power cord will be rubbed against the ground even if the power cord is bundled. Since the slot machine 1 may be turned on during manufacturing and the power cord must be taken out of the outer main body 100 in preparation for such a case, it is necessary to put out the power cord when moving on the manufacturing line or between lines. There is a risk that the power cord may slip on the ground or get caught under the bottom plate 101 of the slot machine 1 when the machine is moved.

On the other hand, the heat radiation port 104a of the embodiment extends the cord outlet 104b from the upper side to the upper side, and pulls out the power cord from the cord outlet 104b. As a result, a sufficient height can be secured to hang the bundled power strips in a suspended state. Therefore, the trouble of accidentally damaging the power cord in the process of manufacturing the slot machine 1 is drastically reduced.

As described above, the slot machine 1 of the present invention can be installed only by setting the power supply device 112 in the inner corner portion of the outer body 100 and screwing in one wood screw 112q. Therefore, the power supply device 112 has a power supply device 112 as compared with the conventional one. Significant labor saving in installation work is possible. Further, in the present invention, fixing is completed by screwing to one surface, so that it is easy to see and can be securely fixed, especially when the part to be fixed is brought to the front (front) of the power supply device 112. .. Incidentally, conventionally, it is necessary to screw the power supply device 112 to a plurality of surfaces or members, and in particular, the screws fixed to the back plate 104 are difficult to see and may be forgotten.

Further, since the heat radiating port 104a is necessary as a cooling means for the power supply device 112, even if the heat radiating port 104a is used for fixing the power supply device 112, almost no extra process or cost is generated. On the contrary, the position of the heat radiating port 104a and the position of the power supply device 112 are matched for fixing, so that the cooling efficiency is improved. In addition, when the device case 112a is made of synthetic resin as in the embodiment, the protrusion 112m for mounting can also be integrally molded, so that there is almost no cost. Therefore, the total cost required to install the power supply device 112 can be reduced as compared with the conventional case.

Furthermore, when the device case 112a is made of synthetic resin, there is an advantage that the legs 112h and the step 112j of the device case 112a, which are useful as measures against heat generation of the power supply device 112, can be implemented at almost no cost.

[1-1-2. Outer body-partition plate-upper space]
On the other hand, the case member 400 is housed in the space above the partition plate 105 in the outer main body 100, and the wiring relay member 113 which is the core of the wiring means described later is placed on the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. It is attached (see FIGS. 590 and 591), and a vent 133 for heat dissipation is formed on the back plate 104 above the wiring relay member 113.

[2. Door type front member]
FIG. 592 shows the front side of the door-shaped front member 200, and FIG. 590 shows the back side of the door-shaped front member 200. The door-shaped front member 200 has a medal tray 201 below the front side, and an operation unit 202 is provided substantially in the center of the front side. In the operation unit 202, only one medal is inserted (pulled) from the insertion port 203 for inserting medals, the effect button 204 that can be operated by the player, and the medals stored as data in the memory of the main board 409 described later. One-card insertion button 205 for instructing (drop), MAX insertion button 206 for instructing the maximum number of medals (for example, three) that can be used in one game, and medals packed in the medal selector 207, which will be described later. A medal return button 208 for returning the medal to the medal tray 201, a storage release switch 209 for inputting a medal storage release command (release command by settlement) stored as data in the memory of the main board 409, and the above. A start lever 210 for operating the symbol variation display device 300, and three reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c and the like for stopping the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 are provided. Of course, the configuration of the operation unit 202 shown here is an example, and is not limited thereto.

Further, a medal selector 207 is provided on the back side of the insertion slot 203, a medal gutter 212 is connected to the side of the medal selector 207, and a return gutter 213 is connected to the bottom. The medal selector 207 is a known one that switches the flow path by turning on / off a built-in solenoid (not shown), and when waiting for a medal from a player to be inserted, the flow path is set to the medal gutter 212 side. In addition, when the insertion of medals is refused, such as when the number of medals exceeds the specified number, the flow path is set to the return gutter 213 side. The tip of the medal gutter 212 faces the inside of the hopper 110b of the medal discharging device 110 when the door-shaped front member 200 is in the closed position so as to cover the front surface of the outer body 100, and the medal selector 207 is provided from the insertion port 203. The medals that flow through the medal gutter 212 arrive at the hopper 110b. On the other hand, the return gutter 213 is connected to the medal tray 201 on the front side, and the medals flowing from the slot 203 through the medal selector 207 to the return gutter 213 return to the medal tray 201.

[2-1. Door-shaped front member-perspective window]
The door-shaped front member 200 has a size that covers the entire front surface of the outer body 100, and the upper half thereof is a see-through window for games covered with a transparent plate 214a as shown in FIGS. 622 and 623. It is 214. The perspective window 214 and the transparent plate 214a of the embodiment are larger than usual so that the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 can be seen side by side, and the image is imaged by the forehead frame 216 integrated with the door-shaped front member 200. The areas of the display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 are visually divided into upper and lower areas. By setting the size of one transparent plate 214a to cover both the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 in this way, the arrangement of the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 can be switched up and down. However, it can be used as it is.

[2-2. Door-shaped front member-transparent window-transparent plate]
The transparent plate 214a uses a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a methacrylic resin containing rubber having excellent impact resistance, scratch resistance, and optical characteristics, and in the embodiment, "Acrylic (registered trademark) IR D30" manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Corporation. ) Is an almost upside-down trapezoidal shape, and the edge member 214b, which bulges toward the front side of the three sides (left and right side and upper side) excluding the bottom side, with the side facing the player as the front side. 214b and 214b are integrally molded at the time of resin molding using a resin molding mold. When the edge member 214b is integrally molded on the peripheral edge of the flat plate-shaped transparent plate 214a in this way, the transparent plate 214a is described above because the edge member 214b serves as a reinforcing bar to increase the strength of the entire transparent plate 214a. Even if it is large enough to cover both the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 as described above, bending and distortion are unlikely to occur.

As shown in FIG. 624, the edge member 214b has a shell structure that opens to the rear surface side (not solid, but a shell-like structure having a space inside, and the wall thickness of each part is arbitrary). In the internal space thereof, a light emitting unit 217 and, if necessary, a decorative member (not shown) having a pattern or characters on the surface are incorporated.

In FIG. 623, the light emitting unit 217 is drawn so as to be attached to the door type front member 200, but the actual light emitting unit 217 is fitted in the edge member 214b as shown in FIG. 624. ing. Therefore, the transparent plate 214a and the light emitting unit 217 are treated as an integral part.

The shape of the edge member 214b is not limited to the one shown in the drawing, and can be arbitrarily changed according to the design of the light emitting unit 217 and the decorative member. Further, the portion where the edge member 214b is provided is not limited to the three sides of the peripheral edge of the transparent plate 214a as in the embodiment, and may be provided on at least one side.

In addition, in FIGS. 622 and 623, reference numeral 218 is a fixing member provided at the left and right corners of the transparent plate 214a, and is a screw passed through the through hole 214c (see the enlarged view of FIG. 622) from the back side of the transparent plate 214a. (Not shown), it is stopped in the state of FIG. 623 fitted between the edge member 214b and the edge member 214b. The fixing member 218 serves as a corner decoration in appearance, but with respect to the through holes 200a and 214d (see the enlarged view of FIG. 622) provided in the upper corners of the door-shaped front member 200 and the transparent plate 214a, respectively. It is screwed into a screw (not shown) passed from the back side of the door type front member 200, and thus serves as a nut for fixing the transparent plate 214a to the door type front member 200.

Further, in FIGS. 622 to 624, reference numeral 217a is a light emitting body of the light emitting unit 217, and 217b is a reflecting member supporting the light emitting body 217a. As shown in FIG. 624, the reflecting members 217b of the light emitting units 217 located on the left and right are set at angles so as to reflect a large amount of the light of the rod-shaped light emitting body 217a toward the periphery of the slot machine 1. In the form in which the light emitting unit 217 is incorporated inside the edge member 214b of the transparent plate 214a, the light emitting body 217a can be arranged closer to the front side of the slot machine 1, so that it is as if it were a lighthouse at the tip of a cape. , It is advantageous when radiating light toward the surroundings. Further, the reflecting member 217b of the light emitting unit 217 located above is set so as to reflect a large amount of light from the light emitting body 217a (combination of the light source 217a-1 and the light guide plate 217a-2) toward the upper side of the slot machine 1. ing.

The light emitting unit 217 having the above configuration can be turned on during the game, especially when a big hit occurs, to appeal the occurrence of the big hit to the surroundings. By producing a highly appealing effect to the surroundings in this way, the player who has won the big hit can be noticed, and the eyes of many people give the player a sense of superiority, so that the game becomes even more exciting. In addition, it is expected that the popularity of the model will increase and the operating rate will improve by appealing to the surroundings that a big hit has occurred.

The transparent plate 214a of the embodiment has the above-described configuration, and the plate-shaped bottom of the door-shaped front member 200 is provided with respect to the concave groove 219 (see the enlarged view of FIG. 623) provided on the back side of the door-shaped front member 200. It is inserted diagonally from the front surface and fitted into a fitting type, and in that state, the transparent plate 214a is made to stand upright, and all the edge members 214b, 214b, 214b are brought into contact with the front surface of the door type front member 200, and further, the door type front member 200 It is fixed by a screw 603 (see FIG. 590) passed from the back. FIG. 624 is a cut-out of a main part of the door-shaped front member 200 at this time, and as is clear from FIG. 624, if a player has a foreign matter from the boundary between the door-shaped front member 200 and the edge member 214b. Even if the foreign matter is forcibly inserted, there is almost no room for the tip of the foreign matter to cross the inside of the edge member 214b and reach the back side of the transparent plate 214a. Therefore, it exhibits an excellent crime prevention effect.

[2-3. Door type front member-locking device]
A lock device 215 that opens and closes using a dedicated key (not shown) is provided on one side of the door-shaped front member 200 on the free end side.

[3. Design variation display device]
The symbol variation display device 300 is a reel rotation type display device, and incorporates and accommodates, for example, three reels 301a, 301b, 301c and the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, which can be individually rotated by a drive means 303 such as a motor. It is a well-known device that has a device case 302 for playing a game by combining a plurality of symbols (not shown) drawn on the peripheral surfaces of reels 301a, 301b, and 301c.

The device case 302 has a modified hexagonal column shape excluding three surfaces facing the front (player) from an octagonal column that is laid on its side, and has a bottom plate 304, a top plate 305, and the right side when viewed in FIG. 600. Right side plate 306, left side plate 307, vertical rear plate 308 covering the rear surface, upper swash plate 309 provided between top plate 305 and rear plate 308, bottom plate 304 and rear plate 308. It has a box shape surrounded by a lower swash plate 310 provided between the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, and a part of the arcs of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c protrudes from the front surface of the device case 302.

Further, the top plate portion 305 of the device case 302 is provided with a handle 311 that can be changed between a used state in which a finger can be hooked and a non-used state in which the top plate portion 305 is prone, and a finger can be hooked on the handle 311. It is designed to be carried around.

The configuration in which the changeable handle 311 is provided on the top plate portion 305 of the device case 302 as described above is closely related to the measure for increasing the strength of the case member 400. That is, in the embodiment, as will be described later, a reinforcing bar 402 is provided in the opening 401 of the case member 400, thereby imparting sufficient strength to the opening 401 of the case member 400 so that the image display body 500 can be cantilevered. Since such a reinforcing bar 402 crosses the opening 401, it clearly hinders the insertion and removal of the device case 302 into and from the case member 400. On the other hand, if the handle 311 is made variable and laid down on the top plate 305 as in the embodiment, the handle 311 does not protrude, so that the device case 302 can easily pass under the reinforcing bar 402. Therefore, it is possible to provide the opening 401 of the case member 400 with the reinforcing bar 402 in the direction crossing the opening 401 only when the top plate portion 305 of the device case 302 is provided with the changeable handle 311 as described above. Become. By the way, in the conventional device case, since the handle protrudes from the top plate and becomes an obstacle, there is no room for providing a reinforcing bar at the opening of the case member.

The handle 311 of the embodiment has a structure that swings and changes between a standing state and a prone unused state, but a structure that can change the handle 311 between a used state and a non-used state is implemented. It is not limited to the form. For example, as shown in FIG. 611, two belt loops 314 and 314 are cut up on the top plate portion 305, and the belt loops 314 and 314 are made of, for example, synthetic resin or leather and have retaining portions 315 and 315 at both ends. The belt-shaped handle 311 provided is inserted, and the structure is such that the center is pulled up from the non-used state shown in FIG. 611 to change the used state so that the finger can be hooked. Any structure may be used as long as it can be changed to an unused state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 593 and 600, a flange-shaped lower handle 316 is projected from the bottom plate 304 of the device case 302 of the embodiment, and the lower handle 316 is grasped to push the device case 302 or push the device case 302. By pulling it, it is easy to put it in and out of the case member 400.

[4. Case member]
The case member 400 has a size substantially matching the space above the partition plate 105 of the outer main body 100, and includes a bottom plate 403, side plates 404, 404 erected on both left and right sides of the bottom plate 403, and a bottom plate 403. It is a box shape having a rear surface plate 405 erected on the trailing edge, a rear surface plate 405, and a top plate 406 covering the upper surfaces of the side plates 404 and 404, and having an opening 401 on the front surface.

In the case member 400, the bottom plate 403 is made of metal, the side plates 404, 404, the rear surface plate 405, and the top plate 406 are made of synthetic resin, and the inner surfaces of the side plates 404, 404 and the opening 401 of the top plate 406 are reinforced with metal. Members 407, 407, 407 are provided, and a metal reinforcing bar 402 that crosses the opening 401 is hung between the reinforcing members 407, 407 of the side plates 404, 404. Then, below the reinforcing bar 402 as a boundary, the area below the reinforcing bar 402 serves as an installation area for the symbol variation display device 300, and the opening 401 above the reinforcing bar 402 serves as an installation area for the image display body 500. The area surrounded by the case member 400 behind the display body 500 is assigned as the wiring work space 408, and the main board 409, which is the main control board, is mounted on the inner wall surface of the rear surface plate 405 of the wiring work space 408. A control board or the like other than the main board 409 (for example, a sub board 510 (see FIG. 633)) is also mounted in the wiring work space 408.

As shown in FIG. 590, skylight portions 443 and 443 are formed on the top plate 406 of the case member 400. The skylight portions 443 and 443 are divided into two parts with a reinforcing band 444 for maintaining the strength of the top plate 406, and each of them has an axis that passes through the through holes 132, 132, ... Of the outer main body 100. It is located in the region including the intersection, and is sufficiently wider than the through holes 132, 132 ... However, the front peripheral edge of the skylight portion 443 is brought close to the through hole 132 located on the front side. By doing so, the through hole 132 can be found by groping with reference to the peripheral edge of the skylight portion 443, so that the position of the through hole 132 can be quickly and easily determined even if the operator cannot look into the skylight portion 443. Here, the skylight portion 443 also functions as the opening of the present invention. That is, by providing a plurality of skylight portions 443 as openings on the upper surface of the case member 400, it is possible to reduce the weight and further reduce the burden on the operator during transportation and replacement.

As shown in FIGS. 591, 594, 595, and 601 on the outer surface of the rear plate 405 of the case member 400, a plurality of bosses 410 and 410 are projected, and the bosses 410 are used as the back plate of the outer body 100. It is positioned by fitting it into the boss holes 114 and 114 pre-processed in 104. The bosses 410 and 410 are provided near the wiring window 411 described later as shown in FIGS. 591 and 594, while the boss holes 114 and 114 on the outer body 100 side are near the wiring relay member 113. This ensures accurate positioning of the wiring window 411 of the case member 400 and the wiring relay member 113 of the back plate 104.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 591, a concave step portion 412 is formed on the bottom surface of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400, and the concave step portion 412 fits into the step portion 106 of the partition plate 105. A tapered portion 413 that expands rearward is provided at the end of the concave step portion 412 on the rear surface plate 405 side, and the step portion 106 of the partition plate 105 and the case member 400 are guided by the tapered portion 413. Fitting with the concave step portion 412 can be performed smoothly. In this way, the case member 400 is guided straight to the back of the partition plate 105 by the fitting of the concave step portion 412 of the case member 400 and the protruding portion 106 of the partition plate 105. For example, as shown in FIG. 609, the partition A rail member 115 in the form of a concave groove is laid or integrally press-formed on the plate 105, while a wheel 414 is installed on the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400 so that the wheel 414 can be rolled in the groove of the rail member 115. May be good. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 610, a convex rail member 116 is laid or integrally press-formed on the partition plate 105, while collars 415 and 415 are formed at both ends of the wheel 414 of the case member 400. The rail member 116 may be sandwiched between the collars 415 and 415 of the wheels 414.

Further, the case member 400 is stopped by the swing lever type stopper 117 shown in FIGS. 590, 591, 607, and 612 in a state of being set at a predetermined position on the partition plate 105. As shown in FIGS. 590 and 591, the stopper 117 is pivotally attached to the front end portion of the partition plate 105 and the two attachments 118 and 118 suspended from the top plate 103, as shown by the solid line in FIG. 607. The operating posture that engages with a part of the case member 400 and the non-operating posture that does not engage with the case member 400 as shown in FIG. 607 are manually switched in the forward direction on the partition plate 105 of the case member 400. Regulate movement. If the stopper 117 is shaped like a key as shown in FIG. 608 and engaged with the hooking portion 416 provided on the case member 400, the upward movement of the case member 400 on the partition plate 105 is also restricted. be able to.

Further, the stopper 117 axially attached to the attachment 118 of the top plate 103 is located at a position facing the side plate 404 of the case member 400 and the locking hole 442 penetrating the corner portion of the top plate 406 as shown in FIG. 612. The operating posture and the non-operating posture can be switched from the inside of the case member 400 with the case member 400 pushed into a predetermined position.

Further, the rear plate 405 of the case member 400 is provided with a wiring window 411 in the form of a long hole penetrating the back plate 104 side of the outer main body 100. The wiring window 411 corresponds to the upper swash plate 309 of the device case 302 of the symbol variation display device 300 installed on the case member 400 as shown in FIGS. 593, 594, and 613, and is on the lower side of the main board 409. 417 (or you can think of it as a horizontally long triangular space 417 formed between the upper swash plate 309 and the main board 409) and the back. It functions as an opening for connecting the plates 104.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 594 and 601 the case member 400 is provided with a shelf plate-shaped temporary fixing member 418 (hereinafter, also referred to as “temporary fixing shelf”) at a position substantially intermediate to the height of the empty space 417. In addition, recesses 419 and 419, which are wiring passages that pass through to the left and right side surfaces of the case member 400, are formed on both sides of the wiring window 411 on the outside of the rear surface plate 405.

If the arrangement of the wiring window 411 is specified with reference to the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300, the wiring window 411 is the reel 301a of the symbol variation display device 300 as shown in FIG. 613. , 301b, 301c with the horizontal plane HL passing through the center of rotation and the horizontal plane HH passing through the highest height position of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c as the lower limit, that is, the height at which the lower side is placed within that range. In other words, it is an arrangement.

[5. Image display]
The image display body 500 is, for example, a panel-shaped unit capable of displaying an image composed of at least a liquid crystal display (other than a plasma display, an organic EL display, etc.), and can open and close the front opening of the case member 400. It also functions as a front opening / closing member 90 (see FIG. 633) that closes to the front. The image display body 500 has a hinge metal fitting 420 attached to a reinforcing member 407 provided on the left side plate 404 of the case member 400 in FIG. 600 (see the shaded portion in FIG. 600 for the mounting position), and is rotated by the hinge metal fitting 420. It is supported freely.

Further, as shown in FIG. 633, a sub-board 510 is assembled on the back surface side of the image display body 500. For this reason, the image display body 500 such as a liquid crystal display and the sub-board 510 can be integrally configured, which facilitates handling and omits the wiring connecting the two, so that the wiring work in the case member 400 can be performed. The complexity of the space 408 can be suppressed. Further, when the image display body 500 is opened, the sub-board 510 appears to pop out from the inside of the case member 400, so that the workability with respect to the sub-board 510 can be significantly improved.

[5-1. Image display body-hinge metal fittings]
FIG. 625 is an exploded / assembled perspective view of the hinge metal fitting 420. Since the hinge metal fitting 420 has a vertically symmetrical structure, the upper part will be mainly described. The hinge metal fitting 420 is fixed to the fixing member 420a attached to the reinforcing member 407 of the case member 400, the rotating member 420b attached to the back side of the image display body 500 (see the broken line region 500s in FIG. 625), and the rotating member 420b. It is composed of a short link 420c and a long link 420d connecting the members 420a.

The fixing member 420a of the hinge metal fitting 420 has a sideways fixing piece 420e in the form of a shelf plate, one end of a long link 420d is a pin P1 on the upper surface of the fixing piece 420e, and a short link is attached to the lower surface of the fixing piece 420e. One end of the 420c is rotatably attached to the shaft with the pin P2. On the other hand, the rotating member 420b of the hinge metal fitting 420 has a lateral bearing piece 420f in the form of a shelf plate, one end of the long link 420d is a pin P3 on the upper surface of the bearing piece 420f, and the lower surface of the bearing piece 420f. One end of the short link 420c is rotatably attached to the shaft with a pin P4.

In this way, the fixed piece 420e, the bearing piece 420f, the long link 420d, the short link 420c, and the pins P1 to P4 form a four-node rotating chain as shown in the diagram of FIG. A so-called double lever mechanism is configured in which a fixed piece 420e facing a certain bearing piece 420f is used as a fixed link. As shown in FIGS. 626A to 626, the double lever mechanism approximates the rotation trajectory of the image display body 500 to a rotation trajectory centered on the rotation axis 100a of the door-shaped front member 200. Therefore, each pin position is set. That is, the hinge metal fitting 420 functions as a rotation center moving mechanism, and even if the rotation position of the door type front member 200 changes, the rotation outer edge side of the door type front member 200 and the rotation outside of the image display body 500 The distance to the veranda is made to be substantially constant.

In the long link 420d and the short link 420c, the polymerization regions 420g and 420h are set so that the image display body 500 is vertically overlapped with the image display body 500 rotated (opened) by about 90 degrees (for example, the polymerization of the long link 420d). The region 420g is bulged into a triangle so as to overlap the polymerization region 420h of the short link 420c), and pin holes 420i and 420j are formed in the polymerization regions 420g and 420h, respectively. The pin holes 420i and 420j connect the long link 420d and the short link 420c by aligning them coaxially and inserting a rod-shaped stop pin (not shown), thereby locking both lever mechanisms and displaying an image. This is for fixing the 500 in an open position.

[5-2. Image display-lock piece]
As shown in FIGS. 600 and 601 of the vertical reinforcing members 407 of the case member 400, the reinforcing member 407 (on the right side in FIG. 600) on the opposite side of the reinforcing member 407 provided with the hinge metal fitting 420 is locked. A piece 421 is axially attached, and when the lock piece 421 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 600, the tip thereof engages with a receiving portion 508 protruding from the back side of the image display body 500, and in this state. The image display body 500 is locked at a position where the upper portion of the opening 401 of the case member 400 is closed. On the other hand, when the lock piece 421 is rotated in the opposite direction from the locked state, the image display body 500 is unlocked and becomes rotatable around the hinge metal fitting 420. Normally, the image display body 500 is locked to the closed position to prevent unnecessary rotation before the case member 400 is attached to the outer body 100, while the image is obtained when the case member 400 is attached to the outer body 100. The display body 500 is unlocked to be rotatable.

[5-3. Image display-connector]
By the way, since the case member 400 is provided with an image display body 500 that can be opened and closed separately from the door-shaped front member 200 of the outer body 100, when the inside of the case member 400 is visually recognized or the work is performed inside the case member 400. First, the door-shaped front member 200 on the front side must be opened, and then the image display body 500 on the back side must be opened, which may reduce workability or cause annoyance. ..

Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of this example, the rotation direction of the image display body 500 is set to the same direction as the rotation direction of the door type front member 200, and the door type front member 200 and the image display body 500 are appropriately connected. It is connected by 700, and the image display body 500 is also opened and closed in conjunction with the opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200. According to this, when the door-shaped front member 200 is opened, the image display body 500 also rotates in the same direction via the connector 700, and the front surface of the case member 400 is opened. That is, the image display body 500 is carried around to the door-shaped front member 200, and it is possible to visually recognize not only the inside of the outer main body 100 but also the inside of the case member 400 by one lateral opening operation.

Here, as described above, the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 of the embodiment have the rotation locus of the image display body 500 as the rotation axis 100a of the door-shaped front member 200 by the double lever mechanism of the hinge metal fitting 420. Although it is designed to approximate the rotation locus centered on, there is still a relative deviation between the movements of the two. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 629 and 630, the connector 700 of the embodiment forms the fixed sheath member 701 on the back surface of the image display body 500 on the free end side and slides inside the fixed sheath member 701. The rod 702 is housed in a free state, and the tip of the rod 702 is connected to the back surface of the door-shaped front member 200 (specifically, the base member 215a of the locking device 215) so as to be rotatable by the stop shaft 703. is there. By doing so, as shown in FIG. 628, the image display body 500 opens and closes together as if it were an accessory part of the door-shaped front member 200 in conjunction with the opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200, and both of them occur at that time. The rod 702 of the connector 700 moves in and out of the fixed sheath member 701 to absorb the relative deviation of the movement.

The maximum protrusion length when the rod 702 most protrudes from the rotation outer edge (free end) of the image display body 500 is when the image display body 500 is in the open position (for example, when the image display body 500 is opened by 90 °). It is set based on the distance between the rotating outer edge of the door-shaped front member 200 (the position of the stop shaft 703) and the rotating outer edge of the image display body 500. Therefore, the length of the rod 702 can be set to the minimum necessary length, and it is possible to suppress the increase in size of the connecting tool.

Further, the stop shaft 703 is mounted so as to be vertically movable with respect to the support pieces 215b, 215b, 215b formed by bending a part of the base member 215a of the lock device 215, and is always urged downward by the spring 703a. Has been done. Therefore, the stop shaft 703 can be moved upward against the urging of the spring 703a, and the rod 702 of the connector 700 can be attached / detached by moving the stop shaft 703 upward to lift the lower end. That is, the stop shaft 703 can be inserted from above into the shaft hole portion 702a formed in the tip portion of the rod 702 and can be held by the urging force of the spring 703a.

Further, in FIG. 629, reference numeral 704 is an elastic cantilever type stopper provided on the upper surface of the fixed sheath member 701 of the connector 700, and the rod 702 removed from the stop shaft 703 is attached to the fixed sheath member 701. It is intended to be housed and held inside, and engages with the hooking wall 702b at the end of the groove 705 formed on the upper surface of the rod 702 to prevent the rod 702 from blinding. A picking piece 706 is projected from the side surface of the rod 702 in a direction orthogonal to the sliding direction, and the stopper 704 is unlocked by picking the picking piece 706 and forcibly moving the rod 702. It has become like. Further, a retaining piece 701a is hung from the bottom surface of the fixed sheath member 701 on the tip end side and inserted into the groove 705 of the rod 702. The retaining piece 701a comes into contact with the hooking wall 702b when the rod 702 protrudes most, and prevents the rod 702 from coming out of the fixed sheath member 701.

Further, in FIG. 629, reference numeral 509 near the connector 700 is an engaging portion projecting from the back surface of the image display body 500 on the rotation outer edge side. The engaging portion 509 engages with the reinforcing bar 402 that crosses the opening 401 of the case member 400 to support the load on the free end side of the image display body 500 in the closed position. As shown in FIG. 600, the reinforcing bar 402 has a slide-type guide portion 402a that inclines downward toward the image display body 500 in order to smoothly guide the engaging portion 509 to the upper surface of the reinforcing bar 402. It is provided. Further, the engaging portion 509 of the image display body 500 is formed of a synthetic resin having excellent lubricity, which is different from that of the image display body 500, and is detachably attached (replaceable) to the image display body 500. There is.

By the way, the relative deviation of the movement caused by the difference in the rotation locus between the door type front member 200 and the image display body 500 is made into a flexible wire in addition to the stretchable rod type connector 700 as described above. Can also be absorbed. However, if the connector is a flexible wire or the like, the door-shaped front member 200 will hit the image display body 500 that is stopped while the door-shaped front member 200 is closed at the stage of closing the door-shaped front member 200, which impairs smoothness. There is a risk. On the other hand, for example, the image display body 500 may be provided with an urging means such as a winding spring so that the image display body 500 is always urged in the closing direction. By doing so, when the door-shaped front member 200 is closed, the image display body 500 closes by itself while pulling the connector by the action of the urging force, so that the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 do not collide with each other. Of course, the means for rotating the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 is not limited to the above. For example, the hinge metal fitting 420, which is one element for carrying around in the above, is not limited to the structure of the double lever mechanism as described above, and is centered on a single pin 420k as shown in FIGS. 630 and 631. It may be a simple one that rotates the image display body 500.

A locking means for locking the image display body 500 to the closed position as described above so that the image display body 500 can be rotated like a door by forming the attachment means of the image display body 500 to the case member 400 into a hinge structure. When the above lock piece 421) is added, the lock is continued in principle with the case member 400 attached to the outer body 100, and the lock is released only when necessary, such as checking the inside of the wiring work space 408. It is also possible to select the handling, and in that case, the image display body 500 can block important parts (for example, the main board 409 and the sub board 510) in the wiring work space 408, which is effective in improving the security performance. ..

A gap 10 is provided between the upper edge of the opening 401 of the case member 400 and the upper edge of the closed image display body 500, and the reinforcing member 407 of the top plate 406 is formed by a finger passing through the gap 10. You can grab it. Further, a handle opening 422 is formed in the front central portion (reinforcing band 444 between the skylight portions 443 and 443) of the top plate 406 of the case member 400, and the top plate 406 is formed by a finger passed through the handle opening 422. The reinforcing member 407 can be grasped. Therefore, the case member 400 can be appropriately used between the handle opening 422 and the gap 10 according to the handling place and posture. For example, when transporting the case member 400 before incorporating it into the outer body 100, it is better to carry it in a bag form using the handle opening 422, while when the case member 400 is attached to the outer body 100, it is shown in FIG. 593. As described above, since the handle opening 422 is hidden behind the outer body 100 and the finger cannot enter, the case member 400 is pulled out by hooking the finger on the reinforcing member 407 from the gap 10. The lower handle 316 (see FIGS. 593 and 600) of the device case 302 is projected from the center of the front surface of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400, and the outer main body 100 is pushed or pulled by holding the lower handle 316. The case member 400 can be easily taken in and out of the case. In this case, the lower handle 316 is integrated with the case member 400 because the device case 302 is fixed to the case member 400 with screws. Therefore, the lower handle 316 is projected from the front of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400. Is equal to

[5-4. Image display body-frame member]
The image display body 500 has a size that covers almost the entire region above the reinforcing bar 402 of the opening 401 of the case member 400. Further, on the lower side of the image display body 500, a frame member 501 that surrounds the area below the reinforcing bar 402 of the opening 401 of the case member 400, that is, the front area of the symbol variation display device 300 in a frame shape is integrally hung. The frame member 501 borders the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c of the symbol variation display device 300. The surface of the frame member 501 is a decorative surface, and an appropriate pattern or the like is drawn. Although not shown, the frame member 501 is an illumination composed of a light emitting source such as an LED, a light emitting control board for controlling the light emitting source, and a decorative member arranged in front of the light emitting source and capable of transmitting light. A part is provided. Here, a combination of the image display body 500 and the frame member 501 will be described below as a front opening / closing member 90 (see FIG. 633).

[5-4-1. Image display body-frame member-lighting device]
Illumination devices 502 are provided above and below the back side of the frame member 501, and the symbol of the symbol variation display device 300 is brightly illuminated by the illumination device 502. Since the frame member 501 is vertically provided under the image display body 500 and is close to the symbol variation display device 300, the light source can be brought closer to the symbol variation display device 300 by incorporating the lighting device 502 into such a frame member 501. it can. Therefore, the means for incorporating the illuminating device 502 into the frame member 501 is characterized in that sufficient brightness can be ensured even with a low light intensity as compared with the conventional illuminating device.

As shown in FIG. 593, the lighting device 502 exemplified as the embodiment is a strip-shaped substrate elongated in a direction orthogonal to the paper surface in the drawing (the width direction of the slot machine 1 and the same direction as the rotation axis of the reel 301a ...). A large number of light emitting diodes (hereinafter referred to as LEDs) 504 are arranged on the 503, and the lower lighting device 502 has the LED 504 in a tube frame 506 whose upper surface is closed with, for example, a milky white translucent lid plate 505. The upper illuminating device 502 is arranged so as to face upward, while the LED 504 is arranged so as to face downward in the translucent cover 507 having a U-shaped cross section, for example, milky white.

The upper lighting device 502 is installed so that the lighting direction is obliquely downward from directly below toward the player side, that is, the transparent plate 214a side, as shown in FIG. 593. In the embodiment, the direction of the LED mounting surface of the substrate 503 is such that the center line L (see the enlarged view of FIG. 593) of the main irradiation region of the LED 504 having a relatively strong directivity is directed obliquely with respect to the transparent plate 214a. It is tilted diagonally downward toward the transparent plate 214a side.

Further, if a rod-shaped illuminant such as a fluorescent lamp is used as the light source of the illuminating device 502, the substrate 503 of FIG. 593 is changed to a plate-shaped or concave reflecting member that wraps the light source to generate direct light. The center line of the main irradiation region, which is directed by the sum of the reflected light, may be set so as to diagonally hit the back surface on the transparent plate 214a side. If the irradiation aim of the lighting device 502 is set to the transparent plate 214a as described above, there is almost no effect even if a part of the leaked light illuminates the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c.

According to the experiment, when the illumination direction of the lighting device 502 is directed to the peripheral surface side of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, the curved reels 301a, 301b, 301c are strongly reflected and hard to see. On the other hand, when the center line L of the main irradiation region is directed obliquely with respect to the transparent plate 214a as described above, the outer peripheral surface of the reel is illuminated via the transparent plate 214a, so that the reels 301a, 301b, 301c It was confirmed that a wide range became bright and easy to see. The reason is that the light emitted from the illuminating device 502 hits the transparent plate 214a fitted in the transparent window 214 of the door-shaped front member 200 and is reflected and diffused as a whole, or the transparent plate 214a is brightly illuminated and the reel 301a, It is presumed that the wide range of 301b and 301c looks bright or is due to their synergistic action.

The structure of the upper lighting device 502 as described above can be adopted for the lower lighting device 502, and of course, it can be adopted only for the lower lighting device 502 as shown in FIG. 621. In FIG. 621, the upper illuminating device 502 of FIG. 593 is arranged on the lower side, and the lower illuminating device 502 is arranged on the upper side. And "bottom" should be read as "top".

By the way, when an LED is adopted as the light source of the lighting device 502 as in the embodiment, (a) it is driven by a low voltage, so that it is driven by a high voltage (for example, about 800 V at startup and about 600 V at operation). It is safer than the cold-cathode tube, (b) has a longer life than the cold-cathode tube, (c) is stronger than the cold-cathode tube, which is a glass tube, and (d) is capable of multicolor light emission. (E) It is lighter than the cold-cathode tube used in combination with the inverter, and therefore has the advantage that the burden on the hinge metal fitting 420 that supports the image display body 500 is small.

[6. Wiring means]
For example, the input buttons 205 and 206 and the start lever 210 (hereinafter, simply referred to as "these" are collectively used) on the operation unit 202 of the outer body 100, for example, the medal discharge device 110, the power supply device 112, and the door type front member 200. (Sometimes referred to as "main body side electrical components") and, for example, the main board 409 or the like on the case member 400 (sometimes simply referred to as "case member side electrical components" as a general term for the case member side electrical components) are electric. Is connected. In the slot machine 1 of the embodiment, the model unit 50 (see FIGS. 633 and 634) including the front opening / closing member 90 and the case member 400 is detachable from the outer body 100, so that the model unit 50 can be replaced. At this time, a rational wiring means for easily connecting or disconnecting the main body side electric component (housing side electric component) and the case member side electric component is provided.

[6-1. Wiring means-wiring relay member]
As described above, the wiring relay member 113 shown in FIG. 603 is attached to the upper part of the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. As shown in FIGS. 593 and 594, the wiring relay member 113 is located at a position corresponding to the wiring window 411 of the case member 400 and faces the empty space 417 of the case member 400 from the wiring window 411. There is. The wiring relay member 113 relays the main body side wiring 119 connected to the main body side electric component and the case side wiring 423 connected to the case member side electric component, and is connected to the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. A mounting plate 120 to be screwed, a cover body 121 covering the front surface of the mounting plate 120, and a plurality of connector boards (two large and small in the embodiment) housed between the cover body 121 and the mounting plate 120 (hereinafter, two large and small connectors). It may also be referred to as a "terminal board for connector connection".) It is composed of 122 and 123.

Of the two connector boards 122 and 123, the larger connector board 122 located on the left side in FIGS. 603 and 604 is fixedly attached to the mounting plate 120 and is connected to the main board 409. A connector 124 paired with a connector 425 at the tip of the harness 424 is provided.

On the other hand, the smaller connector board 123 located on the right side in FIGS. 603 and 604 is attached to the gap between the mounting plate 120 and the cover body 121 in a non-fixed movable state, and therefore is an enlarged view of FIG. 604. As shown in, it can move in the vertical direction, and can also move in the horizontal direction. The small connector board 123 is provided with a connector 125 paired with a connector 427 at the tip of a harness 426 connected to an electric component on the case member side other than the main board 409. The connector 125 and the connector 124 are of a substrate fixing type that is fixed to a printed circuit board by a fixing means such as soldering, and inexpensive DIN standard connectors are used.

Further, the cover body 121 that covers the front surface of the mounting plate 120 includes two large and small openings 126 and 127 through which the connectors 124 and 125 pass, a support cylinder 128 projecting side by side with the openings 126 and 127, and a lower half. It has a tunnel-shaped wiring duct 129 overhanging in front of the portion.

The main body side wirings 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 pass through the inside of the wiring duct 129, or are bundled with a hook-shaped wiring stopper 130 projecting from the lower front surface of the mounting plate 120 of the wiring relay member 113. In this state, the wiring is distributed to the side plates 102 and 102 of the outer main body 100 as shown by the alternate long and short dash line L in FIG. It is connected to each of the electrical components on the main body side through an opening 109 for wiring provided at the back of the partition plate 105. Of course, if there is an electrical component on the main body side (for example, an external relay terminal plate 131 provided on the inner surface of the side plate 102 in FIG. 590) in the region above the partition plate 105, the partition plate 105 is irrespective of the wiring opening 109. It will be connected as it is.

From the wiring means described so far, the following technical ideas can be grasped.

(A) Self on the rear plate 405 of the case member 400 between the horizontal plane passing through the rotation center of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 and the horizontal plane passing through the maximum height position of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c. The wiring window 411 is formed at a height at which the lower side is located.

(B) On the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100, a wiring relay member 113 that relays the main body side wiring 119 connected to the main body side electric component and the case side wiring 423 connected to the case member side electric component is installed.
(C) A vertical wiring path is formed along the inner surfaces of the side plates 102 and 102 of the outer body 100.
(D) The main body side wiring 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 is guided to the side of the case member 400, and is connected to the main body side electric component from there through the wiring path.

In the gaming machine provided with the above components (a) to (d), the main body side wirings 119 do not pass behind the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300, and the side plates 102, 102 of the outer main body 100. Since the wiring path provided along the line (including the corner with the back plate 104 (see FIG. 599)) is bypassed, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c can be brought close to the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. , That is, the diameter of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is smaller than that of the conventional configuration in which the main body side wiring 119 passes substantially in the center of the back plate 104 and behind the reels 301a, 301b, 301c. Can be made larger. The larger the diameter of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, the greater the force during rotation.

[6-2. Wiring means-connectors 425,427]
As described above, the two connectors 124 and 125 provided on the wiring relay member 113 include the connector 425 at the tip of the harness 424 connected to the main board 409 of the case member 400 and the case member side other than the main board 409. The connector 427 at the end of the harness 426 connected to the electric component is connected to each.

The two connectors 425 and 427 are integrally attached to one connector holder 428 as shown in FIG. 605. The connector holder 428 includes a holder main body 429 to which the connectors 425 and 427 are screwed, and a plate-shaped attachment piece 431 having a through hole 430 in the center and projecting from both sides of the holder main body 429. It is composed of a well-known button-shaped panel fastener 432 (trade name "Nylatch": registered trademark) attached to the through hole 430 of the attachment piece 431, and is a wiring relay member 113 as shown in FIGS. 594 and 597 (a). The attachment piece 431 is applied to the tip of the support cylinder 128, and the button-shaped panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is inserted into the support cylinder 128 and locked. Therefore, since the connector holder 428 is fixed to the support cylinder 128 which is the fixing means and is fixed to the wiring relay member 113, the connector 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 are not disconnected.

[6-2-1. Wiring relay board-Connector 425,427-Temporary fixing shelf]
As described above, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected to the connectors 124 and 125 of the wiring relay member 113, but before the case member 400 is incorporated into the outer body 100, that is, from the factory shipment to the completion of installation, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected. The 427 is temporarily fixed to the temporary fixing shelf 418 provided on the case member 400.

The temporary fixing shelf 418 is a shelf plate-like member directed from the inside of the case member 400 toward the wiring window 411 as shown in FIGS. 594, 595, 601 and 602, and is shown in FIG. 595. A nearly horizontal bench portion 433 on which the connector holder 428 is placed, bench side plates 434 standing on both ends of the bench portion 433, and three inward claw pieces 435 and 435 protruding from each bench side plate 434. , 435 and. There is a gap between the central one of the inward claw pieces 435, 435 and 435 and the other upper and lower two pieces so that the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be fitted. One of the bench side plates 434 has a thin plate structure in which a finger hook portion 436 is extended at the tip, and is supported at one end by placing a finger on the finger hook portion 436 and applying a force in the direction X indicated by arrow 597 (b). It can be warped outward like a leaf spring, and the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be easily removed from the inward claw pieces 435,435,435 in the warped state. The imaginary line in FIG. 597 (a) shows an example in which the tip of the finger hook portion 436 is bent into a key shape, and by doing so, the connector holder 428 can be removed as if the button was pressed as shown by arrow Y. It's easy to do.

Then, as shown in FIG. 595, the connector holder 428 is placed on the bench portion 433 of the temporary fixing shelf 418, and the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 is attached to the inward claw piece 435, 435 of the bench side plate 434. The connector holder 428 is temporarily fixed to the temporary fixing shelf 418 by fitting it between the 435s. Of course, even if it is called temporary fixing, the connector holder 428 is set to have a strength that does not come off from the temporary fixing shelf 418 during transportation of the case member 400, and therefore, until the case member 400 is incorporated into the outer main body 100, The connectors 425 and 427 integrated with the connector holder 428 are temporarily fixed to the temporary fixing shelf 418 provided on the case member 400 and do not move. Therefore, during the work of transporting the case member 400 or incorporating the case member 400 into the outer body 100, the connectors 425 and 427 at the ends of the harnesses 424 and 426 hit the parts inside the case member 400, and of course the parts are of course. There is no risk of damaging yourself.

Then, as shown in FIG. 597 (b) → FIG. 597 (a), in the wiring process after fixing the case member 400 to the outer main body 100, one of the bench side plates 434 is bent outward as described above. If the connector holder 428 is removed from the temporary fixing shelf 418 and the connector holder 428 is moved to a position where its own attachment piece 431 hits the support cylinder 128 of the wiring relay member 113, the connectors 425 and 427 become the connectors of the wiring relay member 113. Since it fits into 124 and 125 (details will be described later), the button-shaped panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is pushed in in that state to lock the attachment piece 431 to the support cylinder 128. At this time, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIGS. 594 and 595, if the guide rail 440 for the guide is provided on the bench portion 433, the connector holder 428 only needs to be pushed inward, so that workability is improved. improves.

The connector holder 428 attached to the wiring relay member 113 as described above is stable with the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 as a support base, and is separated from the case member so that it does not come into contact with the outer main body. Even if the 100 and the model unit 50 move relatively, an unreasonable load is not applied.

From the explanation so far, the following technical ideas can be grasped.
(A) A box-shaped outer body with an open front and a back plate covering the back, and a power supply and other main body side electrical components
(B) A model unit provided with a symbol variation display device and other electrical components on the case member side that fluctuate a plurality of symbols on a case member that can be attached to and detached from the outer body.

(C) A wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer main body to relay the main body side wiring connected to the main body side electric component and the case side wiring connected to the case member side electric component.
(D) A connector attached to the tip of the case-side wiring and
(E) The connector holder attached to the connector and
(F) Temporarily fixing member provided on the case member for temporarily fixing the connector holder, and

(G) It has a fixing means for fixing the connector holder to the wiring relay member, and (h) temporarily fixes the connector holder to the temporary fixing member in a state before mounting the model unit on the outer main body. (I) A gaming machine, wherein the connector holder is replaced with a fixing means from a temporary fixing member to connect the connector of the connector holder to a wiring relay member with the model unit attached to the outer main body.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, the model unit 50 is attached to the outer body 100 and the connectors are connected to each other separately. In contrast, for example, the connector is directly attached to the model unit 50. A method is conceivable in which the connectors are automatically connected to each other by pushing the model unit 50 into the outer body 100. However, in this method, when the model unit 50 having a large mass vibrates inside the outer body 100 during transportation or the like, a large load is applied to the connector joint, so there is anxiety about reliability, and there is a problem that the countermeasure is costly. is there.

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention has a configuration in which one door-shaped front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the model unit 50 is physically independent of the door-shaped front member 200. In contrast, a gaming machine in which the door-shaped front member is divided into upper and lower two stages and the upper door-shaped front member is a part on the model unit 50 side is also conceivable. However, in such a gaming machine, when a player who is excited during the game hits the upper door-shaped front member, a direct impact is applied to the connector coupling portion, so that the connector coupling may become unstable. There is a problem that a new security structure is required for the joint between the upper and lower door-shaped front members.

On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention has a configuration in which one door-shaped front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the model unit 50 is physically independent of the door-shaped front member 200. After connecting the connector holder 428 to the wiring relay member 113, the connector holder 428 has an independent structure that is coupled to a component (wiring relay member 113) fixed to the outer body 100 as shown in FIG. 594 and separated from the model unit 50. Therefore, even when a low-cost general connector used by soldering to a printed circuit board is used, there is no concern about reliability and durability during transportation and during games. Further, since only the model unit 50 is a replacement target when the model is changed and the door type front member 200 is not a replacement target, the burden on the amusement park for the model change is reduced.

[6--2-2. Coupling of connectors 425,427 and connectors 124,125]
As described above, the connector 425 and the connector 427 are attached to one connector holder 428. By doing so, the connection of the two connectors 425 and 427 is completed by one operation of setting the connector holder 428 at a predetermined position of the wiring relay member 113. However, as a practical matter, in a structure in which independent elements of two connectors 425 and 427 and a connector holder 428 are gathered and integrated, the difficult problem of "accurate positioning" of the connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 becomes encounter. That is, if the positioning of the four elements of the two connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 on the wiring relay member 113 side is not accurate, the connectors 425 and 124 and the connectors 427 and 125 cannot be collectively connected. This is because it is difficult to achieve such positioning accuracy at the cost of mass-produced products. As one means for solving such a problem, a method of using a so-called drawer connector having a mechanism for increasing flexibility at the time of coupling without soldering to the printed circuit board can be considered, but the drawer connector itself is expensive. Therefore, the cost burden is still large.

On the other hand, in the wiring means of the embodiment, the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 which is the board support member are divided and the connectors 124 and 125 are mounted on the connectors boards 122 and 123, respectively, and at least one of the connector boards 122 and 123 is wired. It is non-fixed in the gap between the mounting plate 120 of the relay member 113 and the cover body 121, and is perpendicular to the connecting direction of the connector 427 and the connector 125 (the "orthogonal" here is not limited to the exact 90 degrees. , It means about 90 degrees according to the conventional wisdom.) We are taking measures to make it playable. In such a configuration, when the coupling aim of the connector holder 428 is set to the connector 425 and the connector 124, even if there is a slight deviation in the relative positions of the other connector 427 and the connector 125, the connector board 123 floats and causes the deviation. Since it moves to correct, it is possible to connect the connector 427 and the connector 125.

In the above game machine, if the connector holder is operated by aiming at the connector on the fixed connector connection terminal board, even if there is a slight deviation in the relative position between the other connectors due to manufacturing error or the like, Since the non-fixed connector connection terminal board floats together with the connector and moves to correct the deviation and absorbs the error, it is possible to connect the connectors that are not aiming at the connection. Therefore, it is possible to collectively connect a plurality of connectors using one connector holder. Moreover, the connector used is a general-purpose and inexpensive, for example, DIN standard connector that is used by soldering to a printed circuit board, and the cost is also low.

Further, the connector holder is securely fixed to the back plate of the outer main body via the wiring relay member and, by extension, the wiring relay member by a fixing means such as Nylatch (registered trademark). On the other hand, the connector holder and the model unit are only connected via a flexible harness, and even if the model unit moves, the movement is absorbed by the flexible harness, so the movement is not transmitted to the connector holder. .. Therefore, even if a relative movement occurs between the outer body and the model unit due to vibration during transportation, the connector holder moves together with only the outer body and is not interfered with by the model unit. No load is applied to the part. Therefore, the reliability of connector connection is very high.

In addition, as in the embodiment, the configuration in which the small connector board 123 corresponding to the small connector 125 is movable and the large connectors 425 and the connectors 124 are defined as the criteria for coupling is a configuration in which the connectors 425 and 124 are compared with the reverse configuration. , 427, 125 can be easily combined. This is because the smaller connector board 123 can be handled with a lighter force, so that it is easy to automatically correct the deviation. Further, in the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 598, the connectors 425 and 124 are coupled before the other connectors 427 and 125, so that the connectors for coupling aiming can be easily aligned with each other.

Further, as shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 598, a chamfered portion C (a chamfered portion C If both linear chamfering and curved chamfering are formed), the inducing action along the taper of the chamfered portion C improves the bondability between the connectors.

Further, as in the embodiment, in addition to the configuration in which the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 can be made playable, it is also possible to make one of the connectors 425 and 427 on the connector holder 428 side playable. In that case as well, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained. A specific example of the connector holder 428 is shown in FIG. 606. In this example, a receiving cylinder 429a with a female thread is projected from the holder main body 429 of the connector holder 428, while ear pieces 427b having free holes 427a are formed on both sides of the connector 427, and the receiving cylinder 429a of the connector holder 428 is formed. The free hole 427a of the connector 427 is loosely fitted into the connector 427, and a screw 427c with a washer is used to prevent the ear piece 427b from coming off. By doing so, the connector 427 can freely move with respect to the connector holder 428 within the range of the difference in diameter between the free hole 427a and the receiving cylinder 429a. In this case, the connector boards 122 and 123 may be integrally fixed to the mounting plate 120. Further, in the embodiment, the two connectors are treated as one connector group, but the number of connectors in one connector group may be two or more.

Further, in the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 593 and 601 on the back side of the rear surface plate 405 of the case member 400, the design variation display device 300 is recessed toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302. A cable groove 437 is formed, and wiring ports 438 and 438 penetrating the side plate 404 (or rear surface plate 405) of the case member 400 are provided near both ends of the cable groove 437. The wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 are for connecting the symbol variation display device 300 and the main board 409, etc., and in FIG. 600, the right side surface of the symbol variation display device 300 toward the device case 302 ( The cable 313 (see FIG. 601) of the reel substrate 312 provided on the side surface of the door-shaped front member 200 on the non-hinge side is pulled out from one wiring port 438 to the outside of the case member 400, and the cable 313 is pulled out as shown in FIG. It is housed in the cable groove 437, and the tip of the cable 313 is returned from another wiring port 438 into the case member 400 and connected to the main board 409 or the like. The cable groove 437 is provided with cable stoppers 439 at predetermined intervals so that the cable 313 does not fall out from the cable groove 437.

The main board 409 and the reel board 312 are both electrical components on the case member side inside the case member 400, and it is not necessary to pull out the cable 313 from the case member 400. The reason why the case member 400 is intentionally provided with the wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 so that the cable 313 is diverted to the outside is as follows.

The reel board 312 is installed on the non-hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200 on the side surface of the symbol variation display device 300 (device case 302) in consideration of the workability of wiring for inserting and removing the connector in a limited space. The side corresponding to is preferable. On the contrary, if the reel substrate 312 is provided on the side surface of the device case 302 corresponding to the hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200, the fully opened door-shaped front member 200 (see FIG. 590) and the reel substrate 312 are located close to each other. Because they face each other, it is not possible to secure a large work space required for inserting and removing the connector.

However, on the other hand, if the connection portion of the boards (main board 409, sub board 510, image display body 500, etc.) to be connected to the reel board 312 is on the side corresponding to the hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200 of the case member 400. , The cable 313 is dressed to cross the inside of the case member 400. Then, there is a possibility that the cable 313 may be caught when the device case 302 is attached to the case member 400, or conversely, the cable 313 may be caught when the device case 302 is pulled out.

On the other hand, as in the embodiment, if the case member 400 is provided with the wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 so that the cable 313 is bypassed to the outside, the trouble of the cable 313 as described above does not occur. Further, it is better to perform the wiring work with the device case 302 slightly pulled out from the predetermined position, and the length of the cable 313 from the wiring port 438 to the reel board 312 is also the wiring allowance. There is room to say. Therefore, the cable 313 is slackened with the device case 302 set at a predetermined position, and the slackening of the cable 313 becomes large depending on the amount of pulling out. If the slack of the cable 313 is large, the cable 313 is placed in a triangular space formed between the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 and the corner portion at the back of the case member 400, which is located side by side with the wiring port 438. You can let the loose part of the wire escape.

Further, when the cable groove 437 is inflated toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 as in the embodiment, there is a space between the back of the case member 400 and the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302. Useful for effective use of dead space that can be created. The wiring using the wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 does not have to be limited to the cable 313 of the reel board 312, and can be applied to all the cables that cross the inside of the case member 400.

In addition, in FIG. 600, reference numeral 441 is a function-separated relay terminal plate.

The slot machine 1 configured as described above is shipped from the factory in the state of a finished product in which the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100 and the necessary wiring is completed. Then, the finished product is attached to the game machine installation island of the amusement park as it is. At this time, as shown in FIG. When stopping with the fixing member 601, the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 are opened, and the fixing member 601 is inserted through the skylight portion 443 from the inside of the case member 400 through the through hole 132 of the outer main body 100, and further. The fixing member 601 is tightened through the skylight portion 443 with a tool 602 such as a driver, and the top plate 103 of the outer main body 100 and the upper rail 600 of the gaming machine installation island are fixedly connected. Since a plurality of through holes 132 are provided, they can be arbitrarily selected and used as needed. For example, even if the position and size of the upper rail 600 vary, the through hole 132 corresponding to the upper rail 600 can be selected. Further, if the through hole 132 to be used is changed when the entire gaming machine is replaced, it is possible to prevent an adverse effect (so-called stupid hole formation) in which a hole of the fixing member 601 is opened at the same position on the upper rail 600.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 614, a gap S is formed between the outer main body 100 and the case member 400, and the heat generated from the image display body 500 or the like is generated by the cooling fan of the image display body 500 (not shown). From the skylight portion 443 of the case member 400, through the gap S, to the ventilation port 133 of the back plate 104, and from there, it escapes to the inside of the gaming machine installation island. At this time, there is a wiring relay member 113 between the back plate 104 and the case member 400, which acts like a barrier to close the gap S in a wide range. Therefore, the hot air flowing through the gap S is blocked by this portion, and the wiring relay member 113 It is positively discharged to the outside from the vent 133 of the back plate 104 located higher. Therefore, the heat dissipation effect is high.

[7. Design of each reel, design row]
As shown in FIG. 635, on each reel 301a, 301b, 301c, as shown in FIG. 635, a total of 21 symbol sequences (a total of 21 symbols shown by SEQ ID NOs: 0 to 20) are formed by arranging a plurality of types of symbols at regular intervals. A reel band (design band) on which the design) is written is attached. FIG. 635 shows a state in which the symbol rows indicated on the reel bands 321a, 321b, 321c attached to the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are expanded in a plane. In addition, the above-mentioned sequence number is described for convenience in order to identify the symbols arranged in the symbol sequence. Further, in FIG. 635, the reel 301a with the reel band 321a is shown as the left reel, the reel 301b with the reel band 321b is shown as the middle reel, and the reel 301c with the reel band 321c is shown as the right reel. In the above description, the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c are described as necessary.

Then, in each of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, among the symbols arranged in each symbol row, a predetermined number (for example, three) of consecutive symbols are the openings 401 (also referred to as a symbol display window, hereinafter referred to as symbols). It is arranged so that it can be visually recognized through the display window 401 (unified as the display window 401) (see FIG. 636 described below).

As shown in FIG. 635, the types of symbols are "7" symbols painted in red (hereinafter referred to as "red 7 symbols") and "7" symbols filled in blue (hereinafter referred to as "7" symbols). "Blue 7 design") "," BAR design "," cherry design "with cherry design", "watermelon design" with watermelon design, "replay design", "bell design" "Bell design", "design with" righteousness "(hereinafter referred to as" righteousness ")", "design with" positive "(hereinafter referred to as" righteousness ")" is there. The bell design can be divided into a "bell 1 design" in which one star is drawn and a "bell 2 design" in which two stars are drawn, depending on the number of stars drawn in the bell. it can.

In FIG. 635, the "red 7 symbol" has two of the sequence numbers 3 and 6 in the reel band 321a, one of the sequence numbers 12 in the reel band 321b, and the sequence number 10 in the reel band 321c. One corresponds. The "blue 7 symbol" corresponds to one of the sequence numbers 16 in the reel band 321a, one of the sequence numbers 3 in the reel band 321b, and one of the sequence numbers 15 in the reel band 321c. The "BAR symbol" corresponds to one of the sequence numbers 11 in the reel band 321a, two of the sequence numbers 6.9 in the reel band 321b, and one of the sequence numbers 2 in the reel band 321c. The "cherry symbol" is one of the array numbers 10 in the reel band 321a, the three array numbers 1, 14, and 17 in the reel band 321b, and the array numbers 7 and 14 in the reel band 321c. Two correspond to. There are five "replay symbols" in the reel band 321a, which are the array numbers 1, 4, 7, 12, and 17, and in the reel band 321b, the array numbers are 0, 5, 8, and 11. In the case of the reel band 321c, the five of the 16th and the 5th, and the 5th of the arrangement numbers of the 1st, 5th, 8th, 13th, and 17th are corresponding. There are three "bell 1 symbols" in the reel band 321a, which are array numbers 13, 15, and 18, and five in the reel band 321b, which are array numbers 2, 7, 10, 15, and 18. , In the reel band 321c, the three array numbers 9, 12, and 16 correspond to each other. The "bell 2 symbol" corresponds to the three array numbers 2, 5, and 8 in the reel band 321a, and the two array numbers 0 and 4 in the reel band 321c. The "watermelon symbol" has three array numbers 9, 14, and 19 for the reel band 321a, two array numbers 4 and 13 for the reel band 321b, and array number 3 for the reel band 321c.・ Four of No. 6, No. 11, and No. 20 correspond. The "prosthetic symbol" corresponds to one of the sequence numbers 20 in the reel band 321a, one of the sequence numbers 19 in the reel band 321b, and one of the sequence numbers 18 in the reel band 321c. The "regular symbol" corresponds to one of the sequence numbers 0 in the reel band 321a, one of the sequence numbers 20 in the reel band 321b, and one of the sequence numbers 18 in the reel band 321c. The types of symbols are examples, and are not limited to these types.

[8. Frame member]
FIG. 636 shows an enlarged view of the slot machine 1 viewed from the front centering on the vicinity of the frame member 501 including the symbol display window 401. According to FIG. 636, a symbol display window 401 is formed in the central portion of the frame member 501, and a plurality of indicators such as lamps and LEDs are formed around the symbol display window 401 (corresponding to “various indicators” described later). Is shown to be located. Then, a part of the three reels (reel 301a, 301b, 301c) is made visible through the symbol display window 401. Further, it is shown that the effect display surface of the image display body 500 is arranged above the frame member 501, and the image or the like (including the moving image) displayed on the image display body 500 can be visually recognized by the player. It has become. Hereinafter, each of the above configurations shown in FIG. 636 will be described in detail.

[8-1. Design display window]
As shown in FIG. 636, three consecutive symbols among the symbols in the symbol sequence of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c can be visually recognized from the symbol display window 401. The three positions where this symbol is displayed are the "upper (or upper position)" (for example, the position where the "bell 1 symbol" of the reel 301a is displayed) and the "middle (or middle position)" (for example, the middle position). , The position where the "replay symbol" of the reel 301b is displayed) and the "lower (or lower position)" (for example, the position where the "bell 1 symbol" of the reel 301c is displayed).

From the above, it is possible to display "the number of stages x the number of reels" in the symbol display window 401. Therefore, in the slot machine 1, a maximum of nine symbols can be displayed in the symbol display window 401 from "the number of stages (3) x the number of reels (3)".

Various lamps are provided on the left side edge of the frame member 501 (also referred to as the display panel, hereinafter referred to as the display panel 501) (on the left side when viewed from the design display window 401, of which "BET1" and "BET2" are provided. , "BET3" is the BET lamp (Betlamp) 614. The numbers of the BET lamps (the numbers 1, 2, and 3 of "BET1", "BET2", and "BET3" above) are Each corresponds to the number of bets (the number of bets, the number according to the number of medals bet). That is, "1" is one bet (the number of medals bet is one), and "2" is. It means that 2 bets (the number of medals bet is 2) and "3" corresponds to 3 bets (also called MAX bet, the number of medals bet is 3).

The valid sequence is determined according to the number of bets. This "valid sequence" is also called a valid line. In the following, it will be referred to as the effective line. It is determined that the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined winning combination, which will be described later, is displayed as the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination only when they are displayed side by side on one effective line. That is, even if each symbol constituting the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is individually displayed in the symbol display window 401, if each symbol is not lined up on any of the effective lines (that is, a predetermined one). If the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not lined up on the valid line), it will not be determined that the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed. In this way, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not lined up on the effective line, it is determined that the combination mode of the disjointed symbols (that is, the combination of the lost symbols) is displayed.

Next, the number of bets and the effective line will be specifically described. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as an example, in principle, a game in which three cards are hung is specified or recommended (a specified number of three cards). However, in the bonus state, the game is played by playing two cards (the specified number is two). Further, the effective lines in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment are two lines, a linear line that rises to the right (upward right line) and a straight line that falls to the right (downward right line). Specifically, a line (that is, an upward-sloping line) 623b in which "BAR symbol-replay symbol-prosthetic symbol" is displayed in the symbol display window 401 of FIG. 636 and "bell 1 symbol-replay symbol-bell 1 symbol" Is displayed, only two lines of the line (that is, downward-sloping right) line 623a are valid lines.

The number of bets and effective lines are not limited to the above examples. For example, the effective line may be a line that can be visually recognized by the player in the symbol display window 401, and may be, for example, a mountain-shaped or V-shaped arrangement in addition to one or a plurality of linear arrangements. Further, the number of effective lines is not limited to two, and one or a plurality of effective lines may be set. Further, the number of effective lines may be changed according to the number of bets of medals in the game.

The combination of symbols on the effective line displayed in the symbol display window 401 of FIG. 636 is "Bell 1 symbol-replay symbol-bell 1 symbol" displayed on the downward-sloping line 623a, which is one of the effective lines. Since this combination of symbols is a combination of symbols corresponding to the replay combination (replay combination), the next game is automatically bet without inserting medals, and the same game as the previous game is executed again. It becomes possible to do. Even if "Bell 1 symbol-Replay symbol-Bell 1 symbol" is displayed on the effective line, it is difficult for the player to grasp at a glance which combination of symbols is displayed. However, by displaying the combination of the "replay symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol" symbol on the middle line, which is not the effective line, the player can grasp that the replay has been won. It should be noted that, like the above-mentioned replay combination (replay combination), it is difficult to grasp the winning combination at first glance on the effective line, but it is difficult to grasp the winning combination when looking at the entire symbol display window 401. As for, other winning combinations may also prepare a symbol combination in the same manner. At this time, even if it is difficult to grasp the winning combination at first glance from the effective line alone, when the symbol display window 401 is viewed as a whole, the winning combination (the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on the effective line). It becomes possible for the player to easily grasp what has been done).

[8-2. Various indicators]
As shown in FIG. 636, the display panel 501 is lit (or based on the result of the internal lottery or the ART first hit lottery) around the symbol display window 401 according to the progress of the game of the slot machine 1. A plurality of indicators such as lamps and LEDs that can (blink) are arranged. Among such a plurality of indicators, various indicators other than the special indicator LED 612 will be described.

The error lamp 604 starts lighting (or blinking) when some trouble, failure, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "error") occurs during the game of the slot machine 1, and an error is currently occurring. It is a lamp that has the role of informing players (including hall staff). In FIG. 636, the characters "ERR" are drawn in the vicinity of the error lamp 604 for short. Since it is difficult to indicate the details of the error only by lighting or blinking by the error lamp 604, the slot machine 1 can display information indicating the details of the error that has occurred on the special display LED 612 provided separately. ..

The section display lamp 605 starts lighting (whether or not blinking) when the game number management process described later is started, and turns off when the game number management process is completed. That is, the section display lamp 605 is a lamp having a role of notifying the player or the like (including the staff of the hall) that the game number management process is in progress. The timing at which the section display lamp 605 starts lighting (or blinking) may be any timing as long as it is in the game in which the game number management process is started. "In-game in which the number of games management process has started" means from the time the start lever 210 is operated until the game medium (medals, credit data) can be inserted to execute the next game (game). If the result of the game in which the number management process is started is a re-game, it corresponds to (until it becomes a state of automatic BET). For example, a plurality of modes including a mode in which a game medium can be immediately inserted when a special combination is selected by an internal lottery, and a mode in which a so-called freeze process is performed and the game medium can be input a few seconds later. Of these, any aspect may be determined with a predetermined probability. In the case of a mode in which the so-called freeze process is performed and the game medium can be input several seconds later, the player is expected to start the game number management process by performing a liquid crystal effect or a reel effect during the so-called freeze process. You may try to produce a fan. The conditions for starting the game number management process will be described later.

The replay lamp 606 is a lamp having a role of notifying the player that a replay (a game can be played again without betting a new medal) can be performed when the game result is a replay (described later). In FIG. 636, the characters “REP” are drawn for short for replay in the vicinity of the replay lamp 606.

The start lamp 608 is a lamp having a role of starting lighting (or blinking) when the number of bets reaches the MAX bet and prompting the player to operate the starting lever 210 (starting operation). In FIG. 636, the characters “STR” are drawn in the vicinity of the start lamp 608 for short for start.

The medal IN lamp 610 is a lamp having a role of urging a player to bet by continuing to light (or blink) until the number of bets reaches the maximum (MAX bet). In FIG. 636, the character "INS" is drawn in the vicinity of the medal IN lamp 610 for short for insert (input of game value).

The stored number display LED 613 displays the number of stored medals (game value) when the medals that can be used by the player are stored due to the player inserting medals or paying out medals accompanying the game result. It is a display having a role of notifying the player of the number of stored medals, and is composed of two side-by-side 7-segment LEDs (the left side is the stored number display LED 613a and the right side is the stored number display LED 613b). For example, if the upper limit of the number of medals that can be stored by the player is 50 and the maximum number of medals is stored, "5" is displayed on the stored number display LED 613a and the stored number display LED 613b. By displaying "0", the number of stored medals "50" is displayed so as to be identifiable by the player.

The BET lamps 614 (614a to 614c) set the number of BETs when a BET operation for betting medals (game value) is performed up to a specified number before the start lever 210 is operated at the start of the game. By displaying, it is a display having a role of notifying the number of bets (BET number) of the game value in one game, and is composed of three lamps corresponding to the BET number. Specifically, when the number of BETs is one, the BET lamp 614c lights up, and when the number of BETs reaches two, the BET lamp 614b lights up in addition to the BET lamp 614c, and the number of BETs is the upper limit of three (MAXBET). Then, the BET lamps 614a are further turned on, so that all the BET lamps 614a to 614c are turned on.

It is assumed that the display of these indicators described above is controlled by the main board 409 (see FIG. 637 described later).

In addition to these, a bonus notification lamp that announces the winning of the bonus game described later, a 7-segment LED that displays the cumulative number of medals paid out in the bonus game, etc., and a 7-segment LED that counts the bonus game, etc. are separately provided. May be good.

Further, the display such as the stored number display LED 613 and the special display LED 612 (described later) is not limited to the 7-segment LED as long as the information to be displayed by the display can be displayed. For example, the number of segments may be different from "7" (14 segments or 16 segments), and instead of LEDs, LCDs (liquid crystal displays), VFDs (vacuum fluorescent displays), organic ELs, and the like are used. You may.

[8-3. Special display LED]
The special display LED 612 has a role of displaying the number of payouts to notify the player of the number of payouts of the game value by displaying the number of payouts of medals (game value) accompanying the game result. It is a display and is composed of two side-by-side 7-segment LEDs (the left side is a special display LED 612a and the right side is a special display LED 612b). Specifically, two-digit numbers can be displayed using the special display LEDs 612a and 612b, and when 15 medals are paid out according to the game result, the timing is such that the medals are paid out one by one. By changing the display contents such as "01", "02", ..., "15" in total, the player can be notified of the payout status of the game value (medal) in real time.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special display LED 612 has a role of an instruction function display for displaying the instruction content by the "instruction function" in the game, in addition to the role of the above-mentioned payout number display. The details of the "instruction function" will be described later, but to give an overview, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the occurrence of an instruction by the "instruction function" is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the special display LED 612 displays. , Information indicating the pressing position and stop order of the reels 301a to 301c (which can be read as the pressing order and pressing position of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c in the stop operation) is displayed as the instruction function display, and according to the content of the display. When the reel 301 is stopped, a game result that is advantageous to the player is provided.

In the instruction function, the performance that affects the generation of the instruction (specifically, the lottery related to the instruction function, the management of the state transition, etc.) is controlled by the main board 409, and specifically, the lottery related to the instruction function. Not only the control of the state transition and the state transition, but also the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is managed by the main board 409. On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, based on the determination result by the main board 409, the instruction function of the same content is instructed by other display means (for example, the image display body 500) other than the display destination of the instruction function display. However, such a display may be controlled by a peripheral board (for example, a sub board 510) other than the main board 409. The connection relationship between the special display LED 612, the main board 409, and the sub board 510 is illustrated in FIG. 637.

To explain with a specific example, when a small push order combination (in this example, any of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6") is selected as a winning combination during the ART game, the main board 409 (especially) Under the control of the CPU 1110), the instruction content of the "appropriate push order" corresponding to the winning push order small winning combination is displayed on the special display LED 612. Therefore, the player can recognize the proper pressing order when understanding the display content of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612. On the other hand, when the same information as the display content of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub board 510 by a command or the like, the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510 that receives the command is "appropriate". The image showing the "pressing order" can be displayed on the image display body 500. A specific display example of the instruction function display will be described later in [10-3-6].

In the slot machine 1, it is possible to perform such an instruction function display in a manner in which any of the indicators on the display panel 501 also has a function (in this example, the display is displayed on the special display LED 612 that displays the number of payouts. Will be). That is, in the special display LED 612, the instruction function display and the payout number display are performed. For example, by dividing each display period, the two can be displayed without being confused. In this embodiment, the function of displaying the number of payouts is also used, but a display having other functions may be used, or a display dedicated to displaying the instruction function may be provided.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when an error is detected as an abnormal state, the error lamp 604 lights up to notify the occurrence of the error, while the special display LED 612 can identify the type of the error. It also has a function of displaying error information to be displayed on. The display timing of the instruction function display, the payout number display, and the error information display will be described later in [10-3-7] and the like.

[9. Internal configuration of slot machine]
FIG. 637 schematically shows the configurations of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operating members, and the like equipped in the slot machine 1. The slot machine 1 has a main board 409 for comprehensively controlling the progress of the game, and the main board 409 is equipped with a CPU 1110, a ROM 1112, a RAM 1114, an input / output interface 1116, and the like. The main board 409 has a function of influencing the result of the game (acquisition of value for the game). Specifically, for example, an internal lottery execution means for performing an internal lottery and a bonus game based on the result of the internal lottery. Bonus game execution means to execute, RT state control means to control RT state, ART first hit lottery means to perform ART first hit lottery, hell state not in game number management process and multiple advantages in game number management process A game state control means for controlling one of the states, an instruction function control means for executing control related to whether or not the operation of the instruction function is allowed, and a number of games for managing the number of games executed by the player. It has a game number management control means for executing a management process, a payout control means for paying out a medal as a prize based on a winning combination, and the like. Details of each of these means will be described later.

Further, as an example of a configuration (not shown) in FIG. 637, the slot machine 1 has a door open detection switch for detecting an open state of the door-shaped front member 200, a storage release switch 209 (storage medal clearing switch), and a medal selector 207. It is provided with a lever detection sensor in the medal selector provided inside, a stop button LED (stop button LED_1, stop button LED_2, stop button LED_3) and the like that can be lit around each of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c. These configurations are controlled by the main board 409.

The above-mentioned single push buttons 205, 206, start lever 210, reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c, storage release switch 209, etc. are all connected to the main board 409, and these operation buttons use sensors (not shown). The operation by the player can be detected, and the detected operation signal can be output to the main board 409. Specifically, when the start lever 210 is operated, an operation signal for starting the symbol variation display device 300 described above (starting rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c) is output to the main board 409, and the reel stop button 211a is output. , 211b, 211c are operated, an operation signal for stopping the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is output to the main board 409.

In the following, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c will be referred to as a left reel 301a, a middle reel 301b, and a right reel 301c, respectively, as necessary. The corresponding reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c are referred to as a left reel stop button 211a, a middle reel stop button 211b, and a right reel stop button 211c.

Further, the slot machine 1 accommodates other devices together with the main board 409, and various signals are input from these devices to the main board 409. In addition to the symbol variation display device 300, the devices include a medal release device 110 and the like.

The symbol variation display device 300 includes reel drive motors 341a, 341b, and 341c for rotating the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, respectively (left reel drive motor 341a, middle reel drive motor 341b, right reel drive motor 341c). This reel drive motor is composed of a stepping motor, and each reel 301a, 301b, 301c can rotate and stop independently, and at the time of rotation, a plurality of types of symbols are continuously displayed from top to bottom in the symbol display window 401. It is displayed while changing to.

Further, the reels 301a, 301b, 301c have position sensors 331a, 331b, 331c for detecting the reference position regarding the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, and the position sensors 331a, 331b, 331c are reels on the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, respectively. (Left reel position sensor 331a, middle reel position sensor 331b, right reel position sensor 331c) are provided corresponding to the inside (left reel position sensor 331a, middle reel position sensor 331b, right reel position sensor 331c). By inputting the detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors to the main board 409, the main board 409 can obtain the stop position information of each reel.

The solenoid 207a and the insertion sensor 207b described above are installed in the medal selector 207. The insertion sensor 207b detects the medals inserted from the medal insertion port 203, and outputs the medal detection signal to the main board 409. When the solenoid 207a is in the OFF state, the inserted medals are detected by the insertion sensor 207b. On the contrary, when the solenoid 207a is ON, the passage reaching the insertion sensor 207b in the medal selector 207 is locked out and the insertion of medals cannot be accepted. Even if the player inserts the medal, the medal selector 207 The medals that flowed through the return gutter 213 return to the medal tray 201. At this time, the function of the insertion sensor 207b is also invalidated, so that neither betting nor storage of medals is performed by inserting medals.

The medal discharge device 110 has a payout sensor 110e in the discharge port 110c that detects the paid out medals one by one, and a payout medal signal for each medal is input to the main board 409 from the payout sensor 110e. Has been done. Further, the auxiliary storage box 111 for game medals is provided with a medal full tank sensor 111a, and when the number of medals stored inside exceeds a predetermined quantity, a detection signal in which the number of medals exceeds a predetermined quantity is transmitted to the main board. Output to 409. At this time, an error display for notifying the abnormality of the medal storage is performed by the image display body 500, the special display LED 612, the error lamp 604, etc., and the player, the hall employee, etc. are notified that the abnormality has occurred (FIG. 681 described later). Corresponds to the "auxiliary storage full tank error" shown in.

On the other hand, a control signal is output from the main board 409 to the symbol variation display device 300 and the medal discharge device 110. That is, a drive pulse signal for controlling the start and stop of each of the reel drive motors 341a, 341b, and 341c described above is output from the main board 409. Further, a drive signal is input from the main board 409 to the medal discharge device 110 according to the type of combination of symbols stopped on the effective line, and the medal discharge device 110 performs a medal payout operation in response to the drive signal. At this time, if the number of medals required for payout is insufficient in the medal discharge device 110, or if there are no medals at all, the number detection by the payout sensor 110e will be delayed. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) elapses, an error signal of the payout medal is output from the payout sensor 110e to the main board 409, and in response to this, the main board 409 indicates that an abnormality has occurred in the payout of the medal. The content to be notified is displayed on the error lamp 604, the special display LED 612, the image display body 500, etc. to notify the player, the hall employee, etc. that an abnormality has occurred (in the “payout medal empty error” shown in FIG. 681 described later). Equivalent). The main board 409 and various indicators (error lamp 604, start lamp 608, special display LED 612, stored number display LED 613, etc.) are connected by, for example, a harness, and the main board 409 is connected to each of these indicators via a corresponding port. You can operate the lighting and display in.

The slot machine 1 includes a sub-board 510 as a peripheral board different from the main board 409, and the sub-board 510 includes a CPU 1118, a ROM 1120, a RAM 1122, an input / output interface 1130, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 1124, and an AMP (audio). Amplifier) 1126, sound source IC 1128, etc. are mounted. The sub-board 510 receives various command signals from the main board 409 and controls the display of the image display body 500, the light emission (or lighting, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of the lighting device 502 and the operation of the speaker 512.

Further, when the external relay terminal plate 131 is provided on the main board 409, the slot machine 1 is connected to the hall computer 1200 of the amusement park via the external relay terminal plate 131. The external relay terminal board 131 plays a role of relaying various signals (inserted medal signal, payout medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 409 to the hall computer 1200. The connection configuration shown in FIG. 637 is only an example of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. For example, as another connection configuration, not only the main board 409 but also peripheral boards other than the main board 409 (for example, the sub board 510) may be made connectable to the external relay terminal board 131. In such a case, the external board may be connected to the external relay terminal board 131. Various signals can be transmitted from various boards connected to the relay terminal board 131 to the external relay terminal board 131 and output to the hall computer 1200 via the external relay terminal board 131. Specifically, various game information managed by the sub-board 510 and emergency information that can be managed by the sub-board 510 (for example, error information for notifying malfunctions or malfunctions of components of the slot machine 1) are holed. It will be possible to output to the computer 1200.

In addition, the power supply device 112 is provided with a setting key switch 112t, a reset switch 112u, a power supply switch 112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed to the outside of the slot machine 1, and can be operated only by opening the door-shaped front member 200. Of these, the power switch 112v is for turning on / off the power supply to the slot machine 1, and the setting key switch 112t is among a plurality of setting values (for example, settings 1 to 6) having different winning probabilities. It is intended to be set to any of the above, and is configured so that hall personnel can change from one set value to another set value. Further, the reset switch 112u is for canceling the error generated in the slot machine 1, and is further operated when changing the setting together with the setting key switch 112t. The above-mentioned switches may be installed on the main board 409.

The above is an example of the internal configuration of the slot machine 1. In the game using the slot machine 1, when the player operates the start lever 210 while the bet number of medals is determined, the reels 301a, 301b, 301c rotate, and then the player presses the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c. When the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped and controlled, and when all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped, the game result is judged from the combination mode of the symbols on the effective line, and it is necessary. A specified number of medals corresponding to the corresponding winning combination will be awarded accordingly. However, since the number of sliding frames is determined when the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c are operated, the combination mode of the symbols displayed on the effective line is determined when the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c are operated. .. Therefore, instead of determining the game result from the combination mode of the symbols displayed on the effective line, the game result may be determined when the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c are operated.

As described above, reel bands 321a, 321b, and 321c are attached to the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, respectively (see FIG. 635). Then, when all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped, the display content displayed in the symbol display window 401 (combination mode of the symbols displayed on the effective line) indicates that the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is used. It is determined whether or not the combination mode (symbol combination) is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed on the above-mentioned effective lines (right-up line 623b and right-down line 623a) in the symbol display window 401.

In this example, the number of effective lines is described as two, but when the slot machine 1 has a plurality of effective lines, the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combinations are displayed in each of the plurality of effective lines. Whether or not it is judged. As a result, when it is determined that a combination of symbols of a plurality of winning combinations is displayed, the total number of medals to be paid out corresponding to each of the displayed winning combinations is paid out. In the slot machine 1, a predetermined number of medals (for example, 15) can be specified as the upper limit of the number of medals to be paid out at one time (9 in this embodiment). In such a case, if the total number of payouts corresponding to each winning combination displayed on a plurality of valid lines exceeds the upper limit value, a predetermined number of medals of the upper limit value will be paid out and the upper limit value will be exceeded. Minutes are rounded down. In addition, the excess of the upper limit is not divided into the next and subsequent games and paid out.

In the following, the case where the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed on any one of the effective lines is referred to as the symbol corresponding to the (predetermined) winning combination (this is referred to as the winning combination symbol). It is said that the combinations are complete, or the winning combination symbols are complete.

The slot machine 1 symbols include "red 7 symbol", "blue 7 symbol", "BAR symbol", "cherry symbol", "replay symbol", "bell 1 symbol", "bell 2 symbol", and "watermelon symbol". , "Yoshi symbol" and "Regular symbol" have already been mentioned, but among them, "Red 7 symbol", "Blue 7 symbol" and "BAR symbol" are more conspicuous than other symbols. The design is easy to identify and easy to identify. The ease of identification here means a high degree to which the player can easily identify the symbol including the state where the reel is rotating and the reel is stopped. Due to the color and size of these symbols even while the reel is rotating, it is easy for the player to aim and stop the symbols so that they are stopped in the symbol display window 401 when the player operates the stop operation. (That is, it is easy to push). Furthermore, as can be seen from FIG. 635, the "righteousness symbol" and the "genuine symbol" can be read as "justice" in the form of forming a circle with the two symbols "righteousness symbol" and "regular symbol". As described above, they are arranged vertically adjacent to each other, and only one is arranged on each of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, so that it is easy to press them.

These symbols are merely symbolic symbols (only one symbol does not correspond to the winning combination), but by forming a predetermined combination, it becomes a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination. .. That is, a predetermined game privilege is given. Hereinafter, a combination mode of symbols allowed corresponding to each winning combination shown in FIGS. 638 to 643 will be described.

[9-1. Combination of winning combination and design]
Here, a combination of a winning combination (including a winning combination) in the internal lottery executed by the internal lottery executing means and a symbol corresponding to the winning combination will be described with reference to FIGS. 638 to 643. FIG. 638 is an example of a lottery table used for the lottery of the winning combination when the setting is 1. FIG. 639 is an example of a lottery table used for the lottery of the winning combination when the setting is 2. FIG. 640 is an example of a lottery table used for the lottery of the winning combination when the setting is 3. FIG. 641 is an example of a lottery table used for the lottery of the winning combination when the setting is 4. FIG. 642 is an example of a lottery table used for the lottery of the winning combination when the setting is 5. FIG. 643 is an example of a lottery table used for the lottery of the winning combination when the setting is 6. The lottery table (also referred to as a winning price determination table) shown in FIGS. 638 to 643 is stored in ROM 1112 or the like in advance. Although the details will be described later, in the slot machine 1, the internal lottery is executed by the internal lottery execution means included in the CPU 1110 of the main board 409.

[9-1-1. Overview of instruction function]
It is assumed that the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment described below includes an instruction function using a push order small combination as an example of the functions provided by the gaming machine. As for the push order bells 1 to 6, the bell symbol alignment can be displayed only when the reel stop button 211 is operated in an appropriate order. In the gaming machine provided with the instruction function, the winning or losing of the ART first hit is determined by the ART first hit lottery executed by the ART first hit lottery means possessed by the CPU 1110 of the main board 409.

If you win the ART first hit lottery, the ART game will start. In the ART game, mainly when push order bells 1 to 6 are selected as winners in the internal lottery, the reels are stopped according to the instructions by instructing the proper push order in which the most medals can be expected to be paid out. Allow the player who performed the operation to win many medals. On the other hand, during the game period (non-ART) other than the ART game, the above-mentioned push order is not instructed, so that it is possible to make the medal acquisition in the proper push order uncertain, and the medals are awarded for each game state. It can make a difference in the expected number of medals won and the pace of medals consumed. Such an instruction function is an example of a function provided in the slot machine 1, and detailed processing thereof and the like will be described later.

To supplement the push order, since the slot machine 1 uses three reels 301a to 301c, the push order (reel 301 stop order) is "left-middle-right" and "left-". There are six types: "right-middle", "middle-left-right", "middle-right-left", "right-left-middle", and "right-middle-left". In the following description, each push order is referred to as "forward push", "pinch push", "middle forward push", "middle reverse push", "reverse pinch push", and "reverse push". The "pressing order 123" described in the remarks 1 column of FIGS. 638 to 643 corresponds to the pressing order (forward pressing) of "left-middle-right", and the "pressing order 132" is "left-right-". The "middle" push order (pinch push) corresponds, the "push order 312" corresponds to the "right-left-middle" push order (reverse pinch push), and the "push order 213" corresponds to "middle-left-right". "Pressing order (middle order pressing)", "pressing order 321" corresponds to "right-middle-left" pressing order (reverse pressing), and "pressing order 231" corresponds to "middle-right-left" Corresponds to the push order (middle reverse push) of.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a procedure of the stop operation for stopping the reel 301, the left reel 301a is used during a game in which the push order is not instructed, such as during a period when the ART game is not performed (non-ART). It is recommended to "push left (" forward push "or" pinch push ")" to stop the reel first (that is, perform the stop operation first for the reel stop button 211a), and press the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c. If a stop operation that does not follow the recommended procedure, such as stopping first, may be taken, such as temporarily stopping the ART lottery, which is disadvantageous to the player.

In such a slot machine 1, for example, when the winning combination is a winning combination corresponding to a push order small combination (push order bell in this example), the reel stop button 211 (individually, the reel stop button 211a, Depending on the pushing order of 211b, 211c), the mode of the stop roll is changed. Such a difference in the mode of the stop roll can be realized, for example, as follows. That is, as the winning combinations corresponding to the "pushing order bells", a plurality of types of winning combinations (specifically, "pushing order bells 1" to "643" shown in FIGS. Corresponding to "push order bell 6", for example, when the winning combination is "push order bell 1", forward push (left, middle, right) corresponds to "appropriate push order") is prepared, and by internal lottery The operation of a plurality of types of condition devices is permitted by different combinations for each of the selected winning combinations. At this time, under priority control (for example, "number of number priority control" or "number of symbol combination priority control"), the symbol pull-in control when stopping the reel 301 is different according to the pressing order of the reel stop button 211. By being set to be executed, the mode of the stop roll can be changed based on the above-mentioned push order, and as a result, the number of payouts can also be different.

Here, the "number of sheets priority control" means that the number of sheets to be paid out at the time of winning (when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on the valid line) is the largest when the operation of a plurality of conditional devices is allowed. It refers to a pull-in control that gives priority to a large number of conditional devices and pulls a symbol of a symbol combination corresponding to the conditional device from among "retractable symbols" onto an effective line to stop it. In addition, "design combination number priority control" gives priority to the condition device that maximizes the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed by the "retractable symbol" when the operation of a plurality of condition devices is permitted. However, it refers to the pull-in control that pulls the symbol corresponding to the condition device onto the effective line and stops it.

Then, for example, the "push order bell 1" in which the forward push is the "appropriate push order" is selected as the winning combination, and the push operation of the reel stop button 211 is the "proper push order (left, middle, right order)". If it is, the pull-in control is performed by the above-mentioned "number of sheets priority control", and if it is "inappropriate push order", the pull-in control is performed by the above-mentioned "design combination number priority control". At this time, in the case of the "appropriate push order", the condition device of the 8-card combination with the largest number of payouts at the time of winning is prioritized, and the symbol combination of the 8-card combination is drawn onto the effective line. On the other hand, in the case of "inappropriate pushing order", the condition device of the 1-card combination or the condition device of the 0-card combination is prioritized, and the symbol combination of the 1-card combination or the 0-sheet combination is drawn on the effective line. Thus, when "pushing order bell 1" is selected as the winning combination, if the reel 301 is stopped in the "appropriate pushing order", eight cards will be won, while "inappropriate pushing order". When the reel 301 is stopped, a winning combination (1-card combination, 0-card combination) with a smaller number of payouts than the 8-card combination can be won.

Since the symbols that can be drawn onto the effective line when the reel 301 is stopped are limited based on the position of the reel 301 at the time when the stop operation for the reel stop button 211 is performed (specifically, for example, a maximum of 4 frames). Depending on the timing (pushing timing) of this stop operation, a symbol that can be retracted and a symbol that cannot be retracted are generated. As a result, the mode of the stop roll differs depending on the push timing, and the priority of the condition device according to the push timing is also set in advance.

As described above, in the slot machine 1, when the winning combination associated with the "appropriate pushing order" is won, the operation of a plurality of conditional devices is allowed, and different priority control is performed with respect to the pull-in control of the symbol on the reel 301. By setting, a privilege (for example, comparison) that is more advantageous to the player when the game based on the "appropriate push order" is performed than when the game based on the "inappropriate push order" is performed. It can be stopped with a stop roll that can grant (payout of many medals).

Further, although not illustrated in FIGS. 638 to 643, another push order small combination may be prepared in addition to the push order bells 1 to 6, or a push order replay combination may be used. When the push order replay combination is used, for example, when the condition device of "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip" shown in FIGS. 638 to 643 is activated and the stop operation is performed in the proper push order, " "Raise rip 1" is displayed to shift to the high rip state (for example, RT1 to RT2), and if the stop operation is performed in an improper pressing order, "normal maintenance rip" is displayed to shift to the high rip state. It is preferable not to. However, in this case, regardless of the order in which the stop operation is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is displayed, and the next game is executed and inside without inserting the privilege as a regame (game medium (medal, credit data)). Benefits of receiving a lottery) will be granted.

The above is the outline of the instruction function in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. In the following description, the ART game using the push order bell as described above is taken as an example of a special game advantageous to the player, but the special game advantageous to the player in the slot machine 1 is limited to the ART game. It is not a thing, but includes other advantageous gaming states (for example, a bonus game, an AT game, an RT game, etc.). Further, the instruction function is not limited to the instruction function using the push order, and other, for example, the push position (a role in which the privilege given based on the timing of the stop operation for the reel stop button 211 can be changed) is used. It may be the one used.

[9-1-2. Types of Winners]
The lottery table shown in FIGS. 638 to 643 will be described. In the slot machine 1, different lottery tables are prepared according to the RT state, and FIGS. 638 to 643 show the general state (RT0), RT1, RT2, RT3, and bonus as an example of the RT state in the slot machine 1. The internal state and bonus state are shown. In this specification, the general state, the bonus internal state, and the bonus state are also described as being included in the RT state. Here, the general state is a state in which neither the bonus game nor the RT is in progress, the bonus flag is not established, and the bonus game is controlled after the end of the bonus game. The bonus internal state is a state in which a bonus (specifically, BB1 and BB2, which will be described later) is won by an internal lottery, and the winning state of the bonus is carried over without shifting to the bonus state. The bonus state is an advantageous gaming state in which a bonus (specifically, BB1 and BB2, which will be described later) is won by an internal lottery, and the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus is displayed. Although BB1 and BB2 are shown as bonuses in FIGS. 638 to 643, the bonuses that can be mounted on the slot machine 1 may be other types, such as RB bonus and single bonus (SB). You may be prepared. In such a case, it is necessary to prepare a state corresponding to each bonus, but a detailed description of each state is omitted because it is the same as that of a general gaming machine.

As shown in FIGS. 638 to 643, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the winning probability (or the number of places) for each winning combination is determined for each RT state, and is prepared in advance corresponding to each RT state. An internal lottery is held using the lottery table. Then, in the slot machine 1, when any combination is won as a result of the internal lottery, the condition device corresponding to the winning combination is activated, and the symbol combination corresponding to the operated condition device is displayed on the effective line, which will be described later. The reel stop processing is performed. Then, when any winning combination is indicated by the symbol combination displayed on the valid line, the medal is paid out based on the winning combination. In the payout of medals based on the winning combination, the number of medals to be paid out may be set to be different depending on the RT state and the number of medals (specified number) of the game. At this time, it is preferable to separately prepare a lottery table according to the specified number.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, one condition device and a reel control pattern have a one-to-one correspondence. Therefore, when it is desired to prepare a plurality of reel control patterns for one winning combination, one In some cases, multiple conditions may be met for the winning combination. By doing so, it is possible to prepare a plurality of patterns of stop rolls (symbol combinations displayed on the effective line) for one winning combination.

The winning combinations shown in FIGS. 638 to 643 can be roughly classified into bonus roles (BB1, BB2), small roles (watermelon role, cherry role, bell role), and replay role (replay role). If you do not win any of the roles, it is called "missing". Strictly speaking, "missing" is not a winning combination, but in the following, it may be included in the winning combination for convenience.

Here, to briefly explain each role, the "bonus role" is a role that triggers the execution of the bonus game, and specifically, "BB1" and "BB2" correspond to the bonus role. In the "replay role (replay role)", the BET process (state and process in which the start lever 210 can be operated), which will be described later, is performed without inserting a medal, and the next game can be executed (replay role). It is a role. The "small winning combination" is a combination in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out according to the winning, and the number of medals to be paid out differs depending on the small winning combination displayed on the valid line. As described above, the winning combinations "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" shown in FIGS. 638 to 643 may be collectively referred to as "push order bell". The number of push order bells to be paid out is shown in a plurality of ways in FIGS. 638 to 643 because the number of payouts may differ depending on the stop order and stop position of the reel 301. On the other hand, the "common bell" is a bell role that can always stop the bell symbol regardless of the push order. Details of each winning combination will be described later.

For specific roles such as watermelon role, cherry role, and replay role, in addition to the normal role (normal watermelon role, normal cherry role, and normal maintenance replay role (shown as normal maintenance lip in FIGS. 638 to 643), , Special roles (special watermelon role, special cherry role, special maintenance replay role (shown as special maintenance lip in FIGS. 638 to 643) are included in the winning combination. Details of these special roles will be described later. In this specification, the concept including both the normal watermelon role and the special watermelon role is simply referred to as a watermelon role or a watermelon, and similarly, the concept including both the normal cherry role and the special cherry role is simply a cherry. The concept of a combination or cherry, which includes both a normal maintenance replay combination and a special maintenance replay combination, is simply referred to as a maintenance replay combination, maintenance replay, or maintenance lip.

Further, as for the maintenance replay combination, in addition to the normal maintenance replay combination and the special maintenance replay combination, the special maintenance replay combination (shown as the special maintenance lip in FIGS. 638 to 643) is included in the winning combination. Details of this special maintenance replay role will also be described later.

In addition, "missing" means that no winning combination has been selected as a result of the internal lottery regarding the winning combination. In the case of "missing", the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not stopped except when the establishment state of the bonus combination is carried over (that is, the bonus internal state).

The push order bell pays out 9 medals regardless of the push order, while the push order bell pays out one medal or does not pay out if the push order is improper. .. Therefore, by distributing the number of medals in this way, when the bonus state is controlled (bonus game), the medals held by the player can be increased without decreasing.

In addition, even if the result of the internal lottery is not "missing" and one of the winning combinations (bonus winning combination, replay winning combination, small winning combination) is won, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination executes the pull-in control described later. The stop operation (the operation of pressing the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c) is performed at an appropriate timing (push position) aiming to stop in the symbol display window 524 (more strictly speaking, the effective lines 623a and 623b) within the possible range. If this is not done, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination cannot be displayed on the valid line. Therefore, even if one of the winning combinations is won as a result of the lottery, if the combination of symbols corresponding to this winning combination is not displayed on the valid line, it will be described later as in the case where "out of place" is selected. In step S6 of FIG. 644, it is determined that the game result is lost. However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, for the bonus combination and the rare small combination (watermelon role, cherry role), if the stop operation is not performed at an appropriate timing (push position), the combination of the corresponding symbols is on the effective line. However, for other general small roles (push order bell, common bell) and replay role, the corresponding combination of symbols should be displayed on the valid line regardless of the stop operation at any timing. The symbols are arranged so that the push order can be performed (however, it is also necessary to stop the winning combination in the proper push order). In addition, if the game result is lost even though you have won some winning combination, instead of randomly displaying the "missing" symbol combination, it means that you have missed the prize based on the winning combination. It is decided to control so that the predetermined symbol combination (stop roll) to be shown is displayed in the symbol display area. Then, the symbol combination (stop roll) displayed at the time of such a loss is hereinafter referred to as "zero (or zero roll)".

Further, in the description of the present embodiment, the expression "bell zero (bell zero eye)" is used with respect to "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6". Bell zero is a push order in which an appropriate push order is determined for each winning combination. When a bell is won, a stop operation is performed in an improper push order, and the bells are aligned (strictly speaking, eight cards). It means that another symbol combination as if the bell combination was removed is displayed without stopping the symbol combination of the bell combination for which the payout can be obtained. In the case of such a bell zero, the bell zero is displayed as a stop roll, and less payout (including no payout) than the original bell alignment is made.

Further, in the description of the present embodiment, the expression "separation (separation)" may be used in addition to the above "zero (zeroth)". "Breaking" is not a "matching" that makes it relatively easy for the player to recognize the characteristics of a stop, but a stop (so-called) that looks like a combination of seemingly disjointed symbols. It means that it is a "split eye"). That is, the "separate stitch" is one of the categories relating to the display mode of the symbol combination, and even if it is a loose stitch, it is not necessarily a loss, so medals may be paid out.

[9-1-3. Winning form of winning combination]
In the winning combinations illustrated in FIGS. 638 to 643, in addition to the winning combination (single combination) in which only one combination is selected in one lottery opportunity, a plurality of winning combinations are simultaneously selected in duplicate. Roles (simultaneous winning roles) are also included. When a single winning combination is won, later reel stop control is performed based on the operation of the condition device based on the winning combination. However, when the simultaneous winning combination is won, the reel stop control after that is performed based on the simultaneous operation of the condition devices based on the respective winning combination included in the simultaneous winning combination. Then, in the reel stop control when the simultaneous winning combination is won, a predetermined priority (for example, a priority such as "replay> small role>bonus" or "replay>bonus> small role"). According to this, the reel stop processing is performed while the display of the symbol combination of the winning combination is permitted, and the privilege is paid out according to the winning combination. Depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the combination of small wins, the setting method of the effective line, etc., control may be performed so that the simultaneous winning wins are won together, and when simultaneous winning occurs, each of them may be controlled. Benefits will be paid out according to the winning role. In any case, the small role is a "non-carry-over role" that can be won only in the winning game, and the winning combination of the winning combination that could not be won in the winning game is not carried over to the next game or later. Even if the winning combination is selected at the same time, medals will not be paid out according to the small winning combination that could not be won in the winning game.

In addition, when a bonus combination and a small combination are won at the same time, the combination selected in such a combination is also called a duplicate combination. Even when the bonus combination and the small combination are won at the same time, the condition device corresponding to each winning combination is activated at the same time as in the case of the simultaneous winning of the small combination, and the predetermined priority (for example, "re-reel") is activated. Reel stop processing is performed while the display of the symbol combination of the winning combination is allowed according to the priority order such as "game> small role> bonus" or "replay game> bonus> small role", and depending on the winning combination. Benefits will be paid out. However, for the bonus combination, even if the corresponding symbol combination is not displayed in the winning game as described above, the winning winning state of the bonus combination is carried over until the symbol combination of the bonus combination is displayed after the next game. It can be a "carry-over role". Specifically, the bonus roles (BB1, BB2) are "carry-over roles". In addition, the replay role and the small role (for example, the bell role) are "non-carry-over roles". Even when the "carry-over combination" and the "non-carry-over combination" are simultaneously won by winning the duplicate combination, which symbol combination is allowed to be displayed is controlled by the reel stop process. Then, if the symbol combination corresponding to the "carry-over role" is not displayed in the winning game, the winning state of the "carry-over role" is carried over to the next game or later. However, in such a "next game", when another small role is won, both the "carry-over role" and the "other small role" are won, but in this case, Since they are selected in different lottery opportunities (games), they do not correspond to duplicate roles.

In the case of simultaneous winning, which combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is preferentially displayed on the effective line is determined based on the priority setting in the reel stop processing.

In the following, the winning combinations roughly classified above will be explained in detail.

[9-1-4. Bonus role]
The winning combinations "BB1" and "BB2" shown in FIGS. 638 to 643 are bonus combinations. When the bonus combination is selected as the winning combination, the corresponding condition device "BB1" is activated, the reel stop processing is performed, and the privilege is given based on the displayed symbol combination. Specifically, the bonus game (BB game) is executed by displaying the symbol combination (matching "red 7") corresponding to the condition device "BB1" on the effective line. This bonus game is a game in which a player is provided with an opportunity to concentrate and acquire medals over a plurality of games. In this embodiment, for example, assuming that the specified number of games is two, the bonuses shown in FIGS. 638 to 643 The bonus game is advanced using the lottery table shown in the state. Then, the bonus game ends when the number of games of the bonus game exceeds the specified upper limit (for example, 30 games) or when the cumulative number of payouts in the bonus game exceeds the specified number (for example, 200). When the bonus game is over, the bonus state shifts to the general state. Even if the symbol combination of "BB1" or "BB2" is displayed on the valid line, the medal as a prize will not be paid out.

Here, the symbol combinations corresponding to "BB1" and "BB2" are arranged so as not to be drawn onto the effective line depending on the timing of the stop operation for the reel stop button 211 (see FIG. 635). However, "BB1" and "BB2" are carry-over roles that can carry over the winning flag, and even if the corresponding symbol combination is not displayed (not aligned) in the winning game, the winning state will be established after the next game. The game is played as a bonus internal state until it is carried over and the symbol combination is stopped.

Then, when the replay combination or the small combination is won as a result of the internal lottery while being controlled to the bonus internal state, the winning combination that can be displayed is determined according to a predetermined priority.

[9-1-5. Replay role]
The winning combination "replay" shown in FIGS. 638 to 643 is a winning combination of the replay (replaying combination). When the replay combination is won, the condition device for replay is activated, and the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is allowed on the effective line (either line 623a or 623b), and based on this, the reel stop described later is allowed. The process (step S5 of FIG. 644) is performed. In the slot machine 1, when the replay is won, the symbol combinations of the replay role are controlled so as to be always displayed on the valid line, so that it is determined that the symbol combinations of the replay are complete, and as a result, as a privilege of the replay role. , In the next game, medals are automatically bet without inserting medals or betting operations (operations for inserting stored medals), and a replay game in which the same game as the previous game is executed again becomes possible. Even if the replay symbol combination is displayed on the valid line, the medal as a prize will not be paid out.

The replay combination includes a maintenance replay combination (displayed as "maintenance lip" in FIGS. 638 to 643), a raising replay combination (displayed as "raising lip" in FIGS. 638 to 643), and a lowering replay combination (displayed as "raising lip" in FIGS. (Displayed as "lowering lip"), 7-matched replay role (displayed as "7-matched lip" in FIGS. 638 to 643) and 7-matched fake play role (displayed as "7-matched fake lip" in FIGS. 638 to 643). is there. The maintenance replay combination is a replay combination that maintains the current RT state without shifting the RT state. The raising replay role includes a raising replay role 1 that can be selected only by RT1 and a raising replay role 2 that can be selected only by RT2, and the raising replay role 1 functions as a transition role from RT1 to RT2. The raising replay role 2 functions as a transition role from RT2 to RT3. The lower replay role is a role that can be selected only in RT3, and functions as a transition role from RT3 to RT2. The 7-match replay combination is a replay combination that can be selected only in RT3, and when the 7-match replay combination is selected in RT3, it functions as a role to which the ART game is added. The 7-match fake play role is a replay role that is selected only by RT3 like the 7-match replay role, and even if it is selected by an internal lottery, the ART game is not added.

The maintenance replay role can be selected independently by the internal lottery for the normal maintenance replay role and the special maintenance replay role, while the special maintenance replay role, the raising replay role 1, the raising replay role 2, the lowering replay role, and 7 sets are available. Neither the replay combination nor the 7-match fake play combination is selected independently by the internal lottery, but is always selected in duplicate at the same time as the normal maintenance replay combination.

When "Special maintenance lip + Normal maintenance lip", which is a simultaneous winning combination of the special maintenance replay role and the normal maintenance replay role, is selected by the internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is pressed "left-middle-right". When the stop operation is performed in order (forward push), the symbol combination corresponding to the special maintenance replay combination is displayed on the effective line, and the other push orders (reverse push, pinch push, reverse pinch push, middle forward push, middle reverse). When the stop operation is performed by pressing), the symbol combination corresponding to the normal maintenance replay combination is displayed on the effective line. If "Special maintenance lip + Normal maintenance lip" is selected by internal lottery in the hell state that is not in the game number management process, the state shifts from the hell state to the advantageous state. Further, in the advantageous state during the game number management process, when the "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip" is selected in the advantageous states A to D, the game shifts to the advantageous state E, and the "special" in the advantageous state E. When "Maintenance Lip + Normal Maintenance Lip" is selected by the internal lottery, the addition of the ART game will be confirmed.

When "Raise Lip 1 + Normal Maintenance Lip", which is a simultaneous winning combination of the raising replay combination 1 and the normal maintenance replay combination, is selected by the internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the order of "right-middle-left". When the stop operation is performed by (reverse push), the symbol combination corresponding to the up replay combination 1 is displayed on the effective line, and the other push orders (forward push, pinch push, reverse pinch push, middle forward push, middle reverse push) are displayed. When the stop operation is performed with), the symbol combination corresponding to the maintenance replay combination is displayed on the effective line.

When "Raise Lip 2 + Normal Maintenance Lip", which is a simultaneous winning combination of the raising replay combination 2 and the normal maintenance replay combination, is selected by the internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the order of "right-left-middle". When the stop operation is performed by (reverse pinch push), the symbol combination corresponding to the raising replay combination 2 is displayed on the effective line, and the other push orders (forward push, pinch push, middle forward push, reverse push, middle reverse push) are displayed. When the stop operation is performed with), the symbol combination corresponding to the maintenance replay combination is displayed on the effective line.

When "Lower Lip + Normal Maintenance Lip", which is a simultaneous winning combination of the lower replay combination and the normal maintenance replay combination, is selected by the internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the "middle-left-right" order (middle-left-right). When the stop operation is performed with (middle forward push), the symbol combination corresponding to the lower replay combination is displayed on the effective line, and in other push orders (forward push, pinch push, reverse pinch push, reverse push, middle reverse push). When the stop operation is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the maintenance replay combination is displayed on the effective line.

When "7-matched rip + normal-maintained rip", which is a simultaneous winning combination of the 7-matched replay combination and the normal maintenance replay combination, is selected by the internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is pressed "right-middle-left". When the stop operation is performed in order (reverse push) and at an appropriate timing (timing when 7 symbols can be pulled in), the symbol combination (7 doublets) corresponding to the 7-match replay combination is displayed on the effective line, and other than that. If the stop operation is performed in the push order (forward push, pinch push, reverse pinch push, middle forward push, middle reverse push), or if the stop operation is not performed at an inappropriate timing even though it is a reverse push, it corresponds to the maintenance replay combination. The symbol combination is displayed on the valid line.

When "7-matched fake rip + normal-maintenance rip", which is a simultaneous winning combination of the 7-matched fake play role and the normal maintenance replay role, is selected by the internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is "right-middle-left". When the stop operation is performed in the push order (reverse push), the symbol combination (7 zeros) corresponding to the 7-match fake play combination is displayed on the effective line, and the other push orders (forward push, pinch push, reverse pinch) are displayed. When the stop operation is performed by pressing, middle forward push, middle reverse push), the symbol combination corresponding to the maintenance replay combination is displayed on the effective line.

The feature of the game privilege of the replay game is that instead of paying out medals, it is automatically BETed in the next game without consuming new medals. In addition, since the replay is a winning combination that does not involve paying out medals, for example, by increasing the winning probability, even if the winning frequency increases, there is little disadvantage for the hall. Therefore, in the slot machine 1, in the normal state (general state), the probability of winning is approximately once every 6 to 7 times. As a result, the amount of medals consumed by the player (the number of medals consumed per fixed time) can be kept within a certain range to some extent. In other words, the winning role of replay can be given a role of suppressing excessive consumption of medals in the progress of the game.

Further, the symbols constituting the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination are evenly arranged on the reels 301a, 301b, 301c (for example, the symbols constituting the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination and the symbols corresponding to the replay combination are also used as the replay combination. By increasing the number of other symbols (designs that do not constitute the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination) from 1 to 4 at the maximum, which are arranged between the symbols constituting the combination mode of the corresponding symbols. It is possible to arrange the combination modes of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination without the need for pressing. In such a case, if the priority of the displayed winning combination is "replay (replay role)> small role> bonus", the condition device for the replay role and other roles (small role and bonus role) are assumed. Even if the condition device and the condition device are operated at the same time, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is always stopped and displayed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the other combination is not stopped and displayed.

[9-1-6. Belle]
Next, the role of Bell as a winning role will be described. This Belle role is a winning role that can be expected to pay out medals at the time of winning. In the present embodiment, as the bell role, in addition to the push order bell 1 to the push order bell 6 described above, there is a common bell in which the push order does not matter. When the common bell is selected by the internal lottery, the combination of bell symbols is displayed on the valid line regardless of the order in which the reel stop buttons 211 are operated.

[9-1-6-1. Pushing order does not matter bell]
First, a push order-independent bell (common bell) in which the winning degree (winning rate and the number of medals paid out based on the winning) at the time of winning does not change depending on the pushing order of the reel 301 will be described.

When the "pushing order unquestioned bell" shown in FIGS. 638 to 643 is selected as the winning combination, any corresponding symbol combination is always stopped on the valid line regardless of the reel pushing order and pushing timing. The condition device operates so as to. Therefore, when such a condition device is activated, the bell combination is won by the stop display of the symbol combination of the bell combination regardless of the stop order and stop timing of the reel stop button 211 by the player, and the prize is won. The payout of medals (8 medals) will be given as a privilege.

[9-1-6-1. Push order bell]
Next, a push order bell in which the winning degree (winning rate and the number of medals paid out based on the winning) at the time of winning can change depending on the pushing order of the reel 301 will be described.

The winning combinations "pushing order bell 1" to "pushing order bell 6" shown in FIG. 638 are the winning combinations of the pushing order bells, which are mainly prepared in order to surely give a privilege to the player in the ART game. .. As described above, any one of the six appropriate push orders is associated with the "push order bell 1" to the "push order bell 6" (see FIG. 638).

In FIG. 638, the winning probabilities of "pushing order bell 1" to "pushing order bell 6" are equal to each other, and when they are added up, the winning probability of "pushing order bell" is 20478/65536, but "pushing order bell 1" The winning probabilities of "Sequential Bell 1" to "Pushing Order Bell 6" may be arbitrarily distributed under the condition of satisfying the above total value. In this way, the winning probabilities can be evenly distributed (each winning probability of the 6-choice bell can be made equal) for the 6 appropriate pushing orders in the "pushing order bell", and a specific pushing is not limited. It is possible to make it difficult for the order to be selected in the proper push order. In such a case, in a normal game in which it is recommended to first stop the left reel 301a, the rate at which the push order bell wins can be suppressed, and the ART game or the like suppresses the payout rate in the normal game. It is also possible to increase the payout rate in special games.

According to FIGS. 638 to 643, the "pushing order bell 1" is the winning combination of the pushing order bells in which the forward pushing is the proper pushing order, and the "pushing order bell 2" is the winning combination of the pinching pushes in the proper pushing order. "Pushing order bell 3" is the winning combination of the pushing order bell role, and "Pushing order bell 3" is the winning combination of the pushing order bell role, and "Pushing order bell 4" is the proper pushing order. "Pushing order bell 5" is the winning combination of the pushing order bell, which is the pushing order, and "Pushing order bell 5" is the winning combination of the pushing order bell, which is the proper pushing order. Is the winning combination of the push order bell role. Therefore, the "pushing order bell" in the present embodiment is a so-called "six-choice bell" in which the proper pushing order is divided into six ways. As a matter of course, such an appropriate push order can be freely set within a predetermined limit at the design stage of the gaming machine.

In this way, the push order bells "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" pay out eight medals as if they won the bell role only when the stop operation was performed in the proper push order. Is a winning combination, and if the stop operation is performed in an improper push order, "Bell zero eyes" will be displayed on the valid line, and there will be fewer benefits (1 card or) than when the Bell role was won. 0 medal payout) will be awarded.

Here, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is recommended to push left (forward push or pinch push) in a non-ART state other than the ART state. Therefore, when the game is played according to the recommended procedure in the non-ART state, the push order bell (specifically, the push order bell 1 to the push order) has a proper push order other than the left push (forward push or pinch push). Even if the bell 6) is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the bell role cannot be displayed on the effective line. However, in the ART game, an appropriate push order is instructed, and a stop operation according to the instruction content is allowed, so that the bell role can be easily won when the push order bell is won. If the player unreasonably obtains a medal by performing a stop operation different from the recommended procedure during non-ART, the overall medal will be paid out by taking measures such as temporarily stopping the ART lottery. The expected value of may be adjusted appropriately.

Further, in the slot machine 1, it is not necessary to recommend a specific push order as described above. For example, when the instruction function is displayed during an ART game or the like, when a specific push order is not the recommended procedure, the player may perform the stop operation in any push order, and in such a case, the player may perform the stop operation. Since there is no recommended procedure, there is no need to make adjustments (measures such as temporary suspension of ART lottery) for "when a medal is illegally obtained by performing a stop operation different from the recommended procedure" as described above. It becomes. If a specific push order is not the recommended procedure, it is desirable to have the same winning probability for each push order in the push order small winning combination. By making the winning probability the same for each push order, the expected value of the ball output can be equalized regardless of the push order, so the player can enjoy the game with confidence in the push order of his choice. it can.

[9-1-7. Rare small role]
Rare small roles as winning roles include watermelon role and cherry role. The watermelon role is a winning combination that can be expected to pay out medals (5 medals) when the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the valid line. The cherry role is a winning role in which medals can be paid out (two) when the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the valid line.

[9-1-8. Special role]
As described above, the watermelon role, the cherry role, and the maintenance replay role include the special watermelon role, the special cherry role, and the special maintenance replay role, in addition to the normal watermelon role, the normal cherry role, and the normal maintenance replay role, respectively. There is. If a special watermelon role, a special cherry role, or a special maintenance replay role is selected in the internal lottery when the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is the hell state described later, the transition destination from the hell state is advantageous. It is determined to be one of A to advantageous state E. That is, in the hell state, the special watermelon role, the special cherry role, and the special maintenance replay role function as a trigger for transition to an advantageous state (a trigger for the end of the hell state). The probability of determining the transfer destination when these special roles are selected by internal lottery in hell will be described later. A special watermelon role, a special cherry role, or a special maintenance replay role is selected by an internal lottery when the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is any of the advantageous states A to the advantageous state E. Even if it is done, the same processing as when the normal watermelon role, the normal cherry role, or the normal maintenance replay role is selected is performed (the game medium is paid out as a prize, but the hell state and the advantageous state are performed. No migration process is performed between them). That is, the special role is a role that exerts a function different from the normal role only when it is in hell. The game state related to the execution of the instruction function display includes whether or not the execution of the instruction function display is confirmed, and when the execution of the instruction function display is confirmed, the instruction function display is executed. Refers to multiple game states with different conditions for.

In the transition from the hell state to the advantageous state, a special watermelon role, a special cherry role or a special maintenance replay role is selected by an internal lottery when in the hell state, and a combination of symbols corresponding to these special roles is used. It is preferable that it is performed by being displayed on the effective line, but even if the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is not displayed on the effective line, the special watermelon role in the internal lottery when in hell state, It may be performed when a special cherry role or a special maintenance replay role is selected.

Further, as can be seen by referring to FIGS. 638 to 643, the probability of being selected by the internal lottery differs depending on the setting for the normal role (normal watermelon, normal cherry, normal maintenance lip in RT2 and RT3). However (especially the probability of duplicate roles is different), for special roles (special watermelon, special cherry, special maintenance replay role), the probability of being selected by internal lottery is the common probability for all settings. In particular, although not shown in FIGS. 638 to 643, the winning values assigned to each special combination among the random number widths of 0 to 65535 are unique to all the settings. For example, assuming that the random number value assigned as the winning value of the special watermelon is 1000 to 10448, the winning value of the special watermelon is 1000 to 10448 in all the setting values of settings 1 to 6. The same applies to special cherries and special maintenance replays.

The above is a combination mode of each winning combination in the slot machine 1 and a symbol corresponding to each winning combination.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can be set to any of settings 1 to 6 by a person involved in the hall, and for each setting, BB1, "BB1 + normal watermelon", "BB1 + normal cherry". , BB2, "BB2 + normal watermelon", "BB2 + normal cherry", normal watermelon, normal cherry, push order bells 1-6, common bell, normal maintenance lip, "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip", "raise lip 2 + normal maintenance" The winning probabilities for "Rip", "Lower Lip + Normal Maintenance Lip", "7 Match Lip + Normal Maintenance Lip", and "7 Match Fake Lip + Normal Maintenance Lip" are different. On the other hand, the winning probabilities for special roles (special watermelon, special cherry, special maintenance lip) are common in settings 1 to 6, and even if the settings are changed, the winning probabilities for special roles do not change. In other words, the winning probability of this other role, which functions as a trigger for the transition from the hell state to the advantageous state, is a common probability for all settings. However, the winning probability of the special watermelon, the winning probability of the special cherry, and the winning probability of the special maintenance lip may be the same in settings 1 to 6, or the winning probability of the special watermelon, the winning probability of the special cherry, and the winning probability of the special maintenance lip. Although it differs depending on the setting, the synthetic probabilities of the special watermelon, the special cherry, and the special maintenance lip may be common in the settings 1 to 6. Although not shown in FIGS. 638 to 643, the so-called bonus combination such as BB1 may be divided into a special BB1 combination and a normal BB1 combination. For example, in FIGS. 638 to 643, the probability that the BB1 combination is selected is 44/65536, but when the special BB1 combination and the normal BB1 combination are divided, for example, the probability that the special BB1 combination is selected is 65536. It can be set to 33/65, and the probability that the BB1 combination is usually selected can be set to 11/65536. In this case, if it is attempted to be common to all settings, the probability that BB1 will be selected will generally differ for each setting. Therefore, the probability that a special BB1 combination will be selected will be common to all settings, and the normal BB1 combination will be used. By setting a difference in the probability that is selected, it is advisable to set a range in the ball output rate.

Further, the symbol is not limited to the symbol and the combination mode of the symbol described above. Further, in addition to the above-mentioned symbols, a plurality of types of symbols can be newly provided. Then, the types of winning combinations can be further increased or decreased. Further, the winning combinations described above are not limited to all of the winning combinations, and the necessary types of winning combinations may be selected as appropriate.

For example, a duplicate winning combination of a bonus combination and a small combination (or a replay combination) may be set, and a symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is placed on the effective line only when the reel 301 is stopped in an appropriate pushing order. A displayed push order replay combination may be provided.

Further, whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination (bell combination in this embodiment) is displayed on the effective line is determined based on the order in which the reel stop button 211 is stopped. Instead of, a push position small combination determined based on the timing at which the reel stop button 211 is stopped may be prepared. Although detailed description is omitted, the small push position combination means that the stop operation of the reel stop button 211 is performed at an appropriate stop timing (push position) and at an improper stop timing. , It is a small role that shows different winning modes. When such a small push position combination is installed, in the ART game, an instruction is given so that the player can easily recognize the appropriate push position, so that the game is played when the small push position combination is won. It is possible to allow a person to easily win a prize in a corresponding role and to win many medals.

The player of the slot machine 1 draws an internal lottery based on the winning combination lottery probability (FIGS. 638 to 643), the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination, the number of payouts thereof, the arrangement of symbols (FIG. 635), and the like. In some cases, it may be possible to find a game method in which the maximum payout can be expected in a situation where the winning combination selected by is unknown. Such a game method is tentatively referred to as "maximum efficiency batting method" below. When playing a game with the maximum efficiency method, depending on the stop position of the reel, it may be difficult to draw the symbol combination with the largest number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination onto the effective line (watermelon role, cherry role). , Chance role, etc.), in consideration of their winning probabilities and the number of payouts, the reel stop button 211 was pressed at a specific timing so as to maximize the expected value, and the reels were stopped. By pressing the remaining reel stop buttons 211 at an appropriate timing according to the symbol mode, it is possible to draw in symbol combinations corresponding to a plurality of types of winning combinations, and a large number of payouts can be obtained. In other words, the maximum efficiency striking method can be said to be a game method that suppresses the loss of winning combinations as much as possible.

[10. Game processing]
Next, the flow of game processing in the slot machine 1 will be described. The following game processing proceeds according to the processing procedure on the control program executed on the main board 409 (mainly CPU 1110 or the like).

FIG. 644 is an example of a main routine showing the basic processing procedure of one game in the slot machine 1. First, in step S1, the initial setting for preparing for the start of the game is executed. In particular, when the power is turned on, the connection and operating status of the various devices described above are confirmed, the presence or absence of backup data is confirmed, and if backup data exists, the process is restored to the state before the power was turned off. To execute. If the backup data does not exist, a predetermined process such as setting a predetermined initial value is executed.

In the next step S2, the number of bets is determined by the number of medals inserted from the insertion slot 203, or by pressing the MAX insertion button 206 (or one insertion button 205) if there are already stored medals. Then, the start lever 210 is in a state of waiting for operation. That is, the BET process is executed until the number of bets on one game is determined and the start lever 210 can be operated. If the slot machine 1 is a three-card dedicated machine capable of executing a game by inserting three medals, the one-insertion button 205 may not be provided.

In step S3, the game is started by operating the start lever 210 that is in the operation waiting state in step S2, and an internal lottery process is performed to determine whether or not any of the winning combinations is the result of the internal lottery. Execute. This internal lottery process is any one of the stages before all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c that start rotation in the subsequent step S4 are in the stopped state (the state is stopped by the player's stop operation). It is executed to determine whether or not the winning combination of is the lottery result of the game. That is, only when the lottery result of this lottery corresponds to any of the winning combinations, when the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped, the symbol combination corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is on the valid line. It is permissible to stop.

Next, in step S31, an instruction function process is performed as a process related to the ART instruction function (so-called ART navigation). In the instruction function processing, not only the winning of the ART game and the start of the ART game are determined, but also the ART navigation that teaches (instructs) the player the push order and the like during the ART game is executed. The details of the instruction function processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 647 and the like.

In the instruction function processing of this example, the main board 409 manages all the central controls related to the instruction function (ART first hit lottery, determination of the number of ART games, execution of ART games, transition of RT state, display of instruction function, etc.). To do. On the other hand, auxiliary control related to the instruction function (navigation display on the image display body 500, etc.) is managed by the sub-board 510. The display content of the display is limited to that according to the determination result of the instruction function by the main board 409 (content that is not different from the instruction function display). In the slot machine 1, the instruction content by the instruction function (which may be read as the display content of the instruction function display) is determined by the main board 409 based on the winning combination in the game. Further, the display content of the instruction function display controlled by the main board 409 and displayed on the special display LED 612 and the display content of the navigation display controlled by the sub board 510 and displayed on the image display body 500 or the like are paired. The correspondence is not limited to one, and may be a one-to-n (plurality of patterns) correspondence. That is, when some instruction function display is performed by the main board 409 on the special display LED 612, the sub board 510 causes the navigation display on the image display body 500 or the like to execute the navigation display in a display mode corresponding to the instruction function display. , The specific display mode of the navigation display does not have to be limited to one type, and the navigation display may be performed in any of a plurality of types of display modes corresponding to the instruction function display. Good. In such a case, the sub-board 510 may determine which display mode to perform the navigation display, or the main board 409 may specify. Further, the slot machine 1 is not limited to the above configuration, and for example, the main board 409 may perform all the processing related to the instruction function processing.

Further, in the instruction function process of step S31 shown in this example, the processing content related to the instruction function of ART is determined based on the result of the internal lottery process in step S3. Here, since the internal lottery process is performed each time the game is executed, the ART first hit lottery performed based on the result of the internal lottery process is also performed each time the game is executed. Further, it is preferable that the instruction function process is completed before the reel rotation process of step S4 described in the next step is started.

Next, in step S4, the reel rotation process for starting the rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c with the end of the internal lottery process in step S3 is executed. In this reel rotation process, the push operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c is enabled when the rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is started, and the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c are enabled. The operation enable lamp (not shown) for notifying the fact is turned on, and the timer count is started until the next reel rotation process is executed. The operation valid lamp is a lamp built in each reel stop button 211a, 211b, 211c, respectively.

In step S5, the player presses the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c, and the operation enable lamp is turned off in the order of acceptance, and the reel stop process of stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, 301c. To execute.

In the next step S6, when it is determined in step S5 that all the lines 301a to 301c are in the stopped state, whether the winning combination symbols are aligned on the "valid line" (the symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations). Based on (whether the combination mode is displayed), the determination process for determining the winning combination is executed. Specifically, by collating the "display contents displayed on the effective line (symbol combination mode)" and the "symbol combination that is allowed to stop on the effective line corresponding to the winning combination". Judge the winning combination. Further, the determination process in step S6 may be determined based only on the "display content displayed on the effective line (combination mode of symbols)". In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the line (downward right line 623a) on which the "bell symbol-replay symbol-bell symbol" shown in FIG. 636 is displayed, and the "BAR symbol-replay symbol-prosthetic symbol". The two lines on which is displayed (upward right line 623b) are defined as "effective lines". However, the number of effective lines is not limited to this.

In step S7, a medal payout process based on the content of the game privilege corresponding to the winning combination determined in step 6 is executed. Further, when the winning combination determined in step S6 is a winning combination that involves a change in the RT state as in the case of type 2 BB, the RT state is changed (change in the RT state shown in FIGS. 638 to 643). And various game benefits such as re-games are given.

The above is the basic one-game processing procedure of the slot machine 1. Here, in steps S2 (BET processing) to S4 (reel rotation processing), internal processing is performed triggered by a series of external operations (starting operations) performed by the player. Therefore, these processes (step S2, step S3, step S31, step S4) are collectively referred to as a start process. The specific description of this starting process will be described below.

[10-1. Start process]
FIG. 645 specifically shows each process performed in the start process.

In the start processing, first, in step S101, the operation of the medal insertion or the single insertion button 205 and the MAX insertion button 206 is awaited. When there is a MAX bet operation or a medal insertion, the determination in step S101 is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S102. In this judgment, a medal equivalent to a MAX bet is inserted (that is, three or more medals are inserted in the case of a game with a specified number of three, and two or more medals are inserted in the case of a game with a specified number of two). , And the MAX bet button 205 and the MAX insertion button 206 are operated only when they are operated.

In the next step S102, as the reception process, the number of bets (only MAX bets in this example) is determined, and the effective line lamp corresponding to the number of bets is turned on. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, when three medals are inserted when the specified number is three, two lines, a right-up line 623b and a right-down line 623a, become effective lines, and the effective lines indicating these become effective lines. Turn on the lamp.

In step S103, the operation of the starting lever 210 is enabled. When the operation of the starting lever 210 is enabled, the operation waits until the operation of the starting lever 210 is accepted, and the process proceeds to the next step S104.

In the next step S104, it is determined whether the operation of the starting lever 210 is enabled, and in that case, whether the operation of the starting lever 210 is accepted. When the operation of the start lever 210 is enabled in the previous step S103, when the operation of the start lever 210 by the player is accepted, this determination is satisfied and the process proceeds to the next step S105.

Further, the determination in step S101 is not satisfied and the process proceeds to step S104 until the player does not make a bet or insert a medal in step S101 or reaches a MAX bet. At this time, the determination in step S104 is not satisfied, the process returns to step S101, and the subsequent processing is repeated.

Also, the replay game does not require a new medal bet. This automatically puts the MAX bet state into the MAX bet state when the MAX bet command is stored in the RAM 1114 in the replay game process described later. As a result, the determination in step S101 is satisfied.

In step S105, the operation of the starting lever 210 is invalidated in response to the operation of the starting lever 210 in step S104.

Next, in step S106, when the starting lever 210 is operated, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are started to rotate, and random numbers are extracted (acquired) based on the operation of the starting lever 210. As for this random number, any one random number is extracted from 0 to 65535. When the random number is extracted, the process proceeds to the next step S107. The timing of extracting the random number at this time may be performed immediately after the operation of the starting lever 210, or may be performed immediately after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds later), or in the process of programming. Appropriate extraction timing can be set.

In step S107, a hit determination (collision of random numbers) is performed from the extracted random numbers (hereinafter referred to as extracted random numbers) to determine which winning combination is applicable. In this hit determination, the extracted random number values are collated in the hit value determination table described later. The collation of the random number values performed here is to determine whether or not the extracted random number values correspond (match, match) with the predetermined random number values of the winning combination. For example, when the winning random number of BB1 is 0 to 43, if the extracted random number is any one of 0 to 43, it is determined that BB1 is won. At this time, if it is determined that the extracted random number value corresponds to any of the winning combinations, the condition device corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is turned on. The winning probabilities for each winning combination in the hit determination performed by collating the extracted random number values with the hit determination table are as shown in FIGS. 638 to 643. The winning probabilities of "BB1 + normal watermelon", "BB2 + normal cherry", RT2 normal maintenance lip and RT3 "lowering lip + normal maintenance lip" differ depending on the setting. However, the winning probabilities are not limited to these depending on the setting, and the winning probabilities of BB1, BB2, normal watermelon and normal cherry may be different depending on the setting.

Then, in the flag processing, when the hit value determination table that is the reference of the determination is determined when the extracted random value is collated in the game, the game state flag such as the BB in-game flag described later is referred to. Determine the winning price judgment table (lottery table) in the game. That is, the hit value determination table corresponding to the game state flag (RT state flag) that is in the ON state in the game is set and the extracted random number values are collated. As the game state flag, it is assumed that flags corresponding to the RT state are prepared respectively, and for example, it is assumed that there are a general state flag, a bonus internal flag, and a bonus medium flag. Then, when both the bonus internal flag and the bonus internal flag are in the OFF state, the general state flag is always set to the ON state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S107 that the extracted random number value does not correspond to any winning combination, it becomes a "loss" that does not correspond to any winning combination, and neither condition device is operated. Here, when any of the condition devices is ON (when it is operated / established), it is possible to arrange the symbol combinations corresponding to the satisfied condition devices. Therefore, if any of the condition devices is not satisfied, the symbol combinations corresponding to any of the winning combinations cannot be aligned on the effective line. In steps S106 and S107 described above, a random number lottery is performed inside the slot machine 1. Hereinafter, these steps are collectively referred to as an internal lottery or an internal lottery. The process from the extraction of the random numbers to the flag processing corresponds to the internal lottery (step S3 in FIG. 644 described above).

As described above in FIG. 644, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment performs the instruction function processing shown in step S31. Although not shown in FIG. 645, this instruction function process may be executed as a part of the flag process of step S107 of FIG. 645, or after the flag process of step S107 is completed, step S108. The wait timer may be executed before the time is up.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, at a predetermined timing when the flag processing or the instruction function processing is executed, a group of condition devices whose operation is permitted based on the winning combination, the instruction content of the instruction function to be generated, etc. At least a part of the information determined on the main board 409 side is notified from the main board 409 to the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510) by command communication (corresponding to the "instruction information command" described later). The command for notifying this information may be a command that is appropriately summarized.

Further, the command transmitted from the main board 409 to the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510) as a result of performing the instruction function processing in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can adopt the following command mode. .. That is, the winning combinations are divided into groups based on the type and the pressing order of the reel stop buttons 211, and the winning combination selected by the internal lottery is mainly in a form in which the group including the winning combination can be identified. A command can be transmitted from the board 409 to a peripheral board (for example, a sub board 510). The classification criteria for grouping the winning combination is not limited to the above example, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, when the presence or absence of push order is added to the classification criteria, all the bell roles (push order bell 1 to push order bell 6) included in the push order bell are grouped into one group, and the common bell role as a push order unquestioned bell. By grouping the bells into different groups, the bell roles can be divided into groups according to the presence or absence of the push order. At this time, the role of the bell is divided into a group of push order bells and a group of push order bells. The same applies to the replay combination, and for example, the group may be divided into a push order replay group and a normal replay group (push order does not matter). Further, all the winning combinations may be grouped only by the presence or absence of the push order. In such a case, all the winning combinations can be divided into a group with a push order or a group without a push order. Further, instead of grouping the winning combinations, the conditional devices based on the winning combinations may be grouped. In the following, the command for notifying such grouped winners will be described in more detail.

First, regarding the command transmission to notify the grouped winners, when the instruction function display is executed, a command that shows all the breakdown of the grouped winners (so-called "complete navigation" possible command) May be sent. At this time, the sub-board 510 that has received the command can recognize information such as what kind of winning combination is and what kind of pushing order the selected winning combination is, which is an advantageous reel stop method for the player. It is possible to display a navigation display (so-called "complete navigation") that can reliably instruct.

In addition, when the instruction function display is executed for sending a command to notify the grouped winners, a command that shows a part of the grouped winners (for example, only the first stop can be instructed). You may send "partial navigation"). At this time, since the sub-board 510 that has received the command can recognize a part of the information regarding the selected winning combination, the navigation display (for example, only the first stop) that can partially instruct the reel stop method that is advantageous for the player. It is possible to display a so-called "partial navigation"), such as being able to indicate.

Further, regarding the command transmission for notifying the grouped winning combination, if the instruction function display is not executed, a command may be transmitted so that the breakdown of the grouped winning combination is not known. At this time, the sub-board 510 that has received the command can recognize that the selected winning combination is a winning combination included in the group and whether or not the instruction function display can be executed based on the group indicated by the command. , I can't recognize any more information. For example, although it is known that the winning combination is one of the push order bells, the proper push order and the specific breakdown of the winning combination (any of the winning combinations of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6") It can be recognized to the extent that we do not know. A command for notifying the grouped winning combinations when such an instruction function display is not executed may be considered as a "condition device command".

Further, when the instruction function display is executed, it is not necessary to limit the small winning combination to be grouped to the push order bell, and other winning combinations (for example, push order replay) may be included in the grouping. .. That is, in this case, even if the push order bell is selected as the winning combination or another combination is selected, if the proper push order is the same, a command indicating the same group is transmitted. Means. Further, even when the instruction function display is not executed, it is not necessary to limit the small winning combination to be grouped to the push order bell, and it may be grouped including other winning combination, but in such a case, In the peripheral board (for example, sub-board 510) that received the command, the type of winning combination (whether it is another combination or bell) cannot be determined, and the instruction of the winning combination is not related to the instruction function display. (For example, when the instruction function is not executed, it is not possible to display the navigation indicating that another role has been won on the image display body 500), so the push order bell and other roles (for example, push order) It is desirable to send commands by grouping by type of push order small combination, such as separating from replay).

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can reduce the capacity consumed by the main board 409 by transmitting a command notifying the winning combination grouped in this way, and the peripheral board side independently wins the winning combination and its own. It is possible to prevent the judgment of the push order.

In the next step S108, it is determined whether or not the wait timer started in the previous start process (specifically, the game immediately before the game) has timed up (for example, 4.1 seconds have elapsed). The timer called the wait timer measures the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) from the start of reel rotation in the game to the start of reel rotation in the next game. It is a thing. Here, when the wait timer has timed up (4.1 seconds have already passed), this determination is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S109. In addition, this determination loops until the wait timer times out.

In step S109, the rotation of all reels 301a, 301b, 301c is started. Then, when the rotation speeds of all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c become constant, the operation enable lamps of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are turned on. By this lighting, the player knows that the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c has been enabled.

In the slot machine 1, the reel that has started to rotate continues to rotate at the above-mentioned constant speed until the player accepts the stop operation (pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c). ..

Next, in step S110, the wait timer is reset, the wait timer is started until the next start process, and the start process ends.

[10-2. Internal lottery probability]
As described above, in the slot machine 1, the result of the internal lottery (the result of collation of the extracted random number values) is allowed as the corresponding winning combination (hereinafter referred to as the corresponding winning combination) in the game. Here, when the corresponding winning combination is allowed, the condition device corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is activated, and the information of the activated condition device is used as an information command indicating the result of the internal lottery for subsequent processing (reel stop processing, It will be reflected in the judgment process, payout process, etc.).

In the slot machine 1, a range of random number values (this is called an extraction range) when performing random number extraction is determined in advance. This extraction range can be determined, for example, as an integer value from 0 to 65535 (that is, 2 to the 16th power = 65536 random numbers) or the like. In the present embodiment, the random value in the extraction range is set to 0 to 65535 for convenience, but it goes without saying that the value is not limited to this. When the extraction range of this random number is expanded, the range of random numbers that can be extracted (so-called denominator) becomes larger by that amount, so that an event that a specific random number value is biased and extracted is less likely to occur.

Within the above extraction range, random numbers corresponding to each winning combination are further assigned in advance. For example, when a random number value corresponding to the winning combination "BB1" is selected from the random number values within the extraction range (from "0" to "65535" in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment), the result of the internal lottery. Means that "BB1 has been won", and BB1, which is a conditional device, is processed as an information command in the game. Further, by using this, it is possible to calculate the winning probability of BB1 (probability that BB1 is selected as a result of the internal lottery, lottery probability) from the extraction range and the random value corresponding to BB1. In the example of FIGS. 638 to 643, the winning probability of BB1 in the general state is 384/65536 [total number of random numbers corresponding to BB1 / total number of random numbers in the extraction range].

In this way, the corresponding random numbers are determined for all the winning combinations, and these random numbers are called the winning values corresponding to the respective winning combinations. Further, when there are a plurality of winning values, for example, if the winning value of the predetermined winning combination is a continuous random number value "1", "2", "3", "4" within the extraction range, the winning value of the predetermined winning combination is set. The range of values is a random number value "1" to "4". Then, when it is determined (matched) that the extracted random number value corresponds to any of the random number values "1" to "4", it means that "a predetermined combination has been won" as a result of the internal lottery. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 638 to 643, a single winning combination (for example, BB1, BB2, watermelon, cherry, common bell, maintenance replay) that wins only one winning combination is prepared. However, as described above, in addition to such a single combination, a simultaneous winning combination in which a plurality of winning combinations are simultaneously elected may be prepared. When such a duplicate combination is prepared, the winning value of the duplicate combination is also included in the above-mentioned winning value.

From this, the range of the winning value is determined for all the winning combinations, and it is determined by the internal lottery whether or not the extracted random number value falls within the range of the winning value of any of the winning combinations. At this time, if the extracted random number value does not fall within the range of the winning value of any of the winning combinations, the result is a loss. That is, the range of the winning value of the loss is other than the range of the winning value of all the winning combinations. The winning price may also be called the winning allowable value.

By the way, a single winning combination is one in which one winning combination corresponds to one extracted random number value, and a simultaneous winning combination is a plurality of (for example, two) winning combinations for one extracted random number value. Is the corresponding one. That is, when the extracted random number value corresponds to the winning value of the simultaneous winning combination, it means that any of the plurality of winning combination has been won. At this time, the condition devices corresponding to the respective winning combinations of the plurality of winning combinations are simultaneously established (operation is permitted). However, even if a plurality of conditional devices corresponding to each winning combination are simultaneously established, the priority of the conditional device for the simultaneous winning combination is set, so that in reality, all the symbol combinations corresponding to the established conditional devices are all. It is not always possible to stop on the effective line. For example, when the replay combination and the bonus combination are won at the same time, if the attraction of the replay combination is prioritized, the reel stop processing in step S5 is performed so as to give priority to the attraction of the replay combination, and further, the replay combination is used. Since the corresponding symbol combination can always be stopped on the effective line regardless of the push order and the push timing, as a result, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination cannot be stopped on the effective line and is always a replay combination. The symbol combination of is stopped.

Further, according to FIGS. 638 to 643, during the bonus, the hit value of the push order-independent bell (common bell) that can be expected to win (or be established) without depending on the push timing and push order in the stop operation is the extraction range. It occupies everything. Then, in the present embodiment, when the replay is established, the next game is automatically beted and the next game is provided without consuming the medals, and when the push order bell is won, eight medals are paid out. Therefore, when the bonus game is executed, a large number of medals will be paid out during the execution period (during the bonus) of the bonus game.

As can be seen from FIGS. 638 to 643, in the slot machine 1 of this example, a special role (special watermelon) that functions as a transition trigger from the hell state to any of the advantageous states A to E. , Special cherry, special maintenance lip) is determined by using the internal lottery random value used in the internal lottery (lottery of the condition device). Therefore, it is not necessary to use a new random number value different from the internal lottery random number value. Therefore, it is possible to create a new game property using the hell state and the advantageous state while improving the efficiency of the control load, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[10-3. RT state control process]
Hereinafter, the RT state control process performed in the slot machine 1 will be described.

[10-3-1. RT state transition control process]
FIG. 646 is an example of a block diagram showing the transition of the RT state. The RT state transition control is executed by the CPU 1110 mounted on the main board 409.

When the data value in the RAM 1114 mounted on the main board 409 is cleared (RAM cleared), the general state (RT0) is reached. The combined probability of replays in the general state (maintenance replay role, raised replay role 1, raised replay role 2, lowered replay role, 7-matched replay role, and 7-matched fake play role) is about 1 / 7.3. .. In such a general state, when the game is executed for a certain period of time, the number of medals that the player bets to execute the game is larger than the number of medals paid out as a result of the game within this certain period of time. .. That is, the general state is a state in which the number of medals decreases as the player executes the game. In FIG. 646, the replay synthesis probability is referred to as the RP synthesis probability.

In the general state, even though one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected by the internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 is not stopped in the proper order and 0 bells are not operated. When the zero is displayed on the effective line, the CPU 1110 controls the transition from the general state to RT1. The replay synthesis probability at RT1 is about 1 / 7.3. In such RT1, when the game is executed for a certain period of time, the number of medals that the player bets to execute the game within this certain period of time is larger than the number of medals paid out as a result of the game, as in the general state. There will be more.

In RT1, when "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip" is selected by internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination of raise lip 1 is displayed on the valid line, the CPU 1110 is shifted from RT1 to RT2. Control. When the RT state is changed from RT1 to RT2, the basic ART game is started on the condition that the ART first hit lottery is won, and the basic ART is in progress. In this specification, a general term for games in the basic ART, in the special zone described later, and in the preparation of the special zone is referred to as an ART game. However, if the game shifts from RT1 to RT2 without winning the ART first hit lottery, the basic ART game is not performed, and the instruction function display described later and the lottery for adding the number of ART games are not performed. However, when the replay high probability state (corresponding to RT2 of this example) is controlled without winning the ART first hit lottery, the instruction function display does not operate when the push order bell is won. However, if the payout rate exceeds "1", the game number management process described above may be started. This is because the state in which the ball output rate exceeds "1" is advantageous to the player.

During the ART game, an ART game is executed in which the instruction function can be continuously operated over a plurality of games (the instruction function display can be continuously executed over a plurality of games). Specifically, when any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected by the internal lottery, the CPU 1110 controls so that the instruction function display described later is performed. Further, it is also controlled by the sub-board 510 so that the display according to the instruction content of the instruction function determined by the main board 409 is performed. Moreover, the replay synthesis probability in RT2 is about 1 / 1.6. In such RT2, when the game is executed for a certain period of time, the number of medals paid out as a result of the game is larger than the number of medals bet by the player to execute the game within this certain period of time. That is, in RT2 where the instruction function display is performed, when the player executes the game, the number of medals increases accordingly. However, the ART game is set to 50 games per shot, and if the lottery for adding the number of ART games described later is not won, the game ends in 50 games. Specifically, if the lottery for adding the number of ART games is won during the ART game, the number of ART games will be added, and the ART games will continue until the number of added ART games in addition to the above 50 games is exhausted, which will be described later. The instruction function is displayed. On the other hand, if the lottery for adding the number of ART games is not won, the instruction function display described later is performed from the start of the basic ART game until 50 games are digested, but when 50 games are digested, the instruction function display is displayed. finish. At the same time, the display by the sub-board 510 according to the instruction content of the instruction function determined by the main board 409 is also completed. When the display by the sub-board 510 according to the instruction content of the instruction function is completed, even if any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected by the internal lottery, the reel stop button 211 The proper stop operation order is not specified. Then, when the 0-sheet bell zero is displayed on the effective line, the CPU 1110 controls the transition from RT2 to RT1. Even if the basic ART game is over, RT2 is maintained until the 0th bell zero is displayed on the valid line, so the right to execute the replay game is given frequently, but the instruction function display is displayed. It will not be done.

Probabilistically, "pushing order bell 1" to "pushing order bell 6" are not selected by the internal lottery during the ART game, and the specified number of games (pushing order bell 6) is not displayed even once. If the lottery for adding the number of ART games is not won, 50 games may be consumed, and if the lottery for adding the number of ART games is won, the sum of 50 games and the number of added games) may be consumed. In such a case, even if the above-mentioned specified number of games is exhausted, the ART game continues until the instruction function display is performed, and when the instruction function display is performed once, the ART game ends. It is configured in.

Further, in this example, one shot of the ART game is set to 50 games, but it goes without saying that the game is not limited to 50 games.

In this example, the number of games in which the ART game continues until the specified number of games such as 50 games is exhausted is managed, but instead, until the specified number of medals such as a net increase of 100 are net-increased. The number of sheets that the ART game continues may be managed.

During the basic ART, when any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected by the internal lottery, the proper stop operation order of the reel stop button 211 is clearly indicated by the instruction function display. Therefore, as long as the reel stop button 211 is operated according to this instruction function display, the RT state is maintained at RT2 (however, when the symbol combination corresponding to the raising lip 2 is displayed, it shifts to RT3). However, even though one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" was selected by the internal lottery and the proper stop operation order of the reel stop button 211 was clarified by the instruction function display. If the reel stop button 211 is not operated according to this instruction function display, the zero bell zero is displayed on the effective line, and the operation is shifted from RT2 to RT1 under the control of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409.

In RT2, when "raise lip 2 + normal maintenance lip" is selected by the internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the raise replay combination 2 is displayed on the effective line, it is controlled to shift from RT2 to RT3. When the RT state is changed from RT2 to RT3, it will be in the special zone and the ART game will be added with high probability (details will be described later). Also in this RT3, when any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected by the internal lottery, the CPU 1110 mounted on the main board 409 displays the instruction function described later. Control to be done. Further, it is also controlled by the sub-board 510 so that the display according to the instruction content of the instruction function determined by the main board 409 is performed.

The special zone ends in 5 games. Specifically, when "lowering lip + normal maintenance lip" is selected in the internal lottery, if it is in the special zone (if 5 games have not been digested), the symbol combination corresponding to the maintenance replay role is It is controlled so that the instruction function display described later is performed so as to be displayed. On the other hand, when "lowering lip + normal maintenance lip" is selected in the internal lottery, if 5 games have been digested since the special zone was started, the symbol combination corresponding to the lowering replay role will be displayed. In addition, control is performed so that the instruction function display described later is performed (see FIGS. 638 to 643 in each case). Then, when the symbol combination corresponding to the lower replay combination is displayed, the CPU 1110 controls to shift from RT3 to RT2. Further, when the zero bell zero is displayed on the effective line in RT3, the CPU 1110 controls so that the RT state is shifted from RT3 to RT1. The replay synthesis probability at RT3 is about 1 / 1.6. If 5 games have been digested since the special zone was started but the symbol combination corresponding to the lowered replay combination is not yet displayed, the game is controlled to the basic ART game under the RT state of RT3. The lottery state during ART at this time is a high probability state. Therefore, even during the special zone or the special zone preparation, the reel stop button is displayed when any of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected by the internal lottery as in the basic ART. The proper stop operation order of 211 is clarified by the instruction function display, and as long as the reel stop button 211 is operated according to this instruction function display, the RT state is maintained at RT3, but the reel does not follow the instruction function display. When the stop button 211 is operated and the zero bell zero is displayed on the effective line, the process shifts to RT1.

In any of the general states, RT1, RT2, and RT3, when the bonus combination (BB1, BB2) is won in the internal lottery and the condition device corresponding to the bonus combination is activated (when the bonus is established), the bonus is inside. Inside the bonus is a state in which the bonus flag is established but the bonus game has not yet started. That is, when the bonus combination is won in the internal lottery, the condition device corresponding to the bonus combination is activated, but in the condition device corresponding to this bonus combination, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is effective in the game in which the internal lottery is won. Even if it is not displayed in, after the next game, it will continue to operate until the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the valid line. The replay synthesis probability inside the bonus is about 1 / 7.3. Then, when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus symbol is displayed on the valid line (when the bonus is won) inside the bonus, the bonus game is started and the bonus is in progress. During such a bonus, when the game is executed for a certain period of time, the number of medals paid out as a result of the game is larger than the number of medals that the player bets to execute the game within this certain period of time. .. Then, when the bonus game ends, it returns to the general state.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main board 409 controls the RT state to any one of the general state (RT0 state), the RT1 state, the RT2 state, the RT3 state, the bonus internal state, and the bonus state. To. On the other hand, as described above, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has an instruction function, and the execution of the ART game in which the instruction function can be continuously operated over a plurality of games is basically such an RT state. It is controlled by a system different from the control of. As described above, the ART game by such an instruction function is mainly executed in RT2 and RT3, but if the execution condition of the ART game is satisfied (for example, winning the ART execution lottery), in any RT state. , You can run ART games. However, this does not apply if the restrictions such as rules are violated. For example, it is assumed that the ART game cannot be executed in the bonus state. In the following, the state control process related to the instruction function will be described in detail.

[10-3-2. Lottery related to ART]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the following lottery is performed as a lottery related to ART. First, there are an ART first hit lottery and an ART first hit lottery state transition lottery as lottery related to ART performed in a normal game state (hell state, advantageous state A to advantageous state D) that is neither an ART game nor a bonus. Further, as a lottery related to ART performed during an ART game (during basic ART, in a special zone, or in preparation for a special zone), there are a special zone lottery and a lottery for adding the number of ART games. Further, the CPU 1110 mounted on the main board 409 is the first ART-related lottery state in a normal game state (non-ART, RT1, RT2 and RT3 in which the instruction function is not generated) that is neither an ART game nor a bonus. When the winning lottery is controlled to one of a plurality of lottery states (advantageous state A to advantageous state D) having different degrees of advantage, and neither the normal game state nor the bonus (during the ART game), the special zone lottery It is controlled to one of a plurality of lottery states (ART medium-low probability state, ART medium-high probability state, special zone, special zone preparation) in which the degree of advantage of the lottery for adding the number of ART games is different.

The hell state is a state in which the operation of the instruction function is not confirmed, and when a special role is selected by the internal lottery in the hell state, it shifts to one of the advantageous states A to E, but in these advantageous states A to E, , The operation of the instruction function is always confirmed once (the instruction function is always displayed once). In addition, when one game is executed in the hell state, the winning probability of the ART game in which 50 games are executed (probability of transition to the advantageous state E) is a special role (special watermelon role, special cherry role, special) in the internal lottery. It is the combined probability of the probability that the maintenance replay combination) will be selected and the probability that the transfer destination will be determined in the advantageous state E in the transfer destination determination lottery (step S6012) when the special combination is selected in the internal lottery. ..

During the ART game, the CPU 1110 controls the lottery state related to ART to one of an ART medium-low probability state, an ART medium-high probability state, a special zone preparation state, and a special zone state. The generic term for the ART medium-low probability state, the ART medium-high probability state, the special zone preparation state, and the special zone state is referred to as an ART medium lottery state. The ART medium-low probability state is a lottery state in which the winning probability in the special zone lottery or the lottery with the number of ART games added during the non-normal time (ART flag ON) is performed with a relatively low probability. The ART medium-high probability state is a lottery state in which the winning probability in the special zone lottery or the lottery with the number of ART games added during the non-normal time (ART flag ON) is performed with a relatively high probability. The special zone preparation state is the lottery state when the special zone lottery is won but the special zone has not started yet (that is, the special zone lottery has been won, but the RT state has not yet been transferred to RT3. State). The special zone state is a lottery state in the special zone.

As described above, both the special zone state and the special zone preparation state are the lottery states related to ART that are controlled when the special zone lottery is won in the ART medium-low probability state or the ART medium-high probability state. is there. Further, the CPU 1110 is in the lottery state during the ART during the basic ART (the lottery state related to the ART that is neither the special zone nor the preparation for the special zone) only when it is controlled to the ART medium-low probability state and the ART medium-high probability state. Is determined based on the result of the lottery state transition lottery during ART as to which of the above-mentioned ART medium-low probability state and ART medium-high probability state is controlled. The lottery state transition lottery during ART is performed using the lottery state transition lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 664, which will be described later. In the ART medium-low probability state, the transition lottery to the ART medium-high probability state is performed with a probability according to the conditional device operated in response to the result of the internal lottery. Further, in the ART medium-high probability state, the transition lottery to the ART medium-low probability state is performed with a probability according to the conditional device operated in response to the result of the internal lottery. The specific transition probability in the lottery state transition lottery during ART is as shown in FIG. 664 described later.

The specific winning probability in the special zone lottery is as shown in FIG. 665, which will be described later. The special zone lottery is performed every game at a time other than the normal time, depending on the lottery state during ART and the condition device activated as a result of the internal lottery. If you win the special zone lottery, when "raise lip 2 + normal maintenance lip" is selected in the internal lottery in the subsequent games, the reel stop button 211 will press the "right-left-middle" push order (reverse). The instruction function is displayed by the CPU 1110 so that the stop operation is performed by pinching and pushing), and the display according to the instruction content of the instruction function determined by the main board 409 is performed by the sub board 510. When the player stops the reel stop button 211 according to this instruction, the symbol combination corresponding to the raising replay combination 2 is displayed on the effective line, the RT state shifts from RT2 to RT3, and the special zone is started. Reel. However, in the present embodiment, the special zone can be won only when watermelons, cherries, and outliers are selected by the internal lottery in the ART medium-low probability state or the ART medium-high probability state. Therefore, in the special zone state and the special zone preparation state, the result of the special zone lottery is always non-winning. The special zone state ends in 5 games as described above. After that, as described above, when the symbol combination corresponding to the lower replay combination is displayed, the transition from RT3 to RT2 is performed, and the lottery state during ART at this time is controlled to a high probability state.

The lottery for adding the number of ART games is performed according to the advantageous state B (when the ART game is executed when the precursor game is digested), the lottery state during ART, and the conditional device operated as a result of the internal lottery. It is held when the special zone lottery is not won. However, the special zone lottery and the lottery for adding the number of ART games may be performed at the same time. The lottery for adding the number of ART games includes a lottery for determining whether or not to add the number of ART games, and an additional game for determining the number of games to be added when it is decided to add the number of ART games. Includes a number determination lottery. The specific winning probabilities in the additional decision lottery are as shown in FIGS. 656 and 662, which will be described later. The specific number of ART games added in the lottery for determining the number of additional games is as shown in FIGS. 657 to 660 and 662 (b), which will be described later.

The additional game number determination lottery is a lottery performed when the additional game number determination lottery is won, and the specific lottery probability in the additional game number determination lottery is in the ART medium-low probability state, using FIG. 657 described later. , Determine the number of games to be added according to the result of the internal lottery. Further, in the ART medium-high probability state, the number of games to be added is determined according to the result of the internal lottery by using FIG. 658, which will be described later. Similarly, when in the special zone, the number of games to be added is determined according to the result of the internal lottery using FIG. 659 described later, and when the special zone is being prepared, FIG. 660 described later is used. Then, the number of games to be added is determined according to the result of the internal lottery. However, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is either "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip" or "normal maintenance lip", the specific lottery probability in the additional game number determination lottery is shown in FIG. 662 ( As shown in a), the number of games to be added when the lottery for determining the number of additional games is won is as shown in FIG. 662 (b).

[10-3-3. Instruction function processing]
As described in step S31 of FIG. 644, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the main board 409 selects the winning combination by the internal lottery process in step S3 (see FIGS. 638 to 643 for the lottery table). , The main processing of the instruction function processing is performed by the main board 409, and when the occurrence of the instruction is displayed by the special display LED 612 (instruction function display), the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510) gives the same instruction. Function instructions can be displayed on other displays (navigation display, instruction generation effect). The display modes of the instruction function display and the navigation display may be various, but both displays are required to have display contents in line with the instruction contents of the instruction function determined by the main board 409.

FIG. 647 is a diagram for explaining a rough processing flow of the instruction function processing. In FIG. 647, regarding the instruction function processing performed by the slot machine 1, a series of processes executed by the main board 409 and a series of processes executed by the sub board 510 in response to a command from the main board 409 are shown together. ing. FIG. 648 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing related to the generation of the instruction function executed by the main board 409 among the instruction function processes shown in FIG. 647. Here, first, the outline of the instruction function processing will be described with reference to FIG. 647, and after [10-3-4], the processing related to the generation of the instruction function will be performed with reference to FIGS. 648 to 655 and the like. The flow of the game will be explained including.

Although various flags are used in the following description of the instruction function processing, these flags are used in the memory in the board for executing the instruction function processing (for example, the RAM 1114 of the main board 409 and the RAM 1122 of the sub board 510). It is an internal flag that is held, and the value is rewritten or read by the CPU or the like of each board (for example, CPU 1110 or CPU 1118). Further, when the flags having the same name are used between the main board 409 and the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510), it is assumed that these internal flags basically have a common data format, and the main board 409 to the peripheral board side. It is assumed that the value of the flag is synchronized by transmitting a signal such as a command to.

In addition to the above internal flags, variable data may also be used, and these variable data are also used in the memory of the board that refers to the variable data (for example, in the case of the main board 409, the RAM 1114 and the sub board 510. In this case, it is assumed that the data is held in the RAM 1122), and the value is read or rewritten by a CPU or the like (for example, CPU 1110 in the case of the main board 409 and CPU 1118 in the case of the sub board 510).

First, in step S61 of FIG. 647, the main board 409 executes a process (process related to the generation of the instruction function) regarding whether or not to generate the instruction function. More specifically, it determines whether the ART first hit lottery is won or not, whether or not the ART game can be started, and the number of times the ART game is continued.

Then, when it is determined to generate the instruction function as a result of the processing related to the generation of the instruction function, the main board 409 causes the special display LED 612 to display the instruction function display based on the winning combination of the game. Process (step S62). By this instruction function display, it is possible to indicate an appropriate stop order of the push order small winning combination established during ART, or to indicate that a predetermined symbol should be aligned in a predetermined stop order.

In the case of a game in which it is determined in step S61 that the main board 409 does not need to display the instruction function, the special display LED 612 does not display the specific instruction function in step S62.

The main board 409 displays the instruction function in step S62 based on the result of the process related to the generation of the instruction function in step S61, while displaying the same information as the display content (instruction content) in the instruction function display by a command or the like. It is transmitted to a peripheral board (for example, a sub board 510) (instruction information command). If the instruction function is not displayed, the instruction information command may be used to notify the fact, or the instruction information command may not be transmitted. However, if the instruction information command is not transmitted, it is necessary for the receiving side to determine that the command has not been received after a predetermined time has elapsed. By doing so, the peripheral board (sub-board 510) can not only recognize whether or not the instruction function display is performed in the game based on the reception of the instruction information command, but also display the instruction function. The displayed contents (instructions) can also be grasped.

Then, the peripheral board (here, the sub board 510) that has received the instruction information command from the main board 409 performs the process shown in steps S63 to S65 of FIG. 647 based on the information included in the instruction information command. In the instruction function process shown in FIG. 647, the process related to the generation of the instruction function (step S61) is first executed by the main board 409, but the subsequent process by the main board 409 and the sub board 510 (specifically). Does not limit the execution timing of each other's processing with respect to the processing of step S62 and the processing of steps S63 to S65).

First, in step S63, the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510) determines whether or not the instruction function display is performed (or is performed) in the game, and the instruction function display is performed (or performed). ) (YES in step S63), the instruction generation effect processing is performed as the processing in step S64. Further, when it is determined in step S63 that the instruction function display is not performed (or not performed), the peripheral substrate (for example, the sub-board 510) is instructed as the process of step S65 (NO in step S63). Perform function-related processing.

The instruction generation effect processing in step S64 is an "instruction generation effect" that instructs the player on the stop order and stop position (target symbol, that is, the timing of the stop operation) of the reel 301 on the image display body 500 or other display. Is a process for displaying a so-called ART navigation or the like. The content of the instruction shown to the player by the instruction generation effect is limited to the content displayed on the special display LED 612 by the instruction function display process. For example, it is not permissible that the instruction content indicated by the instruction generation effect content is "reverse push" even though the instruction content indicating "forward push" is displayed by the special display LED 612 by the instruction function display. Further, even if the special display LED 612 displays the instruction content indicating "forward push" and indicates that "the left reel 301a should be stopped first" as an instruction based on the instruction generation effect content, the second subsequent operation. It is also unacceptable if the reel 301b to be stopped is not instructed. Further, the fact that the instruction content by the instruction generation effect is limited to the one in line with the display content displayed on the special display LED 612 is not limited to the above-mentioned pressing order, but is a guideline for the pressing location on the instruction function display. Also applies when is determined. That is, for example, although the special display LED 612 displays the instruction content indicating that "the red 7 symbol should be aimed at all reels" by the instruction function display, the instruction content indicated by the instruction generation effect content is "BAR symbol". It is not permissible to have something that "aims at" or "aim at the red 7 symbol only on some reels".

In addition, as for the specific production form of the instruction generation effect, various production forms such as displaying the pressing order and the design on the liquid crystal screen and lighting the LEDs associated with the reels 301a to 301c are conventionally known. Any one or a combination of them may be used.

The instruction function-related process in step S65 is related to the instruction function when the instruction function display is not displayed on the special display LED 612 (for example, a game during non-ART, a game in which the winning combination is won in any push order even during ART, etc.). This is a process for displaying a predetermined effect screen. It should be noted that the above-mentioned "winners in any order of push" include not only the winners who can expect the maximum number of payouts regardless of the game method used at the time of winning, such as the bell in any order of push, but also depending on the game method. Winners who cannot expect the maximum number of payouts or cannot get the payout are also included. To explain in detail, not only the winning combination (for example, watermelon role) that can be obtained when playing with a game method (corresponding to the above-mentioned "maximum efficiency hitting method") that can expect the maximum payout is included, but also " A winning combination that cannot be obtained when playing with the "maximum efficiency striking method" (for example, a symbol combination using a symbol arranged on the opposite side of the symbol arrangement of the reel 301 from the symbol combination of the watermelon role described above is prepared. It is a single-card combination that is judged to be a prize by stopping the symbol combination, and includes a so-called chance role).

By performing the above steps S61 to S65, the instruction function processing is completed. Hereinafter, each process (steps S61 to S65) performed as the instruction function process by the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 will be described in detail.

[10-3-4. Processing related to the generation of the instruction function]
The flow of the game including the process related to the generation of the instruction function shown in step S61 of FIG. 647 will be described with reference to FIG. 648.

First, in step S601 of FIG. 648, it is determined whether or not the game number management flag is ON. The game number management flag is an internal flag for indicating whether or not the game number management process is in progress, and when it is ON, the game number management process is in progress (that is, the advantageous state A to the advantageous state E and the pullback state). If it is OFF, it means that it is not a game number management process (that is, a hell state). If the number of games management flag is ON (YES in step S601), the process proceeds to step S602.

In step S602, the number of games executed during the game number management process (the number of games executed by the player while the game number management flag is set to ON) is counted. Specifically, when one game is executed during the game number management process, the game number counter GC is added by 1 as the number of games executed during the game number management process. Then, the process proceeds to step S603.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, advantageous states A to advantageous states E and pullback states are prepared as states during the game number management process, and any of these advantageous states is controlled.

Here, an outline of each advantageous state and the pullback state of the advantageous state A to the advantageous state E will be briefly described. The advantageous state A is a state in which 32 games are set as the ceiling, and when the instruction function display is performed once in the game after the 32 games are executed, the advantageous state A ends and the state shifts to the hell state. .. The advantageous state B is a state in which 32 games are set as the ceiling, and after the 32 games are executed, the state is shifted to the advantageous state E, which will be described later. The advantageous state C is a state in which 32 games are set as the ceiling, and when the 32 games are executed, the next game shifts to the advantageous state D, which will be described later. In the advantageous state D, 10 games are set as a chance zone (hereinafter referred to as "CZ"), and during the 10 games as the CZ, rare small roles (watermelon role, cherry role) are selected by an internal lottery. If it is issued, there is a 100% chance that the next game will shift to the advantageous state E, and if any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected by the internal lottery, there is a 1/4 chance. Although it shifts to the advantageous state E from the next game, it shifts to the hell state when the CZ ends without shifting to the advantageous state E. The advantageous state E is a state in which the instruction function flag is set to ON and the execution of the ART game is permitted, and the preparatory state until the RT state is changed from RT1 to RT2 and the execution and advantageous state E of the ART game. include. Further, in this advantageous state E, the instruction function continuously operates for the specified number of games (in this example, "50 games + α" (α is the number of additional games)) unless the game number counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold value. However, when the specified number of ART games is exhausted, the game ends unless the number of ART games is added. Further, after the end of the advantageous state E, as long as the game number management flag is ON (unless the game number counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold value), the game is controlled to the pullback state A or the pullback state B described later.

In this example, the advantageous state does not end and the state does not shift to the hell state without the instruction function display being performed even once. However, when the game is controlled to any of the advantageous gaming states (particularly advantageous state A) from the advantageous state A to the advantageous state E, and the instruction function display is performed even once during the game number management process. Even when it is not, if a bonus combination that increases so-called medals is selected by an internal lottery, the instruction function display may not be performed as a special process (special process execution means).

By the way, in a conventional slot machine, when an ART first hit lottery is won, a precursory game is played over a plurality of games (for example, 32 games), and the ART game is often executed after the precursory game is executed. It was. In such a conventional slot machine, even if the ART first hit lottery is not won, when there is a possibility that the ART first hit lottery has been won (for example, a rare small role is selected by an internal lottery). The precursor game is executed when it is played. That is, after the precursor game is executed, the ART game may or may not be executed. Then, by executing the expectation effect that can give the player the expectation of winning the ART first hit lottery during the precursor game, the player's interest can be attracted to the precursor game.

However, in such a conventional slot machine, if the precursor game is executed but the ART first hit lottery is not won, the player is greatly disappointed. In particular, if the result of the ART first hit lottery is not specified until the set precursor game is exhausted, the player must execute the precursor game while there is a possibility that the ART first hit lottery has not been won. However, if the ART first hit lottery is not won, the interest will be significantly reduced. Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the ART first hit lottery is won in the hell state and the transition destination is determined to be one of the advantageous state A to the advantageous state C (that is, the ceiling game (precursor game)). When the transition destination is determined to the set advantageous state), the instruction function display is always performed once when the set ceiling game is digested. As a result, the player is not forced to execute the precursor game while there is a possibility that the ART first hit lottery has not been won, and the precursor game is confirmed that the instruction function display is always performed once. Will be executed. Moreover, since the degree of profit for the player after the precursor game is digested differs depending on the advantageous state, it is possible to preferably suppress the decline in interest without losing the meaning of the precursor game. .. In this example, when the set ceiling game (precursor game) is digested, the instruction function display is always performed once, but the operation of the instruction function display is not necessarily set. It is not limited to what is played only when the ceiling game is digested. For example, the instruction function display may be activated in the middle of the precursor game unless the result of the ART first hit lottery can be grasped at the time when the instruction function display is executed. "A mode in which the result of the ART first hit lottery can be grasped when the instruction function display is executed" is an instruction function in the middle of the omen game when the number of times the instruction function display is operated is determined to be once during the omen game. When the display is activated, it corresponds to a mode in which it can be grasped that the ART game is not executed at that time.

Further, as described above, the hell state is the state in which the execution of the instruction function display is confirmed, and the advantageous state is the state in which the execution of the instruction function display is confirmed. However, the execution of the instruction function display is not confirmed in the pullback state. Therefore, when defining a hell state and a non-hell state (advantageous state A to advantageous state E, pullback state A, and pullback state B), the state in which it is impossible to allow the execution of the instruction function display is the hell state. The non-hell state is a state in which the execution of the instruction function display can be permitted.

Further, in the advantageous state A, the advantageous state B, and the advantageous state C of this example, 32 games are set as the ceiling, but it goes without saying that the setting as the ceiling is not limited to 32 games. It is preferable that the number of games is set to 32 games or less.

Further, in the advantageous state D of this example, 10 games are set as CZ, but it goes without saying that the setting as CZ is not limited to 10 games.

In the processing after step S603, processing according to the state is performed. Specifically, when it is determined in step S603 that the advantageous state A flag is ON (YES in step S603), the advantageous state A time processing is performed (step S604). If it is determined in step S603 that the advantageous state A flag is OFF (NO in step S603), the process proceeds to step S605, and it is determined whether or not the advantageous state B flag is ON (step S605). When it is determined in step S605 that the advantageous state B flag is ON (YES in step S605), the advantageous state B time processing is performed (step S606). If it is determined in step S605 that the advantageous state B flag is OFF (NO in step S605), the process proceeds to step S607, and it is determined whether or not the advantageous state C flag is ON (step S607). When it is determined in step S607 that the advantageous state C flag is ON (YES in step S607), the advantageous state C time processing is performed (step S608). If it is determined in step S607 that the advantageous state C flag is OFF (NO in step S607), the process proceeds to step S609, and it is determined whether or not the advantageous state D flag is ON (step S609). When it is determined in step S609 that the advantageous state D flag is ON (YES in step S609), the advantageous state D time processing is performed (step S610). If it is determined in step S609 that the advantageous state D flag is OFF (NO in step S609), the process proceeds to step S611, and it is determined whether or not the advantageous state E flag is ON (step S611). When it is determined in step S611 that the advantageous state E flag is OFF (YES in step S611), the advantageous state E time processing is performed (step S612). If it is determined in step S611 that the advantageous state E flag is OFF (NO in step S611), the process proceeds to step S613, and the pullback state process is performed (step S613).

If it is determined in step S601 that the number of games management flag is OFF (NO in step S601), the process proceeds to step S614 and the hell state processing is performed.

Hereinafter, the processing in the hell state, each processing in the advantageous state A to the advantageous state E, and the pullback state processing will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 649 to 655. 649 to 655 are flowcharts showing an example of each process executed by the CPU 1110 of the main board 409. Specifically, FIG. 649 is a flowchart showing an example of processing in a hell state. FIG. 650 is a flowchart showing an example of processing in the advantageous state A. FIG. 651 is a flowchart showing an example of processing in the advantageous state B. FIG. 652 is a flowchart showing an example of processing in the advantageous state C. FIG. 653 is a flowchart showing an example of processing in the advantageous state D. FIG. 654 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at the time of advantageous state E. FIG. 655 is a flowchart showing an example of the pullback state processing.

[10-3-4-1. Processing in hell state]
In the hell state, it is first determined whether or not a special role (special watermelon role, special cherry role, special maintenance replay role) has been selected by an internal lottery (step S6011). In step S601, when it is determined in the internal lottery that any of the special roles (special watermelon role, special cherry role, special maintenance replay role) has been selected (YES in step S6011), the selected special role has been selected. The transfer destination determination lottery (step S6012) is performed according to the type of. This transition destination determination lottery is a lottery for determining the advantageous state of the transition destination, and the transition destination is determined from the advantageous states A to the advantageous state E.

In the transition destination determination lottery in step S6012, the advantageous state A is determined with a probability of 59600/65536, the advantageous state B is determined with a probability of 3935/65536, and the advantageous state C is determined with a probability of 2000/65536. , The advantageous state D is determined with a probability of 1/65536, and the advantageous state E is determined with a probability of 1/65536. The slot machine 1 of this example is configured so that hall personnel and the like can change to any of the settings 1 to 6, and each winning combination is selected in the internal lottery for each of these settings. Probability of being different. However, the probability that a special role (special watermelon role, special cherry role, special maintenance replay role) will be selected by the internal lottery is the same regardless of the settings 1 to 6. Here, the probability that the special watermelon role is selected, the probability that the special cherry role is selected, and the probability that the special maintenance replay role is selected may be set in common in settings 1 to 6, or each special role is selected. Although the probability of being issued differs depending on the setting, the combined probability of selecting a special role (special watermelon role, special cherry role, special maintenance replay role) may be common in settings 1 to 6.

When the shift destination is determined in step S6012, the shift destination is determined in steps S6013 to S6016, and the game state flag corresponding to the shift destination is set to ON.

Specifically, when it is determined that the transition destination is in the advantageous state A (YES in all of steps S6013 to S6016), the advantageous state A flag is set to ON (step S6017). After that, the process proceeds to step S6018, and the number of ceiling games is set to 32 games (TA ← 32). After that, the process proceeds to step S6019, and the precursor flag is set to ON.

Further, when it is determined that the transition destination is in the advantageous state B (YES in steps S601 to 6015 and NO in step S6016), the advantageous state B flag is set to ON (step S6022). After that, the process proceeds to step S6023, and the number of ceiling games is set to 32 games (TB ← 32). After that, the process proceeds to step S6019, and the precursor flag is set to ON.

Further, when it is determined that the transition destination is in the advantageous state C (YES in steps S6013 and 6014 and NO in step S6015), the advantageous state C flag is set to ON (step S6024). After that, the process proceeds to step S6025, and the number of ceiling games is set to 32 games (TC ← 32). After that, the process proceeds to step S6019, and the precursor flag is set to ON.

When the precursor flag is set to ON in step S6019, the hell state flag is set to OFF (step S6020), the number of games management flag is set to ON (step S6021), and the hell state processing ends. To do.

When the number of ceiling games is set, a precursory effect is performed until the games with the number of ceiling games are exhausted. However, if the ART first hit lottery is won or the bonus roles (BB1, BB2) are selected in the internal lottery during the precursory production (until the number of games on the ceiling is exhausted), Even if all the games of the number of ceiling games are not digested, ART games and bonus games are executed.

Further, when it is determined that the transition destination is in the advantageous state D (YES in step S6013 and NO in step S6014), the advantageous state D flag is set to ON (step S6026). After that, the process proceeds to step S6027, and the number of CZ games is set to 10 games (CZ ← 10). At this time, the number of ceiling games is not set (the number of ceiling games may be set to 0 games). After that, the hell state flag is set to OFF (step S6020), the game number management flag is set to ON (step S6021), and the hell state processing ends.

Further, when it is determined that the transition destination is in the advantageous state E (NO in step S6013), the advantageous state E flag is set to ON (step S6028). After that, the process proceeds to step S6029, and the number of ART games is set to 50 games (ART ← 50). Number of ART games When ART is set to 50 games (YES in step S6129), the ART flag is set to ON (step S6030). After that, the hell state flag is set to OFF (step S6020), the game number management flag is set to ON (step S6021), the hell state processing ends, and the process returns to the main routine.

If no special role (special watermelon role, special cherry role, special maintenance replay role) is selected in the internal lottery (NO in step S6011), the processes of steps S6012 to S6021 are skipped, and the game The number management state is not started (it does not shift to the advantageous state), and the hell state continues.

By the way, when the transfer destination determination lottery of step S6012 is performed in the hell state, the state is shifted to an advantageous state regardless of the result of the lottery, and the instruction function is always displayed once. The determination of whether or not a special role has been won (step S6011) and / and the transfer destination determination lottery (step S6012) correspond to the ART first hit lottery in the hell state. However, when it is defined as "ART game execution lottery", the determination of whether or not a special role has been won in the internal lottery (step S6011) does not correspond to the "ART game execution lottery", and the transition destination determination lottery Only (step S6012) corresponds to the "ART game execution lottery".

Further, in the hell state, when it is determined that the special role has been selected in step S6011 (YES in step S6011) and the transfer destination determination lottery in step S6012 is performed, the game number management flag is set to ON. Counting of the game number counter GC is started from the next game. Even if the player is in hell and the bonus game is being executed, if it is determined that a special role has been selected in step S6011 (YES in step S6011) and the transfer destination determination lottery in step S6012 is performed, the lottery is performed. The game number management flag is set to ON, and the game number counter GC starts counting from the next game. Therefore, in this case, if the transition destination is any of the advantageous states A to C, the ceiling game is consumed during the bonus game, and if the transition destination is the advantageous state D, the chance zone ( CA) will be executed, and if the transition destination is the advantageous state E, the bonus game will end and the ART game will start when the RT state shifts to RT2 (controlled to RT0 after the end of the bonus game). Will be done. When the game number management process is started (when the game state related to the instruction function display is changed from the hell state to the advantageous state), except for the above-mentioned special process (that is, a bonus combination during the game number management process). Is selected by internal lottery), the instruction function is always displayed once during the game number management process.

By the way, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the period in which the game number management flag is set to ON and the period in which the game number management flag is set to OFF are compared, the period in which the game number management flag is set to ON is longer, but the game The period in which the number management flag is set to ON is configured to be 70% or less of the total game period. Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, while suppressing the gambling property, the deterioration of the interest is preferably suppressed.

[10-3-4-2. Advantageous state A processing]
In the advantageous state A, first, in step S6031, the digestion process of the ceiling game is performed. Specifically, each time a game is executed, it is subtracted by 1 from the number of ceiling games set as 32 games (TA ← TA-1).

When 1 is subtracted from the number of ceiling games in step S6031, it is subsequently determined whether or not the game number counter GC indicating the number of games executed during the game number management process is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold G (step S6032). ). The predetermined threshold value G is a value set so that the number of medals as a game medium paid out to the player in one game number management process does not exceed the specified value. In this example, when the specified value is N, the value obtained by dividing N by the inclination value (net increase in number per game) is set as the predetermined threshold value G. For example, when it is specified that the number of game media paid out to the player does not exceed 3000 in one game number management process, 1500 games are set as a predetermined threshold value G when the inclination value is 2 [cards / game]. Set. However, in the slot machine equipped with the bonus game, the value obtained by subtracting the number of bonus games to be completed in the shortest time from the above G may be set as a predetermined threshold value. For example, if it is specified that the number of game media paid out to the player does not exceed 3000 in one game number management process, the inclination value is 2 [cards / game] and the number of bonus games to be completed in the shortest time is 34 games. When this is done, the 1466 game is set as a predetermined threshold.

If the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value G (YES in step S6032), the process proceeds to step S6034, and the ART first hit lottery is performed (step S6034). The ART first hit lottery performed in step S6034 is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous state E. When the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is either "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip" or "normal maintenance lip", the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery is as shown in FIG. 661. .. In addition, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is neither "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip" nor "normal maintenance lip", the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery is set to 1/65536. There is. FIG. 661 is a table used for the ART first hit lottery when the winning combination selected by the internal lottery is either "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip" or "normal maintenance lip".

Here, the ART first hit lottery performed in step S6034 will be described in detail. When the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery performed in step S6034 is shown in FIG. 661 ("special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip" winning. As shown in the time column), it is determined based on the difference K between the predetermined threshold value G and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process (the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process). Will be done.

Specifically, when the role selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or greater than the first specified number, ART The winning probability in the first winning lottery is 65536/65536 (that is, 100%). In addition, when the winning combination selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the first specified number, the ART first hit lottery will be held. The winning probability is 4/65536. The above-mentioned first specified number can be set arbitrarily, but when the ART game is executed based on winning the ART first hit lottery, a predetermined number of games (50 games in the present embodiment). Is preferably a value that can be digested without ending halfway. In the present embodiment, the number of ART games executed when the ART first hit lottery is won is 50 games (when the additional lottery is not won), so the above first specified number is 50 games or more. It is preferable, but not limited to. However, even if the ART first hit lottery is won, the ART game is not started immediately, so it is preferable to set the game to (50 games + α) in consideration of the number of games in the ready state. In this embodiment, 100 games are set as (50 games + α) games. Therefore, when the role selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of remaining games until the end of the game number management process is 100 games or more, there is a 100% probability that the ART will be hit for the first time. If the lottery is won and the number of games remaining until the end of the game number management process is less than 100 games, the ART first hit lottery will be won only with a probability of 4/65536. As a result, if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is small, the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery becomes relatively small, so even though the ART game was executed by winning the ART first hit lottery. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the ART game is forcibly terminated in the middle. As a result, the disappointment that can be given to the player can be reduced, and by extension, the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

In addition, when the combination selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the ART first hit probability when the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the first specified number. By making (4/65536 in this example) lower than the ART first hit probability (65536/65536 in this example) when the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or greater than the first specified number. , The number of games remaining until the end of the game number management process while keeping the same output rate as compared to the case where the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery is constant regardless of the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process. It is also possible to produce further effects such as being able to realize a game property that increases the ART first hit probability (65536/65536 in this example) when K is equal to or greater than the first specified number. It becomes.

Further, when the winning combination selected by the internal lottery is the normal maintenance lip, as shown in FIG. 661, the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery is always regardless of the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process. Is 4/65536.

In the above-described embodiment, when the winning combination selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the first specified number. Depending on whether or not there is, the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery is determined to be one of two stages, a high probability (65536/65536) and a low probability (4/65536). However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery is set in multiple stages and the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the number of remaining games until the end of the game number management process is K. As the value becomes smaller, the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery may gradually decrease.

If the ART first hit lottery is won (YES in step S6035), the process proceeds to step S6036, and the number of ceiling games is set to 0 (TA ← 0). After that, the precursor flag is set to OFF (step S6037), the advantageous state A flag is set to OFF (step S6038), the advantageous state E flag is set to ON (step S6039), and the number of ART games is set to 50 games. (Step S6040), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6041). After that, the process proceeds to step S6042, and the RT state transition process is performed.

The RT state transition process in step S6042 is a process for shifting the RT state. Specifically, when "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip" is selected by the internal lottery, the instruction function is activated in step S6041, so the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the order of "right-middle-left". The instruction function is displayed so that the stop operation is performed by (reverse push). When the player stops the reel stop button 211 according to this instruction function display, the symbol combination corresponding to the raising replay combination 1 is displayed on the effective line, and the CPU 1110 controls the transition from RT1 to RT2. Then, on condition that the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is performed, the ART flag is set to ON (step S6043), the processing at the advantageous state A ends, and the process returns to the main routine. However, if "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip" is not selected in the internal lottery, or if the player does not follow this even though the instruction function is displayed, from RT1 to RT2 in step S6042. No migration control is performed. When the "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip" was not selected in the internal lottery, the ART flag was not set to ON in step S6043, but the player did not follow this even though the instruction function was displayed. At this time, although the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is not performed in step S6042, the ART flag is set to ON in step S6043. Until the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is performed, the instruction function display is performed when "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip" is selected by the internal lottery. In other words, when "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip" is selected by the internal lottery in RT1, when the symbol combination corresponding to the raise replay combination 1 is displayed on the effective line, the control to shift to RT2 is performed. However, if the symbol combination corresponding to the raised replay combination 1 is not displayed on the effective line because the instruction function display is not followed, the RT1 is maintained, but the ART flag is set to ON. Further, according to the lottery tables of FIGS. 638 to 643, "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip" corresponds only to one push order condition device, but six push orders like a push order bell. It is preferable to have a corresponding condition device.

The ART flag is an internal flag for indicating whether or not the ART game is in progress. When it is ON, it means that it is in ART, and when it is OFF, it means that it is not in ART. That is, it means that it is in non-ART.

If the ART first hit lottery in step S6034 is not won (NO in step S6035), the process proceeds to step S6044, and it is determined whether or not the number of ceiling games is 0 (TA = 0). If the number of ceiling games is not 0 (NO in step S6044), the process does not proceed to step S6053 described later (that is, the processes of steps S6053 to S6061 are not performed), and the advantageous state A is continued without shifting to the hell state. To.

If the ART first hit lottery is won (YES in step S6035), the advantageous state A ends and the game shifts to the advantageous state E even if the number of ceiling games has not been digested, while the ART first hit lottery is won. If not (NO in step S6035), the advantageous state A will continue until the number of games in the ceiling game is exhausted. However, although not shown in FIG. 650, even if the player loses the ART first hit lottery (NO in step S6035) and the number of ceiling games is not 0 (NO in step S6044), a bonus combination is obtained in the internal lottery. When (BB1, BB2) is selected, the bonus game is started when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the valid line. During the execution of this bonus game, the ART first hit lottery is performed with a probability of 328/65536, and if the ART first hit lottery is won, the advantage state E is immediately shifted to after the bonus game is completed. On the other hand, if the ART first hit lottery is not won during the execution of the bonus game, the ceiling game is set to 32 games (TA ← 32), and the advantageous state A time processing is performed again.

When it is determined in step S6044 that the number of ceiling games is 0 (TA = 0) (YES in step S6044), the process proceeds to step S6053, and the game management process, that is, the game number counter GC currently being continued, After the count is started (after the game number management flag is set to ON), it is determined whether or not the instruction function display has been performed even once (step S6053). Judgment as to whether or not the instruction function display has been performed even once is determined by an internal lottery after the count of the game number counter GC is started (while the section display lamp 605 is lit (or blinking)). One of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected, and the maximum number of winning payouts corresponding to this "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" (8 in this example). It corresponds to the determination as to whether or not the stop operation mode for paying out the sheet) is instructed even once.

In step S6053, when it is determined that the instruction function display has been performed one or more times during the game number management process (YES in step S6053), the instruction function flag is set to OFF (step S6054), and the precursor flag is OFF. (Step S6055), the advantageous state A flag is set to OFF (step S6056), the hell state flag is set to ON (step S6057), and the game number management flag is set to OFF (step S6058). After that, the process proceeds to step S6059, the game number counter GC is set to 0 (step S6059), the processing in the advantageous state A ends, and the process returns to the main routine.

If it is determined in step S6053 that the instruction function display has not been performed even once during the game number management process (NO in step S6053), the number of instructions is set to one (step S6060), and the instruction is given. The function flag is set to ON (step S6061). As a result, in the advantageous state A processing, even if the game with the number of ceiling games TA (32 games in this example) has already been digested, it is determined that the instruction function display has not been performed even once. , The state is not changed to the hell state until the instruction function display is performed at least once, and the instruction function display is always performed once during the game number management process.

However, although not shown in FIG. 650, if the bonus game is executed after the count of the game number counter GC is started, the instruction function is displayed even after the count of the game number counter GC is started. Even if this has not been performed even once (even if it is determined as NO in step S6053), the processes of steps S6054 to S6059 are performed, and the advantageous state A is shifted to the hell state. For example, the bonus game is being executed even though the bonus game is executed by shifting from the hell state to the advantageous state A and the bonus roles (BB1, BB2) are selected by the internal lottery without winning the ART first hit lottery. If the ceiling game is set to 32 games after the bonus game is completed and the processing at the advantageous state A is performed again without winning the ART first hit lottery, the instruction function is not displayed and the ceiling game is 32. When the game is digested, the instruction function is not displayed even once after the transition from the hell state to the advantageous state A, but the transition from the advantageous state A to the hell state is performed.

In step S6032, when it is determined that the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process exceeds a predetermined threshold value G (NO in step S6032), the process proceeds to step S6053, and during the game management process. , It is determined whether or not the instruction function display has been performed even once (step S6053). In step S6053, if it is determined that the instruction function display has been performed one or more times during the game number management process (YES in step S6053), the processes of steps S6054 to S6059 are performed, and then the advantageous state A. Time processing ends and returns to the main routine.

By the way, considering the synthetic probability (26280/65536) in which any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected by the internal lottery and the predetermined threshold G (1500 games), the probability Although it can occur only with an extremely low probability, the game number counter GC is stochastically set to a predetermined threshold value without displaying the instruction function even once after the count of the game number counter GC is started. There may be a case where it is determined that G is exceeded (a case where it is determined as NO in step S6032 and a case where it is determined as NO in step S6053). In this case, the processes of steps S6054 to S6059 are not performed, the number of instructions is set to one (step S6060), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6061). As a result, even if the number of games executed during the game management process (game number counter GC) exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the instruction function is not displayed and the instruction function is not immediately transferred to the hell state. The advantageous state A is continued until the display is performed once, and it is possible to guarantee that the instruction function display is always performed once during the game number management process.

Further, as described above, even after the set ceiling game number TA (32 games in this example) has been digested, if the instruction function display is not performed even once during the game number management process, it is hell. Since the advantageous state A continues without shifting to the state, the number of remaining ceiling games TA may become negative as a result of the subtraction process in step S6031. Therefore, when the number of ceiling games TA, which was initially 32 games, becomes 0 by executing the game, the number of ceiling games TA is set to "FF", and when the number of ceiling games TA is "FF", the number of ceiling games TA is set to "FF". As long as the advantageous state A continues without shifting to the hell state or the advantageous state E, the process of step S6031 is not performed, and YES is determined in step S6044. As a result, even if the advantageous state A is continued after the number of ceiling games TA becomes 0 by executing the game, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to an error in the processing of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In step S6031, when the number of remaining ceiling games TA becomes negative, in addition to the process of keeping the number of remaining ceiling games TA set to "FF" even if the game is executed, "FF" is used in the first place. It may be a process of keeping "00" without setting it to "". Further, the remaining ceiling game number TA has been described by a subtraction method in which the game is subtracted each time the game is executed, but it goes without saying that the addition method may be used in which the game is added each time the game is executed.

In this example, when the number of ceiling games TA, which was initially 32 games, becomes 0 due to the execution of the game, the number of ceiling games TA is set to "FF". , It may be a process of keeping 00 without setting it to "FF".

Further, in this example, the initial value of the number of ceiling games TA is 32 games, and the subtraction method in which the number of ceiling games TA is subtracted each time the game is executed has been described. However, it goes without saying that the addition method may be used. ..

[10-3-4-3. Advantageous state B processing]
In the advantageous state B, first, in step S6071, the digestion process of the ceiling game is performed. Specifically, each time a game is executed, it is subtracted by 1 from the number of ceiling games set as 32 games (TB ← TB-1).

When 1 is subtracted from the number of ceiling games in step S6071, whether or not the game number counter GC indicating the number of games executed during the game number management process is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold G (1500 games in this example). Is determined (step S6072). If the number of games counter GC is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value G (YES in step S6072), the process proceeds to step S6073, and a lottery for adding the number of ART games is performed (step S6073). Since the advantageous state B is a state in which it is determined that when the game of the number of ceiling games TB is digested, the game is shifted to the advantageous state E and at least 50 games of ART games are executed, the ART performed in step S6073 is performed. The lottery for adding the number of games is a lottery for determining whether or not to further add the number of games of the ART game. When the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is either "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip" or "normal maintenance lip", the winning probability in the lottery with the number of ART games added is shown in FIG. 662 (a). That's right. In addition, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is neither "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip" nor "normal maintenance lip", the winning probability in the lottery with the number of ART games added is set to 1/65536. ing.

Then, the number of games added when the lottery for adding the number of ART games is won is as shown in FIG. 662 (b). In addition, in "when" special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip "is not won" shown in FIG. 662 (b), the roles selected by the internal lottery are "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip" and "normal maintenance lip". This includes not only when it is neither of the "rips" but also when the combination selected by the internal lottery is the "normal maintenance lip".

Here, the lottery for adding the number of ART games performed in step S6073 will be described in detail. When the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the winning probability in the lottery for adding the number of ART games performed in step S6073 is predetermined as shown in FIG. 662 (a). Is determined based on the difference K between the threshold G of the above and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process (the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process).

Specifically, when the role selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or greater than the second specified number, ART The winning probability in the lottery with the number of games added is 65536/65536 (that is, 100%). Also, when the role selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the second specified number, the number of ART games will be added to the lottery. The winning probability in is 4/65536. The above second specified number can be set arbitrarily, but even if the ART game is added based on winning the lottery for adding the number of ART games, the value can be consumed without ending the ART game halfway. Is preferable. In the present embodiment, when the lottery for adding the number of ART games is won, a maximum of 300 games are added. Therefore, it is preferable that the second specified number is 300 games or more, but the number is not limited to this. Absent. Therefore, when the role selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of remaining games until the end of the game number management process is 300 games or more, there is a 100% chance that the number of ART games will be played. If the number of games remaining until the end of the game number management process is less than 300 games, the lottery for adding the number of ART games will be won only with a probability of 4/65536. As a result, if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is small, the winning probability in the lottery for adding the number of ART games becomes relatively small. Nevertheless, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the ART game is forcibly terminated in the middle. As a result, the disappointment that can be given to the player can be reduced, and by extension, the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

In addition, when the combination selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the number of ART games is added when the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the second specified number. The winning probability in the lottery (4/65536 in this example) is added to the number of ART games when the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or greater than the second specified number. By making it lower than 65536), the number of games counted during the game number management process is the same as the game with the same output rate as compared with the case where the winning probability in the lottery for adding the number of ART games is constant regardless of the game number counter GC. It is possible to realize a game property that increases the winning probability (65536/65536 in this example) in the lottery for adding the number of ART games when the number of remaining games K until the end of the number management process is equal to or greater than the specified number. It is possible to produce further effects.

Further, as shown in FIG. 662 (b), regarding the number of games to be added when the number of ART games is added to the lottery, the role selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip". When is, the number of games remaining K until the end of the game number management process is different between the second specified number and more and less than the second specified number. Specifically, when the role selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the role selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip" when not won. Compared to, the number of games added is set to be large. As a result, if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is small, the number of ART games added when winning the lottery for adding the number of ART games becomes relatively small, so the lottery for adding the number of ART games is won. Even if the ART game is forcibly terminated in the middle of the game even though the ART game has been added, the discouragement that can be given to the player can be reduced.

In the above-described embodiment, when the winning combination selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the second specified number. Depending on whether or not there is, the winning probability in the lottery for adding the number of ART games is now determined to be one of two stages, a high probability (65536/65536) and a low probability (4/65536). However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the winning probability in the lottery for adding the number of ART games is set in multiple stages and the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance rip + normal maintenance rip", the number of remaining games until the end of the game number management process. As K becomes smaller, the winning probability in the lottery for adding the number of ART games may gradually decrease.

After that, the process proceeds to step S6074, and it is determined whether or not the number of ceiling games is 0 (TB = 0). If the number of ceiling games is 0 (YES in step S6074), the precursor flag is set to OFF (step S6075), the advantageous state B flag is set to OFF (step S6076), and the advantageous state E flag is set to ON. (Step S6077), the number of ART games is set (step S6078), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6079). After that, the process proceeds to step S6080, and the RT state transition process is performed.

In step S6073, the ART first hit lottery may be performed instead of the lottery for adding the number of ART games. In this case, the number of ceiling games TB is set to 0, and then the process proceeds to step S6074.

The RT state transition process in step S6080 is a process for shifting the RT state. Specifically, when "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip" is selected by the internal lottery, the instruction function is activated in step S6079, so that the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the "right-middle-left" push order. The instruction function is displayed so that the stop operation is performed by (reverse push). When the player stops the reel stop button 211 according to this instruction function display, the symbol combination corresponding to the raising replay combination 1 is displayed on the effective line, and the CPU 1110 controls the transition from RT1 to RT2. Then, on condition that the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is performed, the ART flag is set to ON (step S6081), the processing in the advantageous state B ends, and the process returns to the main routine. However, if "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip" is not selected in the internal lottery, or if the player does not follow this even though the instruction function is displayed, from RT1 to RT2 in step S6080. No migration control is performed. When the "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip" was not selected in the internal lottery, the ART flag was not set to ON in step S6081, but the player did not follow this even though the instruction function was displayed. At this time, although the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is not performed in step S6080, the ART flag is set to ON in step S6081. Until the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is performed, the instruction function display is performed when "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip" is selected by the internal lottery. In other words, when "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip" is selected by the internal lottery in RT1, when the symbol combination corresponding to the raise replay combination 1 is displayed on the effective line, the control to shift to RT2 is performed. However, if the symbol combination corresponding to the raised replay combination 1 is not displayed on the effective line because the instruction function display is not followed, the RT1 is maintained, but the ART flag is set to ON. Further, as described above, it is preferable to have a condition device corresponding to 6 push orders such as a push order bell for "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip".

In step S6078, if the additional lottery of step S6073 is not won, the number of games for one shot of the ART game (50 games in this example) is set, but if the additional lottery of step S6073 is won, the number of games is set. The number of games (50 + α) is set by adding the number of games α to be added.

If it is determined in step S6074 that the number of ceiling games is not 0 (TB = 0) (if NO is determined in step S6074), regardless of whether or not the lottery for adding the ART game in step S6073 is won. , Steps S6075 to S6081 are not processed. That is, the advantageous state B is continued without shifting to the hell state.

If it is determined in step S6072 that the game number counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold value (NO in step S6072), it is determined whether or not the instruction function display has been performed even once during the game management process. (Step S6082). That is, after the count of the game number counter GC is started (while the section display lamp 605 is lit (or blinking)), any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected in the internal lottery. Is selected, and the stop operation mode for paying out the maximum number of winning payouts (8 in this example) corresponding to the "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is instructed even once. It is determined whether or not it has been done.

In the advantageous state B, when the game with the number of ceiling games TB is digested, the game shifts to the advantageous state E and the ART game is executed, but in step S6072, it is determined that the game number counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold value. (It may be determined as NO in step S6072). For example, the ART game is executed after shifting from the hell state to the advantageous state E, the ART game is added, and the game count counter GC counts without shifting to the hell state even though the ART game has ended once. In the case where the player shifts to the advantageous state B in the continued state (for example, when the ART first hit lottery is won in the pullback mode and the player shifts to the advantageous state B), the ceiling game TB is digested in the advantageous state B. In this case, the number of games counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold G (1500 games in this example). In such a case, if the instruction function display is performed even once, the advantage state B is forcibly shifted to the hell state, but the instruction function display is 1 during the game number management process. In rare cases, it may not have been done. In that case, even if it is in the advantageous state B, the instruction function is displayed once without shifting to the advantageous state E (without executing the ART game), and then the instruction function is forcibly displayed. It will shift from the advantageous state B to the hell state. As a result, even if the number of games executed during the game management process (game number counter GC) exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the instruction function is not displayed and the instruction function is not immediately transferred to the hell state. The advantageous state B is continued until the display is performed once, and it is possible to guarantee that the instruction function display is always performed once during the game number management process.

Specifically, when it is determined in step S6072 that the game number counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold value (NO in step S6072), is the instruction function displayed during the game number management process in step S6082? It is judged whether or not. If it is determined in step S6082 that the instruction function display has not been performed even once during the game number management process (NO in step S6082), the number of instructions is set to one (step S6089), and the instruction function flag Is set to ON (step S6090). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6082 that the instruction function display has been performed during the game number management process (YES in step S6082), the instruction function flag is set to OFF (step S6083), and the precursor flag is set to OFF. (Step S6084), the advantageous state B flag is set to OFF (step S6085), the hell state flag is set to ON (step S6086), and the game number management flag is set to OFF (step S6087). After that, the process proceeds to step S6088, the game number counter GC is set to 0 (step S6088), the processing in the advantageous state B ends, and the process returns to the main routine. As a result, when the game shifts from the hell state to any of the advantageous states A to the advantageous state E and the counting of the game number counter GC is started, even if the game number counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold value. The advantageous state B is not changed to the hell state without displaying the instruction function even once, and the state is changed to the hell state after the instruction function is displayed at least once.

Further, when it is determined in step S6072 that the game number counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold value (NO in step S6072), the set ceiling game number TB (32 games in this example) is exhausted. Even so, if the instruction function display is not performed even once during the game number management process, the advantageous state B continues without shifting to the hell state, and as a result of the subtraction process performed in step S6071 It is possible that the number of remaining ceiling games TB will be negative. Therefore, when the number of ceiling games TB, which was initially 32 games, becomes 0 by executing the game, the number of ceiling games TB is set to FF, and when the number of ceiling games TB is FF, a hell state or As long as the advantageous state B continues without shifting to another advantageous state, the process of step S6071 is not performed. As a result, even if the advantageous state B is continued after the number of ceiling games TB becomes 0 by executing the game, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to an error in the processing of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In step S6071, when the number of remaining ceiling games TB becomes negative, in addition to the process of keeping the number of remaining ceiling games TB set to "FF" even if the game is executed, "FF" is used in the first place. It may be a process of keeping "00" without setting it to "". Further, the remaining ceiling game number TB has been described by a subtraction method in which the game is subtracted each time the game is executed, but it goes without saying that the addition method may be used in which the game is added each time the game is executed.

[10-3-4-4. Advantageous state C processing]
In the advantageous state C, first, in step S6091, the digestion process of the ceiling game is performed. Specifically, each time a game is executed, it is subtracted by 1 from the number of ceiling games set as 32 games (TC ← TC-1).

When 1 is subtracted from the number of ceiling games in step S6091, whether or not the game number counter GC indicating the number of games executed during the game number management process is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold G (1500 games in this example). Is determined (step S6092). If the number of games counter GC is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value G (YES in step S6092), the process proceeds to step S6094, and the ART first hit lottery is performed (step S6094). The ART first hit lottery performed in step S6094 is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous state E. When the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is either "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip" or "normal maintenance lip", the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery is as shown in FIG. 661. .. In addition, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is neither "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip" nor "normal maintenance lip", the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery is set to 1/65536. There is.

Here, the ART first hit lottery performed in step S6094 is performed in the same manner as the ART first hit lottery performed in step S6034. That is, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery performed in step S6094 is shown in FIG. 661 ("special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip". As shown in the column at the time of winning), based on the difference K between the predetermined threshold value G and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process (the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process). Will be decided.

Specifically, when the role selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or greater than the first specified number, ART The winning probability in the first winning lottery is 65536/65536 (that is, 100%). In addition, when the winning combination selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the first specified number, the ART first hit lottery will be held. The winning probability is 4/65536. The above-mentioned first specified number can be set arbitrarily, but when the ART game is executed based on winning the ART first hit lottery, a predetermined number of games (50 games in the present embodiment). Is preferably a value that can be digested without ending halfway. In the present embodiment, the number of ART games executed when the ART first hit lottery is won is 50 games (when the additional lottery is not won), so the above first specified number is 50 games or more. It is preferable, but not limited to. However, even if the ART first hit lottery is won, the ART game is not started immediately, so it is preferable to set the game to (50 games + α) in consideration of the number of games in the ready state. In this embodiment, 100 games are set as (50 games + α) games. Therefore, when the role selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of remaining games until the end of the game number management process is 100 games or more, there is a 100% probability that the ART will be hit for the first time. If the lottery is won and the number of games remaining until the end of the game number management process is less than 100 games, the ART first hit lottery will be won only with a probability of 4/65536. As a result, if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is small, the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery becomes relatively small, so even though the ART game was executed by winning the ART first hit lottery. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the ART game is forcibly terminated in the middle. As a result, the disappointment that can be given to the player can be reduced, and by extension, the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

In addition, when the combination selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the ART first hit probability when the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the first specified number. By making (4/65536 in this example) lower than the ART first hit probability (65536/65536 in this example) when the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or greater than the first specified number. , The number of games remaining until the end of the game number management process while keeping the same output rate as compared to the case where the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery is constant regardless of the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process. It is also possible to produce further effects such as being able to realize a game property that increases the ART first hit probability (65536/65536 in this example) when K is equal to or greater than the first specified number. It becomes.

Further, when the winning combination selected by the internal lottery is the normal maintenance lip, as shown in FIG. 661 (column at the time of winning the normal maintenance lip), regardless of the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process, At all times, the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery is 4/65536.

In the above-described embodiment, when the winning combination selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the first specified number. Depending on whether or not there is, the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery is determined to be one of two stages, a high probability (65536/65536) and a low probability (4/65536). However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery is set in multiple stages and the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the number of remaining games until the end of the game number management process is K. As the value becomes smaller, the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery may gradually decrease.

If the ART first hit lottery is won (YES in step S6095), the process proceeds to step S6096, and the number of ceiling games is set to 0 (TC ← 0). After that, the precursor flag is set to OFF (step S6097), the advantageous state C flag is set to OFF (step S6098), the advantageous state E flag is set to ON (step S6099), and the number of ART games is set to 50 games. (Step S6100), the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6101). After that, the process proceeds to step S6102, and the RT state transition process is performed.

The RT state transition process in step S6102 is a process for shifting the RT state. Specifically, when "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip" is selected by the internal lottery, the instruction function is activated in step S6101, so the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the order of "right-middle-left". The instruction function is displayed so that the stop operation is performed by (reverse push). When the player stops the reel stop button 211 according to this instruction function display, the symbol combination corresponding to the raising replay combination 1 is displayed on the effective line, and the CPU 1110 controls the transition from RT1 to RT2. Then, on condition that the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is performed, the ART flag is set to ON (step S6103), the processing at the advantageous state C ends, and the process returns to the main routine. However, if "raise rip 1 + normal maintenance rip" is not selected in the internal lottery, or if the player does not follow this even though the instruction function is displayed, the process from RT1 to RT2 is performed in step S6102. Although the transition control of is not performed, the ART flag is set to ON in step S6103. Until the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is performed, the instruction function display is performed when "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip" is selected by the internal lottery. In other words, when "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip" is selected by the internal lottery in RT1, when the symbol combination corresponding to the raise replay combination 1 is displayed on the effective line, the control to shift to RT2 is performed. However, if the symbol combination corresponding to the raised replay combination 1 is not displayed on the effective line because the instruction function display is not followed, the RT1 is maintained, but the ART flag is set to ON.

If the ART first hit lottery in step S6094 is not won (NO in step S6095), the process proceeds to step S6104, and it is determined whether or not the number of ceiling games is 0 (TC = 0). If the number of ceiling games is not 0 (NO in step S6104), the processes of steps S6106 to 6109 described later are not performed. That is, the advantageous state C is continued.

If the ART first hit lottery is won (YES in step S6095), the advantageous state C ends and the game shifts to the advantageous state E even if the number of ceiling games is not digested, while the ART first hit lottery is won. If not (NO in step S6095), the advantageous state C will continue until the number of games in the ceiling game is exhausted. However, although not shown in FIG. 652, even if the player loses the ART first hit lottery (NO in step S6095) and the number of ceiling games is not 0 (NO in step S6104), a bonus combination is obtained in the internal lottery. When (BB1, BB2) is selected, the bonus game is started when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the valid line. During the execution of this bonus game, the ART first hit lottery is performed with a probability of 328/65536, and if the ART first hit lottery is won, the advantage state E is immediately shifted to after the bonus game is completed. On the other hand, if the ART first hit lottery is not won during the execution of the bonus game, the ceiling game is set to 32 games (TC ← 32), and the advantageous state C time processing is performed again.

When it is determined in step S6104 that the number of ceiling games is 0 (TC = 0) (YES in step S6104), the precursor flag is set to OFF (step S6106), and the advantageous state C flag is set to OFF (YES in step S6104). Step S6107), the advantageous state D flag is set to ON (step S6108). Then, in step S6109, 10 games are set as the number of games in the chance zone (CZ ← 10), the processing at the advantageous state C is completed, and the process returns to the main routine.

Further, in step S6092, when it is determined that the game number counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold value G (NO in step S6032), the process proceeds to step S6112, and the instruction function display is performed even once during the game management process. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (step S6112). Here, when it is determined that the instruction function display has been performed one or more times (YES in step S6112), the instruction function flag is set to OFF (step S6113), the precursor flag is set to OFF (step S6114), and the instruction function flag is set to OFF. The advantageous state C flag is set to OFF (step S6115), the hell state flag is set to ON (step S6116), and the game number management flag is set to OFF (step S6117). After that, the process proceeds to step S6118, the game number counter GC is set to 0 (step S6118), the processing at the advantageous state C ends, and the process returns to the main routine.

By the way, also in the advantageous state C, as in the case of the advantageous state A, the composite probability (26280/65536) in which any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected by the internal lottery. ) And a predetermined threshold G (1500 games) can occur stochastically only with an extremely low probability, but stochastically, the instruction function display is displayed after the count of the game number counter GC is started. There may be a case where it is determined that the game number counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold G (NO is determined in step S6092 and NO is determined in step S6112) without being performed a number of times. In this case, the processes of steps S6113 to S6118 are not performed, the number of instructions is set to one (step S6119), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6120). As a result, even if the number of games executed during the game management process (game number counter GC) exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the instruction function is not displayed and the instruction function is not immediately transferred to the hell state. The advantageous state C is continued until the display is performed once, and it is possible to guarantee that the instruction function display is always performed once during the game number management process.

Further, even when the game number counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold value and the set ceiling game number TC (32 games in this example) has been exhausted, an instruction is given during the game number management process. If the function display is not performed even once, the advantageous state C continues without shifting to the hell state. Therefore, as a result of the subtraction process in step S6091, the remaining ceiling game number TA may become negative. Can occur. Therefore, when the number of ceiling games TA, which was initially 32 games, becomes 0 by executing the game, the number of ceiling games TC is set to "FF", and when the number of ceiling games TC is "FF", the number of ceiling games TC is set to "FF". As long as the advantageous state C continues without shifting to the hell state or another advantageous state, the process of step S6091 is not performed, and YES is determined in step S6104. As a result, even if the advantageous state C is continued after the number of ceiling games TC becomes 0 by executing the game, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to an error in the processing of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In step S6091, when the number of remaining ceiling games TC becomes negative, in addition to the process of keeping the number of remaining ceiling games TC set to "FF" even if the game is executed, "FF" is used in the first place. It may be a process of keeping "00" without setting it to "". Further, the remaining ceiling game number TC has been described by a subtraction method in which the game is subtracted each time the game is executed, but it goes without saying that the addition method may be used in which the game is added each time the game is executed.

[10-3-4-5. Advantageous state D processing]
In the advantageous state D, first, in step S6131, the digestion process of the CZ game is performed. Specifically, each time a game is executed, it is subtracted by 1 from the number of CZ games set as 10 games (CZ ← CZ-1).

When 1 is subtracted from the number of CZ games in step S6131, whether or not the game number counter GC indicating the number of games executed during the game number management process is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold G (1500 games in this example). Is determined (step S6132).

If the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value G (YES in step S6132), the process proceeds to step S6134, and the ART first hit lottery is performed (step S6134). The ART first hit lottery performed in step S6134 is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous state E, and is set with a higher probability than any of the advantageous states A to C. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 663, when a rare small role (watermelon role, cherry role) is selected by an internal lottery, it is won with a probability of 65536/65536 (100%), and inside. If any of "Push order bell 1" to "Push order bell 6" is selected by lottery, there is a probability of 16384 (25%) of 65536 to win the ART first hit lottery in step S6134. Is done. Further, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is either "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip" or "normal maintenance lip", the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery is as shown in FIG. 661. Is. When a bonus combination (BB1, BB2) is selected by an internal lottery in the CZ of the advantageous state D and the bonus game is executed, the bonus is not exceeded unless the game number counter GC exceeds the threshold value G. After the game is executed, it is confirmed that the ART game is executed by shifting to the advantageous state E.

Here, the ART first hit lottery performed in step S6134 will be described in detail. When the roles selected by the internal lottery are rare small roles (watermelon role, cherry role), "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6", or normal maintenance lip, the first hit of ART performed in step S6134. The winning probability in the lottery is as described above regardless of the difference K between the predetermined threshold G and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process (the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process) (Fig. 663 and FIG. 661 (as shown in the column at the time of winning the normal maintenance lip). On the other hand, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery performed in step S6134 is shown in FIG. 661 ("special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip"). As shown in the "Maintenance Lip" column at the time of winning), the difference K between the predetermined threshold value G and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process (remaining number of games K until the end of the game number management process). Determined based on.

Specifically, when the role selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or more than the specified number, the first hit of ART The winning probability in the lottery is 65536/65536 (that is, 100%). Also, when the combination selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the specified number, the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery Is 4/65536. The above-mentioned specified number can be set arbitrarily, but when the ART game is executed based on winning the ART first hit lottery, the predetermined number of games (50 games in the present embodiment) is in the middle. It is preferable that the value can be digested without ending with. In the present embodiment, since the number of ART games executed when the ART first hit lottery is won is 50 games (when the additional lottery is not won), the above-mentioned specified number is 50 games or more. Is preferable, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, even if the ART first hit lottery is won, the ART game is not started immediately, so it is preferable to set the game to (50 games + α) in consideration of the number of games in the ready state. In this embodiment, 100 games are set as (50 games + α) games. Therefore, when the role selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of remaining games until the end of the game number management process is 100 games or more, there is a 100% probability that the ART will be hit for the first time. If the lottery is won and the number of games remaining until the end of the game number management process is less than 100 games, the ART first hit lottery will be won only with a probability of 4/65536. As a result, if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is small, the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery becomes relatively small, so even though the ART game was executed by winning the ART first hit lottery. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the ART game is forcibly terminated in the middle. As a result, the disappointment that can be given to the player can be reduced, and by extension, the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

In addition, when the combination selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the ART first hit probability (this) when the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the specified number. In the example, 4/65536) is made lower than the ART first hit probability (65536/65536 in this example) when the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or greater than the specified number, so that the number of games is concerned. Compared to the case where the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery is constant regardless of the game number counter GC counted during the management process, the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is the specified number while keeping the output rate the same. In the above case, it is possible to bring about a further effect such that it is possible to realize a game property that increases the ART first hit probability (65536/65536 in this example).

Further, when the winning combination selected by the internal lottery is the normal maintenance lip, as shown in FIG. 661 (column at the time of winning the normal maintenance lip), regardless of the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process, As mentioned above, the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery is always 4/65536.

In the above-described embodiment, when the winning combination selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", is the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process less than the specified number? Based on whether or not, the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery is determined to be one of two stages, a high probability (65536/65536) and a low probability (4/65536). , Not limited to this. For example, when the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery is set in multiple stages and the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the number of remaining games until the end of the game number management process is K. As the value becomes smaller, the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery may gradually decrease.

If the ART first hit lottery is won (YES in step S6135), the process proceeds to step S6136, and the number of CZ games is set to 0 (CZ ← 0). After that, the precursor flag is set to OFF (step S6137), the advantageous state D flag is set to OFF (step S6138), the advantageous state E flag is set to ON (step S6139), and the number of ART games is set to 50 games. (Step S6140), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6141). After that, the process proceeds to step S6142, and the RT state transition process is performed.

The RT state transition process in step S6142 is a process for shifting the RT state. Specifically, when "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip" is selected by the internal lottery, the instruction function is activated in step S6141, so the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the "right-middle-left" push order. The instruction function is displayed so that the stop operation is performed by (reverse push). When the player stops the reel stop button 211 according to this instruction function display, the symbol combination corresponding to the raising replay combination 1 is displayed on the effective line, and the CPU 1110 controls the transition from RT1 to RT2. Then, on condition that the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is performed, the ART flag is set to ON (step S6143), the processing at the time of advantageous state D ends, and the process returns to the main routine. However, if "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip" is not selected in the internal lottery, or if the player does not follow this even though the instruction function is displayed, from RT1 to RT2 in step S6142. No migration control is performed. When the "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip" was not selected in the internal lottery, the ART flag was not set to ON in step S6143, but the player did not follow this even though the instruction function was displayed. At this time, although the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is not performed in step S61042, the ART flag is set to ON in step S6143. Until the transition control from RT1 to RT2 is performed, the instruction function display is performed when "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip" is selected by the internal lottery. In other words, when "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip" is selected by the internal lottery in RT1, when the symbol combination corresponding to the raise replay combination 1 is displayed on the effective line, the control to shift to RT2 is performed. However, if the symbol combination corresponding to the raised replay combination 1 is not displayed on the effective line because the instruction function display is not followed, the RT1 is maintained, but the ART flag is set to ON. Further, as described above, it is preferable to have a condition device corresponding to 6 push orders such as a push order bell for "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip".

If the ART first hit lottery in step S6134 is not won (NO in step S6135), the process proceeds to step S6144, and it is determined whether or not the number of CZ games is 0 (CZ = 0). If the number of CZ games is not 0 (NO in step S6144), the processes of steps S6153 to 6160 described later are not performed. That is, the advantageous state D is continued without shifting to the hell state.

If the ART first hit lottery is won (YES in step S6135), the advantageous state D ends and the game shifts to the advantageous state E even if the number of CZ games has not been digested, while the ART first hit lottery is won. If not (NO in step S6135), the advantageous state D will continue until the number of CZ games is exhausted. However, although not shown in FIG. 653, even if the player loses the ART first hit lottery (NO in step S6135) and the number of CZ games is not 0 (NO in step S6144), a bonus combination is obtained in the internal lottery. When (BB1, BB2) is selected, the bonus game is started when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the valid line. During the execution of this bonus game, an additional lottery in which the number of ART games is added is performed with a probability of 328/65536, and if the additional lottery is won, the bonus game is immediately shifted to the advantageous state E. , The ART game is executed including the number of added games. On the other hand, if the additional lottery is not won during the execution of the bonus game, 50 games are set as the number of ART games (ART ← 50), and immediately after the bonus game is completed, the advantage state E is set to 50. The ART game of the game is executed.

If it is determined in step S6144 that the number of CZ games is 0 (CZ = 0) (YES in step S6144), the process proceeds to step S6153, and has the instruction function display been performed even once during the game management process? Whether or not it is determined (step S6153).

In step S6153, when it is determined that the instruction function display has been performed one or more times during the game number management process (YES in step S6153), the instruction function flag is set to OFF (step S6154), and the advantageous state D flag is set. Is set to OFF (step S6155), the hell state flag is set to ON (step S6156), and the game number management flag is set to OFF (step S6157). After that, the process proceeds to step S6158, the game number counter GC is set to 0 (step S6158), the processing in the advantageous state D ends, and the process returns to the main routine.

By the way, also in the advantageous state D, as in the case of the advantageous state A and the advantageous state C, the composite probability that any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected by the internal lottery ( Considering the 26280/65536) and the predetermined threshold G (1500 games), the probability can occur only with an extremely low probability, but the probability is that the game number counter GC is instructed after the count is started. In some cases, it is determined that the game number counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold value G without displaying the function even once (NO is determined in step S6132 and NO is determined in step S6153). obtain. In this case, the processes of steps S6154 to S6158 are not performed, the number of instructions is set to one (step S6159), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6160). As a result, even if the number of games executed during the game management process (game number counter GC) exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the instruction function is not displayed and the instruction function is not immediately transferred to the hell state. The advantageous state D is continued until the display is performed once, and it is possible to guarantee that the instruction function display is always performed once during the game number management process.

Further, as described above, even after the set number of CZ games CZ (10 games in this example) has been digested, if the instruction function is not displayed even once during the game number management process, it is hell. Since the advantageous state D continues without shifting to the state, the number of remaining CZ games CZ may become negative as a result of the subtraction process performed in step S6131. Therefore, when the number of CZ games CZ, which was initially 10 games, becomes 0 due to the execution of the game, the number of remaining chance games CZ is set to "FF", and the number of chance games CZ is "FF". Occasionally, as long as the advantageous state D continues without shifting to the hell state or the advantageous state E, the process of step S6131 is not performed, and YES is determined in step S6144. As a result, even if the chance game (CZ) is continued after the number of chance games CZ becomes 0 due to the execution of the game, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to an error in the processing of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In step S6131, when the number of remaining chance games CZ becomes negative, in addition to the process of keeping the number of remaining chance games CZ set to "FF" even if the game is executed, "FF" in the first place. It may be a process of keeping "00" without setting to. Further, the number of remaining chance games CZ has been described by a subtraction method in which the game is subtracted each time the game is executed.
[10-3-4-6. Advantageous state E time processing]
The advantageous state E is a process during the ART game. In this advantageous state E, first, in step S6171, the digestion process of the ART game is performed. Specifically, each time the game is executed, it is subtracted by 1 from the number of ART games preset in step S6040, step S6067, step S6100, step S6140 or step S6197 (ART ← ART-1).

When 1 is subtracted from the number of ART games in step S6171, whether or not the game number counter GC indicating the number of games executed during the game number management process is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold G (1500 games in this example). Is determined (step S6172).

If the number of games counter GC counted during the game number management process is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value G (YES in step S6172), the process proceeds to step S6173, and it is determined whether or not the player is in the special zone (step). S6173).

If it is determined in step S6173 that the player is not in the special zone (YES in step S6173), the special zone lottery described above is performed using the special zone lottery table shown in FIG. 665 (step S6174). If the special zone lottery in step S6174 is won (YES in step S6175), the process proceeds to step S6176 and the RT state transition process is performed (step S6176).

The RT state transition process in step S6176 is a process for shifting the RT state. Specifically, when "raise lip 2 + normal maintenance lip" is selected by the internal lottery, the instruction function is activated, so the reel stop button 211 is pressed in the "right-left-middle" push order (reverse pinching). The instruction function is displayed so that the stop operation is performed by pressing). When the player stops the reel stop button 211 according to this instruction function display, the symbol combination corresponding to the raising replay combination 2 is displayed on the effective line, and the CPU 1110 controls the transition from RT2 to RT3. When the special zone lottery is won, the lottery state during ART is shifted from the low probability state during ART or the high probability state during ART to the special zone preparation state. Then, when the symbol combination corresponding to the raised replay combination 2 is displayed on the effective line, the special zone preparation state is shifted to the special zone state.

In step S6177, an additional decision lottery is performed. In the addition decision lottery of step S6177, first, whether or not to add the number of ART games is drawn, and if it is decided to add (YES in step S6178), the process proceeds to the addition game number determination lottery of step S6179, and what A lottery will be drawn to add the game. Then, in step S6180, the number of additional games N determined by the lottery for determining the number of additional games is added (ART ← ART + N). As described above, the additional game number determination lottery is performed using FIGS. 656 and 662 (a), and the additional game number determination lottery is performed using FIGS. 657 to 660 and FIG. 662 (b). FIG. 656 is an example of a lottery table used for the additional game number determination lottery, FIG. 657 is an example of a lottery table used for the additional game number determination lottery when the ART medium and low probability state is in effect, and FIG. 658 is an example of the ART medium and high probability state. Is an example of a lottery table used for the lottery for determining the number of additional games, FIG. 659 is an example of a lottery table used for the lottery for determining the number of additional games in the special zone, and FIG. 660 is preparing for the special zone. This is an example of a lottery table used for a lottery to determine the number of games to be added to.

When it is determined in step S6173 that the zone is in the special zone (NO in step S6173), step S6174, step S6175 and step S6176 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S6177. When it is determined in step S6175 that the special zone lottery in step S6174 has been lost (NO in step S6175), step S6176 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S6177.

In step S6181, the lottery state transition lottery during ART is performed using the lottery state transition lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 664. As described above, the lottery state transition lottery during ART is a lottery for determining whether to control the lottery state during ART during basic ART to the low probability state during ART or the high probability state during ART. Then, based on the result of the lottery state transition lottery during ART in step S6181, the lottery state transition process during ART in step S6183 is performed.

More specifically, in the ART medium-low probability state, the transition lottery to the ART medium-high probability state is performed with a probability according to the conditional device operated in response to the result of the internal lottery with reference to “low → high” in FIG. (Step S6181), and if the transition lottery is won (YES in step S6182), the transition is controlled to the ART medium-high probability state (step S6183). If the transition lottery in step S6181 is lost (NO in step S6182), step S6183 is skipped, the process related to the generation of the instruction function is completed, and the low probability state during ART is maintained. Further, in the ART medium-high probability state, the transition lottery to the ART medium-low probability state is performed with a probability according to the conditional device operated in response to the result of the internal lottery with reference to “high → low” in FIG. When we (step S6181) win this transition lottery (YES in step S6182), the transition is controlled to the ART medium-low probability state (step S6183). If the transition lottery in step S6181 is lost (NO in step S6182), step S6183 is skipped, the process related to the generation of the instruction function ends, and the ART medium-high probability state is maintained. The lottery state transition lottery during ART in step S6181 is performed using the lottery state transition lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 664. FIG. 664 is a lottery table used for the lottery state transition lottery during ART. Note that "low" shown in FIG. 664 means "ART medium-low probability state", and "high" shown in FIG. 664 means "ART medium-high probability state". The ART middle lottery state transition lottery is executed each time the internal lottery is performed (each time the game is executed) in both the ART middle and high probability states and the ART middle and low probability states.

If it is determined that the player has lost the lottery for determining the addition of step S6177 (NO in step S6178), the process proceeds to step S6184, and the digestion determination of the ART game is performed. In the digestion determination of the ART game performed in step S6184, it is determined whether or not all the ART games to be executed have been digested, and if it is determined that all the ART games to be executed have been digested (YES in step S6184). , The advantageous state E flag is set to OFF (step S6185), the pullback state flag is set to ON (step S6186), the instruction function flag is set to OFF (step S6187), and the ART flag is set to OFF (step). S6188), the processing at the time of advantageous state E is completed, and the process returns to the main routine. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6184 that the ART game to be executed is undigested (NO in step S6184), the process proceeds to step S6181 and the ART game is continued.

Although not shown in FIG. 654, it has a step of determining the RT state when the final game of the ART game is completed (when YES is determined in step S6184). If the RT state determined here is RT1, the pullback state A flag is set to ON in step S6186, and if it is RT2, the pullback state B flag is set to ON. The pullback states A and B will be described later.

In step S6172, when it is determined that the game number counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold value (1500 games in this example), that is, the number of games executed by the player in the game number management process reaches a predetermined threshold value. If it is determined that the value is exceeded (NO in step S6172), the process proceeds to step S6190, and it is determined whether or not the instruction function display has been performed even once during the game management process (step S6190). If it is determined that the instruction function display has been performed during the game management process (YES in step S6190), it is determined whether or not the ART flag is ON (step S6191).

When it is determined in step S6191 that the ART flag is ON (YES in step S6191), the ART flag is set to OFF (Step S6192), and the advantageous state E flag is set to OFF (Step S6193). The function flag is set to OFF (step S6194), the game number management flag is set to OFF (step S6195), and the hell state flag is set to ON (step S6196). After that, the process proceeds to step S6197, the game number counter GC is set to 0 (GC ← 0), the processing at the advantageous state E ends, and the process returns to the main routine. That is, when the number of games counted during the game number management process reaches a predetermined threshold value (when NO is determined in step S6172), even if the ART game is in the middle (of the ART game). Even if the end condition is not satisfied (even if the specified number of games (50 games in this example) is not digested), the running ART game will be forcibly ended halfway. If it is determined in step S6191 that the ART flag is OFF (NO in step S6191), step S6192 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S6193.

By the way, also in the advantageous state E, as in the case of the advantageous state A, the advantageous state C, and the advantageous state D, any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected by the internal lottery. Considering the combined probability (26280/65536) and the predetermined threshold G (1500 games), the probability can occur only with an extremely low probability, but the game number counter GC starts counting stochastically. When it is determined that the game number counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold value G without displaying the instruction function even once (NO is determined in step S6172 and NO is determined in step S6190). If) is also possible. In this case, the processes of steps S6191 to S6197 are not performed, the number of instructions is set to one (step S6198), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6199). As a result, even if the number of games executed during the game management process (game number counter GC) exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the instruction function is not displayed and the instruction function is not immediately transferred to the hell state. The advantageous state E is continued until the display is performed once, and it is possible to guarantee that the instruction function display is always performed once during the game number management process.

Further, as described above, even after all the ART game number ART to be executed (50 games + α in this example) has been exhausted, the instruction function display is performed even once during the game number management process. Otherwise, the advantageous state E continues without shifting to the hell state, and as a result of the subtraction process performed in step S6171, the remaining ART game number ART may become negative. Therefore, when the number of ART games ART, which was the initial value (50 games + α), becomes 0 due to the execution of the game, the number of ART games TA is set to "FF" and the number of ART games TA is "FF". At this time, as long as the advantageous state E continues without shifting to the hell state or the pullback state, the process of step S6171 is not performed, and YES is determined in step S6184. As a result, even if the advantageous state E is continued after the number of ART games ART becomes 0 by executing the game, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to an error in the processing of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In step S6171, when the number of remaining ART games ART becomes negative, in addition to the process of keeping the remaining number of ART games ART set to "FF" even if the game is executed, "FF" in the first place. It may be a process of keeping "00" without setting to. Further, the remaining ART game number ART has been described by a subtraction method in which the game is subtracted each time the game is executed, but it goes without saying that the addition method may be used in which the game is added each time the game is executed.

Here, the lottery for determining the number of additional games of ART games and the lottery for determining the number of additional games of step S6179 performed in step S6177 will be described in detail. When the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the winning probability in the additional determination lottery for the number of ART games performed in step S6177 is as shown in FIG. 662 (a). , It is determined based on the difference K between the predetermined threshold value G and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process (the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process).

Specifically, when the role selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or greater than the second specified number, ART The winning probability in the lottery for determining the number of games is 65536/65536 (that is, 100%). In addition, when the role selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the second specified number, the number of ART games is added. The winning probability in the decision lottery is 4/65536. The above second specified number can be set arbitrarily, but even if the ART game is added based on winning the lottery for determining the number of ART games, the ART game can be consumed without ending halfway. It is preferable that the value can be achieved. In the present embodiment, when the lottery for determining the number of ART games is won, a maximum of 300 games are added. Therefore, the second specified number is preferably 300 games or more, but is limited to this. It's not a thing. Therefore, when the role selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of remaining games until the end of the game number management process is 300 games or more, there is a 100% chance that the number of ART games will be played. If the number of games remaining until the end of the game number management process is less than 300 games, the lottery for determining the number of additional games will be won, and the lottery for determining the number of ART games will be won only with a probability of 4/65536. As a result, if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is small, the winning probability in the lottery for determining the number of ART games is relatively small. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the ART game is forcibly terminated halfway despite the addition. As a result, the disappointment that can be given to the player can be reduced, and by extension, the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

In addition, when the combination selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the number of ART games when the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the second specified number Winning probability in the additional decision lottery (4/65536 in this example) is the winning probability in the additional decision lottery when the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or greater than the second specified number (this example) By setting it lower than 65536 / 65536), the winning probability in the lottery for determining the addition of the number of ART games is constant regardless of the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process. Realize a game property that increases the winning probability (65536/65536 in this example) in the lottery for adding the number of ART games when the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or greater than the specified number while maintaining the same rate. It is possible to generate further effects such as being able to do so.

Further, as shown in FIG. 662 (b), the number of games added in the additional game number determination lottery in step S6179 when the ART game number additional game number determination lottery is won is also selected by the internal lottery. When the combination is "special maintenance rip + normal maintenance rip", the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is different between the second specified number and more and less than the second specified number. Specifically, when the role selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the role selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip" when not won. Compared to, the number of games added is set to be large. As a result, if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is small, the number of ART games added in step S6179 when winning the lottery for determining the number of ART games is relatively small. Even if the ART game is forcibly terminated in the middle of the game even though the ART game has been added by winning the lottery, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that can be given to the player. Become.

In the above-described embodiment, when the winning combination selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the second specified number. Based on whether or not there is, the winning probability in the additional decision lottery for the number of ART games is determined to be one of two stages, a high probability (65536/65536) and a low probability (4/65536). However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the winning probability in the lottery for determining the number of ART games is set in multiple stages and the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the remaining until the end of the game number management process. As the number of games K becomes smaller, the winning probability in the lottery for determining the number of ART games may gradually decrease. In the above, the winning probability in the lottery for determining the number of ART games to be added when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip" has been explained. Refer to the table used for the additional game number determination lottery when the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process shown in FIG. 662 (b) is less than the second specified number without changing the probability (65536/65536). You may try to do it. That is, the number of games to be added in the lottery for determining the number of additional games may be changed without changing the winning probability in the lottery for determining the number of additional games.

[10-3-4-7. Processing in the pullback state]
The pullback state is controlled after the end of the advantageous state E when all the number of ART games to be executed has been exhausted and the game number counter GC does not exceed the predetermined threshold value G (when YES is determined in step S6184). In this example, a pullback state A and a pullback state B are prepared. The winning probability of the ART first hit lottery is set higher than the advantageous states A to C and the advantageous state E in both the pullback states A and B, and is set lower than the advantageous state D, but it is advantageous. It may be set higher than the state D.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in principle, the RT state is not changed from RT2 to RT1 during the ART game, but in the internal lottery, "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" Even though one of them was selected and the proper stop operation order of the reel stop button 211 was specified by the instruction function display, 0 bells were not operated because the reel stop button 211 was not operated according to this instruction function display. When the zero is displayed on the effective line, the transition from RT2 to RT1 is performed under the control of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409. In this example, as described above, if the RT state when the final game of the ART game ends (when YES is determined in step S6184) is RT1, it is controlled to the pullback state A, and the final game of the ART game ends. If the RT state at that time is RT2, it is controlled to the pullback state B. Since the pullback state is determined according to the RT state at the end of the final game of the ART game, even if the RT state at the time when the final game of the ART game is started is RT2, the final of the ART game When the 0th bell zero is displayed on the effective line in the game, the RT state is shifted from RT2 to RT1, so that the pullback state A is controlled.

The processing in the pullback state will be described below. In the pullback state, first, each time the game is executed, an ART first hit lottery is performed according to the pullback state (step S6201). The winning probability in this ART first hit lottery is as shown in the ART first hit lottery table of FIG. 661 when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", and the internal lottery. When the winning combination selected in is a role other than "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", it is as shown in the ART first hit lottery table in the pulled back state of FIG. 666. When the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", as shown in FIG. 661, the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery is common to the pullback state A and the pullback state B. doing. On the other hand, when the combination selected by the internal lottery is a combination other than "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the pullback state A and the pullback state B are compared as can be seen with reference to FIG. 666. The pullback state B is more advantageous to the player than the pullback state A in that it is easier to win the ART first hit lottery.

Here, when the combination selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the ART first hit lottery performed in step S6201 will be described in detail. When the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery performed in step S6201 is shown in FIG. 661 ("special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip" winning. As shown in the time column), it is determined based on the difference K between the predetermined threshold value G and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process (the number of games remaining until the game number management process ends). Will be done.

Specifically, when the role selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or greater than the first specified number, ART The winning probability in the first winning lottery is 65536/65536 (that is, 100%). In addition, when the winning combination selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the first specified number, the ART first hit lottery will be held. The winning probability is 4/65536. The above-mentioned first specified number can be set arbitrarily, but when the ART game is executed based on winning the ART first hit lottery, a predetermined number of games (50 games in the present embodiment). Is preferably a value that can be digested without ending halfway. In the present embodiment, the number of ART games executed when the ART first hit lottery is won is 50 games (when the additional lottery is not won), so the above first specified number is 50 games or more. It is preferable to have. However, even if the ART first hit lottery is won, the ART game is not started immediately, so it is preferable to set the game to (50 games + α) in consideration of the number of games in the ready state. In this embodiment, 100 games are set as (50 games + α) games. Therefore, when the role selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", if the number of remaining games until the end of the game number management process is 100 games or more, there is a 100% probability that the ART will be hit for the first time. If the lottery is won and the number of games remaining until the end of the game number management process is less than 100 games, the ART first hit lottery will be won only with a probability of 4/65536. As a result, if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is small, the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery becomes relatively small, so even though the ART game was executed by winning the ART first hit lottery. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the ART game is forcibly terminated in the middle. As a result, the disappointment that can be given to the player can be reduced, and by extension, the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

In addition, when the combination selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the ART first hit probability when the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the first specified number. By making (4/65536 in this example) lower than the ART first hit probability (65536/65536 in this example) when the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or greater than the first specified number. , The number of games remaining until the end of the game number management process while keeping the same output rate as compared to the case where the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery is constant regardless of the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process. It is also possible to produce further effects such as being able to realize a game property that increases the ART first hit probability (65536/65536 in this example) when K is equal to or greater than the first specified number. It becomes.

Further, when the winning combination selected by the internal lottery is the normal maintenance lip, as shown in FIG. 661, the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery is always regardless of the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process. Is 4/65536.

In the above-described embodiment, when the winning combination selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the first specified number. Depending on whether or not there is, the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery is determined to be one of two stages, a high probability (65536/65536) and a low probability (4/65536). However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery is set in multiple stages and the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the number of remaining games until the end of the game number management process is K. As the value becomes smaller, the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery may gradually decrease.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, as long as the game number management flag is ON (unless the game number counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold value) after the end of the advantageous state E, the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery is It is controlled to a pullback state that is relatively higher than the normal time (for example, advantageous state A, advantageous state C or hell state), but is not limited to this, and after the end of the advantageous state E, a predetermined threshold G and the number of games are managed. Even if the pullback state is controlled only when the difference K from the game number counter GC counted during the process (the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process) is, for example, the third specified number or more. Good. In this case as well, if the number of remaining games K from the end of the advantageous state E to the end of the game number management process is less than, for example, the third specified number, the pullback state is not controlled. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the ART game is forcibly terminated in the middle even though the above is executed. As a result, the disappointment that can be given to the player can be reduced, and by extension, the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. After the end of the advantageous state E, the difference K between the predetermined threshold value G and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process (the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process) is, for example, the third provision. If the number is less than the number, the game number management process may be terminated to shift to the hell state, or the game number management process continues, but the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery is the same as the above normal time. It may be about a probability (for example, 1/65536).

If the ART first hit lottery in step S6201 is won (YES in step S6202), is the game number counter GC indicating the number of games executed during the game number management process equal to or less than a predetermined threshold value G (1500 games in this example)? Whether or not it is determined (step S6205).

When it is determined that the game number counter GC is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value G (YES in step S6205), the advantageous state E flag is set to ON (step S6206), and the number of ART games is set to 50 games (step). S6207), the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6208). After that, the process proceeds to step S6209, and the RT state transition process is performed.

The RT state transition process of step S6209 is a process of shifting the RT state, but such a process is performed when the pullback state A is performed, and is not performed when the pullback state B is set. This is because the RT state transition process in step S6209 is a process of shifting the RT state from RT1 to RT2 as a preparatory process for executing the ART game, so that it is not performed in the pullback state B where the RT state is RT2, and RT This is to ensure that the state shifts to RT2 in the pullback state A where the state is RT1. After that, the ART flag is set to ON (step S6210).

When the game number counter GC reaches a predetermined threshold value G in step S6205 (when it is determined as NO in step S6205), the process proceeds to step S6211, and the instruction function display is performed even once during the game management process. It is determined whether or not the game has been broken (step S6211). If it is determined that the instruction function display has been performed during the game management process (YES in step S6211), the pullback state flag is set to OFF (step S6212). Specifically, if the current pullback state is the pullback state A, the pullback state A flag is set to OFF, and if the current pullback state is the pullback state B, the pullback state B flag is set to OFF. After that, if the instruction function flag is ON (YES in step S6213), the instruction function flag is set to OFF (step S6214), and the game number management flag is set to OFF (step S6215). If it is determined in step S6213 that the instruction function flag is OFF (if it is determined that it is NO in step S6213), step S6214 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S6215, and the game number management flag is set to OFF. (Step S6215). After that, the hell state flag is set to ON (step S6216), the game number counter GC is set to 0 (step S6217), the pullback state processing is terminated, and the game returns to the main routine.

By the way, even in the pullback state, as in the case of the advantageous state A, the advantageous state C, the advantageous state D, or the advantageous state E, any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is selected by the internal lottery. Considering the synthetic probability (26280/65536) and the predetermined threshold G (1500 games), it can occur only with an extremely low probability, but the probability is that the number of games counter GC When it is determined that the game number counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold G without displaying the instruction function even once after the count is started (NO is determined in step S6205 and NO is determined in step S6211). (If determined) is also possible. In this case, the processes of steps S6212 to S6217 are not performed, the number of instructions is set to one (step S6218), and the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6219). As a result, even if the number of games executed during the game management process (game number counter GC) exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the instruction function is not displayed and the instruction function is not immediately transferred to the hell state. The pullback state is continued until the display is performed once, and it is possible to guarantee that the instruction function display is always performed once during the game number management process.

When the number of games counter GC exceeds a predetermined threshold value (1500 games in this example) (NO in step S6205), it is normally determined in step S6213 that the instruction function flag is OFF (step S6205). It is determined as NO in S6213). However, on rare occasions, as described above, it may be determined in step S6211 that it is NO, and the instruction function flag may be set to ON in step S6219. In this case, it is determined in step S6213 that the instruction function flag is ON (YES in step S6213).

Further, when the game number counter GC reaches a predetermined threshold value G in step S6205 (when it is determined as NO in step S6205), the game is shifted to the hell state regardless of the result of the ART first hit lottery. .. More specifically, when the game number counter GC reaches a predetermined threshold G in step S6205, even if the ART first hit lottery in step S6202 is won, the ART game is not executed and the pullback state is reached. Ends and shifts to the hell state, and the count of the game number counter ends (the game number management process ends).

When it is determined that the ART first hit lottery in step S6201 has not been won (NO in step S6202), the pullback state maintenance lottery is performed (step S6203). The mode of this maintenance lottery is determined based on the difference K between the predetermined threshold value G and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process (the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process).

To elaborate on the maintenance lottery in step S6203, when the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or greater than the third specified number, in the case of the pullback state A, the game is won with a probability of 49/50. A maintenance lottery is held (that is, a 1/50 chance of losing), and if the player is in the pullback state B, a maintenance lottery is held so that the player wins with a 19/20 chance (that is, a 1/20 chance). Lost in). Therefore, when the pullback state A and the pullback state B are compared, the pullback state B is more likely to win the ART first hit lottery, but the pullback state B is more difficult to maintain than the pullback state A. On the other hand, when the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the third specified number, a maintenance lottery common to the pullback state A and the pullback state B is performed. That is, regardless of whether the player is in the pullback state A or the pullback state B, the maintenance lottery is performed so that the player wins with a probability of 7/50 (the probability of losing is 43/50). In this way, when the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or greater than the third specified number, the pullback state A is more likely to be maintained in the pullback state than the pullback state B, but the game number management process is completed. When the number of remaining games K up to is less than the third specified number, there is a relatively high probability that the game will shift from the pullback state to the hell state regardless of whether the game is in the pullback state A or the pullback state B. .. As a result, if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is small, the winning probability in the maintenance lottery becomes relatively small. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the ART game is forcibly terminated in the middle. As a result, the disappointment that can be given to the player can be reduced, and by extension, the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

In addition, when the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", and the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the third specified number, the winning in the maintenance lottery The probability (7/50 in this example) is the winning probability in the maintenance lottery when the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or greater than the third specified number (in this example, in the case of the pullback state A). By making it lower than 49/50, or 19/20 in the case of the pullback state B), the winning probability in the maintenance lottery is constant regardless of the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process. It is possible to realize a game property that increases the winning probability in the maintenance lottery when the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or greater than the third specified number, while keeping the output rate the same. It is possible to generate further action and effect such as.

The above third specified number can be set arbitrarily, but considering that if the maintenance lottery is won and the pullback state is maintained, the ART game will be executed considering that the ART first hit lottery will be won with a relatively high probability. When the game is played, it is preferable that the predetermined number of games (50 games in the present embodiment) is a value that can be digested without ending halfway. In the present embodiment, since the number of ART games executed when the ART first hit lottery is won is 50 games (when the additional lottery is not won), the above-mentioned third specified number is 50 games or more. It is preferable, but not limited to.

In the above-described embodiment, when the winning combination selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the third specified number. Based on whether or not there is, the winning probability in the maintenance lottery is high (49/50 in the case of pullback state A, 19/20 in the case of pullback state B) and low probability (50 minutes). It is decided to be one of the two stages of 7), but it is not limited to this. For example, when the winning probability in the maintenance lottery is set in multiple stages and the winning combination selected in the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is small. As a result, the winning probability in the maintenance lottery may be gradually lowered.

If the game is lost in the maintenance lottery in step S6203 (if NO is determined in step S6204), the process proceeds to step S6211, and it is determined whether or not the instruction function display has been performed even once during the game management process. (Step S6211). If it is determined that the instruction function display has been performed during the game management process (YES in step S6211), the processes of steps S6212 to S6217 described above are performed (that is, it is determined that the game shifts to the hell state). ), Ends the pullback state processing and returns to the main routine. On the other hand, if it is determined during the game management process that the instruction function display is not performed (NO in step S6211), the processes of steps S6212 to S6217 are not performed, and the number of instructions is set to one (NO). Step S6218), the instruction function flag is set to ON (step S6219).

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game number management process is started when the state is changed from the hell state to the advantageous state. Then, during the game number management process (that is, during the advantageous state or the pullback state), unless a specific condition is satisfied (for example, unless there is an execution history of the bonus game (execution history during the game number management process)) It is guaranteed that the instruction function display is performed once (see FIGS. 650 to 655). The instruction function display referred to here is the number of payouts when a combination in which the number of payouts of the game medium is different depending on the stop operation mode (for example, push order or push position) of the reel stop button 211 is selected by an internal lottery. Refers to an instruction display performed so as to be operated in the most stop operation mode. In this example, when "pushing order bell 1" to "pushing order bell 6" are selected by internal lottery, they are stopped in the pressing order corresponding to the eight cards with the largest number of payouts. The instruction display to be performed corresponds to this. Therefore, when the winning combination other than the winning combination with a different number of payouts of the game media is selected by the internal lottery when the stopping operation mode of the reel stop button 211 is different, the selected combination is instructed (stop operation mode). Even if it is instructed (navigated) which role is selected by the internal lottery instead of the instruction of, the instruction does not correspond to the instruction function display referred to here. In this case, even if the target combination of the instruction function display (the combination in which the number of payouts of the game medium differs depending on the stop operation mode of the reel stop button 211) is selected by the internal lottery, the largest number of payouts (this example). Even if it is instructed that a winning combination with a larger number of payouts than "Push-order bell 1" to "Push-order bell 6") has been selected, the instruction is displayed as an instruction function. Does not correspond to. Further, even though the combination in which the number of payouts of the game media is different is selected by the internal lottery and the stop operation mode is instructed when the stop operation mode of the reel stop button 211 is different, the player disobeys the instruction. Even if the stop operation is not performed in the mode in which the number of payouts is the largest, it is assumed that the instruction function display referred to here is performed. Furthermore, if the stop operation mode of the reel stop button 211 is different, the subsequent RT state is different (for example, "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip 1" in this example is equivalent), or the reel stop button 211 must be operated in an appropriate stop operation mode. For example, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is not displayed, even if the stop operation mode is instructed when the replay combination is selected by the internal lottery, the instruction is also equivalent to the instruction function display here. do not.

By the way, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the ART game (including during the special zone and during the preparation of the special zone), as long as the reel stop button 211 is operated according to the instruction function display, RT2 or RT3 to RT1 However, if the reel stop button 211 is operated without following the instruction function display, it may shift from RT2 or RT3 to RT1. That is, it is a game property in which the player is given the right to choose whether to control the state after the end of the advantageous state E to the pullback state A or the pullback state B. I can say. Therefore, the state after the end of the advantageous state E is the pullback state A, which is difficult to win in the ART first hit lottery but the pullback state is easily maintained, and the pullback state, which is easy to win in the ART first hit lottery but is difficult to maintain the pullback state. The player can select which of the states B the game should be played in. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest in ART games, which tend to be monotonous by simply digesting the game. Further, even if the reel stop button 211 is operated without following the instruction function display and the mode shifts from RT2 or RT3 to RT1, the pullback state is easily maintained after the ART game is completed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In particular, during the ART game (including during the special zone and during the preparation of the special zone), as long as the reel stop button 211 is operated according to the instruction function display, the pullback state A is controlled, so that the pullback state B is selected. The person chooses a high-risk, high-return game as compared with the pull-back state A, in which the player is likely to move to the hell state but is likely to win the ART first hit lottery. As described above, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is determined whether the state after the end of the advantageous state E is a relatively low-risk low-return state or a relatively high-risk high-return game. It can be selected according to the wishes of the person.

However, when the player tries to select the pullback state B of relatively high risk and high return, RT2 and RT3 having a relatively high replay synthesis probability are shifted to RT1 having a relatively low replay synthesis probability. You have to take the risk of If the number of remaining ART games is large, there is a possibility that one of "Push Order Bell 1" to "Push Order Bell 6" will be selected by internal lottery before the ART game ends. Although it is expensive, the number of medals paid to the player during the ART game will be smaller (in some cases, the number of medals consumed to execute the game will be smaller than the number of medals paid out as prizes. There is a risk that it will increase). On the other hand, if the number of remaining games in the ART game is small, it is possible to obtain more medals as prizes to be paid out to the player during the ART game, but by the time the ART game ends, an internal lottery will be held. There is a risk that any one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" will not be selected. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pullback state is determined according to the RT state at the end of the final game of the ART game, so that the slot machine 1 is shifted to RT1 in the final game of the ART game. Is preferable. However, one of "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" is not always selected in the internal lottery in the final game of the ART game. Therefore, for a player who wants to select the pullback state B, it is preferable to stick so as not to shift to RT1 until the final game of the ART game is approached, but it is possible to shift to RT1 at an early stage. You can enjoy deciding when to move to RT1.

In addition, although some players do not want the relatively high-risk, high-return pullback state B, the instruction function is displayed during the ART game (including during the special zone and during the preparation of the special zone). In some cases, the reel stop button 211 may be operated by mistake, but on the contrary, it can give a feeling of tension to the game during the ART game (including during the special zone and during the preparation of the special zone). Moreover, even if the player does not desire the pullback state B, the game is played in a situation where the probability of the first ART hit lottery is relatively high, so that the player does not feel a loss.

As described above, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game shifts from RT2 or RT3 to RT1 during the ART game (including during the special zone and during the preparation of the special zone), the number of additional games is added. Even if the digestion is continued without stopping the progress of the ART game or the like while performing the decision lottery, the pullback state B in which the ART first hit lottery probability is relatively high is controlled, so that the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

By the way, as described above, in step S602, when one game is executed during the game number management process, the game number counter GC is added by 1 as the number of games executed during the game number management process. In the slot machine 1 of this example, a predetermined threshold value is set to 1500 games, and when this threshold value is exceeded, the game number management flag is forcibly set to OFF. Therefore, in principle, the game number counter GC is set. It does not exceed 1500. However, since the game number management process continues until the instruction function display is performed at least once during the game number management process, the game number counter GC may exceed 1500 games, although the probability is extremely low. obtain. In particular, in the slot machine 1 of this example, since the processing of the game number counter GC is performed in 8 bits, only 65536 games can be counted. However, it cannot be said that the game counter GC stochastically does not exceed 65536 games. Therefore, in this example, when the game number counter GC reaches the threshold value of 15,000 games in step S602, the game number counter GC is set to FF. When the game number counter GC is FF, NO is determined in step S6032, step S6072, step S6092, and step S6031 step S6172. As a result, even if the instruction function display is not executed during the game number management process, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to an error in the process of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409, and the deterioration of the interest is suppressed. It becomes possible to do.

[10-3-5. Production processing at the time of winning]
The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to perform an effect operation lottery based on the result of the internal lottery, and to execute an effect that can give a player a sense of expectation based on the result of the effect operation lottery. .. Specifically, the result information of the internal lottery is sent as a command from the main board 409 to the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510), and the sub board 510 that receives this command performs the effect operation lottery based on the result information of the internal lottery. Then, the effect mode determined by the effect operation lottery is controlled to be displayed on the image display body 500 or the like, and the sound effect is also performed at the same time.

FIG. 667 is a production operation lottery table when the internal lottery is won in RT1, FIG. 668 is a production operation lottery table when the internal lottery is won in RT2, and FIG. 669 is a production operation lottery table when the internal lottery is won in RT3. Is. As can be seen with reference to FIGS. 667 to 669, in the internal lottery, BB1, "BB1 + watermelon", "BB1 + cherry", BB2, "BB2 + watermelon", "BB2 + cherry", watermelon, cherry, "push order bell 1". ~ "Push order bell 6", common bell, maintenance replay, "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip", "raise lip 2 + normal maintenance lip", "lower lip + normal maintenance lip", "7 matching lip + normal maintenance lip" And, if any of a plurality of roles such as "7-matched fake rip + normal maintenance rip" is won, the effect can be executed. Of these multiple roles, for the other roles except maintenance replay and "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip", regardless of whether the RT state is RT1 to RT3, when winning in the internal lottery The production operation probability is the same. On the other hand, with respect to the maintenance replay and the "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip", the effect operation probability when winning in the internal lottery differs depending on which of the RT states RT1 to RT3.

In addition, in the column of the winning combination of FIGS. 667 to 669, only the winning combination (see FIGS. 638 to 643) that can be won in each state of RT1 to RT3 is described. The table used in the effect operation lottery is not necessarily limited to the table in which the effect tables corresponding to each of RT1 to RT3 are prepared as shown in FIGS. 667 to 669. For example, data having the same effect operating probability may be prepared as a common table, and tables corresponding to RT1 to RT3 may be prepared only for data having different effect operation probabilities. FIG. 670 is another example of the effect operation lottery table. Explaining with reference to FIG. 670, for example, among the winning combinations shown in the winning combination column of FIGS. 638 to 643, "maintenance replay", "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip", "raise lip 2 + normal maintenance lip", As shown in Fig. 670 (a), the winning combination except for "lowering lip + normal maintenance lip", "7 matching lip + normal maintenance lip" and "7 matching fake lip + normal maintenance lip" is a common production operation lottery. Prepared as a table, among the winning combinations shown in the winning combination column of FIGS. 638 to 643, "maintenance replay", "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip", "raise lip 2 + normal maintenance lip", "lower lip +" Regarding "normal maintenance lip", "7 matching lip + normal maintenance lip" and "7 matching fake lip + normal maintenance lip", as shown in FIGS. 670 (b) to 670 (d), each of RT1 to RT3 was supported. A table in which the effect operation probability is set may be prepared. For example, when the production tables corresponding to each of RT1 to RT3 are prepared as shown in FIGS. 667 to 669, the lottery tables for "the number of RT states x the number of winning combinations (conditional devices)" are displayed. Since it is necessary, the data capacity becomes enormous, a large verification period is required, and there is a problem that the development period is extended. On the other hand, the bonus is not established and the replay synthesis probability is not established. When there are multiple RT states (RT1 to RT3) with different values, and the winning combination (up lip 1, up lip 2, down lip) that may shift between these multiple RT states is won. Although the operation probability is changed, the data capacity is set so that the production operation probability when a winning combination (rare small role such as cherry or watermelon) that is not a winning combination that shifts between multiple RT states is won does not change. In other words, for the winning combination (replay combination) whose winning probability changes depending on the RT state, if the effect operating probability is not changed according to the winning probability, replays will occur frequently even if the effect is activated. There is an abnormal production state that you can not do it, but there is no need to prepare multiple lottery tables for winning roles (bonus roles (BB1, BB2) and small roles (bell, watermelon, cherry)) whose winning probability does not change depending on the RT state. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced. In particular, when the main 409 must control the data capacity, the capacity is limited, which is a particularly remarkable effect.

Specifically, when the RT state is RT1, when the maintenance replay or the "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip" is won in the internal lottery, the production is performed with a probability of about half. Since the normal game state before the start of the ART game (the game state before the symbol combination corresponding to the ART first hit lottery is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the raised lip 1 is displayed on the valid line) is also RT1, in such a game state. , The production will be performed with a probability of about half. On the other hand, when the RT state is RT2 or RT3, the effect is configured to be performed only with an extremely low probability as compared with RT1. Hereinafter, RT1 is referred to as a low lip state in which the replay synthesis probability is relatively low, and RT2 and RT3 are referred to as a high lip state in which the replay synthesis probability is relatively high.

Comparing the low lip state and the high lip state, the high lip state has a higher replay synthesis probability, but the high lip state is more difficult to produce than the low lip state. When the production is performed, the player expects that he may have won a bonus (BB1, BB2) or a rare small role (watermelon, cherry) that can be expected to hit the ART for the first time. However, if the production is frequently performed in the high lip state, not only may the player not have such expectations when the production is performed, but also the production itself becomes troublesome. There is a risk. Therefore, in this example, in the high lip state, it is more difficult to perform the effect than in the low lip state, so that it is possible to give the player a favorable sense of expectation when the effect is performed. In addition, in such a game property, the player is given the right to select whether the RT state after the end of the ART game is controlled to the high lip state or the low lip state. It can be said that it is a game. Therefore, in the RT state after the end of the ART game, RT1 is difficult to win for a specific role (replay in this example) but has a high production operation probability, and RT1 is easy to win for a specific role (replay in this example) but has an effect operation probability. It is possible for the player himself to select in which state the game is to be played, RT2 or RT3, which has a low probability. Even when considered in this way, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in ART games, which tend to be monotonous by simply digesting the game. Further, for a player who wants to select RT1 which can produce the RT state after the end of the ART game with high frequency, it is preferable to stick to RT1 so as not to shift to RT1 until the final game of the ART game is approached. Since it is possible to shift to RT1 at an early stage, it is possible to enjoy the time when to shift to RT1. As described above, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game shifts from RT2 or RT3 to RT1 during the ART game, the progress of the ART game or the like is not stopped while the lottery for determining the number of additional games is performed. Even if the digestion is continued, the production with a high expectation is performed with high frequency in the RT state after the end of the ART game, so that the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in each figure of FIG. 656 to FIG. 670, as shown in FIGS. 638 to 643, a special role (special watermelon role, special cherry role, special maintenance replay role) and a normal role (normal watermelon role, normal cherry role). , Normal maintenance replay role) is not shown separately. This is because when a special role is selected in the internal lottery, the function as a special role is exhibited only in the hell state, and when the game number management flag is set to ON, the internal lottery is performed. This is because even if a special role is selected in, the function as a special role is not exhibited. That is, when the lottery is performed using any of the tables of FIGS. 656 to 670 when the game number management flag is set to ON, the lottery is performed without distinguishing between the special combination and the normal combination. Will be called. For example, to explain with reference to the table of FIG. 663 used in the ART first hit lottery performed during the game number management process and not during the ART game, a special watermelon as a single role in the internal lottery and a normal watermelon are usually used. Regardless of which watermelon (see FIGS. 638 to 643) is selected, the ART first hit lottery is performed with reference to the watermelon as a single role shown in the table of FIG. 663.

As described above, by performing the processing of each step shown in FIG. 648, the processing related to the generation of the instruction function by the main board 409 (step S61 in FIG. 647) is performed, and based on the result of the processing, FIG. The processing after step S62 of the processing related to the generation of the indicated instruction function is performed.

[10-3-6. Instruction function display processing]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the main board 409 is determined to generate the instruction function as a result of the instruction function generation process (specifically, for example, when the push order small winning combination is won during the ART game). , The instruction content based on the winning combination of the game is displayed on the special display LED 612 as an instruction function display (instruction function display process). In the instruction function display process, the main board 409 selects the display mode of the instruction function display to be displayed on the special display LED 612 from a plurality of display modes (for example, holding display data in ROM 1112 or the like) prepared in advance. .. Hereinafter, the instruction function display displayed by using the special display LED 612 will be described in detail.

First, an example of the instruction function display in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 636, the slot machine 1 is provided with two 7-segment LEDs (special display LEDs 612a, 612b) arranged side by side, and two-digit characters and numbers are used by using the special display LEDs 612a, 612b. The instruction function is displayed by displaying.

671 and 672 are diagrams for explaining the instruction function display. FIG. 671 shows a display mode of the special display LED 612a, and FIG. 672 shows a display mode of the special display LED 612b. In both FIGS. 671 and 672, the "segment display" column shows the alphanumeric characters displayed on the 7-segment LED, and the "contents" column shows the contents that the displayed alphanumeric characters mean. Further, in FIG. 672, a display outline of the effect display (navigation display) on the image display body 500 or the like is shown in the "navigation display" column when the corresponding instruction function display is performed, and the "use of use" column indicates The scene or situation in which the display is used is shown. The navigation display controlled by the sub-board 510 will be described later.

In the instruction function display of this example, the following rules are provided as an example of the rules regarding the instruction function display.

(1) The instruction function is displayed using two 7-segment LEDs (7-segment) (special display LEDs 612a, 612b). The special display LED 612a displays information indicating a guideline for the pressing location, and the special display LED 612b displays information indicating the pressing order.

(2) Regarding the period during which the instruction function display is performed, the instruction function display is started and the last reel 301 in rotation is started by at least the reception of the pressing operation (reel stop operation) for the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is started. At the timing when the player's hand is released from the reel stop button 211 in which the reel stop operation corresponding to the above is performed, the display on the special display LED 612 is switched from the instruction function display to the payout number display. That is, the period for displaying the instruction function and the period for displaying the number of payouts do not overlap. If the game value (medals) has not been paid out as a result of the game, that is, if the number of payouts is "0", the number of payouts may not be displayed. As a supplementary requirement, when the instruction function is displayed and the number of payouts is not displayed, the instruction function is canceled (hidden) at the same timing as when the number of payouts is displayed. As a result, the instruction function display may be continued until the payout process is completed.

(3) In a game in which the instruction function display is performed by the special display LED 612, when any of the rotating reels 301a to 301c is first stopped, the stopped reel displays the instruction function ( When the reel is not indicated as the reel to be stopped first by the special display LED612b) (that is, when a reel different from the instruction content is first stopped), or when the reel stop button 211 is pressed, the instruction function display is displayed. Even if the timing does not correspond to the position indicated as a guideline for the push location by (special display LED612a) (that is, when the reel stop operation is performed at a position different from the instruction content) The display mode of the special display LED 612 is not changed until the stop operation for the reel 301 is completed.

When it is determined that the instruction function is to be generated in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, what kind of instruction content is to be displayed on the special display LEDs 612a and 612b as the instruction function display is determined by the main board 409 in the game. Determined based on the winning combination. First, the instruction contents that can be determined by the main board 409 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 671 and 672.

The main board 409 arbitrarily determines the instruction content of the "push location guideline" displayed on the special display LED 612a within a range that does not deny the "appropriate push location" based on the winning combination of the game. be able to. Specifically, for example, when "BB1 (red 7 symbols)" is selected as the winning combination, the main board 409 determines the instruction content to display "2" (red 7 symbols) on the special display LED 612a. However, in addition to that, since the game method aiming at the "red 7 symbol" is not denied, the instruction content to display "0" (not specified) may be determined.

In addition, the main board 409 has a "proper push order" based on the winning combination of the game, with respect to the "push order" instruction content displayed on the special display LED 612b, as in the "push location guideline" instruction content. The content of the instruction can be arbitrarily determined as long as the above is not denied. For example, it is assumed that the "pushing order bell 1" in which the forward pushing is the "appropriate pushing order" generates the instruction function in the game selected as the winning combination. At this time, the main board 409 can determine the instruction content of the "pushing order" to be "left / middle / right" (six-choice pushing order), and according to the display example of FIG. 672 (details will be described later). , "1" is displayed on the special display LED 612b. Further, as the instruction content for clarifying only the "left" of the first stop without clarifying the second stop and the third stop, "left first (2 choices)" may be the instruction content. According to the display example of 672 (details will be described later), "A" is displayed on the special display LED 612b. Further, from the condition that the "appropriate push order" is not denied, the instruction content of the push order may include at least the game procedure according to the "proper push order". That is, as instruction contents having a possibility that the left reel 301a is first stopped, "left first or right first" (segment display "E" in FIG. 672) and "left first or middle first" (FIG. The seg display "F" of 672) may be used as the instruction content, or further, the instruction content (the seg display "0" of FIG. 672) may be used so that the pressing order is unknown.

Next, display examples shown in FIGS. 671 and 672 will be specifically described. First, referring to FIG. 671, there are four types of push locations, "0 (not specified)", "1 (chance symbol)", "2 (red 7 symbol)", and "3 (BAR symbol)". Numbers are set to be displayed. If "0" is displayed as a guideline for the push location, it means that the guideline for the push order is not specified, that is, the operation at a specific stop timing is not instructed in the game. Even if there is, when the reel stop button 211 is pressed (unspecified stop operation) without being aware of the stop timing, some symbol combinations based on the winning combination are not always aligned on the effective line. That is, when trying to reliably stop the symbol combination based on the winning combination in the game in which "not specified" is selected, a predetermined stop timing that can prevent the winning combination from being missed as in the above-mentioned maximum efficiency hitting method. It is required to perform the stop operation with. Specifically, for example, when "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" are won during ART, "0" is displayed on the special display LED 612a, but the push order bell is pushed properly. As long as the stop operation is performed in order, it is possible to arrange the symbol combinations of the bell roles regardless of the stop timing (without missing). On the other hand, for example, when the winning combination is a combination that may be missed depending on the stop timing (for example, a watermelon combination) and "0" is displayed on the special display LED 612a, the stop timing is not taken into consideration. If the reel stop button 211 is pressed, the watermelon role may be missed, and in order to ensure that the watermelon role is won, when the symbols that make up the symbol combination of the watermelon role are within the pullable range. It is necessary to press the reel stop button 211 at an appropriate timing.

Here, it is preferable that the symbol used as a guide for the pushing location is a symbol that is relatively easy for the player to see while the reel 301 is rotating, but the stop operation is aimed at the symbol used as a guide at an appropriate timing. Even if it is made, it is not always necessary to stop the symbol on the effective line.

Further, with respect to the symbols corresponding to "1" to "3" shown in FIG. 671, the corresponding symbols may be arbitrarily changed. For example, the "chance symbol" targeted by "1" may be a "positive" symbol or a "right" symbol, or may be applied to other symbols. Further, the target symbol of "2" may be a "blue 7" symbol instead of the red 7 symbol. The seg display shown in FIG. 671 is only an example, and the seg display pattern can be increased or decreased within the range that can be displayed by the special display LED 612a. For example, a seg display may be added to a symbol other than that illustrated in FIG. 671 (for example, a watermelon symbol). In addition, the symbol set as a guideline for the push location is not limited to one, and for example, a seg display such as "either red 7 symbol or blue 7 symbol" is set as a guideline for the push location. You may. Further, although it is common to FIGS. 671 and 672, the correspondence between "content" and "segment display" does not have to be one-to-one, and a plurality of "segment display" indicating the same "content" is prepared. You may.

Next, referring to FIG. 672, 16 display patterns are set to be displayed, and alphanumeric characters "0" to "9" and "A" to "F" are assigned as the display contents of the seg display. .. The contents of each display pattern will be described in detail below. When displayed in 7 segments, uppercase letters "B" and "D" may not be distinguishable from the numbers "8" and "0", respectively. Therefore, in FIG. 672, "b" and "d" are displayed. It is decided to display in lowercase letters.

The display "0" on the special display LED 612b is used when the pressing order is not limited (the pressing order does not matter). However, as described in the "Usage" column, it is not used only when the winning combination is in any order, and when the winning combination can be won by alternative, the push order is intentionally instructed. It can also be used when not. Winners in any push order include push order bells and replays, as well as low-winners (rare roles) such as chance eyes, watermelons, and cherries. Therefore, when the instruction function is displayed when the rare role is won, the display on the special display LED 612b is "0", but at this time, the expected display such as "chance!" Or the type display of the rare role is displayed on the navigation display. You may let it do. By performing such a display, it is possible to suggest or teach the player that the game has a high expectation different from the usual one. In addition, in the latter case where the push order is not instructed when the winning combination can be won by alternative, the proper push order is not instructed, so the navigation display example is "? ...? ...?". ..

The displays "1" to "6" on the special display LED 612b are used when the stop order of each of the three reels 301a to 301c is determined as an appropriate push order, and the so-called six-choice push order is displayed. Can be done. When the six-choice push order is displayed on the instruction function display, at least the reel to be stopped first and the reel to be stopped second are indicated on the navigation display. Thirdly, the reel to be stopped is clarified by the erasure law, but it may be intentionally specified.

Further, the indications "7" to "9" on the special display LED 612b are used when it is determined whether any of the three reels 301a to 301c should be stopped first as an appropriate pressing order. Then, the so-called three-choice push order can be displayed. When the three-choice push order is displayed on the instruction function display, the first reel to be stopped is indicated on the navigation display.

When the push order such as "1" to "9" is displayed on the special display LED 612b, the most payout is performed when the stop operation according to both the display on the special display LED 612a and the display on the special display LED 612b is performed. A game result that is advantageous to the player is provided, such as a push order bell winning a prize in a stop form that is the number of sheets. As described above, in order to obtain the stop system with the largest number of payouts, it is necessary to stop the winning combination at an appropriate timing in the case of a winning combination that may be missed.

Further, the "providing a game result advantageous to the player" described in the previous paragraph includes "suppressing the provision of a game result disadvantageous to the player". A specific example will be described below. For example, a push order replay is prepared in which different symbol combinations are stopped depending on the push order, and when the push order replay is won, the blue 7 symbol alignment is stopped when the stop operation is performed according to the "specific push order". It is possible. This blue 7 symbol alignment is used as one of the effects to teach the addition when, for example, the push order replay is won during ART and it is internally determined that the number of ART games is added. To do. When the number of ART games is added at the time of winning such a push order replay, displaying the "specific push order" instruction function leads to the provision of "game results advantageous to the player". On the other hand, if the instruction function is displayed when the number of ART games is not added even though the push order replay is won, it is assumed that the blue 7 symbol alignment is stopped by the stop operation according to the instruction. However, since the "game result advantageous to the player" of adding the number of ART games is not provided, the "game result disadvantageous to the player" is provided. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to suppress the provision of such a "game result disadvantageous to the player", if the number of ART games is not added at the time of winning the above-mentioned push order replay, "a specific push" is used. It is possible to display the instruction function in the pressing order that avoids "order". By playing the game according to such an instruction function display, the blue 7 symbol matching that does not add the number of ART games will not appear, so that "a game result that is disadvantageous to the player is provided. It can be "suppressed", and as a result, "a game result advantageous to the player is provided".

On the other hand, the displays "A" to "F" on the special display LED 612b are different from the case where "1" to "9" are displayed, and "a part" of the push order that can lead to a game result advantageous to the player is displayed. It is used when displaying. For example, the display "A" only indicates that the left reel 301a should be stopped first, and does not indicate whether the middle reel 301b or the right reel 301c should be stopped second. The player must select (choose two) the reel to be stopped second. Further, for example, in the case of the display "d", it is only shown that the left reel 301a should not be stopped first, and it is not shown whether the middle reel 301b or the right reel 301c should be stopped first. Then, even if an appropriate pushing order (for example, the middle reel 301b) is selected in the first stop, either of the remaining two reels 301 (in this case, the left reel 301a or the right reel 301c) that are rotating is again in the second stop. As a result, it is possible to make four choices by letting them choose whether to stop. If the proper push order is satisfied only by the selection at the first stop, two options can be selected.

In this way, when the push order such as "A" to "F" is displayed on the special display LED 612b, even if the stop operation is performed according to the displayed contents, the push order is not always appropriate. However, if the proper push order can be finally selected, the push order bell wins the prize in the stop form, which is the largest number of payouts, and the game result advantageous to the player is provided.

Although display examples for each of the special display LEDs 612a and 612b have been described above, in reality, the instruction content in the game is indicated by displaying a two-digit value combining these on the special display LED 612.

Then, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the instruction function display of the first example is performed, so that the instruction function display is performed in a display mode in which the instruction content can be easily grasped. It is possible to execute an appropriate reel stop operation while looking at the display LEDs 612a and 612b, and it is possible to expect a more advantageous game result than when the instruction function display is not performed. In addition, by making it easier for the player to pay attention to the display that displays the instruction function, it is possible to create a playability that is not found in conventional gaming machines.

Further, the display examples as shown in FIGS. 671 and 672 do not necessarily require all the symbols and the pressing order as a guide for the pressing location, and the symbols and the pressing order are appropriately grouped. By adopting such a display example, it can be expected that the amount of data required for the main board 409 to display the instruction function can be reduced.

[10-3-7. Instruction generation production processing]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main board 409 displays the instruction function with the special display LED 612 based on the result of the instruction function generation processing, while displaying the same information as the display content (instruction content) in the instruction function display. The instruction content is notified to the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510) by transmitting the instruction information command. Then, the sub-board 510 that has received such an instruction information command displays an instruction generation effect (so-called navigation display) according to the display content of the instruction function display on the image display body 500 or the like (instruction generation effect processing).

That is, when the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment generates the instruction function, the special display LED 612 displays the instruction function, while the image display body 500 displays the navigation display having the same content as the instruction content in the instruction function. By doing so, the instruction content is announced in a manner that is easier for the player to recognize.

Further, as described above in the description of step S31 of FIG. 644, the display mode of the navigation display controlled by the sub board 510 has a one-to-one relationship with the display mode of the instruction function display controlled by the main board 409. If the display content does not contradict the instruction content by the instruction function display, the sub-board 501 may determine the display mode to be navigated from among the plurality of display modes (1 to n correspondence). ).

As a display example of the navigation display, for example, when "pushing order bell 2" is selected by the internal lottery, "1" is in the corresponding position of the left reel 301a, "3" is in the corresponding position of the middle reel 301b, and the right reel. By displaying "2" at the corresponding position of 301c, the stop order of the left, right, and middle pinching pushes is instructed. In this navigation display, the display color of the image indicating the stop order is changed to yellow, which is reminiscent of the bell, or the reel to be stopped next (for example,) based on the content of the instruction information command that the push order bell is won. , When all reels 301 are rotating, it is the reel to stop first, and when two reels are rotating, it corresponds to the reel to stop second) than the image showing the other stop order. It may be highlighted.

Further, in the navigation display in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the instruction content to be displayed on the image display body 500 may be notified (or assisted) by voice output. Specifically, the reel to be stopped first. When is the left reel 301a, there is an example in which a voice such as "Left!" Is output at a timing before the first stop of the reel is performed. When outputting audio, different audio outputs (for example, non-ART high probability state, non-ART low probability state, etc.) based on the type of winning combination (bell role, replay role, rare role, etc.) and lottery state (non-ART high probability state, non-ART low probability state, etc.), etc. Characters, dialogues, intonations, etc. are different) can be used properly. By performing the navigation display including the voice output in this way, the notification of the instruction content to the player can be made more reliable, and the navigation display that changes according to the game situation is provided to enhance the interest of the player. Can be expected.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by making it possible to display the instruction function display and the navigation display in parallel, it is possible to more reliably convey the instruction content by the instruction function to the player.

FIG. 673 is a timing chart showing an example of the display period by various indicators and the like. In FIG. 673, various indicators and the like are described on the vertical axis, and a display period such as at what timing in the progress process of one game indicated in the horizontal axis direction is displayed or transmitted is shown. ..

First, each item described on the vertical axis of FIG. 673 will be described. The instruction information 801 corresponds to the instruction information command, and when the instruction information 801 is ON, it means "transmission", and the instruction information command is transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub board 510. When the instruction information 801 is OFF, it means "standby", and the instruction information command is not transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub board 510.

The instruction function 802 corresponds to an instruction function controlled by the main board 409, and when the instruction function 802 is ON, it means "display", and the instruction function display is performed by the special display LED 612. When the instruction function 802 is OFF, it means "non-display", and the instruction function is not displayed by the special display LED 612.

The payout number 803 corresponds to the number of game values paid out as a result of the game, and when the payout number 803 is ON, it means "display", and the payout number display is performed by the special display LED 612. When the payout number 803 is OFF, it means "non-display", and the special display LED 612 does not display the payout number. The information regarding the number of payouts is stored in the RAM 1114 of the main board 409, and can be redisplayed even after the power is turned off, depending on the storage location in the RAM 1114 and the program processing.

The seg error 804 corresponds to displaying the details (for example, type and content) of the error on the segment LED when the error is detected, and when the seg error 804 is ON, it means "display", and the special display LED 612. The details of the error are notified in (Error display). When the seg error 804 is OFF, it means "non-display", and no error display is performed on the special display LED 612.

The liquid crystal navigation 805 corresponds to the navigation display of the instruction function controlled by the sub-board 510, and when the liquid crystal navigation 805 is ON, it means "display", and the navigation display is performed on the liquid crystal screen of the image display body 500. When the liquid crystal navigation 805 is OFF, it means "non-display", and the navigation display is not performed on the liquid crystal screen of the image display body 500. In the liquid crystal navigation 805, the navigation display is performed with contents that do not contradict the display contents of the instruction function 802. Although detailed description is omitted, the data related to the display by the sub-board 510 such as the display of the liquid crystal navigation 805 is stored in the RAM 1122 of the sub-board 510, and the data can be appropriately read back even if the power is cut off. And.

The liquid crystal error 806 corresponds to displaying the details (for example, type and content) of the error on the liquid crystal display when the error is detected, and when the liquid crystal error 806 is ON, it means "display" and is an image. The details of the error are notified on the liquid crystal screen of the display body 500. When the liquid crystal error 806 is OFF, it means "non-display", and the details of the error are not notified on the liquid crystal screen of the image display body 500. In the liquid crystal error 806, the error notification is performed with the content not contrary to the notification in the seg error 804.

The error occurrence 807 indicates the error occurrence status, but in this figure, it may be read as the fact that the main board 409 has detected the error. When the error occurrence 807 is ON, it means that an error has occurred (an error has been detected) at the timing when the error has occurred, and when the error occurrence 807 is OFF, no error has occurred (an error has been detected). Does not mean). If the error occurrence 807 is turned ON and then turned OFF, it means that the error is resolved at the timing when the error is turned OFF.

The display and transmission of the instruction information 801 to the seg error 804 are managed by the main board 409, and the display of the liquid crystal navigation 805 and the liquid crystal error 806 is managed by the sub board 510.

Further, in FIG. 673 and other drawings, the "first stop button" is the reel stop button 211 to which the first pressing operation is performed among the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c corresponding to the rotating reels 301a to 301c. Means that. Similarly, the "second stop button" means the reel stop button 211 in which the reel 301 is stopped second, and the "third stop button" means the reel 301 at the third (that is, the last). It means the reel stop button 211 on which the stop operation of is performed.

Next, the display period (including the transmission period and the like) of each display and the like shown in FIG. 673 will be described. The timing chart of FIG. 673 is shown in a situation where the game is played without an error occurring during the AT in which the instruction function is executed, and the payout does not occur in the game.

According to the instruction information 801 in FIG. 673, the instruction information command is transmitted when the start lever 210 is pressed. Further, according to the instruction function 802, the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 ends the stop operation for all reels 301 from the timing when the operation of pressing the reel stop button 211 can be accepted (pressing the third stop button). Is displayed. Further, according to the liquid crystal navigation 805, the navigation display starts from the start of rotation of the reel 301, and the timing of the end of the display is the same as the instruction function display. In the example of FIG. 673, the start of the navigation display precedes the start of the instruction function display, but the navigation display is displayed based on the content of the instruction information command, and the content of the instruction information command is an instruction. Since it is the same as the instruction content in the function display, the navigation display is still performed with the same content as the instruction function display. However, the display order is not necessarily limited to this.

Further, in the timing chart of FIG. 673, the timing of "starting acceptance of pressing the stop button" and the timing of turning on the instruction function 802 look the same, but strictly speaking, after starting the acceptance of pressing the reel stop button 211. , The display of the instruction function is not started by the special display LED 612. That is, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the "display" of the instruction function 802 is performed before the timing of "starting acceptance of pressing the stop button", and in the programmatic processing by the CPU 1118 of the main board 409. However, the instruction function display is executed before the timing at which the stop button press reception starts. The timing of such "start of acceptance of pressing the stop button" and "display of the instruction function" is the same in the timing chart shown in another example.

Further, in FIG. 673, the start timing of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is set to the timing at which the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 can be accepted, and the start timing of the navigation display on the image display body 500 is set to the start timing of rotation of the reel 301. However, these are examples of display timing. That is, in the slot machine 1, the above display (instruction function display and display navigation) is performed at an arbitrary timing in the period from the time when the start lever 210 is pressed to the time when the reel stop button 211 can be pressed. May be started.

[10-4. Reel stop processing]
When the start processing is completed, the operation (stop operation, that is, the operation of pressing the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c) for stopping the reel that continues to rotate at a constant speed is in a waiting state. FIG. 673 shows the content of the reel stop processing by the "table method" as an example. Hereinafter, the flow of the reel stop control process will be described.

In the reel stop processing, first, in step S201, the reel stop control table is selected according to the condition device operated in response to the result of the internal lottery in the game. In this reel stop control table, patterns corresponding to all the condition devices on a one-to-one basis are prepared in advance, and these are stored in ROM 1112 of the main board 409 as read-only table data.

When the reel stop control table is selected based on the condition device satisfied in step S201, the standby state is set until the pressing operations of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are accepted (step S202). , S210, S217). In these standby states, whether or not each reel of the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c has already stopped, or a state in which the first reel stop flag is not ON (F = 0, that is, OFF). It is also determined whether or not the state) is satisfied, and also whether or not any of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is pressed. Until all the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are pressed, the determination in step S209 is not satisfied, and the processes after step S202 are repeated.

Here, the order in which the pressing operations of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are accepted (stop operation procedure) is, as described above, "forward push", "pinching push", "middle forward push", and "middle reverse push". It can be divided into 6 types of "push", "reverse pinch push", and "reverse push". In the following description with respect to FIG. 673, for convenience, these push orders are set to the reel stop button 211 in which the push operation is first performed. Focusing on, the three types of push order are classified. That is, the case where the first stop reel is the left reel 301a is called "forward push", the case where the first stop reel is the middle reel 301b is called "middle push", and the case where the first stop reel is the right reel 301c is called "reverse push".

In step S202, it is determined whether the flag indicating that the left reel 301a has been stopped (left reel stop flag LF) is OFF (LF = 0) and the pressing operation of the left reel stop button 211a is accepted. To do. Assuming that the left reel stop button 211a is pressed first (first) according to the stop operation procedure of "forward push" from the standby state of the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c in step S201, step S202 Is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S203.

In step S203, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0). The "first reel" here means the reel for which the stop operation is first accepted or the reel is stopped first. In this example (“forward push”), the stop operation of the left reel 301a is first accepted, so that the first reel stop flag is in the OFF state (F = 0). Therefore, the determination in step S203 is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S204.

In the next step S204, the first reel stop processing is performed on the left reel 301a. In this first reel stop processing, the stop position of the winning combination symbol corresponding to the internal lottery flag is controlled based on the reel stop control table corresponding to the operating condition device.

In step S206, the reel stop control table of the remaining middle reel 301b and right reel 301c is determined. As described above, since the slot machine 1 has only two effective lines, a right-up line and a right-down line, the remaining reels (middle reel 301b, right reel 301c) have only one stop control table at this point. Can be decided. That is, among the symbols in the symbol display window 401 of the first stop reel (in this case, the left reel 301a) (this is called a stop eye, the same applies hereinafter), the symbol at the upper position or the lower position can be the winning combination symbol. If it is a sexual symbol, select a reel stop control table capable of aligning the corresponding winning combination symbols of the remaining reels (middle reel 301b, right reel 301c) on the effective line based on the corresponding symbol. It will be.

In step S207, the first reel stop flag is set to ON (F = 1), and the process proceeds to the next step S208.

Next, in step S208, the left reel stop flag LF is set to ON (LF = 1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

Then, in step S209, it is determined whether all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are in the stopped state. In this example, the left reel stop flag LF is still turned on, and the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c are still rotating. Therefore, this determination is not satisfied, and the process returns to step S202 and the subsequent processes are repeated. Execute.

Then, when the processing after step S202 is executed again, since the left reel 301a is already in the stopped state, the determination in step S202 is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, it is determined whether the flag indicating that the middle reel 301b has been stopped (middle reel stop flag MF) is OFF (MF = 0) and the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211b is accepted. To do. Here, since the stop operation procedure of "forward push" is followed, the push operation of the middle reel stop button 211b is accepted. Therefore, the determination in step S210 is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S211.

In step S211 it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0) as in step S203 described above. Since the first reel stop flag is already ON (F = 1) at this point, this determination is not satisfied and the process proceeds to step S213.

In step S213, as the middle reel stop process, the stop position of the corresponding winning combination symbol is controlled based on the reel control table corresponding to the operating condition device (in this case, the reel stop control table determined in step S206 above). To execute. Then, at this time, the middle reel 301b becomes the second reel (second reel) to stop, steps S212, S214, and S215 are all bypassed, the process proceeds to step S216, and the middle reel stop flag MF is turned ON (MF = 1). To step S209.

Then, in step S209 again, only the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are in the stopped state, and the right reel 301c is still rotating and is in the stopped state (the right reel stop flag RF is OFF). Since there is no such determination, this determination is not satisfied, the process returns to step S202, and the subsequent processes are repeatedly executed.

Further, in the processing after the third step S202, it is first determined in step S217 whether the right reel stop flag MF is OFF (MF = 0) and the pressing operation of the right reel stop button 211c is accepted. However, since the subsequent processes of steps S218, S220 and the like are the same as the processes after step S210 (steps S211 and S213), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Then, in step S223, the right reel stop flag RF is set to ON (MF = 1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

Finally, in step S209, since all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are in the stopped state at this point, this determination is satisfied and the reel stop process ends.

In the case of the "middle press" stop operation procedure, the same explanation as above can be used, so details will be omitted. However, in the case of the "reverse push" stop operation procedure, there are some differences from the above description, and therefore, it will be described below.

The "reverse push" stop operation procedure differs from the above "forward push" or "middle push" stop operation procedure in step S221 (determining the remaining reel stop control table after the first reel stop process). is there. That is, in the "reverse push" stop operation procedure, if only the right reel 301c is in the stopped state and any of the winning combination symbols is in the lower position of the stop stitches of the right reel 301c, two valid symbols are still valid. It is possible to align the corresponding winning combination symbols on any of the lines. Therefore, at the stage of step S221, a plurality of reel stop control tables capable of aligning the corresponding winning combination symbols on any of the effective lines may be prepared and one of them may be selected.

[10-4-1. Reel stop control]
In the above reel stop processing, reel stop control is performed to pull the winning winning combination symbol (corresponding winning winning combination symbol) corresponding to the establishment flag into the symbol display window 401 as much as possible (so-called pull-in control). Specifically, when the player's reel stop operation is accepted, the range that can be stopped in the symbol display window 401 (the range in which the corresponding winning combination symbol can be pulled in, for example, four symbols). Minutes) are determined in advance, and if there is a corresponding winning combination symbol within that range, the control of pulling it into the symbol display window 401 to stop the reel is executed. The "retractable range" here refers to the maximum number of symbols that can be moved in the direction of rotation of the reel from the time when the reel stop operation is received until the reel stops. Say. For example, if the pull-in range is set to a maximum of four symbols, when the stop operation of the reel is accepted, the reel can be further rotated and moved up to four symbols from that position as a base point.

Therefore, according to such reel stop control, even if there is no corresponding winning combination symbol in the symbol display window 401 at the time when the reel stop operation is accepted, the corresponding winning combination symbol can be pulled in. If there is, it is possible to move the corresponding winning combination symbol into the symbol display window 401 and then stop it. In addition, by performing this pull-in control, even if the player presses the winning combination symbol a little earlier, if the winning combination symbol is within the drawable range, the winning combination symbol is displayed as a symbol. It can be pulled into the window 401 and stopped. Therefore, it is possible to suppress as much as possible the occurrence of omission (the game privilege is extinguished because the game privilege corresponding to the winning combination cannot be obtained because the winning combination symbols cannot be aligned).

In the slot machine 1, when the condition device corresponding to the replay combination, the common bell regardless of the push order, or the like is operating, the corresponding winning combination symbols can be always aligned without the need for the player's push. This is because, for the symbols constituting the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay combination, the bell combination, etc., the corresponding winning combination symbols are arranged at a maximum of four symbols (the above-mentioned figure). See 635). In the reel pull-in control, when the maximum number of pull-in is 4 (4 frames), the symbols arranged at intervals of up to 4 as described above are always effective regardless of the push timing (push position). It becomes possible to pull in the line.

Specifically, for example, when the replay symbols are aligned in the middle row when a predetermined replay combination is won, paying attention to the replay symbols, on the left reel 301a, the other symbols are the maximum between the replay symbols and the replay symbols. Four are arranged (see FIG. 635). As a result, in the left reel 301a, regardless of the position of the reel where the stop operation is received, as long as the condition device corresponding to the replay combination is operating, the replay symbol is always pulled to any of the effective lines to stop. be able to.

In addition, when the result of the internal lottery is a duplicate combination of the bonus combination and the small combination, the small combination is preferentially drawn in over the bonus symbol. When a winning combination of a bonus combination and a small combination is won, the established state of the bonus combination is maintained after the next game even if the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination is displayed in this winning game, and the next game. In the subsequent games in which the small combination (or replay combination) is not established, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed.

The above is an example of reel stop processing by the table method. Aside from this, there is a reel stop process by a control method, but since a known process can be applied to this as well, a specific description thereof will be omitted here. Further, in the present embodiment, either the control method or the table method reel stop processing may be executed, and which method is adopted may be appropriately determined when constructing the control program.

[10-5. Determination process]
When the reel stop process is completed, the main board 409 displays whether the winning combination symbols are aligned on any of the effective lines in the symbol display window 401 (the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations is displayed. Whether or not it is judged. In FIG. 675, the content of this determination process will be specifically described.

When all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped by the reel stop processing, whether the winning combination symbols are aligned on one of the effective lines from the mode of the stop stitch in the symbol display window 401 (corresponding to the winning combination). Whether or not the combination mode of the symbols to be used is displayed) is determined. In particular, the stop stitch when all the reels 301 are in the stop state is called a stop roll.

First, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the bonus game is in progress. This is to determine the ON state and the OFF state of a predetermined game state flag (for example, a flag during a bonus game). If the bonus game flag is ON, the determination in step S301 is satisfied, so the process proceeds to step S302. If the flag in the bonus game is OFF, the determination in step S301 is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S312.

In step S302, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination stopped on the valid line is a bonus symbol (symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination). Explaining the determination of the symbol combination with a specific example, if the bonus is BB1 shown in FIGS. 638 to 643 and the like, the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is the symbol arrangement of "red 7" on the effective line. It can be determined that the two types of BB symbols (bonus symbols) have stopped when such a symbol arrangement is stopped on any of the diagonal lines. In this way, when it is determined that the symbol combination of the bonus symbols has stopped on the valid line (YES in step S302), the bonus game start process related to the start of the bonus game is performed (step S303), and then the process ends. To do. The bonus game start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 676. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S302 that the symbol combination stopped on the effective line is not a bonus symbol (NO in step S302), the process proceeds to step S304.

In step S304, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination stopped on the effective line is a replay symbol (symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination), and if it is determined to be a replay symbol, the replay game process is executed ( Step S305). In this replay game process, the MAX bet command is temporarily stored in the RAM 1114 in order to start the next game with the same number of bets as the number of bets in the game (MAX bets in this example). Based on this command, the next game can be started as a replay. After the process of step S305, the replay winning flag is turned off (step S306), and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S304 that the symbol combination stopped on the valid line is not a replay symbol (NO in step S304), the symbol combination is a small winning combination symbol (a symbol combination indicating a small winning combination) as the next determination process. ) (Step S308). If it is determined in step S308 that it is a small winning combination symbol, as the process of step S309, a specified number of medals are paid out according to the matching small winning combination symbols (a specified number of medals are paid from the medal release device 110). put out). Then, the number of medals to be paid out is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612). As a result, the player is notified (announced and displayed) that a predetermined number of medals corresponding to the small winning combination have been paid out. Then, after the process of step S309 is completed, the corresponding small winning combination winning flag is turned off (step S310), and the process is completed.

When it is determined in step S308 that the symbol combination stopped on the effective line is not a small winning combination symbol (NO in step S308), none of the above determinations in steps S302, S304, and S308 is satisfied, and any of the above determinations are made on the effective line. The winning combination designs are not available. In addition, the result at this time is also called "missing eye (combination mode of disjointed symbols)". In such a case, the loss process is executed (step S311). In the loss process, if the winning flag that is ON at this point is another winning flag other than the bonus, the winning flag is turned off. If none of the winning flags are ON (at this time, the loss flag is ON), the loss flag is turned OFF. After the loss process in step S311, the determination process ends.

The process from step S302 to step S311 described above is a process to be executed when the general state or the bonus internal state is controlled. Next, the processing after step S312 performed when the determination in step S301 is not satisfied will be described. The process here is a process to be executed during the bonus game (BB game) controlled to the bonus state.

In step S312, it is determined whether or not the bonus game payout symbols are aligned on the valid line. The "bonus game payout symbol" here means a general term for a combination of symbols in which medals are paid out by aligning them during the bonus game. Specifically, the bonus game payout combination (general in this example). It is the same as the small winning combination whose payout is specified in the state or internal state, but a special bonus exclusive winning combination may be prepared). If an affirmative determination is obtained in step S312, a predetermined number of medals are paid out according to the bonus game payout symbols that are available (step S313). In the medal payout process, a predetermined number of medals are paid out from the medal discharge device 110, and the number of medals paid out is displayed on the payout number display LED 612. By such a medal payout process, the player is notified (announced and displayed) that a predetermined number of medals corresponding to the payout combination at the time of the bonus game have been paid out.

Following step S313, in step S314, a bonus game end determination process for determining whether or not to end the bonus game is executed (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 677), and then the determination process ends.

If it is determined in step S312 that the bonus game payout symbol has not stopped (NO in step S312), the establishment flag is turned off (step S315), and the process ends. As a pattern of NO in step S312, it is conceivable that the payout combination at the time of the bonus game is won but the payout combination is not won, or the payout combination at the time of the bonus game is not won. In the process of step S315, in the former case, the establishment flag of the payout combination at the time of the bonus game is turned off, and in the latter case, the loss flag is turned off. If a bonus-dedicated role that is always won during the bonus game is prepared, and if the bonus-dedicated role can be won without being missed, the process of step S315 is performed. It may be omitted.

The above-mentioned processes of steps S301 to S315 are game state determination processes performed by the main board 409 (particularly CPU 1110), and after that, ART game determination processes are performed in steps S320.

Since the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has an instruction function as described above, a determination process (ART game determination process) relating to continuation, termination, game number management, etc. of the ART game is performed for each game. There is a need to do. Since the ART game determination process corresponds to the process of the performance that affects the generation of the instruction, the main board 409 executes it.

The timing at which the ART game determination process is performed may be any appropriate timing among the determination processes shown in FIG. 675, but here, as an example, of each process of steps S306, S310, S311, S314, and S315. Later, it is assumed that the ART game determination process of step S320 is performed. Details of the ART game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 678.

[10-5-1. Bonus game start process]
When the determination in step S302 of FIG. 675 is satisfied, the bonus game start process is executed. This bonus game start process will be described with reference to FIG. 676.

First, in step S401, it is determined whether the bonus flag (for example, the BB flag) is ON. When the determination in step S401 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, the flag during the bonus game is turned ON and the bonus flag is turned OFF. Next, in step S406, the cumulative payout number count during the bonus game is cleared. As a result, the cumulative number of payouts is accumulated from the next game. Then, from the next game, the bonus game is started with the number of bets of the specified number of bonus games (in this example, the specified number of BB games is two).

If the determination in step S401 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S402 and error processing is executed. Such a case corresponds to a case where the bonus symbols are aligned even though the bonus flag is OFF. That is, it can occur either by some illegal means (for example, a goto act) or by a failure of the slot machine 1. Therefore, in the error processing, the error lamp 604 is turned on, and the above-mentioned LED or the like is displayed to notify the occurrence of the error.

[10-5-2. Bonus game end judgment process]
Subsequently, the bonus game end determination process of step S314 of FIG. 675 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 677.

First, in step S451, in response to the medals being paid out in step S313 of FIG. 675 described above, the number of medals paid out in the bonus game is added to the total number of medals paid out.

Next, in step S452, it is determined whether or not the cumulative number of payouts exceeds the total number of payouts (for example, 200) specified for each bonus. If the determination in step S452 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S454, and the cumulative number of payouts during the bonus game is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612 or the like. The cumulative payout number is separately provided with an LED or the like for display. It may be displayed on this).

On the other hand, if the determination in step S452 is not satisfied, the bonus game flag is turned off (step S460), and the process ends.

[10-5-3. ART game judgment processing]
FIG. 678 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of the ART game determination process. As described above in [10-3-3] and the like, the ART game is a game executed based on winning the ART in the ART lottery, and when the ART game is being executed, the push order small winning combination ( When the winning combination of the push order bell) is won, instruction information such as "appropriate push order" is displayed on the special display LED 612 (instruction function display), and an instruction effect (navigation display) is displayed according to the instruction function display. It is displayed on the image display body 500 or the like. The ART game determination process is a determination process relating to the start, continuation, end, etc. of such an ART game, and is executed by the main board 409 (particularly the CPU 1110) which is the control body of the ART. Hereinafter, an example of the ART game determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 678.

First, the outline of the ART game will be described. The ART game is started when the start condition of the ART game is satisfied, and is continuously executed in the subsequent game period until the end condition of the ART is satisfied. [10-3-3] As described in the following instruction function processing, when the start condition of the ART game is satisfied, a predetermined internal flag (ART flag) is turned ON and the ART game is started. At the end of the ART game, the ART flag is turned off. Information such as internal flags related to the ART game such as the ART flag and the number of ART games described later is held in the memory (for example, RAM 1114) in the main board 409 that controls the ART game, but in the sub board 510. Similar information may be held in a memory (for example, RAM 1122).

The conditions for starting the ART game (conditions for turning on the ART flag) are as described in detail below in [10-3-2], but simply put, the ART is won in the first ART lottery. That is.

In step S501 of FIG. 678, as the first process of the ART game determination process, the current ART flag is compared with the ART flag in the ART game determination process of the previous game, and it is determined whether or not the ART flag is turned ON. That is, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the ART flag has changed from OFF to ON from the previous game to the current game. It is assumed that the value of the ART flag in the ART game determination process of the previous game is stored separately. If it is determined that the ART flag has been turned ON (YES in step S501), the number of ART games at the start of ART is set (step S502), and the process ends. The number of ART games (so-called initial number of games) at the start of ART may be set in advance as a fixed number of games, the number of games may be drawn at the time of winning ART, or it is determined by another method. However, here, as an example, it is assumed that the number of initial games determined by the above-mentioned instruction function processing is set as the number of ART games at the start of ART.

By performing such processing in step S502, the ART game is started from the next game. At the start of the ART game, the start of the ART game and the effect of clearly indicating the number of ART games to the player are performed (for example, the display of the ART start screen).

On the other hand, if it is not determined in step S501 that the ART flag is turned ON, that is, if the ART flag is OFF or the ART flag is ON from the previous game (NO in step S501), the ART flag is set. It is determined whether or not it is ON (step S505), and if the ART flag is ON (YES in step S505), it is determined whether or not it is in the special zone (step S506). Here, when it is determined that the ART flag is ON and the player is not in the special zone (YES in step S505 and NO in step S506), it means that one game in the ART game has been played. Then, the value of the number of ART games is subtracted by "1" (step S507). If it is determined in step S506 that the player is in the special zone (YES in step S506), the number of ART games is not subtracted, so step S507 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S508. If it is determined in step S505 that the ART flag is not ON (NO in step S505), the ART game is not in progress, so the process ends as it is.

Here, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to the number of games at the start determined at the start of the ART game, an additional function of adding the number of ART games based on satisfying a predetermined condition during the ART game. Suppose you have. When the number of ART games is added, a predetermined internal flag (additional flag) is turned on, and the number of ART games to be added (number of additional games) is determined. The conditions for determining the addition are not particularly limited, and may be the winning of a specific winning combination in the combination lottery, or may be determined based on some other lottery result. Further, the method of determining the number of additional games is not limited to a special method. Then, the following steps S508 to S510 are processes performed when the function of adding the number of ART games is provided.

First, in step S508, it is determined whether or not the addition flag is ON. If the addition flag is ON (YES in step S508), a process of adding the number of addition games to the current number of ART games is performed (step S509), and the addition flag is turned OFF (step S510). As a result, the number of remaining ART games is increased by the additional amount, and the duration of the ART game, which is advantageous for the player, is extended.

After the processing of step S510 (after the processing of step S506 if the addition function is not provided), it is determined whether or not the current number of ART games is "0" (step S511), and if it is "0". Will satisfy the end condition of the ART game, so the ART flag is turned off (step S512), and the process is ended. At this time, not only clearly indicate the end of the ART game to the player, but also clearly indicate to the player information about a series of ART games (for example, the total number of medals paid out in the ART game, the number of continuation of the ART game, etc.). You can do it.

If the current number of ART games is not "0" in the determination of step S511 (NO in step S511), the ART game end condition is not satisfied, so the process ends without changing the ART flag. As a result, the ART game is continued in the subsequent games.

The ART game determination process described with reference to FIG. 678 is a processing example in the case where the game period (ART game period) controlled by the game state for the ART game is deducted by 1 count for each game. , When the ART game period is managed by another subtractive method (for example, a method in which the ART game period is determined by the number of appearances of ART navigation), it is desirable to perform an appropriate ART game determination process according to the subtractive method. ..

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, an internal flag (for example, an ART start flag) indicating the start of the ART game may be prepared separately from the ART flag for the ART game determination process. The ART start flag is an internal flag that is turned on when the ART game start condition is satisfied by winning the ART first hit lottery. In such a case, in a series of processes by the ART game determination process, it is determined in step S501 whether or not the ART start flag is ON, and if the ART start flag is ON, the initial game of ART is in step S502. After setting the number, processing such that the ART flag is turned ON and the ART start flag is turned OFF may be performed. If the ART start flag is OFF in step S501, the processing after step S505 is performed. It should be.

[10-6. Control of production operation]
The above is an example of control mainly by the main board 409, but in the slot machine 1, various production operations are controlled by the sub board 510 as the game progresses. This is executed by the sub board 510 (mainly CPU 1118 or the like) based on various commands (information commands, output signals) output from the main board 409. As described above, various commands output from the main board 449 are temporarily stored in the RAM 1122. Then, based on the command, the effect mode prepared in advance is selected and executed. Such an effect mode is stored in the ROM 1120 as an effect mode data table (not shown), and a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the command are prepared.

For example, the effect mode includes a mode that is completed only by the game (hereinafter, referred to as a single-shot effect mode), a mode that is performed over a plurality of games (hereinafter, referred to as a continuous effect mode), and the like. Of these, the one-shot production mode includes a production that suggests the winning flag (suggestion production, notification production, details will be described later), a production that informs the payout of medals (a mode that informs the payout appearance, and even the number of payouts). There is.

The suggestion effect is different from the effect of directly notifying the player of the winning flag (notification effect), and is an effect of indirectly notifying the winning flag, for example, the form of the winning combination corresponding to the winning flag. , Display that expresses colors, etc. In addition, the suggestion effect is also performed when there is no winning flag (that is, in the case of loss). In this case, the content is such that it is difficult to notice that it is a loss (for example, ambiguous content that can be taken as any winning combination). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the game is lost.

In the notification production, for example, when the winning flag is a bonus role or when the player wins the ART first hit lottery, the result related to the game such as "bonus confirmed!" Or "ART winning!" Is clearly shown to the player. It can be informed. This effect is more effective when executed for winning roles (because there is a possibility of winning a large number of medals) that are particularly pleasing to the player, such as bonuses and ART. That is, when the player wins the first hit of ART or the like, it is possible to give a meaning of congratulating that fact.

It should be noted that the various production modes described above can be executed as an image display by the image display body 500, a sound effect generated by the speaker 512 or the like, light emission or lighting by LED decoration or the like, and the like. Such an effect mode can make it difficult to give a boring impression, such as when a player has been playing a game for a long time. It should be noted that the effect mode is not limited to being executed by the image display body 500, the speaker 512, the LED decoration, and the like. For example, instead of the image display body 500, an EL display (Electroluminescence Display) or a dot LED may be used. In addition, a doll imitating a character, a movable model, etc., and side reels (for example, arranged in a position different from each reel, can be started and stopped regardless of the player's operation as part of the production. (To be executed), or lighting such as a lamp (for example, a rotatable light typified by a rotating lamp) may be provided to execute various effects. By adopting such a method, it is possible to fully entertain the player without using a liquid crystal display or the like.

[10-7. Game number management process]
By the way, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute the game number management process for managing the number of games by the game number management control means included in the CPU 1110. The game number management control means of the CPU 1110 starts the game number management process (starts the game number counting process) based on the satisfaction of the predetermined start condition, and the game based on the satisfaction of the predetermined end condition. By ending the number management process (ending the game number counting process), the number of games executed by the player during the game number management process as a specific section is counted, and the number of games is managed. When the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the game number management process is completed, the number of games counted in the game number management process is initialized and returns to 0.

The above-mentioned predetermined start condition for starting the game number management process is to shift from the hell state to another state (advantageous state A to advantageous state E). That is, when it is determined that the instruction function display at least once or more is performed immediately or after a plurality of games (for example, 32 games) are digested, the game number management process is started. Therefore, the game number management process will be started from the next game in which the special role is selected by the internal lottery in the hell state.

Further, the above-mentioned predetermined end condition for ending the game number management process is that the number of games counted during the game number management process is set to a predetermined threshold value (in this example, 1500 games as described above). ) Has been reached and the instruction function display has been performed one or more times (first condition), and even if the number of games counted during the game number management process has not reached a predetermined threshold, the instruction function display is displayed. The game state related to execution shifts from the advantageous state to the hell state (second condition). When any one of the first condition and the second condition is satisfied, the game number management process ends. For example, when the ceiling game is digested without winning the ART first hit lottery, even if the number of games counted during the game number management process does not reach a predetermined threshold value, the instruction function display is executed. The game state involved shifts from an advantageous state to a hell state. When any one of the above two conditions is satisfied in the game number management process, the game number management process ends. Here, the transition of the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display from the advantageous state to the hell state may be shifted immediately after the ART game is finished, or after the pullback state after the ART game is finished is finished. May be migrated to.

In the present embodiment, the instruction function is always displayed one or more times during the game number management process, but this is not essential. That is, the above first condition may be that the number of games counted during the game number management process reaches a predetermined threshold value (the instruction function display is performed one or more times during the game number management process). May be excluded from the conditions).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the start condition for starting the game number management process and the condition for ending the game number management process are compared, the start condition for starting the game number management process is higher. It is configured to be. Therefore, when comparing the period in which the game number management flag is set to ON and the period in which the game number management process is set to OFF, the period in which the game number management flag is set to ON is longer. ing. However, the period when the game number management flag is set to ON should not exceed 70% of the total period (the sum of the period when the game number management flag is set to ON and the period when the game number management flag is set to OFF). It has become. The period in which the game number management flag is set to ON is a period in which one of the advantageous states A to E and the pullback state is controlled. In this example, the threshold value of 1500 games is set in one shot. It becomes the maximum. Further, the period in which the game number management process is set to OFF is a period in which the game is controlled to the hell state. In this hell state, the execution of the ART game is not confirmed (in other words, the operation of the instruction function display is not allowed, and the above-mentioned conditional devices are grouped), but the ART is performed. The winning probability in the first winning lottery (probability of being determined as YES in step S6011) is 1/20, which is configured so that the winning can be achieved by executing a game less than the 32 games set as the number of ceiling games. There is. As a result, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to preferably suppress a decrease in interest while suppressing gambling.

Further, the CPU 1110 of the slot machine 1 has an ART game forced termination means, and the ART game forced termination means counts the number of games (game) in the game number management process even during the ART game. Based on the fact that the number counter GC) has reached a predetermined threshold, the ART game is forcibly terminated immediately. However, if the instruction function display is not executed even once during the game number management process, even if the number of games counted in the game number management process (game number counter GC) reaches a predetermined threshold value. , The state of hell is not entered until the instruction function display is executed once. Therefore, even if the number of games counted in the game number management process (game number counter GC) reaches a predetermined threshold during the ART game, as long as there is no execution history of the bonus game during the game number management process, The ART game is continued until the instruction function display is executed once. On the contrary, when there is an execution history of a bonus game during the game number management process, even if the instruction function display is not executed even once during the game number management process, it is counted in the game number management process. When the number of games (game number counter GC) reaches a predetermined threshold, the game shifts to the hell state, so that the ART game is forcibly terminated during the ART game.

Further, the CPU 1110 of the slot machine 1 also has a means for extinguishing the instruction function display execution right. This means of extinguishing the instruction function display execution right is, for example, the number of games (the number of games) counted in the game number management process when the instruction function display execution right is granted even if the ART game is not in progress. When the counter GC) reaches a predetermined threshold value, the process of extinguishing the execution right of the given instruction function display is executed. However, even in this case, if the instruction function display is not executed even once during the game number management process, the number of games counted in the game number management process (game number counter GC) reaches a predetermined threshold value. Even if it does, it does not shift to the hell state until the instruction function display is executed once. Therefore, even if the number of games counted in the game number management process (game number counter GC) reaches a predetermined threshold, the instruction function display is 1 unless there is an execution history of the bonus game during the game number management process. Until the execution is performed, the execution right of the given instruction function display is maintained without being extinguished. On the contrary, when there is an execution history of a bonus game during the game number management process, even if the instruction function display is not executed even once during the game number management process, it is counted in the game number management process. When the number of games played (game number counter GC) reaches a predetermined threshold, the game shifts to the hell state. Therefore, even if the right to execute the instruction function display is granted, the right to execute the instruction function display will be extinguished. Become. The right to execute the instruction function display corresponds to the right to execute an ART game in which the instruction function can be continuously operated over a plurality of games, and the right to operate the instruction function display only once (one game). In addition, the state in which the execution right of the instruction function display is granted is the RT state of the precursor game (during the digestion of the ceiling game) or the preparation state (the ceiling game is digested and the instruction function flag is set to ON). RT1 state) corresponds.

In the game after the ART game is forcibly terminated in this way, the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is controlled to the hell state. Even if the ART game is forcibly terminated, the RT state remains RT2 or RT3, and the game shifts to RT1 based on the appearance of 0 bell zeros. In this way, by forcibly ending the ART game based on the number of games counted in the game number management process reaching a predetermined threshold value, the number of game media as a prize can be reduced in a short period of time. It is possible to prevent accidental occurrence of a situation in which a large amount is given, and by extension, it is possible to suppress unnecessarily inciting gambling.

Even if the number of games counted in the game number management process (game number counter GC) reaches a predetermined threshold during the execution of the bonus game, the bonus game is executed to the end without ending halfway. To.

In addition, when the bonus game is executed by winning the BB in the above hell state, the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display in this bonus game is controlled to the hell state unless a special role is won. Up to. Then, in this hell state and if a special role (special watermelon, special cherry, special maintenance lip) is won during the bonus game, the transition destination may be any of the advantageous state A to the advantageous state D. For example, the game number management flag is set to ON, the count of the game number counter GC is started, and the state is shifted from the hell state to the advantageous state of the transition destination. However, if the transition destination is the advantageous state E, the game number management flag is set to ON and the game number counter GC count starts, but in the ART game, the RT state changes from RT1 to RT2 after the bonus game ends. It will be started when it is migrated. It should be noted that the lottery related to the execution of the instruction function display (such as the ART first hit lottery) may not be performed during the bonus game or inside the bonus. For example, even if a special role is selected by the internal lottery, the transfer destination determination lottery in step S6012 may not be performed, or the determination as to whether or not the special role is performed in step S6011 is not performed. It may be (that is, it is the same as when the normal role is selected). However, in the game in which the bonus combination (BB1, BB2) is selected by the internal lottery, a lottery related to the execution of the instruction function display (ART first hit lottery, etc.) may be performed.

[10-8. Overall game flow]
The overall flow of the game in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 679. FIG. 679 is a time chart showing an example of the overall game flow. In explaining the overall flow of the game, each control state in the slot machine 1 of this example will be organized and then described.

First, from the viewpoint of the RT state, the slot machine 1 of this example is a general state controlled after the end of the bonus game, RT1 controlled when 0 bell zeros appear, and replay 1 raised in RT1. RT2, which is controlled when the symbol combination corresponding to the above replay appears, or when the symbol combination corresponding to the lower replay appears at RT2, RT3, BB1 which is controlled when the symbol combination corresponding to the up replay 2 appears at RT2. Or, either the bonus internal state that is controlled when the symbol combination corresponding to BB2 is won but the symbol combination corresponding to these has not appeared, or the bonus state in which the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 or BB2 appears and the bonus game is being executed. It is controlled by the RT state control means.

In addition, from the viewpoint of the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display, it is advantageous that the execution of the instruction function display is not yet confirmed and the execution of the instruction function display is confirmed to be executed at least once. One of the states A to E and the pullback state is controlled by the instruction function control means. In the advantageous state, as described above, in addition to the advantageous state E in which the instruction function display is controlled by the ART game in which the instruction function display can be continuously operated over a plurality of games, the degree of expectation to shift to the advantageous state E is different. States A to D and pullback states are available.

Further, the instruction function control means sets the instruction function flag to either an ON state in which the operation of the instruction function is permitted or an OFF state in which the operation of the instruction function is not permitted. The operation of the instruction function by the instruction function control means is not allowed unless the number of ceiling games is exhausted even if the lottery for the first hit of ART is won, and it is allowed based on the fact that the number of ceiling games is exhausted (ON), and ART. When the game is over, the allowance is released (OFF).

Further, the game number management control means sets the game number management flag to the ON state in which the game number management control is performed (the number of games executed by the player is counted) and the game number management control is not performed (game number management control). It is controlled to one of the OFF state (the number of games executed by the person is not counted). The game number management control by the game number management control means is not executed in the hell state (OFF), but is executed based on the transition from the hell state to the advantageous state A to the advantageous state E (ON). ..

Further, from the viewpoint of a game state that can be grasped by the player (hereinafter referred to as "appearance state"), a general game state in which the number of ceiling games is not set and the execution of the instruction function display is not confirmed. The precursor game state in which the execution of the instruction function display is confirmed and the number of ceiling games is set, the single instruction state in which the instruction function display is performed only once, the number of ceiling games is exhausted, and the instruction function flag is set to ON. The prepared state (the state in which the ART game is ready to be executed, that is, the state in which the ART game can be executed when the symbol combination corresponding to the raised replay 2 appears), and the symbol combination corresponding to the raised replay 2 appears and ART The player can grasp that the game is in one of the ART state during the game and the pullback state (pullback state) after the ART game is completed.

The instruction function is allowed to operate in the above-mentioned preparation state and ART state, and is not allowed to operate in the general game state, the precursor game state, and the pullback state. However, regarding the precursor game state and the CZ state (advantageous states A and D of the present embodiment), the state (precursor game state and CZ state) is exhausted by a predetermined number of games (32 games in the advantageous state A and the advantageous state D). I try to give instructions after waiting for 10 games), but it is not limited to this, and when the predetermined number of games is exhausted, "push order bell 1" to "push order bell 6" in the internal lottery If any one of them is selected, the push order may be instructed, and as soon as the predetermined number of games is exhausted, the game may shift to the hell state.

The game number management control is not executed in the general game state, and the execution is started based on the fact that the special role is selected by the internal lottery (that is, the transition from the hell state to the advantageous state). Further, when it is determined that the number of games executed by the player exceeds a predetermined threshold value during the game number management process (game number management flag ON), the instruction function display is executed once or more. As a condition (except when a bonus game is executed), the game number management flag is set to OFF.

Next, the overall flow of the game will be described. When the RT state is RT1 and the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is the hell state, the appearance state becomes the general state. In the general state, both the instruction function flag and the game number management flag are OFF. Then, when a special role (special watermelon role, special cherry role, special maintenance replay role) is selected by an internal lottery in the hell state and is shifted to one of the advantageous state A to the advantageous state E, the number of games is managed. The flag is set to ON. As a result, the appearance state is shifted from the general game state to the precursor game state (at the time of transition from the advantageous state A to C), CZ (at the time of transition to the advantageous state D), and the ART game (at the time of transition to the advantageous state E).

In the precursor game state, the number of ceiling games is set, and the instruction function flag is set to OFF. Then, when the number of ceiling games is exhausted, the instruction function flag is set to ON. In FIG. 679, the advantage state A is first controlled, the instruction function display is executed only once, and then the state is changed to the hell state, and the game number management flag is set to OFF.

When a special role is selected by an internal lottery in the subsequent hell state and the game is shifted to one of the advantageous state A to the advantageous state E, the number of games management flag is set to ON and the appearance state is a general game. It shifts from the state to the precursor game state. FIG. 679 shows the mode of transition from the hell state to the advantageous state B.

When the ceiling game is digested in the advantageous state B, the appearance state shifts from the precursor game state to the ready state, and the instruction function flag is set to ON. Then, when "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip" is selected by the internal lottery and the player stops the operation based on the instruction function display to display the symbol combination corresponding to the raise replay 1, the RT state is displayed. Is shifted from RT1 to RT2, and the first ART game shown in FIG. 679 is started (becomes an ART state). When the ceiling game is digested in the advantageous state B and the game state is shifted from the precursor game state to the ready state, the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted from the advantageous state B to the advantageous state E.

Since the instruction function flag is set to ON during the ART game (in the ART state), even if "lowering lip + normal maintenance lip" is selected in the internal lottery, the player is based on the instruction function display. The RT state is maintained at RT2 as long as the command function is stopped, but if the symbol combination corresponding to the lower replay is displayed by the stop operation contrary to the instruction function display, the RT state is maintained while the instruction function is maintained. It will be transferred from RT2 to RT1. However, if "Raise Lip 1 + Normal Maintenance Lip" is selected by the internal lottery and the stop operation is performed based on the instruction function display, the symbol combination corresponding to Raise Replay 1 is displayed and the RT state is displayed. Returns from RT1 to RT2.

Further, even if the instruction function flag is OFF, when "raise lip 1 + normal maintenance lip" is selected by the internal lottery, the player can stop the raise lip 1 to obtain a symbol combination corresponding to the raise lip 1. It may be displayed accidentally. In this case, the RT state is shifted from RT1 to RT2, but the ART game is not started because the number of ceiling games has not been exhausted. Then, when the 0-sheet bell zero is displayed, the RT state is shifted from RT2 to R1.

When the first ART game shown in FIG. 679 is completed, the instruction function flag is set to OFF, and the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted from the advantageous state E to the pullback state. The RT state is maintained at RT2 unless the 0-sheet bell zero is displayed, but when the 0-sheet bell zero is displayed, the RT state is shifted from RT2 to RT1.

The pullback state ends when the player loses the maintenance lottery, and the instruction function display is executed on condition that the instruction function display is executed at least once (except when the bonus game is executed). The related game state is changed from the pullback state to the hell state. However, when the number of games counted by the game number management control means reaches the threshold value during the pullback state, if the instruction function display is executed once or more, the game number management flag is set to OFF and the instruction function display is displayed. The game state related to the execution of is changed from the pullback state to the hell state.

In this example, when the first ART game is completed, the number of games counted by the game number management control means has not reached the threshold value, and in FIG. 679, the state when the ART first hit lottery is won in the pullback state. It is shown. When the ART first hit lottery is won in the pullback state, the instruction function flag is set to ON, the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted to the advantageous state E, and the second ART game shown in FIG. 679 is started. To. At this time, if the RT state is shifted to RT1, the ART game is started by shifting from RT1 to RT2, but if the RT state is maintained at RT2, the ART game is started immediately. However, in this case, even if the RT state is maintained at RT2, the ART game may be started after several games have been executed. Then, when the second ART game shown in FIG. 679 is completed, the instruction function flag is set to OFF, and the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted from the advantageous state E to the pullback state.

In this example, the number of games counted by the game number management control means has not reached the threshold value at the end of the second ART game, and in FIG. 679, BB1 is selected by an internal lottery in the pullback state. The state at that time is shown. When BB1 is selected by the internal lottery, the RT state until the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is displayed becomes a bonus internal state, and when the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is displayed, it becomes a bonus state and the CPU 1110 has. The bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means.

Regardless of whether the bonus game is executed or not, if the player loses the maintenance lottery without winning the ART first hit lottery in the pullback state, the pullback state ends, the general game state is set, and the instruction function display is executed. The related game state is changed from the pullback state to the hell state, and the game number management flag is set to OFF. Further, even if the bonus game is being executed, when the game number management flag is set to OFF, the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted to the hell state.

In FIG. 679, during the bonus state (during the execution of the bonus game), it is determined that the ART first hit lottery is won and the state is changed to the advantageous state B, for example, and 32 games of ceiling games are set to be the precursor game state. The state is shown. At this time, the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is changed from the hell state to the advantageous state, and the game number management flag is set to ON. Then, when the bonus game ends, the RT state shifts from the bonus state to the general state (RT0), and when 0 bell zeros are displayed in the general state, the RT state shifts from the general state (RT0) to RT1. Will be done.

In FIG. 679, since the ceiling game has not been digested at the end of the bonus game, the precursor game state continues. Then, when 0 bell zero is displayed, the RT state is shifted from the general state (RT0) to RT1, and when the ceiling game is digested and the instruction function flag is set to ON, the appearance state is the precursor game state. Is transitioned to the ready state.

After that, when "raised replay 1 + normal maintenance replay" is selected by the internal lottery and the symbol combination corresponding to the raised replay 1 is displayed, the RT state is shifted from RT1 to RT2 and is shown in FIG. 679. The third ART game is started, the ART state is set, and the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted to the advantageous state E.

During the third ART game, when the number of games counted during the game number management process (that is, the number of games executed by the player after the game number management flag is set to ON) reaches the threshold value, the game is played. The number management flag is set to OFF, and the game number management process ends. When the game number management process is completed, the instruction function flag is set to OFF, and the running ART game is forcibly terminated. At this time, the ART game is forcibly terminated halfway even if the specified number of games has not been digested. When the ART game is forcibly terminated in this way, the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display shifts to the hell state, and the appearance state becomes the general game state.

Even if the number of games counted during the game number management process (that is, the number of games executed by the player after the game number management flag is set to ON) reaches the threshold value, the game number management process If the instruction function display is not executed even once, the transition to the hell state is avoided until the instruction function display is executed at least once, and if the ART game is in progress, the ART game continues and the ART game is continued. The instruction function flag is also maintained in the ON state. Then, when the instruction function display is performed once, the game number management flag is set to OFF, the game number management process is completed, the instruction function flag is set to OFF, and the running ART game is forcibly set. When it is terminated, the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted to the hell state.

However, if even one bonus game is executed during the game number management process, even if the instruction function is not displayed even once during the game number management process, the game number management process is in progress. When the counted number of games (that is, the number of games executed by the player after the game number management flag is set to ON) reaches the threshold value, the game number management flag is set to OFF and the game number management process is performed. Upon termination, the instruction function flag is set to OFF, the running ART game is forcibly terminated, and the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted to the hell state.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 679, when the ART first hit lottery is won and the state is shifted to the advantageous state during the execution of the bonus game (during the bonus state), the number of games counted during the game number management process. When the threshold is reached, the game number management flag is set to OFF, the game number management process ends, and the instruction function flag is displayed, even if the instruction function is not displayed even once during the game number management process. Is set to OFF, the running ART game is forcibly terminated, and the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted to the hell state.

Even if the ART game is forcibly terminated, in the RT state, RT2 is maintained unless 0 bell zeros are displayed, and RT1 is set based on the fact that 0 bell zeros are displayed. Will be migrated. In FIG. 679, the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is controlled by RT2 for a while after being shifted to the hell state, and then is shifted from RT2 to RT1.

Then, when a special role is selected by an internal lottery in the hell state and the game state related to the execution of the instruction function display is shifted from the hell state to one of the advantageous state A to the advantageous state E (in FIG. 679). The state of transition to the advantageous state C is shown), the game number management flag is set to ON, and the game number management process is started. Then, when the number of precursor games is shifted to the advantageous state, the appearance state changes from the general game state to the precursor game state.

Note that FIG. 679 does not show a mode in which the RT state is shifted from RT2 to RT3, but the special zone lottery is won (YES in step S606), and the symbol combination corresponding to the raised replay combination 2 is on the effective line. When displayed in, the RT state is changed from RT2 to RT3, and the special zone state is set.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of this example, when the slot machine 1 is shifted to the advantageous state D, the slot machine 1 is shifted to the chance zone (CZ). However, in FIG. 679, the mode of shifting to the advantageous state D is not described. The chance zone (CZ) is not shown in the status column.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the period in which the game number management flag is set to ON (the period in which the game number management flag is controlled to an advantageous state) and the period in which the game number management flag is set to OFF (hell state) Compared to the period controlled by), the period when the game number management flag is set to ON is configured to be higher, and the game number management flag is set to ON during the entire period. The period of stay is set not to exceed 70%. Then, in the hell state as the period when the game number management flag is set to OFF, the instruction function display is not executed, but the probability that a special role is selected in the internal lottery is higher than the 32 games set as the number of ceiling games. It is configured so that special roles can be selected by playing a few games. Moreover, even if the transition destination when the special role is selected is not the advantageous state B or the advantageous state E, when the transition destination is the advantageous state C or the advantageous state D, the expectation of the ART game is given to the player. Can be given. Therefore, when the number of games executed during the game management process (game number counter GC) exceeds a predetermined threshold G, the game number management process is terminated and the game shifts to the hell state, but in the hell state, the advantageous state A Since the expectation that the ART game will be executed is increased as compared with the above, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest while suppressing the gambling.

[10-9. Processing when an abnormal state occurs]
The processing performed when an abnormal state occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described in detail.

In the slot machine 1, when an abnormal state occurs during the game, an error is notified according to the type of the detected error. In particular, in the case of an error that can be detected by the main board 409, the error lamp 604 lights up (or blinks), and the special display LED 612 can display an error indicating the type of the error. In the special display LED 612, the instruction function display and the payout number display are usually performed. In addition, although an error may not be detected, a sudden power failure is also included in the abnormal state.

When the above abnormal state occurs, it is necessary to cancel the error in order to return to the normal game state (in the case of power off, the error display should not remain after the power is restored). The method of canceling the error differs depending on the error that has occurred, but it is often necessary to turn off the power (OFF / ON).

[10-9-1. RAM clear]
Here, clearing of data values (RAM clearing) in the RAM 1114 mounted on the main board 409 will be described.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a specific operation such as setting change or power OFF / ON is performed, the value of the data held in the RAM 1114 of the main board 409 is erased or initially set in the address range corresponding to each operation. A clear process (RAM clear) that rewrites to a value is performed. Therefore, even when the error cancellation process is performed, if the power is turned off / on, a part of the data held in the RAM 1114 may be cleared.

However, if an error cancellation process is performed while the instruction function is displayed, or if the power is cut off while the medal is being paid out, the data used for the instruction function display and the number of medals to be paid out will be cleared by clearing the RAM. , It is assumed that there are cases where the continuation of the game is hindered. In the slot machine 1, in view of such a problem, the target range of the RAM clear in the RAM 1114 is predetermined.

FIG. 680 is a diagram for explaining a data block of RAM. FIG. 680 shows an internal image of the RAM 1114, with the upper end as the start of the memory address and the lower end as the end of the memory address. For example, the unused area 1114z is a data area in which data is not read or written (in other words, a data area other than the used area), and is grouped on the terminal side of the memory address. As shown in FIG. 680, in the RAM 1114, a plurality of "areas" are predetermined according to the type of data to be stored. In addition, five types of "clear range 0" to "clear range 4" are defined as the target range for RAM clearing. The unused area 1114z may be included in each clear range.

First, the clear range of RAM clear will be described. "Clear range 0" means a target range corresponding to total erasure, which is basically never implemented. That is, RAM clearing in the clear range 0 is not performed by normal maintenance or error processing. From another point of view, in the set value data area 1114a, the data value is not cleared except when the RAM is cleared in the clear range 0. This means that the set value data area 1114a is basically not cleared.

“Clear range 1” means a target range in which RAM is cleared at the start of setting change performed by operating the setting key switch 1112t. Specifically, among the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 680, all the data areas below the door flag area 1114b are targeted, and the set value data area 1114a is not cleared.

“Clear range 2” means a target range in which RAM is cleared at the time of reset performed by operating the reset switch 112u. Specifically, among the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 680, the data area of the lamp ON data area 1114d or less is targeted, and the set value data area 1114a to the door monitoring timer area 1114c are not cleared.

"Clear range 3" means a target range in which RAM is cleared at the end of the bonus. RAM clearing from clear range 0 to clear range 2 requires work by a hall clerk, etc. as an opportunity to execute each RAM clear, but RAM clear at the end of the bonus is automatically performed by internal processing after the end of the bonus. Is executed. In the RAM clear at the end of the bonus, specifically, among the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 680, the data area of the replay input number area 1114j or less is targeted, and the set value data area 1114a to the instruction function display area 1114i is not cleared.

The "clear range 3" is also a target range in which the RAM is cleared when the power is simply turned off / on. That is, when the power is turned off / on without changing the setting or resetting, the data area targeted by the "clear range 3" is cleared. Since the instruction function display area 1114i is not included in the "clear range 3", the instruction content of the instruction function is not erased by turning the power off / on.

"Clear range 4" means a target range in which RAM is cleared at the start of each game. The RAM clear at the start of each game is automatically executed, for example, by an internal process when the start lever 210 is operated while the number of medals bet is determined. In the RAM clear at the start of each game, specifically, among the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 680, the data area of the display flag area 1114 l or less is targeted, and the set value data area 1114a to the interrupt check is used. The timer area 1114k is not cleared.

Next, each data area shown in FIG. 680 will be briefly described. The set value set in the slot machine 1 is stored in the set value data area 1114a.

Information indicating the open / closed state of the door type front member 200 (or front opening / closing member 90) is stored in the door flag area 1114b, and the door type front member 200 (or front opening / closing member 90) is stored in the door monitoring timer area 1114c. Time information for recognizing that it is open is stored.

The lamp ON data area 1114d stores information regarding the lighting of lamps (for example, replay lamps 606, start lamps 608, and other indicators arranged on the display panel 501). Information indicating the number of credits (number of medals stored) is stored in the credit number area 1114e. In the credit display area 1114f, information for displaying the number of stored medals on the stored number display LED 613 is stored. In the payout number area 1114g, information indicating the number of payouts (medal payout number) indicating how many game values have been paid out in the game is stored. In the payout display area 1114h, information for displaying the number of medals to be paid out on the special display LED 612 is stored. In the instruction function display area 1114i, information corresponding to the instruction content by the instruction function for displaying the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is stored.

In the replay insertion number area 1114j, the number of game values to be input during the replay operation (the number of medals inserted during the replay) are stored. The timer area 1114k for interrupt check stores timer information necessary for executing the interrupt process.

The display flag area 1114l stores information indicating an error display state displayed on the special display LED 612. In the medal payout number area 1114 m, the payout number of game values to be paid out as a result of the game is stored. Information indicating whether or not the game value can be input is stored in the insertable number area 1114n. In the medal insertion number area 1114o, the number of game values inserted before the start of the game is stored. Random numbers used in the condition device are stored in the random number storage area 1114p.

As described above, in the RAM 1114 of the main board 409, efficient memory control can be expected by setting the range in which the RAM is cleared for each of various actions (when the setting is changed, when the power is turned off / on, etc.).

The RAM 1114 has a specified range (capacity) that can be used as a storage area of the main board 409 in the gaming machine, and data such as a program must be stored within the specified range. However, in recent years, with respect to the processing related to the test signal and the processing related to fraud, the data related to the program for the processing is stored in the unused area outside the above-specified range (for example, the unused area 1114z in FIG. 680). Is allowed. However, the use of such an unused area is limited to a gaming machine having an instruction function.

Further, in the slot machine 1, after the RAM is cleared after the power is turned off or the like, whether or not to redisplay the data displayed before the RAM is cleared is determined by the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 (or the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510). ) Can be determined for each type of data. That is, the CPU 1110 (or CPU 1118) may refer to the data stored in the data area where the RAM has not been cleared and redisplay the data as much as possible at the time of recovery from the power failure, or may redisplay the specific data (for example,). , Data related to the number of payouts display, data related to the navigation display, etc.) can be redisplayed theoretically, but may not be redisplayed by program control. At this time, it is also included to refer to the data saved in the stack point of the RAM 1114.

[10-9-2. error indication]
Next, the error display in the special display LED 612 will be described. FIG. 681 is a diagram for explaining an error display by the special display LED. In the slot machine 1, when an error described in the "notification type" column of FIG. 681 (described later, some non-errors are included) is detected, it is indicated in the "SEG" column by the special display LED 612. By displaying such a predetermined segment, the type of the detected error is notified so as to be identifiable. Of the errors shown in the "Notification type" column of FIG. 681, each error other than "communication error (at the time of series code error)" detected on the sub-board 510 is mainly the detection signal of each error when it occurs. The board 409 is notified. The error shown in FIG. 681 is a part of the error that can be detected by the slot machine 1, and in addition to the error shown in the figure, there is an error that can be detected by the main board 409 or the sub board 510.

The outline of each error shown in the “Notification type” column of FIG. 681 will be described below.

The "RAM error" is an error notified when the RAM 1114 of the main board 409 is broken. On the other hand, "communication error (at the time of series code error)" is detected when there is an abnormality in the series code transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub board 510, but since it is detected by the sub board 510, it is specially displayed. No error is displayed on the LED 612.

"Setting being changed" or "setting being confirmed" is not an error, but is shown in FIG. 681 because the "setting value" is displayed (notified) on the special display LED 612 during the work. The set value of the slot machine 1 is stored in, for example, the set value data area 1114a of the RAM 1114. The notification timing by "setting is being changed" is the start of the predetermined setting change operation, and the notification timing by "setting is being confirmed" is the start of the predetermined setting confirmation operation.

The "illegal payout error" is an error notified when there is an abnormal payout. Specifically, it is a payout count switch (not shown. A switch for counting the number of medals to be paid out, for example, except when medals are paid out from the hopper 110b by the operation of the drive means (not shown) included in the medal discharge device 110. It is detected when (provided in the medal release device 110) is turned on. In FIG. 681, the notification priority is set differently depending on whether the timing at which the error is detected is "when the main game is not stopped" or "when the main game is stopped". It is considered that the higher priority is to detect when the main game is not stopped. However, the same "HF" is displayed as a segment on the special display LED 612 regardless of the timing of detection.

"Insert medal passing time 1 error", "Insert medal passing time 2 error", "Medal passing order 1 error", "Medal passing order 2 error", "Medal passing interval time error", and "Insert medal retrograde error" This is an error notified when there is an abnormality in the process from the medal being inserted from the medal insertion slot 203 to the hopper 1110b. The abnormalities referred to here include not only abnormalities related to the passage path of medals but also abnormalities caused by inserting foreign substances other than medals.

In the slot machine 1, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 203 are detected by the insertion sensor 207b (when the solenoid 207a is in the OFF state), and then the lever sensor, selector sensor, and shoot sensor sensors. The hopper 110b is reached while the passage is detected by. The lever sensor, selector sensor, and shoot sensor are sensors provided in the medal selector 207, and detect the passage of medals at predetermined positions provided (not shown). Further, when the solenoid 207a is in the ON state, the path to the insertion sensor 207b is locked out, so that even if the medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 203, the medal is inserted via the medal selector 207 and the return gutter 213. It is returned to the tray 201. When the medal whose passage is detected by the insertion sensor 207b does not move through such a normal process (specified medal passage sequence), the main board 409 is based on the presence / absence of detection by each sensor, the detection time, and the like. Detect each of the above errors.

An outline of each error will be described. The "inserted medal passing time 1 error" is an error notified when medals (including foreign substances other than medals) stay in the vicinity of the inserted sensor 207b. Specifically, the medal detection by the inserted sensor 207b is performed. It is detected when it continues for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms). The "inserted medal passing time 2 error" is an error notified when medals (including foreign substances other than medals) stay in the vicinity of the lever sensor. Specifically, the medal detection by the lever sensor is performed for a predetermined time. It is detected when it continues (for example, 500 ms). The detection target period of the "inserted medal passing time 2 error" is always, but the notification timing of the error is set at the start of medal acceptance (may be at the end of the game such as after the completion of the payout process).

The "medal passing order 1 error" is an error notified when the medal detection by the selector sensor is performed even though the medal detection by the lever sensor is not detected (OFF). More specifically, the error is detected when the medal is not detected by the lever sensor in a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms) before the medal passage is detected by the selector sensor. The "medal passing order 2 error" is an error notified when the medal is not detected by the shoot sensor after the medal is detected by the selector sensor. More specifically, the error is detected when the medal is not detected by the shoot sensor within a predetermined period (for example, 400 ms) after the medal passage is detected by the selector sensor.

The "medal passing interval time error" is an error notified when a medal has passed in an unexpected manner under normal conditions. Specifically, in each sensor provided in the medal selector 207, some object has a passing interval shorter than the shortest medal passing interval assumed in the normal state (that is, the passing interval when medals are continuously inserted). The error is detected when the passing situation is detected over a predetermined frequency (for example, five times in a row).

The “inserted medal retrograde error” is an error notified when a medal moves in a route other than the specified medal passing sequence, and in particular, when a retrograde movement is detected. Specifically, it is detected based on the detection order of medal detection by each sensor (insertion sensor 207b, lever sensor, selector sensor, shoot sensor, etc.) provided in the medal selector 207.

In addition, "payout medal jam error", "payout medal empty error", and "auxiliary storage full tank error" are errors notified when there is an abnormality related to medal payout or storage. Explaining the outline of each error, first, the "payout medal jam error" is an error notified when medals are jammed during medal payout from the hopper 110b. Specifically, when the payout count switch is turned on for a predetermined period (for example, 200 ms) or more, the error is detected. Further, the “payout medal empty error” is an error notified when the medal in the hopper 110b becomes empty. Specifically, when the medal from the hopper 110b is not normally paid out and the payout is retried (payout retry), the payout count switch is turned on for a predetermined period (for example, 1500 ms) or more after the payout retry. If not, the error is detected. Further, the "auxiliary storage box full tank error" is an error notified when the medal auxiliary storage box 111 is full. Specifically, when the medal full tank sensor 111a of the medal auxiliary storage box 111 detects the storage of medals exceeding a predetermined standard, the error is detected.

The “Priority” column in FIG. 681 shows the priority of notification between errors. In this example, the above priority means the priority when a plurality of errors are detected at the same time, and even if an error having a higher priority than the error is detected after one error is detected. , The displayed contents are not changed. However, the priority of the error display in the slot machine 1 is not limited to this, and in the above example, it may be determined to switch to the display of the error with the higher priority detected later. Further, in the "SEG" column, a display example of the special display LED 612 is shown. In any case, in the slot machine 1, when a plurality of errors are detected, the game cannot be restarted (the next game is played) unless those errors are cleared.

Further, when the "video" is "◯" in the "notification method" column, for example, an image for notifying an error is displayed on the image display body 500. However, the broadcast image by the "video" is required to have the same display content as the error display on the special display LED 612. When the "sound" is "○", for example, the notification sound is output from the speaker 512. When the "lamp" is "○", for example, the error lamp 604 lights up or blinks. In the notification by sound output, lamp output, etc., the notification mode may be changed according to the priority of the detected error. For example, when an error having a high priority is detected, the error has a low priority. The notification mode may be emphasized in comparison.

Further, in the "reset release" column, it is indicated whether or not the error can be released by a reset performed by operating the reset switch 112u. As for the error that can be reset, the data area (see FIG. 680) of the "clear range 2" among the data stored in the RAM 1114 is cleared when the error is canceled by the reset.

Further, when "immediately" is described in the "responsiveness" column, it means that the error can be detected on the main board 409 side when the slot machine 1 is in operation. For example, when an illegal payout error is detected, the main board 409 immediately issues a command notifying the detection. That is, even if it is described as "immediately", it is not always necessary to immediately display the error when the error is detected. For example, after the result of the game is obtained (after the end of the payout process or the payout process). An error may be displayed before (before the start of). The fraudulent payout error is a highly urgent error that means that the game value is fraudulently paid out.

[10-9-3. Processing when an error occurs]
Hereinafter, processing when the error described in the previous chapter occurs in the slot machine 1 during the game (processing when an error occurs) will be described. The specific details of the error occurrence processing differ depending on what kind of requirement definition the slot machine 1 has regarding the error. Here, it is assumed that the slot machine 1 includes the following requirement definitions (first requirement definition) regarding errors, and details of error occurrence processing performed in such a case will be described.
(1) Do not group multiple errors based on their importance (for example, strong error and weak error).
(2) Even if an error is detected during the game, the progress of the game is continued and the error is displayed after the game is completed.
(3) Even if an error is detected during the game, the instruction function display is continuously displayed.

682 and 683 are flowcharts (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the error occurrence processing in the present embodiment. FIG. 682 and FIG. 683 are combined into one flowchart. In this flowchart, the overall processing procedure of one game is based on the processing procedure shown in FIG. 644, and further, the processing performed when an error occurs is described in detail. Shown. Note that FIGS. 682 and 683 show an example of a processing procedure when the game progresses when the power is not turned off (that is, the power is not turned off). On the other hand, FIG. 684, which will be described later, is a flowchart showing an example of a processing procedure for the power failure recovery process in the present embodiment. In FIG. 684, the processing procedure is also applied when the power is turned off / on in the processing of FIGS. 682 and 683.

[10-9-3-1. Processing when an error occurs (when there is no power failure)]
With reference to FIGS. 682 and 683, a processing procedure (at the time of non-power interruption) of one game including an error occurrence processing will be described. Since the overall processing flow overlaps with the series of processing shown in FIG. 644, detailed description of the already explained processing will be omitted. Unless otherwise specified, each process of FIGS. 682 and 683 is executed by the main board 409 (mainly the CPU 1110). Further, in order to make it easier to understand the situation in which each process is performed, the correspondence with the “state of the gaming machine” shown in FIG. 674 is also shown.

First, in FIG. 682, as described in the BET process of FIG. 644, after a predetermined number of game values (specifically, medals) are input, the game is played by the player pressing the start lever 210. It is started (step S801). The flow of such a game corresponds to the "medal insertion" to the "starting lever pressing" shown in FIG. 674.

When the start lever 210 is pressed to start the game, an internal lottery process is performed (step S802), and a condition device that is allowed to operate based on the winning combination is acquired (step S803).

Next, in step S804, it is determined whether or not the section is capable of displaying the instruction function by the special display LED 612. Here, the section in which the instruction function can be displayed means a game (for example, during an ART game) in which the instruction function can be displayed by the instruction function. Up to now, it has been mainly explained that the instruction function display is performed during the ART game, but in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a specific game period other than the ART game (for example, the ART is relatively won). The instruction function may be displayed even in an easy chance zone (CZ) or the like). In such a case, a positive determination can be obtained in step S804 even in a game other than the ART game.

If it is determined in step S804 that the section is capable of displaying the instruction function (specifically, if it is determined that the main board 409 gives an instruction by the instruction function) (YES in step S804), step S803 is performed. Based on the acquired condition device, the instruction content by the instruction function is determined (step S805). Next, the instruction content determined in step S805 is stored in the instruction function display area 1114i of the RAM 1114 (step S806).

After that, the rotation of the reel 301 is started (step S807). The timing of step S807 corresponds to the “reel rotation start” shown in FIG. 674. Then, by transmitting the instruction information command to the sub-board 510, the instruction content by the instruction function is notified (step S808). As a result, the sub-board 510 can cause the image display body 500 or the like to perform the navigation display at a predetermined display timing related to the navigation display based on the received instruction information command. In the slot machine 1, the instruction information command in step S808 may be transmitted at a timing prior to the start of rotation of the reel 301 (step S807).

After that, the instruction content stored in the RAM 1114 in step S806 is displayed on the special display LED 612 at a predetermined display timing related to the instruction display function (instruction function display) (step S809). Specific display examples of the instruction function display are as shown in FIGS. 671 and 672. Further, the predetermined display timings related to the "navigation display" and the "instruction function display" are as described above with reference to FIG. 674. Then, after displaying the instruction function in step S809, in step S810, acceptance of the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is started.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S804 that the section is not capable of displaying the instruction function (specifically, when it is not determined that the main board 409 gives an instruction by the instruction function) (NO in step S804). , S805, S806, S808, S809, the rotation of the reel 301 is started (step S811), and the acceptance of the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211a is started (step S801). Step S812).

Step S810 and step S812 correspond to "reel stop button press acceptance possible" shown in FIG. 674. Then, after the process of step S810 or step S812 is performed, the process proceeds to step S813.

In step S813, the player presses the first stop button (the first stop operation among the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). At this time, the reel stop processing as described with reference to FIG. 673 is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 on which the stop operation has been performed. The timing of step S813 corresponds to the "pressing of the first stop button" shown in FIG. 674.

Next, the main board 409 determines whether or not an error has been detected between the pressing of the first stop button in step S813 and the subsequent pressing of the second stop button (step S814). If no error is detected in step S814 (NO in step S814), the process of step S815 is performed. If an error is detected in step S814 (YES in step S814), the process of step S819 is performed. In FIG. 683, when an error is detected in step S814, the process of step S819 is performed without waiting for the stop operation of the reel stop button corresponding to the remaining reels 301 that are rotating. The process of step S819 may be performed after performing the reel stop operation on the remaining reels 301. This also applies to step S816. In the processing after such an error detection, a difference in priority (importance) may be provided according to the type of error, and the processing may be used properly based on the priority. For example, an error that is unlikely to occur in a normal game situation, such as "HF (illegal payout error)", should be a high-priority error. When such a high-priority error is detected, it is better to perform the process of step S819 without waiting for the stop operation of the reel stop button 211 corresponding to the remaining reels 301 that are rotating. preferable.

In step S815, the player presses the second stop button (the second stop operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). At this time, the reel stop processing as described with reference to FIG. 673 is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 on which the stop operation has been performed. The timing of step S815 corresponds to the "pressing of the second stop button" shown in FIG. 674.

Next, the main board 409 determines whether or not an error has been detected between the pressing of the second stop button in step S815 and the subsequent pressing of the third stop button (step S816). If no error is detected in step S816 (NO in step S816), the process of step S817 is performed. If an error is detected in step S816 (YES in step S816), the process of step S819 is performed without waiting for the stop operation of the reel stop button corresponding to the remaining reels 301 that are rotating.

In step S817, the player presses the third stop button (third stop operation among the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). At this time, the reel stop processing as described with reference to FIG. 673 is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 on which the stop operation has been performed. The timing of step S817 corresponds to the "pressing of the third stop button" shown in FIG. 674.

Next, the main board 409 determines whether or not an error has been detected between the time when the third stop button is pressed in step S817 and the time when a predetermined time elapses (for example, until all reels 301 are stopped). (Step S818). After that, the process of step S819 is performed regardless of whether or not the error is detected in step S818.

In step S819, the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is terminated. However, when it is determined in step S804 that the section is not capable of displaying the instruction function (NO in step S804), the instruction function is not displayed in step S809, so that special processing needs to be performed in step S819. There is no.

After that, in step S820, all reels 301 (reels 301a to 301c) are stopped, and it becomes possible to determine the winning based on the symbol combination stopped on the effective line. The timing of step S820 corresponds to the "stop all reels" shown in FIG. 674.

As shown in FIG. 683, the processing of step S819 and step S820 is performed regardless of the presence or absence of error detection during the game up to that point, but the subsequent processing is whether or not it is determined that an error has been detected. It depends on whether or not. Specifically, if no error is detected during the previous game, the process from step S821 is performed, and if an error is detected during the previous game, the process from step S825 is performed. Is done.

First, as a normal processing in which no error is detected during the game up to that point, in step S821, it is determined whether or not the value for the game is paid out. In the payout of the game value, when the suspension of the winning combination is confirmed based on the symbol combination stopped on the valid line, the gaming value corresponding to the winning combination is paid out. If it is determined in step S821 that there is no payout (NO in step S821), no error has been detected, so the game ends. If it is determined in step S821 that there is a payout (YES in step S821), the number of payouts is displayed on the special display LED 612 (step S822), and the game value (medal) is paid out (step S823). .. After that, since no error has been detected, the game is terminated.

On the other hand, as a process when an error is detected during the game up to that point, first, it is determined whether or not the value for the game is paid out (step S824).

The process of step S824 is the same as the process when no error is detected (step S821), and steps S822 (display of the number of payouts) and S823 performed when it is determined that there is a payout (YES in step S824). The process of (payout process) is the same.

However, if an error is detected during the game up to that point, the processes of steps S826 and S827 are performed in order to cause the special display LED 612 to display the error. When the payout process is performed in step S823, after the payout process is completed, the payout number display displayed on the special display LED 612 is cleared (step S825), and then the processes after step S826 are performed. If it is determined in step S824 that there is no payout, the processing after step S826 is performed as it is.

In step S826, the special display LED 612 displays the types of errors detected so far (error display). A display example of the error display is as shown in FIG. 681. After that, an error release process is performed according to the error notified by the hall clerk, the sales office, or the like (step S827), and the game ends.

As described above, by performing the processes shown in FIGS. 682 and 683, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when an error is detected during the game, the special display LED 612 displays the instruction function and the number of payouts. Without interruption, it is possible to display an error and notify the player, the hall clerk, or the like of the type of the detected error.

[10-10. Modification example]
In this embodiment, a method of reducing the disappointment that can be given to a player by forcibly ending the ART game in the middle of the game even though the ART game is executed by winning the first ART winning lottery. As a result, the winning probability in the ART first hit lottery executed in step S6034, step S6094, step S6134 and step S6201 is the difference K between the predetermined threshold G and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process. The number of games remaining until the end of the game number management process K) is used for determination. Similarly, regarding the winning probability in the lottery for adding the number of ART games in step S6073 and the lottery for determining the number of additional games in step S6177, and the number of games added in the lottery for determining the number of additional games in step S6179, the number of remaining games until the end of the game number management process. It is decided based on K. Further, the winning probability in the maintenance lottery in step S6193 is also determined based on the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process. However, the method for reducing the disappointment that can be given to the player by forcibly ending the running ART game in the middle is not limited to the above method. For example, the effect image displayed on the image display body 500 by the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510 and the instruction function display process executed by the main board 409 also forcibly end the running ART game in the middle. This makes it possible to reduce the disappointment that can be given to the player. Hereinafter, the effect image displayed on the image display body 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 685, taking as an example a lottery for determining the number of additional games in step S6177 and a lottery for determining the number of additional games in step S6179, which are processes executed during the ART game. At the same time, the instruction function display processing will also be described. Note that FIG. 685 is an example of an effect image related to the additional decision lottery and the additional game number determination lottery.

The effect image displayed on the image display body 500 by the CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510 is the difference K between the predetermined threshold G and the game number counter GC counted during the game number management process (remaining until the end of the game number management process). Determined based on the number of games K). Similarly, the mode of the instruction function display process executed by the main board 409 is also determined based on the number of games remaining K until the end of the game number management process.

First, a case where the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or greater than the fourth specified number will be described. During the execution of the ART game, when the additional game number lottery of step S6177 is won and the number of additional games of the ART game is determined by the additional game number determination lottery of step S6179, the image display body 500 shows FIG. 685 (a). As shown in, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 204 is displayed. Such an image prompting the operation of the effect button 204 makes the player expect that he / she has won the additional decision lottery of the ART game, but even if he / she loses the additional decision lottery in step S6177, there is a predetermined probability. Since it is displayed, even if an image prompting the operation of the effect button 204 is displayed, it does not determine that the player has won the additional decision lottery of the ART game.

When the ART game addition decision lottery is lost, even if an image prompting the operation of the effect button 204 is displayed and the player operates the effect button 204, the image display body 500 is shown in FIG. 685 (b). A lost image is displayed.

When an image prompting the operation of the effect button 204 is displayed and the player operates the effect button 204 after winning the ART game addition decision lottery, the image display body 500 has FIGS. 685 (c) to 685 (e). As shown in, the number of additional games is displayed. FIG. 685 (c) shows that the number of games to be added is 20 games, and FIG. 685 (d) shows that the number of games to be added is 70 games. ) Indicates that the number of games to be added is 300 games.

In FIG. 685, "30G remaining" displayed in the upper left indicates that the number of remaining games of the ART game is 30 games, and "TOTAL 1400" displayed in the lower right is in the process of managing the number of games. It shows that the number of games counter GC counted in is 1400. In the present embodiment, when the game number counter GC indicating the number of games executed during the game number management process reaches a predetermined threshold value G (1500 games in this example), the game number management process ends and the advantageous state is changed to hell. "TOTAL" displayed at the bottom right because it shifts to the state
"1400" means that the number of remaining games until the end of the game number management process is 100 games.

Next, a case where the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the fourth specified number will be described. During the execution of the ART game, when the combination selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", there is a probability of 65536/65536 to win the additional decision lottery of step S6177. Then, when the number of additional games of the ART game is determined by the lottery for determining the number of additional games in step S6179, the image display body 500 has a case where the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is the fourth specified number or more. Similarly, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 204 is displayed (FIG. 685). As described above, the image prompting the operation of the effect button 204 is intended to make the player expect to win the additional decision lottery of the ART game, but when the player loses the additional decision lottery in step S6177. Even if an image prompting the operation of the effect button 204 is displayed, it does not determine that the player has won the additional decision lottery of the ART game.

If the ART game addition decision lottery is lost, even if an image prompting the operation of the effect button 204 is displayed and the player operates the effect button 204, the image display body 500 remains until the end of the game number management process. As in the case where the number of games K is equal to or greater than the fourth specified number, the lost image shown in FIG. 685 (b) is displayed.

However, if the player wins the ART game addition decision lottery and an image prompting the operation of the production button 204 is displayed and the player operates the production button 204, the player wins the addition decision lottery in step S6177 and the addition game in step S6179. Even if the number of ART games to be added is determined by the number determination lottery, the images shown in FIGS. 685 (c) to 685 (e) are not displayed on the image display body 500, and FIG. 685 (b) is shown. The lost image shown in is displayed. Then, when the number of ART games already specified to the player is digested (when the ART game executed when the game is not added is digested), the ART game is actually added and internally. Even if it continues, the image display body 500 displays an end effect image indicating that the ART game has ended. Therefore, although the ART game is continuing internally, it is possible to suppress the risk that the player will realize that the ART game is continuing. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the ART game is forcibly terminated in the middle even though the ART game has been continued. As a result, it is possible to suppress the disappointment of the player, and by extension, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

However, when the role selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the ART game will be added with a probability of 65536/65536, so the symbol combination corresponding to the special maintenance lip will be available. When it is displayed on the valid line, the player knows that the ART game will be added at that time. Therefore, when the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is equal to or greater than the fourth specified number, the instruction function is displayed in such a manner that the symbol combination corresponding to the special maintenance lip is displayed on the effective line (in order). (The push instruction function is displayed), but if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the fourth specified number, the symbol combination corresponding to the special maintenance lip is not displayed on the valid line. The instruction function is displayed. For details, out of the four push orders excluding forward push (123 push order) and reverse pinch push (312 push order), the push order indicating function is displayed with an equal probability). There is. Here, as can be seen from FIGS. 638 to 643, the reverse pinch push (312) is excluded from the instruction function display not only for the forward push (123 push order) but also for the reverse pinch push (312 push order). This is because the instruction function display is performed so that the raised replay 2 that triggers the transition to the specialized zone is displayed on the effective line. Therefore, in order to avoid entering the special zone even though the special zone lottery has not been won, there are four ways except forward push (123 push order) and reverse pinch push (312 push order). Of the push order of, the instruction function display of the push order determined by the equal probability is performed. This is because it is rare to enter the special zone, and one of the four push orders is frequently instructed, so that it can be confused with this. When the winning combination selected by the internal lottery is a normal maintenance lip, it is determined with an equal probability in any of the six pressing orders, and the stop operation in the determined pressing order is prompted. The instruction function is displayed as follows. As a result, even if the winning combination selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip" when the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the fourth specified number. It is unlikely that the player will grasp this.

The above-mentioned fourth specified number can be set arbitrarily, but even if the ART game is added, the total number of ART games including the added number of games is exhausted without the ART game ending halfway. It is preferable that the value can be set. In the present embodiment, since the maximum number of ART games to be added is 300 games, the above-mentioned fourth specified number is preferably 350 games or more in consideration of the initial number of ART games.

In the above-described modified example, when the ART game is added, if the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the fourth specified number, the lost image shown in FIG. 685 (b). Is always displayed, but it is not limited to this. For example, even if the ART game is added and the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the fourth specified number, when certain conditions are satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 685 (b)). When the lottery for whether or not to display the lost image is won), the lost image shown in FIG. 685 (b) may be displayed. Further, the above-mentioned certain condition may be changed according to the number of games remaining K until the end of the game number management process (for example, the number of games K remaining until the end of the game number management process is reduced). The probability that a lost image will be displayed increases in proportion to (for example). In this case as well, even if the role selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the symbol combination corresponding to the special maintenance lip will be the effective line so that the player will not be aware of this. The instruction function is displayed in a mode that is not displayed.

Further, in the above-described modified example, FIG. 685 (Fig. 685) shows that the ART game is added based on whether or not the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the fourth specified number. Whether or not to display the lost image shown in b) is determined, but the criterion for displaying this lost image does not necessarily have to be based on whether or not the number is less than the fourth specified number. .. For example, the number of remaining ART games including the number of added ART games is compared with the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process, and the number of remaining ART games including the number of added ART games is the end of the game number management process. When it is determined that the number of remaining games is less than K, an image indicating that the ART game has been added is displayed, and the number of remaining ART games including the number of added ART games is completed in the game number management process. When it is determined that the number of remaining games is more than K, a lost image may be displayed. In this case as well, even if the role selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the symbol combination corresponding to the special maintenance lip will be the effective line so that the player will not be aware of this. The instruction function is displayed in a mode that is not displayed.

Further, in this modification, when the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is less than the fourth specified number, the player wins the additional game number determination lottery in step S6177 and is added by the additional game number determination lottery in step S6179. Even if the number of ART games is determined, the image display body 500 is designed to display a lost image indicating that the ART games are not added, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of games added is smaller than the number of games actually added so that the player can be given the impression that the ART game is not forcibly terminated in the middle even if the ART game is added. An image indicating that the above has been performed may be displayed on the image display body 500. For example, if the number of remaining games of the ART game is 30 and the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is 50, when 50 games are added to the ART game, the number of remaining games of the ART game is increased. It will be 80 games. However, since the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process is 50 games, it is not possible to digest all 80 games, which is the remaining number of ART games, and when 50 games are digested, the ART game is halfway. It will be forcibly terminated with. Therefore, even if the number of ART games actually added is 50, the number of games (the number of games of 20 or less) is less than the number of games actually added (50 games). Is displayed on the image display body 500. However, in that case, it is better to display the actual number of additional games in the data of the number of additional games lottery table. This is because there is a risk that the player will be aware of the additional display of a numerical value that is not included in the data of the number of additional games lottery table. However, in such a case, there may be a difference between the threshold value of 1500 games and the number of ART games currently being digested (displayed). In that case, if the difference is smaller than the minimum number of additional games that is actually in the data of the number of additional games lottery table, the end effect image described later is executed, and if it is large, the number of ART games is "0". At that time, an effect as shown in FIG. 685 may be added, and the effect may be performed based on a numerical value actually existing in the data of the game number lottery table. From the above, it is possible to give the player the impression that all the ART games, including the number of added games, have been digested, and the player is disappointed because the ART game is forcibly terminated halfway. It is possible to suppress the fact that the game is given, and by extension, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest. In this case as well, even if the role selected by the internal lottery is "special maintenance lip + normal maintenance lip", the symbol combination corresponding to the special maintenance lip will be the effective line so that the player will not be aware of this. The instruction function is displayed in a mode that is not displayed.

By the way, although it has been decided that the ART game will be added, a lost image is displayed on the image display body 500, or the number of games added is smaller than the number of games actually added. When the image indicating that effect is displayed on the image display body 500, it means that the ART game is continuing internally. Therefore, it is preferable that the image display body 500 displays the end effect image indicating the end of the ART game until the number of remaining games K until the end of the game number management process becomes 0. As a result, even if the running ART game is forcibly terminated in the middle, it seems that the ART game is terminated in appearance, so the ART game is forcibly terminated in the middle. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the disappointment of the player, and by extension, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

In this modification, as described above, the ART game being executed is halfway due to the effect image displayed on the image display body 500 by the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510 and the instruction function display process executed by the main board 409. A method for reducing the disappointment that can be given to the player by forcibly terminating the game will be described by taking as an example a lottery for determining the number of additional games in step S6177 and a lottery for determining the number of additional games in step S6179, which are processes executed during the ART game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to the ART first hit lottery in step S6034, step S6094, step S6134 and step S6201, the lottery for adding the number of ART games in step S6073, and the maintenance lottery in step S6203.

The gaming machine represented by the slot machine 1 described in the present embodiment can be expressed as a technical idea in addition to the gaming machine according to claim 1.

The gaming machine of technical idea 1 is

A gaming machine that includes a plurality of symbol strings that can be variably displayed and a stop operation means that can stop the symbol rows that are variably displayed, and a game result appears when the stop operation means is operated.
An instruction control means capable of executing an instruction of an operation mode of the stop operation means, and an instruction control means.
An advantageous game executing means capable of executing an advantageous game capable of continuously generating an instruction of an operation mode of the stop operating means by the instruction control means, and an advantageous game executing means.
An additional lottery means for performing an additional lottery related to the addition of the number of executed games of the advantageous game, and
An effect control means that controls a predetermined effect and can control the effect based on the result of the additional lottery.

As a game state related to the execution of the instruction of the operation mode of the stop operation means, one of an instruction permissible state in which the execution of the instruction is permissible and an instruction non-instruction state in which the execution of the instruction cannot be permitted. Controllable instruction state control means and

With the instruction state transition control means capable of shifting from the instruction allowable state to the instruction impossible state based on the fact that the parameters that can be updated with the progress of the game satisfy the predetermined conditions in the instruction allowable state. ,
With
The effect control means

It is characterized by having a means for controlling based on parameters that can be updated as the game progresses, including whether or not to perform an effect based on the result of the additional lottery in the instruction permissible state. ..

The gaming machine described in the above technical idea is equipped with an advantageous game (for example, an ART game) capable of continuously generating an instruction of an operation mode of a stop operation means. This type of gaming machine also has a role lottery means for drawing a role for each time the game is played.

In the above-mentioned combination lottery, a plurality of combinations are targeted for lottery, and a prize is given to the player when the stop operation means is operated in an appropriate operation mode and when the stop operation means is operated in an improper operation mode. Instructors with different amounts of game media are included. The instructor corresponds to "pushing order bell 1" to "pushing order bell 6" of the present embodiment, and when operated in an appropriate operation mode, for example, eight game media are given as prizes, which is inappropriate. When operated in the operation mode, for example, 1 or 0 game media are given as a prize (in the case of 0, the game medium as a prize is not given). The above-mentioned proper operation mode and improper operation mode correspond to the case where the push order is correct and the case where the push order is incorrect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the timing to stop the stop operation means (reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c) is correct, for example, eight game media are given as a prize and the stop operation means is stopped. If is incorrect, for example, 1 or 0 gaming media may be awarded as an award (in the case of 0, the gaming medium as an award is not awarded) as an improper operation mode.

Although not described in the above technical idea, the gaming machine of the present technical idea is an advantageous game in which an execution lottery of an advantageous game capable of continuously generating an instruction of an operation mode of a stop operation means over a plurality of games is performed. It is equipped with an execution lottery means. It is possible to continuously generate instructions on the operation mode of the stop operation means, and it is possible to continuously generate instructions for prompting the stop operation means to be operated in an appropriate operation mode over a plurality of games. Means that. Therefore, the execution lottery of the above-mentioned advantageous game corresponds to the transition destination determination lottery described in the present embodiment if the instruction is not possible (hell state) described later, and the instruction allowed state (advantageous state or pullback state) described later. If so, the "ART first hit lottery" and the "additional decision lottery" described in the present embodiment correspond to each other. The internal lottery in the hell state described in the present embodiment is a lottery in which a special role can be selected, but does not correspond to the above-mentioned "execution lottery of advantageous game". This is because even if a special role is selected by an internal lottery, it is only determined that the game will shift from the hell state to the advantageous state, and the advantageous game (ART game) that can be continuously generated over a plurality of games. ) Is not a lottery to decide the execution.

Further, the gaming machine of the present technical idea includes a display means (image display body 500) on which a predetermined display effect is performed. This display means is controlled by the effect control means (corresponding to the CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510) so that the effect based on the result of the execution lottery of the advantageous game or the result of the additional lottery is performed. For example, a definite effect of winning the advantageous game execution lottery, an expected effect indicating that the advantageous game execution lottery may have been won, an additional definite effect indicating that the additional lottery has been won, and an additional lottery. The number of advantageous games added by winning the game is displayed by the above display means. In the above display means, a display effect for instructing the operation mode of the stop operation means may also be performed.

Execution of an advantageous game (for example, an ART game) When the result of the lottery is a specific result, the advantageous game is executed. That is, if the result of the lottery for executing the advantageous game when not in the advantageous game is a specific result, the advantageous game is executed immediately or after a plurality of games are executed, and the advantageous game is executed when the advantageous game is in progress. If the result of the lottery (additional lottery) is a specific result, an advantageous game is added and the execution period is extended.

As a lottery state in which the execution lottery of the advantageous game is performed, a plurality of lottery states having different degrees of expectation that a specific result can be obtained are prepared. In the present embodiment, as the lottery state when the advantageous game is being executed, an ART medium-low probability state, an ART medium-high probability state, a special zone, and a special zone preparation are prepared. Further, as the lottery state when the advantageous game is not being executed, a hell state, an advantageous state A to E, and a pullback state are prepared, but the lottery state is not necessarily limited to these.

Further, as a game state related to the execution of the instruction of the operation mode of the stop operation means, there is either an instruction permissible state in which the execution of the instruction is permissible or an instruction non-permissible state in which the execution of the instruction cannot be permitted. It is configured to be controllable. The instruction-allowed state corresponds to the advantageous state described in the present embodiment, and the instruction-unable state corresponds to the hell state described in the present embodiment. Even if the instruction is allowed, the instruction function flag described in the present embodiment is not necessarily set to ON, but the instruction is given at a desired timing (for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied). It is possible to set the function flag to ON. On the other hand, the non-instruction state is defined as an advantageous state when the instruction function flag cannot be set to ON and the instruction function flag is set to ON.

In the present embodiment, the period in which the game number management flag is set to ON corresponds to the above-mentioned instruction allowable state, and the period in which the game number management flag is set to OFF corresponds to the above-mentioned non-instruction state. ..

In addition, when a special role (special watermelon, special cherry, special maintenance lip) is selected by the internal lottery, the state where the instruction cannot be given is changed to the state where the instruction is allowed. Here, as the instruction permissible state, a plurality of states having different expectations for executing the advantageous game are prepared. When the state is changed from the non-instruction state to the permissible instruction state, the counting means executes counting of parameters that can be updated as the game progresses. The parameter referred to here is the number of games executed in the present embodiment, but is not limited to this, for example, the difference number (the number of game media given as a prize and the number of game media used to execute the game). And the number of times the above-mentioned instructor is selected by the internal lottery.

When the parameter counted by the above counting means satisfies a predetermined condition, the instruction permissible state ends and the state shifts to the non-instruction state. In the present embodiment, when the parameter (for example, the number of games executed) counted in the advantageous state A to the advantageous state E or the pullback state as the instruction permissible state reaches the threshold value, the instruction permissible state ends and the instruction cannot be instructed. Will be migrated to. If the above parameters reach the threshold value during the execution of an advantageous game (for example, an ART game), even if the advantageous game being executed is in the middle (the advantageous game being executed is the end condition). Even if the number of games has not been played), the instruction-allowing state ends and the instruction-disabled state is entered, so that the running advantageous game is forcibly terminated.

The above parameters are updated as the game progresses, but the update method may be a method of adding and updating as the game progresses, or subtracting and updating from the specified value as the game progresses. It may be a method. For example, when the above parameter is "the number of games executed", 1 is added when 1 game is executed if the method is to add and update, and 1 game is executed if 1 game is executed if the method is subtraction and update. 1 is subtracted. In the present embodiment, when one game is executed, the number of executed games is incremented by 1, and when the number of executed games reaches the threshold value, the instruction permissible state ends. On the other hand, in the method of subtraction update, when one game is executed, one is subtracted from the above threshold value, and when it becomes 0, the instruction permissible state ends.

In the present embodiment, when the number of staying games in the instruction-allowing state and the number of staying games in the non-instruction-allowable state are compared, the number of staying games in the instruction-allowing state is configured to be higher. Further, in the instruction permissible state, when the counted parameter reaches the threshold value, the instruction is not possible state. Then, in the hell state as an instructible state, although it is not confirmed that the game will shift to the advantageous state, the expectation that the ART game will be executed (the expectation that the ART game will be executed (the degree of expectation to shift to the advantageous state B or the advantageous state E) is at least It is configured to be greater than the expectation that the ART game will be executed in the advantageous state A. Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to preferably suppress a decrease in interest while suppressing gambling.

By the way, based on the fact that the parameters (for example, the number of games played) counted in the advantageous state A to the advantageous state E as the instruction allowable state and the pullback state reach the threshold value, the instruction allowable state is shifted to the non-instruction state. In the gaming machine of the present technical idea, as the above parameters approach the above threshold value, the player may be discouraged when he / she wins the additional lottery related to the addition of the number of executed games of the advantageous game. The sex becomes high. For example, when the above parameter is "the number of games executed" and "the number of games remaining until the above threshold is reached" is smaller than "the number of advantageous games executed as an advantageous game", the advantageous game is being executed. In addition, the advantageous game is forcibly terminated in the middle, and even if the advantageous game execution lottery is won, the result may be disappointing to the player.

Therefore, in the gaming machine of the present technical idea, the effect based on the result of the additional lottery performed by the display means (image display body 500) is controlled based on the parameters that can be updated as the game progresses. That is, the addition performed by the display means (image display body 500) based on the fact that the above parameters have reached the specified values (for example, the number of games executed in the instruction allowable state has reached the specified number of games). The content of the production based on the result of the lottery can be changed. Specifically, when the above parameters are won in the additional lottery before reaching the specified value, the effect indicating that the winner is won (hereinafter referred to as "pre-specified additional effect") is performed with a relatively high probability. , When the above parameters reach the specified value and the additional lottery is won, the effect indicating that the winning is won and the effect indicating the number of games added (hereinafter, these effects are collectively referred to as "additional effect after regulation". (Referred to as) is performed only with a relatively low probability, and in most cases, only a normal effect (for example, the same effect as when the player loses the additional lottery) is performed. An effect indicating that the player has won the additional lottery or an effect indicating the number of games added will give the player an uplifting feeling, but an effect indicating that the player has won the additional lottery even though he / she has won the additional lottery. If the effect indicating the number of games added is not performed, it is suppressed that the player is given an uplifting feeling. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from being discouraged after giving an uplifting feeling, and by extension, to suppress the decline in interest. It should be noted that, when the additional lottery is won after the above parameters reach the specified value, the effect indicating that the winning is won and the effect indicating the number of added games are not performed at all stochastically. Good.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the present technical idea, the probability that when the additional lottery is won, the effect indicating that the winning is performed or the effect indicating the number of added games is performed is determined based on the specified value, "additional effect before regulation". Is set in two stages of the probability that the above is performed and the probability that the "additional effect after regulation" is performed, but instead of this, it may be set in multiple stages. In this case, as the difference between the above threshold value and the above parameter number of games (that is, the number of remaining games until the above threshold value is reached) becomes smaller, an effect indicating that the winning is won when the execution lottery of the advantageous game is won. It is advisable to gradually reduce the probability that an effect indicating the number of added games will be performed.

Further, in the game machine of the present technical concept, even when the additional lottery is won after the above parameters reach the specified value, the probability is lower than before the above parameters reach the specified value, but the additional lottery is performed. An effect indicating that the game has been won and an effect indicating the number of games added have been performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the above parameters reach the specified values, even if the additional lottery is won. The effect of showing that the game has been won and the effect of showing the number of games added may not be performed, or the number of games added may not be shown, but the effect of winning the additional lottery may be shown. It is also possible to perform an effect showing the number of false additional games, which is less than the actual number of additional games added by the additional lottery. When performing an effect that indicates the number of false additional games that is less than the number of games actually added by the additional lottery, the effect that indicates the number of games that is smaller than the difference between the above threshold value and the above parameters is performed. Is preferable.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the present technical idea, after the above parameters reach the specified value, the effect indicating that the additional lottery has been won or the effect indicating the number of added games is not performed or relatively. Although it is tried to be played only with a low probability, in addition to these, even if the advantageous game is continued internally due to the addition of the advantageous game, it is apparent from the appearance that the advantageous game is continued. To make it difficult to grasp, when the number of advantageous games already specified to the player is exhausted, the advantageous game is terminated, and the effect indicating that the advantageous game is being executed is terminated. It is preferable to do so. In this way, after the effect indicating that the advantageous game is being executed is completed even though the advantageous game is continued, the advantageous game is executed instead of the effect indicating that the advantageous game is being executed. An effect that is not understood to be inside (for example, the same effect as during normal operation (when the advantageous game is not executed)) will be performed. As a result, it is less likely that the player will realize that the advantageous game has been continued, and even though the advantageous game has been continued by winning the additional lottery, the advantageous game is forcibly terminated halfway. It is possible to suppress the disappointment of the player by doing so, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. However, even if the player is prevented from knowing that the advantageous game has been continued, the instruction control means executes the instruction of the operation mode of the stop operation means (in this case, the advantageous game is given to the player). When not, it feels the same as when the operation mode of the stop operation means is instructed).

[11. Precursor production]
In this chapter, an example of the precursory effect of the slot machine 1 will be described. The slot machine 1 in this chapter performs an AT (assist time) rush lottery, which is an example of an advantageous gaming state at the time of executing a normal game, and when the AT is won in the lottery, the number of games selected in the lottery (for example, 0 games to 32). The AT game (first special game state) starts after the precursory game (selected from the game).

AT is an advantageous game in which an effect indicating a winning small winning combination type is executed by using an image display body 500 or a speaker 512, so that the winning small winning combination can be easily paid out as compared with a normal game. This is an example of a state.

Details will be described later, but in the slot machine 1 of this chapter, in each game, a small role of the middle 1st bell is won with a high probability (for example, 1 / 4.37 as described later). In this chapter, the middle 1st bell means that when the middle reel 301b is stopped first after the symbol variation display device 300 is started, the bell is displayed on a predetermined line (for example, upward to the right) in the symbol variation display device 300. When a large number of medals (for example, 10 medals) are paid out and the left reel 301a or the right reel 301c is stopped first, a bell is displayed on one line in the symbol variation display device 300. It is a small role that is not available and cannot receive medals.

For example, if the middle 1st bell is won during an AT game, there is a high probability (for example, 1/1 during the AT game, 0/1 during the normal game excluding the precursor game) compared to the normal game, and the start lever. Immediately after pressing 210, it is notified that the middle 1st bell has been won (for example, "1" is displayed at a position immediately above the middle reel 301b of the image display body 500, or "middle" is displayed from the speaker 512. A sound like "!" Is output). As a result, during the AT game, it becomes easier to receive the payout of 10 cards by the middle 1st bell as compared with the normal game.

[11-1. Various tables for precursory production]
Hereinafter, the small winning combination winning probability, the state transition winning probability, and the like in the slot machine 1 of this chapter will be described first. FIG. 686 is an example of a small winning combination lottery table. The small winning combination lottery table is stored in, for example, ROM 1112 of the main board 409. In the small winning combination lottery table, the lottery value of each small winning combination for each state (that is, when the AT flag is OFF (during the normal game) and when the AT flag is ON (during the AT game)) and the small winning combination is won and the small winning combination is displayed. The number of medals to be paid out when the winning combination is aligned with a predetermined line (a line generally called an effective line) in the symbol variation display device 300 is defined.

The winning probability of each small winning combination is a quotient obtained by dividing the corresponding lottery value by the total value (65536) of the lottery values of all the small winning combinations in the state. For example, the winning probability of a weak watermelon when the AT flag is OFF is 300/65536. In this chapter, the number of payouts and the lottery value are the same when the AT flag is OFF and when the AT flag is ON. As described above, since the value in the probability column (winning probability) can be calculated from the lottery value of each small winning combination, the small winning combination lottery table does not have to include the probability column.

In the example of FIG. 686, the lottery values of the middle 1st bell, the special bell, the replay, and the outlier are higher than the lottery values of other small winning combinations. Small roles with a low winning rate that do not fall under any of the middle 1st bells, special bells, replays, and outliers are also called rare small roles.

FIG. 687 is an example of the AT first hit lottery table. The AT first hit lottery table is stored in, for example, ROM 1112 of the main board 409. In the AT first hit lottery table, the lottery value for the first AT win in the normal game (however, excluding the precursor game of AT (hereinafter, also simply referred to as the precursor game)) is defined for each small winning combination won in the game. There is. The AT first hit lottery performed during the normal game is also referred to as an A1 lottery, and the AT first hit lottery performed during the relief state game described later is also referred to as a D1 lottery.

The denominator of the lottery value of the AT first hit lottery table is 65536. For example, if a weak watermelon is won during a normal game, there is a probability of 3000/65536 that the AT is won and the game shifts to the precursor game. In this chapter, the lottery value is the same in the A1 lottery and the D1 lottery. Further, in the example of FIG. 686, the AT lottery table includes a probability column, but the value in each probability column can be calculated as a quotient obtained by dividing the corresponding lottery value by 65536, which is the denominator. The table does not have to include a probability field.

FIG. 688 is an example of a lottery table for the number of precursor games. (A) is a precursor game number lottery table when the first hit of AT is won during the normal game, and (b) is a precursor game number lottery table when the first hit of AT is won during the relief state game. Is. The precursor game number lottery table is stored in, for example, ROM 1112 of the main board 409. The lottery for the number of precursor games when the AT is won during the normal game is also called the A2 lottery. The lottery for the number of precursor games when the AT is won during the relief state game is also called the D2 lottery, and the D2 lottery includes two types of lottery (D2-1 lottery and D2-2 lottery). Details of the D2-1 lottery and the D2-2 lottery will be described later.

The winning probability of the number of precursor games is a quotient obtained by dividing the corresponding lottery value by the total value (65536) of the lottery values of the number of precursor games in the state. For example, the winning probability of the number of precursor games of 5 games during a normal game (A2 lottery) is 4096/65536. In this way, since the value in the probability column (winning probability) can be calculated from the lottery value of each precursor game number, the precursor game number lottery table does not have to include the probability column.

In the example of FIG. 688 (a), when the AT is won during the normal game, the precursors of 5 games, 8 games, 16 games, or 32 games are selected, and the winning rate is 5 games <8 games <16 games. <The order increases in the order of 32 games. Further, in the example of FIG. 688 (b), when the AT is won during the relief state game, the precursors of 0 game, 1 game, 2 games, 3 games, or 4 games are selected, and the winning rate is D2-. In the case of 1 lottery, the order of 4 games <3 games <2 games <1 game <0 games increases, and the probability that the precursors of 4 games are selected with an extremely high probability and the precursors of other games are selected is It is extremely low, and in the D2-2 lottery, the number of precursor games 0 is the easiest to be selected, and the number of precursor games 4 is the most difficult to be selected.

FIG. 689 is an example of an AT stock lottery table. The details will be described later, but in principle, the precursor games are the precursor game (third special game state), which is the final four games of the precursor game, and the precursor game, which is the precursor game before the start of the precursor game (first half game). 2 Special game state) and. (A) is an AT stock lottery table referred to during the first half of the precursor game, and (b) is an AT stock lottery table referred to during the second half of the precursor game. The AT stock lottery table is stored in, for example, ROM 1112 of the main board 409.

If you win the AT stock lottery during the precursor game, the AT game will be stocked. The stocked AT game is released, for example, after the end of the AT game that has entered after the precursor game, for example, after the precursor game or without the precursor game.

In the AT stock lottery table, the lottery value of AT stock is defined for each small winning combination won in the game. The AT stock lottery performed during the first half of the precursor game is also called a B1 lottery, and the AT stock lottery performed during the second half of the precursor game is also called a C1 lottery.

The denominator of the lottery value of the AT stock lottery table is 65536. For example, if a weak watermelon is won during the first half of the game, there is a 1500/65536 chance of winning the AT stock. In this chapter, the lottery value of AT stock in each small winning combination is different in the B1 lottery and the C1 lottery. Further, in the example of FIG. 689, the AT stock lottery table includes a probability column, but the value in each probability column can be calculated as a quotient obtained by dividing the corresponding lottery value by 65536, which is the denominator, and therefore the AT stock lottery. The table does not have to include a probability field.

FIG. 690 is an example of a pseudo bonus lottery table. The pseudo bonus lottery table is stored in ROM 1112 of the main board 409. The pseudo bonus is an example of an advantageous gaming state. For example, a pseudo bonus can be won in a normal game including a precursor game and an AT game.

If the pseudo-bonus is won, the pseudo-bonus precursor game within a predetermined number of games is executed. Pseudo-bonus precursor When a specific small winning combination (for example, replay) is established after the end of the game, the pseudo-bonus starts from the next game by stopping the reels in a predetermined push order. The predetermined pressing order is notified by, for example, the image display body 500 or the speaker 512.

In the predetermined pressing order, the player aims at the bonus symbol (for example, "7" or "BAR") and presses the bonus symbol to a predetermined shape (for example, "7, 7, 7"). , "BAR / BAR / BAR", "7.7 / BAR", etc.), but even if the predetermined shape is not aligned, the pseudo bonus is entered.

During the pseudo bonus, for example, the lottery value of the small winning combination probability table similar to that when the AT flag is ON is referred to. In addition, during the pseudo-bonus, as in the case of AT, an effect indicating the winning small winning combination type is executed using the image display body 500 and the speaker 512, and the winning small winning combination is paid out as compared with the normal game. Can be easily received.

The pseudo-bonus ends with a predetermined end condition. A predetermined number of games have been executed since the start of the pseudo-bonus, a predetermined number of medals have been paid out since the start of the pseudo-bonus, and a predetermined number of small wins have been established since the start of the pseudo-bonus. This is an example of the end condition of.

In this way, the point where the section where the number of medals increases is started by aligning the bonus symbols with a predetermined shape (for example, "7,7,7", "BAR, BAR, BAR", "7,7, BAR", etc.). In, it is generally called a pseudo-bonus because it is very similar to a real bonus, but the details of the pseudo-bonus in this chapter will be described later.

FIG. 691 is an example of the AT initial game number lottery table. The AT initial game number lottery table is stored in ROM 1112 of the main board 409. The AT initial game number lottery table defines the number of AT games when the AT first hit or the AT stock is won for each state at the time of the lottery.

The denominator of the lottery value in the AT initial game number lottery table is 128. For example, when the first AT hit is won during a normal game, the probability that the initial number of AT games is 50 games, 100 games, 200 games, and 300 games is 32/128. The expected values of the number of AT initial games in the A1 lottery, the B1 lottery, the C1 lottery, and the D1 lottery are 162.5 games, 112.5 games, 96.875 games, and 193.75 games, respectively. That is, the expected value of the number of AT initial games is large in the order of relief state game> normal game (excluding precursor game)> precursor game first half game> precursor second half game.

FIG. 692 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a stop type of various bells. (A) is an example of a stop type of a common bell. When the common bell is won, the bell stops at the middle stage of the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c (middle stage alignment) regardless of the reel stop order, and 10 medals are paid out.

(B1) is an example of a stop type in the case where the middle reel 301b is stopped first when the middle 1st bell is won. In this case, the bells stop at the lower stage of the left reel 301a, the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, and the upper stage of the right reel 301c (aligned to the right), and 10 medals are paid out. (B2) is an example of a stop type in which the left reel 301a or the right reel 301c is stopped first when the middle 1st bell is won. In this case, the bells do not stop at the lower stage of the left reel 301a, and the bells do not line up horizontally or diagonally and stop in a lost shape, and medals are not paid out.

(C1) is an example of a stop type in which the middle reel 301b is stopped first when the special bell is won when the AT flag is off (that is, when the AT is not in progress). In this case, the bells stop at the lower tiers of the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c (the lower tiers are aligned), and two medals are paid out. (C2) is an example of a stop type in which the left reel 301a or the right reel 301c is stopped first when the special bell is won when the AT flag is off (that is, when the AT is not in progress). In this case, although the bell stops at the lower stage of the left reel 301a, the bells stop in a lost shape without being aligned horizontally or diagonally, and one medal is paid out.

(C3) is an example of a stop type in which the middle reel 301b is first stopped when the special bell is won when the AT flag is on (that is, during AT). In this case, the bells stop at the upper stage of the left reel 301a, the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, and the lower stage of the right reel 301c (aligned downward to the right), and 10 medals are paid out. (C4) is an example of a stop type in which the left reel 301a or the right reel 301c is stopped first when the special bell is won when the AT flag is on (that is, during AT). In this case, the bells do not stop at the lower stage of the left reel 301a, and the bells do not line up horizontally or diagonally and stop in a lost shape, and medals are not paid out. That is, the special bell is designed so that the control for stopping the reel differs depending on whether or not it is in AT (whether or not the AT flag is on) (control for changing the displayed symbol is executed).

[11-2. Specific example of precursory production]
693 and 694 are explanatory views showing an example of a precursory effect. (A) is a state when the lever is turned on in the first half of the precursor game. (A) is a game in which the middle 1st bell is won. Precursor If you win a special bell or a middle 1st bell during the first half of the game, the reel push order for paying out 10 medals (the maximum number of medals to be paid out in the middle 1st bell winning game) (push to stop the middle reel 301b first) The effect indicating (in order) is executed at a predetermined ratio, and the player can obtain 10 medals by following the instruction of the effect.

The predetermined ratio may be the same as the ratio at which the push order effect is executed in the AT game, but is lower than the ratio at which the push order effect is executed in the AT game, and in a normal game excluding the precursor game. It may be higher than the ratio at which the push order effect is executed. For example, when the execution ratio of the push order effect is 1/1 and 0/1 when the special bell or the middle 1st bell is won in the AT game and the normal game, respectively, when the middle 1st bell is won in the first half of the precursor. The execution ratio of the push order effect is 1/2.

Specifically, for example, on the image display body 500, an enemy character is displayed at a position directly above each of the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c. In addition, the central enemy character is displayed in such a manner that it appears to be in front of the other enemy characters, and the number "1" is displayed at the bottom of the central enemy character. Further, the special display LED 612b is displayed with "8" indicating that the pushing order in which the middle reel 301b is the first stop is correct (see FIG. 672).

In addition, in the push order instruction effect, in addition to the display effect using the image display body 500 or the like, a sound such as "Middle !!" is output from the speaker 512, and the middle reel 301b is the left reel 301a and the left reel 301a. It may be lit stronger than the right reel 301c to indicate that the middle reel 301b is stopped first.

In (B), the player first stops the middle reel 301b and then stops all reels according to the instruction in (A). In the symbol variation display device 300, the bells are aligned upward to the right, and 10 medals are paid out. On the image display body 500, an image of a mode in which three enemy characters are pushed and defeated, and an image described as "10 GET!" Showing that 10 sheets have been paid out are displayed. In addition, the special display LED displays "10" indicating that 10 sheets have been paid out.

(C) is a state when the lever of the game in the latter half of the precursor is turned on. (C) is a game in which the middle 1st bell is won. If the 1st bell is won during the second half of the precursor game, an instruction effect different from that of the first half of the precursor is executed. That is, an effect indicating the push order of the reels that cannot obtain 10 medals (here, the push order in which the left reel 301a is stopped first) is executed, and the player follows the instructions of the effect to make one piece. You can win medals.

Specifically, for example, on the image display body 500, an enemy character is displayed at a position directly above each of the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c. In addition, the enemy character on the left is displayed in such a manner that it appears to be in front of the other enemy characters, and the number "1" is displayed at the bottom of the enemy character on the left.

In addition, the line "Left!" Is displayed indicating that the left reel 301a should be stopped as the first stop. Further, the special display LED 612b may display "7" indicating that the pressing order for the left reel 301a as the first stop is correct (see FIG. 672), or the special display LED 612b may not be lit.

Although the background image of the image display body 500 is not drawn in FIG. 693, for example, there may be a period during which the background image is displayed, and (A) (that is, the precursory first half game) and (C) (that is, that is). The background image in the precursory second half game) may be different. Further, the period in which the background image is displayed is, for example, longer in (A) than in (C). In (C), since the number of games remaining until the start of AT is small, the main effect is more focused than the background image.

In (D), the player first stops the left reel 301a and then stops all reels according to the instruction in (C). In the symbol variation display device 300, the bells are stopped at the lower stage of the left reel 301a, and the bells are stopped in a lost shape without being aligned horizontally or diagonally, and one medal is paid out. In addition, the image display body 500 displays an image in which three enemy characters are pushed and defeated, and an image described as "1GET!" Indicates that one piece has been paid out. .. In addition, the special display LED displays "1" indicating that one piece has been paid out. In addition, although the mode of the image displayed on the image display body 500 is the same in (B) and (D), for example, (B) has a larger number of medals to be paid out, so that more effects can be obtained. An image of a different aspect may be displayed, such as an image of an aspect wearing the above.

(E) is the state at the time of lever-on in the game in which the rare small role was won in the latter half of the precursor. Even if a rare small role is won in the first half of the precursor, the same production as in (E) and (F) described later is performed. In (E), it is assumed that the strong cherry has been won. If a rare small role is won during the second half of the precursor game, for example, an image indicating that it is a chance (“CHANGE!”) And an image of an enemy character are displayed on the image display body 500.

It is desirable that the image size of the enemy character is larger than the image size of the character displayed when the lever of the game in which the middle 1st bell is won is turned on. Further, for example, the winning rare small role may be indicated by the color of the enemy character's clothes, the aura worn by the enemy character, or the enemy character itself (for example, if the winning combination is cherry, red, watermelon). If so, green etc.). In (E), since the strong cherry is won, for example, an enemy character dressed in red may be displayed.

In FIG. 694 (F), in (E), the player has won a prize on the symbol variation device 300. Two medals have been paid out. If the strong cherry is won, the cherries can be aligned on the lower stage of the left reel 301a, the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, and the upper stage of the right reel. The image display body 500 displays an image in which the enemy character that appeared in (E) is pushed away and defeated. In addition, "2" indicating that two payouts have been made is displayed on the special display LED.

(G) is a state at the time of lever-on of the final game (that is, the game immediately before the start of AT) in the latter half of the precursor. In the final game in the latter half of the precursor, rock-paper-scissors production will be performed. In (G), an image indicating that rock-paper-scissors starts is displayed on the image display body 500. The hand displayed on the left side of the image display body 500 is the hand of the ally character, and the hand displayed on the right side is the hand of the enemy character. Further, in (G), as in (C), the middle 1st bell is won, and an effect indicating the push order for first stopping the left reel 301a is executed.

It should be noted that the effect of winning the middle 1st bell and showing the push order for stopping the left reel 301a first may be displayed until the end of the game, but since it is the final game of the precursor game, it is displayed. Push order to stop the left reel 301a first until the result of the final game is displayed (for example, after a predetermined time has passed by pressing the start lever 210 or when the second stop button is pressed). You may erase the effect indicating. This is to concentrate the player's consciousness on the rock-paper-scissors production.

(H) is a state after the player first stops the left reel 301a and then stops all reels in accordance with the instruction in (G) in the final game in the latter half of the precursor (that is, the game immediately before the start of AT). Is. An image in which the ally character wins the enemy character by playing rock-paper-scissors, an image informing the player of the entry into the AT game, and an image showing that one payout has been made are displayed on the image display body 500.

(I) is a state when the lever is turned on in the AT start game. An image (AT start! 100G!) Showing that an AT game that continues for at least 100 games has started is displayed on the image display body 500. In addition, (I) is a game in which the middle 1st bell is won. If the middle 1st bell is won during the AT game, an effect showing the reel pushing order for paying out 10 medals is executed, and the player can obtain 10 medals by following the instructions of the effect. ..

As mentioned above, in the first half of the omen state, when the middle 1st bell or the special bell is won, a middle push instruction (that is, an instruction to stop the middle reel 301b as the first stop) appears, so that the player wins more medals. It can be done and the interest is improved. Furthermore, in the latter half of the omen state, a left push instruction (that is, an instruction to stop the left reel 301a as the first stop) appears when the middle 1st bell or the special bell is won, so that an extreme increase in the number of medals won by the player is suppressed. It is possible to suppress the loss of holes. That is, in the precursory state of this chapter, it is possible to improve the interest of the player and suppress the burden on the hall without depending on the setting of the AT transition probability of the slot machine 1.

[11-3. Various flows for precursor production]
FIG. 695 is a flowchart showing an example of the flag processing in step S107 in FIG. 645. First, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 draws the winning combination according to the random number extracted in step S106 of FIG. 645 and the lottery value shown in the small winning combination probability table of FIG. 686 (S6721). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether AT_FLG is off (S6722). When AT_FLG is on, it indicates that the current state is the AT state, and when it is off, it indicates that the current state is not the AT state.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_FLG is on (S6722: NO), it executes the process when AT_FLG is on (S6723) and ends the flag process. Details of step S6723 will be described later. When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_FLG is off (S6722: YES), it determines whether or not AT_ZN_FLG is off (S6724).

When AT_ZN_FLG is on, it indicates that the current state is the precursor state of AT, and when it is off, it indicates that the current state is not the precursor state of AT. Note that AT_ZN_FLG is a general term for AT_ZN_FLG1 and AT_ZN_FLG2, which will be described later. When AT_ZN_FLG is on, it means that it is on when at least one of AT_ZN_FLG1 and AT_ZN_FLG2 is on, and when AT_ZN_FLG is off, it means that both AT_ZN_FLG1 and AT_ZN_FLG2 are off.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_ZN_FLG is on (S6724: NO), it executes the process when AT_ZN_FLG is on (S6725) and ends the flag process. Details of step S6725 will be described later. When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_ZN_FLG is off (S6724: YES), it determines whether or not AT_ST_FLG is off (S6726). When AT_ST_FLG is on, it indicates that the AT is in stock (that is, the AT stock lottery is won but the stocked AT is not released), and when it is off, the AT is in stock. Indicates that there is no state.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_ST_FLG is on (S6726: NO), it executes the process when AT_ST_FLG is on (S6727) and ends the flag process. Details of step S6727 will be described later. When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_ST_FLG is off (S6726: YES), it determines whether or not KYUSAI_FLG is off (S6728). When KYUSAI_FLAG is on, it indicates that it is in a relief state, and when it is off, it indicates that it is not in a relief state.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that KYUSAI_FLG is on (S6728: NO), it executes the process when KYUSAI_FLG is on (S6729) and ends the flag process. Details of step S6729 will be described later. When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that KYUSAI_FLG is off (S6728: YES), the CPU 1110 performs an AT first hit lottery (A1 lottery) with reference to the AT first hit lottery table (S67210).

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the AT has been won in the AT first hit lottery in step S67210 (S67211). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT has not been won (S67211: NO), the flag processing ends. When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT has been won (S67211: YES), the CPU 1110 draws the AT initial game number by referring to the A1 lottery column of the AT initial game number lottery table (FIG. 691) (S67212). ..

Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 performs a lottery for the number of precursor games (A2 lottery, FIG. 688) with reference to the precursor game number lottery table (S67213). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the number of winning precursor games exceeds 4 games (5 games or more) (S67214).

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of precursor games is 4 games or less (S67214: NO), AT_ZN_FLG2 is turned on (S67215), and the flag processing ends. When AT_ZN_FLG2 is on, it indicates that the current state is the precursory latter half state of AT, and when it is off, it indicates that the current state is not the precursory latter half state of AT.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of precursor games is 5 or more (S67214: YES), AT_ZN_FLG1 is turned on (S67216), and the flag processing ends. When AT_ZN_FLG1 is on, it indicates that the current state is the first half state of AT, and when it is off, it indicates that the current state is not the first half state of AT.

FIG. 696 is a flowchart showing an example of processing during AT precursor, that is, processing when AT_ZN_FLG is on (S6725). First, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not AT_ZN_FLG1 is on (S6731).

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_ZN_FLG1 is on (S6731: YES), it notifies the sub board 510 that AT_ZN_FLG1 is on, and the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510 sets the effect state 1 ( S6732). The effect state 1 is an effect state in which an operation instruction effect for first stopping the middle reel 301b is executed when the winning combination is the “middle 1st bell” or the “special bell”. Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 executes the AT stock lottery (B1 lottery) with reference to the AT stock lottery table for the B1 lottery (S6733), and transitions to step S6738 described later.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_ZN_FLG1 is off (S6731: NO), it notifies the sub board 510 that AT_ZN_FLG1 is off (AT_ZN_FLG2 is on), and the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510. Sets the effect state 2 (S6734). The effect state 2 is an effect state in which an operation instruction effect for first stopping the left reel 301a is executed when the winning combination is the “middle 1st bell” or the “special bell”.

Only one of the effect state 1 and the effect state 2 can be set. That is, when the process of step S6731 or step S6734 is executed while one of the effect states has already been set, for example, after resetting the set effect state, the process of step S6731 or step S6734 is executed. Alternatively, a new effect state may be overwritten without resetting the set effect state.

Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not C1_KINSHI_FLG is off (S6735). When C1_KINSH_FLG is on, it indicates that the C1 lottery is prohibited, and when it is off, it indicates that the C1 lottery is not prohibited.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that C1_KINSHI_FLG is off (S6735: YES), the CPU 1110 executes the AT stock lottery (C1 lottery) with reference to the AT stock lottery table for the C1 lottery, and proceeds to step S6738. To do. In the AT stock lottery table described above, the winning rate of AT stock is set lower in the C1 lottery (that is, the lottery in the latter half of the precursor and when C1_KINSHI_FLG is off) than in the B1 lottery (that is, the lottery in the first half of the precursor). If the winning rate of AT stock is set low, the burden on the hall can be suppressed, and in the latter half of the omen, a rock-paper-scissors effect is executed to notify whether or not the AT can enter, so the winning rate of AT stock is low. This is because the interest of the player is unlikely to decline.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that C1_KINSHI_FLG is on (S6735: NO), the CPU 1110 executes a pseudo bonus lottery (C2 lottery) with reference to the pseudo bonus lottery table, and proceeds to step S6738.

Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the lottery (that is, any of the B1 lottery, the C1 lottery, and the C2 lottery) in the step immediately before the step S6738 has been won (S6738). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the lottery in the step immediately before step S6738 has not been won (S6738: NO), the process proceeds to step S67311 described later.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the lottery in the step immediately before step S6738 has not been won (S6738: YES), the AT initial game number lottery table is referred to and the stocked AT initial game number lottery is performed. Do (S6739). If the number of games of the pseudo-bonus is fixed, or if the end condition of the pseudo-bonus is that a predetermined number of predetermined small wins are satisfied, the process of step S6739 may not be executed. When the number of pseudo-bonus games is determined by lottery, in step S6739, for example, the number of pseudo-bonus games is determined using a pseudo-bonus game number lottery table (not shown).

If the pseudo-bonus is won, for example, the pseudo-bonus is immediately activated. Specifically, the next game of the game in which the pseudo-bonus is won (more specifically, the pseudo-bonus starts after a predetermined time (period) elapses after the result of the game in which the pseudo-bonus is won and the pseudo-bonus is won is shown. (The state transitions to the pseudo-bonus state). The predetermined time (period) is, for example, the time (period) from when all reels are stopped until the payout of medals is completed). That is, there is no precursor game of pseudo-bonus. Further, since there is no precursor game of the pseudo-bonus, the effect indicating whether or not the pseudo-bonus is correct (the effect corresponding to the rock-paper-scissors effect before the start of AT) may not be executed. Also, the digestion game in the pseudo-bonus may be subtracted from the precursor game. As a result, for example, the pseudo bonus can be started while digesting the precursor game, and when the precursor game ends during the pseudo bonus, the pseudo bonus is executed from the precursor game to the AT game. be able to.

Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 turns on AT_ST_FLG (S67310). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 subtracts 1 from the remaining number of precursor games (S67311). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the number of remaining games of the precursor game is 4 (S67312). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of remaining games of the precursor game is 4 (S67312: YES), AT_ZN_FLG1 is turned off and AT_ZN_FLG2 is turned on (S67313).

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the effect state 1 is set (whether or not AT_ZN_FLG1 is on) (S67314). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the effect state 1 is not set (whether AT_ZN_FLG1 is off) (S67314: NO), the process when AT_ZN_FLG is on ends.

When it is determined that the effect state 1 is set (AT_ZN_FLG1 is on) (S67314: YES), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 executes the precursor puncture lottery (S67315). The precursor puncture lottery is a lottery for extinguishing the winning ATs (first hit AT and stock AT) and ending the precursor state. The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the precursor puncture lottery has been won (S67316). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the precursor puncture lottery has not been won (S67316: NO), the process when AT_ZN_FLG is on ends.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the precursor puncture lottery has been won (S67316: YES), turns off all the flags (S67317), turns on KYUSAI_FLG (S67318), and ends the process when AT_ZN_FLG is on. To do. In other words, although the AT disappears by winning the precursory puncture lottery, it is possible to enter the relief state.

In other words, by winning the AT lottery and making it a game that does not necessarily shift to the latter half of the precursor even if it shifts to the first half of the precursor, the player hopes that he will not win the punk lottery rather than simply enjoying the precursor effect. You can proceed with the game while playing. Therefore, unlike the precursors of conventional slot machines that simply provide a sense of security, the slot machine 1 of this chapter can provide a thrill to the player even during the precursors.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of remaining games of the precursor game is not 4 (S67312: NO), it determines whether or not the number of remaining games of the precursor game is 0 (S67319). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of remaining games of the precursor game is not 0 (S67319: NO), the CPU 1110 proceeds to step S67314 described above. When it is determined that the number of remaining games of the precursor game is 0 (S67320: YES), AT_ZN_FLG is turned off (S67321), and the process when AT_ZN_FLG is on ends.

FIG. 697 is a flowchart showing an example of processing in a state where AT is in stock, that is, processing when AT_ST_FLG is on (S6727). First, the CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510 sets the effect state 1 (S6741). That is, in the precursor of the stocked AT, the middle push instruction appears when the middle 1st bell and the special bell are won, that is, the same state as the first half of the precursor. In step S6741, instead of the effect state 1, the effect state 2 (that is, the same state as the latter half of the precursor) may be set.

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether AT_STZN_FLG is off (S6742). When AT_STZN_FLG is on, it indicates that it is a precursor state of stocked AT, and when it is off, it indicates that it is not a precursor state of stocked AT.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_STZN_FLG is on (S6742: NO), the CPU 1110 proceeds to step S6745 described later. When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_STZN_FLG is off (S6742: YES), it sets 5 games as the number of precursor games of the AT stock precursor (S6743).

The number of precursor games of AT stock precursor does not have to be 5, but it is desirable that the number of precursor games of AT stock is shorter than the average number of precursor games of AT for the first time (average number of precursor games in A2 lottery). This is because if it takes a large number of games to release the AT even though the AT is in stock, the player's interest will be reduced. Further, when AT_FLG is off and AT_ST_FLG is on, the precursor game is always set via step S6743, so that the AT stock is not released without passing through the precursor after the end of AT. .. In other words, AT's consecutive villas will always go through the AT stock precursor.

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 turns on AT_STZN_FLG (S6744). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 subtracts 1 from the number of remaining precursor games of the AT stock (S6745). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the number of remaining precursor games of the AT stock is 0 (S6746). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of remaining precursor games of the AT stock is not 0 (S6746: NO), the CPU 1110 ends the process when AT_ST_FLG is on.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of remaining precursor games of the AT stock is 0 (S6746: YES), the AT_STZN_FLG is turned off (S6747), the AT_ST_FLG is turned off (S6748), and the AT_ST_FLG is turned on. End the process.

As described above, the AT stock precursor is in the same state as the first half of the precursor of the first AT hit, and the production state 2 should not be set in the AT stock precursor. That is, in the AT stock precursor, the AT stock is released without going through the same state as in the latter half of the precursor of the first AT hit.

FIG. 698 is a flowchart showing an example of the relief state processing, that is, the processing when KYUSAI_FLG is on (S6729). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 notifies the sub board 510 that KYUSAI_FLG is on, and the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510 executes an operation instruction effect in which the left reel 301a is first stopped regardless of the winning combination. (S6751).

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 refers to the AT first hit lottery table and executes the AT first hit lottery (D1 lottery) (S6752). The first-hit probability in the D1 lottery is the same as the first-hit probability in the A1 lottery (Fig. 687). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the AT first hit lottery (D1 lottery) has been won (S6753). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT first hit lottery (D1 lottery) has not been won (S6753: NO), the KYUSAI_FLG is turned off (S6754), and the process when the KYUSAI_FLG is on ends.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT first hit lottery (D1 lottery) has been won (S6753: YES), the CPU 1110 executes the AT initial game number lottery by referring to the AT initial game number lottery table (S6755). ).

Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 refers to the precursor game number lottery table for the D2 lottery and executes the lottery for the precursor game number. However, in the game before the game that won the precursory puncture lottery, if the player plays the game according to the instruction to the operation instruction (that is, the reels are stopped according to the notified reel push order), D2- If one lottery is held and the instructions are not followed, a D2-2 lottery shall be held.

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the number of winning precursor games exceeds 4 games (5 games or more) (S6757). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of precursor games is 4 games or less (S6757: NO), AT_ZN_FLG2 is turned on (S6758), and the process when KYUSAI_FLG is turned on ends. When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of precursor games is 5 or more (S6757: YES), the AT_ZN_FLG1 is turned on (S6759), and the process when KYUSAI_FLG is on ends.

FIG. 699 is a flowchart showing an example of processing after the reels are completely stopped. The process of FIG. 699 is performed immediately after the result is YES in step S209 of FIG. 673, for example. The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not AT_ZN_FLG2 is on (S6761). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_ZN_FLG2 is off (S6761: NO), the CPU 1110 proceeds to step S6765 described later.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that AT_ZN_FLG2 is on (S6761: YES), whether or not a left push navigation (that is, an operation instruction effect in which the left reel 301a is the first stop) has occurred in the game. Is determined (S6742). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the left push navigation has not occurred (S6742: NO), the process proceeds to step S6765 described later.

When it is determined that the left push navigation has occurred (S6742: YES), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the game has been middle-pressed (that is, whether the middle reel 301b was the first stop) (S6763). ). When it is determined that the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 is not pressed in the middle (that is, the left reel 301a or the right reel 301c is the first stop) (S6763: NO), the process proceeds to step s6765 described later.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the button has been pressed in the middle (S6763: YES), the CPU 1110 turns on C1_KINSHI_FLG (S6764). That is, in the latter half of the omen (the state in which the production state 2 is set), if the left push navigation is generated but the middle push is performed, C1_KINSHI_FLG is set and the C1 lottery is not performed. (See step S6735). This makes it possible to prevent the player from stopping the middle reel 301b first and winning 10 medals when the middle 1st bell or the special bell is won in the latter half of the omen.

Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the game is a game immediately before AT_ZN_FLG2 is turned on (S6765). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the game is not the game immediately before AT_ZN_FLG2 is turned on (S6765: NO), the CPU 1110 proceeds to step S6767, which will be described later.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the game is a game immediately before AT_ZN_FLG2 is turned on (S6765: YES), the sub board 510 is stopped by a left push navigation command, that is, the left reel 301a is stopped as the first stop. A command for executing an effect indicating what should be done is notified (S6766).

Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the number of remaining games of the precursor game is 0 (S6767). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of remaining games of the precursor game is not 0 (S6767: NO), the CPU 1110 ends the process after all reels are stopped as shown in this flowchart.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the number of remaining games of the precursor game is 0 (S6767: YES), the CPU 1110 executes a freeze effect for 10 seconds (S6768). During the freeze effect, the reel does not start even if the start lever 210 is pressed. Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 turns on AT_FLG (S6769), and ends the process after all reels are stopped as shown in this flowchart.

[11-4-1. Specific example of precursory production 2]
FIG. 700 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a precursory effect. FIG. 700 (A) shows a state in which the AT game started in FIG. 694 (I) has ended. As described above, it is assumed that the AT stock has been won according to the left push navigation in the game at the time of the latter half of the omen shown in FIGS. 693 (E) to 694 (F). In (A), a display showing the result in the AT game (for example, the total number of continuous games of AT and the number of medals won) is displayed on the image display body 500.

(B) is a state in which the precursor game of AT stock has started. Since he owns AT stock, he has entered the precursor game of AT stock immediately after the end of AT. As described above, the precursor game of AT stock is in the same production state as the precursor game at the time of the first hit of AT. (B) is a game in which the middle 1st bell is won, and a middle push instruction appears when the lever is turned on.

(C) is the final game of the AT stock precursor game. It is a game that has won the 1st bell in the middle, and a middle push instruction appears when the lever is turned on. Furthermore, since it is the final game of the precursor game, the rock-paper-scissors effect is executed, and the ally character is in a winning state. (D) is a stocked AT start game.

As described above, the AT released in FIG. 700 was acquired in the latter half of the precursory period. Also, if the left-push navigation is not followed in the second half of the precursor game, C1_KINSHI_FLG will be turned on, so the fact that the AT was stocked in the second half of the precursor means that the player follows the left-push navigation when the left-push navigation appears. That is, the reels were stopped in the push order in which the number of medals won was reduced in the middle 1st bell or the special bell.

By not passing through the latter half of the precursor when the disadvantageous operation instruction appears in the precursor of the AT stocked according to the operation instruction which is disadvantageous to the player in this way, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

As described above, in step S6741, the effect state 2 may be set instead of the effect state 1. As a result, the stocked AT precursors are in the same state as the latter half of the precursors, so that the number of medals won by the player is reduced, and the burden on the hole can be suppressed.

Further, for example, in step S6741, a lottery may be performed, and the effect state 1 or the effect state 2 may be selected and set according to the result of the lottery, or the player's operation (for example, the effect button 204 before the lever is turned on) may be selected. The effect state 1 or the effect state 2 may be selected by the operation of pressing), or the selection rate of the effect state 1 and the effect state 2 in the lottery may be changed by the operation of the player.

If the selection rate of the effect state can be changed by the operation of the player, the selection rate of the effect state may be changed depending on the operation mode. Specifically, for example, when the effect button 204 is pressed less than 100 times before the lever is turned on, the effect state 1 is set, and the effect button 204 is pressed 100 times or more before the lever is turned on. If there is, the effect state 2 is set. As a result, when the number of times the effect button 204 is pressed is small (less than 100 times), the time required for the press operation is short and the AT can be entered quickly, but since the effect state 2 is set, the left-press navigation Appears, and the number of medals consumed until the AT rushes increases. On the other hand, when the effect button 204 is pressed many times (100 times or more), it takes a long time to press the effect button 204 and it takes time to enter the AT. It appears, and the number of medals consumed until the AT rushes can be suppressed. In this way, it is possible to provide different game characteristics according to the operation of the player.

Further, the AT stock may be released via both the first half of the precursor and the second half of the precursor as in the case of the first hit of the AT.

It should be noted that the effect of notifying the winning of the AT stock when the AT stock is won while following the left push navigation in the game of FIGS. 693 (E) to 694 (F), that is, the game of the second half of the precursor of the first hit AT is It will not be executed in the precursor game until the first hit AT starts. In addition, it is not notified except for the final game of the precursor game controlled after the first hit AT is completed, and it is notified that the AT is executed in the final game of the precursor game (notifies that it was in stock). It is desirable that it is not a production to do). By not notifying the winning of the AT stock by the release of the first hit AT, the player does not know the existence or nonexistence of the AT stock, so that the game after the end of the first hit AT can be enjoyed with a sense of tension.

Further, as described above, in the lottery for acquiring the initial number of AT games, the average number of games is smaller and the degree of advantage is lower in the C1 lottery than in the A1 lottery. That is, the average number of games is larger and the degree of advantage is higher in the first AT hit that rushes after the end of the second half of the omen than in the AT stock that was won when following the left push navigation in the latter half of the omen. The latter half of the AT precursor is in a state of entering the AT when the remaining precursor games are exhausted, and if the degree of advantage of the AT stock acquired in the latter half of the AT precursor is greater than the first hit of the AT, the player will win a large number of medals in a short period of time. This is because it will be acquired and the burden on the hall will increase.

[11-4-2. Specific example of precursory production 3]
FIG. 701 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a precursory effect. (A) is the state when the lever is turned on in the game during the latter half of the precursor. In the game (A), the special bell has been won, and as in FIG. 693 (C), a left-push navigation indicating that the left reel 301a should be stopped as the first stop has appeared. As described in the AT first hit table of FIG. 688 and the AT stock lottery table of FIG. 689, the winning rate of the AT first hit and the AT stock when the special bell is established is extremely low (for example, 0). Is desirable.

(B) is a state in which all reels are stopped after the middle reel 301b is stopped first in the game. Since the middle reel 301b was stopped first when the special bell was won with AT_FLG off, the bell stopped at the bottom of all of the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c, and two medals were paid out. That is, according to the left push navigation, the number of medals to be paid out is larger than that when the left reel 301a is first stopped (in this case, one medal is paid out). In addition, a rare character with a fan appears on the image display body 500, and a rare effect that supports it appears.

In (B), since the middle reel 301b was stopped first even though the special bell was established in the latter half of the precursor and the left push navigation was generated, step S6764 is executed and C1_KINSHI_FLG is turned on. That is, a disadvantageous situation occurs for the player that the AT stock lottery is not performed.

However, if the AT stock lottery is simply prohibited, the situation will be extremely disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, when C1_KINSHI_FLG is turned on, the AT stock lottery is not performed, but a pseudo bonus lottery that is advantageous for the player in step S6737. Will be done. It is desirable that the winning rate of the pseudo bonus is extremely lower than the winning rate of the AT stock lottery (AT stock lottery table of FIG. 689, pseudo bonus lottery table of FIG. 690). This is to prevent creating a favorable situation for the player even though the left push navigation is ignored.

In addition, the above-mentioned rare effect can appear only when the left push navigation is displayed in the latter half of the omen, but the middle press (that is, the same operation as the operation when following the navigation appearing in the first half of the omen) ( It is a production that does not appear as a result of lottery such as a lottery for winning roles or an AT lottery, and it is also a production that does not appear if you operate according to the navigation). Even when C1_KINSHI_FLG is turned on by pressing the middle button and the situation becomes disadvantageous for the player, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest by making the rare effect appear. The AT stock lottery may be performed when C1_KINSHI_FLG is on, but it is desirable that the winning rate when C1_KINSHI_FLG is on is lower than when C1_KINSHI_FLG is off.

(C) is a state at the time of lever-on in the game in which the rare small role (strong cherry) was won in the latter half of the next game precursor of (B). In (C), no special production is performed. In (D), in (C), the player has won a prize on the symbol variation device 300. No special production is performed in (D) either.

In the games (C) and (D), although a pseudo-bonus lottery is performed, the winning rate is extremely low as compared with the AT stock lottery. Here, for example, if a special effect (effect as shown in FIGS. 693 (E) and 694 (F)) such as during the AT stock lottery is performed, the game is played even though the winning rate of the pseudo bonus is extremely low. It is desirable that no special production is performed as described above, because it makes people expect.

In addition, in the game in which the left push navigation appears in the latter half of the precursor, even if the right reel 301c is first stopped, C1_KINSHI_FLG is not turned on. If C1_KINSHI_FLG is turned on in all operations other than the first stop of the left reel 301a, the player may be overly nervous due to fear of operation mistakes, and more medals than planned may be paid out. Because there isn't. In other words, by setting the condition that C1_KINSHI_FLG is turned on (the rate at which the AT lottery is executed decreases) is the same as the push order in the first half of the precursor, it is possible to give a feeling of tension between the first half of the precursor and the second half of the precursor. it can.

In the above-mentioned example, when the special bell is won when AT_FLG is off, two medals are used when the middle reel or the right reel is stopped first, and one medal is used when the left reel is stopped first. However, one medal may be paid out when the middle reel or the right reel is first stopped, and two medals may be paid out when the left reel is first stopped.

As a result, when the special bell is won in the latter half of the omen, if the player presses the middle button without following the left push navigation, not only C1_KINSHI_FLG will be turned on, but also the number of medals won by the special bell will be reduced, so that the player can use the left push navigation. Will follow.

In addition, when a game method (a game in which the middle reel 301c is first stopped) is performed in which the rate at which the lottery for shifting to the AT state is executed decreases in the latter half of the omen, the rate at which the lottery for shifting to the AT state is executed is Although it decreases, it is higher than the game method (a game in which the left reel 301a is first stopped) in which the rate at which the lottery for shifting to the AT state is executed does not decrease, from the viewpoint of simply paying out medals.

[11-4-3: Another example of precursory production 3]
FIG. 702 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the precursory effect. FIG. 702 (A) shows a game in which the AT stocked during the precursor of the first AT hit starts in the same state as in FIG. 700 (D). In the above-mentioned flowchart and lottery table, if the AT stock lottery is won, one AT is stocked, but it is possible to win a plurality of AT stocks in one AT stock lottery. That is, for example, when the AT stock lottery is won, the stock number lottery is performed. Here, it is assumed that a plurality of AT stocks have been acquired in the game at the time of the latter half of the omen shown in FIGS. 693 (E) to 694 (F).

For example, one AT stock lottery can acquire a predetermined number (for example, 10) or less AT stocks, but the number of stocks is increased in the stock number lottery so that the number of medals acquired by the player is not excessive. The smaller the number, the higher the selection ratio (for example, one having the minimum number of stocks is 49152/65536, two are 8192/65536, and so on).

(B) is a state in which AT has ended. The same effect as in FIG. 700 (A) is performed. (C) is a game in which the precursor of the second stocked AT has started. Even if the AT ends in (B), the stock of AT remains, so that the second stock AT precursor starts from the game following the end of AT in (B). In (C), a rock-paper-scissors effect is executed to notify whether or not the second stock AT can be entered.

In this way, for each stocked AT, a notification effect (rock-paper-scissors effect) indicating whether or not the stock AT can be entered in the game immediately before the start of the stock AT is executed. However, it is desirable that the notification effect at the time of winning the AT stock is not executed for the second and subsequent AT stocks, although it may be executed for the first AT stock. If the notification effect is executed even when the second and subsequent AT stocks are won, the player can easily predict the number of stocks in advance, and is interested in the notification effect (rock-paper-scissors effect) indicating whether or not the stock AT can be started. This is because there is a risk of losing it.

(D) is a state in which all reels are stopped according to the left push navigation in the game of (C). Here, too, the notification effect is not performed. (E) is the next game of (D), and is a state in which AT has started. As in (E), in the game in which the AT starts, the effect of notifying that the AT starts for the first time is executed.

As shown in (C) to (E), one game is selected as the number of games that are the precursors of the second stock AT. In this way, when a plurality of AT stocks are won, it is desirable that the maximum number of games that are the precursors of the second and subsequent stock ATs is shorter than the number of games that are the precursors of the first stock AT. .. This is because, even though a plurality of AT stocks have been won, if the number of games that are the precursors of the second and subsequent stock ATs is long, the player feels frustrated.

However, even for the second and subsequent stock ATs, it is desirable that the number of precursor games is 1 or more (that is, 0 games are not selected). This is because if the number of precursor games of the second and subsequent stock ATs is 0, the players will be exhausted due to the continuous ATs, and the burden on the hall will be excessive. On the other hand, the number of precursor games of the second and subsequent stock ATs may be 0, and in this case, a large number of medals can be quickly obtained by the continuous ATs.

Further, when the maximum number of stocks (10 pieces) is acquired in one AT stock production, it is desirable that all the precursors of the second and subsequent stock ATs are one game. As a result, by starting the stock AT at the precursor of one game, it can be inferred that the player has acquired the maximum number of stocks at the timing before all the stocks are released, and the expectation is high. Increase.

If the predetermined operation is performed and the predetermined condition is satisfied, a lottery may be performed to lengthen the number of precursor games of the second and subsequent stock ATs. As the predetermined operation, for example, there is an operation of pressing the one-sheet insertion button 205 three times in front of the start lever 210, and as the predetermined condition, for example, there is a lottery of a winning combination by pressing the start lever 210. As a result, the precursor can be lengthened by the operation of the player, which improves the interest for the player who wants to enjoy the precursor effect. In addition, if a rare effect or the like is performed in the lottery, the interest of the player will not be reduced. Even if the start lever 210 is pressed after pressing the insertion button 206, which is different from the single insertion button 205, the lottery for delaying the release of the AT is not executed. In the above-mentioned example, the example of increasing the number of precursor games of the second and subsequent stock ATs has been described, but similarly, the number of precursor games of the first stock AT may be lengthened.

[11-4-3: Specific example of precursory production 4]
FIG. 703 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a precursory effect. (A) is a state when the lever is turned on in the final game in the first half of the precursor, and the same effect as in FIG. 693 (A) is performed. (B) is a state in which all reels are stopped in the final game in the first half of the precursor. In (B), the condition of step S6765 of FIG. 699 is satisfied, and the process of step S6766 is executed. That is, in (B), the left push navigation appears.

Specifically, in (B), the line "Left!" Is also output from the speaker. In this way, the middle push navigation appeared in the first half of the precursor, but before entering the second half of the precursor (more accurately, when the first half of the precursor game ends, before the next game starts). In addition, by notifying the player that the left reel 301a should be the first stop, it is possible to suppress a mistake in pushing the reels in the latter half of the precursor. As a result, by suppressing the reel push order error in the latter half of the precursor, it is possible to prevent C1_KINSHI_FLG from being turned on during the latter half of the precursor, that is, it is possible to prevent the AT stock lottery from being performed.

(C) is a state in which all reels are stopped in the final game in the first half of the precursor, and is a continuation state of (B). In (C), the image display body 500 displays a line saying "It's left!", Which indicates that the left reel 301a should be stopped first. The displayed dialogue is the same as the display when the lever is turned on in the latter half of the precursor. In addition, the line "Left!" Displayed in (C) (hereinafter, also referred to as the big left push line) appears when the lever is turned on when the special bell or the middle 1st bell is won in the latter half of the aura game. It is displayed larger than the line "It is!" (For example, FIG. 693 (C), hereinafter also referred to as a small left push line). In (C), the operation instruction line (“left!”) From the speaker is continuously output.

(D) is the state when the lever is turned on in the first game in the latter half of the precursor. The effect of (D) is the same as that of FIG. 693 (C), but for example, the point that the large left push line that appeared in (C) is continuously displayed, and the line of the operation instruction from the speaker ("" It's on the left! ”) Is still output.

(E) is the state when the lever is turned on in the first game in the latter half of the precursor, and is a continuation of (D). Although the large left push line is still displayed on the image display body 500, the output of the operation instruction line (“left!”) From the speaker is finished. It is desirable that the output of the dialogue sound ends before the display of the dialogue in this way because if the dialogue is continuously output from the speaker, it may interfere with the game of other nearby players. In addition, the large left push line is continuously displayed until the first stop of the game. As a result, it is possible to suppress a mistake in the reel pushing order in the start game in the latter half of the precursor. On the other hand, the display of the dialogue may end before the output of the dialogue sound. This is because there are some players who want to enjoy the effect of the precursory time using the image display body 500.

For example, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 measures the time from the transmission of the left push navigation command in step S6766 until the start lever 210 is pressed, and notifies the sub board 510. For example, the CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510 erases the large left-pressed dialogue when it is determined that the measurement time has elapsed since the large left-pressed dialogue was displayed. Therefore, depending on the elapsed timing of the measurement time, the large left push line may be erased before the start lever 210 is pressed, after the start lever 210 is pressed, and before the reel first stops.

By doing this, a sufficient amount of time has passed since the large left push line was displayed, and when the player is fully informed of the push order, the large left push line is deleted and the game is played for another production. Can attract the attention of others. Instead of measuring the measurement time, the large left push line may be erased after a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds) has elapsed.

If the large left push line is erased after the lapse of a predetermined time, the predetermined time is set so that the large left push line can be displayed across the first game and the next game in the latter half of the precursor. It may be good (specifically, for example, about 5 seconds longer than the shortest time of 4.1 seconds in one game), and a predetermined time so that the large left push line is erased during the first game in the latter half of the omen. (Specifically, for example, about 3 seconds, which is shorter than the shortest time of 4.1 seconds for one game, or the wait time when the game is digested at the fastest speed (that is, the maximum wait time). (About 1.5 seconds, which is shorter than (about 2.5 seconds)). Also, when the predetermined time is set so that the large left push line is erased during the first game in the latter half of the precursor, "1 game". It is preferable to execute the freeze effect in which the freeze time is set so as to be the shortest time of 4.1 seconds + freeze time> predetermined time in the first game in the latter half of the precursor.

In FIG. 703, since the start lever 210 is pressed before the large left push line is erased, the large left push line is still displayed, but instead of the large left push line being erased, it is small. A left-push line (that is, a line displayed when the lever is turned on when the special bell or the middle 1st bell is won in the latter half of the precursor) may be displayed. The display is continuously displayed until the first stop of the reel is performed.

(F) is a state in which the left reel 301a is first stopped in the games (D) and (E), and then all reels are stopped. In (F), the large left push line is erased, and the same effect as in FIG. 693 (D) is performed.

In the example of FIG. 703, as described above, the display size of the large left-pressed lines is larger than the display size of the small left-pressed lines, but the display size and display position of these lines may be the same. In this case, as in the above-described example, the lines displayed from the time when all reels of the first half of the precursor game are stopped can be continuously displayed even when the lever is turned on in the second half of the precursor game, but the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 is When the lever is turned on, it is not necessary to send the left push navigation command to the sub board 510.

In this case, even when the lever is turned on, the CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510 displays the dialogue based on the command transmitted in step S6766. By not transmitting the command again when the lever is turned on, it is possible to avoid a command reception failure or delay by the sub-board 510, and it is possible to avoid the above in the display of the large left push line.

In the latter half of the game in which the large left push line is continuously displayed from (C), when the middle reel 301b is first stopped without following the instruction of the large left push line, the large left push line is displayed. The display time of may be extended, or a small left-pressed line may be displayed.

In addition, when the middle reel 301b is stopped first in the state where the large left push line has already been erased in the game of the latter half of the precursor, the large left push line may be redisplayed or the small left push line may be displayed again. May be displayed. By these processes, it is possible to make the player who made a mistake in the push order in the latter half of the precursor understand the correct push order.

In the above-mentioned precursor game number lottery table (FIG. 688), the number of precursor games at the time of winning the first AT hit was 5 games or more, but the number of precursor games of 4 games or less may be selectable. When the number of precursor games of 4 games or less is selected in the first AT hit, for example, the precursor game of one game is executed, and the precursor game before that is defined as the precursor game.

In this way, when the number of games in the latter half of the precursor is one game, it is desirable that the large left push line is deleted in the middle of the one game at the latest (for example, 3 seconds after the start of display). When the number of games in the latter half of the precursor is one game, there is a high possibility that a definite effect for notifying the AT rush will be executed in the one game, so it is possible to display a large left push line in the entire period of the one game. If this is the case, it will hinder such a definite production (the above-mentioned rock-paper-scissors production), which may reduce the interest of the player. However, even in such a precursory second half game consisting of only one game, if the middle reel 301b is first stopped after erasing the large left push line, the large left push line is redisplayed or the small left push line is displayed. You may display the lines.

[11-4-4: Specific example of precursory production 5]
FIG. 704 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a precursory effect. The effect of FIG. 704 is an example of an effect performed when AT_ZN_FLG2 is on, that is, in the latter half of the precursor. (A) is the state at the time of lever-on in the game in which the rare small role was won in the latter half of the precursor. In (A), the same effect as in FIG. 693 (E) is performed. In the game (A), it is assumed that the weak watermelon has been won. However, the enemy character displayed in (A) may be displayed in a mode indicating a watermelon (for example, the clothes of the enemy character are green).

When the left reel 301a is first stopped, the weak watermelons are aligned upward to the right (that is, the watermelons stop at the lower stage of the left reel 301a, the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, and the upper stage of the right reel 301c) or downward to the right. (That is, the watermelon stops at the upper stage of the left reel 301a, the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, and the lower stage of the right reel 301c), and when the middle reel 301b or the right reel 301c is first stopped, the lower stages are aligned (left reel 301a, It is a watermelon symbol (watermelon stops at the lower stage of the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c).

(B) is a state in which the middle reel 301b is stopped as the first stop in the game of (A). When the weak watermelon is established in the latter half of the precursor, the middle reel 301b is stopped as the first stop (that is, the same operation as when the special bell in the first half of the precursor and the instruction when the middle 1st bell is established (middle push navigation) is followed) is performed. ), A predetermined message is displayed on the image display body 500.

As the prescribed message, for example, "You can press the middle button first, but the probability of pulling in is higher if you press the left side first! Oh! By the way, the pull-in probability means that the symbols are easy to align. Is displayed (hereinafter, also referred to as a kind message) (in the figure, the above-mentioned message is omitted and it is described as "You can press it in the middle ..."). The kind message is not only displayed on the image display body 500, but may be output as a sound from the speaker.

(C) is a state in which all reels are stopped and weak watermelons are prepared. The kind message has been deleted, and the same effect as in FIG. 694 (F) is being performed. As described above, when the middle reel 301b is first stopped, the watermelons are aligned in the lower stage. Therefore, when the middle reel 301b is first stopped, assuming that the maximum number of sliding frames of each reel is 4, in order to align the watermelons, the watermelons are 1 in the lower, middle, upper, or upper stages for each reel. It is necessary to press the reel stop button at the timing of being located on the frame (any of these five frames in total) two steps higher.

On the other hand, when the left reel 301a is first stopped, the watermelons can be aligned both upward to the right and downward to the right. Therefore, when the left reel 301a is first stopped, in order to align the watermelons, for the left reel, the watermelons are on the lower, middle, upper, or upper one to four steps (any of these seven frames in total). The left reel stop button 211a may be pressed at the timing of the position. That is, when the left reel 301a is first stopped, the player has more time to press the button.

Therefore, by displaying the kind message in (B), even a player who plays for the first time in the slot machine 1 can know an appropriate game method. In addition, in order to reduce the data capacity, instead of the message in (B), the same line as in FIG. 693 (C), "It's left!" May be displayed.

It is desirable that the kind message is hidden after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the start of display. If the kind message is displayed even after the time has passed so that the player can fully understand the content of the kind message, the player feels that it is hindering the production performed by the image display body 500. is there.

Further, even after the predetermined time has elapsed and the kind message is hidden, it is desirable that the kind message can be displayed by pressing the middle reel stop button 211b without pressing the start lever 210 again. .. This is to enable the player who could not read the message while the message is displayed to be guided again to the game method. That is, it is possible to display the kindness message multiple times in one game.

Although the kind message can be redisplayed without pressing the start lever 210 again in this way, when the number of remaining precursor games is 0 and the freeze effect is being executed (the process of step S6768 in FIG. 699 is executed). (When), the display of the kind message is not started. This is to concentrate on entertaining the AT game to the player in the situation where the number of remaining precursor games is 0 and it is confirmed that the AT game will start from the next game.

In the freeze effect for 10 seconds, for example, the screen suddenly blacks out in the first half 5 seconds, the blackout state continues, and the display notifying that the image display body 500 has won the AT in the second half 5 seconds ( For example, an effect of displaying a message such as "Congratulations!") Is performed. It should be noted that the kind message whose display was started before the start of the freeze effect has been erased by the start of the second half 5 seconds of the freeze effect at the latest.

That is, when the AT starts in the next game of the game in which the kind message is displayed, one kind message is displayed because the time required for the game is the game progress time plus 10 seconds of the freeze time. Longer than the time.

Further, when the middle reel stop button 211b is pressed again while the kind message is being displayed, only the display time of the kind message may be reset again while the kind message is continuously displayed. Further, if the middle reel stop button 211b is pressed again while the kind message is being displayed, the effect of displaying the kind message may be restarted from the beginning. By performing these processes, a kind message is displayed from the time when the middle reel stop button 211b is pressed again until the predetermined time elapses. Therefore, even if the player is reading the message slowly, the display time of the kind message can be extended and the kind message can be read until the end.

On the other hand, even if the middle reel stop button 211b is pressed again while the kind message is displayed, it is not necessary to reset the kind message display time and redo the kind message production, that is, the running kind message. It does not have to affect the display effect. In order to reliably stop the middle reel 301b, there is a player who presses the middle reel stop button 211b a plurality of times in succession. For example, the display time of the kind message becomes long in such a place not intended by the player. This is to avoid reeling.

In the example of FIG. 704, the kind message has already been deleted at the time of (C), but since the kind message contains information advantageous to the player, the start lever 210 is pressed, and the next after the kind message is displayed. Even if the game starts, it is desirable to continue displaying the kind message until a predetermined time has passed from the start of displaying the kind message. In this way, the kind message can be displayed across a plurality of games (2 games) in the latter half of the precursor, and does not span a plurality of games unless the first game in the latter half of the precursor is completed within the predetermined time. It can also be displayed in only one game.

However, when the game starts two games after the kind message is started to be displayed, it is desirable to forcibly hide the kind message even if a predetermined time has not passed since the kind message was started to be displayed. This is because there is a high possibility that the player is proceeding with the game one after another, thinking that the information of the kind message is unnecessary.

At this time, a new effect is executed by pressing the start lever 210. For example, all of the display, sound, and lamp light emission by the kind message effect are changed to the display, sound, and light emission by the new effect. Prioritize. This makes it possible for the player to understand the game method more reliably. Further, for example, although the display of the kind message has priority over the display by the new effect, the new effect may be prioritized over the kind message effect for sound and light emission. As a result, the player can enjoy a new effect while making the player understand the game method.

Further, for example, the new effect may be prioritized over the kind message effect for all of the display, sound, and light emission. That is, in this case, the kind message is deleted at the same time as the start of the new effect. As a result, in particular, for example, if the new production is a production with a high AT expectation, the player's expectation is improved as compared with the case where the kind message is continuously displayed.

As described above, the kind message is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) in principle, but some players feel that the information of the kind message is unnecessary. Therefore, for example, at the start of the AT game, the kind message is hidden. Further, the 10-second freeze in step S6768 may not be executed. As a result, even if the kindness message is displayed in the precursory final game, the kindness message can be deleted by pressing the start lever 210 to immediately start the first game of the AT.

Further, in this case, although the freeze effect in step S6768 is executed, the freeze time may be shortened. For example, if the freeze time is 0.5 seconds and the game is advanced at the fastest speed, the display time of the kind message is 0.5 seconds of the freeze time, which is the game time of one game considering the weight. It becomes 4.6 seconds by adding 1 second, and the display time (5 seconds) of the kind message can be shortened.

[11-4-5: Specific example of precursory production 6]
FIG. 705 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a precursory effect. (A) is a state at the time of lever-on of the next game of the game that won the puncture lottery in step S67315 in the first half of the precursor, that is, the game in the rescue state. As described above, after winning the puncture lottery, since the process of turning off all the flags in step S67317 is performed, the rescue state is entered in the state where the precursor state is completed.

By providing the puncture lottery of the precursor in this way, it is possible to suppress the burden on the hall because it does not necessarily enter the AT even if it shifts to the precursor. On the other hand, by making it possible to enter the relief state after a precursory puncture, it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest.

In (A), the image of the enemy character is displayed on the image display body 100. Further, on the image display body 500, a left-push navigation (that is, the same operation instruction as when the lever is turned on when the special bell or the middle 1st bell is won in the first half of the precursor) appears. In addition, the dialogue of the left push navigation by the enemy character is displayed. It is desirable that the enemy character and the dialogue are displayed in a manner that makes the player think that a disadvantage may occur according to the dialogue, but the instruction of pressing the middle button is not directly displayed. In addition, a display such as "Don't be fooled by the enemy character !!" may also be displayed.

(B) is a state in which the middle reel 301b is first stopped without following the left push navigation in (A). On the image display body 500, an image of a mode in which the enemy character is damaged is displayed. (C) is a state in which all reels are stopped. An image of the enemy character being blown away is displayed.

In (B), when the left reel 301a is first stopped according to the navigation of (A), for example, the winning rate of AT in the rescue state game decreases, or the number of AT initial games at the time of winning AT It will be a disadvantageous situation for the player, such as a decrease in the average value. When the left reel 301a is first stopped, for example, the image of the mode attacked by the enemy character is displayed on the image display body 500, suggesting that the situation is disadvantageous. Good. In this way, the specifications are such that an advantageous lottery can be received when the player does not follow the left-push navigation, so that the player can be provided with a capture element.

In the rescue state game, it may be set so that the AT first hit lottery can be received only when the reels are stopped in the order of pressing the correct answer. For example, the correct push order is four push orders (middle → right → left, middle → left → right, right → left → middle, right → middle →) excluding the push order that stops the left reel 301a first. Only one of the left) may be the correct answer (the probability of being able to win the first AT lottery is 25% and the difficulty of receiving the lottery is high), or three are the correct answers. (That is, the probability of receiving the AT first hit lottery is 75%, and the difficulty level for receiving the lottery is low).

In this case, in the rescue state game, when the player other than the left reel 301a is stopped as the first stop, but the correct answer cannot be obtained in the pushing order, for example, in (C), an image of a mode of being attacked by an enemy character is displayed. May be good.

In addition, when the AT lottery is won in the relief state, if the game is played according to the operation instruction (middle push navigation) in the first half of the precursor in the game that won the precursor puncture lottery, the precursor game lottery table of D2-1 and the operation instruction are displayed. If the game is played without complying with the above, the lottery for the number of precursor games in step S6756 is performed using the lottery table for the number of precursor games in D2-2 (see FIG. 688 in each case).

In the example of FIG. 688, for example, although the number of precursor games can be selected from 0 to 4, when the operation instruction is followed (when the precursor game number lottery table of D2-1 is used), the maximum game is played. The number of 4 games is selected at an extremely high rate. In the game in which the precursor puncture lottery is won, if the operation instructions in the first half of the precursor are not followed, the rescue state may not be entered in the first place. This is to give a penalty to a player who is not playing as instructed. Even if the first AT hit is not won, it is desirable that the relief state game ends in one game. By setting the relief state for only one game, the player can enjoy the relief state game with a sense of tension.

(D) is a state when the lever is turned on in the next game in the relief state. It is assumed that the player wins the first AT in the relief state and has entered the precursory state in (D). It is desirable that the navigation indicating the push order does not appear in the precursor to the winning AT in the relief state. As described above, by not displaying the navigation indicating the push order, the player can feel a sense of tension because he / she does not know whether or not he / she has entered the omen. In addition, since the maximum number of AT precursor games won in the rescue state game is four, the number of medals acquired by the player does not significantly decrease even if the navigation indicating the push order is not displayed.

On the other hand, the push order navigation may be displayed even after the next game in the rescue state. For example, the number of games in which the push order navigation can be displayed after the end of the relief state is selected by lottery. For example, the push order can be displayed only in the relief state game> The push order can be displayed up to the first precursor game after the rescue status game ends> The push order can be displayed up to the second precursor game after the rescue status game ends> The rescue status game The push order can be displayed up to the 3rd precursor game after the end> Relief state The selection ratio in the lottery is set so that the push order can be displayed up to the 4th precursor game after the end of the game.

It should be noted that the freeze effect may be performed (for example, in (A)) in the game that has shifted to the relief state. In the freeze effect, first, all reels are stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). For example, if a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the effect button 204 10 times or more) is performed in this stopped state for 5 seconds, an AT first hit lottery is performed in the relief state game, and if not performed, relief is performed. In this state, the AT first hit lottery may not be performed.

When the predetermined operation is performed and the AT first hit lottery is performed, for example, the reel is rotated in the forward direction (normal reel rotation direction) although it is frozen, and the AT first hit lottery is performed. Notify that. On the other hand, when the predetermined operation is not performed and the AT first hit lottery is not performed, for example, the reel is kept stopped or the reel is rotated in the reverse direction so that the AT first hit lottery is not performed. Notify.

In order to receive the AT first hit lottery in the relief state, an operation with a higher degree of difficulty than the operation of pressing the effect button 204 10 times or more in 5 seconds of the reel stopped state in the above-described example may be required. Specifically, for example, the effect button 204 is pressed 20 times or more in 5 seconds when the reel is stopped, or the reel stop state is shorter than 3 seconds (that is, the shortest game time (4.1 seconds) of one game). Only time) is continued, and the effect button 204 may be pressed 10 times or more while the reel is stopped. That is, the relief state may be a game state in which the game is provided for a time shorter than the shortest game time (4.1 seconds) of one game.

For example, when the first AT hit is won in the rescue state, the time may be longer than that of other games of the precursor by executing the freeze effect in the final game of the precursor. As mentioned above, when the AT is won in the relief state, the navigation does not appear in the omen, so suddenly a freeze effect is performed and the winning of the first AT hit is notified, so that the player's feeling of excitement rises sharply. be able to. Further, in order to remind the player of AT winning, it is desirable that the AT winning effect in the rescue state is the same as the AT winning effect (rock-paper-scissors effect) when the above-mentioned precursor is passed.

[12. Chance zone production]
In this chapter, an example of the chance zone production of the slot machine 1 will be described. The slot machine 1 in this chapter refers to a normal game (although it is an advantageous section described above, an instruction is not generated for the above-mentioned push order small winning combination (or an instruction is generated only with an extremely low probability). An AT rush lottery, which is an example of an advantageous gaming state, is performed at the time of execution of (referred to as a normal game), and when the AT is won in the lottery, the AT game starts. After winning the AT game, the AT game may start after a precursor game of the number of games selected by lottery (for example, selected from 0 games to 32 games).

Further, the slot machine 1 of this chapter performs a chance zone (hereinafter, also referred to as CZ) rush lottery at the time of executing a normal game, and when the CZ is won in the lottery, a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games) of CZ games are started. .. Although the CZ game is an example of a normal game, it is also an advantageous gaming state in which it is possible to win an AT with a higher probability than in a normal game other than during the CZ game. After winning the CZ game, the CZ game may be started after a precursory game of the number of games selected by lottery (for example, selected from 0 to 16 games). In addition, an instruction may be generated when the above-mentioned push order small winning combination is won during the CZ game.

[12-1. Various tables]
Hereinafter, the small winning combination winning probability, the state transition winning probability, and the like in the slot machine 1 of this chapter will be described first. FIG. 706 is an example of a small winning combination lottery table. The small winning combination lottery table is stored in, for example, ROM 1112 of the main board 409. In the small winning combination lottery table, the lottery value of each small winning combination for each state (general medium and BB (big bonus) internal medium), and the small winning combination is determined by the symbol variation display device 300 by winning each small winning combination. The number of medals to be paid out when the lines (generally called effective lines) are aligned is defined. The small role lottery is also called the A-1 lottery.

If you win the BB during the general public, you will move to the inside of the BB. When a predetermined symbol is aligned in the symbol variation display device 300 inside the BB, the BB game starts and returns to the general mode after the end of the BB game.

Inside the BB, the winning probability of the replay is set higher than that of the general one. In the slot machine 1 of this chapter, when a small winning combination is won in a game inside the BB, the small winning combination wins in preference to the predetermined symbol. In the example of FIG. 706, since a small winning combination is established inside the BB with an extremely high probability (65535/65536), it is extremely rare for the BB to win a prize even inside the BB. Furthermore, since the BB is won with a high probability (1 / 7.30) in general, most of the normal games and AT games are executed in the state inside the BB.

Further, even if the power of the slot machine 1 is turned off or the setting is changed inside the BB, the state remains inside the BB. However, when the RAM is cleared, the state is initialized and the game is started from the general public.

In the BB in the slot machine 1 of this chapter, the number of medals does not increase or increases only by an extremely small number (for example, in a BB game in which two medals are paid out by multiplying two medals, until a predetermined number of medals are paid out or a predetermined number is specified. The number of games executed, so-called zero bonus). Therefore, in slot machine 1 of this chapter, medals will be increased not by bonuses but by AT games.

The common bell is a bell that is aligned regardless of the order in which the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c are stopped. Further, in the push order bells, the XYZ bells (X, Y, Z are 1, 2, or 3 different numbers, respectively), the left reel 301a is stopped X, the middle reel 301b is stopped Y, and the right reel 301c is stopped. The bells are aligned only when Z is stopped, and when each reel is stopped in any other order, the bells are not aligned on the reels and cannot be paid out, or the number of bells is smaller than when the bells are won. (For example, one piece) will be paid out. For example, in a game in which the 213 bell is established, the bells are aligned only when the middle reel 301b is set as the first stop, the left reel 301a is set as the second stop, and the right reel 301c is set as the third stop.

The winning probability of each small winning combination is the quotient obtained by dividing the corresponding lottery value by the total value (65536) of the lottery values of all the small winning combinations in the state, and the value in the probability column (winning probability) is the winning probability of each small winning combination. Since it can be calculated from the lottery value, the small winning combination lottery table does not have to include the probability column. This also applies to other tables described later. In this chapter, the number of payouts is the same in the general and inside the BB.

FIG. 707 is an example of the AT first hit lottery table. The AT first hit lottery table is stored in, for example, ROM 1112 of the main board 409. In the AT first hit lottery table, the lottery value of the AT first hit in the normal game excluding the CZ game is defined for each small winning combination won in the game. The AT first hit lottery performed during a normal game excluding the CZ game is also called a B-1 lottery.

FIG. 708 is an example of a CZ transition lottery table. The CZ transition lottery table is stored in, for example, ROM 1112 of the main board 409. In the CZ transition lottery table, lottery values for winning CZ in normal games other than CZ games are defined for each small winning combination won in the game. The CZ transition lottery performed during a normal game excluding the CZ game is also called a B-2 lottery.

FIG. 709 is an example of the AT first hit lottery table referred to at the start of each game in CZ (that is, when the lever is turned on (when the start lever 210 is operated)). The AT first hit lottery table of FIG. 709 is stored in, for example, ROM 1112 of the main board 409. In the AT first hit lottery table of FIG. 709, the lottery value for winning the AT when the lever is turned on in the CZ game is defined for each small winning combination won in the game. The AT first hit lottery performed when the lever of the CZ game is turned on is also called a B-3 lottery.

FIG. 710 is an example of the AT first hit lottery table referred to during the simulated game in CZ. The AT first hit lottery table of FIG. 710 is stored in, for example, ROM 1112 of the main board 409. In the AT first hit lottery table of FIG. 710, the lottery value for winning the AT during the simulated game is defined for each small winning combination won in the game. The AT first hit lottery performed during the simulated game of the CZ game is also called a B-4 lottery.

The simulated game is the following production. The freeze effect starts at the start of the game or at a predetermined timing after the start of the game. During the freeze effect, for example, each reel may be stopped, or may rotate forward or reverse. Each reel is in a state where it can be pseudo-stopped by a predetermined trigger during the freeze effect (for example, an operation of the start lever 210 or a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the freeze effect). If the reel is stopped at the start of the freeze effect, the reel shall rotate before entering the state where the pseudo stop is possible.

In a state where each reel can be pseudo-stopped, each reel is pseudo-stopped by a predetermined trigger (for example, a predetermined time elapses from the start of the rotation, or each reel stop button is pressed during the rotation). The pseudo stop is, for example, a state in which the player can recognize the symbol corresponding to each frame, but the reel is not completely stopped (for example, a mode in which the reel is slightly shaken). It should be noted that the reel may be automatically pseudo-stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed from the rotation without pressing the reel stop button.

After the pseudo stop of each reel, the freeze effect ends and the reel rotation in the actual game starts by a predetermined trigger (for example, a predetermined time elapses from the pseudo stop, or the operation of the start lever 210, etc.).

As mentioned above, since the simulated game is just a kind of production, the small winning combination that looks like a prize in the simulated stop during the simulated game is not actually established, and the payout corresponding to the small winning combination is not established. Can not be received. That is, during the simulated game, not only the image display body 500 but also each reel (stop system by pseudo stop) functions as a means for displaying the effect.

Further, during a normal game, after pressing each reel stop button, for example, the reel can be stopped by sliding up to 4 frames, but the reel stop button can be pressed during the reel rotation during the simulated game. When pressing the reel to make a pseudo stop, it is not necessary to set an upper limit on the number of frames that can be slipped. That is, during the simulated game, no matter when the reel stop button is pressed, the reel can be pseudo-stopped in a stopped form determined by the time the reel stop button is pressed. It should be noted that, as in the normal game, only a maximum of 4 frames may be allowed to slide.

Further, as will be described in detail later, if the game is continued while the pressed state of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is maintained during CZ, the AT is won with a higher probability than the case where the pressed state is not maintained. Table 2 is referred to in the B-4 lottery when the pressed state of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is maintained, and table 1 is referred to in the B-4 lottery when the pressed state is not maintained.

It is troublesome for the player to execute the game while maintaining the pressed state of the one-sheet insertion button 205 in this way, but the machine discount (ball output rate) is improved because the AT winning rate is increased. On the other hand, by executing the game while maintaining the pressed state of the one-sheet insertion button 205, it becomes difficult for the player to execute the game with so-called full weight (specifically, one hand of the player plays the game). Since it cannot be used for operations to advance the game), the increase and decrease of the number of balls to be played per unit time will be slowed down, and it will be easier for the hall to predict the number of balls to be played, which in turn will make it easier to make a business plan.

In order to prevent the pressed state of the one-sheet insertion button 205 from being maintained regardless of the player's operation, the structure of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is such that the upper surface of the peripheral portion around the button and the upper surface of the button are substantially flat. (It is desirable that the structure is such that the single insertion button 205 is not pressed even if an object having a certain weight and a flat bottom surface is placed on the single insertion button 205).

In addition, during CZ, even if the one-card insertion button 205 is not held down, the AT is won with a higher probability than in a normal game, so for a player who wants to play a large number of games, one-card insertion is performed. You can also choose not to press button 205.

FIG. 711 is an example of an AT addition lottery table. The AT addition lottery table is stored in, for example, ROM 1112 of the main board 409. In the AT addition lottery table, the lottery value for winning the AT addition is defined for each small winning combination won in the game.

The AT addition lottery is executed instead of the AT first hit lottery (B-1 lottery), for example, during the AT precursor and when the lever is turned on during the AT. When the AT addition lottery is won, the AT addition game number lottery is performed with reference to the AT addition game number lottery table described later, and the AT game addition of the selected number of games is performed. The AT addition lottery is also called a C-1 lottery.

FIG. 712 is an example of the AT addition game number lottery table. The AT addition game number lottery table is stored in, for example, ROM 1112 of the main board 409. In the AT addition lottery table, a lottery value for winning each AT addition game number is defined. The AT addition game number lottery is also called a C-2 lottery.

FIG. 713 is an example of a special zone transition lottery table. The special zone transition lottery table is stored in, for example, ROM 1112 of the main board 409. Details will be described later, but during AT, instead of the CZ transition lottery, a transition lottery to the special zone is executed. The special zone transition lottery is also called the C-3 lottery. The specialized zone is a zone in which the number of games of each game AT is added with an extremely high probability.

FIG. 714 is an example of the red 7 stop pattern table. The red 7 stop pattern table is stored in, for example, ROM 1112 of the main board 409. Although the details will be described later, a pseudo game is performed during CZ, and when the game is executed in a predetermined procedure during CZ, an AT first hit lottery is performed. In the simulated game, red 7 is in the middle of the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c. Is stopped, and the stop type of the right reel 301c is determined with reference to the Red 7 stop pattern table.

The AT expectation in each game in CZ is suggested by the stop position of red 7 on the right reel 301c of the simulated game in the game. For example, in the example of FIG. 714, the AT expectation is higher in the order of middle red 7> upper red 7> lower red 7> frame lower (one lower frame below) red 7>. In particular, the middle red 7 is selected only when the AT is won, that is, the result is that the AT is confirmed.

FIG. 715 is an example of the symbol arrangement of each reel in the slot machine 1 of this chapter. FIG. 716 is an explanatory diagram showing an image of the reel in the CZ. As shown in FIG. 716, in the slot machine 1 of this chapter, a transmissive liquid crystal 301ca is arranged so as to cover the upper stage of the right reel 301c, and a transmissive liquid crystal 301cc is arranged so as to cover the lower stage of the right reel 301c.

During CZ (at least during the simulated game in CZ), an image is displayed on the transmissive liquid crystal 301ca and the transmissive liquid crystal 301cc, and the upper and lower stages of the right reel 301c become invisible. Further, in a state other than CZ, the image may not be displayed on the transmissive liquid crystal 301ca and the transmissive liquid crystal 301cc and may be in a transparent state, and if the upper and lower stages of the right reel 301c are visible, the image is displayed. May be good.

As shown in FIG. 714, when the red 7 stops at the lower stage of the right reel 301c during CZ (a little hot roll), it is better when the red 7 stops at the upper row (super hot roll). High expectations for AT winning. According to the symbol arrangement of FIG. 715, the symbol in the middle stage of the right reel 301c when the red 7 is stopped in the lower stage of the right reel 301c and when the red 7 is stopped in the upper stage of the right reel 301c are both blank.

Therefore, when an image is displayed on the transmissive liquid crystal 301ca and the transmissive liquid crystal 301cc during CZ to make the upper and lower stages of the right reel 301c invisible, and the blank stops in the middle stage of the right reel 301c, the player Cannot recognize whether the red 7 has stopped at the upper stage or the lower stage of the right reel 301c, so that the player's tension can be maintained even when the right reel 301c is stopped.

Although the details will be described later, by executing a specific operation during CZ, the images displayed on the transmissive liquid crystal 301ca and the transmissive liquid crystal 301cc are erased so that the upper and lower stages of the right reel 301c can be visually recognized. You can also.

The slot machine 1 may have a movable body capable of covering the upper and lower stages of the right reel 301c, for example, instead of the transmissive liquid crystal 301ca and the transmissive liquid crystal 301cc. In this case, for example, the initial position of the movable body is a position where the symbol of each reel can be visually recognized, and the movable body moves to a position covering the upper and lower stages of the right reel 301c during CZ, and the right reel 301c Make the upper and lower tiers invisible.

[12-2. Specific example of CZ production]
First, in order to make it easier to understand the outline of the CZ game, an example of the CZ effect will be described prior to the flowchart for executing the CZ game. 717, 718, and 719 are explanatory views showing an example of the effect in CZ. FIG. 717 (A) shows a state in which all reels of the game that won the CZ are stopped. In the game that wins the CZ, a freeze effect occurs for 5 seconds from the time when the reels are fully stopped, and the operation of the start lever 210 is not accepted during the freeze effect. Therefore, the next game, which is the start game of the CZ, may be started. Can not. When the freeze effect starts, a message indicating that the CZ has been won is displayed on the image display body 500. For example, the CZ is continuously executed for a maximum of 10 games, and if the AT is won, the CZ is terminated in the game and the AT starts from the next game.

(B) is a state in which all reels of the game in which the CZ is won are stopped, which is a continuation of (A). In (B), the freeze effect continues from (A). If the pressed state of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is maintained during the CZ, a message indicating that the AT lottery that is given preferential treatment during the CZ can be received is displayed on the image display body 500.

Further, in order to make the player surely recognize that the one-sheet insertion button 205 is pressed, an image of the one-sheet insertion button 205 with an arrow is further displayed on the image display body 500. Further, in order for the player to start the next game, which is the start game of CZ, the image of the MAX input button 206 may also be displayed on the image display body 500.

(C) is a state in which the freeze effect in (B) is released, the lever is turned on, and the CCZ game is started (the state at the time of lever on). In CZ, the simulated game starts when the lever is turned on. The image display body 500 continues to display an image of the one-sheet insertion button 205 with an arrow. Further, since CZ has started, an effect is put on the image of the one-sheet insertion button 205 in order to give the player a stronger impression of the image of the one-sheet insertion button 205.

As described above, if the one-sheet insertion button 205 is maintained in the pressed state during the CZ, it is possible to receive a preferential AT lottery during the CZ (even if the button is pressed once, the preferential treatment is given when the pressing is interrupted. Will disappear). In particular, in the AT first hit lottery table for CZ in FIG. 710, if the winning combination is a weak cherry in table 2, the AT is won at 1 / 3.77, but the winning combination is weak in table 1. If it is a cherry, the lottery value is 0, that is, the AT lottery is not performed. That is, when the pressed state of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is not maintained, not only the preferential treatment of the lottery value is not received, but also the frequency of the AT lottery is reduced as compared with the case where the pressing state is maintained.

Therefore, in order not to make the player forget to hold the button, the image showing the continuous operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is continuously displayed even if the pseudo game ends and the game shifts to the main game, and the CZ Even if the game shifts to the pseudo game performed in the second game, it is continuously displayed. That is, the continuous operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205 can be displayed across a plurality of games, and is continuously displayed until the CZ ends (until the game state shifts to a game state different from the CZ). It is a thing.

It should be noted that the single insertion button 205 is continued not only during the CZ game but also during the CZ when the game is not in progress (from the third stop in the CZ to the operation of the start lever 210). An image showing an operation instruction should be displayed. For example, this is to ensure that the player who starts the game on the slot machine 1 from the middle of the CZ also recognizes the operation instruction for the one-sheet insertion button 205. In order to ensure that the operation instruction is recognized, the so-called demo screen or the like is not displayed in the state where the game is not progressing in the CZ (from the third stop in the CZ to the operation of the start lever 210). Is preferable.

It should be noted that, after the operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205 in (B) appears, a telop image indicating an instruction to keep pressing the one-sheet insertion button 205 as shown in FIG. 719 ("Keep pressing 1BET!"). Is preferably displayed on the image display body 500.

Even if the game ends, it is desirable that the telop image remains displayed until, for example, the CZ ends (including the state in which the game is not in progress). For the convenience of drawing space, the display of the telop image is omitted in the drawings for the CZ effect such as FIG. 717.

Further, in FIG. 717 (C), the player is provided with a reel stop button to be operated by causing the lamps provided on the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b to emit light and not causing the lamps provided on the right reel 301c to emit light. It may be easy to understand. Further, an image is displayed on the transmissive liquid crystal 301ca and the transmissive liquid crystal 301cc, which hinders the visibility of the upper and lower stages of the right reel 301c.

Although the details will be described later, when the right reel 301c is first stopped in the simulated game during the CZ (stop during the simulated game indicates a pseudo stop), the AT no lottery flag is turned ON in the simulated game. , You will not be able to win the AT. Therefore, the image display body 500 is displayed with a message indicating an instruction to stop the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b before the right reel 301c (that is, an operation instruction of the left reel stop button 211a and the middle reel stop button 211b). There is.

Further, in order to make the instruction easy for the player to understand, the image display body 500 has a display in which the effects are combined with the images of the left reel stop button 211a and the middle reel stop button 211b, and the image of the right reel stop button 211c. A display with a cross mark on it and a display are displayed.

(D) is a state in which the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are stopped according to the instruction in (C). During the CZ simulated game, if the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are first stopped or second stopped aiming at red 7 in the middle stage (that is, the frame above the middle stage or the middle stage within 4 frames). If the reel stop button is pressed at the timing when the red 7 is located on the left reel 301a), the red 7 stops at the middle stage of the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c. As long as the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are stopped first or second, the red 7 may be stopped in the middle stage regardless of the timing of pressing the reel stop button.

Further, since the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are stopped and only the right reel 301c is rotating, a cross mark is arranged on the image of the left reel stop button 211a and the middle reel stop button 211b on the image display body 500. The display and the display in which the effect is put together on the right reel stop button 211c are displayed. Further, on the image display body 500, a message indicating an instruction to stop the red 7 (that is, an operation instruction of the right reel stop button 211c) is displayed in the middle stage of the right reel.

Further, in order to make the instruction easy to understand, the lamps provided on the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b may not emit light, and the lamps provided on the right reel 301c may emit light.

(E) is a state in which the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are stopped, and is a continuation state of (D). For example, it is the same as (D) except that a message indicating that red 7 stops in the middle of the right reel 301c is extremely hot is displayed on the image display body 500.

(F) is a state in which the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are stopped, and is a continuation state of (E). As described with reference to FIG. 714, in the simulated game in CZ, the AT winning expectation degree differs depending on the stop position of red 7 on the right reel 301c. Further, in a state where the transmission liquid crystal 301ca and the transmission liquid crystal 301cc obstruct the visibility of the upper and lower stages of the right reel 301c due to the design arrangement of the right reel 301c described above, the red 7 is stopped on the upper or lower stage of the right reel 301c. In that case, the player cannot recognize which of the red 7s has stopped.

Therefore, for a player who wants to know the stop position of Red 7 accurately, the details will be described later, but for example, the images of the transmissive liquid crystal 301ca and the transmissive liquid crystal 301cc are erased according to the amount of operation of the starting lever 210. The upper and lower stages of the right reel 301c are gradually made easier to see.

In (F), as such an operation instruction of the starting lever 210, for example, an image of the starting lever 210 is displayed on the image display body 500 together with an arrow, and if you want to know the stop position of red 7, the starting lever 210 is operated. A message indicating that it is good is displayed. That is, the instruction in (F) is not an effect of notifying or suggesting the result of the AT lottery, but is an operation instruction for improving the visibility of the reel. Since the simulated game is just an effect, the reel during the simulated game is a part of the effect display. That is, the instruction in (F) can be said to be a display for canceling the display (display of the transmissive liquid crystal 301ca and the transmissive liquid crystal 301cc) that hinders the visibility of the effect display. Note that, for example, the operation instruction of the start lever 210 in (F) may be displayed until the start lever 210 is operated.

In (C) to (E), instructions for the two operation units of the single push button 205 and the reel stop button appear at the same time, but in (F), further instructions for the start lever 210 are added, and three instructions are added. Instructions to the operation unit are appearing at the same time.

For example, in (C), an operation instruction for the reel stop button for stopping the left reel and the middle reel is displayed, and in (D) to (F), an operation instruction for the reel stop button for stopping the right reel is displayed. As described above, the operation instruction for the reel stop button can be displayed a plurality of times in one game (including the pseudo game and the main game).

Further, in (D) to (F), when the right reel is stopped according to the operation instruction for the reel stop button for stopping the right reel, the AT winning is confirmed by the stop type of red 7 as shown in FIG. That is, there are cases where the lottery result is directly notified (AT is confirmed when the middle red 7 is stopped) and cases where AT winning is expected (chance when the upper red 7 or the lower red 7 is stopped).

Even if the AT is won in the CZ, as shown in FIG. 714, the probability (1/8) that the red 7 stops in the middle stage of the right reel 301c in the simulated game is the red 7 in another position. Is preferably set lower than the probability of stopping (7/8). If the probability that Red 7 will stop in the middle row is set high, the player will not have a sense of expectation for the AT lottery result in the game when Red 7 does not stop in the middle row, and there is a risk that the interest will decline. is there.

FIG. 718 (G) shows a state in which the right reel 301c is stopped as the third stop during the simulated game in CZ according to the instructions in (D) to (F), and the instruction display for the reel stop button is also erased. There is. In (G), the red 7 is stopped in the middle stage of the right reel 301c. During the simulated game of CZ, if the third stop is aimed at the red 7 on the upper stage of the right reel 301c (that is, the reel stop button is pressed at the timing when the red 7 is located on the upper or upper frame. If pressed), Red 7 will stop at the stop position determined using the Red 7 stop pattern table. Regardless of the timing at which the reel stop button is pressed, the red 7 may stop at the stop position determined by using the red 7 stop pattern table for the right reel 301c.

Further, in (G), the player does not follow the operation instruction to the start lever 210, and the upper and lower stages of the right reel 301c remain invisible due to the transmissive liquid crystal 301ca and the transmissive liquid crystal 301cc. Further, in (G), since Red 7 is stopped in the middle of the right reel 301c, a message (GoodJob !!) indicating that there is a high possibility of winning the AT is displayed on the image display body 500.

Although the details will be described later, the remaining time of the freeze effect is overwritten with 5 seconds after the third stop of the simulated game. That is, when 5 seconds have passed from the third stop, the freeze effect ends and the reel rotation in the normal game starts. Further, in these 5 seconds, the notification effect of the AT lottery result can be executed. In (G), the image of the main character used for the notification effect is displayed on the image display body 500. In (G), an image of a standing hero character is displayed.

Even after the third stop, an image with an arrow for instructing the pressing and holding of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is displayed on the image display body 500 until the end of CZ. There is a possibility that a plurality of CZ games will be played in succession, and if the pressing of the one-card insertion button 205 is stopped in the middle, the AT winning rate in the games after the cancellation will be the one-card insertion button 205. This is because it will be lower than when it is continued.

(H) is a state in which the right reel 301c is stopped as a third stop during the simulated game in CZ, and is a continuation state of (G). In (H), the freeze production is continuing. A message indicating that the AT lottery result is notified by repeatedly hitting the MAX input button 206 and an image of the MAX input button 206 with an arrow are displayed on the image display body 500.

(I) is a state in which the right reel 301c is stopped as a third stop during the simulated game in CZ, and is a continuation state of (H). In (I), the freeze production is ongoing. A message instructing the continuous pressing of the MAX input button 206 and an image of the MAX input button 206 with an arrow are displayed on the image display body 500.

In (H) and (I), instruction effects for the two operation units of the one-sheet insertion button 205 and the MAX insertion button 206 have appeared. As described above, the instruction effects for the two operation units also appeared in FIGS. 717 (C) to 717 (E), but these two operation units were the one-sheet insertion button 205 and the reel stop button. While the instruction effect for a plurality of operation units is executed in this way, the player executes various operations by changing the operation unit to be operated, so that the player carefully observes the instruction effect. You will never get tired of playing games.

(J) is a state in which the right reel 301c is stopped as a third stop during the simulated game in CZ, and is a continuation state of (I). In (I), the freeze production is ongoing. It is assumed that the player follows the instruction of repeatedly hitting the MAX input button 206. On the image display body 500, an image in which the main character wears an aura and a message (Yes !!) indicating that the AT has been won are displayed.

In addition, although it is notified in (J) that the AT has been won, the details will be described later, but when the AT is won in the pseudo game in CZ, the game in which the pseudo game is completed and the game is shifted to the main game is still in progress. Since the AT state is not set, if the character or instruction wearing the aura displayed in (J) is deleted in the main game, the game will be stopped when the main game is completed. Therefore, it is preferable to continuously display the characters and instructions wearing the aura displayed in (J) until the game shifts to the AT state.

If the MAX input button 206 is not repeatedly hit, the AT lottery result is notified after the end of the freeze effect and by the end of the normal game that starts immediately after the pseudo game. If the AT is not won, for example, even if the MAX input button 206 is repeatedly hit, the main character does not wear an aura and falls down by the end of the freeze effect.

In addition, in order to leave the lingering sound of the CZ being executed to the player, the instruction effect of the start lever 210 may be displayed even at the start of the normal game after the end of the CZ across the CZ. However, in a normal game that is not a simulated game, hiding the reels increases the difficulty of pressing and may miss a small role, which may be disadvantageous to the player. It is desirable to display it on the image display body 500. At this time, the images of the transmissive liquid crystal 301ca and the transmissive liquid crystal 301cc hinder the visual recognition of the effect image displayed on the image display body 500, and when the start lever 210 is operated, the images of the transmissive liquid crystal 301ca and the transmissive liquid crystal 301cc are displayed on the image display body. It is erased from 500 to improve the visibility of the effect image.

FIG. 720 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the effect in CZ. Following the production of FIGS. 717 (A) to 717 (F), the production of FIG. 720 is performed. Differences from FIG. 718 will be mainly described. In (G2), the right reel 301c is stopped as the third stop during the simulated game in CZ according to the instructions in (D) to (F). In (G2), symbols other than red 7 are stopped in the middle of the right reel 301c. If the red 7 is stopped at the upper or lower stage of the right reel 301c, the blank is stopped at the middle stage, and if the red 7 is stopped under the frame of the right reel 301c (one frame below the lower stage), the blank is stopped at the middle stage. The bell is stopped.

Further, in (G2), the player does not follow the operation instruction to the start lever 210, and the upper and lower stages of the right reel 301c remain invisible due to the transmissive liquid crystal 301ca and the transmissive liquid crystal 301cc. Also, in (G2), Red 7 is not stopped in the middle of the right reel 301c, so there is not a high possibility of winning the AT, but a message indicating that there are still chances left (it is too early to give up! ) Is displayed on the image display body 500. Further, in (G2), the image of the fallen hero character is displayed on the image display body 500.

(H2) is a state in which the right reel 301c is stopped as a third stop during the simulated game in CZ, and is a continuation state of (G2). In (H2), the freeze production is continuing. A message indicating that the AT lottery result is notified by repeatedly hitting the MAX input button 206 (AT wins if the main character stands up by repeatedly hitting the MAX input button 206, non-wins if the main character does not stand up), and MAX with an arrow. The image of the input button 206 and the image are displayed on the image display body 500.

(I2) is a state in which the right reel 301c is stopped as a third stop during the simulated game in CZ, and is a continuation state of (H2). In (I2), the freeze production is continuing. A message instructing the continuous pressing of the MAX input button 206 and an image of the MAX input button 206 with an arrow are displayed on the image display body 500.

(J2) is a state in which the right reel 301c is stopped as a third stop during the simulated game in CZ, and is a continuation state of (I2). (J2) is an effect when the AT is not won in CZ. A message (boo ...) indicating that the AT was not won and a hero character who could not stand up are displayed. Although not shown, when the AT is won in CZ, the same effect as in FIG. 718 (J) is performed except that the red 7 is not stopped in the middle stage of the right reel 301c. ..

(H2) is a state in which the simulated game is completed, and is a continuation state of (J2). A message indicating that the simulated game has ended is displayed on the image display body 500. Further, the operation instruction image of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is still displayed.

(I2) is a state in which the simulated game is completed and the main game is started. However, it is assumed that a weak chance role or a strong chance role has been selected as the winning combination at the time of lever-on. Here, the weak chance role is "bonus symbol" in the upper row of the left reel 301a, "bonus symbol or watermelon" in the middle row of the middle reel 301b, "red 7" in the upper row of the right reel 301c (red 7 is in the middle row of the right reel 301c). It is assumed that (cannot be stopped) is a lost eye that can be stopped. Further, it is assumed that the strong chance combination is a lost eye in which the "bonus symbol" on the upper stage of the left reel 301a, the "bonus symbol or watermelon" on the middle stage of the middle reel, and the "red 7" on the middle stage of the right reel can be stopped.

After the end of the simulated game, for example, when a predetermined time elapses or when the start lever 210 is operated, the main game starts. The production of (I2) is the same as that of FIG. 717 (C). If a weak chance combination or a strong chance combination is selected as the winning combination at the time of lever-on and the AT lottery in the simulated game cannot be won, the same effect as CZ may be performed in the main game. That is, after (I2), the same effect as after (D) is performed in this game.

In the main game in such a case, by executing the same instruction effect as in the simulated game, the player can evoke the expectation of the player who was disappointed because he could not win the AT in the simulated game. ..

As in the example of the small winning combination lottery table in FIG. 706, the appearance rate of the strong chance combination (that is, the probability that Red 7 stops in the middle of the right reel 301c) is the appearance rate of the weak chance combination (that is, the right reel 301c. It is desirable that it is lower than the probability that Red 7 does not stop in the middle row. As a result, even in the simulated game and when the same effect as in the simulated game appears in the main game, the red 7 does not stop in the middle stage of the right reel 301c rather than the probability that the red 7 stops in the middle stage of the right reel 301c. The probability is higher. That is, it does not arouse an excessive sense of expectation in both the production in the simulated game and the production similar to the simulated game in the main game.

FIG. 721 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the relationship between the operating amount of the starting lever 210 during the simulated game of the CZ game and the visual state of the lower symbol of the right reel 301c hidden by the transmissive liquid crystal 301cc. FIG. 721 describes the relationship between the lower stage of the right reel 301c and the transmissive liquid crystal 301cc, but the same applies to the relationship between the upper stage of the right reel 301c and the transmissive liquid crystal 301ca.

As described above, since the image is displayed on the transmissive liquid crystal 301cc during CZ, the visibility of the entire lower stage of the right reel 301c is hindered until the starting lever 210 is operated. (A) shows a visual state when the starting lever 210 is operated to a position of 3/10 of the maximum movable width from the initial position. In this case, for example, the image on the upper 3/10 of the transmissive liquid crystal 301cc is erased, and the design of the portion becomes visible. (B) shows a visual state when the starting lever 210 is operated from the initial position to a position of 8/10 of the maximum movable width. In this case, for example, the image on the upper part 8/10 of the transmissive liquid crystal 301cc is erased, and the design of the portion becomes visible.

That is, when the blank symbol No. 11 stops in the middle of the right reel 301c in the simulated game, the visibility of the reel is improved by following the operation instruction of the starting lever 210 in FIG. 717 (F), and the player can improve the visibility of the reel. It is possible to know the stop position of Red 7 and, by extension, the AT expectation. On the other hand, for a player who does not want to know the AT expectation until the notification effect (the effect of repeatedly hitting the MAX input button 206) is performed, the AT expectation cannot be known by ignoring the operation instruction of the start lever 210. , Can maintain a sense of tension.

The amount of operation of the starting lever 210 is determined in real time. For example, when the starting lever 210 is operated up to 10/10 of the maximum range of motion, the image of the upper 10/10 of the transmissive liquid crystal 301cc is erased (that is, all are visible), but the player sends the starting lever 210 to the starting lever 210. When the applied force is weakened and the starting lever 210 is operated only up to 3/10 of the maximum movable width, the image is erased only up to 3/10 of the upper part of the transmissive liquid crystal 301cc. That is, in order to keep the visible state of the reel good, the player needs to maintain the operating state of the starting lever 210.

As described above, it is considered that many players continue to press the one-sheet insertion button 205 because the AT lottery value is given preferential treatment if the one-sheet insertion button 205 is maintained in the pressed state during CZ. In order to improve the visibility of the reel while receiving the preferential AT lottery, the one-sheet insertion button 205 and the start lever 210 are arranged at a distance that a general adult can operate at the same time with one hand. It is desirable to be.

However, even in such an arrangement, it is harsh for the player to keep pressing the single-insertion button 205 and the start lever 210 at the same time. When the storage release switch 209 (storage medal clearing switch) is operated when 3/10 or more is visible or all the reel symbols (10/10) are visible), the start lever 210 The predetermined visual state may be maintained even if the operation of is stopped.

The operation instruction of the starting lever 210 for improving the visible state of the reel may be erased at the timing after the starting lever 210 is operated according to the operation instruction (for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the operation). If the right reel is completely visible (10/10 is visible) and the operation instruction is still displayed, the display of other effects may be hindered and the player may not be able to fully entertain. Because there is.

In principle, the operation instruction is displayed every game during CZ, but as described above, the player selects to operate the storage release switch 209 to maintain a good visual state. If this is the case, since the player's intention has been confirmed, the operation instruction may not be displayed at all in the subsequent game in the CZ.

In addition, when the operation instruction is not displayed at all by selecting to maintain a good visual state, the maintained visual state is changed (for example, from 8/10 to 5/10). Therefore, when the storage release switch 209 is operated again, it is desirable to initialize the visual state before the change (0/10, that is, the invisible state). Further, the timing for instructing the operation of the start lever 210 to improve the visual recognition state of the reel is displayed later than the timing when the storage release switch 209 is operated again, not the timing when the storage release switch 209 is operated again. (Timing of displaying each game during CZ) should be set. Further, in this way, the maintenance / release may be repeated every time the storage release switch 209 is pressed.

The operation instruction is displayed after the second stop of the simulated game of the CZ start game, but the start lever 210 is displayed before the display of the operation instruction (for example, after the first stop and before the second stop in the simulated game). Even when the right reel 301c is operated, the degree of visibility of the upper and lower stages of the right reel 301c (display range of the image displayed on the transmissive liquid crystal 301ca and the transmissive liquid crystal 301cc) may be changed. When the start lever 210 is operated before the second stop of the simulated game to change the visibility of the upper and lower stages of the right reel 301c, for example, the instruction may not be displayed after the second stop. , Whether or not to execute the display of the instruction may be decided by a lottery based on a predetermined distribution.

If the start lever 210 is not operated even though the operation instruction is displayed, the player may not be aware of the operation instruction. Therefore, the operation instruction is given over the next game. It may be displayed continuously.

As described above, by maintaining the pressed state of the one-sheet insertion button 205, it is possible to receive a preferential AT lottery, and by pressing the right reel stop button 211c (stop type of the right reel 301c), the lottery is performed. The result can be suggested, or the AT lottery cannot be received if the reel stop buttons are not pressed in the correct pressing order. In other words, it can be said that maintaining the pressed state of the one-sheet insertion button 205 and operating the reel stop button are closely related to the transition to the AT game. Therefore, for each of the operation instruction for instructing the operation of the one-sheet insertion button 205 to maintain the pressed state and the operation instruction for instructing the operation of the reel stop button, a plurality of types of effect variations (for example, a display mode with or without an effect) , The display size is different, etc.). By having various effect patterns, the player will not get tired of these operation instruction effects and will be able to perform the operation more reliably.

On the other hand, when the start lever 210 is operated, the visual state of the effect display is improved, but the maintenance of the one-sheet insertion button pressed state and the operation of the reel stop button are more closely related to the transition to the AT game. I'm not. Therefore, it is desirable that the operation instruction for instructing the operation of the start lever 210 is an effect of only one pattern (although a plurality of types of effect variations may be provided).

[12-3. Various flows for CZ production]
Subsequently, an example of the process for realizing the CZ effect will be described. FIG. 722 is a flowchart showing an example of the flag processing in step S107 of FIG. 645. This flowchart shows an example of processing until each reel stop button becomes effective. First, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 performs a lottery (A-1 lottery) for the winning combination according to the random number extracted in step S106 of FIG. 645 and the lottery value shown in the small combination lottery table of FIG. 706 (S70001). ).

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 performs an AT first hit lottery (B-1 lottery) according to the small winning combination won in step S7701 and the lottery value shown in the AT first hit lottery table of FIG. 707 (S7002).

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the player has won the first AT hit in the B-1 lottery (S7003). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT first hit is won (S7003: Yes), the AT flag is set to ON (S7004), and 100 is set in the AT counter (counter that counts the number of remaining AT games). It is set (S7005), and the flag processing is completed.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT has not been won at the first hit (S7003: No), the CZ shift is performed according to the small winning combination won in step S7701 and the lottery value shown in the CZ shift lottery table of FIG. 708. A lottery (B-2 lottery) is performed (S70006). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the CZ transition has been won in the B-2 lottery (S7007).

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the CZ transition has been won (S7007: Yes), the CZ flag is set to ON (S7008), and 10 is set in the CZ counter (counter that counts the number of remaining games in CZ). (S70009), and the flag processing is terminated. When it is determined that the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 has not won the CZ transition (S7007: No), the flag processing ends.

FIG. 723 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed when all reels are stopped (at the time of the third stop). The process of FIG. 723 is executed instead of the ART game determination process of step S320 in FIG. 675. First, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether the AT flag is on (S70101). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT flag is on (S70101: Yes), the CPU 1110 transmits an AT command to the sub board 510 (S70102), and ends the process.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT flag is off (S70101: No), it determines whether the CZ flag is on (S70103). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the CZ flag is off (S70103: No), the process ends.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the CZ flag is on (S70103: Yes), the CPU 1110 transmits a CZ start command to the sub board 510 (S70104). Subsequently, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 executes a freeze process for 5 seconds (S70105). During this 5-second freeze, the CPU 1118 of the sub-board 510 executes, for example, the effects described in FIGS. 717 (A) and 717 (B).

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether the one-sheet insertion button 205 is pressed (S70106). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the one-sheet insertion button 205 is pressed (S70106: Yes), the pressing maintenance flag is set to ON (S70107), and the process ends. When it is determined that the one-sheet insertion button 205 is not pressed (S70106: No), the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 ends the process.

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 continuously monitors whether the one-sheet insertion button 210 is pressed during CZ (that is, while the CZ flag is on) even after the press / hold flag is set to ON. When it is detected that the one-sheet insertion button 210 is not pressed, the pressing maintenance flag is set to off again. As a result, during CZ, when the pressing of the one-sheet insertion button 210 is interrupted, the preferential AT lottery cannot be received. The determination of maintaining the pressed state of the one-sheet insertion button 205 in step S70106 may be performed until the start lever 210 is operated at the start of the next game. That is, if the one-sheet insertion button 205 is pressed when the lever of the CZ start game is turned on, the pressing maintenance flag may be set to on.

FIG. 724 is a flowchart showing an example of the flag processing in step S107 of FIG. 645 when the CZ flag is on. First, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 performs a lottery (A-1 lottery) for the winning combination according to the random number extracted in step S106 of FIG. 645 and the lottery value shown in the small combination lottery table of FIG. 706 (S70201). ).

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 subtracts 1 from the value of the CZ counter (S70202). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 performs an AT first hit lottery (B-3 lottery) according to the small winning combination won in step S7021 and the lottery value shown in the CZ middle AT first hit lottery table of FIG. 709 (S7023).

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the player has won the first AT hit in the B-3 lottery (S70204). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT first hit is won (S70204: Yes), the AT flag is set to ON (S70205), and 100 is set to the AT counter (counter that counts the number of remaining AT games). It is set (S70206), the CZ flag is set to off (S70207), and the process proceeds to step S70208 described later.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines in the B-3 lottery that the AT first hit has not been won (S70204: No), the freeze time is set to 1 hour and the freeze process is started (S70208). In this freeze, the simulated game shown in FIG. 717 (C) and the like is performed.

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 starts pseudo rotation of each reel (reel rotation in the simulated game) (S70209). The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 sets each reel stop button in an enabled state for pseudo-stopping the reels (S70210), and ends the process. Although reel rotation and stop in the simulated game are a kind of effect, since the process of rotating and stopping the reel can be executed only by the main board 409, these processes are executed by the main board 409. Further, particularly in this chapter, the AT winning rate and the like change depending on the operation mode and the like during the simulated game, that is, there are processes that affect the ball output during the simulated game, and these processes are also executed by the main board 409.

FIG. 725 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at the time of the first pseudo stop in the pseudo game in CZ. The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the first pseudo stop is the left reel 301a (that is, whether the left reel stop button 211a is pressed) (S7031). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the first pseudo stop is the left reel 301a (S70301: Yes), the CPU 1110 controls the left reel 301a so that the red 7 stops in the middle stage of the left reel 301a, and ends the process. ..

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the first pseudo stop is not the left reel (S7031: No), it determines whether the first pseudo stop was the middle reel 301b (that is, whether the middle reel stop button 211b was pressed). Judgment (S70303). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the first pseudo stop is the middle reel 301b (S70303: Yes), the CPU 1110 controls the middle reel 301b so that the red 7 stops in the middle stage of the middle reel, and ends the process.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the first pseudo stop is not the middle reel 301b (S70303: No), that is, when it determines that the first pseudo stop is the right reel 301c, the AT no lottery flag is set to ON. (S70305), the right reel 301c is controlled so that the red 7 stops under the frame of the right reel 301c (S70306), and the process ends. By the process of step S70305, when the right reel 301c is first pseudo-stopped in the simulated game during CZ, the AT lottery in the simulated game cannot be received.

FIG. 726 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at the time of the second pseudo stop in the pseudo game in CZ. The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the second pseudo stop is the left reel 301a (that is, whether the left reel stop button 211a is pressed) (S70401). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the second pseudo stop is the left reel 301a (S70401: Yes), the CPU 1110 determines whether the AT non-lottery flag is on (S70402).

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT non-lottery flag is on (S70402: Yes), the CPU 1110 controls the left reel 301a so that the red 7 stops under the frame of the left reel 301a (S70403), and performs processing. finish. When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT non-lottery flag is off (S70402: No), the CPU 1110 controls the left reel 301a so that the red 7 stops in the middle of the left reel 301a (S70404), and presses and holds the flag. Is on (S70405).

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the press / hold flag is ON (S70405: Yes), the AT first hit lottery (B-4 lottery) is performed with reference to Table 2 of the AT first hit lottery table of FIG. 710. Do (S70406). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the press / hold flag is off (S70405: Yes), the AT first hit lottery (B-4 lottery) is performed with reference to Table 1 of the AT first hit lottery table of FIG. 710. Do (S70407).

Following step S70406 or step S70407, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether the AT has been won in the B-4 lottery (S70408). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT has not been won (S70408: No), the process ends.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT has been won (S70408: Yes), the AT flag is set to on (S70410), the AT counter is set to 100 (S70411), and the CZ flag is set to off. (S70411), the process is terminated.

In step S70401, when the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the second pseudo stop is not the left reel 301a (S70401: No), is the second pseudo stop the middle reel 301b (that is, the middle reel stop button 211b is pressed)? Whether or not it was done) is determined (S70412).

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the second pseudo stop is the middle reel 301b (S70412: Yes), it determines whether the AT non-lottery flag is on (S70413).

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT non-lottery flag is ON (S70413: Yes), the CPU 1110 controls the middle reel 301b so that the red 7 stops under the frame of the middle reel 301b (S70415), and performs processing. finish. When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT non-lottery flag is off (S70413: No), the CPU 1110 controls the middle reel 301b so that the red 7 stops in the middle stage of the middle reel 301b (S70416), and in step S70405. Transition.

In step S70412, when the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the second pseudo stop is not the middle reel 301b (S70412: No), that is, when it determines that the second pseudo stop is the right reel 301c, there is no AT lottery. The flag is set to on (S70417), the right reel 301c is controlled so that the red 7 stops under the frame of the right reel 301c (S70418), and the process ends. By the process of step S70417, when the right reel 301c is second pseudo-stopped in the simulated game during CZ, the AT lottery in the simulated game cannot be received.

Further, by stopping the left reel 301a or the middle reel 301b as the first pseudo stop and the second pseudo stop, respectively, it is possible to receive a lottery using the AT first hit lottery table for CZ in which the lottery value is given preferential treatment. .. Further, by continuing to press the one-sheet insertion button 205 by the process of step S70405 to step S70406 described above, a lottery using the table 2 in which the lottery value is more preferential among the AT first hit lottery tables for CZ is received. be able to.

In the above-mentioned example, if the AT non-lottery flag is off after the second pseudo stop, the B-4 lottery according to the press hold flag is executed, but the press hold flag is set before the second pseudo stop. According to the B-4 lottery, when the AT no lottery flag is turned on, if the AT winning is won, the AT winning is canceled (the AT flag is turned off and the AT counter value is set to zero). It may be a specification (re-do).

FIG. 727 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at the time of the third pseudo stop in the pseudo game in CZ. The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the third pseudo stop is the left reel 301a (that is, whether the left reel stop button 211a is pressed) (S70501).

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the third pseudo stop is the left reel 301a (S70501: Yes), the CPU 1110 controls the left reel 301a so that the red 7 stops under the frame of the left reel 301a (S70502). The freeze time of the freeze being executed is overwritten with 5 seconds (S70503), and the process ends. In this case, since the AT lottery has not been performed, in this overwritten 5-second freeze, for example, the image display body 500 says, "In the next game, do not make a mistake in the order in which the reel stop button is pressed. It is good to display a message such as "Ne!".

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the third pseudo stop is not the left reel 301a (S70501: No), whether the third pseudo stop is the middle reel 301b (that is, whether the middle reel stop button 211b is pressed) or not. Is determined (S70504). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the third pseudo stop is the middle reel 301b (S70504: Yes), the CPU 1110 controls the left reel 301a so that the red 7 stops under the frame of the middle reel 301b (S70505). The transition to step S70503.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the third pseudo stop is not the middle reel 301b (S70504: NO), the AT winning result in the game (the result of the lottery in FIG. 710) and the red 7 stop pattern table in FIG. 714. According to the above, the stop pattern of the right reel 301c in the simulated game is drawn by lottery (S70506). Then, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 controls the right reel 301c (S70505) according to the stop pattern determined in step S70506, and transitions to step S70503.

FIG. 728 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at the time of the third stop of the main game of the game in which the simulated game is executed. The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines whether or not the AT flag is on (S76001). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT flag is on (S70601: Yes), the CPU 1110 transmits an AT start command to the sub board 510 (S70602), and ends the process.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the AT flag is off (S7601: No), it determines whether or not the value of the CZ counter is 0 (S70603). When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the value of the CZ counter is not 0 (S70603: No), the process ends. When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 determines that the value of the CZ counter is 0 (S70603: Yes), the CZ flag is set to off (S70604), and a CZ end command is transmitted to the sub board 510 (S70605). , End the process.

[12-4. Specific example of CZ production 1]
In the above-mentioned example of the effect in the CZ, the game property is to push the red 7 during the simulated game, but in at least a part of the games of the CZ, the game property that does not need to be pushed may be adopted.

Specifically, in the above-mentioned example, in the simulated game, if the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are first stopped or second stopped aiming at red 7 in the middle stage (that is, 1 to 4 from the middle stage or the middle stage). By pressing the reel stop button at the timing when Red 7 is located on the frame above the frame), Red 7 could be stopped in the middle stage. Further, in the simulated game, if the third stop is aimed at the red 7 on the upper stage of the right reel 301c (that is, if the reel stop button is pressed at the timing when the red 7 is located on the upper stage or the frame one above the upper stage), Red 7 could be stopped at the stop position determined using the Red 7 stop pattern table. Hereinafter, a game including such a pseudo game is also referred to as a game with a push.

On the other hand, in the simulated game, if the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are stopped as the first stop or the second stop, and the right reel 301c is stopped as the third stop, the CZ of this chapter will be used for each reel stop button. Regardless of the pressing timing, red 7 stops at the middle stage of the left reel 301a and middle reel 301b, and for the right reel 301c, red 7 stops at the stop position determined using the red 7 stop pattern table. It may include a game to be played. Hereinafter, such a game is also referred to as a game without a push. In the non-push-button game, since it is not necessary to aim at the red 7 in the middle stage in the simulated game, the operation instruction for each reel stop button in FIGS. 717 (C) to 717 (F) does not appear.

In the game without pressing, red 7 stops in the middle of the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b and red 7 for the right reel 301c after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the simulated game without pressing each reel stop button. Red 7 may be configured to stop at a stop position determined using the stop pattern table.

For example, when a game without a push can be executed as in this chapter, the B-4 lottery (S70405-S7041) based on the hold-hold flag and the right reel stop pattern lottery (S70506) are performed, for example. It is executed when the lever is turned on (after step S70202 of the CZ flag processing in FIG. 724).

For example, when the AT lottery (B-3 lottery or B-4 lottery) is won, for example, a game with a push is executed at a rate of 3/4, and a game without a push is executed at a rate of 1/4. .. Further, for example, if the AT lottery (B-3 lottery and B-4 lottery) is not won, for example, a game with a push is executed at a rate of 1/8, and a game without a push is executed at a rate of 7/8. Is executed. In this way, since the distribution of the game with push and the game without push is determined, when the game with push is executed (when the operation instruction for the reel stop button appears), there is no push. The expectation for winning the AT is higher than when the game is executed (when the operation instruction for the reel stop button does not appear).

However, whether the game with push or the game without push is executed depends on the AT lottery result, but does not directly depend on the right reel stop pattern lottery result (that is, the right reel). It is desirable not to draw a lottery whether the game with the reels is executed or the game without the reels is executed by referring to the stop pattern lottery result). If whether the game with push or the game without push is executed depends directly on the right reel stop pattern lottery result, the player can more easily predict the stop system of the right reel. This is because there is a risk that you will not be able to enjoy the game with a lot of eyes.

The probability of winning the AT in the B-4 lottery is 1 / 11.96 when the AT pressing and maintaining flag is off, and 1 / 10.62 when the AT pressing and maintaining flag is on. Considering the distribution of the pressed game and the non-pressed game, the frequency with which the pressed game is executed is lower than the frequency with which the non-pressed game is executed. On the other hand, as described above, when the AT is won, the rate at which the game with a push is executed is higher than the rate at which the game without a push is executed. As a result, the game with the push is executed at a rate of less than half for one game, so that the player has a sense of rarity for the game with the push and more than half when winning the AT. You can enjoy the game with the eyes while having a great expectation for the game with the eyes.

In addition, when a game with a push is executed, a push valid period (reel stop button valid period) may be set. In this case, if the reel stop button is not pressed within the valid period of pressing, the reel is stopped as if the reel stop button was pressed at the end of the valid period. Furthermore, an effect image indicating that the push button is valid (an effect image of the effective reel stop button and an effect image that is repeatedly displayed as if emphasizing the effective reel stop button) is an image. It may be displayed on the display body 500. As a result, the player needs to execute the eye-pressing within the time limit, and can enjoy the game property of measuring his / her own eye-pressing skill. In addition, the effect image may show the remaining time of the eye-catching valid period.

When the pressing is executed within the valid period of the pressing, it is desirable that the effect image is not deleted immediately, but is completely deleted after a predetermined time has elapsed after the reel stop button is pressed. As a result, the player can leave a lingering feeling of expectation in the game with a push.

Further, when the eye-pressing is executed within the effective period of the eye-pressing, a pattern for immediately erasing the effect image and a pattern for not immediately erasing the effect image may be selected by lottery. In this case, it is desirable that the distribution of these patterns is defined so that the pattern that immediately erases the effect image has a higher AT winning expectation than the pattern that does not immediately delete the effect image. ..

Further, for example, the valid period of the first pseudo-stop is 3 seconds, the valid period of the second pseudo-stop is 5 seconds, and a plurality of valid periods of the push are set in one simulated game. It may be different in length. For example, as the notification timing of the AT lottery result is closer (that is, at the time of the second pseudo stop than at the time of the first pseudo stop), there is a player who feels more nervous. By setting the effective period of the second pseudo-stop to be longer than the effective period, it is possible to carefully press the second pseudo-stop even in a high tension, and it becomes easier to succeed.

In addition, when many reel rotations other than the reel to be stopped come into view, it is difficult for some players to press the reels, so the second pseudo stop (when only two reels are rotating) is pressed. Since the effective period of the first pseudo stop (when all reels are rotating) is set longer than the effective period, it is possible to carefully press the first pseudo stop. , It will be easier to succeed.

Even if a plurality of push-press valid periods are set in a game with one push, the above-mentioned effect image indicating that the push-press valid period is in progress and the remaining valid period is displayed. Is desirable.

When the normal stop control up to 4 frames is used in the simulated game of the game with push, for example, in the first pseudo stop, the push fails and the red 7 is in the middle of the left reel 301a. If the left reel 301a cannot be stopped, the left reel 301a may be quasi-rotated again to display an instruction to press the left reel stop button 211a again. In that case, in the second pseudo stop, in order to concentrate the player on the push and not to fail, it is preferable to stop the output of the BGM to make it silent or turn off the lamp. Further, in the second pseudo stop, for example, the BGM may be changed or the lamp lighting pattern may be changed to arouse the feeling of expectation.

If the push fails even in the second pseudo stop, the third pseudo stop may be performed. The left reel stop button 211a may be pressed many times until the push is succeeded in this way, but the same effect is repeatedly displayed on the left reel stop button 211a each time. However, it is better to set an upper limit.

In addition, a game in which a pseudo stop with a push and a pseudo stop without a push may be executed. Specifically, for example, in a pseudo game in one game, the first pseudo stop has a push (stops if red 7 is aimed at the middle stage of the left reel 301a or the middle reel 301b), and the second pseudo stop is an eye. No push (red 7 stops in the middle of the left reel 301a or middle reel 301b regardless of the timing of pressing the reel stop button), and the third pseudo stop has a push (aim for red 7 in the frame of the right reel 301c) For example, the game that Red 7 stops according to the selected right reel stop system pattern) may be executed.

In such a game, the operation instruction effect of the reel stop button is displayed in the pseudo stop with the press, and the operation instruction effect of the reel stop button is not displayed in the pseudo stop without the press. As described above, the operation instruction for the start lever 210 shown in FIG. 717 (F) may be displayed before the first pseudo stop.

In such a situation, for the first pseudo stop and the third pseudo stop, the operation instruction for the three operation units consisting of the single insertion button 205, the start lever 210, and the reel stop button is displayed, and for the second pseudo stop, the operation instruction is displayed. An operation instruction is displayed for two operation units including the one-sheet insertion button 205 and the start lever 210. By reducing the number of operation units to be operated instructed at the time of the second pseudo stop in this way, the operation burden on the player can be reduced and fatigue can be suppressed.

In such a situation where the pseudo stop with the push is performed a plurality of times, for example, in the first pseudo stop, when the left reel 301a or the middle reel 301b is stopped according to the operation instruction for the reel stop button, AT You may perform an effect showing the degree of expectation of winning. Specifically, for example, when the red 7 is stopped in the middle stage, an expectation raising effect (for example, changing the background color of the image display body 500 to red, changing the BGM, etc.) is executed. This increases the motivation of the player to follow the operation instructions.

Further, after the second pseudo stop, when the operation instruction for the reel stop button is followed, an effect of notifying the result of the AT lottery may be executed. Specifically, for example, if the AT is won, the red 7 always stops in the middle stage in the second pseudo stop, and if the AT is not won, the red 7 always stops in the second pseudo stop in the second pseudo stop. Just do it. This increases the motivation of the player to follow the operation instructions.

Even in a game in which a pseudo stop with a push and a pseudo stop without a push are mixed, if the pseudo stop with a push is executed a plurality of times, the reel stop button for the pseudo stop is valid. The length of the period may be different. In this case, the closer the notification timing of the AT lottery result is, the more tense the player feels. Therefore, for such a player, the pseudo stop performed after the pseudo stop valid period performed earlier. Since the effective period of the push is set longer, it is possible to carefully push the pseudo-stop that is performed later even in a high tension, and it becomes easier to succeed. On the other hand, when many reel rotations other than the reel to be stopped come into view, it is difficult for some players to press the reels, so it is performed before the validity period of the reel stop button of the pseudo stop performed later. The valid period of the reel stop button for pseudo stop may be set longer.

As described above, when the AT is won in the CZ, the AT starts from the next game in which the AT is won, without any sign or a normal game. Further, when the AT is won with one or more games remaining in the CZ, the CZ of the number of games remaining at the time of winning the AT may be started immediately after the end of the AT without sandwiching the normal game. .. With such specifications, it is possible to win multiple ATs with CZ of 10 games, and CZ and AT alternate in the order of CZ → AT → CZ → AT without sandwiching the normal game. Situations occur.

In such a situation, the player may get tired of the CZ effect and the AT effect because the CZ and the AT are alternately and continuously performed. Therefore, in such a situation where CZ and AT are alternately performed without sandwiching the normal game, the production mode and BGM during CZ and AT may be changed.

In this case, for example, by displaying an image or the like imitating the effect button 204 (and / or the cross key, etc.) at the start of the CZ and AT or after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start, the effect mode and BGM can be changed. You may instruct. The operation instructions for the effect button 204 for changing the effect mode and BGM are the above-mentioned operation instruction for maintaining the pressed state of the one-sheet insertion button 205, the operation instruction for each reel stop button, and the operation instruction for the start lever 210. It can be displayed at the same time as at least one of the operation instructions. That is, operation instructions for up to four operation means can be displayed at the same time, and it is possible to present more options to the player and provide new operability.

[12-5. Specific example of CZ production 2: Pushing practice production]
As described above, in the simulated game in CZ, the image display of the transmissive liquid crystal 301ca and the transmissive liquid crystal 301cc obstructs the visibility of the upper and lower stages of the right reel 301c. Is never low. Further, as described above, by operating the starting lever 210 during the simulated game, it is possible to remove the obstruction of visibility of the upper and lower stages of the right reel 301c, but the starting lever 210 must be maintained in the operated state. Since it returns to the blocked state, the difficulty of pressing the button while maintaining the operation of the starting lever 210 is not low. Further, if the pseudo game is advanced according to the operation instruction, the right reel 301c will be pseudo-stopped as the third pseudo-stop, and the stop system of the right reel 301c of the third pseudo-stop suggests the result of the AT lottery. Alternatively, since the notification is made directly, the player becomes more nervous about the third pseudo stop, and the possibility of failing to press the reel increases.

Therefore, in the CZ described below, it is possible to practice the eye-catching before executing the third pseudo stop.

FIG. 729 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the effect during the CZ (eye-pressing practice effect). In the slot machine 1, a transmissive liquid crystal 301aa is arranged so as to cover the upper stage of the left reel 301a, and a transmissive liquid crystal 301ab is arranged so as to cover the lower stage of the left reel 301a. By displaying the images on the transmissive liquid crystal 301aa and the transmissive liquid crystal 301ab, it is possible to prevent the upper and lower stages of the left reel 301a from being visually recognized. The slot machine 1 may have a movable body capable of covering the upper and lower stages of the left reel 301a, for example, instead of the transmissive liquid crystal 301aa and the transmissive liquid crystal 301ab. Further, the slot machine 1 has a visual state change button 216 with a switch.

(A) is a state in which the CZ game has started (a state when the lever is turned on), and the same effect as in FIG. 717 (C) is executed. (B) is a start state of the eye-catching practice effect in the simulated game. In (A), when the visual state change button 216 is pressed once or held down (the ON state of the visual state change button 216 is detected for a predetermined time), the eye-pressing practice effect starts. In (B), the image is displayed on the transmissive liquid crystal 301aa and the transmissive liquid crystal 301ab, and the visibility of the upper and lower stages of the left reel 301a is hindered.

Further, in (B), an image of an angel flying down is displayed on the image display body 500, and an operation instruction of the start lever 210 saying "I want to practice. Please operate the start lever" is displayed. Further, similarly to FIG. 717 (F), in order to make the operation instruction easier to understand, an image of the start lever 210 with an arrow may be displayed on the image display body 500.

(C) is a state during the eye-pressing practice production in the simulated game, and is a continuation state of (B). An operation instruction to stop the red 7 on the left reel 301a (that is, an operation instruction to the left reel stop button 211a) is displayed on the image display body 500 as an angel's line ("Let's stop the red 7 on the left reel"). There is.

(D) is a state in which the starting lever 210 is operated according to the operation instruction of the starting lever 210. The images of the transmissive liquid crystal 301aa and the transmissive liquid crystal 301ab are erased, and the upper and lower stages of the left reel 301a can be visually recognized. The relationship between the amount of operation of the starting lever 210 and the visual state of the upper and lower symbols of the left reel 301a is the same as that shown in FIG. 721, for example. Further, when the operating state of the starting lever 210 is maintained and a predetermined time elapses, the operating instruction to the starting lever 210 may be deleted as shown in (D).

(E) is a state in which the left reel 301a is stopped in the push-push practice effect. In (E), the left reel 301a is successfully pressed, red 7 is stopped in the middle row, and a line praising the player by an angel is displayed.

After the push-push practice effect is completed, the left reel 301a is quasi-rotated again to return to the effect of (A). For players who are not confident in pressing the eyes after practicing only once, if the visual status change button 216 is pressed once or held down again after returning to (A), The eye-pressing practice effect may be restarted (the number of times the eye-pressing practice effect can be executed in one simulated game may not be limited).

It should be noted that only the left reel 301a may be able to be operated during the push-push practice production. That is, it is not necessary to enable only the left reel stop button 211a and the middle reel stop button 211b and the right reel stop button 211c.

It should be noted that the practice effect may be executed not only during the simulated game during the CZ, but also during a normal game other than the CZ or during the AT (that is, the game may be executed in any state). That is, during a normal game or AT, when the visual state change button 216 is pressed once or held down (the ON state of the visual state change button 216 is detected for a predetermined time), the eye-pressing practice effect may be started.

It should be noted that the simulated game is not performed during the normal game or AT, and the reel is not a production but an area showing a pattern showing the lottery result. The image display body 500 may be displayed to imitate the actual reel arrangement, reel rotation speed, and transmissive liquid crystal to perform eye-pressing practice effect, or the effective line may be only one middle line. The visibility of the reel may be reduced as long as it does not overlap the effective line. Further, for example, even when the game is not being executed, for example, by pressing the effect button 204, even if the game is not being executed, the eye-pressing practice effect can be performed. Good. In this case, since the game is not being executed, for example, the image display body 500 is used instead of the reel to perform the eye-pressing practice effect. Further, even when the game is not being executed, if the visual state change button 216 is pressed once or held down (the ON state of the visual state change button 216 is detected for a predetermined time), only the pseudo game may be performed. As a result, the player can easily practice without consuming the game medium.

Since the ratio of CZ games to the total number of games is not so high, by making it possible to execute the eye-catching practice effect at various timings in this way, even players who are not good at eye-catching can practice sufficiently. It can be piled up, the success rate of the eye-catching in the simulated game during the actual CZ is increased, and the expectation in the simulated game is improved.

Since the visual state change button 216 is a button for starting the eye-pressing practice effect, it is an operation unit that does not affect the progress of the normal game. In particular, since a player who is good at pushing the eyes has few opportunities to use the visual state change button 216, the visual state change button 216 is used as an operation unit (for example, a start lever 210 or each reel stop) used in a normal game. It is desirable that the button) is placed in a position where it is not placed. Specifically, for example, the visual state change button 216 is a panel arranged between the lower panel (the medal tray 201 and the reel stop button, and generally displays the model title of the slot machine 1. It is provided on the panel).

Further, since the vertical position of the lower panel in the normal arrangement when playing the slot machine 1 is close to the vertical position of the hopper 110b, when the visual state change button 216 is provided on the lower panel, In order to reduce the manufacturing cost of the slot machine 1, the switch for detecting the pressing of the visual state change button 216 may also be used as a switch for counting medals paid out from the hopper 110b.

However, when these switches are also used, the eye-pressing practice effect is not performed only by pressing the visual state change button 216, and only when the visual state change button 216 is continuously pressed for a predetermined time or longer. It is good to be able to perform a push-and-push practice effect. It is desirable that the predetermined time is, for example, a time longer than the time when one medal is paid out from the hopper 110b. Even if multiple medals are paid out in succession, the medals are paid out one by one, so the visual status change button 216 repeats the on and off states each time one medal is paid out. .. Therefore, if the predetermined time is longer than the time when one medal is paid out from the hopper 110b, the medal push-out practice effect will not start.

In addition, in order not to make the player forget that if the one-sheet insertion button 205 is continuously pressed, the player can receive the preferential AT lottery, the image instructing the one-sheet insertion button 205 to be pressed is displayed even during the practice production. It is desirable that it remains displayed.

[12-6. Pseudo game in normal game]
In the above-mentioned example, the CZ in which the simulated game is performed has been described, but the simulated game may also be performed in a normal game other than the CZ game. In a simulated game in a normal game, if the reels are pushed in the correct order, the bells will stop in the middle of the reels and line up to win the AT. In addition, even if the correct answer is not given in the order of pressing, the bells will rise to the right with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/4) and pseudo-stop to win the AT, and the AT will be lost with a predetermined probability (3/4). The eyes (bells are not aligned) make a pseudo stop and do not win the AT.

In a normal game, if a predetermined condition is met, a pseudo game is won. Specifically, for example, when the lever of the normal game is turned on, a preparatory lottery is performed, and when the preparatory lottery is won, a pseudo game lottery is performed. The winning rate in the preparatory lottery is assumed to be, for example, 1/2. Then, in the pseudo game lottery, the pseudo game is won with a probability of 1/50.

Further, in a normal game, when the single-insertion button 205 is repeatedly hit (the operation is for the same operation means as the single-insertion button 205 in CZ, but the player's action is different), the winning rate in the preparatory lottery is increased. Increase. The winning rate in the preparatory lottery when the one-sheet insertion button 205 is repeatedly hit is 1 / 1.8. That is, it is advantageous for the player to continuously execute the operation of repeatedly hitting the one-sheet insertion button 205 every game. In addition, as a definition of repeated hits, when the time from when the one-sheet insertion button 205 is turned off to when it is turned on again is less than a predetermined time (for example, less than 500 ms), it is treated as if it was repeatedly hit.

It should be noted that if the pressing of the one-card insertion button 205 is maintained (long press instead of repeated hits) in the normal game (that is, if the operation for giving preferential treatment to the AT winning rate during the simulated game of CZ is executed in the normal game), preparations are made. Even if the lottery is not performed or is performed, the winning rate of the preparatory lottery is extremely low (for example, 1/65536). The player can be entertained by the advanced game characteristics in which advantageous situations can be obtained by performing different operations on the one-card insertion button 205 during CZ and in the normal game.

FIG. 730 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pseudo game executed during a normal game. In this chapter, in the slot machine 1, in addition to the transmissive liquid crystal 301aa, the transmissive liquid crystal 301ab, the transmissive liquid crystal 301ca, and the transmissive liquid crystal 301cc, the transmissive liquid crystal 301ba covers the upper stage of the middle reel 301b, and the lower stage of the middle reel 301b. The transmissive liquid crystal 301bb is arranged so as to cover the above. By displaying the images on the transmissive liquid crystal 301ba and the transmissive liquid crystal 301bb, it is possible to prevent the upper and lower stages of the middle reel 301b from being visually recognized. The slot machine 1 may have, for example, a movable body capable of covering the upper and lower stages of the middle reel 301b instead of the transmissive liquid crystal 301ba and the transmissive liquid crystal 301bb.

(A) is a state immediately after the end of CZ, and the reel is stopped. At the timing when the CZ ends and switches to the normal state (normal game) (for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the end of the pressed state of the reel stop button of the third stop in the CZ final game), one image as shown in (A). An operation instruction for prompting the repeated pressing of the input button 205 is displayed on the image display body 500. Further, it is shown in the operation instruction that the pseudo game can be easily won by repeatedly hitting the one-sheet insertion button 205.

If the operation instruction is followed, it becomes easier to win the pseudo game, that is, the situation is advantageous to the player, and since the operation instruction is important information for the player, the length is long enough for the player to recognize. It is desirable to display by time. Specifically, the display time of the operation instruction may be longer (for example, 5 seconds) than 4.1 seconds, which is the shortest game time (time-up time of the wait timer) of one game of the slot machine 1, for example. desirable. Therefore, the operation instruction can be displayed across a plurality of games.

In addition, instead of specifically determining the display time of the operation instruction, the operation instruction is displayed until the first game starts (when the start lever 210 is operated) after shifting to the normal state after the end of CZ. May be good. In addition, the display time of the operation instruction (for example, 5 seconds longer than 4.1 seconds, which is the shortest game time of one game of the slot machine 1) has elapsed, or the first game starts in the normal state after the end of CZ. When any of the actions (starting lever 210 is operated) is satisfied, the operation instruction may be deleted.

It should be noted that, after the display of this operation instruction is erased, the one-sheet insertion button 205 is not repeatedly hit, or is not repeatedly hit but is long-pressed as in the case of CZ, and the predetermined conditions are satisfied (). If the predetermined condition is satisfied and the preparatory operation before the winning combination lottery is performed), the operation instruction for prompting the continuous hitting of the one-sheet insertion button 205 may be displayed again. The preparatory operation for the winning combination lottery, such as inserting a medal or pressing the MAX insertion button 206, is an example of the predetermined condition.

Therefore, for example, when the game is switched from CZ to the normal game and the operation instruction of the 1-card insertion button 205 is displayed and erased, and then the medal is inserted while pressing and holding the 1-card insertion button 205, "Wait a little! You! , Do you want to take the lottery as it is? Such a stupid! Hit 1 BET repeatedly Yutayan ... ", etc., and the operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is displayed.

The mode of the operation instruction (first operation instruction) that appears when the CZ is switched to the normal game and the mode of the operation instruction (second operation instruction) that is redisplayed during the normal game are the same. It may be different or it may be different.

Specifically, for example, in the first operation instruction and the second operation instruction, the display time, display size, and display position of the operation instruction, the presence or absence of a voice to be output at the same time as the operation instruction, and the volume volume and output of the voice. The time and the like may be different.

For example, the longer the display time of the operation instruction, the larger the display size, and the closer the display position is to the center of the image display body 500, the stronger the impression of the operation instruction can be. In addition, the impression of the operation instruction can be strengthened when the sound is output at the same time as the operation instruction, rather than when the sound is not output. Further, the louder the volume of the voice and the longer the output time, the stronger the impression of the operation time can be.

In addition to the long-pressing operation of the one-sheet insertion button 205 during CZ, if the long-pressing operation is performed when the game shifts to the normal game, it is rather disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, by executing the first operation instruction in a mode with a strong impression (for example, making the display time of the first operation instruction longer than the display time of the second operation instruction), the player can change from the CZ to the normal state. The operation method of the one-sheet insertion button 205 can be reliably changed at the time of switching.

In addition, there are some players who have not seen the operation instruction properly or forget to repeatedly hit what they see, even though they were playing the game at the time of the operation instruction immediately after the end of CZ. Therefore, by giving the second operation instruction in a manner that gives a stronger impression than the first operation instruction (for example, the display time of the second operation instruction is longer than the display time of the first operation instruction), such as these. It is possible to prevent the player from forgetting the repeated hitting operation.

For example, when it takes a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the display of the first operation instruction or the second operation instruction to the deletion, the pseudo game is won and the pseudo game starts within the predetermined time. However, it is desirable that the first operation instruction or the second operation instruction is not deleted until the predetermined time has elapsed. For example, if the display of the first operation instruction or the second operation instruction is erased at the start of the simulated game, the player may forget to repeatedly hit the one-sheet insertion button 205 due to the impact of the appearance of the simulated game. Because. In this case, during the simulated game, the first operation instruction or the second operation instruction, the operation instruction for the reel stop button, and the operation instruction for the start lever 210 are displayed at the same time.

Also, a player who has not seen the operation instruction immediately after the end of CZ (for example, when another player is playing during CZ and immediately after the end of CZ, and the player changes after that), one card is inserted. I don't know that repeated hits of Button 205 will give me a favorable situation. Further, since the slot machine whose lottery result is affected by the operation of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is not generally known, the second operation instruction is given in a mode that gives a weak impression to the player who has not digested the CZ game. Even if the above is executed, there is a possibility that the operation of the one-sheet insertion button 205 itself may be suspicious. Therefore, when the second operation instruction is given in a manner that gives a strong impression (for example, the display time of the second operation instruction is made longer than the display time of the first operation instruction), such a continuous striking operation for the player is performed. You can increase your motivation.

Subsequently, (B) is a state at the time of lever-on of the normal game in which the pseudo game is won. The pseudo game in the normal game is activated when the lever of the game won in the pseudo game lottery is turned on, but it may occur after a precursor within a predetermined number of games is inserted. However, when both the pseudo game and the CZ in the normal game are won when the lever is turned on in the normal game, the CZ is preferentially executed, and the pseudo game in the normal game is extinguished or carried over after the CZ ends. To do.

When the simulated game starts, images are displayed on each of the transmissive liquid crystal 301aa, the transmissive liquid crystal 301ab, the transmissive liquid crystal 301ba, the transmissive liquid crystal 301bb, the transmissive liquid crystal 301ca, and the transmissive liquid crystal 301cc, which hinders the visibility of the frames other than the middle stage of all reels. Be done.

If you win a simulated game in a normal game, you can choose from 6 push orders (left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → left → right, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, right. → Middle → Left) is selected. The selection probabilities of each push order are equal (1/6 for each). When the player presses each reel stop button according to the selected push order to pseudo-stop the reels, the bells are aligned in a straight line in the middle stage and the AT is won.

In (B), the line "Apply the push order and align the bells!" And the image of each reel stop button decorated with the effect with "?" Are displayed on the image display body 500, respectively. Indicates an operation instruction for each reel stop button.

(C) is a state when the lever is turned on in the normal game in which the pseudo game is won, and is a continuation state of (B). The image of each reel stop button is still displayed. Further, by operating the starting lever 210, an image indicating that the image of each transmissive liquid crystal is erased and the upper and lower stages of each reel become visible, and an image of the starting lever 210 with an arrow are images. It is displayed on the display body 500, and each indicates an operation instruction for the start lever 210.

When the start lever 210 is operated during the simulated game of the normal game, the images of the transmissive liquid crystals are erased to the extent that the upper and lower stages of each reel can be visually recognized. When the correct answer is given in the order in which the reels are pushed and the bells are aligned in the middle row, it is possible to recognize that the AT has been won even if the upper and lower rows cannot be visually recognized.

On the other hand, if the correct answer cannot be obtained in the order in which the reels are pushed, the bells will not be aligned in the middle row. As described above, even if the correct answer cannot be obtained in the order in which the reels are pushed, the bells are aligned upward to the right with a predetermined probability, and the AT is won. Further, if the correct answer cannot be obtained in the order in which the reels are pushed and the AT is not won, the bell stops in the middle stage of the middle reel 301b and the lost eye stops.

Therefore, if the bells are not aligned in the middle stage and the bells are pseudo-stopped in the middle stage of the middle reel 301b, the player can determine the result of the AT lottery without looking at the lower stage of the left reel 301a and the lower stage of the right reel 301c. Can't. The details will be described later, but when a predetermined time elapses from the third pseudo stop in the simulated game, the result of the AT lottery is notified, but for the player who cannot wait for it, the winning result is obtained by operating the start lever 210 described above. Can be confirmed quickly.

The trigger for erasing the image of the operation instruction for the start lever 210 is the same as the trigger for erasing the image of the operation instruction for the start lever 210 in the CZ described above, for example. Further, the relationship between the operation amount of the starting lever 210 and the region where the image is not displayed in each transmissive liquid crystal is the same as the relationship described with reference to FIG. 721, for example.

(D) is a state in which the correct answer cannot be obtained in the order in which the reels are pushed in the simulated game, the bells are not aligned in the middle stage, and the bells are pseudo-stopped in the middle stage of the middle reel 301b. In (D), since each transmissive liquid crystal obstructs the visibility of the upper and lower stages of each reel, it is not possible to determine whether or not the AT has been won.

(E) is a state in which the starting lever 210 is operated after the state of (D) is reached. By operating the start lever 210, the image of each transmissive liquid crystal is erased, and the upper and lower stages of each reel are also visible. In (E), the bells are aligned to the right and the AT is won. Further, in (E), since the start lever 210 is kept pressed for a predetermined time, the image of the start lever 210 with an arrow, which is an operation instruction image, is erased.

(F) is a state at the end of the simulated game. When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses from the third pseudo stop, the image of each transmissive liquid crystal is erased even if the start lever 210 is not operated, and whether or not the bells are aligned upward to the right, that is, the AT is won. The image display body 500 also notifies whether or not this is done. After the production of (F), the simulated game ends and the reel rotation of the normal game starts.

When the starting lever 210 is operated by a predetermined amount (for example, 5/10 of the maximum movable width from the initial position of the starting lever 210) or more after the third pseudo stop, whether or not the bells are aligned upward to the right is reeled. Therefore, the image displayed on the image display body 500 may be changed to an image that notifies the result of the AT lottery.

Therefore, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the third pseudo stop and the result of the AT lottery is notified, and when the player who cannot wait for the predetermined time operates the start lever 210, the predetermined time elapses. When the result of the AT lottery is notified without waiting for, and when the start lever 210 is operated and the player recognizes the result of the AT lottery by the number of reels, the notification is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed. There are cases and cases.

Although not shown, if the correct answer is given in the order in which the reels are pushed and the bells are aligned in the middle row, a display indicating that the AT has been won is displayed on the image display body 500, and the simulated game is completed and is normal. The reel rotation of the game starts.

As explained in this chapter, the player cannot receive an advantageous lottery if he / she does not repeatedly hit the single-insertion button 205 during the normal game, but the player becomes tired if he / she continues the continuous hitting operation, which in turn causes repeated hitting. It may not be possible to continue the operation.

Therefore, in order not to give the player only a disadvantageous situation by not executing the continuous hitting operation, the same applies when the single insertion button 205 is repeatedly hit (and the same long press operation as the operation during CZ is performed). ) When the start lever 210 is operated (when the game is started), the push order navigation may be performed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/100). When each reel stop button is pressed according to this push order navigation, the bells are aligned in the game (this game, which is not a pseudo game), and medals can be paid out. However, since the operation is still performed without following the continuous hitting instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205, it is better not to perform a special AT lottery even if the push order navigation is followed.

In the first normal game after the end of CZ, the above-mentioned pseudo game may always occur. By doing so, it is possible to give a large chance of winning the AT again to the player who could not win the AT in CZ, and it is possible to suppress the disappointment of the player.

For example, in a simulated game during a normal game, the display of the operation instruction for the start lever 210 in FIG. 730 (C) is started before the operation instruction for each reel stop button in FIG. 730 (B). The operation instruction for each reel stop button and the operation instruction for the start lever 210 may be displayed at the same time.

If the correct answer is not given in the order of pushing in the simulated game, the following lottery and production may be performed. If the answer is not correct in the order of pressing, the bell is raised to the right at the stage of the second pseudo stop. Then, a lottery is performed at the time of the third pseudo stop, and in the lottery, the bells are pseudo-stopped in an upward-sloping manner with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/4) to win the AT. However, if the one-sheet insertion button 205 is repeatedly hit before the third pseudo stop, the bells are raised to the right with a higher probability (for example, 1 / 3.5) than the predetermined probability in the lottery, and the pseudo stop is performed. Let me win the AT.

Therefore, when the second pseudo stop (that is, the preparatory operation for performing the lottery at the time of the third pseudo stop described above) is performed, an operation instruction for prompting the continuous hitting operation of the one-sheet insertion button 205 (for example, "Bell when 1 BET is repeatedly hit"). The message "It will be easier to align!" And / or the image of the one-sheet insertion button 205 with an arrow) is displayed to prompt the player to perform a continuous hit operation. At the timing when the operation instruction for prompting the continuous hitting operation of the single push button 205 is displayed, the operation instruction is also displayed on the right reel stop button 211c at the same time, and at least the operation instruction for the start lever 210 is also displayed at the same time if the start lever 210 is not operated. It is displayed.

By performing such a lottery and directing when the correct answer is not given in the push order in the simulated game, the player who attaches importance to the AT winning rate repeatedly hits the one-sheet insertion button 205, and the player who desires the smooth progress of the game. Can select different game characteristics depending on the player's preference of performing the third pseudo stop without repeatedly hitting the one-sheet insertion button 205.

The operation instruction prompting the repeated hitting operation of the one-sheet insertion button 205 may be deleted or displayed, for example, after being displayed blinking for a predetermined time (that is, displayed by repeating the display state and the non-display state a plurality of times). Only the state may be erased after continuing for a predetermined time. It should be noted that, for example, in order to ensure that the player repeatedly hits the one-sheet insertion button 205 and to stop the bells in a pseudo-stop manner with a high probability of rising to the right, an operation instruction is given to the right reel stop button 211c for these predetermined times. The display time may be set longer than the display time of, or these predetermined times may be set shorter than the display time of the operation instruction for the right reel stop button 211c in order to concentrate the player on the pseudo stop operation of the reels.

In addition, the operation instruction for prompting the repeated hitting operation of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is a preparatory operation for the lottery at the time of the third pseudo stop, such as at the time of the first pseudo stop and at the time of the second pseudo stop. It may be executed (at the timing of performing).

Further, when the operation instruction for prompting the continuous striking operation of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is displayed at the same time as the operation instruction for the right reel stop button 211c, the voice corresponding to the operation instruction for prompting the continuous striking operation of the one-sheet insertion button 205 can be heard. The voice corresponding to the right reel stop button 211c is output with priority (for example, the voice with priority is output at a louder volume than the voice without priority, or the voice without priority is not output and is given priority. Only the audio that is being output is output (even if the output of the non-priority audio is started first, the output of the non-priority audio is stopped and the priority audio is output). Etc.), or the voice corresponding to the operation instruction for prompting the continuous striking operation of the one-sheet insertion button 205 may be output with priority over the voice corresponding to the right reel stop button 211c. Further, the priorities of these sounds may be the same (for example, they may be output at the same volume at the same time).

When the operation instruction for prompting the continuous striking operation of the single-sheet insertion button 205 is displayed at the same time as the operation instruction for the start lever 210, the voice corresponding to the operation instruction for prompting the continuous striking operation of the single-sheet insertion button 205 and the start lever 210 The voice corresponding to the operation instruction for the right reel stop button 211c and the start lever 210 when the relationship with the corresponding voice and the operation instruction for the right reel stop button 211c are displayed at the same time as the operation instruction for the start lever 210. The same applies to the relationship with the voice corresponding to.

Further, when the operation instruction for prompting the continuous striking operation of the single sheet insertion button 205 is displayed at the same time as the operation instruction for the right reel stop button 211c, the lamp corresponding to the operation instruction for prompting the continuous striking operation of the single sheet insertion button 205 is displayed. The lamp corresponding to the right reel stop button 211c is output with priority (for example, the lamp with priority emits light with a stronger amount of light than the lamp without priority, or the lamp without priority is not output and is prioritized. Only the lamps that are present are output (even if the lamps that are not prioritized start outputting first, the lamps that are not prioritized are stopped and the lamps that are prioritized are output), etc. ), Or the lamp corresponding to the operation instruction prompting the continuous striking operation of the one-sheet insertion button 205 may be output with priority over the lamp corresponding to the right reel stop button 211c. Further, these lamps may have the same priority (for example, they may be output at the same time with the same amount of light).

When an operation instruction for prompting the continuous striking operation of the single-sheet insertion button 205 is displayed at the same time as the operation instruction for the start lever 210, the lamp corresponding to the operation instruction for prompting the continuous striking operation of the single-sheet insertion button 205 and the start lever 210 The lamp corresponding to the operation instruction for the right reel stop button 211c and the start lever 210 when the relationship with the corresponding lamp and the operation instruction for the right reel stop button 211c are displayed at the same time as the operation instruction for the start lever 210. The same applies to the relationship with the lamp corresponding to.

Since the player can more easily recognize the operation instruction corresponding to the priority voice, it is preferable to set the priority of the voice corresponding to the operation instruction of the operation that the player wants to surely perform. Similarly, since it is easier for the player to recognize the operation instruction corresponding to the priority lamp, it is preferable to set the priority of the lamp corresponding to the operation instruction of the operation that the player wants to surely perform. ..

Further, when the timing of outputting the sound corresponding to the operation instruction for prompting the continuous striking operation of the single-sheet insertion button 205 overlaps with the timing for outputting another effect sound, the operation instruction for prompting the continuous striking operation of the single-sheet insertion button 205. The sound corresponding to the above may be output in preference to the other effect sound, or the other effect sound may be output in preference to the sound corresponding to the operation instruction for prompting the continuous striking operation of the single input button 205. It may have the same priority.

Further, when the timing of outputting the lamp corresponding to the operation instruction for prompting the continuous striking operation of the single-sheet insertion button 205 overlaps with the timing of outputting the lamp corresponding to another effect, the continuous striking operation of the single-sheet insertion button 205 is performed. The lamp corresponding to the prompting operation instruction may be output with priority over the lamp corresponding to the other effect, or the lamp corresponding to the other effect may be output in response to the operation instruction prompting the continuous pressing operation of the single input button 205. The lamp may be output with priority over the lamp, or may have the same priority.

In the above-mentioned example, when the pseudo game is executed during the normal game, the AT is won with a higher probability than the normal game in which the pseudo game is not executed. However, the pseudo game during the normal game is, for example, It may be executed as a mere effect in which the AT lottery is not performed during the simulated game, such as the fortune-telling effect shown below. That is, there is no difference in the AT winning rate between the normal game in which the simulated game in which the fortune-telling effect is executed is performed and the normal game in which the simulated game is not performed.

Specifically, for example, in a simulated game in which a fortune-telling effect is executed, if the reel push order is correctly answered, the bells are pseudo-stopped in the middle stage of the reel and aligned, and even if the push order is not correct, a predetermined probability At (for example, 1/4), the bells rise to the right and make a pseudo stop, and with a predetermined probability (3/4), the missed eyes (bells are not aligned in a straight line) make a pseudo stop.

Then, for example, when the bells are aligned by the pseudo stop, at the end of the pseudo game (Fig. 730 (F)), instead of the message "Congratulations on winning the AT!", "Today's fortune is Daikichi! Good thing." The message "Maybe there is!" Is displayed on the image display body 500. On the other hand, if the bells are not aligned due to the pseudo stop, at the end of the pseudo game, instead of the message "Congratulations on winning the AT!", The message "Today's fortune is bad ... but let's do our best!" It is displayed on the image display body 500. Further, instead of the message "Are you winning the AT?" In FIGS. 730 (D) and (E), for example, the message "What is your fortune today?" Is displayed. By performing such a fortune-telling effect in the simulated game, the player can be entertained without increasing the AT winning rate (that is, without increasing the burden on the hall).

[12-7. Specific example of CZ production 3]
Hereinafter, another example of CZ production will be described. In the above-mentioned example, by maintaining the pressed state of the one-sheet insertion button 205 during CZ, it was possible to receive an advantageous AT lottery. In this chapter, when the pressed state of the one-sheet insertion button is maintained during CZ, the shortest game time (time-up time of the wait timer) of one game of slot machine 1 during CZ is 4.1 seconds. If the pressed state is not maintained, the shortest game time becomes longer (for example, 10 seconds, which is more than twice the time of 4.1 seconds).

For example, the player gives an operation instruction to the single-sheet insertion button 205 in CZ (a message displayed on the image display body 500 in FIG. 717 (B), a message displayed on the image display body 500 in FIG. 717 (C), and the like). The winning combination was drawn by operating the start lever 210 after not performing the operation indicated by the one-sheet insertion button 205, etc.) or by performing an operation different from the operation indicated by the operation instruction. In this case, the time-up time of the wait timer of 4.1 seconds, which is the shortest game time of the slot machine 1, is extended to 10 seconds. This increases the digestion time per game in CZ.

Even if the minimum game time remains 4.1 seconds by maintaining the pressed state of the one-sheet insertion button 205 during CZ, one hand is used while maintaining the pressing state of the one-sheet insertion button 205. Since it is necessary to proceed with the game, it is difficult for even a player who is accustomed to the game to digest the game in 4.1 seconds. That is, even if the one-sheet insertion button 205 is maintained in the pressed state, the digestion time per game in CZ becomes long.

If the one-sheet insertion button 205 is not pressed during CZ, the shortest game time is extended from 4.1 seconds to 10 seconds, which is more than twice the time of 4.1 seconds. However, if the average digestion time of one game exceeds twice 4.1 seconds, the shortest game time after extension does not have to be more than twice 4.1 seconds (for example). The shortest game time after the change may be about 7 seconds).

By lengthening the shortest game time in the CZ and lengthening the average digestion time of the game in this way, the burden on the hole can be alleviated. Further, by increasing the average digestion time in the CZ, the player playing the CZ can enjoy the CZ effect.

Further, by increasing the average digestion time in the CZ, a person who is not playing the slot machine 1 in the CZ (for example, a player who is playing in another slot machine around the slot machine 1 in the CZ). Or, a person who has passed around the slot machine 1 in the CZ) can be shown the game in the CZ frequently, and the slot machine 1 can be attracted to the interest.

For example, the AT winning rate in each game when the one-card insertion button 205 is maintained in the CZ is the AT first hit table in CZ of FIG. 709, the AT first hit lottery table of FIG. 710, and the table 2. Calculated from, it is about 1 / 10.43. Further, as described above, since CZ continues until the AT winning game or until 10 games are exhausted, the CZ continues for an average of 6.67 games when calculated from the AT winning rate in each game in CZ.

Further, according to the small winning combination lottery table of FIG. 706, the AT first hit lottery table of FIG. 707, and the CZ transition lottery table of FIG. 708, the game shifts to CZ with a probability of about 1/603 during a normal game. Therefore, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of normal games executed in one day by 6.67 × 1/603 is the average number of CZ games executed in one day. Assuming that 4000 normal games are executed in one day, an average of 44.2 CZ games are executed in one day.

Then, for example, assuming that 10 slot machines 1 are installed in the hall, a total of 442 CZ games are executed. If 442 games are digested in the normal shortest game time (4.1 seconds), the CZ game is played for a total of 1814 seconds on 10 slot machines 1 in one day. Therefore, if the shortest game time is doubled, the CZ game will be executed for a total of 1814 seconds (about 30 minutes) in one hole in one day, so that the slot machine 1 in the CZ can be used. The fun of the slot machine 1 can be fully announced to those who are not playing.

It should be noted that this is the case when the start lever 210 is operated (when the game is started) after performing an operation other than pressing and holding the one-sheet insertion button 205 (for example, a continuous striking operation) or without performing the operation. However, in principle, those who do not display the optimum operation instruction (hold down the one-sheet insertion button 205) (so that the shortest game time is not extended) in order to reduce the burden on the hole described above. Is good.

On the other hand, in such a case, for example, the operation instruction such as the message in FIG. 717 (B) may be redisplayed, or the image of the one-sheet insertion button 205 that is always displayed in the CZ may be highlighted ( For example, an effect may be applied or moved), or the message may be displayed and the image of the one-sheet insertion button 205 may be highlighted at the same time.

However, if a game in which the shortest game time is extended is played continuously for a predetermined game (for example, 5 games), the player may not intend to play the game with the normal shortest game time (4.1 seconds). Since it is highly probable, there is no need to redisplay or highlight the above-mentioned message.

If a game with an extended minimum playing time is played continuously for a predetermined game, for example, "I told you that if you press and hold the 1BET button, the digestion time of the game will be shortened ... Although the optimal operation content is shown, such as "You lose your favor ... I'm sorry ...", what is the above-mentioned redisplay of the message and highlighting of the image of the one-sheet insertion button 205? It is advisable to display differently. By performing the different displays in this way, it is easy for the player to notice the new display even if the above-mentioned message is redisplayed or the image of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is highlighted or the player notices the operation instruction. Because.

However, if the special conditions are met during the game in which the minimum game time is extended, the minimum game time may be shortened (the original 4.1 seconds may be restored, or the minimum game time may be returned to 4.1 seconds. It may be shortened to a value of more than 4.1 seconds and less than 10 seconds). This is to prevent the player from being inconvenienced by making the average digestion time excessively long. However, when returning the shortest game time to the original 4.1 seconds, it is desirable to return it after the game in which the shortest game time is extended ends, that is, in the next and subsequent games.

It should be noted that the storage release switch 209 (storage medal clearing switch) is operated and the effect button 204 is operated (for example, once pressed or long pressed) during the execution of the game in which the shortest game time is extended. , All are examples of the above-mentioned special conditions.

Further, when the slot machine 1 is designed to allow the lottery of the winning combination to be performed during the execution of the game in which the minimum game time is extended, the winning during the execution of the game in which the minimum game time is extended is also performed. The lottery of roles is also an example of the above-mentioned special conditions. It should be noted that the lottery of the winning combination is allowed during the execution of the game in which the shortest game time is extended (even if the shortest game time is extended, the game in which the shortest game time is extended is being played. For players caused by the extension of the shortest playing time by sometimes allowing the winning combination to be drawn, that is, allowing the winning combination to be drawn multiple times in one game). Disadvantages can be mitigated.

However, if it is designed to allow the winning combination to be drawn during the execution of the game in which the minimum game time is extended, it is desirable that the upper limit of the number of lottery is set. For example, the number of lottery that can be executed depending on the number of medals (maximum credits) that can be inserted into the slot machine 1 (the maximum number of credits is 50, and the number of medals required for one game is 3, so 50/3. = 16.666 ... 16 times smaller) is the upper limit.

If the lottery is executed up to the maximum number of times, the shortest playing time in the next game may be returned to the normal 4.1 seconds, or if the lottery is executed even once, in the next game. The shortest game time may be returned to the normal 4.1 seconds.

Also, if it is designed to allow the winning combination to be drawn during the execution of the game with the extended minimum playing time, the winning combination at the time of lever-on of the game with the extended minimum playing time is a bonus. (The winning combination in which the condition device is activated until the symbol combinations corresponding to the bonus are prepared. It is also called the carry-over combination), and the winning combination of the lottery performed during the execution of the game in which the shortest game time is extended is also There can be cases where it is a bonus.

In this case, for example, when a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning bonus when the lever is turned on is displayed on the reel, the game shifts to the bonus game state of the bonus, and the end condition of the bonus game state (for example, the number of medals to be paid out is predetermined). When the number (for example, 300 or more) is satisfied, the bonus game state ends. Then, from the first game after the bonus game state ends, the reel can be stopped at the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning bonus during the execution of the game in which the shortest game time is extended, and the symbol combination becomes the reel. When displayed, the bonus game state of the new bonus starts.

Further, in the above-mentioned case, the bonus won by the lottery performed during the execution of the game in which the shortest game time is extended is shifted to the bonus game state without displaying the combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus. May be good. By generating the bonus game state in this way, the player recognizes the consecutive bonuses as one bonus in which a large number of medals can be obtained. The maximum number of medals that can be obtained with one bonus is set by the rules, but due to consecutive bonuses (the bonus symbols are not aligned for the second bonus), the player wins medals that exceed the rules. You can feel as if you are getting a medal. In this continuous bonus, for example, it is preferable to perform an effect in which a plurality of bonuses look like one bonus, such as continuously counting without resetting the display of the cumulative number of medals won in the bonus.

Even in a game in which the shortest game time is extended, an operation instruction for maintaining the pressing of the one-sheet insertion button 205, an operation instruction for pressing each reel stop button in the simulated game, and a visual state of each transmissive liquid crystal are improved. It is possible to simultaneously display three instructions including operation instructions for operating the starting lever 210 for the purpose. The process of extending the shortest game time is not limited to the above-mentioned CZ, but may be executed during the CZ (for example, a special specialization zone described later) executed during the AT.

[12-8. CZ (specialized zone) that shifts during AT]
Hereinafter, the CZ executed during AT will be described. When the AT is won, the initial number of games (for example, 50 games or more) is determined. In addition, based on the winning combination during the AT game or the AT precursor game, a lottery for adding the number of AT games is performed, or the mode shifts to a mode in which the addition of the number of AT games occurs with an extremely high probability (for example, 1/2). The number of AT games can be increased by conducting a lottery or by performing a transition lottery to a specialized zone in which the number of AT games per game is added.

This makes it possible to realize an AT game with a number of games exceeding the initial number of games determined at the time of winning the AT. Also, if the push order bell (123 bell, 132 bell, 213 bell, 231 bell, 312 bell, or 321 bell) is won during the AT game, the probability is higher than that of the normal game (for example, 1 during the AT game). / 1, 0/1 during normal games excluding precursor games), the correct push order is notified immediately after the operation of the start lever 210 (for example, at a position immediately above each reel of the image display body 500). A number indicating the pressing order is displayed, or a sound such as "Middle!" Is output from the speaker 512). As a result, it is possible to enjoy the game while increasing the number of medals during AT.

The slot machine 1 in this chapter is equipped with a special zone which is a CZ during AT, and the special zone includes a normal special zone and a special special zone. When the special zone is won during AT, for example, it shifts to the normal special zone with a probability of 3/4 and the special special zone with a probability of 1/4. The normal specialization zone is a general specialization zone in which the number of AT games is added every game. On the other hand, the special specialization zone is a specialization zone in which a lottery is performed as to whether or not to enter the specialization zone, and the details will be described later.

If you win the special zone again in the special special zone, instead of moving to the new special zone as it is, you can return to the AT state that is not the special zone once, for example, play the AT game of a predetermined number of games. After digesting, move to a new specialized zone. The predetermined number of games in this case is, for example, less than the initial number of games of AT (for example, 50 games), or less than the average number of games of one AT including the number of games added to the initial number of games of AT. A short number of games is desirable.

However, in the special special zone, if the number of remaining games of the AT is small when the special zone is won again, the AT may end before the predetermined number of games are consumed. Therefore, at the end of the special specialization zone, for example, an AT game shorter than the number of AT initial games (for example, 20 games) may be added. By doing so, the AT state can be maintained until the special zone is re-entered after the special special zone ends.

It is desirable to start the special zone from the game next to the game that won the transition lottery to the special zone. By doing so, it is possible to shift to the specialized zone before the AT ends. Further, if the number of remaining games of AT becomes zero after the start of the special zone and before the end of the special zone, it is desirable to continue the AT state until the end of the special zone. By doing so, all the acquired special zones can be digested during AT.

Next, an example of the production in the special zone will be described. As for the normal special zone, the same effect as that of the special zone in a general slot machine is performed, so the illustration is omitted. In the normal specialization zone, for example, when the lever is turned on for each game, the number of additional games is determined based on the winning combination, and an effect indicating the degree of expectation appears based on the winning combination or the determined number of additional games. Then, for example, the determined number of additional games is notified by using the image display body 500 or the like at the time of the third stop. The normal specialization zone ends with a fixed number of games (for example, 10 games).

FIG. 731 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the effect in the special specialization zone. The special special zone ends, for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the transition to the special special zone, regardless of the number of games digested. (A) is the state at the end of the game in which the special specialization zone is won. A display indicating that the special special zone has been won is displayed on the image display body 500.

(B) is a state at the time of lever-on of the next game of (A), that is, the start game of the special specialization zone. When the lever is turned on, the time until the end of the special specialization zone (for example, 60 seconds) is set in the timer. Then, it is a game property of how many normal special zones can be stocked in these 60 seconds, and depending on the progress speed of the game and the number of times the special zone is won, a plurality of normal special zones can be stocked in 60 seconds. You can also stock specialized zones.

In addition, the pseudo game is continuously performed in this 60 seconds. Keeping the 1BET button pressed during the special special zone doubles the special zone stock probability, but doubles the timer speed until the end of the special special zone (that is, it is shortened to 30 seconds at the shortest). ). As a result, when the pressed state of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is maintained, more lottery can be executed per unit time as compared with the case where the pressed state is not maintained, while the pressed state is maintained. If it is not maintained, the special specialization zone can be enjoyed for a longer period of time as compared with the case where the pressed state is maintained. The time until the end of the special specialization zone is not limited to one fixed value (60 seconds), and for example, one value may be selected from a plurality of values.

In (B), if the pressed state of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is maintained, an operation instruction message indicating that the AT lottery is given preferential treatment but the time progresses at double speed, and an image of the one-sheet insertion button 205 with an arrow. The operation instruction image and is displayed. Then, after that, a pseudo game similar to the above-mentioned CZ is performed.

Specifically, when the special zone is won, the same simulated game as in FIGS. 717 (B) to 718 (J) is performed, and when the special zone cannot be won, the pseudo games are shown in FIGS. 717 (B) to 718 (J). Following F), the same simulated game as in FIGS. 719 (G2) to (J2) is performed. Then, the pseudo game is repeated until the timer value becomes zero. When the timer value becomes zero, the pseudo game being executed may be forcibly terminated to end the special specialization zone, or the special specialization zone may be terminated when the pseudo game being executed ends. May be good. In addition, even in the special zone, the telop image instructing the pressing and holding of the one-sheet insertion button 205 shown in FIG. 719 may be always displayed as in the case of CZ.

In addition, for example, in order not to incite the player's gambling spirit too much, the maximum number of special zones that can be stocked in one special special zone (for example, 10) is set. desirable. Also, even if multiple special zones are stocked in one special special zone, each special zone is released instead of continuously releasing the stocked multiple special zones. It is advisable to insert a predetermined number of normal AT games (that is, AT games that are not specialized zones) in the meantime. That is, the game progresses in the order of the end of the special special zone → normal AT → special zone → normal AT → ...

It should be noted that during the simulated game of the special specialization zone, a notification effect may be provided to notify that all the winning stocks have been won, or a notification effect may not be performed for some or all of the stocks. (That is, the player does not know the number of winning stocks (but more than the notified number)). Further, the display in the notification effect may be erased once at the timing of shifting to the normal AT game, or may be executed over the normal AT game.

In addition, the special special zone can be an opportunity to greatly increase the number of medals won, so the special special zone gives the player a strong sense of tension. Therefore, in order to release the tension of the player himself and let him play as much as he can, for example, when the reel stop buttons of the first pseudo stop and the second pseudo stop in the simulated game are pressed, the special special zone ( Alternatively, you can change the BGM for the period from the special specialization zone to the next normal AT, or change the tone of the message displayed on the image display 500 (for example, "Master !! Red in the middle of the right reel". It is desirable to change to a maid style like "Please stop 7!"). The operation means for changing the BGM and the message are the same operation means when viewed as a reel stop button, and if each reel stop button is regarded as an individual operation means, it is regarded as another operation means. You can also do it.

Further, since the special specialization zone ends with the passage of time, for example, a countdown of the remaining time of the special specialization zone may be displayed on the image display body 500 so that the player can recognize the remaining time. The countdown starts, for example, at the start of the special specialization zone (that is, when the lever is turned on), and the countdown proceeds at double speed when the one-sheet insertion button 205 is pressed. At the start of the special specialization zone, the countdown of the remaining time is not displayed, and the countdown is performed at any timing of the first pseudo stop, the second pseudo stop, or the third pseudo stop in the (for example, the first) pseudo game. It may be displayed.

For example, if a message that directly announces or indirectly suggests a special specialization zone as shown in FIGS. 731 (A) and 731 (B) is not displayed and a countdown is displayed at a timing after the lever is turned on, the lever is turned on. At this point, the player does not know whether the normal specialization zone or the special specialization zone has started. Then, at the timing of the pseudo stop, a countdown is suddenly displayed, and the player can recognize that it is a special specialization zone, so that the expectation rises at once.

Also, when there are multiple times in the special special zone (for example, 60 seconds and 120 seconds are determined by lottery) and the countdown display is performed at a timing after the lever is turned on, it is indicated as, for example, 30 seconds. It is possible to raise expectations by concealing which special special zone of 60 seconds or 120 seconds, or by making the player recognize that it is a special special zone of 120 seconds, which is indicated as 90 seconds. ..

The operation means for changing the BGM and the tone of the message in the special specialization zone described above and the operation means for displaying the countdown (that is, for notifying the type of the specialization zone) are the same. It may or may not be. By keeping these operating means the same, the BGM change, the tone change, and the notification of the special specialization zone can all be caused by the operation of the same operating means, so that the player can operate the other operating means. Although it is difficult to obtain a sense of expectation, it is possible to have a great sense of expectation for the operation of the same operating means. On the other hand, by making these operating means different, the player can have a sense of expectation for the operation of each of the different operating means.

[12-9. Relationship between instruction effects for different operation units in CZ 1]
Hereinafter, the relevance of the instruction effect to the different operation units in the CZ will be described. As described above, during the simulated game during the CZ, the image display body 500 displays an instruction to keep pressing the single push button 205, an operation instruction to each reel stop button, and an operation instruction to the start lever 210.

Maintaining the press of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is an operation related to the lottery result, and if this operation instruction is deleted, the player stops pressing the one-sheet insertion button 205 and cannot receive an advantageous lottery. There is a risk. Further, if the operation instruction for each reel stop button is deleted, the player may not know whether to stop each reel. Further, if the operation instruction for the start lever 210 is erased, the player misunderstands that the visibility of the reel cannot be improved, and the difficulty of pressing the reel during the simulated game increases, and the interest is reduced. There is a risk. Therefore, by making it possible to display the three operation instructions on the image display body 500 at the same time, these problems are solved.

Below, while three operation instructions can be displayed at the same time, the operation instructions are displayed in the order of pressing and holding instruction for the single push button 205, operation instruction for each reel stop button, and operation instruction for the start lever 210. An example to start will be described.

That is, in this example, first, the operation instruction for the one-sheet insertion button 205 related to the lottery result in CZ is displayed to make the player understand the lottery method. Then, an instruction to press the reel stop button is issued to quickly stop the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b, which do not suggest the lottery result. Then, the operation instruction of the starting lever 210 is displayed to improve the visibility of the right reel 301c that suggests the lottery result, and the player's consciousness is concentrated on the right reel 301c.

Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the operation instructions in this order will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 717 (B), when it is confirmed that the transition to CZ is made, the explanation of CZ is executed in a state before the transition to CZ. In this explanation, for example, as described above, it is instructed to maintain the pressed state of the one-sheet insertion button 205. Since some players do not know which operation unit the one-sheet insertion button 205 is, as described above, in this explanation, the image of the one-sheet insertion button 205 (an image imitating the one-sheet insertion button 205) is used as an image. It is preferable to display it on the display body 500.

As shown in FIG. 717 (C), when CZ starts, the explanatory text indicating the instruction to keep pressing the one-sheet insertion button 205 is deleted, but the instruction to keep pressing the one-sheet insertion button 205 is played. It is desirable that the image of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is continuously displayed so that the person can continuously recognize it. Further, when continuously displaying the image of the one-sheet insertion button 205, the display size of the image may be continuously displayed without changing the display size of the image so as not to change the player's recognition of the operation of the one-sheet insertion button. Since it is considered that the player has received the explanation of the mechanism of CZ and understands it, the display size of the image may be changed to be smaller than when the explanation is displayed, or the one-sheet insertion button 205 Since holding down the button is an important operation related to the lottery result, the display size of the image may be changed to be larger than when the explanation is displayed.

The image may be displayed as, for example, a cycle effect in which blinking, movement, and the like are repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle. If the display size of the image is not changed at the timing of deleting the description, the cycle that continues from the time when the description is displayed may be inherited, or the cycle may be restarted at the timing. You may start.

Specifically, for example, the image is displayed as a cycle effect of repeatedly displaying three display images in the order of display image 1, display image 2, and display image 3, and the display image 2 is displayed immediately before the description is deleted. When is displayed, at the timing of erasing the description, the cycle may be inherited and the display image 3 which is the next image of the display image 2 may be displayed to continue the cycle effect, or the cycle effect may be continued. The cycle effect may be restarted by displaying the display image 1 which is the start image.

Further, when the explanation is deleted, the display size of the image of the single sheet insertion button 205 may be changed to a similar size (for example, about 0.7 times to 1.3 times). The effect mode of the image of the one-sheet insertion button 205 may be changed before and after the explanation is erased. Specifically, for example, the cycle effect itself (for example, the movement amount, the display position, and blinking) regardless of whether the display size of the image of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is changed or not. Speed etc.) may be changed. As a result, after the explanation is deleted, the player can be strongly impressed with the operation of holding down the one-sheet insertion button 205.

Subsequently, the image display body 500 displays the operation instruction content for each reel stop button while the operation instruction for holding and holding the one-sheet insertion button 205 is displayed. Since it is premised that the pressing of the one-sheet insertion button 205 will be maintained according to the instruction content of pressing and maintaining the one-sheet insertion button 205, the image of each reel stop button showing the operation instruction for each reel stop button. Is displayed, the image of the one-sheet insertion button 205 does not necessarily have to be displayed.

If the image of the one-sheet insertion button 205 (the image instructing the pressing and holding of the one-sheet insertion button) and the image of each reel stop button (the image instructing the pressing of each reel stop button) are displayed at the same time, the current state is While a sound or lamp for notifying that the state of is CZ is being output, a sound corresponding to an operation instruction of each reel stop button (for example, pressing the right reel stop button 211c such as "right!"" It is desirable to output a sound (for example, a sound indicating) or a lamp (for example, a lamp provided on the right reel stop button 211c is made to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, blue)). As a result, the player can surely recognize that the operation of the reel stop button is required.

Further, when instructing the operation of each reel stop button, for example, some lamps provided in the slot machine 1 (for example, the reel stop button to be pressed) are provided as lamps corresponding to the operation instructions. Only the lamp) is made to emit light, and for the other lamps, the light of the lamp indicating that the current state is controlled by CZ is continued.

Subsequently, while the operation instruction for pressing and maintaining the single-sheet insertion button 205 and the operation instruction for pressing each reel stop button are displayed, the content of the operation instruction for the start lever 210 is displayed on the image display body 500. Will be done. Since it is premised that the pressing of the one-sheet insertion button 205 will be maintained according to the content of the instruction for maintaining the pressing of the one-sheet insertion button 205, an image of the starting lever 210 showing an operation instruction for the starting lever 210 is displayed. The image of the one-sheet insertion button 205 does not necessarily have to be displayed when the image is displayed.

Further, even if the operation is performed according to the operation instruction of the start lever 210, it only improves the visibility in the effect display, and it is considered that the operation of the reel stop button is more important than the operation of the start lever 210. Be done. Therefore, when the image of each reel stop button is displayed, the image of the one-sheet insertion button 205 and the image of the start lever 210 may not necessarily be displayed.

When the image of the single insertion button 205 and the image of the start lever 210 are displayed at the same time, or when the image of each reel stop button and the image of the start lever 210 are displayed at the same time, the current state is CZ. While a sound or lamp for notifying the presence is being output, a sound corresponding to an operation instruction of the starting lever 210 (for example, a sound for instructing the pressing of the starting lever 210 such as "hit the lever!") Or a lamp. (For example, it is desirable to preferentially output a lamp provided in the vicinity of the starting lever 210 to emit a predetermined color). As a result, the player can surely recognize that the operation of the starting lever 210 is required.

Further, when instructing the operation of the start lever 210, only a part of the lamps provided in the slot machine 1 (for example, the lamp provided in the reel stop button to be pressed) is made to emit light as a lamp corresponding to. For other lamps, the lamp that indicates that the current state is controlled by CZ continues to emit light.

As described above, the operation instruction for holding down the single push button 205 (first operation instruction), the operation instruction for each reel stop button (second operation instruction), and the operation instruction for the start lever 210 (third operation instruction). , A plurality of operation instructions can be displayed at the same time. When displaying a plurality of operation instructions at the same time, at least a part of the plurality of operation instructions may be overlapped or displayed without overlapping.

By displaying at least a part of a plurality of operation instructions in an overlapping manner, the player can recognize that the images of the plurality of operation instructions are integrated to form one large operation instruction display, and the motivation for the operation is improved. To do. Further, by displaying at least a part of a plurality of operation instructions in an overlapping manner, it becomes easy to secure a space for displaying an effect other than the operation instructions on the image display body 500, and various display effects using the space are realized. can do. On the other hand, by displaying the plurality of operation instructions without overlapping them, the player can easily identify each of the plurality of operation instructions, so that it becomes easier to understand the game method during the simulated game.

Hereinafter, display patterns (1) to (4) when a plurality of operation instructions are displayed at the same time will be described.

(1) A pattern in which the first operation instruction and the second operation instruction are displayed at the same time, and the third operation instruction is not displayed. When the first operation instruction and the second operation instruction are displayed in an overlapping manner, the first operation instruction should be displayed on the front side of the second operation instruction (that is, only the first instruction can be visually recognized for the overlapping portion). As a result, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the first operation instruction, which is an operation for receiving the preferential lottery. When the first operation instruction and the second operation instruction are displayed in an overlapping manner, by displaying the second operation instruction on the front side of the first operation instruction, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the pressing instruction of each reel stop button. , Since the player presses each reel stop button at an early timing, the simulated game can proceed smoothly. Further, when the first operation instruction and the second operation instruction are displayed without overlapping, the player can identify each of the operations indicated by both instructions, and both operations can be performed more reliably. ..

(2) A pattern in which the first operation instruction and the third operation instruction are displayed at the same time, and the second operation instruction is not displayed. When the first operation instruction and the third operation instruction are displayed in an overlapping manner, the first operation instruction is displayed in front of the third operation instruction, so that the first operation instruction, which is an operation for receiving a preferential lottery, is displayed. It becomes easier for the player to recognize. When the first operation instruction and the third operation instruction are displayed in an overlapping manner, by displaying the third operation instruction on the front side of the first operation instruction, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the operation instruction of the starting lever 210. The player can surely operate the start lever 210 to improve the visibility of the reels and proceed with the simulated game, which in turn improves the interest. Further, when the first operation instruction and the third operation instruction are displayed without overlapping, the player can identify each of the operations indicated by both instructions, and both operations can be reliably performed.

(3) A pattern in which the second operation instruction and the third operation instruction are displayed at the same time, and the first operation instruction is not displayed. When the second operation instruction and the third operation instruction are displayed in an overlapping manner, by displaying the second operation instruction on the front side of the third operation instruction, the operation instruction of the reel stop button can be easily recognized by the player. After stopping the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b that do not suggest the lottery result, the player can concentrate on the operation of improving the visibility of the right reel 301c for suggesting the lottery result. When the second operation instruction and the third operation instruction are displayed in an overlapping manner, by displaying the third operation instruction on the front side of the second operation instruction, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the operation instruction of the starting lever 210. , The player can concentrate on the operation of stopping each reel after first operating the starting lever 210 to improve the visibility of the reels. Further, when the second operation instruction and the third operation instruction are displayed without overlapping, the player can identify each of the operations indicated by both instructions, and both operations can be reliably performed.

(4) A pattern in which the first operation instruction, the second operation instruction, and the third operation instruction are displayed at the same time. The pattern includes, for example, the following patterns (4a) to (4h) depending on the overlap of the display of each operation instruction.
(4a) A pattern in which each of the first operation instruction, the second operation instruction, and the third operation instruction is displayed overlapping with both of the other two operation instructions.
(4b) A pattern in which the first operation instruction overlaps with the second operation instruction and the third operation instruction, but the second operation instruction and the third operation instruction are displayed without overlapping.
(4c) A pattern in which the second operation instruction overlaps with the first operation instruction and the third operation instruction, but the first operation instruction and the third operation instruction do not overlap.
(4d) A pattern in which the first operation instruction and the second operation instruction are displayed without overlapping, although the third operation instruction overlaps with the first operation instruction and the second operation instruction.
(4e) A pattern in which the first operation instruction and the second operation instruction overlap, but the third operation instruction is displayed without overlapping with either the first operation instruction or the second operation instruction.
(4f) A pattern in which the first operation instruction and the third operation instruction overlap, but the second operation instruction is displayed without overlapping with either the first operation instruction or the third operation instruction.
(4g) A pattern in which the second operation instruction and the third operation instruction overlap, but the first operation instruction does not overlap with either the second operation instruction or the third operation instruction.
(4h) A pattern in which each of the first operation instruction, the second operation instruction, and the third operation instruction is displayed if they overlap with any of the other two operation instructions.

In the pattern (4a), since all the operation instructions overlap each other, the player is given the impression that the three operation instructions are integrated, and the integrated operation instructions are easily noticed by the player. Become. Further, the total display area of the three operation instructions is reduced, and the wide area of the image display body 500 can be effectively used for other effects.

In the pattern (4a), there may be an area where all of the first operation instruction, the second operation instruction, and the third operation instruction overlap (that is, the display area of the first operation instruction and the second operation instruction). The intersection of the display area and the display area of the third operation instruction is not an empty set), and the area does not have to exist (that is, the product set is an empty set).

In the pattern (4a), by displaying the first operation instruction, the second operation instruction, and the third operation instruction in this order from the front, the one-sheet insertion button 205 is kept pressed, each reel stop button is pressed, and the start lever 210 is pressed. It is possible to strengthen the impression that the player has for each operation in the order of operation. That is, the player is made to recognize the first operation instruction, which is an operation for receiving the preferential lottery, extremely strongly to surely maintain the pressed state of the one-sheet insertion button 205, and to strongly recognize the operation of each reel stop button. Therefore, the simulated game can be smoothly progressed, and the player's recognition of the operation instruction of the starting lever 210, which is not directly related to the progress of the simulated game, can be weakened.

In the pattern (4a), by displaying the first operation instruction, the third operation instruction, and the second operation instruction in this order from the front, the pressing and holding of the one-sheet insertion button 205, the operation of the start lever 210, and the operation of each reel stop button are performed. It is possible to strengthen the impression that the player has for each operation in the order of pressing. That is, the player is made to recognize the first operation instruction, which is an operation for receiving the preferential lottery, extremely strongly to surely maintain the pressed state of the one-sheet insertion button 205, and to strongly recognize the operation of the starting lever 210. By improving the visibility of the right reel 301c showing the lottery result, it is possible to improve the interest and weaken the player's recognition of the operation instructions of the left reel stop button 211a and the middle reel stop button 211b which do not show the lottery result.

In the pattern (4a), by displaying the second operation instruction, the first operation instruction, and the third operation instruction in order from the front, each reel stop button is pressed, one reel insertion button 205 is pressed and maintained, and the start lever 210 is pressed. It is possible to strengthen the impression that the player has for each operation in the order of operation. That is, the operation of each reel stop button is recognized extremely strongly to allow the simulated game to proceed smoothly, the first operation instruction is strongly recognized by the player, and the pressed state of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is maintained as much as possible. It is possible to weaken the player's perception of the operation instruction of the starting lever 210, which is not directly related to the progress.

In the pattern (4a), by displaying the second operation instruction, the third operation instruction, and the first operation instruction in order from the front, each reel stop button is pressed, the start lever 210 is operated, and the one-sheet insertion button 205 is pressed. It is possible to strengthen the impression that the player has for each operation in the order of maintenance. That is, the operation of each reel stop button is recognized extremely strongly to allow the simulated game to proceed smoothly, and the operation of the starting lever 210 is strongly recognized to improve the visibility of the right reel 301c showing the lottery result, thereby improving the interest. By weakening the player's recognition of the first operation instruction, which is an operation for receiving the preferential lottery, it is possible to suppress the excessive payout of medals and suppress the burden on the hall.

In the pattern (4a), by displaying the third operation instruction, the first operation instruction, and the second operation instruction in order from the front, the operation of the start lever 210, the pressing and holding of the one-sheet insertion button 205, and the pressing and holding of each reel stop button are performed. It is possible to strengthen the impression that the player has for each operation in the order of pressing. That is, the operation of the starting lever 210 is extremely strongly recognized to improve the visibility of the right reel 301c showing the lottery result, thereby improving the interest, and the player is strongly recognized by the first operation instruction to insert one button 205. It is possible to maintain the pressed state as much as possible and weaken the player's recognition of the operation instructions of the left reel stop button 211a and the middle reel stop button 211b that do not show the lottery result.

In the pattern (4a), by displaying the third operation instruction, the second operation instruction, and the first operation instruction in order from the front, the start lever 210 is operated, each reel stop button is pressed, and the one-sheet insertion button 205 is pressed. It is possible to strengthen the impression that the player has for each operation in the order of maintenance. That is, the operation of the starting lever 210 is extremely strongly recognized to improve the visibility of the right reel 301c showing the lottery result, thereby improving the interest, and the operation of each reel stop button is strongly recognized to smoothly proceed with the simulated game. By weakening the player's recognition of the first operation instruction, which is an operation for receiving the preferential lottery, it is possible to suppress the excessive payout of medals and suppress the burden on the hall.

In the pattern (4a), the positional relationship before and after the three operation instructions may be the relationship of three freezing. Specifically, for example, in the portion where the first operation instruction and the second operation instruction overlap, the first operation instruction is displayed in front of the second operation instruction, and the portion where the second operation instruction and the third operation instruction overlap. In, the second operation instruction is displayed before the third operation instruction, and the third operation instruction is displayed before the first operation instruction in the portion where the third operation instruction and the first operation instruction overlap. .. However, in this case, in the portion where all of the first operation instruction, the second operation instruction, and the third operation instruction overlap, for example, any one operation instruction may be displayed, or an image other than each operation instruction may be displayed. It may be displayed or may be blank.

In the patterns (4b) to (4d), although one operation instruction overlaps with the other two operation instructions, the other two operation instructions are displayed without overlapping each other. As a result, the player is given the impression that the three operation instructions are integrated, and the integrated operation instructions are easily noticed by the player, and the other two operation instructions are overlapped with each other. Therefore, as compared with the pattern (4a), the player can easily identify each operation instruction.

In the patterns (4e) to (4g), one operation instruction does not overlap with the other two operation instructions, but the other two operation instructions are displayed overlapping. As a result, the player can completely distinguish the one operation instruction from the other two operation instructions, and it is easy to reliably execute the one operation instruction. On the other hand, the player is given the impression that the other two operation instructions are integrated, and the integrated operation instruction is easily noticed by the player.

The context of the display positions of the first operation instruction and the second operation instruction in the patterns (4b) to (4g) is the same as that described in the above-mentioned pattern (1). 3 The context of the display position of the operation instruction is the same as that described in the above-mentioned pattern (2), and the context of the display position of the second operation instruction and the third operation instruction is the same as the above-mentioned pattern (3). It is the same as the contents explained.

In the pattern (4h), since the operation instructions are displayed without overlapping, the player can easily identify all the operation instructions, so that the operation indicated by each operation instruction can be reliably executed.

For example, when an image of the one-sheet insertion button 205, each reel stop button, or the start lever 210 is displayed as an operation instruction, these images start to be displayed with a special effect (for example, the said image). The image may fade in and be started to be displayed, or the images of the operation unit disassembled into a plurality of parts may be gathered to form an image of the operation unit, and the display may be started. The display of the image may be started in the same manner as during the display.

For example, an image of an operation instruction that has started to be displayed with such a special effect is displayed in front of images of other operation instructions. As a result, even during the display after the image is started to be displayed with the effect, the player can pay attention to the image and perform the operation indicated by the image more reliably. On the other hand, the image of the other operation instruction may be displayed in front of the image of the operation instruction that started to be displayed with a special effect. As a result, the player pays attention to the image with the effect when the special effect is accompanied, and pays attention to the other image located in front of the effect after the effect is completed. The instructions can be recognized by the player in a well-balanced manner.

Further, when an image of the one-sheet insertion button 205, each reel stop button, or the start lever 210 is displayed as an operation instruction, each of these images may have a plurality of display modes. Further, the AT winning expectation may be indicated by these a plurality of display modes (for example, when an image of a reel stop button having a large size is displayed, an image of a reel stop button having a high AT winning expectation and a small size is displayed). When is displayed, the AT winning expectation is low, and when the image of the red single-insertion button 205 is displayed, the AT winning expectation is high, and the image of the white single-insertion button 205 is displayed. In some cases, the expectation of winning AT is low, etc.).

For example, among the images having such a plurality of display modes, the image in the mode in which the AT winning expectation is high is displayed in front of the images in the other operation instructions. As a result, the player can easily recognize the image of the mode in which the AT winning expectation is high, so that the expectation is improved. On the other hand, an image of another operation instruction may be displayed in front of the image of such an aspect in which the AT winning expectation is high. For example, even if the image of the reel stop button in a mode in which the AT winning expectation is high is displayed, the AT is not always won, so the image of the one-sheet insertion button 205 for receiving the preferential lottery. Is displayed on the front side to encourage the player to keep pressing the one-sheet insertion button 205, which is a great advantage for the player.

The operation of the reel stop button during the simulated game is an operation performed for the progress of the simulated game, and is not an operation for receiving a preferential lottery, and in particular, the left reel stop button 211a and the middle reel stop button 211b. Does not indicate the lottery result even if the operation is executed. Therefore, in particular, with respect to the image of the operation instruction of the reel stop button, the player's reel stop button can be started by starting the display with the above-mentioned special effect or by having the above-mentioned plurality of types of display modes. It is possible to increase the expectation and motivation for pressing.

When a plurality of operation instructions are displayed at the same time, at least a part of the timing at which all the voices corresponding to the plurality of operation instructions are output may be duplicated, or only a part of the voices may be output. At least a part of the timing to be output may be duplicated, or the output timing may not be duplicated at all for all the voices.

If the output timings of the sounds corresponding to the operation instructions overlap, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize these operation instructions with the ears, but the output interval interval of the sounds of the operation instructions with the overlapping timings disappears, so that the production has a sense of speed. Increase. On the other hand, for the voice of the operation instruction whose output timing does not overlap with the voice of the other operation instruction, the player can easily recognize the operation instruction indicated by the voice by ear, and the operation indicated by the operation instruction is executed more reliably. It will be easier.

Specifically, for example, the voice of the instruction to maintain the pressed state of the single reel insertion button 205 for receiving the preferential lottery is duplicated with the voice of other operation instructions so that the player can clearly recognize it. However, with regard to the voice of the pressing instruction of each reel stop button related to the progress of the simulated game and the operation instruction of the starting lever 210 for improving the visibility of the reel, at least the output timing is at least in order to improve the sense of speed of the production. Duplicate a part.

Further, when a plurality of operation instructions are displayed at the same time, for example, all the voices corresponding to each of the plurality of operation instructions may be output, or only a part of the voices may be output. By outputting all the voices, the player can be made to recognize all the instruction contents by ear. Further, the reason why only a part of the voice is output is for the player who is confused because he / she cannot understand the instruction contents indicated by many voices when all the voices are output. When outputting only a part of the voice, for example, in order to improve the visibility of the priority (for example, the instruction to keep pressing the one-sheet insertion button 205 for receiving the preferential lottery> the reel showing the lottery result). The operation instruction of the start lever 210> the instruction to press each reel stop button, which may not show the lottery result, has a higher priority), and the predetermined number (1) is from the highest priority. It is preferable to output the voice corresponding to one or two) operation instructions.

Further, when the voice corresponding to each of the plurality of operation instructions is output, a volume difference may be provided in each voice. Also in this case, for example, the priority (for example, the instruction to keep pressing the one-sheet insertion button 205 for receiving the preferential lottery> the operation instruction of the starting lever 210 for improving the visibility of the reel showing the lottery result> The priority is higher in the order of pressing the reel stop button, which may not show the lottery result), and the higher the priority, the louder the output.

When a plurality of operation instructions are displayed at the same time, at least a part of the timings at which all the lamps corresponding to the plurality of operation instructions emit light may overlap, or only some of the lamps emit light. At least a part of the timing may overlap, or the timing of emitting light for all the lamps may not overlap at all.

If the light emission timings of the lamps corresponding to the operation instructions overlap, the player is more likely to be confused as to which operation unit to operate, but since many lamps emit light at the same time, the player's expectation is improved. On the other hand, with respect to the voice of the operation instruction whose light emission timing does not overlap with the lamp of the other operation instruction, it becomes easier for the player to pay attention to the operation instruction indicated by the lamp, and it becomes easier to execute the operation indicated by the operation instruction more reliably. ..

Specifically, for example, the lamp for instructing to maintain the pressed state of the single reel insertion button 205 for giving preferential treatment to the lottery is overlapped with the light emission of the lamp for other operation instructions so that the player can clearly recognize it. Instead, the lamps for pressing each reel stop button related to the progress of the simulated game and for operating the start lever 210 to improve the visibility of the reels are emitted in order to improve the player's expectation. Overlap at least part of the timing.

Further, when a plurality of operation instructions are displayed at the same time, for example, all the lamps corresponding to the plurality of operation instructions may be made to emit light, or only some of the lamps may be made to emit light. By making all the lamps emit light, the player can be made to recognize all the instruction contents by the lamps. Further, the reason why only some of the lamps are made to emit light is that when all the lamps emit light, the player is confused because he / she cannot understand the instruction contents indicated by many lamps. When only some of the lamps are to emit light, for example, priority (for example, instruction to keep pressing the one-sheet insertion button 205 for receiving a preferential lottery> start to improve the visibility of the reel showing the lottery result. The operation instruction of the lever 210> the instruction to press each reel stop button that may not show the lottery result, the higher priority) is predetermined, and the predetermined number (one or one or one) is set from the highest priority. It is advisable to make the lamps corresponding to the operation instructions of (2) light up.

Further, when the lamps corresponding to the plurality of operation instructions are made to emit light, for example, the light emission patterns of some or all of the lamps may be changed. Also in this case, for example, the priority (for example, the instruction to keep pressing the one-sheet insertion button 205 for receiving the preferential lottery> the operation instruction of the starting lever 210 for improving the visibility of the reel showing the lottery result> The priority is high in the order of pressing each reel stop button, which may not show the lottery result), and it corresponds to a predetermined number (1 to 3) of operation instructions from the lowest priority. It is advisable to change the light emission pattern of the lamp.

Further, for example, when at least a part of the lamps to be used overlaps in the light emission of the lamp corresponding to each of the plurality of operation instructions, for example, the lamp corresponding to only one of the plurality of operation instructions Light is emitted. In this case, for example, the priority (for example, the instruction to keep pressing the one-sheet insertion button 205 for receiving the preferential lottery> the operation instruction of the starting lever 210 for improving the visibility of the reel showing the lottery result> the lottery. The priority is higher in the order of pressing the reel stop button, which may not show the result), and it is preferable to light the lamp corresponding to the operation instruction having the highest priority. Further, when at least a part of the lamps to be used overlaps in the light emission of the lamps corresponding to the plurality of operation instructions, for example, the light emission of the lamps corresponding to the plurality of operation instructions is executed in order, for example. You may.

[12-10. Relationship between instruction effects for different operation units in CZ 2]
Below, while three operation instructions can be displayed at the same time, the operation instructions are displayed in the order of pressing and holding instruction for the one-sheet insertion button 205, operation instruction for the start lever 210, and operation instruction for each reel stop button. An example to start will be described.

For example, as shown in FIG. 730, the slot machine 1 includes a transmissive liquid crystal 301aa, a transmissive liquid crystal 301ab, a transmissive liquid crystal 301ba, a transmissive liquid crystal 301bb, a transmissive liquid crystal 301ca, and a transmissive liquid crystal 301cc, which cover the upper and lower stages of each reel. It shall be. Then, it is assumed that an image is displayed on each transmissive liquid crystal during the simulated game of CZ, and the visibility of the upper and lower stages of each reel is lowered.

In this example, first, an operation instruction for the one-sheet insertion button 205 related to the lottery result in CZ is displayed to make the player understand the lottery method. Next, by displaying the operation instruction for the start lever 210, the game characteristics of the eye-catching in the simulated game of CZ are understood. Finally, an operation instruction for each reel stop button is displayed to advance the simulated game.

By displaying the operation instruction for the start lever 210 before the operation instruction of each reel stop button, for example, a player who is not good at pressing the reel operates the start lever 210 to improve the visibility of the reel. A player who is good at pushing the eyes in the simulated game does not dare to operate the start lever 210, and pushes the eyes in the simulated game while only the middle stage of each reel is visible. It is possible to provide a way of enjoying a simulated game according to the skill of the person.

In addition, even a player who is good at pushing the reels can proceed with the game more smoothly by pushing the reels with all the pieces of the reel visible than when only the middle stage of the reel is visible. Therefore, the operation instruction of the start lever 210 is displayed before the operation instruction of each reel stop button is displayed.

The pattern in which each operation instruction is displayed at the same time, the overlap of the images of each operation instruction in the pattern, and the relationship between the voice and the lamp corresponding to each operation instruction are the same as those described above.

[12-11. Relationship between instruction effects for different operation units in CZ 3]
Below, while three operation instructions can be displayed at the same time, the operation instructions are displayed in the order of the operation instruction for each reel stop button, the operation instruction for holding down the push button 205, and the operation instruction for the start lever 210. An example to start will be described.

In CZ, although it is possible to receive a preferential lottery by maintaining the pressed state of the one-sheet insertion button 205, there are some players who feel that the physical load due to maintaining the pressed state is large. Furthermore, if an attempt is made to pseudo-stop each reel according to the operation instruction of each reel stop button while the pressed state is maintained, there is a possibility that the one-sheet insertion button 205 is accidentally released.

Therefore, in the CZ of this chapter, it is possible to receive a preferential lottery even if the maintenance of the pressed state of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is interrupted up to a predetermined number of times (for example, once) during the CZ. Specifically, for example, even if the pressing of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is interrupted after the pressing and retaining flag is turned on during CZ, the pressing and retaining flag remains on if the number of interruptions is within a predetermined number of times. , When the number of interruptions exceeds a predetermined number of times, or when a predetermined time (for example, within 10 seconds) has elapsed from the cancellation, the press / hold flag is set to off.

FIG. 732 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the CZ effect. Mainly, the difference from the production of FIG. 717 will be described. (A) is a state in which only the left reel 301a is pseudo-stopped in the simulated game of the start game of CZ, and is, for example, a continuation state of FIG. 717 (C). Further, in (A), it is assumed that the pressing of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is maintained (that is, the pressing retention flag is on).

(B) is a state in which the pressing of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is interrupted from the state of (A). The effect display displayed on the image display body 500 is the same as that in (A) only by interrupting the pressing of the one-sheet insertion button 205. At the time of (B), the AT lottery has not been performed yet, and even if the pressing of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is interrupted after the first pseudo-stop is performed, one sheet is again inserted before the second pseudo-stop is performed. Since the AT lottery can be received when the button 205 is continuously pressed, the effect state of (A) is maintained in (B).

(C) is a state in which the middle reel 301b is pseudo-stopped while the pressing of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is interrupted. When the middle reel 301b is stopped while the pressing of the single-sheet insertion button 205 is suspended, it is emphasized more than the operation instruction of the single-sheet insertion button 205 displayed from the start of CZ (specifically, it is emphasized). A mode different from the image of the 1-sheet insertion button 205 displayed from the start of CZ such as a large size) Operation instruction of the 1-sheet insertion button 205 (for example, the image of the 1-sheet insertion button 205 and "Keep pressing!" Message) is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the preferential lottery cannot be received unless the one-sheet insertion button 205 is continuously pressed.

As described with reference to FIG. 726, the slot machine 1 has a specification in which the AT lottery during the pseudo game is performed at the time of the second pseudo stop of the pseudo game, and when the second pseudo stop is performed with the press hold flag off. , Since a lottery using the table 1 of FIG. 710 (that is, a lottery in which the AT winning rate is not given preferential treatment) is performed, when the second pseudo stop is performed with the pressing and holding of the one-sheet insertion button 205 interrupted, this As described above, in addition to the operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205 displayed from the beginning, the emphasized operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is displayed.

Therefore, at the timing when the emphasized operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is displayed, the one-sheet insertion button 205 is not pressed, so that the operation instruction has a meaning of a warning as well as a warning. (Not only the image of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is displayed, but also the message "Keep pressing!" Is displayed at the same time, etc.).

However, since the simulated game itself can proceed without maintaining the pressing of the single reel insertion button 205, as described above, the operation instruction of the single reel insertion button displayed from the start of CZ and the emphasized 1 Not only the operation instruction of the sheet insertion button 205 and the operation instruction of the right reel stop button 211c are also displayed.

In addition, the emphasized operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is another operation instruction (in the example of (C), the message "Stop red 7 in the middle of the right reel!", The image of the right reel stop button 211c, and The image of the one-sheet insertion button 205 that has been displayed since the start of CZ) may be superimposed or may be displayed without overlapping. When they are displayed in an overlapping manner, the position and mode in which the operation instruction and the other operation instructions can be visually recognized (for example, the operation instruction displayed on the front side is displayed semi-transparently or blinks). Is desirable.

When the operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205 displayed from the start of CZ and the operation instruction of the emphasized one-sheet insertion button 205 are displayed at the same time, the one-sheet insertion displayed from the start of CZ is inserted. It is desirable to output the voice corresponding to the emphasized one-sheet insertion button 205 operation instruction without outputting the voice corresponding to the operation instruction of the button 205. Since the instruction contents themselves in these two operation instructions are the same, it is sufficient to output only the warning voice in the emphasized operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205.

(D) is a continuation of (C), and the pressing of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is continuously interrupted. This is the same as in FIG. 717 (E), except that the emphasized operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is displayed on the image display body 500.

(E) is a continuation of (D), and the pressing of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is continuously interrupted. This is the same as in FIG. 717 (F), except that the emphasized operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is displayed on the image display body 500. It is considered that the operation instruction for maintaining the pressed state of the one-sheet insertion button 205, which is an operation for receiving a preferential lottery, is more important than the operation instruction for the right reel stop button 211c and the operation instruction for the start lever 210. Therefore, the emphasized operation instruction for holding down the one-sheet insertion button 205 is continuously displayed.

However, since it is possible to improve the visibility of the right reel 301c and proceed with the simulated game without maintaining the pressing of the one-sheet insertion button 205, the one-sheet insertion button displayed from the start of CZ Not only the operation instruction of the emphasized one-sheet insertion button 205, but also the operation instruction of the right reel stop button 211c and the operation instruction of the start lever 210 are displayed.

However, since some players feel that the physical load of holding down the one-sheet insertion button 205 is heavy and do not need to receive a preferential lottery, the emphasized operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is given. When a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the display, the display of the operation instruction may be deleted. Further, when the one-sheet insertion button 205 is pressed and held again (maintains the pressed state), it is considered that the player has recognized the emphasized one-sheet insertion button 205 pressing instruction, so the display is deleted. May be good. Further, when the AT lottery during the simulated game is performed (the second pseudo stop is performed) with the pressing and holding of the one-sheet insertion button 205 restarted, an advantageous AT using the table 2 of FIG. 710 is used. Since the lottery has been held, the display may be deleted.

Further, the emphasized operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205 may be continuously displayed only once for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), or a continuous display state for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) and a predetermined time (for example, 1). The state in which the second) is not displayed may be repeatedly displayed a plurality of times (for example, 5 times).

(F) is a continuation of (E), in a state where a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of displaying the emphasized operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205, or the pressing and holding of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is resumed. is there. Since the emphasized operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205 has been deleted, the state is the same as in FIG. 717 (F).

The final AT lottery in the CZ ends with the second pseudo stop of the pseudo game of the final game of the CZ. Therefore, after the second pseudo stop of the pseudo game of the final game of CZ, even if the pressing of the one-card insertion button 205 is interrupted, the lottery is not affected, so that even if the pressing of the one-sheet insertion button is interrupted, it is emphasized. It is not necessary to display the operation instruction of the single sheet insertion button 205.

In addition, you may always freeze after stopping all reels of this game in the final game of CZ. For example, during the freeze, on the image display body 500, "Congratulations!" (When the AT is won in the CZ final game) and "Sorry ...!" (When the AT is not won in the CZ final game). A display showing the result may be displayed. It should be noted that even if the pressing of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is interrupted (in the period from the stop of all reels to the start of the next game (rotating the reels)), the one-sheet insertion button 205 is emphasized. The operation instruction of is not necessary to be displayed.

An example has been described in which the pressing and holding flag is not set to off even if the pressing and holding of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is interrupted up to a predetermined number of times, but when the predetermined number of times is a plurality of times, it is emphasized 1. The operation instruction of the sheet insertion button 205 may be displayed multiple times (when it is displayed multiple times in one game, or although it is displayed only once in one game, it straddles multiple games called CZ. There are cases where it is displayed multiple times in an advantageous state to be executed).

Further, when the operation instruction of the emphasized one-sheet insertion button 205 is displayed, a new opportunity for displaying the emphasized operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205 may be satisfied. In this case, when the new opportunity is satisfied, the emphasized operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button may be newly displayed, or the already emphasized operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is displayed. Therefore, the operation display may not be newly performed, or the display time of the new operation display may be added to the display time of the highlighted operation instruction that has already been displayed, although the operation display is not newly performed.

[12-12. Relationship between instruction effects for different operation units in CZ 4]
Below, while three operation instructions can be displayed at the same time, the operation instructions are displayed in the order of the operation instruction for each reel stop button, the operation instruction for the start lever 210, and the instruction for holding down the push button 205. An example to start will be described. Also in the CZ of this chapter, it is possible to receive a preferential lottery even if the maintenance of the pressed state of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is interrupted up to a predetermined number of times (for example, once) during the CZ.

FIG. 733 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the CZ effect. Mainly, the difference from the production of FIG. 717 will be described. (A) is a state in which the left reel and the middle reel are pseudo-stopped in the simulated game in CZ, which is the same state as in FIG. 717 (D). The operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205 and the operation instruction of the right reel stop button 211c, which have been displayed since the start of CZ, are displayed. Further, in (A), the pressed state of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is maintained.

(B) is a continuation of (A) and is in the same state as in FIG. 717 (E). In addition to the operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205 and the operation instruction of the right reel stop button 211c displayed from the start of Z, three operation instructions of the start lever 210 for improving the visibility of the reel. Is displayed. Further, in (B), the pressed state of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is maintained.

(C) is a state in which the pressing state of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is interrupted in the state of (B). When the pressing state of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is interrupted while the three operation instructions are displayed, for example, it is emphasized more than the operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205 displayed at the time from the start of CZ (specifically). Specifically, the operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205 (for example, the image of the one-sheet insertion button 205 and the "press" are displayed in a mode different from the image of the one-sheet insertion button 205 displayed from the start of CZ such as a large size). The message "Continue!") Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the preferential lottery cannot be received unless the one-sheet insertion button 205 is continuously pressed.

As described with reference to FIG. 726, the slot machine 1 has a specification in which the AT lottery during the pseudo game is performed at the time of the second pseudo stop of the pseudo game, and when the second pseudo stop is performed with the press hold flag off. , Since the lottery using the table 1 of FIG. 710 (that is, the lottery in which the AT winning rate is not given preferential treatment) is performed, when the pressing of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is interrupted after the second pseudo stop is performed, the next Since there is a possibility that the lottery using the table 2 of FIG. 710 will not be performed in the game of, the operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205, the operation instruction of the right reel stop button 211c, and the start lever 210 that have been displayed from the beginning. In addition to the operation instruction of the above, the operation instruction of the emphasized one-sheet insertion button 205 is displayed.

Therefore, at the timing when the emphasized operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is displayed, the one-sheet insertion button 205 is not pressed, so that the operation instruction has a meaning of a warning as well as a warning. (Not only the image of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is displayed, but also the message "Keep pressing!" Is displayed at the same time, etc.).

However, since the simulated game itself can proceed without maintaining the pressing of the single reel insertion button 205, as described above, the operation instruction of the single reel insertion button displayed from the start of CZ and the emphasized 1 Not only the operation instruction of the sheet insertion button 205 and the operation instruction of the right reel stop button 211c are also displayed.

In addition, the emphasized operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is another operation instruction (in the example of (C), the message "If you want to check where Red 7 stopped, operate the start lever!", Start. The image of the lever 210, the image of the right reel stop button 211c, and the image of the one-sheet insertion button 205 displayed from the start of CZ) may be superimposed or may not be displayed. However, when they are displayed in an overlapping manner, the position or mode in which the operation instruction and the other operation instructions can be visually recognized (for example, the operation instruction displayed on the front side is displayed semi-transparently or blinks). Etc.).

When the operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205 displayed from the start of CZ and the operation instruction of the emphasized one-sheet insertion button 205 are displayed at the same time, the one-sheet insertion displayed from the start of CZ is inserted. It is desirable to output the voice corresponding to the emphasized one-sheet insertion button 205 operation instruction without outputting the voice corresponding to the operation instruction of the button 205. Since the instruction contents themselves in these two operation instructions are the same, it is sufficient to output only the warning voice in the emphasized operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205.

In the example of FIG. 733, since the pressing of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is interrupted after (B) (that is, after the second pseudo stop), the AT lottery in the pseudo game is completed, that is, the said In the simulated game, a lottery using the table 2 of FIG. 710 (that is, a lottery in which the AT winning rate is given preferential treatment) is performed. That is, there is a possibility that the pressing and holding of the one-card insertion button 205 will be resumed by the time after the second pseudo stop of the simulated game of the next game, and the lottery using the table 2 of FIG. 710 will be received again in the simulated game. is there.

Therefore, for example, even if the emphasized operation instruction of the single sheet insertion button 205 is displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the pressing of the single sheet insertion button 205 is interrupted in the state of (B). Alternatively, when the pressing of the one-card insertion button 205 is interrupted in the state of (B) and a predetermined operation up to the second pseudo stop of the pseudo game of the next game is executed (for example, the (pseudo game) of the next game is executed. The operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205 emphasized at the time of lever-on (that is, when the lottery of the winning combination is executed) may be displayed.

The emphasized operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205 may be deleted after a predetermined time has elapsed from the appearance (for example, 10 seconds later), or may be deleted at the timing when the pressing and holding of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is resumed. It may be deleted at the timing when the lottery for the pseudo game is performed (the timing when the second pseudo stop is performed) while the pressing and holding of the one-card insertion button 205 is resumed. Further, the emphasized operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205 may be continuously displayed only once for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), or a continuous display state for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) and a predetermined time (for example, 1). The state in which the second) is not displayed may be repeatedly displayed a plurality of times (for example, 5 times).

In (D), since the pressing and holding of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is resumed, the emphasized operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is deleted, and the state is the same as in FIG. 717 (F).

The final AT lottery in the CZ ends with the second pseudo stop of the pseudo game of the final game of the CZ. Therefore, after the second pseudo stop of the pseudo game of the final game of CZ, even if the pressing of the one-card insertion button 205 is interrupted, the lottery is not affected, so that even if the pressing of the one-sheet insertion button is interrupted, it is emphasized. It is not necessary to display the operation instruction of the single sheet insertion button 205.

In addition, you may always freeze after stopping all reels of this game in the final game of CZ. For example, during the freeze, on the image display body 500, "Congratulations!" (When the AT is won in the CZ final game) and "Sorry ...!" (When the AT is not won in the CZ final game). A display showing the result may be displayed. Even if the pressing of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is interrupted while the freeze (the display) is being performed, the emphasized operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205 may not be displayed.

An example has been described in which the pressing and holding flag is not set to off even if the pressing and holding of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is interrupted up to a predetermined number of times, but when the predetermined number of times is a plurality of times, the emphasis is 1 The operation instruction of the sheet insertion button 205 may be displayed a plurality of times.

Further, when the operation instruction of the emphasized one-sheet insertion button 205 is displayed, a new opportunity for displaying the emphasized operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205 may be satisfied. In this case, when the new opportunity is satisfied, the emphasized operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button may be newly displayed, or the already emphasized operation instruction of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is displayed. Therefore, the operation display may not be newly performed, or the display time of the new operation display may be added to the display time of the highlighted operation instruction that has already been displayed, although the operation display is not newly performed.

[12-13. Relationship between instruction effects for different operation units in CZ 5]
Below, while three operation instructions can be displayed at the same time, the operation instructions are displayed in the order of the operation instruction for the start lever 210, the instruction for holding down the press of the sheet insertion button 205, and the operation instruction for each reel stop button. An example to start will be described. The CZ specifications in this chapter and the next chapter are different from the above-mentioned example. Hereinafter, CZ in this chapter and the next chapter will also be referred to as CZ2.

As shown in FIG. 735 and the like, the slot machines 1 of this chapter and the next chapter cover the upper and lower stages of each reel, and cover the upper and lower stages of each reel. , Shall be provided. Then, it is assumed that an image is displayed on each transmissive liquid crystal during the simulated game of CZ, and the visibility of the upper and lower stages of each reel is lowered.

Similar to CZ, CZ2 games of a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games, but ends with the AT winning game when the AT is won) are executed, and a pseudo game is performed at the start of each game. Even in the simulated game of CZ2, an instruction to aim at Red 7 appears in the middle stage of each reel. However, in the simulated game of CZ2, when the player presses the reel stop button, the reel stops without slipping (so-called bitter stop) with the frame at the pressing timing. That is, in the simulated game, the player can always stop the red 7 in the middle stage by pushing the red 7 in the middle stage.

In the pseudo game of CZ2, in addition to or instead of the AT lottery at the time of the second pseudo stop executed in CZ, red 7 at the time of the first pseudo stop, the second pseudo stop, and the third pseudo stop, respectively. The AT lottery is executed when the player stops in the middle stage. This AT lottery is also called a B-5 lottery. That is, the CZ2 has a game property that requires a technique of pushing the red 7 to the middle stage during the simulated game.

Further, the simulated game of CZ2 is a game in which the red 7 is pushed to the middle stage, but an image is displayed on each transmissive liquid crystal and the visibility of the upper and lower stages of each reel is obstructed so that only the middle stage can be visually recognized (so-called 1). Many players find it difficult to push the reels (with the windows open).

Therefore, in CZ2 as well as in CZ, when the start lever 210 is operated during the simulated game, the image of each transmissive liquid crystal is erased and all the frames of each reel can be visually recognized (so-called all windows (3 windows) open state). It becomes. However, in order to give an incentive to the player who is good at pushing, the red 7 is placed in the middle with one window rather than the AT lottery value when the red 7 is stopped in the middle with all windows open. It is assumed that the AT lottery value when the window is stopped is given preferential treatment.

Further, the one-sheet insertion button 205 is more than the AT lottery value when the red 7 is stopped in the middle stage in the state where the pressing state of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is not maintained (that is, the state where the pressing maintenance flag is off). It is assumed that the AT lottery value when the red 7 is stopped in the middle row while the pressing state of is maintained (that is, the pressing and maintaining flag is on) is given preferential treatment.

FIG. 734 is an example of an AT lottery table showing the lottery value of the AT lottery executed when the red 7 is stopped in the middle stage at each pseudo stop of the CZ2. As mentioned above, the lottery value with one window open is given preferential treatment over the AT lottery value with all windows open (table 4 is more preferential than table 3 and table 6 is more preferential than table 5). Has been). Further, as described above, the lottery value when the one-sheet insertion button 205 is not maintained is given preferential treatment over the lottery value when the one-sheet insertion button 205 is not maintained (table 5 is more favorable than table 3). Table 6 is given preferential treatment over).

In the example of FIG. 734, the lottery value (5000) when the red 7 is stopped by opening one window without maintaining the pressed state of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is the pressed state of the one-sheet insertion button 205. It is higher than the lottery value (3500) in the case where Red 7 is stopped by opening all windows (Table 5). That is, comparing the fact that the red 7 is stopped in the middle stage while the one-sheet insertion button 205 is pressed and the red 7 is stopped in the one-window open state, the red 7 is stopped when the one window is open. Stopping the bitterness has a greater contribution rate to the preferential treatment of the lottery value of the B-5 lottery. Many players find it more difficult to stop Red 7 with one window open than to keep Red 7 pressed in the middle of the one-sheet insertion button 205, which is more difficult. This is to give an incentive for performing various operations.

Hereinafter, CZ2 will be described (mainly the difference from CZ). 735 and 736 are explanatory views showing an example of the effect of CZ2. FIG. 735 (A) shows a state in which all reels are stopped in the game in which CZ2 is won. In the game in which the CZ2 is won, as in the game in which the CZ is won, a freeze effect is generated for 5 seconds from the time when the reels are fully stopped, and the operation of the start lever 210 is not accepted during the freeze effect. Cannot start.

When the freeze effect starts, a message indicating that the CZ2 has been won is displayed on the image display body 500. For example, CZ2 is continuously executed for a maximum of 10 games, and if an AT is won, CZ2 is terminated in the game and AT starts from the next game.

(B) is a state in which all reels of the game that won CZ2 are stopped, which is a continuation of (A). In (B), the freeze effect continues from (A). In CZ2, a message is displayed indicating that a favorable result can be obtained for the player by pressing the bitter.

(C) is a state in which all reels of the game that won CZ2 are stopped, which is a continuation of (B). For example, from the timing (C), an image is displayed on each transmissive liquid crystal, and one window is open.

In (C), an operation instruction indicating that the image of each transmissive liquid crystal can be erased and the state in which one window is open can be changed to the state in which all windows are open by operating the start lever 210 (“starting lever”). You can change the size of the window by. If you succeed in pressing the bite in one window, it's super hot! "And the image of the start lever 210 with an arrow) are displayed.

As described above, since the selection of whether one window is open or all windows are open is an operation that contributes most to the lottery value of the B-5 lottery, the operation instruction of the starting lever 210 is thus performed. Appears before the operation instruction for the one-sheet insertion button 205 and the operation instruction for each reel stop button.

In addition, since it is necessary for the player to confirm whether or not the bitter pressing can be successfully performed with one window open, the operation on the starting lever 210 is performed before the CZ2 starts as in (C). Instructions (that is, operation instructions for enhancing the visibility of the reel effect) are given.

In addition, for example, when the start lever 210 is operated at the timing before the start of CZ2 as in (C), the image of each transmissive liquid crystal may be erased and the state may be changed to the state where all windows are open. Further, in this case, the image may be displayed again on each transmissive liquid crystal by the start of CZ2, and one window may be opened again. As a result, the player can confirm the state in which one window is open and the state in which all windows are open, and it becomes easy to determine which of the simulated games is to be performed. Further, before the start of CZ2, the state in which one window is open and the state in which all windows are open may be confirmed a plurality of times.

Since the image displayed on each transmissive liquid crystal can be erased at all times during the simulated game of CZ2, the operation instruction to the start lever 210 (for example, the image of the start lever 210) is given during CZ (at least). It is desirable that the images continue to be displayed until the image of each transmissive liquid crystal is erased).

In addition, in FIG. 735 and FIG. 736, an example in which the start lever 210 is not operated, that is, the simulated game is advanced in the state of one window in which the image is displayed on each transmissive liquid crystal will be described.

(D) is a state in which the freeze effect up to (C) is released and the CZ2 game is started (a state when the lever is turned on). In CZ2, the simulated game starts when the lever is turned on. An operation instruction (a message saying "If you keep pressing 1BET, the lottery will be given more preferential treatment!" And an image of the 1-sheet insertion button 205 with an arrow) that instructs to keep the 1-sheet insertion button 205 pressed is further displayed as an image. It is displayed on the body 500.

Further, by continuing to press the one-card insertion button 205 during the simulated game of CZ2, it is possible to receive a preferential AT lottery. Therefore, an operation instruction (for example, one-card insertion) for the one-sheet insertion button 205 during CZ2 is performed. It is desirable that the image of button 205) be continuously displayed. Further, after (D), it is desirable that the image display body 500 displays a telop image indicating an instruction to keep pressing the single sheet insertion button 205 as shown in FIG. 719.

(E) is a state at the start of the simulated game of CZ2, and is a continuation state of (D). An operation instruction for pressing each reel stop button (a message "Aim for red 7!", An image of each reel stop button with an effect) is further displayed on the image display body 500. In the pseudo game of CZ2, the reel stop order does not matter, that is, even if the reels other than the right reel 301c are stopped in the third pseudo stop, the lottery is not disadvantageous.

(F) is a state in which the left reel 301a is pseudo-stopped according to the operation instruction for each reel stop button appearing in (E). In addition to the three operation instructions, an image of the main character is displayed. In (F), the red 7 was successfully stopped in the middle of the left reel 301a, and the B-5 lottery was received. Therefore, for example, the message "GOOD !!" is displayed on the image display body 500. Reel. If Red 7 fails to stop in the middle row, the message "BAD ..." is displayed as shown in FIG. 736 (F') because the B-5 lottery could not be received. Will be done.

In addition, for example, when the red 7 is pseudo-stopped in the middle stage (that is, when the B-5 lottery is received) while the pressing of the one-sheet insertion button 205 is not maintained, or when the stop position is simply pseudo-stopped. When the image display body 500 is used (that is, when an operation that may receive a B-5 lottery is performed), the operation instruction of the emphasized one-sheet insertion button 205 as shown in FIG. 732 is displayed on the image display body 500. You may. This is to get the players to receive a more preferential lottery.

FIG. 736 (G) shows a state in which all reels are pseudo-stopped in the simulated game. A message indicating that the AT lottery result is notified by repeatedly hitting the MAX input button 206 and an image of the MAX input button 206 with an arrow are displayed on the image display body 500.

(H) is a state in which all reels are pseudo-stopped in the simulated game, and is a continuation state of (G). In (I), the freeze production is ongoing. A message instructing the continuous pressing of the MAX input button 206 and an image of the MAX input button 206 with an arrow are displayed on the image display body 500.

(I) is a state in which all reels are pseudo-stopped in the simulated game, and is a continuation state of (H). It is assumed that the player follows the instruction of repeatedly hitting the MAX input button 206. On the image display body 500, an image in which the main character wears an aura and a message (Yes !!) indicating that the AT has been won are displayed.

If the MAX input button 206 is not repeatedly hit, the AT lottery result is notified after the end of the freeze effect and by the end of the normal game that starts immediately after the pseudo game. If the AT is not won, for example, even if the MAX input button 206 is repeatedly hit, the main character does not wear an aura and falls down by the end of the freeze effect.

In addition, in order to leave the lingering sound of the CZ being executed to the player, the instruction effect of the start lever 210 may be displayed even at the start of the normal game after the end of the CZ across the CZ. However, in a normal game that is not a simulated game, hiding the reels increases the difficulty of pressing and may miss a small role, which may be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, an image imitating each transmissive liquid crystal is displayed as an image display body 500. It is desirable to display in. At this time, the image imitating each transmissive liquid crystal obstructs the visual recognition of the effect image displayed on the image display body 500, and when the start lever 210 is operated, the image imitating each transmissive liquid crystal is erased from the image display body 500. The visibility of the effect image is improved.

[12-14. Relationship between instruction effects for different operation units in CZ 6]
Below, while three operation instructions can be displayed at the same time, the operation instructions are displayed in the order of the operation instruction for the start lever 210, the operation instruction for each reel stop button, and the operation instruction for pressing and maintaining the push button 205. An example to start will be described. The CZ specifications in this chapter and the next chapter are different from the above-mentioned example. Hereinafter, CZ2 is also executed in this chapter.

In the simulated game of CZ2, it is difficult to stop Red 7 in the middle stage when one window is open, but the AT winning rate is not high when all windows are open. Therefore, in CZ2 of this chapter, a practice effect of practicing bitter pushing is executed before the first pseudo stop in which the B-5 lottery can be executed. Although the practice production is realized by a simulated game in which the reels stop biting, the AT lottery is not executed during the practice production.

Also, in the practice production, the player can erase the image of each transmissive liquid crystal and change from the state where one window is open to the state where all windows are open by operating the start lever 210. It is possible to confirm in advance whether the skill of pushing the eyes is suitable for opening one window or opening all windows by a practice effect.

FIG. 737 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the production of CZ2. FIG. 737 (D2) is a state in which the simulated game of the practice effect has started, and is a continuation state of FIG. 735 (C). When the practice effect starts, the reels rotate in a pseudo manner, and each reel stop button becomes effective. An operation instruction for pressing each reel stop button (a message "Practice start! Aim for red 7!", An image of each reel stop button with an effect) is displayed on the image display body 500.

(E2) is a state in which the left reel 301a is first pseudo-stopped in the practice production. Although I tried to push the button with one window open, Red 7 did not stop in the middle of the left reel 301a, so not only the image of the starting lever 210 but also the message ("Operate the starting lever without overdoing it". Then, you can use 3 windows! ”) To prompt the player to operate the starting lever 210 again. As a result, it is possible to execute the pressing of the difficulty level (one window open or all windows open) suitable for the player.

(F2) is a state in which all reels are pseudo-stopped in the practice production. Since the actual simulated game (that is, the simulated game in which the B-5 lottery can be executed at each simulated stop) starts from now on, an operation instruction for the start lever 210 and an operation instruction for each reel stop button are displayed. When the start lever 210 is operated to change the state to open all windows in the practice production, for example, in (F2), an image is displayed on each transmissive liquid crystal and the state returns to the state where one window is open. .. In addition, since there are some players who cannot decide whether to open one window or all windows in one practice, and some players who are not confident in pushing the bitter, it is possible to execute multiple practice productions in one simulated game. May be good.

(G2) is a state in which the actual simulated game in CZ2 has started. After the end of the practice effect, for example, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses or a predetermined operation unit (for example, the effect button 204) is operated, the reels are pseudo-rotated and the actual simulated game is started. (G2) is the same as that of FIG. 735 (D) except that the image of each reel stop button is displayed as an operation instruction image. After (G2), the transition to FIG. 735 (E) occurs.

[13. Seesaw game production]
Hereinafter, the seesaw game production executed by the slot machine 1 in this chapter will be described. The reel arrangement in the slot machine 1 of this chapter is the same as that shown in FIG. 715. Although the details will be described later, in the seesaw game production, the medal moves to the seesaw accessory mounted on the slot machine 1, and the player operates the start lever 210 to adjust the angle of the seesaw portion in the seesaw accessory. Can be done. Then, if the medals can be retained on the seesaw section for a predetermined time or longer, the seesaw game production is successful, and an advantageous result can be obtained for the player.

On the other hand, if the medal cannot be retained on the seesaw section for a predetermined time and the medal is dropped from either end of the seesaw section, the seesaw game production has failed, and the player No favorable results can be obtained.

If the seesaw game is successfully produced during the normal game (when the AT flag is OFF), a lottery for entering the AT is performed in principle. In addition, if the winning seesaw game is successfully produced during the AT game (when the AT flag is ON), a lottery for adding the number of AT games is performed in principle.

[13-2. Slot machine equipped with seesaw accessories]
Hereinafter, the structure of the slot machine 1 on which the seesaw accessory is mounted will be described. FIG. 738 is a perspective view of the slot machine 1 on which the seesaw accessory is mounted. FIG. 739 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine 1 (excluding the outer main body 100) on which the seesaw accessory is mounted. FIG. 740 is a front view showing an outline of the seesaw accessory.

Of the configurations described in the exploded perspective view of the slot machine of FIG. 590 and the perspective view of the slot machine of FIG. 592 in FIGS. 738 and 739, those which are unnecessary for the explanation of the configuration newly appearing in FIGS. 738 and 739. The description and description of the reference code are omitted. Further, in FIG. 739, the description is omitted because the outer main body 100 is the same as the outer main body 100 in FIG. 590. Further, for convenience of explanation, the description of the door portion 555 described later is omitted in FIG. 739.

The slot machine 1 in this chapter has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box-shaped seesaw accessory 550. The seesaw accessory 550 is attached to the upper left portion of the transparent plate 214a in the rear view. The image display body 500 of this chapter has a recess 500a in the upper right portion of the front view for accommodating the seesaw accessory 550. The seesaw accessory 550 includes a seesaw portion 552, a shaft portion 553, and a shaft portion 553 stored in the seesaw box 551. It has a claw portion 556. The seesaw box 551 has a door portion 555 that can be opened and closed on the back side.

The seesaw portion 552 has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape with the left-right direction in the front view as the longitudinal direction. The seesaw portion 552 has a convex portion for preventing the medal from falling toward the front side of the front view along the longitudinal side of the seesaw portion 552 on the front side of the front view. Further, the seesaw portion 552 is provided with a weight sensor (not shown) for detecting whether a medal is staying on the claw portion 556. Further, a movable piece 552a and a movable piece 552b are provided along both side surfaces of the seesaw portion 552. The movable piece 552a and the movable piece 552b can move vertically upward.

The shaft portion 553 fixes the seesaw portion 552 to the seesaw box 551. A stepping motor (not shown) that can rotate in the left-right direction in the front view is mounted on the fixing portion 553a that fixes the shaft portion 553 and the seesaw portion 552. The angle of the seesaw portion 552 can be adjusted in the left-right direction in the front view by rotating the stepping motor in the left-right direction in the front view according to the amount of operation of the starting lever 210 in the left-right direction.

Further, the fixed portion 553a is equipped with a stepping motor (not shown) that can rotate in the depth direction in the front view. When the long press of the effect button at a predetermined timing is detected, the stepping motor rotates in the front view depth direction, so that the seesaw portion 552 can be tilted in the front view depth direction.

The claw portion 556 is provided on the intersection of the upper surface of the seesaw box 551 and the right side surface in the front view, and extends in the lower left direction in the front view. The claw portion 556 is provided at substantially the same position as the seesaw portion 552 in the depth direction. Further, the claw portion 556 has a tip portion 557 that is a movable piece. Further, the claw portion 556 is provided with a weight sensor (not shown) for detecting whether a medal is staying on the claw portion 556.

A seesaw success pipe 558 and a seesaw failure pipe 559 are provided on the bottom surface of the seesaw box 551. The seesaw success tube 558 has an opening 558a extending in the back direction along the long side of the bottom surface of the seesaw box 551. An opening 559a directly connected to the seesaw failure pipe 559 is formed on the bottom surface of the seesaw box 551.

The inner diameters of the seesaw success tube 558 and the seesaw failure tube 559 are larger than the diameter of the medal. The ends of the seesaw success tube 558 and the seesaw failure tube 559 that are not connected to the seesaw box are led to the return gutter 213. Inside the seesaw success tube 558 and the seesaw failure tube 559, a sensor (not shown) for detecting a passing medal is provided. It is desirable that the seesaw success tube 558 and the seesaw failure tube 559 are made of a transparent material so as not to interfere with the visibility of the symbol display device 300. In FIG. 738, the seesaw success pipe 558 and the seesaw failure pipe 559 are used as transparent materials, and the description thereof is omitted.

In addition, an opening / closing member (not shown) is provided on the medal gutter 212 in this chapter. Normally, the opening / closing member is closed, but when the opening / closing member is opened, a medal can pass through the medal gutter 212. Form an opening. Further, the opening / closing member is provided with a sensor capable of detecting the medal when the medal passes through the opening formed at the time of opening.

The slot machine 1 starts from a position in the vertical direction of the opening / closing member and extends to the left in the rear view, and starts from the left end in the rear view of the conveyor 561 to the claw portion 556 of the seesaw accessory 550. And an extending conveyor 562.

Hereinafter, the medal transport route in the seesaw game production will be described. In the game in which the seesaw game production starts, the player needs to insert four medals. In the game, when the insertion sensor 207b detects the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 203 and the main board 409 receives the detection signal of the third medal, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 opens and closes on the medal trough 212. The members are opened, the conveyor 561 and the conveyor 562 are operated counterclockwise when viewed from the rear, and the operation of the starting lever 210 (operation in the vertical direction) becomes effective, so that the game can be advanced.

When the fourth medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 203 in a state where the game can proceed (three medals are inserted), the opening / closing member on the medal trough 212 opens the medal. It falls onto the conveyor 561 from the opening formed by the above, the medal is conveyed onto the conveyor 562 by the conveyor 561, and is conveyed to the claw portion 556 of the seesaw accessory 550 by the conveyor 562. Upon receiving the medal detection signal from the sensor provided on the opening / closing member, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 closes the opening / closing member.

When inserting a medal from a credit (storage device), the opening / closing member is opened after a specified number of three medals have been inserted from the credit (storage device), and when one medal is inserted, the medal is inserted. Drops onto the conveyor 561.

At this point, the angle formed by the claw portion 556 and the tip portion 557 is a predetermined value (for example, 90 °) or less, and the claw portion 556 can hold the fourth medal that has been conveyed. When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 receives the medal detection signal from the sensor provided on the claw portion 556 for a predetermined time or longer, the CPU 1110 operates the start lever 210 for adjusting the inclination of the seesaw portion 552 (to advance the game). Enable the left / right operation that is different from the operation (up / down direction) of. Further, when the third medal is inserted, both the up / down operation and the left / right operation of the starting lever 210 may be enabled.

Further, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 stops the conveyor 561 and the conveyor 562 when the medal detection signal from the sensor provided on the claw portion 556 is received for a predetermined time or longer.

When the player operates (for example, pressing the start lever 210) after a predetermined timing of the seesaw game production, the angle formed by the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 between the claw portion 556 and the tip portion 557 is a predetermined value (for example). By operating the tip portion 557 so as to be 180 °) or higher, the medal held by the claw portion 556 drops onto the seesaw portion 552. Further, since the start lever 210 is pressed (up and down operation) with three medals inserted, the winning combination is drawn and the game is started.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 does not receive the medal detection signal from the sensor provided on the claw portion 556 for a predetermined time or longer, the angle formed by the claw portion 556 and the tip portion 557 is restored. The tip portion 557 is operated.

If the medal falls from either end of the seesaw section 552 before a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the medal began to stay in the seesaw section 552, the medal is returned from the opening 559a through the seesaw failure tube 559. It moves to the gutter 213 and the fourth medal is returned to the player. When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 receives the detection signal from the sensor installed in the seesaw failure tube 559, it transmits a signal indicating that the seesaw game production has failed to the sub board 510, and the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510 sends a signal indicating that the seesaw game production has failed. Seesaw game production Performs production corresponding to failure.

When a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses without falling after the medal starts to stay in the seesaw portion 552, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 vertically upwards the movable piece 552a and the movable piece 552b of the seesaw portion 552. To operate. The movable piece 552a and the movable piece 552b after the operation serve as walls at both ends of the seesaw portion 552, so that the medal does not fall from both ends of the seesaw portion 552. Further, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 operates a stepping motor provided on the seesaw portion 552 that can rotate in the left-right direction in the front view to return the angle of the seesaw portion 552 to the horizontal.

The CPU 1110 of the main board 409 opens the door portion 552 to the rear side, and further operates the stepping motor provided in the seesaw portion 552 that can rotate in the front-view depth direction according to the operation of the player to operate the seesaw portion 552. Tilt in the front view depth direction. As a result, the medals staying on the seesaw portion 552 pass through the seesaw success pipe 558 through the opening 558a and move to the return gutter 213, and the fourth medal is returned to the player.

When the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 receives the detection signal from the sensor installed in the seesaw success tube 558, the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510 transmits a signal indicating that the seesaw game production is successful to the sub board 510. Perform a production corresponding to the success of the seesaw game production.

Further, when the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 receives the detection signal from the sensor installed in the seesaw success tube 558, the CPU 1110 operates a stepping motor provided in the seesaw unit 552 that can rotate in the front view depth direction to operate the seesaw. The inclination of the part 552 in the depth direction in the front view is restored (horizontally). The medal transport route in the seesaw game production has been described above.

[13-3. Overview of seesaw game production]
Hereinafter, various tables for realizing the see-saw game production will be described. FIG. 741 is an example of a small winning combination lottery table of the slot machine 1 of this chapter. In the small winning combination lottery table of FIG. 741, the number of push order bells to be paid out is 9 in principle, but it varies depending on the mode of push order and the game situation. Details will be described later.

FIG. 742 is an example of a seesaw game production rush lottery table. The seesaw game production rush lottery table is stored in, for example, ROM 1112 of the main board 409. In the seesaw game production rush lottery table, lottery values for winning the seesaw game production (including normal games and AT games) in games other than the game in which the seesaw game production is executed are defined for each small winning combination won in the game. Has been done.

In the normal game, in addition to the AT winning from the seesaw game production, for example, the AT first hit lottery using the AT first hit lottery table of FIG. 707 is performed.

743 and 744 are explanatory views showing an example of a seesaw game effect performed during a normal game, and show an example when the seesaw game effect fails. When the seesaw game effect is won in the normal game, when the reels of the normal game are completely stopped, an effect is performed to notify that the seesaw game effect has been won. FIG. 743 (A) shows the normal game when the reels are completely stopped. It is in a state.

In FIG. 743 (A), the lost symbol is stopped on the symbol variation display device 300. A message indicating that the seesaw game production has been won and that the AT has been won if the seesaw game production is successful is displayed on the image display body 500. From FIG. 743 (A) to FIG. 744 (I) described later, it is the state when the reels of the normal game are fully stopped, and the seesaw game production itself has not started.

If the push order bell is won during the execution of the seesaw game effect that was won in the normal game, the reverse push (that is, the right reel 301c, the middle reel 301b, and the left reel 301a) is performed regardless of which push order bell is won. When the game is digested by (stopping the reels with), the control to change the stop control of the reels is executed so that three cards are paid out. Therefore, in FIG. 743 (B), the game is digested by pushing backward. A message indicating that the game can be advanced without reducing the number of medals is displayed on the image display body 500. Further, in FIG. 743 (B), a reverse push guide image (a left-pointing arrow and a number indicating the stop order of each reel displayed in the arrow) are formed in a region corresponding to the upper part of each reel of the image display body 500. Push order navigation) is displayed.

In FIG. 743 (C), a message indicating that the see-saw game effect will be described is displayed on the image display body 500. In FIG. 743 (D), a message indicating that four medals need to be inserted into the medal selector 207 is displayed on the image display body 500 in the game in which the seesaw game effect is performed.

In FIG. 743 (E), an image indicating that when four medals are inserted into the medal selector 207, the fourth medal moves to the seesaw accessory 550 and an image imitating the seesaw accessory are images. It is displayed on the display body 500. In FIG. 743 (F), when the seesaw game production is completed, a message indicating that the fourth medal returns to the medal tray 201 via the return gutter 213 and an image imitating the seesaw character are displayed as images. It is displayed on the body 500.

In FIG. 744 (G), a message is displayed on the image display body 500 urging the start lever 210 to be operated to adjust the inclination of the seesaw unit 552 so that the medal stays on the seesaw unit 552 for 5 seconds. Further, by displaying an image imitating the starting lever 210 on the image display body 500, the player is urged to operate the starting lever 210, and by operating the starting lever 210 left and right, the seesaw portion 552 is tilted. It shows that it will change.

In FIG. 744 (H), a message indicating whether or not the medal is likely to fall from the seesaw unit 552 (that is, whether the degree of expectation is low or high) is indicated by the emission color of the LED mounted on the seesaw unit 552. , And an image imitating a seesaw accessory are displayed on the image display body 500.

In FIG. 744 (I), a guide for inserting four medals, the fourth medal being inserted stays in the claw portion 556 of the seesaw accessory 550, and the tip portion 557 operates when the start lever 210 is operated. A message indicating that the medal is moving from the claw portion 556 to the seesaw portion 550 is displayed on the image display body 500. Further, an image imitating the seesaw accessory 550 is displayed on the image display body 500.

FIG. 744 (J) is a state at the time of lever-on of the next game of FIG. 744 (I), that is, a game in which the seesaw game effect is performed. The seesaw game effect is realized by a simulated game started by lever-on, and during the simulated game, the reels rotate in the reverse direction in a frozen state (that is, an invalid state in which the reels do not stop even if each stop button is pressed). In FIG. 744 (J), medals are retained on the seesaw portion 552. In addition, in the game where the seesaw game production is executed, a reverse push guidance image (an image with a number written inside the arrow pointing to the left), a gauge showing the remaining medal residence time until AT acquisition, a support message, and so on. Is displayed on the image display body 500.

In FIG. 744 (K), the medal cannot be retained in the seesaw section 552 for 5 seconds, but is dropped onto the seesaw failure tube 559, and the sensor in the seesaw failure tube 559 detects the medal, that is, the seesaw game effect. It is in a state where AT could not be obtained due to failure.

In FIG. 744 (K), a reverse push guidance image, a message indicating that the seesaw game production has failed (“Sorry ... next expectation!”), And a character image (fan) indicating that the seesaw game production has failed. (Character image) and is displayed on the image display body 500.

When the freeze state is released (that is, the stop button is enabled) and the stop button is pressed a predetermined time after the sensor in the seesaw failure tube 559 detects the medal, for example, the lost eye or the previous stop eye is stopped. When the simulated game is completed and a predetermined operation unit (for example, the start lever 210 or the MAX input button 206) is operated or a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, the main game (a normal game in which the reels rotate four times in order). Starts.

FIGS. 745 and 746 are explanatory views showing an example of a seesaw game effect performed during a normal game, and show an example when the seesaw game effect is successful. FIG. 745 (K') is a continuation of FIG. 744 (J), and is a state in which the seesaw game production is successful (that is, the medal can be retained in the seesaw portion 552 for 5 seconds). In FIG. 745 (K'), the movable piece 552a of the seesaw portion 552 and the movable piece of the movable piece 552b are raised, and the inclination of the seesaw portion 552 is fixed horizontally. Further, the door portion 555 is opened. The reel is also stopped.

Further, in FIG. 745 (K'), an effect button long-press guide image, a reverse-press guide image, and (that is, two operation guide images) are displayed. The effect button long press guidance image is a message indicating that the seesaw unit 552 tilts toward the back of the front view and the medal moves to the seesaw success tube 558 when the effect button 204 is held pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) or longer. It is an image composed of an effect button pressing guidance message, an image imitating the effect button 204, and an image in which an effect and an arrow are attached. In addition, a character celebrating the AT winning with the fan turned sideways is displayed on the image display body 500.

The long press time of the effect button 204 until the seesaw portion 552 is tilted may not be a predetermined time but may be indefinite. The predetermined time is determined by, for example, a predetermined distribution, and is 2 seconds for the 32/128 distribution, 3 seconds for the 64/128 distribution, 5 seconds for the 32/128 distribution, and the like. Further, for example, the predetermined time may be set to be longer as the amount indicating the stored amount of medals such as the number of credits is larger.

In FIG. 745 (L), the seesaw portion 552 is tilted toward the back of the front view, passes through the door portion 555 where the medal is open, moves to the seesaw success pipe 558, and is a sensor attached to the seesaw success pipe 558. Is in the state where the medal is detected. Even if the effect button 204 is pressed and held according to the effect button long press guidance image, the special sound effect corresponding to the effect button 204 is pressed and held is not output, and the BGM is not changed (output during the seesaw game effect execution). It is desirable not to change the BGM that is being played. Since it is sufficiently suggested that the AT will be won at the time of FIG. 745 (K'), if a special sound effect is output or the BGM is changed here, the player has an excessive sense of expectation (AT). (I think that the player will be given additional benefits other than the acquisition of).

Further, in FIG. 745 (L), the movable pieces attached to both ends of the seesaw portion 552 have returned to the reference positions. In addition, a message indicating that the AT has been won (“AT acquisition!”), A reverse push guidance image, a long press guidance image of the effect button, and (that is, two guidance images) are displayed on the image display body 500. .. The medals that have passed through the seesaw success tube 558 are returned to the return gutter 213. Further, the reel is also stopped in FIG. 745 (L).

FIG. 745 (M) is a continuation of FIG. 745 (L), and a message indicating that there is a chance of further adding the number of AT games to the acquired AT is displayed on the image display body 500. Further, the reverse push guidance image and the effect button long press guidance image are displayed on the image display body 500. As will be described later, the maximum number of AT games that can be added at one addition chance is two games, and only a profit that is not great for the player is given. If a message such as "Keep pressing and holding!" Is displayed, the player may misunderstand that the additional chance is extremely hot, so do not force the operation to "Tilt when pressed and held". I'm still displaying a message that something will happen when an operation is performed on.

Even after it is confirmed that the seesaw game production is successful and the AT is won, the effect button long press guidance image is displayed on the image display body 500, so that there is a chance to add the AT after the seesaw game production is successful. Since it is possible to strongly impress the player that the see-saw game has been successfully produced even when is being executed, the player's uplifting feeling can be maintained. Furthermore, since the player strongly remembers that the production button should be pressed and held after the see-saw game production is successful, the operation will not be confused in the subsequent see-saw game production.

Further, in the state where the AT addition chance is performed, the reel rotates in the reverse direction at a higher speed than when the seesaw game is performed. As a result, the player can increase the feeling of excitement for winning the AT and further adding it.

Here, it is assumed that an additional chance will always appear after the AT is won, but whether or not the additional chance is performed depends on a predetermined distribution (for example, 32/128 when the additional chance is performed, 96 / which is not performed). 128) May be determined.

In FIG. 745 (N), an effect for adding the number of AT games is performed. Here, when the start lever 210 is operated at the right time, the number of AT games is added. The operation guidance display of the starting lever 210 here is a guidance display indicating that a suggestion effect suggesting the degree of expectation is displayed.

Specifically, the timing at which the black-filled portion of the gauge displayed on the image display body 500 moves to the right and at least a part of the black-filled portion overlaps with the shaded portion of the gauge. If the start lever 210 is operated with, the number of AT games can be added successfully. However, since the hall is inconvenienced if the player does not operate the starting lever 210 forever, a predetermined effective time (for example, 2 seconds) of the starting lever 210 is provided.

On the other hand, if the start lever 210 is operated at a timing that does not overlap with the shaded portion of the gauge even in a part of the blackened part, the addition of the number of AT games fails and the game shifts to the main game. Alternatively, the effect of FIG. 746 (S) and later, which will be described later, and the effect of FIG. 747, which will be described later, may be executed. The part painted in black may continue to move left and right in the gauge until the starting lever 210 is operated, or the same effect as when the addition fails when the gauge reaches the right end is performed. You may be struck.

In this way, in the seesaw game production, the operation of the start lever 210 (the left-right operation different from the operation for advancing the game (vertical direction)) keeps the medals staying in the seesaw portion 552, and the operation of the start lever 210 (the operation of the start lever 210). It is possible to provide a new game property in which the player's operation technique is directly linked to the player's interests by adjusting the timing of the operation (up and down operation similar to the operation for advancing the game (vertical direction)), and by extension, the game. It can enhance the interest.

Further, in FIG. 745 (N), a start lever operation guide image, a reverse push guide image, and an effect button long press guide image, which are images of the start lever 210 for prompting the operation of the start lever 210 (that is, three images). Operation guidance image), is displayed on the image display body 500.

FIG. 745 (O) shows the state after operating the starting lever 210 in FIG. 745 (N). A message indicating whether or not the operation timing of the start lever 210 in (N) is the timing at which the number of AT games can be added is notified later (FIG. 745 (P)) is displayed on the image display body. Further, the reverse push guidance image and the effect button long press guidance image are displayed on the image display body 500.

As described above, the reverse push guide image of FIG. 745 (N), the effect button long press guide image, and the operation guide image of the start lever 210 for guiding the operation of the start lever 210 are simultaneously displayed. From the displayed state, the state shifts to a state in which two guide images, the reverse push guide image of FIG. 745 (O) and the effect button long press guide image, are displayed at the same time, but the reel is reversed during this period. Continue to rotate. This is to notify the success or failure of the addition and the number of additional games at the stop of the reel ((P) described later). Immediately after the start lever 210 is operated in FIG. 745 (O), the reel continues to rotate in the reverse direction, so that the player can continue to feel tense.

When the starting lever 210 is operated at a timing in which at least a part of the blackened portion overlaps with the shaded portion of the gauge in FIG. 745 (N), the reel is temporarily released after a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). It stops (FIG. 745 (P) described later). The predetermined time may be selectable from a plurality of values, such as 8 seconds, 10 seconds, or 15 seconds. In this case, it is desirable that the selection rate is determined so that the expectation that a more advantageous result will be obtained is higher when a longer time is selected as the predetermined time (for example, successful addition (2 games). 8 seconds is 16/128, 10 seconds is 32/128, 15 seconds is 80/128, and when the addition is successful (1 game is added), 7 seconds is 32/128, 10 seconds is 64/128, 15 seconds. Is 32/128, and when the addition fails, 7 seconds is selected as 80/128, 10 seconds is selected as 32/128, and 15 seconds is selected as 16/128). By doing so, the player can obtain an uplifting feeling as the reverse rotation of the reel continues for a long time after operating the starting lever 210.

The operation guide image of the starting lever 210, which is hidden in FIG. 745 (O), may be displayed again before the above-mentioned predetermined time until the reel temporarily stops elapses (that is, reverse pressing). The guide image, the effect button long press guide image, and the operation guide image of the start lever 210 may be displayed at the same time). For example, there are white and red display colors for the message "Come on!" In FIG. 745 (O), and the display color is displayed so that the degree of expectation is higher when the display color is red than when it is white. It is assumed that the color selection rate is defined. That is, when the start lever 210 is operated according to the operation guide image of the start lever 210 newly displayed in FIG. 745 (O), a suggestion effect suggesting the degree of expectation is produced by the display color of the message in FIG. 745 (O). Can be executed.

Further, before the above-mentioned predetermined time until the reel temporarily stops elapses, an operation guide image of another operation unit such as the MAX input button 206 is displayed instead of the operation guide image of the start lever 210. (That is, the reverse push guide image, the effect button long press guide image, and the operation guide image of the MAX input button 206 may be displayed at the same time). Even if the operation guidance image of another operation unit is displayed instead of the operation guidance image of the start lever 210, the player playing in the empty sky may operate the same operation unit many times. Therefore, the operation of the start lever 210 may be enabled while the operation guidance image of the other operation unit is displayed on the assumption that the guidance image is displayed again.

On the other hand, in FIG. 745 (O), when the operation guide image of the starting lever 210 or the operation guide image of the MAX input button 206 is displayed before the predetermined time elapses, and the operation is performed according to the operation guide image. It is preferable to display the result of the addition even before the reel is temporarily stopped. As a result, the player who wants to know the addition result quickly can follow the operation guide, and the player who wants to feel the tension until the end can wait for the temporary stop of the reel.

Further, the operation guidance image for the start lever 210 and the MAX input button 206 may be displayed a plurality of times in the above-mentioned predetermined time until the reel is temporarily stopped. In that case, when the start lever 210 or the MAX input button 206 is operated other than the last display of the plurality of times, the result of the addition may be displayed, but a display suggesting the result of the addition (for example, It is desirable that the ratio of performing the above-mentioned white display or red display) is higher than the ratio of not displaying suggesting the result of the addition. As a result, even when the start lever 210 or the MAX input button 206 is operated other than the final display of the plurality of times, the player's expectation can be pulled until the latter half of the production. When the start lever 210 or the MAX input button 206 is operated at the end of the plurality of times, it is preferable to display the addition result even before the reel is temporarily stopped.

Further, for example, the first display of the plurality of times displays only the operation guide image for the start lever 210, and the last display of the plurality of times displays the operation guide image for the start lever 210 lever and the MAX input button 206. As described above, the number (type) of the operation units for which the operation is guided may be larger in the last display than in the first display. As a result, the number of operation guide images to be displayed increases (types increase), so the player can enjoy the fun of which operation unit to operate (which type of operation unit is displayed) at the end. Can be given.

Further, for example, the first display of the plurality of times displays an operation guide image for the start lever 210 and the MAX input button 206, and the last display of the plurality of times is an operation for only one of the start lever 210 lever and the MAX input button 206. The number of operation units for which the operation is guided may be smaller in the last display than in the first display, such as displaying a guide image. As a result, the number of operation guide images displayed is reduced, so that the player can anticipate and enjoy the operation unit that is finally narrowed down.

Further, when the operation guide image of the start lever 210 and the operation guide image of the MAX input button 206, which is a different operation unit, are not displayed before the predetermined time elapses as shown in FIG. 745 (O) <Start lever 210 When the operation guidance image is displayed (that is, the same operation guidance image is redisplayed) <When the operation guidance image of the MAX input button 206, which is a different operation unit, is displayed, the degree of expectation is increased in this order. It is good that the selection rate is set. When the operation guidance image of the start lever 210 is displayed again, the player thinks that something may happen, and when the guidance image of the operation part different from that of the start lever 210 is displayed, the player feels particularly uncomfortable. This is because I think that it can be expected to be added in order to remember it.

Further, when the operation guide image of the start lever 210 or the operation guide image of the MAX input button 206 is displayed before the predetermined time elapses, in order to give the player a feeling of tension to notify the result of the addition. , The BGM may be silenced, the output volume of the BGM may be increased or decreased, the BGM itself may be changed, or a special sound effect may be output. Further, at this time, in order to give the player a feeling of tension to notify the result of the addition, the background of the effect image (or the effect image itself) is a still image (although the effect image is slightly shaken, enlarged or reduced). Make the effect image static (including a mode that the player feels still), enlarge or reduce the effect image, and make the background of the effect image (or the effect image itself) a single color (for example, gold or blackout) or multiple colors (for example, rainbow). It is good to display with.

Before the predetermined time elapses, the operation unit is operated according to the operation guidance image of the starting lever 210 or the operation guidance image of the MAX input button 206, and when the AT addition is announced, the predetermined movable body operates (for example). , The shutter 301d, which will be described later, returns to the reference position after covering half of the reel), and it is desirable that the predetermined movable body does not operate unless the AT addition is notified. Further, at this time, the output volume of the BGM may be increased or decreased, the BGM itself may be changed, or a special sound effect may be output. Further, at this time, the background of the effect image (or the effect image itself) may be changed to a still image (including a mode in which the effect image is slightly shaken, enlarged or reduced, but is perceived as still by the player), or the effect image. May be enlarged or reduced, and the background of the effect image (or the effect image itself) may be displayed in a single color (for example, gold or blackout) and a plurality of colors (for example, rainbow).

Further, the display color of the image of the start lever 210 or the operation guidance image of the MAX input button 206 displayed before the predetermined time elapses may be changed, or the effect may be combined with these images (that is,). There may be a plurality of display modes of the operation guide image of the start lever 210, and there may be a plurality of display modes of the operation guide image of the MAX input button 206). However, it is desirable that the degree of expectation is set higher when the display color is changed or the effect is combined.

Further, when the operation guide image for the start lever 210 is displayed in FIG. 745 (N) (even if the start lever 210 is operated in this state, the addition result is not notified until a predetermined time elapses), a feeling of expectation. It is desirable to continuously output the BGM that was output immediately before the operation guide image is displayed in order not to incite too much, but in order to give the player a feeling of tension from an early timing, The BGM may be silenced, the output volume of the BGM may be increased or decreased, the BGM itself may be changed, or a special sound effect may be output. Further, at this time, it is desirable to continuously display the background of the effect image that was displayed immediately before the operation guide image is displayed in order not to over-inspire the expectation, but it is desirable to display the background at an early timing. In order to give a feeling of tension to the player, the background of the effect image (or the effect image itself) includes a still image (the effect image is slightly shaken, enlarged or reduced, but the player feels still. ), The effect image may be enlarged or reduced, and the background of the effect image (or the effect image itself) may be displayed in a single color (for example, red or blackout) or a plurality of colors (for example, rainbow).

According to the operation guide image for the starting lever 210 displayed in FIG. 745 (N), the starting lever 210 was operated to shift to the state shown in FIG. 745 (O) (that is, the reel rotates in the reverse direction and "Come on!" Is displayed), it is desirable not to move the movable body in order not to over-inspire expectations. However, in order to give the player a feeling of tension from an early timing, even if the predetermined movable body operates (however, according to the operation guide image of the start lever 210 or the MAX input button 206 redisplayed in FIG. 745 (O)). It is desirable that the operating distance and operating time are shorter than the operation of the movable body when the operation is performed.) For example, if the additional AT games are won, 128/128, not won. In some cases, the movable body may be operated by distribution such as 32/128 (that is, when the movable body is operated, the expectation of winning the number of AT games is high).

Further, according to the operation guide image for the start lever 210 displayed in FIG. 745 (N), the start lever 210 is operated so as not to overheat the expectation when the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 745 (O). Therefore, it is desirable to continuously output the BGM that was output immediately before the operation is performed, but in order to give the player a feeling of tension from an early timing, the output volume of the BGM may be increased or decreased. , The BGM itself may be changed, or a special sound effect may be output. Further, at this time, it is desirable to continuously display the background of the effect image that was displayed immediately before the operation is performed so as not to overheat the expectation, but the background of the effect image (or The production image itself) can be made into a still image (including a mode in which the production image is slightly shaken, enlarged or reduced, but is perceived as still by the player), or the production image can be enlarged or reduced, or the background of the production image. (Or the effect image itself) may be displayed in a single color (for example, red or blackout) and a plurality of colors (for example, rainbow).

Further, the display color of the operation guide image for the start lever 210 displayed in FIG. 745 (N) may be changed, or the effect may be combined with these images (that is, the operation guide image of the start lever 210 may be displayed. There may be multiple modes). However, it is desirable that the degree of expectation is set higher when the display color is changed or the effect is combined. Further, the operation guide image of the start lever 210 or the MAX input button 206 redisplayed in FIG. 745 (O) has a higher expectation than the operation guide image of the start lever 210 displayed in FIG. 745 (N). The mode may be easily selected, or the operation of the start lever 210 displayed in FIG. 745 (N) rather than the operation guide image of the start lever 210 or the MAX input button 206 redisplayed in FIG. 745 (O). The guide image may make it easier to select a mode having a high degree of expectation.

Further, from the operation effective time of the start lever 210 for suggesting the addition expectation degree in FIG. 745 (N) (for example, 2 seconds as described above), it is displayed again for the addition result notification in FIG. 745 (O). It is desirable that the effective operation time of the start lever 210 corresponding to the operation guide image of the start lever 210 and the effective operation time of the MAX input button 206 corresponding to the operation guide image of the MAX input button 206 are longer. This operation is performed in a situation where the addition is confirmed, so that the player is provided with a feeling of exhilaration for a long time.

Subsequently, in FIG. 745 (P), a message indicating that the number of AT games has been added and the number of games (for example, 2 games) is displayed on the image display body 500. The message indicating the number of games does not directly indicate the number of games as shown in FIG. 745 (P), but may be a message indicating only the degree of expectation such as "may be good" or "may be subtle". Often, in this case, for example, when the additional chance is completely finished and the game returns to the main game, the total number of additional games is notified.

In addition, Red 7 (three identical symbol combinations) is aligned in the middle of the reel. If the operation of the start lever 210 is successful in FIG. 745 (N), a lottery for the number of AT additional games is performed, and two games or one additional game is won. When the operation of the start lever 210 is successful, for example, one game is added at 96/128 and two games are added at 32/128, and a lottery for the number of additional games is performed.

If two games are won (advantageous results are obtained), the reels are temporarily stopped (reels are temporarily stopped) with the red 7s aligned (the same symbol combination is displayed) as shown in Fig. 745 (P). If you win one game (no favorable result), for example, the same stop as the stop of the previous game (main game). The reels are temporarily stopped at the eyes or at the stop where Red 7 is tempai (red 7 stops at the same stage or diagonally on two reels out of three reels) but Red 7 is not aligned. Also, if you win two games (when the same symbol combination is displayed), you may enter a special state (specialized zone, etc.) after a predetermined time when the reels are temporarily stopped has elapsed. Good.

Further, in FIG. 745 (P), the reel temporarily stops for a predetermined time, and after the predetermined time (temporarily stopped time) elapses, the reel rotates in the reverse direction again as shown in FIG. 746 (Q) described later. It is desirable that the stopped time is different from any of the times from when the starting lever 210 is operated until the reel is temporarily stopped (for example, 5 seconds, which is shorter than any of the times until the reel is temporarily stopped). Further, the time during which the reel is temporarily stopped is not selectable from a plurality of values, and it is desirable to take only one value. In the state where the reels are temporarily stopped, the result has already been notified, so if multiple temporary stop times are prepared, for example, if the temporary stop time is long, the number of additional games announced will be larger. This is because there is a risk that the player may have excessive expectations that the number of games may have been added.

Further, in FIG. 745 (P), the reverse push guidance image and the effect button long press guidance image are displayed on the image display body 500. Although the reels are temporarily stopped instead of being completely stopped in the simulated game, the reels may be completely stopped in the simulated game as well. However, even in the simulated game, when the reel is completely stopped, the simulated game is designed in the vicinity of a predetermined lamp or LED in order to make the player recognize that the simulated game is being performed. It is preferable to make a light emitting body such as an LED emit light, or to display an image having a predetermined size (for example, a message such as "a pseudo game is in progress" or "FREEPLAY") on the image display body 500.

In FIG. 745 (P), after the reel rotation has stopped and the above-mentioned predetermined time has elapsed, special conditions (for example, another additional lottery is performed, the number of credits is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, etc.) are satisfied. In that case, as shown in FIG. 746 (Q), an additional chance is made again. On the other hand, if the special conditions are not satisfied after the reel rotation has stopped and the above-mentioned predetermined time has elapsed, the starting lever 210 is operated as described later without rotating the reel in the reverse direction again (that is, a game). (Based on the operation that triggers the progress of), the game shifts to the main game.

In FIG. 746 (Q), another chance of addition is performed, and the same effect as in FIG. 745 (M) is performed. If the additional chance is successful in this way, the additional chance may loop. For example, when the above special conditions are satisfied, the loop rate is selected by a predetermined distribution (for example, a loop rate of 50% is 64/128, 66% is 48/124, 80% is 15/128, and 90% is 1). / 128 distribution). Then, if the additional chance is successful, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the additional chance will be made again according to the selected loop rate. The addition chance may be continued as long as the addition chance is successful until the addition chance of a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) is completed.

The reel rotation time in the first addition chance is longer than, for example, the reel stop time (for example, 5 seconds) in the first addition chance, for example, 10 seconds. As a result, the player can increase the expectation that the addition will be performed over a long period of time during the reel rotation, and further, since the reel stop time is short, the second addition chance can be smoothly performed. You can advance or end the extra chance.

Further, the reel rotation time in the first addition chance may be the same as the reel stop time (for example, 5 seconds) in the first addition chance, for example. As a result, since the reel rotation and the reel stop are performed at the same tempo, the player can easily measure the end timing of the reel stop by experiencing the length of the reel rotation time.

Further, the rotation time of the reel in the first addition chance may be shorter than the reel stop time (for example, 5 seconds) in the first addition chance, for example, 3 seconds. As a result, it is possible to shorten the time for feeling the tension about whether or not the addition is performed, suppress the fatigue of the player, and prolong the time for feeling the uplifting feeling when the addition is performed.

The rotation time of the reel in the second and subsequent addition chances is longer than, for example, the reel stop time (for example, 5 seconds) in the first addition chance, for example, 7 seconds. As a result, after the reel is stopped, the second and subsequent addition chances proceed smoothly, and in the second and subsequent addition chances, the reel rotation time is long, so there is a sense of expectation as to how many games will be added. Can be increased.

Further, the reel rotation time in the second and subsequent addition chances may be the same as, for example, the reel stop time (for example, 5 seconds) in the first addition chance. As a result, the reel rotation and the reel stop are performed at the same tempo, so that the player can easily measure the end timing of the second and subsequent reel rotations by experiencing the length of the reel stop time. ..

Further, the rotation time of the reel in the second and subsequent addition chances may be shorter than, for example, the reel stop time (for example, 5 seconds) in the first addition chance, and may be, for example, 3 seconds. As a result, it is possible to shorten the time for feeling the tension about whether or not the addition is performed, suppress the fatigue of the player, and prolong the time for feeling the uplifting feeling when the addition is performed.

Further, the reel rotation time in the second and subsequent addition chances is shorter than, for example, the reel rotation time in the first addition chance. In this way, in the second and subsequent addition chances, the reel rotation time is short, and the number of AT games is added one after another in a short time, so that the player can get a feeling of exhilaration.

Further, the reel rotation time in the second and subsequent addition chances is selected from a plurality of times shorter than the reel rotation time in the first addition chance, such as 3 seconds, 5 seconds, or 7 seconds, with a predetermined selection rate. You may. In this case, as with the reel rotation time at the first addition chance, the longer the reel rotation time, the higher the addition expectation.

Further, the reel rotation time in the second and subsequent addition chances is the same as, for example, the reel rotation time in the first addition chance. As a result, the player can easily measure the timing of the end of the second and subsequent reel rotations by experiencing the length of the first reel rotation.

Further, the reel rotation time in the second and subsequent addition chances is longer than, for example, the reel rotation time in the first addition chance. Since the number of medals obtained by the player increases when the second and subsequent additions are performed, the increase speed of medals can be suppressed by taking time for the reel rotation of the second and subsequent times.

In addition, in order to give a sense of surprise by starting the reel rotation without letting the player know the reel rotation start timing at the next addition chance, the reel rotation time at the addition chance is different from the reel stop time at the addition chance. It may be a different time (that is, a time that cannot be selected as the reel stop time).

Although the comparison between the reel rotation time and the reel stop time in the addition chance and the comparison between the reel rotation times in the addition chance have been described, the reel rotation time may be read as the reel average rotation time, and the reel stop time may be read as the reel. It may be read as the average downtime. By selecting the rotation time of the reel from a plurality of times by a predetermined distribution, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the addition or non-performing is notified, and a feeling of surprise can be provided. By selecting the reel stop time from a plurality of times by a predetermined distribution, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the timing when the next addition chance starts, and a feeling of surprise can be provided.

In FIG. 746 (R), a message indicating that the number of AT games in one game has been added is displayed on the image display body 500, and the reel is temporarily stopped at the same stop as the stop of the immediately preceding game. It is the same as in FIG. 745 (P) except that it is done.

As in the case of the first addition chance, after FIG. 746 (Q), an effect of inciting whether or not a winner has been won may be performed in the same manner as in FIG. 745 (O). Is deleted, but the effect may proceed without displaying the operation guide image as it is, the operation guide image of the start lever 210 may be redisplayed, or a different operation such as the MAX input button 206 may be performed. The operation guidance image of the unit may be displayed.

By redisplaying the operation guidance image of the start lever 210, the player expects that there will still be an opportunity to operate the start lever 210 (that is, the additional chance will continue). The player can obtain a feeling of expectation that further benefits can be obtained by operating another operation unit by displaying the operation guidance images of different operation units. The degree of expectation depending on whether or not the operation guide image is displayed in the effect, and the effect mode (display mode, BGM, movable body) of the operation guide image are the same as those in FIG. 745 (O).

However, if the shortest time (3 seconds) is selected from a plurality of times such as 3 seconds, 5 seconds, or 7 seconds as the time for the reel to rotate in the reverse direction in the second and subsequent addition chances, it is a short time. In order not to impair the exhilaration caused by the addition of the number of AT games, the operation guidance image of the start lever 210 should not be displayed again and the operation guidance image of a different operation unit such as the MAX input button 206 should not be displayed. Is desirable. Further, when the operation guide image of the start lever 210 or the operation guide image of the MAX input button 206 is displayed and the operation is performed according to the operation guide image, even before the reel is temporarily stopped as described above. The result of the addition is displayed, but if the operation guidance image is displayed when the shortest time (3 seconds) is selected as the reel reverse rotation time, the player will be required to complete the shortest time. It is likely that the operation cannot be completed. In other words, the player feels stress if he / she cannot complete the operation even though he / she wants to operate it, and the result of the addition is displayed when the operation can be completed by the end of the shortest time. The timing is only slightly earlier. Therefore, when the shortest time (3 seconds) is selected as the reel reverse rotation time as described above, the operation guide image of the starting lever 210 is displayed again and the operation of different operation units such as the MAX input button 206 is performed. It is desirable not to display the guide image.

It is confirmed that the above-mentioned special conditions (for example, an additional lottery is performed) and an additional chance will be performed again, but the number of additional games may be "+1" or "+2" each time. As mentioned above, when two games are added, Red 7 is aligned, and when one game is added, Red 7 is tempted (however, there are no tempais). In addition, when one game is added, the red 7 tempai roll or the lost roll where the red 7 does not even tempai may be stopped by a predetermined distribution.

At this time, there is a pattern 1 in which the reels are temporarily stopped with the red 7 alignment (that is, "+2"), and then the reels are temporarily stopped with the red 7 alignment at the next addition chance. Similarly, there is a pattern 2 of red 7 tempai (that is, “+1”) temporary stop → red 7 tempai pseudo stop, and a pattern 3 of loss (that is, “+1”) temporary stop → loss temporary stop. In Patterns 1 to 3, since the same outcome as the previous addition chance is stopped at the later addition chance, the player's expectation is not unnecessarily raised or lowered.

In addition, there are a pattern 4 of red 7-aligned temporary stop → red 7 tempai temporary stop and a pattern 5 of red 7-aligned temporary stop → loss temporary stop. In pattern 4 and pattern 5, since the number of additional games is smaller in the later additional chance, the player can be made to think that the loop of the additional chance is about to end, and the loop can be prepared. The player's disappointment can be reduced when the game is finished.

In addition, there are a pattern 6 of temporary stop of loss → temporary stop of red 7 and a pattern 7 of temporary stop of red 7 tempai → temporary stop of red 7. In pattern 6 and pattern 7, since the number of additional games is larger in the later additional chance, the player's feeling of excitement can be gradually increased.

In addition, there are a pattern 8 of red 7 tempai temporary stop → loss temporary stop and a pattern 9 of loss temporary stop → red 7 tempai temporary stop. In the pattern 8 and the pattern 9, although the number of additional games is the same, the stop result is different. Therefore, even if only the same number of games as the previous time is added, the player does not get tired of the temporary stop effect of the reel.

FIG. 746 (S) shows a state in which the loop rate lottery for the additional chance is deviated (the additional lottery was not performed). A message indicating that the number of additional games was not drawn due to the loop lottery of the additional chance is displayed on the image display. Further, although the red 7 is tempted on the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b, the reel is temporarily stopped at the stop where the red 7 is not aligned (FIG. 746 displaying the result of the additional lottery). The stop roll of R) is continuously displayed). Further, the reverse push guidance image and the effect button long press guidance image are displayed on the image display body 500.

In FIG. 746 (T), a message indicating that a special movie is provided to the apology for not winning the loop lottery for the additional chance is displayed on the image display body 500. By displaying the special movie, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player who is disappointed by the end of the loop of the addition chance. Further, the reverse push guidance image and the effect button long press guidance image are displayed on the image display body 500. Even after the additional lottery has not been performed, the stop rolls of the reels are continuously displayed. This is to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the main game has started when the reel rotates.

In FIG. 746 (U), the reverse push guidance image and the effect button long press guidance image are erased, and the special movie is displayed on the image display body 500. The slot machine 1 of this chapter is provided with a shutter 301d which is a movable body for covering the entire reel and making the (temporary) stop eye invisible.

At the start of the special movie, the shutter 301d is closed to cover the entire reel (as shown in FIG. 746 (T), the symbol combination indicating that the favorable result was not obtained is made unrecognizable), thereby making the player unrecognizable. You can draw attention to a special movie, which in turn can entertain the player. In order to entertain the player, the special movie is a movie that appears when the premium production (AT winning expectation is extremely high (for example, 99% or more)), and the appearance rate is extremely low (for example, a normal game or an AT game). It is the same movie as (1/32768 or less) movie), or it does not appear in the production executed in the normal game or AT game (that is, the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510 does not select it at the start of the game (lever on)). It is desirable to be.

As shown in FIG. 746 (U), in order to concentrate the player on the special movie, it is desirable that no guide image is displayed, but when a predetermined operation is performed (for example, MAX). A reverse push guidance image can be displayed on the input button 206) to check the push order in this game, or when a predetermined time has passed from the start of displaying the special movie, the operation guide of the start lever 210 is displayed. An image may be displayed so that the effect state (for example, the sound output in the effect, the display mode of the effect, etc.) can be changed. As a result, the player can prepare for the main game while the special movie is displayed.

Further, in the special movie, the reverse push guidance image and the effect button long press guidance image may be continuously displayed from (T). As a result, the same guidance image as after the success of the seesaw game is displayed, so that the player can feel the satisfaction of having obtained a favorable result by the seesaw game production and the additional chance even while displaying the special movie. Can be bitten.

FIG. 746 (V) shows a state in which a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the special movie. When the one-sheet insertion button 205 is pressed, the shutter 301d is released and the reel is visually recognized again to reconfirm the contents of the last addition (as described above, there is a temporary stop with one game addition and two game addition. A message indicating that it can be done is displayed on the image display body 500. Since the special movie itself is not unusual for a player who has played the slot machine 1 in this chapter very often, it would be more interesting to be able to reconfirm how advantageous the result was compared to the special movie. Because it will increase.

In the state of FIG. 746 (V), the one-sheet insertion button 205 is pressed (the number of slot machines in this chapter is three, and the operation of the starting lever 210 is effective only by pressing the one-sheet insertion button 205 once. However, when the operating means for advancing the game (the player's intention is felt) is operated (based on the operation), the shutter 301d is opened and the entire reel (design on the reel) is opened. The combination of) becomes visible, and the special movie displayed on the image display body 500 is erased.

Since all the reels remain stopped while the shutter 301d is closed, the stop stitch when the shutter 301d is opened is the same as the stop stitch in FIG. 746 (T). Therefore, the shutter 301d You can reconfirm the stop eye before closing. Further, all the reels may be rotated while the shutter 301d is closed, and the reels may be stopped when the shutter 301d is opened so as to be the same as the stop stitch in (T).

In addition, when the one-sheet insertion button 205 is pressed before the end of the special movie to make the combination of symbols on all reels visible, the reels become visible at a predetermined ratio (for example, 16/128). The reel may rotate at about the same time (for example, within 0.5 seconds difference) and then automatically stop. The stop stitches of the automatic stop at this time may be aligned with 7 reds (that is, promoted from the additional stop stitch of one game to the additional stop stitch of two games in FIG. 746 (T)). The stop stitch at 746 (T) may be displayed.

At this time, for example, the probability of being promoted to 7 reds is higher than the probability of displaying the stop in (T). For example, the probability of being promoted to 7 reds is 1/200, and by displaying the stop mark in FIG. 746 (T), the player can finally confirm the number of games added at the last addition chance. By displaying the same symbol combination, it is possible to enhance the player's uplifting feeling by starting the AT game. Further, it may be set so that the probability that the stop stitch in FIG. 746 (T) is displayed is higher than the probability that the red 7 is promoted to the same line.

By doing so, the player can have a sense of expectation even during the special movie after the addition chance is over. Also, before the end of the special movie, press the one-card insertion button 205 three times (or press the MAXBET button with three or more medals in the credit (storage device)) and hit the start lever 210 to play the game. The promotion effect of the above-mentioned stop stitch may be performed even in the case of proceeding with the above-mentioned.

In the above example, the special movie is displayed when the additional AT game number is not won due to the additional chance (that is, in the situation where the player is disappointed), but in other cases, the player is also displayed. A special movie may be displayed if the situation goes through a disappointing situation.

For example, as shown in FIG. 746 (R), when the number of additional games is the lowest (no advantageous result is obtained) even though the number of additional AT games is won in the additional chance, the lowest in (R). After a predetermined time has elapsed from the notification of the number of additional games, the special movie production shown in FIG. 746 (U) may be executed. In particular, in this case, if the promotion effect is performed by pressing the single-sheet insertion button 205 in FIG. 746 (V), the player's disappointment can be removed and an uplifting feeling can be given at once.

Further, for example, a background image suggesting that the user is staying in a high probability state (a state in which it is easy to win AT or CZ or a state in which it is easy to win in addition to the number of AT games) in a normal game and an AT game is displayed on the image display body 500. If it is displayed, but it is switched to a background image that suggests that you are staying in a low probability state (a state where it is difficult to win AT or CZ or it is difficult to win in addition to the number of AT games), it is low. After a predetermined time has elapsed from the display of the background image suggesting that the player is staying in the stochastic state, the special movie effect shown in FIG. 746 (U) may be executed.

Further, for example, when the power is turned on after the slot machine 1 cannot be played due to a power failure due to a lightning strike or the like, a special movie from FIG. 746 (U) is taken after a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on. You may perform the production.

It should be noted that a part of the effect that can be displayed during the normal game or the AT game may be displayed in the special movie. For example, there are a first effect that appears during a normal game and a second effect that has a higher expectation of winning an AT than the first effect (for example, both appear when the start lever 210 is operated (that is, when the lever is on). It is advisable to display a part of the second production in the special movie in the AT winning expectation suggestion production). As a result, the player who knows the second effect can immerse himself in the lingering sound by remembering the time when he won the AT in that effect, and the player who does not know the second effect can be immersed in the second effect in the subsequent normal game. When the production appears, it is a production that appeared in the special movie, so you can get a sense of expectation by thinking that it is a production with a high expectation of AT winning.

As mentioned above, if the start lever 210 is operated while the special movie is displayed, the simulated game ends and the game shifts to the main game, but if the start lever 210 is not operated forever, the hall will be opened. Since it causes inconvenience, it is advisable to shift to the main game after a predetermined time has passed in order to shift from the pseudo game to the main game. It is preferable that the special movie is created according to this predetermined time, but in order to save the capacity of the ROM 1120 of the sub-board 510, the movie for a time shorter than this predetermined time is repeated a plurality of times. It may be displayed.

Further, if the time of one movie is short, the player's line of sight may be changed by making the combination of reel symbols visible between the movies repeated a plurality of times. At this time, in order to draw the player attention to the symbol combination of the reels, an image (for example, a background image) appearing in a normal game or an AT game between movies may be displayed on the image display body 500. ..

It should be noted that, in FIG. 746 (T), the effect button long press guidance image is displayed even after the addition chance is completed for the following reasons. If you succeed in producing a seesaw game and press and hold the effect button 204, the seesaw section 552 tilts in the front view depth direction, but if you stop pressing after dropping the medal to the seesaw success tube 558, the seesaw section 552 tilts originally After that, even if the effect button 204 is pressed and held for a long time, the seesaw portion 552 does not tilt again in the front view depth direction in the simulated game.

Here, for example, when the addition chance ends in FIG. 746 (S), one dummy medal falls from the claw portion 556 to the seesaw portion 552 at a predetermined ratio (for example, 1/1000). Therefore, in this case, the dummy medal cannot be moved to the seesaw success tube 558 unless the effect button 204 is continuously pressed until the timing when the dummy medal falls to the seesaw portion 552.

If the dummy medal can be moved to the seesaw success tube 558, the number of AT games is added. Therefore, the effect button long press guidance image is displayed even when the addition chance is completed so that the player can obtain an advantageous result. The dummy medals are stored in a predetermined storage position (not shown) in the slot machine 1, and when the lottery at a predetermined ratio in FIG. 746 (S) described above is won, the dummy medals are stored from the storage position. The dummy medal returns to the storage position regardless of whether the medal can be moved to the claw portion 556 and the seesaw success tube 558 or not (not shown).

However, since the special movie itself is a valuable special effect, as described above, the effect button long press guidance image may be deleted to display only the special movie, or only the special movie may be displayed and the special movie may be displayed. The display of the movie and the effect pressing guide image may be repeated alternately.

In addition, if the medal can be moved to the seesaw success tube 558, the number of AT games will be added, but the technical intervention factor of the player is reduced, and even a player with low skill can play the game. In order to make it enjoyable, it is better that the addition is performed at a predetermined ratio (for example, 1/10 adds 1 game and 1/20 adds 2 games). Since some players prefer the slot machine 1 having a large technical intervention element, if the medal can be moved to the seesaw success tube 558, the addition of the number of AT games may be confirmed.

If the lottery for adding the number of AT games is performed based on moving the medal to the seesaw success tube 558, the special movie itself is valuable, but it is advantageous for the player to add the number of AT games. Since the result is more uplifting for the player, the reel is displayed almost at the same time (for example, within 0.5 seconds difference) when the display of the special movie is finished and the reel is made visible. It is advisable to allow the rotation of.

[13-4. Practice production]
FIG. 747 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a practice production of an additional chance in the seesaw game production. Following FIG. 746 (S), that is, when the addition chance ends without winning the loop lottery of the addition chance, the addition chance practice production starts in FIG. 747 (T'). In FIG. 747 (T'), a message indicating that the practice effect can be started is displayed. Further, in FIG. 747 (T'), the reverse push guidance image and the effect button long press guidance image are displayed on the image display body 500. The practice production is performed with the reel temporarily stopped.

The time from FIG. 746 (S) to the transition from FIG. 746 (T) (the time from the result of the additional lottery to the start of the special movie) and FIG. 746 (S) to FIG. 747 ( When comparing the time until the transition to T') (the time from the result of the additional lottery to the start of the practice production), the former is used so that the player can practice immediately. The latter is shorter than the latter.

In the practice effect, the same effect as the operation effect of the start lever 210 in the above-mentioned addition chance can be performed with the reel temporarily stopped. Since the reel is rotating in the actual addition chance production, even if the player wants to concentrate on the display of the image display body 500, the rotating reel becomes anxious and it becomes difficult to concentrate, so that the starting lever 210 The difficulty level is high because it is difficult to grasp the operation timing of. On the other hand, in the practice production, since the reel is temporarily stopped, the player can easily concentrate on the display of the image display body 500, and it is easy to grasp the operation timing of the start lever 210, so that the difficulty level is low.

Since the frequency of appearance of the seesaw game effect is not high, the player can improve the operation of the start lever 210 at the additional chance by making the practice effect appear. Further, if the practice effect is executed after the operation of the start lever 210 fails in the addition chance, the player who is not good at the operation can be trained. In some cases, the above-mentioned special movie production may be performed without executing this practice production, but each may be sorted by lottery, or the special movie production and the practice production may be performed each time the additional chance fails. It may appear alternately. In addition, when sorting by lottery, since the practice production leads to actual profit, it is better to increase the ratio of the practice production to be distributed rather than the special movie production.

After the end of the additional chance, it is determined whether or not the practice effect is performed according to the predetermined distribution (for example, 96/128 in which the practice effect is executed, 32/128 in which the practice effect is not executed), and the practice effect is not executed. In some cases, the special movie production described above is executed. The reason why the practice production is given higher priority than the special movie production is that it leads to the actual benefit of the player.

In FIG. 747 (U'), in order to reduce the difficulty level of the practice effect, the practice effect is performed while maintaining that the reel (a combination of symbols indicating the result of the additional lottery) is displayed. The display content on the image display body 5000 is almost the same as that shown in FIG. 745 (N). However, the purpose is to make the player practice, and in order not to give the misunderstanding that the player is added, the operation guide image for prompting the operation of the starting lever 210 is from the one displayed in FIG. 745 (N). Is also displayed in a small size. In FIG. 747 (U'), after displaying "Practice is possible" for a predetermined time, it is preferable that the same guidance display of "hit the lever" similar to that in FIG. 746 (Q) is performed.

Instead, in order to make it easier for the player to succeed in the operation in the practice effect, a chance effect is added by adding the ratio of the size of the gauge displayed on the image display body 500 to the size of the gauge and / or the size of the shaded area. Increase it from time to time, or increase the movement speed of the black part of the gauge and lower it from the time of chance production. By lowering the difficulty level of the practice production in this way and making it easier for the player to succeed in the operation, the player can easily remember the sense of accomplishment at the time of success.

On the other hand, by deliberately raising the difficulty level and practicing, in order to make it easier to succeed in the actual production, the ratio is reduced or the movement speed of the black part of the gauge is added and increased from the time of chance production. May be good. By increasing the difficulty level in this way, it is possible to give a sense of accomplishment when it succeeds, and even if it fails, the actual production is easier, so it can somehow give the player confidence.

Since the player wants to concentrate on the practice, the BGM flowing in FIG. 747 (T') is muted (suddenly volume) before the operation guide image of the starting lever 210 is displayed in FIG. 747 (U'). To zero or fade out) or suppress the volume. The mute or volume suppression of the BGM may be performed at the timing when the operation guide image of the start lever 210 is displayed, or at a predetermined timing after the operation guide image of the start lever 210 is displayed. You may be struck.

In order to avoid a situation in which the display of the image display body 500 in FIG. 747 (U') cannot be overlooked and practice cannot be performed, for example, the slot machine 1 has a movable body having a transmissive liquid crystal on the front surface, and the movable body is provided. May move to a position where it overlaps the symbol of the reel, and the same content as the display of the image display body 500 in FIG. 747 (U') may be displayed by the transmissive liquid crystal of the movable body.

At this time, the transparency of the display of the transmissive liquid crystal may be lowered to make the reel design completely invisible, or the transparency may be increased to display the reel design (part or all). ) May be in a visible state although the visibility level deteriorates.

In FIG. 747 (V'), a message indicating that the game is returned to the main game by pressing the MAX input button 206 when the practice effect is started is displayed. This is because the player who is good at the operation in the additional chance production feels that the practice production is unnecessary. Further, on the image display body 500, a gauge for a practice effect, a reverse push guide image, and a long press guide image of the effect button are displayed on the image display body 500.

FIG. 747 (W') shows a state in which the player presses the MAX input button 206 in FIG. 747 (V'). After the practice production is completed, the simulated game is shifted to the main game, and the reels are rotating forward (in order to shift from the simulated game to the main game, the rotation of the reels is rotated by performing random delay processing. Since the random delay processing is a well-known technique, the description thereof will be omitted). Further, a number indicating a reverse push is written on the upper part of each reel in the image display body 500. Further, since the reel to be pressed first is the right reel 301c, the light emitting body provided on the right reel 301c is lit. In the above example, the practice effect is performed at the end of the simulated game, but the practice effect may be performed during the main game that is performed following the simulated game.

Even if the start lever 210 is operated at the right time in the practice production and succeeds (that is, the start lever 210 is operated at the timing when at least a part of the black part of the gauge overlaps with the shaded part), it is only practice. Since there is no AT game, the number of AT games will not be added. However, when the operation of the start lever 210 is successful, the lamp emits light in a mode that appears during the main game and does not appear in the effect that appears based on the lottery result when the start lever 210 is operated. Or (dedicated light emission pattern) sound effect (dedicated sound effect) and BGM (dedicated BGM) may be played. In this way, the provision of a dedicated production increases the motivation of the player for the success of the practice production. In addition, by performing a dedicated effect (light emission, sound, and / or BGM) that cannot appear during the main game, the player does not misunderstand that the practice effect is the main game. is there.

On the other hand, if the operation timing of the start lever 210 is unsuccessful in the practice production, the lamps in these dedicated light emitting patterns, the dedicated sound effects, and the dedicated BGM do not flow.

The above-mentioned special movie production may be executed after the practice production is performed. For example, after the practice production is executed after the additional chance production is executed, the player is tired from operating the start lever 210 aiming at the timing, so the player is shown a valuable special movie. You can rest and entertain at the same time.

If the practice can be executed multiple times in one simulated game, the skill of the player becomes high and it becomes easy to succeed in the additional chance, which may increase the ball output rate, which in turn increases the burden on the hole. It is desirable that the practice can be performed only once because of the risk. Further, the practice may be performed only once after the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on.

When the practice can be performed only once, it is preferable that the guidance of the practice effect displayed in FIG. 747 (U') is deleted when the start lever 210 is operated in the second and subsequent practice effects. Also, in situations where the ball output rate may be high (when the design value is designed so that the ball output rate does not change so much even if the skills of all players are high), it is possible to practice multiple times. It may be, and the number of exercises may not be limited.

If the practice is successful, a message indicating that the practice has been successful, such as "Congratulations on success! Let's do our best in the actual performance!", May be displayed on the image display body 500. It is desirable that this message is different from the message when the start lever 210 is operated at the additional chance (“Come on!” In FIG. 745 (O)). This is because if the message is the same between the actual performance and the practice, the player may misunderstand that the number of AT games may be added.

[13-5. Two-choice production of fate]
FIG. 748 is an explanatory diagram showing another example (two-choice production of fate) of the additional chance production in the seesaw game production. The additional chance of FIG. 748 depends on the operation direction of the start lever 210 (for example, hitting from the top or hitting from the bottom), not the operation timing of the starting lever 210 as described in FIG. 745 (N) or the like. Whether or not to add is decided.

When the two-choice production of fate is performed, for example, when the seesaw game production is successful, the loop rate is selected by a predetermined distribution (for example, the loop rate 50% is 64/128, 66% is 48/124, 80). % Is 15/128, 90% is 1/128).

Further, when the start lever 210 is hit from either the top or the bottom according to a predetermined distribution, it is selected to win the addition of the number of AT games. The predetermined distribution is predetermined, for example, hitting from the top is the correct answer 48/128, hitting from the bottom is the correct answer 80/128, and in this case, it is better to hit the start lever 210 from the bottom. The AT winning rate is high.

Further, when the start lever 210 is hit from the correct direction to win the AT game number addition, the number of games to be added is determined according to a predetermined distribution (for example, 1 game addition 64/128, 2 game addition 64/128).

Following FIG. 745 (M), in FIG. 748 (N ″), a two-choice effect of fate is executed as an additional chance. In FIG. 748 (N ″), the reel continues to rotate in the reverse direction at high speed, and a message (title display) indicating that the two-choice challenge of fate has started is displayed on the image display body 500. Further, the reverse push guidance image and the effect button long press guidance image are displayed on the image display body 500.

In FIG. 748 (O''), a message indicating guidance for hitting the start lever 210 from above, which is an example of a guidance display as a request effect for requesting an operation on the start lever 210, is displayed on the image display body 500. .. The reverse push guidance image and the effect button long press guidance image are displayed on the image display body 500. In FIG. 748 (P ″), a message (“ka ...”) indicating that there is a possibility of an operation direction other than hitting the start lever 210 from above is displayed on the image display body 500. Further, the reverse push guidance image and the effect button long press guidance image are displayed on the image display body 500.

In FIG. 748 (Q''), a message indicating guidance for hitting the start lever 210 from below, which is an example of a guidance display as a request effect for requesting an operation on the start lever 210, is displayed on the image display body 500. .. Further, the reverse push guidance image and the effect button long press guidance image are displayed on the image display body 500.

FIG. 748 (R ″) shows the state after hitting the starting lever 210 from above or below. By this operation, a message (“Come on, which one?”) That encourages whether or not the player has won the additional AT games is displayed on the image display body 500. Further, the reverse push guidance image and the effect button long press guidance image are displayed on the image display body 500.

When FIG. 748 (O ″) is displayed, the starting lever 210 is effective for operation only from above. Further, when FIG. 748 (Q ″) is displayed, the operation is effective for the operation of the starting lever 210 only from below. Further, when FIG. 748 (R ″) is displayed, the operation is effective for the operation of the starting lever 210 from above and below.

Therefore, rather than the player who hit the start lever 210 from above at the time of FIG. 748 (O'') without looking at the explanation to the end, the explanation is seen to the end and FIG. 748 (Q'') or FIG. 748 (R). The player who hits the start lever 210 from below at the time of'') is more advantageous (as described above, hitting the start lever 210 from below is often the correct answer).

That is, the specifications are such that a player whose game speed is slow because he / she is not accustomed to playing slots is more advantageous (for that reason, when the message "Hit the start lever from above!" Is displayed, go after that. There is no suggestion or instruction that "hit the start lever from below!"). From the timing of FIG. 748 (O ″), the operation for the operation from below the starting lever 210 may be enabled. This is because it is troublesome for the player who has experienced the additional chance many times to wait for the timing when the operation from below becomes effective.

However, since the ball ejection rate is higher when the starting lever 210 is hit from below, the starting lever 210 is raised when FIG. 748 (Q'') is displayed in order to reduce the load on the hole. The operation may be valid for operations from and below.

When the correct answer is given to the operation direction of the starting lever 210 to obtain an additional number of AT games, the same display as in FIGS. 745 (P) and 746 (R) is displayed on the image display body 500, and FIG. 745 is displayed. The reel temporarily stops at the same stop point as in (P) and FIG. 746 (R). Further, according to the selected loop rate, it is determined whether or not the additional chance is made again.

It should be noted that when the addition chance loops, the effect of determining whether or not the number of AT games can be added is determined by the timing of the start lever 210 described with reference to FIG. 745 and the like (timing effect), and the operation direction of the start lever 210 in FIG. 748. An effect (operation direction effect) that determines whether or not the number of AT games can be added may be mixed. In this case, for example, when the addition of the number of AT games is determined and the loop lottery is won, which effect is executed by the predetermined distribution (for example, the timing effect 64/128 and the operation direction effect 64/128). It may be decided whether or not to be performed, or the player may select which effect to execute by displaying the selection screen of the timing effect and the operation direction effect.

Further, if the correct answer cannot be obtained in the operation direction of the start lever 210 and the additional number of AT games cannot be obtained, the game may be shifted to the main game, or the production (special movie display) after FIG. 746 (T). ) May be executed.

It should be noted that FIG. 748 (O''), that is, the operation guide for hitting the start lever from above (hereinafter, also referred to as guidance from above) is displayed, and FIG. 748 (Q''), that is, the operation for tapping the start lever from below. The production mode is different from the situation in which the guidance (hereinafter, also referred to as the guidance from the bottom) is displayed, for example, as follows.

When the guidance is displayed from above, it is desirable that the volume of the BGM continues from the time of FIG. 748 (N ″). If you hit the start lever 210 from above, the probability of winning the additional AT games is lower, but if you suppress the volume or mute the sound here, the player will be guided from above. Is mistaken for the final timing of the two-choice production of fate, and there is a possibility that the start lever 210 will be hit from above, resulting in a loss. On the other hand, comparing the case of hitting the start lever 210 from above and the case of hitting the start lever 210 from below, since there is no extremely large difference in the expected value of adding the number of AT games, hit the start lever 210 from above. Since there is a sufficient expected value, BGM may be suppressed or the sound may be muted.

On the other hand, the state where the guidance is displayed from the bottom is a state where the final timing of the two-choice production of fate is considerably approached, and since both options are presented, BGM is suppressed in order to increase the tension. You may mute or mute the sound.

The effective operation time of the start lever 210 when the guidance from the top displayed first (the guidance from the top is displayed before the guidance from the bottom is omitted below) is displayed from the bottom displayed later. It is desirable that the operation effective time of the starting lever 210 when (the guidance from the bottom is displayed after the guidance from the top is omitted below) is shorter than the effective operation time of the starting lever 210. By shortening the effective operation time of the start lever 210 when the guidance is displayed from above, the operation will not be effective even if the player hits the start lever 210 from above early. After seeing both options, the direction of hitting the starting lever 210 can be reconsidered.

When the guidance is displayed from the top and when the guidance is displayed from the bottom, the expectation (expectation that the additional lottery is won) is increased (for example, "hit the start lever from above!" Or "start lever". The degree of expectation may differ depending on the guidance display itself for the operating means, such as "Hit from the bottom!" Is displayed in red letters.

For example, when the message "Hit the start lever from above!" Is displayed from above, the guidance is displayed from the bottom with white characters on 8/10 and red characters on 2/10. As you can see in the distribution of white characters on 6/10 and red characters on 4/10, the appearance frequency of the expectation increase effect is displayed from the bottom than when the guidance is displayed from the top. It is desirable that it is higher when it is. If the expectation suggestion effect is displayed frequently when the guidance is displayed from above, it is misunderstood that the probability is high even though the probability of winning the additional AT games is low, and from above. This is because the operation of the starting lever 210 may be continued.

In addition, the guidance may not be displayed from the bottom even though the guidance is displayed from the top. In this case, for example, if the guidance is displayed from the top but the guidance is not displayed from the bottom after that, the guidance is displayed from the top. If the message in is divided into white characters at 8/10 and red characters at 2/10, and the guidance is displayed from the bottom after the guidance is displayed from the top, the message in the guidance from the top is 2/10. It is determined that the message is displayed from the bottom more easily when the message in the guidance from the top is displayed in a highly expected manner so that it is displayed in white characters and red characters on 8/10. It is desirable that it is done.

Also, at the start of the two-choice challenge of fate, you may not be forced to win the additional AT games at a predetermined rate (that is, whether you hit the start lever 210 from above or from below), and you may be forced to do so. If the number of AT games is not added, it is desirable that the guidance is displayed from the top but not the guidance from the bottom after that. No matter how the start lever 210 is operated, the number of AT games will not be added, so that the guidance is not displayed from the bottom, which has a high degree of expectation, so that the player's expectation is not overheated. Further, if the starting lever 210 is hit from above at this time, it is desirable to be notified that the number of AT games has not been won after the lapse of a predetermined time. Although he was not forced to win the additional AT games, this is to give the player a sense of expectation as much as possible.

Further, even when the guidance is displayed from above, the guidance may not be displayed from below at a predetermined ratio (for example, less than 5/10). In this case, the starting lever 210 is displayed from above. It is effective only for the operation (that is, even if the start lever 210 is hit from below, the AT game is not won). At this time, when the guidance is displayed from above, the guidance is more likely to be displayed from the bottom after the guidance from the top than when the expectation increase effect appears, compared to the case where the guidance does not appear. May be good. In addition, when there is a possibility that the guidance is not displayed from the bottom after the guidance is displayed from the top, even if the start lever 210 is operated according to the guidance from the top, the AT is added at a predetermined ratio (for example, 6/10). You may not win (that is, you will definitely fail in the two-choice production of fate).

When the starting lever 210 is operated according to the guidance from above when the guidance is displayed from above, and when the guidance is displayed from below, the starting lever 210 is operated according to the guidance from below, and then the starting lever 210 is operated. It is displayed based on the operation of the starting lever 201 in a predetermined period until the result display (the same display as in FIG. 745 (P) and FIG. 746 (R)) of whether or not the answer is correct in the tapping direction is performed. An effect of increasing the degree of expectation (for example, a cut-in of a character image displayed in red, a lamp emission in a predetermined pattern, or a predetermined sound effect) may be performed. However, if the guidance is displayed from above, the expected degree increase effect will not be performed on 8/10, but will be performed on 2/10, and if the guidance is displayed from below, it will be 6/10. The frequency of appearance is lower when the start lever 210 is operated according to the guidance from below than when the start lever 210 is operated according to the guidance from above, as in the distribution that it is not performed and is performed on 4/10. It is desirable, and it is desirable that the number of patterns for increasing the expectation level is smaller when the starting lever 210 is operated according to the guidance from below.

As mentioned above, when there is a possibility that the guidance is not displayed from the bottom after the guidance is displayed from the top, it is better if the expectation increase effect appears when the guidance is displayed from the top. , It may be easier to display the guidance from the bottom after the guidance from the top as compared with the case where it does not appear.

If you follow the guidance from the bottom, you are more likely to win the additional AT games, so if you dare to follow the guidance from the bottom, you do not need to produce an excessive increase in expectations, and it is necessary to increase the variation. Because there is no.

It is desirable that the effect that appears when the start lever 210 is operated according to the guidance from above when the guidance is displayed from above is an effect that does not indicate whether or not the number of AT games is added. If a player who does not know that the guidance appears from the bottom prematurely operates the start lever 210 according to the guidance from the top and an effect indicating whether or not the number of AT games is added appears, the player concerned This is because the timing at which the guidance appears from above may be misunderstood as the final timing of the two-choice production of fate, and the guidance may not be seen from below forever and may be lost.

Specifically, the effect that appears when the start lever 210 is operated according to the guidance from above when the guidance is displayed from above is an effect that only indicates the added expectation (for example, character A is displayed). If the character B is displayed, the expectation is 80%, and if the character B is displayed, the expectation is 50%. If the character B is displayed, the effect indicates that the number of AT games is added, and if the red message is displayed, the expectation is 80%. If a white message is displayed, it is desirable to have an effect indicating that the player has won the additional number of AT games with an expectation of 50%, or).

On the other hand, it is desirable that the effect that appears when the start lever 210 is operated according to the guidance from below when the guidance is displayed from below is an effect indicating whether or not the number of AT games is added. Since all the options are presented to the player at the timing when the guidance is displayed from the bottom, the player's profit even if the effect indicating whether or not the number of AT games is added is executed when following the guidance from the bottom. This is because there is no difference.

If you follow the guidance from above, an effect that does not indicate whether or not the number of AT games is added is executed, but if you follow the guidance from below, an effect that indicates whether or not the number of AT games is added is executed. Then, if the player realizes that the probability of winning the additional AT games is higher when following the guidance from the bottom, the ball output rate will increase and the burden on the hall will increase, so follow the guidance from the bottom. Even in the case, an effect that does not indicate the correctness may be executed.

In other words, when the start lever 210 is hit from above while the guidance is displayed from above, the degree of expectation is shown and the success or failure of adding the number of AT games is not notified, so it is a game like a post-notification, and from the bottom. When the start lever 210 is hit from below while the guidance is displayed, it is a game like a prior notice because it is notified whether or not the number of AT games has been added.

In addition, when following the guidance from above, an effect indicating whether or not the additional lottery is successful may be executed. If an effect indicating a hit is displayed, it is advantageous to operate it later, but there will be many players who will operate it first, and the additional winning rate of the hall as a whole will decrease, which will increase the burden on the hall. It is suppressed.

If the start lever 210 is not operated without following the guidance from above when the guidance is displayed from above, a special effect (the effect that does not indicate whether or not the number of AT games is added as described above) is executed. Without doing so, the production proceeds to the above-mentioned FIG. 748 (P''). On the other hand, even if the start lever 210 is not operated without following the guidance from the bottom when the guidance is displayed from the bottom, the valid time after the lapse of a predetermined time (the effective time during which the operation from the bottom is enabled) It is desirable that a special effect (for example, a dancing character is displayed) be performed after the end. The number of AT games is better if you follow the guidance from the bottom because the special effect that was not displayed when you did not follow the guidance from the top is displayed when you do not operate the start lever 210 without following the guidance from the bottom. It can be implied that there is a high probability of winning the extra.

Further, in FIG. 748 (R''), if the message "Which one?" Is displayed forever, it causes annoyance to the hall. Therefore, for example, the start lever 210 is not operated after the guidance is displayed from below. When a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, the processing may be performed assuming that the starting lever 210 is hit from above.

If the start lever 210 is not hit from above after the guidance appears from above, the success or failure of adding the number of AT games will be notified after the first predetermined time has elapsed, but after the guidance appears from below, it will be below. If the start lever 210 is not hit, the success or failure of the addition of the number of AT games is notified after the second predetermined time shorter than the first predetermined time has elapsed. This is because those who follow the guidance from the bottom are more likely to win the additional AT games. Further, by hitting the start lever 210 from the bottom according to the guidance from the bottom, the success or failure of the addition of the number of AT games may be notified.

It is desirable that the movable body does not operate when the starting lever 210 is operated according to the guidance from above when the guidance is displayed from above. On the other hand, when the guide is displayed from below and the start lever 210 is operated according to the guide from below, it is desirable that the movable body operates in whole or in part of the movable width. If the movable body operates while the guidance is displayed from above, it is misunderstood that the probability is high even though the probability of winning the additional AT games is low, and the operation of the start lever 210 from above is continued. This is because there is a risk that it will end up.

In addition, the movable body is operated a predetermined number of times before the guidance is displayed from above, and the movable body is operated more times than the predetermined number of times from the end of the display of the guidance from the top to the start of the display of the guidance from the bottom. By operating it, it may be implied that it is advantageous to operate the starting lever 210 according to the guidance from below. However, when each operation guide is displayed, it is better not to operate the movable body in order to make the player surely recognize the operation guide. Further, all the movable bodies may be operated before the guidance is displayed from above, and after the guidance is displayed from above and before the guidance is displayed from below, or some of the movable bodies may be operated. You may do so.

Further, it is desirable that the time from the start to the end of the guidance display from above is longer than the time from the start to the end of the operation of the movable body before the guidance is displayed from above. This is because if the movable body is moved for a long time before the guidance is displayed from above, the player's expectation is increased, and the start lever 210 may be hit prematurely when the guidance is displayed from above. On the contrary, the time from the start to the end of the guidance display from above may be shorter than the time from the start to the end of the operation of the movable body before the guidance is displayed from above. This is because the player's expectation can be raised by lengthening the operating time of the movable body, rather than having the player properly recognize the guidance from above, which is an operation guide having a low probability of winning the AT.

In addition, the time from the start to the end of the guidance display from the top may be shorter than the time from the start to the end of the operation of the movable body from the end of the guidance display from the top to the start of the guidance display from the bottom. desirable. By moving the movable body for a long time after the guidance is displayed from above, it can be implied that the probability of winning the AT is higher if the guide is followed from the bottom. On the contrary, the time from the start to the end of the guidance display from the top is longer than the time from the start to the end of the operation of the movable body from the end of the guidance display from the top to the start of the guidance display from the bottom. You may. This is to make the player aware that there is an option to hit the start lever 210 from above even though the probability of winning the AT addition is low, and there is a sufficient probability that the AT addition will not be won even if the guidance is followed from below. This is to prevent it from operating for a long time so as not to overwhelm the expectation.

Further, it is desirable that the time from the start to the end of the guidance display from the bottom is longer than the time from the start to the end of the operation of the movable body before the guidance is displayed from the top. If the movable body is moved for a long time before the guidance is displayed from above, the player's expectation will increase, and when the guidance is displayed from above, there is a risk of hitting the start lever 210 prematurely. This is because by taking a longer time than that, it is possible to sufficiently make the player recognize the operation having a high probability of winning the AT. On the contrary, the time from the start to the end of the guidance display from the bottom may be shorter than the time from the start to the end of the operation of the movable body before the guidance is displayed from the top. If the movable body is moved for a long time before the guidance is displayed from above, the player's expectation will increase, and since there is not enough time to fully recognize the operation with a high probability of winning the AT addition, the player will have the probability of winning the AT addition. There is a high possibility that the operation will be performed according to the guidance from a low position, and the burden on the hall can be suppressed.

In addition, the time from the start to the end of the guidance display from the bottom may be shorter than the time from the start to the end of the operation of the movable body from the end of the guidance display from the top to the start of the guidance display from the bottom. desirable. Since the player pays attention to the movement of the movable body while the movable body is moving, by moving the movable body for a long time after the guidance is displayed from above, the guidance is given from the bottom immediately after the movement of the movable body is completed. It is displayed, and it is possible to make the player recognize the guidance with high expectation of winning the AT. On the contrary, the time from the start to the end of the guidance display from the bottom is longer than the time from the start to the end of the operation of the movable body from the end of the guidance display from the top to the start of the guidance display from the bottom. You may. Even if the movable body is operated for a long time, there is a sufficient probability that the AT addition will not be won even if the guidance is followed from below. Therefore, the movable body is not operated for a long time so as not to overwhelm the expectation.

In the two-choice production of fate, whether or not to add the number of AT games was determined by the operation method of the start lever 210, but the more times the operation guide of the start lever 210 appears (that is, the start lever 210 (The more operation opportunities there are), the additional chance of increasing the number of AT games (hereinafter, also referred to as the production of how many times the operation can be performed) may be implemented.

In this case, for example, when the number of AT games is decided to be added and the loop lottery is won, a predetermined distribution (for example, timing effect 40/100, fate two-choice effect 35/100, how many times can be operated 25) (Distribution of / 100) determines which additional chance will be made.

When the effect of how many times the operation can be performed is selected, for example, if the number of AT games is added by lottery in advance and the number of AT games is added, the number of operations is 1 time: 10/100, 2 times: 35 /. 100, 3 times: 55/100, and if the number of AT games is not added, the number of operations is 1 time: 65/100, 2 times: 25/100, 3 times: 10/100. ..

The effect of how many times the operation can be performed is executed during the simulated game (that is, during the reverse rotation of the reel) as in the timing effect and the two-choice effect of fate. The effects of how many times the operation can be performed include an operation guidance image of the starting lever 210 (including an image imitating the starting lever 210), an image indicating that the operation is the first operation (for example, the message "first time!"). Is displayed. If the start lever 210 is operated within the operation valid period when the number of times of one operation is selected, FIG. 745 (O) is displayed, and then FIG. 745 (P) is shown according to the result of the additional lottery. The effects shown in 746 (R) and 746 (S) are executed.

An image showing that when the number of times of two operations is selected and the start lever 210 is operated within the first operation valid period or the operation valid period ends, it develops into the second operation (for example, "" The message) is displayed.

Then, in the second operation guidance, an operation guidance image of the starting lever 210 (including an image imitating the starting lever 210) and an image indicating that the operation is the second operation (for example, the message "second time !!"). And are displayed. If the start lever 210 is operated within the second operation valid period when the number of operations to be performed twice is selected, FIG. 745 (O) is displayed, and then FIG. 745 (P) is displayed according to the result of the additional lottery. ), FIG. 746 (R), and FIG. 746 (S).

An image showing that when the number of operations of 3 times is selected and the start lever 210 is operated within the valid period of the 2nd operation or the valid period of the operation ends, it develops into the 3rd operation (for example, "" The message "Next is the last !!") is displayed.

Then, in the third operation guidance, an operation guidance image of the starting lever 210 (including an image imitating the starting lever 210) and an image indicating that the operation is the third operation (for example, the message "third time !!!"). When the start lever 210 is operated within the third operation valid period when the number of operations of 3 times is selected, FIG. 745 (O) is displayed, and then the result of the additional lottery is displayed. Correspondingly, the effects of FIGS. 745 (P), 746 (R), and 746 (S) (P) are executed.

As the operation guidance continues for the first time, the second time, and the third time, the display during the operation guidance may be displayed with a high degree of expectation. For example, in the first operation guide, the background image, the image of the start lever 210, and the message "First time !!" are displayed in blue, and in the second operation guide, the background image, the image of the start lever 210, and "2" are displayed. The message "Third time !!" is displayed in green, and in the third operation guidance, the background image, the image of the starting lever 210, and the message "Third time !!" are displayed in red. Further, for example, the display size of the image of the starting lever 210 may be increased as the operation guidance continues for the first time, the second time, and the third time.

Further, when the first operation guide develops to FIG. 745 (O) and the second operation guide develops to FIG. 745 (O), the degree of expectation of the display in FIG. 745 (O) is high in this order. It may be displayed as high. Specifically, for example, when the first operation guide is developed to FIG. 745 (O), the background image and the characters "Still more!" Are displayed in blue, and the second operation guide is shown in FIG. 745 (O). When it develops into, the background image and the characters "Come on!" Are displayed in green.

In this way, by performing additional chances with different operation methods, such as timing production, two-choice production of fate, and production of how many times it can be operated, the player will not get bored and all kinds of additional chances. Since it is difficult to get the knack of the operation, it is difficult to increase the ball output rate, and the burden on the hole can be reduced.

[13-6. See-saw game production during AT]
749, 750, 751, 752, and 753 are explanatory views showing an example of a seesaw game effect executed during AT. Hereinafter, the differences from the see-saw game production in the normal time will be mainly described. During AT, for example, when a predetermined rare combination (small combination with a low probability of establishment (for example, 1/30 or less)) is established, there is a high probability (for example, more than 1/10), and a predetermined normal combination (probability of establishment is high (for example, 1/30 or less)). For example, if you win a small role (more than 1/30), there is a low probability (for example, 1/1000 or less) (specifically, if a weak watermelon included in the predetermined rare role is established, 1/8, the predetermined rare If the strong watermelon included in the combination is established, 1/4, and if the push order bell included in the predetermined normal combination is established, 1/2048), a lottery to enter the special zone is performed. The special zone continues for 10 games, and the seesaw game production is executed every game. If each seesaw game in the special zone is successfully produced, the number of AT games will be added.

In addition, odd-numbered games (1, 3, 5, 7, 9 games) in the special zone are called special zone A, and 321 bells (9 payouts) are forcibly established in the special zone A. Control changes are made to. That is, in the main game in the special zone A, if the reels are stopped by pushing backward, nine cards can be paid out.

Even-numbered games in the special zone (2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th games) are called special zone B, and the control is changed so that 132 bells (5 payouts) are forcibly established in the special zone B. Is done. That is, in the main game in the special zone B, if the reels are stopped by pinching, five cards can be paid out. Therefore, in the 10 games of the special zone, the game of the special zone A and the game of the special zone B are alternately played. Since the technique of forcibly winning the winning combination and the technique of changing the control table for reel stop are well-known techniques, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 749 (A) shows a state when all reels of the game won in the special zone are stopped. In (A), a message indicating that the number of AT games is added when the seesaw game production is successful is displayed on the image display body 500. In FIG. 749 (B), the explanation of the seesaw game production has started, and the same display as in FIG. 743 (C) is performed. In addition, in the seesaw game production executed in the normal game, an explanation was displayed to forcibly establish the 321 bell and push the back (Fig. 743 (B)), but the player plays the game according to the navigation during AT. Seesaw games in the special zone because they understand what to do and because there are more medals in the seesaw game during AT (because it contradicts the message "You can enjoy the seesaw game without reducing too many medals!") Such a display is not performed in the production.

The contents (explanation of the seesaw game effect) displayed on the image display body 500 in FIGS. 749 (C), (D), (E), (F), 750 (G), and (H) are shown in FIG. 743, respectively. Since the contents are the same as those displayed in (D), (E), (F), FIGS. 744 (G), (H), and (I), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 750 (I) is a state at the time of lever-on of the next game of FIG. 750 (H), that is, the game in which the see-saw game production of the first game of the special zone (special zone A) is performed. In the see-saw game production in the special zone, the reel rotates in the reverse direction, which is realized by the pseudo game started by lever-on, as in the see-saw game production that is normally executed.

Further, in FIG. 750 (I), medals are accumulated on the seesaw portion 552, and a reverse push guide image as a batting method effect showing an advantageous batting method for the player and the remaining medals until the number of AT games is added. A gauge indicating the residence time and a support message are displayed on the image display body 500.

FIG. 750 (J) shows a state in which the see-saw game is successfully produced by operating the starting lever 210 in the left-right direction (an operation different from the operation for advancing the game (vertical direction)). In FIG. 750 (J), the movable piece 552a of the seesaw portion 552 and the movable piece of the movable piece 552b are raised, and the inclination of the seesaw portion 552 is fixed horizontally. Further, the door portion 555 is opened. Further, in FIG. 750 (J), the effect button long press guide image, the reverse press guide image (that is, two guide images), and the character celebrating the addition of the number of AT games by turning the fan sideways are image display bodies. It is displayed at 500.

In FIG. 750 (K), the seesaw portion 552 is tilted toward the back of the front view due to the long press of the effect button 204 according to the effect button long press guide image, and passes through the door portion 555 where the medal is open. It has moved to the seesaw success tube 558, and the sensor attached to the seesaw success tube 558 has detected the medal. Further, in FIG. 750 (K), the movable pieces attached to both ends of the seesaw portion 552 have returned to the reference positions. In addition, a message indicating that the number of AT games has been added (“AT addition!”), A reverse push guidance image, and a long press guidance image of the effect button (that is, two guidance images) are displayed on the image display body 500. Has been done. The medals that have passed through the seesaw success tube 558 are returned to the return gutter 213.

FIG. 750 (L) is a continuation of FIG. 750 (K), and a message indicating that there is a chance to add the number of AT games (additional chance) is displayed on the image display body 500. Further, a reverse push guide image and a long press guide image of the effect button (that is, two guide images) are displayed on the image display body 500. As with the seesaw game production that was won during the normal game, even after it is confirmed that the seesaw game production was successful and the number of AT games was added, the effect button long press guidance image and the image display body 500 It is displayed in.

In addition, the reel rotates in the reverse direction at a higher speed than when the seesaw game was played in the state where the additional addition chance is performed. In addition, here, it is assumed that an additional additional chance will always appear after the see-saw game production is successful and the additional AT game number is won, but whether or not the additional additional chance is performed depends on a predetermined distribution (for example,). , 32/128 where additional addition chances are made, 96/128 where no additional chances are made) may be determined.

In FIG. 751 (M), an effect for adding the number of AT games is performed. Here, as in FIG. 745 (N), when the start lever 210 is operated in a timely manner (up and down operation similar to the operation for advancing the game (vertical direction)), the number of AT games is added. However, a predetermined effective time (for example, 2 seconds) of the starting lever 210 may be provided as in the case of an additional chance in the see-saw game production at the normal time. Further, in (M), the start lever operation guide image of the start lever 210 for prompting the operation of the start lever 210, the reverse push guide image, and the effect button long press guide image (that is, three guide images) are displayed. It is displayed on the image display.

FIG. 751 (N) shows the state after operating the starting lever 210 in FIG. 751 (M). A message indicating whether or not the operation timing of the start lever 210 in FIG. 751 (M) is the timing at which the addition of the number of AT games can be acquired is displayed on the image display. Further, a reverse push guide image and a long press guide image of the effect button (that is, two guide images) are displayed on the image display body 500.

In FIG. 751 (O), a message indicating that the number of AT games has been added and the number of games (2 games) is displayed on the image display body 500. In addition, red 7 is aligned in the middle of the reel (three identical symbol combinations). If the operation of the start lever 210 is successful in (M), a lottery for the number of additional AT additional games is performed, and two games or one additional game is won. When the operation of the start lever 210 is successful, for example, one game is added at 96/128 and two games are added at 32/128, and a lottery for the number of additional games is performed.

Similar to the AT addition chance developed from the seesaw game production that rushed into the normal game, if you win 2 games (advantageous results are obtained), you will have red 7 (three identical symbol combinations). If the reel temporarily stops in this state and one game is won (no favorable result is obtained), for example, the same stop as the stop of the previous game (main game) or red 7 is tempted. However, the reel temporarily stops at the stop where the red 7s are not aligned. Further, in FIG. 751 (O), the reverse push guide image and the effect button long press guide image (that is, two guide images) are displayed on the image display body 500.

In FIG. 751 (P), the image display body 500 includes a message indicating that the start lever 210 is operated to shift to the main game, a reverse push guide image, and a long press guide image of the effect button (that is, two guide images). It is displayed in.

Subsequently, FIG. 751 (Q) shows a state in which the start lever 210 is operated in FIG. 751 (P), and the main game is started. Since this game is the first game of the special zone, a band indicating that the game is in the special zone A is displayed on the image display body 500 (in the special zone A by a background image or the like instead of the band). May be shown). Further, a number (reverse push) indicating the stop order of each reel is displayed at a position located above each reel of the image display body 500. FIG. 751 (R) shows a state in which the 321 bells are stopped according to the stop order, the bells are aligned in the middle stage of the reels, and nine medals are paid out.

FIG. 752 (S) shows the lever-on state of the second game of the special zone. The simulated game has started and the seesaw game production has started. Since the second game of the special zone is the special zone B, 132 bells are established. Instead of the reverse push guidance image, the pinch hitting guide image as a batting method effect showing an advantageous hitting method for the player (the number 132 displayed in the upper left part of the image display body 500 and the characters "pinching!" Is the same as in FIG. 750 (I), except that (combination of) is displayed.

FIG. 752 (T) is the same as that of FIG. 750 (J) except that the see-saw game production is successful and the pinching guide image is displayed instead of the reverse push guide image. In FIG. 752 (U), the seesaw portion 552 is tilted toward the back of the front view, passes through the door portion 555 where the medal is open, moves to the seesaw success pipe 558, and is a sensor attached to the seesaw success pipe 558. Is the same as in FIG. 750 (K) except that the medal is detected and the pinch guide image is displayed instead of the reverse push guide image.

FIG. 752 (V) shows a state in which a message indicating that there is a chance to add the number of AT games (additional chance to add) is displayed on the image display body 500, and instead of the reverse push guidance image, a pinch is used. This is the same as in FIG. 750 (L) except that the guide image is displayed.

FIG. 752 (W) shows a state in which the effect for adding the number of AT games is performed, and FIG. 751 (W) shows that the pinching guide image is displayed instead of the reverse push guide image. Same as M). FIG. 752 (X) is a state after the start lever 210 is operated in FIG. 752 (W), except that a pinching guide image is displayed instead of the reverse push guide image. It is the same as N).

FIG. 753 (Y) shows a state in which a message indicating that the number of AT games has been added and the number of games (2 games) is displayed on the image display body 500, instead of the reverse push guidance image. , The same as in FIG. 751 (O) except that the pinching guide image is displayed. FIG. 753 (Z) shows a state in which a message indicating that the start lever 210 is operated to shift to the main game is displayed, and a pinching guide image is displayed instead of the reverse push guide image. Except for this, it is the same as in FIG. 751 (P).

FIG. 753 (AA) is a state in which the start lever 210 is operated in FIG. 753 (Z), and the main game is started. Since this game is the second game of the special zone, a band indicating that the game is in the special zone B is displayed on the image display body 500. Further, a number indicating the stop order of each reel is displayed at a position located above each reel of the image display body 500. FIG. 753 (AB) shows a state in which 132 bells are stopped according to the stop order, and the bells are aligned diagonally downward to the right of the reel, and five medals are paid out.

If the see-saw game production in the special zone fails, the game shifts to the main game when the start lever 210 is operated or a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses without executing the additional chance. In addition, if the AT addition chance in the special zone fails, the start lever 210 is operated or a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses without displaying the screen for the number of additional games. Transition.

In the above example, the games in the special zone A and the games in the special zone B are alternately played in the 10 games in the special zone. For example, the game in the special zone B 2 In the game, if 132 bells (5 medals are paid out) are obtained according to the pinch guide image, 321 bells (9 payouts) will be established even in even games after the 3rd game in the special zone. The reverse push guidance image may be displayed. In this case as well, the even-numbered games after the third game of the special zone may be displayed as the special zone A, or may be displayed as the special zone B even though the 321 bell is established.

However, if all 321 bells are established in the third and subsequent games of the special zone and the reverse push guidance image is displayed, the ball output rate will increase and the burden on the hole will increase, so pinching in the second game will occur. The guide image may be deleted after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds longer than 4.1 seconds, which is the shortest time of one game) has elapsed after being displayed. Further, even if a predetermined time has not passed since the pinching guide image is displayed, the pinching guide image is deleted before the game in which the pinching guide image is displayed ends (for example, at the time of the second stop). You may. As a result, the player who misunderstood that there is no need for pinching because the pinching guide image was not noticed or erased, 132 bells were established in the even-numbered games after the third game in the special zone, and the ball output rate was increased. Since it cannot be raised, the burden on the hall is reduced.

However, even so, the ball output rate of the slot machine 1 is designed on the premise of acquiring 321 bells in even-numbered games after the third game in the special zone, so that the pinching guide image is erased after a lapse of a predetermined time. , It is desirable that the display size is larger than the reverse push guide image. Further, as described above, since it is important to follow the guidance of the pinching guide image in the second game of the special zone, the pinching guidance image is highlighted (for example, it is displayed by blinking or displayed multiple times. ) Is desirable.

In addition, since the player may forget how to hit after the pinching guide image is deleted, the pinching guide image may be redisplayed when special conditions are satisfied as a relief. .. For example, in the first game of the special zone, when the guidance of the reverse push guidance image is followed, a lottery for redisplaying the pinch guidance image (for example, winning at 1/2 and losing at 1/2) is performed, and the re-display is performed. Winning the display lottery is an example of special conditions. As described above, it is desirable that the special condition is a condition that is satisfied when the operation guidance (guidance of the reverse push guidance image) of the first game of the special zone is followed.

When the pinching guide image that is redisplayed when the above-mentioned special condition is satisfied is redisplayed, it may be displayed together with the above-mentioned highlighting. In addition, if 132 bells are acquired according to the guidance of the pinching guide image in the second game of the special zone, 321 bells can be acquired in all of the third and subsequent games of the special zone, so that the number of acquired medals has increased or From now on, a blessing effect may be executed to congratulate the transition to a state where a large number of medals can be obtained (all are controlled by 9 bells). When a blessing effect is performed, for example, the reel stops after the second game of the special zone is completed and before the third game (that is, the game in which the 321 bell is established and the reverse push guidance image is displayed). It will be in a frozen state as it is, and a blessing effect will be executed in the frozen state.

For example, in the case of executing the blessing effect, special conditions (for example, a predetermined start lever 210 or the like) are specified during the blessing effect without executing the payout of five medals by 132 bells at the end of the second game. The five medals may be paid out by satisfying (such as based on the operation of the operation unit). In addition, during the blessing production, four of the five medals were paid out, and the remaining one medal was operated by the start lever 210 to start the third game of the special zone. It may be paid out when (during the execution of the third game). By delaying the payout of medals in this way, you may feel a sense of discomfort at the end of the second game, and something advantageous for the player may occur. You can have a sense of expectation that you can make it seem as if you have won medals that exceed the number of medals that are paid out.

If you do not follow the guidance of the pinching guide image in the second game of the special zone, the number of payouts is 0 because the bells are not aligned on the reel in the game, and the three games of the special zone. 132 bells may be established in all the games after the eyes, and the pinching guide image may appear. If the player does not follow the guidance in the second game of the special zone in this way, the ball output rate decreases, so that the player can face the second game of the special zone with a sense of tension.

If you do not follow the guidance of the pinching guide image displayed in the second game of the special zone (also called the front pinching guidance image) and the pinching guidance image of the second game of the special zone, three games will be played. The display mode may be different or the same as that of the pinching guide image (also referred to as a rear pinching guide image) displayed after the eyes.

By making it easier for the player to recognize the front pinching guide image, there is an advantage that the player can easily receive the benefit (establishment of 321 bell) after the third game of the special zone, but the disadvantage that the burden on the hall increases. There is. By making it easier for the player to recognize the rear-pinch guide image, there is an advantage that it becomes easier for the player to recognize the push order after the third game changed due to the player making a mistake in the push order, but the number of payouts is small. 132 Bell guide image is easy to recognize There is a demerit that the burden on the hall increases. For example, the ease of recognizing the front pinching guide image and the rear pinching guide image can be determined by using the following display modes.

For example, a plurality of pinching guide images may be displayed for both the front pinching guide image and the rear pinching guide image. Specifically, for example, the pinching guide image in the upper left portion of the image display body 500 shown in FIG. 752 (S) and the like, and the front pinching guide image having a size larger than the pinching guide image are displayed in the image display body 500. It may be displayed in the center of. However, for the front pinching guide image, the large front pinching guide image displayed in the center of the image display body 500 is displayed only once to make it difficult to recognize, and for the rear pinching guide image, the image is displayed. The rear pinching guide image displayed on the display body 500 is displayed a plurality of times to facilitate recognition.

Further, for example, the rear pinching guide image displayed in the third game of the special zone is displayed from the middle of the second game of the special zone in order to inform the player of the newly changed push order. It may be easy to recognize. Specifically, for example, the rear pinching guide image is displayed from the time of the second stop of the second game of the special zone (whether or not the push is performed in the correct push order at the time of the second stop is determined).

Further, the display position of the image display body 500 may be different or the same between the front pinching guide image and the rear pinching guide image. For example, it may be displayed in the central portion of the image display body 500 to make it easier to recognize the front pinching guide image, and may be displayed in the upper left portion of the image display body 500 to make it difficult to recognize the rear pinching guide image. .. On the contrary, even if it is displayed in the center of the image display body 500 to make it easier to recognize the rear pinching guide image and displayed in the upper left part of the image display body 500 to make it difficult to recognize the front pinching guide image. Good.

Further, the length of the display time may be different or the same between the front pinching guide image and the rear pinching guide image. For example, in order to make it easier to recognize the front pinching guide image, it is displayed longer than the display time of the rear pinching guide image. On the contrary, in order to make it easier to recognize the rear pinching guide image, it may be displayed longer than the display time of the front pinching guide image.

The sound effect output when the front pinching guide image is displayed, the number of times it is output, and its volume are the sound effect output when the rear pinching guide image is displayed, the number of times it is output, and its volume. And may be the same or different. For example, since the front pinching guide image is pushed in the same order as planned for the player, the sound effect corresponding to the front pinching guidance image (for example, "pinching!" Corresponding to the pushing order) is only once. It may be output, but since the rear pinch guide image is displayed because the push order has been changed, it corresponds to the rear pinch guide image in order to inform the player of the changed push order. It is desirable to output sound effects (for example, "Pinching!" Corresponding to the pressing order) multiple times.

In addition, if both the front pinching guide image and the rear pinching guidance image follow the guidance, the ball ejection rate increases, so that the corresponding sound effects are output multiple times from the viewpoint of the player's benefit. Alternatively, from the viewpoint of increasing the burden on the hall, the corresponding sound effect may be output only once. In addition, especially when following the front pinching guide image, the ball ejection rate increases further, so when the front pinching guide image is displayed, the corresponding sound effect is played only once, and when the rear pinching guidance image is displayed, it corresponds. The sound effect to be played may be output multiple times.

Further, for example, in the first game of the special zone, if the lottery for redisplaying the front pinch guidance image performed according to the guidance of the reverse push guidance image is lost, the front pinch is performed in the second game of the special zone. Even if the hitting guide image is displayed, the corresponding sound effect may not be output. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the sound effect is not output at the same time as the front pinching guide image and the front pinching guide image is not redisplayed, which is severe for the player, that is, it is easy to reduce the burden on the hall. Even if the above special conditions are not satisfied, it is not necessary to output the corresponding sound effect when the front pinching guide image or the rear pinching guide image is displayed.

For each of the front pinching guide image and the rear pinching guide image, the output of the corresponding sound effect may be started before the display of the pinching guide image is started, or the display of the pinching guide image is started. At the same time, the output of the corresponding sound effect may be started, or the corresponding sound effect may be output after the display of the pinching guide image is started.

By starting the output of the corresponding sound effect at the same time as the display of the pinching guide image is started, the guidance can be appealed to the visual and auditory senses at the same time, so that the player can surely recognize the pinching guidance. In general, there are individual differences in the visual and auditory reaction speeds (there are also individual differences in which of the visual and auditory responses is faster), but this is handled before the pinching guidance image is displayed. When the output of the sound effect is started, it is easier for a person whose auditory reaction speed is lower than that of the visual sense to recognize both at the same time. However, it is easy for a person with a high auditory reaction speed to recognize both at the same time.

For each of the front pinching guide image and the rear pinching guide image, the display time of the pinching guide image and the output time of the corresponding sound effect may be the same length, or from the display time of the pinching guide image. The output time of the corresponding sound effect may be longer, or the output time of the corresponding sound effect may be shorter than the display time of the pinching guide image.

Since the display time of the pinching guide image and the output time of the corresponding sound effect are the same length, it becomes easy to recognize that the pinching guide image and the output sound are integrated. Since the output time of the corresponding sound effect is longer than the display time of the pinching guide image, the player can easily notice the sound effect because the sound effect is output for a long time even when the volume in the hall is high. Since the output time of the corresponding sound effect is shorter than the display time of the pinching guide image, the player can concentrate on the effect displayed on the image display body 500.

Regarding the production mode and the time and timing at which the production is executed in the see-saw game production (including the additional chance production) during AT, for matters not described above, the see-saw game production during the normal game (including the additional chance production) ) Can be the same as that in. Specifically, for example, in the see-saw game production (including the addition chance production) during AT, the display mode and display time of each guide image, the length and timing of the display time, the rotation mode of the reel, and the length and timing of the rotation time, Matters not explained above regarding the output mode of sound effects and BGM, the output time, the light emitting mode of the light emitting body, the length and timing of the light emitting time, and the operating mode of the movable body are the see-saw game effects during the normal game. It can also be the same as in (including the additional chance production). However, since it is a see-saw game production during AT, it is not possible to take a production mode that relies on being in a normal game.

[13-7. Suddenly seesaw game production]
In the above, an example in which the seesaw game production starts from the next game that wins the seesaw game production has been described. The seesaw game production starts from ()), and the seesaw game production will be described with reference to FIG. 754.

FIG. 754 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of suddenly seesaw game production. FIG. 754 (A) shows a state when the lever of the winning game is suddenly turned on for the seesaw game production. Suddenly, the seesaw game production is realized by the main game, not the simulated game. Therefore, each stop button is effective during the execution of the seesaw game effect, and the medal can be paid out by stopping each stop button while executing the seesaw game effect.

In addition, when the seesaw game production is suddenly won in a game in which the push order bell is established, an image that guides the push order of the push order bell (in FIG. 754 (A), the reverse push image because 321 bell is established). Is displayed. As a result, the player can get an uplifting feeling by suddenly winning the seesaw game production and being able to receive the payout by the push order bell.

In the game in which the seesaw game production is suddenly won, the medal moves to the claw portion 556 of the seesaw accessory 550 at the same time as the lever is turned on, the tip portion 557 operates, and the medal falls from the claw portion 556 to the seesaw portion 552.

In the above-mentioned see-saw game production, four medals were inserted and the fourth medal moved to the claw portion 556, but in the see-saw game production, the dummy medal suddenly plays the role of the fourth medal. The dummy medal is stored in a predetermined storage position (not shown) in the slot machine 1. When the seesaw game suddenly starts, the dummy medal moves from the storage position to the claw portion 556, and the seesaw game is successful. In either case, the dummy medal returns to the storage position (not shown).

In the seesaw game production, the seesaw game is suddenly started without explaining the seesaw game production as described above (FIGS. 743 (C) to 744 (I)). This makes it possible to provide a surprise to the player, but the medal may be moved to the seesaw section 552 after inserting a video explaining the seesaw game production.

In FIG. 754 (A), medals are retained on the seesaw portion 552. Further, in FIG. 754 (A), a reverse push guide image as a batting method effect showing an advantageous batting method for the player, a gauge showing the remaining medal residence time until the AT is acquired, and a support message are displayed as images. It is displayed on the body 500.

FIG. 754 (B) shows a state in which the seesaw game is successfully produced. In FIG. 754 (B), the movable piece 552a of the seesaw portion 552 and the movable piece of the movable piece 552b are raised, and the inclination of the seesaw portion 552 is fixed horizontally. Further, the door portion 555 is opened. The reverse push guidance image and the effect button long press guidance image are displayed on the image display body 500. The medals that have passed through the seesaw success tube 558 are returned to the return gutter 213.

In FIG. 754 (C), the effect button 204 is pressed and held, the seesaw portion 552 is tilted toward the back of the front view, the medal passes through the open door portion 555, and the seesaw portion 552 moves to the seesaw success pipe 558. The sensor attached to the success tube 558 is in a state of detecting a medal. Further, the movable pieces attached to both ends of the seesaw portion 552 have returned to the reference position. Further, a message indicating that the AT has been won, a reverse push guidance image, and a long press guidance image of the effect button are displayed on the image display body 500. The medals that have passed through the seesaw success tube 558 are returned to the return gutter 213.

FIG. 754 (D) shows a state in which all reels of the main game in which the seesaw game production is suddenly performed are stopped. When all reels are stopped, it freezes. When a predetermined percentage (for example, 1/2) of suddenly succeeding in producing a seesaw game wins the chance to add the number of AT games and wins the chance to add the number of AT games, the frozen state shown in FIG. 754 (D) is obtained. Become. If you do not win the chance to add the number of AT games even if you suddenly succeed in producing the seesaw game, the game will not freeze even after the end of this game, and AT will start from the next game. That is, if the additional chance is not won, the AT of the initial number of games is the chance to be started, and if the additional chance is won, the AT of the number of additional games in addition to the initial number of games is the chance to be started.

In FIG. 754 (D), one medal falls again on the seesaw portion 552 with the movable piece 552a of the seesaw portion 552 and the movable piece of the movable piece 552b raised. This frozen state lasts for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds).

FIG. 754 (E) shows a state in which the freeze state has ended. In FIG. 754 (E), the effect button long press guidance image is displayed. When the effect button is pressed and held in the state of FIG. 754 (E), the effect button 204 is pressed and held, the seesaw portion 552 is tilted toward the back of the front view, and the medal passes through the open door portion 555 and the seesaw is successful. It moves to the pipe 558, and the number of AT additional games is notified. Further, when it is detected that the medal has passed through the open door portion 555, the effect button long press guidance image is deleted.

Since the seesaw game effect is suddenly realized by this game as described above, all the reels can be stopped by operating each stop button during the seesaw game. That is, for example, while all the small roles are being paid out, the effect button long press guidance image may be displayed after 5 seconds, which is the time for the medals to be retained in the seesaw section 552, has elapsed. obtain.

When the effect button long press guidance image is displayed while the medal is being paid out, it is desirable to temporarily stop the medal payout in order to concentrate the player on the effect button 204 long press guidance. For example, it is decided that 9 medals will be paid out with 321 bells aligned, and the timing of paying out the 5th medal and the timing when 5 seconds have passed since the medals were retained in the seesaw section 552. , Are the same, the fifth medal is paid out, and the payout is temporarily stopped without paying out the sixth medal. That is, the medal payout control is performed by the main board 409, and the process of stopping the medal payout control is also performed by the main board 409. Therefore, the count of 5 seconds, which is the time for accumulating medals, is performed by the main board 409. ing.

In addition, since the payout was temporarily stopped in order to concentrate the player on the effect button long press guide image, when the effect button long press guide image was erased (the medal passed through the open door portion 555). When it is detected), the payout may be resumed. If the start lever 210 is operated before the restarted payout is completed, the next game can be started. Even if the next game is started while the payout is being performed, the same processing as that performed when the start lever is operated when the payout is not performed is performed, and the payout is performed during the game. Even so, the payout sound is output. When the next game starts and each reel rotates, it is desirable to finish the payout by the time the reel is rotating but the remaining payout is made and the next game ends. This is because if the remaining payouts are not completed by the end of the next game, if a new payout is obtained in the next game, the payouts for the two games may be mixed and the player may be confused.

However, the maximum number of medals that can be paid out in one game of a slot machine is 15, and there may be cases where the next game ends before the restarted payout is completed. In that case, the medals are restarted. The payout process to be made will be performed across multiple games, but in that case, it is better to end the payout that is restarted promptly (does not cause confusion), so the reel (change in design) rotates. It is better to execute the process related to payout intermittently regardless of whether it is stopped or not.

For example, if the main game in which the seesaw game production is suddenly started is completed within 5 seconds (the shortest time for one game is 4.1 seconds), 5 seconds, which is the time for the medals to be retained in the seesaw section 552, has elapsed. You can start the next game before you do. That is, it is possible to suddenly execute the seesaw game production across a plurality of games (two games). In this case, there is a possibility that the seesaw game will be won suddenly in the second game. In that case, the seesaw game may be stocked suddenly, and the seesaw game may be started suddenly after a predetermined number of games have elapsed.

In addition, in the state where the main game is completed (the state where the reel (change of the symbol) is stopped), the 5 seconds for retaining the medal in the seesaw section 552 in the seesaw game production is suddenly completed, and the effect button long press guidance image is completed. If the start lever 210 is operated while is displayed, the next game is started. When the next game is started, it is desirable to display the effect button long press guidance image at the same position and the same size as the previous game even at the start of the next game. If the display position or display size of the effect button long press guidance image displayed across the games is changed, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the effect button long press guide image.

[13-8. Another example when the seesaw game production fails]
FIG. 755 is an explanatory diagram showing another example when the seesaw game production fails. FIG. 755 (A) shows a state in which the seesaw game has started, which is the same as in FIG. 744 (J). FIG. 755 (B) shows that the seesaw game production failed, that is, the medal could not be retained on the seesaw section 552 for a predetermined time (5 seconds) after the seesaw game started, and the medal was formed from the end of the seesaw section 552. Has been dropped. The medal that has fallen from the end of the seesaw portion 552 moves from the opening 559a through the seesaw failure pipe 559 to the return gutter 213. That is, when the residence time of the medal on the seesaw portion 552 is less than a predetermined time (5 seconds), the effect button long press guidance image is not displayed even if the medal is retained on the seesaw portion 552.

FIG. 755 (C) shows a state immediately after the see-saw game production fails. In FIG. 755 (C), if the see-saw game production fails, the game immediately shifts to the main game instead of the failure production in the simulated game. When shifting to the main game, for example, random delay processing is performed on each reel so that each reel rotates normally (forward rotation). If the seesaw game production fails and the seesaw game production fails, some players will be strongly discouraged. Therefore, by promptly returning to the main game, the occurrence of such disappointment can be suppressed. Further, the reverse push guide image is displayed in FIG. 755 (C).

In addition, when the seesaw game production fails and the game returns to the main game, the game can be executed in a minimum of 4.1 seconds by combining the simulated game in which the seesaw game production is performed and the main game. .. For example, if the number of AT games that cannot be consumed by the closing time of the hall has been acquired, it is better for the player to advance the game promptly than to acquire an additional number of AT games. In order to increase the rate, even if the game is directed by the seesaw game, the seesaw game can be intentionally failed and executed in 4.1 seconds, which is the shortest time of one game.

On the other hand, in the seesaw game production, the fact that the medal could be retained in the seesaw section 552 for 5 seconds means that the game in which the seesaw game production was executed could not be executed within 4.1 seconds, which is the shortest time of one game. Means that. In this way, when the see-saw game is successfully produced and a favorable result is given to the player, the ball ejection speed can be suppressed by preventing the game from proceeding in the shortest time.

In the seesaw game production, if the medal can be retained in the seesaw section 552 for 2 seconds (shorter than 4.1 seconds, which is the shortest time required to digest one game), the seesaw game production is successful (movable piece of the seesaw section 552). 552a may be operated to display the effect button long press guidance image). In this case, even in a game in which a seesaw game is produced, the game can be advanced in the shortest time while acquiring the number of AT winning games or AT addition games.

Even when the seesaw game production is determined whether or not the medal can be retained in the seesaw section 552 for a time shorter than 4.1 seconds (for example, 2 seconds), which is the shortest time required to digest one game. , As shown in FIG. 745 (K'), in the seesaw game production, the reverse push guidance image, the effect button long press guidance image, the operation guidance of the start lever 210, and (that is, the operation guidance for the three operation units) are simultaneously displayed. Although they are displayed, it is desirable that the length of time they are displayed at the same time is longer than a specific time in order to ensure that the player knows all the operations. On the contrary, the length of the time during which these operations are displayed at the same time may be shorter than the specific time in order to suppress the increase in the number of balls to be ejected by making it difficult for the player to grasp each operation. The shortest time of one game, 4.1 seconds, is an example of the specific length of time.

For the same reason as described above, the length of time when the reverse push guidance image, the effect button long press guidance image, and (operation guidance for the two operation units) are displayed at the same time in the seesaw game production is It may be longer or shorter than the specific time.

In the seesaw game production, after the reverse push guidance image and the effect button long press guidance image are displayed, the operation guidance of the start lever 210 is further displayed, and the operation guidance for the three operation units is displayed at the same time. However, the length of time from the start of the game in which the seesaw game effect is performed until the operation guide of the start lever 210 is displayed may be longer or shorter than the specific length of time.

Since the length of time from the start of the game in which the seesaw game production is performed until the operation guide of the start lever 210 is displayed is shorter than the specific length of time, the seesaw game production can be speedily advanced. Therefore, the ball ejection speed can be increased. Further, since the length of time from the start of the game in which the seesaw game production is performed until the operation guide of the start lever 210 is displayed is longer than the specific time length, it takes time to produce the seesaw game. Therefore, the ball ejection speed can be reduced.
The shortest time of one game, 4.1 seconds, is an example of the specific length of time.

For the same reason as described above, the length of time from the start of the game in which the seesaw game production is performed until the production operation guidance image is displayed may be longer or shorter than the specific time. May be good.

[13-9. Another example of a chance to add a seesaw game production]
FIG. 756 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the additional chance performed in the seesaw game production. In the example of the addition chance described with reference to FIG. 745 and the like, whether or not to win the addition of the number of AT games is determined by the operation timing of the start lever 210, but when the seesaw game production is successful, a predetermined ratio is used. (For example, 8/128), the addition of the number of AT games may be forcibly won regardless of the operation timing of the start lever 210 of the next addition chance.

In the example of FIG. 756, when the seesaw game production is successful, the number of AT games is forcibly won. FIG. 756 (A) shows a state in which the addition chance has started, which is the same as in FIG. 745 (M).

In FIG. 756 (B), similarly to FIG. 745 (N), a message prompting the operation of the starting lever 210 in time with the timing, an image imitating the starting lever 210, and a gauge indicating the timing are displayed as an image display body. It is displayed at 500. However, in FIG. 756 (B), since the image imitating the starting lever 210 is displayed in a special display (for example, rainbow), the number of AT games has already been added when the seesaw game production is successful. Is shown.

It should be noted that the start lever 210 during the addition chance is displayed as a special display (for example, rainbow) at a predetermined ratio (for example, 60/128) when the addition of the number of AT games has already been won when the seesaw game production is successful. It may be.

In addition, although it is possible to execute a special display (for example, rainbow) when the number of AT games has already been added, the operation mode of the starting lever 210 (timing, whether to hit from above or from below). It is desirable that the appearance rate is less than 1/2 in order to emphasize the game characteristics.

When the special display (for example, rainbow) is displayed, the same sound effect as when the special display is not displayed (an image imitating the start lever 210 in the normal mode is displayed) may be output, or the normal sound effect may be output. A sound effect different from the sound effect when the image imitating the start lever 210 of the embodiment is displayed may be output. The same applies to the light emitting body, and when the special display (for example, rainbow) is displayed, the light emitting mode of the light emitting body is the same as when the special display is not displayed (an image imitating the start lever 210 in the normal mode is displayed). It may be present, or it may be a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode when an image imitating the start lever 210 of the normal mode is displayed. However, when different sound effects are output, it is desirable to display different light emission modes.

If the addition of the number of AT games is not won when the seesaw game production is successful, and whether or not the addition of the number of AT games can be won is determined by the operation timing of the start lever 210, the start lever 210 during the addition chance is displayed specially ( For example, it is not displayed in rainbow), but is displayed in a normal mode.

As a result, when the start lever 210 is displayed in a special display (for example, rainbow) during the addition chance, the player can get an uplifting feeling by winning the addition of the number of AT games, and also during the addition chance. Since it is understood that it is not necessary to operate the start lever 210 aiming at the timing, it is possible to suppress the feeling of fatigue generated by aiming at the timing during the additional chance. Further, in FIG. 756 (B), the reverse push guide image and the effect button long press guide image are displayed on the image display body 500.

FIG. 756 (C) shows the state in which the starting lever 210 is operated in FIG. 756 (B), which is the same state as in FIG. 745 (O). FIG. 756 (D) is a state in which the number of AT additional games is announced, which is the same state as in FIG. 745 (P).

In FIG. 756 (D), when the start lever 210 is operated or a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses, the game shifts to the main game as shown in (E). As described above, when it is notified in advance that the addition of the number of AT games is confirmed by displaying the image of the starting lever 210 in the special display (for example, rainbow) in FIG. 756 (B), the player is sufficiently able to do so. It is desirable that the additional chance does not loop because it was possible to give an uplifting feeling to.

As a result, after the image of the starting lever 210 is displayed in a special display (for example, rainbow), the operation guidance for the two operation units, the reverse push guidance image and the effect button long press guidance image, may be displayed. Further, the operation guide for the operation unit of the starting lever 210 is displayed, and the operation guide for the operation unit 3 is not displayed. Therefore, after announcing the number of additional games in FIG. 756 (D), the game shifts to the main game as shown in (E).

Further, for example, when an upper limit (for example, 5 times) is set for the number of loops of the addition chance and the upper limit is reached (that is, the last) addition chance is won, the image of the starting lever 210 is forcibly displayed. It may be displayed with a special display (for example, rainbow). By doing so, it is possible to suppress the disappointment that the upper limit of the number of loops has been reached and the additional chance does not loop any more.

By displaying the image of the starting lever 210 in a special display (for example, rainbow) in both the addition chance of the first loop and the addition chance when the upper limit of the loop is reached, the player is disappointed with expectation. It is desirable not to display the above-mentioned special movie or practice effect at the end of the simulated game after displaying the image of the starting lever 210 in the special display (for example, rainbow).

When the image of the starting lever 210 is displayed in a special display (for example, rainbow), the additional chance may be further looped. As a result, for example, the loop lottery is won after the image of the starting lever 210 is displayed in a special display (for example, rainbow) by forcibly winning the additional AT game number at the additional chance one time before the upper limit of the number of loops. , Forcibly win the AT game number addition at the upper limit of the number of loops, and display the image of the start lever 210 in a special display (for example, rainbow), etc. Since the image of the starting lever 210 can be displayed in a special display (for example, rainbow) times (for example, continuously), the expectation of the player can be strongly improved.

Also, for example, although the image of the starting lever 210 was not displayed in the special display (for example, rainbow) at the chance of adding one time before the upper limit of the number of loops, the number of AT games was won by hitting the starting lever 210 at the right time. Then, when the loop lottery is won and the chance to add the upper limit of the number of loops is reached, as a privilege of reaching the upper limit of the number of loops, the player is forced to win the additional number of AT games and the start lever 210. The image may be displayed in rainbow.

In the above example, when the lottery for adding the number of AT games is forcibly won, the image of the starting lever 210 is displayed in a special display (for example, rainbow) regardless of the operation timing of the starting lever 210. However, even in the slot machine 1 in which the lottery for forcibly winning is not performed, the image of the starting lever 210 may be displayed in a special display (for example, rainbow).

For example, at a predetermined ratio when an AT addition chance is made, the ratio of the size of the black-filled portion and / or the shaded portion of the gauge indicating the operation timing of the starting lever 210 to the size of the gauge may be increased more than usual. By slowing down the movement speed of the black part of the gauge than usual, the difficulty level of the operation timing of the start lever 210 is lowered (however, although the difficulty level of the operation timing is lowered, it is not always successful. ), You may raise the expectation of winning the number of AT additional games.

In this way, when the difficulty level of the operation timing of the start lever 210 is lowered, the image of the start lever 210 is specially displayed to show the player that the expectation of winning the number of AT additional games is higher than the normal operation timing. It may be displayed as (for example, rainbow). When the image of the starting lever 210 is displayed in a special display (for example, rainbow) and the starting lever 210 is operated, the success or failure of adding the number of AT games may be notified as soon as the starting lever 210 is operated. After a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the start lever 210 is operated, the success or failure of adding the number of AT games may be notified.

In addition, a special display (for example, rainbow) of the starting lever 210 that can be displayed when the lottery for adding the number of AT games has already been performed is performed, and the effect displayed when the starting lever 210 is operated and the number of AT games are added. Although not won in the lottery, the effect displayed when the operation of the start lever 210 is an operation to win the lottery by adding the number of AT games (operation at the right time, hitting from above, etc.) is the same effect. However, if they are different, the display size is larger and more colors are displayed when the start lever 210 is specially displayed (for example, rainbow). It is desirable that the output sound of the BGM or sound effect to be used is large, or the amount of light emitted by the light emitter is large).

[13-10. Another example of see-saw game production during AT]
757 and 758 are explanatory views showing another example of the seesaw game effect executed during AT. In FIG. 749 and the like, an example in which the seesaw game production is won according to a predetermined probability for each game during AT has been described, but in addition to the lottery with the predetermined probability, in FIGS. 757 and 758, the AT starts (specifically). For example, when the reels of the game immediately before the AT start game are completely stopped, or when the MAX input button 206 of the AT start game is pressed or the lever is turned on), the seesaw game production starts when a predetermined time elapses.

FIG. 757 (A) shows a state when the lever is turned on in the AT start game. The 321 bell is established, and a display for guiding the reverse push is displayed on the image display body 500. Further, a timer indicating the remaining time is displayed on the image display body 500, and it is shown that the seesaw game effect starts when 100 seconds have passed.

Further, a display indicating the number of remaining AT games is displayed on the image display body 500. Since the shortest time of one game is 4.1 seconds and the seesaw game is produced 100 seconds after the start of AT, even if all the games are performed in the shortest time, the seesaw game is produced in the 25th game from the start of AT. Starts. In order to entertain the player by always performing the seesaw game production at least once when entering the AT, the initial number of games of the AT is set to 30 games, which is larger than these 25 games.

In the seesaw game production executed after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of AT, it is desirable not to give a result that is advantageous to the player such as adding the number of AT games, and instead, a special image that does not appear in other productions. It is desirable to display a message or the like. For example, if the seesaw game production is executed when a predetermined time elapses from the start of AT and the seesaw game production is performed when the predetermined time elapses from the end of the seesaw game production, the seesaw game production is assumed to be successful. In that case, if an advantageous result is given, it is advantageous for the player to advance the game slowly, which may delay the progress of the game and increase the burden on the hole. Therefore, it is necessary not to give an advantageous result. desirable.

Further, for example, if the general AT additional game number lottery (additional lottery in which the above-mentioned seesaw game production is not performed) is won before 100 seconds elapse, the general AT additional game number lottery is performed. When (the above-mentioned additional lottery in which the seesaw game is not performed) is won, the result is not notified (or a part of the result is notified (for example, when 20 games are won, only 10 games are notified)) and the time is set. It may be notified at the same time in the seesaw game performed in the course. By doing so, it is possible to make the player recognize that an advantageous result has been given even though the advantageous result has not been obtained.

In addition, instead of directly indicating the number of seconds remaining until the start of the seesaw game with a timer, for example, a 10-step gauge is displayed, and the gauge is accumulated by 1 step every predetermined number of seconds (for example, 10 seconds). The seesaw game production may be started at the timing when the gauge is accumulated up to the stage. If the number of seconds remaining until the start of the seesaw game is directly indicated by the timer, the player may be distracted by the timer and play the game in a hurry, which may lead to a mistake in the push order. is there.

A predetermined lottery (for example, winning 32/128, non-winning 96/128) may be performed at the time of AT winning, and when the lottery is won, the gauge is a predetermined value smaller than the maximum value (for example, 5 stages). The seesaw game production may be started at the timing when the eyes) are accumulated. As a result, the player can expect the seesaw game production even when the gauge is in the process of accumulating up to 10 levels.

FIG. 757 (B) shows a state in which all the reels are pushed and stopped in order in the game of FIG. 757 (A), and the bells are aligned in the middle stage. The display of the number of remaining AT games is reduced by one game, and the timer indicating the remaining time until the seesaw game production is advanced by 5 seconds.

FIG. 757 (C) shows a state in which the timer indicating the remaining time until the see-saw game production is set to 0 seconds. When the timer reaches 0 seconds, a message indicating that the seesaw game starts is displayed on the image display body 500, indicating that the seesaw game effect is executed in the next game.

In FIG. 757 (C), when all the reels are stopped, the timer indicating the remaining time until the start of the seesaw game effect is 0 seconds, but the game is being executed (the wait timer is operating and the reels). If the remaining time reaches 0 seconds (during rotation), the running effect is stopped, a message indicating that the seesaw game starts is displayed on the image display body 500, and the seesaw game effect is executed in the next game. The reel.

757 (D), (E), (F), 758 (G), and (H) are states when the lever of the game in which the seesaw game effect is executed is turned on, and the contents of these effects are shown in FIG. 744, respectively. It is the same as (C), (D), (E), (F), and FIG. 745 (G).

FIG. 758 (I) shows a state in which the medal has fallen on the seesaw section 552 and the seesaw game has started. Since this seesaw game production is executed in this game, the reels are rotating forward. A reverse push guidance image, a gauge indicating the remaining time of the seesaw game, and a cheering message are displayed on the image display body 500.

FIG. 758 (J) shows a state in which the seesaw game is successfully produced. The movable piece 552a of the seesaw portion 552 and the movable piece of the movable piece 552b are raised, and the inclination of the seesaw portion 552 is fixed horizontally. In addition, a special image consisting of an image of a standing character and the message "GOOD" is displayed. Further, the reverse push guidance image and the effect button long press guidance image are displayed on the image display body 500.

FIG. 758 (K) shows a state in which the effect button 204 is long-pressed in the state of FIG. 758 (J) to open the door portion 555, and the medal passes through the seesaw success pipe 558. At this time, the same operation guidance of the starting lever 210 as in FIG. 745 (N) is further displayed, and the reverse push guidance image, the effect button long press guidance image, and the operation guidance for the three operation units are displayed at the same time. ..

FIG. 758 (L) shows a black portion in the gauge displayed on the image display body 500 in the state where the start lever 210 is operated in a timely manner in the state of FIG. 758 (K) (that is, in FIG. 758 (L)). The start lever 210 is operated at the timing when at least a part of the shaded portion overlaps with the shaded portion). A special message congratulations on the timely operation, a reverse push guidance image, and a long press guidance image of the effect button are displayed on the image display body 500. The medals that have passed through the seesaw success tube 558 are returned to the return gutter 213.

In the above example, if all the games are played in the shortest time (4.1 seconds), the seesaw game is produced only once after the lapse of the predetermined time. For example, the initial number of games is 60 games or more. By doing so, the seesaw game may be played a plurality of times (twice). For example, when the see-saw game effect triggered by the passage of time can be executed twice in one AT, when the operation guidance of the start lever 210 in FIG. 758 (K) of the first see-saw game effect is followed. May display a message indicating that the AT is still going on. If the seesaw game effect is forcibly executed a plurality of times each time the AT is entered, the player can become accustomed to the operation of the seesaw game.

Further, for example, if the initial number of games is selected from two types of 30 games and 60 games by a predetermined distribution (30 games 64/128, 60 games 64/128), when 30 games are selected. It is also possible to execute the seesaw game effect by the lapse of a predetermined time at least once, and when 60 games are selected, the seesaw game effect by the lapse of a predetermined time is executed at least twice.

Further, in this case, for example, although 60 games are selected as the initial number of games, 30 games are notified, and when the start lever 210 is operated in a timely manner in FIG. 758 (K) after a predetermined time has elapsed, the actual number of games is 60 games. An effect may be performed to notify that the player has been elected. In fact, the fact that the player won the 60 games will be understood by the player if the AT is digested. Therefore, even if the start lever 210 is not operated in FIG. 758 (K), the predetermined time has elapsed. The notification effect may be performed.

Further, for example, when the seesaw game production is successful with the passage of a predetermined time and the start lever 210 is operated at the right timing, the production state of the normal game after the end of AT may be changed. Specifically, for example, the effect stage is changed, or the displayed main character is changed. Further, at this time, a list of selectable effect states may be displayed, and the player may select the effect state to change the effect state of the normal game after the end of AT.

Further, for example, when the AT is won in the normal game and the AT is further won during the precursory game until the AT starts, the AT won during the precursory game is stocked. As for the stocked AT, after the first winning AT is completed, the stocked AT starts after a precursor game within a predetermined number of games (for example, a normal game within 5 games). In this case, when the seesaw game is successfully produced over time during the first winning AT game and the start lever 210 is operated in a timely manner in FIG. 758 (K), a display notifying that the AT is in stock (indication). For example, a message such as "stock x 1") may be performed.

Further, depending on the operation status of the start lever 210 of the player (for example, the larger the operation amount of the start lever 210 (the longer the operation width from the initial position is longer than the predetermined value)), the seesaw game effect is performed. The remaining time until is subtractable. For example, every time a game is played with full weight (that is, 4.1 seconds, which is the shortest time of one game per game) for five consecutive games, the remaining time is subtracted by 30 seconds, or by a predetermined small winning combination (for example, push order bell). The remaining time is subtracted by 30 seconds each time the payment is received 5 times. As a result, the see-saw game production can be reached quickly by advancing the game faster.

The above is one form of the slot machine 1 of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine other than a slot machine, for example, a pachinko machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Although the present invention has been described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings, the present invention is not limited to such a specific configuration, and various modifications and equivalents within the scope of the attached claims are equivalent. It includes the configuration.

1 Slot machine 10 Gap 21 Transparent plate 50 Model unit 90 Front opening / closing member 100 Outer body 100a Rotating shaft 101 Bottom plate 102 Side plate 102a Convex surface 102b Guard 103 Top plate 104a Heat dissipation port 104b Cord outlet 105 Partition plate 106 Protruding part 107 Mounting Piece 108 Mounting piece 109 Opening 110 Medal discharge device 110a Device body 110b Hopper 110c Discharge port 110d Overflow gutter 110e Payout sensor 111 Game medal auxiliary storage box 111a Medal full tank sensor 112 Power supply device 112a Device case 112b Top plate 112c Rear plate 112d Front plate 112e Side plate 112f Slope plate 112g Ventilation hole 112h Leg 112i Ventilation space 112j Step 112k Mounting piece 112m Protrusion 112m-1 Projection 112p Through hole 112r Bottom plate 112s Board 112t Setting key switch 112u Reset switch 112v Power switch 113 Wiring relay Member 114 Boss hole 115 Rail member 116 Rail member 117 Stopper 118 Fixture 119 Main body side wiring 120 Mounting plate 121 Cover body 122 Connector board 123 Connector board 124 Connector 125 Connector 126 Opening 127 The opening 128 Support cylinder 129 Wiring duct 131 External relay Terminal plate 132 Through hole 133 Vent 200 Door type front member 200a Through hole 201 Medal tray 202 Operation unit 203 Med insertion port 205 1 piece Insertion button 206 MAX insertion button 207 Medal selector 207a Solvent 207b Insertion sensor 208 Medal return button 209 Storage Release switch 210 Start lever 211a Left reel stop button 211b Middle reel stop button 211c Right reel stop button 212 Medal gutter 213 Return gutter 214 See-through window 214a Transparent plate 214b Edge member 214c Through hole 214d Through hole 215 Locking device 215a Base member 215b Support piece 216 Forehead frame 217 Light emitting unit 217a Light emitting body 217a-1 Light source 217a-2 Light guide plate 217b Reflecting member 218 Fixing member 219 Recessed groove 300 Symbol variation display device 301a Left reel (first reel)
301b Medium reel (2nd reel)
301c Right reel (3rd reel)
302 Device case 303 Drive means 304 Bottom plate 305 Top plate 305 Top plate 306 Right plate 307 Left plate 308 Rear plate 309 Upper plate 310 Lower diagonal plate 311 Handle 312 Reel board 313 Cable 315 Retainer 316 Handle 321a to 321c Reel band 331a Left reel position sensor 331b Middle reel position sensor 331c Right reel position sensor 341a Left reel drive motor 341b Middle reel drive motor 341c Right reel drive motor 400 Case member 401 Design display window 402 Reinforcing rail 402a Guide part 403 Bottom plate 404 Side plate 405 Rear plate 406 Top plate 407 Reinforcing member 408 Wiring work space 409 Main board 410 Boss 411 Wiring window 412 Concave part 413 Tapered part 414 Wheel 415 Claw 416 Hooking part 417 Triangular space 418 Temporary fixing member Shelf 420 Hinge metal fitting 420a Fixing member 420b times Moving member 420c Short link 420d Long link 420e Fixed piece 420f Shaft support piece 420g Overlapping area 420h Overlapping area 420h Overlapping area 420j Pin hole 420k Pin 421 Lock piece 422 Handle opening 423 Case side wiring 424 Harness 425 Connector 426 Harness 427 Connector 427a Free hole 427b Ear piece 427c Screw 428 Connector holder 429 Holder main body 429a Receiving cylinder 430 Through hole 431 Mounting piece 432 Button type panel fastener 433 Bench side plate 435 Claw piece 436 Finger hook part 437 Cable groove 438 Wiring port 440 Guide rail 442 Stop hole 443 Top window 444 Reinforcing band 449 Main board 500 Image display 500s Broken line area 501 Frame member (display panel)
502 Lighting device 503 Board 505 Translucent lid plate 506 Tube frame 507 Translucent cover 508 Receiving part 509 Engaging part 510 Sub-board 512 Speaker 550 Seesaw accessory 551 Seesaw box 552 Seesaw part 552a Movable piece 552b Movable piece 551 Shaft part 554 Stepping motor 555 Door part 556 Claw part 557 Tip part 558 Seesaw success pipe 559 Seesaw failure pipe 560 Conveyor 561 Conveyor 600 Upper rail 601 Fixing member 602 Tool 603 Screw 604 Error lamp 606 Replay lamp 608 Start lamp 610 Medal IN lamp 612 (612a) , 612b, 612c) Special display LED
613 (613a, 613b) Stored number display LED
614 BET lamp 623a Right-down line 623b Right-up line 700 Connection tool 701 Fixed sheath member 701a Prevention piece 702 Rod 702a Shaft hole 702b Hook wall 703 Stop shaft 703a Spring 704 Stopper 705 Groove 706 Picking piece 1110 CPU
1112 ROM
1114 RAM
1116 I / O interface 1130 I / O interface 1200 Hall computer

Claims (1)

A gaming machine in which the fluctuation of a symbol is started, the symbol is stopped and displayed, and one game is completed.
Lottery means to draw lots for winning,
It has an operation means that can be operated by the player,
The gaming machine is provided with an effect display means for performing a predetermined display.
The predetermined display displayed on the effect display means includes
The first guidance display showing how to hit the player in an advantageous way,
The second guidance display that is displayed due to the fact that the game medium continues to stay in a specific space,
A third guidance display as a request effect requesting an operation on the operating means, and
There is at least a winning display indicating that the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a winning.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible that the hit display is not performed when all of the first guide display, the second guide display, and the third guide display are displayed on the effect display means. ..

Images